Scribd Logo
Upload

Welcome to Scribd!

  • 22 views

    12 B Amm 00 00 00 I

    Uploaded by

    Luis Avila

    Copyright:

    © All Rights Reserved
    Download as PDF, TXT or read online from Scribd

    12 B Amm 00 00 00 I

    Uploaded by

    Luis Avila
    22 views6,282 pages

    Original Title

    12-B-AMM-00-00-00-I

    Copyright

    © © All Rights Reserved

    Available Formats

    PDF, TXT or read online from Scribd

    Did you find this document useful?

    Is this content inappropriate?

    Copyright:

    © All Rights Reserved
    Download as PDF, TXT or read online from Scribd
    Download as pdf or txt
    22 views6,282 pages

    12 B Amm 00 00 00 I

    Uploaded by

    Luis Avila

    Copyright:

    © All Rights Reserved
    Download as PDF, TXT or read online from Scribd
    Download as pdf or txt
    of 6282

    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I

    UNCLASSIFIED

    PC-12/47E GENERAL - AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

    LIST OF EFFECTIVE CHAPTERS

    Table of Contents Page

    PC-12/47E GENERAL - AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE MANUAL - LIST OF EFFECTIVE 1


    CHAPTERS................................................................................................................................

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description
    Chapter Number Chapter Title
    00 GENERAL 12-B-00-00-00-00A-001A-A
    04 STRUCTURAL AND COMPONENT 12-B-04-00-00-00A-000A-A
    LIMITATIONS
    05 SCHEDULED/UNSCHEDULED 12-B-05-00-00-00A-018A-A
    MAINTENANCE
    06 DIMENSIONS AND ZONES – GENERAL 12-B-06-00-00-00A-040A-A
    07 LIFTING AND SHORING – GENERAL 12-B-07-00-00-00A-040A-A
    08 LEVELING AND WEIGHING – GENERAL 12-B-08-00-00-00A-040A-A
    09 HANDLING AND TAXIING – GENERAL 12-B-09-00-00-00A-040A-A
    10 PARKING, MOORING AND STORING – 12-B-10-00-00-00A-040A-A
    GENERAL
    11 PLACARDS AND MARKINGS – GENERAL 12-B-11-00-00-00A-040A-A
    12 SERVICING – GENERAL 12-B-12-00-00-00A-040A-A
    20 EQUIPMENT HANDLING 12-B-20-00-00-00A-901A-A
    21 AIR CONDITIONING 12-B-21-00-00-00A-040A-A
    22 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL – 12-B-22-00-00-00A-040A-A
    GENERAL
    23 COMMUNICATIONS 12-B-23-00-00-00A-040A-A
    24 ELECTRICAL POWER 12-B-24-00-00-00A-040A-A
    25 EQUIPMENT AND FURNISHINGS 12-B-25-00-00-00A-040A-A
    26 FIRE PROTECTION 12-B-26-00-00-00A-040A-A
    27 FLIGHT CONTROLS 12-B-27-00-00-00A-040A-A
    28 FUEL 12-B-28-00-00-00A-040A-A
    29 HYDRAULIC POWER 12-B-29-00-00-00A-040A-A
    30 ICE AND RAIN PROTECTION 12-B-30-00-00-00A-040A-A
    31 INDICATING AND RECORDING SYSTEMS 12-B-31-00-00-00A-040A-A
    32 LANDING GEAR – HYDRAULIC 12-B-32-00-00-00A-040A-A
    33 LIGHTS 12-B-33-00-00-00A-040A-A
    34 NAVIGATION 12-B-34-00-00-00A-040A-A

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-009A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Chapter Number Chapter Title


    35 OXYGEN SYSTEM 12-B-35-00-00-00A-040A-A
    45 CENTRAL MAINTENANCE SYSTEM 12-B-45-00-00-00A-040A-A
    46 SYSTEMS INTEGRATION AND DISPLAY 12-B-46-00-00-00A-040A-A
    52 DOORS – GENERAL 12-B-52-00-00-00A-040A-A
    53 FUSELAGE 12-B-53-00-00-00A-040A-A
    55 STABILIZERS 12-B-55-00-00-00A-040A-A
    56 WINDOWS 12-B-56-00-00-00A-040A-A
    57 WINGS 12-B-57-00-00-00A-040A-A
    61 PROPELLER 12-B-61-00-00-00A-040A-A
    71 POWERPLANT 12-B-71-00-00-00A-040A-A
    72 ENGINE 12-B-72-00-00-00A-040A-A
    73 ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL 12-B-73-00-00-00A-040A-A
    74 IGNITION SYSTEM 12-B-74-00-00-00A-040A-A
    76 ENGINE CONTROLS 12-B-76-00-00-00A-040A-A
    77 ENGINE INDICATING – GENERAL 12-B-77-00-00-00A-040A-A
    78 EXHAUST 12-B-78-00-00-00A-040A-A
    79 OIL SYSTEM 12-B-79-00-00-00A-040A-A
    80 STARTING 12-B-80-00-00-00A-040A-A

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-009A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    GENERAL

    COPYRIGHT

    Table of Contents Page

    GENERAL - COPYRIGHT.......................................................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description
    © Pilatus Aircraft Ltd.
    This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright.
    All rights reserved.
    No part of this document may be copied, reproduced or translated to other languages without the prior written
    consent of Pilatus Aircraft Ltd.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-00-00-00-00A-001A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-08-03 Page 1
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-00-00-00-00A-001A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-08-03 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PC-12/47E GENERAL - AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

    LIST OF APPLICABLE DATA MODULES - REVISION 11

    Table of Contents Page

    PC-12/47E GENERAL - AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE MANUAL - LIST OF APPLICABLE 1


    DATA MODULES - REVISION 11..............................................................................................

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description
    C = Changed data module
    N = New data module

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    GENERAL - COPYRIGHT 12-B-00-00-00-00A-001A-A 03.08.2010 1 ALL
    PC-12/47E GENERAL - AIRCRAFT 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A N 22.05.2014 50 All
    MAINTENANCE MANUAL - LIST OF
    APPLICABLE DATA MODULES -
    REVISION 11
    PC-12/47E GENERAL - AIRCRAFT 12-B-00-00-00-00A-003A-A C 22.05.2014 3 ALL
    MAINTENANCE MANUAL - CHANGE
    HIGHLIGHTS - REVISION 11
    PC12/47E - AMM LIST OF 12-B-00-00-00-00A-004A-A C 05.05.2014 1 ALL
    REVISIONS
    PC12/47E - AMM LIST OF 12-B-00-00-00-00A-006A-A C 01.05.2014 2 ALL
    TEMPORARY REVISIONS
    GENERAL - LIST OF 12-B-00-00-00-00A-007A-A C 03.04.2014 3 ALL
    ABBREVIATIONS
    PC-12/47E GENERAL - AIRCRAFT 12-B-00-00-00-00A-009A-A N 22.05.2014 2 All
    MAINTENANCE MANUAL - LIST OF
    EFFECTIVE CHAPTERS
    GENERAL - AMM RECORD OF 12-B-00-00-00-00A-017A-A C 13.05.2014 11 ALL
    SERVICE BULLETINS
    GENERAL - INTRODUCTION 12-B-00-00-00-00A-018A-A C 11.03.2014 8 ALL
    GENERAL - LIST OF SOFTWARE 12-B-00-00-00-00A-090A-A 08.11.2013 1 ALL
    STRUCTURAL AND COMPONENT 12-B-04-00-00-00A-000A-A C 13.03.2014 14 ALL
    LIMITATIONS - AIRWORTHINESS
    LIMITATIONS

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    SCHEDULED/UNSCHEDULED 12-B-05-00-00-00A-018A-A 12.11.2013 2 ALL
    MAINTENANCE - INTRODUCTION
    MASTER MAINTENANCE PLAN - 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A C 07.04.2014 60 ALL
    GENERAL
    TIME LIMITS - INTRODUCTION 12-B-05-10-00-00A-018A-A C 07.04.2014 3 ALL
    OVERHAUL AND REPLACEMENT 12-B-05-10-10-00A-281A-A C 15.05.2014 3 ALL
    SCHEDULE - SCHEDULED
    INSPECTIONS
    TIME LIMITED INSPECTION 12-B-05-10-20-00A-281A-A C 15.05.2014 17 ALL
    REQUIREMENTS - SCHEDULED
    INSPECTIONS
    SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE 12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A 30.04.2012 3 ALL
    CHECKS - INTRODUCTION
    100 HOUR INSPECTION - 12-B-05-20-10-00A-281A-A C 17.02.2014 9 ALL
    SCHEDULED INSPECTIONS
    ANNUAL INSPECTION - 12-B-05-20-20-00A-281A-A C 17.02.2014 14 ALL
    SCHEDULED INSPECTIONS
    SUPPLEMENTAL STRUCTURAL 12-B-05-20-30-00A-280A-A 10.01.2011 3 ALL
    INSPECTION DOCUMENT -
    INSPECTIONS
    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION 12-B-05-30-00-00A-010A-A C 06.03.2014 20 ALL
    PROGRAM - GENERAL
    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION 12-B-05-30-01-00A-281A-A C 17.02.2014 2 ALL
    PROGRAM - MASTER INSPECTION
    CARD
    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281A-A C 17.02.2014 5 WORK CARD
    PROGRAM - WORK CARD 1 – MINI 1
    INSPECTION
    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281B-A 20.05.2009 2 WORK CARD
    PROGRAM - WORK CARD 2 – 2
    GENERAL
    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281C-A 21.06.2012 2 WORK CARD
    PROGRAM - WORK CARD 3 – ZONE 3
    20
    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281D-A 20.05.2009 2 WORK CARD
    PROGRAM - WORK CARD 4 – ZONE 4
    30
    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281E-A 20.05.2009 2 WORK CARD
    PROGRAM - WORK CARD 5 – ZONE 5
    50 AND 60
    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281F-A 20.05.2009 2 WORK CARD
    PROGRAM - WORK CARD 6 – ZONE 6
    10 AND 70
    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281G-A 10.01.2013 2 WORK CARD
    PROGRAM - WORK CARD 7 – ZONE 7
    40
    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281H-A 12.09.2012 2 ALL
    PROGRAM - WORK CARD 8 – ZONE
    10 AND 20
    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281J-A 22.10.2013 2 WORK CARD
    PROGRAM - WORK CARD 9 – ZONE 9
    10

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281K-A 21.02.2011 3 WORK CARD
    PROGRAM - WORK CARD 10 – 10
    ZONE 40
    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281L-A 20.05.2009 2 WORK CARD
    PROGRAM - WORK CARD 11 – 11
    ZONE 20
    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281M-A 27.08.2013 2 WORK CARD
    PROGRAM - WORK CARD 13 – 13
    ZONE 70
    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281N-A 27.08.2013 2 WORK CARD
    PROGRAM - WORK CARD 14 – 14
    ZONE 30
    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281P-A 20.05.2009 2 WORK CARD
    PROGRAM - WORK CARD 15 – 15
    ZONE 40
    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281Q-A 20.05.2009 2 WORK CARD
    PROGRAM - WORK CARD 16 – 16
    ZONE 20
    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281R-A 20.05.2009 2 WORK CARD
    PROGRAM - WORK CARD 17 – 17
    ZONE 30
    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281S-A 10.01.2013 2 WORK CARD
    PROGRAM - WORK CARD 18 – 18
    ZONE 40
    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281T-A 20.05.2009 2 WORK CARD
    PROGRAM - WORK CARD 19 – 19
    ZONE 30
    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281U-A 20.05.2009 2 WORK CARD
    PROGRAM - WORK CARD 20 – 20
    ZONE 50 AND 60
    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281V-A 18.07.2013 2 WORK CARD
    PROGRAM - WORK CARD 21 – 21
    ZONE 40
    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281W-A 08.10.2013 2 WORK CARD
    PROGRAM - WORK CARD 22 – 22
    ZONE 50 AND 60
    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281X-A 18.07.2013 2 WORK CARD
    PROGRAM - WORK CARD 23 – 23
    ZONE 10 AND 20
    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281Y-A 20.05.2009 2 WORK CARD
    PROGRAM - WORK CARD 24 – 24
    ZONE 20
    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281Z-A 20.06.2013 3 WORK CARD
    PROGRAM - WORK CARD 25 – 25
    ZONE 10 AND 20
    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION 12-B-05-30-03-00A-281A-A 03.12.2010 2 WORK CARD
    PROGRAM - WORK CARD 26 – 26
    ZONE 30
    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION 12-B-05-30-03-00A-281B-A 10.01.2013 2 WORK CARD
    PROGRAM - WORK CARD 28 – 28
    ZONE 40

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION 12-B-05-30-03-00A-281C-A N 17.02.2014 2 ALL
    PROGRAM - WORK CARD 27 –
    ZONE 70
    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION 12-B-05-30-04-00A-281A-A 20.05.2009 2 ALL
    PROGRAM - ENGINE GROUND RUN
    TEST CARD
    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION 12-B-05-30-05-00A-010A-A 18.12.2012 2 WORK CARD
    PROGRAM - SIGN OFF SHEET – 1 SIGN OFF
    MINI INSPECTION SHEET
    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION 12-B-05-30-05-00A-010B-A 27.08.2013 2 PHASE 1
    PROGRAM - SIGN OFF SHEET – SIGN OFF
    PHASE 1 SHEET
    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION 12-B-05-30-05-00A-010C-A 27.08.2013 2 PHASE 2
    PROGRAM - SIGN OFF SHEET – SIGN OFF
    PHASE 2 SHEET
    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION 12-B-05-30-05-00A-010D-A 18.07.2013 3 PHASE 3
    PROGRAM - SIGN OFF SHEET – SIGN OFF
    PHASE 3 SHEET
    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION 12-B-05-30-05-00A-010E-A 27.08.2013 2 PHASE 4
    PROGRAM - SIGN OFF SHEET– SIGN OFF
    PHASE 4 SHEET
    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION 12-B-05-30-05-00A-010F-A 27.08.2013 3 PHASE 5
    PROGRAM - SIGN OFF SHEET – SIGN OFF
    PHASE 5 SHEET
    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION 12-B-05-30-05-00A-010G-A C 17.02.2014 3 PHASE 6
    PROGRAM - SIGN OFF SHEET – SIGN OFF
    PHASE 6 SHEET
    UNSCHEDULED MAINTENANCE 12-B-05-50-00-00A-018A-A 15.10.2013 7 ALL
    CHECKS - INTRODUCTION
    HARD LANDING - UNSCHEDULED 12-B-05-50-01-00A-282A-A C 14.03.2014 3 ALL
    INSPECTIONS
    HARD LANDING – ELECTRO 12-B-05-50-01-00A-282B-A 03.05.2012 3 ELECTRO
    MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR - MECHANICA
    UNSCHEDULED INSPECTION L LANDING
    GEAR
    FLIGHT IN SEVERE TURBULENCE 12-B-05-50-02-00A-282A-A C 18.03.2014 6 ALL
    OR SEVERE MANEUVRES -
    UNSCHEDULED INSPECTIONS
    OVERSPEED WITH FLAPS 12-B-05-50-03-00A-282A-A C 03.04.2014 2 ALL
    EXTENDED - UNSCHEDULED
    INSPECTIONS
    PROPELLER SUDDEN STOPAGE 12-B-05-50-04-00A-282A-A 09.04.2008 3 ALL
    OR IMPACT - UNSCHEDULED
    INSPECTIONS
    LIGHTNING STRIKE - 12-B-05-50-05-00A-282A-A 15.03.2013 2 ALL
    UNSCHEDULED INSPECTIONS
    LIGHTNING STRIKE – ELECTRO 12-B-05-50-05-00A-282B-A 03.05.2012 2 ELECTRO
    MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR - MECHANICA
    UNSCHEDULED INSPECTION L LANDING
    GEAR
    ALIGNMENT AND SYMMETRY - 12-B-05-50-06-00A-282A-A 15.03.2013 11 ALL
    UNSCHEDULED INSPECTIONS

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    ALIGNMENT AND SYMMETRY – 12-B-05-50-06-00A-282B-A 07.10.2011 12 ELECTRO
    ELECTRO MECHANICAL LANDING MECHANICA
    GEAR - UNSCHEDULED L LANDING
    INSPECTION GEAR
    FUSELAGE CARRY THROUGH 12-B-05-50-07-00A-282A-A 04.12.2009 11 ALL
    FRAMES - GEOMETRY
    INSPECTION
    MAXIMUM OPERATING SPEED 12-B-05-50-08-00A-282A-A 09.08.2010 5 All
    (VMO/MMO) EXCEEDANCE -
    UNSCHEDULED INSPECTION
    MAXIMUM LANDING GEAR 12-B-05-50-09-00A-282A-A 03.04.2013 2 ALL
    OPERATING SPEED (VLO)
    EXCEEDANCE - UNSCHEDULED
    INSPECTION
    MAXIMUM LANDING GEAR 12-B-05-50-09-00A-282B-A 03.05.2012 2 ELECTRO
    OPERATING SPEED (VLO) MECHANICA
    EXCEEDANCE – ELECTRO L LANDING
    MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR - GEAR
    UNSCHEDULED INSPECTION
    MAXIMUM LANDING GEAR 12-B-05-50-10-00A-282A-A 03.04.2013 2 ALL
    EXTENDED SPEED (VLE)
    EXCEEDANCE - UNSCHEDULED
    INSPECTION
    MAXIMUM LANDING GEAR 12-B-05-50-10-00A-282B-A 03.05.2012 2 ELECTRO
    EXTENDED SPEED (VLE) MECHANICA
    EXCEEDANCE – ELECTRO L LANDING
    MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR - GEAR
    UNSCHEDULED INSPECTION
    TAIL–DOWN DAMAGE INSPECTION 12-B-05-50-11-00A-282A-A C 01.05.2014 10 ALL
    - UNSCHEDULED INSPECTION
    AFTER A FLIGHT THROUGH 12-B-05-50-15-00A-282A-A 20.09.2010 4 ALL
    VOLCANIC ASH OR SMOKE -
    UNSCHEDULED INSPECTION
    DIMENSIONS AND ZONES – 12-B-06-00-00-00A-040A-A 09.04.2008 1 ALL
    GENERAL - DESCRIPTION
    DIMENSIONS AND ZONES - 12-B-06-10-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 7 ALL
    DESCRIPTION
    ACCESS PROVISION – HYDRAULIC 12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A C 02.04.2014 17 HYDRAULIC
    LANDING GEAR - DESCRIPTION LANDING
    GEAR
    ACCESS PROVISIONS – ELECTRO 12-B-06-20-00-00A-040B-A C 02.04.2014 17 ELECTRO
    MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR - MECHANICA
    DESCRIPTION L LANDING
    GEAR
    LIFTING AND SHORING – GENERAL 12-B-07-00-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 1 ALL
    - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    JACKING - MAINTENANCE 12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A 15.03.2008 8 ALL
    PRACTICES
    SHORING - MAINTENANCE 12-B-07-20-00-00A-901A-A 15.03.2008 4 ALL
    PRACTICES

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    LEVELING AND WEIGHING – 12-B-08-00-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 1 ALL
    GENERAL - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    WEIGHING - MAINTENANCE 12-B-08-10-00-00A-901A-A 15.03.2008 3 ALL
    PRACTICES
    LEVELING - MAINTENANCE 12-B-08-20-00-00A-901A-A 15.03.2008 4 ALL
    PRACTICES
    HANDLING AND TAXIING – 12-B-09-00-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 1 ALL
    GENERAL - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    TOWING - MAINTENANCE 12-B-09-10-00-00A-901A-A 28.07.2009 5 ALL
    PRACTICES
    TAXIING - MAINTENANCE 12-B-09-20-00-00A-901A-A 20.11.2007 2 ALL
    PRACTICES
    PARKING, MOORING AND 12-B-10-00-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 2 ALL
    STORING – GENERAL -
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    PARKING - MAINTENANCE 12-B-10-10-00-00A-901A-A 15.06.2012 8 ALL
    PRACTICES
    STORING - MAINTENANCE 12-B-10-10-01-00A-901A-A 28.11.2011 4 ALL
    PRACTICES
    MOORING - MAINTENANCE 12-B-10-20-00-00A-901A-A 15.03.2008 5 ALL
    PRACTICES
    RETURN TO SERVICE - 12-B-10-30-00-00A-901A-A 28.11.2011 3 ALL
    MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    PLACARDS AND MARKINGS – 12-B-11-00-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 1 ALL
    GENERAL - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    PLACARDS AND MARKINGS - 12-B-11-00-00-00A-901A-A 06.07.2011 4 ALL
    MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    PLACARDS AND MARKINGS - 12-B-11-00-00-00A-920A-A 06.07.2011 4 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    EXTERIOR PLACARDS AND 12-B-11-20-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 1 ALL
    MARKINGS - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    EXTERIOR PLACARDS AND 12-B-11-20-00-00A-901A-A 15.03.2008 2 ALL
    MARKINGS - MAINTENANCE
    PRACTICES
    INSTALLATION OF FLAP 12-B-11-20-01-00A-901A-A 30.11.2009 5 ALL
    MARKINGS - MAINTENANCE
    PRACTICES
    INSTALLATION OF HORIZONTAL 12-B-11-20-02-00A-901A-A 30.11.2009 5 ALL
    STABILIZER TRIM MARKINGS -
    MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    INTERIOR PLACARDS - 12-B-11-30-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 1 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    FLIGHT COMPARTMENT 12-B-11-30-10-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 1 ALL
    PLACARDS - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    PASSENGER COMPARTMENT 12-B-11-30-20-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 1 ALL
    PLACARDS - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    SERVICING – GENERAL - 12-B-12-00-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 1 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    REPLENISHMENT - DESCRIPTION 12-B-12-10-00-00A-040A-A 22.01.2013 3 ALL
    AND OPERATION
    FUEL - SERVICING 12-B-12-10-01-00A-902A-A 06.07.2011 9 ALL
    BRAKES - SERVICING 12-B-12-10-02-00A-902A-A 05.01.2009 3 ALL
    ENGINE OIL - SERVICING 12-B-12-10-03-00A-902A-A 25.04.2012 3 ALL
    TIRES - SERVICING 12-B-12-10-04-00A-902A-A 15.03.2008 6 ALL
    OXYGEN - SERVICING 12-B-12-10-05-00A-902A-A 22.11.2010 6 ALL
    SCHEDULED SERVICING - 12-B-12-20-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 1 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    AIRCRAFT EXTERIOR - POLISH 12-B-12-20-01-00A-256A-A 08.10.2008 4 ALL
    AND APPLY SEALING
    AIRCRAFT EXTERIOR WASHING - 12-B-12-20-01-00A-902A-A 18.09.2013 7 ALL
    SERVICING
    AIRCRAFT WINDOWS CLEANING - 12-B-12-20-02-00A-902A-A 15.03.2008 3 ALL
    SERVICING
    AIRCRAFT INTERIOR CLEANING - 12-B-12-20-03-00A-902A-A 18.09.2013 3 ALL
    SERVICING
    LANDING GEAR - SERVICING 12-B-12-20-04-00A-902A-A 15.03.2008 5 ALL
    PROPELLER - SERVICING 12-B-12-20-05-00A-902A-A 14.06.2012 3 ALL
    WHEEL BEARING - SERVICING 12-B-12-20-06-00A-902A-A 27.02.2012 8 ALL
    EQUIPMENT HANDLING - 12-B-20-00-00-00A-901A-A 26.08.2008 2 ALL
    MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    LOCKING AND RETAINING 12-B-20-20-00-00A-040A-A 20.11.2007 7 ALL
    DEVICES - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    TORQUE WRENCHES AND 12-B-20-20-01-00A-040A-A 20.11.2007 7 ALL
    PROCEDURES - DESCRIPTION
    AND OPERATION
    CRIMPING - DESCRIPTION AND 12-B-20-20-10-00A-040A-A 21.06.2011 14 All
    OPERATION
    STANDARD PRACTICES - 12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A 31.10.2012 3 ALL
    CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST
    CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST - 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071A-A 30.10.2013 2 ALL
    PROCESSING AND CLEANING
    CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST - 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071B-A 18.10.2013 2 ALL
    PROCESSING SUNDRIES
    CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST - 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071C-A 02.12.2008 1 ALL
    WELDING AND METAL
    CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST - 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071D-A C 14.03.2014 3 ALL
    JOINTING COMPOUNDS AND
    GREASES
    CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST - 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071E-A 02.03.2012 2 ALL
    POLISHING
    CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST - 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071F-A C 05.05.2014 1 ALL
    INSPECTING
    CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST - 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071G-A C 26.05.2014 3 ALL
    PAINTS, VARNISHES AND
    THINNERS

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST - 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071H-A 18.10.2013 3 ALL
    BONDING, ADHESIVES, FILLERS
    AND SEALERS
    CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST - 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071I-A 22.10.2013 3 ALL
    GENERAL STORES
    CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST - 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071J-A 24.11.2011 2 ALL
    OILS AND FLUIDS
    CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST - 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071K-A 02.12.2008 1 ALL
    FUELS
    CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST - 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071L-A 02.12.2008 1 ALL
    PACKING
    CORROSION - DESCRIPTION 12-B-20-40-00-00A-040A-A 23.12.2009 6 ALL
    CORROSION CONTROL - 12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A 10.08.2012 17 ALL
    MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    CORROSION - REPAIR 12-B-20-40-00-00A-904A-A 20.11.2007 3 ALL
    CHEMICAL CONVERSION COATING 12-B-20-40-10-00A-901A-A 20.11.2007 4 ALL
    - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    STANDARD PRACTICES - 12-B-20-50-00-00A-040A-A 20.11.2007 1 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    COMPOSITE PANELS ANTI–CHAFE 12-B-20-50-01-00A-904A-A 20.11.2007 6 ALL
    STRIP - REPAIR
    PLASTIC TUBING - MAINTENANCE 12-B-20-50-02-00A-901A-A 24.10.2011 20 ALL
    PRACTICES
    SEALANT APPLICATION - 12-B-20-50-03-00A-901A-A 20.11.2007 3 ALL
    MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    BUSHES AND BEARINGS - 12-B-20-50-04-00A-901A-A 22.03.2011 7 ALL
    MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    HEXASHIELD CONNECTOR - 12-B-20-50-10-00A-920A-A 09.10.2008 8 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    AIR CONDITIONING - DESCRIPTION 12-B-21-00-00-00A-040A-A 29.08.2008 2 ALL
    AND OPERATION
    DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM - 12-B-21-20-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 5 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    FIREWALL SHUT–OFF VALVE - 12-B-21-20-01-00A-920A-A 30.11.2009 5 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    MICROSWITCH - REMOVAL/ 12-B-21-20-01-01A-920A-A 23.08.2011 10 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    BLOWER UNIT - REMOVAL/ 12-B-21-20-02-00A-920A-A 06.10.2008 5 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    PRESSURIZATION CONTROL - 12-B-21-30-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 4 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    PRESSURIZATION CONTROL - 12-B-21-30-00-00A-901A-A 15.03.2008 3 ALL
    MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    PRESSURIZATION CONTROL - 12-B-21-30-00-00A-903A-A C 05.05.2014 12 ALL
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    CABIN PRESSURIZATION 12-B-21-30-01-00A-903A-A 11.09.2008 4 ALL
    CONTROL UNIT - ADJUSTMENT/
    TEST
    CABIN PRESSURIZATION 12-B-21-30-01-00A-920A-A C 18.03.2014 5 ALL
    CONTROL UNIT - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    SAFETY VALVE - CLEAN 12-B-21-30-02-00A-250A-A 15.03.2008 5 ALL

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    SAFETY VALVE - REMOVAL/ 12-B-21-30-02-00A-920A-A 30.11.2009 5 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    OUTFLOW VALVE - REMOVAL/ 12-B-21-30-03-00A-920A-A 30.11.2009 4 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    NEGATIVE PRESSURE RELIEF 12-B-21-30-05-00A-920A-A 05.05.2009 4 ALL
    VALVE - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    HEATING AND COOLING - 12-B-21-40-00-00A-040A-A 30.08.2008 12 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    SECONDARY HEATING - 12-B-21-40-01-00A-903A-A C 06.03.2014 4 ALL
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    UNDERFLOOR HEATER - 12-B-21-40-01-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 6 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    REFRIGERATION PACK - 12-B-21-40-02-00A-313A-A 15.03.2008 5 ALL
    INSPECTION/CHECK
    REFRIGERATION PACK - 12-B-21-40-02-00A-902A-A 30.11.2009 6 ALL
    SERVICING
    REFRIGERATION PACK - 12-B-21-40-02-00A-920A-A 30.11.2009 5 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    WATER SEPARATOR - CLEAN 12-B-21-40-03-00A-250A-A 30.11.2009 6 ALL
    WATER SEPARATOR - REPAIR 12-B-21-40-03-00A-904A-A 05.01.2009 3 ALL
    WATER SEPARATOR - REMOVAL/ 12-B-21-40-03-00A-920A-A 10.03.2010 5 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    HP SHUT–OFF VALVE - REMOVAL/ 12-B-21-40-04-00A-920A-A 15.02.2012 5 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    PRIMARY SHUT–OFF VALVE - 12-B-21-40-05-00A-920A-A 15.02.2012 5 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    OVERTEMPERATURE SWITCH - 12-B-21-40-06-00A-903A-A 11.12.2012 3 ALL
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    OVER TEMPERATURE SWITCH - 12-B-21-40-06-00A-920A-A 10.10.2012 4 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    OVERPRESSURE SWITCH - 12-B-21-40-07-00A-920A-A 22.11.2012 4 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH - 12-B-21-40-08-00A-920A-A 09.04.2008 4 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    FLOW CONTROL VENTURI - 12-B-21-40-09-00A-920A-A 22.11.2012 4 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    COLD AIR UNIT - REMOVAL/ 12-B-21-40-10-00A-920A-A 30.11.2009 7 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    CABIN HEATER - REMOVAL/ 12-B-21-40-15-00A-920A-A 21.03.2012 6 CABIN
    INSTALLATION HEATER
    ENGINE BAY DUCTS - REPAIR 12-B-21-41-00-00A-904A-A 05.01.2009 3 ALL
    ENGINE BAY DUCTS - REMOVAL/ 12-B-21-41-00-00A-920A-A 30.11.2009 6 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    FOOTWARMER - DESCRIPTION 12-B-21-43-00-00A-040A-A 07.08.2008 3 FOOT
    AND OPERATION WARMER
    SYSTEM
    FOOTWARMER - ADJUSTMENT/ 12-B-21-43-00-00A-903A-A 07.05.2012 3 ALL
    TEST
    FOOTWARMER - REMOVAL/ 12-B-21-43-00-00A-920A-A 06.10.2008 5 FOOT
    INSTALLATION WARMER
    SYSTEM

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 9


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    ADDITIONAL COOLING - 12-B-21-50-00-00A-040A-A 29.08.2008 1 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    VAPOUR CYCLE COOLING 12-B-21-50-01-00A-040A-A 09.04.2008 6 VAPOUR
    SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND CYCLE
    OPERATION COOLING
    SYSTEM
    VAPOUR CYCLE COOLING 12-B-21-50-01-00A-902A-A 16.02.2012 9 VAPOUR
    SYSTEM - SERVICING CYCLE
    COOLING
    SYSTEM
    VAPOUR CYCLE COOLING 12-B-21-50-01-00A-903A-A 30.11.2009 12 ALL
    SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    COMPRESSOR CONDENSER UNIT 12-B-21-50-01-00A-920A-A 16.02.2012 6 VAPOUR
    - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION CYCLE
    COOLING
    SYSTEM
    COMPRESSOR DRIVE MOTOR - 12-B-21-50-03-00A-313A-A 11.11.2011 3 VAPOUR
    INSPECTION/CHECK CYCLE
    COOLING
    SYSTEM
    TEMPERATURE CONTROL 12-B-21-60-00-00A-040A-A 27.08.2008 5 ALL
    SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    INTEGRATED ECS CONTROLLER - 12-B-21-60-01-00A-903A-A 07.11.2008 3 ALL
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    INTEGRATED ECS CONTROLLER - 12-B-21-60-01-00A-920A-A 22.08.2008 4 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    TEMPERATURE CONTROL VALVE - 12-B-21-60-02-00A-920A-A 30.11.2009 5 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    FLOW CONTROL VALVE - 12-B-21-60-03-00A-920A-A 25.08.2008 5 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    ACTUATOR - REMOVAL/ 12-B-21-60-03-01A-920A-A 30.11.2011 7 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    DUCT TEMPERATURE SENSOR - 12-B-21-60-04-00A-920A-A 30.11.2009 5 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    DUCT OVERTEMPERATURE 12-B-21-60-05-00A-903A-A 11.12.2012 3 ALL
    SWITCH - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    DUCT OVER TEMPERATURE 12-B-21-60-05-00A-920A-A 30.11.2012 4 ALL
    SWITCH - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    FLIGHT COMPARTMENT 12-B-21-60-06-00A-920A-A 07.07.2008 4 ALL
    TEMPERATURE SENSOR -
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    FLIGHT COMPARTMENT 12-B-21-60-07-00A-920A-A 07.07.2008 4 ALL
    TEMPERATURE SENSOR FAN -
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    UNDERFLOOR TEMPERATURE 12-B-21-60-08-00A-920A-A 18.08.2008 5 ALL
    SENSOR - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    UNDERFLOOR TEMPERATURE 12-B-21-60-09-00A-920A-A 07.07.2008 5 ALL
    SENSOR FAN - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 10


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    PASSENGER COMPARTMENT 12-B-21-60-10-00A-920A-A 07.07.2008 4 ALL
    TEMPERATURE SENSOR -
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    PASSENGER COMPARTMENT 12-B-21-60-11-00A-920A-A 07.07.2008 4 ALL
    TEMPERATURE SENSOR FAN -
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL – 12-B-22-00-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 2 ALL
    GENERAL - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    AUTOPILOT - DESCRIPTION AND 12-B-22-10-00-00A-040A-A 04.06.2009 8 ALL
    OPERATION
    AUTOPILOT - INSPECTION/CHECK 12-B-22-10-00-00A-313A-A 10.06.2008 6 ALL
    AUTOPILOT - ADJUSTMENT/TEST 12-B-22-10-00-00A-903A-A 12.11.2012 11 ALL
    PITCH ACTUATOR - REMOVAL/ 12-B-22-10-02-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 4 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    ROLL ACTUATOR - REMOVAL/ 12-B-22-10-03-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 5 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    YAW ACTUATOR - REMOVAL/ 12-B-22-10-04-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 4 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    FLIGHT CONTROL PANEL - 12-B-22-10-05-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 4 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    TRIM ADAPTOR - REMOVAL/ 12-B-22-10-07-00A-920A-A 09.04.2008 4 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    SPEED AND ATTITUDE 12-B-22-20-00-00A-040A-A 11.05.2012 9 ALL
    CORRECTION - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    SPEED AND ATTITUDE 12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A 12.11.2012 29 ALL
    CORRECTION - ADJUSTMENT/
    TEST
    STICK PUSHER COMPUTER - 12-B-22-20-01-00A-920A-A C 18.03.2014 5 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    AOA TRANSMITTER - INSPECTION/ 12-B-22-20-02-00A-313A-A 22.04.2008 2 ALL
    CHECK
    AOA TRANSMITTER - REMOVAL/ 12-B-22-20-02-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 6 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    STICK–SHAKER ACTUATOR - 12-B-22-20-03-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 4 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    STICK PUSHER SERVO - 12-B-22-20-04-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 4 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    TORQUE TRANSDUCER - 12-B-22-20-05-00A-920A-A C 04.02.2014 5 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    STICK PUSHER CAPSTAN - 12-B-22-20-06-00A-920A-A 30.11.2009 6 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    COMMUNICATIONS - DESCRIPTION 12-B-23-00-00-00A-040A-A 09.04.2008 3 ALL
    AND OPERATION
    SPEECH COMMUNICATION - 12-B-23-10-00-00A-040A-A 09.04.2008 1 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    HF COMMUNICATION - 12-B-23-11-00-00A-040A-A 09.04.2008 7 HF
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION COMMUNICA
    TION
    SYSTEM

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 11


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    HF COMMUNICATION - 12-B-23-11-00-00A-903A-A 09.04.2008 3 HF
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST COMMUNICA
    TION
    SYSTEM
    CONTROL UNIT - REMOVAL/ 12-B-23-11-01-00A-920A-A 09.04.2008 4 HF
    INSTALLATION COMMUNICA
    TIONS
    SYSTEM
    RECEIVER UNIT - REMOVAL/ 12-B-23-11-02-00A-920A-A 09.04.2008 5 HF
    INSTALLATION COMMUNICA
    TIONS
    SYSTEM
    COUPLER UNIT - REMOVAL/ 12-B-23-11-03-00A-920A-A 09.04.2008 5 HF
    INSTALLATION COMMUNICA
    TIONS
    SYSTEM
    ANTENNA - REMOVAL 12-B-23-11-04-00A-920A-A 09.04.2008 7 HF
    INSTALLATION COMMUNICA
    TIONS
    SYSTEM
    OPTIONAL SHORT ANTENNA - 12-B-23-11-04-00A-920B-A 01.09.2009 7 SHORT HF
    REMOVAL INSTALLATION ANTENNA
    HF POWER AMPLIFIER - REMOVAL/ 12-B-23-11-06-00A-920A-A 17.06.2013 5 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    VHF COMMUNICATION - 12-B-23-12-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 7 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    VHF COMMUNICATION - 12-B-23-12-00-00A-903A-A 12.08.2008 4 SINGLE VHF
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST COMMUNICA
    TION
    SYSTEM
    MULTI MODE DIGITAL RADIO - 12-B-23-12-01-00A-920A-A 12.08.2008 5 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    VHF 1 ANTENNA - REMOVAL/ 12-B-23-12-02-00A-920A-A 09.04.2008 5 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    VHF 2 ANTENNA - REMOVAL/ 12-B-23-12-03-00A-920A-A 09.04.2008 5 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    SATCOM - DESCRIPTION AND 12-B-23-16-00-00A-040A-A 06.10.2008 2 SATCOM
    OPERATION
    SATCOM ANTENNA - REMOVAL/ 12-B-23-16-01-00A-920A-A 06.10.2008 5 SATCOM
    INSTALLATION
    PASSENGER ADVISORY SYSTEM - 12-B-23-40-00-00A-040A-A 09.04.2008 1 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    PASSENGER ENTERTAINMENT - 12-B-23-40-10-00A-040A-A 18.08.2008 1 PASSENGER
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION ENTERTAIN
    MENT
    SYSTEM
    AUDIO INTEGRATING SYSTEM - 12-B-23-50-00-00A-040A-A 17.03.2011 10 SINGLE
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION AUDIO
    CONTROL
    PANEL

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 12


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    AUDIO INTEGRATING SYSTEM - 12-B-23-50-00-00A-903A-A C 07.05.2014 7 SINGLE
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST AUDIO
    CONTROL
    PANEL
    AUDIO CONTROL PANEL - 12-B-23-50-01-00A-920A-A 09.04.2008 5 SINGLE
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION AUDIO
    CONTROL
    PANEL
    DUAL AUDIO INTEGRATING 12-B-23-50-10-00A-040A-A 17.03.2011 10 DUAL AUDIO
    SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND CONTROL
    OPERATION PANELS
    DUAL AUDIO INTEGRATING 12-B-23-50-10-00A-903A-A 12.09.2012 7 DUAL AUDIO
    SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST CONTROL
    PANELS
    DUAL AUDIO CONTROL PANEL - 12-B-23-50-11-00A-920A-A 09.04.2008 5 DUAL AUDIO
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION CONTROL
    PANEL
    NOISE CANCELLING HEADSETS - 12-B-23-51-00-00A-040A-A 09.04.2008 3 NOISE
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION CANCELLIN
    G
    HEADSETS
    STATIC DISCHARGING - 12-B-23-60-00-00A-040A-A 09.04.2008 2 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    STATIC DISCHARGING - REMOVAL/ 12-B-23-60-00-00A-920A-A 17.03.2011 7 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    ELECTRICAL POWER - 12-B-24-00-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 4 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    ELECTRICAL POWER - 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A 16.07.2010 6 ALL
    MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    DC GENERATION - DESCRIPTION 12-B-24-30-00-00A-040A-A 17.10.2008 17 ALL
    AND OPERATION
    DC GENERATION - ADJUSTMENT/ 12-B-24-30-00-00A-903A-A 01.10.2013 13 ALL
    TEST
    STARTER/GENERATOR - 12-B-24-30-01-00A-313A-A 23.11.2011 6 ALL
    INSPECTION/CHECK
    STARTER/GENERATOR - 12-B-24-30-01-00A-920A-A 30.11.2009 6 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1 - 12-B-24-30-05-00A-920A-A 09.04.2008 4 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    VOLTAGE REGULATOR 2 - 12-B-24-30-06-00A-920A-A 09.04.2008 4 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    LEAD ACID BATTERY - REMOVAL/ 12-B-24-30-07-00A-920A-A 07.10.2008 8 LEAD ACID
    INSTALLATION BATTERY
    NI–CAD BATTERY - REMOVAL/ 12-B-24-30-07-00A-920B-A 30.11.2009 8 NI-CAD
    INSTALLATION BATTERY
    GENERATOR CURRENT SENSOR - 12-B-24-30-08-00A-920A-A 01.06.2011 10 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    EXTERNAL POWER - DESCRIPTION 12-B-24-40-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 4 ALL
    AND OPERATION
    BATTERY AND EXTERNAL POWER 12-B-24-40-01-00A-903A-A 22.10.2013 6 ALL
    JUNCTION BOX - ADJUSTMENT/
    TEST

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 13


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    BATTERY AND EXTERNAL POWER 12-B-24-40-01-00A-920A-A 22.05.2012 6 ALL
    JUNCTION BOX - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    DC ELECTRICAL LOAD 12-B-24-50-00-00A-040A-A 10.01.2013 1 ALL
    DISTRIBUTION - DESCRIPTION
    AND OPERATION
    DC LOAD DISTRIBUTION – 12-B-24-52-00-00A-040A-A 22.05.2013 7 HYDRAULIC
    HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR - LANDING
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION GEAR
    DC LOAD DISTRIBUTION – 12-B-24-52-00-00A-040B-A 20.09.2011 7 ELECTRO
    ELECTRO MECHANICAL LANDING MECHANICA
    GEAR - DESCRIPTION AND L LANDING
    OPERATION GEAR
    LEFT POWER JUNCTION BOX - 12-B-24-52-10-00A-903A-A 22.10.2013 6 ALL
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    LEFT POWER JUNCTION BOX - 12-B-24-52-10-00A-920A-A 18.08.2010 6 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    RIGHT POWER JUNCTION BOX – 12-B-24-52-20-00A-903A-A 22.10.2013 7 HYDRAULIC
    HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR - LANDING
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST GEAR
    ELECTRO MECHANICAL LANDING 12-B-24-52-20-00A-903B-A 22.10.2013 7 ELECTRO
    GEAR – RIGHT POWER JUNCTION MECHANICA
    BOX - ADJUSTMENT/TEST L LANDING
    GEAR
    RIGHT POWER JUNCTION BOX - 12-B-24-52-20-00A-920A-A 10.01.2013 7 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY 12-B-24-52-51-00A-040A-A 17.10.2008 8 ALL
    (EPS) SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION
    AND OPERATION
    EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY 12-B-24-52-51-00A-903A-A 09.04.2008 2 ALL
    (EPS) SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/
    TEST
    EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY 12-B-24-52-51-00A-920A-A 09.04.2008 5 ALL
    (EPS) SYSTEM - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    110 VAC AUXILIARY POWER - 12-B-24-60-00-00A-040A-A 09.04.2008 4 110 VAC
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION AUXILIARY
    POWER
    110 VAC AUXILIARY POWER – 12-B-24-60-01-00A-920A-A 09.04.2008 4 110 VAC
    STATIC INVERTER - REMOVAL/ AUXILIARY
    INSTALLATION POWER
    EQUIPMENT AND FURNISHINGS - 12-B-25-00-00-00A-040A-A 25.08.2008 1 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    FLIGHT COMPARTMENT - 12-B-25-10-00-00A-040A-A 23.09.2009 5 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    FLIGHT COMPARTMENT CREW 12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 5 ALL
    SEATS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    CREW SEAT SAFETY HARNESS - 12-B-25-10-02-00A-920A-A 29.08.2008 2 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    FLIGHT COMPARTMENT TRIM - 12-B-25-10-03-00A-920A-A 25.08.2008 18 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 14


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    FLIGHT COMPARTMENT CARPET - 12-B-25-10-04-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 4 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    FLIGHT COMPARTMENT – LEFT 12-B-25-10-05-00A-920A-A 25.08.2008 4 ALL
    STORAGE BOX - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    FLIGHT COMPARTMENT – RIGHT 12-B-25-10-06-00A-920A-A 25.08.2008 4 ALL
    STORAGE BOX - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    EQUIPMENT AND FURNISHINGS – 12-B-25-20-00-00A-040A-A 18.08.2008 2 ALL
    PASSENGER COMPARTMENT -
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    EQUIPMENT AND FURNISHINGS – 12-B-25-21-00-00A-040A-A 18.08.2008 7 EXECUTIVE
    EXECUTIVE INTERIOR - INTERIOR
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    EXECUTIVE SEATS - 12-B-25-21-01-00A-903A-A 18.08.2008 5 EXECUTIVE
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST INTERIOR
    EXECUTIVE SEATS - REMOVAL 12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A C 14.03.2014 5 EXECUTIVE
    INSTALLATION INTERIOR
    EXECUTIVE SEAT SAFETY 12-B-25-21-02-00A-920A-A 18.08.2008 2 EXECUTIVE
    HARNESS - REMOVAL/ INTERIOR
    INSTALLATION
    EXECUTIVE TRIM - REMOVAL 12-B-25-21-03-00A-920A-A 30.11.2009 28 EXECUTIVE
    INSTALLATION INTERIOR
    EXECUTIVE CARPETS - REMOVAL/ 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A 18.08.2008 4 EXECUTIVE
    INSTALLATION INTERIOR
    LEFT STORAGE CABINET - 12-B-25-21-05-00A-920A-A 18.08.2008 4 EXECUTIVE
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION INTERIOR
    RIGHT STORAGE CABINET - 12-B-25-21-06-00A-920A-A 18.08.2008 5 EXECUTIVE
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION INTERIOR
    TOILET COMPARTMENT - 12-B-25-21-07-00A-920A-A 18.08.2008 8 TOILET
    REMOVAL INSTALLATION COMPARTM
    ENT
    BENCH SEAT - REMOVAL/ 12-B-25-21-08-00A-920A-A 18.08.2008 5 BENCH
    INSTALLATION SEAT
    EQUIPMENT AND FURNISHINGS – 12-B-25-22-00-00A-040A-A 18.08.2008 5 STANDARD
    STANDARD INTERIOR - INTERIOR
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    STANDARD SEATS - REMOVAL/ 12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A C 16.05.2014 5 STANDARD
    INSTALLATION INTERIOR
    STANDARD SEAT SAFETY 12-B-25-22-02-00A-920A-A 18.08.2008 2 STANDARD
    HARNESS - REMOVAL/ INTERIOR
    INSTALLATION
    STANDARD TRIM - REMOVAL 12-B-25-22-03-00A-920A-A C 16.05.2014 24 STANDARD
    INSTALLATION INTERIOR
    STANDARD CARPETS - REMOVAL/ 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A 18.08.2008 4 STANDARD
    INSTALLATION INTERIOR
    BAGGAGE AREA AND TRIM - 12-B-25-23-00-00A-040A-A 18.08.2008 1 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    BAGGAGE AREA EQUIPMENT - 12-B-25-23-01-00A-920A-A 18.08.2008 6 ALL
    REMOVAL INSTALLATION
    LARGE BAGGAGE NET - REMOVAL 12-B-25-23-02-00A-920A-A 18.08.2008 4 ALL
    INSTALLATION

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 15


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    CARGO COMPARTMENT - 12-B-25-50-00-00A-040A-A 21.09.2009 1 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT - 12-B-25-60-00-00A-040A-A 17.07.2008 1 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    EMERGENCY LOCATOR 12-B-25-63-00-00A-040A-A 17.07.2008 4 ALL
    TRANSMITTER - DESCRIPTION
    AND OPERATION
    EMERGENCY LOCATOR 12-B-25-63-00-00A-903A-A C 01.04.2014 6 ALL
    TRANSMITTER - ADJUSTMENT/
    TEST
    EMERGENCY LOCATOR 12-B-25-63-00-00A-920A-A 25.06.2012 6 ALL
    TRANSMITTER - REMOVAL
    INSTALLATION
    EMERGENCY LOCATOR 12-B-25-63-02-00A-920A-A 17.07.2008 5 ALL
    TRANSMITTER ANTENNA -
    REMOVAL INSTALLATION
    ELT – NAVIGATION INTERFACE - 12-B-25-63-03-00A-920A-A 17.07.2008 5 ALL
    REMOVAL INSTALLATION
    INSULATION - DESCRIPTION AND 12-B-25-80-00-00A-040A-A 23.09.2009 2 ALL
    OPERATION
    COLD WEATHER PREHEATER 12-B-25-90-00-00A-040A-A 25.08.2008 4 COLD
    SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND WEATHER
    OPERATION PREHEATER
    SYSTEM
    COLD WEATHER PREHEATER 12-B-25-90-00-00A-903A-A C 18.02.2014 4 COLD
    SYSTEM (110 VAC) - ADJUSTMENT/ WEATHER
    TEST PREHEATER
    SYSTEM 110
    VAC
    COLD WEATHER PREHEATER 12-B-25-90-00-00A-903B-A C 18.02.2014 4 COLD
    SYSTEM (230 VAC) - ADJUSTMENT/ WEATHER
    TEST PREHEATER
    SYSTEM 230
    VAC
    COLD WEATHER PREHEATER 12-B-25-90-00-00A-920A-A 25.04.2012 16 110 VAC
    SYSTEM (110 VAC) - REMOVAL/ PREHEATER
    INSTALLATION SYSTEM
    COLD WEATHER PREHEATER 12-B-25-90-00-00A-920B-A 22.05.2012 16 230 VAC
    SYSTEM (230 VAC) - REMOVAL/ PREHEATER
    INSTALLATION SYSTEM
    FIRE PROTECTION - DESCRIPTION 12-B-26-00-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 1 ALL
    AND OPERATION
    FIRE/OVERHEAT DETECTION - 12-B-26-10-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 3 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    FIRE/OVERHEAT DETECTION - 12-B-26-10-00-00A-903A-A 15.03.2008 2 ALL
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    EXTINGUISHING - DESCRIPTION 12-B-26-20-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 1 ALL
    AND OPERATION
    FLIGHT CONTROLS - 12-B-27-00-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 2 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    FLIGHT CONTROLS - INSPECTION/ 12-B-27-00-00-00A-313A-A 23.10.2012 10 ALL
    CHECK

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 16


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    FLIGHT CONTROLS – CONTROL 12-B-27-00-01-00A-352A-A 01.09.2010 5 ALL
    RODS - MAGNETIC PARTICLE
    INSPECTION
    FLIGHT CONTROLS – CONTROL 12-B-27-00-01-00A-353A-A 01.09.2010 4 ALL
    RODS - EDDY CURRENT
    INSPECTION
    AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM - 12-B-27-10-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 5 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM - 12-B-27-10-00-00A-307A-A 27.10.2010 6 ALL
    PARTS LIST– COCKPIT – KIT P/N
    500.50.12.314
    AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM - 12-B-27-10-00-00A-307B-A 12.05.2011 7 ALL
    PARTS LIST – FLOOR – KIT P/N
    500.60.12.035
    AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM - 12-B-27-10-00-00A-307C-A 12.05.2011 4 ALL
    PARTS LIST – WING – KIT P/N
    500.60.12.016
    AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM - 12-B-27-10-00-00A-310A-A C 03.04.2014 4 ALL
    EXAMINE
    AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM - 12-B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A 16.10.2013 21 ALL
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    AILERON CABLES - REMOVAL/ 12-B-27-10-01-00A-920A-A C 18.03.2014 8 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    AILERON AUTOPILOT CABLE - 12-B-27-10-02-00A-920A-A 16.03.2010 7 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    AILERON CONTROL ROD – INNER 12-B-27-10-05-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 5 ALL
    WING - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    AILERON CONTROL ROD – 12-B-27-10-06-00A-920A-A 14.10.2013 5 ALL
    CENTER WING - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    AILERON CONTROL ROD – OUTER 12-B-27-10-07-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 5 ALL
    WING - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM – 12-B-27-10-08-00A-352B-A 27.10.2010 5 ALL
    FUSELAGE BELLCRANK -
    MAGNETIC PARTICLE INSPECTION
    AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM – 12-B-27-10-08-00A-353A-A 20.09.2010 5 ALL
    OUTER WING BELLCRANK - EDDY
    CURRENT INSPECTION
    AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM – 12-B-27-10-08-00A-353B-A 27.10.2010 5 ALL
    FUSELAGE BELLCRANK - EDDY
    CURRENT INSPECTION
    AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM – 12-B-27-10-08-00A-920A-A 07.08.2012 5 ALL
    OUTER WING BELLCRANK -
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM – 12-B-27-10-08-00A-920B-A 07.08.2012 6 ALL
    FUSELAGE BELLCRANK -
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM – 12-B-27-10-09-00A-353A-A 21.10.2010 5 ALL
    FUSELAGE CABLE QUADRANT -
    EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 17


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM – 12-B-27-10-09-00A-920A-A 07.08.2012 5 ALL
    FUSELAGE CABLE QUADRANT -
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    AILERON TRIM - DESCRIPTION 12-B-27-15-00-00A-040A-A 09.04.2008 4 ALL
    AND OPERATION
    AILERON TRIM - ADJUSTMENT/ 12-B-27-15-00-00A-903A-A 15.03.2008 4 ALL
    TEST
    AILERON TRIM ACTUATOR - 12-B-27-15-01-00A-920A-A 30.11.2009 6 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM - 12-B-27-20-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 4 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM - 12-B-27-20-00-00A-307A-A 21.02.2011 11 ALL
    PARTS LIST – KIT P/N 500.60.12.018
    RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM - 12-B-27-20-00-00A-310A-A 18.01.2011 3 ALL
    EXAMINE
    RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM - 12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A C 11.03.2014 21 ALL
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    RUDDER CABLES - REMOVAL/ 12-B-27-20-01-00A-920A-A 30.11.2012 10 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    RUDDER AUTOPILOT CABLES - 12-B-27-20-02-00A-920A-A 22.03.2010 8 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM – 12-B-27-20-04-00A-353A-A 04.01.2011 5 ALL
    BELLCRANK - EDDY CURRENT
    INSPECTION
    RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM – 12-B-27-20-05-00A-310A-A 22.11.2010 3 ALL
    CABLE QUADRANT - EXAMINE
    RUDDER TRIM - DESCRIPTION 12-B-27-25-00-00A-040A-A 09.04.2008 4 ALL
    AND OPERATION
    RUDDER TRIM - ADJUSTMENT/ 12-B-27-25-00-00A-903A-A 15.03.2008 6 ALL
    TEST
    RUDDER TRIM ACTUATOR - 12-B-27-25-01-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 5 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM - 12-B-27-30-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 3 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM - 12-B-27-30-00-00A-307A-A 19.01.2011 8 ALL
    PARTS LIST – KIT P/N 500.60.12.019
    ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM - 12-B-27-30-00-00A-310A-A C 18.03.2014 3 ALL
    EXAMINE
    ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM - 12-B-27-30-00-00A-903A-A 13.08.2010 24 ALL
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    ELEVATOR CABLES - REMOVAL/ 12-B-27-30-01-00A-920A-A C 18.03.2014 10 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    ELEVATOR AUTOPILOT CABLES - 12-B-27-30-02-00A-920A-A 16.03.2010 8 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM – 12-B-27-30-05-00A-353A-A 20.10.2010 5 ALL
    CONTROL LEVER - EDDY
    CURRENT INSPECTION
    ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM – 12-B-27-30-06-00A-664A-A 06.02.2012 5 ALL
    BELLCRANK - SPECIAL REPAIR RM
    12–008
    HORIZONTAL STABILIZER TRIM - 12-B-27-40-00-00A-040A-A 09.04.2008 6 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 18


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    HORIZONTAL STABILIZER TRIM - 12-B-27-40-00-00A-903A-A 15.07.2010 9 ALL
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    TRIM ACTUATOR - REMOVAL/ 12-B-27-40-01-00A-920A-A C 19.02.2014 6 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    HORIZONTAL STABILIZER TRIM – 12-B-27-40-02-00A-920A-A C 12.02.2014 4 ALL
    TRIM ACTUATOR FAILSAFE
    PLATES - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    FLAPS - DESCRIPTION AND 12-B-27-50-00-00A-040A-A 09.04.2008 10 ALL
    OPERATION
    FLAPS - FAULT ISOLATION 12-B-27-50-00-00A-420A-A 01.10.2013 15 ALL
    PROCEDURE
    FLAPS - MAINTENANCE 12-B-27-50-00-00A-901A-A 16.02.2012 4 ALL
    PRACTICES
    FLAPS - SERVICING 12-B-27-50-00-00A-902A-A C 06.05.2014 6 ALL
    FLAPS - ADJUSTMENT/TEST 12-B-27-50-00-00A-903A-A 11.11.2013 17 ALL
    POWER DRIVE UNIT - REMOVAL/ 12-B-27-50-01-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 9 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    FLAP DRIVE SHAFTS - REMOVAL/ 12-B-27-50-02-00A-920A-A 30.11.2009 11 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    FLAP ACTUATOR - INSPECTION/ 12-B-27-50-03-00A-313A-A 05.06.2012 9 ALL
    CHECK
    FLAP ACTUATOR - ADJUSTMENT/ 12-B-27-50-03-00A-903A-A 30.11.2009 10 ALL
    TEST
    FLAP ACTUATOR - REMOVAL/ 12-B-27-50-03-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 12 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    FLAP CONTROL AND WARNING 12-B-27-50-05-00A-920A-A 05.10.2009 5 ALL
    UNIT - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    FLAP POSITION TRANSMITTERS - 12-B-27-50-06-00A-920A-A 22.05.2012 8 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    UP AND DOWN LIMIT SWITCHES - 12-B-27-50-07-00A-903A-A 07.10.2009 6 ALL
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    UP AND DOWN LIMIT SWITCHES - 12-B-27-50-07-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 5 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    FLAP POSITION SELECTOR - 12-B-27-50-08-00A-903A-A 15.03.2008 4 ALL
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    FLAP POSITION SELECTOR - 12-B-27-50-08-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 5 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    FLAP DRIVE SYSTEM - EXAMINE 12-B-27-51-00-00A-310A-A 21.03.2011 6 ALL
    FLAP DRIVE SYSTEM - IN SITU 12-B-27-51-00-00A-313A-A 10.01.2011 5 ALL
    INSPECTION/CHECK
    FLAP DRIVE SYSTEM - IN SITU 12-B-27-51-00-00A-353A-A 09.07.2012 5 ALL
    EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION
    FLAP DRIVE SYSTEM – WING – LH 12-B-27-51-01-00A-307A-A 27.10.2010 4 ALL
    INBOARD MECHANISM - PARTS
    LIST – KIT P/N 500.60.12.021
    FLAP DRIVE SYSTEM – WING – RH 12-B-27-51-01-00A-307B-A 27.10.2010 4 ALL
    INBOARD MECHANISM - PARTS
    LIST – KIT P/N 500.60.12.022
    FLAP DRIVE SYSTEM – WING – 12-B-27-51-01-00A-353A-A 10.11.2010 14 ALL
    INBOARD MECHANISM - EDDY
    CURRENT INSPECTION

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 19


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    FLAP DRIVE SYSTEM – WING – 12-B-27-51-01-00A-920A-A 11.05.2011 9 ALL
    INBOARD MECHANISM - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    FLAP DRIVE SYSTEM – WING – LH 12-B-27-51-02-00A-307A-A 02.02.2012 4 All
    CENTER MECHANISM - PARTS
    LIST – KIT P/N 500.60.12.023
    FLAP DRIVE SYSTEM – WING – RH 12-B-27-51-02-00A-307B-A 06.01.2011 4 ALL
    CENTER MECHANISM - PARTS
    LIST – KIT P/N 500.60.12.024
    FLAP DRIVE SYSTEM – WING – 12-B-27-51-02-00A-353A-A 10.11.2010 14 ALL
    CENTER MECHANISM - EDDY
    CURRENT INSPECTION
    FLAP DRIVE SYSTEM – WING – 12-B-27-51-02-00A-920A-A 11.05.2011 7 ALL
    CENTER MECHANISM - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    FLAP DRIVE SYSTEM – WING – 12-B-27-51-03-00A-307A-A 02.02.2012 4 ALL
    OUTBOARD MECHANISM - PARTS
    LIST – KIT P/N 500.60.12.025
    FLAP DRIVE SYSTEM – WING – 12-B-27-51-03-00A-353A-A 29.10.2010 16 ALL
    OUTBOARD MECHANISM - EDDY
    CURRENT INSPECTION
    FLAP DRIVE SYSTEM – WING – 12-B-27-51-03-00A-920A-A 11.05.2011 6 ALL
    OUTBOARD MECHANISM -
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    GUST LOCK - DESCRIPTION AND 12-B-27-70-00-00A-040A-A 20.11.2007 2 ALL
    OPERATION
    FUEL - DESCRIPTION AND 12-B-28-00-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 2 ALL
    OPERATION
    FUEL - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES 12-B-28-00-00-00A-901A-A 15.02.2012 3 ALL
    FUEL TANK - DESCRIPTION AND 12-B-28-10-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 3 ALL
    OPERATION
    FUEL TANK - INSPECTION/CHECK 12-B-28-10-00-00A-313A-A 09.04.2008 6 ALL
    FUEL TANK - REPAIR 12-B-28-10-00-00A-904A-A 09.04.2008 8 ALL
    TANK CROSS VENT PIPE AND 12-B-28-10-01-00A-903A-A 15.03.2008 3 ALL
    OUTWARD CHECK VALVE -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    DRAIN VALVE - REMOVAL/ 12-B-28-10-02-00A-920A-A 12.07.2011 5 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    DISTRIBUTION - DESCRIPTION 12-B-28-20-00-00A-040A-A 12.11.2013 8 ALL
    AND OPERATION
    FUEL FILTER ELEMENT - CLEAN 12-B-28-20-01-00A-250A-A 15.03.2008 3 ALL
    FUEL FILTER DIFFERENTIAL 12-B-28-20-01-00A-904A-A 30.11.2009 5 ALL
    PRESSURE INDICATOR - REPAIR
    FUEL FILTER ELEMENT - 12-B-28-20-01-00A-920A-A 30.11.2009 6 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    LOW PRESSURE SWITCH - 12-B-28-20-02-00A-920A-A 30.11.2009 5 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    ENGINE DRIVEN PUMP - 12-B-28-20-03-00A-920A-A 30.11.2009 6 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    BOOSTER PUMP - REMOVAL/ 12-B-28-20-04-00A-920A-A 30.11.2009 8 ALL
    INSTALLATION

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 20


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    TRANSFER JET PUMP - REMOVAL/ 12-B-28-20-05-00A-920A-A 09.04.2008 6 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    DELIVERY AND TRANSFER JET 12-B-28-20-06-00A-250A-A 07.08.2012 3 ALL
    PUMP - CLEAN
    DELIVERY AND TRANSFER JET 12-B-28-20-06-00A-920A-A 30.11.2009 5 ALL
    PUMP - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    FLOAT VALVE - ADJUSTMENT/ 12-B-28-20-07-00A-903A-A 15.03.2008 3 ALL
    TEST
    FLOAT VALVE - REMOVAL/ 12-B-28-20-07-00A-920A-A 30.11.2009 6 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    FIREWALL SHUTOFF VALVE - 12-B-28-20-08-00A-920A-A 30.11.2009 6 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    BALANCING SYSTEM - 12-B-28-21-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 3 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    BALANCING SYSTEM - 12-B-28-21-00-00A-903A-A 09.04.2008 3 ALL
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    FUEL INDICATION - DESCRIPTION 12-B-28-40-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 5 ALL
    AND OPERATION
    FUEL INDICATION - FAULT 12-B-28-40-00-00A-420A-A 30.11.2012 12 ALL
    ISOLATION PROCEDURES
    FUEL INDICATION - ADJUSTMENT/ 12-B-28-40-00-00A-903A-A 09.04.2008 3 ALL
    TEST
    FUEL QUANTITY SENSOR AND 12-B-28-40-01-00A-920A-A 11.05.2011 10 ALL
    LOW LEVEL SENSOR - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    FUEL CONTROL MONITOR UNIT - 12-B-28-40-04-00A-920A-A 09.04.2008 4 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    HYDRAULIC POWER - 12-B-29-00-00-00A-040A-A 31.01.2013 2 HYDRAULIC
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION SYSTEM
    HYDRAULIC POWER - FAULT 12-B-29-00-00-00A-420A-A 31.01.2013 6 HYDRAULIC
    ISOLATION PROCEDURE SYSTEM
    HYDRAULIC POWER - 12-B-29-00-00-00A-901A-A 31.01.2013 4 HYDRAULIC
    MAINTENANCE PRACTICES SYSTEM
    HYDRAULIC SYSTEM - SERVICING 12-B-29-00-00-00A-902A-A 31.01.2013 10 HYDRAULIC
    SYSTEM
    HYDRAULIC POWER - 12-B-29-00-00-00A-903A-A 31.01.2013 8 HYDRAULIC
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST SYSTEM
    MAIN HYDRAULIC SYSTEM - 12-B-29-10-00-00A-040A-A C 21.01.2014 6 HYDRAULIC
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION SYSTEM
    HYDRAULIC POWER PACK - 12-B-29-10-01-00A-901A-A 06.11.2013 15 HYDRAULIC
    MAINTENANCE PRACTICES SYSTEM
    HYDRAULIC POWER PACK - 12-B-29-10-01-00A-920A-A 31.01.2013 6 HYDRAULIC
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION SYSTEM
    ACCUMULATOR - MAINTENANCE 12-B-29-10-02-00A-901A-A C 17.04.2014 9 HYDRAULIC
    PRACTICES SYSTEM
    ACCUMULATOR - REMOVAL/ 12-B-29-10-02-00A-920A-A 31.01.2013 5 HYDRAULIC
    INSTALLATION SYSTEM
    LOW PRESSURE SWITCH - 12-B-29-10-03-00A-920A-A 31.01.2013 5 HYDRAULIC
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION SYSTEM
    RETURN LINE FILTER 12-B-29-10-04-00A-313A-A 06.11.2013 2 HYDRAULIC
    DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SYSTEM
    INDICATOR - INSPECTION/CHECK

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 21


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    RETURN LINE FILTER - REMOVAL/ 12-B-29-10-04-00A-920A-A 31.01.2013 5 HYDRAULIC
    INSTALLATION SYSTEM
    SERVICE SELECTOR VALVE - 12-B-29-10-05-00A-920A-A 31.01.2013 5 HYDRAULIC
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION SYSTEM
    POWER PACK MOTOR - REMOVAL/ 12-B-29-10-06-00A-920A-A 31.01.2013 5 HYDRAULIC
    INSTALLATION SYSTEM
    SYSTEM PRESSURE SWITCH - 12-B-29-10-07-00A-920A-A 31.01.2013 5 HYDRAULIC
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION SYSTEM
    EMERGENCY HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 12-B-29-20-00-00A-040A-A 31.01.2013 3 HYDRAULIC
    - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION SYSTEM
    HAND PUMP - REMOVAL/ 12-B-29-20-01-00A-920A-A 31.01.2013 5 HYDRAULIC
    INSTALLATION SYSTEM
    ICE AND RAIN PROTECTION - 12-B-30-00-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 2 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    AIRFOIL DE–ICE SYSTEM - 12-B-30-10-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 6 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    AIRFOIL DE–ICE BOOTS - 12-B-30-10-00-00A-313A-A 06.11.2013 4 ALL
    INSPECTION/CHECK
    AIRFOIL DE–ICE SYSTEM - 12-B-30-10-00-00A-903A-A 20.09.2011 9 ALL
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    PRESSURE REGULATOR - 12-B-30-10-01-00A-920A-A 01.12.2009 5 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    EJECTOR FLOW CONTROL VALVE 12-B-30-10-02-00A-901A-A 15.03.2008 6 ALL
    - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    EJECTOR FLOW CONTROL VALVE 12-B-30-10-02-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 5 ALL
    - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    AIRFOIL DE–ICE SYSTEM TIMER - 12-B-30-10-03-00A-920A-A 09.04.2008 5 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    AIRFOIL DE–ICE SYSTEM – 12-B-30-10-04-00A-920A-A 06.12.2011 7 ALL
    PRESSURE SWITCH - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    WING DE–ICING BOOTS - 12-B-30-14-01-00A-920A-A 11.10.2013 14 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    HORIZONTAL STABILIZER DE– 12-B-30-16-01-00A-920A-A 11.10.2013 11 ALL
    ICING BOOTS - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    AIR INTAKE DE–ICE SYSTEM - 12-B-30-20-00-00A-040A-A 09.04.2008 6 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    AIR INTAKE DE–ICE SYSTEM - 12-B-30-20-00-00A-903A-A 09.04.2008 3 ALL
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    INERTIAL SEPARATOR ACTUATOR 12-B-30-20-01-00A-920A-A 09.04.2008 5 ALL
    - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    AIR INTAKE DE–ICE LIP - 12-B-30-20-02-00A-920A-A 15.07.2009 6 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    PROBES DE–ICE SYSTEM - 12-B-30-30-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 1 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    DUAL PROBES DE–ICE SYSTEM - 12-B-30-30-20-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 7 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    PROBES DE–ICE SYSTEM - 12-B-30-30-20-00A-903A-A C 18.03.2014 10 ALL
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    AOA PLATE CONTROLLER - 12-B-30-30-21-00A-920A-A 09.04.2008 5 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 22


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    WINDSHIELD DE–ICE SYSTEM - 12-B-30-40-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 4 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    WINDSHIELD DE–ICE SYSTEM - 12-B-30-40-00-00A-901A-A 15.03.2008 3 ALL
    MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    WINDSHIELD DE–ICE SYSTEM - 12-B-30-40-00-00A-903A-A 12.11.2012 2 ALL
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    WINDSHIELD DE–ICE 12-B-30-40-01-00A-920A-A C 05.05.2014 4 ALL
    CONTROLLER - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    PROPELLER DE–ICE SYSTEM - 12-B-30-60-00-00A-040A-A 09.12.2010 6 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    PROPELLER DE–ICE SYSTEM - 12-B-30-60-00-00A-313A-A 18.09.2013 5 ALL
    INSPECTION/CHECK
    PROPELLER DE–ICE SYSTEM - 12-B-30-60-00-00A-903A-A 09.12.2010 8 ALL
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    TIMER - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION 12-B-30-60-01-00A-920A-A 09.04.2008 5 ALL
    BRUSH PACK AND MOV - 12-B-30-60-02-00A-920A-A 01.12.2009 6 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    INDICATING AND RECORDING 12-B-31-00-00-00A-040A-A 09.04.2008 2 ALL
    SYSTEMS - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    OVERHEAD CONTROL PANEL - 12-B-31-10-00-00A-040A-A 09.04.2008 7 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    OVERHEAD CONTROL PANEL - 12-B-31-10-00-00A-903A-A 12.11.2012 3 ALL
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    OVERHEAD CONTROL PANEL - 12-B-31-10-00-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 5 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    INDEPENDENT INSTRUMENTS - 12-B-31-20-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 1 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    CLOCKS - DESCRIPTION AND 12-B-31-20-10-00A-040A-A 11.11.2011 1 ALL
    OPERATION
    DIGITAL CLOCK DC20 - 12-B-31-20-12-00A-040A-A 09.04.2008 3 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    DIGITAL CLOCK M877 - 12-B-31-20-12-00A-040B-A 02.08.2012 4 DAVTRON
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    DIGITAL CLOCK DC20 - 12-B-31-20-12-00A-903A-A 09.04.2008 3 ALL
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    DIGITAL CLOCK M877 - 12-B-31-20-12-00A-903B-A 02.08.2012 3 DAVTRON
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST M877
    DIGITAL CLOCK DC20 - REMOVAL/ 12-B-31-20-12-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 4 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    DIGITAL CLOCK M877 - REMOVAL/ 12-B-31-20-12-00A-920B-A 12.11.2012 5 DAVTRON
    INSTALLATION M877
    TIME COUNTERS - DESCRIPTION 12-B-31-20-20-00A-040A-A 09.04.2008 1 ALL
    AND OPERATION
    FLIGHT TIME COUNTER - 12-B-31-20-21-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 4 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    FLIGHT TIME COUNTER - 12-B-31-20-21-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 5 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    RECORDERS – CVFDR - 12-B-31-30-01-00A-040A-A 18.01.2011 6 CVFDR
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 23


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    RECORDERS – CVFDR - STORAGE 12-B-31-30-01-00A-551A-A 16.10.2013 7 CVFDR
    READOUT (DOWNLOADING)
    RECORDERS – CVFDR - DATA 12-B-31-30-01-00A-552A-A 16.10.2013 10 CVFDR
    ERASING
    RECORDERS – CVFDR - 12-B-31-30-01-00A-903A-A C 12.05.2014 8 CVFDR
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    RECORDERS – CVFDR - REMOVAL/ 12-B-31-30-01-00A-920A-A 18.01.2011 5 CVFDR
    INSTALLATION
    RECORDERS – AREA 12-B-31-30-02-00A-920A-A 24.01.2011 6 CVFDR
    MICROPHONE - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    RECORDERS – TEST 12-B-31-30-05-00A-920A-A 18.05.2010 9 ALL
    INSTRUMENTATION UNIT –
    LUNCHBOX UNIT - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    RECORDERS – TEST 12-B-31-30-05-00A-920B-A 18.05.2010 7 ALL
    INSTRUMENTATION UNIT –
    DATATAP UNIT - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    CENTRAL COMPUTERS - 12-B-31-40-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 11 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    MODULAR AVIONICS UNIT - 12-B-31-41-00-00A-040A-A 23.09.2009 14 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    MODULAR AVIONICS UNIT - 12-B-31-41-00-00A-903A-A 15.04.2008 4 ALL
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    MODULAR AVIONICS UNIT - 12-B-31-41-00-00A-920A-A 09.04.2008 9 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    MODULAR AVIONICS UNIT – 12-B-31-41-01-00A-920A-A 10.03.2010 4 ALL
    SWING BOLTS - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    MODULAR AVIONICS UNIT 12-B-31-42-00-00A-920A-A 15.10.2010 7 ALL
    MODULES - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    MODULAR AVIONICS UNIT 12-B-31-43-00-00A-920A-A 09.04.2008 6 ALL
    COOLING FANS - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    CENTRAL WARNING SYSTEM - 12-B-31-50-00-00A-040A-A 10.01.2013 6 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    LIGHTED PUSHBUTTON FILAMENT 12-B-31-50-01-00A-920A-A 11.04.2008 4 ALL
    - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    AURAL WARNING SYSTEM - 12-B-31-51-00-00A-040A-A 25.08.2008 6 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    CREW ALERTING SYSTEM - 12-B-31-52-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 8 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    FLIGHT ALERTING SYSTEM - 12-B-31-53-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 3 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    VIDEO INTERFACE - DESCRIPTION 12-B-31-60-10-00A-040A-A 03.12.2010 4 VIDEO
    AND OPERATION INPUT
    VIDEO INTERFACE - REMOVAL/ 12-B-31-60-10-00A-920A-A 03.12.2010 4 VIDEO
    INSTALLATION INTERFACE

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 24


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    LANDING GEAR – HYDRAULIC - 12-B-32-00-00-00A-040A-A 31.01.2013 2 HYDRAULIC
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION LANDING
    GEAR
    LANDING GEAR – ELECTRO 12-B-32-00-00-00A-040B-A 14.10.2011 2 ELECTRO-
    MECHANICAL - DESCRIPTION AND MECHANICA
    OPERATION L LANDING
    GEAR
    LANDING GEAR – HYDRAULIC - 12-B-32-00-00-00A-901A-A C 13.02.2014 3 HYDRAULIC
    MAINTENANCE PRACTICES LANDING
    GEAR
    LANDING GEAR – ELECTRO 12-B-32-00-00-00A-901B-A C 13.02.2014 2 ELECTRO
    MECHANICAL - MAINTENANCE MECHANICA
    PRACTICES L LANDING
    GEAR
    MAIN LANDING GEAR AND DOORS 12-B-32-10-00-00A-040A-A 31.01.2013 5 HYDRAULIC
    – HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR - LANDING
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION GEAR
    MAIN LANDING GEAR AND DOORS 12-B-32-10-00-00A-040B-A 17.01.2012 6 ELECTRO-
    – ELECTRO MECHANICAL MECHANICA
    LANDING GEAR - DESCRIPTION L LANDING
    AND OPERATION GEAR
    MAIN LANDING GEAR HINGE PIN 12-B-32-10-00-00A-313A-A 31.01.2013 9 HYDRAULIC
    AND BUSHES – HYDRAULIC LANDING
    LANDING GEAR - INSPECTION/ GEAR
    CHECK
    MAIN LANDING GEAR HINGE PIN 12-B-32-10-00-00A-313B-A 09.10.2013 9 ELECTRO
    AND BUSHES – ELECTRO MECHANICA
    MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR - L LANDING
    INSPECTION/CHECK GEAR
    MAIN LANDING GEAR SHOCK 12-B-32-10-00-00A-902A-A 22.05.2013 9 ALL
    ABSORBER - SERVICING
    MAIN LANDING GEAR AND DOORS 12-B-32-10-00-00A-903A-A 31.01.2013 7 HYDRAULIC
    – HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR - LANDING
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST GEAR
    MAIN LANDING GEAR AND DOORS 12-B-32-10-00-00A-903B-A 02.03.2012 8 ELECTRO
    – ELECTRO MECHANICAL MECHANICA
    LANDING GEAR - ADJUSTMENT/ L LANDING
    TEST GEAR
    MAIN GEAR AND DOORS - REPAIR 12-B-32-10-00-00A-904B-A 05.11.2009 4 ALL
    TO REMOVE THE MLG BAY SEAL
    MAIN LANDING GEAR LEG – 12-B-32-10-01-00A-920A-A 31.01.2013 9 HYDRAULIC
    HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR - LANDING
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION GEAR
    MAIN LANDING GEAR LEG – 12-B-32-10-01-00A-920B-A C 07.05.2014 13 ELECTRO-
    ELECTRO MECHANICAL LANDING MECHANICA
    GEAR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION L LANDING
    GEAR
    MAIN LANDING GEAR DOOR – 12-B-32-10-02-00A-920A-A 22.01.2013 5 HYDRAULIC
    HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR - LANDING
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION GEAR

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 25


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    MAIN LANDING GEAR DOOR – 12-B-32-10-02-00A-920B-A 30.04.2012 5 ELECTRO
    ELECTRO MECHANICAL LANDING MECHANICA
    GEAR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION L LANDING
    GEAR
    SHOCK ABSORBER – HYDRAULIC 12-B-32-10-03-00A-920A-A 31.01.2013 5 HYDRAULIC
    LANDING GEAR - REMOVAL/ LANDING
    INSTALLATION GEAR
    SHOCK ABSORBER – ELECTRO 12-B-32-10-03-00A-920B-A 19.09.2011 5 ELECTRO
    MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR - MECHANICA
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION L LANDING
    GEAR
    MAIN GEAR AND DOORS – 12-B-32-10-05-00A-920A-A 22.06.2012 6 ELECTRO
    FOLDING STRUT - REMOVAL/ MECHANICA
    INSTALLATION L LANDING
    GEAR
    MAIN GEAR AND DOORS – SPRING 12-B-32-10-06-00A-313A-A 31.05.2012 3 ELECTRO
    STRUT - INSPECTION/CHECK MECHANICA
    L LANDING
    GEAR
    MAIN GEAR AND DOORS – SPRING 12-B-32-10-06-00A-920A-A 07.05.2012 7 ELECTRO
    STRUT - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION MECHANICA
    L LANDING
    GEAR
    MAIN GEAR AND DOORS – DRAG 12-B-32-10-07-00A-920A-A 14.10.2013 8 ELECTRO
    LINK - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION MECHANICA
    L LANDING
    GEAR
    NOSE LANDING GEAR AND DOORS 12-B-32-20-00-00A-040A-A 31.01.2013 5 HYDRAULIC
    – HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR - LANDING
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION GEAR
    NOSE LANDING GEAR AND DOORS 12-B-32-20-00-00A-040B-A 25.10.2011 5 ELECTRO
    – ELECTRO MECHANICAL MECHANICA
    LANDING GEAR - DESCRIPTION L LANDING
    AND OPERATION GEAR
    NLG AND DRAG LINK 12-B-32-20-00-00A-313A-A 01.12.2009 3 ALL
    ATTACHMENT BEARINGS -
    INSPECTION/CHECK
    NOSE LANDING GEAR SHOCK 12-B-32-20-00-00A-902A-A 15.03.2013 10 ALL
    ABSORBER - SERVICING
    NOSE LANDING GEAR AND DOORS 12-B-32-20-00-00A-903A-A 31.01.2013 14 HYDRAULIC
    – HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR - LANDING
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST GEAR
    NOSE LANDING GEAR AND DOORS 12-B-32-20-00-00A-903B-A 11.09.2013 17 ELECTRO
    – ELECTRO MECHANICAL MECHANICA
    LANDING GEAR - ADJUSTMENT/ L LANDING
    TEST GEAR
    NOSE LANDING GEAR LEG – 12-B-32-20-01-00A-920A-A 31.01.2013 9 HYDRAULIC
    HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR - LANDING
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION GEAR

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 26


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    NOSE LANDING GEAR LEG – 12-B-32-20-01-00A-920B-A 30.09.2013 9 ELECTRO-
    ELECTRO MECHANICAL LANDING MECHANICA
    GEAR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION L LANDING
    GEAR
    NOSE LANDING GEAR DOOR – 12-B-32-20-02-00A-920A-A 31.01.2013 5 HYDRAULIC
    HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR - LANDING
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION GEAR
    NOSE LANDING GEAR DOOR – 12-B-32-20-02-00A-920B-A 19.10.2011 5 ELECTRO
    ELECTRO MECHANICAL LANDING MECHANICA
    GEAR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION L LANDING
    GEAR
    SPRING STRUT – HYDRAULIC 12-B-32-20-03-00A-920A-A 31.01.2013 6 HYDRAULIC
    LANDING GEAR - REMOVAL/ LANDING
    INSTALLATION GEAR
    SPRING STRUT – ELECTRO 12-B-32-20-03-00A-920B-A 30.09.2013 6 ELECTRO
    MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR - MECHANICA
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION L LANDING
    GEAR
    TOWING INDICATOR - REMOVAL/ 12-B-32-20-04-00A-920A-A 09.04.2008 4 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    DRAG LINK ASSEMBLY – 12-B-32-20-05-00A-920A-A 31.01.2013 9 HYDRAULIC
    HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR - LANDING
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION GEAR
    DRAG LINK ASSEMBLY – ELECTRO 12-B-32-20-05-00A-920B-A 30.09.2013 9 ELECTRO
    MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR - MECHANICA
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION L LANDING
    GEAR
    DRAG LINK RIGHT PART - 12-B-32-20-06-00A-313A-A 10.10.2008 6 ALL
    INSPECTION/CHECK
    DRAG LINK RIGHT PART – 12-B-32-20-06-00A-920A-A 31.01.2013 8 HYDRAULIC
    HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR - LANDING
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION GEAR
    EXTENSION AND RETRACTION – 12-B-32-30-00-00A-040A-A 31.01.2013 5 HYDRAULIC
    HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR - LANDING
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION GEAR
    EXTENSION AND RETRACTION – 12-B-32-30-00-00A-040B-A 17.01.2012 5 ELECTRO
    ELECTRO MECHANICAL LANDING MECHANICA
    GEAR - DESCRIPTION AND L LANDING
    OPERATION GEAR
    EXTENSION AND RETRACTION – 12-B-32-30-00-00A-903A-A 31.01.2013 15 HYDRAULIC
    HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR - LANDING
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST GEAR
    EXTENSION AND RETRACTION – 12-B-32-30-00-00A-903B-A 14.06.2012 6 ELECTRO-
    ELECTRO MECHANICAL LANDING MECHANICA
    GEAR - ADJUSTMENT/TEST L LANDING
    GEAR
    MAIN LANDING GEAR ACTUATOR – 12-B-32-30-01-00A-361A-A 09.04.2008 2 ALL
    SPHERICAL BEARINGS -
    ALLOWABLE WEAR
    MAIN LANDING GEAR ACTUATOR – 12-B-32-30-01-00A-920A-A 31.01.2013 6 HYDRAULIC
    HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR - LANDING
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION GEAR

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 27


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    MAIN LANDING GEAR ACTUATOR – 12-B-32-30-01-00A-920B-A C 28.04.2014 12 ELECTRO-
    ELECTRO MECHANICAL LANDING MECHANICA
    GEAR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION L LANDING
    GEAR
    NOSE LANDING GEAR ACTUATOR 12-B-32-30-02-00A-361A-A 09.04.2008 2 ALL
    – SPHERICAL BEARINGS -
    ALLOWABLE WEAR
    NOSE LANDING GEAR ACTUATOR 12-B-32-30-02-00A-920A-A 31.01.2013 5 HYDRAULIC
    – HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR - LANDING
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION GEAR
    NOSE LANDING GEAR ACTUATOR 12-B-32-30-02-00A-920B-A C 28.04.2014 9 ELECTRO
    – ELECTRO MECHANICAL MECHANICA
    LANDING GEAR - REMOVAL/ L LANDING
    INSTALLATION GEAR
    SELECTOR VALVE – HYDRAULIC 12-B-32-30-03-00A-920A-A 31.01.2013 5 HYDRAULIC
    LANDING GEAR - REMOVAL/ LANDING
    INSTALLATION GEAR
    LANDING GEAR SELECTOR – 12-B-32-30-04-00A-920A-A 31.01.2013 5 HYDRAULIC
    HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR - LANDING
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION GEAR
    LANDING GEAR SELECTOR – 12-B-32-30-04-00A-920B-A 07.05.2012 5 ELECTRO
    ELECTRO MECHANICAL LANDING MECHANICA
    GEAR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION L LANDING
    GEAR
    LANDING GEAR SELECTOR 12-B-32-30-05-00A-920A-A 31.01.2013 5 HYDRAULIC
    SOLENOID – HYDRAULIC LANDING LANDING
    GEAR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION GEAR
    LANDING GEAR RELAY UNIT – 12-B-32-30-08-00A-903A-A 15.06.2012 2 ELECTRO
    ELECTRO MECHANICAL LANDING MECHANICA
    GEAR - ADJUSTMENT/TEST L LANDING
    GEAR
    LANDING GEAR RELAY UNIT – 12-B-32-30-08-00A-920A-A 27.02.2012 6 ELECTRO
    ELECTRO MECHANICAL LANDING MECHANICA
    GEAR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION L LANDING
    GEAR
    EMERGENCY GEAR EXTENSION 12-B-32-30-10-00A-040A-A 22.08.2013 3 ELECTRO
    SYSTEM – ELECTRO MECHANICAL MECHANICA
    LANDING GEAR - DESCRIPTION L LANDING
    AND OPERATION GEAR
    EMERGENCY GEAR EXTENSION 12-B-32-30-10-00A-313A-A 22.08.2013 5 ELECTRO
    SYSTEM – ELECTRO MECHANICAL MECHANICA
    LANDING GEAR - INSPECTION/ L LANDING
    CHECK GEAR
    EMERGENCY GEAR EXTENSION 12-B-32-30-10-00A-903A-A C 24.04.2014 13 ELECTRO
    SYSTEM – ELECTRO MECHANICAL MECHANICA
    LANDING GEAR - ADJUSTMENT/ L LANDING
    TEST GEAR
    EMERGENCY GEAR EXTENSION 12-B-32-30-10-01A-920A-A 03.10.2013 5 ELECTRO
    SYSTEM – ELECTRO MECHANICAL MECHANICA
    LANDING GEAR – HANDLE - L LANDING
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION GEAR

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 28


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    EMERGENCY GEAR EXTENSION 12-B-32-30-10-02A-920A-A 03.10.2013 9 ELECTRO
    SYSTEM – ELECTRO MECHANICAL MECHANICA
    LANDING GEAR – NLG CABLE - L LANDING
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION GEAR
    EMERGENCY GEAR EXTENSION 12-B-32-30-10-03A-920A-A 08.10.2013 9 ELECTRO
    SYSTEM – ELECTRO MECHANICAL MECHANICA
    LANDING GEAR – INTERMEDIATE L LANDING
    CABLE - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION GEAR
    EMERGENCY GEAR EXTENSION 12-B-32-30-10-04A-920A-A C 07.04.2014 8 ELECTRO
    SYSTEM – ELECTRO MECHANICAL MECHANICA
    LANDING GEAR – MLG CABLE - L LANDING
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION GEAR
    WHEELS AND BRAKES - 12-B-32-40-00-00A-040A-A 16.03.2010 5 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    WHEELS AND BRAKES - 12-B-32-40-00-00A-902A-A 15.03.2013 6 ALL
    SERVICING
    MAIN WHEEL - REMOVAL/ 12-B-32-40-01-00A-920A-A 15.03.2013 7 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    NOSE WHEEL - REMOVAL/ 12-B-32-40-02-00A-920A-A 12.11.2013 9 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    BRAKE ASSEMBLY (MSN 1001 – 12-B-32-40-03-00A-920A-A 15.03.2010 6 MSN 545,
    1230) - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION 1001-1230
    BRAKE ASSEMBLY (MSN 1231 – 12-B-32-40-03-00A-920B-A 15.03.2013 6 MSN
    9999) - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION 1231-9999
    MASTER CYLINDER - REMOVAL/ 12-B-32-40-04-00A-920A-A 01.12.2009 5 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    PARK BRAKE VALVE - REMOVAL/ 12-B-32-40-05-00A-920A-A 12.11.2013 6 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    BRAKE SWIVEL ASSEMBLY (PRE 12-B-32-40-06-00A-904A-A 01.12.2009 5 PRE SB
    SB 32–022) - REPAIR 32-022
    BRAKE SWIVEL ASSEMBLY (PRE 12-B-32-40-06-00A-920A-A 30.10.2008 4 PRE SB
    SB 32–022) - REMOVAL/ 32-022
    INSTALLATION
    NOSE WHEEL STEERING - 12-B-32-50-00-00A-040A-A 20.11.2007 3 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    NOSE WHEEL STEERING - 12-B-32-50-00-00A-310A-A 04.10.2010 4 ALL
    EXAMINE
    NOSE WHEEL STEERING - 12-B-32-50-00-00A-903A-A 15.03.2013 3 ALL
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    SHIMMY DAMPER - REMOVAL/ 12-B-32-50-01-00A-920A-A 15.03.2013 5 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    SPRING STRUT - CLEAN 12-B-32-50-02-00A-250A-A 16.03.2011 6 ALL
    SPRING STRUT - REMOVAL/ 12-B-32-50-02-00A-920A-A 15.03.2013 5 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    TORQUE TUBE - REMOVAL/ 12-B-32-50-03-00A-920A-A 15.03.2013 6 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    POSITION AND WARNING – 12-B-32-60-00-00A-040A-A 31.01.2013 8 HYDRAULIC
    HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR - LANDING
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION GEAR

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 29


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    POSITION AND WARNING – 12-B-32-60-00-00A-040B-A 20.10.2011 8 ELECTRO
    ELECTRO MECHANICAL LANDING MECHANICA
    GEAR - DESCRIPTION AND L LANDING
    OPERATION GEAR
    POSITION AND WARNING – 12-B-32-60-00-00A-903B-A 30.09.2013 9 ELECTRO
    ELECTRO MECHANICAL LANDING MECHANICA
    GEAR - ADJUSTMENT/TEST L LANDING
    GEAR
    POSITION AND WARNING – MLG 12-B-32-60-01-00A-920B-A 01.10.2013 8 ELECTRO
    MICROSWITCH - REMOVAL/ MECHANICA
    INSTALLATION L LANDING
    GEAR
    WEIGHT ON WHEELS SWITCH - 12-B-32-60-12-00A-920A-A N 16.05.2014 5 HYDRAULIC
    HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR - LANDING
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION GEAR
    LIGHTS - DESCRIPTION AND 12-B-33-00-00-00A-040A-A 09.04.2008 2 ALL
    OPERATION
    INTERIOR LIGHTS - ADJUSTMENT/ 12-B-33-00-00-00A-903A-A C 07.04.2014 9 ALL
    TEST
    FLIGHT COMPARTMENT LIGHTS - 12-B-33-10-00-00A-040A-A C 01.05.2014 10 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    REAR CENTER CONSOLE PANEL 12-B-33-10-02-00A-920A-A 11.11.2009 5 MSN
    (PRE SB 46–003 AND MSN 1001 – 1001-1175
    1175) - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    REAR CENTER CONSOLE PANEL 12-B-33-10-02-00A-920B-A 17.11.2009 5 MSN
    (POST SB 46–003 AND MSN 1176 – 1176-9999
    9999) - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    COCKPIT LIGHT DIM UNIT - 12-B-33-10-04-00A-920A-A C 18.03.2014 5 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    DOME LIGHT SWITCH - REMOVAL/ 12-B-33-10-05-00A-920A-A 09.04.2008 5 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    PASSENGER COMPARTMENT 12-B-33-20-00-00A-040A-A C 07.04.2014 4 ALL
    LIGHTS - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    PASSENGER COMPARTMENT LED 12-B-33-20-06-00A-920A-A 01.12.2009 4 ALL
    FLOOD LIGHTS - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    PASSENGER COMPARTMENT LED 12-B-33-20-07-00A-920A-A 01.12.2009 5 ALL
    READING LIGHTS - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    CARGO AND SERVICE 12-B-33-30-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 3 ALL
    COMPARTMENT LIGHTS -
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    EXTERNAL LIGHTS - DESCRIPTION 12-B-33-40-00-00A-040A-A 14.10.2013 5 ALL
    AND OPERATION
    EXTERNAL LIGHTS - ADJUSTMENT/ 12-B-33-40-00-00A-903A-A 12.11.2013 12 ALL
    TEST
    WING INSPECTION LIGHT - 12-B-33-40-12-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 3 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    WING INSPECTION LIGHT - 12-B-33-40-12-00A-920A-A 01.12.2009 5 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 30


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    LANDING LIGHTS – HYDRAULIC 12-B-33-41-00-00A-040A-A C 14.05.2014 3 HYDRAULIC
    LANDING GEAR - DESCRIPTION LANDING
    AND OPERATION GEAR
    LED LANDING LIGHTS – ELECTRO 12-B-33-41-00-00A-040B-A C 16.05.2014 3 ELECTRO
    MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR - MECHANICA
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION L LANDING
    GEAR / LED
    LIGHTS
    LANDING LIGHT FILAMENT - 12-B-33-41-01-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 4 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    LED LANDING LIGHT - REMOVAL/ 12-B-33-41-01-00A-920B-A N 05.05.2014 4 LED
    INSTALLATION LANDING
    LIGHT
    TAXI LIGHT - DESCRIPTION AND 12-B-33-42-00-00A-040A-A C 15.05.2014 3 ALL
    OPERATION
    LED TAXI LIGHT - DESCRIPTION 12-B-33-42-00-00A-040B-A C 15.05.2014 3 1451-9999
    AND OPERATION
    TAXI LIGHT FILAMENT - REMOVAL/ 12-B-33-42-01-00A-920A-A 09.04.2008 4 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    LED TAXI LIGHT - REMOVAL 12-B-33-42-01-00A-920B-A N 05.05.2014 4 LED TAXI
    INSTALLATION LIGHT
    NAVIGATION AND STROBE LIGHTS 12-B-33-43-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 4 ALL
    - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    COMBINED LED ANTI COLLISION/ 12-B-33-43-00-00A-040B-A 30.10.2013 2 All
    POSITION LIGHTS - DESCRIPTION
    AND OPERATION
    NAVIGATION LIGHTS - REMOVAL/ 12-B-33-43-01-00A-920A-A 09.04.2008 6 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    COMBINED LED NAVIGATION/ANTI 12-B-33-43-01-00A-920B-A 27.10.2013 5 COMBINED
    COLLISION/POSITION LIGHTS - LED
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION NAVIGATION
    /ANTI
    COLLISION/
    POSITION
    LIGHTS
    STROBE LIGHTS - REMOVAL/ 12-B-33-43-02-00A-920A-A 09.04.2008 4 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    STROBE–LIGHT POWER SUPPLY - 12-B-33-43-03-00A-920A-A 09.04.2008 5 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    LED ANTI COLLISION LIGHT 12-B-33-43-03-00A-920B-A 27.10.2013 5 COMBINED
    POWER SUPPLY - REMOVAL/ LED
    INSTALLATION NAVIGATION
    /ANTI
    COLLISION/
    POSITION
    LIGHTS
    RECOGNITION LIGHTS - 12-B-33-44-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 4 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    PULSE RECOGNITION LIGHTS - 12-B-33-44-00-00A-040B-A 15.03.2008 3 PULSE
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION RECOGNITIO
    N LIGHTS

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 31


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    LED PULSE RECOGNITION LIGHTS 12-B-33-44-00-00A-040C-A 08.11.2013 3 LED PULSE
    - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION RECOGNITIO
    N LIGHTS
    RECOGNITION LIGHTS - 12-B-33-44-00-00A-903A-A 15.03.2008 6 ALL
    ADJUSTMENT
    PULSE RECOGNITION LIGHTS - 12-B-33-44-00-00A-903B-A 06.07.2011 6 PULSE
    ADJUSTMENT RECOGNITIO
    N LIGHTS
    LED PULSE RECOGNITION LIGHTS 12-B-33-44-00-00A-903C-A 27.10.2013 6 All
    - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    RECOGNITION LIGHTS - REMOVAL/ 12-B-33-44-00-00A-920A-A 28.03.2011 10 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    PULSE RECOGNITION LIGHTS - 12-B-33-44-00-00A-920B-A 06.07.2011 6 PULSE
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION RECOGNITIO
    N LIGHTS
    LED PULSE RECOGNITION LIGHTS 12-B-33-44-00-00A-920C-A 27.10.2013 5 LED
    - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION RECOGNITIO
    N LIGHTS
    LOGO LIGHTS - DESCRIPTION AND 12-B-33-45-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 3 LOGO
    OPERATION LIGHTS
    LOGO LIGHTS - ADJUSTMENT/ 12-B-33-45-00-00A-903A-A 09.04.2008 5 LOGO
    TEST LIGHTS
    LOGO LIGHT FILAMENT - 12-B-33-45-01-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 5 LOGO
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION LIGHTS
    RED FLASHING BEACONS - 12-B-33-46-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 3 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    RED LED FLASHING BEACONS - 12-B-33-46-00-00A-040B-A 12.11.2013 3 RED LED
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION FLASHING
    BEACONS
    RED FLASHING BEACONS - 12-B-33-46-00-00A-920A-A 09.04.2008 7 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    LED RED FLASHING BEACONS - 12-B-33-46-00-00A-920B-A 08.10.2013 6 All
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    NAVIGATION - DESCRIPTION AND 12-B-34-00-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 2 ALL
    OPERATION
    FLIGHT ENVIRONMENT DATA - 12-B-34-10-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 2 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    PITOT STATIC SYSTEM - 12-B-34-11-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 4 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    PITOT STATIC SYSTEM - 12-B-34-11-00-00A-901A-A 15.03.2008 5 ALL
    MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    PITOT STATIC SYSTEM - 12-B-34-11-00-00A-903A-A 15.03.2008 4 ALL
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    PITOT HEAD - REMOVAL/ 12-B-34-11-11-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 4 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    STATIC PORT (RVSM) - 12-B-34-11-12-00A-313A-A 20.04.2009 5 REDUCED
    INSPECTION/CHECK VERTICAL
    SEPARATIO
    N MINIMA
    (RVSM)
    STATIC PORT - REMOVAL/ 12-B-34-11-12-00A-920A-A 20.04.2009 5 ALL
    INSTALLATION

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 32


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE - 12-B-34-12-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 3 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE 12-B-34-12-00-00A-903A-A 15.03.2008 4 ALL
    SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    ALTITUDE AND VERTICAL SPEED 12-B-34-14-00-00A-903A-A 05.05.2009 3 ALL
    INDICATION - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    ALTITUDE AND VERTICAL SPEED 12-B-34-14-00-00A-903B-A 05.05.2009 4 REDUCED
    INDICATION (RVSM) - VERTICAL
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST SEPARATIO
    N MINIMA
    (RVSM)
    ANGLE OF ATTACK - DESCRIPTION 12-B-34-15-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 2 ALL
    AND OPERATION
    AIRSPEED INDICATION - 12-B-34-16-00-00A-903A-A 15.12.2008 4 ALL
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    ATTITUDE AND DIRECTION - 12-B-34-20-00-00A-040A-A 09.04.2008 2 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    ATTITUDE AND DIRECTION - 12-B-34-20-00-00A-903A-A C 05.05.2014 32 ALL
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    STANDBY MAGNETIC COMPASS - 12-B-34-21-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 3 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    STANDBY MAGNETIC COMPASS - 12-B-34-21-00-00A-920A-A 26.01.2011 6 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    AIR DATA, ATTITUDE AND 12-B-34-25-00-00A-040A-A 04.09.2009 5 ALL
    HEADING REFERENCE SYSTEM
    KSG 7200 - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    AIR DATA, ATTITUDE AND 12-B-34-25-00-00A-903A-A 07.11.2013 10 ALL
    HEADING REFERENCE SYSTEM
    KSG 7200 - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    AIR DATA, ATTITUDE AND 12-B-34-25-01-00A-920A-A 17.03.2011 5 ALL
    HEADING REFERENCE UNIT -
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    MAGNETOMETER (MSN 1001, 1002) 12-B-34-25-02-00A-920A-A 16.04.2010 5 ALL
    - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    MAGNETOMETER (MSN 1003 – 12-B-34-25-02-00A-920B-A 16.04.2010 5 ALL
    9999) - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    ADAHRS CONFIGURATION 12-B-34-25-03-00A-920A-A 16.03.2010 4 ALL
    MODULE - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    ADAHRS – HEADING/TRACK 12-B-34-25-04-00A-040A-A 24.09.2009 3 HEADING/
    OVERRIDE SWITCH - TRACK
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OVERRIDE
    SWITCH
    ADAHRS – HEADING/TRACK 12-B-34-25-04-00A-903A-A 08.10.2009 2 HEADING/
    OVERRIDE SWITCH - TRACK
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST OVERRIDE
    SWITCH
    ADAHRS – HEADING/TRACK 12-B-34-25-04-00A-920A-A 23.09.2009 5 HEADING/
    OVERRIDE SWITCH - REMOVAL/ TRACK
    INSTALLATION OVERRIDE
    SWITCH

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 33


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    ELECTRONIC STANDBY 12-B-34-26-40-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 6 ALL
    INSTRUMENT SYSTEM -
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    ELECTRONIC STANDBY 12-B-34-26-40-00A-040B-A 08.04.2010 12 L3 ESIS
    INSTRUMENT SYSTEM (MSN 1271 SYSTEM
    – 9999) - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    ELECTRONIC STANDBY 12-B-34-26-40-00A-901A-A 22.08.2008 3 ALL
    INSTRUMENT SYSTEM -
    MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    ELECTRONIC STANDBY 12-B-34-26-40-00A-901B-A 31.03.2010 3 L3 ESIS
    INSTRUMENT SYSTEM (MSN 1271 SYSTEM
    – 9999) - MAINTENANCE
    PRACTICES
    ELECTRONIC STANDBY 12-B-34-26-40-00A-903A-A 09.04.2008 2 ALL
    INSTRUMENT SYSTEM -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    ELECTRONIC STANDBY 12-B-34-26-40-00A-903B-A 20.11.2012 30 MSN
    INSTRUMENT SYSTEM (MSN 1271 1271-9999
    – 9999) - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    ELECTRONIC STANDBY 12-B-34-26-40-00A-920A-A 09.04.2008 4 ALL
    INSTRUMENT - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    ELECTRONIC STANDBY 12-B-34-26-40-00A-920B-A 20.11.2012 5 MSN
    INSTRUMENT (MSN 1271 – 9999) - 1271-9999
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    ELECTRONIC STANDBY 12-B-34-26-45-00A-920B-A 20.11.2012 5 MSN
    INSTRUMENT SYSTEM (MSN 1271 1271-9999
    – 9999) – MAGNETOMETER -
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    LANDING AND TAXI AIDS - 12-B-34-30-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 1 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    MARKER SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION 12-B-34-32-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 3 ALL
    AND OPERATION
    MARKER SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/ 12-B-34-32-00-00A-903A-A 09.04.2008 4 ALL
    TEST
    MARKER ANTENNA - REMOVAL/ 12-B-34-32-01-00A-920A-A 09.04.2008 5 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    INDEPENDENT POSITION 12-B-34-40-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 2 ALL
    DETERMINING - DESCRIPTION
    AND OPERATION
    WEATHER RADAR - DESCRIPTION 12-B-34-41-00-00A-040A-A 01.07.2008 6 ALL
    AND OPERATION
    WEATHER RADAR - ADJUSTMENT/ 12-B-34-41-00-00A-903A-A 04.12.2012 4 ALL
    TEST
    WEATHER RADAR TRANSCEIVER - 12-B-34-41-02-00A-920A-A 18.03.2009 7 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    WEATHER RADAR – 12-B-34-41-04-00A-903A-A 31.10.2013 4 WEATHER
    CONFIGURATION MODULE - RADAR
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 34


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    WEATHER RADAR – 12-B-34-41-04-00A-920A-A 11.12.2012 4 WEATHER
    CONFIGURATION MODULE - RADAR
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    XM SATELLITE WEATHER SYSTEM 12-B-34-41-10-00A-040A-A 10.10.2008 5 XM
    - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION SATELLITE
    WEATHER
    SYSTEM
    XM SATELLITE WEATHER SYSTEM 12-B-34-41-10-00A-903A-A 01.12.2008 2 XM
    - ADJUSTMENT/TEST SATELLITE
    WEATHER
    SYSTEM
    XM SATELLITE WEATHER 12-B-34-41-11-00A-920A-A 06.10.2008 5 XM
    PROCESSOR - REMOVAL/ SATELLITE
    INSTALLATION WEATHER
    SYSTEM
    XM SATELLITE WEATHER 12-B-34-41-12-00A-920A-A 01.12.2009 5 XM
    ANTENNA - REMOVAL/ SATELLITE
    INSTALLATION WEATHER
    SYSTEM
    STORMSCOPE SYSTEM - 12-B-34-41-30-00A-040A-A 09.04.2008 4 WX 500
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION STORMSCO
    PE
    STORMSCOPE SYSTEM - 12-B-34-41-30-00A-903A-A 12.12.2008 3 WX500
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST STORMSCO
    PE
    STORMSCOPE PROCESSOR - 12-B-34-41-31-00A-920A-A 09.04.2008 4 WX500
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION STORMSCO
    PE
    STORMSCOPE ANTENNA - 12-B-34-41-32-00A-920A-A 09.04.2008 5 WX500
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION STORMSCO
    PE
    RADAR ALTIMETER SYSTEM - 12-B-34-42-00-00A-040A-A 25.08.2008 4 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    RADAR ALTIMETER SYSTEM - 12-B-34-42-00-00A-903A-A C 03.04.2014 6 ALL
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    RADAR ALTIMETER TRANSCEIVER 12-B-34-42-01-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 5 ALL
    - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    RADAR ALTIMETER ANTENNAS - 12-B-34-42-02-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 5 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    TRAFFIC ALERT AND COLLISION 12-B-34-44-00-00A-040A-A 09.04.2008 8 TCAS
    AVOIDANCE SYSTEM -
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    TRAFFIC ALERT AND COLLISION 12-B-34-44-00-00A-903A-A 12.10.2010 5 TCAS
    AVOIDANCE SYSTEM -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    TCAS PROCESSOR - REMOVAL/ 12-B-34-44-01-00A-920A-A 09.04.2008 5 TCAS
    INSTALLATION
    TAS/TCAS – UPPER ANTENNA - 12-B-34-44-02-00A-920A-A 01.06.2011 5 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    TAS/TCAS – LOWER ANTENNA - 12-B-34-44-03-00A-920A-A 01.06.2011 5 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 35


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    ENHANCED GROUND PROXIMITY 12-B-34-45-00-00A-040A-A 08.01.2013 12 EGPWS
    WARNING SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION
    AND OPERATION
    ENHANCED GROUND PROXIMITY 12-B-34-45-00-00A-903A-A 08.01.2013 6 EGPWS
    WARNING SYSTEM -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    EGPWS COMPUTER - REMOVAL/ 12-B-34-45-01-00A-920A-A 09.04.2008 5 EGPWS
    INSTALLATION
    MULTI HAZARD AWARENESS 12-B-34-45-10-00A-040A-A 18.11.2008 17 MULTI
    SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND HAZARD
    OPERATION AWARENES
    S SYSTEM
    MULTI HAZARD AWARENESS 12-B-34-45-10-00A-903A-A 08.10.2010 8 MULTI
    SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST HAZARD
    AWARENES
    S SYSTEM
    MULTI HAZARD AWARENESS 12-B-34-45-10-01A-920A-A 23.09.2008 5 MULTI
    SYSTEM COMPUTER - REMOVAL/ HAZARD
    INSTALLATION AWARENES
    S SYSTEM
    MULTI HAZARD AWARENESS 12-B-34-45-10-02A-920A-A 07.11.2008 4 MULTI
    SYSTEM CONFIGURATION HAZARD
    MODULE - REMOVAL/ AWARENES
    INSTALLATION S SYSTEM
    DEPENDENT POSITION 12-B-34-50-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 2 ALL
    DETERMINING - DESCRIPTION
    AND OPERATION
    VHF NAVIGATION SYSTEM - 12-B-34-51-00-00A-040A-A 09.04.2008 6 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    VHF NAVIGATION SYSTEM - 12-B-34-51-00-00A-903A-A 12.08.2008 6 ALL
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    VHF NAVIGATION ANTENNAS 1 12-B-34-51-03-00A-920A-A 09.04.2008 5 ALL
    AND 2 - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    DME SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND 12-B-34-52-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 5 KN63 DME
    OPERATION
    DME SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST 12-B-34-52-00-00A-903A-A 09.04.2008 3 KN63 DME
    DME TRANSCEIVER - REMOVAL/ 12-B-34-52-01-00A-920A-A C 01.05.2014 5 KN63 DME
    INSTALLATION
    DME ANTENNA - REMOVAL/ 12-B-34-52-02-00A-920A-A 25.09.2009 5 KN63 DME
    INSTALLATION
    ADF SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND 12-B-34-53-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 3 ALL
    OPERATION
    ADF SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST 12-B-34-53-00-00A-903A-A 12.08.2008 2 ALL
    ADF ANTENNA - REMOVAL/ 12-B-34-53-02-00A-920A-A 09.04.2008 5 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    DUAL DIVERSITY ATC 12-B-34-54-00-00A-040A-A 31.10.2013 14 DUAL
    TRANSPONDER SYSTEM WITHOUT DIVERSITY
    ADS–B OUT - DESCRIPTION AND ATC
    OPERATION TRANSPOND
    ER SYSTEM
    WITHOUT
    ADS-B OUT

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 36


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    DUAL NON–DIVERSITY ATC 12-B-34-54-00-00A-040B-A 31.10.2013 14 DUAL NON
    TRANSPONDER SYSTEM WITHOUT DIVERSITY
    ADS–B OUT - DESCRIPTION AND ATC
    OPERATION TRANSPOND
    ER SYSTEM
    WITHOUT
    ADS-B OUT
    DUAL DIVERSITY ATC 12-B-34-54-00-00A-040C-A 12.11.2013 16 DUAL
    TRANSPONDER SYSTEM WITH DIVERSITY
    ADS–B OUT - DESCRIPTION AND ATC
    OPERATION TRANSPOND
    ER SYSTEM
    WITH ADS-B
    OUT
    DUAL NON DIVERSITY ATC 12-B-34-54-00-00A-040D-A 12.11.2013 14 DUAL NON
    TRANSPONDER SYSTEM WITH DIVERSITY
    ADS–B OUT - DESCRIPTION AND ATC
    OPERATION TRANSPOND
    ER SYSTEM
    WITH ADS-B
    OUT
    DUAL DIVERSITY ATC 12-B-34-54-00-00A-903A-A 14.11.2013 13 DUAL
    TRANSPONDER SYSTEM - DIVERSITY
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST ATC
    TRANSPOND
    ERS
    DUAL NON–DIVERSITY ATC 12-B-34-54-00-00A-903B-A 14.11.2013 11 DUAL NON-
    TRANSPONDER SYSTEM - DIVERSITY
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST ATC
    TRANSPOND
    ERS
    ATC TRANSPONDER - REMOVAL/ 12-B-34-54-01-00A-920A-A 09.04.2008 4 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    ATC 1 (BOTTOM) ANTENNA - 12-B-34-54-02-00A-920A-A 25.09.2009 5 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    ATC DIVERSITY (TOP) ANTENNA - 12-B-34-54-03-00A-920A-A 25.09.2009 5 DIVERSITY
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ATC
    SYSTEM
    ATC 2 SECOND (BOTTOM) 12-B-34-54-04-00A-920A-A 25.09.2009 5 DUAL ATC
    ANTENNA - REMOVAL/ TRANSPOND
    INSTALLATION ER SYSTEM
    SINGLE DIVERSITY AIR TRAFFIC 12-B-34-54-10-00A-040A-A 31.10.2013 13 SINGLE
    CONTROL TRANSPONDER DIVERSITY
    SYSTEM WITHOUT ADS–B OUT - ATC
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION TRANSPOND
    ER WITHOUT
    ADS-B OUT

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 37


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    SINGLE NON–DIVERSITY AIR 12-B-34-54-10-00A-040B-A 31.10.2013 13 SINGLE
    TRAFFIC CONTROL NON-
    TRANSPONDER SYSTEM WITHOUT DIVERSITY
    ADS–B OUT - DESCRIPTION AND ATC
    OPERATION TRANSPOND
    ER WITHOUT
    ADS-B OUT
    SINGLE DIVERSITY ATC 12-B-34-54-10-00A-040C-A 12.11.2013 14 SINGLE
    TRANSPONDER SYSTEM WITH DIVERSITY
    ADS–B OUT - DESCRIPTION AND ATC
    OPERATION TRANSPOND
    ER WITH
    ADS-B OUT
    SINGLE NON–DIVERSITY ATC 12-B-34-54-10-00A-040D-A 12.11.2013 14 SINGLE
    TRANSPONDER SYSTEM WITH NON-
    ADS–B OUT - DESCRIPTION AND DIVERSITY
    OPERATION ATC
    TRANSPOND
    ER SYSTEM
    WITH ADS-B
    OUT
    SINGLE DIVERSITY AIR TRAFFIC 12-B-34-54-10-00A-903A-A 14.11.2013 11 SINGLE
    CONTROL TRANSPONDER DIVERSITY
    SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST ATC
    TRANSPOND
    ER
    SINGLE NON–DIVERSITY AIR 12-B-34-54-10-00A-903B-A 14.11.2013 10 SINGLE
    TRAFFIC CONTROL NON-
    TRANSPONDER SYSTEM - DIVERSITY
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST ATC
    TRANSPOND
    ER
    GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM - 12-B-34-57-00-00A-040A-A 27.08.2008 4 KGS 200
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION GPS
    GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM - 12-B-34-57-00-00A-903A-A 07.11.2013 3 ALL
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    GLOBAL NAVIGATION SYSTEM 12-B-34-57-01-00A-920A-A 21.06.2010 5 ALL
    SENSOR UNIT - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    WAAS CAPABLE GPS RECEIVER - 12-B-34-57-01-00A-920B-A 07.10.2009 5 WAAS GPS
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION RECEIVER
    (CMC)
    GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM 2 12-B-34-57-01-00A-920C-A 11.11.2009 5 OPTIONAL
    RECEIVER (POST SB 34–020) - SECOND
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION GPS
    GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM 12-B-34-57-02-00A-920A-A C 05.05.2014 5 ALL
    ANTENNA - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    OXYGEN SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION 12-B-35-00-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 1 ALL
    AND OPERATION
    OXYGEN SYSTEM - MAINTENANCE 12-B-35-00-00-00A-901A-A 22.11.2012 4 ALL
    PRACTICES

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 38


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    OXYGEN SYSTEM - SERVICING 12-B-35-00-00-00A-902A-A 15.03.2008 3 ALL
    OXYGEN SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/ 12-B-35-00-00-00A-903A-A 22.11.2012 7 ALL
    TEST
    CREW OXYGEN SYSTEM - 12-B-35-10-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 6 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    STANDARD OXYGEN CYLINDER - 12-B-35-10-01-00A-920A-A 01.12.2009 5 STANDARD
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION OXYGEN
    CYLINDER
    LARGE CAPACITY OXYGEN 12-B-35-10-01-00A-920B-A 15.03.2008 5 LARGE
    CYLINDER - REMOVAL/ OXYGEN
    INSTALLATION CYLINDER
    CREW OXYGEN CONNECTORS - 12-B-35-10-02-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 5 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    PASSENGER OXYGEN SYSTEM - 12-B-35-20-00-00A-040A-A 12.01.2010 3 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    PASSENGER OXYGEN MASKS - 12-B-35-20-00-00A-313A-A 07.10.2009 3 ALL
    INSPECTION/CHECK
    PASSENGER OXYGEN 12-B-35-20-01-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 5 ALL
    CONNECTORS - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    PASSENGER OXYGEN MASKS 12-B-35-20-03-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 4 EXECUTIVE
    (EXECUTIVE INTERIOR) - INTERIOR
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    THREE POSITION CONTROL 12-B-35-20-04-00A-920A-A 05.10.2009 7 ALL
    VALVE - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    PASSENGER OXYGEN SYSTEM – 12-B-35-20-06-00A-920A-A 21.11.2012 6 LARGE
    SHUT–OFF VALVE - REMOVAL/ CAPACITY
    INSTALLATION OXYGEN
    SYSTEM
    CENTRAL MAINTENANCE SYSTEM 12-B-45-00-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 3 ALL
    - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    CENTRAL MAINTENANCE SYSTEM 12-B-45-45-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 1 ALL
    INTERFACE – REMOTE TERMINAL -
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    CENTRAL MAINTENANCE SYSTEM 12-B-45-45-00-00A-330A-A C 16.05.2014 12 ALL
    INTERFACE - PREPARE TEST
    EQUIPMENT
    CENTRAL MAINTENANCE SYSTEM 12-B-45-45-00-00A-331A-A C 10.05.2014 11 ALL
    INTERFACE - CONNECT THE
    COMPUTER
    CENTRAL MAINTENANCE SYSTEM 12-B-45-45-00-00A-550A-A C 19.05.2014 8 ALL
    INTERFACE - LOAD SOFTWARE
    CENTRAL MAINTENANCE SYSTEM 12-B-45-45-00-00A-551A-A 15.10.2013 3 ALL
    INTERFACE - FAULT MONITORING
    STORAGE READOUT (DOWNLOAD
    DATA)
    CENTRAL MAINTENANCE SYSTEM 12-B-45-45-00-00A-552A-A 24.01.2011 2 ALL
    INTERFACE - ERASE DATA
    CENTRAL MAINTENANCE SYSTEM 12-B-45-45-00-00A-553A-A 05.11.2013 5 ALL
    INTERFACE - CHANGE THE
    SETTINGS FILE

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 39


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    SYSTEMS INTEGRATION AND 12-B-46-00-00-00A-040A-A 02.03.2010 3 ALL
    DISPLAY - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    WIRELESS DATA LOADING DEVICE 12-B-46-20-12-00A-903A-A 04.11.2013 3 ALL
    - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    WIRELESS DATA LOADING DEVICE 12-B-46-20-12-00A-920A-A 23.10.2013 5 POST SB
    - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION 46-004 OR
    CONNECTED
    FLIGHT
    DECK
    OPTION
    DISPLAY AND CONTROL - 12-B-46-30-00-00A-040A-A 02.03.2010 4 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    DISPLAY AND CONTROL - 12-B-46-30-00-00A-901A-A 30.11.2012 3 ALL
    MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    DISPLAY AND CONTROL - 12-B-46-30-00-00A-903A-A 13.05.2009 5 ALL
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY - 12-B-46-30-01-00A-040A-A 30.11.2011 14 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY - 12-B-46-30-01-00A-920A-A 09.04.2008 4 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY 12-B-46-30-02-00A-040A-A 09.04.2008 4 ALL
    CONTROLLER - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY 12-B-46-30-02-00A-903A-A 26.11.2009 3 ALL
    CONTROLLER - ADJUSTMENT/
    TEST
    PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY 12-B-46-30-02-00A-920A-A 09.04.2008 4 ALL
    CONTROLLER - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY - 12-B-46-30-03-00A-040A-A 17.10.2008 5 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY - 12-B-46-30-03-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 4 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    MULTI FUNCTION CONTROLLER - 12-B-46-30-04-00A-040A-A 26.08.2008 5 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    MULTI FUNCTION CONTROLLER - 12-B-46-30-04-00A-550A-A 19.05.2009 5 POST SB
    LOAD DATA 45-001 AND
    46-001
    MULTI FUNCTION CONTROLLER - 12-B-46-30-04-00A-551A-A 15.10.2013 5 POST SB
    FAULT MONITORING STORAGE 45-001 AND
    READOUT (DOWNLOAD DATA) 46-001
    MULTI FUNCTION CONTROLLER - 12-B-46-30-04-00A-903A-A 16.01.2009 2 ALL
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    MULTI FUNCTION CONTROLLER - 12-B-46-30-04-00A-920A-A 16.01.2009 4 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    REVERSION CONTROL PANEL (4 12-B-46-30-05-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 4 FOUR
    SWITCH) - DESCRIPTION AND SWITCH
    OPERATION REVERSION
    PANEL
    REVERSION CONTROL PANEL (4 12-B-46-30-05-00A-903A-A 15.03.2008 3 ALL
    SWITCH) - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 40


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    REVERSION CONTROL PANEL (4 12-B-46-30-05-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 5 4 SWITCH
    SWITCH) - REMOVAL/ REVERSION
    INSTALLATION CONTROLLE
    R
    REVERSION CONTROL PANEL (3 12-B-46-30-06-00A-040A-A 23.06.2008 4 THREE
    SWITCH) - DESCRIPTION AND SWITCH
    OPERATION REVERSION
    CONTROL
    PANEL
    REVERSION CONTROL PANEL (3 12-B-46-30-06-00A-903A-A 05.08.2008 3 3 SWITCH
    SWITCH) - ADJUSTMENT/TEST REVERSION
    CONTROL
    PANEL
    REVERSION CONTROL PANEL (3 12-B-46-30-06-00A-920A-A 23.07.2008 4 3 SWITCH
    SWITCH) - REMOVAL/ REVERSION
    INSTALLATION CONTROL
    PANEL
    CURSOR CONTROL DEVICE - 12-B-46-30-07-00A-040A-A 16.08.2010 3 CURSOR
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION CONTROL
    DEVICE
    CURSOR CONTROL DEVICE - 12-B-46-30-07-00A-903A-A 22.09.2010 2 CURSOR
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST CONTROL
    DEVICE
    CURSOR CONTROL DEVICE - 12-B-46-30-07-00A-920A-A 03.09.2009 4 CURSOR
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION CONTROL
    DEVICE
    CURSOR CONTROL DEVICE 12-B-46-30-07-01A-920A-A 08.10.2009 5 CURSOR
    TRACKBALL - REMOVAL/ CONTROL
    INSTALLATION DEVICE
    CURSOR CONTROL DEVICE 12-B-46-30-07-02A-920A-A 20.09.2010 5 CURSOR
    SCROLLWHEEL - REMOVAL/ CONTROL
    INSTALLATION DEVICE
    CURSOR CONTROL DEVICE 12-B-46-30-07-03A-920A-A 08.10.2009 5 CURSOR
    PUSHBUTTON - REMOVAL/ CONTROL
    INSTALLATION DEVICE
    CURSOR CONTROL DEVICE 12-B-46-30-07-04A-920A-A 01.02.2011 6 CURSOR
    WIRING HARNESS - REMOVAL/ CONTROL
    INSTALLATION DEVICE
    CURSOR CONTROL DEVICE 12-B-46-30-08-00A-920A-A 23.09.2009 4 CURSOR
    CONTROL UNIT - REMOVAL/ CONTROL
    INSTALLATION DEVICE
    DOORS – GENERAL - 12-B-52-00-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 2 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    PASSENGER/CREW DOOR HINGE - 12-B-52-00-01-00A-353A-A 19.10.2010 5 ALL
    EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION
    PASSENGER/CREW DOOR - 12-B-52-10-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 6 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    PASSENGER/CREW DOOR - 12-B-52-10-00-00A-310A-A 04.10.2010 3 ALL
    EXAMINE
    PASSENGER/CREW DOOR - 12-B-52-10-00-00A-313A-A 15.03.2008 3 ALL
    INSPECTION/CHECK

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 41


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    PASSENGER/CREW DOOR - 12-B-52-10-00-00A-903A-A 16.03.2011 10 ALL
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    PASSENGER/CREW DOOR SKINS - 12-B-52-10-01-00A-353A-A 16.11.2010 9 ALL
    EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION
    PASSENGER/CREW DOOR - 12-B-52-10-01-00A-920A-A 01.12.2009 6 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    PASSENGER/CREW DOOR LOCK - 12-B-52-10-02-00A-920A-A 01.12.2009 4 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    PASSENGER/CREW DOOR SEAL - 12-B-52-10-03-00A-920A-A 01.12.2009 7 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    PASSENGER/CREW DOOR CABLE 12-B-52-10-04-00A-920A-A 01.12.2009 5 ALL
    RETAINER - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    PASSENGER/CREW DOOR STEP - 12-B-52-10-05-00A-920A-A 01.12.2009 5 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    EMERGENCY EXIT DOOR - 12-B-52-20-00-00A-040A-A 09.04.2008 3 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    EMERGENCY EXIT - EXAMINE 12-B-52-20-00-00A-310A-A 20.09.2010 3 ALL
    EMERGENCY EXIT DOOR SEAL - 12-B-52-20-01-00A-920A-A 01.12.2009 5 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    CARGO DOOR - DESCRIPTION AND 12-B-52-30-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 9 ALL
    OPERATION
    CARGO DOOR - EXAMINE 12-B-52-30-00-00A-310A-A 10.01.2011 3 ALL
    CARGO DOOR - INSPECTION/ 12-B-52-30-00-00A-313A-A 11.12.2009 5 ALL
    CHECK
    CARGO DOOR - ADJUSTMENT/ 12-B-52-30-00-00A-903A-A C 02.05.2014 29 ALL
    TEST
    CARGO DOOR HINGE - EDDY 12-B-52-30-00-01A-353A-A 19.10.2010 5 ALL
    CURRENT INSPECTION
    CARGO DOOR SKINS - EDDY 12-B-52-30-01-00A-353A-A 07.12.2010 9 ALL
    CURRENT INSPECTION
    CARGO DOOR - REMOVAL/ 12-B-52-30-01-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 7 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    DOOR LOCK - REMOVAL/ 12-B-52-30-02-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 4 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    CARGO DOOR SEAL - REMOVAL/ 12-B-52-30-03-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 6 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    CARGO DOOR DRIVE MECHANISM 12-B-52-30-04-00A-903A-A 15.03.2008 5 ALL
    - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    CARGO DOOR DRIVE MECHANISM 12-B-52-30-04-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 6 ALL
    - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    CARGO DOOR DRIVE MECHANISM 12-B-52-30-05-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 5 ALL
    CABLE - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    CARGO DOOR GAS STRUT - 12-B-52-30-06-00A-920A-A 01.12.2009 6 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    CARGO DOOR LUG FITTINGS - 12-B-52-30-07-00A-920A-A 01.12.2009 6 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    SERVICE DOOR - DESCRIPTION 12-B-52-40-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 1 ALL
    AND OPERATION
    SERVICE DOOR LOCK - REMOVAL/ 12-B-52-40-01-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 4 ALL
    INSTALLATION

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 42


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    DOOR WARNING - DESCRIPTION 12-B-52-70-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 3 ALL
    AND OPERATION
    DOOR WARNING - ADJUSTMENT/ 12-B-52-70-00-00A-903A-A C 07.05.2014 5 ALL
    TEST
    PASSENGER/CREW–DOOR BOLTS 12-B-52-70-01-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 4 ALL
    SWITCH - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    PASSENGER/CREW–DOOR 12-B-52-70-02-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 4 ALL
    HANDLE SWITCH - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    CARGO–DOOR BOLTS SWITCH - 12-B-52-70-03-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 5 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    CARGO–DOOR HANDLE SWITCH - 12-B-52-70-04-00A-920A-A C 07.05.2014 8 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    FUSELAGE - DESCRIPTION AND 12-B-53-00-00-00A-040A-A 04.08.2008 3 ALL
    OPERATION
    FUSELAGE - ANTENNA 12-B-53-00-00-00A-310A-A 12.05.2011 4 ALL
    STRUCTURE – EXAMINE
    FUSELAGE - ANTENNA 12-B-53-00-00-00A-353A-A 12.05.2011 6 ALL
    STRUCTURE – EDDY CURRENT
    INSPECTION
    FORWARD FUSELAGE - EXAMINE 12-B-53-10-00-00A-310A-A 13.05.2011 3 ALL
    FORWARD FUSELAGE – FRAME 10 12-B-53-10-06-01A-353A-A 20.09.2010 5 ALL
    LONGERONS - EDDY CURRENT
    INSPECTION
    FORWARD FUSELAGE – WINDOW 12-B-53-10-16-00A-310A-A 20.01.2010 2 ALL
    STRUCTURE - EXAMINE
    CENTER FUSELAGE - EXAMINE 12-B-53-20-00-00A-310A-A 18.01.2011 4 ALL
    CENTER FUSELAGE FRAMES – 12-B-53-20-02-00A-307A-A 05.10.2010 2 ALL
    CARRY THROUGH FRAMES -
    PARTS LIST – KIT P/N 500.50.12.327
    CENTER FUSELAGE FRAMES – 12-B-53-20-02-00A-310A-A 29.09.2010 6 ALL
    CARRY THROUGH FRAMES -
    EXAMINE
    CENTER FUSELAGE – CARRY 12-B-53-20-02-00A-313A-A 26.09.2012 4 ALL
    THROUGH FRAMES - INSPECTION/
    CHECK
    CENTER FUSELAGE FRAMES – 12-B-53-20-02-00A-353A-A 04.10.2010 5 ALL
    CARRY THROUGH FRAMES - EDDY
    CURRENT INSPECTION
    REAR FUSELAGE - EXAMINE 12-B-53-30-00-00A-310A-A 18.01.2011 3 ALL
    REAR FUSELAGE SKINS AND 12-B-53-30-01-00A-313A-A C 21.01.2014 3 Reduced
    STRINGERS (RVSM) - INSPECTION/ Vertical
    CHECK Separation
    Minima
    (RVSM)
    REAR FUSELAGE FRAMES - EDDY 12-B-53-30-02-00A-353A-A 04.10.2010 4 ALL
    CURRENT INSPECTION
    STABILIZERS - DESCRIPTION AND 12-B-55-00-00-00A-040A-A 20.11.2007 3 ALL
    OPERATION

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 43


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    VERTICAL STABILIZER 12-B-55-00-00-00A-353A-A 19.10.2010 5 ALL
    ATTACHMENT FITTINGS - EDDY
    CURRENT INSPECTION
    STABILIZERS ATTACHMENT 12-B-55-00-00-00A-361A-A 01.12.2009 5 ALL
    FITTINGS - ALLOWABLE WEAR
    HORIZONTAL STABILIZER - 12-B-55-10-01-00A-920A-A 01.12.2009 7 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    ELEVATORS - EXAMINE 12-B-55-20-00-00A-310A-A 24.09.2010 3 ALL
    ELEVATOR DRIVE LEVER AND 12-B-55-20-01-00A-353A-A 20.10.2010 5 ALL
    HINGE - EDDY CURRENT
    INSPECTION
    ELEVATOR LEVER FITTING - 12-B-55-20-01-00A-904A-A 01.12.2009 4 ALL
    REPAIR
    ELEVATOR - REMOVAL/ 12-B-55-20-01-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 5 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    VERTICAL STABILIZER - PARTS 12-B-55-30-00-00A-307A-A 18.09.2013 4 ALL
    LIST – KIT P/N 500.50.12.325
    VERTICAL STABILIZER - EXAMINE 12-B-55-30-00-00A-310A-A 18.01.2011 3 ALL
    VERTICAL STABILIZER - REMOVAL/ 12-B-55-30-01-00A-920A-A 15.02.2013 16 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    VERTICAL STABILIZER – PITCH 12-B-55-30-02-00A-353A-A 18.01.2011 5 ALL
    TRIM ACTUATOR ATTACHMENT -
    EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION
    VERTICAL STABILIZER SPARS - 12-B-55-30-03-00A-353A-A 08.10.2010 7 ALL
    EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION
    RUDDER - EXAMINE 12-B-55-40-00-00A-310A-A 20.09.2010 3 ALL
    RUDDER - REMOVAL/ 12-B-55-40-01-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 5 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    RUDDER TRIM TAB - EXAMINE 12-B-55-40-04-00A-310A-A 28.09.2010 3 ALL
    RUDDER TRIM TAB - REMOVAL/ 12-B-55-40-04-00A-920A-A 11.05.2010 5 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    RUDDER HINGE - EDDY CURRENT 12-B-55-40-05-00A-353A-A 20.09.2010 5 ALL
    INSPECTION
    WINDOWS - DESCRIPTION AND 12-B-56-00-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 3 ALL
    OPERATION
    WINDOWS - INSPECTION/CHECK 12-B-56-00-00-00A-313A-A 24.10.2013 4 ALL
    WINDOWS - REPAIR 12-B-56-00-00-00A-904A-A 15.04.2009 4 ALL
    WINDSHIELD - PARTS LIST – KIT 12-B-56-11-00-00A-307A-A 04.10.2010 2 All
    P/N 500.50.12.326
    WINDSHIELD - EXAMINE 12-B-56-11-01-00A-310A-A 20.01.2010 2 ALL
    WINDSHIELD - REMOVAL/ 12-B-56-11-01-00A-920A-A 11.11.2009 9 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    COCKPIT SIDE WINDOWS - 12-B-56-11-02-00A-310A-A 20.01.2010 2 ALL
    EXAMINE
    COCKPIT SIDE WINDOWS - 12-B-56-11-02-00A-313A-A 18.08.2008 5 ALL
    INSPECTION/CHECK
    INNER SIDE WINDOWS - 12-B-56-11-02-00A-920A-A 27.06.2008 4 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    DIRECT VISION WINDOW - 12-B-56-14-01-00A-920A-A 22.08.2008 5 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    CABIN WINDOWS - REMOVAL/ 12-B-56-20-01-00A-920A-A 16.06.2010 6 ALL
    INSTALLATION

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 44


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    WINGS - DESCRIPTION AND 12-B-57-00-00-00A-040A-A 30.06.2008 3 ALL
    OPERATION
    WINGS - PARTS LIST – KIT P/N 12-B-57-00-00-00A-307A-A C 05.05.2014 2 ALL
    500.60.12.007
    WINGS - EXAMINE 12-B-57-00-00-00A-310A-A 04.01.2011 3 ALL
    WING AND FUSELAGE FITTINGS - 12-B-57-00-00-00A-313A-A C 05.05.2014 13 ALL
    INSPECTION/CHECK
    LEFT WING – HYDRAULIC LANDING 12-B-57-00-00-00A-520A-A C 05.05.2014 17 HYDRAULIC
    GEAR - REMOVAL LANDING
    GEAR
    LEFT WING – ELECTRO 12-B-57-00-00-00A-520B-A C 05.05.2014 15 ELECTRO
    MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR - MECHANICA
    REMOVAL L LANDING
    GEAR
    LEFT WING – HYDRAULIC LANDING 12-B-57-00-00-00A-720A-A C 05.05.2014 19 HYDRAULIC
    GEAR - INSTALLATION LANDING
    GEAR
    LEFT WING – ELECTRO 12-B-57-00-00-00A-720B-A C 05.05.2014 16 ELECTRO
    MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR - MECHANICA
    INSTALLATION L LANDING
    GEAR
    WINGS - MAINTENANCE 12-B-57-00-00-00A-901A-A 17.11.2009 5 ALL
    PRACTICES
    RIGHT WING – HYDRAULIC 12-B-57-00-00-00B-520A-A C 05.05.2014 17 HYDRAULIC
    LANDING GEAR - REMOVAL LANDING
    GEAR
    RIGHT WING – ELECTRO 12-B-57-00-00-00B-520B-A C 05.05.2014 17 ELECTRO
    MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR - MECHANICA
    REMOVAL L LANDING
    GEAR
    RIGHT WING – HYDRAULIC 12-B-57-00-00-00B-720A-A C 05.05.2014 21 HYDRAULIC
    LANDING GEAR - INSTALLATION LANDING
    GEAR
    RIGHT WING – ELECTRO 12-B-57-00-00-00B-720B-A C 05.05.2014 20 ELECTRO
    MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR - MECHANICA
    INSTALLATION L LANDING
    GEAR
    WING AND FUSELAGE 12-B-57-00-03-00A-353A-A 10.01.2011 6 ALL
    ATTACHMENT FITTINGS - EDDY
    CURRENT INSPECTION
    WING AND FUSELAGE 12-B-57-00-03-01A-353A-A 23.09.2010 4 ALL
    ATTACHMENT FITTINGS –
    HOLLOW BOLTS - EDDY CURRENT
    INSPECTION
    WING SKINS - EDDY CURRENT 12-B-57-20-01-00A-353A-A 23.08.2010 2 ALL
    INSPECTION
    WING STRUCTURE – RIBS - PARTS 12-B-57-20-05-00A-307A-A 25.04.2012 2 KIT P/N
    LIST – FIRST OVERSIZE – P/N 500.60.12.03
    500.60.12.031 1
    WING STRUCTURE – RIBS - PARTS 12-B-57-20-05-00A-307B-A 25.04.2012 2 All
    LIST – SECOND OVERSIZE – P/N
    500.60.12.043

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 45


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    WING STRUCTURE – RIBS - EDDY 12-B-57-20-05-00A-353A-A 27.10.2010 7 ALL
    CURRENT INSPECTION – RIB 6
    STRAP
    WING STRUCTURE – SPARS AND 12-B-57-20-10-00A-307A-A 27.10.2010 3 ALL
    AUXILIARY STRUCTURE - PARTS
    LIST – FIRST OVERSIZE – P/N
    500.60.12.030
    WING STRUCTURE – SPARS AND 12-B-57-20-10-00A-307B-A 01.12.2010 3 ALL
    AUXILIARY STRUCTURE - PARTS
    LIST – SECOND OVERSIZE – P/N
    500.60.12.020
    WING STRUCTURE – SPARS AND 12-B-57-20-10-00A-353A-A 10.12.2010 9 ALL
    AUXILIARY STRUCTURE – MAIN
    SPAR - EDDY CURRENT
    INSPECTION
    WING STRUCTURE – SPARS AND 12-B-57-20-10-00A-353B-A 03.11.2010 5 ALL
    AUXILIARY STRUCTURE – REAR
    SPAR - EDDY CURRENT
    INSPECTION
    WING STRUCTURE – SPARS AND 12-B-57-20-10-00A-353C-A 04.01.2011 3 ALL
    AUXILIARY STRUCTURE – REAR
    SPAR - EDDY CURRENT
    INSPECTION
    WING STRUCTURE – SPARS AND 12-B-57-20-10-00A-353D-A 09.01.2012 6 ALL
    AUXILIARY STRUCTURE – MAIN
    SPAR – RIB 6 STRAP FASTENER -
    EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION
    WING TIP - EXAMINE 12-B-57-33-00-00A-310A-A 04.01.2011 4 ALL
    WING TIP - REMOVAL/ 12-B-57-33-00-00A-920A-A 09.04.2008 5 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    WING TIP – LED EXTERNAL LIGHTS 12-B-57-33-00-00A-920B-A 14.10.2013 5 LED
    - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION EXTERNAL
    LIGHTS
    FLAPS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION 12-B-57-50-01-00A-920A-A 29.02.2012 7 ALL
    FLAP SUPPORT ARM BUSHES AND 12-B-57-50-02-00A-904A-A 22.03.2011 11 ALL
    BELLCRANK BEARINGS - REPAIR
    FLAP SUPPORT ARM - REMOVAL/ 12-B-57-50-02-01A-920A-A 07.08.2012 9 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    AILERONS - EXAMINE 12-B-57-60-00-00A-310A-A 04.01.2011 3 ALL
    AILERON - REMOVAL/ 12-B-57-60-02-00A-920A-A 28.07.2009 8 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    AILERON TRIM LH - PARTS LIST – 12-B-57-60-04-00A-307A-A 25.10.2012 4 ALL
    KIT P/N 500.60.12.039
    AILERON TRIM RH - PARTS LIST – 12-B-57-60-04-00A-307B-A 25.10.2012 4 ALL
    KIT P/N 500.60.12.040
    AILERON TRIM TAB - EXAMINE 12-B-57-60-04-00A-310A-A 18.01.2011 3 ALL
    AILERON TRIM TAB - REMOVAL/ 12-B-57-60-04-00A-920A-A 04.01.2011 5 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    AILERON DRIVE ARM - REMOVAL/ 12-B-57-60-05-00A-920A-A 01.12.2009 5 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    AILERON HINGE - EDDY CURRENT 12-B-57-60-06-00A-353A-A 04.01.2011 5 ALL
    INSPECTION

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 46


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    PROPELLER - DESCRIPTION AND 12-B-61-00-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 7 ALL
    OPERATION
    PROPELLER - ADJUSTMENT/TEST 12-B-61-00-00-00A-903A-A 19.02.2013 16 ALL
    PROPELLER BLADES - REPAIR 12-B-61-00-00-00A-904A-A 30.11.2012 3 ALL
    PROPELLER - REMOVAL/ 12-B-61-10-01-00A-920A-A 01.12.2009 9 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    GOVERNOR - REMOVAL/ 12-B-61-20-01-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 4 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    LOW PITCH WARNING SWITCH - 12-B-61-20-02-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 5 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    OVERSPEED GOVERNOR - 12-B-61-20-03-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 4 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    POWERPLANT - DESCRIPTION 12-B-71-00-00-00A-040A-A 15.06.2012 4 ALL
    AND OPERATION
    POWERPLANT - CLEAN 12-B-71-00-00-00A-250A-A 01.12.2009 13 ALL
    POWERPLANT - MAINTENANCE 12-B-71-00-00-00A-901A-A C 13.05.2014 14 ALL
    PRACTICES
    POWER PLANT - ADJUSTMENT/ 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903A-A 15.11.2011 8 ALL
    TEST
    POWER PLANT TEST 1 – ENGINE 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903B-A 09.04.2008 2 ALL
    OIL PRESSURE - ADJUSTMENT/
    TEST
    POWER PLANT TEST 2 – 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903C-A 09.04.2008 3 ALL
    PROPELLER BLADE FEATHER -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    POWER PLANT TEST 3 – DC 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903D-A C 28.03.2014 12 ALL
    GENERATION SYSTEM -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    POWER PLANT TEST 4 – MAXIMUM 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903E-A 09.04.2008 6 ALL
    PROPELLER SPEED -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    POWER PLANT TEST 5– BLEED 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903F-A 09.04.2008 2 ALL
    VALVE CLOSING POINT -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    POWER PLANT TEST 6 – TORQUE 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903G-A 07.08.2009 6 ALL
    LIMITER - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    POWER PLANT TEST 7 – ENGINE 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903H-A 06.07.2011 8 ALL
    PERFORMANCE - ADJUSTMENT/
    TEST
    POWER PLANT TEST 8 – 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903I-A 27.08.2008 2 ALL
    TORQUEMETER FUNCTION -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    POWER PLANT TEST 9 – 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903J-A 09.04.2008 2 ALL
    ACCELERATION - ADJUSTMENT/
    TEST
    POWER PLANT TEST 10 – 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903K-A 09.04.2008 6 ALL
    OVERSPEED GOVERNOR -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    POWER PLANT TEST 11 – Nf 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903L-A 09.04.2008 6 ALL
    GOVERNOR - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    POWER PLANT TEST 12 – FCU 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903M-A 09.04.2008 3 ALL
    DEAD BAND - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 47


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    POWER PLANT TEST 13 – 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903N-A 09.04.2008 5 ALL
    PROPELLER LOW PITCH WARNING
    - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    POWER PLANT TEST 14 – GROUND 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903O-A 09.04.2008 6 ALL
    IDLE SPEED - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    POWER PLANT TEST 15 – FLIGHT 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903P-A 09.04.2008 7 ALL
    IDLE SPEED - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    POWER PLANT TEST 16 – MANUAL 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903Q-A 09.04.2008 2 ALL
    OVERRIDE - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    POWER PLANT TEST 17 – 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903R-A 09.04.2008 5 ALL
    REVERSE POWER - ADJUSTMENT/
    TEST
    POWER PLANT TEST 18 – 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903S-A 09.04.2008 7 ALL
    ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL
    SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    POWER PLANT TEST 19 – ENGINE 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903T-A 09.04.2008 2 ALL
    STOP TIME - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    POWERPLANT TEST 20 – AFTER 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903U-A 09.04.2008 2 ALL
    ENGINE STOP - ADJUSTMENT/
    TEST
    POWERPLANT - REMOVAL/ 12-B-71-00-00-00A-920A-A 01.12.2009 29 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    POWERPLANT - STRIP/BUILD 12-B-71-00-00-00A-920A-B 20.08.2012 19 ALL
    ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS - 12-B-71-00-03-00A-250A-A 15.03.2008 3 ALL
    CLEAN
    POWERPLANT MOUNTING– 12-B-71-00-04-00A-920A-A 01.12.2009 7 ALL
    FRAME–BOLTS - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    POWERPLANT MOUNTING FRAME 12-B-71-00-05-00A-352A-A 03.12.2009 2 ALL
    - MAGNETIC PARTICLE
    INSPECTION
    POWERPLANT MOUNTING FRAME 12-B-71-00-05-00A-920A-A 04.10.2010 8 ALL
    - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    ENGINE COWLINGS - REMOVAL/ 12-B-71-10-00-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 5 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    ENGINE - DESCRIPTION AND 12-B-72-00-00-00A-040A-A 07.10.2008 4 ALL
    OPERATION
    POWER SECTION - DESCRIPTION 12-B-72-10-00-01A-040A-A 07.10.2008 2 ALL
    AND OPERATION
    POWER SECTION - REMOVAL/ 12-B-72-10-00-01A-920A-A 01.12.2008 8 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL - 12-B-73-00-00-00A-040A-A 09.04.2008 2 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    FUEL CONTROL UNIT - REMOVAL/ 12-B-73-20-01-00A-920A-A 17.07.2009 6 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    TORQUE LIMITER - REMOVAL/ 12-B-73-20-02-00A-920A-A 09.04.2008 5 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    FUEL FLOW TRANSMITTER - 12-B-73-30-01-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 5 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    IGNITION SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION 12-B-74-00-00-00A-040A-A 09.04.2008 4 ALL
    AND OPERATION

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 48


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    IGNITION SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/ 12-B-74-00-00-00A-903A-A 15.03.2008 5 ALL
    TEST
    IGNITION UNIT - REMOVAL/ 12-B-74-10-01-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 5 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    SPARK IGNITORS - REMOVAL/ 12-B-74-20-00-00A-920A-A 28.01.2009 5 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    ENGINE CONTROLS - 12-B-76-00-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 6 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    POWER CONTROLS - 12-B-76-10-00-00A-903A-A 01.12.2009 19 ALL
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    POWER CONTROLS 12-B-76-10-01-00A-903A-A 09.04.2008 10 ALL
    MICROSWITCHES - ADJUSTMENT/
    TEST
    PROPELLER FEATHER 12-B-76-10-02-00A-903A-A 07.11.2008 5 ALL
    MICROSWITCHES - ADJUSTMENT/
    TEST
    POWER CONTROL CABLES - 12-B-76-10-04-00A-920A-A 11.02.2010 17 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    MANUAL OVERRIDE - 12-B-76-20-00-00A-903A-A 02.02.2010 7 ALL
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    MANUAL OVERRIDE CABLE - 12-B-76-20-00-04A-920A-A 12.07.2010 10 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    ENGINE INDICATING – GENERAL - 12-B-77-00-00-00A-040A-A 09.04.2008 4 ALL
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    INTEGRATED ENGINE 12-B-77-40-00-00A-040A-A 04.10.2010 14 ALL
    INSTRUMENT SYSTEM -
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    TORQUE TRANSDUCER - 12-B-77-40-03-00A-903A-A 04.07.2008 5 ALL
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    TORQUE TRANSDUCER - 12-B-77-40-03-00A-920A-A 09.04.2008 4 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    EXHAUST - DESCRIPTION AND 12-B-78-00-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 1 ALL
    OPERATION
    EXHAUST STUB - REPAIR 12-B-78-10-01-00A-904A-A 15.03.2008 5 ALL
    LEFT EXHAUST ASSEMBLY DE–ICE 12-B-78-10-01-00A-904B-A 18.09.2013 7 ALL
    BLEED AIR TUBE - REPAIR
    RIGHT EXHAUST ASSEMBLY DE– 12-B-78-10-01-00A-904C-A 11.08.2011 7 ALL
    ICE BLEED AIR TUBE - REPAIR
    EXHAUST STUB - REMOVAL/ 12-B-78-10-01-00A-920A-A 15.03.2008 6 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    OIL SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND 12-B-79-00-00-00A-040A-A 04.10.2010 7 ALL
    OPERATION
    OIL SYSTEM – ELECTRO 12-B-79-00-00-00A-040B-A 05.12.2011 6 ELECTRO
    MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR - MECHANICA
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION L LANDING
    GEAR
    OIL SYSTEM - SERVICING 12-B-79-00-00-00A-902A-A 01.12.2009 11 ALL
    OIL FILTER ELEMENT - REMOVAL/ 12-B-79-20-01-00A-920A-A 01.12.2009 6 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    OIL COOLER - REMOVAL/ 12-B-79-20-02-00A-920A-A 01.12.2009 7 ALL
    INSTALLATION

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 49


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Document title Data module code Issue date No. of Effectivity


    pages
    CHIP DETECTOR - ADJUSTMENT/ 12-B-79-30-01-00A-903A-A 06.11.2008 5 ALL
    TEST
    CHIP DETECTOR - REMOVAL/ 12-B-79-30-01-00A-920A-A 19.10.2012 6 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    OIL PRESSURE TRANSDUCER - 12-B-79-30-02-00A-903A-A 16.07.2008 5 ALL
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    OIL PRESSURE TRANSDUCER - 12-B-79-30-02-00A-920A-A C 11.03.2014 5 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    TEMPERATURE SENSOR - 12-B-79-30-03-00A-920A-A 01.12.2009 5 ALL
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    PRESSURE SWITCH - REMOVAL/ 12-B-79-30-04-00A-920A-A 01.12.2009 5 ALL
    INSTALLATION
    OIL DEBRIS MONITORING SYSTEM 12-B-79-30-05-00A-903A-A 04.10.2010 5 PRE SB
    (PRE SB 79–007) - ADJUSTMENT/ 79-006
    TEST
    OIL DEBRIS MONITORING SYSTEM 12-B-79-30-05-00A-920A-A 04.10.2010 5 PRE SB
    (PRE SB 79–007) - REMOVAL/ 79-006
    INSTALLATION
    STARTING - DESCRIPTION AND 12-B-80-00-00-00A-040A-A 15.03.2008 1 ALL
    OPERATION
    AUTOMATIC STARTING (NG 12-B-80-10-20-00A-040A-A 07.07.2008 8 ALL
    CONTROLLED) - DESCRIPTION
    AND OPERATION

    Effectivity: All 12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 50
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PC-12/47E GENERAL - AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

    CHANGE HIGHLIGHTS - REVISION 11

    Table of Contents Page

    PC-12/47E GENERAL - AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE MANUAL - CHANGE HIGHLIGHTS - 1


    REVISION 11..............................................................................................................................

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description
    DM Reference Action Change
    12-B-00-00-00-00A-002A-A Inserted Incorporation of new data module
    12-B-00-00-00-00A-003A-A Replaced Updated to reflect latest change highlights
    12-B-00-00-00-00A-004A-A Replaced PTS 14369 Revision Administration
    12-B-00-00-00-00A-006A-A Replaced PTS 14369 Revision Administration
    12-B-00-00-00-00A-007A-A Replaced PTS 14170 update list.
    12-B-00-00-00-00A-009A-A Inserted Incorporation of new data module
    12-B-00-00-00-00A-017A-A Replaced PTS 14369 Revision Administration
    12-B-00-00-00-00A-018A-A Replaced PTS 13950 Occurrence reporting added.
    12-B-04-00-00-00A-000A-A Replaced PTS 14144 flap drive arm inspection added.
    12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A Replaced PTS 13903 Eldg actuator anti rotation pads added. PTS 13952
    tasks 21-30/46 and 314 updated. PTS 14032 Task 32-10/436
    added. PTS 13976 Task 27-20/140 rudder upper hinge
    inspection added. PTS 14144 Task 27-50/144 updated,
    27-50/437 added. PTS 14055 Task 32-30/423 corrected, P/Nos
    removed. PTS 14269 Task 52-30/89 updated.
    12-B-05-10-00-00A-018A-A Replaced PTS 14168 first overhaul statement changed.
    12-B-05-10-10-00A-281A-A Replaced PTS 14321 NLG overhaul and ELT Nav Interface Serial Memory
    added.
    12-B-05-10-20-00A-281A-A Replaced PTS 13903 Eldg anti rotation pad added. PTS 13952
    Pressurization tasks updated. PTS 14269 Task 52-30/89
    updated. PTS 14372 Task 71-00/432 added. PTS 14321 NLG
    overhaul and ELT Nav Interface Serial Memory Module
    removed.
    12-B-05-20-10-00A-281A-A Replaced PTS 13976 Task 27-20/140 rudder upper hinge inspection
    added. PTS 14144 Task 27-50/144 updated.
    12-B-05-20-20-00A-281A-A Replaced PTS 14032 Task 32-10/436 added. PTS 13976 Task 27-20/140
    rudder upper hinge inspection added. PTS 14144 Task
    27-50/144 updated.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-00-00-00-00A-003A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    DM Reference Action Change


    12-B-05-30-00-00A-010A-A Replaced PTS 14032 Task 32-10/436 added. PTS 13976 Task 27-20/140
    rudder upper hinge inspection added. PTS 14144 Task
    27-50/144 updated. PTS 14124 Note added for P&WC EMM.
    12-B-05-30-01-00A-281A-A Replaced PTS 14032 add work card 27.
    12-B-05-30-02-00A-281A-A Replaced PTS 13076 Task 27-20/140 rudder upper hinge inspection
    added. PTS 14144 Task 27-50/144 updated.
    12-B-05-30-03-00A-281C-A Inserted Incorporation of new data module
    12-B-05-30-05-00A-010G-A Replaced PTS 14032 Task 32-10/436 added.
    12-B-05-50-01-00A-282A-A Replaced PTS 14053 flap drive arm inspection added.
    12-B-05-50-02-00A-282A-A Replaced PTS 14053 flap drive arm inspection added.
    12-B-05-50-03-00A-282A-A Replaced PTS 14053 flap drive arm inspection added.
    12-B-05-50-11-00A-282A-A Replaced PTS 14348 procedure clarified.
    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A Replaced PTS 14038 floor access panel reference corrected.
    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040B-A Replaced PTS 14038 floor access panel reference corrected.
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-071D-A Replaced PTS 14107 P04-004 added.
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-071F-A Replaced PTS 13904 materials updated.
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-071G-A Replaced PTS 14051 Aerodur finish added. PTS 14014 Alumigrip 4200
    HS topcoat Yellow added. PTS 14070 Berlacryl Graphite Pearl
    added. PTS 14151 P07-034 and 035 added.
    12-B-21-30-00-00A-903A-A Replaced PTS 13460 Removal of differential pressure sensor from
    procedure. PTS 13952 Test renamed to Cabin Positive
    Pressure Relief Functional Test.
    12-B-21-30-01-00A-920A-A Replaced PTS 14038 floor panel reference corrected, seat removal
    removed.
    12-B-21-40-01-00A-903A-A Replaced PTS 14089 thermal protection switch timings corrected.
    12-B-22-20-01-00A-920A-A Replaced PTS 14038 floor panel reference changed.
    12-B-22-20-05-00A-920A-A Replaced PTS 13763 check helicoil and torque tighten screws.
    12-B-23-50-00-00A-903A-A Replaced PTS 13678 volume adjustment added.
    12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A Replaced PTS 14102 procedure change for seat rail corrosion.
    12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A Replaced PTS 14030, Illustration correction
    12-B-25-22-03-00A-920A-A Replaced PTS 14329 Correction of Figure references
    12-B-25-63-00-00A-903A-A Replaced PTS 14112 procedure updated.
    12-B-25-90-00-00A-903A-A Replaced PTS 13998 test procedure update.
    12-B-25-90-00-00A-903B-A Replaced PTS 13998 test procedure updated.
    12-B-27-10-00-00A-310A-A Replaced PTS 14038 floor panel reference corrected.
    12-B-27-10-01-00A-920A-A Replaced PTS 14038 floor panel reference changed.
    12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A Replaced PTS 14065 procedure corrected.
    12-B-27-30-00-00A-310A-A Replaced PTS 14038 access panel reference changed.
    12-B-27-30-01-00A-920A-A Replaced PTS 13689 Para 2.1.25 and 26 hotspots corrected. PTS 14038
    floor panel reference corrected.
    12-B-27-40-01-00A-920A-A Replaced PTS 14017 add torque tightening and CPC.
    12-B-27-40-02-00A-920A-A Replaced PTS 14017 torque tightening and CPC added.
    12-B-27-50-00-00A-902A-A Replaced PTS 14231 Update grease description
    12-B-29-10-00-00A-040A-A Replaced PTS 13526 hydraulic caution activation.
    12-B-29-10-02-00A-901A-A Replaced PTS 14157 Aircraft Defect Report changed to Aircraft
    Malfunction Report.
    12-B-30-30-20-00A-903A-A Replaced PTS 14038 floor access panel corrected.
    12-B-30-40-01-00A-920A-A Replaced PTS 13518 controller installation corrected.
    12-B-31-30-01-00A-903A-A Replaced PTS 14067 procedure updated
    12-B-32-00-00-00A-901A-A Replaced PTS 14013 Maintenance Air/Gnd switch procedure added.
    12-B-32-00-00-00A-901B-A Replaced PTS 14013 Air/Gnd Override switch added.
    12-B-32-10-01-00A-920B-A Replaced PTS 13098 LED landing light.
    12-B-32-30-01-00A-920B-A Replaced PTS 14270 Test box added, procedure changed.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-00-00-00-00A-003A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    DM Reference Action Change


    12-B-32-30-02-00A-920B-A Replaced PTS 14270 test box added, procedure updated.
    12-B-32-30-10-00A-903A-A Replaced PTSS 14322 step 2.2.5 corrected.
    12-B-32-30-10-04A-920A-A Replaced PTS 13987 procedure updated.
    12-B-32-60-12-00A-920A-A Inserted Incorporation of new data module
    12-B-33-00-00-00A-903A-A Replaced PTS 14252 passenger door light added.
    12-B-33-10-00-00A-040A-A Replaced PTS 14252 Passenger door light added.
    12-B-33-10-04-00A-920A-A Replaced PTS 14038 floor panel reference changed.
    12-B-33-20-00-00A-040A-A Replaced PTS 14252 passenger door light added.
    12-B-33-41-00-00A-040A-A Replaced PTS 14390 SB 33-012 added.
    12-B-33-41-00-00A-040B-A Replaced PTS 14390 LED lights.
    12-B-33-41-01-00A-920B-A Inserted Incorporation of new data module
    12-B-33-42-00-00A-040A-A Replaced PTS 14390 SB 33-012 added.
    12-B-33-42-00-00A-040B-A Replaced PTS 14390 SB 33-012 added.
    12-B-33-42-01-00A-920B-A Inserted Incorporation of new data module
    12-B-34-20-00-00A-903A-A Replaced PTS 13925 slow slave added.
    12-B-34-42-00-00A-903A-A Replaced PTS 13956 operational test added.
    12-B-34-52-01-00A-920A-A Replaced PTS 14347 access panel corrected.
    12-B-34-57-02-00A-920A-A Replaced PTS 14081 conductive gasket added.
    12-B-45-45-00-00A-330A-A Replaced PTS 13963 procedure updated.
    12-B-45-45-00-00A-331A-A Replaced PTS 13963 Support equipment and procedure update.
    12-B-45-45-00-00A-550A-A Replaced PTS 14403 set APEX NIC module date/time added.
    12-B-52-30-00-00A-903A-A Replaced PTS 13949 illustration corrected.
    12-B-52-70-00-00A-903A-A Replaced PTS 14264 SB 52-008 / new proximity switch added.
    12-B-52-70-04-00A-920A-A Replaced PTS 14264 SB 52-008 added.
    12-B-53-30-01-00A-313A-A Replaced PTS 14029 no repair statement.
    12-B-57-00-00-00A-307A-A Replaced PTS 14134 illustration updated.
    12-B-57-00-00-00A-313A-A Replaced PTS 14157 Aircraft Defect Report changed to Aircraft
    Malfunction Report. PTS 14308 illustration update.
    12-B-57-00-00-00A-520A-A Replaced PTS 14134 /14308 illustration and procedure update.
    12-B-57-00-00-00A-520B-A Replaced PTS 14308 illustration update.
    12-B-57-00-00-00A-720A-A Replaced PTS 13721 alignment/symmetry check added. PTS
    13134/13308 Update wing illustrations.
    12-B-57-00-00-00A-720B-A Replaced PTS 13721 alignment/symmetry check added. PTS 14134 /
    14308 procedure / illustration clarification.
    12-B-57-00-00-00B-520A-A Replaced PTS 14308 illustration update.
    12-B-57-00-00-00B-520B-A Replaced PTS 14308 illustration update.
    12-B-57-00-00-00B-720A-A Replaced PTS 13721 alignment and symmetry check added. PTS
    14134/14308 procedure/illustration clarification.
    12-B-57-00-00-00B-720B-A Replaced PTS 13721 alignment and symmetry check added. PTS 14134 /
    14308 procedure / illustration clarification.
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-901A-A Replaced PTS 13968 engine limits para/notes reformatted.
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903D-A Replaced PTS 14037 Bus tie contactor test added.
    12-B-79-30-02-00A-920A-A Replaced PTS 13485 reference DM changed.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-00-00-00-00A-003A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 3
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-00-00-00-00A-003A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-22 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    AMM LIST OF REVISIONS

    1 List of Revisions
    Rev No. Date of Issue Date Inserted Signature
    1 Jan 30/09 Jan 30/09 Pilatus
    2 Jun 01/09 Jun 01/09 Pilatus
    3 Oct 20/09 Oct 20/09 Pilatus
    4 Apr 08/10 Apr 08/10 Pilatus
    5 Jan 31/11 Jun 30/11 Pilatus
    6 Sep 30/11 Sep 30/11 Pilatus
    7 Dec 15/11 Dec 15/11 Pilatus
    8 Jan 30/12 Jan 30/12 Pilatus
    9 Dec 15/12 Dec 15/12 Pilatus
    10 Dec 08/13 Dec 08/13 Pilatus
    11 May 31/14 May 31/14 Pilatus

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-00-00-00-00A-004A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-05 Page 1
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-00-00-00-00A-004A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-05 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PC12/47E

    AMM LIST OF TEMPORARY REVISIONS

    Table of Contents Page

    PC12/47E - AMM LIST OF TEMPORARY REVISIONS............................................................. 1


    1 List of Temporary Revisions................................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description

    1 List of Temporary Revisions


    Temp Rev No. Date of Issue Date Inserted Signature Date or Signature
    Revision
    Removed
    05-01 Dec 09/08 Dec 16/08 Pilatus 1 Pilatus
    27-01 Dec 09/08 Dec 16/08 Pilatus 1 Pilatus
    00-01 Jan 05/09 Jan 23/09 Pilatus 1 Pilatus
    34-01 Dec 12/08 Jan 23/09 Pilatus 1 Pilatus
    34-02 Dec 15/08 Jan 23/09 Pilatus 1 Pilatus
    34-03 Dec 15/08 Jan 23/09 Pilatus 1 Pilatus
    34-04 Dec 15/08 Jan 23/09 Pilatus 1 Pilatus
    34-05 Dec 12/08 Jan 23/09 Pilatus 1 Pilatus
    34-06 Dec 01/08 Jan 23/09 Pilatus 1 Pilatus
    45-01 Jan 16/09 Jan 23/09 Pilatus 1 Pilatus
    46-01 Jan 16/09 Jan 23/09 Pilatus 1 Pilatus
    71-01 Mar 02/09 Mar 03/09 Pilatus 2 Pilatus
    46-02 Mar 06/09 Mar 09/09 Pilatus 2 Pilatus
    00-02 Mar 06/09 Mar 09/09 Pilatus TR 00-03 Pilatus
    00-03 Mar 25/09 Mar 31/09 Pilatus 2 Pilatus
    34-07 Apr 22/09 May 01/09 Pilatus 2 Pilatus
    21-01 May 05/09 May 14/09 Pilatus 2 Pilatus
    25-01 Jun 30/09 Jul 02/09 Pilatus 3 Pilatus
    00-04 Nov 10/09 Nov 10/09 Pilatus 4 Pilatus
    05-02 Nov 11/09 Nov 11/09 Pilatus 4 Pilatus
    34-08 Jun 23/10 Jun 23/10 Pilatus 5 Pilatus
    22-01 Jul 07/10 Jul 07/10 Pilatus 5 Pilatus

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-00-00-00-00A-006A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-01 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Temp Rev No. Date of Issue Date Inserted Signature Date or Signature
    Revision
    Removed
    56-01 Jul 05/10 Jul 05/10 Pilatus 5 Pilatus
    27-02 Oct 05/10 Oct 05/10 Pilatus 5 Pilatus
    28-01 Feb 10/12 Feb 10/12 Pilatus 9 Pilatus
    22-02 May 11/12 May 11/12 Pilatus 9 Pilatus
    31-01 Jun 18/12 Jun 18/12 Pilatus 9 Pilatus
    00-05 Jul 17/12 Jul 17/12 Pilatus 9 Pilatus
    57-01 Aug 07/12 Aug 07/12 Pilatus 9 Pilatus
    04-01 Oct 15/12 Oct 15/12 Pilatus 9 Pilatus
    30-01 Mar 08/13 Mar 08/13 Pilatus 10 Pilatus
    30-02 Mar 08/13 Mar 08/13 Pilatus 10 Pilatus
    04–02 Mar 13/14 Mar 13/14 Pilatus 11 Pilatus
    31–02 Apr 28/14 Apr 13/14 Pilatus 11 Pilatus

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-00-00-00-00A-006A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-01 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    GENERAL

    LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS

    Table of Contents Page

    GENERAL - LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS.................................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description
    This data module gives a list of the abbreviations.

    ABBRV MEANING
    A ampere
    ACMS aircraft condition and monitoring system
    ACP audio control panel
    ACS air cycle system
    ADC air data computer
    ADF automatic direction finder
    ADAHRS air data, attitude & heading reference system
    AGM advanced graphics module
    AIO actuator input/output (module)
    A/P auto pilot
    APM aircraft personality module (configuration module)
    AOA angle of attack
    ASCB avionics standard communications bus
    ATC air traffic control
    ATT attitude

    CAS crew alerting system


    CB circuit breaker
    CBIT continuous built in test
    CMC central maintenance computer
    CMCF central maintenance computer function
    CMM component maintenance manual
    CPCS cabin pressurization control system
    CPCU cabin pressure control unit
    CSIO custom input/output (module)

    DC direct current
    DEOS digital engine operating system

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-00-00-00-00A-007A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-03 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    ABBRV MEANING
    DGRD degrade mode
    DLS data loading software
    DME distance measuring equipment
    DR dead reckoning

    ECMS engine condition monitoring system


    ECS environmental control system
    ECTM engine condition trend monitoring
    EGPWS enhanced ground proximity warning system
    EMI electro magnetic interference
    EPMP electrical power management panel
    EPU external power unit
    EPU estimated position uncertainty
    ESIS electronic standby instrument system

    FAS flight alerting system


    FCP flight control panel
    FCWU flap control and warning unit
    FD flight director
    FGD flight guidance display
    FHDB fault history database
    FMS flight management system

    GA go around
    GIO generic input/output (module)
    GNSSU global navigation sensor system unit
    GPS global positioning system
    GPWS ground proximity warning system

    HDG heading
    HIRF high intensity radiated field

    ICS intercom system

    LAN local area network


    LCD liquid crystal display
    LED light emitting diode
    LRM line replacement module
    LRU line replacement unit
    LTR liter

    MAU modular avionics unit


    MFC multi function controller
    MFD multi function display
    MHAS multi hazard awareness system
    MKR marker
    MMDR multi mode digital radio
    MOR manual over-ride

    N2 nitrogen
    NIC network interface controller

    OCP overhead control panel

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-00-00-00-00A-007A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-03 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    ABBRV MEANING
    ODM oil debris monitoring
    OSCMM operating, servicing and component maintenance manual

    PBIT power-up built in test


    PCL power control lever
    PFD primary flight display
    PFT pre-flight test
    PTT press to transmit

    RNP required navigation performance


    RT remote terminal
    RVSM reduced vertical separation minima

    SCFM standard cubic feet per minute


    SD secure data
    SSM sign status matrix

    TAS traffic advisory system


    TAWS terrain awareness & warning system
    TCAS traffic alert & collision avoidance system
    TCS touch control steering

    V volt
    VOR VHF omni-range

    WAAS wide area augmentation system


    WOW weight on wheels

    XFER transfer
    XPNDR transponder

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-00-00-00-00A-007A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-03 Page 3
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-00-00-00-00A-007A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-03 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    GENERAL

    AMM RECORD OF SERVICE BULLETINS

    Table of Contents Page

    GENERAL - AMM RECORD OF SERVICE BULLETINS........................................................... 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 2
    2 Chapter 4 - Airworthiness Limitations..................................................................... 3
    3 Chapter 5 - Scheduled/Unscheduled Servicing...................................................... 3
    4 Chapter 11 - Placards............................................................................................. 3
    5 Chapter 21 - Environmental Control....................................................................... 3
    6 Chapter 22 - Auto Flight......................................................................................... 4
    7 Chapter 23 - Communications................................................................................ 4
    8 Chapter 24 - Electrical Power................................................................................. 4
    9 Chapter 25 - Equipment/Furnishings...................................................................... 5
    10 Chapter 26 - Fire Protection................................................................................... 5
    11 Chapter 27 - Flight Controls................................................................................... 5
    12 Chapter 28 - Fuel.................................................................................................... 5
    13 Chapter 29 - Hydraulic Power................................................................................ 5
    14 Chapter 30 - Ice and Rain Protection..................................................................... 6
    15 Chapter 31 - Indicating/Recording Systems........................................................... 6
    16 Section 32 - Landing Gear...................................................................................... 6
    17 Chapter 33 - Lights................................................................................................. 6
    18 Chapter 34 - Navigation.......................................................................................... 7
    19 Chapter 35 - Oxygen.............................................................................................. 7
    20 Chapter 45 - Central Maintenance System............................................................ 8
    21 Chapter 46 - Systems Integration and Display....................................................... 8
    22 Chapter 52 - Doors................................................................................................. 8
    23 Chapter 53 - Fuselage............................................................................................ 9
    24 Chapter 55 - Stabilizers.......................................................................................... 9
    25 Chapter 56 - Windows............................................................................................ 9
    26 Chapter 57 - Wings................................................................................................. 9
    27 Chapter 71 - Power Plant....................................................................................... 9
    28 Chapter 72 - Engine............................................................................................... 9
    29 Chapter 73 - Engine Fuel and Control.................................................................... 10
    30 Chapter 74 - Ignition............................................................................................... 10
    31 Chapter 76 - Engine Controls................................................................................. 10
    32 Chapter 77 - Engine Indicating............................................................................... 10
    33 Chapter 78 - Exhaust.............................................................................................. 10
    34 Chapter 79 - Oil...................................................................................................... 10
    35 Chapter 80 - Starting.............................................................................................. 11

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 2
    2 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 4....................................................................... 3
    3 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 5....................................................................... 3
    4 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 11..................................................................... 3
    5 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 21..................................................................... 3
    6 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 22..................................................................... 4
    7 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 23..................................................................... 4

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-00-00-00-00A-017A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-13 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    8 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 24..................................................................... 4


    9 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 25..................................................................... 5
    10 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 26..................................................................... 5
    11 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 27..................................................................... 5
    12 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 28..................................................................... 5
    13 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 29..................................................................... 5
    14 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 30..................................................................... 6
    15 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 31..................................................................... 6
    16 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 32..................................................................... 6
    17 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 33..................................................................... 6
    18 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 34..................................................................... 7
    19 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 35..................................................................... 7
    20 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 45..................................................................... 8
    21 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 46..................................................................... 8
    22 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 52..................................................................... 8
    23 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 53..................................................................... 9
    24 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 55..................................................................... 9
    25 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 56..................................................................... 9
    26 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 57..................................................................... 9
    27 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 71..................................................................... 9
    28 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 72..................................................................... 9
    29 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 73..................................................................... 10
    30 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 74..................................................................... 10
    31 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 76..................................................................... 10
    32 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 77..................................................................... 10
    33 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 78..................................................................... 10
    34 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 79..................................................................... 10
    35 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 80..................................................................... 11

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description

    1 General
    This Data Module gives a record of Service Bulletins.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-00-00-00-00A-017A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-13 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2 Chapter 4 - Airworthiness Limitations


    Table 2 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 4
    SB number Issue Date Title Incorporated in
    Revision
    04-009 Mar 31/08Nov Life extension No effect
    29/12
    Rev 3 No effect
    04-010 Oct 22/09 Canadian Registration of PC-12/47E Aircraft No effect
    Rev 1 Jul 05/12 No effect
    04-011 Nov 19/08 CIS Registration of PC-12/47E Aircraft No effect

    04-012 Jun 22/09 Life extension to 27,500 flight hours or 33,000 flights (available No effect
    on request only)
    04-013 Nov 06/09 Certification for China CAAC (available on request only) No effect
    Rev 1 Nov 14/11 No effect
    04-014 Aug 17/10 Life extension to 30,000 flying hours or 36,000 landings (MSN No effect
    244 only)
    04-015 Feb 20/14 Certification for New Zealand Standard PC-12 Series Aircraft No effect
    04-016 May 07/14 Certification for Malaysia Standard PC-12 Series Aircraft No effect

    3 Chapter 5 - Scheduled/Unscheduled Servicing


    Table 3 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 5
    SB number Issue Date Title Incorporated in
    Revision

    4 Chapter 11 - Placards
    Table 4 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 11
    SB number Issue Date Title Incorporated in
    Revision
    11-004 Aug 02/10 Replace the flight compartment Vo speeds placard No effect
    Rev 1 Nov 26/10 No effect
    11-005 Mar 01/12 Revised fuel filler placard No effect
    11-006 Mar 01/12 Replace the oxygen charging pressure and engine oil placards No effect

    5 Chapter 21 - Environmental Control


    Table 5 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 21
    SB number Issue Date Title Incorporated in
    Revision
    21-010 Jan 12/09 Replacement of the Environmental Control System (ECS) 1
    Controller
    21-011 Oct 22/09 Introduction of Cabin Pressure Control Unit P/N No effect
    21-012 Apr 29/13 Replace VCCS Pressure Switch No effect

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-00-00-00-00A-017A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-13 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    6 Chapter 22 - Auto Flight


    Table 6 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 22
    SB number Issue Date Title Incorporated in
    Revision
    22-005 Oct 21/09 Flight Control Panel with VNAV button. 3

    7 Chapter 23 - Communications
    Table 7 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 23
    SB number Issue Date Title Incorporated in
    Revision
    23-005 Jun 11/08 Replacement of Multi Mode Digital Radio (MMDR) KTR 2280 1
    Radios
    23-006 Dec 16/09 Static discharging bonding improvements No effect
    Rev 1 Nov 22/12 No effect
    23-007 Sep 21/11 Headset microphone jack wiring No effect
    23-008 - Applicable to PC-12 aircraft -
    23-009 Oct 17/12 MMDR software upgrade No effect
    Rev 1 Nov 07/12 No effect

    8 Chapter 24 - Electrical Power


    Table 8 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 24
    SB number Issue Date Title Incorporated in
    Revision
    24-025 Sep 24/09 Introduction of Battery and External Power Junction Box P/N No effect
    974.03.38.142
    24-026 Sep 21/10 Inspect the clamping bands on plugs PB361 and PB362 No effect
    24-027 Jun 08/11 Inspect the gap between current sensor and busbar (LHPJB) No effect
    24-028 Jul 20/11 Installation of water protection for electrical equipment panel, 7
    frame 10
    24-029 Sep 30/11 Installation of Nickel cadmium Batteries in lieu Sealed Lead 7
    Acid
    24-030 Mar 08/12 Reroute and protect wing root harnesses No effect
    24-031 Apr 17/12 Inspection of power cables rear fuselage No effect
    24-032 Apr 04/12 Jun Replace RH power junction box ident plate No effect
    04/12
    Rev 1
    24-033 Apr 04/12 Generator common spares No effect
    Rev 1 Oct 15/13
    24-035 Nov 23/12 Protection of the engine bay electrical harness No effect

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-00-00-00-00A-017A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-13 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    9 Chapter 25 - Equipment/Furnishings
    Table 9 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 25
    SB number Issue Date Title Incorporated in
    Revision
    25-034 Oct 22/09 Installation of Supplementary Heating for Cold Weather 1
    Operations
    Rev 1 Jan 24/13
    25-035 Oct 22/09 Installation of Supplementary Heating for Cold Weather 1
    Operations
    Rev 2 Jan 24/13 No effect
    25-036 Nov 12/12 Cabin Configuration MSN 1209 (factory modification only) No effect
    25-037 Jan 23/14 Cabin Configuration MSN 1390 (factory modification only) No effect

    10 Chapter 26 - Fire Protection


    Table 10 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 26
    SB number Issue Date Title Incorporated in
    Revision
    26-001 May 12/10 Alternative cockpit fire extinguisher No effect

    11 Chapter 27 - Flight Controls


    Table 11 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 27
    SB number Issue Date Title Incorporated in
    Revision
    27-018 Nov 27/07 Replace the bolts on the cable clamps for the Stick Pusher 1
    Servo cables
    27-020 Jan 20/09 Do a check of the tension of the stick pusher servo cables 1
    Rev 1 Jan 30/09 No effect

    12 Chapter 28 - Fuel
    Table 12 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 28
    SB number Issue Date Title Incorporated in
    Revision
    28-012 Sep 04/08 Replacement of the Fuel Control Monitoring Unit (FCMU) 1

    13 Chapter 29 - Hydraulic Power


    Table 13 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 29
    SB number Issue Date Title Incorporated in
    Revision

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-00-00-00-00A-017A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-13 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    14 Chapter 30 - Ice and Rain Protection


    Table 14 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 30
    SB number Issue Date Title Incorporated in
    Revision

    15 Chapter 31 - Indicating/Recording Systems


    Table 15 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 31
    SB number Issue Date Title Incorporated in
    Revision
    31-009 Nov 26/10 Modification of the Overhead Panel pushbutton switches No effect
    31-010 Dec 22/10 Replacement of the AGM modules in the MAU No effect
    Rev 1 Mar 09/11 No effect
    31-011 Jan 18/11 Installation of an APEX Video Input system 5
    31-012 Jul 04/12 Installation of a Cockpit Voice and Flight Data Recorder 5
    Rev 3 Apr 14/11 11
    31-013 Sep 15/11 Replacement of the Overhead Control Panel Bus Tie Circuit No effect
    Breaker
    31-015 Wiring change to the Davtron Clock power supply 9
    Mar 08/12
    Rev 2 9
    31-016 Mar 08/12 Replace Thommen clock with Davtron clock 9
    31-018 Aug 09/13 Installation of New Modular Avionics Unit GIO and CSIO No effect
    Modules in conjunction with SB46-004

    16 Section 32 - Landing Gear


    Table 16 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 32
    SB number Issue Date Title Incorporated in
    Revision
    32-021 Nov 21/08 Replacement of the NWS crank bar assembly 1
    32-022 Nov 17/09 Replace the stainless steel brake lines and swivel joints with 1
    flexible hoses
    32-023 Dec 15/09 Nose landing gear steering rod retention improvement 4
    32-024 Dec 03/12 Improvements to the Emergency Gear Extension System No effect
    (MSN1300 Only)

    17 Chapter 33 - Lights
    Table 17 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 33
    SB number Issue Date Title Incorporated in
    Revision
    33-012 Apr 10/14 Replace Incandescent Landing and Taxi Lights With LED 11
    Lights

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-00-00-00-00A-017A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-13 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    18 Chapter 34 - Navigation
    Table 18 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 34
    SB number Issue Date Title Incorporated in
    Revision
    34-014 Dec 05/08 Remove the connection between the Weather Radar and the 1
    Weight-On-Wheels (WOW) Switch
    34-015 Nov 13/08 Replace the Air Data, Attitude and Heading Reference System No effect
    (ADAHRS) unit
    34-016 Dec 16/08 Remove the Autopilot engaged signal from the EGPWS 1
    34-017 Dec 15/08 Changes to the GPS wiring 1
    34-018 Jan 09/09 Replace the Air Data Attitude and Heading Reference System 1
    (ADAHRS) Unit
    34-019 Not issued -
    34-020 Oct 22/09 Installation of WAAS GPS system 3
    Rev 1 Jul 05/10 No effect
    34-021 Oct 09/09 Installation of a Heading/Track Override Switch 3
    34-022 Oct 05/09 Upgrade the ADAHRS software No effect
    34-023 Oct 21/09 Installation of a second GPS system No effect
    Rev 2 Aug 29/11 No effect
    34-024 Oct 21/09 Installation of an XM Satellite Weather system No effect
    34-026 Jun 30/10 Honeywell SBAS capable GNSSU 5
    Rev 3 Sep 01/11 No effect
    34-027 Jul 06/10 Correction to the ADAHRS magnetometer pitch and roll offsets 5
    34-028 Sep 29/10 Replace the ADAHRS No effect
    Rev 1 Nov 28/11 No effect
    34-032 Sep 28/11 Introduction of GNSSU P/N 985.99.12.227 No effect
    34-033 Nov 28/11 Replace the ADAHRS No effect
    Rev 1 Jun 04/13 No effect
    34-034 - Applicable to PC-12 Aircraft -
    34-035 Aug 27/12 Introduction of GNSSU P/N 985.99.12.253 No effect
    34-036 Dec 05/12 ESIS magnetometer mounting correction data label 9
    34-037 Jan 11/13 Introduction of EGPWS Mk. VIII Computer
    34-038 Mar 26/13 Modification to the ESIS Power Return Wires No effect
    34-039 Oct 31/13 Improvement of the Pitot Pipe Line No effect
    Rev 1 Mar 14/14

    19 Chapter 35 - Oxygen
    Table 19 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 35
    SB number Issue Date Title Incorporated in
    Revision
    35-006 Dec 06/12 Replacement of the oxygen shut-off valve 9
    Rev 1 May 16/13 No effect

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-00-00-00-00A-017A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-13 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    20 Chapter 45 - Central Maintenance System


    Table 20 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 45
    SB number Issue Date Title Incorporated in
    Revision
    45-001 Jan 12/09 Upgrade the Honeywell Primus APEX software to Build 5.X 1
    Rev 2 Jun 20/11 No effect
    45-002 Mar 30/09 Upgrade the Honeywell Primus APEX software to Build 5.3.1 No effect
    Rev 1 Jun 27/11 No effect
    45-003 Oct 22/09 Upgrade the Honeywell Primus APEX software to Build 6 3
    Rev 2 Jun 27/11 No effect
    45-004 Sep 18/09 Activate Factory options software No effect
    Rev 4 May 17/13 No effect
    45-005 Dec 22/10 Upgrade the Honeywell Primus APEX software to Build 7 1
    Rev 3 Nov 10/11 6
    45-006 May 13/11 Inspection of SYS 2 wiring crimps and splices No effect
    45-007 Jun 13/12 Replace the MAU Network Interface Cards (available on No effect
    request)
    Rev 1 Aug 12/13
    45-008 Dec 22/11 Upgrade the Honeywell Primus APEX software to Build 8 9
    45-009 Apr 04/12 Upgrade the Honeywell Primus APEX software to Build 8.3.3 9

    21 Chapter 46 - Systems Integration and Display


    Table 21 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 46
    SB number Issue Date Title Incorporated in
    Revision
    46-001 Jan 09/09 Replace the Multi Function Controller Jan 30/09
    46-002 - Not issued -
    46-003 May 06/10 Installation of a Cursor Control Device 5
    Rev 3 Dec 23/10 No effect
    46-004 Nov 15/13 Install a wireless data loading/downloading system Rev 10
    Rev 5 Mar 25/14
    46-005 Oct 28-13 Introduction of Protection on the Pilot PFD and MFD Wiring No effect
    Looms

    22 Chapter 52 - Doors
    Table 22 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 52
    SB number Issue Date Title Incorporated in
    Revision
    52–008 May 12/14 Introduction of a New Door Handle Switch 11

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-00-00-00-00A-017A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-13 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    23 Chapter 53 - Fuselage
    Table 23 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 53
    SB number Issue Date Title Incorporated in
    Revision
    53-005 Jul 10/09 Inspect frame 13 lightening holes for edge protection No effect

    24 Chapter 55 - Stabilizers
    Table 24 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 55
    SB number Issue Date Title Incorporated in
    Revision

    25 Chapter 56 - Windows
    Table 25 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 56
    SB number Issue Date Title Incorporated in
    Revision

    26 Chapter 57 - Wings
    Table 26 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 57
    SB number Issue Date Title Incorporated in
    Revision
    57-006 Aug 16/12 Inspection of the flap support arm attachments 9

    27 Chapter 71 - Power Plant


    Table 27 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 71
    SB number Issue Date Title Incorporated in
    Revision

    28 Chapter 72 - Engine
    Table 28 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 72
    SB number Issue Date Title Incorporated in
    Revision
    72-003 Jan 13/11 Replace First Stage Carrier Retaining Bolts No effect
    72-004 Sep 16/13 P&WC Service Bulletin No. 14357R1 No effect

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-00-00-00-00A-017A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-13 Page 9


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    29 Chapter 73 - Engine Fuel and Control


    Table 29 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 73
    SB number Issue Date Title Incorporated in
    Revision

    30 Chapter 74 - Ignition
    Table 30 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 74
    SB number Issue Date Title Incorporated in
    Revision

    31 Chapter 76 - Engine Controls


    Table 31 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 76
    SB number Issue Date Title Incorporated in
    Revision
    76-002 Oct 15/09 Power Control Lever Reverse Thrust Latch sticking No effect
    Rev 1 Jul 07/11 No effect

    32 Chapter 77 - Engine Indicating


    Table 32 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 77
    SB number Issue Date Title Incorporated in
    Revision

    33 Chapter 78 - Exhaust
    Table 33 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 78
    SB number Issue Date Title Incorporated in
    Revision

    34 Chapter 79 - Oil
    Table 34 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 79
    SB number Issue Date Title Incorporated in
    Revision
    79-007 Sep 24/09 Removal of the Oil Debris Monitoring System (ODMS) 1
    Rev 1 No effect

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-00-00-00-00A-017A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-13 Page 10


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    35 Chapter 80 - Starting
    Table 35 List of Service Bulletins - Chapter 80
    SB number Issue Date Title Incorporated in
    Revision

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-00-00-00-00A-017A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-13 Page 11
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-00-00-00-00A-017A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-13 Page 12


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    GENERAL

    INTRODUCTION

    Table of Contents Page

    GENERAL - INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................... 1
    1 General................................................................................................................... 1
    2 Occurrence Reporting Requirement....................................................................... 2
    3 IETP Revisions....................................................................................................... 2
    4 Warnings, Cautions and Notes............................................................................... 3
    5 Standard Numbering System (SNS) - Data Module Code..................................... 3
    5.1 Model Identification Code....................................................................................... 3
    5.2 System Difference Code......................................................................................... 3
    5.3 Standard Numbering System................................................................................. 3
    5.4 Disassembly code.................................................................................................. 3
    5.5 Disassembly code variant....................................................................................... 3
    5.6 Information Code.................................................................................................... 3
    5.7 Information Code variant........................................................................................ 4
    5.8 Item location code.................................................................................................. 4
    6 Manual Standard Numbering System..................................................................... 4
    7 Punctuation in Units of Weight and Measurement................................................. 8
    8 Consumable Materials............................................................................................ 8
    9 List of Abbreviations............................................................................................... 8
    10 Requests for Revisions........................................................................................... 8

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-00-00-00-00A-007A-A LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    PublicationRevisionRequest.pdf

    Description

    1 General
    This manual has been prepared using the Aerospace Specification S1000D and is assembled from Data Modules
    (DM), which are written in AECMA Simplified English (SE).
    The maintenance manual gives instructions for maintenance personnel to service and maintain the PC-12/47E
    Series aircraft. The aircraft Series can be identified by referring to the Aircraft Identification Plate installed aft of the
    cargo door. The maintenance manual provides sufficient information to inspect, fault isolate and to complete the

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-00-00-00-00A-018A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-11 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    removal/installation and test/adjustment of equipment as well as the repair of certain systems. To provide as
    complete as coverage as possible, optional equipment has been included in the manual.
    Information which is beyond the scope of this manual may be found in the following manuals:
    − Structural Repair Manual Document No. 02305
    − Illustrated Parts Catalog Document No. 02308
    − Wiring Diagram Manual
    − Vendor Publications

    It is the responsibility of the owner to ensure that the latest revision of the manual is used for servicing and
    maintenance of the aircraft.
    If it is necessary to contact Pilatus Aircraft Ltd. about your aircraft, it is important to include the aircraft serial
    number in any correspondence. The serial number can be found on the manufacturers data placard.
    Use only parts that have been approved and certified by Pilatus and obtained from Pilatus approved sources for
    maintenance on the aircraft. Salvaged or reworked parts obtained from non Pilatus approved sources are
    unsuitable and unsafe for use on the aircraft.
    In the event that the aircraft should be maintained and/or operated with parts and/or components which are not
    approved by the seller and/or its supplier and vendor, all warranties will be rendered null and void upon installation
    of such parts and/or components. Pilatus expressly disclaims any and all liability including but not limited to liability
    for any loss or damage to property, injury or death, in association with any and all malfunctions and/or incidents
    and/or accidents involving such non approved parts and/or components.

    2 Occurrence Reporting Requirement


    EASA Implementing Rule Part 21A.3 “Failures, malfunctions and defects” requires Pilatus Aircraft to maintain a
    system for collection, investigation and analysis of aircraft malfunction data that fulfils the EASA Reporting Criteria
    (AMC 20–8) for any occurrence which is reported to the agency. To fulfil this requirement, Pilatus Aircraft requests
    that Operators and Service Centers report aircraft malfunctions using the “MyPilatus” internet portal, which will help
    Pilatus Aircraft to comply with this regulation.

    3 IETP Revisions
    This Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM) Document No. 02300 is part of the Interactive Electronic Technical
    Publication (IETP) set on the DVD, Document No. 02307. Regular revisions to the IETP set will be done to correct,
    change and add new information from Service Bulletins etc. The IETP revised information will be issued as a new
    replacement DVD. The DVD label will be identified with the latest Revision No. IETP. DVDs from the previous
    revision must then be destroyed. The opening statement on the DVD will show the IETP Revision No. The Revision
    Highlights will give a brief summary of the changes to the chapter topics and temporary revisions that have been
    included. Revised information is shown on a blue background by the IETP viewing software.
    The Record of Service Bulletins will be updated at each revision to show all Service Bulletins that have been issued
    and their IETP inclusion date if applicable.
    Temporary revisions are issued when the IETP must be revised between normal regular revisions. They are issued
    on yellow paper and must be kept in a folder which is to be made available to the maintenance personnel when
    working with the IETP DVD.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-00-00-00-00A-018A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-11 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    4 Warnings, Cautions and Notes


    These are used to stress important items in the text. Warnings and Cautions come immediately before the text to
    which they refer. Notes are put after the text to which they refer. The uses are given below:
    WARNING: Gives details of materials, processes, procedures or limits which must be followed to avoid injury to
    personnel.
    CAUTION: Gives details of methods or procedures which must be followed to avoid damage to equipment.
    NOTE: Used to give details of hints or tips which make the task easier for maintenance personnel.

    5 Standard Numbering System (SNS) - Data Module Code


    The data module code has 17 alpha numeric characters.

    5.1 Model Identification Code


    The Model Identification Code (MIC) is a number that identifies the data in the DM as PC-12.

    12 A 20 31 00 00 A 070 A A
    MIC SDC SNS SNS SNS DC DC IC IC Variant Item
    Chapter Section Subject Variant Location
    refer to refer to refer to refer to refer to refer to refer to refer to
    Para 5.1 Para 5.2 Para 5.3 Para 5.4 Para 5.5 Para 5.6 Para 5.7 Para 5.8

    5.2 System Difference Code


    The System Difference Code (SDC) can change to show a variant of an item in the same system. The SDC change
    is an indication that it is a different installation. For example it could have a different Manufacturer or the function is
    different.

    5.3 Standard Numbering System


    The Standard Numbering System (SNS) code contains three pairs of digits that identify the chapter, section and
    subject of the DM.

    5.4 Disassembly code


    The Disassembly code (DC) shows the level in that SNS.

    5.5 Disassembly code variant


    The Disassembly code variant shows an alternative or a different design. The difference is not sufficient to change
    the SDC.

    5.6 Information Code


    The Information Code (IC) displays the type of information in the DM. The information codes used in the manual
    are:
    − 040 - Description and Operation
    − 090 - List of Software
    − 250 - Cleaning

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-00-00-00-00A-018A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-11 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − 313 - Inspection/Check
    − 330 - Prepare Test Equipment
    − 331 - Connect Test Equipment
    − 361 - Allowable Wear
    − 420 - Fault Isolation
    − 520 - Removal
    − 550 - Load Software
    − 551 - Download Data
    − 552 - Erase Data
    − 553 - Change the Settings
    − 720 - Installation
    − 901 - Maintenance Practices
    − 902 - Servicing
    − 903 - Adjustment/Test
    − 904 - Component Repair
    − 920 - Removal/Installation

    5.7 Information Code variant


    The Information Code variant gives different data that is applicable to the same subject.

    5.8 Item location code


    The Item location code identifies the location of the content of the DM as follows:
    − A - On the air vehicle
    − B - On a removed engine or primary assembly
    − C - On the bench
    − D - Applicable for codes A, B and C.

    6 Manual Standard Numbering System


    The following SNS chapter/system, sub-chapter/sub-system breakdown is used in this manual:

    SYSTEM/ CHAPTER SUBSYSTEM/SECTION TITLE


    INTRODUCTION
    4 AIRWORTHINESS LIMITATIONS
    5 TIME LIMITS/MAINTENANCE CHECKS
    00 General
    10 Time Limits
    20 Scheduled Maintenance Checks
    50 Unscheduled Maintenance Checks
    6 DIMENSIONS AND AREAS
    00 General
    10 Dimensions and Zones
    20 Access Panels

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-00-00-00-00A-018A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-11 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    SYSTEM/ CHAPTER SUBSYSTEM/SECTION TITLE


    7 LIFTING AND SHORING
    00 General
    10 Jacking
    20 Shoring
    8 LEVELLING AND WEIGHING
    00 General
    10 Weighing
    20 Leveling
    9 TOWING AND TAXIING
    00 General
    10 Towing
    20 Taxiing
    10 PARKING AN MOORING
    00 General
    10 Parking/Storage
    20 Mooring
    30 Return to Service
    11 PLACARDS AND MARKINGS
    00 General
    20 Exterior Placards and Markings
    30 Interior Placards and Markings
    12 SERVICING
    00 General
    10 Replenishment
    20 Scheduled Servicing
    20 STANDARD PRACTICES
    20 Locking and Retaining Devices
    30 Consumable Materials List
    40 Corrosion
    50 Standard Practices
    21 AIR CONDITIONING
    00 General
    20 Distribution
    30 Pressurization Control
    40 Environmental Control System
    50 Cooling
    60 Temperature Control System
    22 AUTO FLIGHT
    00 General
    10 Autopilot
    20 Speed and Attitude Correction
    23 COMMUNICATIONS
    00 General
    10 Speech Communication
    40 Passenger Advisory System
    50 Audio Integrating
    60 Static Discharging
    24 ELECTRICAL POWER
    00 General
    30 DC Generation
    40 External Power
    50 Load Distribution
    60 12 VDC Auxiliary Power

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-00-00-00-00A-018A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-11 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    SYSTEM/ CHAPTER SUBSYSTEM/SECTION TITLE


    25 EQUIPMENT AND FURNISHINGS
    00 General
    10 Flight Compartment
    20 Passenger Compartment
    50 Cargo Compartment
    60 Emergency Equipment
    80 Insulation
    90 Cold Weather Preheater System
    26 FIRE PROTECTION
    00 General
    10 Detection
    20 Extinguishing
    27 FLIGHT CONTROLS
    00 General
    10 Aileron
    20 Rudder
    30 Elevator
    40 Horizontal Stabilizer
    50 Flaps
    70 Gust Lock
    28 FUEL
    00 General
    10 Storage
    20 Distribution
    40 Indicating
    29 HYDRAULIC POWER
    00 General
    10 Main
    20 Auxiliary
    30 ICE AND RAIN PROTECTION
    00 General
    10 Airfoil
    20 Air Intake
    30 Pitot and Static
    40 Windshield
    60 Propeller
    31 INDICATING/RECORDING SYSTEMS
    00 General
    10 Control Panels
    20 Independent Instruments
    40 Central Computers
    50 Central Warning System
    32 LANDING GEAR
    00 General
    10 Main Gear and Doors
    20 Nose Gear and Doors
    30 Extension and Retraction
    40 Wheels and Brakes
    50 Nose Wheel Steering
    60 Position and Warning
    33 LIGHTS
    00 General
    10 Flight Compartment

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-00-00-00-00A-018A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-11 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    SYSTEM/ CHAPTER SUBSYSTEM/SECTION TITLE


    20 Passenger Compartment
    30 Service Compartments
    40 Exterior
    34 NAVIGATION
    00 General
    10 Flight Environment Data
    20 Attitude and Direction
    30 Landing and Taxiing Aids
    40 Independent Position Determining
    50 Dependent Position Determining
    35 OXYGEN
    00 General
    10 Crew
    20 Passenger
    45 CENTRAL MAINTENANCE SYSTEM
    00 General
    45 Central Maintenance System Interface
    46 SYSTEMS INTEGRATION AND DISPLAY
    00 General
    30 Display
    52 DOORS
    00 General
    10 Passenger/Crew
    20 Emergency Exit
    30 Cargo
    40 Service
    70 Door Warning
    53 FUSELAGE
    00 General
    55 STABILIZERS
    00 General
    10 Horizontal Stabilizer
    20 Elevator
    30 Vertical Stabilizer
    40 Rudder
    56 WINDOWS
    00 General
    10 Flight Compartment
    20 Passenger Compartment
    57 WINGS
    00 General
    33 Wing Tip
    50 Flap
    60 Aileron
    61 PROPELLER
    00 General
    10 Propeller Assembly
    20 Controlling
    71 POWER PLANT
    00 General
    10 Cowling
    72 ENGINE
    00 General

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-00-00-00-00A-018A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-11 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    SYSTEM/ CHAPTER SUBSYSTEM/SECTION TITLE


    10 Power Section
    73 ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL
    00 General
    20 Controlling
    30 Indicating
    74 IGNITION
    00 General
    10 Electrical Power Supply
    20 Distribution
    76 ENGINE CONTROLS
    00 General
    10 Power Control
    20 Manual Override (MOR)
    77 ENGINE INDICATING
    00 General
    40 Integrated Engine Instrument System
    78 EXHAUST
    00 General
    10 Exhaust Stub
    79 OIL
    00 General
    20 Distribution
    30 Oil Debris Monitoring (ODM)
    80 STARTING
    00 General
    10 Automatic Starting

    7 Punctuation in Units of Weight and Measurement


    In this manual the decimal fraction is shown by a point in the Imperial/US units of weight and measurement, and by
    a comma in metric units.

    8 Consumable Materials
    Consumable materials used on the aircraft during maintenance procedures are listed in AMM 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A, Consumable Materials List. The list gives details of the material and gives a material
    number which is used throughout the manual.

    9 List of Abbreviations
    Refer to AMM 12-B-00-00-00-00A-007A-A for the list of abbreviations.

    10 Requests for Revisions


    If operators have suggestions for improvements to the content of the manual or errors are found, please submit the
    proposed changes (use this form PublicationRevisionRequest.pdf) by email to [email protected].

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-00-00-00-00A-018A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-11 Page 8
    PUBLICATION REVISION REQUEST
    Manual

    DM Pages

    Title

    REASON FOR CHANGE

    PROPOSED CHANGES

    Company Name/Date

    TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS REMARKS

    Name Signature/date

    Please sent an Email with your comments/changes directly to:


    [email protected]
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    GENERAL

    LIST OF SOFTWARE

    Table of Contents Page

    GENERAL - LIST OF SOFTWARE............................................................................................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description
    This DM gives the Primus APEX® software part numbers and associated hardware compatability tables (link to
    PrimusAPEXSoftwareP_NandHardwareCompatibility_Rev8_7.pdf).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-00-00-00-00A-090A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-11-08 Page 1
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-00-00-00-00A-090A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-11-08 Page 2


    PC-12/47E Software and Hardware Compatibility
    ECC

    Component Compatibility Config. Validation


    LRU Description Part Number Primus APEX Software Build Required
    Supplier Partnumber Supplier Media-Partnumber Pilatus 6 7 8 8.5 8.6 8.7
    Primus Apex Software
    Primus Apex System Build 6 Software EB7037248-00103 MM7037257-004 985.99.12.207 X Yes
    Primus Apex Option File, PC-12E TT60000070-xxx CTT60000070-xxx / CMD60000070-xxx 985.99.12.208 X No
    Primus Apex Settings File, PC-12E use B6 settings.def to create file MSNxxxx SETTINGS FILE N/A X No
    Loadable Diagnostic Interface (LDI) PC12_LDI_6_2_3 1 N/A 545.45.12.043 1 X No
    Build 6
    PC-APEX Simulation Tool (not installed on a/c) MM7800305-103 N/A 985.99.12.209 X No
    Tools Disk (not installed on a/c, includes Remote Terminal, APM Settings Tool) TM60000075-001 N/A 985.99.12.210 X No
    Remote Terminal part of TM60000075-001 RT 2.0 / DLS 5.0.1 985.99.12.210 X No
    APM Settings Tool part of TM60000075-001 APM Settings v2.1 985.99.12.210 X X X X X X No
    Primus Apex System Build 7 Software EB7037248-00104 MM7037257-005 985.99.12.223 X Yes
    Primus Apex Option File, PC-12E TT60000664-xxx CTT60000664-xxx / CMD60000664-xxx 985.99.12.224 X No
    Primus Apex Settings File, PC-12E use B7 settings.def to create file MSNxxxx SETTINGS FILE N/A X No
    Loadable Diagnostic Interface (LDI) PC12_LDI_7_1_14 N/A 545.45.12.044 X No
    Build 7 PC-APEX Simulation Tool (not installed on a/c) MM7800305-104 N/A 985.99.12.226 X No
    Tools Disk (not installed on a/c, includes Remote Terminal, APM Settings Tool) TM60000075-003 or -101 2 N/A 985.99.12.225 or .246 X No
    Remote Terminal part of TM60000075-003 or -101 RT 3.1 / DLS 5.0.2 985.99.12.225 or .246 X No
    APM Settings Tool part of TM60000075-003 or -101 APM Settings v2.1 985.99.12.225 or .246 X X X X X X No
    Primus Apex System Build 8 Software EB7037248-00106 4
    MM7037257-007 4 985.99.12.248 4 X Yes
    Primus Apex Option File, PC-12E TT60000930-xxx CTT60000930-xxx / CMD60000930-xxx 985.99.12.234 X No
    Primus Apex Settings File, PC-12E 7 MSNxxxx SETTINGS FILE N/A X X X X No
    use B8 settings.def to create file
    Build 8 Loadable Diagnostic Interface (LDI) PC12_LDI_8_3_3 5 N/A 545.45.12.046 5 X No
    PC-APEX Simulation Tool (not installed on a/c) MM7800305-105 N/A 985.99.12.235 X X X X No
    Tools Disk (not installed on a/c, includes Remote Terminal, APM Settings Tool) TM60000075-005 or -1022 N/A 985.99.12.237 or .247 X No
    Remote Terminal part of TM60000075-005 or -102 RT 4.1 / DLS 7.1.1 985.99.12.237 or .247 X No
    APM Settings Tool part of TM60000075-005 or -102 APM Settings v2.1 985.99.12.237 or .247 X X X X X X No
    Primus Apex System Build 8.5 Software EB60000487-0107 MM60000486-008 985.99.12.256 X Yes
    Primus Apex Option File, PC-12E TT60001152-xxx CTT60001152-xxx / CMD60001152-xxx 985.99.12.255 X X X No
    7
    Primus Apex Settings File, PC-12E use B8 or B8.5 settings.def to create file MSNxxxx SETTINGS FILE N/A X X X X No
    Loadable Diagnostic Interface (LDI) PC12_LDI_8_5_14 N/A 545.45.12.047 X X X No
    Build 8.5
    PC-APEX Simulation Tool (not installed on a/c) MM7800305-105 N/A 985.99.12.235 X X X X No
    Tools Disk (not installed on a/c, includes Remote Terminal, APM Settings Tool) TM60000075-104 N/A 985.99.12.257 X X X No
    Remote Terminal part of TM60000075-104 RT 5.3 / DLS 7.1.2 985.99.12.257 X X X No
    APM Settings Tool part of TM60000075-104 APM Settings v2.1 985.99.12.257 X X X X X X No
    Primus Apex System Build 8.6 Software EB60000487-0108 MM60000486-009 985.99.12.260 X Yes
    Primus Apex Option File, PC-12E TT60001152-xxx CTT60001152-xxx / CMD60001152-xxx 985.99.12.255 X X X No
    7
    Primus Apex Settings File, PC-12E use B8, B8.5 or B8.6 settings.def to create file MSNxxxx SETTINGS FILE N/A X X X X No
    Loadable Diagnostic Interface (LDI) PC12_LDI_8_5_14 N/A 545.45.12.047 X X X No
    Build 8.6
    PC-APEX Simulation Tool (not installed on a/c) MM7800305-105 N/A 985.99.12.235 X X X X No
    Tools Disk (not installed on a/c, includes Remote Terminal, APM Settings Tool) TM60000075-104 N/A 985.99.12.257 X X X No
    Remote Terminal part of TM60000075-104 RT 5.3 / DLS 7.1.2 985.99.12.257 X X X No
    APM Settings Tool part of TM60000075-104 APM Settings v2.1 985.99.12.257 X X X X X X No
    Primus Apex System Build 8.7 Software EB60000487-0109 MM60000486-010 985.99.12.266 X Yes
    Primus Apex Option File, PC-12E TT60001152-xxx CTT60001152-xxx / CMD60001152-xxx 985.99.12.255 X X X No
    7
    Primus Apex Settings File, PC-12E use B8, B8.5,B8.6 or B8.7 settings.def to create file MSNxxxx SETTINGS FILE N/A X X X X No
    Loadable Diagnostic Interface (LDI) PC12_LDI_8_5_14 N/A 545.45.12.047 X X X No
    Build 8.7
    PC-APEX Simulation Tool (not installed on a/c) MM7800305-105 N/A 985.99.12.235 X X X X No
    Tools Disk (not installed on a/c, includes Remote Terminal, APM Settings Tool) TM60000075-104 N/A 985.99.12.257 X X X No
    Remote Terminal part of TM60000075-104 RT 5.3 / DLS 7.1.2 985.99.12.257 X X X No
    APM Settings Tool part of TM60000075-104 APM Settings v2.1 985.99.12.257 X X X X X X No

    Revision: 8.7 - 08 October 2013 Page 1/2


    PC-12/47E Software and Hardware Compatibility
    ECC

    Component Compatibility Config. Validation


    LRU Description Part Number Primus APEX Software Build Required
    Supplier Partnumber Supplier Media-Partnumber Pilatus 6 7 8 8.5 8.6 8.7
    Primus Apex Databases
    6
    Purple Disk (Build 6) WORLD-xxx or EURAME-xxx or AUSASP-xxx or AMRATL-xxx (depending X X X X X
    Purple Disk (Build 7) 6 888.309.7555 or 303.328.6948 on subscription); includes iNav-16M FMS Database, Transportation & N/A X X X X X No
    Purple Disk (Builds 8 and up) Cities 12-2008 (AGM_CRH Database) X X X X
    Green Disk 888.309.7555 or 303.328.6948 996-0146-xxx N/A X X X X X X No
    Blue Disk 888.309.7555 or 303.328.6948 CHART_DISC_xx-yyyy N/A X X X X X X No
    Checklist Database N/A ApexPC12 or as applicable N/A X X X X X X No
    Apex FMS Performance Database MM60000461-002 (or -001) APEX-PDB-60000461-002-06 (or -001-06) 985.99.12.215 X X X X X X No
    ADAHRS
    065-00188-5103 (sw mod 0301) or 985.99.12.205 or
    KSG 7200 Dual Channel ADAHRS X X X X X X N/A
    065-00188-5103 (hw mod 3) 985.99.12.220
    Dual Channel ADAHRS 065-00188-5103 (hw mod 4 and 5) 985.99.12.245 X X X X X X N/A
    222-30197-0006 731-30197-0006-KSG 7100/7200
    ADAHRS Certification File 985.99.12.206 X X X X X X N/A
    (ID/Version number: 577/4) PILATUS PC-12/47E CERTIFICATION FILE
    GNSS Receiver
    KGS 200 GPS Receiver (non SBAS) 066-01201-0101 N/A 985.99.12.155 X X X X X X N/A
    CMA-3024 GPS Receiver (SBAS), GPS #1 only HG2021GD04 N/A 985.99.12.201 X N/A
    KGS 200 SBAS GPS Receiver (SBAS) 066-01201-0102 N/A 985.99.12.191 X X X X X X N/A
    KGS 200 SBAS GPS Receiver (SBAS) 066-01201-0104 N/A 985.99.12.227 X X X X X X N/A
    KGS 200 SBAS GPS Receiver (SBAS) 066-01201-0105 N/A 985.99.12.253 X X X X X X N/A
    Flight Guidance Panel
    KMC 9200 Flight Guidance Panel 071-01597-0201 N/A 985.99.12.112 X X3 X3 X3 X3 X3 N/A
    KMC 9200 Flight Guidance Panel with VNAV button 071-01597-0401 N/A 985.99.12.204 X X X X X X N/A
    NIC Module
    NIC 200 NIC Module 7026542-1801 N/A 985.99.12.148 X X X X X X N/A
    NG NIC NIC Module 7038231-1801 N/A 985.99.12.231 X X X X N/A
    AGM Module
    AGM Module AGM Module 7036410-1902 N/A 985.99.12.157 X X X X X X N/A
    AGM Module AGM Module 7036410-1904 N/A 985.99.12.222 X X X X X N/A
    CSIO Module
    CSIO Module CSIO Module 7036333-1902 N/A 985.99.12.151 X X X X X X N/A
    CSIO Module CSIO Module 7036333-1906 N/A 985.99.12.251 X X X N/A
    GIO Module
    GIO Module GIO Module 7025365-1901 N/A 985.99.12.146 X X X X X X N/A
    GIO Module GIO Module 7038622-1901 N/A 985.99.12.252 X X X N/A
    Cursor Control Device
    CCD Assembly CCD Assembly N/A N/A 531.13.12.092 X N/A
    CCD Assembly CCD Assembly with Display Select N/A N/A 531.13.12.099 X X X X X N/A
    Video Input Box
    VHB2412 RIB Switch and Interface Module VHB2412-200 N/A 975.95.01.107 X X X X X N/A
    CVFDR
    CVFDR FRED File Flight Data Recorder Definition File for Apex Build 7 N/A N/A 531.30.12.023 X N/A
    CVFDR FRED File Flight Data Recorder Definition File for Apex Build 8 and Up N/A N/A 531.30.12.027 X X X X N/A
    CVFDR Data Analysis Tool Data Analysis Software for Apex Build 7 and Up N/A N/A 513.31.12.002 X X X X X N/A
    1
    Note: PC12_LDI_6_2_0 is superseded by PC12_LDI_6_2_3 / 545.45.12.042 is superseded by 545.45.12.043
    2
    Note: The -1xx part numbers are also fully compatible with Windows 7 (32- and 64-bit)
    3
    Note: Only compatible if Coupled VNAV Option is not installed.
    4
    Note: For Apex Build 8 software, EB7037248-00105 is superceded by EB7037248-00106 / MM7037257-006 is superceded by MM7037257-007 / 985.99.12.236 is superceded by 985.99.12.248
    5
    Note: PC12_LDI_8_3_2 is superseded by PC12_LDI_8_3_3 / 545.45.12.045 is superseded by 545.45.12.046
    6
    Note: Databases for Builds 6 and 7 are compatible with APEX Builds 8 and up but not all procedures are available. Operators are requested to contact INDS after their aircraft is updated to B8 to change their subscription to the Build 8 database.
    7
    Note: There is no change to the settings file between B8, B8.5, B8.6 and B8.7. Therefore the existing B8 (or higher) APM Settings file can be used for the APEX B8.5, B8.6 or B8.7 Load, or, a new one can be created using either the B8, B8.5, B8.6 or B8.7 settings.def file.

    Revision: 8.7 - 08 October 2013 Page 2/2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    STRUCTURAL AND COMPONENT LIMITATIONS

    AIRWORTHINESS LIMITATIONS

    Table of Contents Page

    STRUCTURAL AND COMPONENT LIMITATIONS - AIRWORTHINESS LIMITATIONS.......... 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 4
    2 Structural Limitations.............................................................................................. 5
    3 Component Limitations........................................................................................... 5
    4 Miscellaneous Limitations....................................................................................... 6
    5 Supplemental Structural Inspection Document...................................................... 7
    5.1 Limit of Validity....................................................................................................... 7
    5.2 Authorisation........................................................................................................... 7
    5.3 Deviation from Type Design................................................................................... 7
    5.4 Supplemental Corrosion Prevention and Control Program (CPCP)....................... 8
    5.5 Damage Tolerance Evaluation............................................................................... 8
    6 Component Life...................................................................................................... 8
    7 Inspection Program................................................................................................ 9

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Structural Limitations.............................................................................................. 5
    3 Component Limitations........................................................................................... 5
    4 Miscellaneous Limitations....................................................................................... 6
    5 Component Life...................................................................................................... 8
    6 Supplemental Structural Inspection Program......................................................... 9

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-05-20-30-00A-280A-A SUPPLEMENTAL STRUCTURAL INSPECTION
    DOCUMENT - INSPECTIONS
    12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A CORROSION CONTROL - MAINTENANCE
    PRACTICES
    12-B-21-30-00-00A-903A-A PRESSURIZATION CONTROL - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-27-00-01-00A-352A-A FLIGHT CONTROLS – CONTROL RODS - MAGNETIC
    PARTICLE INSPECTION
    12-B-27-00-01-00A-353A-A FLIGHT CONTROLS – CONTROL RODS - EDDY
    CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-27-10-00-00A-310A-A AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM - EXAMINE
    12-B-27-10-08-00A-352B-A AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM – FUSELAGE
    BELLCRANK - MAGNETIC PARTICLE INSPECTION
    12-B-27-10-08-00A-353A-A AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM – OUTER WING
    BELLCRANK - EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-04-00-00-00A-000A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-13 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Data module/Technical publication Title


    12-B-27-10-08-00A-353B-A AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM – FUSELAGE
    BELLCRANK - EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-27-10-09-00A-353A-A AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM – FUSELAGE CABLE
    QUADRANT - EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-27-20-00-00A-310A-A RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM - EXAMINE
    12-B-27-20-04-00A-353A-A RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM – BELLCRANK - EDDY
    CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-27-20-05-00A-310A-A RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM – CABLE QUADRANT -
    EXAMINE
    12-B-27-30-00-00A-310A-A ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM - EXAMINE
    12-B-27-30-05-00A-353A-A ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM – CONTROL LEVER
    - EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-27-40-00-00A-903A-A HORIZONTAL STABILIZER TRIM - ADJUSTMENT/
    TEST
    12-B-27-40-02-00A-920A-A HORIZONTAL STABILIZER TRIM – TRIM ACTUATOR
    FAILSAFE PLATES - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-27-51-00-00A-310A-A FLAP DRIVE SYSTEM - EXAMINE
    12-B-27-51-00-00A-313A-A FLAP DRIVE SYSTEM - IN SITU INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-27-51-00-00A-353A-A FLAP DRIVE SYSTEM - IN SITU EDDY CURRENT
    INSPECTION
    12-B-27-51-01-00A-353A-A FLAP DRIVE SYSTEM – WING – INBOARD
    MECHANISM - EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-27-51-02-00A-353A-A FLAP DRIVE SYSTEM – WING – CENTER
    MECHANISM - EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-27-51-03-00A-353A-A FLAP DRIVE SYSTEM – WING – OUTBOARD
    MECHANISM - EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-32-10-06-00A-313A-A MAIN GEAR AND DOORS – SPRING STRUT -
    INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-32-20-06-00A-313A-A DRAG LINK RIGHT PART - INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-32-30-08-00A-903A-A LANDING GEAR RELAY UNIT – ELECTRO
    MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-32-30-10-00A-903A-A EMERGENCY GEAR EXTENSION SYSTEM –
    ELECTRO MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-52-10-00-00A-310A-A PASSENGER/CREW DOOR - EXAMINE
    12-B-52-20-00-00A-310A-A EMERGENCY EXIT - EXAMINE
    12-B-52-30-00-00A-310A-A CARGO DOOR - EXAMINE
    12-B-53-00-00-00A-310A-A FUSELAGE - ANTENNA STRUCTURE – EXAMINE
    12-B-53-00-00-00A-353A-A FUSELAGE - ANTENNA STRUCTURE – EDDY
    CURRENT INSPECTION

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-04-00-00-00A-000A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-13 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Data module/Technical publication Title


    12-B-53-10-00-00A-310A-A FORWARD FUSELAGE - EXAMINE
    12-B-53-10-06-01A-353A-A FORWARD FUSELAGE – FRAME 10 LONGERONS -
    EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-53-10-16-00A-310A-A FORWARD FUSELAGE – WINDOW STRUCTURE -
    EXAMINE
    12-B-53-20-00-00A-310A-A CENTER FUSELAGE - EXAMINE
    12-B-53-20-02-00A-310A-A CENTER FUSELAGE FRAMES – CARRY THROUGH
    FRAMES - EXAMINE
    12-B-53-20-02-00A-353A-A CENTER FUSELAGE FRAMES – CARRY THROUGH
    FRAMES - EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-53-30-00-00A-310A-A REAR FUSELAGE - EXAMINE
    12-B-53-30-02-00A-353A-A REAR FUSELAGE FRAMES - EDDY CURRENT
    INSPECTION
    12-B-55-00-00-00A-353A-A VERTICAL STABILIZER ATTACHMENT FITTINGS -
    EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-55-20-00-00A-310A-A ELEVATORS - EXAMINE
    12-B-55-20-01-00A-353A-A ELEVATOR DRIVE LEVER AND HINGE - EDDY
    CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-55-30-00-00A-310A-A VERTICAL STABILIZER - EXAMINE
    12-B-55-30-02-00A-353A-A VERTICAL STABILIZER – PITCH TRIM ACTUATOR
    ATTACHMENT - EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-55-30-03-00A-353A-A VERTICAL STABILIZER SPARS - EDDY CURRENT
    INSPECTION
    12-B-55-40-00-00A-310A-A RUDDER - EXAMINE
    12-B-55-40-05-00A-353A-A RUDDER HINGE - EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-56-00-00-00A-313A-A WINDOWS - INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-56-11-01-00A-310A-A WINDSHIELD - EXAMINE
    12-B-56-11-02-00A-310A-A COCKPIT SIDE WINDOWS - EXAMINE
    12-B-57-00-00-00A-310A-A WINGS - EXAMINE
    12-B-57-00-03-00A-353A-A WING AND FUSELAGE ATTACHMENT FITTINGS -
    EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-57-00-03-01A-353A-A WING AND FUSELAGE ATTACHMENT FITTINGS –
    HOLLOW BOLTS - EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-57-20-05-00A-353A-A WING STRUCTURE – RIBS - EDDY CURRENT
    INSPECTION – RIB 6 STRAP
    12-B-57-20-10-00A-353A-A WING STRUCTURE – SPARS AND AUXILIARY
    STRUCTURE – MAIN SPAR - EDDY CURRENT
    INSPECTION

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-04-00-00-00A-000A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-13 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Data module/Technical publication Title


    12-B-57-20-10-00A-353B-A WING STRUCTURE – SPARS AND AUXILIARY
    STRUCTURE – REAR SPAR - EDDY CURRENT
    INSPECTION
    12-B-57-20-10-00A-353C-A WING STRUCTURE – SPARS AND AUXILIARY
    STRUCTURE – REAR SPAR - EDDY CURRENT
    INSPECTION
    12-B-57-20-10-00A-353D-A WING STRUCTURE – SPARS AND AUXILIARY
    STRUCTURE – MAIN SPAR – RIB 6 STRAP
    FASTENER - EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-57-60-00-00A-310A-A AILERONS - EXAMINE
    12-B-57-60-06-00A-353A-A AILERON HINGE - EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903D-A POWER PLANT TEST 3 – DC GENERATION SYSTEM
    - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-71-00-05-00A-352A-A POWERPLANT MOUNTING FRAME - MAGNETIC
    PARTICLE INSPECTION

    Description

    1 General
    The Airworthiness Limitations section is EASA approved and variations must also be approved.
    The Airworthiness Limitations section is also FAA approved for US registered aircraft in accordance with FAR
    21.29.
    The Airworthiness Limitations section is FAA approved and specifies maintenance required under Parts 43.16 and
    91.403 of the Federal Aviation Regulations unless an alternate program has been FAA approved.
    Refer to the Pilot's Operating Handbook/Airplane Flight Manual for the approved seats and seat limitations.
    On the PC-12/47E aircraft, do not install the following components:
    Nose Landing Gear
    532.20.12.038 with serial numbers AM 001 thru 054 (Ref. Pilatus Service Bulletin 32-016).
    532.20.12.039 with serial numbers AM 001 thru 054 (Ref. Pilatus Service Bulletin 32-016).
    532.20.12.140 all (Ref. Pilatus Service Bulletin 32-014).
    Main Landing Gear
    532.10.12.049 with serial numbers AM 001 thru 053 (Ref. Pilatus Service Bulletin 32-015/016/018).
    532.10.12.050 with serial numbers AM 001 thru 053 (Ref. Pilatus Service Bulletin 32-015/016/018).
    532.10.12.077 with serial numbers AM 001 thru 229 and all without primer and painted head (Ref. Pilatus Service
    Bulletin 32-012/018).
    532.10.12.110 without marking "AT" or "VLG" (Ref. Pilatus Service Bulletin 32-015).
    Main Landing Gear Shock Absorber
    532.10.12.175 with serial numbers AM 001 thru 107 (Ref. Pilatus Service Bulletin 32-016).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-04-00-00-00A-000A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-13 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Main Landing Gear Actuators


    960.30.01.103 with serial numbers 830E thru 881E (Ref. Pilatus Service Bulletin 32-017).
    Flaps
    FCWU 99-3 with serial numbers lower than 10000 and all Vickers Flap Actuators (Part No's 978.73.20.301,
    978.73.20.302/303/304 and 306).
    Propeller Blade
    Propeller blade E10477K.

    2 Structural Limitations
    Table 2 Structural Limitations
    Structure Life
    Fuselage and associated structure Pre SB 04-009 20,000 flying hours or 27,000 landings,
    whichever comes first
    Post SB 04-009 25,000 flying hours or 30,000 landings,
    whichever comes first
    Wing structure Pre SB 04-009 20,000 flying hours or 27,000 landings,
    whichever comes first
    Post SB 04-009 25,000 flying hours or 30,000 landings,
    whichever comes first
    Tail structure Pre SB 04-009 20,000 flying hours or 27,000 landings,
    whichever comes first
    Post SB 04-009 25,000 flying hours or 30,000 landings,
    whichever comes first
    Beyond 25,000 flying hours or 30,000 landings (whichever comes first) refer to Para 5 and AMM 12-
    B-05-20-30-00A-280A-A for the supplemental structural inspections.

    3 Component Limitations
    Table 3 Component Limitations
    Component Life
    Engine rotor components P&WC SB 14002 (latest revision)
    Engine mounting frame Pre SB 04-009 20,000 flying hours or 27,000 landings,
    whichever comes first
    Post SB 04-009 25,000 flying hours or 30,000 landings,
    whichever comes first
    Beyond 25,000 flying hours or 30,000 landings (whichever comes first) refer to Para 5 and AMM 12-
    B-05-20-30-00A-280A-A for the supplemental structural inspections.
    Engine mounting frame, replace all bolts, washers and 11,000 flying hours
    nuts
    Pitch trim actuator 20,000 flying hours or 27,000 landings, whichever comes
    first
    Flap actuator (Part No. 978.73.20.307, 308 and 309) 20,000 flying hours or 27,000 landings, whichever comes
    (black anodized) first
    Fire extinguisher 10 years (elapsed). See Note 1 below.
    Oxygen bottle 15 years (elapsed)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-04-00-00-00A-000A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-13 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Component Life
    Cargo door lower lug fittings (Qty 3) 13,000 flying hours or 17,000 landings, whichever comes
    first
    Pitch trim actuator attachment parts, fail safe plates 10,000 flying hours
    and their attachment parts (IPC 12-20-00-07). Refer to
    AMM 12-B-27-40-02-00A-920A-A for fail safe plates
    removal/installation.
    Nose landing gear torque tube (P/N 532.50.12.047) 11,000 flying hours or 15,000 landings or 10 years
    installed, whichever comes first.
    Electro-mechanical landing gear actuators 1000 landings

    Note 1: Fire extinguishers that are 10 years or older must be replaced by 30 June 2013.

    4 Miscellaneous Limitations
    Table 4 Miscellaneous Limitations
    Component Limitation Procedure
    Inboard flap drive arms Every 150 flying hours or at Annual In-situ Inspection/CheckAMM 12-
    Inspection, whichever comes first B-27-51-00-00A-313A-A
    Cockpit outer side, DV windows If cracked or stress crazing can be Replace
    and cabin windows felt
    Cockpit inner and outer side, DV If chipped, cracked (only for inner Refer to AMM 12-B-56-00-00-00A-313A-A
    windows and cabin windows side windows), scratched, bubbles for limitations
    or delaminated
    Windshield LH and RH If cracked in inner lamination Replace
    If cracked in outer lamination Only unpressurized flight is permitted up to
    the next scheduled inspection providing it
    does not cause visual problems
    Generator Control Unit (GCU) 1 Every 3,000 flying hours or at Functional test of the GCU 1 and GCU 2
    and GCU 2 Annual Inspection, whichever over and under-voltage trip protection
    comes first (Refer to AMM 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903D-
    A)
    ECS emergency shut-off system Every 3,000 flying hours or at Attach a spring balance to the ECS EMER
    Annual Inspection, whichever SHUT-OFF lever. Pull the lever and check
    comes first that the max pull force to open the ram air
    scoop is 22.5 lbf (100 N) and make sure
    that the ram air scoop is completely open.
    Pressurization Dump switch Every 3,000 flying hours or at Operational test (refer to AMM 12-
    Annual Inspection, whichever B-21-30-00-00A-903A-A)
    comes first
    Horizontal stabilizer trim Every 3,000 flying hours or at Functional test of Trim Runaway Aural
    Annual Inspection, whichever Warning System (FAA CMR) in
    comes first accordance with AMM 12-
    B-27-40-00-00A-903A-A
    NLG drag link right part (P/N Initially 2,000 flying hours or 2,500 Inspection/check (refer to AMM 12-
    532.20.12.289) landings (installed) whichever B-32-20-06-00A-313A-A).
    comes first, then every 300 flying
    hours or 400 landings, whichever
    comes first.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-04-00-00-00A-000A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-13 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Component Limitation Procedure


    Emergency gear extension 2000 flying hours or at Annual Operational test, AMM12-
    system Inspection, whichever comes first B-32-30-10-00A-903A-A
    Electro mechanical landing gear
    Main landing gear spring strut 2000 flying hours or at Annual Loosen and move the spring strut cover to
    Inspection, whichever comes first examine the springs, AMM 12-
    Electro mechanical landing gear B-32-10-06-00A-313A-A
    Time delay relays and power 2000 flying hours or at Annual Functional test, AMM 12-
    contactors Inspection, whichever comes first B-32-30-08-00A-903A-A
    Electro mechanical landing gear
    Oxygen bottle Refer to AVOX Service Information Hydrostatic test.
    Letter SIL-35-114 latest revision
    (www.avoxsys.com). Refer to AVOX Service Information Letter
    SIL-35-114 latest revision
    (www.avoxsys.com).
    Pitch trim actuator (Part No. 5,000 flying hours or 5 years Overhaul
    978.73.14.202 and (installed) whichever comes first
    978.73.14.203)
    Wing Main Spar Fastener Holes Threshold 16000 wing flying hours Eddy current inspection, AMM 12-
    Strap Rib 6 or 22500 wing landings, whichever B-57-20-10-00A-353D-A
    comes first.
    No cracks are permitted. If you find cracks
    All wings with no landing records contact Pilatus Aircraft for advice.
    must apply a calculated applicable
    landings equal to 2 x flying hours.

    5 Supplemental Structural Inspection Document


    This section and AMM 12-B-05-20-30-00A-280A-A give the additional structural and component life limits and the
    supplemental inspections needed for aircraft that have 25,000 flying hours or 30,000 landings or more and forms
    the Supplemental Structural Inspection Document (SSID) needed to increase the life of the airframe.
    Service Bulletin 04-009 must be accomplished to allow an aircraft to be operated up to 25,000 flying hours or
    30,000 landings, whichever comes first.
    Only authorised Pilatus Service Centers can do the SSID, see Para 5.2.

    5.1 Limit of Validity


    The limit of validity (LOV) of the SSID is 50,000 flying hours or 60,000 landings, whichever comes first. The part of
    the SSID for the wing structure (without systems and control system structure such as flaps and ailerons) has a
    lower LOV of 35,000 flying hours or 43,000 landings, whichever comes first.

    5.2 Authorisation
    Only Pilatus authorised Service Centers can do the SSID as defined in Para 7 and in AMM 12-
    B-05-20-30-00A-280A-A.

    5.3 Deviation from Type Design


    Deviations from the Type Design in critical locations could make the aircraft ineligible for this life extension.
    Therefore:

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-04-00-00-00A-000A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-13 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    (a) all concessions,


    (b) all repairs, alterations and modifications,
    (c) all STC installations

    must be assessed to find out if the aircraft will be eligible for this life extension.The owner/operator is responsible to
    organize these assessments well in advance of the first SSID inspection. There must be a clear statement for the
    specific aircraft MSN available which states that the aircraft with (a), (b) and (c) is eligible for this life extension.
    The assessments can be done as follows for:
    (a) Concessions - Only Pilatus can do this assessment. Pilatus shall be approached at least 5 months in
    advance.

    (b) Repairs, alterations and modifications - Any Authority approved Design Organization or equivalent can do
    this assessment.

    (c) For the aircraft modifications of the STC any Authority approved Design Organization or equivalent can do
    this assessment. For the part of the STC itself the STC holder(s) only must do this assessment.

    On request, Pilatus can do the assessments for items (b) and the first part of (c) in addition to (a) above, provided
    sufficient information is given.

    5.4 Supplemental Corrosion Prevention and Control Program (CPCP)


    The maximum corrosion level to be maintained is Corrosion Level 1. Refer to AMM 12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A for
    Corrosion Control Maintenance Practices.
    The supplemental CPCP inspection tasks are identified in the column where a calendar time interval is given. The
    following additional threshold inspection requirement is applicable for all those CPCP inspection tasks:
    − the CPCP inspection task must be accomplished 6 years after Service Bulletin 04-009 has been accomplished
    − the CPCP inspection task must not be accomplished before the aircraft reaches 25,000 flying hours or 30,000
    landings.

    5.5 Damage Tolerance Evaluation


    The entire aircraft structure is subject to Damage Tolerance Evaluation when modified or repaired, except for life
    limited components as listed in Table 3 and Table 5, which remain as safe-life.

    6 Component Life
    Table 5 Component Life
    Task No. Component Life (whichever comes
    first)
    Flying Landings
    Hours
    27-50/414 Flaps - Life Limit (discard) 25,000 30,000
    55-10/415 Horizontal Stabilizer - Life Limit (discard) 25,000 30,000
    32-20/416 NLG Drag Link - Life Limit (discard) 25,000 30,000
    32-30/417 MLG Actuator - Life Limit (discard) 25,000 30,000
    29-10/418 Nitrogen accumulator - Life Limit (discard) 25,000 30,000

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-04-00-00-00A-000A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-13 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    7 Inspection Program
    Only Pilatus authorised Service Centers can do this SSID:

    Table 6 Supplemental Structural Inspection Program


    SUPPLEMENTAL STRUCTURAL INSPECTION PROGRAM
    Task No Inspection/Reference Threshold Repeated Interval (whichever
    (whichever comes comes first)
    first)
    Flying Landings Flying Landings Years
    Hours Hours
    32-10/345 Main landing gear - Overhaul 25,000 30,000 8,300 10,000 6
    CMM 02099
    Inspection kit P/N 500.60.12.027
    32-10/346 MLG Yoke fitting lugs - Eddy Current 25,000 30,000 8,300 10,000 -
    Inspection
    CMM 02099
    32-10/347 MLG Trailing Link - Eddy Current 25,000 30,000 8,300 10,000 -
    Inspection
    CMM 02099
    52-10/348 Passenger/crew door - Examine all 32,500 42,000 12,500 15,000 6
    structural elements
    AMM 12-B-52-10-00-00A-310A-A
    52-20/349 Emergency door - Examine all structural 32,500 42,000 12,500 15,000 6
    elements
    AMM 12-B-52-20-00-00A-310A-A
    52-30/350 Cargo door - Examine all structural 32,500 42,000 12,500 15,000 6
    elements
    AMM 12-B-52-30-00-00A-310A-A
    53-00/351 Upper Longerons Frame 10 - Eddy 25,000 30,000 12,500 15,000 -
    Current Inspection
    AMM 12-B-53-10-06-01A-353A-A
    Inspection kit P/N 500.60.12.032
    53-00/352 Fuselage Frames 10 to 16 - Examine all 32,500 42,000 12,500 15,000 6
    structural elements
    AMM 12-B-53-10-00-00A-310A-A
    Inspection kit P/N 500.60.12.034
    53-00/353 Fuselage Frames 16 to 36 - Examine all 32,500 42,000 12,500 15,000 6
    structural elements
    AMM 12-B-53-20-00-00A-310A-A
    Inspection kit P/N 500.60.12.042
    53-00/354 Fuselage Frames 36 to 43 - Examine all 32,500 42,000 12,500 15,000 6
    structural elements
    AMM 12-B-53-30-00-00A-310A-A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-04-00-00-00A-000A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-13 Page 9


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    SUPPLEMENTAL STRUCTURAL INSPECTION PROGRAM


    Task No Inspection/Reference Threshold Repeated Interval (whichever
    (whichever comes comes first)
    first)
    Flying Landings Flying Landings Years
    Hours Hours
    53-00/355 Antenna Structure - Examine 32,500 42,000 12,500 15,000 6
    AMM 12-B-53-00-00-00A-310A-A
    53-00/356 Antenna - Bottom fuselage skin - Eddy 28,300 37,000 8,300 10,000 -
    Current Inspection
    AMM 12-B-53-00-00-00A-353A-A
    53-00/357 Antenna - Upper fuselage skin - Eddy 32,500 42,000 12,500 15,000 -
    Current Inspection
    AMM 12-B-53-00-00-00A-353A-A
    53-00/358 Upper Flange Carry Through Frames 21 30,000 39,000 10,000 12,000 6
    and 24 - Examine
    AMM 12-B-53-20-02-00A-310A-A
    Inspection kit P/N 500.50.12.327
    53-00/359 Frames 21 and 24 Wing Attachments - 30,000 39,000 10,000 12,000 -
    Eddy Current Inspection
    AMM 12-B-53-20-02-00A-353A-A
    53-00/360 Frames 21 and 24 Side Frame 30,000 39,000 10,000 12,000 -
    Attachments - Eddy Current Inspection
    AMM 12-B-53-20-02-00A-353A-A
    53-00/361 Frames 41 and 43 Stabilizer Attachment - 32,500 42,000 12,500 15,000 -
    Eddy Current Inspection
    AMM 12-B-53-30-02-00A-353A-A
    or
    AMM 12-B-55-30-03-00A-353A-A
    55-20/362 Elevator - Examine 32,500 42,000 12,500 15,000 6
    AMM 12-B-55-20-00-00A-310A-A
    27-30/363 Elevator - Control System - Examine 32,500 42,000 12,500 15,000 6
    AMM 12-B-27-30-00-00A-310A-A
    Inspection kit P/N 500.60.12.019
    27-30/364 Elevator Control Rods - Eddy Current 32,500 42,000 12,500 15,000 -
    Inspection
    AMM 12-B-27-00-01-00A-353A-A
    27-30/365 Elevator Control Rods - Magnetic Particle 32,500 42,000 12,500 15,000 -
    Inspection
    AMM 12-B-27-00-01-00A-352A-A
    27-30/366 Elevator Control Lever - Eddy Current 32,500 42,000 12,500 15,000 -
    Inspection
    AMM 12-B-27-30-05-00A-353A-A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-04-00-00-00A-000A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-13 Page 10


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    SUPPLEMENTAL STRUCTURAL INSPECTION PROGRAM


    Task No Inspection/Reference Threshold Repeated Interval (whichever
    (whichever comes comes first)
    first)
    Flying Landings Flying Landings Years
    Hours Hours
    55-20/367 Elevator Drive Lever - Eddy Current 32,500 42,000 12,500 15,000 -
    Inspection
    AMM 12-B-55-20-01-00A-353A-A
    55-20/368 Elevator Hinges - Eddy Current 32,500 42,000 12,500 15,000 -
    Inspection
    AMM 12-B-55-20-01-00A-353A-A
    55-30/369 Vertical Stabilizer - Examine 32,500 42,000 12,500 15,000 6
    AMM 12-B-55-30-00-00A-310A-A
    Inspection kit P/N 500.50.12.325
    55-30/370 Vertical Stabilizer Main and Rear Spar 32,500 42,000 12,500 15,000 -
    Attachment to Fuselage - Eddy Current
    Inspection
    AMM 12-B-53-30-02-00A-353A-A
    or
    AMM 12-B-55-30-03-00A-353A-A
    55-30/371 Vertical Stabilizer Main Attachment to 32,500 42,000 12,500 15,000 -
    Horizontal Stabilizer - Eddy Current
    Inspection
    AMM 12-B-55-00-00-00A-353A-A
    55-30/372 Vertical Stabilizer Pitch Trim Actuator 32,500 42,000 12,500 15,000 -
    Fitting and Attachment - Eddy Current
    Inspection
    AMM 12-B-55-30-02-00A-353A-A
    55-40/373 Rudder - Examine 32,500 42,000 12,500 15,000 6
    AMM 12-B-55-40-00-00A-310A-A
    27-20/374 Rudder Control System - Examine 32,500 42,000 12,500 15,000 6
    AMM 12-B-27-20-00-00A-310A-A
    Inspection kit P/N 500.60.12.018
    27-20/375 Rudder Bellcranks - Eddy Current 32,500 42,000 12,500 15,000 -
    Inspection
    AMM 12-B-27-20-04-00A-353A-A
    27-20/376 Rudder Cable Quadrant Shear Spigot - 32,500 42,000 12,500 15,000 6
    Examine
    AMM 12-B-27-20-05-00A-310A-A
    55-40-377 Rudder Hinges - Eddy Current Inspection 32,500 42,000 12,500 15,000 -
    AMM 12-B-55-40-05-00A-353A-A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-04-00-00-00A-000A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-13 Page 11


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    SUPPLEMENTAL STRUCTURAL INSPECTION PROGRAM


    Task No Inspection/Reference Threshold Repeated Interval (whichever
    (whichever comes comes first)
    first)
    Flying Landings Flying Landings Years
    Hours Hours
    56-11/378 Windshield LH and RH and Cockpit Side 32,500 42,000 12,500 15,000 6
    Windows - Examine with windshield and
    side windows removed
    AMM 12-B-56-11-01-00A-310A-A
    and
    AMM 12-B-56-11-02-00A-310A-A
    and
    AMM 12-B-53-10-16-00A-310A-A
    Inspection kit P/N 500.50.12.326
    57-00/379 Wing - Examine all structural elements 30,000 39,000 10,000 12,000 6
    Rib 1 to Rib 20
    AMM 12-B-57-00-00-00A-310A-A
    57-00/380 Wing Main and Rear Spar to Fuselage 30,000 39,000 10,000 12,000 -
    Attachment - Eddy Current Inspection
    AMM 12-B-57-00-03-00A-353A-A
    and
    AMM 12-B-57-00-03-01A-353A-A
    Inspection kit P/N 500.60.12.004 wing
    attachment
    Inspection kit P/N 500.60.12.007 double
    bush
    57-00/382 Wing Rear Spar at Rib 8 Flap Arm 25,000 30,000 12,500 15,000 -
    Attachment - Eddy Current Inspection
    AMM 12-B-57-20-10-00A-353C-A
    57-00/383 Wing Main Spar Fastener Holes Rib 1 25,000 30,000 3,300 4,000 -
    thru Rib 6 - Eddy Current Inspection
    AMM 12-B-57-20-10-00A-353A-A
    Inspection kit P/N 500.60.12.030
    or
    Inspection kit P/N 500.60.12.020
    57-00/384 Wing Main Spar Fastener Holes Strap Rib 25,000 30,000 3,300 4,000 -
    6 - Eddy Current Inspection
    AMM 12-B-57-20-05-00A-353A-A
    Inspection kit P/N 500.60.12.031 or
    Inspection kit P/N 500.60.12.043

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-04-00-00-00A-000A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-13 Page 12


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    SUPPLEMENTAL STRUCTURAL INSPECTION PROGRAM


    Task No Inspection/Reference Threshold Repeated Interval (whichever
    (whichever comes comes first)
    first)
    Flying Landings Flying Landings Years
    Hours Hours
    57-00/385 Wing Rear Spar Fastener Holes Rib 2 25,000 30,000 12,500 15,000 -
    thru Rib 3 - Eddy Current Inspection
    AMM 12-B-57-20-10-00A-353B-A
    27-50/386 Flap Mechanism - Examine 30,000 39,000 10,000 12,000 6
    AMM 12-B-27-51-00-00A-310A-A
    Inspection kit P/N 500.60.12.021
    Inspection kit P/N 500.60.12.022
    Inspection kit P/N 500.60.12.023
    Inspection kit P/N 500.60.12.024
    Inspection kit P/N 500.60.12.025
    27-50/387 Flap Drive Arm (not removed) - Eddy 25,000 30,000 2,500 3,000 -
    Current Inspection
    AMM 12-B-27-51-00-00A-353A-A
    27-50/388 Flap Drive Arm (removed) - Eddy Current 30,000 39,000 10,000 12,000 -
    Inspection
    AMM 12-B-27-51-01-00A-353A-A
    AMM 12-B-27-51-02-00A-353A-A
    AMM 12-B-27-51-03-00A-353A-A
    27-50/389 Flap Support Arm - Eddy Current 30,000 39,000 10,000 12,000 -
    Inspection
    AMM 12-B-27-51-01-00A-353A-A
    AMM 12-B-27-51-02-00A-353A-A
    AMM 12-B-27-51-03-00A-353A-A
    27-50/390 Flap Cove Rib FIttings - Eddy Current 30,000 39,000 10,000 12,000 -
    Inspection
    AMM 12-B-27-51-01-00A-353A-A
    AMM 12-B-27-51-02-00A-353A-A
    AMM 12-B-27-51-03-00A-353A-A
    27-50-391 Flap Aft Links - Eddy Current Inspection 30,000 39,000 10,000 12,000 -
    AMM 12-B-27-51-01-00A-353A-A
    AMM 12-B-27-51-02-00A-353A-A
    AMM 12-B-27-51-03-00A-353A-A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-04-00-00-00A-000A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-13 Page 13


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    SUPPLEMENTAL STRUCTURAL INSPECTION PROGRAM


    Task No Inspection/Reference Threshold Repeated Interval (whichever
    (whichever comes comes first)
    first)
    Flying Landings Flying Landings Years
    Hours Hours
    27-50/392 Flap Bellcranks - Eddy Current Inspection 30,000 39,000 10,000 12,000 -
    AMM 12-B-27-51-01-00A-353A-A
    AMM 12-B-27-51-02-00A-353A-A
    AMM 12-B-27-51-03-00A-353A-A
    57-60/393 Aileron - Examine 32,500 42,000 12,500 15,000 6
    AMM 12-B-57-60-00-00A-310A-A
    27-10/394 Aileron Control System - Examine 32,500 42,000 12,500 15,000 6
    AMM 12-B-27-10-00-00A-310A-A
    Inspection kit P/N 500.50.12.314
    Inspection kit P/N 500.60.12.035
    Inspection kit P/N 500.60.12.016
    27-10/395 Aileron Cable Segment - Eddy Current 32,500 42,000 12,500 15,000 -
    Inspection
    AMM 12-B-27-10-09-00A-353A-A
    27-10/396 Aileron Control Rods - Eddy Current 32,500 42,000 12,500 15,000 -
    Inspection
    AMM 12-B-27-00-01-00A-353A-A
    27-10/397 Aileron Control Rods - Magnetic Particle 32,500 42,000 12,500 15,000 -
    Inspection
    AMM 12-B-27-00-01-00A-352A-A
    27-10/398 Aileron Bellcranks - Eddy Current and 32,500 42,000 12,500 15,000 -
    Magnetic Particle Inspections
    AMM 12-B-27-10-08-00A-353A-A
    AMM 12-B-27-10-08-00A-353B-A
    AMM 12-B-27-10-08-00A-352B-A
    27-30/400 Aileron Hinge Points - Eddy Current 32,500 42,000 12,500 15,000 -
    Inspection
    AMM 12-B-57-60-06-00A-353A-A
    71-00/401 Engine Mount - Magnetic Particle 26,600 35,000 6,600 8,000 -
    Inspection
    AMM 12-B-71-00-05-00A-352A-A
    Inspection kit P/N 500.60.12.006
    The Airworthiness Limitations Section is EASA Approved under Approval Number:
    10048310
    Approval Date:- 27 February 2014

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-04-00-00-00A-000A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-13 Page 14
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    SCHEDULED/UNSCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

    INTRODUCTION

    Table of Contents Page

    SCHEDULED/UNSCHEDULED MAINTENANCE - INTRODUCTION....................................... 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1
    2 Time Limits............................................................................................................. 2
    3 Scheduled Maintenance Checks............................................................................ 2
    4 Unscheduled Maintenance Checks........................................................................ 2
    5 Master Maintenance Plan and Progressive Inspection Program............................ 2
    6 Definition of Terminology........................................................................................ 2
    6.1 Flying Hours........................................................................................................... 2
    6.2 Landings................................................................................................................. 2

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A MASTER MAINTENANCE PLAN - GENERAL
    12-B-05-10-00-00A-018A-A TIME LIMITS - INTRODUCTION
    12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS -
    INTRODUCTION
    12-B-05-30-00-00A-010A-A PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM - GENERAL
    12-B-05-50-00-00A-018A-A UNSCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS -
    INTRODUCTION

    Description

    1 General

    Note

    Refer to P&WC Engine Maintenance Manual (EMM) for the engine scheduled maintenance tasks.

    This data module has three sections:


    − Time Limits (refer to AMM 12-B-05-10-00-00A-018A-A)
    − Scheduled Maintenance Checks (refer to AMM 12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A)
    − Unscheduled Maintenance Checks (refer to AMM 12-B-05-50-00-00A-018A-A)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-00-00A-018A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-11-12 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2 Time Limits
    This section has two parts:
    − a list of the components which are subject to an overhaul life or a maximum life limit
    − a list of time limited inspection requirements

    3 Scheduled Maintenance Checks


    This section gives details of the scheduled inspections for the aircraft:
    − a 100 flying hour inspection schedule
    − an annual inspection schedule

    4 Unscheduled Maintenance Checks


    This section gives inspection requirements which are necessary after a special or unusual circumstance has
    occurred which may have damaged the aircraft.

    5 Master Maintenance Plan and Progressive Inspection Program


    Refer to AMM 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A and 12-B-05-30-00-00A-010A-A.
    The Master Maintenance Plan gives a list of all the Airworthiness Limitations, Time Limits and Scheduled
    Maintenance Checks in system order. The purpose of the Master Maintenance Plan is to provide the operator/
    maintainer with a complete overview of all the maintenance tasks. The Plan is intended as a tool to assist the
    operator/maintainer in planning.
    The Progressive Inspection Program has been made for aircraft that operate at high annual flying hour rates. The
    standard inspection items have been grouped into six phases and a minor inspection. The program has been
    technically approved by the Swiss Federal Office for Civil Aviation (FOCA), but operators intending to use this
    program should check with their local Airworthiness Authority for acceptance.

    6 Definition of Terminology

    6.1 Flying Hours


    Flying hours are defined as the total time between take-off and landing.

    6.2 Landings
    All landings of a flight including the final landing; touch-and-goes; full stop landing with a follow on take-off in the
    same flight.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-00-00A-018A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-11-12 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    MASTER MAINTENANCE PLAN

    GENERAL

    Table of Contents Page

    MASTER MAINTENANCE PLAN - GENERAL........................................................................... 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 8
    2 Purpose.................................................................................................................. 8
    3 Task List................................................................................................................. 9

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Master Maintenance Plan Task List....................................................................... 9

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A ACCESS PROVISION – HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR
    - DESCRIPTION
    12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A JACKING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-11-20-00-00A-901A-A EXTERIOR PLACARDS AND MARKINGS -
    MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-11-30-00-00A-040A-A INTERIOR PLACARDS - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-12-10-02-00A-902A-A BRAKES - SERVICING
    12-B-12-10-04-00A-902A-A TIRES - SERVICING
    12-B-12-20-01-00A-902A-A AIRCRAFT EXTERIOR WASHING - SERVICING
    12-B-12-20-02-00A-902A-A AIRCRAFT WINDOWS CLEANING - SERVICING
    12-B-12-20-03-00A-902A-A AIRCRAFT INTERIOR CLEANING - SERVICING
    12-B-12-20-04-00A-902A-A LANDING GEAR - SERVICING
    12-B-12-20-05-00A-902A-A PROPELLER - SERVICING
    12-B-12-20-06-00A-902A-A WHEEL BEARING - SERVICING
    12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A CORROSION CONTROL - MAINTENANCE
    PRACTICES
    12-B-21-30-00-00A-903A-A PRESSURIZATION CONTROL - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-21-30-02-00A-250A-A SAFETY VALVE - CLEAN
    12-B-21-40-01-00A-903A-A SECONDARY HEATING - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-21-40-02-00A-313A-A REFRIGERATION PACK - INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-21-40-02-00A-902A-A REFRIGERATION PACK - SERVICING

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Data module/Technical publication Title


    12-B-21-40-03-00A-250A-A WATER SEPARATOR - CLEAN
    12-B-21-40-06-00A-903A-A OVERTEMPERATURE SWITCH - ADJUSTMENT/
    TEST
    12-B-21-43-00-00A-903A-A FOOTWARMER - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-21-50-01-00A-903A-A VAPOUR CYCLE COOLING SYSTEM -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-21-50-03-00A-313A-A COMPRESSOR DRIVE MOTOR - INSPECTION/
    CHECK
    12-B-21-60-05-00A-903A-A DUCT OVERTEMPERATURE SWITCH -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-22-10-00-00A-313A-A AUTOPILOT - INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A SPEED AND ATTITUDE CORRECTION -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-23-12-00-00A-903A-A VHF COMMUNICATION - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-23-50-00-00A-903A-A AUDIO INTEGRATING SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/
    TEST
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-24-30-00-00A-903A-A DC GENERATION - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-24-30-01-00A-313A-A STARTER/GENERATOR - INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-24-30-07-00A-920A-A LEAD ACID BATTERY - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-24-52-51-00A-920A-A EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY (EPS) SYSTEM -
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A FLIGHT COMPARTMENT CREW SEATS - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE SEATS - REMOVAL INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-21-03-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE TRIM - REMOVAL INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A STANDARD SEATS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-22-03-00A-920A-A STANDARD TRIM - REMOVAL INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-63-00-00A-903A-A EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-27-00-00-00A-313A-A FLIGHT CONTROLS - INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-27-00-01-00A-352A-A FLIGHT CONTROLS – CONTROL RODS - MAGNETIC
    PARTICLE INSPECTION
    12-B-27-00-01-00A-353A-A FLIGHT CONTROLS – CONTROL RODS - EDDY
    CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-27-10-00-00A-310A-A AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM - EXAMINE
    12-B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-27-10-08-00A-352B-A AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM – FUSELAGE
    BELLCRANK - MAGNETIC PARTICLE INSPECTION

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Data module/Technical publication Title


    12-B-27-10-08-00A-353A-A AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM – OUTER WING
    BELLCRANK - EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-27-10-08-00A-353B-A AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM – FUSELAGE
    BELLCRANK - EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-27-10-09-00A-353A-A AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM – FUSELAGE CABLE
    QUADRANT - EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-27-15-00-00A-903A-A AILERON TRIM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-27-20-00-00A-310A-A RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM - EXAMINE
    12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-27-20-04-00A-353A-A RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM – BELLCRANK - EDDY
    CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-27-20-05-00A-310A-A RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM – CABLE QUADRANT -
    EXAMINE
    12-B-27-25-00-00A-903A-A RUDDER TRIM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-27-30-00-00A-310A-A ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM - EXAMINE
    12-B-27-30-00-00A-903A-A ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/
    TEST
    12-B-27-30-05-00A-353A-A ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM – CONTROL LEVER
    - EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-27-40-00-00A-903A-A HORIZONTAL STABILIZER TRIM - ADJUSTMENT/
    TEST
    12-B-27-40-02-00A-920A-A HORIZONTAL STABILIZER TRIM – TRIM ACTUATOR
    FAILSAFE PLATES - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-27-50-00-00A-902A-A FLAPS - SERVICING
    12-B-27-50-00-00A-903A-A FLAPS - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-27-50-03-00A-313A-A FLAP ACTUATOR - INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-27-51-00-00A-310A-A FLAP DRIVE SYSTEM - EXAMINE
    12-B-27-51-00-00A-313A-A FLAP DRIVE SYSTEM - IN SITU INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-27-51-00-00A-353A-A FLAP DRIVE SYSTEM - IN SITU EDDY CURRENT
    INSPECTION
    12-B-27-51-01-00A-353A-A FLAP DRIVE SYSTEM – WING – INBOARD
    MECHANISM - EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-27-51-02-00A-353A-A FLAP DRIVE SYSTEM – WING – CENTER
    MECHANISM - EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-27-51-03-00A-353A-A FLAP DRIVE SYSTEM – WING – OUTBOARD
    MECHANISM - EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-28-10-01-00A-903A-A TANK CROSS VENT PIPE AND OUTWARD CHECK
    VALVE - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-28-20-01-00A-250A-A FUEL FILTER ELEMENT - CLEAN
    12-B-28-20-01-00A-920A-A FUEL FILTER ELEMENT - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Data module/Technical publication Title


    12-B-28-20-07-00A-903A-A FLOAT VALVE - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-29-00-00-00A-902A-A HYDRAULIC SYSTEM - SERVICING
    12-B-29-10-02-00A-901A-A ACCUMULATOR - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-29-10-04-00A-313A-A RETURN LINE FILTER DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE
    INDICATOR - INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-30-10-00-00A-313A-A AIRFOIL DE–ICE BOOTS - INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-30-10-00-00A-903A-A AIRFOIL DE–ICE SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-30-20-00-00A-903A-A AIR INTAKE DE–ICE SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-30-30-20-00A-903A-A PROBES DE–ICE SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-30-40-00-00A-903A-A WINDSHIELD DE–ICE SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/
    TEST
    12-B-30-60-00-00A-313A-A PROPELLER DE–ICE SYSTEM - INSPECTION/
    CHECK
    12-B-30-60-00-00A-903A-A PROPELLER DE–ICE SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-31-30-01-00A-903A-A RECORDERS – CVFDR - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-32-10-00-00A-313A-A MAIN LANDING GEAR HINGE PIN AND BUSHES –
    HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR - INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-32-10-00-00A-313B-A MAIN LANDING GEAR HINGE PIN AND BUSHES –
    ELECTRO MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR -
    INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-32-10-00-00A-902A-A MAIN LANDING GEAR SHOCK ABSORBER -
    SERVICING
    12-B-32-10-03-00A-920A-A SHOCK ABSORBER – HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR -
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-32-10-03-00A-920B-A SHOCK ABSORBER – ELECTRO MECHANICAL
    LANDING GEAR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-32-20-00-00A-902A-A NOSE LANDING GEAR SHOCK ABSORBER -
    SERVICING
    12-B-32-20-06-00A-313A-A DRAG LINK RIGHT PART - INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-32-30-00-00A-903A-A EXTENSION AND RETRACTION – HYDRAULIC
    LANDING GEAR - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-32-30-00-00A-903B-A EXTENSION AND RETRACTION – ELECTRO
    MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-32-30-01-01A-920B-A MLG ACTUATOR ANTI ROTATION PAD - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    12-B-32-30-02-01A-920B-A NLG ACTUATOR ANTI ROTATION PAD - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    12-B-32-30-10-00A-903A-A EMERGENCY GEAR EXTENSION SYSTEM –
    ELECTRO MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Data module/Technical publication Title


    12-B-32-50-00-00A-310A-A NOSE WHEEL STEERING - EXAMINE
    12-B-33-40-00-00A-903A-A EXTERNAL LIGHTS - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-34-11-00-00A-901A-A PITOT STATIC SYSTEM - MAINTENANCE
    PRACTICES
    12-B-34-11-00-00A-903A-A PITOT STATIC SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-34-11-12-00A-313A-A STATIC PORT (RVSM) - INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-34-14-00-00A-903B-A ALTITUDE AND VERTICAL SPEED INDICATION
    (RVSM) - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-34-20-00-00A-903A-A ATTITUDE AND DIRECTION - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-34-54-00-00A-903A-A DUAL DIVERSITY ATC TRANSPONDER SYSTEM -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-34-54-00-00A-903B-A DUAL NON–DIVERSITY ATC TRANSPONDER
    SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-34-54-10-00A-903A-A SINGLE DIVERSITY AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL
    TRANSPONDER SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-34-54-10-00A-903B-A SINGLE NON–DIVERSITY AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL
    TRANSPONDER SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-35-00-00-00A-903A-A OXYGEN SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-35-20-00-00A-313A-A PASSENGER OXYGEN MASKS - INSPECTION/
    CHECK
    12-B-46-30-02-00A-903A-A PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY CONTROLLER -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-46-30-05-00A-903A-A REVERSION CONTROL PANEL (4 SWITCH) -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-46-30-06-00A-903A-A REVERSION CONTROL PANEL (3 SWITCH) -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-52-00-01-00A-353A-A PASSENGER/CREW DOOR HINGE - EDDY
    CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-52-10-00-00A-310A-A PASSENGER/CREW DOOR - EXAMINE
    12-B-52-10-00-00A-313A-A PASSENGER/CREW DOOR - INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-52-10-01-00A-353A-A PASSENGER/CREW DOOR SKINS - EDDY
    CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-52-20-00-00A-310A-A EMERGENCY EXIT - EXAMINE
    12-B-52-30-00-00A-310A-A CARGO DOOR - EXAMINE
    12-B-52-30-00-00A-313A-A CARGO DOOR - INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-52-30-00-01A-353A-A CARGO DOOR HINGE - EDDY CURRENT
    INSPECTION
    12-B-52-30-01-00A-353A-A CARGO DOOR SKINS - EDDY CURRENT
    INSPECTION
    12-B-52-70-00-00A-903A-A DOOR WARNING - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Data module/Technical publication Title


    12-B-53-00-00-00A-310A-A FUSELAGE - ANTENNA STRUCTURE – EXAMINE
    12-B-53-00-00-00A-353A-A FUSELAGE - ANTENNA STRUCTURE – EDDY
    CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-53-10-00-00A-310A-A FORWARD FUSELAGE - EXAMINE
    12-B-53-10-06-01A-353A-A FORWARD FUSELAGE – FRAME 10 LONGERONS -
    EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-53-10-16-00A-310A-A FORWARD FUSELAGE – WINDOW STRUCTURE -
    EXAMINE
    12-B-53-20-00-00A-310A-A CENTER FUSELAGE - EXAMINE
    12-B-53-20-02-00A-310A-A CENTER FUSELAGE FRAMES – CARRY THROUGH
    FRAMES - EXAMINE
    12-B-53-20-02-00A-313A-A CENTER FUSELAGE – CARRY THROUGH FRAMES -
    INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-53-20-02-00A-353A-A CENTER FUSELAGE FRAMES – CARRY THROUGH
    FRAMES - EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-53-30-00-00A-310A-A REAR FUSELAGE - EXAMINE
    12-B-53-30-01-00A-313A-A REAR FUSELAGE SKINS AND STRINGERS (RVSM) -
    INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-53-30-02-00A-353A-A REAR FUSELAGE FRAMES - EDDY CURRENT
    INSPECTION
    12-B-54-20-02-00A-664A-A ENGINE FRAME DAMAGED PAINT AND
    CORROSION - SPECIAL REPAIR PROCEDURES
    12-B-55-00-00-00A-353A-A VERTICAL STABILIZER ATTACHMENT FITTINGS -
    EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-55-00-00-00A-361A-A STABILIZERS ATTACHMENT FITTINGS -
    ALLOWABLE WEAR
    12-B-55-00-01-00A-664A-A VERTICAL STABILIZER SKIN CRACK - SPECIAL
    REPAIR PROCEDURES
    12-B-55-20-00-00A-310A-A ELEVATORS - EXAMINE
    12-B-55-20-01-00A-353A-A ELEVATOR DRIVE LEVER AND HINGE - EDDY
    CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-55-30-00-00A-310A-A VERTICAL STABILIZER - EXAMINE
    12-B-55-30-02-00A-353A-A VERTICAL STABILIZER – PITCH TRIM ACTUATOR
    ATTACHMENT - EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-55-30-03-00A-353A-A VERTICAL STABILIZER SPARS - EDDY CURRENT
    INSPECTION
    12-B-55-40-00-00A-310A-A RUDDER - EXAMINE
    12-B-55-40-00-00A-664B-A RUDDER - REPAIR PROCEDURE RM 06299 –
    UPPER HINGE FITTING
    12-B-55-40-04-00A-310A-A RUDDER TRIM TAB - EXAMINE

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Data module/Technical publication Title


    12-B-55-40-05-00A-353A-A RUDDER HINGE - EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-56-00-00-00A-313A-A WINDOWS - INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-56-11-01-00A-310A-A WINDSHIELD - EXAMINE
    12-B-56-11-02-00A-310A-A COCKPIT SIDE WINDOWS - EXAMINE
    12-B-56-11-02-00A-313A-A COCKPIT SIDE WINDOWS - INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-57-00-00-00A-310A-A WINGS - EXAMINE
    12-B-57-00-00-00A-313A-A WING AND FUSELAGE FITTINGS - INSPECTION/
    CHECK
    12-B-57-00-03-00A-353A-A WING AND FUSELAGE ATTACHMENT FITTINGS -
    EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-57-00-03-01A-353A-A WING AND FUSELAGE ATTACHMENT FITTINGS –
    HOLLOW BOLTS - EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-57-20-01-00A-353A-A WING SKINS - EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-57-20-05-00A-353A-A WING STRUCTURE – RIBS - EDDY CURRENT
    INSPECTION – RIB 6 STRAP
    12-B-57-20-10-00A-353A-A WING STRUCTURE – SPARS AND AUXILIARY
    STRUCTURE – MAIN SPAR - EDDY CURRENT
    INSPECTION
    12-B-57-20-10-00A-353B-A WING STRUCTURE – SPARS AND AUXILIARY
    STRUCTURE – REAR SPAR - EDDY CURRENT
    INSPECTION
    12-B-57-20-10-00A-353C-A WING STRUCTURE – SPARS AND AUXILIARY
    STRUCTURE – REAR SPAR - EDDY CURRENT
    INSPECTION
    12-B-57-20-10-00A-353D-A WING STRUCTURE – SPARS AND AUXILIARY
    STRUCTURE – MAIN SPAR – RIB 6 STRAP
    FASTENER - EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-57-33-00-00A-310A-A WING TIP - EXAMINE
    12-B-57-60-00-00A-310A-A AILERONS - EXAMINE
    12-B-57-60-04-00A-310A-A AILERON TRIM TAB - EXAMINE
    12-B-57-60-06-00A-353A-A AILERON HINGE - EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-61-00-00-00A-904A-A PROPELLER BLADES - REPAIR
    12-B-61-10-01-00A-920A-A PROPELLER - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903A-A POWER PLANT - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903D-A POWER PLANT TEST 3 – DC GENERATION SYSTEM
    - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903G-A POWER PLANT TEST 6 – TORQUE LIMITER -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903H-A POWER PLANT TEST 7 – ENGINE PERFORMANCE -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Data module/Technical publication Title


    12-B-71-00-03-00A-250A-A ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS - CLEAN
    12-B-71-00-05-00A-352A-A POWERPLANT MOUNTING FRAME - MAGNETIC
    PARTICLE INSPECTION
    12-B-74-00-00-00A-903A-A IGNITION SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-76-10-00-00A-903A-A POWER CONTROLS - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-76-10-02-00A-903A-A PROPELLER FEATHER MICROSWITCHES -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-76-20-00-00A-903A-A MANUAL OVERRIDE - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-79-30-01-00A-903A-A CHIP DETECTOR - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Description

    1 General
    The Master Maintenance Plan lists all maintenance tasks from the Airworthiness Limitations (AL) DM, time limits
    DM, 100 Hour inspection DM, annual inspection DM and the Progressive Inspection (PI). The tasks are listed in
    ATA chapter (given in the task number) order.

    2 Purpose
    The purpose of this Master Maintenance Plan is to provide the operator/maintainer a complete overview of the
    maintenance which is applicable for the PC-12/47E. This plan is intended as a tool to assist the operator/maintainer
    in planning.
    Each task has a unique task number. This number is only used in the Master Maintenance Plan and Progressive
    Inspection program for task identification.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3 Task List
    Table 2 Master Maintenance Plan Task List
    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI
    limitations Limits Hour l
    00-00/45 Aircraft Do the corrosion and - - Y - - -
    corrosion protection
    inspections
    AMM 12-
    B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A
    00-00/12 Airworthiness Check - - - Y Y Y
    1 Directives and
    Service Bulletins
    reviewed and
    complied with as
    required
    00-00/12 Chapter 4 and Check - - - Y Y Y
    2 Chapter 5 -
    Overhaul and
    Replacement
    Schedule and Time
    Limited Inspection
    Requirements DMs
    reviewed and any
    additional
    requirements are
    complied with
    06-00/11 Access panels Install - - - Y - -
    9 42AB, 42AT and
    32CT AMM 12-
    B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A
    06-00/12 Access panels Remove - - - Y - -
    3 42AB, 42AT and
    32CT AMM 12-
    B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 9


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    06-00/21 Access panels Open/remove and examine. - - - - Y Y
    8 11AR, 11BL, 11BR, make sure the drain holes
    12AB, 12AZ, 12BB, are clear.
    12BL, 12BR, 12BZ,
    12CL, 12CR,12CZ, AMM 12-
    12DZ, 12EL, 12ER, B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A
    12EZ, 12FZ, 12HZ,
    21GZ, 21JZ, 21PZ,
    21QZ, 31AB, 31AL,
    31BL, 32AB, 32AL,
    32 BL, 32BT, 32CL,
    33ET, 41AT, 42AT,
    42AB, 51KB,
    51MB, 51NB,
    52KB, 52MB,
    52NB, 52OB,
    52PB, 52RB, 52TB,
    52SB, 61KB,
    61MB, 61NB,
    62KB, 62MB,
    62NB, 62OB,
    62PB, 62RB, 62SB,
    62TB
    06-00/21 Access panels Close or install - - - - Y Y
    9 11AR, 11BL, 11BR,
    12AB, 12AZ, 12BB,
    12BL, 12BR, 12BZ,
    12CL, 12CR,12CZ,
    12DZ, 12EL, 12ER,
    12EZ, 12FZ, 12HZ,
    21GZ, 21JZ, 21PZ,
    21QZ, 31AB, 31AL,
    31BL, 32AB, 32AL,
    32BL, 32BT, 32CL,
    33ET, 41AT, 42AT,
    42AB, 51KB,
    51MB, 51NB,
    52KB, 52MB,
    52NB, 52OB,
    52PB, 52RB, 52TB,
    52SB, 61KB,
    61MB, 61NB,
    62KB, 62MB,
    62NB, 62OB,
    62PB, 62RB, 62SB,
    62TB
    07-10/16 Aircraft Lower to the ground, - - - Y Y Y
    0 remove jacks and
    disconnect from ground
    AMM 12-
    B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 10


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    07-10/16 Aircraft Lift on jacks and connect - - - Y Y Y
    1 the aircraft to ground
    AMM 12-
    B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A
    10-10/42 External Protective Examine. Replace if any - - - Y Y Y
    8 Covers part of the cover is missing,
    damaged, torn or does not
    install properly.
    11-00/22 Placards and Examine and attach new - - - - Y Y
    0 markings placards if necessary
    AMM 12-
    B-11-20-00-00A-901A-A
    and 12-
    B-11-30-00-00A-040A-A
    12-20/12 Aircraft Wash the exterior, including - - - Y Y Y
    4 the landing gear and flap
    compartments
    AMM 12-
    B-12-20-01-00A-902A-A
    12-20/12 Windshields and Clean - - - Y Y Y
    5 windows
    AMM 12-
    B-12-20-02-00A-902A-A
    12-20/12 Cockpit and cabin Clean - - - Y Y Y
    6
    AMM 12-
    B-12-20-03-00A-902A-A
    21-20/22 ECS and bleed air Examine - - - - Y Y
    1 ducts, pipelines,
    equipment and
    associated clamps
    in the engine
    compartment
    21-20/31 ECS emergency ECS EMER shut-off valve - 3000 flying Y - - - -
    7 shut-off system operational test; max pull hours or at
    force 22.5 lbf (100N) and Annual
    make sure ram air scoop is Inspection
    completely open whichever
    comes first
    21-30/46 Cabin positive Functional test 3000 flying - Y - - -
    pressure relief hours or 2
    AMM 12- Years
    B-21-30-00-00A-903A-A whichever
    comes first
    21-30/31 Pressurization Check for contamination of 3000 flying - Y - - -
    4 safety valve the valve poppet and hours or 2
    poppet seat. If Years
    contamination is found whichever
    remove and cleanAMM 12- comes first
    B-21-30-02-00A-250A-A (installed)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 11


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    21-30/31 Pressurization Operational test 3000 flying Y - - - -
    8 dump switch hours or at
    Annual
    Inspection
    whichever
    comes first
    21-40/50 Water separator Clean 500 flying - Y - - Y
    condenser hours
    AMM 12-
    B-21-40-03-00A-250A-A
    21-40/51 Overtemperature Functional test 5 years - Y - - -
    switch (installed)
    AMM 12-
    B-21-40-06-00A-903A-A
    21-40/52 Duct Functional test 5 years - Y - - -
    overtemperature (installed)
    switch AMM 12-
    B-21-60-05-00A-903A-A
    21-40/55 Cold air unit Re-oil 500 flying - Y - - Y
    hours
    AMM 12-
    B-21-40-02-00A-902A-A
    21-40/56 Heat exchanger Inspection/check 500 flying - Y - - Y
    matrix hours
    AMM 12-
    B-21-40-02-00A-313A-A
    21-40/12 Flight compartment Operational test - - - - Y Y
    8 foot heater (if
    installed) thermal AMM 12-
    protection switch B-21-43-00-00A-903A-A
    21-40/33 Cabin auxiliary Operational test - - - - Y Y
    0 heater thermal
    protection switch AMM 12-
    B-21-40-01-00A-903A-A
    21-40/33 Underfloor heater Functional test - - - - Y Y
    1 thermal protection
    switch AMM 12-
    B-21-40-01-00A-903A-A
    21-50/58 Vapor cycle Inspection/check 500 Ops Hr - Y - - -
    compressor motor
    (if installed) AMM 12-
    B-21-50-03-00A-313A-A
    21-50/59 Vapor cycle Check for tension 500 Ops Hr - Y - - -
    compressor motor
    drive belt (if AMM 12-
    Installed) B-21-50-01-00A-903A-A
    21-50/22 Vapor cycle cooling Examine the cooling unit - - - - Y Y
    3 system (if installed)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 12


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    21-50/43 Vapor cycle Clean per OSCMM Initially at each - Y - - -
    3 compressor scheduled
    condenser module inspection,
    (including motor) (if then based on
    installed) field
    experience the
    interval can be
    adjusted to a
    more effective
    level
    22-10/60 Servo mount (pitch, Remove for clutch check 1000 flying - Y - - Y
    roll and yaw) hours or 12
    AMM 12- months
    B-22-10-00-00A-313A-A whichever
    comes first
    (installed)
    22-10/23 Pitch, roll, and yaw Examine - - - - Y Y
    3 actuators and
    capstan control
    cables
    22-20/12 Angle of Attack Examine - - - Y Y Y
    9 (AOA) transmitters
    22-20/13 Stick pusher Check - - - Y Y
    0 system
    AMM 12-
    B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A
    22-20/22 Stick pusher Functional test - - - - Y Y
    6 system
    AMM 12-
    B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A
    23-10/32 Audio Control Operational test - - - - Y Y
    2 Panel Emergency
    Switch AMM 12-
    B-23-50-00-00A-903A-A
    23-10/32 Emergency Operational test - - - - Y Y
    3 Frequency Comm
    Tuning Switch AMM 12-
    B-23-12-00-00A-903A-A
    24-30/33 NiCad batteries Remove and service 400 flying - Y - - Y
    9 hours or 12
    AMM 12- month
    B-24-30-07-00A-920A-A whichever
    and CMM comes first
    (installed)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 13


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    24-30/34 Lead acid batteries Remove and do a capacity Initially at 1000 - Y - - -
    0 test flying hours or
    12 months
    AMM 12- (installed)
    B-24-30-07-00A-920A-A whichever
    and CMM comes first. If
    capacity above
    90% then
    every 600
    flying hours or
    6 months. If
    capacity is
    between 85%
    and 90% then
    every 300
    flying hours or
    3 months. If
    capacity is
    below 85%
    replace.
    24-30/30 Generator 1 Brush check 200 flying - Y - - Y
    9 hours
    AMM 12-
    B-24-30-01-00A-313A-A
    24-30/31 Starter/generator 2 Brush check 200 flying - Y - - Y
    0 hours
    AMM 12-
    B-24-30-01-00A-313A-A
    24-30/31 Generator control Functional test of the GCU 3000 flying Y - - - -
    1 units GCU 1 and 1 and GCU 2 over and hours or at
    GCU 2 under voltage trip protection Annual
    (CMR) Inspection
    whichever
    AMM 12- comes first
    B-71-00-00-00A-903D-A (installed)
    24-30/31 External power Over/under voltage trip - - - - Y Y
    2 controller protection operational test
    AMM 12-
    B-24-30-00-00A-903A-A
    24-30/31 DC electrical Functional test - - - - Y Y
    3 system
    AMM 12-
    B-71-00-00-00A-903D-A
    24-40/22 External Power Unit Examine - - - - Y Y
    9 (EPU) receptacle
    24-50/70 Emergency power Remove and Cap test 12 months - Y - - Y
    supply (if installed) (installed)
    AMM 12-
    B-24-52-51-00A-920A-A
    24-60/13 Cockpit circuit Examine - - - Y Y Y
    3 breaker panels and
    switch panels

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 14


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    25-10/13 Crew seat belts Examine - - - Y Y Y
    4
    25-10/13 Crew seats Examine as far as possible - - - Y - Y
    5 with seats installed
    25-10/29 Crew seat belts Overhaul 12 years - Y - - -
    4 (elapsed)
    25-10/29 Crew seats Remove - - - - Y Y
    6
    AMM 12-
    B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A
    25-10/29 Crew seats Install - - - - Y Y
    7
    AMM 12-
    B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A
    25-10/30 Crew seats Remove cushions, covers - - - - Y Y
    0 and shells (Ref. CMM) and
    examine seat. Install
    cushions, covers and
    shells.

    Note

    The CMM Document


    No’s. are given in AMM
    12-
    B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A
    25-20/13 Passenger seat Examine - - - Y Y Y
    6 belts and
    extensions
    25-20/13 Passenger seats Examine - - - - Y Y
    7
    25-20/29 Passenger seat Overhaul 12 years - Y - - -
    5 belts and (elapsed)
    extensions
    25-20/29 Passenger seats Remove - - - - Y Y
    8
    AMM 12-
    B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A or
    12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A
    25-20/29 Passenger seats Install - - - - Y Y
    9
    AMM 12-
    B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A or
    12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 15


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    25-20/30 Passenger seats Examine as far as possible - - - Y - Y
    2 with seats installed.
    Move the recline
    mechanism and swivel
    function (executive seat
    only) through its full motion
    and check for correct
    operation. If necessary,
    refer to the applicable
    supplier CMM (CMM
    25-20-07 for executive
    seats and CMM 25-20-99
    for standard seats).
    25-60/23 ELT Operational test - - - - Y Y
    1
    AMM 12-
    B-25-63-00-00A-903A-A
    25-60/23 ELT installation Examine - - - - Y Y
    2
    25-63/23 ELT battery Discard After 1 hour of - Y - - -
    use or as
    shown on the
    battery label
    25-63/43 ELT Nav Interface Discard 16000 flying - Y - - -
    4 Unit Serial Memory hours or 10
    Module years
    (installed),
    whichever
    comes first.
    26-20/2 Fire extinguisher Life limit 10 years Y - - - -
    (elapsed)
    26-20/24 Fire extinguisher Content check 12 months - Y - - Y
    (elapsed)
    27-00/71 Flight control Inspection/check 2000 flying - Y - - -
    cables including hours or 5
    auto pilot and stick AMM 12- years
    pusher cables B-27-00-00-00A-313A-A whichever
    comes first
    (installed)
    27-00/13 Aileron, elevator Operate, make sure full and - - - Y Y
    8 and rudder controls free travel

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 16


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    27-00/40 Bonding leads to all Examine Threshold - Y - - -
    2 Flight Control
    Surfaces 32,500 flying
    hours or
    42,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    12,500 flying
    hours or
    15,000
    landings or 6
    years,
    whichever
    comes first
    27-10/13 Aileron LH and RH Examine - - - Y Y Y
    9
    27-10/23 Aileron LH and RH Examine - - - - Y Y
    4 rods and levers
    Spray PTFE Teflon Spray
    OKS 571 (or equivalent)
    around the aileron pushrod
    guide roller sleeves at all
    three locations in each wing
    27-10/23 Aileron electrical Examine - - - - Y Y
    5 bonding straps
    27-10/23 Aileron controls Examine the control cables - - - - Y Y
    6 and pulleys as far as
    possible. Move the
    mechanism so that you can
    see all parts of the cables
    and make sure the safety
    clips are fully engaged in
    the turnbuckles
    27-10/23 Aileron cable Check - - - - Y Y
    7 tension
    AMM 12-
    B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A
    27-10/23 Ailerons Functional test - - - - Y Y
    8
    AMM 12-
    B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 17


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    27-10/39 Aileron Control Examine Threshold Y - - - -
    4 System
    AMM 12- 32,500 flying
    B-27-10-00-00A-310A-A hours or
    42,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    12,500 flying
    hours or
    15,000
    landings or 6
    years,
    whichever
    comes first
    27-10/39 Aileron Cable Eddy Current Inspection Threshold Y - - - -
    5 Segment
    AMM 12- 32,500 flying
    B-27-10-09-00A-353A-A hours or
    42,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    12,500 flying
    hours or
    15,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first
    27-10/39 Aileron Control Eddy Current Inspection Threshold Y - - - -
    6 Rods
    AMM 12- 32,500 flying
    B-27-00-01-00A-353A-A hours or
    42,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    12,500 flying
    hours or
    15,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 18


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    27-10/39 Aileron Control Magnetic Particle Threshold Y - - - -
    7 Rods Inspection
    32,500 flying
    AMM 12- hours or
    B-27-00-01-00A-352A-A 42,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    12,500 flying
    hours or
    15,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first
    27-10/39 Aileron Bellcranks Eddy Current and Magnetic Threshold Y - - - -
    8 Particle Inspections
    32,500 flying
    AMM 12- hours or
    B-27-10-08-00A-353A-A 42,000
    landings,
    AMM 12- whichever
    B-27-10-08-00A-353B-A comes first.
    12-B-27-10-08-00A-352B-A Repeat

    12,500 flying
    hours or
    15,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first
    27-15/23 Aileron trim Functional test - - - - Y Y
    9
    AMM 12-
    B-27-15-00-00A-903A-A
    27-20/14 Rudder Examine, in particular the - - - Y Y Y
    0 cover plate (Part No.
    555.40.12.215) on the
    bottom of the rudder to
    make sure it is not bent and
    there are no signs of
    interference with the rudder
    stop.
    Move the rudder on the
    upper hinge in the lateral
    and fore-and-aft directions
    and check for play. If
    necessary repair, SRM
    12-B-55-40-00-00A-664B-
    A.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 19


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    27-20/24 Rudder static Examine - - - - Y Y
    0 dischargers
    27-20/24 Rudder controls Examine the control cables - - - - Y Y
    1 and pulleys as far as
    possible. Move the
    mechanism so that you can
    see all parts of the cables
    and make sure the safety
    clips are fully engaged in
    the turnbuckles
    27-20/24 Rudder cable Check - - - - Y Y
    3 tension
    AMM 12-
    B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A
    27-20/24 Rudder Functional test - - - - Y Y
    4
    AMM 12-
    B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A
    27-20/24 Rudder trim Functional test - - - - Y Y
    5
    AMM 12-
    B-27-25-00-00A-903A-A
    27-20/24 Rudder electrical Examine - - - - Y Y
    6 bonding straps
    27-20/37 Rudder Control Examine Threshold Y - - - -
    4 System
    AMM 12- 32,500 flying
    B-27-20-00-00A-310A-A hours or
    42,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    12,500 flying
    hours or
    15,000
    landings or 6
    years,
    whichever
    comes first

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 20


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    27-20/37 Rudder Bellcranks Eddy Current Inspection Threshold Y - - - -
    5
    AMM 12- 32,500 flying
    B-27-20-04-00A-353A-A hours or
    42,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    12,500 flying
    hours or
    15,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first
    27-20/37 Rudder Cable Examine Threshold Y - - - -
    6 Quadrant Shear
    Spigot AMM 12- 32,500 flying
    B-27-20-05-00A-310A-A hours or
    42,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    12,500 flying
    hours or
    15,000
    landings or 6
    years,
    whichever
    comes first
    27-20/43 Rudder control Check for new factory Within the next - Y - - -
    0 cables tension delivered aircraft that have 150 flying
    not had an Annual hours
    Inspection completed
    AMM 12-
    B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A
    27-20/43 Rudder control Check after replacement of At the next - Y - - -
    1 cables tension any rudder control system scheduled
    cables (Autopilot, and/or inspection, but
    rudder) not later than
    150 flying
    AMM 12- hours
    B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A
    27-30/14 Elevators Examine - - - Y Y Y
    1
    27-30/24 Elevator electrical Examine - - - - Y Y
    7 bonding straps
    27-30/24 Elevator static Examine - - - - Y Y
    8 dischargers

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 21


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    27-30/24 Elevator controls Examine the control cables - - - - Y Y
    9 and pulleys as far as
    possible. Move the
    mechanism so that you can
    see all parts of the cables
    and make sure the safety
    clips are fully engaged in
    the turnbuckles
    27-30/25 Elevator cable Check - - - - Y Y
    0 tension
    AMM 12-
    B-27-30-00-00A-903A-A
    27-30/25 Elevator Functional test - - - - Y Y
    1
    AMM 12-
    B-27-30-00-00A-903A-A
    27-30/33 Elevator control Check for new factory Within the next - Y - - -
    3 cables tension delivered aircraft that have 150 flying
    not had an Annual hours
    Inspection completed
    AMM 12-
    B-27-30-00-00A-903A-A
    27-30/33 Elevator control Check after replacement of At the next - Y - - -
    4 cables tension any elevator control system scheduled
    cables (Autopilot, Stick inspection, but
    Pusher and Elevator) not later than
    150 flying
    AMM 12- hours
    B-27-30-00-00A-903A-A
    27-30/36 Elevator - Control Examine Threshold Y - - - -
    3 System
    AMM 12- 32,500 flying
    B-27-30-00-00A-310A-A hours or
    42,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    12,500 flying
    hours or
    15,000
    landings or 6
    years,
    whichever
    comes first

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 22


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    27-30/36 Elevator Control Eddy Current Inspection Threshold Y - - - -
    4 Rods
    AMM 12- 32,500 flying
    B-27-00-01-00A-353A-A hours or
    42,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    12,500 flying
    hours or
    15,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first
    27-30/36 Elevator Control Magnetic Particle Threshold Y - - - -
    5 Rods Inspection
    32,500 flying
    AMM 12- hours or
    B-27-00-01-00A-352A-A 42,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    12,500 flying
    hours or
    15,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first
    27-30/36 Elevator Control Eddy Current Inspection Threshold Y - - - -
    6 Lever
    AMM 12- 32,500 flying
    B-27-30-05-00A-353A-A hours or
    42,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    12,500 flying
    hours or
    15,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 23


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    27-30/40 Aileron Hinge Eddy Current Inspection Threshold Y - - - -
    0 Points
    AMM 12- 32,500 flying
    B-57-60-06-00A-353A-A hours or
    42,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    12,500 flying
    hours or
    15,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first
    27-40/1 Horizontal stabilizer Functional test of trim 3000 flying Y - - - -
    trim runaway aural warning hours or at
    system (FAA CMR) Annual
    Inspection
    AMM 12- whichever
    B-27-40-00-00A-903A-A comes first
    27-40/3 Pitch trim actuator Life limit 20000 flying Y - - - -
    hours or 27000
    landings
    whichever
    comes first
    27-40/26 Pitch trim actuator Overhaul 5000 flying Y - - - -
    (Part No. hours or 5
    978.73.14.202 and years
    978.73.14.203) whichever
    comes first
    (installed)
    27-40/14 Horizontal stabilizer Operational test of trim - - - Y Y Y
    2 trim interrupt and alternate trim
    switches
    AMM 12-
    B-27-40-00-00A-903A-A
    27-40/25 Horizontal stabilizer Examine - - - - Y Y
    2 trim actuator top
    and bottom
    attachments
    27-40/29 Horizontal stabilizer Operational test of trim - - - Y - Y
    1 trim system
    AMM 12-
    B-27-40-00-00A-903A-A
    27-40/29 Horizontal stabilizer Functional test of trim - - - - Y Y
    2 trim system
    AMM 12-
    B-27-40-00-00A-903A-A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 24


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    27-40/30 Pitch trim actuator Life limit 10000 flying Y - - - -
    7 attachment parts, hours
    fail safe plates and Fail safe plate removal/
    their attachment installation, AMM 12-
    parts (IPC B-27-40-02-00A-920A-A
    12-20-00-07)
    27-50/4 Flap actuators Life limit 20000 flying Y - - - -
    (black anodized) hours or 27000
    (Part No. landings
    978.73.20.307, 308 whichever
    and 309) comes first
    27-50/28 Flap power drive Overhaul 10000 flying - Y - - -
    unit (Part No. hours or 13500
    978.73.20.003) landings
    whichever
    comes first
    27-50/30 Flap actuators Overhaul 5000 flying - Y - - -
    (black anodized) hours or 7000
    (Part No. landings
    978.73.20.307, 308 whichever
    and 309) comes first
    27-50/31 Flap flexible drive Discard 10000 flying - Y - - -
    shafts (Part No’s hours or 13500
    945.02.02.203, landings
    204, 205 and 206) whichever
    comes first
    27-50/74 Flap actuators Lubricate 150 flying - Y - - Y
    (black anodized) hours or 12
    (Part No. AMM 12- month
    978.73.20.307, 308 B-27-50-00-00A-902A-A whichever
    and 309) comes first
    (installed)
    27-50/76 Flap actuators Backlash check Annual - Y - - -
    (black anodized) inspection or
    (Part No. AMM 12- 1000 flying
    978.73.20.307, 308 B-27-50-03-00A-313A-A hours or 1300
    and 309) landings
    whichever
    comes first
    (installed)
    27-50/14 Flaps Lower to 40° - - - Y Y Y
    3
    27-50/14 Flaps and flap Examine - - - Y Y Y
    4 support mechanism
    27-50/25 Flaps electrical Examine - - - - Y Y
    3 bonding straps
    27-50/25 Flap motor, Examine - - - - Y Y
    4 actuators and
    flexible drive shafts

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 25


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    27-50/25 Flaps Functional test and - - - - Y Y
    5 asymmetry monitor test.
    AMM 12-
    B-27-50-00-00A-903A-A
    27-50/38 Flap Mechanism Examine Threshold Y - - - -
    6
    AMM 12- 30,000 flying
    B-27-51-00-00A-310A-A hours or
    39,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    10,000 flying
    hours or
    12,000
    landings or 6
    years,
    whichever
    comes first
    27-50/38 Flap Drive Arm (not Eddy Current Inspection Threshold Y - - - -
    7 removed)
    AMM 12- 25,000 flying
    B-27-51-00-00A-353A-A hours or
    30,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    2,500 flying
    hours or 3,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first
    27-50/38 Flap Drive Arm Eddy Current Inspection Threshold Y - - - -
    8 (removed)
    AMM 12- 30,000 flying
    B-27-51-01-00A-353A-A hours or
    39,000
    AMM 12- landings,
    B-27-51-02-00A-353A-A whichever
    AMM 12- comes first.
    B-27-51-03-00A-353A-A Repeat
    10,000 flying
    hours or
    12,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 26


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    27-50/38 Flap Support Arm Eddy Current Inspection Threshold Y - - - -
    9
    AMM 12- 30,000 flying
    B-27-51-01-00A-353A-A hours or
    39,000
    AMM 12- landings,
    B-27-51-02-00A-353A-A whichever
    AMM 12- comes first.
    B-27-51-03-00A-353A-A Repeat
    10,000 flying
    hours or
    12,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first
    27-50/39 Flap Cove Rib Eddy Current Inspection Threshold Y - - - -
    0 FIttings
    AMM 12- 30,000 flying
    B-27-51-01-00A-353A-A hours or
    39,000
    AMM 12- landings,
    B-27-51-02-00A-353A-A whichever
    AMM 12- comes first.
    B-27-51-03-00A-353A-A Repeat
    10,000 flying
    hours or
    12,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first
    27-50/39 Flap Aft Links Eddy Current Inspection Threshold Y - - - -
    1
    AMM 12- 30,000 flying
    B-27-51-01-00A-353A-A hours or
    39,000
    AMM 12- landings,
    B-27-51-02-00A-353A-A whichever
    AMM 12- comes first.
    B-27-51-03-00A-353A-A Repeat
    10,000 flying
    hours or
    12,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 27


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    27-50/39 Flap Bellcranks Eddy Current Inspection Threshold Y - - - -
    2
    AMM 12- 30,000 flying
    B-27-51-01-00A-353A-A hours or
    39,000
    AMM 12- landings,
    B-27-51-02-00A-353A-A whichever
    AMM 12- comes first.
    B-27-51-03-00A-353A-A Repeat
    10,000 flying
    hours or
    12,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first
    27– Inboard flap drive In-situ Inspection/ Every 150 Y - - - -
    50/437 arms CheckAMM 12- flying hours or
    B-27-51-00-00A-313A-A at Annual
    Inspection,
    whichever
    comes first
    28-10/14 Fuel tank filler caps Examine - - - Y Y Y
    5
    28-10/14 Fuel Remove a sample from - - - Y Y Y
    6 each drain valve and
    examine for water
    28-10/30 Fuel cross vent and Operational test 1000 flying - Y - - -
    6 outward check hours
    valve AMM 12-
    B-28-10-01-00A-903A-A
    28-20/32 Engine driven Overhaul 3500 flying - Y - - -
    pump hours
    28-20/14 Fuel tank vent Operational test - - - Y Y Y
    7 valve and flame
    arrestor AMM 12-
    B-28-20-07-00A-903A-A
    28-20/14 Fuel filter element Remove and clean - - - Y Y Y
    8
    AMM 12-
    B-28-20-01-00A-920A-A
    and 12-
    B-28-20-01-00A-250A-A
    28-20/14 Firewall shutoff Operate FUEL EMERG - - - Y Y Y
    9 valve SHUTOFF lever and make
    sure firewall shutoff valve
    opens and closes fully to
    each dead stop. Make sure
    movement is free and
    check if initial pull out force
    at lever outer end is below
    10 lbf (44.5 N)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 28


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    28-20/15 Engine driven Examine - - - Y Y Y
    0 pump
    28-20/25 Fuel system Examine as far as possible - - - - Y Y
    6 components with panels in Task
    06-00/218 opened/removed
    29-10/15 Low pressure filter Make sure that it has not - - - Y Y Y
    1 blockage indicator come out. If indicator found
    out, do the inspection/check
    If installed procedure
    AMM 12-
    B-29-10-04-00A-313A-A
    29-10/15 Reservoir tank Make sure nitrogen - - - Y Y Y
    3 pressure is correct.
    If installed Pressurize as necessary
    AMM 12-
    B-29-00-00-00A-902A-A
    29-10/25 Power pack Examine, specially for leaks - - - - Y Y
    7 and cracks on the end
    If installed plates and where motor is
    attached
    29-10/25 Nitrogen Check nitrogen pressure - - - - Y Y
    8 accumulator and fill as necessary
    If installed AMM 12-
    B-29-10-02-00A-901A-A
    29-10/25 Power pack electric Remove, clean and re- - - - - Y Y
    9 motor shaft seal install
    drain fluid collector
    bottle
    If installed
    29-10/31 Hydraulic system Make sure fluid level - - - Y Y Y
    6 indicator on the reservoir
    If installed tank shows full. Fill as
    needed.
    AMM 12-
    B-29-00-00-00A-902A-A
    30-10/79 Airfoil de-icers Apply a surface coating of 6 month - Y - - -
    Age Master No. 1 in (installed)
    accordance with the
    manufacturers instructions
    30-10/15 Wing and horizontal Inspection/check - - - Y Y Y
    4 stabilizer airfoil de-
    ice boots AMM 12-
    B-30-10-00-00A-313A-A
    30-10/15 Inertial separation Operational test. - - - Y Y Y
    5 system
    AMM 12-
    B-30-20-00-00A-903A-A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 29


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    30-10/26 Airfoil de-ice Functional test - - - - Y Y
    0 system
    AMM 12-
    B-30-10-00-00A-903A-A
    30-20/15 Engine air intake Examine and look for signs - - - Y Y Y
    6 de-ice lip of gas leaks - none are
    permitted
    30-20/26 Air by-pass door Examine and lubricate with - - - - Y Y
    1 and operating minimum quantity of
    mechanism P10-001
    30-30/32 Probes de-ice Functional test. - - - Y Y Y
    9 system
    AMM 12-
    B-30-30-20-00A-903A-A
    30-40/26 Windshield de-ice Operational test - - - - Y Y
    2 system
    AMM 12-
    B-30-40-00-00A-903A-A
    30-60/15 Propeller de-ice Inspection/check - - - Y Y Y
    8 system
    AMM 12-
    B-30-60-00-00A-313A-A
    30-60/15 Propeller de-ice Operational test - - - Y Y Y
    9 system
    AMM 12-
    B-30-60-00-00A-903A-A
    31-30/42 CVFDR (if installed) Operational test - - - - Y Y
    1
    AMM 12-
    B-31-30-01-00A-903A-A
    32-10/80 Main and nose Lubricate Tire change or - Y - - -
    wheel bearings 12 months
    AMM 12- whichever
    B-12-20-06-00A-902A-A comes first
    (installed)
    32-10/16 Main landing gear Lubricate - - - Y Y Y
    2
    AMM 12-
    B-12-20-04-00A-902A-A
    32-10/16 Main landing gear Examine - - - Y Y Y
    3 legs
    32-10/16 Main landing gear Examine - - - Y Y Y
    4 compartments
    32-10/16 Main landing gear Check nitrogen pressure - - - Y Y Y
    5 shock struts
    AMM 12-
    B-32-10-00-00A-902A-A
    32-10/26 Main landing gear Examine - - - - Y Y
    3 electrical bonding
    straps

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 30


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    32-10/31 Main landing gear Inspection/check 2000 flying - Y - - -
    5 axles and bushes hours or 12
    AMM 12- months
    B-32-10-00-00A-313A-A whichever
    or comes first
    (installed)
    AMM 12-
    B-32-10-00-00A-313B-A
    32-10/34 Main landing gear Overhaul CMM 02099 Threshold Y - - - -
    5
    25,000 flying
    hours or
    30,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    8,300 flying
    hours or
    10,000
    landings or 6
    years,
    whichever
    comes first
    32-10/34 MLG Yoke fitting Eddy Current Inspection Threshold Y - - - -
    6 lugs CMM 02099
    25,000 flying
    hours or
    30,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    8,300 flying
    hours or
    10,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 31


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    32-10/34 MLG Trailing Link Eddy Current Inspection Threshold Y - - - -
    7 CMM 02099
    25,000 flying
    hours or
    30,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    8,300 flying
    hours or
    10,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first
    32-10/43 Main landing gear Remove, clean and - - - - Y Y
    6 shock struts top examine for corrosion. If
    and bottom corroded, replace bolt with
    attachment bolts latest bolt part number. If
    not corroded, apply grease
    P04–028 and install the
    bolt.AMM 12-
    B-32-10-03-00A-920A-A or
    12-B-32-10-03-00A-920B-A
    32-20/16 Nose landing gear Check nitrogen pressure - - - Y Y Y
    6 leg shock strut
    AMM 12-
    B-32-20-00-00A-902A-A
    32-20/16 Nose landing gear Lubricate - - - Y Y Y
    7
    AMM 12-
    B-12-20-04-00A-902A-A
    32-20/16 Nose landing gear Examine, in particular the - - - Y Y Y
    8 leg and steering steering rod end (Part No.
    mechanism 532.20.12.134) for the
    complete retention of
    bearing into the steering rod
    end housing.
    32-20/16 Nose landing gear Examine - - - Y Y Y
    9 compartment
    32-20/26 Nose landing gear Examine - - - - Y Y
    5 electrical bonding
    straps
    32-20/33 NLG torque tube Life limit 11000 flying Y - - - -
    5 (Part No. hours or 15000
    532.50.12.047) landings or 10
    years
    whichever
    comes first

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 32


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    32-20/33 NLG drag link right Inspection/check Initially 2000 Y - - - -
    8 part (P/N flying hours or
    532.20.12.289) AMM 12- 2500 landings
    B-32-20-06-00A-313A-A (installed)
    whichever
    comes first,
    then every 300
    flying hours or
    400 landings,
    whichever
    comes first
    32-20/40 NLG Overhaul Threshold - Y - - -
    3
    CMM 02100 25,000 flying
    hours or
    30,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    8,300 flying
    hours or
    10,000
    landings or 6
    years,
    whichever
    comes first
    32-30/17 Extension and Functional test of extension - - - Y Y Y
    0 retraction system and retraction system and
    emergency extension
    Hydraulic landing system
    gear only
    AMM 12-
    B-32-30-00-00A-903A-A
    32-30/42 Electro mechanical Life limit 1000 landings Y - - - -
    3 landing gear
    actuators
    32-30/42 Emergency gear Operational test 2000 flying Y - - - -
    4 extension system hours or at
    AMM 12- Annual
    Electro mechanical B-32-30-10-00A-903A-A Inspection
    landing gear only whichever
    comes first
    32-30/42 Electro mechanical Examine all components - - - Y Y Y
    5 landing gear and their attachments in the
    extension and nose and main landing gear
    retraction compartments
    mechanism

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 33


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    32-30/42 Time delay relays Functional test 2000 flying Y - - - -
    6 and power hours or at
    contactors AMM 12- Annual
    B-32-30-00-00A-903B-A Inspection,
    Electro mechanical whichever
    landing gear only comes first
    32-30/42 Main landing gear Loosen and move the 2000 flying Y - - - -
    9 spring strut spring strut cover to hours or at
    examine the springs Annual
    P/N 532.34.12.081 Inspection,
    Electro mechanical whichever
    landing gear only comes first
    32-30/43 NLG and MLG Discard 12,000 - Y - - -
    5 Electro-mechanical landings
    Actuators Anti- NLG Actuator AMM
    rotation pads 12-B-32-30-02-01A-920B-A
    MLG Actuator AMM
    12-B-32-30-01-01A-920B-A
    32-40/17 Mainwheels Examine. Rotate wheels, - - - Y Y Y
    1 make sure bearing
    movement is smooth and
    free and no excessive play
    exists
    32-40/17 Mainwheel tires Examine and check tire - - - Y Y Y
    2 pressure
    AMM 12-
    B-12-10-04-00A-902A-A
    32-40/17 Nosewheel Examine. Rotate wheel, - - - Y Y Y
    3 make sure bearing
    movement is smooth and
    free and no excessive play
    exists
    32-40/17 Nosewheel tire Examine and check tire - - - Y Y Y
    4 pressure
    AMM 12-
    B-12-10-04-00A-902A-A
    32-40/17 Brake system Apply the parking brake. - - - Y Y Y
    5 Examine the brake units.
    Make sure that pad wear
    indicators protrude from
    housing.
    32-40/17 Fluid reservoir Check and replenish if - - - Y Y Y
    6 necessary
    AMM 12-
    B-12-10-02-00A-902A-A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 34


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    32-50/40 NLG Steering Examine Threshold - Y - - -
    4 Mechanism
    AMM 12- 32,500 flying
    B-32-50-00-00A-310A-A hours or
    42,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    8,300 flying
    hours or
    10,000
    landings or 6
    years,
    whichever
    comes first
    33-40/17 Exterior lighting Operational test. - - - Y Y Y
    7
    AMM 12-
    B-33-40-00-00A-903A-A
    33-41/17 Landing lights Examine - - - Y Y Y
    8
    33-42/17 Taxi lights Examine - - - Y Y Y
    9
    33-43/18 Navigation and Examine - - - Y Y Y
    0 strobe lights
    33-44/18 Recognition lights Examine - - - Y Y Y
    1 (if installed)
    33-46/18 Beacon lights (if Examine - - - Y Y Y
    2 installed)
    34-00/18 Communications Examine - - - Y Y Y
    3 and navigation
    antennas
    34-00/18 Cockpit instruments Examine - - - Y Y Y
    4 and avionic
    equipment
    34-11/82 Static system Leak check. 2 years - Y - - -
    AMM 12-
    B-34-11-00-00A-903A-A
    34-11/18 Pitot tube Examine - - - Y Y Y
    5
    34-11/18 Static ports Examine - - - Y Y Y
    6
    34-11/26 Pitot and static Drain. - - - Y Y
    8 system
    AMM 12-
    B-34-11-00-00A-901A-A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 35


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    34-54/86 Transponder Functional test 2 years - Y - - -
    system (single and (installed)
    dual systems) AMM 12-
    B-34-54-00-00A-903A-A or
    12-B-34-54-00-00A-903B-A
    or 12-
    B-34-54-10-00A-903A-A or
    12-B-34-54-10-00A-903B-A
    34-21/84 Standby magnetic Swing check 2 years - Y - - -
    compass (installed)
    AMM 12-
    B-34-20-00-00A-903A-A
    34-11/34 Static ports plate Inspection/check 2 years - Y - - -
    3 height (RVSM (installed)
    aircraft) AMM 12-
    B-34-11-12-00A-313A-A
    34-25/34 Altitude and vertical Functional test 2 years - Y - - -
    4 speed indication
    (RVSM aircraft) AMM 12-
    B-34-14-00-00A-903B-A
    35-10/6 Oxygen bottle Life limit 15 years Y - - - -
    (elapsed)
    35-10/36 Oxygen bottle Hydrostatic test. Refer to Refer to AVOX Y - - - -
    AVOX Service Information Service
    Letter SIL-35-114 latest Information
    revision Letter
    (www.avoxsys.com). SIL-35-114
    latest revision
    (www.avoxsys.
    com).
    35-10/18 High pressure relief Make sure that it is not - - - Y Y Y
    7 indicator (green damaged
    disk)
    35-10/18 Oxygen system Check contents - - - Y Y
    8
    35-10/26 Oxygen pipelines Examine - - - - Y Y
    9 and equipment
    35-10/27 Oxygen system Operational test - - - - Y Y
    0
    AMM 12-
    B-35-00-00-00A-903A-A
    35-20/87 Passenger oxygen Inspection/check 3 years - Y - - -
    masks (installed)
    AMM 12-
    B-35-20-00-00A-313A-A
    46-26/32 Pilot and Copilot (if Operational test - - - Y Y Y
    0 installed) PFD
    Reversionary AMM 12-
    switches B-46-30-05-00A-903A-A or
    12-B-46-30-06-00A-903A-A
    46-26/32 ADAHRS sensor Operational test - - - Y Y Y
    1 source select
    switches AMM 12-
    B-46-30-02-00A-903A-A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 36


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    52-10/88 Passenger/crew Examine with trim removed. 2000, 4000, - Y - - -
    door 6000 flying
    AMM 12- hours or 2, 4, 6
    B-25-21-03-00A-920A-A or years
    12-B-25-22-03-00A-920A-A whichever
    Examine the top step area comes first
    around the insulation mat
    for corrosion. If corrosion is
    found, write to Pilatus for a
    specific repair.Examine
    door hinge pin and hinges.
    AMM 12-
    B-52-10-00-00A-313A-A
    52-10/18 Passenger/crew Clean with a dry cloth, - - - Y Y Y
    9 door seal examine and apply P09-002
    french chalk
    52-10/19 Passenger/crew Examine - - - Y Y Y
    0 door shoot bolts
    and door frame
    fittings
    52-10/19 Passenger/crew Make sure movement is - - - Y Y Y
    1 door handle lock free
    pin
    52-10/19 Passenger/crew Examine and lubricate as - - - Y Y Y
    2 door hinges necessary with minimum
    quantity of P10-001
    Lubricant
    52-10/27 Passenger/crew Examine - - - - Y Y
    1 door,
    counterbalance and
    cable support
    brackets
    52-10/34 Passenger/crew Examine all structural Threshold Y - - - -
    8 door elements
    32,500 flying
    AMM 12- hours or
    B-52-10-00-00A-310A-A 42,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    12,500 flying
    hours or
    15,000
    landings or 6
    years,
    whichever
    comes first

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 37


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    52-10/40 Passenger/Crew Eddy Current Inspection Threshold - Y - - -
    5 Door Piano Hinge 32,500 flying
    AMM 12- hours or
    B-52-00-01-00A-353A-A 42,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    12,500 flying
    hours or
    15,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    52-10/40 Passenger/Crew Eddy Current Inspection Threshold - Y - - -
    6 Door Skin 25,000 flying
    AMM 12- hours or
    B-52-10-01-00A-353A-A 30,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    12,500 flying
    hours or
    15,000
    landings or 6
    years,
    whichever
    comes first.
    52-20/27 Emergency door Examine (door removed) - - - - Y Y
    2
    52-20/34 Emergency door Examine all structural Threshold Y - - - -
    9 elements
    32,500 flying
    AMM 12- hours or
    B-52-20-00-00A-310A-A 42,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    12,500 flying
    hours or
    15,000
    landings or 6
    years,
    whichever
    comes first

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 38


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    52-30/8 Cargo door lower Life limit 13000 flying Y - - - -
    lug fittings (qty 3) hours or 17000
    landings
    whichever
    comes first
    52-30/89 Cargo door Examine with trim removed. 2000, 4000, - Y - - -
    6000 flying
    AMM 12- hours or 2, 4, 6
    B-25-21-03-00A-920A-A or years
    12-B-25-22-03-00A-920A-A whichever
    Examine door hinge pin, comes first
    hinges and the lock
    mechanism.
    AMM 12-
    B-52-30-00-00A-313A-A
    52-30/19 Cargo door seal Clean with a dry cloth, - - - Y Y Y
    3 examine and apply P09-002
    french chalk
    52-30/19 Cargo door shoot Examine. Make sure the - - - Y Y Y
    4 bolts, door frame hook roller bushes are free
    fittings and hooks to rotate. For roller bush
    wear limits refer to AMM
    12-B-52-30-00-00A-313A-A
    52-30/19 Cargo door hinges Examine and lubricate as - - - Y Y Y
    5 necessary with minimum
    quantity of P10-001
    Lubricant
    52-30/27 Emergency door Clean with a wet cloth, dry - - - - Y Y
    3 seal and examine and apply
    P09-002 french chalk
    52-30/27 Cargo door Examine - - - - Y Y
    4
    52-30/35 Cargo door Examine all structural Threshold Y - - - -
    0 elements
    32,500 flying
    AMM 12- hours or
    B-52-30-00-00A-310A-A 42,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    12,500 flying
    hours or
    15,000
    landings or 6
    years,
    whichever
    comes first

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 39


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    52-30/40 Cargo Door Piano Eddy Current Inspection Threshold - Y - - -
    7 Hinge 32,500 flying
    AMM 12- hours or
    B-52-30-00-01A-353A-A 42,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    12,500 flying
    hours or
    15,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    52-30/40 Cargo Door Skin Eddy Current Inspection Threshold25,0 - Y - - -
    8 00 flying hours
    AMM 12- or 30,000
    B-52-30-01-00A-353A-A landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    12,500 flying
    hours or
    15,000
    landings or 6
    years,
    whichever
    comes first.
    52-70/27 Door warning Operational test - - - - Y Y
    5 system
    AMM 12-
    B-52-70-00-00A-903A-A
    53-00/9 Fuselage and Life Limit 20000 flying Y - - - -
    associated hours or 27000
    structure (Pre SB landings
    04-009) whichever
    comes first
    53-00/90 Front pressure Examine with insulation on 2000, 4000, - Y - - -
    bulkhead engine and cockpit sides 6000 flying
    removed. If insulation on hours or 2, 4, 6
    cockpit side is wet, remove, years
    dry and reinstall insulation whichever
    comes first

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 40


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    53-00/91 Fuselage internal Examine frames 10, 21, 24, 2000, 4000, - Y - - -
    bottom surface 36 and frames adjacent to 6000 flying
    doors and to emergency hours or 2, 4, 6
    exit, with insulation years
    removed. If corrosion is whichever
    found, examine all fuselage comes first
    bottom surface with
    insulation removed. If
    insulation is wet, remove,
    dry and reinstall insulation
    53-00/92 Rear pressure Examine with trim removed 2000, 4000, - Y - - -
    bulkhead 6000 flying
    hours or 2, 4, 6
    years
    whichever
    comes first
    53-00/93 Structure around Examine 2000, 4000, - Y - - -
    windows 6000 flying
    hours or 2, 4, 6
    years
    whichever
    comes first
    53-00/94 Door frames and Examine. If insulation is 2000, 4000, - Y - - -
    emergency exit installed in the door frames 6000 flying
    frame and is wet, remove and hours or 2, 4, 6
    discard it (no longer years
    installed on production) whichever
    comes first
    53-00/19 Fuselage external Examine. - - - Y Y Y
    6 surface
    For aircraft that experience
    stone damage to the belly
    skin, visually examine
    affected areas for cracks.
    53-00/27 Rear pressure Examine - - - - Y Y
    6 bulkhead
    53-00/27 Floor top and Examine as far as possible - - - - Y Y
    7 bottom surface and with carpet and floor panels
    seat rails in Task 06-00/8 removed
    53-00/27 Baggage/freight net Examine for corrosion - - - - Y Y
    8 mounting plates
    attachment bolts
    and surrounding
    structure
    53-00/27 Baggage Examine - - - - Y Y
    9 compartment
    53-00/28 Rear fuselage Examine as far as possible, - - - - Y Y
    0 internal structure in particular examine
    battery mounting tray for
    corrosion

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 41


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    53-00/32 Fuselage and Life limit 25000 flying Y - - - -
    4 associated hours or 30000
    structure (Post SB landings
    04-009) whichever
    comes first
    53-00/33 Carry through Inspection/Check - - - - Y Y
    7 frames 21 and 24
    AMM 12-
    B-53-20-02-00A-313A-A
    53-00/35 Upper Longerons Eddy Current Inspection Threshold Y - - - -
    1 Frame 10
    AMM 12- 25,000 flying
    B-53-10-06-01A-353A-A hours or
    30,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    12,500 flying
    hours or
    15,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first
    53-00/35 Fuselage Frames Examine all structural Threshold Y - - - -
    2 10 to 16 elements
    32,500 flying
    AMM 12- hours or
    B-53-10-00-00A-310A-A 42,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    12,500 flying
    hours or
    15,000
    landings or 6
    years,
    whichever
    comes first

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 42


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    53-00/35 Fuselage Frames Examine all structural Threshold Y - - - -
    3 16 to 36 elements
    32,500 flying
    AMM 12- hours or
    B-53-20-00-00A-310A-A 42,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    12,500 flying
    hours or
    15,000
    landings or 6
    years,
    whichever
    comes first
    53-00/35 Fuselage Frames Examine all structural Threshold Y - - - -
    4 36 to 43 elements
    32,500 flying
    AMM 12- hours or
    B-53-30-00-00A-310A-A 42,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    12,500 flying
    hours or
    15,000
    landings or 6
    years,
    whichever
    comes first
    53-00/35 Antenna Structure Examine Threshold Y - - - -
    5
    AMM 12- 32,500 flying
    B-53-00-00-00A-310A-A hours or
    42,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    12,500 flying
    hours or
    15,000
    landings or 6
    years,
    whichever
    comes first

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 43


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    53-00/35 Antenna - Bottom Eddy Current Inspection Threshold Y - - - -
    6 fuselage skin
    AMM 12- 28,300 flying
    B-53-00-00-00A-353A-A hours or
    37,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    8,300 flying
    hours or
    10,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first
    53-00/35 Antenna - Upper Eddy Current Inspection Threshold Y - - - -
    7 fuselage skin
    AMM 12- 32,500 flying
    B-53-00-00-00A-353A-A hours or
    42,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    12,500 flying
    hours or
    15,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first
    53-00/35 Upper Flange Carry Examine Threshold Y - - - -
    8 Through Frames 21
    and 24 AMM 12- 30,000 flying
    B-53-20-02-00A-310A-A hours or
    39,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    10,000 flying
    hours or
    12,000
    landings or 6
    years,
    whichever
    comes first

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 44


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    53-00/35 Frames 21 and 24 Eddy Current Inspection Threshold Y - - - -
    9 Wing Attachments
    AMM 12- 30,000 flying
    B-53-20-02-00A-353A-A hours or
    39,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    10,000 flying
    hours or
    12,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first
    53-00/36 Frames 21 and 24 Eddy Current Inspection Threshold Y - - - -
    0 Side Frame
    Attachments AMM 12- 30,000 flying
    B-53-20-02-00A-353A-A hours or
    39,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    10,000 flying
    hours or
    12,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first
    53-00/36 Frames 41 and 43 Eddy Current Inspection Threshold Y - - - -
    1 Stabilizer
    Attachment AMM 12- 32,500 flying
    B-53-30-02-00A-353A-A hours or
    42,000
    or landings,
    AMM 12- whichever
    B-55-30-03-00A-353A-A comes first.
    Repeat
    12,500 flying
    hours or
    15,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 45


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    53-00/41 Frame 40 Eddy Current Inspection Threshold - Y - - -
    9 32,500 flying
    AMM 12- hours or
    B-53-30-02-00A-353A-A 42,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    12,500 flying
    hours or
    15,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first
    53-30/34 Static ports critical Inspection/check 12 months - Y - - -
    2 area (RVSM
    aircraft) AMM 12-
    B-53-30-01-00A-313A-A
    55-00/10 Tail structure (Pre Life limit 20000 flying Y - - - -
    SB 04-009) hours or 27000
    landings
    whichever
    comes first
    55-00/32 Tail structure (Post 25000 flying Y - - - -
    5 SB 04-009) hours or 30000
    landings
    whichever
    comes first
    55-10/95 Horizontal stabilizer Examine as far as possible 2000, 4000, - Y - - -
    internal surfaces with panels removed 6000 flying
    and horizontal/ hours or 2, 4, 6
    vertical stabilizer years
    interface whichever
    comes first
    55-10/96 Vertical stabilizer Examine as far as possible 2000, 4000, - Y - - -
    internal surfaces with panels removed 6000 flying
    hours or 2, 4, 6
    years
    whichever
    comes first
    55-10/19 Horizontal stabilizer Examine - - - Y Y Y
    7 external surface
    55-10/31 Horizontal/vertical Inspection/Check - - - - Y Y
    9 stabilizer
    attachment AMM 12-
    B-55-00-00-00A-361A-A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 46


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    55-20/36 Elevator Examine Threshold Y - - - -
    2
    AMM 12- 32,500 flying
    B-55-20-00-00A-310A-A hours or
    42,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    12,500 flying
    hours or
    15,000
    landings or 6
    years,
    whichever
    comes first
    55-20/36 Elevator Drive Eddy Current Inspection Threshold Y - - - -
    7 Lever
    AMM 12- 32,500 flying
    B-55-20-01-00A-353A-A hours or
    42,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    12,500 flying
    hours or
    15,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first
    55-20/36 Elevator Hinges Eddy Current Inspection Threshold Y - - - -
    8
    AMM 12- 32,500 flying
    B-55-20-01-00A-353A-A hours or
    42,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    12,500 flying
    hours or
    15,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 47


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    55-30/19 Vertical stabilizer Examine, specially around - - - Y Y Y
    8 external surface rear spar top rivets. If
    cracks are found refer to
    SRM
    12-B-55-00-01-00A-664A-A
    for repair procedure
    55-30/28 Vertical stabilizer Examine - - - - Y Y
    1 electrical bonding
    straps
    55-30/36 Vertical Stabilizer Examine Threshold Y - - - -
    9
    AMM 12- 32,500 flying
    B-55-30-00-00A-310A-A hours or
    42,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    12,500 flying
    hours or
    15,000
    landings or 6
    years,
    whichever
    comes first
    55-30/37 Vertical Stabilizer Eddy Current Inspection Threshold Y - - - -
    0 Main and Rear
    Spar Attachment to AMM 12- 32,500 flying
    Fuselage B-53-30-02-00A-353A-A hours or
    42,000
    or landings,
    AMM 12- whichever
    B-55-30-03-00A-353A-A comes first.
    Repeat
    12,500 flying
    hours or
    15,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 48


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    55-30/37 Vertical Stabilizer Eddy Current Inspection Threshold Y - - - -
    1 Main Attachment to
    Horizontal AMM 12- 32,500 flying
    Stabilizer B-55-00-00-00A-353A-A hours or
    42,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    12,500 flying
    hours or
    15,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first
    55-30/37 Vertical Stabilizer Eddy Current Inspection Threshold Y - - - -
    2 Pitch Trim Actuator
    Fitting and AMM 12- 32,500 flying
    Attachment B-55-30-02-00A-353A-A hours or
    42,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    12,500 flying
    hours or
    15,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first
    55-30/42 Vertical Stabilizer Eddy Current Inspection Threshold - Y - - -
    0 Forward 32,500 flying
    Attachment to AMM 12- hours or
    Frame 40 B-55-30-03-00A-353A-A 42,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    12,500 flying
    hours or
    15,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 49


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    55-40/37 Rudder Examine Threshold Y - - - -
    3
    AMM 12- 32,500 flying
    B-55-40-00-00A-310A-A hours or
    42,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    12,500 flying
    hours or
    15,000
    landings or 6
    years,
    whichever
    comes first
    55-40/37 Rudder Hinges Eddy Current Inspection Threshold Y - - - -
    7
    AMM 12- 32,500 flying
    B-55-40-05-00A-353A-A hours or
    42,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    12,500 flying
    hours or
    15,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first
    55-40/41 Rudder Trim Tab Examine Threshold - Y - - -
    0 32,500 flying
    AMM 12- hours or
    B-55-40-04-00A-310A-A 42,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    12,500 flying
    hours or
    15,000
    landings or 6
    years,
    whichever
    comes first
    56-10/20 Windshield LH and Examine 12- - - - Y Y Y
    0 RH B-56-00-00-00A-313A-A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 50


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    56-11/12 Cockpit outer side, Replace If cracked or Y - - - -
    DV windows and stress crazing
    cabin windows can be felt
    56-11/13 Cockpit inner side, Refer to AMM 12- If chipped, Y - - - -
    DV windows and B-56-00-00-00A-313A-A for cracked (only
    cabin windows limitations for inner side
    windows),
    scratched,
    bubbles or
    delaminated
    56-11/14 Windshield LH and Replace If cracked in Y - - - -
    RH inner
    lamination
    56-11/15 Windshield LH and Only unpressurized flight is If cracked in Y - - - -
    RH permitted up to the next outer
    scheduled inspection lamination
    providing it does not cause
    visual problems
    56-11/33 Cockpit side Inspection/check 11000 flying - Y - - -
    2 windows hours or 10
    AMM 12- years
    B-56-11-02-00A-313A-A whichever
    comes first
    (installed)
    56-11/37 Windshield LH and Examine with windshield Threshold Y - - - -
    8 RH and Cockpit and side windows removed
    Side Windows 32,500 flying
    AMM 12- hours or
    B-56-11-01-00A-310A-A 42,000
    landings,
    and whichever
    AMM 12- comes first.
    B-56-11-02-00A-310A-A Repeat
    and 12,500 flying
    AMM 12- hours or
    B-53-10-16-00A-310A-A 15,000
    landings or 6
    years,
    whichever
    comes first
    56-20/20 Cockpit and cabin Examine - - - Y Y Y
    1 windows
    AMM 12-
    B-56-00-00-00A-313A-A
    57-00/11 Wing structure (Pre Life limit 20000 flying Y - - - -
    SB 04-009) hours or 27000
    landings
    whichever
    comes first

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 51


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    57-00/97 Wing internal Examine as far as possible 2000, 4000, - Y - - -
    surfaces and flap with all wing panels 6000 flying
    compartment removed hours or 2, 4, 6
    years
    whichever
    comes first
    57-00/98 Landing gear Examine, especially main 2000, 4000, - Y - - -
    compartments and rear spar parts 6000 flying
    hours or 2, 4, 6
    years
    whichever
    comes first
    57-00/99 Wing to fuselage Examine attachment fittings 11000 flying - Y - - -
    attachments with wings removed hours or 10
    years
    AMM 12- whichever
    B-57-00-00-00A-313A-A comes first
    57-00/20 Wing external Examine - - - Y Y Y
    2 surfaces
    57-00/28 Wing tip static Examine - - - - Y Y
    2 dischargers
    57-00/28 Wing internal Examine as far as possible - - - - Y Y
    3 surfaces and flap with panels in Task
    compartment 06-00/218 opened/removed
    57-00/28 Wing to fuselage Examine as far as possible - - - - Y Y
    4 attachments
    57-00/32 Wing structure Life limit 25000 flying Y - - - -
    6 (Post SB 04-009) hours or 30000
    landings
    whichever
    comes first
    57-00/37 Wing Examine all structural Threshold Y - - - -
    9 elements Rib 1 to Rib 20
    30,000 flying
    AMM 12- hours or
    B-57-00-00-00A-310A-A 39,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    10,000 flying
    hours or
    12,000
    landings or 6
    years,
    whichever
    comes first

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 52


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    57-00/38 Wing Main and Eddy Current Inspection Threshold Y - - - -
    0 Rear Spar to
    Fuselage AMM 12- 30,000 flying
    Attachment B-57-00-03-00A-353A-A hours or
    39,000
    and landings,
    AMM 12- whichever
    B-57-00-03-01A-353A-A comes first.
    Repeat
    10,000 flying
    hours or
    12,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first
    57-00/38 Wing Rear Spar at Eddy Current Inspection Threshold Y - - - -
    2 Rib 8 Flap Arm
    Attachment AMM 12- 25,000 flying
    B-57-20-10-00A-353C-A hours or
    30,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    12,500 flying
    hours or
    15,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first
    57-00/38 Wing Main Spar Eddy Current Inspection Threshold Y - - - -
    3 Fastener Holes Rib
    1 thru Rib 6 AMM 12- 25,000 flying
    B-57-20-10-00A-353A-A hours or
    30,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    3,300 flying
    hours or 4,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 53


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    57-00/38 Wing Main Spar Eddy Current Inspection Threshold Y - - - -
    4 Fastener Holes
    Strap Rib 6 AMM 12- 25,000 flying
    B-57-20-05-00A-353A-A hours or
    30,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    3,300 flying
    hours or 4,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first
    57-00/38 Wing Rear Spar Eddy Current Inspection Threshold Y - - - -
    5 Fastener Holes Rib
    2 thru Rib 3 AMM 12- 25,000 flying
    B-57-20-10-00A-353B-A hours or
    30,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    12,500 flying
    hours or
    15,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first
    57-00/41 Wing Tips Examine Threshold - Y - - -
    2 32,500 flying
    AMM 12- hours or
    B-57-33-00-00A-310A-A 42,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    12,500 flying
    hours or
    15,000
    landings or 6
    years,
    whichever
    comes first

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 54


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    57-00/41 Wing Skin around Eddy Current Inspection Threshold25,0 - Y - - -
    3 drain holes 00 flying hours
    AMM 12- or 30,000
    B-57-20-01-00A-353A-A landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    2,500 flying
    hours or 3,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    57-00/42 Wing Main Spar Eddy Current Inspection Threshold Y - - - -
    7 Fastener Holes 16,000 wing
    Strap Rib 6 AMM 12- flying hours or
    B-57-20-10-00A-353D-A 22,500 wing
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    57-60/39 Aileron Examine Threshold Y - - - -
    3
    AMM 12- 32,500 flying
    B-57-60-00-00A-310A-A hours or
    42,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    12,500 flying
    hours or
    15,000
    landings or 6
    years,
    whichever
    comes first
    57-60/41 Aileron Trim Tab Examine Threshold - Y - - -
    1 32,500 flying
    AMM 12- hours or
    B-57-60-04-00A-310A-A 42,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    12,500 flying
    hours or
    15,000
    landings or 6
    years,
    whichever
    comes first

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 55


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    61-00/10 Propeller Lubricate 400 flying - Y - - Y
    0 hours or 12
    AMM 12- month
    B-12-20-05-00A-902A-A whichever
    comes first
    (installed)
    61-10/37 Propeller Overhaul 4000 flying - Y - - -
    hours or 6
    years
    whichever
    comes first
    (Ref Hartzell
    SL 61)
    (installed)
    61-10/20 Propeller blades Examine. Repair blades as - - - Y Y Y
    3 necessary
    AMM 12-
    B-61-00-00-00A-904A-A
    61-10/28 Propeller hub Remove spinner dome and - - - - Y Y
    5 examine propeller hub.
    Install spinner dome
    AMM 12-
    B-61-10-01-00A-920A-A
    61-20/28 Propeller governor, Examine - - - - Y Y
    6 overspeed
    governor and beta
    controls
    71-00/16 Engine mounting Life limit 20000 flying Y - - - -
    frame (Pre SB hours or 27000
    04-009) landings
    whichever
    comes first
    71-00/17 Engine mounting Life limit 11000 flying Y - - - -
    frame, replace all hours
    bolts, washers and
    nuts
    71-00/38 Engine shock Overhaul At engine - Y - - -
    mount assemblies overhaul, but
    not later than
    5000 flying
    hours
    71-00/10 Power plant torque Operational test 500 flying - Y - - -
    1 limiter hours or 12
    AMM 12- months
    B-71-00-00-00A-903G-A whichever
    comes first
    (installed)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 56


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    71-00/10 Power plant Operational test 500 flying - Y - - -
    2 performance hours or 12
    AMM 12- months
    B-71-00-00-00A-903H-A whichever
    comes first
    (installed)
    71-00/10 Engine torque and Clean 500 flying - Y - - Y
    7 stick pusher torque hours or 12
    transducer AMM 12- months
    electrical B-71-00-03-00A-250A-A whichever
    connectors comes first
    (installed)
    71-00/20 Power plant Post inspection ground run - - - Y Y Y
    4 tests
    AMM 12-
    B-71-00-00-00A-903A-A
    71-00/20 Engine tubular Examine. Replace - - - Y Y Y
    5 mounting frame shockmount if cracks in
    and shockmounts elastomer are more than 1
    in (25,4 mm) long and/or
    0.06 in (1,5 mm) deep
    71-00/20 Power plant and Examine. Refer to P&WC - - - Y Y Y
    6 accessories EMM 72-00-00 Periodic
    inspection and do the 100
    hour and minor inspection
    items
    71-00/20 Engine drain mast Examine for fuel leaks (no - - - Y Y Y
    9 and tank leaks permitted) and drain
    (no excessive leaks)
    71-00/28 Power plant Inspection ground run - - - - - Y Y
    7 note defects. NOTE: A pre
    inspection ground run is not
    a pre-requisite but may be
    useful to determine any
    repair work needed to
    maintain the airworthiness
    of the aircraft 12-
    B-71-00-00-00A-903A-A
    71-00/30 Engine tubular Examine with firewall - - - - Y Y
    1 mounting frame insulation blanket removed
    firewall attachment as necessary. If cracked,
    fittings blistered or flaking paint is
    found on the mounting
    frame refer to SRM
    12-B-54-20-02-00A-664A-A
    71-00/32 Engine mounting Life limit 25000 flying Y - - - -
    7 frame (Post SB hours or 30000
    04-009) landings
    whichever
    comes first

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 57


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    71-00/40 Engine Mount Magnetic Particle Threshold Y - - - -
    1 Inspection
    26,600 flying
    AMM 12- hours or
    B-71-00-05-00A-352A-A 35,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    6,600 flying
    hours or 8,000
    landings,
    whichever
    comes first
    71-00/43 Powerplant and Refer to P&WC EMM - - Y - - -
    2 accessories 72-00-00 Periodic
    Inspection and do the time
    limited inspection items
    71-10/20 Engine cowlings Open and examine, - - - Y Y Y
    7 ENG 43AL and particularly for condition of
    ENG 43AR rubbing strips and
    fasteners. Lubricate the
    hinges with a minimum of
    material P10-001C
    71-10/20 Engine cowlings Close - - - Y Y Y
    8 ENG 43AL and
    ENG 43AR
    72-00/18 Engine rotor Life limit P&WC SB Y - - - -
    components 14002
    72-00/39 Engine Overhaul 3500 flying - Y - - -
    hours P&WC
    SB 14603
    latest revision
    72-00/30 Engine accessories Overhaul P&WC SB - Y - - -
    8 14603 latest
    revision
    74-00/28 Ignition system Operational test - - - Y Y Y
    8
    AMM 12-
    B-74-00-00-00A-903A-A
    76-00/21 Engine controls in Examine - - - Y Y Y
    0 engine
    compartment
    76-00/21 Beta slip ring Make sure gap is not more - - - Y Y Y
    1 carbon block than 0.01in (0.25mm)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 58


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    76-00/21 Cockpit control - - - Y Y
    2 quadrant
    CAUTION

    Do not move PCL into the


    reverse range
    PCL - move between idle
    and max and make sure
    movement is full and free.
    Condition lever - Do the
    operational test (AMM 12-
    B-76-10-00-00A-903A-A).
    Manual override lever -
    move between off and max
    and make sure movement
    is full and free.
    76-00/30 Cockpit control Power control - Operational - - - - Y Y
    3 quadrant test AMM 12-
    B-76-10-00-00A-903A-A.
    Manual override -
    operational test AMM 12-
    B-76-20-00-00A-903A-A
    76-00/30 Cockpit control Examine - - - Y Y Y
    4 quadrant
    76-10/11 Propeller feathering Functional test 3000 flying - Y - - Y
    7 microswitches hours or 12
    AMM 12- months
    B-76-10-02-00A-903A-A whichever
    comes first
    78-00/21 Exhaust stubs Examine - - - Y Y Y
    4
    79-00/42 Oil filler cap/dipstick Energize aircraft electrical - - - Y Y Y
    2 system AMM 12-
    B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    Remove filler cap, examine
    and make sure the seal is in
    good condition. Set and
    hold AIR/GROUND switch
    to GROUND and make sure
    after 60 seconds the CAS
    ENGINE OIL LEVEL
    warning message comes
    on. Install filler cap and
    make sure the locking
    mechanism operates
    correctly.
    79-20/43 Oil cooler Overhaul At engine - Y - - -
    overhaul
    79-20/28 Engine oil cooler Examine. Make sure outlet - - - - Y Y
    9 door has full and free
    movement

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 59


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description Interval/ AL Time 100 Annua PI


    limitations Limits Hour l
    79-20/29 Oil system chip Operational test - - - Y Y Y
    0 detector indication
    system AMM 12-
    B-79-30-01-00A-903A-A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-00-01-00A-010A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 60
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    TIME LIMITS

    INTRODUCTION

    Table of Contents Page

    TIME LIMITS - INTRODUCTION................................................................................................ 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1
    2 Permissible Tolerances.......................................................................................... 2
    2.1 Flying Hour Based Intervals................................................................................... 2
    2.2 Calendar Time Based Intervals.............................................................................. 2
    2.3 Cycle Based Intervals............................................................................................. 2
    3 Overhaul and Replacement Time Limits................................................................ 2
    4 Time Limited Inspection Requirements.................................................................. 3

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-05-10-10-00A-281A-A OVERHAUL AND REPLACEMENT SCHEDULE -
    SCHEDULED INSPECTIONS
    12-B-05-10-20-00A-281A-A TIME LIMITED INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS -
    SCHEDULED INSPECTIONS
    12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS -
    INTRODUCTION

    Description

    1 General
    This section has two data modules:
    − overhaul and replacement schedule, refer to AMM 12-B-05-10-10-00A-281A-A
    − time limited inspection requirements, refer to AMM 12-B-05-10-20-00A-281A-A

    The time limits stated in this section are based on average usage and average environmental conditions.
    The stated time limits do not constitute a guarantee that the item will reach the time without malfunction as the
    factors mentioned before cannot be controlled by the manufacturer. Particularly if an aircraft is operated in
    extremely humid tropics, or in exceptionally cold, damp climates, or salt-laden conditions, etc.
    The date on the aircraft data plate is to be used as the start time for all the time limited items listed in this section.
    The subsequent monitoring procedure for all the calendar time limited items after their initial replacement or
    inspection, will be in elapsed time or installed time. This is given with each component interval in the data modules,
    refer to AMM 12-B-05-10-10-00A-281A-A and AMM 12-B-05-10-20-00A-281A-A.
    Elapsed time is the time interval since manufacture of the component.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-10-00-00A-018A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Installed time is the time interval since the installation of the component on the aircraft.
    For the calendar based time limited items, the inspection requirement is to be done no later than the last day of the
    month of the calendar interval given. This is also applicable to all the subsequent calendar time limited inspection
    requirements.
    It is the responsibility of the owner or operator to make sure that the times are monitored correctly.

    2 Permissible Tolerances
    The following paragraphs outline the permissible tolerances and extensions flying hour, cycles (landings) and
    calendar based maintenance intervals.
    It is the responsibility of the owner or operator to make sure that any maintenance interval extension is accepted by
    the Airworthiness Authority of the country of registration of the affected aircraft.
    If you do an inspection inside the permitted tolerance the planned inspection times do not shift, e.g:
    − The 2000 hour Flap Flexible Drive Shafts (Part No's 945.02.02.201 and 202) inspection is due at 2000, 4000
    and 6000 hours etc. If you do the inspection at 1800 hours, the next inspection is still due at 4000 hours (+/-
    200 hours). If you do the next inspection at 4200 hours then the following inspection is still due at 6000 hours
    (+/- 200 hours). The inspection intervals do not change

    If you do an inspection earlier and outside the given tolerance then the planned inspection times shift, e.g:T
    − The 2000 hour Flap Flexible Drive Shafts (Part No's 945.02.02.201 and 202) inspection is due at 2000, 4000
    and 6000 hours etc. If you do the second inspection earlier and outside the given tolerance, e.g. at 3600 hours,
    the inspection interval shifts. Because you did the 4000 hour inspection 400 hours earlier, the base interval will
    shift 400 hours. In this case the following inspections would be due at 5600 hours +/- 200 hours, etc

    These tolerances are not permissible to tasks in Chapter 4 Airworthiness Limitations.

    2.1 Flying Hour Based Intervals


    Interval 100 Flying Hours or less: ± 10 Flying Hours.
    Interval more than 100 Flying Hours: ± 10% but not more than 500 Flying Hours.

    2.2 Calendar Time Based Intervals


    Interval 1 year or less: ± 10% but not more than 1 month.
    Interval more than 1 year: ± 10% but not more than 6 months.

    2.3 Cycle Based Intervals


    Less than 500 cycles: ± 10% but not more than 25 cycles.
    More than 500 cycles: ± 10% but not more than 500 cycles.

    3 Overhaul and Replacement Time Limits


    This data module lists component overhaul times and replacement times. The time limits for the components are
    based on flying hours, calendar time or number of flights. The first overhaul and/or replacement of a component is
    recommended to be done at the stated interval (permissible tolerances applicable). Based on the inspection results
    at the end of the first overhaul or replacement task, the operator can use these results to determine subsequent
    intervals applicable to the individual airplane or fleet operation, provided the operator has an approved condition

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-10-00-00A-018A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    monitoring system. If such an approved monitoring system is not available, subsequent overhaul and replacement
    of components should be done at the stated interval.
    The requirements of this topic may be accomplished by either:
    − disassembly, inspection, assembly and test of overhauled components in accordance with the appropriate
    Component Maintenance Manual or
    − exchange parts from Pilatus Aircraft Limited may be purchased and installed. Compliance with one of these
    two options is at the discretion of the maintenance center carrying out the time limit requirement

    Components not listed in the Overhaul and Replacement Schedule need only to be replaced when their condition
    shows that replacement is necessary.

    4 Time Limited Inspection Requirements


    This data module gives a list of items that require inspecting or testing at intervals that are based on flying hours,
    calendar time or the number of flights. To give the best utilization, each item listed in this section has been given an
    individual optimized periodicity. For this reason they are listed separately from the scheduled inspection
    requirements given in AMM 12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A. When a scheduled inspection is done this section should
    be reviewed and any requirements complied with.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-10-00-00A-018A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 3
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-10-00-00A-018A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-07 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    OVERHAUL AND REPLACEMENT SCHEDULE

    SCHEDULED INSPECTIONS

    Table of Contents Page

    OVERHAUL AND REPLACEMENT SCHEDULE - SCHEDULED INSPECTIONS.................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-10-10-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Overhaul and Replacement Schedule

    Component Discard Interval Overhaul Interval


    Chapter 25 - Equipment and Furnishings
    ELT battery After one hour of use or -
    as shown on the battery
    label
    ELT Nav Interface Unit Serial Memory 16000 flying hours or 10 -
    Module years installed, whichever
    comes first
    Crew seat belts - 12 years (elapsed)
    Passenger seat belts and extensions - 12 years (elapsed)
    Chapter - 26 Fire Protection
    Fire extinguisher - 12 months contents
    check (elapsed)
    Chapter 27 - Flight controls
    Flap power drive unit (Part No - 10000 flying hours or
    978.73.20.003) 13500 landings
    whichever comes first
    Flap linear actuators (black anodized) - 5000 flying hours or
    (Part No’s 978.73.20.307/308 and 309) 7000 landings
    whichever comes first
    Flap flexible drive shafts (Part No’s 10000 flying hours or -
    945.02.02.203/204/205 and 206) 13500 landings
    whichever comes first
    Chapter 28 - Fuel
    Engine driven pump - 3500 flying hours
    Chapter 32- Landing Gear
    Nose landing gear - Threshold 25,000 flying
    hours or 30,000
    landings, whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat 8,300 flying
    hours or 10,000
    landings or 6 years,
    whichever comes first.
    Chapter 61 - Propeller
    Propeller - 4000 flying hours or 6
    years (Ref. Hartzell SL
    61) (installed)
    Chapter 71 - Power plant
    Engine shock mount assemblies - At engine overhaul, but
    not later than 5000 flying
    hours
    Chapter 72 - Engine

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-10-10-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Component Discard Interval Overhaul Interval


    Engine - 3500 flying hours (Ref.
    P&WC SB 14603, latest
    revision)
    Engine accessories - Ref. P&WC SB 14603,
    latest revision
    Chapter 73 - Engine Fuel and Control
    Task removed
    Task removed
    Chapter 79 - Oil
    Task removed
    Oil cooler - At engine overhaul
    Task removed

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-10-10-00A-281A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-15 Page 3
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-10-10-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-15 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    TIME LIMITED INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS

    SCHEDULED INSPECTIONS

    Table of Contents Page

    TIME LIMITED INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS - SCHEDULED INSPECTIONS.................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 3
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 3
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 4
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 4
    6 Time Limited Inspection Requirements - RVSM Aircraft........................................ 16

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-12-20-05-00A-902A-A PROPELLER - SERVICING
    12-B-12-20-06-00A-902A-A WHEEL BEARING - SERVICING
    12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A CORROSION CONTROL - MAINTENANCE
    PRACTICES
    12-B-21-30-00-00A-903A-A PRESSURIZATION CONTROL - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-21-30-02-00A-250A-A SAFETY VALVE - CLEAN
    12-B-21-40-02-00A-313A-A REFRIGERATION PACK - INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-21-40-02-00A-902A-A REFRIGERATION PACK - SERVICING
    12-B-21-40-03-00A-250A-A WATER SEPARATOR - CLEAN
    12-B-21-40-06-00A-903A-A OVERTEMPERATURE SWITCH - ADJUSTMENT/
    TEST
    12-B-21-50-01-00A-903A-A VAPOUR CYCLE COOLING SYSTEM -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-21-50-03-00A-313A-A COMPRESSOR DRIVE MOTOR - INSPECTION/
    CHECK
    12-B-21-60-05-00A-903A-A DUCT OVERTEMPERATURE SWITCH -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-22-10-00-00A-313A-A AUTOPILOT - INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-24-30-01-00A-313A-A STARTER/GENERATOR - INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-24-30-07-00A-920A-A LEAD ACID BATTERY - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-24-30-07-00A-920B-A NI–CAD BATTERY - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-10-20-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Data module/Technical publication Title


    12-B-24-52-51-00A-920A-A EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY (EPS) SYSTEM -
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-21-03-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE TRIM - REMOVAL INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-22-03-00A-920A-A STANDARD TRIM - REMOVAL INSTALLATION
    12-B-27-00-00-00A-313A-A FLIGHT CONTROLS - INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-27-30-00-00A-903A-A ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/
    TEST
    12-B-27-50-00-00A-902A-A FLAPS - SERVICING
    12-B-27-50-03-00A-313A-A FLAP ACTUATOR - INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-28-10-01-00A-903A-A TANK CROSS VENT PIPE AND OUTWARD CHECK
    VALVE - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-32-10-00-00A-313A-A MAIN LANDING GEAR HINGE PIN AND BUSHES –
    HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR - INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-32-10-00-00A-313B-A MAIN LANDING GEAR HINGE PIN AND BUSHES –
    ELECTRO MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR -
    INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-32-30-01-01A-920B-A MLG ACTUATOR ANTI ROTATION PAD - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    12-B-32-30-02-01A-920B-A NLG ACTUATOR ANTI ROTATION PAD - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    12-B-32-50-00-00A-310A-A NOSE WHEEL STEERING - EXAMINE
    12-B-34-11-00-00A-903A-A PITOT STATIC SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-34-11-12-00A-313A-A STATIC PORT (RVSM) - INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-34-14-00-00A-903B-A ALTITUDE AND VERTICAL SPEED INDICATION
    (RVSM) - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-34-20-00-00A-903A-A ATTITUDE AND DIRECTION - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-34-54-00-00A-903A-A DUAL DIVERSITY ATC TRANSPONDER SYSTEM -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-34-54-00-00A-903B-A DUAL NON–DIVERSITY ATC TRANSPONDER
    SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-34-54-10-00A-903A-A SINGLE DIVERSITY AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL
    TRANSPONDER SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-34-54-10-00A-903B-A SINGLE NON–DIVERSITY AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL
    TRANSPONDER SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-35-20-00-00A-313A-A PASSENGER OXYGEN MASKS - INSPECTION/
    CHECK
    12-B-52-00-01-00A-353A-A PASSENGER/CREW DOOR HINGE - EDDY
    CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-52-10-00-00A-313A-A PASSENGER/CREW DOOR - INSPECTION/CHECK

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-10-20-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Data module/Technical publication Title


    12-B-52-10-01-00A-353A-A PASSENGER/CREW DOOR SKINS - EDDY
    CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-52-30-00-00A-313A-A CARGO DOOR - INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-52-30-00-01A-353A-A CARGO DOOR HINGE - EDDY CURRENT
    INSPECTION
    12-B-52-30-01-00A-353A-A CARGO DOOR SKINS - EDDY CURRENT
    INSPECTION
    12-B-53-30-01-00A-313A-A REAR FUSELAGE SKINS AND STRINGERS (RVSM) -
    INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-53-30-02-00A-353A-A REAR FUSELAGE FRAMES - EDDY CURRENT
    INSPECTION
    12-B-55-30-03-00A-353A-A VERTICAL STABILIZER SPARS - EDDY CURRENT
    INSPECTION
    12-B-55-40-04-00A-310A-A RUDDER TRIM TAB - EXAMINE
    12-B-56-11-02-00A-313A-A COCKPIT SIDE WINDOWS - INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-57-00-00-00A-313A-A WING AND FUSELAGE FITTINGS - INSPECTION/
    CHECK
    12-B-57-20-01-00A-353A-A WING SKINS - EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-57-33-00-00A-310A-A WING TIP - EXAMINE
    12-B-57-60-04-00A-310A-A AILERON TRIM TAB - EXAMINE
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903G-A POWER PLANT TEST 6 – TORQUE LIMITER -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903H-A POWER PLANT TEST 7 – ENGINE PERFORMANCE -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-71-00-03-00A-250A-A ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS - CLEAN
    12-B-76-10-02-00A-903A-A PROPELLER FEATHER MICROSWITCHES -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-10-20-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-15 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Time Limited Inspection Requirements

    Note

    To ensure continued airworthiness of the aircraft for operations in Reduced Vertical Separation Minima
    (RVSM) airspace, the following time limited inspections must be complied with.

    Item Inspection Interval


    Requirement
    Aircraft Do the corrosion and AMM 12-
    corrosion protection B-20-40-00-00A-901A
    inspections -A
    AMM 12-
    B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A
    Chapter 21 - Air Conditioning
    Cold air unit Re-oil 500 flying hours
    AMM 12-
    B-21-40-02-00A-902A-A
    Heat exchanger matrix Inspection/check 500 flying hours
    AMM 12-
    B-21-40-02-00A-313A-A
    Overtemperature switch Remove and test 5 years (installed)
    AMM 12-
    B-21-40-06-00A-903A-A
    Duct overtemperature switch Remove and test 5 years (installed)
    AMM 12-
    B-21-60-05-00A-903A-A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-10-20-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-15 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Item Inspection Interval


    Requirement
    Water separator condenser Clean 500 flying hours
    AMM 12-
    B-21-40-03-00A-250A-A
    Pressurization safety valve Check for contamination 3000 flying hours or 2
    of the valve poppet and years installed,
    poppet seat. If whichever comes first
    contamination is found
    remove and cleanAMM
    12-
    B-21-30-02-00A-250A-A
    Cabin positive pressure relief Functional test 3000 flying hours or 2
    years whichever
    AMM 12- comes first
    B-21-30-00-00A-903A-A
    Vapor cycle compressor motor drive belt Check for tension 500 system operating
    (if Installed) hours
    AMM 12-
    B-21-50-01-00A-903A-A
    Vapor cycle compressor motor (if Inspection/check 500 system operating
    installed) hours
    AMM 12-
    B-21-50-03-00A-313A-A
    Vapor cycle compressor condenser Clean per OSCMM Initially at each
    module (including motor) (if installed) scheduled inspection,
    then based on field
    experience the
    interval can be
    adjusted to a more
    effective interval

    Item Inspection Interval


    Requirement
    Chapter 22 - Auto Flight
    Servo mount (pitch, roll and yaw) Remove for clutch check 1000 flying hours or
    12 months installed,
    AMM 12- whichever comes first
    B-22-10-00-00A-313A-A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-10-20-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-15 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Item Inspection Interval


    Requirement
    Chapter 24 - Electrical Power
    Generator 1 Brush inspection 200 flying hours
    AMM 12-
    B-24-30-01-00A-313A-A
    Starter generator 2 Brush inspection 200 flying hours
    AMM12-
    B-24-30-01-00A-313A-A
    Lead acid batteries Remove and capacity Initially at 1000 flying
    test hours or 12 months
    (installed) whichever
    AMM 12- comes first. If capacity
    B-24-30-07-00A-920A-A above 90% then every
    and CMM 600 flying hours or 6
    months. If capacity is
    between 85% and
    90% then every 300
    flying hours or 3
    months. If capacity is
    below 85% replace.
    NiCad batteries Remove and service 400 flying hours or 12
    months installed,
    AMM 12- whichever comes first
    B-24-30-07-00A-920B-A
    and CMM
    Emergency Power Supply Remove and do a 12 months (installed)
    capacity test
    AMM 12-
    B-24-52-51-00A-920A-A
    and CMM

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-10-20-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-15 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Item Inspection Interval


    Requirement
    Chapter 27 - Flight Controls
    Bonding leads to all Flight Control Examine Threshold 32,500
    Surfaces flying hours or 42,000
    landings, whichever
    comes first.
    Repeat
    12,500 flying hours or
    15,000 landings or 6
    years, whichever
    comes first.
    Flight control cables including auto pilot Inspection/check 2000 flying hours or 5
    and stick pusher cables years installed,
    AMM 12- whichever comes first
    B-27-00-00-00A-313A-A
    Rudder control cables tension Check for new factory Within the next 150
    delivered aircraft that flying hours
    have not had an Annual
    Inspection completed
    AMM 12-
    B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A
    Check after replacement At the next scheduled
    of any rudder control inspection, but not
    system cables (Autopilot later than 150 flying
    and/or rudder) hours
    AMM 12-
    B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A
    Elevator control cables tension Check for new factory
    delivered aircraft that
    have not had an Annual Within the next 150
    Inspection completed flying hours
    AMM 12-
    B-27-30-00-00A-903A-A
    Check after replacement At the next scheduled
    of any elevator control inspection, but not
    system cables (Autopilot, later than 150 flying
    Stick Pusher and hours
    Elevator)
    AMM 12-
    B-27-30-00-00A-903A-A
    Flap actuators (black anodized) (Part Lubricate 150 flying hours or 12
    No. 978.73.20.307, 308 and 309) months installed,
    AMM 12- whichever comes first
    B-27-50-00-00A-902A-A
    Flap actuators (black anodized) (Part Backlash check Annual inspection or
    No. 978.73.20.307, 308 and 309) every 1000 flying
    AMM 12- hours or 1300
    B-27-50-03-00A-313A-A landings whichever
    comes first (installed)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-10-20-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-15 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Item Inspection Interval


    Requirement
    Chapter 28 - Fuel
    Fuel cross vent and outward check Operational test 1000 flying hours
    valve
    AMM 12-
    B-28-10-01-00A-903A-A

    Item Inspection Interval


    Requirement
    Chapter 30 - Ice and Rain Protection
    Airfoil de-icers Apply a surface coating 6 months (installed)
    of Age Master No. 1 in
    accordance with the
    manufacturers
    instructions

    Item Inspection Interval


    Requirement
    Chapter 32 - Landing Gear
    Main and nose wheel bearings Lubricate Tire change or 12
    months installed,
    AMM 12- whichever comes first
    B-12-20-06-00A-902A-A
    Main landing gear axles and bushes Inspection/Check 2000 flying hours or
    12 months installed,
    Hydraulic Landing whichever comes first
    Gear AMM 12-
    B-32-10-00-00A-313A-A
    Electro-mechanical
    Landing Gear AMM 12-
    B-32-10-00-00A-313B-A
    NLG and MLG Electro-mechanical Discard 12,000 landings
    Actuators Anti-rotation pads
    NLG
    AMM12-
    B-32-30-02-01A-920B-A
    MLG AMM
    12-
    B-32-30-01-01A-920B-A
    NLG Steering mechanism Examine Threshold32,500
    flying hours or 42,000
    AMM 12- landings, whichever
    B-32-50-00-00A-310A-A comes first.

    Repeat
    8,300 flying hours or
    10,000 landings or 6
    years whichever
    comes first.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-10-20-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-15 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Item Inspection Interval


    Requirement
    Chapter 34 - Navigation
    Static system Leak check 2 years
    AMM 12-
    B-34-11-00-00A-903A-A
    Transponder system (single and dual Functional test 2 years (installed)
    systems)
    AMM 12-
    B-34-54-00-00A-903A-A
    or 12-
    B-34-54-00-00A-903B-A
    or 12-
    B-34-54-10-00A-903A-A
    or 12-
    B-34-54-10-00A-903B-A
    Standby magnetic compass Swing check 2 years (installed)
    AMM DM 12-
    B-34-20-00-00A-903A-A

    Item Inspection Interval


    Requirement
    Chapter 35 - Oxygen
    Passenger oxygen masks Inspection/check 3 years (installed)
    AMM 12-
    B-35-20-00-00A-313A-A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-10-20-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-15 Page 9


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Item Inspection Interval


    Requirement
    Chapter 52 - Doors
    Passenger/Crew Door Piano Hinge Eddy Current Inspection Threshold 32,500
    flying hours or 42,000
    AMM 12- landings, whichever
    B-52-00-01-00A-353A-A comes first.

    Repeat
    12,500 flying hours or
    15,000 landings,
    whichever comes first.
    Passenger/Crew Door Skin Eddy Current Inspection Threshold 25,000
    flying hours or 30,000
    AMM 12- landings, whichever
    B-52-10-01-00A-353A-A comes first.

    Repeat
    12,500 flying hours or
    15,000 landings or 6
    years, whichever
    comes first.
    Cargo Door Piano Hinge Eddy Current Inspection Threshold 32,500
    flying hours or 42,000
    AMM 12- landings, whichever
    B-52-30-00-01A-353A-A comes first.

    Repeat
    12,500 flying hours or
    15,000 landings,
    whichever comes first.
    Cargo Door Skin Eddy Current Inspection Threshold25,000
    flying hours or 30,000
    AMM 12- landings, whichever
    B-52-30-01-00A-353A-A comes first.

    Repeat
    12,500 flying hours or
    15,000 landings or 6
    years, whichever
    comes first.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-10-20-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-15 Page 10


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Item Inspection Interval


    Requirement
    Passenger/crew door Examine with trim Mild Corrosive
    removed. Environment: 6000
    flying hours or 6
    AMM 12- years, whichever
    B-25-21-03-00A-920A-A comes first. (See Note
    or 12- below)
    B-25-22-03-00A-920A-A
    .Examine the top step
    area around the
    insulation mat for
    Moderate Corrosive
    corrosion. If corrosion is
    Environment: 4000
    found, write to Pilatus for
    flying hours or 4
    a specific repair.
    years, whichever
    Examine door hinge pin
    comes first. (See Note
    and hinges
    below)
    AMM 12-
    B-52-10-00-00A-313A-A
    Severe Corrosive
    Environment: 2000
    flying hours or 2
    years, whichever
    comes first. (See Note
    below)

    NOTE: Local
    conditions may be
    more or less severe.
    Based on field
    experience the
    interval can be
    adjusted to more or
    less frequent, until an
    effective interval can
    be set.
    Cargo door Examine with trim 2000, 4000, 6000
    removed. flying hoursor
    AMM 12- 2, 4, 6 years
    B-25-21-03-00A-920A-A
    or 12- whichever comes first.
    B-25-22-03-00A-920A-A
    Examine door hinge pin,
    hinges and the lock
    mechanism.
    AMM 12-
    B-52-30-00-00A-313A-A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-10-20-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-15 Page 11


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Item Inspection Interval


    Requirement
    Chapter 53 - Fuselage Mild Corrosive
    Front pressure bulkhead Examine with insulation Environment: 6000
    on engine and cockpit flying hours or 6
    sides removed. If years, whichever
    insulation on cockpit side comes first. (See Note
    is wet, remove, dry and below)
    reinstall insulation
    Fuselage internal bottom surface Examine frames 10, 21,
    24, 36 and frames
    adjacent to doors and to Moderate Corrosive
    emergency exit, with Environment: 4000
    insulation removed. If flying hours or 4
    corrosion is found, years, whichever
    examine all fuselage comes first. (See Note
    bottom surface with below)
    insulation removed. If
    insulation is wet,
    remove, dry and reinstall Severe Corrosive
    insulation Environment: 2000
    Structure around windows Examine flying hours or 2
    Door frames and emergency exit frame Examine. If insulation is years, whichever
    installed in the door comes first. (See Note
    frames and is wet, below)
    remove and discard it
    (no longer installed on
    production)
    Rear pressure bulkhead Examine with trim NOTE: Local
    removed conditions may be
    more or less severe.
    Based on field
    experience the
    interval can be
    adjusted to more or
    less frequent, until an
    effective interval can
    be set.
    Frame 40 Eddy Current Inspection Threshold 32,500
    flying hours or 42,000
    AMM 12- landings, whichever
    B-53-30-02-00A-353A-A comes first.

    Repeat
    12,500 flying hours or
    15,000 landings,
    whichever comes first

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-10-20-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-15 Page 12


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Item Inspection Interval


    Requirement
    Chapter 55 - Stabilizers
    Horizontal stabilizer internal surfaces Examine as far as Mild Corrosive
    and horizontal/vertical stabilizer possible with panels Environment: 6000
    interface removed flying hours or 6
    years, whichever
    comes first. (See Note
    below)
    Vertical stabilizer internal surfaces Examine as far as Moderate Corrosive
    possible with panels Environment: 4000
    removed flying hours or 4
    years, whichever
    comes first. (See Note
    below)
    Severe Corrosive
    Environment: 2000
    flying hours or 2
    years, whichever
    comes first. (See Note
    below)
    NOTE: Local
    conditions may be
    more or less severe.
    Based on field
    experience the
    interval can be
    adjusted to more or
    less frequent, until an
    effective interval can
    be set.
    Vertical Stabilizer Forward Attachment Eddy Current Inspection Threshold 32,500
    to Frame 40 flying hours or 42,000
    AMM 12- landings, whichever
    B-55-30-03-00A-353A-A comes first.

    Repeat
    12,500 flying hours or
    15,000 landings,
    whichever comes first
    Rudder Trim Tab Examine Threshold 32,500
    flying hours or 42,000
    AMM 12- landings, whichever
    B-55-40-04-00A-310A-A comes first.

    Repeat
    12,500 flying hours or
    15,000 landings or 6
    years, whichever
    comes first

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-10-20-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-15 Page 13


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Item Inspection Interval


    Requirement
    Chapter 56 - Windows
    Cockpit side windows Inspection/Check 11000 flying hours or
    10 years installed,
    AMM 12- whichever comes first
    B-56-11-02-00A-313A-A

    Item Inspection Interval


    Requirement
    Chapter 57 - Wing
    Wing internal surfaces and flap Examine as far as Mild Corrosive
    compartment possible with all wing Environment: 6000
    panels removed flying hours or 6
    Landing gear compartments Examine, especially years, whichever
    main and rear spar parts comes first. (See Note
    below)
    Moderate Corrosive
    Environment: 4000
    flying hours or 4
    years, whichever
    comes first. (See Note
    below)
    Severe Corrosive
    Environment: 2000
    flying hours or 2
    years, whichever
    comes first. (See Note
    below)
    NOTE: Local
    conditions may be
    more or less severe.
    Based on field
    experience the
    interval can be
    adjusted to more or
    less frequent, until an
    effective interval can
    be set.
    Wing to fuselage attachments Examine attachment 11000 flying hours or
    fittings with wings 10 years, whichever
    removed comes first
    AMM 12-
    B-57-00-00-00A-313A-A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-10-20-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-15 Page 14


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Item Inspection Interval


    Requirement
    Aileron Trim Tab Examine Threshold 32,500
    flying hours or 42,000
    AMM 12- landings, whichever
    B-57-60-04-00A-310A-A comes first.

    Repeat
    12,500 flying hours or
    15,000 landings or 6
    years, whichever
    comes first
    Wing Tips Examine Threshold 32,500
    flying hours or 42,000
    AMM 12- landings, whichever
    B-57-33-00-00A-310A-A comes first.

    Repeat
    12,500 flying hours or
    15,000 landings or 6
    years, whichever
    comes first
    Wing Skin around drain holes Eddy Current Inspection Threshold25,000
    flying hours or 30,000
    AMM 12- landings, whichever
    B-57-20-01-00A-353A-A comes first.

    Repeat
    2,500 flying hours or
    3,000 landings,
    whichever comes first.

    Item Inspection Interval


    Requirement
    Chapter 61 - Propeller
    Propeller Lubricate 400 flying hours or 12
    months installed,
    AMM 12- whichever comes first
    B-12-20-05-00A-902A-A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-10-20-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-15 Page 15


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Item Inspection Interval


    Requirement
    Chapter 71 - Power Plant
    Power plant Torque Limiter Test 500 flying hours or 12
    months installed,
    AMM 12- whichever comes first.
    B-71-00-00-00A-903G-A
    Performance Test
    AMM 12-
    B-71-00-00-00A-903H-A
    Engine torque and stick pusher torque Clean 500 flying hours or 12
    transducers electrical connectors months installed,
    AMM 12- whichever comes first
    B-71-00-03-00A-250A-A
    Powerplant and accessories Refer to P&WC EMM Refer to P&WC EMM
    72–00–00 Periodic 72–00–00 Periodic
    Inspection and do the Inspection
    time limited inspection
    items

    Item Inspection Interval


    Requirement
    Chapter 76 - Engine Controls
    Propeller feathering microswitches Functional test 3000 flying hours or
    12 months whichever
    AMM 12- comes first
    B-76-10-02-00A-903A-A

    Table 6 Time Limited Inspection Requirements - RVSM Aircraft


    Item Inspection Requirement Interval
    Static system Leak check 2 years
    AMM 12-
    B-34-11-00-00A-903A-A
    Transponder system (single and dual Functional test 2 years (installed)
    system)
    AMM 12-
    B-34-54-00-00A-903A-A or 12-
    B-34-54-00-00A-903B-A or 12-
    B-34-54-10-00A-903A-A or 12-
    B-34-54-10-00A-903B-A
    Static ports critical area Inspection/check 12 months
    AMM 12-
    B-53-30-01-00A-313A-A
    Static ports plate height Inspection/check 2 years
    AMM 12-
    B-34-11-12-00A-313A-A
    Altitude and vertical speed indication Functional test 2 years
    AMM 12-
    B-34-14-00-00A-903B-A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-10-20-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-15 Page 16


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-10-20-00A-281A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-15 Page 17
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-10-20-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-15 Page 18


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS

    INTRODUCTION

    Table of Contents Page

    SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS - INTRODUCTION.................................................... 1


    1 Inspection Requirements........................................................................................ 1
    2 Permissible Tolerances.......................................................................................... 2
    3 Inspection Sheets................................................................................................... 2
    4 Inspection Guide-lines............................................................................................ 2
    5 Inspection Terms and Definitions........................................................................... 3

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-40-00-00A-040A-A CORROSION - DESCRIPTION

    Description

    1 Inspection Requirements
    As required by FAR Part 91 the aircraft must be the subject of a complete Annual Inspection each 12 calendar
    months of operation.
    National regulations may require a 100 Hour Inspection. Certain inspection items in the 100 hour inspection sheets
    are marked with an asterisk *. These items are applicable when the aircraft is inspected in conformity with the
    requirements of FAA Parts 43 and 91 only.
    If National Regulations do not require the 100 Hour Inspection, the owner or operator is then responsible for
    complying with any national regulations. Pilatus however recommends that every 150 hours the aircraft is the
    subject of an inspection, which is based on the same content of the 100 Hour Inspection.
    The inspection intervals are based on normal usage of the aircraft under average environmental conditions. Aircraft
    operated in extremely humid tropics, or in exceptionally cold, damp climates, salt-laden conditions may need more
    frequent inspections for wear, corrosion and lubrication. Under these adverse conditions the Hourly Inspection
    should be done in compliance with the inspection sheets at a more frequent interval until the owner or operator can
    set his own inspection interval based on field experience.
    The owner or operator is primarily responsible for maintaining the aircraft in an airworthy condition. This includes
    compliance with Airworthiness Directives and any additional maintenance requirements from Chapter 4 and the
    Time Limits section of this chapter. It is further the responsibility of the owner or operator to make sure that the
    aircraft is inspected in accordance with the inspection sheets.
    Owner or operator attention is drawn to the recommendations given in Chapter 12-B-20-40-00-00A-040A-A for the
    establishment of a Corrosion Control Program for the aircraft.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-04-30 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2 Permissible Tolerances
    Do not extend an inspection by more than the permitted tolerance of 10% (± 10 or 15 hours for the 100 or 150 Hour
    Inspection or ± 1 month for the Annual Inspection).
    If you do an inspection inside the permitted tolerance the planned inspection times do not shift, e.g:
    − The 100 Hour Inspection is due at 100, 200 and 300 hours etc. If you do the inspection at 90 hours, the next
    inspection is still due at 200 hours (± 10 hours). If you do the next inspection at 210 hours then the following
    inspection is still due at 300 hours (± 10 hours). The inspection intervals do not change

    If you do an inspection earlier and outside the given tolerance then the planned inspection times shift, e.g:
    − The 100 Hour Inspection is due at 100, 200 and 300 hours etc. If you do the second inspection earlier and
    outside the given tolerance, e.g. at 160 hours, the inspection interval shifts. Because you did the 200 hour
    inspection 40 hours earlier, the base interval will shift 40 hours. In this case the following inspections would be
    due at 260 hours ± 10 hours, etc.

    The same rules apply for the Annual Inspection tolerance, using the ± 1 month.
    The owner or operator is responsible for complying with any national regulations.

    3 Inspection Sheets
    The 100 Hour Inspection and Annual Inspection sheets list the maintenance items for inspection and state the level
    of inspection required. The sheets have been prepared to assist the owner or operator in meeting the foregoing
    responsibilities. They include, together with the inspection requirements, cross references to the maintenance
    procedures which are necessary to do the inspections.
    The inspections sheets are not intended to be all-inclusive, for no such sheets can replace the good judgement of a
    qualified mechanic in the performance of his duties. As the one primarily responsible for the airworthiness of the
    aircraft, the owner or operator should select only qualified personnel to maintain the aircraft.

    4 Inspection Guide-lines
    The inspection sheets can be copied and should be used for doing the inspections. Detailed information of systems
    and sub-systems on the aircraft can be found in the relevant chapters of this maintenance manual and the Engine
    Maintenance Manual (EMM Part No. 3038336). Reference should be made to the topics in this manual, the EMM
    and Pilatus issued Service Bulletins for inspection, repair, removal and installation procedures called for in the
    inspection sheets. It is the responsibility of the owner or operator to make sure that mechanics inspecting the
    aircraft have access to these documents as well as the inspection sheets.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-04-30 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    5 Inspection Terms and Definitions


    CHECK Compare a measurement of time, pressure, temperature, resistance,
    dimension or other quantity with a specific figure for that measurement.
    EXAMINE Look at the condition of an item for the following:
    Chafing
    Contamination
    Corrosion
    Cracks
    Deterioration
    Discoloration due to overheating
    Distortion
    Faulty or broken locking devices.
    Fractures
    Fraying
    Insecurity of attachment
    Loose clips or fasteners
    Loose or missing rivets
    Leaks
    Scoring
    Wear
    REMOVE Disconnect a component or system and move it from its correct position.
    INSTALL Put a component in the correct position and attach it correctly.
    REPLACE Remove an item and install a new or serviceable item in its place.
    FUNCTIONALLY Use special equipment to make sure that a component or system
    TEST operates correctly.
    OPERATIONALLY Show by normal operation and with no special equipment or
    TEST measurements, that a system or component operates correctly.
    LUBRICATE Apply lubricant.
    FILL Fill to the correct level, pressure or quantity. This also includes where
    necessary the following:
    Remove caps or covers
    Examine caps, covers, gaskets, seals
    Install caps, covers
    Install locking devices if appropriate.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-04-30 Page 3
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-04-30 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    100 HOUR INSPECTION

    SCHEDULED INSPECTIONS

    Table of Contents Page

    100 HOUR INSPECTION - SCHEDULED INSPECTIONS......................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 2
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 3
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 3
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 3

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS -
    INTRODUCTION
    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A ACCESS PROVISION – HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR
    - DESCRIPTION
    12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A JACKING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-12-10-02-00A-902A-A BRAKES - SERVICING
    12-B-12-10-04-00A-902A-A TIRES - SERVICING
    12-B-12-20-01-00A-902A-A AIRCRAFT EXTERIOR WASHING - SERVICING
    12-B-12-20-02-00A-902A-A AIRCRAFT WINDOWS CLEANING - SERVICING
    12-B-12-20-03-00A-902A-A AIRCRAFT INTERIOR CLEANING - SERVICING
    12-B-12-20-04-00A-902A-A LANDING GEAR - SERVICING
    12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A SPEED AND ATTITUDE CORRECTION -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-27-40-00-00A-903A-A HORIZONTAL STABILIZER TRIM - ADJUSTMENT/
    TEST
    12-B-28-20-01-00A-250A-A FUEL FILTER ELEMENT - CLEAN
    12-B-28-20-01-00A-920A-A FUEL FILTER ELEMENT - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-28-20-07-00A-903A-A FLOAT VALVE - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-29-00-00-00A-902A-A HYDRAULIC SYSTEM - SERVICING
    12-B-29-10-04-00A-313A-A RETURN LINE FILTER DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE
    INDICATOR - INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-30-10-00-00A-313A-A AIRFOIL DE–ICE BOOTS - INSPECTION/CHECK

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-20-10-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-17 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Data module/Technical publication Title


    12-B-30-20-00-00A-903A-A AIR INTAKE DE–ICE SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-30-30-20-00A-903A-A PROBES DE–ICE SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-30-60-00-00A-313A-A PROPELLER DE–ICE SYSTEM - INSPECTION/
    CHECK
    12-B-30-60-00-00A-903A-A PROPELLER DE–ICE SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-32-10-00-00A-902A-A MAIN LANDING GEAR SHOCK ABSORBER -
    SERVICING
    12-B-32-20-00-00A-902A-A NOSE LANDING GEAR SHOCK ABSORBER -
    SERVICING
    12-B-32-30-00-00A-903A-A EXTENSION AND RETRACTION – HYDRAULIC
    LANDING GEAR - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-33-40-00-00A-903A-A EXTERNAL LIGHTS - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-46-30-02-00A-903A-A PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY CONTROLLER -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-46-30-05-00A-903A-A REVERSION CONTROL PANEL (4 SWITCH) -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-46-30-06-00A-903A-A REVERSION CONTROL PANEL (3 SWITCH) -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-52-30-00-00A-313A-A CARGO DOOR - INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-55-00-01-00A-664A-A VERTICAL STABILIZER SKIN CRACK - SPECIAL
    REPAIR PROCEDURES
    12-B-55-40-00-00A-664B-A RUDDER - REPAIR PROCEDURE RM 06299 –
    UPPER HINGE FITTING
    12-B-56-00-00-00A-313A-A WINDOWS - INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-61-00-00-00A-904A-A PROPELLER BLADES - REPAIR
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903A-A POWER PLANT - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-74-00-00-00A-903A-A IGNITION SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-76-10-00-00A-903A-A POWER CONTROLS - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-79-30-01-00A-903A-A CHIP DETECTOR - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-20-10-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-17 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Kit For 100 Hour Inspection CSN 12-20-00-01-005 1
    CPC-temporary Part P10-001 As
    required
    French chalk Part P09-002 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    The terms used for the item inspection requirements are defined in 12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A
    Certain inspection items in the 100 hour inspection sheets are marked with an asterisk *. These items are
    applicable when the aircraft is inspected in conformity with the requirements of FAA Parts 43 and 91 only.
    2 100 Hour Inspection
    2.1 Job Set Up

    100 Hour Inspection


    Ac No. AF Hrs. Date
    Chapt/Task Item Sig. Insp.
    27-50/143 Flaps - lower to 40°
    12-20/124 Aircraft - Wash the aircraft exterior, including the
    landing gear and flap compartments (AMM12-
    B-12-20-01-00A-902A-A)
    12-20/125 Windshields and windows - clean (AMM12-
    B-12-20-02-00A-902A-A)
    12-20/126 Cockpit and cabin - clean (AMM12-
    B-12-20-03-00A-902A-A)
    06-00/123 Access panels 42AB, 42AT and 32CT - remove
    (AMM12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-20-10-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-17 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    100 Hour Inspection


    Ac No. AF Hrs. Date
    Chapt/Task Item Sig. Insp.
    71-10/207 Engine cowlings ENG 43AL and ENG 43AR - open
    and examine, particularly for condition of rubbing
    strips and fasteners. Lubricate the hinges with a
    minimum of CPC-temporary (Pt.No. P10-001).
    2.2 Procedure

    100 Hour Inspection


    Ac No. AF Hrs. Date
    Chapt/Task Item Sig. Insp.
    Parking, Mooring & Storing
    10-10/428 External protective covers - Examine. Replace if any
    part of the cover is missing, damaged, torn or does
    not install properly.
    Auto Flight
    22-20/129 Angle of Attack (AOA) transmitters - examine
    22-20/130 Stick pusher system - check (AMM 12-
    B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A)
    Electrical Power
    *24-60/133 Cockpit circuit breaker panels and switch panels -
    examine
    Equipment and Furnishings
    *25-10/134 Crew seat belts - examine
    *25-10/135 Crew seats - examine as far as possible with seats
    installed
    *25-20/136 Passenger seat belts and extensions - examine
    25-20/302 Passenger seats - examine as far as possible with
    seats installed.
    Move the recline mechanism and swivel function
    (executive seat only) through its full motion and check
    for correct operation. If necessary, refer to the
    applicable supplier CMM (CMM 25-20-07 for
    executive seats and CMM 25-20-99 for standard
    seats).
    Flight Controls
    *27-00/138 Aileron, elevator and rudder controls - operate, make
    sure full and free travel
    27-10/139 Aileron LH and RH - examine
    27-20/140 Rudder - Examine, in particular the cover plate (Part
    No. 555.40.12.215) on the bottom of the rudder to
    make sure it is not bent and there are no signs of
    interference with the rudder stop.
    Move the rudder on the upper hinge in the lateral and
    fore-and-aft directions and check for play. If
    necessary repair, SRM 12-B-55-40-00-00A-664B-A.
    27-30/141 Elevators - examine
    27-40/142 Horizontal stabilizer trim - operational test of trim
    interrupt and alternate trim switches (AMM 12-
    B-27-40-00-00A-903A-A)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-20-10-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-17 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    100 Hour Inspection


    Ac No. AF Hrs. Date
    Chapt/Task Item Sig. Insp.
    27-40/291 Horizontal stabilizer trim - operational test of trim
    system (AMM 12-B-27-40-00-00A-903A-A)
    27-50/144 Flaps and flap support mechanism - examine
    Fuel
    28-10/145 Fuel tank filler caps - examine
    28-10/146 Fuel - remove a sample from each drain valve and
    examine for water
    28-20/147 Fuel tank vent valve and flame arrestor - operational
    test (AMM 12-B-28-20-07-00A-903A-A)
    28-20/148 Fuel filter element - remove and clean (AMM 12-
    B-28-20-01-00A-920A-A and 12-
    B-28-20-01-00A-250A-A)
    28-20/149 Firewall shut-off valve - operate FUEL EMERG
    SHUTOFF lever and make sure firewall shutoff valve
    opens and closes fully to dead stop. Make sure
    movement is free and check if initial pull out force at
    lever outer end is below 10 lbf (44.5 N)
    28-20/150 Engine Driven fuel Pump (EDP) - examine
    Hydraulic Power
    29-10/151 Low pressure filter blockage indicator - make sure
    that it has not come out. If indicator found out, do the
    inspection/check procedure (AMM 12-
    B-29-10-04-00A-313A-A)
    29-10/316 Hydraulic system - Make sure fluid level indicator on
    the reservoir tank shows full. Fill as necessary (AMM
    12-B-29-00-00-00A-902A-A)
    29-10/153 Reservoir tank - make sure nitrogen pressure is
    correct. Pressurize as necessary (AMM 12-
    B-29-00-00-00A-902A-A)
    Ice and Rain Protection
    30-10/154 Wing and horizontal stabilizer airfoil de-ice boots -
    inspection/check (AMM 12-B-30-10-00-00A-313A-A)
    30-10/155 Inertial separation system - operational test (AMM 12-
    B-30-20-00-00A-903A-A)
    30-20/156 Engine air intake de-ice lip - look for signs of gas
    leaks. None are permitted.
    30-30/329 Probes de-ice system - functional test (AMM 12-
    B-30-30-20-00A-903A-A)
    30-60/158 Propeller de-ice system - inspection/check (AMM 12-
    B-30-60-00-00A-313A-A)
    30-60/159 Propeller de-ice system - operational test (AMM 12-
    B-30-60-00-00A-903A-A)
    Landing Gear
    *07-10/161 Aircraft lift on jacks (AMM 12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-
    A)
    32-10/162 Main landing gear - lubricate (AMM 12-
    B-12-20-04-00A-902A-A)
    32-10/163 Main landing gear legs - examine
    32-10/164 Main landing gear compartments - examine

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-20-10-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-17 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    100 Hour Inspection


    Ac No. AF Hrs. Date
    Chapt/Task Item Sig. Insp.
    *32-10/165 Main landing gear shock struts - check nitrogen
    pressure (AMM 12-B-32-10-00-00A-902A-A)
    *32-20/166 Nose landing gear shock strut - check nitrogen
    pressure (AMM 12-B-32-20-00-00A-902A-A)
    32-20/167 Nose landing gear - lubricate (AMM 12-
    B-12-20-04-00A-902A-A)
    32-20/168 Nose landing gear leg and steering mechanism -
    examine, in particular the steering rod end (Part No.
    532.20.12.134) for the complete retention of bearing
    into the steering rod end housing.
    32-20/169 Nose landing gear compartment - examine
    *32-30/170 Hydraulic Landing GearExtension and retraction
    system - functional test of extension and retraction
    system and emergency extension system (AMM 12-
    B-32-30-00-00A-903A-A)
    32-30/425 Electro-mechanical Landing GearExtension and
    Retraction Mechanism - examine all components and
    their attachments in the nose and main landing gear
    compartments.
    *32-40/171 Mainwheels - examine. Rotate wheels, make sure
    bearing movement is smooth and free and no
    excessive play exists
    32-40/172 Mainwheel tires - examine and check tire pressure
    (AMM 12-B-12-10-04-00A-902A-A)
    *32-40/173 Nosewheel - examine. Rotate wheel, make sure
    bearing movement is smooth and free and no
    excessive play exists
    32-40/174 Nosewheel tire - examine and check tire pressure
    (AMM 12-B-12-10-04-00A-902A-A)
    32-40/175 Brake system - apply the parking brake. Examine the
    brake units. Make sure that pad wear indicators
    protrude from housing.
    32-40/176 Fluid reservoir - replenish if necessary (AMM 12-
    B-12-10-02-00A-902A-A)
    *07-10/160 Aircraft - lower to the ground, remove jacks and
    disconnect from ground (AMM 12-
    B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A)
    Lighting
    33-40/177 Exterior lighting - operational test (AMM 12-
    B-33-40-00-00A-903A-A)
    33-41/178 Landing lights - examine
    33-42/179 Taxi lights - examine
    33-43/180 Navigation and strobe lights - examine
    33-44/181 Recognition lights (if installed) - examine
    33-46/182 Beacon lights (if installed) - examine
    Navigation
    34-00/183 Communications and navigation antennas - examine
    *34-00/184 Cockpit instruments and avionic equipment - examine
    34-11/185 Pitot-tube - examine

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-20-10-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-17 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    100 Hour Inspection


    Ac No. AF Hrs. Date
    Chapt/Task Item Sig. Insp.
    34-11/186 Static ports - examine
    Oxygen
    35-10/187 High pressure relief indicator (green disk) - make sure
    that it is not damaged
    35-10/188 Oxygen system - check contents
    System Display and Integration
    46-26/320 Pilot and Copilot (if installed) PFD reversionary
    switches - operational test (AMM 12-
    B-46-30-05-00A-903A-A or 12-B-46-30-06-00A-903A-
    A)
    46-26/321 ADAHRS sensor source select switches - operational
    test (AMM 12-B-46-30-02-00A-903A-A)
    Doors
    52-10/189 Passenger/crew door seal - clean with a dry cloth,
    examine and apply French chalk (Pt.No. P09-002).
    52-10/190 Passenger/crew door shoot bolts and door frame
    fittings - examine
    52-10/191 Passenger/crew door handle lock pin - make sure
    movement is free
    52-10/192 Passenger/crew door hinges - examine and lubricate
    as necessary with minimum quantity of CPC-
    temporary (Pt.No. P10-001)
    52-30/193 Cargo door seal - clean with a dry cloth, examine and
    apply French chalk (Pt.No. P09-002)
    52-30/194 Cargo door shoot bolts, door frame fittings and hooks
    - examine. Make sure the hook roller bushes are free
    to rotate. For roller bush wear limits refer to AMM 12-
    B-52-30-00-00A-313A-A
    52-30/195 Cargo door hinges - examine and lubricate as
    necessary with minimum quantity of CPC-
    temporary (Pt.No. P10-001)
    Fuselage
    53-00/196 Fuselage external surface - examine.
    For aircraft that experience stone damage to the belly
    skin, visually examine affected areas for cracks.
    Stabilizers
    55-10/197 Horizontal stabilizer external surface - examine
    55-30/198 Vertical stabilizer external surface - examine,
    specially around rear spar top rivets. If cracks are
    found refer to SRM 12-B-55-00-01-00A-664A-A for
    repair procedure
    Windows
    56-10/200 Windshield LH and RH - examine (AMM 12-
    B-56-00-00-00A-313A-A)
    56-20/201 Cockpit and cabin windows - examine (AMM 12-
    B-56-00-00-00A-313A-A)
    Wing
    57-00/202 Wing external surfaces - examine

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-20-10-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-17 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    100 Hour Inspection


    Ac No. AF Hrs. Date
    Chapt/Task Item Sig. Insp.
    Propeller
    61-10/203 Propeller blades - examine. Repair blades as
    necessary. Ref. Hartzell MM and (AMM 12-
    B-61-00-00-00A-904A-A)
    Power Plant
    *71-00/205 Engine tubular mounting frame and shockmounts -
    examine. Replace shockmount if cracks in elastomer
    are more than 1 in (25,4 mm) long and/or 0.06 in (1,5
    mm) deep
    71-00/206 Power plant and accessories - examine. Refer to
    P&WC EMM 72-00-00 Periodic inspection and do the
    100 hour and minor inspection items
    71-00/209 Engine drain mast and tank - for fuel leaks (no leaks
    permitted) and drain (no excessive leaks)
    Ignition
    74-00/288 Ignition system - operational test (AMM 12-
    B-74-00-00-00A-903A-A)
    Engine Controls
    76-00/210 Engine controls in engine compartment - examine
    76-00/211 Beta slip ring carbon block - make sure gap is not
    more than 0.01in (0.25mm)
    76-00/304 Cockpit control quadrant - examine
    76-00/212

    CAUTION

    Do not move PCL into the reverse range


    PCL - move between idle and max and make sure
    movement is full and free. Condition lever - Do the
    operational test (AMM 12-B-76-10-00-00A-903A-A).
    Manual override lever - move between off and max
    and make sure movement is full and free.
    Exhaust
    78-00/214 Exhaust stubs - examine
    Oil
    79-00/422 Oil filler cap/dipstick - energize aircraft electrical
    system (AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A). Remove
    filler cap, examine and make sure the seal is in good
    condition. Set and hold AIR/GROUND switch to
    GROUND and make sure after 60 seconds the CAS
    ENGINE OIL LEVEL warning message comes on.
    Install filler cap and make sure the locking mechanism
    operates correctly.
    79-20/216 Task removed
    79-20/290 Oil system chip detector indication system -
    operational test (12-B-79-30-01-00A-903A-A)
    2.3 Job Close Up

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-20-10-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-17 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    100 Hour Inspection


    Ac No. AF Hrs. Date
    Chapt/Task Item Sig. Insp.
    06-00/119 Access panels 42AB, 42AT and 32CT - Install
    71-10/208 Engine cowlings ENG43AL and ENG 43AR - close
    71-00/204 Power plant - post inspection ground run (AMM 12-
    B-71-00-00-00A-903A-A)
    00-00/121 Airworthiness Directives and Service Bulletins
    reviewed and complied with as required
    00-00/122 Chapter 4 and Chapter 5 - Overhaul and
    Replacement Schedule, and Time Limited Inspection
    Requirements sections reviewed and any additional
    requirements are complied with

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-20-10-00A-281A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-17 Page 9
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-20-10-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-17 Page 10


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    ANNUAL INSPECTION

    SCHEDULED INSPECTIONS

    Table of Contents Page

    ANNUAL INSPECTION - SCHEDULED INSPECTIONS............................................................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 4
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 4
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 4
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS -
    INTRODUCTION
    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A ACCESS PROVISION – HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR
    - DESCRIPTION
    12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A JACKING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-11-20-00-00A-040A-A EXTERIOR PLACARDS AND MARKINGS -
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-11-30-00-00A-040A-A INTERIOR PLACARDS - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-12-10-02-00A-902A-A BRAKES - SERVICING
    12-B-12-10-04-00A-902A-A TIRES - SERVICING
    12-B-12-20-01-00A-902A-A AIRCRAFT EXTERIOR WASHING - SERVICING
    12-B-12-20-02-00A-902A-A AIRCRAFT WINDOWS CLEANING - SERVICING
    12-B-12-20-03-00A-902A-A AIRCRAFT INTERIOR CLEANING - SERVICING
    12-B-12-20-04-00A-902A-A LANDING GEAR - SERVICING
    12-B-21-40-01-00A-903A-A SECONDARY HEATING - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-21-43-00-00A-903A-A FOOTWARMER - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A SPEED AND ATTITUDE CORRECTION -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-23-12-00-00A-903A-A VHF COMMUNICATION - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-23-50-00-00A-903A-A AUDIO INTEGRATING SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/
    TEST
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-20-20-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-17 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Data module/Technical publication Title


    12-B-24-30-00-00A-903A-A DC GENERATION - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A FLIGHT COMPARTMENT CREW SEATS - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE SEATS - REMOVAL INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-63-00-00A-903A-A EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-27-15-00-00A-903A-A AILERON TRIM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-27-25-00-00A-903A-A RUDDER TRIM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-27-30-00-00A-903A-A ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/
    TEST
    12-B-27-40-00-00A-903A-A HORIZONTAL STABILIZER TRIM - ADJUSTMENT/
    TEST
    12-B-27-50-00-00A-903A-A FLAPS - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-28-20-01-00A-250A-A FUEL FILTER ELEMENT - CLEAN
    12-B-28-20-01-00A-920A-A FUEL FILTER ELEMENT - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-28-20-07-00A-903A-A FLOAT VALVE - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-29-00-00-00A-902A-A HYDRAULIC SYSTEM - SERVICING
    12-B-29-10-02-00A-901A-A ACCUMULATOR - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-29-10-04-00A-313A-A RETURN LINE FILTER DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE
    INDICATOR - INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-30-10-00-00A-313A-A AIRFOIL DE–ICE BOOTS - INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-30-10-00-00A-903A-A AIRFOIL DE–ICE SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-30-20-00-00A-903A-A AIR INTAKE DE–ICE SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-30-30-20-00A-903A-A PROBES DE–ICE SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-30-40-00-00A-903A-A WINDSHIELD DE–ICE SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/
    TEST
    12-B-30-60-00-00A-313A-A PROPELLER DE–ICE SYSTEM - INSPECTION/
    CHECK
    12-B-30-60-00-00A-903A-A PROPELLER DE–ICE SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-31-30-01-00A-903A-A RECORDERS – CVFDR - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-32-10-00-00A-902A-A MAIN LANDING GEAR SHOCK ABSORBER -
    SERVICING
    12-B-32-10-03-00A-920A-A SHOCK ABSORBER – HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR -
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-32-10-03-00A-920B-A SHOCK ABSORBER – ELECTRO MECHANICAL
    LANDING GEAR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-20-20-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-17 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Data module/Technical publication Title


    12-B-32-20-00-00A-902A-A NOSE LANDING GEAR SHOCK ABSORBER -
    SERVICING
    12-B-32-30-00-00A-903A-A EXTENSION AND RETRACTION – HYDRAULIC
    LANDING GEAR - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-32-30-10-00A-903A-A EMERGENCY GEAR EXTENSION SYSTEM –
    ELECTRO MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-33-40-00-00A-903A-A EXTERNAL LIGHTS - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-34-11-00-00A-901A-A PITOT STATIC SYSTEM - MAINTENANCE
    PRACTICES
    12-B-35-00-00-00A-903A-A OXYGEN SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-46-30-02-00A-903A-A PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY CONTROLLER -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-46-30-05-00A-903A-A REVERSION CONTROL PANEL (4 SWITCH) -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-46-30-06-00A-903A-A REVERSION CONTROL PANEL (3 SWITCH) -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-52-30-00-00A-313A-A CARGO DOOR - INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-52-70-00-00A-903A-A DOOR WARNING - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-53-20-02-00A-313A-A CENTER FUSELAGE – CARRY THROUGH FRAMES -
    INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-54-20-02-00A-664A-A ENGINE FRAME DAMAGED PAINT AND
    CORROSION - SPECIAL REPAIR PROCEDURES
    12-B-55-00-00-00A-361A-A STABILIZERS ATTACHMENT FITTINGS -
    ALLOWABLE WEAR
    12-B-55-00-01-00A-664A-A VERTICAL STABILIZER SKIN CRACK - SPECIAL
    REPAIR PROCEDURES
    12-B-55-40-00-00A-664B-A RUDDER - REPAIR PROCEDURE RM 06299 –
    UPPER HINGE FITTING
    12-B-56-00-00-00A-313A-A WINDOWS - INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-61-00-00-00A-904A-A PROPELLER BLADES - REPAIR
    12-B-61-10-01-00A-920A-A PROPELLER - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903A-A POWER PLANT - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903D-A POWER PLANT TEST 3 – DC GENERATION SYSTEM
    - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-74-00-00-00A-903A-A IGNITION SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-76-10-00-00A-903A-A POWER CONTROLS - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-76-20-00-00A-903A-A MANUAL OVERRIDE - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-79-30-01-00A-903A-A CHIP DETECTOR - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-20-20-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-17 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Annual inspection kit CSN 12-20-00-02-005 1
    CPC-temporary Part P10-001 As
    required
    French chalk Part P09-002 As
    required
    PTFE Teflon spray Part OKS 571 Or
    equivalen
    t

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    The terms used for the item inspection requirements are defined in DM 12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A.

    Note

    The scope of the 100 flying hour inspection is included in the Annual Inspection. Note that some 100 flying
    hour inspection items are not called for in the Annual Inspection, but similar more detailed tasks replace
    them.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-20-20-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-17 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2 Preparation

    Annual Inspection
    Ac No. AF Hrs. Date
    Chapt/Task Item Sig. Insp.
    71-00/287 Power plant inspection ground run - note defects. A pre-
    inspection ground run is not a prerequisite but may be
    useful to determine any repair work necessary to
    maintain airworthiness of the aircraft.
    27-50/143 Flaps - lower to 40°
    12-20/124 Aircraft - Wash the aircraft exterior, including the landing
    gear and flap compartments (AMM 12-
    B-12-20-01-00A-902A-A)
    12-20/125 Windshields and windows - clean (AMM 12-
    B-12-20-02-00A-902A-A)
    12-20/126 Cockpit and cabin - clean (AMM 12-
    B-12-20-03-00A-902A-A)
    25-10/296 Crew seats - remove (AMM 12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A)
    25-20/298 Passenger seats - remove (AMM 12-
    B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A)
    07-10/161 Aircraft - Lift on jacks (AMM 12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A)
    Connect the aircraft to ground.
    06-00/218 Open/remove and examine the following panels:11AL,
    11AR, 11BL, 11BR, 12AB, 12AZ, 12BB, 12BL, 12BR,
    12BZ, 12CL, 12CR, 12CZ, 12DZ, 12EL, 12ER, 12EZ,
    12FZ, 12HZ, 21GZ, 21JZ, 21PZ, 21QZ,31AB, 31AL,
    31BL, 32AB, 32AL, 32BL, 32BT, 32CL, 33ET, 41AT,
    42AT, 42AB, 51KB, 51MB, 51NB, 52KB, 52MB, 52NB,
    52OB, 52PB, 52RB, 52TB, 52SB, 61KB, 61MB, 61NB,
    62KB, 62MB, 62NB, 62OB, 62PB, 62RB, 62SB. Make
    sure the drain holes are clear (12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-
    A).
    71-10/207 Engine cowlings ENG 43AL and ENG 43AR - open and
    examine, particularly for condition of rubbing strips and
    fasteners. Lubricate the hinges with a minimum of
    material CPC-temporary (Pt.No. P10-001).
    3 Annual Inspection

    Annual Inspection
    Ac No. AF Hrs. Date
    Chapt/Task Item Sig. Insp.
    Parking, Mooring & Storing
    10-10/428 External protective covers - Examine. Replace if any part
    of the cover is missing, damaged, torn or does not install
    properly.
    Placards and Markings
    11-00/220 Placards and markings - examine. Attach new placards if
    necessary (AMM 12-B-11-20-00-00A-040A-A and 12-
    B-11-30-00-00A-040A-A)
    Air Conditioning
    21-20/221 ECS and bleed air ducts, pipelines, equipment and
    associated clamps in the engine compartment - examine

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-20-20-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-17 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Annual Inspection
    Ac No. AF Hrs. Date
    Chapt/Task Item Sig. Insp.
    21-40/128 Foot heater (if installed) thermal protection switch -
    operational test (AMM 12-B-21-43-00-00A-903A-A)
    21-40/330 Cabin auxiliary heater thermal protection switch -
    Operational test (AMM 12-B-21-40-01-00A-903A-A)
    21-40/331 Underfloor heater thermal protection switch - Functional
    test (AMM 12-B-21-40-01-00A-903A-A)
    21-50/223 Vapor cycle cooling system (if installed) - examine the
    cooling unit
    Auto Flight
    22-10/233 Pitch, roll, and yaw actuators and capstan control cables
    - examine
    22-20/129 Angle of Attack (AOA) transmitters - examine
    22-20/226 Stick pusher system - functional test (AMM 12-
    B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A)
    Communications
    23-10/323 Emergency frequency comm tuning switch - operational
    test (AMM 12-B-23-12-00-00A-903A-A)
    23-10/322 Audio Control Panel emergency switch - operational test
    (AMM 12-B-23-50-00-00A-903A-A)
    Electrical Power
    24-40/229 External Power Unit (EPU) receptacle - examine
    24-60/133 Cockpit circuit breaker panels and switch panels -
    examine
    24-30/312 External power controller - over/under-voltage trip
    protection - operation test (AMM 12-
    B-24-30-00-00A-903A-A)
    24-30/313 DC electrical system - Functional test (AMM 12-
    B-71-00-00-00A-903D-A)
    Equipment and Furnishings
    25-10/134 Crew seat belts - examine
    25-10/300 Crew seats - remove cushions, covers and shells (Ref.
    CMM) and examine seat. Install cushions, covers and
    shells.

    Note

    The CMM Document No’s. are given in AMM 12-


    B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A.
    25-20/136 Passenger seat belts and extensions - examine
    25-20/137 Passenger seats - examine
    25-60/232 ELT installation - examine
    Flight Controls
    27-10/139 Aileron LH and RH - examine
    27-10/234 Aileron LH and RH rods and levers - examine
    Spray PTFE Teflon Spray OKS 571 (or equivalent)
    around the aileron pushrod guide roller sleeves at all
    three locations in each wing

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-20-20-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-17 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Annual Inspection
    Ac No. AF Hrs. Date
    Chapt/Task Item Sig. Insp.
    27-10/235 Aileron electrical bonding straps - examine
    27-10/236 Aileron controls - examine the control cables and pulleys
    as far as possible. Move the mechanism so that you can
    see all parts of the cables and make sure the safety clips
    are fully engaged in the turnbuckles
    27-10/237 Aileron cable tension - check (AMM 12-
    B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A)
    27-10/238 Ailerons - functional test (AMM 12-
    B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A)
    27-15/239 Aileron trim - functional test (AMM 12-
    B-27-15-00-00A-903A-A)
    27-20/140 Rudder - Examine, in particular the cover plate (Part No.
    555.40.12.215) on the bottom of the rudder to make sure
    it is not bent and there are no signs of interference with
    the rudder stop.
    Move the rudder on the upper hinge in the lateral and
    fore-and-aft directions and check for play. If necessary
    repair, SRM 12-B-55-40-00-00A-664B-A.
    27-20/246 Rudder electrical bonding straps - examine
    27-20/240 Rudder static dischargers - examine
    27-20/241 Rudder controls - examine the control cables and pulleys
    as far as possible. Move the mechanism so that you can
    see all parts of the cables and make sure the safety clips
    are fully engaged in the turnbuckles
    27-20/243 Rudder cable tension - check (AMM 12-
    B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A)
    27-20/244 Rudder - functional test (AMM 12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-
    A)
    27-20/245 Rudder trim - functional test (AMM 12-
    B-27-25-00-00A-903A-A)
    27-30/141 Elevators - examine
    27-30/247 Elevators electrical bonding straps - examine
    27-30/248 Elevators static dischargers - examine
    27-30/249 Elevator controls - examine the control cables, pulleys,
    rods and connections as far as possible. Move the
    mechanism so that you can see all parts of the cables
    and rods. Make sure the safety clips are fully engaged in
    the turnbuckles.
    27-30/250 Elevator cable tension - check (AMM 12-
    B-27-30-00-00A-903A-A)
    27-30/251 Elevator - functional test (AMM 12-
    B-27-30-00-00A-903A-A)
    27-40/142 Horizontal stabilizer trim - operational test of trim
    interrupt and alternate trim switches (AMM 12-
    B-27-40-00-00A-903A-A)
    27-40/292 Horizontal stabilizer trim - functional test of trim system
    (AMM 12-B-27-40-00-00A-903A-A)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-20-20-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-17 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Annual Inspection
    Ac No. AF Hrs. Date
    Chapt/Task Item Sig. Insp.
    27-40/252 Horizontal stabilizer trim actuator top and bottom
    attachments - examine
    27-50/144 Flaps and flap support mechanism - examine
    27-50/253 Flap electrical bonding straps - examine
    27-50/254 Flap motor, actuators and flexible drive shafts - examine
    27-50/255 Flaps - functional test and asymmetry monitor test.
    (AMM 12-B-27-50-00-00A-903A-A)
    Fuel
    28-10/145 Fuel tank filler caps - examine
    28-10/146 Fuel - remove a sample from each drain valve and
    examine for water
    28-20/148 Fuel filter element - remove and clean (AMM 12-
    B-28-20-01-00A-920A-A and 12-B-28-20-01-00A-250A-
    A)
    28-20/149 Firewall shutoff valve - operate FUEL EMERG
    SHUTOFF lever and make sure firewall shutoff valve
    opens and closes fully to each dead stop. Make sure
    movement is free and check if initial pull out force at
    lever outer end is below 10 lbf (44.5 N)
    28-20/256 Fuel system components - examine as far as possible
    with panels in item 06-00/218 opened/removed
    28-20/150 Engine Driven fuel Pump (EDP) - examine
    28-20/147 Fuel tank vent valve and flame arrestor - operational test
    (AMM 12-B-28-20-07-00A-903A-A)
    Hydraulic Power (if installed)
    29-10/257 Power pack - examine, specially for leaks and cracks on
    the end plates and where motor is attached
    29-10/151 Low pressure filter blockage indicator - make sure that it
    has not come out. If indicator found out, do the
    inspection/check procedure (AMM 12-
    B-29-10-04-00A-313A-A)
    29-10/316 Hydraulic system - make sure fluid level indicator on the
    reservoir tank shows full. Fill as necessary (AMM 12-
    B-29-00-00-00A-902A-A)
    29-10/258 Nitrogen accumulator - check nitrogen pressure and fill
    as necessary (AMM 12-B-29-10-02-00A-901A-A)
    29-10/153 Reservoir tank - make sure nitrogen pressure is correct.
    Pressurize as necessary (AMM 12-
    B-29-00-00-00A-902A-A)
    29-10/259 Power pack electric motor shaft seal drain fluid collector
    bottle - remove, clean and re-install
    Ice and Rain Protection
    30-10/154 Wing and horizontal stabilizer airfoil de-ice boots -
    inspection/check (AMM 12-B-30-10-00-00A-313A-A)
    30-10/155 Inertial separation system - operational test (AMM 12-
    B-30-20-00-00A-903A-A)
    30-10/260 Airfoil de-ice system - functional test (AMM 12-
    B-30-10-00-00A-903A-A)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-20-20-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-17 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Annual Inspection
    Ac No. AF Hrs. Date
    Chapt/Task Item Sig. Insp.
    30-20/261 Air by-pass door and operating mechanism - examine
    and lubricate with minimum quantity of CPC-
    temporary (Pt.No. P10-001)
    30-20/156 Engine air intake de-ice lip - look for signs of gas leaks.
    None are permitted.
    30-30/329 Probes de-ice system - functional test (AMM 12-
    B-30-30-20-00A-903A-A)
    30-40/262 Windshield de-ice system - operational test (AMM 12-
    B-30-40-00-00A-903A-A)
    30-60/158 Propeller de-ice system - inspection/check (AMM 12-
    B-30-60-00-00A-313A-A)
    30-60/159 Propeller de-ice system - operational test (AMM 12-
    B-30-60-00-00A-903A-A)
    Indicating/Recording
    31-30/421 CVFDR (if installed) - operational test (AMM 12-
    B-31-30-01-00A-903A-A)
    Landing Gear
    32-10/163 Main landing gear legs - examine
    32-10/162 Main landing gear - lubricate (AMM 12-
    B-12-20-04-00A-902A-A)
    32-10/164 Main landing gear compartments - examine
    32-10/263 Main landing gear electrical bonding straps - examine
    32-10/165 Main landing gear shock struts - check nitrogen pressure
    (AMM 12-B-32-10-00-00A-902A-A)
    32-10/436 Main landing gear shock struts top and bottom
    attachment bolts
    Remove, clean and examine for corrosion. If corroded,
    replace bolt with latest bolt part number. If not corroded,
    apply grease P04–028 and install the bolt.
    (AMM 12-B-32-10-03-00A-920A-A or 12-
    B-32-10-03-00A-920B-A)
    32-20/168 Nose landing gear leg and steering mechanism -
    examine, in particular the steering rod end (Part No.
    532.20.12.134) for the complete retention of bearing into
    the steering rod end housing.
    32-20/167 Nose landing gear - lubricate (AMM 12-
    B-12-20-04-00A-902A-A)
    32-20/169 Nose landing gear compartment - examine
    32-20/265 Nose landing gear electrical bonding straps - examine
    32-20/166 Nose landing gear leg shock strut - check nitrogen
    pressure (AMM 12-B-32-20-00-00A-902A-A)
    32-30/170 Hydraulic Landing GearExtension and retraction
    system - functional test of extension and retraction
    system and emergency extension system (AMM 12-
    B-32-30-00-00A-903A-A)
    32-30/424 Electro-mechanical Landing GearEmergency gear
    extension system - operational test (AMM 12-
    B-32-30-10-00A-903A-A)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-20-20-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-17 Page 9


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Annual Inspection
    Ac No. AF Hrs. Date
    Chapt/Task Item Sig. Insp.
    32-30/425 Electro-mechanical Landing GearExtension and
    Retraction Mechanism - examine all components and
    their attachments in the nose and main landing gear
    compartments.
    32-40/171 Mainwheels - examine. Rotate wheels, make sure
    bearing movement is smooth and free and no excessive
    play exists
    32-40/172 Mainwheel tires - examine and check tire pressure
    (AMM 12-B-12-10-04-00A-902A-A)
    32-40/173 Nosewheel - examine. Rotate wheel, make sure bearing
    movement is smooth and free and no excessive play
    exists
    32-40/174 Nosewheel tire - examine and check tire pressure (AMM
    12-B-12-10-04-00A-902A-A)
    32-40/175 Brake system - apply the parking brake. Examine the
    brake units. Make sure that pad wear indicators protrude
    from housing.
    32-40/176 Fluid reservoir - replenish if necessary (AMM 12-
    B-12-10-02-00A-902A-A)
    Lighting
    33-40/177 Exterior lighting - operational test. (AMM 12-
    B-33-40-00-00A-903A-A)
    33-41/178 Landing lights - examine
    33-42/179 Taxi lights - examine
    33-43/180 Navigation and strobe lights - examine
    33-44/181 Recognition lights (if installed) - examine
    33-46/182 Beacon lights (if installed) - examine
    Navigation
    34-00/183 Communications and navigation antennas - examine
    34-00/184 Cockpit instruments and avionic equipment - examine
    34-11/268 Pitot static system - drain (AMM 12-
    B-34-11-00-00A-901A-A)
    34-11/185 Pitot-tubes - examine
    34-11/186 Static ports - examine
    Oxygen
    35-10/187 High pressure relief indicator (green disk) - make sure
    that it is not damaged
    35-10/269 Oxygen pipelines and equipment - examine
    35-10/270 Oxygen system - operational test (AMM 12-
    B-35-00-00-00A-903A-A)
    System Display and Integration
    46-26/320 Pilot and Copilot (if installed) PFD reversionary switches
    - operational test (AMM 12-B-46-30-05-00A-903A-A or
    12-B-46-30-06-00A-903A-A)
    46-26/321 ADAHRS sensor source select switches - operational
    test (AMM 12-B-46-30-02-00A-903A-A)
    Doors

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-20-20-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-17 Page 10


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Annual Inspection
    Ac No. AF Hrs. Date
    Chapt/Task Item Sig. Insp.
    52-10/271 Passenger/crew door, counterbalance and cable support
    brackets - examine
    52-10/189 Passenger/crew door seal - clean with a wet cloth, dry
    and examine and apply French chalk (Pt.No. P09-002)
    52-10/190 Passenger/crew door shoot bolts and door frame fittings
    - examine
    52-10/192 Passenger/crew door hinges - examine and lubricate as
    necessary with minimum quantity of CPC-
    temporary (Pt.No. P10-001)
    52-10/191 Passenger/crew door handle lock pin - make sure
    movement is free
    52-20/272 Emergency door - examine (door removed)
    52-30/273 Emergency door seal - clean with a wet cloth, dry,
    examine and apply material French
    chalk (Pt.No. P09-002)
    52-30/274 Cargo door - examine
    52-30/193 Cargo door seal - clean with a wet cloth, dry and
    examine and apply French chalk (Pt.No. P09-002)
    52-30/194 Cargo door shoot bolts, door frame fittings and hooks -
    examine. Make sure the hook roller bushes are free to
    rotate. For the roller bush wear limits refer to AMM 12-
    B-52-30-00-00A-313A-A
    52-30/195 Cargo door hinges - examine and lubricate as necessary
    with minimum quantity of CPC-
    temporary (Pt.No. P10-001)
    52-70/275 Door warning system - operational test (AMM 12-
    B-52-70-00-00A-903A-A)
    Fuselage
    53-00/196 Fuselage external surface - examine.
    For aircraft that experience stone damage to the belly
    skin, visually examine affected areas for cracks.
    53-00/276 Rear pressure bulkhead - examine
    53-00/277 Floor top and bottom surface and seat rails - examine as
    far as possible with carpet and floor panels in item
    06-00/218 removed
    53-00/337 Carry Through Frames 21 and 24 - Inspection/Check
    (AMM 12-B-53-20-02-00A-313A-A).
    53-00/278 Baggage/freight net mounting plates attachment bolts
    and surrounding structure - examine for corrosion
    53-00/279 Baggage compartment - examine
    53-00/280 Rear fuselage internal structure - examine as far as
    possible, in particular examine battery mounting tray for
    corrosion
    Stabilizers
    55-10/197 Horizontal stabilizer external surface - examine
    55-10/319 Horizontal/vertical stabilizer attachment - Inspection/
    Check (AMM 12-B-55-00-00-00A-361A-A)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-20-20-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-17 Page 11


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Annual Inspection
    Ac No. AF Hrs. Date
    Chapt/Task Item Sig. Insp.
    55-30/198 Vertical stabilizer external surface - examine, specially
    around rear spar top rivets. If cracks are found refer to
    SRM 12-B-55-00-01-00A-664A-A for repair procedure
    55-30/281 Vertical stabilizer electrical bonding straps - examine
    Windows
    56-10/200 Windshield LH and RH - examine (AMM 12-
    B-56-00-00-00A-313A-A)
    56-20/201 Cockpit and cabin windows - examine (AMM 12-
    B-56-00-00-00A-313A-A)
    Wing
    57-00/202 Wing external surfaces - examine
    57-00/282 Wing tip static dischargers - examine
    57-00/283 Wing internal surfaces and flap compartment - examine
    as far as possible with panels in item 06-00/218
    removed
    57/00/284 Wing to fuselage attachments - examine as far as
    possible
    Propeller
    61-10/203 Propeller blades - examine. Repair blades as necessary
    Ref. Hartzell MM and (AMM 12-B-61-00-00-00A-904A-A)
    61-10/285 Propeller hub - remove spinner dome and examine
    propeller hub. Install spinner dome (AMM 12-
    B-61-10-01-00A-920A-A)
    61-20/286 Propeller governor, overspeed governor and beta
    controls - examine
    Power Plant
    71-00/205 Engine tubular mounting frame and shockmounts -
    examine. Replace shockmount if cracks in elastomer are
    more than 1 in (25,4 mm) long and/or 0.06 in (1,5 mm)
    deep
    71-00-301 Engine tubular mounting frame firewall attachment
    fittings - examine with firewall insulation blanket removed
    as necessary. If cracked, blistered or flaking paint is
    found on the mounting frame refer to SRM
    12-B-54-20-02-00A-664A-A.
    71-00/206 Power plant and accessories - examine. Refer to P&WC
    EMM 72-00-00 Periodic inspection and do the 100 hour
    and minor inspection items
    71-00/209 Engine drain mast and tank - for fuel leaks (no leaks
    permitted) and drain (no excessive leaks)
    Ignition
    74-00/288 Ignition system - operational test AMM 12-
    B-74-00-00-00A-903A-A
    Engine Controls
    76-00/210 Engine controls in engine compartment - examine
    76-00/211 Beta slip ring carbon block - make sure gap is not more
    than 0.01in (0.25mm)
    76-00/304 Cockpit control quadrant - examine.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-20-20-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-17 Page 12


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Annual Inspection
    Ac No. AF Hrs. Date
    Chapt/Task Item Sig. Insp.
    76-00/303 Power controls - operational test (AMM 12-
    B-76-10-00-00A-903A-A). Manual override - operational
    test (AMM 12-B-76-20-00-00A-903A-A)
    Exhaust
    78-00/214 Exhaust stubs - examine
    Oil
    79-00/422 Oil filler cap/dipstick - energize aircraft electrical system
    (AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A). Remove filler cap,
    examine and make sure the seal is in good condition.
    Set and hold AIR/GROUND switch to GROUND and
    make sure after 60 seconds the CAS ENGINE OIL
    LEVEL warning message comes on. Install filler cap and
    make sure the locking mechanism operates correctly.
    79-20/216 Task removed
    79-20/289 Engine oil cooler - examine. Make sure outlet door has
    full and free movement
    79-20/290 Oil system chip detector indication system - operational
    test (AMM 12-B-79-30-01-00A-903A-A)
    4 Job Close Up

    Annual Inspection
    Ac No. AF Hrs. Date
    Chapt/Task Item Sig. Insp.
    25-10/297 Crew seats - install (AMM 12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A)
    25-20/299 Passenger seats - install (AMM 12-
    B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A)
    06-00/219 Close/install the following panels:11AL, 11AR, 11BL,
    11BR, 12AB, 12AZ, 12BB, 12BL, 12BR, 12BZ, 12CL,
    12CR, 12CZ, 12DZ, 12EL, 12ER, 12EZ, 12FZ, 12HZ,
    21GZ, 21JZ, 21PZ, 21QZ,31AB, 31AL, 31BL, 32AB,
    32AL, 32BL, 32BT, 32CL, 33ET, 41AT, 42AT, 42AB,
    51KB, 51MB, 51NB, 52KB, 52MB, 52NB, 52OB, 52PB,
    52RB, 52TB, 52SB, 61KB, 61MB, 61NB, 62KB, 62MB,
    62NB, 62OB, 62PB, 62RB, 62SB.
    71-10/208 Engine cowlings ENG43AL and ENG 43AR - close
    07-10/160 Aircraft - lower to the ground and remove the jacks
    (AMM 12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A)
    71-00/204 Power plant - post inspection ground run (AMM 12-
    B-71-00-00-00A-903A-A)
    25-60/231 ELT - operational test (AMM 12-B-25-63-00-00A-903A-
    A)
    00-00/121 Airworthiness Directives and Service Bulletins reviewed
    and complied with as required
    00-00/122 Chapter 4 and Chapter 5 - Overhaul and Replacement
    Schedule, and Time Limited Inspection Requirements
    sections reviewed and any additional requirements are
    complied with

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-20-20-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-17 Page 13


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-20-20-00A-281A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-17 Page 14
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    SUPPLEMENTAL STRUCTURAL INSPECTION DOCUMENT

    INSPECTIONS

    Table of Contents Page

    SUPPLEMENTAL STRUCTURAL INSPECTION DOCUMENT - INSPECTIONS...................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 2
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-32-50-00-00A-310A-A NOSE WHEEL STEERING - EXAMINE
    12-B-52-00-01-00A-353A-A PASSENGER/CREW DOOR HINGE - EDDY
    CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-52-10-01-00A-353A-A PASSENGER/CREW DOOR SKINS - EDDY
    CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-52-30-00-01A-353A-A CARGO DOOR HINGE - EDDY CURRENT
    INSPECTION
    12-B-52-30-01-00A-353A-A CARGO DOOR SKINS - EDDY CURRENT
    INSPECTION
    12-B-53-30-02-00A-353A-A REAR FUSELAGE FRAMES - EDDY CURRENT
    INSPECTION
    12-B-55-30-03-00A-353A-A VERTICAL STABILIZER SPARS - EDDY CURRENT
    INSPECTION
    12-B-55-40-00-00A-310A-A RUDDER - EXAMINE
    12-B-57-20-01-00A-353A-A WING SKINS - EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-57-33-00-00A-310A-A WING TIP - EXAMINE
    12-B-57-60-04-00A-310A-A AILERON TRIM TAB - EXAMINE

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-20-30-00A-280A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-01-10 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Do these supplemental structural inspections to increase the life of the airframe above more than 25000
    flying hours or 30000 landings:

    SUPPLEMENTAL INSPECTIONS
    Task No Inspection/Reference Threshold Repeated Interval
    (whichever comes (whichever comes first)
    first)
    Flying Landings Flying Landings Years
    hours hours
    27-00/402 Bonding leads to all Flight Control 32,500 42,000 12,500 15,000 6
    Surfaces - Examine
    32-20/403 NLG - Overhaul 25,000 30,000 8,300 10,000 6
    CMM 02100
    Parts kit P/N 500.60.12.029
    32-50/404 NLG Steering Mechanism - Examine 32,500 42,000 8,300 10,000 6
    AMM 12-B-32-50-00-00A-310A-A
    52-10/405 Passenger/Crew Door Piano Hinge - 32,500 42,000 12,500 15,000 -
    Eddy Current Inspection
    AMM 12-B-52-00-01-00A-353A-A
    52-10/406 Passenger/Crew Door Skin - Eddy 25,000 30,000 12,500 15,000 6
    Current Inspection
    AMM 12-B-52-10-01-00A-353A-A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-20-30-00A-280A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-01-10 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    SUPPLEMENTAL INSPECTIONS
    Task No Inspection/Reference Threshold Repeated Interval
    (whichever comes (whichever comes first)
    first)
    Flying Landings Flying Landings Years
    hours hours
    52-30/407 Cargo Door Piano Hinge - Eddy Current 32,500 42,000 12,500 15,000 -
    Inspection
    AMM 12-B-52-30-00-01A-353A-A
    52-30/408 Cargo Door Skin - Eddy Current 25,000 30,000 12,500 15,000 6
    Inspection
    AMM 12-B-52-30-01-00A-353A-A
    53-00/419 Frame 40 - Eddy Current Inspection 32,500 42,000 12,500 15,000 -
    AMM 12-B-53-30-02-00A-353A-A
    55-30/420 Vertical Stabilizer Forward Attachment to 32,500 42,000 12,500 15,000 -
    Frame 40 - Eddy Current Inspection
    AMM 12-B-55-30-03-00A-353A-A
    55-40/410 Rudder Trim Tab - Examine 32,500 42,000 12,500 15,000 6
    AMM 12-B-55-40-00-00A-310A-A
    57-60/411 Aileron Trim Tab - Examine 32,500 42,000 12,500 15,000 6
    AMM 12-B-57-60-04-00A-310A-A
    Inspection kit P/N 500.60.12.039 and
    Inspection kit P/N 500.60.12.040
    57-00/412 Wing Tips - Examine 32,500 42,000 12,500 15,000 6
    AMM 12-B-57-33-00-00A-310A-A
    57-00/413 Wing Skin around drain holes - Eddy 25,000 30,000 2,500 3,000 -
    Current Inspection
    AMM 12-B-57-20-01-00A-353A-A

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-20-30-00A-280A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-01-10 Page 3
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-20-30-00A-280A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-01-10 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM

    GENERAL

    Table of Contents Page

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM - GENERAL........................................................... 1


    1 Introduction............................................................................................................. 4
    2 Progressive Inspection Program Details................................................................ 4
    2.1 Mini Inspection........................................................................................................ 5
    2.2 Phase 1 thru 6 Inspections..................................................................................... 5
    2.3 Out of Phase Inspections....................................................................................... 5
    3 Progressive Inspection Program Schedule Outline................................................ 5
    4 Inspection Program Tolerances.............................................................................. 5
    5 Extensions Outside the Inspection Program Tolerances........................................ 6
    6 Initiation of the Progressive Inspection Program.................................................... 6
    7 Return to the 100 Hour/Annual Maintenance Program.......................................... 6
    8 Inspection Work Cards........................................................................................... 6
    9 Task List................................................................................................................. 8

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Progressive Inspection Program Task List............................................................. 8

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Zones...................................................................................................................... 7

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-04-00-00-00A-000A-A STRUCTURAL AND COMPONENT LIMITATIONS -
    AIRWORTHINESS LIMITATIONS
    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A ACCESS PROVISION – HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR
    - DESCRIPTION
    12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A JACKING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-11-20-00-00A-901A-A EXTERIOR PLACARDS AND MARKINGS -
    MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-11-30-00-00A-040A-A INTERIOR PLACARDS - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-12-10-02-00A-902A-A BRAKES - SERVICING
    12-B-12-10-04-00A-902A-A TIRES - SERVICING
    12-B-12-20-01-00A-902A-A AIRCRAFT EXTERIOR WASHING - SERVICING
    12-B-12-20-02-00A-902A-A AIRCRAFT WINDOWS CLEANING - SERVICING

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-30-00-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-06 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Data module/Technical publication Title


    12-B-12-20-03-00A-902A-A AIRCRAFT INTERIOR CLEANING - SERVICING
    12-B-12-20-04-00A-902A-A LANDING GEAR - SERVICING
    12-B-12-20-05-00A-902A-A PROPELLER - SERVICING
    12-B-21-40-01-00A-903A-A SECONDARY HEATING - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-21-40-02-00A-313A-A REFRIGERATION PACK - INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-21-40-02-00A-902A-A REFRIGERATION PACK - SERVICING
    12-B-21-40-03-00A-250A-A WATER SEPARATOR - CLEAN
    12-B-21-43-00-00A-903A-A FOOTWARMER - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-22-10-00-00A-313A-A AUTOPILOT - INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A SPEED AND ATTITUDE CORRECTION -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-23-12-00-00A-903A-A VHF COMMUNICATION - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-23-50-00-00A-903A-A AUDIO INTEGRATING SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/
    TEST
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-24-30-01-00A-313A-A STARTER/GENERATOR - INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-24-30-07-00A-920B-A NI–CAD BATTERY - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-24-52-51-00A-920A-A EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY (EPS) SYSTEM -
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A FLIGHT COMPARTMENT CREW SEATS - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE SEATS - REMOVAL INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A STANDARD SEATS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-63-00-00A-903A-A EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-27-15-00-00A-903A-A AILERON TRIM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-27-25-00-00A-903A-A RUDDER TRIM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-27-30-00-00A-903A-A ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/
    TEST
    12-B-27-40-00-00A-903A-A HORIZONTAL STABILIZER TRIM - ADJUSTMENT/
    TEST
    12-B-27-50-00-00A-902A-A FLAPS - SERVICING
    12-B-27-50-00-00A-903A-A FLAPS - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-28-20-01-00A-250A-A FUEL FILTER ELEMENT - CLEAN
    12-B-28-20-01-00A-920A-A FUEL FILTER ELEMENT - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-30-00-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-06 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Data module/Technical publication Title


    12-B-28-20-07-00A-903A-A FLOAT VALVE - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-29-00-00-00A-902A-A HYDRAULIC SYSTEM - SERVICING
    12-B-29-10-02-00A-901A-A ACCUMULATOR - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-29-10-04-00A-313A-A RETURN LINE FILTER DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE
    INDICATOR - INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-30-10-00-00A-313A-A AIRFOIL DE–ICE BOOTS - INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-30-10-00-00A-903A-A AIRFOIL DE–ICE SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-30-20-00-00A-903A-A AIR INTAKE DE–ICE SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-30-30-20-00A-903A-A PROBES DE–ICE SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-30-40-00-00A-903A-A WINDSHIELD DE–ICE SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/
    TEST
    12-B-30-60-00-00A-313A-A PROPELLER DE–ICE SYSTEM - INSPECTION/
    CHECK
    12-B-30-60-00-00A-903A-A PROPELLER DE–ICE SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-31-30-01-00A-903A-A RECORDERS – CVFDR - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-32-10-00-00A-902A-A MAIN LANDING GEAR SHOCK ABSORBER -
    SERVICING
    12-B-32-10-03-00A-920A-A SHOCK ABSORBER – HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR -
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-32-10-03-00A-920B-A SHOCK ABSORBER – ELECTRO MECHANICAL
    LANDING GEAR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-32-20-00-00A-902A-A NOSE LANDING GEAR SHOCK ABSORBER -
    SERVICING
    12-B-32-30-00-00A-903A-A EXTENSION AND RETRACTION – HYDRAULIC
    LANDING GEAR - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-33-40-00-00A-903A-A EXTERNAL LIGHTS - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-34-11-00-00A-901A-A PITOT STATIC SYSTEM - MAINTENANCE
    PRACTICES
    12-B-35-00-00-00A-903A-A OXYGEN SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-46-30-02-00A-903A-A PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY CONTROLLER -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-46-30-05-00A-903A-A REVERSION CONTROL PANEL (4 SWITCH) -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-46-30-06-00A-903A-A REVERSION CONTROL PANEL (3 SWITCH) -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-52-30-00-00A-313A-A CARGO DOOR - INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-52-70-00-00A-903A-A DOOR WARNING - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-53-20-02-00A-313A-A CENTER FUSELAGE – CARRY THROUGH FRAMES -
    INSPECTION/CHECK

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-30-00-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-06 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Data module/Technical publication Title


    12-B-54-20-02-00A-664A-A ENGINE FRAME DAMAGED PAINT AND
    CORROSION - SPECIAL REPAIR PROCEDURES
    12-B-55-00-00-00A-361A-A STABILIZERS ATTACHMENT FITTINGS -
    ALLOWABLE WEAR
    12-B-55-00-01-00A-664A-A VERTICAL STABILIZER SKIN CRACK - SPECIAL
    REPAIR PROCEDURES
    12-B-55-40-00-00A-664B-A RUDDER - REPAIR PROCEDURE RM 06299 –
    UPPER HINGE FITTING
    12-B-56-00-00-00A-313A-A WINDOWS - INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-61-00-00-00A-904A-A PROPELLER BLADES - REPAIR
    12-B-61-10-01-00A-920A-A PROPELLER - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903A-A POWER PLANT - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903D-A POWER PLANT TEST 3 – DC GENERATION SYSTEM
    - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-71-00-03-00A-250A-A ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS - CLEAN
    12-B-74-00-00-00A-903A-A IGNITION SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-76-10-00-00A-903A-A POWER CONTROLS - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-76-10-02-00A-903A-A PROPELLER FEATHER MICROSWITCHES -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-76-20-00-00A-903A-A MANUAL OVERRIDE - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-79-30-01-00A-903A-A CHIP DETECTOR - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Description

    1 Introduction
    The Progressive Inspection Program is designed for high utilization operators generally flying an average of 1200
    hours per calendar year per aircraft. The standard inspection items were re-grouped, stretched (where permitted)
    and spread into six phases and alternating into six mini or minor inspections. The program has been technically
    approved by the Swiss Federal Office for Civil Aviation (FOCA), but operators intending to use this program should
    check with their local Airworthiness Authority for acceptance.

    Note

    Refer to P&WC Engine Maintenance Manual (EMM) for the engine scheduled maintenance tasks.

    2 Progressive Inspection Program Details


    For each aircraft maintained under this program a complete inspection cycle consists of six Mini or Minor
    Inspections and six Phase inspections at alternating intervals. This must be complied with and not exceeding 1200
    hours Time In Service (TIS) or 12 months, whichever comes first.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-30-00-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-06 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.1 Mini Inspection


    The Mini Inspection consists of a visual inspection of the wing, tail, fuselage and landing gear. Fluid levels are
    verified and the aircraft is visually inspected for fluid leaks. A visual inspection of the cabin and cockpit is performed
    to check the cleanliness, seats and seat belts. A visual inspection is performed of the propeller and engine oil filter
    and fuel filter are also examined.

    2.2 Phase 1 thru 6 Inspections


    The Phases 1 thru 6 inspections includes all 100 hours and Annual tasks as well as Time Limited and Overhaul
    tasks that fall within 12 calendar months, excluding those tasks that have component operating hour intervals. The
    components with factory limits will be inspected based on their individual installation time.

    2.3 Out of Phase Inspections


    Out of phase inspections are all remaining tasks in DM 12-B-04-00-00-00A-000A-A as well as Time Limited and
    Overhaul tasks in Chapter 05 that are outside the scope of the Progressive Inspection program.
    When all 6 Mini Inspections and the 6 Phase Inspections have been carried out, the requirement of the Annual
    Inspection has been met or exceeded. The remaining out of phase items must be reviewed on a regular basis to
    ensure that the aircraft is kept airworthy.

    3 Progressive Inspection Program Schedule Outline


    The complete program is divided into 6 Mini Inspections altered by 6 Phase Inspections. Once the 1200 hour cycle
    has been completed, the cycle starts over again (see the Table below):

    100 hr 200 300 hr 400 hr 500 hr 600 hr 700 hr 800 hr 900 hr 1000 hr 1100 hr 1200 hr
    check hr check check check check check check check check check check
    chec
    k
    Mini Ph 1 Mini insp Ph 2 Mini insp Ph 3 Mini insp Ph 4 Mini insp Ph 5 Mini insp Ph 6
    insp insp insp insp insp insp insp
    Operations Under 1200 Hours per Year
    All inspections in the program must be completed within 12 months before starting the cycle over. If the utilization
    of the aircraft will be less than 1200 hours per year, the remaining phases must be accomplished not later than the
    end of the 12 month period.
    For example: The anticipated flying is 900 hours. This would mean that the last check accomplished in the 12
    month period would be the 900 hour check (Mini Inspection). To complete the program cycle, Phase 5 and 6
    Inspection items of the 1000 hour and 1200 hour check respectively, must be accomplished during the 900 hour
    check. When the 900 hour check is signed off, the cycle would start over with the first 100 hour mini check.

    4 Inspection Program Tolerances


    The inspection program has a tolerance of ± 10 hours. That is, 100 Hour respectively phase inspection may be
    signed out between 10 hours prior to, or ten hours after the due time without altering the due time of the next 100
    hour inspection.
    Any inspection completed prior to the 90 hour point in the 100 hour interval will reset the due time of the next
    inspection.
    An inspection period cannot normally be extended beyond the 120 hour point. For example, if the initial inspection
    is completed at 110 hours the next inspection is due between 190 and 210 hours. If the next inspection is

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-30-00-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-06 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    performed at 190 hours the following check will be due between 290 and 310 hours. This means that the basic
    interval can vary from 80 hours up to 120 hours between the inspections.

    5 Extensions Outside the Inspection Program Tolerances


    An extension is for extenuating and unforeseen circumstances, not to facilitate maintenance planning. If such a
    circumstance should occur, the request must be submitted in detailed writing to the local aviation authority for
    approval.

    6 Initiation of the Progressive Inspection Program


    An Annual Inspection must be carried out prior to placing the aircraft on the Progressive Inspection program.

    7 Return to the 100 Hour/Annual Maintenance Program


    The aircraft can be returned to the regular 100 hour/Annual maintenance program by completing an annual
    inspection as detailed in the PC-12/47E Aircraft Maintenance Manual.

    8 Inspection Work Cards


    The inspection work cards are subdivided into inspection zones of the PC-12/47E (Fig. 1). The zones are defined
    as follows:
    − Zone 10 Fuselage below the floor including cabin, cockpit and internal and external fuselage area from the
    firewall to the rear pressure bulkhead
    − Zone 20 Fuselage above the floor including cabin, cockpit and internal and external fuselage area from the
    firewall to the rear pressure bulkhead
    − Zone 30 Internal and external tail area including vertical and horizontal stabilizers, rudder and elevator from
    rear pressure bulkhead
    − Zone 40 Engine, propeller and systems forward of the firewall including cowlings and fairings
    − Zone 50 Left hand wing, internal and external structure, fuel storage, plumbing and delivery systems, ailerons,
    flaps and control systems
    − Zone 60 Right hand wing, internal and external structure, fuel storage, plumbing and delivery systems,
    ailerons, flaps and control systems
    − Zone 70 Landing gear including tires, wheels, brakes and gear doors

    The applicability of each Inspection Card also shows the applicable inspection work cards for each check.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-30-00-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-06 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PRIMARY
    ZONE 60

    PRIMARY
    ZONE 50

    PRIMARY
    ZONE 40 PRIMARY ZONE 20 PRIMARY ZONE 30

    PRIMARY ZONE 70

    PRIMARY ZONE 10
    06103

    Figure 1 Zones

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-30-00-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-06 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    9 Task List
    Table 2 Progressive Inspection Program Task List
    Task No Items Task Description Reference Phase
    00-00/121 Airworthiness Directives and Check - Mini
    Service Bulletins reviewed and inspection
    complied with as required
    00-00/122 Chapter 4 and Chapter 5 - Check - Mini
    Overhaul and Replacement inspection
    Schedule and Time Limited
    Inspection Requirements DMs
    reviewed and any additional
    requirements are complied with
    06-00/218 Access panels 11AR, 11BL, Open/remove and examine 12- Mini
    11BR, 12AB, 12AZ, 12BB, 12BL, B-06-20-00-00A-040A- inspection
    12BR, 12BZ, 12CL, 12CR, 12CZ, A
    12DZ, 12EL, 12ER, 12EZ, 12FZ,
    12HZ, 21GZ, 21JZ, 21PZ, 21QZ,
    31AB, 31AL, 31BL, 32AB, 32AL,
    32BL, 32BT, 32CL, 33ET, 41AT,
    42AT, 42AB, 51KB, 51MB, 51NB,
    52KB, 52MB, 52NB, 52OB,
    52PB, 52RB, 52TB, 52SB, 61KB,
    61MB, 61NB, 62KB, 62MB,
    62NB, 62OB, 62PB, 62RB,
    62SB, 62TB
    06-00/219 Access panels 11AR, 11BL, Close or install - Mini
    11BR, 12AB, 12AZ, 12BB, 12BL, inspection
    12BR, 12BZ, 12CL, 12CR, 12CZ,
    12DZ, 12EL, 12ER, 12EZ, 12FZ,
    12HZ, 21GZ, 21JZ, 21PZ, 21QZ,
    31AB, 31AL, 31BL, 32AB, 32AL,
    32BL, 32BT, 32CL, 33ET, 41AT,
    42AT, 42AB, 51KB, 51MB, 51NB,
    52KB, 52MB, 52NB, 52OB,
    52PB, 52RB, 52TB, 52SB, 61KB,
    61MB, 61NB, 62KB, 62MB,
    62NB, 62OB, 62PB, 62RB,
    62SB, 62TB
    07-10/160 Aircraft Lower to the ground, remove 12- Mini
    jacks and disconnect from B-07-10-00-00A-901A- inspection
    ground A
    07-10/161 Aircraft Lift on jacks and connect the 12- Mini
    aircraft to ground B-07-10-00-00A-901A- inspection
    A
    10-10/428 External protective covers Examine. Replace if any part - Mini
    of the cover is missing, inspection
    damaged, torn or does not
    install properly.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-30-00-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-06 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No Items Task Description Reference Phase


    11-00/220 Placards and markings Examine and attach new 12- Mini
    placards if necessary B-11-20-00-00A-901A- inspection
    A and 12-
    B-11-30-00-00A-040A-
    A
    12-20/124 Aircraft Wash the exterior, including 12- Mini
    the landing gear and flap B-12-20-01-00A-902A- inspection
    compartments A
    12-20/125 Windshields and windows Clean 12- Mini
    B-12-20-02-00A-902A- inspection
    A
    12-20/126 Cockpit and cabin Clean 12- Mini
    B-12-20-03-00A-902A- inspection
    A
    21-20/221 ECS and bleed air ducts, Examine - Phase 1, 3, 5
    pipelines, equipment and
    associated clamps in the engine
    compartment
    21-40/50 Water separator condenser Clean 12- Phase 1, 4
    B-21-40-03-00A-250A-
    A
    21-40/56 Heat exchanger matrix Inspection/check 12- Phase 1, 3, 5
    B-21-40-02-00A-313A-
    A
    21-40/55 Cold air unit Re-oil 12- Phase 1, 3, 5
    B-21-40-02-00A-902A-
    A
    21-40/128 Flight compartment foot heater (if Operational test 12- Phase 5
    installed) thermal protection B-21-43-00-00A-903A-
    switch A
    21-40/330 Cabin auxiliary heater thermal Operational test 12- Phase 5
    protection switch B-21-40-01-00A-903A-
    A
    21-40/331 Underfloor heater thermal Functional test 12- Phase 5
    protection switch B-21-40-01-00A-903A-
    A
    21-50/223 Vapor cycle cooling system (if Examine the cooling unit - Phase 3, 6
    installed)
    22-10/233 Pitch, roll, and yaw actuators and Examine - Phase 6
    capstan control cables
    22-10/60 Servo mount (pitch, roll and yaw) Remove for clutch check 12- Phase 6
    B-22-10-00-00A-313A-
    A
    22-20/130 Stick pusher system Check 12- All Phase
    B-22-20-00-00A-903A- items
    A
    22-20/129 Angle of Attack (AOA) Examine - Mini
    transmitters inspection
    22-20/226 Stick pusher system Functional test 12- Phase 3, 6
    B-22-20-00-00A-903A-
    A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-30-00-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-06 Page 9


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No Items Task Description Reference Phase


    23-10/322 Audio Control Panel Emergency Operational test 12- Phase 4
    Switch B-23-50-00-00A-903A-
    A
    23-10/323 Emergency Frequency Comm Operational test 12- Phase 4
    Tuning Switch B-23-12-00-00A-903A-
    A
    24-30/310 Starter/generator 2 Brush check 12- All Phase
    B-24-30-01-00A-313A- items
    A
    24-30/313 DC electrical system Functional test 12- Phase 4
    B-71-00-00-00A-903D-
    A
    24-30/339 NiCad batteries Remove and service 12- All Phase
    B-24-30-07-00A-920B- items
    A and CMM
    24-30/309 Generator 1 Brush check 12- All Phase
    B-24-30-01-00A-313A- items
    A
    24-30/340 Task removed from Progressive Inspection Program
    24-40/229 External Power Unit (EPU) Examine - Phase 6
    receptacle
    24-50/70 Emergency power supply (if Remove and Cap test 12- Phase 4
    installed) B-24-52-51-00A-920A-
    A
    24-60/133 Cockpit circuit breaker panels Examine - Phase 4
    and switch panels
    25-10/297 Crew seats Install 12- Phase 5
    B-25-10-01-00A-920A-
    A
    25-10/296 Crew seats Remove 12- Phase 5
    B-25-10-01-00A-920A-
    A
    25-10/300 Crew seats Crew seats - remove 12- Phase 5
    cushions, covers and shells B-25-10-01-00A-920A-
    (Ref. CMM) and examine A
    seat. Install cushions, covers
    and shells.

    Note

    The CMM Document No’s.


    are given in DM
    25-10/135 Crew seats Examine as far as possible - Mini
    with seats installed inspection
    25-10/134 Crew seat belts Examine - Mini
    inspection
    25-20/298 Passenger seats Remove 12- Phase 5
    B-25-21-01-00A-920A-
    A or 12-
    B-25-22-01-00A-920A-
    A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-30-00-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-06 Page 10


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No Items Task Description Reference Phase


    25-20/299 Passenger seats Install 12- Phase 5
    B-25-21-01-00A-920A-
    A or 12-
    B-25-22-01-00A-920A-
    A
    25-20/136 Passenger seat belts and Examine - Mini
    extensions inspection
    25-20/302 Passenger seats Examine as far as possible - Mini
    with seats installed. inspection
    Move the recline mechanism
    and swivel function
    (executive seat only) through
    its full motion and check for
    correct operation. If
    necessary, refer to the
    applicable supplier CMM
    (CMM 25-20-07 for
    executive seats and CMM
    25-20-99 for standard
    seats).
    25-20/137 Passenger seats Examine - Phase 5
    25-60/232 ELT installation Examine - Phase 6
    25-60/231 ELT Operational test 12- Phase 6
    B-25-63-00-00A-903A-
    A
    26-20/24 Fire extinguisher Content check - Phase 4
    27-00/138 Aileron, elevator and rudder Operate, make sure full and - All Phase
    controls free travel items
    27-10/236 Aileron controls Examine the control cables - Phase 5
    and pulleys as far as
    possible. Move the
    mechanism so that you can
    see all parts of the cables
    and make sure the safety
    clips are fully engaged in the
    turnbuckles
    27-10/238 Ailerons Functional test 12- Phase 5
    B-27-10-00-00A-903A-
    A
    27-10/139 Aileron LH and RH Examine - Mini
    inspection
    27-10/234 Aileron LH and RH rods and Examine - Phase 2
    levers
    Spray PTFE Teflon Spray
    OKS 571 (or equivalent)
    around the aileron pushrod
    guide roller sleeves at all
    three locations in each wing
    27-10/235 Aileron electrical bonding straps Examine - Phase 2
    27-10/237 Aileron cable tension Check 12- Phase 5
    B-27-10-00-00A-903A-
    A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-30-00-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-06 Page 11


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No Items Task Description Reference Phase


    27-15/239 Aileron trim Functional test 12- Phase 2
    B-27-15-00-00A-903A-
    A
    27-20/240 Rudder static dischargers Examine - Mini
    inspection
    27-20/140 Rudder Examine, in particular the - Mini
    cover plate (Part No. inspection
    555.40.12.215) on the
    bottom of the rudder to make
    sure it is not bent and there
    are no signs of interference
    with the rudder stop.
    Move the rudder on the
    upper hinge in the lateral
    and fore-and-aft directions
    and check for play. If
    necessary repair, SRM
    12-B-55-40-00-00A-664B-A.
    27-20/241 Rudder controls Examine the control cables - Phase 5
    and pulleys as far as
    possible. Move the
    mechanism so that you can
    see all parts of the cables
    and make sure the safety
    clips are fully engaged in the
    turnbuckles
    27-20/243 Rudder cable tension Check 12- Phase 5
    B-27-20-00-00A-903A-
    A
    27-20/246 Rudder electrical bonding straps Examine - Phase 6
    27-20/245 Rudder trim Functional test 12- Phase 6
    B-27-25-00-00A-903A-
    A
    27-20/244 Rudder Functional test 12- Phase 6
    B-27-20-00-00A-903A-
    A
    27-30/250 Elevator cable tension Check 12- Phase 5
    B-27-30-00-00A-903A-
    A
    27-30/247 Elevator electrical bonding straps Examine - Phase 6
    27-30/251 Elevator Functional test 12- Phase 6
    B-27-30-00-00A-903A-
    A
    27-30/249 Elevator controls Examine the control cables - Phase 5
    and pulleys as far as
    possible. Move the
    mechanism so that you can
    see all parts of the cables
    and make sure the safety
    clips are fully engaged in the
    turnbuckles

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-30-00-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-06 Page 12


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No Items Task Description Reference Phase


    27-30/248 Elevator static dischargers Examine - Mini
    inspection
    27-30/141 Elevators Examine - Mini
    inspection
    27-40/142 Horizontal stabilizer trim Operational test of trim 12- Mini
    interrupt and alternate trim B-27-40-00-00A-903A- inspection
    switches A
    27-40/252 Horizontal stabilizer trim actuator Examine - Phase 6
    top and bottom attachments
    27-40/292 Horizontal stabilizer trim Functional test of trim 12- Phase 3, 6
    system B-27-40-00-00A-903A-
    A
    27-40/291 Horizontal stabilizer trim Operational test of trim 12- All Phase
    system B-27-40-00-00A-903A- items
    A
    27-50/254 Flap motor, actuators and flexible Examine - Phase 2
    drive shafts
    27-50/253 Flaps electrical bonding straps Examine - Phase 2
    27-50/255 Flaps Functional test and 12- Phase 1
    asymmetry monitor test. B-27-50-00-00A-903A-
    A
    27-50/74 Flap actuators (black anodized) Lubricate 12- Mini
    (Part No. 978.73.20.307, 308 and B-27-50-00-00A-902A- inspection
    309) A
    27-50/144 Flaps and flap support Examine - Mini
    mechanism inspection
    27-50/143 Flaps Lower to 40° - Mini
    inspection
    28-10/145 Fuel tank filler caps Examine - Mini
    inspection
    28-10/146 Fuel Remove a sample from each - All Phase
    drain valve and examine for items
    water
    28-20/148 Fuel filter element Remove and clean 12- Mini
    B-28-20-01-00A-920A- inspection
    A and 12-
    B-28-20-01-00A-250A-
    A
    28-20/147 Fuel tank vent valve and flame Operational test 12- Mini
    arrestor B-28-20-07-00A-903A- inspection
    A
    28-20/150 Engine driven pump Examine - All Phase
    items
    28-20/256 Fuel system components Examine as far as possible - Phase 2
    with panels in Task
    06-00/218 opened/removed

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-30-00-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-06 Page 13


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No Items Task Description Reference Phase


    28-20/149 Firewall shutoff valve Operate FUEL EMERG - Phase 1, 3, 5
    SHUTOFF lever and make
    sure firewall shutoff valve
    opens and closes fully to
    each dead stop. Make sure
    movement is free and check
    if initial pull out force at lever
    outer end is below 10 lbf
    (44.5 N)
    29-10/151 Low pressure filter blockage Make sure that it has not 12- Phase 1, 3, 5
    indicator come out. If indicator found B-29-10-04-00A-313A-
    out, do the inspection/check A
    If installed procedure
    29-10/259 Power pack electric motor shaft Remove, clean and re-install - Phase 1, 3, 5
    seal drain fluid collector bottle
    If installed
    29-10/258 Nitrogen accumulator Check nitrogen pressure and 12- Phase 1, 3, 5
    fill as necessary B-29-10-02-00A-901A-
    If installed A
    29-10/257 Power pack Examine, specially for leaks - Phase 1, 3, 5
    and cracks on the end plates
    If installed and where motor is attached
    29-10/153 Reservoir tank Make sure nitrogen pressure 12- Mini
    is correct. Pressurize as B-29-00-00-00A-902A- inspection
    If installed necessary A
    29-10/316 Hydraulic system Make sure fluid level 12- Mini
    indicator on the reservoir B-29-00-00-00A-902A- inspection
    If installed tank shows full. Fill as A
    necessary.
    30-10/260 Airfoil de-ice system Functional test 12- Phase 2, 4, 6
    B-30-10-00-00A-903A-
    A
    30-10/154 Wing and horizontal stabilizer Inspection/check 12- All Phase
    airfoil de-ice boots B-30-10-00-00A-313A- items
    A
    30-10/155 Inertial separation system Operational test. 12- Phase 1, 3, 5
    B-30-20-00-00A-903A-
    A
    30-20/261 Air by-pass door and operating Examine and lubricate with - Phase 1, 3, 5
    mechanism minimum quantity of
    P10-001
    30-20/156 Engine air intake de-ice lip Examine and look for signs - Mini
    of gas leaks - none are inspection
    permitted
    30-30/329 Probes de-ice system Functional test. 12- Phase 2, 4, 6
    B-30-30-20-00A-903A-
    A
    30-40/262 Windshield de-ice system Operational test 12- Phase 2, 4, 6
    B-30-40-00-00A-903A-
    A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-30-00-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-06 Page 14


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No Items Task Description Reference Phase


    30-60/159 Propeller de-ice system Operational test 12- Phase 2, 4, 6
    B-30-60-00-00A-903A-
    A
    30-60/158 Propeller de-ice system Inspection/check 12- Phase 1, 3, 5
    B-30-60-00-00A-313A-
    A
    31-30/421 CVFDR (if installed) Operational test 12- Phase 6
    B-31-30-01-00A-903A-
    A
    32-10/165 Main landing gear shock struts Check nitrogen pressure 12- Phase 2, 4, 6
    B-32-10-00-00A-902A-
    A
    32-10/162 Main landing gear Lubricate 12- Phase 2, 4, 6
    B-12-20-04-00A-902A-
    A
    32-10/263 Main landing gear electrical Examine - Phase 2, 4, 6
    bonding straps
    32-10/164 Main landing gear compartments Examine - Phase 2, 4, 6
    32-10/163 Main landing gear legs Examine - Phase 2, 4, 6
    32-10/436 Main landing gear shock struts Remove, clean and examine AMM 12- Phase 6
    top and bottom attachment bolts for corrosion. If corroded, B-32-10-03-00A-920A-
    replace bolt with latest bolt A or 12-
    part number. If not corroded, B-32-10-03-00A-920B-
    apply grease P04–028 and A
    install the bolt
    32-20/167 Nose landing gear Lubricate 12- Phase 2, 4, 6
    B-12-20-04-00A-902A-
    A
    32-20/166 Nose landing gear leg shock strut Check nitrogen pressure 12- Phase 2, 4, 6
    B-32-20-00-00A-902A-
    A
    32-20/265 Nose landing gear electrical Examine - Phase 2, 4, 6
    bonding straps
    32-20/168 Nose landing gear leg and Examine, in particular the - Phase 2, 4, 6
    steering mechanism steering rod end (Part No.
    532.20.12.134) for the
    complete retention of
    bearing into the steering rod
    end housing.
    32-20/169 Nose landing gear compartment Examine - Phase 2, 4, 6
    32-30/170 Extension and retraction system Functional test of extension 12- Phase 2, 4, 6
    and retraction system and B-32-30-00-00A-903A-
    Hydraulic landing gear emergency extension A
    system
    32-30/425 Electro mechanical landing gear Examine all components and - Phase 2, 4, 6
    extension and retraction their attachments in the nose
    mechanism and main landing gear
    compartments
    32-40/174 Nosewheel tire Examine and check tire 12- Mini
    pressure B-12-10-04-00A-902A- inspection
    A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-30-00-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-06 Page 15


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No Items Task Description Reference Phase


    32-40/172 Mainwheel tires Examine and check tire 12- Mini
    pressure B-12-10-04-00A-902A- inspection
    A
    32-40/176 Fluid reservoir Check and replenish if 12- Mini
    necessary B-12-10-02-00A-902A- inspection
    A
    32-40/173 Nosewheel Examine. Rotate wheel, - Phase 2, 4, 6
    make sure bearing
    movement is smooth and
    free and no excessive play
    exists
    32-40/171 Mainwheels Examine. Rotate wheels, - Phase 2, 4, 6
    make sure bearing
    movement is smooth and
    free and no excessive play
    exists
    32-40/175 Brake system Apply the parking brake. - Mini
    Examine the brake units. inspection
    Make sure that pad wear
    indicators protrude from
    housing.
    33-40/177 Exterior lighting Operational test. 12- All Phase
    B-33-40-00-00A-903A- items
    A
    33-41/178 Landing lights Examine - All Phase
    items
    33-42/179 Taxi lights Examine - All Phase
    items
    33-43/180 Navigation and strobe lights Examine - All Phase
    items
    33-44/181 Recognition lights (if installed) Examine - All Phase
    items
    33-46/182 Beacon lights (if installed) Examine - All Phase
    items
    34-00/183 Communications and navigation Examine - Phase 3
    antennas
    34-00/184 Cockpit instruments and avionic Examine - All Phase
    equipment items
    34-11/268 Pitot and static system Drain. 12- Phase 1
    B-34-11-00-00A-901A-
    A
    34-11/185 Pitot tube Examine - Mini
    inspection
    34-11/186 Static ports Examine - Mini
    inspection
    35-10/188 Oxygen system Check contents - Mini
    inspection
    35-10/187 High pressure relief indicator Make sure that it is not - Mini
    (green disk) damaged inspection

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-30-00-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-06 Page 16


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No Items Task Description Reference Phase


    35-10/270 Oxygen system Operational test 12- Phase 5
    B-35-00-00-00A-903A-
    A
    35-10/269 Oxygen pipelines and equipment Examine - Phase 5
    46-26/321 ADAHRS sensor source select Operational test 12- Mini
    switches B-46-30-02-00A-903A- inspection
    A
    46-26/320 Pilot and Copilot (if installed) Operational test 12- Mini
    PFD Reversionary switches B-46-30-05-00A-903A- inspection
    A or 12-
    B-46-30-06-00A-903A-
    A
    52-10/271 Passenger/crew door, Examine - Phase 3
    counterbalance and cable
    support brackets
    52-10/189 Passenger/crew door seal Clean with a dry cloth, - Phase 1, 3, 5
    examine and apply P09-002
    french chalk
    52-10/190 Passenger/crew door shoot bolts Examine - Phase 1, 3, 5
    and door frame fittings
    52-10/191 Passenger/crew door handle lock Make sure movement is free - Phase 1, 3, 5
    pin
    52-10/192 Passenger/crew door hinges Examine and lubricate as - Phase 1, 3, 5
    necessary with minimum
    quantity of P10-001
    Lubricant
    52-20/272 Emergency door Examine (door removed) - Phase 3
    52-30/195 Cargo door hinges Examine and lubricate as - Phase 1, 3, 5
    necessary with minimum
    quantity of P10-001
    Lubricant
    52-30/273 Emergency door seal Clean with a wet cloth, dry - Phase 3
    and examine and apply
    P09-002 french chalk
    52-30/274 Cargo door Examine - Phase 3
    52-30/194 Cargo door shoot bolts, door Examine. Make sure the - Phase 1, 3, 5
    frame fittings and hooks hook roller bushes are free
    to rotate. For the roller bush
    wear limits refer to AMM 12-
    B-52-30-00-00A-313A-A
    52-30/193 Cargo door seal Clean with a dry cloth, - Phase 1, 3, 5
    examine and apply P09-002
    french chalk
    52-70/275 Door warning system Operational test 12- Phase 3
    B-52-70-00-00A-903A-
    A
    53-00/196 Fuselage external surface Examine. - Mini
    inspection
    For aircraft that experience
    stone damage to the belly
    skin, visually examine
    affected areas for cracks.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-30-00-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-06 Page 17


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No Items Task Description Reference Phase


    53-00/280 Rear fuselage internal structure Examine as far as possible, - Phase 6
    in particular examine battery
    mounting tray for corrosion
    53-00/277 Floor top and bottom surface and Examine as far as possible - Phase 5
    seat rails with carpet and floor panels
    in Task 06-00/8 removed
    53-00/278 Baggage/freight net mounting Examine for corrosion - Phase 5
    plates attachment bolts and
    surrounding structure
    53-00/276 Rear pressure bulkhead Examine - Phase 4
    53-00/279 Baggage compartment Examine - Phase 5
    53-00/337 Carry through frames 21 and 24 Inspection/Check 12- Phase 5
    B-53-20-02-00A-313A-
    A
    55-10/197 Horizontal stabilizer external Examine - Mini
    surface inspection
    55-10/319 Horizontal/vertical stabilizer Inspection/Check 12- Phase 6
    attachment B-55-00-00-00A-361A-
    A
    55-30/281 Vertical stabilizer electrical Examine - Phase 6
    bonding straps
    55-30/198 Vertical stabilizer external Examine, specially around 12- Mini
    surface rear spar top rivets. If cracks B-55-00-01-00A-664A- inspection
    are found refer to DM for A
    repair procedure
    56-10/200 Windshield LH and RH Examine 12- Mini
    B-56-00-00-00A-313A- inspection
    A
    56-20/201 Cockpit and cabin windows Examine 12- Mini
    B-56-00-00-00A-313A- inspection
    A
    57-00/282 Wing tip static dischargers Examine - Mini
    inspection
    57-00/202 Wing external surfaces Examine - Mini
    inspection
    57-00/283 Wing internal surfaces and flap Examine as far as possible - Phase 2
    compartment with panels in Task
    06-00/218 opened/removed
    57-00/284 Wing to fuselage attachments Examine as far as possible - Phase 2
    61-00/100 Propeller Lubricate 12- Phase 1, 3, 5
    B-12-20-05-00A-902A-
    A
    61-10/203 Propeller blades Examine. Repair blades as 12- Mini
    necessary B-61-00-00-00A-904A- inspection
    A
    61-10/285 Propeller hub Remove spinner dome and 12- Phase 1, 3, 5
    examine propeller hub. B-61-10-01-00A-920A-
    Install spinner dome. A
    61-20/286 Propeller governor, overspeed Examine - Phase 1
    governor and beta controls

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-30-00-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-06 Page 18


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No Items Task Description Reference Phase


    71-00/209 Engine drain mast and tank Examine for fuel leaks (no - Mini
    leaks permitted) and drain inspection
    (no excessive leaks)
    71-00/287 Power plant Inspection ground run - note 12- Mini
    defects. NOTE: A pre B-71-00-00-00A-903A- inspection
    inspection ground run is not A
    a pre-requisite but may be
    useful to determine any
    repair work needed to
    maintain the airworthiness of
    the aircraft
    71-00/204 Power plant Post inspection ground run 12- Mini
    tests B-71-00-00-00A-903A- inspection
    A
    71-00/205 Engine tubular mounting frame Examine. Replace - Phase 1
    and shockmounts shockmount if cracks in
    elastomer are more than 1 in
    (25,4 mm) long and/or 0.06
    in (1,5 mm) deep
    71-00/301 Engine tubular mounting frame Examine with firewall - Phase 1
    firewall attachment fittings insulation blanket removed
    as necessary. If cracked,
    blistered or flaking paint is
    found on the mounting frame
    refer to SRM
    12-B-54-20-02-00A-664A-A
    71-00/107 Engine torque and stick pusher Clean 12- Phase 3, 6
    torque transducer electrical B-71-00-03-00A-250A-
    connectors A
    71-00/206 Power plant and accessories Examine. Refer to P&WC - All Phase
    EMM 72-00-00 Periodic items
    inspection and do the 100
    hour and minor inspection
    items
    71-10/208 Engine cowlings ENG 43AL and Close - Mini
    ENG 43AR inspection
    71-10/207 Engine cowlings ENG 43AL and Open and examine, - Mini
    ENG 43AR particularly for condition of inspection
    rubbing strips and fasteners.
    Lubricate the hinges with a
    minimum of material
    P10-001C
    74-00/288 Ignition system Operational test 12- All Phase
    B-74-00-00-00A-903A- items
    A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-30-00-00A-010A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-06 Page 19


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No Items Task Description Reference Phase


    76-00/212 Cockpit control quadrant 12- Mini
    B-76-10-00-00A-903A- inspection
    CAUTION A

    Do not move PCL into the


    reverse range
    PCL - move between idle
    and max and make sure
    movement is full and free.
    Condition lever - Do the
    operational test. Manual
    override lever - move
    between off and max and
    make sure movement is full
    and free.
    76-00/303 Cockpit control quadrant Power control - Operational 12- Phase 4
    test. Manual override - B-76-10-00-00A-903A-
    operational test A, 12-
    B-76-20-00-00A-903A-
    A
    76-00/304 Cockpit control quadrant Examine - Mini
    inspection
    76-00/211 Beta slip ring carbon block Make sure gap is not more - Mini
    than 0.01in (0.25mm) inspection
    76-00/210 Engine controls in engine Examine - Phase 1, 3, 5
    compartment
    76-10/117 Propeller feathering Functional test 12- All Phase
    microswitches B-76-10-02-00A-903A- items
    A
    78-00/214 Exhaust stubs Examine - All Phase
    items
    79-00/422 Oil filler cap/dipstick Energize aircraft electrical 12- Phase 1, 3, 5
    system. Remove filler cap, B-24-00-00-00A-901A-
    examine and make sure the A
    seal is in good condition. Set
    and hold AIR/GROUND
    switch to GROUND and
    make sure after 60 seconds
    the CAS ENGINE OIL
    LEVEL warning message
    comes on. Install filler cap
    and make sure the locking
    mechanism operates
    correctly.
    79-20/289 Engine oil cooler Examine. Make sure outlet - Phase 1, 3, 5
    door has full and free
    movement
    79-20/290 Oil system chip detector Operational test 12- All Phase
    indication system B-79-30-01-00A-903A- items
    A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-30-00-00A-010A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-06 Page 20
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM

    MASTER INSPECTION CARD

    Table of Contents Page

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM - MASTER INSPECTION CARD........................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-30-01-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-17 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 The following table gives the progressive inspections needed at various flying hour intervals.

    A/C Flying Hours Type of Check Inspection Work Cards


    100 Mini inspection 1
    200 Phase 1 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 14, 15, 19, 20, 21
    300 Mini inspection 1
    400 Phase 2 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 11, 13, 22
    500 Mini inspection 1
    600 Phase 3 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 16, 17, 18, 23
    700 Mini inspection 1
    800 Phase 4 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 11, 13, 14, 15, 24
    900 Mini inspection 1
    1000 Phase 5 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 25
    1100 Mini inspection 1
    1200 Phase 6 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 11, 13, 16, 17, 18, 26, 27, 28

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-30-01-00A-281A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-17 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM

    WORK CARD 1 – MINI INSPECTION

    Table of Contents Page

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM - WORK CARD 1 – MINI INSPECTION................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 2
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 2
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2
    6 Work Card 1 - Mini Inspection................................................................................ 3

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS -
    INTRODUCTION
    12-B-05-30-05-00A-010A-A PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM - SIGN OFF
    SHEET – MINI INSPECTION
    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A ACCESS PROVISION – HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR
    - DESCRIPTION
    12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A JACKING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-11-20-00-00A-901A-A EXTERIOR PLACARDS AND MARKINGS -
    MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-11-30-00-00A-040A-A INTERIOR PLACARDS - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-12-10-02-00A-902A-A BRAKES - SERVICING
    12-B-12-10-04-00A-902A-A TIRES - SERVICING
    12-B-12-20-01-00A-902A-A AIRCRAFT EXTERIOR WASHING - SERVICING
    12-B-12-20-02-00A-902A-A AIRCRAFT WINDOWS CLEANING - SERVICING
    12-B-12-20-03-00A-902A-A AIRCRAFT INTERIOR CLEANING - SERVICING
    12-B-27-40-00-00A-903A-A HORIZONTAL STABILIZER TRIM - ADJUSTMENT/
    TEST
    12-B-27-50-00-00A-902A-A FLAPS - SERVICING
    12-B-28-20-01-00A-250A-A FUEL FILTER ELEMENT - CLEAN
    12-B-28-20-01-00A-920A-A FUEL FILTER ELEMENT - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-28-20-07-00A-903A-A FLOAT VALVE - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 1 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-17 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Data module/Technical publication Title


    12-B-29-00-00-00A-902A-A HYDRAULIC SYSTEM - SERVICING
    12-B-46-30-02-00A-903A-A PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY CONTROLLER -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-46-30-05-00A-903A-A REVERSION CONTROL PANEL (4 SWITCH) -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-46-30-06-00A-903A-A REVERSION CONTROL PANEL (3 SWITCH) -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-55-00-01-00A-664A-A VERTICAL STABILIZER SKIN CRACK - SPECIAL
    REPAIR PROCEDURES
    12-B-55-40-00-00A-664B-A RUDDER - REPAIR PROCEDURE RM 06299 –
    UPPER HINGE FITTING
    12-B-56-00-00-00A-313A-A WINDOWS - INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-61-00-00-00A-904A-A PROPELLER BLADES - REPAIR
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903A-A POWER PLANT - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-76-10-00-00A-903A-A POWER CONTROLS - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 1 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-17 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Procedure
    Table 6 Work Card 1 - Mini Inspection
    Task No Items Task Description
    The terms used for the item inspection requirements are defined in 12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A.
    00-00/121 Airworthiness Directives and Service Check
    Bulletins reviewed and complied with as
    required
    00-00/122 Chapter 4 and Chapter 5 - Overhaul and Check
    Replacement Schedule and Time Limited
    Inspection Requirements DMs reviewed
    and any additional requirements are
    complied with
    06-00/218 Access panels 11AR, 11BL, 11BR, 12AB, Open/remove and examine. Make sure the drain holes
    12AZ, 12BB, 12BL, 12BR, 12BZ, 12CL, are clear.
    12CR, 12CZ, 12DZ, 12EL, 12ER, 12EZ,
    12FZ, 12HZ, 21GZ, 21JZ, 21PZ, 21QZ, To be done as needed to complete inspection items
    31AB, 31BL, 32AB, 32BT, 33ET, 41AT, 12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A
    42AT, 42AB, 51KB, 51MB, 51NB, 52PB,
    52RB, 52TB, 52SB, 61KB, 61MB, 61NB,
    62PB, 62RB, 62SB, 62TB
    06-00/219 Access panels 11AR, 11BL, 11BR, 12AB, Close or install. Make sure the drain holes are clear.
    12AZ, 12BB, 12BL, 12BR, 12BZ, 12CL,
    12CR, 12CZ, 12DZ, 12EL, 12ER, 12EZ,
    12FZ, 12HZ, 21GZ, 21JZ, 21PZ, 21QZ,
    31AB, 31BL, 32AB, 32BT, 33ET, 41AT,
    42AT, 42AB, 51KB, 51MB, 51NB, 52PB,
    52RB, 52TB, 52SB, 61KB, 61MB, 61NB,
    62PB, 62RB, 62SB, 62TB
    07-10/160 Aircraft Lower to the ground, remove jacks and disconnect from
    ground
    To be done in Phases 2, 4 and 6
    12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A
    07-10/161 Aircraft Lift on jacks and connect the aircraft to ground
    To be done in Phases 2, 4 and 6
    12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A
    10-10/428 External protective covers Examine. Replace if any part of the cover is missing,
    damaged, torn or does not install properly.
    11-00/220 Placards and markings Examine and attach new placards if necessary 12-
    B-11-20-00-00A-901A-A and 12-B-11-30-00-00A-040A-
    A
    12-20/124 Aircraft Wash the exterior, including the landing gear and flap
    compartments 12-B-12-20-01-00A-902A-A
    12-20/125 Windshields and windows Clean 12-B-12-20-02-00A-902A-A
    12-20/126 Cockpit and cabin Clean 12-B-12-20-03-00A-902A-A
    22-20/129 Angle of Attack (AOA) transmitters Examine
    25-10/134 Crew seat belts Examine
    25-10/135 Crew seats Examine as far as possible with seats installed
    25-20/136 Passenger seat belts and extensions Examine

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 1 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-17 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No Items Task Description


    25-20/302 Passenger seats Examine as far as possible with seats installed.
    Move the recline mechanism and swivel function
    (executive seat only) through its full motion and check
    for correct operation. If necessary, refer to the applicable
    supplier CMM (CMM 25-20-07 for executive seats and
    CMM 25-20-99 for standard seats).
    27-10/139 Aileron LH and RH Examine
    27-20/140 Rudder Examine, in particular the cover plate (Part No.
    555.40.12.215) on the bottom of the rudder to make
    sure it is not bent and there are no signs of interference
    with the rudder stop.
    Move the rudder on the upper hinge in the lateral and
    fore-and-aft directions and check for play. If necessary
    repair, SRM 12-B-55-40-00-00A-664B-A.
    27-20/240 Rudder static dischargers Examine
    27-30/141 Elevators Examine
    27-30/248 Elevator static dischargers Examine
    27-40/142 Horizontal stabilizer trim Operational test of Trim Interrupt and Alternate Trim
    switches12-B-27-40-00-00A-903A-A
    27-50/74 Flap actuators (black anodised) (Part No. Lubricate12-B-27-50-00-00A-902A-A
    978.73.20.307, 308 and 309)
    27-50/143 Flaps Lower to 40°
    27-50/144 Flaps and flap support mechanism Examine
    28-10/145 Fuel tank filler caps Examine
    28-20/147 Fuel tank vent float valve and flame Operational test12-B-28-20-07-00A-903A-A
    arrestor
    28-20/148 Fuel filter element Remove and clean12-B-28-20-01-00A-920A-A and 12-
    B-28-20-01-00A-250A-A
    29-10/153 Reservoir tank Make sure nitrogen pressure is correct. Pressurize as
    necessary 12-B-29-00-00-00A-902A-A
    29-10/316 Hydraulic system Make sure fluid level indicator on the reservoir tank
    shows full. Fill as necessary.12-B-29-00-00-00A-902A-A
    30-20/156 Engine air intake de-ice lip Examine, look for signs of gas leaks - none are
    permitted
    32-40/172 Mainwheel tires Examine and check tire pressure12-
    B-12-10-04-00A-902A-A
    32-40/174 Nosewheel tire Examine and check tire pressure12-
    B-12-10-04-00A-902A-A
    32-40/175 Brake system Apply the parking brake. Examine the brake units. Make
    sure that pad wear indicators protrude from housing.
    32-40/176 Fluid reservoir Check and fill if needed.12-B-12-10-02-00A-902A-A
    34-11/185 Pitot tube Examine
    34-11/186 Static ports Examine
    35-10/187 High pressure relief indicator (green disc) Make sure that it is not damaged
    35-10/188 Oxygen system Check contents
    46-26/320 Pilot and Copilot (if installed) PFD Operational test 12-B-46-30-05-00A-903A-A or 12-
    Reversionary switches B-46-30-06-00A-903A-A
    46-26/321 ADAHRS sensor source select switches Operational test 12-B-46-30-02-00A-903A-A

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 1 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-17 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No Items Task Description


    53-00/196 Fuselage external surface Examine.
    For aircraft that experience stone damage to the belly
    skin, visually examine affected areas for cracks.
    55-10/197 Horizontal stabilizer external surface Examine
    55-30/198 Vertical stabilizer external surface Examine, especially around rear spar top rivets. If
    cracks are found refer to DMC for repair
    procedure12-B-55-00-01-00A-664A-A
    56-10/200 Windshield LH and RH Examine12-B-56-00-00-00A-313A-A
    56-20/201 Cockpit and cabin windows Examine12-B-56-00-00-00A-313A-A
    57-00/202 Wing external surfaces Examine
    57-00/282 Wing tip static dischargers Examine
    61-10/203 Propeller blades Examine and repair blades as needed12-
    B-61-00-00-00A-904A-A
    71-00/204 Power plant Post inspection ground run tests12-
    B-71-00-00-00A-903A-A
    71-00/209 Engine drain mast and tank Examine for fuel leaks (no leaks permitted) and drain
    (no excessive leaks)
    71-00/287 Power plant Inspection ground run - note defects
    A pre-inspection ground run is not a pre-requisite but
    may be useful to determine any repair work needed to
    maintain the airworthiness of the aircraft
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903A-A
    71-10/207 Engine cowlings ENG43AL and Open and examine, especially for condition of rubbing
    ENG43AR strips and fasteners. Lubricate the hinges with a
    minimum of material P10-001C
    71-10/208 Engine cowlings ENG43AL and Close
    ENG43AR
    73-20/112 Task removed
    76-00/211 Beta slip ring carbon block Make sure gap is not more than 0.01 in (0,25 mm)
    76-00/212 Cockpit control quadrant CAUTION - DO NOT MOVE PCL INTO THE REVERSE
    RANGE. PCL - move between idle and max and make
    sure movement is full and free. Condition lever - Do the
    operational test. Manual override lever - move between
    off and max and make sure movement is full and free.
    12-B-76-10-00-00A-903A-A
    76-00/304 Cockpit control quadrant Examine
    79-20/216 Task removed
    1 Mini Inspection

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 1 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-17 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 1 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-17 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM

    WORK CARD 2 – GENERAL

    Table of Contents Page

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM - WORK CARD 2 – GENERAL............................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2
    6 Work Card 2 - General........................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS -
    INTRODUCTION
    12-B-30-10-00-00A-313A-A AIRFOIL DE–ICE BOOTS - INSPECTION/CHECK

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 2 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281B-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-05-20 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    Table 6 Work Card 2 - General
    Task No. Items Task description
    The terms used for the item inspection are defined in DM 12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A.
    30-10 154 Wing and horizontal stabilizer airfoil Inspection/check12-B-30-10-00-00A-313A-A
    de-ice boots
    1 All Phase Items

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 2 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281B-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-05-20 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM

    WORK CARD 3 – ZONE 20

    Table of Contents Page

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM - WORK CARD 3 – ZONE 20................................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2
    6 Work Card 3 - Zone 20........................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS -
    INTRODUCTION
    12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A SPEED AND ATTITUDE CORRECTION -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-27-40-00-00A-903A-A HORIZONTAL STABILIZER TRIM - ADJUSTMENT/
    TEST
    12-B-33-40-00-00A-903A-A EXTERNAL LIGHTS - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-79-30-01-00A-903A-A CHIP DETECTOR - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 3 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281C-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-06-21 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    Table 6 Work Card 3 - Zone 20
    Task No. Items Task description
    The terms used for the item inspection are defined in DM 12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A.
    22-20/130 Stick pusher system Check
    Not to be done in Phases 3 and 6
    12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A
    27-00/138 Aileron, elevator and rudder controls Operate, make sure full and free travel
    27-40/291 Horizontal stabilizer trim Operational test of trim system
    Not to be done in Phases 3 and 6
    12-B-27-40-00-00A-903A-A
    33-40/177 Exterior lighting Operational test.12-B-33-40-00-00A-903A-A
    34-00/184 Cockpit instruments and avionic Examine
    equipment
    79-20/290 Oil system chip detector indication Operational test 12-B-79-30-01-00A-903A-A
    system
    1 All Phase Items

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 3 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281C-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-06-21 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM

    WORK CARD 4 – ZONE 30

    Table of Contents Page

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM - WORK CARD 4 – ZONE 30................................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2
    6 Work Card 4 - Zone 30........................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS -
    INTRODUCTION
    12-B-24-30-07-00A-920B-A NI–CAD BATTERY - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 4 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281D-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-05-20 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    Table 6 Work Card 4 - Zone 30
    Task No. Items Task description
    The terms used for the item inspection are defined in DM 12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A.
    24-30/339 NiCad batteries Remove and service12-B-24-30-07-00A-920B-A and CMM
    1 All Phase Items

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 4 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281D-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-05-20 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM

    WORK CARD 5 – ZONE 50 AND 60

    Table of Contents Page

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM - WORK CARD 5 – ZONE 50 AND 60.................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 1
    6 Work Card 5 - Zone 50 and 60............................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS -
    INTRODUCTION

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 5 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281E-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-05-20 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    Table 6 Work Card 5 - Zone 50 and 60
    Task No. Items Task description
    The terms used for the item inspection are defined in DM 12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A.
    28-10 146 Fuel Remove a sample from each drain valve and examine for
    water
    33-43 180 Navigation and strobe lights Examine
    33-44 181 Recognition lights (if installed) Examine
    1 All Phase items

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 5 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281E-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-05-20 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM

    WORK CARD 6 – ZONE 10 AND 70

    Table of Contents Page

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM - WORK CARD 6 – ZONE 10 AND 70.................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 1
    6 Work Card 6 - Zone 10 and 70............................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS -
    INTRODUCTION

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 6 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281F-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-05-20 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    Table 6 Work Card 6 - Zone 10 and 70
    Task No. Items Task description
    The terms used for the item inspection are defined in DM 12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A.
    33-41 178 Landing lights Examine
    33-42 179 Taxi lights Examine
    33-46 182 Beacon lights (if installed) Examine
    1 All Phase items

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 6 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281F-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-05-20 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM

    WORK CARD 7 – ZONE 40

    Table of Contents Page

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM - WORK CARD 7 – ZONE 40................................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2
    6 Work Card 7 - Zone 40........................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS -
    INTRODUCTION
    12-B-24-30-01-00A-313A-A STARTER/GENERATOR - INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-74-00-00-00A-903A-A IGNITION SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-76-10-02-00A-903A-A PROPELLER FEATHER MICROSWITCHES -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 7 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281G-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-01-10 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    Table 6 Work Card 7 - Zone 40
    Task No. Items Task description
    The terms used for the item inspection are defined in DM 12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A.
    24-30 309 Generator 1 Brush check12-B-24-30-01-00A-313A-A
    24-30 310 Starter/Generator 2 Brush check12-B-24-30-01-00A-313A-A
    28-20 150 Engine driven pump Examine
    71-00 206 Power plant and accessories Examine. Refer to P&WC EMM 72-00-00 Periodic
    inspection and do the 100 hour and minor inspection items
    74-00 288 Ignition system Operational test12-B-74-00-00-00A-903A-A
    74-20 116 Task removed
    76-10 117 Propeller feathering microswitches Functional test12-B-76-10-02-00A-903A-A
    78-00 214 Exhaust stubs Examine
    1 All Phase items

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 7 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281G-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-01-10 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM

    WORK CARD 8 – ZONE 10 AND 20

    Table of Contents Page

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM - WORK CARD 8 – ZONE 10 AND 20.................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2
    6 Work Card 8 - Zone 10 and 20............................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS -
    INTRODUCTION
    12-B-52-30-00-00A-313A-A CARGO DOOR - INSPECTION/CHECK

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    French chalk Part P09-002 As
    required
    Lubricant Part P10-001 As
    required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281H-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-09-12 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    Table 6 Work Card 8 - Zone 10 and 20
    Task No. Items Task description
    The terms used for the item inspection are defined in DM 12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A.
    28-20 149 Firewall shut-off valve Operate the FUEL EMERG SHUTOFF lever and make sure
    the firwall shut-off valve opens and closes fully to each dead
    stop. Make sure movement is free and check if initial pull
    out force at lever outer end is below 10 lbf (44.5 N).
    29-10 257 Power pack Examine, specially for leaks and cracks on the end plates
    and where motor is attached
    52-10 189 Passenger/crew door seal Clean with a dry cloth, examine and apply French
    chalk (Pt.No. P09-002)
    52-10 190 Passenger/crew door shoot bolts and Examine
    door frame fittings
    52-10 191 Passenger/crew door handle lock pin Make sure movement is free
    52-10 192 Passenger/crew door hinges Examine and lubricate as necessary with minimum quantity
    of Lubricant (Pt.No. P10-001)
    52-30 193 Cargo door seal Clean with a dry cloth, examine and apply French
    chalk (Pt.No. P09-002)
    52-30 194 Cargo door shoot bolts, door frame Examine and make sure the hook roller bushes are free to
    fittings and hooks rotate. For the roller bush wear limits refer to AMM 12-
    B-52-30-00-00A-313A-A
    52-30 195 Cargo door hinges Examine and lubricate as necessary with minimum quantity
    of Lubricant (Pt.No. P10-001)
    1 Phase 1, 3, 5 Items.

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281H-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-09-12 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM

    WORK CARD 9 – ZONE 10

    Table of Contents Page

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM - WORK CARD 9 – ZONE 10................................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2
    6 Work Card 9 - Zone 10........................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS -
    INTRODUCTION
    12-B-29-10-02-00A-901A-A ACCUMULATOR - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-29-10-04-00A-313A-A RETURN LINE FILTER DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE
    INDICATOR - INSPECTION/CHECK

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 9 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281J-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-22 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    Table 6 Work Card 9 - Zone 10
    Task No. Items Task description
    The terms used for the item inspection are defined in DM 12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A.
    29-10/151 Low pressure filter blockage indicator Make sure that it has not come out. If indicator found out, do
    the inspection/check procedure12-B-29-10-04-00A-313A-A
    29-10 258 Nitrogen accumulator Check nitrogen pressure and fill as necessary12-
    B-29-10-02-00A-901A-A
    29-10/259 Power pack electric motor shaft seal Remove, clean and re-install
    drain fluid collector bottle
    1 Phase 1, 3, 5 Items.

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 9 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281J-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-22 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM

    WORK CARD 10 – ZONE 40

    Table of Contents Page

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM - WORK CARD 10 – ZONE 40.............................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2
    6 Work Card 10 - Zone 40......................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS -
    INTRODUCTION
    12-B-12-20-05-00A-902A-A PROPELLER - SERVICING
    12-B-21-40-02-00A-313A-A REFRIGERATION PACK - INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-21-40-02-00A-902A-A REFRIGERATION PACK - SERVICING
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-30-20-00-00A-903A-A AIR INTAKE DE–ICE SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-30-60-00-00A-313A-A PROPELLER DE–ICE SYSTEM - INSPECTION/
    CHECK
    12-B-61-10-01-00A-920A-A PROPELLER - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 10 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281K-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-02-21 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Lubricant Part P10-001 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    Table 6 Work Card 10 - Zone 40
    Task No. Items Task description
    The terms used for the item inspection are defined in DM 12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A.
    21-20/221 ECS and bleed air ducts, pipelines, Examine
    equipment and associated clamps in
    the engine compartment
    21-40/55 Cold air unit Re-oil 12-B-21-40-02-00A-902A-A
    21-40/56 Heat exchanger matrix Inspection/check 12-B-21-40-02-00A-313A-A
    30-10/155 Inertial separation system Operational test. 12-B-30-20-00-00A-903A-A
    30-20/261 Air by-pass door and operating Examine and lubricate with minimum quantity of
    mechanism Lubricant (Pt.No. P10-001)
    30-60/158 Propeller de-ice system Inspection/check12-B-30-60-00-00A-313A-A
    61-00/100 Propeller Lubricate 12-B-12-20-05-00A-902A-A
    61-10/285 Propeller hub Remove spinner dome and examine propeller hub. Install
    spinner dome.12-B-61-10-01-00A-920A-A
    76-00/210 Engine controls in engine Examine
    compartment
    79-00/422 Oil filler cap/dipstick Energize aircraft electrical system. Remove filler cap,
    examine and make sure the seal is in good condition. Set
    and hold AIR/GROUND switch to GROUND and make sure
    after 60 seconds the CAS ENGINE OIL LEVEL warning
    message comes on. Install filler cap and make sure the
    locking mechanism operates correctly.12-
    B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A
    79-20/289 Engine oil cooler Examine. Make sure outlet door has full and free movement
    1 Phase 1, 3, 5 Items.

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 10 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281K-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-02-21 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 10 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281K-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-02-21 Page 3
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 10 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281K-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-02-21 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM

    WORK CARD 11 – ZONE 20

    Table of Contents Page

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM - WORK CARD 11 – ZONE 20.............................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2
    6 Work Card 11 - Zone 20......................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS -
    INTRODUCTION
    12-B-30-10-00-00A-903A-A AIRFOIL DE–ICE SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-30-30-20-00A-903A-A PROBES DE–ICE SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-30-40-00-00A-903A-A WINDSHIELD DE–ICE SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/
    TEST
    12-B-30-60-00-00A-903A-A PROPELLER DE–ICE SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-32-30-00-00A-903A-A EXTENSION AND RETRACTION – HYDRAULIC
    LANDING GEAR - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 11 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281L-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-05-20 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    Table 6 Work Card 11 - Zone 20
    Task No. Items Task description
    The terms used for the item inspection are defined in DM 12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A.
    30-10/260 Airfoil de-ice system Functional test12-B-30-10-00-00A-903A-A
    30-30/329 Probes de-ice system Functional test.12-B-30-30-20-00A-903A-A
    30-40/262 Windshield de-ice system Operational test12-B-30-40-00-00A-903A-A
    30-60/159 Propeller de-ice system Operational test12-B-30-60-00-00A-903A-A
    32-30/170 Extension and retraction system Functional test of extension and retraction system and
    emergency extension system12-B-32-30-00-00A-903A-A
    1 Phase 2, 4, 6 Items.

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 11 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281L-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-05-20 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM

    WORK CARD 13 – ZONE 70

    Table of Contents Page

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM - WORK CARD 13 – ZONE 70.............................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2
    6 Work Card 13 - Zone 70......................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS -
    INTRODUCTION
    12-B-12-20-04-00A-902A-A LANDING GEAR - SERVICING
    12-B-32-10-00-00A-902A-A MAIN LANDING GEAR SHOCK ABSORBER -
    SERVICING
    12-B-32-20-00-00A-902A-A NOSE LANDING GEAR SHOCK ABSORBER -
    SERVICING

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 13 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281M-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-08-27 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    Table 6 Work Card 13 - Zone 70
    Task No. Items Task description
    The terms used for the item inspection are defined in DM 12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A.
    32-10/162 Main landing gear Lubricate12-B-12-20-04-00A-902A-A
    32-10/163 Main landing gear legs Examine
    32-10/164 Main landing gear compartments Examine
    32-10/165 Main landing gear shock struts Check nitrogen pressure12-B-32-10-00-00A-902A-A
    32-10/263 Main landing gear electrical bonding Examine
    straps
    32-20/166 Nose landing gear leg shock strut Check nitrogen pressure12-B-32-20-00-00A-902A-A
    32-20/167 Nose landing gear Lubricate12-B-12-20-04-00A-902A-A
    32-20/168 Nose landing gear leg and steering Examine, in particular the steering rod end (Part No.
    mechanism 532.20.12.134) for the complete retention of bearing into the
    steering rod end housing.
    32-20/169 Nose landing gear compartment Examine
    32-20/265 Nose landing gear electrical bonding Examine
    straps
    32-30/425 Electro mechanical landing gear Examine all components and their attachments in the nose
    extension and retraction mechanism and main landing gear compartments
    32-40/171 Mainwheels Examine. Rotate wheels, make sure bearing movement is
    smooth and free and no excessive play exists
    32-40/173 Nosewheel Examine. Rotate wheel, make sure bearing movement is
    smooth and free and no excessive play exists
    1 Phase 2, 4, 6 Items.

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 13 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281M-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-08-27 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM

    WORK CARD 14 – ZONE 30

    Table of Contents Page

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM - WORK CARD 14 – ZONE 30.............................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 1
    6 Work Card 14 - Zone 30......................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS -
    INTRODUCTION

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 14 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281N-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-08-27 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    Table 6 Work Card 14 - Zone 30
    Task No. Items Task description
    The terms used for the item inspection are defined in DM 12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A.
    24-30/340 Task removed from Progressive Inspection Program
    1 Phase 1, 4 Items

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 14 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281N-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-08-27 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM

    WORK CARD 15 – ZONE 40

    Table of Contents Page

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM - WORK CARD 15 – ZONE 40.............................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2
    6 Work Card 15 - Zone 40......................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS -
    INTRODUCTION
    12-B-21-40-03-00A-250A-A WATER SEPARATOR - CLEAN

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 15 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281P-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-05-20 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    Table 6 Work Card 15 - Zone 40
    Task No. Items Task description
    The terms used for the item inspection are defined in DM 12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A.
    21-40 50 Water separator condensor Clean12-B-21-40-03-00A-250A-A
    1 Phase 1, 4 Items

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 15 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281P-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-05-20 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM

    WORK CARD 16 – ZONE 20

    Table of Contents Page

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM - WORK CARD 16 – ZONE 20.............................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2
    6 Work Card 16 - Zone 20......................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS -
    INTRODUCTION
    12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A SPEED AND ATTITUDE CORRECTION -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-27-40-00-00A-903A-A HORIZONTAL STABILIZER TRIM - ADJUSTMENT/
    TEST

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 16 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281Q-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-05-20 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    Table 6 Work Card 16 - Zone 20
    Task No. Items Task description
    The terms used for the item inspection are defined in DM 12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A.
    22-20/226 Stick pusher system Functional test 12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A
    27-40/292 Horizontal stabilizer trim Functional test of trim system 12-B-27-40-00-00A-903A-A
    1 Phase 3, 6 Items

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 16 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281Q-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-05-20 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM

    WORK CARD 17 – ZONE 30

    Table of Contents Page

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM - WORK CARD 17 – ZONE 30.............................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 1
    6 Work Card 17 - Zone 30......................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS -
    INTRODUCTION

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 17 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281R-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-05-20 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    Table 6 Work Card 17 - Zone 30
    Task No. Items Task description
    The terms used for the item inspection are defined in DM 12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A.
    21-50/223 Vapor cycle cooling system (if Examine the cooling unit
    installed)
    1 Phase 3, 6 Items

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 17 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281R-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-05-20 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM

    WORK CARD 18 – ZONE 40

    Table of Contents Page

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM - WORK CARD 18 – ZONE 40.............................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2
    6 Work Card 18 - Zone 40......................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS -
    INTRODUCTION
    12-B-71-00-03-00A-250A-A ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS - CLEAN

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 18 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281S-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-01-10 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    Table 6 Work Card 18 - Zone 40
    Task No. Items Task description
    The terms used for the item inspection are defined in DM 12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A.
    71-00/107 Engine torque and stick pusher torque Clean 12-B-71-00-03-00A-250A-A
    transducer electrical connectors
    73-20/41 Task removed
    73-20/113 Task removed
    73-20/114 Task removed
    79-30/328 Task removed
    1 Phase 3, 6 Items

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 18 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281S-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-01-10 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM

    WORK CARD 19 – ZONE 30

    Table of Contents Page

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM - WORK CARD 19 – ZONE 30.............................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2
    6 Work Card 19 - Zone 30......................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS -
    INTRODUCTION
    12-B-34-11-00-00A-901A-A PITOT STATIC SYSTEM - MAINTENANCE
    PRACTICES

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 19 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281T-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-05-20 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    Table 6 Work Card 19 - Zone 30
    Task No. Items Task description
    The terms used for the item inspection are defined in DM 12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A.
    34-11/268 Pitot and static system Drain. 12-B-34-11-00-00A-901A-A
    1 Phase 1 Items

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 19 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281T-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-05-20 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM

    WORK CARD 20 – ZONE 50 AND 60

    Table of Contents Page

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM - WORK CARD 20 – ZONE 50 AND 60................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2
    6 Work Card 20 - Zone 50 and 60............................................................................. 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS -
    INTRODUCTION
    12-B-27-50-00-00A-903A-A FLAPS - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 20 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281U-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-05-20 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    Table 6 Work Card 20 - Zone 50 and 60
    Task No. Items Task description
    The terms used for the item inspection are defined in DM 12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A.
    27-50/255 Flaps Functional test and asymmetry monitor test.12-
    B-27-50-00-00A-903A-A
    1 Phase 1 Items

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 20 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281U-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-05-20 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM

    WORK CARD 21 – ZONE 40

    Table of Contents Page

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM - WORK CARD 21 – ZONE 40.............................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2
    6 Work Card 21 - Zone 40......................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS -
    INTRODUCTION
    12-B-54-20-02-00A-664A-A ENGINE FRAME DAMAGED PAINT AND
    CORROSION - SPECIAL REPAIR PROCEDURES

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 21 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281V-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-07-18 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    Table 6 Work Card 21 - Zone 40
    Task No. Items Task description
    The terms used for the item inspection are defined in DM 12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A.
    61-20/286 Propeller governor, overspeed Examine
    governor and beta controls
    71-00/205 Engine tubular mounting frame and Examine. Replace shockmount if cracks in elastomer are
    shockmounts more than 1 in (25,4 mm) long and/or 0.06 in (1,5 mm) deep
    71-00/301 Engine tubular mounting frame Examine with firewall insulation blanket removed as
    firewall attachment fittings necessary. If cracked, blistered or flaking paint is found on
    the mounting frame refer to SRM
    12-B-54-20-02-00A-664A-A
    1 Phase 1 Items

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 21 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281V-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-07-18 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM

    WORK CARD 22 – ZONE 50 AND 60

    Table of Contents Page

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM - WORK CARD 22 – ZONE 50 AND 60................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2
    6 Work Card 22 - Zone 50 and 60............................................................................. 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS -
    INTRODUCTION
    12-B-27-15-00-00A-903A-A AILERON TRIM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    PTFE Teflon spray Part OKS 571 Or
    equivalen
    t

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 22 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281W-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-08 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    Table 6 Work Card 22 - Zone 50 and 60
    Task No. Items Task description
    The terms used for the item inspection are defined in DM 12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A.
    27-10/234 Aileron LH and RH rods and levers Examine
    Spray PTFE Teflon Spray OKS 571 (or equivalent) around
    the aileron pushrod guide roller sleeves at all three locations
    in each wing
    27-10/235 Aileron electrical bonding straps Examine
    27-15/239 Aileron trim Functional test12-B-27-15-00-00A-903A-A
    27-50/253 Flaps electrical bonding straps Examine
    27-50/254 Flap motor, actuators and flexible Examine
    drive shafts
    28-20/256 Fuel system components Examine as far as possible with panels in Task 06-00/218
    opened/removed
    57-00/283 Wing internal surfaces and flap Examine as far as possible with panels in Task 06-00/218
    compartment opened/removed
    57-00/284 Wing to fuselage attachments Examine as far as possible
    1 Phase 2 Items

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 22 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281W-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-08 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM

    WORK CARD 23 – ZONE 10 AND 20

    Table of Contents Page

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM - WORK CARD 23 – ZONE 10 AND 20................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2
    6 Work Card 23 - Zone 10 and 20............................................................................. 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS -
    INTRODUCTION
    12-B-52-70-00-00A-903A-A DOOR WARNING - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    French chalk Part P09-002 As
    required

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 23 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281X-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-07-18 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    Table 6 Work Card 23 - Zone 10 and 20
    Task No. Items Task description
    The terms used for the item inspection are defined in DM 12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A.
    34-00/183 Communications and navigation Examine
    antennas
    52-10/271 Passenger/crew door, counterbalance Examine
    and cable support brackets
    52-20/272 Emergency door Examine (door removed)
    52-30/273 Emergency door seal Clean with a wet cloth, dry and examine and apply French
    chalk (Pt.No. P09-002)
    52-30/274 Cargo door Examine
    52-70/275 Door warning system Operational test12-B-52-70-00-00A-903A-A
    1 Phase 3 Items

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 23 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281X-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-07-18 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM

    WORK CARD 24 – ZONE 20

    Table of Contents Page

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM - WORK CARD 24 – ZONE 20.............................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2
    6 Work Card 24 - Zone 20......................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS -
    INTRODUCTION
    12-B-23-12-00-00A-903A-A VHF COMMUNICATION - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-23-50-00-00A-903A-A AUDIO INTEGRATING SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/
    TEST
    12-B-24-52-51-00A-920A-A EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY (EPS) SYSTEM -
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903D-A POWER PLANT TEST 3 – DC GENERATION SYSTEM
    - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-76-10-00-00A-903A-A POWER CONTROLS - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-76-20-00-00A-903A-A MANUAL OVERRIDE - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 24 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281Y-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-05-20 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    Table 6 Work Card 24 - Zone 20
    Task No. Items Task description
    The terms used for the item inspection are defined in DM 12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A.
    23-10/322 Audio Control Panel Emergency Operational test 12-B-23-50-00-00A-903A-A
    Switch
    23-10/233 Emergency Frequency Comm Tuning Operational test 12-B-23-12-00-00A-903A-A
    Switch
    24-30/313 DC electrical system Functional test 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903D-A
    24-50/70 Emergency power supply (if installed) Remove and Cap test12-B-24-52-51-00A-920A-A
    24-60/133 Cockpit circuit breaker panels and Examine
    switch panels
    26-20/24 Fire extinguisher Content check
    53-00/276 Rear pressure bulkhead Examine
    76-00/303 Cockpit control quadrant Operational test. Manual override - operational test 12-
    B-76-10-00-00A-903A-A, 12-B-76-20-00-00A-903A-A
    1 Phase 4 Items

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 24 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281Y-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-05-20 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM

    WORK CARD 25 – ZONE 10 AND 20

    Table of Contents Page

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM - WORK CARD 25 – ZONE 10 AND 20................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 2
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2
    6 Work Card 25 - Zone 10 and 20............................................................................. 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS -
    INTRODUCTION
    12-B-21-40-01-00A-903A-A SECONDARY HEATING - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-21-43-00-00A-903A-A FOOTWARMER - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-24-30-00-00A-903A-A DC GENERATION - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A FLIGHT COMPARTMENT CREW SEATS - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE SEATS - REMOVAL INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A STANDARD SEATS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-27-30-00-00A-903A-A ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/
    TEST
    12-B-35-00-00-00A-903A-A OXYGEN SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-53-20-02-00A-313A-A CENTER FUSELAGE – CARRY THROUGH FRAMES -
    INSPECTION/CHECK

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 25 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281Z-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-06-20 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    Table 6 Work Card 25 - Zone 10 and 20
    Task No. Items Task description
    The terms used for the item inspection are defined in DM 12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A.
    21-40/128 Flight compartment foot heater (if Operational test
    installed) thermal protection switch
    AMM 12-B-21-43-00-00A-903A-A
    21-40/330 Cabin auxiliary heater thermal Operational test
    protection switch
    AMM 12-B-21-40-01-00A-903A-A
    21-40/331 Underfloor heater thermal protection Functional test
    switch
    AMM 12-B-21-40-01-00A-903A-A
    24-30/312 External power controller Over/under voltage trip protection operational test.
    12-B-24-30-00-00A-903A-A
    25-10/296 Crew seats Remove12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A
    25-10/297 Crew seats Install12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A
    25-10/300 Crew seats Remove cushions, covers and shells (Ref. CMM) and
    examine seat. Install cushions, covers and shells.
    The CMM Document No’s. are given in DM
    12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A
    25-20/137 Passenger seats Examine
    25-20/298 Passenger seats Remove12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A or 12-
    B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A
    25-20/299 Passenger seats Install12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A or 12-
    B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 25 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281Z-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-06-20 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No. Items Task description


    27-10/236 Aileron controls Examine the control cables and pulleys as far as possible.
    Move the mechanism so that you can see all parts of the
    cables and make sure the safety clips are fully engaged in
    the turnbuckles
    27-10/237 Aileron cable tension Check12-B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A
    27-10/238 Ailerons Functional test12-B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A
    27-20/241 Rudder controls Examine the control cables and pulleys as far as possible.
    Move the mechanism so that you can see all parts of the
    cables and make sure the safety clips are fully engaged in
    the turnbuckles
    27-20/243 Rudder cable tension Check12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A
    27-30/249 Elevator controls Examine the control cables and pulleys as far as possible.
    Move the mechanism so that you can see all parts of the
    cables and make sure the safety clips are fully engaged in
    the turnbuckles
    27-30/250 Elevator cable tension Check12-B-27-30-00-00A-903A-A
    35-10/269 Oxygen pipelines and equipment Examine
    35-10/270 Oxygen system Operational test12-B-35-00-00-00A-903A-A
    53-00/277 Floor top and bottom surface and seat Examine as far as possible with carpet and floor panels in
    rails Task 06-00/8 removed
    53-00/278 Baggage/freight net mounting plates Examine for corrosion
    attachment bolts and surrounding
    structure
    53-00/279 Baggage compartment Examine
    53-00/337 Carry through frames 21 and 24 Inspection/Check 12-B-53-20-02-00A-313A-A
    1 Phase 5 Items

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 25 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281Z-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-06-20 Page 3
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 25 12-B-05-30-02-00A-281Z-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-06-20 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM

    WORK CARD 26 – ZONE 30

    Table of Contents Page

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM - WORK CARD 26 – ZONE 30.............................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2
    6 Work Card 26 - Zone 30......................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS -
    INTRODUCTION
    12-B-22-10-00-00A-313A-A AUTOPILOT - INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-25-63-00-00A-903A-A EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-27-25-00-00A-903A-A RUDDER TRIM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-27-30-00-00A-903A-A ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/
    TEST
    12-B-31-30-01-00A-903A-A RECORDERS – CVFDR - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-55-00-00-00A-361A-A STABILIZERS ATTACHMENT FITTINGS -
    ALLOWABLE WEAR

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 26 12-B-05-30-03-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-12-03 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    Table 6 Work Card 26 - Zone 30
    Task No. Items Task description
    The terms used for the item inspection are defined in DM 12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A.
    22-10/60 Servo mount (pitch, roll and yaw) Remove for clutch check 12-B-22-10-00-00A-313A-A
    22-10/233 Pitch, roll, and yaw actuators and Examine
    capstan control cables
    24-40/229 External Power Unit (EPU) receptacle Examine
    25-60/231 ELT Operational test 12-B-25-63-00-00A-903A-A
    25-60/232 ELT installation Examine
    27-20/244 Rudder Functional test12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A
    27-20/245 Rudder trim Functional test12-B-27-25-00-00A-903A-A
    27-20/246 Rudder electrical bonding straps Examine
    27-30/247 Elevator electrical bonding straps Examine
    27-30/251 Elevator Functional test12-B-27-30-00-00A-903A-A
    27-40/252 Horizontal stabilizer trim actuator top Examine
    and bottom attachments
    31-30/421 CVFDR (if installed) Operational test
    12-B-31-30-01-00A-903A-A
    53-00/280 Rear fuselage internal structure Examine as far as possible, in particular examine battery
    mounting tray for corrosion
    55-10/319 Horizontal/vertical stabilizer Inspection/Check12-B-55-00-00-00A-361A-A
    attachment
    55-30/281 Vertical stabilizer electrical bonding Examine
    straps
    1 Phase 6 Items

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 26 12-B-05-30-03-00A-281A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-12-03 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM

    WORK CARD 28 – ZONE 40

    Table of Contents Page

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM - WORK CARD 28 – ZONE 40.............................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 1
    6 Work Card 28 - Zone 40......................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS -
    INTRODUCTION

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 28 12-B-05-30-03-00A-281B-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-01-10 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    Table 6 Work Card 28 - Zone 40
    Task No. Items Task description
    The terms used for the item inspection are defined in DM 12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A.
    73-20/40 Task removed
    1 Phase 6 Items

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 28 12-B-05-30-03-00A-281B-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-01-10 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM

    WORK CARD 27 – ZONE 70

    Table of Contents Page

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM - WORK CARD 27 – ZONE 70.............................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2
    6 Work Card 27 - Zone 70......................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS -
    INTRODUCTION
    12-B-32-10-03-00A-920A-A SHOCK ABSORBER – HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR -
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-32-10-03-00A-920B-A SHOCK ABSORBER – ELECTRO MECHANICAL
    LANDING GEAR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-30-03-00A-281C-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-17 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    Table 6 Work Card 27 - Zone 70
    Task No. Items Task description
    The terms used for the item inspection are defined in AMM 12-B-05-20-00-00A-018A-A.
    32–10/436 Main landing gear shock struts top Remove, clean and examine for corrosion. If corroded
    and bottom attachment bolts replace bolt with latest bolt part number. If not corroded,
    apply grease P04–028 and install the bolt.
    AMM 12-B-32-10-03-00A-920A-A or 12-
    B-32-10-03-00A-920B-A
    1 Phase 6 Items

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-30-03-00A-281C-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-17 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM

    ENGINE GROUND RUN TEST CARD

    Table of Contents Page

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM - ENGINE GROUND RUN TEST CARD............... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903A-A POWER PLANT - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-30-04-00A-281A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-05-20 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Refer to 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903A-A for test details.
    Test 5 Bleed vlave closing point is done after engine installation or after working on the compressor bleed
    valve.

    Test No Type of test Test completion


    Mini Ph 1 Ph 2 Ph 3 Ph 4 Ph 5 Ph 6
    1 Engine oil pressure X X X X X X X
    2 Propeller blade feather - X - - - - -
    3 DC generation system - - - - - - X
    4 Maximum propeller speed - - X - - - -
    6 Torque limiter - - - X - - -
    7 Engine performance - - X - - - -
    8 Torquemeter function - - X - - - -
    9 Acceleration - - - X - - -
    10 Overspeed governor - - - X - - -
    11 Nf governor - - - - X - -
    12 FCU dead band - - - - X - -
    13 Propeller low pitch warning - X - - - - -
    14 Ground idle speed - - - - - X -
    15 Flight idle speed - - - - - X -
    16 Manual override - - - - - x -
    17 Reverse power - - - - - - X
    18 ECS - X X - X - X
    19 Engine stop time X X X X X X X
    20 After engine stop X X X X X X X

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-30-04-00A-281A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-05-20 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM

    SIGN OFF SHEET – MINI INSPECTION

    Table of Contents Page

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM - SIGN OFF SHEET – MINI INSPECTION........... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description
    A/C Reg MSN A/C Hours A/C Landings

    Work Card 1
    Task No Initial
    00-00/121
    00-00/122
    06-00/218
    06-00/219
    07-10/160
    07-10/161
    10-10/428
    11-00/220
    12-20/124
    12-20/125
    12-20/126
    22-20/129
    25-10/134
    25-10/135
    25-20/136
    25-20/302
    27-10/139
    27-20/140
    27-20/240
    27-30/141
    27-30/248
    27-40/142
    27-50/74
    27-50/143

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 1 SIGN OFF


    12-B-05-30-05-00A-010A-A
    SHEET

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-12-18 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Work Card 1
    Task No Initial
    27-50/144
    28-10/145
    28-20/147
    28-20/148
    29-10/153
    29-10/316
    30-20/156
    32-40/172
    32-40/174
    32-40/175
    32-40/176
    34-11/185
    34-11/186
    35-10/187
    35-10/188
    46-26/320
    46-26/321
    53-00/196
    55-10/197
    55-30/198
    56-10/200
    56-20/201
    57-00/202
    57-00/282
    61-10/203
    71-00/204
    71-00/209
    71-00/287
    71-10/207
    71-10/208
    Task removed
    76-00/211
    76-00/212
    76-00/304
    Task removed

    Mini Inspection Sign Off Date

    Effectivity: WORK CARD 1 SIGN OFF


    12-B-05-30-05-00A-010A-A
    SHEET
    End of data module
    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-12-18 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM

    SIGN OFF SHEET – PHASE 1

    Table of Contents Page

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM - SIGN OFF SHEET – PHASE 1........................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description
    A/C Reg MSN A/C Hours A/C Landings

    Note

    For Work Card 1 see Mini Inspection Sign-Off Sheet

    Task No Initial
    Work Card 2
    30-10/154
    Work Card 3
    22-20/130
    27-00/138
    27-40/291
    33-40/177
    34-00/184
    79-20/290
    Work Card 4
    24-30/339
    Work Card 5
    28-10/146
    33-43/180
    33-43/181
    Work Card 6
    33-41/178
    33-42/179
    33-46/182
    Work Card 7

    Effectivity: PHASE 1 SIGN OFF


    12-B-05-30-05-00A-010B-A
    SHEET

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-08-27 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No Initial
    24-30/309
    24-30/310
    28-20/150
    71-00/206
    74-00/288
    Task removed
    76-10/117
    78-00/214
    Work Card 8
    28-20/149
    29-10/257
    52-10/189
    52-10/190
    52-10/191
    52-10/192
    52-20/193
    52-30/194
    52-30/195
    Work Card 9
    29-10/151
    29-10/258
    29-10/259
    Work Card 10
    21-20/221
    21-40/55
    21-40/56
    30-10/155
    30-20/261
    30-60/158
    61-00/100
    61-10/285
    76-00/210
    79-00/422
    79-20/289
    Work Card 14
    Task removed
    Work Card 15
    21-40/50
    Work Card 19
    34-11/268
    Work Card 20
    27-50/255
    Work Card 21
    61-20/286
    71-00/205
    71-00/301

    Phase 1 Inspection Sign Off Date

    Effectivity: PHASE 1 SIGN OFF


    12-B-05-30-05-00A-010B-A
    SHEET
    End of data module
    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-08-27 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM

    SIGN OFF SHEET – PHASE 2

    Table of Contents Page

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM - SIGN OFF SHEET – PHASE 2........................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description
    A/C Reg MSN A/C Hours A/C Landings

    Note

    For Work Card 1 see Mini Inspection Sign-Off Sheet

    Task No Initial
    Work Card 2
    30-10/154
    Work Card 3
    22-20/130
    27-00/138
    27-40/291
    33-40/177
    34-00/184
    79-20/290
    Work Card 4
    24-30/339
    Work Card 5
    28-10/146
    33-43/180
    33-43/181
    Work Card 6
    33-41/178
    33-42/179
    33-46/182
    Work Card 7

    Effectivity: PHASE 2 SIGN OFF


    12-B-05-30-05-00A-010C-A
    SHEET

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-08-27 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No Initial
    24-30/309
    24-30/310
    28-20/150
    71-00/206
    74-00/288
    Task removed
    76-10/117
    78-00/214
    Work Card 11
    30-10/260
    30-30/329
    30-40/262
    30-60/159
    32-30/170
    Work Card 13
    32-10/162
    32-10/163
    32-10/164
    32-10/165
    32-10/263
    32-20/166
    32-20/167
    32-20/168
    32-20/169
    32-20/265
    32-30/425
    32-40/171
    32-40/173
    Work Card 22
    27-10/234
    27-10/235
    27-15/239
    27-50/253
    27-50/254
    28-20/256
    57-00/283
    57-00/284

    Phase 2 Inspection Sign Off Date

    Effectivity: PHASE 2 SIGN OFF


    12-B-05-30-05-00A-010C-A
    SHEET
    End of data module
    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-08-27 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM

    SIGN OFF SHEET – PHASE 3

    Table of Contents Page

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM - SIGN OFF SHEET – PHASE 3........................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description
    A/C Reg MSN A/C Hours A/C Landings

    Note

    For Work Card 1 see Mini Inspection Sign-Off Sheet

    Task No Initial
    Work Card 2
    30-10/154
    Work Card 3
    22-20/130
    27-00/138
    27-40/291
    33-40/177
    34-00/184
    79-20/290
    Work Card 4
    24-30/339
    Work Card 5
    28-10/146
    33-43/180
    33-43/181
    Work Card 6
    33-41/178
    33-42/179
    33-46/182
    Work Card 7

    Effectivity: PHASE 3 SIGN OFF


    12-B-05-30-05-00A-010D-A
    SHEET

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-07-18 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No Initial
    24-30/309
    24-30/310
    28-20/150
    71-00/206
    74-00/288
    Task removed
    76-10/117
    78-00/214
    Work Card 8
    28-20/149
    29-10/257
    52-10/189
    52-10/190
    52-10/191
    52-10/192
    52-20/193
    52-30/194
    52-30/195
    Work Card 9
    29-10/151
    29-10/258
    29-10/259
    Work Card 10
    21-20/221
    21-40/55
    21-40/56
    30-10/155
    30-20/261
    30-60/158
    61-00/100
    61-10/285
    76-00/210
    79-00/422
    79-20/289
    Work Card 16
    22-20/226
    27-40/292
    Work Card 17
    21-50/223
    Work Card 18
    71-00/107
    Task removed
    Task removed
    Task removed
    Task removed

    Work Card 23
    34-00/183
    52-10/271

    Effectivity: PHASE 3 SIGN OFF


    12-B-05-30-05-00A-010D-A
    SHEET

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-07-18 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No Initial
    52-20/272
    52-30/273
    52-30/274
    52-70/275

    Phase 3 Inspection Sign Off Date

    Effectivity: PHASE 3 SIGN OFF


    12-B-05-30-05-00A-010D-A
    SHEET
    End of data module
    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-07-18 Page 3
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: PHASE 3 SIGN OFF


    12-B-05-30-05-00A-010D-A
    SHEET

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-07-18 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM

    SIGN OFF SHEET– PHASE 4

    Table of Contents Page

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM - SIGN OFF SHEET– PHASE 4............................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description
    A/C Reg MSN A/C Hours A/C Landings

    Note

    For Work Card 1 see Mini Inspection Sign-Off Sheet

    Task No Initial
    Work Card 2
    30-10/154
    Work Card 3
    22-20/130
    27-00/138
    27-40/291
    33-40/177
    34-00/184
    79-20/290
    Work Card 4
    24-30/339
    Work Card 5
    28-10/146
    33-43/180
    33-43/181
    Work Card 6
    33-41/178
    33-42/179
    33-46/182
    Work Card 7

    Effectivity: PHASE 4 SIGN OFF


    12-B-05-30-05-00A-010E-A
    SHEET

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-08-27 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No Initial
    24-30/309
    24-30/310
    28-20/150
    71-00/206
    74-00/288
    Task removed
    76-10/117
    78-00/214
    Work Card 11
    30-10/260
    30-30/329
    30-40/262
    30-60/159
    32-30/170
    Work Card 13
    32-10/162
    32-10/163
    32-10/164
    32-10/165
    32-10/263
    32-20/166
    32-20/167
    32-20/168
    32-20/169
    32-20/265
    32-30/425
    32-40/171
    32-40/173
    Work Card 14
    Task removed
    Work Card 15
    21-40/50
    Work Card 24
    23-10/322
    23-10/323
    24-30/313
    24-50/70
    24-60/133
    26-20/24
    53-00/276
    76-00/303

    Phase 4 Inspection Sign Off Date

    Effectivity: PHASE 4 SIGN OFF


    12-B-05-30-05-00A-010E-A
    SHEET
    End of data module
    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-08-27 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM

    SIGN OFF SHEET – PHASE 5

    Table of Contents Page

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM - SIGN OFF SHEET – PHASE 5........................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description
    A/C Reg MSN A/C Hours A/C Landings

    Note

    For Work Card 1 see Mini Inspection Sign-Off Sheet

    Task No Initial
    Work Card 2
    30-10/154
    Work Card 3
    22-20/130
    27-00/138
    27-40/291
    33-40/177
    34-00/184
    79-20/290
    Work Card 4
    24-30/339
    Work Card 5
    28-10/146
    33-43/180
    33-43/181
    Work Card 6
    33-41/178
    33-42/179
    33-46/182
    Work Card 7

    Effectivity: PHASE 5 SIGN OFF


    12-B-05-30-05-00A-010F-A
    SHEET

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-08-27 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No Initial
    24-30/309
    24-30/310
    28-20/150
    71-00/206
    74-00/288
    Task removed
    76-10/117
    78-00/214
    Work Card 8
    28-20/149
    29-10/257
    52-10/189
    52-10/190
    52-10/191
    52-10/192
    52-20/193
    52-30/194
    52-30/195
    Work Card 9
    29-10/151
    29-10/258
    29-10/259
    Work Card 10
    21-20/221
    21-40/55
    21-40/56
    30-10/155
    30-20/261
    30-60/158
    61-00/100
    61-10/285
    76-00/210
    79-00/422
    79-20/289
    Work Card 25
    21-40/128
    21-40/330
    21-40/331
    24-30/312
    25-10/296
    25-10/297
    25-10/300
    25-20/137
    25-20/298
    25-20/299
    27-10/236
    27-10/237
    27-10/238
    27-20/241

    Effectivity: PHASE 5 SIGN OFF


    12-B-05-30-05-00A-010F-A
    SHEET

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-08-27 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No Initial
    27-20/243
    27-30/249
    27-30/250
    35-10/269
    35-10/270
    53-00/277
    53-00/278
    53-00/279
    53-00/337

    Phase 5 Inspection Sign Off Date

    Effectivity: PHASE 5 SIGN OFF


    12-B-05-30-05-00A-010F-A
    SHEET
    End of data module
    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-08-27 Page 3
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: PHASE 5 SIGN OFF


    12-B-05-30-05-00A-010F-A
    SHEET

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-08-27 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM

    SIGN OFF SHEET – PHASE 6

    Table of Contents Page

    PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION PROGRAM - SIGN OFF SHEET – PHASE 6........................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description
    A/C Reg MSN A/C Hours A/C Landings

    Note

    For Work Card 1 see Mini Inspection Sign-Off Sheet

    Task No Initial
    Work Card 2
    30-10/154
    Work Card 3
    22-20/130
    27-00/138
    27-40/291
    33-40/177
    34-00/184
    79-20/290
    Work Card 4
    24-30/339
    Work Card 5
    28-10/146
    33-43/180
    33-43/181
    Work Card 6
    33-41/178
    33-42/179
    33-46/182
    Work Card 7

    Effectivity: PHASE 6 SIGN OFF


    12-B-05-30-05-00A-010G-A
    SHEET

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-17 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No Initial
    24-30/309
    24-30/310
    28-20/150
    71-00/206
    74-00/288
    76-10/117
    78-00/214
    Work Card 11
    30-10/260
    30-30/329
    30-40/262
    30-60/159
    32-30/170
    Work Card 13
    32-10/162
    32-10/163
    32-10/164
    32-10/165
    32-10/263
    32-20/166
    32-20/167
    32-20/168
    32-20/169
    32-20/265
    32-30/425
    32-40/171
    32-40/173
    Work Card 16
    22-20/226
    27-40/292
    Work Card 17
    21-50/223
    Work Card 18
    71-00/107
    Work Card 26
    22-10/60
    22-10/233
    24-40/229
    25-60/231
    25-60/232
    27-20/244
    27-20/245
    27-20/246
    27-30/247
    27-30/251
    27-40/252
    31-30/421
    53-00/280
    55-10/319

    Effectivity: PHASE 6 SIGN OFF


    12-B-05-30-05-00A-010G-A
    SHEET

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-17 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Task No Initial
    55-30/281
    Work Card 27
    32–10/436

    Phase 6 Inspection Sign Off Date

    Effectivity: PHASE 6 SIGN OFF


    12-B-05-30-05-00A-010G-A
    SHEET
    End of data module
    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-17 Page 3
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: PHASE 6 SIGN OFF


    12-B-05-30-05-00A-010G-A
    SHEET

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-17 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    UNSCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS

    INTRODUCTION

    Table of Contents Page

    UNSCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS - INTRODUCTION............................................... 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 2
    2 Unscheduled Checks - Airframe............................................................................. 2
    3 Refinement Charts.................................................................................................. 3
    3.1 Positive Load Factor............................................................................................... 4
    3.2 Negative Load Factor............................................................................................. 4
    4 Unscheduled Checks - Engine............................................................................... 7

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Airframe Exceedances........................................................................................... 2
    3 Engine Exceedances.............................................................................................. 7

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Refinement Chart – Positive Load Factor............................................................... 5


    2 Refinement Chart – Negative Load Factor............................................................. 6

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-05-50-01-00A-282A-A HARD LANDING - UNSCHEDULED INSPECTIONS
    12-B-05-50-02-00A-282A-A FLIGHT IN SEVERE TURBULENCE OR SEVERE
    MANEUVRES - UNSCHEDULED INSPECTIONS
    12-B-05-50-03-00A-282A-A OVERSPEED WITH FLAPS EXTENDED -
    UNSCHEDULED INSPECTIONS
    12-B-05-50-04-00A-282A-A PROPELLER SUDDEN STOPAGE OR IMPACT -
    UNSCHEDULED INSPECTIONS
    12-B-05-50-05-00A-282A-A LIGHTNING STRIKE - UNSCHEDULED INSPECTIONS
    12-B-05-50-06-00A-282A-A ALIGNMENT AND SYMMETRY - UNSCHEDULED
    INSPECTIONS
    12-B-05-50-07-00A-282A-A FUSELAGE CARRY THROUGH FRAMES -
    GEOMETRY INSPECTION
    12-B-05-50-08-00A-282A-A MAXIMUM OPERATING SPEED (VMO/MMO)
    EXCEEDANCE - UNSCHEDULED INSPECTION
    12-B-05-50-09-00A-282A-A MAXIMUM LANDING GEAR OPERATING SPEED
    (VLO) EXCEEDANCE - UNSCHEDULED INSPECTION

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-00-00A-018A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Data module/Technical publication Title


    12-B-05-50-10-00A-282A-A MAXIMUM LANDING GEAR EXTENDED SPEED (VLE)
    EXCEEDANCE - UNSCHEDULED INSPECTION
    12-B-05-50-11-00A-282A-A TAIL–DOWN DAMAGE INSPECTION -
    UNSCHEDULED INSPECTION
    12-B-05-50-15-00A-282A-A AFTER A FLIGHT THROUGH VOLCANIC ASH OR
    SMOKE - UNSCHEDULED INSPECTION
    12-B-45-45-00-00A-551A-A CENTRAL MAINTENANCE SYSTEM INTERFACE -
    FAULT MONITORING STORAGE READOUT
    (DOWNLOAD DATA)

    Description

    1 General
    Unscheduled maintenance checks are necessary if unusual incidents occur.
    These checks must be done before the next flight following the incident.

    2 Unscheduled Checks - Airframe


    Unscheduled checks must be done after the following incidents occur or permitted deviations are exceeded. Refer
    to Table 2 for the airframe exceedance checks that are needed:

    Check Reference
    Hard landing 12-B-05-50-01-00A-282A-A
    Flight in severe turbulence or after severe maneuvers 12-B-05-50-02-00A-282A-A
    Overspeed with flaps down 12-B-05-50-03-00A-282A-A
    Propeller sudden stoppage 12-B-05-50-04-00A-282A-A
    Lightning strike 12-B-05-50-05-00A-282A-A
    Alignment and Symmetry 12-B-05-50-06-00A-282A-A
    Fuselage carry thru frames 12-B-05-50-07-00A-282A-A
    Maximum operating speed exceedance 12-B-05-50-08-00A-282A-A
    Maximum landing gear operating speed exceedance 12-B-05-50-09-00A-282A-A
    Maximum landing gear extended speed exceedance 12-B-05-50-10-00A-282A-A
    Tail down damage inspection 12-B-05-50-11-00A-282A-A
    Flight thru volcanic ash or smoke 12-B-05-50-15-00A-282A-A

    Table 2 Airframe Exceedances


    Limitation Abbreviation Unit Trigger Exceedan Maintenance Action
    ce range
    Max operating Vmo knots 240 ≤245 None
    speed ≤252 12-B-05-50-08-00A-282A-A
    >252 Contact Pilatus¹
    OVERSP Max flap Vfe ≤15° knots 165 ≤170 None
    EED extended speed ≤180 12-B-05-50-03-00A-282A-A
    >180 Contact Pilatus¹
    Max flap Vfe >15° knots 130 ≤135 None
    extended speed ≤145 12-B-05-50-03-00A-282A-A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-00-00A-018A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Limitation Abbreviation Unit Trigger Exceedan Maintenance Action


    ce range
    >145 Contact Pilatus¹
    Max landing gear Vlo knots 180 ≤185 None
    operation speed ≤195 12-B-05-50-09-00A-282A-A
    >195 Contact Pilatus¹
    Max landing gear Vle knots 240 ≤245 None
    extended speed ≤252 12-B-05-50-10-00A-282A-A
    >252 Contact Pilatus¹
    Positive/upward +nz g 2.9 (Build R ≤1.00* None
    load factor 7) R ≤1.15* 12-B-05-50-02-00A-282A-A
    R >1.15* Contact Pilatus¹
    2.4 (Build
    6)
    Negative/ -nz g -2.9 (Build R ≤1.00* None
    downward load 7) R ≤1.15* 12-B-05-50-02-00A-282A-A
    factor R >1.15* Contact Pilatus¹
    -2.36 (Build
    6)
    OVER G Lateral load +/- ny g ± 0.8 (Build ≤0.8 None
    factor 7) ≤1.0 No weight on wheels - 12-
    B-05-50-02-00A-282A-A
    ± 1.0 (Build
    ≤1.0 Weight on wheels - 12-
    6)
    B-05-50-01-00A-282A-A
    >1.0 Contact Pilatus¹
    Longitudinal load +/- nx g ± 1.0 (Build ≤1.0 None
    factor 7) >1.0 No weight on wheels - None
    >1.0 Weight on wheels - Contact
    ± 1.0 (Build
    Pilatus¹
    6)
    Max take off MTOW kg Pilot report ≤4750 None
    weight ≤4970 12-B-05-50-02-00A-282A-A
    OVERWE >4970 Contact Pilatus¹
    IGHT Max landing MLW kg Pilot report ≤4500 None
    weight ≤4725 12-B-05-50-01-00A-282A-A
    >4725 Contact Pilatus¹
    OVER CPCS pressure ΔP psi Pilot report N/A Contact Pilatus¹
    PRESSU
    RE
    Contact Pilatus¹ - when you contact Pilatus give a detailed report of the aircraft exceedance.
    * - Read the allowable load factor from the refinement chart using the gross weight and fuel weight to determine
    the load factor ratio (R) = effective/allowable laod factor.

    3 Refinement Charts
    It is possible to refine the positive and negative load factors used to determine if an exceedance is real. This
    requires the following information:
    − aircraft take-off weight
    − fuel weight at take-off and at the time of the exceedance
    − the peak load factor recorded in the Aircraft data.txt log file.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-00-00A-018A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-15 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.1 Positive Load Factor


    Refer to Fig. 1.
    Obtain the aircraft gross weight and fuel weight at the time of the exceedance.
    Interrogate the Aircraft data.txt log file to determine the peak load factor, AMM 12-B-45-45-00-00A-551A-A. This
    load factor is designated g actual.

    Note

    The ADAHRS log files record g where 0g implies straight and level flight. Therefore you must use a correction of
    -1.0g for all recorded g values.

    Determine the allowable g using the chart, aircraft gross weight and fuel loading at the time of the exceedance.
    This load factor is designated g allowable.
    Determine the ratio R by dividing g actual by g allowable.
    Refer to Table 2 for the exceedance range and the required maintenance action.

    3.2 Negative Load Factor


    Refer to Fig. 2.
    Obtain the aircraft gross weight and fuel weight at the time of the exceedance.
    Interrogate the Aircraft data.txt log file to determine the peak load factor, AMM 12-B-45-45-00-00A-551A-A. This
    load factor is designated g actual.

    Note

    The ADAHRS log files record g where 0g implies straight and level flight. Therefore you must use a correction of
    -1.0g for all recorded g values.

    Determine the allowable g using the chart, aircraft gross weight and fuel loading at the time of the exceedance.
    This load factor is designated g allowable.
    Determine the ratio R by dividing g actual by g allowable.
    Refer to Table 2 for the exceedance range and the required maintenance action.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-00-00A-018A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-15 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    ALLOWABLE POSITIVE LOAD FACTOR GIVEN FUEL QUANTITY & GROSS WEIGHT
    5.0

    4.9 1200kg - 1222kg Fuel (total)


    600kg - 1199kg Fuel (total)
    4.8 400kg - 599kg Fuel (total)
    0kg - 399kg Fuel (total)
    4.7

    4.6

    4.5

    4.4

    4.3

    4.2

    4.1

    4.0
    ALLOWABLE ADAHRS g(-)

    3.9

    3.8

    3.7

    3.6

    3.5

    3.4

    3.3

    3.2

    3.1

    3.0 Notes:
    1. ADAHRS recorded "g" must be within this envelope.
    2. Ensure MTOW (4740kg) and MZFW (4100kg) are not exceeded.
    2.9
    3. For this chart, 0.0g means straight and level flight.

    2.8

    2.7

    2.6

    2.5
    2500

    2600

    2700

    2800

    2900

    3000

    3100

    3200

    3300

    3400

    3500

    3600

    3700

    3800

    3900

    4000

    4100

    4200

    4300

    4400

    4500

    4600

    4700

    4800

    GROSS WEIGHT (kg) 12-B-055002-A-S4080-00001-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Refinement Chart – Positive Load Factor

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-00-00A-018A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-15 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    ALLOWABLE NEGATIVE LOAD FACTOR GIVEN FUEL QUANTITY & GROSS WEIGHT
    -2.5
    0kg - 1222kg Fuel (total)

    -2.6

    -2.7

    -2.8

    -2.9 Notes:
    1. ADAHRS recorded "g" must be within this envelope.
    2. Ensure MTOW (4740kg) and MZFW (4100kg) are not exceeded.
    -3.0
    3. For this chart, 0.0g means straight and level flight.

    -3.1

    -3.2

    -3.3

    -3.4

    -3.5
    ALLOWABLE ADAHRS g(-)

    -3.6

    -3.7

    -3.8

    -3.9

    -4.0

    -4.1

    -4.2

    -4.3

    -4.4

    -4.5

    -4.6

    -4.7

    -4.8

    -4.9

    -5.0
    2500

    2600

    2700

    2800

    2900

    3000

    3100

    3200

    3300

    3400

    3500

    3600

    3700

    3800

    3900

    4000

    4100

    4200

    4300

    4400

    4500

    4600

    4700

    4800

    GROSS WEIGHT (kg) 12-B-055002-A-S4080-00002-A-01-1

    Figure 2 Refinement Chart – Negative Load Factor

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-00-00A-018A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-15 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    4 Unscheduled Checks - Engine


    Checks must be done after the following incidents occur (Ref. P&WC EMM). Table 3 gives the inspections needed
    for engine exceedances:
    − Engine overspeed (Gas generator or propeller)
    − Overtemperature
    − Overtorque
    − Sudden propeller stoppage
    − Loss of oil pressure
    − CHIP light on

    Table 3 Engine Exceedances


    Parameter Condition CAS red warning Maintenance action
    Value Delay (sec)
    ITT - >850 20 EMM 71-00-00 Fig 501
    - >870 - EMM 71-00-00 Fig 501
    Start >870 5 EMM 71-00-00 Fig 501
    - >1000 - EMM 71-00-00 Fig 501
    Torque - >44.34 20 EMM 71-00-00 Fig 503
    Prop Owners Manual 61-00-49 Fig 5-4
    - >61 0 EMM 71-00-00 Fig 503
    Prop Owners Manual 61-00-49 Fig 5-4
    Ng - >104 - EMM 72-00-00 Para C1
    Np - >1760 20 EMM 72-00-00 Section 12 Para C1
    Prop Owners Manual 61-00-49 Fig 5-3
    - ≥1870 EMM 72-00-00 Section 12 Para C1
    Prop Owners Manual 61-00-49 Fig 5-3
    Ground >350 to <950 15 Prop Owners Manual 61-00-49 Fig 5-6
    Oil pressure Ng >72% ≥60 to <90 20 EMM 72-00-00 Section 12 Para R
    - ≥40 to <60 20 EMM 72-00-00 Section 12 Para R
    - <40 - EMM 72-00-00 Section 12 Para R
    - >135 20 EMM 72-00-00 Section 12 Para R
    - >200 - EMM 72-00-00 Section 12 Para R
    Oil temp - <−40 - EMM 72-00-00 Section 12 Para Q
    - >105 600 EMM 72-00-00 Section 12 Para Q
    - ≥110 - EMM 72-00-00 Section 12 Para Q

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-00-00A-018A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-15 Page 7
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-00-00A-018A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-15 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    HARD LANDING

    UNSCHEDULED INSPECTIONS

    Table of Contents Page

    HARD LANDING - UNSCHEDULED INSPECTIONS................................................................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-05-50-00-00A-018A-A UNSCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS -
    INTRODUCTION
    12-B-05-50-06-00A-282A-A ALIGNMENT AND SYMMETRY - UNSCHEDULED
    INSPECTIONS
    12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A JACKING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-27-51-00-00A-313A-A FLAP DRIVE SYSTEM - IN SITU INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-32-30-00-00A-903A-A EXTENSION AND RETRACTION – HYDRAULIC
    LANDING GEAR - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-32-30-00-00A-903B-A EXTENSION AND RETRACTION – ELECTRO
    MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-01-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-14 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    After a hard or overweight landing the following examination should be carried out before further flight. An
    initial examination consists of determining if any external damage has occurred and a more detailed level of
    examination of any areas found damaged during the initial examination. If no damage is found during the
    initial examination then it is not necessary to do the more detailed examination.
    Use the refinement charts in AMM 12-B-05-50-00-00A-018A-A to evaluate the exceedance limits.
    2 Initial Examination
    2.1 Structure
    If distortion of the skin is found do the Alignment and Symmetry Checks (AMM 12-
    B-05-50-06-00A-282A-A).
    2.1.1 Look for fuel leaks or seepage from seams and rivet heads in the wing integral tank areas.

    CAUTION

    ALTHOUGH SMALL DISTORTIONS FOUND ON FUSELAGE AND WING SKINS MAY


    SEEM SUFFICIENTLY SMALL AS TO BE IGNORED, A CAREFUL EXAMINATION OF THE
    INTERNAL SUPPORTING STRUCTURE COULD SHOW MAJOR DAMAGE.

    2.1.2 Examine the complete wing, engine compartment, fuselage and horizontal stabilizer skin for
    distortion and for loose or missing rivets.
    2.2 Landing Gear
    2.2.1 Examine the tires and wheels for damage.
    2.2.2 Examine the landing gear legs for leaks and damage.
    2.2.3 Examine the landing gear attachment points for damage.
    2.2.4 Examine the shock absorber top and bottom attachment points for damage.
    2.2.5 Examine the landing gear compartments for damage.
    3 Detailed Examination

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-01-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-14 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.1 Preparation
    Raise the aircraft on jacks (AMM 12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A).
    3.2 Structure
    3.2.1 Remove access panels near the damaged area and examine internal structure as far as
    possible.
    3.2.2 Lower the flaps. Examine the flaps and flap coves. Raise the flaps. Make sure flap
    movement is smooth.
    3.2.3 Examine the flap drive arms (AMM 12-B-27-51-00-00A-313A-A).
    3.2.4 Move the ailerons up and down and make sure movement is smooth and there are no
    unusual noises.
    3.3 Landing Gear
    3.3.1 Make sure that the wheels are free to rotate.
    3.3.2 Move the rudder pedals left and right and make sure that the nose wheel steering movement
    is satisfactory.
    3.3.3 Do the adjustment/test of the landing gear (AMM 12-B-32-30-00-00A-903A-A or 12-
    B-32-30-00-00A-903B-A).
    3.4 Engine
    Do the engine heavy/hard landing inspection (Ref. P&WC EMM 72-00-00).

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-01-00A-282A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-14 Page 3
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-01-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-14 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    HARD LANDING – ELECTRO MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR

    UNSCHEDULED INSPECTION

    Table of Contents Page

    HARD LANDING – ELECTRO MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR - UNSCHEDULED 1


    INSPECTION..............................................................................................................................

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-05-50-00-00A-018A-A UNSCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS -
    INTRODUCTION
    12-B-05-50-06-00A-282A-A ALIGNMENT AND SYMMETRY - UNSCHEDULED
    INSPECTIONS
    12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A JACKING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-32-30-00-00A-903B-A EXTENSION AND RETRACTION – ELECTRO
    MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-05-50-01-00A-282B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-05-03 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    After a hard or overweight landing the following examination should be carried out before further flight. An
    initial examination consists of determining if any external damage has occurred and a more detailed level of
    examination of any areas found damaged during the initial examination. If no damage is found during the
    initial examination then it is not necessary to do the more detailed examination.
    Use the refinement charts in AMM 12-B-05-50-00-00A-018A-A to evaluate the exceedance limits.
    2 Initial Examination
    2.1 Structure
    If distortion of the skin is found do the Alignment and Symmetry Checks (AMM 12-
    B-05-50-06-00A-282A-A).
    2.1.1 Look for fuel leaks or seepage from seams and rivet heads in the wing integral tank areas.
    2.1.2
    CAUTION

    ALTHOUGH SMALL DISTORTIONS FOUND ON FUSELAGE AND WING SKINS MAY


    SEEM SUFFICIENTLY SMALL AS TO BE IGNORED, A CAREFUL EXAMINATION OF THE
    INTERNAL SUPPORTING STRUCTURE COULD SHOW MAJOR DAMAGE.

    Examine the complete wing, engine compartment, fuselage and horizontal stabilizer skin for
    distortion and for loose or missing rivets.
    2.2 Landing Gear
    2.2.1 Examine the tires and wheels for damage.
    2.2.2 Examine the landing gear legs for leaks and damage.
    2.2.3 Examine the landing gear attachment points for damage.
    2.2.4 Examine the shock absorber top and bottom attachment points for damage.
    2.2.5 Examine the landing gear compartments for damage.
    2.2.6 Examine the nose and main landing gear drag links for damage.
    2.2.7 Examine the main landing gear folding struts for damage.
    3 Detailed Examination
    3.1 Preparation
    Raise the aircraft on jacks (AMM 12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A).
    3.2 Structure

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-05-50-01-00A-282B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-05-03 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.2.1 Remove access panels near the damaged area and examine internal structure as far as
    possible.
    3.2.2 Lower the flaps. Examine the flaps and flap coves. Raise the flaps. Make sure flap
    movement is smooth.
    3.2.3 Move the ailerons up and down and make sure movement is smooth and there are no
    unusual noises.
    3.3 Landing Gear
    3.3.1 Make sure that the wheels are free to rotate.
    3.3.2 Move the rudder pedals left and right and make sure that the nose wheel steering movement
    is satisfactory.
    3.3.3 Do the adjustment/test of the landing gear (AMM 12-B-32-30-00-00A-903B-A).
    3.4 Engine
    Do the engine heavy/hard landing inspection (Ref. P&WC EMM 72-00-00).

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-05-50-01-00A-282B-A
    LANDING GEAR
    End of data module
    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-05-03 Page 3
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-05-50-01-00A-282B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-05-03 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FLIGHT IN SEVERE TURBULENCE OR SEVERE MANEUVRES

    UNSCHEDULED INSPECTIONS

    Table of Contents Page

    FLIGHT IN SEVERE TURBULENCE OR SEVERE MANEUVRES - UNSCHEDULED 1


    INSPECTIONS............................................................................................................................

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Refinement Chart – Positive Load Factor............................................................... 4


    2 Refinement Chart – Negative Load Factor............................................................. 5

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-05-50-06-00A-282A-A ALIGNMENT AND SYMMETRY - UNSCHEDULED
    INSPECTIONS
    12-B-27-51-00-00A-313A-A FLAP DRIVE SYSTEM - IN SITU INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-45-45-00-00A-551A-A CENTRAL MAINTENANCE SYSTEM INTERFACE -
    FAULT MONITORING STORAGE READOUT
    (DOWNLOAD DATA)

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-02-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-18 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This examination should be done after a flight in severe turbulence or when severe maneuver conditions are
    reported by the pilot.
    It is possible to refine the positive and negative load factors used to determine if an exceedance is real. Use
    the refinement charts (Fig. 1 and Fig. 2) to evaluate the exceedance limits. This requires the following
    information:
    − aircraft take-off weight
    − fuel weight at take-off and at the time of the exceedance
    − the peak load factor recorded in the acms_aircraft_data_log_file.txt of the ACMS data.

    Obtain the aircraft gross weight and fuel weight at the time of the exceedance.
    Interrogate the acms_aircraft_data_log_file.txt of the ACMS data to determine the peak load factor, AMM 12-
    B-45-45-00-00A-551A-A. This load factor is designated g actual.

    Note

    The ADAHRS log files record g where 0g implies straight and level flight.

    Determine the allowable g using the chart, aircraft gross weight and fuel loading at the time of the
    exceedance. This load factor is designated g allowable.
    Determine the ratio R by dividing g actual by g allowable.
    If R≥1 then an actual exceedance has occurred and you must do the inspection given in Para below. If R≤1
    an exceedance has not occurred.
    If distortion of the skin is found do the Alignment and Symmetry Checks (Refer to DM 12-
    B-05-50-06-00A-282A-A).
    2 Detailed Examination

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-02-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-18 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    CAUTION

    ALTHOUGH SMALL DISTORTIONS FOUND ON FUSELAGE AND WING SKINS MAY SEEM
    SUFFICIENTLY SMALL AS TO BE IGNORED, A CAREFUL EXAMINATION OF THE INTERNAL
    SUPPORTING STRUCTURE COULD SHOW MAJOR DAMAGE.

    2.1 Wing
    2.1.1 Look for fuel leaks from seams and rivet heads in the wing integral tank areas.
    2.1.2 Examine the top and bottom skins for distortion at rivet rows and for loose or missing rivets.
    2.1.3 Remove access panels from the wing dry areas and examine the internal structure.
    2.1.4 Lower the flaps. Examine the flaps, flap coves and the flap support mechanism, in particular
    the flap drive arms. Raise the flaps. Make sure flap movement is smooth.
    2.1.5 Examine the flap drive arms, refer to AMM 12-B-27-51-00-00A-313A-A.
    2.1.6 Move the ailerons up and down and make sure movement is smooth and there are no
    unusual noises.
    2.2 Fuselage
    2.2.1 Examine the fuselage skin for distortion at rivet rows and for loose or missing rivets.
    2.2.2 Examine the passenger/crew, cargo and emergency exit doors for distortion and correct
    closing.
    2.2.3 Examine the battery area for no electrolyte spillage.
    2.2.4 Examine the battery for security of attachment.
    2.2.5 Examine the engine cowlings for distortion and security of attachment.
    2.3 Stabilizers
    2.3.1 Examine outside skins for distortion.
    2.3.2 Move the elevator up and down and make sure there are no unusual noises.
    2.3.3 Move the rudder left and right and make sure there are no unusual noises.
    2.3.4 Move the horizontal stabilizer up and down at the tip and make sure there is not to much
    play.
    2.4 Repair of Damage
    List all damage found and refer to the Structural Repair Manual for repair information. If serious
    structural damage has occurred contact Pilatus Aircraft Ltd. for assistance.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-02-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-18 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    ALLOWABLE POSITIVE LOAD FACTOR GIVEN FUEL QUANTITY & GROSS WEIGHT
    5.0

    4.9 1200kg - 1222kg Fuel (total)


    600kg - 1199kg Fuel (total)
    4.8 400kg - 599kg Fuel (total)
    0kg - 399kg Fuel (total)
    4.7

    4.6

    4.5

    4.4

    4.3

    4.2

    4.1

    4.0
    ALLOWABLE ADAHRS g(-)

    3.9

    3.8

    3.7

    3.6

    3.5

    3.4

    3.3

    3.2

    3.1

    3.0 Notes:
    1. ADAHRS recorded "g" must be within this envelope.
    2. Ensure MTOW (4740kg) and MZFW (4100kg) are not exceeded.
    2.9
    3. For this chart, 0.0g means straight and level flight.

    2.8

    2.7

    2.6

    2.5
    2500

    2600

    2700

    2800

    2900

    3000

    3100

    3200

    3300

    3400

    3500

    3600

    3700

    3800

    3900

    4000

    4100

    4200

    4300

    4400

    4500

    4600

    4700

    4800

    GROSS WEIGHT (kg) 12-B-055002-A-S4080-00001-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Refinement Chart – Positive Load Factor

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-02-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-18 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    ALLOWABLE NEGATIVE LOAD FACTOR GIVEN FUEL QUANTITY & GROSS WEIGHT
    -2.5
    0kg - 1222kg Fuel (total)

    -2.6

    -2.7

    -2.8

    -2.9 Notes:
    1. ADAHRS recorded "g" must be within this envelope.
    2. Ensure MTOW (4740kg) and MZFW (4100kg) are not exceeded.
    -3.0
    3. For this chart, 0.0g means straight and level flight.

    -3.1

    -3.2

    -3.3

    -3.4

    -3.5
    ALLOWABLE ADAHRS g(-)

    -3.6

    -3.7

    -3.8

    -3.9

    -4.0

    -4.1

    -4.2

    -4.3

    -4.4

    -4.5

    -4.6

    -4.7

    -4.8

    -4.9

    -5.0
    2500

    2600

    2700

    2800

    2900

    3000

    3100

    3200

    3300

    3400

    3500

    3600

    3700

    3800

    3900

    4000

    4100

    4200

    4300

    4400

    4500

    4600

    4700

    4800

    GROSS WEIGHT (kg) 12-B-055002-A-S4080-00002-A-01-1

    Figure 2 Refinement Chart – Negative Load Factor

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-02-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-18 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-02-00A-282A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-18 Page 6
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    OVERSPEED WITH FLAPS EXTENDED

    UNSCHEDULED INSPECTIONS

    Table of Contents Page

    OVERSPEED WITH FLAPS EXTENDED - UNSCHEDULED INSPECTIONS.......................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-05-50-00-00A-018A-A UNSCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS -
    INTRODUCTION
    12-B-27-50-00-00A-903A-A FLAPS - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-27-51-00-00A-313A-A FLAP DRIVE SYSTEM - IN SITU INSPECTION/CHECK

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-03-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-03 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    Do this check if the maximum flap extended speed quoted in the Airplane Flight Manual has been exceeded.
    Refer to AMM 12-B-05-50-00-00A-018A-A, Table 3 - Airframe Exceedances, for the maintenance action
    needed according to the exceedance range.
    2 Overspeed with Flaps Down
    2.1 Examine wing top and bottom skin surfaces for distortion and loose or missing rivets.
    2.2 Lower the flaps. Remove the flap fairings and examine the flaps and flap coves for distortion and loose
    or missing rivets.
    2.3 Examine the flap support mechanism. For the flap drive arms, refer to AMM 12-B-27-51-00-00A-313A-
    A.
    2.4 Do the adjustment/test of the flap system (AMM 12-B-27-50-00-00A-903A-A).

    Note

    When the flaps are moving, listen for unusual noises indicating malfunction of the system.

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-03-00A-282A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-03 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PROPELLER SUDDEN STOPAGE OR IMPACT

    UNSCHEDULED INSPECTIONS

    Table of Contents Page

    PROPELLER SUDDEN STOPAGE OR IMPACT - UNSCHEDULED INSPECTIONS............... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-05-50-06-00A-282A-A ALIGNMENT AND SYMMETRY - UNSCHEDULED
    INSPECTIONS
    12-B-61-00-00-00A-904A-A PROPELLER BLADES - REPAIR
    12-B-61-10-01-00A-920A-A PROPELLER - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903A-A POWER PLANT - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-71-10-00-00A-920A-A ENGINE COWLINGS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-04-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    Sudden propeller stoppage occurs when the propeller rotation stops due to contact with a hard object. A
    propeller strike occurs when either; a rotating propeller hits an object or a stationary propeller is hit by a
    moving object.
    If distortion of the skin is found do the Engine Alignment Check (Ref. 12-B-05-50-06-00A-282A-A).
    2 When A Sudden Propeller Stoppage Occurs
    2.1 Remove the power plant access panels (Ref. 12-B-71-10-00-00A-920A-A).
    2.2 Remove the propeller (Ref. 12-B-61-10-01-00A-920A-A) and replace or overhaul.
    2.3 Examine the engine (Ref. P&WC EMM 72-00-00).
    2.4 Examine the engine mounting tubular frame (visually and using a straightedge) for distortion.
    Distortion is not permissible.
    2.5 Examine the firewall for distortion.
    2.6 Install a new or overhauled propeller (Ref. 12-B-61-10-01-00A-920A-A).
    2.7 Install the power plant access panels (Ref. 12-B-71-10-00-00A-920A-A).
    2.8 Do the adjustment/test of the engine (Ref. 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903A-A).
    3
    WARNING

    WHEN A PROPELLER BLADE IS BENT OR TWISTED, REPAIR IS MAJOR AND AN OVERHAUL OF THE
    PROPELLER MUST BE DONE.

    CAUTION

    PROPELLER BLADES MUST BE REPAIRED IMMEDIATELY AFTER DAMAGE IS FOUND OR BLADE


    FAILURE CAN OCCUR.

    When A Sudden Propeller Strike Occurs


    3.1 Remove the power plant access panels 12-B-71-10-00-00A-920A-A.
    3.2 Examine the propeller.
    3.3 Minor damage to the propeller blades can be repaired if the damage is less than the permitted limits,
    refer to 12-B-61-00-00-00A-904A-A.
    3.4 Examine the engine (Ref. P&WC EMM 72-00-00).
    3.5 Install the power plant access panels (Ref. 12-B-71-10-00-00A-920A-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-04-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-04-00A-282A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 3
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-04-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    LIGHTNING STRIKE

    UNSCHEDULED INSPECTIONS

    Table of Contents Page

    LIGHTNING STRIKE - UNSCHEDULED INSPECTIONS.......................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-32-30-00-00A-903A-A EXTENSION AND RETRACTION – HYDRAULIC
    LANDING GEAR - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-32-30-00-00A-903B-A EXTENSION AND RETRACTION – ELECTRO
    MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-05-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-03-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    Do this check if the aircraft is hit by lightning or it is suspected that it has been hit by lightning.
    2 Lightning Strike
    2.1 Find the point at which the lightning hit the aircraft.
    2.2 Look for secondary damage such as burns or pit near the area of the lightning hit.
    2.3 Examine the aircraft for signs of discharge.
    2.4 Examine the static dischargers.
    2.5 Examine the bonding leads between the area of the lightning hit and the discharge point.
    2.6 If the lightning hit the aircraft on a control surface examine the hinge and bearings on the control
    surface.
    2.7 If the aircraft was hit by lightning while on the ground, examine for damage:
    2.7.1 The landing gear.
    2.7.2 The nosewheel steering mechanism.
    2.7.3 The wheels and tires. Make sure that the tire pressures are correct.
    2.8 Operationally test the flight controls and make sure that the movement is full and smooth.
    2.9 Examine the propeller (Ref. Hartzell POM 149, 61-00-49).
    2.10 Examine the engine (Ref. P&WC EMM 72-00-00).
    2.11 Examine the engine mounting frame for signs of burning.
    2.12 Operationally test all electrical and avionic equipment.
    2.13 If the aircraft was hit by lightning while on the ground, do a Functional Test of the Extension and
    Retraction System (AMM 12-B-32-30-00-00A-903A-A or 12-B-32-30-00-00A-903B-A).

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-05-00A-282A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-03-15 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    LIGHTNING STRIKE – ELECTRO MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR

    UNSCHEDULED INSPECTION

    Table of Contents Page

    LIGHTNING STRIKE – ELECTRO MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR - UNSCHEDULED 1


    INSPECTION..............................................................................................................................

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-32-30-00-00A-903B-A EXTENSION AND RETRACTION – ELECTRO
    MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-05-50-05-00A-282B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-05-03 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    Do this check if the aircraft is hit by lightning or it is suspected that it has been hit by lightning.
    2 Lightning Strike
    2.1 Find the point at which the lightning hit the aircraft.
    2.2 Look for secondary damage such as burns or pit near the area of the lightning hit.
    2.3 Examine the aircraft for signs of discharge.
    2.4 Examine the static dischargers.
    2.5 Examine the bonding leads between the area of the lightning hit and the discharge point.
    2.6 If the lightning hit the aircraft on a control surface examine the hinge and bearings on the control
    surface.
    2.7 If the aircraft was hit by lightning while on the ground, examine for damage:
    2.7.1 The landing gear.
    2.7.2 The nosewheel steering mechanism.
    2.7.3 The wheels and tires. Make sure that the tire pressures are correct.
    2.8 Operationally test the flight controls and make sure that the movement is full and smooth.
    2.9 Examine the propeller (Ref. Hartzell POM 149, 61-00-49).
    2.10 Examine the engine (Ref. P&WC EMM 72-00-00).
    2.11 Examine the engine mounting frame for signs of burning.
    2.12 Operationally test all electrical and avionic equipment.
    2.13 If the aircraft was hit by lightning while on the ground, do a Functional Test of the Extension and
    Retraction System (refer to AMM 12-B-32-30-00-00A-903B-A).

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-05-50-05-00A-282B-A
    LANDING GEAR
    End of data module
    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-05-03 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    ALIGNMENT AND SYMMETRY

    UNSCHEDULED INSPECTIONS

    Table of Contents Page

    ALIGNMENT AND SYMMETRY - UNSCHEDULED INSPECTIONS......................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 2
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Longitudinal and Lateral Levelling.......................................................................... 6


    2 Reference Points and Dimensions......................................................................... 7
    3 Recommended In Service Check Form.................................................................. 9
    4 Recommended Comparison Table......................................................................... 10

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A GENERAL - AEROSPACE GROUND EQUIPMENT
    (AGE) AND TOOLS
    12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A JACKING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-12-10-01-00A-902A-A FUEL - SERVICING
    12-B-32-30-00-00A-903A-A EXTENSION AND RETRACTION – HYDRAULIC
    LANDING GEAR - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-32-30-00-00A-903B-A EXTENSION AND RETRACTION – ELECTRO
    MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-06-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-03-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Transit theodolite Part As
    Required
    Levelling bars x 2 (Steel rulers 5 Part As
    ft (1,5 M)) Required
    Tape measure, steel high Part As
    precision (25 ft (7 M)) Required
    Plumb-line (Local supply) Part As
    Required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1
    Note

    To identify the AGE and tools used in this procedure refer to the list of AGE and tools 12-
    B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A.

    General
    These checks are done by taking selected measurements for comparison with the measurements taken at
    the same points when the aircraft was prepared for delivery at the manufacturers.
    Before the checks are done:
    1 The aircraft must be empty of fuel.
    2 The aircraft must be parked in a hangar for a minimum of one hour.
    3 The aircraft must not be exposed to direct sunlight.
    4 The hangar floor must be of concrete, or a similar material.
    5 The aircraft must be on jacks with the landing gear retracted.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-06-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A record of the Aircraft Build Checks can be obtained from Pilatus Aircraft Ltd.
    If the measurements taken are not in the limits given, the aircraft must not be operated, and Pilatus advised
    before any further action is taken.
    Pilatus will provide any assistance required on receipt of copies of the In-Service Check Form and
    Comparison Table and a full report on the incident which made the check necessary. Details of structural
    damage discovered during the subsequent investigation, should also be included.
    2
    WARNING

    IF PERMITTED DEVIATIONS ARE EXCEEDED, THE AIRCRAFT SHOULD NOT BE OPERATED UNTIL IT
    HAS BEEN RECTIFIED AND BROUGHT WITHIN ITS DESIGN STRENGTH, SHAPE AND ALIGNMENT
    TOLERANCES.

    Alignment and Symmetry


    2.1 General
    A Reference Point (RP) is identified with contrasting paint (usually colored red) and by a washer under
    the rivet head.
    Reference Dimensions (A, B, C and D) are distances between two reference points.
    2.2 Job Set Up
    2.2.1 Defuel the aircraft (AMM 12-B-12-10-01-00A-902A-A).
    2.2.2 Prepare an In-Service Check Form.
    2.2.3 Put the aircraft on jacks (AMM 12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.2.4 Retract the landing gear (AMM 12-B-32-30-00-00A-903A-A or 12-B-32-30-00-00A-903B-A).
    2.2.5 Set the horizontal stabilizer trim on the trim indicator to the green diamond position.
    2.3 Longitudinal Levelling Check (Ref. Fig. 1)
    2.3.1 Put a levelling bar across the four seat rails adjacent to the passenger/crew door.
    2.3.2 Put a levelling bar across the four seat rails adjacent to the cargo door.

    Note

    With the floor carpets installed it will be necessary to put 8 mm spacers on the seat rails
    below the levelling bars to give the bars a level surface.

    2.3.3 Set up the theodolite:


    2.3.3.1 Adjust the tripod to allow readings to be taken at a level approximately 100 to
    200 mm below lowest point of fuselage.
    2.3.3.2 Level the theodolite base, turn through 360° and check each 90° to make sure
    that the base is level.
    2.3.3.3 Level the theodolite head by turning leveling adjuster to match bubble halves
    visible through the small leveling eyepiece.
    2.3.4 Hold the tape measure against the bottom of the front levelling bar.
    2.3.5 Zoom and focus the theodolite on the tape and make a note of the reading.
    2.3.6 Hold the tape measure against the bottom of the rear levelling bar.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-06-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-03-15 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.3.7 Zoom and focus the theodolite on the tape and make a note of the reading.
    2.3.8 Compare the front and rear readings. If the readings are not the same, adjust the tail jack
    and do the check again.
    2.4
    Note

    The recorded reading is the Correction Factor. The Correction Factor is needed to help determine the
    deformation check.

    Lateral Levelling Check (Ref. Fig. 1)


    2.4.1
    Note

    If it is not possible to do the lateral levelling check because of damage to the wing(s), speak
    to Pilatus for the data on how to continue.

    Set up the theodolite:


    2.4.1.1 Adjust the tripod to allow readings to be taken approximately 750 mm below RP
    6.
    2.4.1.2 Level the theodolite base, turn through 360° and check each 90° to make sure
    that the base is level.
    2.4.1.3 Level the theodolite head by turning leveling adjuster to match bubble halves
    visible through the small leveling eyepiece.
    2.4.2 Hold the tape measure against the RP 6 left.
    2.4.3 Zoom and focus the theodolite on the tape and make a note of the reading.
    2.4.4 Hold the tape measure against the RP 6 right.
    2.4.5 Zoom and focus the theodolite on the tape and make a note of the reading.
    2.4.6 Compare the left and right reference point readings. If the readings are not the same, adjust
    the main jacks and do the check again.
    2.5 Deformation and Symmetry Check (Ref. Fig. 1, Fig. 2 and Fig. 3)
    2.5.1 Put the theodolite in position so that readings can be taken from a measuring tape
    suspended from Reference Points 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 10 and 13.
    2.5.2 Set up the theodolite:
    2.5.2.1 Adjust the tripod to allow readings to be taken at a level approximately 100 to
    200 mm below lowest point of fuselage.
    2.5.2.2 Level the theodolite head by turning leveling adjuster to match bubble halves
    visible through the small leveling eyepiece.
    2.5.3 Hold the tape measure against the RP 6 left, with the zero mark at the center of the painted
    rivet head, and approximately 1m of tape exposed so that the scale faces the theodolite.
    2.5.4 Zoom and focus the theodolite on the tape and make a note of the readings from the
    measuring tape. Make a record on the check form.
    2.5.5 Hold the tape measure against the RP 6 right.
    2.5.6 Zoom and focus the theodolite on the tape and make a note of the readings from the
    measuring tape. Make a record on the check form.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-06-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-03-15 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.5.7 Repeat steps 3, 4, 5 and 6 for the Reference Points 7, 5, 4, 3, 2, 10 and 13 (left and right
    sides).
    2.5.8 Measure the dimension A, left and right from RP 12 on top surface of wing to RP 10 on the
    horizontal stabilizer. Make a record on the check form.
    2.5.9 Measure the dimensions B, left and right, from RP 12 to RP 8 on the upper leading edge of
    the vertical stabilizer. Make a record on the check form.
    2.5.10 Measure the dimensions C, left and right, from RP 12 to RP 13 on the side of the rear
    fuselage. Make a record on the check form.
    2.6 Engine Alignment Check (Ref. Fig. 1, Fig. 2 and Fig. 3)
    2.6.1
    Note

    The propeller blade measure point is to be taken from the center of the blade at a radius of 1
    meter.

    Select one propeller blade as the master blade.


    2.6.2 Position the master blade horizontally.
    2.6.3 Measure the dimension D on the left hand side, master propeller blade to the start of the
    fuselage skin (75 mm forward of frame 10). Make a record on the check form.
    2.6.4 Turn the master blade through 180° so that the blade is horizontal.
    2.6.5 Measure the dimension D on the right hand side (master propeller blade to the start of the
    fuselage skin). Make a record on the check form.
    2.6.6 Position the master blade vertically.
    2.6.7 Put a plumb line in position in front of the propeller.
    2.6.8 Measure dimension E from the front edge of the blade to the plumb line. Make a record on
    the check form.
    2.6.9 Turn the master blade through 180° so that the blade is vertical.
    2.6.10 Measure dimension E from the front edge of the blade to the plumb line. Make a record on
    the check form.
    2.7 Completion of Comparison Table (Ref. Fig. 3 and Fig. 4)
    2.7.1 From the information recorded on the In Service Check Form complete the Comparison
    Table.
    2.7.2 If the deviation from the build checks is not in the limits given contact Pilatus for advice.

    Note

    Give as much information as possible about the incident which made the check necessary.

    2.8 Close Up
    2.8.1 Remove the levelling bars and spacers.
    2.8.2 Lower the landing gear (AMM 12-B-32-30-00-00A-903A-A or 12-B-32-30-00-00A-903B-A).
    2.8.3 Lower the aircraft from jacks (AMM 12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.8.4 Refuel the aircraft (AMM 12-B-12-10-01-00A-902A-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-06-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-03-15 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    LEVELLING BARS

    TRANSIT THEODOLITE

    RP6 RIGHT RP6 LEFT

    TRANSIT THEODOLITE
    05101

    Figure 1 Longitudinal and Lateral Levelling

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-06-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-03-15 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    10 10
    8
    13 13

    C C

    B B

    A A

    12
    1 1
    12

    3 3
    5 5
    7 7

    6 4 2 2 4 6
    1 1

    FUS. SKIN END


    (75mm FORWARD FRAME 10)
    D D

    SAME BLADE LEFT AND


    RIGHT HORIZONTAL

    R1000
    05102

    Figure 2 Reference Points and Dimensions (Sheet 1 of 2)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-06-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-03-15 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    10
    LEAD
    A
    8
    B
    C

    13
    R1000

    SAME BLADE UP AND


    DOWN HORIZONTAL

    10 10

    6 7 6 7
    4 5 4 5
    2 3 2 3

    05103

    Figure 2 Reference Points and Dimensions (Sheet 2 of 2)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-06-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-03-15 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Bottom

    Top
    E
    D
    C
    B
    In Service Alignment and Symmetry Check Form

    A
    13
    10
    7
    6
    5
    4
    3
    2

    Dimension

    Dimension
    Reference

    Reading

    Reading
    Points

    Right

    Right
    Left

    Left

    05104

    Figure 3 Recommended In Service Check Form

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-06-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-03-15 Page 9


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PC-12 Structural Deformation Checks Comparison Table


    Ac MSN Recorded Aircraft Build Checks
    Date In-Service Check Results
    Deviation From Build Checks
    Maximum Permitted Deviation mm
    Check Reference /Dimension Remarks
    Wing Torsional Deformation Check
    2-3 left 4
    2-3 right 4
    Difference * *must not exceed 8
    4-5 left 3
    4-5 right 3
    Difference * *must not exceed 6
    6-7 left 2
    6-7 right 2
    Difference * *must not exceed 4
    Wing Bending Deformation Check
    4-2 left 4
    6-4 left 5
    5-3 left 4
    7-5 left 5
    4-2 right 4
    6-4 right 5
    5-3 right 4
    7-5 right 5
    Horizontal Stabilizer Deformation Check
    10 left
    10 right
    Difference * *must not exceed 10
    Fuselage Deformation Check
    13 left
    13 right
    Difference * *must not exceed 8
    Symmetry Check
    A left
    A right
    Difference (L - R)* 25
    B left
    B right
    Difference (L - R)* 20
    C left
    C right
    Difference (L - R)* 15
    D left
    D right
    Difference (L - R) Between +50 and +90 mm
    E top
    E bottom
    Difference (T - B) Between 55 and 95 mm
    * Subtract right from left and indicate if the result is positive or negative
    05106

    Figure 4 Recommended Comparison Table

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-06-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-03-15 Page 10


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-06-00A-282A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-03-15 Page 11
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-06-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-03-15 Page 12


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    ALIGNMENT AND SYMMETRY – ELECTRO MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR

    UNSCHEDULED INSPECTION

    Table of Contents Page

    ALIGNMENT AND SYMMETRY – ELECTRO MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR - 1


    UNSCHEDULED INSPECTION..................................................................................................

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 2
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Longitudinal and Lateral Levelling.......................................................................... 7


    2 Reference Points and Dimensions......................................................................... 8
    3 Recommended In Service Check Form.................................................................. 10
    4 Recommended Comparison Table......................................................................... 11

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A GENERAL - AEROSPACE GROUND EQUIPMENT
    (AGE) AND TOOLS
    12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A JACKING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-12-10-01-00A-902A-A FUEL - SERVICING
    12-B-32-30-00-00A-903B-A EXTENSION AND RETRACTION – ELECTRO
    MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-05-50-06-00A-282B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-10-07 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Transit theodolite Part Local supply As
    required
    Levelling bars x 2 Part Local supply As
    required
    Tape measure, steel high Part Local supply As
    precision required
    Plumb-line Part Local supply As
    required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1
    Note

    To identify the AGE and tools used in this procedure refer to the list of AGE and tools 12-
    B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A.

    General
    These checks are done by taking selected measurements for comparison with the measurements taken at
    the same points when the aircraft was prepared for delivery at the manufacturers.
    Before the checks are done:
    1 The aircraft must be empty of fuel.
    2 The aircraft must be parked in a hangar for a minimum of one hour.
    3 The aircraft must not be exposed to direct sunlight.
    4 The hangar floor must be of concrete, or a similar material.
    5 The aircraft must be on jacks with the landing gear retracted.

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-05-50-06-00A-282B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-10-07 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A record of the Aircraft Build Checks can be obtained from Pilatus Aircraft Ltd.
    If the measurements taken are not in the limits given, the aircraft must not be operated, and Pilatus advised
    before any further action is taken.
    Pilatus will provide any assistance required on receipt of copies of the In-Service Check Form and
    Comparison Table and a full report on the incident which made the check necessary. Details of structural
    damage discovered during the subsequent investigation, should also be included.
    2
    WARNING

    IF PERMITTED DEVIATIONS ARE EXCEEDED, THE AIRCRAFT SHOULD NOT BE OPERATED UNTIL IT
    HAS BEEN RECTIFIED AND BROUGHT WITHIN ITS DESIGN STRENGTH, SHAPE AND ALIGNMENT
    TOLERANCES.

    Alignment and Symmetry


    2.1 General
    A Reference Point (RP) is identified with contrasting paint (usually colored red) and by a washer under
    the rivet head.
    Reference Dimensions (A, B, C and D) are distances between two reference points.
    2.2 Job Set Up
    2.2.1 Defuel the aircraft (refer to AMM 12-B-12-10-01-00A-902A-A).
    2.2.2 Prepare an In-Service Check Form.
    2.2.3 Put the aircraft on jacks (refer to AMM 12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.2.4 Retract the landing gear (refer to AMM 12-B-32-30-00-00A-903B-A).
    2.2.5 Set the horizontal stabilizer trim on the trim indicator to the green diamond position.
    2.3 Longitudinal Levelling Check
    (Ref. Fig. 1)
    2.3.1 Put a levelling bar across the four seat rails adjacent to the passenger/crew door.
    2.3.2 Put a levelling bar across the four seat rails adjacent to the cargo door.

    Note

    With the floor carpets installed it will be necessary to put 8 mm spacers on the seat rails
    below the levelling bars to give the bars a level surface.

    2.3.3 Set up the theodolite:


    2.3.3.1 Adjust the tripod to allow readings to be taken at a level approximately 100 to
    200 mm below lowest point of fuselage.
    2.3.3.2 Level the theodolite base, turn through 360° and check each 90° to make sure
    that the base is level.
    2.3.3.3 Level the theodolite head by turning leveling adjuster to match bubble halves
    visible through the small leveling eyepiece.
    2.3.4 Hold the tape measure against the bottom of the front levelling bar.
    2.3.5 Zoom and focus the theodolite on the tape and make a note of the reading.

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-05-50-06-00A-282B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-10-07 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.3.6 Hold the tape measure against the bottom of the rear levelling bar.
    2.3.7 Zoom and focus the theodolite on the tape and make a note of the reading.
    2.3.8 Compare the front and rear readings. If the readings are not the same, adjust the tail jack
    and do the check again.
    2.4
    Note

    The recorded reading is the Correction Factor. The Correction Factor is needed to help determine the
    deformation check.

    Lateral Levelling Check


    (Ref. Fig. 1)
    2.4.1
    Note

    If it is not possible to do the lateral levelling check because of damage to the wing(s), speak
    to Pilatus for the data on how to continue.

    Set up the theodolite:


    2.4.1.1 Adjust the tripod to allow readings to be taken approximately 750 mm below RP
    6.
    2.4.1.2 Level the theodolite base, turn through 360° and check each 90° to make sure
    that the base is level.
    2.4.1.3 Level the theodolite head by turning leveling adjuster to match bubble halves
    visible through the small leveling eyepiece.
    2.4.2 Hold the tape measure against the RP 6 left.
    2.4.3 Zoom and focus the theodolite on the tape and make a note of the reading.
    2.4.4 Hold the tape measure against the RP 6 right.
    2.4.5 Zoom and focus the theodolite on the tape and make a note of the reading.
    2.4.6 Compare the left and right reference point readings. If the readings are not the same, adjust
    the main jacks and do the check again.
    2.5 Deformation and Symmetry Check
    (Ref. Fig. 1, Fig. 2 and Fig. 3)
    2.5.1 Put the theodolite in position so that readings can be taken from a measuring tape
    suspended from Reference Points 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 10 and 13.
    2.5.2 Set up the theodolite:
    2.5.2.1 Adjust the tripod to allow readings to be taken at a level approximately 100 to
    200 mm below lowest point of fuselage.
    2.5.2.2 Level the theodolite head by turning leveling adjuster to match bubble halves
    visible through the small leveling eyepiece.
    2.5.3 Hold the tape measure against the RP 6 left, with the zero mark at the center of the painted
    rivet head, and approximately 1m of tape exposed so that the scale faces the theodolite.
    2.5.4 Zoom and focus the theodolite on the tape and make a note of the readings from the
    measuring tape. Make a record on the check form.

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-05-50-06-00A-282B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-10-07 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.5.5 Hold the tape measure against the RP 6 right.


    2.5.6 Zoom and focus the theodolite on the tape and make a note of the readings from the
    measuring tape. Make a record on the check form.
    2.5.7 Repeat steps 3, 4, 5 and 6 for the Reference Points 7, 5, 4, 3, 2, 10 and 13 (left and right
    sides).
    2.5.8 Measure the dimension A, left and right from RP 12 on top surface of wing to RP 10 on the
    horizontal stabilizer. Make a record on the check form.
    2.5.9 Measure the dimensions B, left and right, from RP 12 to RP 8 on the upper leading edge of
    the vertical stabilizer. Make a record on the check form.
    2.5.10 Measure the dimensions C, left and right, from RP 12 to RP 13 on the side of the rear
    fuselage. Make a record on the check form.
    2.6 Engine Alignment Check
    (Ref. Fig. 1, Fig. 2 and Fig. 3)
    2.6.1
    Note

    The propeller blade measure point is to be taken from the center of the blade at a radius of 1
    meter.

    Select one propeller blade as the master blade.


    2.6.2 Position the master blade horizontally.
    2.6.3 Measure the dimension D on the left hand side, master propeller blade to the start of the
    fuselage skin (75 mm forward of frame 10). Make a record on the check form.
    2.6.4 Turn the master blade through 180° so that the blade is horizontal.
    2.6.5 Measure the dimension D on the right hand side (master propeller blade to the start of the
    fuselage skin). Make a record on the check form.
    2.6.6 Position the master blade vertically.
    2.6.7 Put a plumb line in position in front of the propeller.
    2.6.8 Measure dimension E from the front edge of the blade to the plumb line. Make a record on
    the check form.
    2.6.9 Turn the master blade through 180° so that the blade is vertical.
    2.6.10 Measure dimension E from the front edge of the blade to the plumb line. Make a record on
    the check form.
    2.7 Completion of Comparison Table
    (Ref. Fig. 3 and Fig. 4)
    2.7.1 From the information recorded on the In Service Check Form complete the Comparison
    Table.
    2.7.2 If the deviation from the build checks is not in the limits given contact Pilatus for advice.

    Note

    Give as much information as possible about the incident which made the check necessary.

    2.8 Close Up

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-05-50-06-00A-282B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-10-07 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.8.1 Remove the levelling bars and spacers.


    2.8.2 Lower the landing gear (refer to AMM 12-B-32-30-00-00A-903B-A).
    2.8.3 Lower the aircraft from jacks (refer to AMM 12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.8.4 Refuel the aircraft (refer to AMM 12-B-12-10-01-00A-902A-A).

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-05-50-06-00A-282B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-10-07 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    LEVELLING BARS

    TRANSIT THEODOLITE

    RP6 RIGHT RP6 LEFT

    TRANSIT THEODOLITE
    05101

    Figure 1 Longitudinal and Lateral Levelling

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-05-50-06-00A-282B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-10-07 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    10 10
    8
    13 13

    C C

    B B

    A A

    12
    1 1
    12

    3 3
    5 5
    7 7

    6 4 2 2 4 6
    1 1

    FUS. SKIN END


    (75mm FORWARD FRAME 10)
    D D

    SAME BLADE LEFT AND


    RIGHT HORIZONTAL

    R1000
    05102

    Figure 2 Reference Points and Dimensions (Sheet 1 of 2)

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-05-50-06-00A-282B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-10-07 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    10
    LEAD
    A
    8
    B
    C

    13
    R1000

    SAME BLADE UP AND


    DOWN HORIZONTAL

    10 10

    6 7 6 7
    4 5 4 5
    2 3 2 3

    05103

    Figure 2 Reference Points and Dimensions (Sheet 2 of 2)

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-05-50-06-00A-282B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-10-07 Page 9


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Bottom

    Top
    E
    D
    C
    B
    In Service Alignment and Symmetry Check Form

    A
    13
    10
    7
    6
    5
    4
    3
    2

    Dimension

    Dimension
    Reference

    Reading

    Reading
    Points

    Right

    Right
    Left

    Left

    05104

    Figure 3 Recommended In Service Check Form

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-05-50-06-00A-282B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-10-07 Page 10


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PC-12 Structural Deformation Checks Comparison Table


    Ac MSN Recorded Aircraft Build Checks
    Date In-Service Check Results
    Deviation From Build Checks
    Maximum Permitted Deviation mm
    Check Reference /Dimension Remarks
    Wing Torsional Deformation Check
    2-3 left 4
    2-3 right 4
    Difference * *must not exceed 8
    4-5 left 3
    4-5 right 3
    Difference * *must not exceed 6
    6-7 left 2
    6-7 right 2
    Difference * *must not exceed 4
    Wing Bending Deformation Check
    4-2 left 4
    6-4 left 5
    5-3 left 4
    7-5 left 5
    4-2 right 4
    6-4 right 5
    5-3 right 4
    7-5 right 5
    Horizontal Stabilizer Deformation Check
    10 left
    10 right
    Difference * *must not exceed 10
    Fuselage Deformation Check
    13 left
    13 right
    Difference * *must not exceed 8
    Symmetry Check
    A left
    A right
    Difference (L - R)* 25
    B left
    B right
    Difference (L - R)* 20
    C left
    C right
    Difference (L - R)* 15
    D left
    D right
    Difference (L - R) Between +50 and +90 mm
    E top
    E bottom
    Difference (T - B) Between 55 and 95 mm
    * Subtract right from left and indicate if the result is positive or negative
    05106

    Figure 4 Recommended Comparison Table

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-05-50-06-00A-282B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-10-07 Page 11


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-05-50-06-00A-282B-A
    LANDING GEAR
    End of data module
    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-10-07 Page 12
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FUSELAGE CARRY THROUGH FRAMES

    GEOMETRY INSPECTION

    Table of Contents Page

    FUSELAGE CARRY THROUGH FRAMES - GEOMETRY INSPECTION................................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 2
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 2
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 3
    6 Lug Gap dimensions............................................................................................... 5

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Jig Assembly LH & RH Lug Bush Fitment.............................................................. 7


    2 Frame 21 and 24 Pin Fitment................................................................................. 8
    3 Lug Gap Identification and Measurements............................................................. 9
    4 Wing Alignment and Longitudinal/Roll Checks....................................................... 10

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-05-50-06-00A-282A-A ALIGNMENT AND SYMMETRY - UNSCHEDULED
    INSPECTIONS
    12-B-57-00-00-00A-313A-A WING AND FUSELAGE FITTINGS - INSPECTION/
    CHECK
    12-B-57-00-00-00A-520A-A LEFT WING – HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR -
    REMOVAL
    12-B-57-00-00-00A-720A-A LEFT WING – HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR -
    INSTALLATION
    12-B-57-00-00-00B-520A-A RIGHT WING – HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR -
    REMOVAL
    12-B-57-00-00-00B-720A-A RIGHT WING – HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR -
    INSTALLATION

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-07-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-12-04 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Jig Kit Assembly LH (Includes Part BM 6107806 1
    items listed below)
    Jig Kit Assembly RH (Includes Part BM 6107807 1
    items listed below)
    Stepped Pin - Frame 21 Upper Part 6107806-05 1 (per kit
    assy)
    Long Pin - Frame 21 Lower Part 6107806-06 1 (per kit
    assy)
    Short Pin - Frame 24 Lower Part 6107806-07 1 (per kit
    assy)
    Knurled Nut Part 6107806-08 1 (per kit
    assy)
    Washer Part 6107806-09 1 (per kit
    assy)
    Bush - Lugs C3 and D3 Part 6107806-10 2 (per kit
    assy)
    Bush - Lugs D1 and D5 Part 6107806-11 2 (per kit
    assy)
    Bush - Lug E2 Part 6107806-12 1 (per kit
    assy)
    Bush - Lug C5 Part 6107806-13 1 (per kit
    assy)
    Bush - Lug C1 Part 6107806-14 1 (per kit
    assy)
    Conical Centre Fittings Part 6107806-20 4 (per kit
    assy)

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-07-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-12-04 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    After a hard landing/ground strike, particularly one bad enough to significantly damage one or both wings,
    the fuselage frames may have been distorted or displaced significantly. This can affect a decision to repair or
    scrap the fuselage. The following procedure provides a means of checking that the alignment of the fuselage
    wing carry-through frames (Frames 21 and 24) conform to the production build tolerances. The check is
    carried out using a pair of dedicated Pilatus jigs.

    Note

    Do the inspection before the aircraft flies again.

    2 Inspection
    2.1
    CAUTION

    THE JIGS ARE PRECISION MADE DELICATE EQUIPMENT AND MUST BE PROTECTED AGAINST
    SHOCKS OR HIGH LOADS. DO NOT USE FORCE TO MAKE THE JIGS FIT DEFORMED
    STRUCTURE. YOU CAN DAMAGE THE JIGS AND/OR THE LUGS ON THE FUSELAGE FRAMES.

    Carefully examine the fuselage belly skin between Frames 21 and 24 for signs of wrinkling, buckling or
    working rivets. Such skin damage indicates that the frames have been laterally displaced.
    2.2 Carefully examine all rivets, stringers, longerons and panels to the fore, aft and side of each frame for
    signs of distortion or cracking.
    2.3 Carefully inspect the bolted joints to the upper sections of Frames 21 and 24 for cracks.
    2.4 It is highly recommended (if the wings are not too damaged) that you do an aircraft alignment check,
    in accordance with 12-B-05-50-06-00A-282A-A before the wings are removed from the aircraft. The
    results, when compared with the production alignment check data (available from Pilatus Customer
    Support), can provide helpful data regarding fuselage alignment or damage.
    3 Inspect the Carry-Through Frames

    Note

    The following inspections require levelling or angular measurements to a high tolerance. A typical digital
    inclinometer is not accurate for some of the following inspections; use an accurate laser levelling system.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-07-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-12-04 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Note

    The following procedures do not check the alignment of the whole fuselage (notably the engine mounts or
    empennage) with the centre fuselage.

    3.1 Aircraft Setup


    3.1.1 Support the fuselage using the Frame 21 hard points and the rear fuselage hard points.
    3.1.2 Remove the wings, AMM 12-B-57-00-00-00A-520A-A (LH Wing) and AMM 12-
    B-57-00-00-00B-520A-A (RH Wing).
    3.1.3 Remove the loose lug bushes.
    3.1.4 Clean the lugs of any dirt or other material that may damage the lug bores.
    3.1.5 Check the loose and bonded bushes for any signs of damage.
    3.1.6 Replace damaged bushes, AMM 12-B-57-00-00-00A-313A-A
    3.2 Fuselage Levelling
    3.2.1 Level the aircraft longitudinally, AMM 12-B-05-50-06-00A-282A-A.
    3.2.2 Level the aircraft laterally, using Frame 21 upper surface, AMM 12-B-05-50-06-00A-282A-A.
    3.2.3 Check the level of Frame 24 upper surface. This must be parallel to Frame 21, within ±0.1
    degree.
    3.3 Interface Geometry
    Install the LH and RH Jig Assemblies to the aircraft as follows:

    CAUTION

    DO NOT FORCE ANY OF THE PINS INTO POSITION AS THIS MAY CAUSE SERIOUS DAMAGE
    TO THE JIGS AND/OR LUGS.

    Note

    Three persons are needed for this procedure - two to support the weight of each jig, while the third
    person inserts the pins (alternatively, a hoist could be used to support the weight of the jig).

    3.3.1 Install all the lug bushes removed at Step 3.1.3.


    3.3.2 Install the Bush - Lug C5 (Pt.No. 6107806-13) Figure 1 [1] into position on the Jig Assembly
    LH Figure 1 [3], upper aft lug Figure 1 [2],orientated as shown: all other jig lugs have bushes
    permanently fitted.
    3.3.3 Install the Bush - Lug C5 (Pt.No. 6107806-13) Figure 1 [1] into position on the Jig Assembly
    RH Figure 1 [5], upper aft lug Figure 1 [4], orientated as shown: all other jig lugs have
    bushes permanently fitted.
    3.3.4 Install the Jig Assembly LH Figure 2 [7] onto the LH fuselage lugs as follows:
    3.3.4.1 Insert pin Figure 2 [2] into Frame 21 upper lugs Figure 2 [3] and pin Figure 2 [8]
    into Frame 24 lower lugs Figure 2 [9].
    3.3.4.2 Insert pin Figure 2 [1] into Frame 21 lower lug Figure 2 [4]. If there are any
    difficulties fitting this pin, consult Pilatus Customer Support for further advice.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-07-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-12-04 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.3.4.3 Install Washer (Pt.No. 6107806-09) Figure 2 [5] and Knurled


    Nut (Pt.No. 6107806-08) Figure 2 [6] onto the end of pin Figure 2 [2] and hand
    tighten. This action locates the jig in the correct fore-aft position.
    3.3.5 Install the Jig Assembly RH Figure 2 [7] to the RH fuselage lugs as follows:
    3.3.5.1 Insert pin Figure 2 [2] into Frame 21 upper lugs Figure 2 [3] and pin Figure 2 [8]
    into Frame 24 lower lugs Figure 2 [9].
    3.3.5.2 Insert pin Figure 2 [1] into the Frame 21 lower lugs Figure 2 [4]. If there are any
    difficulties fitting this pin, consult Pilatus Customer Support for further advice.
    3.3.5.3 Install Washer (Pt.No. 6107806-09) Figure 2 [5] and Knurled
    Nut (Pt.No. 6107806-08) Figure 2 [6] onto the end of pin Figure 2 [2] and hand
    tighten. This action locates the jig in the correct fore-aft position.
    3.3.6 Measure the gaps between the LH and RH Jig Assemblies Figure 3 [1] and the fuselage lugs
    on Frame 21 Figure 3 [2] and Frame 24 Figure 3 [3]. Check that the measurements are
    compliant with the information contained in Fig. 3 and Table 6. Any deviation from these
    dimensions indicates local bending of lugs has occurred.

    Table 6 Lug Gap dimensions


    Lug Gap Dimension (mm)
    Jig Assy Figure 3 [C1] - Frame 21 Upper Figure 3 [C2] 2,5 +0.65 / -0,80mm
    Frame 21 Upper Figure 3 [C2] - Jig Assy Figure 3 [C3] 4,6 +0.40 / -0,30mm
    Jig Assy Figure 3 [C3] - Frame 21 Upper Figure 3 [C4] 2,5 ± 0,10mm
    Frame 21 Upper Figure 3 [C4] - Jig Assy Figure 3 [C5] 4,5 +0,70 / -0,55mm
    Jig Assy Figure 3 [D1] - Frame 21 Lower Figure 3 [D2] 2,5 +0,95 / -1,10mm
    Frame 21 Lower Figure 3 [D2] - Jig Assy Figure 3 [D3] 4,5 +0,70 / -0,60mm
    Jig Assy Figure 3 [D3] - Frame 21 Lower Figure 3 [D4] 2,5 ± 0,40mm
    Frame 21 Lower Figure 3 [D4] - Jig Assy Figure 3 [D5] 4,5 +1,00 / -0,85mm
    Frame 24 Lower Figure 3 [E1] - Jig Assy Figure 3 [E2] 3,0 +0,50 / -0,50mm
    Jig Assy Figure 3 [E2] - Frame 24 Lower Figure 3 [E3] 3,0 +0,50 / -0,50mm
    3.4 Wing alignment Checks
    The following dimensional checks are to make sure that the fuselage lugs will allow the wings to align
    correctly:
    3.4.1 Measure the gap between the face of the LH and RH Jig Assembly upper aft fitting
    Figure 3 [1]) and the corresponding face on the LH and RH Frame 24 upper lug Figure 3 [3].
    The dimensions must be 1mm ± 0,5mm. If the gap is outside of these limits, consult Pilatus
    Customer Support for further advice.
    3.4.2 Check the roll attitude of the LH and RH jigs at surfaces Figure 4 [5] and Figure 4 [6]. These
    surfaces must be 90 degrees ± 0,05 degrees to the top of Frame 21.
    3.4.3 Check the longitudinal level of the LH and RH jigs between surfaces Figure 4 [1] and
    Figure 4 [4], and then between surfaces Figure 4 [2] and Figure 4 [3] respectively. These
    surfaces must be within 0,125 degrees of horizontal, and within 0,25 degrees of each other.
    3.4.4 Insert the Conical Centre Fittings (Pt.No. 6107806-20) Figure 4 [7], Figure 4 [8], Figure 4 [9]
    and Figure 4 [10] into the holes on the lower side of each jig assembly.
    3.4.5 Carefully measure the diagonal distance between the forward RH cone Figure 4 [10] and the
    aft LH cone Figure 4 [8], and then the forward LH cone Figure 4 [7] and aft RH cone
    Figure 4 [9]. These dimensions must be 2152mm ± 1,3mm (see Fig 4).
    4 Close Up
    4.1 Remove the LH and RH Jig Assemblies from the aircraft.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-07-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-12-04 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    4.2 Install the LH wing, AMM 12-B-57-00-00-00A-720A-A.


    4.3 Install the RH wing, AMM 12-B-57-00-00-00B-720A-A.
    4.4 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-07-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-12-04 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    12-A-055007-A-S4080-00016-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Jig Assembly LH & RH Lug Bush Fitment

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-07-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-12-04 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    LH SHOWN
    A RH OPPOSITE

    2
    3

    7
    5

    4
    6

    8
    9

    12-A-055007-A-S4080-00017-A-01-1

    Figure 2 Frame 21 and 24 Pin Fitment

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-07-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-12-04 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    A C

    1
    3

    E1 E2 E3 2 B

    1 E D
    3
    2

    E
    D1 D2 D3 D4 D5

    D
    1

    C 1
    3

    C1 C2 C3 C4 C5
    1 mm
    ± 0.5 mm
    1

    2
    12-A-055007-A-S4080-00023-A-01-1

    Figure 3 Lug Gap Identification and Measurements

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-07-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-12-04 Page 9


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    1

    A
    4

    7 5

    2
    5
    6
    8

    10 6

    2152 mm ± 1.3 mm

    2152 mm ± 1.3 mm

    12-A-055007-A-S4080-00019-A-01-1

    Figure 4 Wing Alignment and Longitudinal/Roll Checks

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-07-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-12-04 Page 10


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-07-00A-282A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-12-04 Page 11
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-07-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-12-04 Page 12


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    MAXIMUM OPERATING SPEED (VMO/MMO) EXCEEDANCE

    UNSCHEDULED INSPECTION

    Table of Contents Page

    MAXIMUM OPERATING SPEED (VMO/MMO) EXCEEDANCE - UNSCHEDULED 1


    INSPECTION..............................................................................................................................

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Vmo/Mmo Exceedance Envelope.......................................................................... 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: All 12-B-05-50-08-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-08-09 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This procedure gives the inspection requirements if an aircraft has exceeded the maximum operating speed
    (Vmo) of 240 KCAS or Mmo of 0,48, whichever is the lesser.
    1.1 If the exceedance is known:
    − to be within the Altitude/KCAS Exceedance Envelope, defined in Fig 1, AND
    − that no vibration or buffeting was experienced during the event, AND
    − there were no other concurrent exceedances,

    do the inspections at Step 2.


    1.2 If the exceedance:
    − is outside the Altitude/KCAS Exceedance Envelope defined in Fig 1, OR
    − if vibration or buffeting was experienced, OR
    − if there were any other concurrent exceedances, OR
    − if the exact details of the exceedance are unknown,

    you must do further inspections for damage. Send details of the exceedance to Pilatus Aircraft Limited
    and request maintenance advice before the aircraft flies again.
    2 Inspections
    2.1 Do these inspections after an aircraft has exceeded the Vmo/Mmo limits (see Step 1.1):
    2.1.1 Do a visual examination of the external surface of the fuselage, wings, horizontal and vertical
    stabilizers for the following types of damage:
    − deformation
    − distortion
    − cracks
    − loose or missing fasteners.
    2.1.2 Do a visual examination of the flight control surfaces; ailerons, spoilers, elevators, rudder
    and flaps for the following damage:
    − deformation
    − distortion
    − cracks
    − loose or missing fasteners
    − security of attachment of the mass balance weights.

    Effectivity: All 12-B-05-50-08-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-08-09 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.1.3 Do a visual examination of the aircraft servicing doors, blade antennae, cowlings and landing
    gear doors; their hinge fittings, latches, mechanisms and their attachment to the aircraft
    structure for the following types of damage:
    − deformation
    − distortion
    − cracks
    − loose or missing fasteners.
    2.1.4 Make sure that the aircraft servicing doors, cowlings and the landing gear doors, close
    correctly against the frame structure.
    2.1.5 Do visual and operational control checks for full and free movement of the following control
    surfaces:
    − the ailerons
    − the elevators
    − the rudder.
    2.1.6 Do an extension and retraction of the flaps and do a visual check for the following:
    − correct symmetrical extension and retraction.
    − that the operational speed of the flap drive motor is constant, with no difference of speed
    of operation during the extension or retraction cycles of the flaps.
    2.2 If any damage is found, before you fly the aircraft again, you must advise Pilatus Aircraft Limited of the
    damage found, and request maintenance advice.

    Effectivity: All 12-B-05-50-08-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-08-09 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    V /M EXCEEDANCE ENVELOPE
    176 185 MO MO
    30000

    196 206
    25000
    DENSITY ALTITUDE (ft)

    20000
    218 229

    252
    15000
    240

    10000

    5000

    0
    170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270

    M 0.4800
    KCAS
    M 0.5035
    KCAS ENVELOPE (AFM)
    EXCEEDANCE ENVELOPE

    12-A-055008-A-S4080-00021-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Vmo/Mmo Exceedance Envelope

    Effectivity: All 12-B-05-50-08-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-08-09 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: All 12-B-05-50-08-00A-282A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-08-09 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: All 12-B-05-50-08-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-08-09 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    MAXIMUM LANDING GEAR OPERATING SPEED (VLO) EXCEEDANCE

    UNSCHEDULED INSPECTION

    Table of Contents Page

    MAXIMUM LANDING GEAR OPERATING SPEED (VLO) EXCEEDANCE - UNSCHEDULED 1


    INSPECTION..............................................................................................................................

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-05-50-00-00A-018A-A UNSCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS -
    INTRODUCTION
    12-B-32-30-00-00A-903A-A EXTENSION AND RETRACTION – HYDRAULIC
    LANDING GEAR - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-32-30-00-00A-903B-A EXTENSION AND RETRACTION – ELECTRO
    MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-09-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-04-03 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Refer to AMM 12-B-05-50-00-00A-018A-A. If the aircraft has exceeded the maximum landing gear operating
    speed (VLO) do the inspections that follow:
    1.1 Examine these landing gear components for damage or distortion:
    − Nose landing gear drag link assembly
    − Nose landing gear actuator assembly
    − Left and right main landing gear actuator assembly.
    1.2 Damage or distortion is not allowed. Replace damaged or distorted parts as needed.
    1.3 Do the adjustment/test of the extension and retraction system, AMM 12-B-32-30-00-00A-903A-A or
    12-B-32-30-00-00A-903B-A.

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-09-00A-282A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-04-03 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    MAXIMUM LANDING GEAR OPERATING SPEED (VLO) EXCEEDANCE –


    ELECTRO MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR

    UNSCHEDULED INSPECTION

    Table of Contents Page

    MAXIMUM LANDING GEAR OPERATING SPEED (VLO) EXCEEDANCE – ELECTRO 1


    MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR - UNSCHEDULED INSPECTION...........................................

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-05-50-00-00A-018A-A UNSCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS -
    INTRODUCTION
    12-B-32-30-00-00A-903B-A EXTENSION AND RETRACTION – ELECTRO
    MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-05-50-09-00A-282B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-05-03 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Refer to AMM 12-B-05-50-00-00A-018A-A. If the aircraft has exceeded the maximum landing gear operating
    speed (VLO) do the inspections that follow:
    1.1 Examine these landing gear components for damage or distortion:
    − Nose landing gear drag link assembly
    − Nose landing gear actuator assembly
    − Left and right main landing gear actuator assembly
    − Left and right main landing gear drag link and folding strut assembly.
    1.2 Damage or distortion is not allowed. Replace damaged or distorted parts as needed.
    1.3 Do the adjustment/test of the extension and retraction system, AMM 12-B-32-30-00-00A-903B-A.

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-05-50-09-00A-282B-A
    LANDING GEAR
    End of data module
    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-05-03 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    MAXIMUM LANDING GEAR EXTENDED SPEED (VLE) EXCEEDANCE

    UNSCHEDULED INSPECTION

    Table of Contents Page

    MAXIMUM LANDING GEAR EXTENDED SPEED (VLE) EXCEEDANCE - UNSCHEDULED 1


    INSPECTION..............................................................................................................................

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-05-50-00-00A-018A-A UNSCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS -
    INTRODUCTION
    12-B-05-50-08-00A-282A-A MAXIMUM OPERATING SPEED (VMO/MMO)
    EXCEEDANCE - UNSCHEDULED INSPECTION
    12-B-32-30-00-00A-903A-A EXTENSION AND RETRACTION – HYDRAULIC
    LANDING GEAR - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-32-30-00-00A-903B-A EXTENSION AND RETRACTION – ELECTRO
    MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-10-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-04-03 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Refer to AMM 12-B-05-50-00-00A-018A-A. If the aircraft has exceeded the maximum landing gear extended
    speed:
    1.1 Do the maximum operating speed exceedance inspection, AMM 12-B-05-50-08-00A-282A-A.
    1.2 Examine the main and the nose landing gear doors for:
    − distortion
    − loose/missing fasteners
    − excessive play.
    1.3 Examine the brake pipes for:
    − security
    − chafing
    − leaks.
    1.4 Damage is not allowed. Replace parts as needed.
    1.5 Do the adjustment/test of the extension and retraction system, AMM 12-B-32-30-00-00A-903A-A or
    12-B-32-30-00-00A-903B-A.

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-10-00A-282A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-04-03 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    MAXIMUM LANDING GEAR EXTENDED SPEED (VLE) EXCEEDANCE –


    ELECTRO MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR

    UNSCHEDULED INSPECTION

    Table of Contents Page

    MAXIMUM LANDING GEAR EXTENDED SPEED (VLE) EXCEEDANCE – ELECTRO 1


    MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR - UNSCHEDULED INSPECTION...........................................

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-05-50-00-00A-018A-A UNSCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS -
    INTRODUCTION
    12-B-05-50-08-00A-282A-A MAXIMUM OPERATING SPEED (VMO/MMO)
    EXCEEDANCE - UNSCHEDULED INSPECTION
    12-B-32-30-00-00A-903B-A EXTENSION AND RETRACTION – ELECTRO
    MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-05-50-10-00A-282B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-05-03 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Refer to AMM 12-B-05-50-00-00A-018A-A. If the aircraft has exceeded the maximum landing gear extended
    speed:
    1.1 Do the maximum operating speed exceedance inspection, AMM 12-B-05-50-08-00A-282A-A.
    1.2 Examine the main and the nose landing gear doors for:
    − distortion
    − loose/missing fasteners
    − excessive play.
    1.3 Examine the brake pipes for:
    − security
    − chafing
    − leaks.
    1.4 Damage is not allowed. Replace parts as needed.
    1.5 Do the adjustment/test of the extension and retraction system, AMM 12-B-32-30-00-00A-903B-A.

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-05-50-10-00A-282B-A
    LANDING GEAR
    End of data module
    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-05-03 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    TAIL–DOWN DAMAGE INSPECTION

    UNSCHEDULED INSPECTION

    Table of Contents Page

    TAIL–DOWN DAMAGE INSPECTION - UNSCHEDULED INSPECTION.................................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 2
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 2
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Rudder Control Cables – Adjustment .................................................................... 6


    2 Cable Quadrant – Removal/Installation.................................................................. 7
    3 Rudder Hinge Fittings – Removal/Installation........................................................ 8
    4 Vertical Stabilizer Attachment and Spars............................................................... 9

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A JACKING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-27-30-00-00A-903A-A ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/
    TEST
    12-B-27-40-00-00A-903A-A HORIZONTAL STABILIZER TRIM - ADJUSTMENT/
    TEST
    12-B-51-00-00-00A-353A-A STRUCTURES – STANDARD PRACTICES - EDDY
    CURRENT INSPECTION
    12-B-51-10-00-00A-041A-A INVESTIGATION, CLEAN–UP AND AERODYNAMIC
    SMOOTHNESS - DESCRIPTION
    12-B-51-60-03-00A-276A-A RUDDER - BALANCE
    12-B-51-70-00-00A-041A-A REPAIRS - DESCRIPTION
    12-B-51-70-04-00A-663A-A COMPOSITE COMPONENTS - STANDARD REPAIR
    PROCEDURES
    12-B-53-30-20-00A-664A-A REAR FUSELAGE – STRAKES - SPECIAL REPAIR
    PROCEDURE
    12-B-55-40-01-00A-920A-A RUDDER - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-11-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-01 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Inspection equipment Part Olympus NORTEC 2000 or 1
    equivalent
    Safety clip (circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.65 As
    open) required
    Warning sign (DO NOT Part Local supply As
    OPERATE THE FLIGHT required
    CONTROLS)

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Cotter pin CSN 55400001 055 1
    Cotter pin CSN 27200001 075 2

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Bearing CSN 55400002 115 1
    Bolt CSN 55400001 050 1
    Bolt CSN 55400001 070 1
    Bolt CSN 55300001 140 1
    Retaining ring CSN 55-40-00-02-110 1
    Nut CSN 55-40-00-01-060 1
    Nut CSN 55-30-00-01-150 1
    Washer CSN 55-30-00-01-145 1
    Washer CSN 55-40-00-01-065 1
    Locking clips CSN 27200001 065 4

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-11-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-01 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    The aircraft tail may hit the ground when loading the aircraft without the tail support stand in position. As a
    consequence of a tail-down incidence, the rear fuselage and rudder mounting structure require a detailed
    inspection.
    This inspection procedure gives the inspection procedure for aircraft that have experienced a tail-down
    incidence when on the ground.
    To find, identify and make an estimate of the damage to the aircraft structure, refer to SRM
    12-B-51-10-00-00A-041A-A.
    For small damage repairs and approved repairs to the aircraft structure and to composite parts, refer to SRM
    12-B-51-70-00-00A-041A-A.
    Even if there is no damage, do the functional test of the rudder control system (refer to AMM 12-
    B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A).
    2 During the Inspection Procedure
    If you find damage during this procedure, you must contact Pilatus Aircraft Ltd.
    3 Preparation
    3.1 Lift the aircraft on jacks (refer to AMM 12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A).
    3.2 Make sure the flaps are set to 0°.
    3.3 Open and install a Safety clip (circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.65) on this circuit breaker:
    − A/P SERVO (AVIONIC 1 BUS)
    3.4 Put up a Warning sign (DO NOT OPERATE THE FLIGHT CONTROLS) (Pt.No. Local supply) in the
    flight compartment.
    3.5 Remove the horizontal stabilizer fairing and the rear vertical stabilizer fairing (32 CT).
    3.6 Open access panels 11 AL, 31 AB, 32 AL, 32 AR, 32 CL and 32 CR.
    4 Procedure
    4.1 Remove the four locking clips Figure 1 [1] from the turnbuckles Figure 1 [2]. Discard the locking clips.
    4.2 Loosen the turnbuckles Figure 1 [2].
    4.3 Remove the rudder from the aircraft (refer to AMM 12-B-55-40-01-00A-920A-A).
    4.4 Remove the two cotter pins Figure 2 [8] from the control cables Figure 2 [9]. Discard the cotter pins.
    4.5 Disconnect the rudder cables Figure 2 [9] from the cable quadrant Figure 2 [2].
    4.6 Remove the cotter pin Figure 2 [7] nut Figure 2 [6] bolt Figure 2 [1] and washer Figure 2 [2].
    4.7 Remove the cable quadrant Figure 2 [3]. Discard the nut Figure 2 [6], bolt Figure 2 [1] and washer
    Figure 2 [2].
    4.8 Remove the bearing Figure 2 [4] from the cable quadrant Figure 2 [3]. Discard the bearing Figure 2 [4]
    and the retaining ring Figure 2 [5].
    4.9 Remove the nuts Figure 3 [7] washers Figure 3 [6] bolts Figure 3 [2] and bonding leads Figure 3 [3].
    Remove the rudder stop fitting/assembly Figure 3 [1].
    4.10 Disassemble the rudder stop Figure 3 [15].

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-11-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-01 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    4.11 Remove the hinge bracket Figure 3 [4].


    4.12 Remove the hinge support fitting Figure 3 [5]. Discard the bolt Figure 3 [12], nut Figure 3 [10] and
    washer Figure 3 [11].
    5 Required Inspection

    Note

    NDT inspection (eddy current or dye penetrant) is used to detect surface cracks in metals. No cracks are
    allowed. If cracks are found, replace the component or contact Pilatus. For information on the NDT inspection
    procedure, refer to SRM 12-B-51-00-00-00A-353A-A.

    Note

    Crack inspection by NDT (eddy current or dye penetrant) is required for specific items as identified with
    (NDT) in the following procedure. In addition to the specific NDT inspection all items must have a visual
    inspection. If a crack is suspected from visual inspection, do the NDT inspection to confirm the result.

    Note

    If composite material has minor damage, such as cracks, scratches, surface delamination and/or abrasion,
    use the standard repair procedures given in SRM 12-B-51-70-04-00A-663A-A.

    5.1 Examine the cable quadrant and bearing housing for cracks (NDT) , deformation and/or distortion.
    5.2 Examine the rudder stop fitting/assembly Figure 3 [1] for cracks (NDT) or any damage.
    5.3 Examine the rudder for signs of cracks or deformation.
    5.4 Examine the hinge bracket Figure 3 [4] for signs of cracks (NDT) and/or distortion.
    5.5 Examine the hinge support fitting Figure 3 [5] for signs of cracks (NDT) and/or distortion.
    5.6 Examine the strakes for damage. Use the SRM12-B-53-30-20-00A-664A-A to repair any damage or to
    replace the strakes.
    5.7 Examine the internal structure where the strake spigot beams attach to the fuselage frames, FR 38 to
    FR 40. Check for cracks and/or deformation.
    5.8 Examine the lower fuselage area for damage. Examine the antenna(s) to make sure they did not hit
    the ground and do not have damage.
    5.9 Examine the sidewalls of the rear fuselage structure and the rear fuselage at frame 43 for signs of
    cracks and/or deformation.
    5.10 Examine the top hinge bracket Figure 4 [3] for cracks (NDT), deformation and/or displacement.
    Examine the bearing Figure 4 [4] and the attachment of the top hinge bracket to the structure.
    5.11 Examine the vertical stabilizer spars for cracks (NDT) and/or deformation in the attachment area at
    frame 43.
    5.12 Examine the vertical stabilizer outer surface for cracks, deformation and skin distortion.
    5.13 Examine the vertical stabilizer fairing 32 CT for damage.
    5.14 Examine the composite lower rudder fairing 32 AB for damage.
    5.15 Look at the rudder mechanism below the cockpit floor and examine the rudder stops for damage.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-11-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-01 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    6 Installation
    6.1 Install the hinge support fitting Figure 3 [5] to the fuselage structure with a new Bolt Figure 3 [12] new
    Washer Figure 3 [11] and new Nut Figure 3 [10].
    6.2 Install the hinge bracket Figure 3 [4] to the fuselage structure with the bolts Figure 3 [14] washers
    Figure 3 [13] washers Figure 3 [9] and nuts Figure 3 [8].
    6.3 Assemble the rudder stop Figure 3 [15] to the rudder stop assembly Figure 3 [1].
    6.4 Install the rudder stop fitting/assembly Figure 3 [1] and the bonding leads Figure 3 [3].
    6.5 Install a new Bearing Figure 2 [4] in the cable quadrant Figure 2 [3]. Secure with a new Retaining ring
    Figure 2 [5].
    6.6 Install the cable quadrant Figure 2 [3]. Use a new Bolt Figure 2 [1], new Washer Figure 2 [2] new
    Nut Figure 2 [6] and a new Cotter pin (Pt.No. CSN 55400001 055) Figure 2 [7].
    6.7 Attach the rudder cables Figure 2 [9] to the cable quadrant Figure 2 [3] and secure each rudder cable
    with a new Cotter pin (Pt.No. CSN 27200001 075) Figure 2 [8].
    6.8
    Note

    If a new rudder is installed, make sure the painted rudder is balanced before installation. To balance
    the rudder, refer to SRM 12-B-51-60-03-00A-276A-A.

    Note

    Use a new Bolt Figure 4 [2] when you attach the rudder to the top hinge.

    Install the rudder (refer to AMM 12-B-55-40-01-00A-920A-A). After installation of the rudder, do an
    adjustment and test of the rudder control system (refer to AMM 12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A).
    6.9 Do the functional test of the rudder control system (refer to AMM 12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A).
    6.10 Install the rear vertical stabilizer fairing 32 CT and the horizontal stabilizer fairing.
    6.11 Do the functional test of the elevator control system, AMM 12-B-27-30-00-00A-903A-A.
    6.12 Do the operational test of the horizontal stabilizer trim, AMM 12-B-27-40-00-00A-903A-A.
    6.13 Close access panels 31 AB, 32 AL, 32 AR, 32 CL and 32 CR.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-11-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-01 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1
    2

    1
    2

    12-A-055011-A-S4080-00023-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Rudder Control Cables – Adjustment

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-11-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-01 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A A

    B
    3

    D
    4

    D 5

    C
    9

    12-B-055011-A-S4080-00028-A-01-1

    Figure 2 Cable Quadrant – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-11-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-01 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    A

    1
    2

    3
    4
    15

    6
    8 7
    5
    14 9

    13

    12
    10
    11

    12-B-055011-A-S4080-00027-A-01-1

    Figure 3 Rudder Hinge Fittings – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-11-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-01 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    B
    A
    A

    B
    1

    12-A-055011-A-S4080-00026-A-01-1

    Figure 4 Vertical Stabilizer Attachment and Spars

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-11-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-01 Page 9


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-11-00A-282A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-01 Page 10
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    AFTER A FLIGHT THROUGH VOLCANIC ASH OR SMOKE

    UNSCHEDULED INSPECTION

    Table of Contents Page

    AFTER A FLIGHT THROUGH VOLCANIC ASH OR SMOKE - UNSCHEDULED 1


    INSPECTION..............................................................................................................................

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 2
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-05-50-05-00A-282A-A LIGHTNING STRIKE - UNSCHEDULED INSPECTIONS
    12-B-12-20-01-00A-256A-A AIRCRAFT EXTERIOR - POLISH AND APPLY
    SEALING
    12-B-12-20-01-00A-902A-A AIRCRAFT EXTERIOR WASHING - SERVICING
    12-B-21-30-02-00A-250A-A SAFETY VALVE - CLEAN
    12-B-21-30-02-00A-920A-A SAFETY VALVE - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-21-30-03-00A-920A-A OUTFLOW VALVE - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-21-40-02-00A-313A-A REFRIGERATION PACK - INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-21-40-03-00A-250A-A WATER SEPARATOR - CLEAN
    12-B-21-40-03-00A-920A-A WATER SEPARATOR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-34-11-00-00A-903A-A PITOT STATIC SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903T-A POWER PLANT TEST 19 – ENGINE STOP TIME -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-15-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-09-20 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Soft bristle brush Part Local Supply As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 If the aircraft has flown through suspected, or actual volcanic ash or smoke, the following examinations
    should be carried out before further flight.
    If any damage is found, use the aircraft AMM and/or SRM to do general repairs. If no repair procedure is
    available, contact Pilatus Aircraft Ltd.
    2 Exterior Fuselage
    2.1 Do a visual inspection of the areas that follow, for abrasion, contamination and/or damage:
    − Exterior fuselage
    − Stabilizers
    − Wings
    − De-ice boots
    − Flight control surfaces
    − Antennas
    − Windshields
    − Side windows
    − DV windows
    − Cabin windows
    − Wheels
    − All exterior lights
    2.2 Examine the AoA probes as follows:

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-15-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-09-20 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.2.1 Make sure that the AoA probes are free from abrasion, contamination or damage.
    2.2.2 Make sure that the AoA probes are not seized and can move freely.
    3 Aircraft Wash
    3.1 Do a wash of the aircraft exterior, refer AMM 12-B-12-20-01-00A-902A-A.
    3.2 Do Step 2.1 again.
    3.3 If necessary, polish and seal the aircraft external surface, refer AMM 12-B-12-20-01-00A-256A-A.
    4 Internal Fuselage
    4.1 Do a visual inspection of all the aircraft compartments for contamination in the areas where there are
    access doors.
    4.2 Do a visual inspection of all the aircraft compartments for contamination in the areas where the
    fuselage skin has venting and/or NACA inlets.
    5 Engine Area
    5.1 Do a visual inspection of the Environmental Control System (ECS) heat exchanger matrix for
    contamination, refer AMM 12-B-21-40-02-00A-313A-A.
    5.2 If the ECS heat exchanger matrix is contaminated, clean it with a Soft bristle brush (Pt.No. Local
    Supply).
    5.3 Remove the ECS water separator, refer AMM 12-B-21-40-03-00A-920A-A.
    5.4 Do a visual inspection of the ECS water separator for contamination. If contamination is found, do this
    work:
    5.4.1 Clean the separator, refer AMM 12-B-21-40-03-00A-250A-A.
    5.4.2 Install the separator, refer AMM 12-B-21-40-03-00A-920A-A.
    5.5
    Note

    Do a rinse of the air intake and inertial separator before you do an engine compressor and turbine
    wash.

    Do a visual inspection of the air intake and inertial separator for contamination. If contamination is
    found, rinse with clean water.
    5.6 Do a visual inspection of the engine oil cooler assembly as follows:
    5.6.1 Make sure that the outlet door has full and free movement.
    5.6.2 If necessary, clean the oil cooler heat exchanger matrix using a Soft bristle
    brush (Pt.No. Local Supply).
    5.7 Do a visual inspection of the propeller for abrasion, contamination and/or damage.
    6 Cabin Pressurization
    6.1 Do a visual inspection through the inlet valve of the cabin pressurization system for contamination of
    these components:
    − Outflow valve
    − Safety valves
    6.2 If contamination is found, do as follows:
    − Remove the outflow valve, refer AMM 12-B-21-30-03-00A-920A-A and clean as necessary.
    − Remove the safety valve, refer AMM to 12-B-21-30-02-00A-920A-A.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-15-00A-282A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-09-20 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − Clean the safety valve, refer AMM 12-B-21-30-02-00A-250A-A.


    7 Pitot/Static System
    7.1 Make sure that the Pitot/Static system is free from contamination as follows:
    7.1.1 Disconnect the Pitot/Static system from the aircraft equipment.
    7.1.2 Remove the Pitot/Static system drain traps.
    7.1.3 Blow clean dry low pressure air through the Pitot/Static lines from the pitot heads and static
    ports.
    7.1.4 Install the Pitot/Static system drain traps.
    7.1.5 Connect the Pitot/Static system to the aircraft equipment.
    7.2 Do a Pitot/Static system leak check, refer AMM 12-B-34-11-00-00A-903A-A.
    8 Detailed Examination/Test
    8.1 Do an operational test of the aircraft flight controls to make sure that movement is full, free and
    smooth.
    8.2 If the aircraft has, or is suspected to have been struck by a coronal discharge (St. Elmo's Fire), refer
    AMM 12-B-05-50-05-00A-282A-A.
    8.3 Inspect the engine, refer P&WC EMM 72-00-00, Unscheduled Inspection - Aircraft Flown Through
    Volcanic Ash or Smoke.
    8.4 Do Step 5.3 and Step 5.4 again.
    8.5 Do the ECS functional test, refer AMM 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903T-A.

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-05-50-15-00A-282A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-09-20 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    DIMENSIONS AND ZONES – GENERAL

    DESCRIPTION

    Table of Contents Page

    DIMENSIONS AND ZONES – GENERAL - DESCRIPTION...................................................... 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1
    1.1 Dimensions And Zones.......................................................................................... 1
    1.2 Access Panels........................................................................................................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-06-10-00-00A-040A-A DIMENSIONS AND ZONES - DESCRIPTION
    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A ACCESS PROVISION – HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR
    - DESCRIPTION

    Description

    1 General

    1.1 Dimensions And Zones


    (Refer to DM 12-B-06-10-00-00A-040A-A)
    This document gives the primary dimensions and structural zones of the aircraft.

    1.2 Access Panels


    (Refer to DM 12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A)
    The access panels and doors give access to system components or aircraft structure. This document gives the
    location of each access panel and door and the components that they give access to.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-06-00-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 1
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-06-00-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    DIMENSIONS AND ZONES

    DESCRIPTION

    Table of Contents Page

    DIMENSIONS AND ZONES - DESCRIPTION........................................................................... 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1
    2 Dimensions (Ref. ) ................................................................................................. 1
    3 Structural Parts (Ref. )............................................................................................ 3
    4 Aircraft Zones (Ref. and )....................................................................................... 5

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Dimensions and Areas – Dimensions..................................................................... 2


    2 Dimensions and Areas – Structure Identification.................................................... 4
    3 Aircraft Primary Zones............................................................................................ 6
    4 Aircraft Secondary Zones....................................................................................... 7

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description

    1 General
    This document gives the primary dimensions and structural zones of the aircraft.

    2 Dimensions (Ref. Fig. 1)


    The dimensions of the aircraft are given in feet-inches and in meters. The measurement from the ground to the top
    of the horizontal stabilizer is correct when the aircraft is on the ground, the fuel tanks are empty and one person is
    in the flight compartment. The measurement between the centers of the nose and main landing gears is correct
    when the aircraft is off the ground. Where applicable, other measurements are correct when the aircraft is on the
    ground and the fuel tanks are empty.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-06-10-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    NOTE:
    WINGSPAN DIMENSION IS IN
    A FULLY FUELED CONDITION

    5 ft 6 in
    (1,69 m)

    53 ft 4 in 17 ft 1 in
    (16,28 m) (5,20 m)

    14 ft
    6 ft
    (4,26 m)
    (1,83 m)

    11 ft 5 in
    (3,48 m)
    47 ft 3 in
    (14,40 m)

    8 ft 9 in
    (2,67 m)

    14 ft 10 in
    (4,53 m) 12-B-061000-A-S4080-01070-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Dimensions and Areas – Dimensions

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-06-10-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3 Structural Parts (Ref. Fig. 2)


    The frames in the fuselage and the ribs in the wings and the vertical and horizontal stabilizers are identified by
    numbers to make the location of structure and components easier.
    The first frame of the fuselage is frame 10, the front pressure bulkhead, and the last frame is frame 43.
    The first rib of each wing is rib 1, at the wing root, and the last rib is rib 20, at the end of the wing. A wing tip is
    installed outboard of this rib.
    The first rib of the vertical stabilizer is rib 1, at the bottom, and the last rib is rib 6, at the top.
    The ribs of the horizontal stabilizer are measured in millimeters from its center, rib 0. The last ribs of the horizontal
    stabilizer are ribs 2269, at each tip.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-06-10-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    0
    105
    300
    520
    1 780
    2 1070
    1360
    3
    1660
    4
    1960
    5
    2269
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19 6
    20 5
    4
    3
    2
    1

    10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 37 38 39 40
    11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35

    41 42 43
    06102

    Figure 2 Dimensions and Areas – Structure Identification

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-06-10-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    4 Aircraft Zones (Ref. Fig. 3 and Fig. 4)


    The aircraft is divided into zones that can be used to give the location of areas or components. The largest areas of
    the aircraft are the primary zones. Each primary zone is divided into smaller areas that are the secondary zones.
    The access panels in a secondary zone take the number of that zone.
    The primary zones are:
    − Zone 10 Fuselage below the floor
    − Zone 20 Fuselage above the floor
    − Zone 30 Empennage
    − Zone 40 Powerplant
    − Zone 50 Left wing
    − Zone 60 Right wing
    − Zone 70 Landing gear and doors

    The secondary zones are:


    − Zone 11 Flight compartment below the floor
    − Zone 12 Passenger compartment below the floor
    − Zone 21 Flight compartment above the floor
    − Zone 22 Passenger compartment above the floor
    − Zone 23 Passenger/crew door
    − Zone 24 Cargo door
    − Zone 31 Rear fuselage
    − Zone 32 Vertical stabilizer
    − Zone 33 Horizontal stabilizer left
    − Zone 34 Horizontal stabilizer right
    − Zone 41 Propeller
    − Zone 42 Forward engine-compartment
    − Zone 43 Rear engine-compartment
    − Zone 51 Left wing inboard
    − Zone 52 Left wing outboard
    − Zone 61 Right wing inboard
    − Zone 62 Right wing outboard
    − Zone 71 Nose landing gear and doors
    − Zone 72 Left main landing gear and door
    − Zone 73 Right main landing gear and door

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-06-10-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PRIMARY
    ZONE 60

    PRIMARY
    ZONE 50

    PRIMARY
    ZONE 40 PRIMARY ZONE 20 PRIMARY ZONE 30

    PRIMARY ZONE 70

    PRIMARY ZONE 10
    06103

    Figure 3 Aircraft Primary Zones

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-06-10-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    ZONE 62

    RIB 10

    ZONE 61

    ZONE 34

    ZONE 33

    ZONE 51

    RIB 10

    ZONE 52

    ZONE 32
    ZONE ZONE
    43 21 ZONE 22

    ZONE 23 ZONE 24
    ZONE
    41

    ZONE
    42 ZONE ZONE 12 ZONE 31
    11
    FRAME 10 FRAME 16 FRAME 36 FRAME 43
    06108

    ZONE 73 ZONE 71 ZONE 72

    Figure 4 Aircraft Secondary Zones

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-06-10-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 7
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-06-10-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    ACCESS PROVISION – HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR

    DESCRIPTION

    Table of Contents Page

    ACCESS PROVISION – HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR - DESCRIPTION............................... 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 2
    2 Access Panels........................................................................................................ 2
    2.1 Zone 11 - Flight Compartment Below The Floor.................................................... 2
    2.2 Zone 12 - Cargo Compartment Below The Floor................................................... 3
    2.3 Zone 21 - Flight Compartment Above The Floor.................................................... 4
    2.4 Zone 22 - Passenger Compartment Above The Floor............................................ 4
    2.5 Zone 31 - Rear Fuselage........................................................................................ 5
    2.6 Zone 32 - Vertical Stabilizer................................................................................... 5
    2.7 Zone 33 - Horizontal Stabilizer Left........................................................................ 5
    2.8 Zone 34 - Horizontal Stabilizer Right...................................................................... 5
    2.9 Zone 41 - Propeller................................................................................................. 6
    2.10 Zone 42 - Forward Engine-Compartment............................................................... 6
    2.11 Zone 43 - Rear Engine-Compartment.................................................................... 6
    2.12 Zone 51 - Left Wing Inboard................................................................................... 6
    2.13 Zone 52 - Left Outboard Wing................................................................................ 7
    2.14 Zone 61 - Right Wing Inboard................................................................................ 7
    2.15 Zone 62 - Right Wing Outboard.............................................................................. 8
    3 Drain Holes ............................................................................................................ 16

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Left and Right Side External Access Panels – Panel Identification........................ 9


    2 External Upper Surface Access Panels – Panel Identification............................... 10
    3 External Lower Surface Access Panels – Panel Identification............................... 11
    4 Left Wing Access Panels – Panel Identification..................................................... 12
    5 Right Wing Access Panels – Panel Identification................................................... 13
    6 Flight and Cargo Compartment Access Panels – Panel Identification................... 14
    7 Cargo Compartment Access Panels – Panel Identification.................................... 15
    8 Drain Holes – Location........................................................................................... 17

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-06-10-00-00A-040A-A DIMENSIONS AND ZONES - DESCRIPTION

    Effectivity: HYDRAULIC LANDING


    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A
    GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-02 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Description

    1 General
    The access panels and doors give access to system components or aircraft structure. This document gives the
    location of each access panel and door and the components that they give access to.
    Access doors give access to servicing points and are usually hinged and have quick-release catches. Access
    panels give access for maintenance or inspection and are usually attached with screws. Some panels have seals
    which must be examined for damage before the access panel is installed.
    Before the installation of access panels, check the condition of the fasteners. Replace damaged or corroded
    fasteners. If needed, lubricate the panel fasteners with CPC-temporary P10-001 (or equivalent) before installation.
    The bottom skin panels of the aircraft have drain holes and there are two fuel drains in the inner bottom skin of
    each wing. The location of the drain holes and drain valves are shown in Fig. 8.

    2 Access Panels
    A number identifies each access panel. The number has three parts:
    − The number of the secondary zone, refer to AMM 12-B-06-10-00-00A-040A-A
    − The letter in the sequence of the access panels in the secondary zone
    − The letter for the position of the access panel in the secondary zone.

    The letters for the different positions in the secondary zone are:
    − L Left
    − R Right
    − B Bottom
    − T Top
    − Z Internal.

    2.1 Zone 11 - Flight Compartment Below The Floor


    Panel No. Gives Access To
    Figure 1 [11 AL] Rudder cable system, nose-wheel steering system, fuel check valves, fuel
    shut-off valve, air separator and fuel low-pressure switch.
    Figure 1 [11 BL] Fuel filter element, air separator, fuel low-pressure switch and maintenance
    shutoff valve.
    Figure 3 [11 CL] Fuel pipes.
    Figure 1 [11 AR] Oxygen cylinder, safety shut-off valve, and pressure regulator (airfoil de-ice
    system).
    Figure 1 [11 BR] Oxygen cylinder, discharge indicator, charging pressure gage, charging
    valve, second ATC antenna and pressure reducing valve.
    Figure 6 [11 AZ] Safety valve, elevator cable system and pitot static drains.
    Figure 6 [11 BZ] Plenum chamber, flow control valve, aileron cable system and windshield de-
    ice controller.
    Figure 6 [11 CZ] Outflow valve.
    Figure 6 [11 DZ] LH and RH Relay panels, Cabin Pressure Control Unit, Cockpit light dim unit,
    Stick Pusher Computer.

    Effectivity: HYDRAULIC LANDING


    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A
    GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-02 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.2 Zone 12 - Cargo Compartment Below The Floor


    Panel No. Gives Access To
    Figure 3 [12 AB]
    Figure 3 [12 BB]
    Figure 1 [12 AL]
    Figure 1 [12 BL] Left flap drive-shaft, left inboard flap screw-actuator, hydraulic power pack,
    accumulator, service selector valve, power pack motor and system pressure
    switch.
    Figure 1 [12 CL]
    Figure 3 [12 DL]
    Figure 3 [12 EL] Hydraulic power pack, accumulator, service selector valve, power pack
    motor, hydraulic low-pressure switch and return line filter. Left pitot drain trap
    Figure 3 [12 FL] Hydraulic power pack.
    Figure 1 [12 AR] Ejector flow-control valves.
    Figure 1 [12 BR] Ejector flow-control valves, right inboard flap screw-actuator.
    Figure 1 [12 CR]
    Figure 3 [12 DR]
    Figure 3 [12 ER] Right pitot drain trap
    Figure 3 [12 FR]
    Figure 6 [12 AZ] Frames 16 thru 21 left, aileron and rudder cable systems, Hydraulic power
    relay.
    Figure 6 [12 BZ] Frames 18 thru 21 center, Modular Avionics Unit, EPS, radar altimeter
    antennas, elevator, rudder and aileron cable systems.
    Figure 6 [12 CZ] Frames 16 thru 21 right, elevator control systems.
    Figure 6 [12 DZ] Frames 21 thru 24 left, aileron and rudder cable systems, underfloor
    temperature sensor.
    Figure 6 [12 EZ] Frames 21 thru 24 center, roll actuator, trim adaptor, stick pusher servo,
    probes de-ice control panels, airfoil de-ice timer, aileron elevator and rudder
    cable systems.
    Figure 6 [12 FZ] Frames 21 thru 24 right, airfoil de-ice timer, stick pusher servo, elevator cable
    system.
    Figure 6 [12 GZ] Frames 24 thru 29 left, TAWS/TCAS configuration module, left flap drive-
    shaft and rudder cable system.
    Figure 6 [12 HZ] Frames 24 thru 29 center, flap power drive-unit, left and right flap drive
    shafts, ADAHRU, DME unit, FCWU, TAS/TAWS processor, Rad Alt
    transceiver, FCMU, XM Satellite processor, underfloor heater and rudder and
    elevator cable systems.
    Figure 6 [12 IZ] Frames 24 thru 29 right, right flap drive shaft and elevator cable system.
    Figure 6 [12 JZ] Frames 29 thru 34 left, rudder cable system
    Figure 6 [12 KZ] Frames 29 thru 34 center, cabin heater and relay, HF Amplifier, 110 VAC
    static inverter, EGPWS computer, HF Receiver and rudder and elevator
    cable systems.
    Figure 6 [12 LZ] Frames 29 thru 34 right, elevator cable system
    Figure 6 [12 MZ] Frames 34 thru 36 center, rudder and elevator cable systems, Stormscope
    processor.

    Effectivity: HYDRAULIC LANDING


    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A
    GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-02 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.3 Zone 21 - Flight Compartment Above The Floor


    Panel No. Gives Access To
    Figure 1 [21 AL] Attachment bolts for the top engine-mounting frame.
    Figure 1 [21 AR] Attachment bolts for the top engine-mounting frame.
    Figure 6 [21 AZ] Left power junction box.
    Figure 6 [21 BZ] CD storage compartment.
    Figure 6 [21 CZ] Wing inspection light and left side window.
    Figure 6 [21 DZ] Windshield.
    Figure 6 [21 EZ] Windshield.
    Figure 6 [21 FZ] Windshield and standby compass.
    Figure 6 [21 GZ] Engine controls in console, elevator and aileron control systems, and landing
    gear selector handle.
    Figure 6 [21 HZ] Emergency hydraulic system hand-pump, ACS and fuel shut-off levers.
    Figure 6 [21 JZ] Engine controls in console, elevator and aileron control systems, and landing
    gear selector handle.
    Figure 6 [21 KZ] Windshield.
    Figure 6 [21 LZ] Windshield.
    Figure 6 [21 Right power junction box
    MZ]
    Figure 6 [21 PZ] Brake reservoir.
    Figure 6 [21 QZ] Maintenance Interface test connectors, LAN connector, ASC bus terminators,
    and AIR/GND switch.

    2.4 Zone 22 - Passenger Compartment Above The Floor


    Panel No. Gives Access To
    Figure 1 [22 AR] The emergency exit door.
    Figure 7 [22 AZ] Flight compartment and pilot seat.
    Figure 7 [22 BZ] Flight compartment and co-pilot seat.
    Figure 7 [22 CZ] Left oxygen connectors, and cargo door bolts switch.
    Figure 7 [22 DZ] Access to the door bolts switch for the passenger/crew door and three
    passenger windows.
    Figure 7 [22 EZ]
    Figure 7 [22 FZ] Right passenger windows.
    Figure 7 [22 GZ] Right oxygen connectors.
    Figure 7 [22 HZ] Passenger/crew door internal mechanism and components.
    Figure 7 [22 JZ] Emergency exit door mechanism and window.
    Figure 7 [22 KZ] Cargo door internal mechanism and window.
    Figure 7 [22 LZ]
    Figure 7 [22
    MZ]
    Figure 7 [22 NZ]
    Figure 7 [22 OZ]
    Figure 7 [22 PZ] Access to the evaporator units.
    Figure 7 [22 QZ]
    Figure 7 [22 RZ]
    Figure 7 [22 SZ]
    Figure 7 [22 TZ]
    Figure 7 [22 UZ]

    Effectivity: HYDRAULIC LANDING


    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A
    GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-02 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.5 Zone 31 - Rear Fuselage


    Panel No. Gives Access To
    Figure 3 [31 AB] Battery, Battery and External Power Junction Box and circuit breakers,
    elevator and rudder cable systems, ELT installation, pitch actuator, static
    ports and drain traps, vapour cycle compressor, and yaw actuator.
    Figure 3 [31 BB] Marker antenna.
    Figure 1 [31 AL] Elevator and rudder cable systems.
    Figure 1 [31 BL] Ground power receptacle.
    Figure 1 [31 AR] Elevator and rudder cable systems.
    Figure 2 [31 AT]

    2.6 Zone 32 - Vertical Stabilizer


    Panel No. Gives Access To
    Figure 1 [32 AB] Rudder cable quadrant and bottom hinge.
    and Figure 3 [32
    AB]
    Figure 1 [32 BB] Control rod for the rudder trim tab.
    Figure 1 [32 AL] Elevator cable system, and rudder trim actuator.
    Figure 1 [32 BL]
    Figure 1 [32 CL] Elevator cable system.
    Figure 1 [32 DL] Elevator cable system, navigation antennas 1 and 2, and horizontal stabilizer
    trim actuator.
    Figure 1 [32 AR] Elevator cable system and rudder trim actuator.
    Figure 1 [32 BR]
    Figure 1 [32 CR] Elevator cable system.
    Figure 1 [32 DR] Elevator cable system, and horizontal stabilizer trim actuator.
    Figure 1 [32 AT] Rudder top hinge.
    Figure 2 [32 BT] Horizontal stabilizer trim actuator and attachment bolts, and elevator cable
    system.
    Figure 1 [32 CT] Elevator control mechanism.

    2.7 Zone 33 - Horizontal Stabilizer Left


    Panel No. Gives Access To
    Figure 2 [33 AT] Elevator hinge.
    Figure 2 [33 BT] Elevator hinge.
    Figure 2 [33 CT] Elevator left balance weight.
    Figure 2 [33 DT] Horizontal stabilizer attachment bolts, and elevator control mechanism.
    Figure 2 [33 ET] Horizontal stabilizer attachment bolts, and elevator control mechanism.

    2.8 Zone 34 - Horizontal Stabilizer Right


    Panel No. Gives Access To
    Figure 2 [34 AT] Elevator hinge.
    Figure 2 [34 BT] Elevator hinge.
    Figure 2 [34 CT] Elevator right balance weight.
    Figure 2 [34 DT] Horizontal stabilizer attachment bolts, and elevator control mechanism.

    Effectivity: HYDRAULIC LANDING


    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A
    GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-02 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.9 Zone 41 - Propeller


    Panel No. Gives Access To
    Figure 2 [41 AT] Propeller grease points, de-ice system and hub.

    2.10 Zone 42 - Forward Engine-Compartment


    Panel No. Gives Access To
    Figure 3 [42 AB] Propeller, chip detector, torque limiter, exhaust stubs, spark igniters, propeller
    governor, propeller overspeed governor, engine, and engine oil drains.
    Figure 2 [42 AT] Propeller brush pack, torque limiter, torque transducer, exhaust stubs, spark
    igniters, low-pitch warning switch, and engine.

    2.11 Zone 43 - Rear Engine-Compartment


    Panel No. Gives Access To
    Figure 3 [43 AB] Starter/generator cooling duct, engine, and engine oil drains.
    Figure 3 [43 BB] Engine oil drains.
    Figure 3 [43 CB] Oil cooler.
    Figure 1 [43 AL] Fuel control unit, refrigeration pack, igniter unit, starter/ generator,
    generator 2, voltage regulators 1 and 2, temperature control valve, water
    separator, EDP, oil tank dipstick, and engine.
    Figure 1 [43 AR] Propeller de-ice system timer, engine oil filter, oil temperature sensor, oil
    pressure transducer, fuel control unit, fuel flow transmitter, refrigeration
    pack, HP shut-off valve, primary shut-off valve, flow control venturi,
    temperature control valve, overtemperature switch, duct sensor, starter/
    generator, generator 2, voltage regulator 1, water separator, EDP, engine
    control systems, ground air supply connection, and engine.

    2.12 Zone 51 - Left Wing Inboard


    Panel No. Gives Access To
    Figure 4 [51 AB] Fuel pipes.
    Figure 4 [51 BB] Booster pump and MLG actuator.
    Figure 4 [51 CB] Fuel tank.
    Figure 4 [51 DB] Fuel tank, inboard fuel-quantity sensor and fuel low-level switch.
    Figure 4 [51 EB] Fuel tank.
    Figure 4 [51 FB] Fuel tank.
    Figure 4 [51 GB] Fuel tank, fuel quantity sensor, outboard low-level switch, and transfer jet
    pump.
    Figure 4 [51 HB] Fuel tank.
    Figure 4 [51 IB] Fuel quantity sensor.
    Figure 4 [51 JB] Inboard flap support-arm.
    Figure 4 [51 KB] Inboard and outboard flap screw actuators.
    Figure 4 [51 LB] Center flap support-arm.
    Figure 4 [51 MB] Inboard flap support-arm.
    Figure 4 [51 NB] Center flap support-arm.

    Effectivity: HYDRAULIC LANDING


    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A
    GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-02 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.13 Zone 52 - Left Outboard Wing


    Panel No. Gives Access To
    Figure 4 [52 AB] Fuel tank.
    Figure 4 [52 BB] Fuel tank, fuel quantity sensor.
    Figure 4 [52 CB] Fuel tank.
    Figure 4 [52 DB] Fuel tank.
    Figure 4 [52 EB] Fuel tank.
    Figure 4 [52 FB] Fuel tank, fuel quantity sensor.
    Figure 4 [52 GB] Fuel tank.
    Figure 4 [52 HB] Fuel tank.
    Figure 4 [52 IB] Fuel tank.
    Figure 4 [52 JB] Fuel tank.
    Figure 4 [52 KB]
    Figure 4 [52 MB] Pitot head connection to pitot line.
    Figure 4 [52 NB] No 1 Magnetometer
    Figure 4 [52 OB] OAT sensor for ADAHRS, No 2 Magnetometer
    Figure 4 [52 PB] Outboard flap screw-actuator, and flap position transmitter.
    Figure 4 [52 QB] Outboard flap support-arm.
    Figure 4 [52 RB] Flap position transmitter, aileron trim actuator, and aileron attachments.
    Figure 4 [52 SB] Aileron trim actuator and the aileron.
    Figure 4 [52 TB] Outboard flap support-arm.
    Figure 4 [52 UB] Aileron Inboard hinge.
    Figure 4 [52 VB] Aileron outboard hinge.
    Figure 4 [52 XT] Strobe light power-supply and strobe light.
    Figure 4 [52 YT] Navigation light.
    Figure 2 [52 ZT] Fuel tank cap.

    2.14 Zone 61 - Right Wing Inboard


    Panel No. Gives Access To
    Figure 5 [61 AB] Fuel pipes.
    Figure 5 [61 BB] Booster pump and MLG actuator.
    Figure 5 [61 CB] Fuel tank.
    Figure 5 [61 DB] Fuel tank, inboard fuel-quantity sensor and fuel low-level switch.
    Figure 5 [61 EB] Fuel tank.
    Figure 5 [61 FB] Fuel tank.
    Figure 5 [61 GB] Fuel tank, fuel quantity sensor, outboard low-level switch and transfer jet
    pump.
    Figure 5 [61 HB] Fuel tank.
    Figure 5 [61 IB] Fuel tank, and fuel quantity sensor.
    Figure 5 [61 JB] Inboard flap support-arm.
    Figure 5 [61 KB] Inboard and outboard flap screw actuators.
    Figure 5 [61 LB] Center flap support-arm.
    Figure 5 [61 MB] Inboard flap support-arm.
    Figure 5 [61 NB] Center flap support-arm.

    Effectivity: HYDRAULIC LANDING


    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A
    GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-02 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.15 Zone 62 - Right Wing Outboard


    Panel No. Gives Access To
    Figure 5 [62 AB] Fuel tanks.
    Figure 5 [62 BB] Fuel tank, and fuel quantity sensor.
    Figure 5 [62 CB] Fuel tank.
    Figure 5 [62 DB] Fuel tank.
    Figure 5 [62 EB] Fuel tank.
    Figure 5 [62 FB] Fuel tank, and fuel quantity sensor.
    Figure 5 [62 GB] Fuel tanks.
    Figure 5 [62 HB] Fuel tanks.
    Figure 5 [62 IB] Fuel tanks.
    Figure 5 [62 JB] Fuel tanks.
    Figure 5 [62 KB]
    Figure 5 [62 MB]
    Figure 5 [62 NB] ESIS magnetometer (MSN 1271 - 9999)
    Figure 5 [62 OB] OAT sensor for ADAHRS
    Figure 5 [62 PB] Outboard flap screw actuator, and flap position transmitter.
    Figure 5 [62 QB] Outboard flap support-arm.
    Figure 5 [62 RB] Flap position transmitter, and aileron attachments.
    Figure 5 [62 SB] Aileron.
    Figure 5 [62 TB] Outboard flap support-arm.
    Figure 5 [62 UB] Aileron inboard hinge.
    Figure 5 [62 VB] Aileron outboard hinge.
    Figure 5 [62 XT] Strobe power-supply and strobe light.
    Figure 5 [62 YT] Navigation light.
    Figure 2 [62 ZT] Fuel tank cap.

    Effectivity: HYDRAULIC LANDING


    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A
    GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-02 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    32 AT

    32 CT

    43 AL 12 BL 32 DL
    32 CL

    21 AL 32 BL
    32 AL

    32 BB

    31 AL
    11 AL
    11 BL 12 AL 12 CL 31 BL

    32 CT

    32 DR 12 BR 22 AR 43 AR
    32 CR 21 AR
    32 BR
    32 AR

    32 AB
    31 AR
    11 AR
    12 CR 12 AR 11 BR

    12-A-062000-A-S4080-00020-A-02-1

    Figure 1 Left and Right Side External Access Panels – Panel Identification

    Effectivity: HYDRAULIC LANDING


    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A
    GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-02 Page 9


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    62 ZT

    34 CT

    34 BT
    42 AT 31 AT
    32 BT

    34 AT
    34 DT

    33 ET

    33 DT
    33 AT

    41 AT
    33 BT

    33 CT

    52 ZT

    12-A-062000-A-S4080-00021-A-02-1

    Figure 2 External Upper Surface Access Panels – Panel Identification

    Effectivity: HYDRAULIC LANDING


    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A
    GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-02 Page 10


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    43 AB
    43 BB

    42 AB 43 CB 31 AB 31 BB 32 AB

    12 DL 12 FL

    11 CL 12 EL

    12 AB 12 BB

    12 DR 12 FR
    12 ER

    12-A-062000-A-S4080-00022-A-03-1

    Figure 3 External Lower Surface Access Panels – Panel Identification

    Effectivity: HYDRAULIC LANDING


    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A
    GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-02 Page 11


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    52 XT

    52 YT

    52 VB

    52 OB 52 SB

    52 NB

    52 KB 52 MB
    52 UB

    52 IB
    52 JB

    52 HB
    52 GB
    52 RB

    52 EB 52 FB
    52 TB
    52 QB

    52 DB
    52 CB

    52 AB 52 BB

    52 PB

    51 HB 51 IB

    51 NB
    51 LB

    51 FB 51 GB

    51 EB
    51 KB

    51 DB

    51 CB 51 JB

    51 BB

    51 AB
    51 MB

    LEFT WING - LOWER SURFACE

    12-A-062000-A-S4080-00023-A-02-1

    Figure 4 Left Wing Access Panels – Panel Identification

    Effectivity: HYDRAULIC LANDING


    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A
    GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-02 Page 12


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    61 MB
    61 AB

    61 BB

    61 CB
    61 JB

    61 DB

    61 KB
    61 EB

    61 FB 61 GB

    61 LB
    61 NB

    61 HB 61 IB

    62 PB

    62 AB 62 BB

    62 CB 62 DB

    62 QB
    62 TB
    62 EB 62 FB

    62 RB
    62 GB
    62 HB

    62 JB
    62 IB

    62 UB
    62 KB 62 MB

    62 NB

    62 OB 62 SB

    62 VB

    62 YT

    62 XT

    RIGHT WING - LOWER SURFACE

    12-A-062000-A-S4080-00024-A-02-1

    Figure 5 Right Wing Access Panels – Panel Identification

    Effectivity: HYDRAULIC LANDING


    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A
    GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-02 Page 13


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    B
    A

    A 21 EZ

    21 FZ
    21 DZ
    21 KZ 21 LZ

    21 CZ

    21 PZ

    21 QZ
    21 BZ
    21 GZ 21 JZ

    21 HZ 21 MZ
    21 AZ

    B 11 AZ 11 BZ 11 CZ

    F16 F21 F24 F29 F34


    12 BZ 12 EZ 12 HZ 12 KZ
    12 CZ 12 FZ 12 IZ 12 LZ

    FWD

    11 DZ 12 MZ

    12 AZ 12 DZ 12 GZ 12 JZ 12-B-062000-A-S4080-00001-A-02-1

    Figure 6 Flight and Cargo Compartment Access Panels – Panel Identification

    Effectivity: HYDRAULIC LANDING


    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A
    GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-02 Page 14


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    22 DZ
    A
    22 NZ 22 RZ
    22 EZ
    22 PZ 22 QZ 22 UZ

    22 BZ
    C 22 KZ

    B
    22 CZ

    22 HZ A
    22 AZ 22 SZ
    22 MZ
    22 OZ 22 LZ 22 TZ

    22 KZ 22 DZ 22 HZ

    FWD

    B 22 CZ

    22 JZ 22 FZ

    FWD

    C 22 GZ

    12-A-062000-A-S4080-00026-A-02-1

    Figure 7 Cargo Compartment Access Panels – Panel Identification

    Effectivity: HYDRAULIC LANDING


    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A
    GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-02 Page 15


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3 Drain Holes
    (Ref. Fig. 8)
    The bottom skins of the fuselage, wings, horizontal stabilizer and some access panels have drain holes at locations
    where fluids could collect and damage from corrosion could occur. It is important that the drain holes are inspected
    during corrosion inspections to make sure they are kept clear.

    Effectivity: HYDRAULIC LANDING


    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A
    GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-02 Page 16


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    DRAIN-VALVE VIEWED
    FROM BELOW
    DRAIN-HOLE

    06112

    Figure 8 Drain Holes – Location

    Effectivity: HYDRAULIC LANDING


    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A
    GEAR
    End of data module
    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-02 Page 17
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: HYDRAULIC LANDING


    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A
    GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-02 Page 18


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    ACCESS PROVISIONS – ELECTRO MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR

    DESCRIPTION

    Table of Contents Page

    ACCESS PROVISIONS – ELECTRO MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR - DESCRIPTION........ 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 2
    2 Access Panels........................................................................................................ 2
    2.1 Zone 11 - Flight Compartment Below The Floor.................................................... 2
    2.2 Zone 12 - Cargo Compartment Below The Floor................................................... 3
    2.3 Zone 21 - Flight Compartment Above The Floor.................................................... 3
    2.4 Zone 22 - Passenger Compartment Above The Floor............................................ 4
    2.5 Zone 31 - Rear Fuselage........................................................................................ 4
    2.6 Zone 32 - Vertical Stabilizer................................................................................... 5
    2.7 Zone 33 - Horizontal Stabilizer Left........................................................................ 5
    2.8 Zone 34 - Horizontal Stabilizer Right...................................................................... 5
    2.9 Zone 41 - Propeller................................................................................................. 5
    2.10 Zone 42 - Forward Engine-Compartment............................................................... 5
    2.11 Zone 43 - Rear Engine-Compartment.................................................................... 6
    2.12 Zone 51 - Left Wing Inboard................................................................................... 6
    2.13 Zone 52 - Left Outboard Wing................................................................................ 6
    2.14 Zone 61 - Right Wing Inboard................................................................................ 7
    2.15 Zone 62 - Right Wing Outboard.............................................................................. 7
    3 Drain Holes ............................................................................................................ 16

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Left and Right Side External Access Panels – Panel Identification........................ 9


    2 External Upper Surface Access Panels – Panel Identification............................... 10
    3 External Lower Surface Access Panels – Panel Identification............................... 11
    4 Left Wing Access Panels........................................................................................ 12
    5 Right Wing Access Panels LED............................................................................. 13
    6 Flight and Cargo Compartment Access Panels...................................................... 14
    7 Cargo Compartment Access Panels – Panel Identification.................................... 15
    8 Drain Holes – Location........................................................................................... 17

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-06-10-00-00A-040A-A DIMENSIONS AND ZONES - DESCRIPTION

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-02 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Description

    1 General
    The access panels and doors give access to system components or aircraft structure. This document gives the
    location of each access panel and door and the components that they give access to.
    Access doors give access to servicing points and are usually hinged and have quick-release catches. Access
    panels give access for maintenance or inspection and are usually attached with screws. Some panels have seals
    which must be examined for damage before the access panel is installed.
    Before the installation of access panels, check the condition of the fasteners. Replace damaged or corroded
    fasteners. If needed, lubricate the panel fasteners with CPC-temporary P10-001 (or equivalent) before installation.
    The bottom skin panels of the aircraft have drain holes and there are two fuel drains in the inner bottom skin of
    each wing. The location of the drain holes and drain valves are shown in Fig. 8.

    2 Access Panels
    A number identifies each access panel. The number has three parts:
    − The number of the secondary zone, refer to AMM 12-B-06-10-00-00A-040A-A
    − The letter in the sequence of the access panels in the secondary zone
    − The letter for the position of the access panel in the secondary zone.

    The letters for the different positions in the secondary zone are:
    − L Left
    − R Right
    − B Bottom
    − T Top
    − Z Internal.

    2.1 Zone 11 - Flight Compartment Below The Floor


    Panel No. Gives Access To
    Figure 1 [11 AL] Rudder cable system, nose-wheel steering system, fuel check valves, fuel
    shut-off valve, air separator and fuel low-pressure switch.
    Figure 1 [11 BL] Fuel filter element, air separator, fuel low-pressure switch and maintenance
    shutoff valve.
    Figure 3 [11 CL] Fuel pipes.
    Figure 1 [11 AR] Oxygen cylinder, safety shut-off valve, and pressure regulator (airfoil de-ice
    system).
    Figure 1 [11 BR] Oxygen cylinder, discharge indicator, charging pressure gage, charging
    valve, second ATC antenna and pressure reducing valve.
    Figure 6 [11 AZ] Safety valve, elevator cable system and pitot static drains.
    Figure 6 [11 BZ] Plenum chamber, flow control valve, aileron cable system and windshield de-
    ice controller.
    Figure 6 [11 CZ] Outflow valve.
    Figure 6 [11 DZ] LH and RH Relay panels, Cabin Pressure Control Unit, Cockpit light dim unit,
    Stick Pusher Computer.

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-02 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.2 Zone 12 - Cargo Compartment Below The Floor


    Panel No. Gives Access To
    Figure 3 [12 AB]
    Figure 3 [12 BB]
    Figure 1 [12 AL]
    Figure 1 [12 BL] Left flap drive-shaft, left inboard flap screw-actuator.
    Figure 1 [12 CL]
    Figure 3 [12 DL]
    Figure 3 [12 EL] Left pitot drain trap.
    Figure 3 [12 FL]
    Figure 1 [12 AR] Ejector flow-control valves.
    Figure 1 [12 BR] Ejector flow-control valves, right inboard flap screw-actuator.
    Figure 1 [12 CR]
    Figure 3 [12 DR]
    Figure 3 [12 ER] Right pitot drain trap.
    Figure 3 [12 FR]
    Figure 6 [12 AZ] Frames 16 thru 21 left, aileron and rudder cable systems.
    Figure 6 [12 BZ] Frames 18 thru 21 center, Modular Avionics Unit, EPS, radar altimeter
    antennas, elevator, rudder and aileron cable systems.
    Figure 6 [12 CZ] Frames 16 thru 21 right, elevator control systems.
    Figure 6 [12 DZ] Frames 21 thru 24 left, aileron and rudder cable systems, underfloor
    temperature sensor.
    Figure 6 [12 EZ] Frames 21 thru 24 center, landing gear relay unit, roll actuator, trim adaptor,
    stick pusher servo, probes de-ice control panels, airfoil de-ice timer, aileron
    elevator and rudder cable systems.
    Figure 6 [12 FZ] Frames 21 thru 24 right, airfoil de-ice timer, stick pusher servo, LED
    Navigation/ACL power supply, elevator cable system.
    Figure 6 [12 GZ] Frames 24 thru 29 left, TAWS/TCAS configuration module, left flap drive-
    shaft and rudder cable system.
    Figure 6 [12 HZ] Frames 24 thru 29 center, flap power drive-unit, left and right flap drive
    shafts, ADAHRU, DME unit, FCWU, TAS/TAWS processor, Rad Alt
    transceiver, FCMU, XM Satellite processor, underfloor heater and rudder and
    elevator cable systems.
    Figure 6 [12 IZ] Frames 24 thru 29 right, right flap drive shaft and elevator cable system.
    Figure 6 [12 JZ] Frames 29 thru 34 left, rudder cable system.
    Figure 6 [12 KZ] Frames 29 thru 34 center, cabin heater and relay, HF Amplifier, 110 VAC
    static inverter, EGPWS computer, HF Receiver and rudder and elevator
    cable systems.
    Figure 6 [12 LZ] Frames 29 thru 34 right, elevator cable system.
    Figure 6 [12 MZ] Frames 34 thru 36 center, rudder and elevator cable systems, Stormscope
    processor.

    2.3 Zone 21 - Flight Compartment Above The Floor


    Panel No. Gives Access To
    Figure 1 [21 AL] Attachment bolts for the top engine-mounting frame.
    Figure 1 [21 AR] Attachment bolts for the top engine-mounting frame.
    Figure 6 [21 AZ] Left power junction box.
    Figure 6 [21 BZ] CD storage compartment.
    Figure 6 [21 CZ] Wing inspection light and left side window.
    Figure 6 [21 DZ] Windshield.
    Figure 6 [21 EZ] Windshield.
    Figure 6 [21 FZ] Windshield and standby compass.

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-02 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Panel No. Gives Access To


    Figure 6 [21 GZ] Engine controls in console, elevator and aileron control systems, and landing
    gear selector handle.
    Figure 6 [21 HZ] Emergency landing gear release handle, ACS and fuel shut-off levers.
    Figure 6 [21 JZ] Engine controls in console, elevator and aileron control systems, and landing
    gear selector handle.
    Figure 6 [21 KZ] Windshield.
    Figure 6 [21 LZ] Windshield.
    Figure 6 [21 Right power junction box.
    MZ]
    Figure 6 [21 PZ] Brake reservoir.
    Figure 6 [21 QZ] Maintenance Interface test connectors, LAN connector, ASC bus terminators,
    and AIR/GND switch.

    2.4 Zone 22 - Passenger Compartment Above The Floor


    Panel No. Gives Access To
    Figure 1 [22 AR] The emergency exit door.
    Figure 7 [22 AZ] Flight compartment and pilot seat.
    Figure 7 [22 BZ] Flight compartment and co-pilot seat.
    Figure 7 [22 CZ] Left oxygen connectors, and cargo door bolts switch.
    Figure 7 [22 DZ] Door bolts switch for the passenger/crew door and three passenger windows.
    Figure 7 [22 EZ]
    Figure 7 [22 FZ] Right passenger windows.
    Figure 7 [22 GZ] Right oxygen connectors.
    Figure 7 [22 HZ] Passenger/crew door internal mechanism and components.
    Figure 7 [22 JZ] Emergency exit door mechanism and window.
    Figure 7 [22 KZ] Cargo door internal mechanism and window.
    Figure 7 [22 LZ]
    Figure 7 [22
    MZ]
    Figure 7 [22 NZ]
    Figure 7 [22 OZ]
    Figure 7 [22 PZ] Evaporator units.
    Figure 7 [22 QZ]
    Figure 7 [22 RZ]
    Figure 7 [22 SZ]
    Figure 7 [22 TZ]
    Figure 7 [22 UZ]

    2.5 Zone 31 - Rear Fuselage


    Panel No. Gives Access To
    Figure 3 [31 AB] Battery, Battery and External Power Junction Box and circuit breakers,
    elevator and rudder cable systems, ELT installation, pitch actuator, static
    ports and drain traps, vapour cycle compressor, and yaw actuator.
    Figure 3 [31 BB] Marker antenna.
    Figure 1 [31 AL] Elevator and rudder cable systems.
    Figure 1 [31 BL] Ground power receptacle.
    Figure 1 [31 AR] Elevator and rudder cable systems.
    Figure 2 [31 AT]

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-02 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.6 Zone 32 - Vertical Stabilizer


    Panel No. Gives Access To
    Figure 1 [32 AB] Rudder cable quadrant and bottom hinge.
    and Figure 3 [32
    AB]
    Figure 1 [32 BB] Control rod for the rudder trim tab.
    Figure 1 [32 AL] Elevator cable system, and rudder trim actuator.
    Figure 1 [32 BL]
    Figure 1 [32 CL] Elevator cable system.
    Figure 1 [32 DL] Elevator cable system, navigation antennas 1 and 2, and horizontal stabilizer
    trim actuator.
    Figure 1 [32 AR] Elevator cable system and rudder trim actuator.
    Figure 1 [32 BR]
    Figure 1 [32 CR] Elevator cable system.
    Figure 1 [32 DR] Elevator cable system, and horizontal stabilizer trim actuator.
    Figure 1 [32 AT] Rudder top hinge.
    Figure 2 [32 BT] Horizontal stabilizer trim actuator and attachment bolts, and elevator cable
    system.
    Figure 1 [32 CT] Elevator control mechanism.

    2.7 Zone 33 - Horizontal Stabilizer Left


    Panel No. Gives Access To
    Figure 2 [33 AT] Elevator hinge.
    Figure 2 [33 BT] Elevator hinge.
    Figure 2 [33 CT] Elevator left balance weight.
    Figure 2 [33 DT] Horizontal stabilizer attachment bolts, and elevator control mechanism.
    Figure 2 [33 ET] Horizontal stabilizer attachment bolts, and elevator control mechanism.

    2.8 Zone 34 - Horizontal Stabilizer Right


    Panel No. Gives Access To
    Figure 2 [34 AT] Elevator hinge.
    Figure 2 [34 BT] Elevator hinge.
    Figure 2 [34 CT] Elevator right balance weight.
    Figure 2 [34 DT] Horizontal stabilizer attachment bolts, and elevator control mechanism.

    2.9 Zone 41 - Propeller


    Panel No. Gives Access To
    Figure 2 [41 AT] Propeller grease points, de-ice system and hub.

    2.10 Zone 42 - Forward Engine-Compartment


    Panel No. Gives Access To
    Figure 3 [42 AB] Propeller, chip detector, torque limiter, exhaust stubs, spark igniters, propeller
    governor, propeller overspeed governor, engine, and engine oil drains.
    Figure 2 [42 AT] Propeller brush pack, torque limiter, torque transducer, exhaust stubs, spark
    igniters, low-pitch warning switch, and engine.

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-02 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.11 Zone 43 - Rear Engine-Compartment


    Panel No. Gives Access To
    Figure 3 [43 AB] Starter/generator cooling duct, engine, and engine oil drains.
    Figure 3 [43 BB] Engine oil drains.
    Figure 3 [43 CB] Oil cooler.
    Figure 1 [43 AL] Fuel control unit, refrigeration pack, igniter unit, starter/ generator,
    generator 2, voltage regulators 1 and 2, temperature control valve, water
    separator, EDP, oil tank dipstick, and engine.
    Figure 1 [43 AR] Propeller de-ice system timer, engine oil filter, oil temperature sensor, oil
    pressure transducer, fuel control unit, fuel flow transmitter, refrigeration
    pack, HP shut-off valve, primary shut-off valve, flow control venturi,
    temperature control valve, overtemperature switch, duct sensor, starter/
    generator, generator 2, voltage regulator 1, water separator, EDP, engine
    control systems, ground air supply connection, and engine.

    2.12 Zone 51 - Left Wing Inboard


    Panel No. Gives Access To
    Figure 4 [51 AB] Fuel pipes.
    Figure 4 [51 BB] Booster pump and MLG actuator.
    Figure 4 [51 CB] Fuel tank.
    Figure 4 [51 DB] Fuel tank, inboard fuel-quantity sensor and fuel low-level switch.
    Figure 4 [51 EB] Fuel tank.
    Figure 4 [51 FB] Fuel tank.
    Figure 4 [51 GB] Fuel tank, fuel quantity sensor, outboard low-level switch, and transfer jet
    pump.
    Figure 4 [51 HB] Fuel tank.
    Figure 4 [51 IB] Fuel quantity sensor.
    Figure 4 [51 JB] Inboard flap support-arm.
    Figure 4 [51 KB] Inboard and outboard flap screw actuators.
    Figure 4 [51 LB] Center flap support-arm.
    Figure 4 [51 MB] Inboard flap support-arm.
    Figure 4 [51 NB] Center flap support-arm.

    2.13 Zone 52 - Left Outboard Wing


    Panel No. Gives Access To
    Figure 4 [52 AB] Fuel tank.
    Figure 4 [52 BB] Fuel tank, fuel quantity sensor.
    Figure 4 [52 CB] Fuel tank.
    Figure 4 [52 DB] Fuel tank.
    Figure 4 [52 EB] Fuel tank.
    Figure 4 [52 FB] Fuel tank, fuel quantity sensor.
    Figure 4 [52 GB] Fuel tank.
    Figure 4 [52 HB] Fuel tank.
    Figure 4 [52 IB] Fuel tank.
    Figure 4 [52 JB] Fuel tank.
    Figure 4 [52 KB]
    Figure 4 [52 MB] Pitot head connection to pitot line.
    Figure 4 [52 NB] No 1 Magnetometer
    Figure 4 [52 OB] OAT sensor for ADAHRS, No 2 Magnetometer
    Figure 4 [52 PB] Outboard flap screw-actuator, and flap position transmitter.

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-02 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Panel No. Gives Access To


    Figure 4 [52 QB] Outboard flap support-arm.
    Figure 4 [52 RB] Flap position transmitter, aileron trim actuator, and aileron attachments.
    Figure 4 [52 SB] Aileron trim actuator and the aileron.
    Figure 4 [52 TB] Outboard flap support-arm.
    Figure 4 [52 UB] Aileron Inboard hinge.
    Figure 4 [52 VB] Aileron outboard hinge.
    Figure 4 [52 XT] Combined LED anti collision, navigation and tail position light.
    Figure 2 [52 ZT] Fuel tank cap.

    2.14 Zone 61 - Right Wing Inboard


    Panel No. Gives Access To
    Figure 5 [61 AB] Fuel pipes.
    Figure 5 [61 BB] Booster pump and MLG actuator.
    Figure 5 [61 CB] Fuel tank.
    Figure 5 [61 DB] Fuel tank, inboard fuel-quantity sensor and fuel low-level switch.
    Figure 5 [61 EB] Fuel tank.
    Figure 5 [61 FB] Fuel tank.
    Figure 5 [61 GB] Fuel tank, fuel quantity sensor, outboard low-level switch and transfer jet
    pump.
    Figure 5 [61 HB] Fuel tank.
    Figure 5 [61 IB] Fuel tank, and fuel quantity sensor.
    Figure 5 [61 JB] Inboard flap support-arm.
    Figure 5 [61 KB] Inboard and outboard flap screw actuators.
    Figure 5 [61 LB] Center flap support-arm.
    Figure 5 [61 MB] Inboard flap support-arm.
    Figure 5 [61 NB] Center flap support-arm.

    2.15 Zone 62 - Right Wing Outboard


    Panel No. Gives Access To
    Figure 5 [62 AB] Fuel tanks.
    Figure 5 [62 BB] Fuel tank, and fuel quantity sensor.
    Figure 5 [62 CB] Fuel tank.
    Figure 5 [62 DB] Fuel tank.
    Figure 5 [62 EB] Fuel tank.
    Figure 5 [62 FB] Fuel tank, and fuel quantity sensor.
    Figure 5 [62 GB] Fuel tanks.
    Figure 5 [62 HB] Fuel tanks.
    Figure 5 [62 IB] Fuel tanks.
    Figure 5 [62 JB] Fuel tanks.
    Figure 5 [62 KB]
    Figure 5 [62 MB]
    Figure 5 [62 NB] ESIS magnetometer (MSN 1271 - 9999).
    Figure 5 [62 OB] OAT sensor for ADAHRS.
    Figure 5 [62 PB] Outboard flap screw actuator, and flap position transmitter.
    Figure 5 [62 QB] Outboard flap support-arm.
    Figure 5 [62 RB] Flap position transmitter, and aileron attachments.
    Figure 5 [62 SB] Aileron.
    Figure 5 [62 TB] Outboard flap support-arm.
    Figure 5 [62 UB] Aileron inboard hinge.
    Figure 5 [62 VB] Aileron outboard hinge.

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-02 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Panel No. Gives Access To


    Figure 5 [62 XT] Combined LED anti collision, navigation and tail position light.
    Figure 2 [62 ZT] Fuel tank cap.

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-02 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    32 AT

    32 CT

    43 AL 12 BL 32 DL
    32 CL

    21 AL 32 BL
    32 AL

    32 BB

    31 AL
    11 AL
    11 BL 12 AL 12 CL 31 BL

    32 CT

    32 DR 12 BR 22 AR 43 AR
    32 CR 21 AR
    32 BR
    32 AR

    32 AB
    31 AR
    11 AR
    12 CR 12 AR 11 BR

    12-A-062000-A-S4080-00020-A-02-1

    Figure 1 Left and Right Side External Access Panels – Panel Identification

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-02 Page 9


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    62 ZT

    34 CT

    34 BT
    42 AT 31 AT
    32 BT

    34 AT
    34 DT

    33 ET

    33 DT
    33 AT

    41 AT
    33 BT

    33 CT

    52 ZT

    12-A-062000-A-S4080-00021-A-02-1

    Figure 2 External Upper Surface Access Panels – Panel Identification

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-02 Page 10


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    43 AB
    43 BB

    42 AB 43 CB 31 AB 31 BB 32 AB

    12 DL 12 FL

    11 CL 12 EL

    12 AB 12 BB

    12 DR 12 FR
    12 ER

    12-A-062000-A-S4080-00022-A-03-1

    Figure 3 External Lower Surface Access Panels – Panel Identification

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-02 Page 11


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    52 XT

    52 VB

    52 OB 52 SB

    52 NB

    52 KB 52 MB
    52 UB

    52 IB
    52 JB

    52 HB
    52 GB
    52 RB

    52 EB 52 FB
    52 TB
    52 QB

    52 DB
    52 CB

    52 AB 52 BB

    52 PB

    51 HB 51 IB

    51 NB
    51 LB

    51 FB 51 GB

    51 EB
    51 KB

    51 DB

    51 CB 51 JB

    51 BB

    51 AB
    51 MB

    LEFT WING - LOWER SURFACE

    12-B-062000-A-S4080-00005-A-01-1

    Figure 4 Left Wing Access Panels

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-02 Page 12


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    61 MB
    61 AB

    61 BB

    61 CB
    61 JB

    61 DB

    61 KB
    61 EB

    61 FB 61 GB

    61 LB
    61 NB

    61 HB 61 IB

    62 PB

    62 AB 62 BB

    62 CB 62 DB

    62 QB
    62 TB
    62 EB 62 FB

    62 RB
    62 GB
    62 HB

    62 JB
    62 IB

    62 UB
    62 KB 62 MB

    62 NB

    62 OB 62 SB

    62 VB

    62 XT

    RIGHT WING - LOWER SURFACE

    12-B-062000-A-S4080-00006-A-01-1

    Figure 5 Right Wing Access Panels LED

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-02 Page 13


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    B
    A

    A 21 EZ

    21 FZ
    21 DZ
    21 KZ 21 LZ

    21 CZ

    21 PZ

    21 QZ
    21 BZ
    21 GZ 21 JZ

    21 HZ 21 MZ
    21 AZ

    FR16
    B FR21 FR24
    11 AZ 11 BZ
    FR29 FR34
    11 CZ

    12 BZ 12 EZ 12 HZ 12 KZ
    12 CZ 12 FZ 12 IZ 12 LZ

    FWD

    11 DZ 12 MZ

    12 AZ 12 DZ 12 GZ 12 JZ 12-B-062000-A-S4080-00004-A-01-1

    Figure 6 Flight and Cargo Compartment Access Panels

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-02 Page 14


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    22 DZ
    A
    22 NZ 22 RZ
    22 EZ
    22 PZ 22 QZ 22 UZ

    22 BZ
    C 22 KZ

    B
    22 CZ

    22 HZ A
    22 AZ 22 SZ
    22 MZ
    22 OZ 22 LZ 22 TZ

    22 KZ 22 DZ 22 HZ

    FWD

    B 22 CZ

    22 JZ 22 FZ

    FWD

    C 22 GZ

    12-A-062000-A-S4080-00026-A-02-1

    Figure 7 Cargo Compartment Access Panels – Panel Identification

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-02 Page 15


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3 Drain Holes
    (Ref. Fig. 8)
    The bottom skins of the fuselage, wings, horizontal stabilizer and some access panels have drain holes at locations
    where fluids could collect and damage from corrosion could occur. It is important that the drain holes are inspected
    during corrosion inspections to make sure they are kept clear.

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-02 Page 16


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    DRAIN-VALVE VIEWED
    FROM BELOW
    DRAIN-HOLE

    06112

    Figure 8 Drain Holes – Location

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040B-A
    LANDING GEAR
    End of data module
    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-02 Page 17
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-02 Page 18


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    LIFTING AND SHORING – GENERAL

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    LIFTING AND SHORING – GENERAL - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION............................ 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1
    1.1 Jacking................................................................................................................... 1
    1.2 Shoring................................................................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A JACKING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-07-20-00-00A-901A-A SHORING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Description

    1 General

    1.1 Jacking
    (Refer to DM 12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A)
    This data module gives the safety precautions and procedures to lift and lower the complete aircraft on jacks and to
    lift and lower a single landing-gear wheel.

    1.2 Shoring
    (Refer to DM 12-B-07-20-00-00A-901A-A)
    This data module gives the positions of trestles used to hold the aircraft during long periods of storage or during
    major maintenance.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-07-00-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-07-00-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    JACKING

    MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Table of Contents Page

    JACKING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES................................................................................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Jacking – Complete Aircraft.................................................................................... 6


    2 Jacking – Single Wheel.......................................................................................... 7

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A GENERAL - AEROSPACE GROUND EQUIPMENT
    (AGE) AND TOOLS
    12-B-07-20-00-00A-901A-A SHORING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Warning signs (AIRCRAFT ON Part Local supply As
    JACKS) Required
    Hydraulic tail jack Part 968.85.81.214 1
    Hydraulic main jack Part 968.85.81.230 2

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark


    Jack adapter (For main jacks) Part 968.85.81.231 As
    Required
    Jack adapter (For tail jack) Part 968.85.81.232 As
    Required
    Jack adapter kit (Contains two Part 968.85.81.233 As
    main and one tail jack adapter) Required
    Ballast (220-550 lbs (100-250 Part Local supply As
    kg)) Required
    Wheel chocks (Or equivalent) Part 990.00.00.909 As
    Required
    Main-wheel jack adapter Part 507.20.12.051 As
    Required
    Nose-wheel jack adapter Part 507.20.12.052 As
    Required
    Hydraulic jack (Minimum Part 968.85.81.212 As
    capacity 3.9 tons) or Required
    Hydraulic jack (4 tonnes) or Part 968.85.81.217 As
    Required
    Hydraulic jack (5 tonnes) Part 968.85.81.218 As
    Required
    Locking screw (For nose wheel Part 513.32.12.050 As
    lifting) Required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This chapter gives the safety precautions and procedures to lift and lower the complete aircraft on jacks and
    to lift and lower a single landing-gear wheel.
    2 Lift And Lower The Complete Aircraft On Jacks

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.1
    Note

    To identify the AGE and tools used in this procedure refer to the list of AGE and tools 12-
    B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A.

    Safety Precautions
    Obey these safety precautions when an aircraft is lifted on jacks:
    2.1.1 Make sure the aircraft is on level ground.
    2.1.2 Make sure the tools and equipment that are used to lift and lower the aircraft are serviceable.
    2.1.3 Make sure the area is clear of persons and equipment when the aircraft is lifted or lowered.
    2.1.4 Make sure there are no structural defects that will cause further damage to the aircraft when
    it is lifted.
    2.1.5 Attach 550 lbs (250 kg) of ballast (Ballast (220-550 lbs (100-250 kg)) (Pt.No. Local supply))
    to the tail jacking point if parts of the aircraft tail have been or are to be removed.
    2.2 Preparation
    2.2.1 Obey the safety precautions.
    2.2.2 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (Refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.2.3 Put the chocks (Wheel chocks (Or equivalent) (Pt.No. 990.00.00.909)) (Figure 1 [2]) in
    position at each main wheel.
    2.2.4 Put the signs (Warning signs (AIRCRAFT ON JACKS) (Pt.No. Local supply)) around the
    aircraft.
    2.2.5 Put the jack adaptor (Jack adapter (For main jacks) (Pt.No. 968.85.81.231)) (Figure 1 [3])
    and jack adaptor (Jack adapter (For tail jack) (Pt.No. 968.85.81.232)) (Figure 1 [5]) on the
    main and tail jacks (Figure 1 [1]) and (Figure 1 [4]).
    2.2.6 Put the jack (Hydraulic main jack (Pt.No. 968.85.81.230)) (Figure 1 [1]) in position below the
    main jacking points on wing Rib 1 and the jack (Hydraulic tail jack (Pt.No. 968.85.81.214))
    (Figure 1 [4]) below the tail jacking point.
    2.2.7 Slowly extend the jacks (Figure 1 [1]) and (Figure 1 [4]) until they lightly touch the aircraft
    jacking points.
    2.2.8 Adjust the position of the jacks (Figure 1 [1]) and (Figure 1 [4]) to make sure they are vertical
    and align with the aircraft jacking points.
    2.2.9 Set the parking brake to OFF.
    2.2.10 Close the passenger/crew door.
    2.3 Lift The Aircraft
    Four persons are necessary for this procedure. One person to operate each jack and one person to
    monitor the level.
    2.3.1 Slowly extend the jacks (Figure 1 [1]) and (Figure 1 [4]) to lift the aircraft.
    2.3.2 Adjust the extension of each jack (Figure 1 [1]) and (Figure 1 [4]) as the aircraft is lifted to
    keep the aircraft level.
    2.3.3 Stop the extension of the jacks (Figure 1 [1]) and (Figure 1 [4]) when the wheels are clear of
    the ground.
    2.3.4 Make sure the jacks (Figure 1 [1]) and (Figure 1 [4]) are safe.
    2.3.5 Remove the wheel chocks (Figure 1 [2]).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.3.6
    CAUTION

    ATTACH BALLAST TO THE TAIL JACKING POINT TO PREVENT ANY POSSIBLE REAR
    FUSELAGE UPWARDS MOVEMENT, WHILE THE AIRCRAFT IS ON JACKS.

    Attach 330 lbs (150 kg) of ballast to the tail jacking point. If parts of the aircraft tail have been
    or are to be removed, attach 550 lbs (250 kg) of ballast to the tail jacking point.
    2.3.7 If necessary, put the aircraft on trestles (Refer to DM 12-B-07-20-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.4 Lower The Aircraft
    2.4.1 Make sure the landing gear is fully extended.
    2.4.2 If necessary, remove all trestles from the aircraft (Refer to DM 12-B-07-20-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.4.3 Slowly retract the jacks (Figure 1 [1]) and (Figure 1 [4]) to lower the aircraft.
    2.4.4 Adjust the retraction of each jack (Figure 1 [1]) and (Figure 1 [4]) as the aircraft is lowered to
    keep the aircraft level.
    2.4.5 Retract the jacks (Figure 1 [1]) and (Figure 1 [4]) until the aircraft is completely lowered and
    the aircraft weight is not on the jacks (Figure 1 [1]).
    2.4.6 Put the wheel chocks (Figure 1 [2]) in position at each main wheel.
    2.5 Close Up
    2.5.1 Remove the main and tail jacks (Figure 1 [1]) and (Figure 1 [4]) from the aircraft.
    2.5.2 Remove the AIRCRAFT ON JACKS warning signs.
    2.5.3 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3 Lift And Lower One Wheel
    3.1 Preparation
    3.1.1 Obey the safety precautions.
    3.1.2 Put the AIRCRAFT ON JACKS warning signs around the aircraft.
    3.1.3 Put wheel chocks (Figure 2 [1]) in position at the wheels that are not to be lifted.
    3.1.4 Put the main-wheel jack adapter (Figure 2 [5]) or the jack adaptor (Nose-wheel jack
    adapter (Pt.No. 507.20.12.052)) (Figure 2 [3]) in the landing-gear leg of the wheel that is to
    be lifted. For nose-wheel lifting install the lock (Locking screw (For nose wheel
    lifting) (Pt.No. 513.32.12.050)) (Figure 2 [2]).
    3.1.5 Put the jack (Figure 2 [4]) in position below the jack adapter (Figure 2 [5]) or (Figure 2 [3]).
    3.2 Lift A Wheel
    3.2.1 Set the parking brake to OFF.
    3.2.2 Slowly extend the jack (Figure 2 [4]) until the wheel is clear of the ground.
    3.2.3 Make sure the jack (Figure 2 [4]) is safe.
    3.3 Lower A Wheel
    3.3.1 Prepare the jack (Figure 2 [4]) to lower the wheel.
    3.3.2 Slowly lower the wheel until the wheel is on the ground and there is no weight on the jack
    (Figure 2 [4]).
    3.4 Close Up
    3.4.1 Remove the jack (Figure 2 [4]) from the aircraft.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.4.2 Remove the jack adapter (Figure 2 [5]) or (Figure 2 [3]) from the landing-gear leg. If the
    nose-wheel has been lifted remove the locking screw (Figure 2 [2]).
    3.4.3 Remove the AIRCRAFT ON JACKS warning signs.
    3.4.4 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    4 A
    1
    150Kg

    25°
    MAX.

    B B

    1 1

    2 2

    B 3

    4
    07101

    Figure 1 Jacking – Complete Aircraft

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A B
    2

    B
    A
    07102

    Figure 2 Jacking – Single Wheel

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 8
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    SHORING

    MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Table of Contents Page

    SHORING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES................................................................................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Shoring – Trestle Positions..................................................................................... 3

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A JACKING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Trestles Part Local supply As
    Required
    Warning Signs (AIRCRAFT ON Part Local supply As
    TRESTLES) Required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-07-20-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    The trestles are usually used with jacks, but they must be the correct shape and strength to hold the aircraft
    if the jacks are removed for a short time. Hold the aircraft on trestles during long periods of storage or for
    major maintenance.
    Make sure the tops of the trestles are the same shape as the aircraft surface which they touch, and there are
    no projections that can damage the aircraft. Put a soft cover on the tops of the trestles to make sure they do
    not cause damage to the aircraft.
    Fig. 1 gives the quantity and positions of the trestles to be used to hold the aircraft.
    2 Put The Aircraft On Trestles (Ref. Fig. 1)
    2.1 Put the signs (Warning Signs (AIRCRAFT ON TRESTLES) (Pt.No. Local supply) ) around the aircraft.
    2.2 Lift the aircraft clear of the ground on jacks (Refer to DM 12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.3 Put the trestles (Trestles (Pt.No. Local supply)) in position under the aircraft.
    2.4
    CAUTION

    THE FUSELAGE WEIGHT MUST BE SUFFICIENTLY ON THE TRESTLE AT FRAME 21 TO HOLD


    THE TRESTLE. IT MUST NOT BE POSSIBLE TO MOVE THE TRESTLE BY HAND.

    Adjust the jacks to make sure the aircraft lightly touches the trestles and the jacks hold the weight of
    the aircraft.
    2.5 Make sure the jacks and the trestles are safe.
    3 Remove The Trestles From The Aircraft
    3.1 Lift the aircraft clear of the trestles on the jacks (Refer to DM 12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A).
    3.2 Remove the trestles from below the aircraft.
    3.3 Lower the aircraft to the ground and remove the jacks (Refer to DM 12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A).
    3.4 Remove the AIRCRAFT ON TRESTLES warning signs from around the aircraft.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-07-20-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FRAME FRAME FRAME


    15 21 36

    JACKING
    POINT
    RIB 7
    MAIN FUSELAGE
    JACKING JACKING
    POINT POINT

    MAIN
    JACKING
    FUSELAGE
    POINT
    JACKING
    POINT
    RIB 7
    07103

    Figure 1 Shoring – Trestle Positions

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-07-20-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-07-20-00-00A-901A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    LEVELING AND WEIGHING – GENERAL

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    LEVELING AND WEIGHING – GENERAL - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION...................... 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1
    1.1 Weighing................................................................................................................. 1
    1.2 Levelling................................................................................................................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-08-10-00-00A-901A-A WEIGHING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-08-20-00-00A-901A-A LEVELING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Description

    1 General

    1.1 Weighing
    (Refer to DM 12-B-08-10-00-00A-901A-A)
    This data module gives the procedure to weigh the aircraft.

    1.2 Levelling
    (Refer to DM 12-B-08-20-00-00A-901A-A)
    This data module gives the procedure to make the aircraft level for maintenance procedures.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-08-00-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-08-00-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    WEIGHING

    MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Table of Contents Page

    WEIGHING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.............................................................................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-12-10-01-00A-902A-A FUEL - SERVICING
    12-B-12-10-02-00A-902A-A BRAKES - SERVICING
    12-B-12-10-03-00A-902A-A ENGINE OIL - SERVICING
    12-B-12-10-04-00A-902A-A TIRES - SERVICING
    12-B-12-10-05-00A-902A-A OXYGEN - SERVICING
    12-B-12-20-01-00A-902A-A AIRCRAFT EXTERIOR WASHING - SERVICING
    12-B-12-20-03-00A-902A-A AIRCRAFT INTERIOR CLEANING - SERVICING

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Aircraft weighing equipment (3 Part 990.00.02.155 As
    load plates) (Or load cell Required
    equipment and adapters)
    Inclinometer Part 903.70.32.410 As
    Required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-08-10-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This document gives the procedure to weigh the aircraft with wheel load plates. The aircraft can also be
    weighed using load cell equipment. The aircraft must be in a hangar when it is weighed. This prevents
    incorrect indications on the weighing equipment because of the wind.
    2 Weighing the aircraft
    2.1 Preparation
    2.1.1 Wash the aircraft (Refer to DM 12-B-12-20-01-00A-902A-A).
    2.1.2 Defuel the aircraft (Refer to DM 12-B-12-10-01-00A-902A-A).
    2.1.3 Do a check of the oxygen quantity (Refer to DM 12-B-12-10-05-00A-902A-A).
    2.1.4 Make sure the tire pressures are correct (Refer to DM 12-B-12-10-04-00A-902A-A).
    2.1.5 Do a check of the brake reservoir fluid-quantity (Refer to DM 12-B-12-10-02-00A-902A-A).
    2.1.6 Do a check of the engine oil quantity (Refer to DM 12-B-12-10-03-00A-902A-A).
    2.1.7 Clean the interior of the aircraft (Refer to DM 12-B-12-20-03-00A-902A-A).
    2.1.8 Remove all of the equipment from the aircraft that is not in the aircraft equipment list.
    2.1.9 Make sure all the equipment in the aircraft equipment list is installed in the correct position in
    the aircraft.
    2.1.10 Make sure the flaps are set to 0°.
    2.1.11 Put the aircraft in position on level ground
    2.2 Procedure
    2.2.1 Refer to the manufacturer's instructions and put the weighing equipment (Aircraft weighing
    equipment (3 load plates) (Or load cell equipment and adapters) (Pt.No. 990.00.02.155)) in
    position.
    2.2.2 Move the aircraft on to the weighing plates.
    2.2.3 Make sure the aircraft cannot move off of the weighing plates.
    2.2.4 Set the parking brake to OFF.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-08-10-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.2.5 Put the inclinometer (Inclinometer (Pt.No. 903.70.32.410)) in the longitudinal direction on the
    passenger compartment floor, adjacent to the cargo door.
    2.2.6 Make sure the attitude of the aircraft is level.
    2.2.7 If necessary, adjust the pressure of the nose wheel tire to make the attitude of the aircraft
    correct.
    2.2.8 Remove the inclinometer from the aircraft.
    2.2.9 Close the passenger/crew door and the cargo door.
    2.2.10 Refer to the manufacturer's instructions and make a note of the aircraft weight shown on the
    weighing plates.
    2.2.11 Do the procedure to weigh (Refer to Airplane Flight Manual, Section 6).

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-08-10-00-00A-901A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 3
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-08-10-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    LEVELING

    MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Table of Contents Page

    LEVELING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES............................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Levelling – Maintenance Practices......................................................................... 3

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A GENERAL - AEROSPACE GROUND EQUIPMENT
    (AGE) AND TOOLS
    12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A JACKING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Inclinometer Part 903.70.32.410 As
    Required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-08-20-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Level The Aircraft
    1.1
    Note

    To identify the AGE and tools used in this procedure refer to the list of AGE and tools 12-
    B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A.

    Procedure
    1.1.1 Lift the aircraft clear of the ground on jacks (Refer to DM 12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A).
    1.1.2 Put the inclinometer (Inclinometer (Pt.No. 903.70.32.410)) (Figure 1 [1]) in the lateral
    direction on the passenger compartment floor, adjacent to the cargo door opening.
    1.1.3 Adjust the two main jacks to make the aircraft level in the lateral direction.
    1.1.4 Turn the inclinometer (Figure 1 [1]) 180 degrees and make sure the indication on the
    inclinometer (Figure 1 [1]) is the same.
    1.1.5 Put the inclinometer (Figure 1 [1]) in the longitudinal direction.
    1.1.6 Adjust the tail jack to make the aircraft level in the longitudinal direction.
    1.1.7 Turn the inclinometer (Figure 1 [1]) 180 degrees and make sure the indication on the
    inclinometer (Figure 1 [1]) is the same.
    1.1.8 Put the inclinometer (Figure 1 [1]) in the lateral direction and make sure the aircraft is still
    level in the lateral direction.
    1.1.9 Remove the inclinometer (Figure 1 [1]) from the aircraft.
    1.2 Close Up
    1.2.1 When the applicable procedure is completed, do Step 1.2.2 and Step 1.2.3.
    1.2.2 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    1.2.3 Lower the aircraft to the ground and remove the jacks (Refer to DM 12-
    B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-08-20-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    08101

    Figure 1 Levelling – Maintenance Practices

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-08-20-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-08-20-00-00A-901A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    HANDLING AND TAXIING – GENERAL

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    HANDLING AND TAXIING – GENERAL - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION.......................... 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1
    1.1 Towing.................................................................................................................... 1
    1.2 Taxiing.................................................................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-09-10-00-00A-901A-A TOWING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-09-20-00-00A-901A-A TAXIING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Description

    1 General

    1.1 Towing
    (Refer to DM 12-B-09-10-00-00A-901A-A)
    This data module gives the safety precautions and procedures to move the aircraft with a tow bar and a vehicle or
    with a steering arm.

    1.2 Taxiing
    (Refer to DM 12-B-09-20-00-00A-901A-A)
    This data module gives the safety precautions for aircraft taxiing.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-09-00-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-09-00-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    TOWING

    MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Table of Contents Page

    TOWING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.................................................................................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Towing – Maintenance Practices............................................................................ 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A GENERAL - AEROSPACE GROUND EQUIPMENT
    (AGE) AND TOOLS

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Tow bar Part 990.00.00.904 As
    Required
    Head attachment Part 990.00.00.907 As
    Required
    Steering bar Part 509.10.12.043 As
    Required
    Wheel chocks Part 990.00.00.902 As
    Required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-09-10-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-07-28 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Towing Procedures
    1.1
    Note

    To identify the AGE and tools used in this procedure refer to the list of AGE and tools 12-
    B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A.

    General Safety Precautions


    Obey the following safety precautions when the aircraft is to be moved:
    1.1.1 Make sure there are sufficient persons to move the aircraft. These persons are:
    − A person at each wing tip
    − A person in the pilot seat to operate the aircraft brakes
    − A person to operate the tow vehicle
    − A person in control of the towing operation
    1.1.2 Make sure all persons know the safety precautions and procedures for the towing operation.
    1.1.3 Make sure the tow vehicle and the related equipment is correct for the aircraft.
    1.1.4 Make sure the direction in which the aircraft is to be towed is clear of objects.
    1.1.5 Operate the aircraft navigation lights to make sure that the size of the aircraft is visible at all
    times.
    1.1.6 When the aircraft is towed at night, make sure all persons have a light to give the necessary
    indications.
    1.2 Safety Precautions During The Aircraft Move
    Obey the following safety precautions when the aircraft is moved:
    1.2.1 Make sure the persons are at the correct positions.
    1.2.2 Make sure the person in control of the towing operation can see all the other persons at all
    times.
    1.2.3 Make sure the aircraft speed is not too high.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-09-10-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-07-28 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1.2.4 Make sure the nose wheel does not turn to an angle more than the limit shown on the nose
    landing-gear leg.
    1.2.5 Do not push or pull on the flying control surfaces, propeller, antennas or other surfaces
    which can easily become damaged
    2 Tow The Aircraft With The Tow Bar

    WARNING

    TOW THE AIRCRAFT ON FIRM GROUND ONLY. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY CAUSE INJURY TO
    PERSONNEL OR DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

    2.1 Obey the safety precautions.


    2.2 Connect the tow bar (Tow bar (Pt.No. 990.00.00.904)) (Figure 1 [4]) to the nose landing-gear strut
    (Figure 1 [3]).
    2.3 Connect the tow bar (Figure 1 [4]) to the tow vehicle.
    2.4 Remove the chocks (Wheel chocks (Pt.No. 990.00.00.902)) from the landing gear.
    2.5 Release the parking brake.
    2.6 Move the aircraft to the new location with the tow vehicle.
    2.7 Put the wheel chocks in position.
    2.8 Disconnect the tow vehicle from the tow bar (Figure 1 [4]).
    2.9 Disconnect the tow bar (Figure 1 [4]) from the nose landing-gear strut (Figure 1 [3]).
    3 Tow The Aircraft With The Steering Bar
    3.1 Obey the safety precautions.
    3.2 Remove the steering bar (Steering bar (Pt.No. 509.10.12.043)) (Figure 1 [2]) from the steering bar
    attachments (Figure 1 [1]) inside the rear fuselage.
    3.3 Connect the steering bar (Figure 1 [2]) to the nose landing-gear strut (Figure 1 [3]).
    3.4 Remove the wheel chocks from the landing gear.
    3.5 Release the parking brake.
    3.6 Move the aircraft to the new location.
    3.7 Put the wheel chocks in position.
    3.8 Disconnect the steering bar (Figure 1 [2]) from the nose landing-gear strut (Figure 1 [3]).
    3.9 Attach the steering bar (Figure 1 [2]) to the steering bar attachments (Figure 1 [1]) in the rear fuselage.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-09-10-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-07-28 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1 2
    A
    A

    B
    2
    09101

    Figure 1 Towing – Maintenance Practices

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-09-10-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-07-28 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    4 Tow the Aircraft by Lifting the Nosewheel


    4.1 Obey the safety precautions in Para .
    4.2 Remove the wheel chocks from the landing gear.

    CAUTION

    DO NOT LIFT THE NOSEWHEEL TIRE MORE THAN 75 MM (2.95 IN) FROM THE GROUND. YOU
    CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE NOSE LANDING GEAR IF YOU LIFT THE TIRE MORE THAN 75
    MM (2.95 IN).

    4.3 Obey the towing vehicle manufacturer's instructions and carefully lift the nosewheel clear of the
    ground.
    4.4 Release the parking brake.
    4.5 Move the aircraft to the new location.
    4.6 Carefully lower the nosewheel.
    4.7 Put the wheel chocks in position.
    4.8 Move the towing vehicle away from the aircraft.

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-09-10-00-00A-901A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-07-28 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-09-10-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-07-28 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    TAXIING

    MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Table of Contents Page

    TAXIING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES................................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-09-20-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2007-11-20 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Safety Precautions

    WARNING

    ONLY QUALIFIED PERSONS MUST TAXI THE AIRCRAFT. INCORRECT PROCEDURES CAN CAUSE
    SERIOUS INJURY TO PEOPLE AND DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

    Obey these safety precautions during the aircraft taxiing:


    − Obey the safety precautions for engine operation
    − Make sure the direction that the aircraft is to go along is clear of objects
    − Keep the taxiing speed to a safe speed
    − Use reverse thrust to control the taxiing speed where possible. Do not use the aircraft brakes
    continuously to control the taxiing speed
    − If necessary, use sufficient persons and an aircraft marshaller to make sure the aircraft does not touch
    other objects during the aircraft taxiing
    − Obey all local safety precautions

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-09-20-00-00A-901A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2007-11-20 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PARKING, MOORING AND STORING – GENERAL

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    PARKING, MOORING AND STORING – GENERAL - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION...... 1


    1 Parking................................................................................................................... 1
    2 Storing.................................................................................................................... 1
    3 Mooring................................................................................................................... 1
    4 Return To Service................................................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-10-10-00-00A-901A-A PARKING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-10-10-01-00A-901A-A STORING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-10-20-00-00A-901A-A MOORING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-10-30-00-00A-901A-A RETURN TO SERVICE - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Description

    1 Parking
    (Refer to DM 12-B-10-10-00-00A-901A-A)
    Parking is done when the aircraft will not be used for a short time.

    2 Storing
    (Refer to DM 12-B-10-10-01-00A-901A-A)
    Storing is done when the aircraft will not be used for a long time.

    3 Mooring
    (Refer to DM 12-B-10-20-00-00A-901A-A)
    Mooring is done when the aircraft is not in a hangar and the wind speeds are high.

    4 Return To Service
    (Refer to DM 12-B-10-30-00-00A-901A-A)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-10-00-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Return to service is done when the aircraft is to be used after storage.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-10-00-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PARKING

    MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Table of Contents Page

    PARKING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES................................................................................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 3

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Parking – Maintenance Practices........................................................................... 5

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A GENERAL - AEROSPACE GROUND EQUIPMENT
    (AGE) AND TOOLS
    12-B-09-10-00-00A-901A-A TOWING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-10-10-01-00A-901A-A STORING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-10-20-00-00A-901A-A MOORING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-27-70-00-00A-040A-A GUST LOCK - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Engine air-intake cover Part 990.00.00.891 As
    required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-10-10-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-06-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark


    Engine air-intake cover CSN 10-10-00-01-035 Alternativ
    e
    Oil-cooler air intake cover Part 990.00.00.892 As
    required
    Oil-cooler air intake cover Part 990.00.00.893 As
    required
    Engine exhaust-stub covers Part 510.10.12.046 As
    required
    ECS air intake cover Part 990.00.00.894 As
    required
    Generator air intake Part 990.00.00.895 As
    required
    Propeller restraint Part 510.10.12.026 As
    required
    AOA transmitter cover Part 110.88.07.001 As
    required
    AOA transmitter cover CSN 10-10-00-01-015 Alternativ
    e
    Pitot head cover Part 510.10.12.017 As
    required
    Pitot head cover CSN 10-10-00-01-020 Alternativ
    e
    Wheel chocks Part 990.00.00.902 As
    required
    Lock pin emergency exit Part 940.26.81.205 As
    required
    Lock pin emergency exit CSN 10-10-00-01-010 Alternativ
    e
    Sun screens (Optional) Part 990.00.00.881 As
    required
    Cover assembly CSN 10-10-00-01-040 As
    required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-10-10-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-06-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    The aircraft can be temporarily parked in a hangar or outside in low wind speeds. If the aircraft is outside and
    the wind speeds are high, moor the aircraft (AMM 12-B-10-20-00-00A-901A-A).
    If the aircraft is not to be used for a long time, do the storage of the aircraft (AMM 12-B-10-10-01-00A-901A-
    A).
    2
    CAUTION

    IF THE AIRCRAFT IS PARKED FOR A LONG PERIOD OF TIME WITH TEMPERATURES BELOW 0° C (32
    F), APPLY APPROXIAMATELY TWO OUNCES (59 CC) OF ISOPROPYL ALCOHOL TO THE OUTER
    DIAMETER OF THE BRAKE ASSEMBLY WITH A SPRAY BOTTLE. APPLY THE ALCOHOL WHEN THE
    BRAKE ASSEMBLY IS SUFFICIENTLY COOL TO TOUCH BUT BEFORE IT IS COLD.

    CAUTION

    MAKE SURE THE NOSE WHEEL IS CENTERED AND THE RUDDER IS IN THE NEUTRAL POSITION.

    Note

    To identify the AGE and tools used in this procedure refer to the list of AGE and tools 12-
    B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A.

    Note

    Two versions of external cover sets are available. The original version supplied with the aircraft is shown in
    Fig. 1 Sheet 1 and 2. The superseding version is shown in Fig. 1 Sheet 3.

    Parking - Maintenance Practices


    2.1
    Note

    Before you install or remove covers, make sure that they are serviceable and complete.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-10-10-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-06-15 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Note

    If the aircraft is parked in sunlight, the Sun screens (Optional) (Pt.No. 990.00.00.881) can be put in
    position behind the flight compartment windows to protect the interior from heat and UV damage.

    Put the aircraft on a level surface. If the aircraft is not in a hangar, point the aircraft into the usual wind
    direction (AMM 12-B-09-10-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.2 Put the parking brake to ON.
    2.3 Put the Wheel chocks (Pt.No. 990.00.00.902) at the front and the rear of the nose wheel and each
    main wheel.
    2.4 Ground the aircraft.
    2.5 Close the DV window, the passenger/crew door and the cargo door.

    Note

    Keep the DV window open if the aircraft is parked in a hangar.

    2.6 Make sure all access panels are correctly installed and closed.
    2.7 Install these covers:
    − Engine air-intake cover (Pt.No. 990.00.00.891) Figure 1 [1] or Figure 1 [4]
    − Oil-cooler air intake cover (Pt.No. 990.00.00.892), (Qty 2) Figure 1 [2] or Figure 1 [1]
    − ECS air intake cover (Pt.No. 990.00.00.894) Figure 1 [3] or Figure 1 [2]
    − Generator air intake (Pt.No. 990.00.00.895) Figure 1 [4] or Figure 1 [2]
    2.8 Install these covers:
    − Engine exhaust-stub covers (Pt.No. 510.10.12.046) Figure 1 [5] or Figure 1 [6]
    − AOA transmitter cover (Pt.No. 110.88.07.001) Figure 1 [6] or Figure 1 [7]
    − Pitot head cover (Pt.No. 510.10.12.017) Figure 1 [7] or Figure 1 [8]
    − Propeller restraint (Pt.No. 510.10.12.026) Figure 1 [8] or Figure 1 [5]
    2.9 Engage the flying controls gust lock in the flight compartment, AMM 12-B-27-70-00-00A-040A-A.
    2.10 Install the Lock pin emergency exit (Pt.No. 940.26.81.205) Figure 1 [9] or Figure 1 [9] in the passenger
    compartment emergency exit inner handle Figure 1 [10].
    2.11 Lock the passenger/crew and cargo doors.
    2.12 Lock the service door 31 AB.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-10-10-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-06-15 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FWD
    A

    D C

    A B 1

    FWD

    B
    2

    C
    10102

    Figure 1 Parking – Maintenance Practices (Sheet 1 of 3)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-10-10-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-06-15 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    C A
    E

    A
    A
    D

    C
    IF INSTALLED
    B
    D
    B
    F
    9
    10

    F D

    E 8 C
    7

    INSIDE CABIN
    10103

    LOOKING OUTBOARD

    Figure 1 Parking – Maintenance Practices (Sheet 2 of 3)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-10-10-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-06-15 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A 2

    B
    TYPICAL

    D
    E
    E C
    B 3

    A C
    C B TYPICAL

    4
    9

    D
    5

    E
    TYPICAL

    12-A-101000-A-S4080-30013-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Parking – Maintenance Practices (Sheet 3 of 3)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-10-10-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-06-15 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-10-10-00-00A-901A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-06-15 Page 8
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    STORING

    MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Table of Contents Page

    STORING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES................................................................................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-10-10-00-00A-901A-A PARKING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-10-20-00-00A-901A-A MOORING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-12-10-01-00A-902A-A FUEL - SERVICING
    12-B-12-10-04-00A-902A-A TIRES - SERVICING
    12-B-24-30-07-00A-920A-A LEAD ACID BATTERY - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-34-11-00-00A-901A-A PITOT STATIC SYSTEM - MAINTENANCE
    PRACTICES
    12-B-79-00-00-00A-902A-A OIL SYSTEM - SERVICING

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Desiccant bags Part Local supply As
    Required
    Humidity indicators Part Local supply As
    Required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-10-10-01-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-11-28 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    Storage must be done when the aircraft will not be in use for a long time. The procedure is divided into four
    parts, each with a specified time for aircraft storage. The parts of the procedure are:
    − Part 1 Up to 7 days
    − Part 2 More than 7 days and up to 28 days
    − Part 3 More than 28 days and up to 90 days
    − Part 4 More than 90 days
    2 Part 1 (Up to 7 days)
    2.1 Refuel the aircraft, refer to AMM 12-B-12-10-01-00A-902A-A.
    2.2 Make sure the tire pressures are correct, refer to AMM 12-B-12-10-04-00A-902A-A.
    2.3 Park the aircraft, refer to AMM 12-B-10-10-00-00A-901A-A.
    2.4 Moor the aircraft if it is not in a hangar, refer to AMM 12-B-10-20-00-00A-901A-A.
    2.5 Do the preservation procedure for the engine, refer to P&WC EMM 72-00-00.
    3 Part 2 (more than 7 days and up to 28 days)
    3.1 Refuel the aircraft, refer to AMM 12-B-12-10-01-00A-902A-A.
    3.2 Make sure the tire pressures are correct, refer to AMM 12-B-12-10-04-00A-902A-A.
    3.3 Park the aircraft, refer to AMM 12-B-10-10-00-00A-901A-A.
    3.4 Moor the aircraft if it is not in a hangar, refer to AMM 12-B-10-20-00-00A-901A-A.
    3.5 Install Desiccant bags (Pt.No. Local supply) and Humidity indicators (Pt.No. Local supply) in the
    engine exhaust stubs.
    3.6 Do the preservation procedure for the engine, refer to P&WC EMM 72-00-00.
    3.7 Aircraft MSN 545, 1001 thru 1340 with Davtron Clock P/N 999.61.11.214 and Pre SB 31-015 or
    Pre SB 31-016. Open and install a safety clip on the circuit breaker:
    − ELT-NAV/CLOCK (BATTERY AND EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX)
    3.8 Each seven days do these procedures:

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-10-10-01-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-11-28 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.8.1 Make sure the tire pressures are correct, refer to AMM 12-B-12-10-04-00A-902A-A.
    3.8.2 Move the aircraft (conserves the tires).
    3.8.3 Drain the pitot-static system, refer to AMM 12-B-34-11-00-00A-901A-A.
    3.8.4 Remove 0.5 US pint (0,25 l) of fuel from each fuel tank and examine for water.
    3.8.5 Replace the engine exhaust-stubs Desiccant bags (Pt.No. Local supply) if the humidity is
    more than 40 percent.
    4 Part 3 (more than 28 days and up to 90 days)
    4.1 Refuel the aircraft, refer to AMM 12-B-12-10-01-00A-902A-A.
    4.2 Make sure the tire pressures are correct, refer to AMM 12-B-12-10-04-00A-902A-A.
    4.3 Park the aircraft, refer to AMM 12-B-10-10-00-00A-901A-A.
    4.4 Moor the aircraft if it is not in a hangar, refer to AMM 12-B-10-20-00-00A-901A-A.
    4.5 Install Desiccant bags (Pt.No. Local supply) and Humidity indicators (Pt.No. Local supply) in the
    engine exhaust stubs.
    4.6 Do the preservation procedure for the engine, refer to P&WC EMM 72-00-00.
    4.7 Remove the batteries, refer to AMM 12-B-24-30-07-00A-920A-A.
    4.8 Each seven days do these procedures:
    4.8.1 Make sure the tire pressures are correct, refer to AMM 12-B-12-10-04-00A-902A-A.
    4.8.2 Move the aircraft (conserves the tires).
    4.8.3 Drain the pitot-static system, refer to AMM 12-B-34-11-00-00A-901A-A.
    4.8.4 Remove 0.5 US pint (0,25 l) of fuel from each fuel tank and examine for water.
    4.8.5 Replace the engine exhaust-stubs Desiccant bags (Pt.No. Local supply) if the humidity is
    more than 40 percent.
    5 Part 4 (more than 90 days)
    5.1 Refuel the aircraft, refer to AMM 12-B-12-10-01-00A-902A-A.
    5.2 Make sure the tire pressures are correct, refer to AMM 12-B-12-10-04-00A-902A-A.
    5.3 Do the preservation procedure for the engine, refer to P&WC EMM 72-00-00.
    5.4 Install Desiccant bags (Pt.No. Local supply) and Humidity indicators (Pt.No. Local supply) in the
    engine exhaust stubs.
    5.5 Remove the batteries, refer to AMM 12-B-24-30-07-00A-920A-A.
    5.6 Drain the engine oil system, refer to AMM 12-B-79-00-00-00A-902A-A.
    5.7 Park the aircraft, refer to AMM 12-B-10-10-00-00A-901A-A.
    5.8 If the aircraft is to be stored outside (especially during winter months), a tail support/stand must be
    installed, so that the aircraft does not tip onto its tail because of snow accumulation.
    5.9 Each seven days do these procedures:
    5.9.1 Move the aircraft (conserves the tires).
    5.9.2 Drain the pitot-static system, refer to AMM 12-B-34-11-00-00A-901A-A.
    5.9.3 Remove 0.5 US pint (0,25 l) of fuel from each fuel tank and examine for water.
    5.9.4 Replace the engine exhaust-stubs Desiccant bags (Pt.No. Local supply) if the humidity is
    more than 40 percent.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-10-10-01-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-11-28 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-10-10-01-00A-901A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-11-28 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    MOORING

    MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Table of Contents Page

    MOORING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES............................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Mooring – Maintenance Practices.......................................................................... 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-10-10-00-00A-901A-A PARKING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Rope (Four pieces, 0.75 in (20 Part Local supply As
    mm) diameter, manila or nylon) Required
    Mooring blocks (Minimum 200 lb Part Local supply As
    (91 Kg) each) Required
    Spike pickets (For fine type soil) Part Local supply As
    Required
    Screw pickets (For clay type soil Part Local supply As
    or rock surfaces) Required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-10-20-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    The aircraft must be moored if it is outside when there are high wind speeds or when it will not be moved for
    a long time. The aircraft can be moored on hard surfaces such as concrete or on soft surfaces such as
    grass.
    The aircraft has four mooring points:
    − The nose landing-gear leg
    − The rear jacking point
    − The left wing bottom-surface at rib 12
    − The right wing bottom-surface at rib 12
    2
    CAUTION

    KEEP THE ROPE TIGHT WHEN IT IS ATTACHED TO THE AIRCRAFT AND GROUND MOORING
    POINTS.

    Hard Surfaces With Mooring Points


    2.1 Park the aircraft (Refer to DM 12-B-10-10-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.2 Attach the rope (Rope (Four pieces, 0.75 in (20 mm) diameter, manila or nylon) (Pt.No. Local supply))
    to each wing mooring point (Figure 1 [4]) and to the ground mooring points (Figure 1 [1]). Make a knot
    in the rope at each wing mooring point (Figure 1 [4]) to make sure the rope does not move.
    2.3 Attach the rope to the nose landing-gear (NLG) leg (Figure 1 [5]) and to the ground mooring points
    (Figure 1 [3]). Wind the rope one time around the NLG leg.
    2.4 Attach the rope to the rear jacking point (Figure 1 [6]) and to the ground mooring points (Figure 1 [2]).
    Make sure each part of the rope is approximately 25° from vertical.
    3 Hard Surfaces With No Mooring Points
    3.1 Park the aircraft (Refer to DM 12-B-10-10-00-00A-901A-A).
    3.2 Put the mooring blocks (Mooring blocks (Minimum 200 lb (91 Kg) each) (Pt.No. Local supply)) in
    position near the aircraft.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-10-20-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.3 Attach the rope to each wing mooring point (Figure 1 [4]) and to the concrete blocks (Figure 1 [1]).
    Make a knot in the rope at each wing mooring point (Figure 1 [4]) to make sure the rope does not
    move.
    3.4 Attach the rope to the NLG leg (Figure 1 [5]) and to the concrete blocks (Figure 1 [3]). Wind the rope
    one time around the NLG leg.
    3.5 Attach the rope to the rear jacking point (Figure 1 [6]) and to the concrete blocks (Figure 1 [2]). Make
    sure each part of the rope is approximately 25° from vertical.
    4 Soft Surfaces
    4.1 Park the aircraft (Refer to DM 12-B-10-10-00-00A-901A-A).
    4.2 Make sure the spikes (Spike pickets (For fine type soil) (Pt.No. Local supply)) or screw pickets (Screw
    pickets (For clay type soil or rock surfaces) (Pt.No. Local supply)) to be used are correct for the ground
    type.
    4.3 Put the spikes in position near the aircraft.
    4.4 Attach the rope to each wing mooring point (Figure 1 [4]) and to the spikes (Figure 1 [1]). Make a knot
    in the rope at each wing mooring point (Figure 1 [4]) to make sure the rope does not move.
    4.5 Attach the rope to the NLG leg (Figure 1 [5]) and to the spikes (Figure 1 [3]). Wind the rope one time
    around the NLG leg.
    4.6 Attach the rope to the rear jacking point (Figure 1 [6]) and to the spikes (Figure 1 [2]). Make sure each
    part of the rope is approximately 25° from vertical.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-10-20-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1 1

    B
    A
    3
    C

    2
    3

    1 5
    1

    25°

    25°

    C B
    10101

    Figure 1 Mooring – Maintenance Practices

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-10-20-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-10-20-00-00A-901A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-10-20-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    RETURN TO SERVICE

    MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Table of Contents Page

    RETURN TO SERVICE - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES........................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-07-20-00-00A-901A-A SHORING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-10-10-00-00A-901A-A PARKING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-10-20-00-00A-901A-A MOORING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-12-10-04-00A-902A-A TIRES - SERVICING
    12-B-24-30-07-00A-920A-A LEAD ACID BATTERY - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-10-30-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-11-28 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    Return to service must be done when the aircraft has been in storage. The procedure is divided into four
    parts, each with a specified time that the aircraft has been in storage. The parts of the procedure are:
    − Part 1 Up to 7 days
    − Part 2 More than 7 days and up to 28 days
    − Part 3 More than 28 days and up to 90 days
    − Part 4 More than 90 days.
    2 Part 1 (Up to 7 days)
    2.1 Remove the equipment used to moor the aircraft (AMM 12-B-10-20-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.2 Remove the equipment used to park the aircraft (AMM 12-B-10-10-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.3 Make sure the tire pressures are correct (AMM 12-B-12-10-04-00A-902A-A).
    3 Part 2 (more than 7 days and up to 28 days)
    3.1 Remove the equipment used to moor the aircraft (AMM 12-B-10-20-00-00A-901A-A).
    3.2 Remove the equipment used to park the aircraft (AMM 12-B-10-10-00-00A-901A-A).
    3.3 Make sure the tire pressures are correct (AMM 12-B-12-10-04-00A-902A-A).
    3.4 Remove the desiccant bags and humidity indicators from the engine exhaust stubs.
    3.5 Aircraft MSN 545, 1001 thru 1340 with Davtron Clock P/N 999.61.11.214 and Pre SB 31-015 or
    Pre SB 31-016. Remove the safety clip and close the circuit breaker:
    − ELT-NAV/CLOCK (BATTERY AND EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX).
    4 Part 3 (more than 28 days and up to 90 days)
    4.1 Remove the equipment used to moor the aircraft (AMM 12-B-10-20-00-00A-901A-A).
    4.2 Remove the equipment used to park the aircraft (AMM 12-B-10-10-00-00A-901A-A).
    4.3 Make sure the tire pressures are correct (AMM 12-B-12-10-04-00A-902A-A).
    4.4 Remove the desiccant bags and humidity indicators from the engine exhaust stubs.
    4.5 Install the aircraft batteries (AMM 12-B-24-30-07-00A-920A-A).
    4.6 Do the depreservation procedure for the engine (Refer to P&WC EMM 72-00-00).
    5 Part 4 (more than 90 days)
    5.1 Remove the aircraft from the trestles (AMM 12-B-07-20-00-00A-901A-A).
    5.2 Remove the equipment used to moor the aircraft (AMM 12-B-10-20-00-00A-901A-A).
    5.3 Remove the equipment used to park the aircraft (AMM 12-B-10-10-00-00A-901A-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-10-30-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-11-28 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    5.4 Make sure the tire pressures are correct (AMM 12-B-12-10-04-00A-902A-A).
    5.5 Remove the desiccant bags and humidity indicators from the engine exhaust stubs.
    5.6 Install the aircraft batteries (AMM 12-B-24-30-07-00A-920A-A).
    5.7 Do the depreservation procedure for the engine (Refer to P&WC EMM 72-00-00).

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-10-30-00-00A-901A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-11-28 Page 3
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-10-30-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-11-28 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PLACARDS AND MARKINGS – GENERAL

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    PLACARDS AND MARKINGS – GENERAL - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION.................... 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1
    1.1 Exterior Placards.................................................................................................... 1
    1.2 Interior Placards..................................................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-11-20-00-00A-040A-A EXTERIOR PLACARDS AND MARKINGS -
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-11-30-00-00A-040A-A INTERIOR PLACARDS - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION

    Description

    1 General
    The precise location of each placard, and a list of applicable part numbers is given in the Illustrated Parts Catalog
    (IPC).

    1.1 Exterior Placards


    (Refer to DM 12-B-11-20-00-00A-040A-A)
    Exterior placards and markings are installed on the aircraft exterior and inside access panels. They give warnings
    and cautions, ground servicing and maintenance information, and ground operation instructions and limits.

    1.2 Interior Placards


    (Refer to DM 12-B-11-30-00-00A-040A-A)
    Interior placards and markings are installed in the flight compartment and the passenger compartment. They give
    information for the operation of the aircraft and its equipment, emergency instructions, and ground servicing and
    maintenance information.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-11-00-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-11-00-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PLACARDS AND MARKINGS

    MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Table of Contents Page

    PLACARDS AND MARKINGS - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES................................................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Silk screen Part Local supply As
    Required
    Stencil Part Local supply As
    Required
    Spreader Part Local supply As
    Required
    Stencil brush Part Local supply As
    Required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-11-00-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-07-06 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    White spirit Part P01-008 As
    Required
    MATERIAL DELETED Part P08-041 -
    Paint, hardener Part P07-010 As
    Required
    Paint, black Part P07-011 As
    Required
    Paint, white Part P07-012 As
    Required
    Paint, red Part P07-013 As
    Required
    Paint, thinners Part P07-014 As
    Required
    Paint, retarder Part P07-015 As
    Required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1
    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    General
    This document gives the procedures for the removal and installation of exterior and interior placards, and for
    the installation of silk screen and/or stencil markings (as applicable).
    2 Placards Installation
    2.1 Clean the applicable area with a lint-free cloth made moist with White spirit (Pt.No. P01-008) and allow
    to dry.
    2.2 Remove the backing strip from the new placard.
    2.3 Align the placard and apply it correctly into position. Make sure no air bubbles are caught between the
    placard and the surface.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-11-00-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-07-06 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.4 DELETED
    3 Silk Screen and Stencil Markings - Installation
    3.1 Procedure
    3.1.1 Clean the applicable area of the aircraft with a lint-free cloth made moist with Paint,
    thinners (Pt.No. P07-014). Allow it to dry.
    3.1.2 Prepare the paint mixture; mix the materials in these proportions:
    − Paint, black (Pt.No. P07-011) or Paint, white (Pt.No. P07-012) or Paint,
    red (Pt.No. P07-013) 100.00 g
    − Paint, hardener (Pt.No. P07-010) 25.00 g
    − Paint, retarder (Pt.No. P07-015) 2.50 g
    − Paint, thinners (Pt.No. P07-014) 11.00 cc

    Note

    Do not prepare more paint than necessary. It will become hard very quickly.

    3.1.3 Put the Stencil (Pt.No. Local supply) in position on the aircraft surface.

    Note

    Refer to the applicable illustration to make sure you point the stencil in the correct direction.

    3.1.4 Use a Stencil brush (Pt.No. Local supply) to apply an even layer of the paint through the
    stencil, onto the aircraft surface.
    3.1.5 Allow the paint to dry and remove the stencil from the aircraft.
    3.2 Procedure - Silk Screen Markings
    3.2.1 Clean the applicable area of the aircraft with Paint, thinners (Pt.No. P07-014) and a lint-free
    cloth. Allow it to dry.
    3.2.2 Prepare the paint mixture; mix the materials in these proportions:
    − Paint, black (Pt.No. P07-011) or Paint, white (Pt.No. P07-012) or Paint,
    red (Pt.No. P07-013) 100.00 g
    − Paint, hardener (Pt.No. P07-010) 25.00 g
    − Paint, retarder (Pt.No. P07-015) 2.50 g
    − Paint, thinners (Pt.No. P07-014) 11.00 cc

    Note

    Do not prepare more paint than necessary. It will become hard very quickly.

    3.2.3 Put the Silk screen (Pt.No. Local supply) in position on the aircraft surface.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-11-00-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-07-06 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Note

    Refer to the applicable illustration to make sure you point the silk screen in the correct
    direction.

    3.2.4 Apply a thick layer of paint across one end of the silk screen.
    3.2.5 Use a Spreader (Pt.No. Local supply) to apply the paint. Hold the spreader at approximately
    45º from vertical and apply an even layer of paint over the silk screen. Do not use pressure.
    3.2.6 Hold the spreader at approximately 15º from vertical. Apply hand pressure to the spreader
    and apply the paint to the silk screen in one smooth stroke.
    3.2.7 Allow the paint to dry and remove the silk screen.

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-11-00-00-00A-901A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-07-06 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PLACARDS AND MARKINGS

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    PLACARDS AND MARKINGS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Silk screen Part Local supply As
    required
    Stencil Part Local supply As
    required
    Spreader Part Local supply As
    required
    Stencil brush Part Local supply As
    required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-11-00-00-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-07-06 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Solvent Part P01-008 As
    required
    Cloth Part P02-003 As
    required
    MATERIAL DELETED Part P08-041 -
    Paint Part P07-010 As
    required
    Paint Part P07-020 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Placards - Installation
    1.1
    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIAL. OBEY THE MANUFACTURERS
    HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure, refer to the list of consumable items AMM 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Clean the area with a cloth (Cloth (Pt.No. P02-003)) made moist with solvent
    (Solvent (Pt.No. P01-008)).
    1.2 Let the area dry.
    1.3 Remove the backing strip from the new placard.
    1.4 Align the placard and apply it in the correct position. Make sure that no air bubbles are between the
    placard and the surface.
    1.5 DELETED
    1.6 DELETED

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-11-00-00-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-07-06 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2 Stencil Markings - Installation


    2.1
    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIAL. OBEY THE MANUFACTURERS
    HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure, refer to the list of consumable items AMM 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Clean the area with a cloth (Cloth (Pt.No. P02-003)) made moist with solvent
    (Solvent (Pt.No. P01-008)).
    2.2 Let the area dry.
    2.3 Use the manufacturer's instructions and prepare the paint (Paint (Pt.No. P07-020)).
    2.4 Put the stencil (Stencil (Pt.No. Local supply)) in position on the aircraft surface. Make sure that you
    point the stencil in the right direction.
    2.5 Use a brush (Stencil brush (Pt.No. Local supply)) to apply an even layer of the paint through the
    stencil onto the aircraft surface.
    2.6 Let the paint dry.
    2.7 Remove the stencil from the aircraft.
    3 Silk Screen Markings - Installation
    3.1
    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIAL. OBEY THE MANUFACTURERS
    HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure, refer to the list of consumable items AMM 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Clean the area with a cloth (Cloth (Pt.No. P02-003)) made moist with solvent
    (Solvent (Pt.No. P01-008)).
    3.2 Let the area dry.
    3.3 Use the manufacturer's instructions and prepare the paint (Paint (Pt.No. P07-010)).
    3.4 Put the silk screen (Silk screen (Pt.No. Local supply)) in position on the aircraft surface. Make sure
    that you point the silk screen in the right direction.
    3.5 Apply a thick layer of the paint across one end of the silk screen.
    3.6 Use a spreader (Spreader (Pt.No. Local supply)) to apply an even layer of paint over the silk screen.
    Hold the spreader at approximately 45° from vertical. Do not use pressure.
    3.7 Hold the spreader at approximately 15° from vertical. Use hand pressure on the spreader and spread
    the paint across the silk screen in open smooth stroke.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-11-00-00-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-07-06 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.8 Let the paint dry.


    3.9 Remove the silk screen from the aircraft.

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-11-00-00-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-07-06 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    EXTERIOR PLACARDS AND MARKINGS

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    EXTERIOR PLACARDS AND MARKINGS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION...................... 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description

    1 General
    Exterior placards and markings are installed on the aircraft exterior, on the inside of access panels, and on
    equipment behind access panels. They give warnings and cautions, ground servicing and maintenance
    information, and ground operation instructions and limits.
    The precise location of each placard, and a list of their part numbers is given in the Illustrated Parts Catalog (IPC).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-11-20-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-11-20-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    EXTERIOR PLACARDS AND MARKINGS

    MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Table of Contents Page

    EXTERIOR PLACARDS AND MARKINGS - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES............................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-11-20-01-00A-901A-A INSTALLATION OF FLAP MARKINGS -
    MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-11-20-02-00A-901A-A INSTALLATION OF HORIZONTAL STABILIZER TRIM
    MARKINGS - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-11-20-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    The following maintenance practices are issued:
    − Installation of Flap Markings (refer to DM 12-B-11-20-01-00A-901A-A)
    − Installation of Horizontal Stabilizer Trim Markings (refer to DM 12-B-11-20-02-00A-901A-A)

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-11-20-00-00A-901A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    INSTALLATION OF FLAP MARKINGS

    MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Table of Contents Page

    INSTALLATION OF FLAP MARKINGS - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Flaps – Installation of Markings.............................................................................. 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Tape measure, steel (1m in Part Local supply As
    length with mm marking) Required
    Set Square (or equivalent) Part Local supply As
    Required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-11-20-01-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Placards CSN 11-20-00-03-051 2
    Placard CSN 11-20-00-03-052 1
    Placard CSN 11-20-00-03-053 1
    White spirit (Or equivalent) Part P01-008 As
    Required
    Paint (Black or red) Part Local supply As
    Required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1
    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    General
    Do this procedure when the wing surface finish has been repaired or if the markings become damaged.
    2
    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU OPERATE THE FLAP CONTROLS. MAKE SURE THE FLAPS ARE CLEAR.
    INJURY TO PERSONS AND/OR DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT CAN OCCUR.

    Installation of the Flap Markings


    2.1 Energize the aircraft electrical system (12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.2 Set the flap position selector to 0° and operate the flaps to 0°.
    2.3 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.4 From the left inner flap fairing, use the Tape measure, steel (1m in length with mm
    marking) (Pt.No. Local supply) and measure 270 mm approximately outboard of the center of the
    fairing. At this point find the row of rivets at the flap rib. This is to be the inner flap measurement point.
    2.5 From the left center flap fairing, measure 180 mm approximately outboard from the center of the
    fairing. At this point find the row of rivets at the flap rib. This is to be the outer flap measurement point.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-11-20-01-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.6 Clean the identified areas on the left flap with a cloth made moist with White spirit (Or
    equivalent) (Pt.No. P01-008).
    2.7 At the identified inner measurement point, position the Set Square (or equivalent) (Pt.No. Local
    supply) against the wing rear edge and align the set square with the center of the last rivet at the flap
    rear edge.
    2.8 Make a mark on the wing rear edge and on the flap rear edge.
    2.9 Install the placards that follow (the placard Part No’s and locations are given in Fig. 1):
    − Placards (Pt.No. CSN 11200003 051 )
    − Placard (Pt.No. CSN 11200003 052 )
    − Placard (Pt.No. CSN 11200003 053 )
    2.10 Or align the tape measure with the center of the markings, then use a permanent marker or paint and
    make marks 15 mm long and 2 mm wide, at the wing rear edge and on each side of the tape measure
    at the flap rear edge.
    2.11 Do the above four steps and install the left flap outer measurement marks.
    2.12 Do steps Step 2.4 thru Step 2.11 again and install the right flap measurement marks.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-11-20-01-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    B

    o
    90
    B

    180 mm

    o
    90

    FLAP OUTER
    MEASUREMENT POINT

    270 mm

    FLAP INNER
    MEASUREMENT POINT
    11128

    Figure 1 Flaps – Installation of Markings

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-11-20-01-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-11-20-01-00A-901A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-11-20-01-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    INSTALLATION OF HORIZONTAL STABILIZER TRIM MARKINGS

    MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Table of Contents Page

    INSTALLATION OF HORIZONTAL STABILIZER TRIM MARKINGS - MAINTENANCE 1


    PRACTICES...............................................................................................................................

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Horizontal Stabilizer – Installation of Markings....................................................... 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-27-40-00-00A-903A-A HORIZONTAL STABILIZER TRIM - ADJUSTMENT/
    TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Ladder (3 m / 10 ft) Part Local supply As
    Required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-11-20-02-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Placard, trim limits CSN 11-20-00-03-055 As
    Required
    Sealant Part P08-056 As
    Required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    Do this procedure when the horizontal stabilizer and fairings surface finish has been repaired, parts have
    been replaced or if the markings become damaged.
    Two persons are necessary for this task.
    2 Installation of the Horizontal Stabilizer Trim Markings
    Ref. Fig. 1

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    2.1 If necessary, put the ladder (Ladder (3 m / 10 ft) (Pt.No. Local supply)) in position.
    2.2 If the trim mark is not installed on the horizontal stabilizer, do the Step 2.2.1 thru Step 2.2.3 to make a
    trim mark of approximately 0.1 inch (3 mm) in width:
    2.2.1 Put masking tape above and below the small groove in the center of the front edge of the left
    stabilizer flange.
    2.2.2 Apply the sealant (Sealant (Pt.No. P08-056)) to the area between the masking tape to make
    the trim mark.
    2.2.3 Carefully remove the masking tape and allow the sealant to dry.
    2.3 Energize the aircraft electrical system (Refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.4 Push and hold the TRIM ENGAGE switch on the pilot control wheel.
    2.5 Operate the PITCH/AIL TRIM switch on the pilot control wheel to UP until movement of the horizontal
    stabilizer stops.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-11-20-02-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.6 Release the TRIM ENGAGE switch on the pilot control wheel.
    2.7 Make a mark on the left side of the stabilizer fairing that aligns with the mark on the stabilizer flange.
    2.8 Align the bottom limit mark on the placard (Placard, trim limits (Pt.No. CSN 11200003 055 )) with the
    mark on the stabilizer fairing. On the fairing, mark the top and bottom green range ends and the top
    limit mark.
    2.9 Push and hold the TRIM ENGAGE switch on the pilot control wheel.
    2.10 Operate the PITCH/AIL TRIM switch on the pilot control wheel to DOWN. Stop immediately when the
    STAB TRIM warning on the CAS goes off.
    2.11 Release the TRIM ENGAGE switch on the pilot control wheel.
    2.12 Make sure the trim mark on the horizontal stabilizer is at the bottom edge of the green range.
    2.13 Make sure the horizontal stabilizer indication is at the top edge of the green take-off position on the
    Multi Function Display (MFD) trim indicator.
    2.14 Push and hold the TRIM ENGAGE switch on the pilot control wheel.
    2.15 Operate the PITCH/AIL TRIM switch on the pilot control wheel to DOWN until movement of the
    horizontal stabilizer stops.
    2.16 Release the TRIM ENGAGE switch on the pilot control wheel.
    2.17 Make sure the trim mark on the horizontal stabilizer is at the top limit mark.
    2.18 Push and hold the TRIM ENGAGE switch on the pilot control wheel.
    2.19 Operate the PITCH/AIL TRIM switch on the pilot control wheel to UP. Stop immediately when the
    STAB TRIM warning on the CAS goes off.
    2.20 Release the TRIM ENGAGE switch on the pilot control wheel.
    2.21 Make sure the trim mark on the horizontal stabilizer is at the top edge of the green range.
    2.22 Make sure the horizontal stabilizer indication is at the bottom edge of the green take-off position on the
    MFD trim indicator.
    2.23 Push and hold the TRIM ENGAGE switch on the pilot control wheel.
    2.24 Operate the PITCH/AIL TRIM switch on the pilot control wheel until the MFD trim indicator has moved
    to the middle of the take-off range.
    2.25 Release the TRIM ENGAGE switch on the pilot control wheel.
    2.26 Make sure the mark on the stabilizer fairing is in align with the black mark of the green range.
    2.27 If the horizontal stabilizer trim operates correctly and all the marks align, install the Placard, trim
    limits (Pt.No. CSN 11200003 055 ). If the marks did not align, do the horizontal stabilizer trim
    functional test (Refer to DM 12-B-27-40-00-00A-903A-A).
    2.28 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (Refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.29 Remove the ladder.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-11-20-02-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    APPROX 10 mm

    UP LIMIT

    GREEN RANGE
    A

    HORIZONTAL
    DOWN LIMIT STABILIZER
    TRIM MARK
    11129

    Figure 1 Horizontal Stabilizer – Installation of Markings

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-11-20-02-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-11-20-02-00A-901A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-11-20-02-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    INTERIOR PLACARDS

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    INTERIOR PLACARDS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION.................................................... 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1
    1.1 Flight Compartment Placards................................................................................. 1
    1.2 Passenger Compartment Placards......................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-11-30-10-00A-040A-A FLIGHT COMPARTMENT PLACARDS -
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-11-30-20-00A-040A-A PASSENGER COMPARTMENT PLACARDS -
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Description

    1 General
    Interior placards and markings are installed in the flight compartment and the passenger compartments. They give
    information for the operation of the aircraft and its equipment, emergency instructions, and ground servicing and
    maintenance information.

    1.1 Flight Compartment Placards


    (Refer to DM 12-B-11-30-10-00A-040A-A)

    1.2 Passenger Compartment Placards


    (Refer to DM 12-B-11-30-20-00A-040A-A)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-11-30-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-11-30-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FLIGHT COMPARTMENT PLACARDS

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    FLIGHT COMPARTMENT PLACARDS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION........................... 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description

    1 General
    The flight compartment placards give information for the operation of the aircraft and its equipment, emergency
    instructions, and ground maintenance information.
    The precise location of each placard, and a list of applicable part numbers is given in the Illustrated Parts Catalog
    (IPC).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-11-30-10-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-11-30-10-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PASSENGER COMPARTMENT PLACARDS

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    PASSENGER COMPARTMENT PLACARDS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION................. 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description

    1 General
    The passenger compartment placards give information for the operation of the aircraft and its equipment,
    emergency instructions, and ground servicing and maintenance information.
    The precise location of each placard, and a list of applicable part numbers is given in the Illustrated Parts Catalog
    (IPC).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-11-30-20-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-11-30-20-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    SERVICING – GENERAL

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    SERVICING – GENERAL - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION................................................ 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-12-10-00-00A-040A-A REPLENISHMENT - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-12-20-00-00A-040A-A SCHEDULED SERVICING - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION

    Description

    1 General
    This document gives the reference procedures to fill the aircraft systems (Refer to DM 12-B-12-10-00-00A-040A-A)
    and to do the scheduled servicing of the aircraft (Refer to DM 12-B-12-20-00-00A-040A-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-00-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-00-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    REPLENISHMENT

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    REPLENISHMENT - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION........................................................... 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1
    2 Specifications And Capacities................................................................................ 2
    2.1 Fuel......................................................................................................................... 2
    2.2 Engine Oil............................................................................................................... 2
    2.3 Hydraulic System (If Installed)................................................................................ 2
    2.4 Brake System......................................................................................................... 3
    2.5 Oxygen................................................................................................................... 3
    2.6 Tires........................................................................................................................ 3

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Fuel System Capacity............................................................................................. 2
    3 Engine Oil System Capacity................................................................................... 2
    4 Hydraulic System Capacity..................................................................................... 2
    5 Brake System Capacity.......................................................................................... 3
    6 Oxygen System Capacity....................................................................................... 3
    7 Alternative Tires...................................................................................................... 3

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-12-10-01-00A-902A-A FUEL - SERVICING
    12-B-12-10-02-00A-902A-A BRAKES - SERVICING
    12-B-12-10-03-00A-902A-A ENGINE OIL - SERVICING
    12-B-12-10-04-00A-902A-A TIRES - SERVICING
    12-B-12-10-05-00A-902A-A OXYGEN - SERVICING

    Description

    1 General
    This document gives the procedures to fill these systems:
    − The fuel system (AMM 12-B-12-10-01-00A-902A-A)
    − The brake system (AMM 12-B-12-10-02-00A-902A-A)
    − The engine oil system (AMM 12-B-12-10-03-00A-902A-A)
    − The tires (AMM 12-B-12-10-04-00A-902A-A)
    − The oxygen system (AMM 12-B-12-10-05-00A-902A-A)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-10-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-01-22 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2 Specifications And Capacities

    2.1 Fuel
    These fuels can be used:
    − ASTM-D1655 Jet A, Jet A-1 or Jet B
    − Jet A-2 (with limits)
    − MIL-T-5624 JP4 or JP5
    − MIL-83133 JP8

    Refer to P&WC Service Bulletin No. 14004 (latest revision) for all information on the fuels that can be used and
    their specifications.
    Refer to Table 2 for the capacities of the fuel system. The fuel system is calibrated in liters, the quantities in US
    gallons are approximate equivalents.

    Table 2 Fuel System Capacity


    US gallons Liters
    Total 407 1540
    Useable 402 1521,5
    Unuseable 5 18,5

    2.2 Engine Oil


    Text Deleted
    Refer to P&WC Service Bulletin No. 14001 (latest revision) for all information on the engine oils that can be used
    and their specifications.
    Refer to Table 3 for the capacities of the engine oil system.

    Table 3 Engine Oil System Capacity


    US gallons Liters
    Total (including oil cooler) 2.62 9,92
    Oil tank total 2.3 8,7
    Oil tank expansion space 0.7 2,64
    Oil tank useable oil 1.5 5,68

    2.3 Hydraulic System (If Installed)


    Hydraulic fluid to specification MIL-H-5606F must be used.
    Refer to Table 4 for the capacity of the hydraulic system.

    Table 4 Hydraulic System Capacity


    US gallons Liters
    Reservoir total 0.79 3,0
    Reservoir useable 0.26 1,0
    Total 1.6 6,0
    Pressure tank 0.39 1,5
    Total 2.0 7,5

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-10-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-01-22 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.4 Brake System


    Hydraulic fluid to specification MIL-H-83282C.
    Different specifications of oil should not be mixed.
    Refer to Table 5 for the capacity of the brake system.

    Table 5 Brake System Capacity


    US gallons Liters
    Total 0.14 0,5

    2.5 Oxygen
    Oxygen to specification MIL-027210 must be used.
    Refer to Table 6 for the capacity of the oxygen system.

    Table 6 Oxygen System Capacity


    Cu ft Liters
    Standard system 22.6 640
    Optional larger capacity system 77.1 1965

    2.6 Tires
    The following table gives the alternative tires from different manufacturers that can be installed on the PC-12/47E
    aircraft.

    Table 7 Alternative Tires


    WHEEL TIRE SIZE BF GOODRICH/ GOODYEAR/ DUNLOP
    MICHELIN AIRTREADS
    NOSE WHEEL 17.5 x 6.25-6 021-327-0 175K88-2 DR28420T
    8 PR TL
    MAIN WHEEL 8.5 x 10 021-350-0 850T06-1 DR8626T
    10PR TL

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-10-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-01-22 Page 3
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-10-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-01-22 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FUEL

    SERVICING

    Table of Contents Page

    FUEL - SERVICING.................................................................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Fuel – Refuel.......................................................................................................... 7
    2 Fuel – Defuel.......................................................................................................... 8

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A GENERAL - AEROSPACE GROUND EQUIPMENT
    (AGE) AND TOOLS
    12-B-12-10-00-00A-040A-A REPLENISHMENT - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-28-00-00-00A-901A-A FUEL - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Refuel vehicle Part Local supply As
    required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-10-01-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-07-06 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark


    Defuel vehicle (With suction Part Local supply As
    function) required
    Defuel container (Minimum Part Local supply As
    capacity 10 US gal (37,8 l)) required
    Defuel adapter (To connect to Part Local supply As
    the aircraft fuel line and defuel required
    container)
    Fuel drain tool (Optional for wing Part 990.00.00.908 As
    drain points) required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    The aircraft is refueled through fill positions in the top of the left and right wings. To defuel the aircraft the fuel
    system must be disconnected at the engine. Refer to AMM 12-B-12-10-00-00A-040A-A for the fuel
    specifications and the fuel tank capacities.
    2
    CAUTION

    IF IT IS KNOWN THAT THE AIRCRAFT WILL FLY IN AMBIENT TEMPERATURES OF LESS THAN 0° C
    AND IF THE FUEL DOES NOT CONTAIN AN ANTI ICING ADDITIVE, ONE MUST BE MIXED WITH THE
    FUEL DURING FUELING.

    Refuel

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-10-01-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-07-06 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.1
    CAUTION

    OBEY THE FOLLOWING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WHEN THE AIRCRAFT IS REFUELED:


    − OBEY THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS GIVEN IN AMM 12-B-28-00-00-00A-901A-A
    − REFUEL ONLY IN AN APPROVED AREA
    − DO NOT DO MAINTENANCE WORK WHICH WILL CAUSE A SOURCE OF IGNITION NEAR
    OPEN FUEL TANKS OR FUELING EQUIPMENT
    − PUT THE FUELING EQUIPMENT IN A POSITION FROM WHICH IT CAN EASILY BE MOVED IN
    AN EMERGENCY
    − DO NOT REMOVE THE AIRCRAFT GROUND UNTIL THE REFUEL IS COMPLETED
    − DO NOT REMOVE THE REFUEL/DEFUEL VEHICLE GROUND FROM THE AIRCRAFT UNTIL
    THE REFUEL IS COMPLETED.

    Note

    To identify the AGE and tools used in this procedure refer to the list of AGE and tools AMM 12-
    B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A.

    De-energize the aircraft electrical system, refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.


    2.2 Ground the aircraft.
    2.3 Make sure the refuel vehicle (Refuel vehicle (Pt.No. Local supply)) has the correct fuel.
    2.4 Move the refuel vehicle to the correct position to refuel the aircraft.
    2.5 Connect the refuel vehicle ground Figure 1 [5] to the aircraft at the nose landing gear.
    2.6 Ground the refuel hose to the ground position Figure 1 [3] or Figure 1 [2] on the left or right wing.
    2.7 Remove the fuel-tank cap Figure 1 [4] or Figure 1 [1] from the left or right wing.
    2.8 Put the refuel hose in the refuel-opening and fill the fuel-tank.
    2.9 Remove the refuel hose from the refuel-opening.
    2.10 Install the fuel-tank cap Figure 1 [4] or Figure 1 [1].
    2.11 Remove the refuel hose ground from the ground position Figure 1 [3] or Figure 1 [2].
    2.12 Do Step 2.6 thru Step 2.11 for the other wing fuel-tank.
    2.13 Disconnect the refuel vehicle ground Figure 1 [5].
    2.14 Set the Overhead Control Panel (OCP) STANDBY BUS switch to ON.
    2.15 Make sure the Multi Function Display (MFD) shows the correct fuel quantity.
    2.16 Set the STANDBY BUS switch to OFF.
    2.17 Move the refuel vehicle from the area.
    3 Defuel

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-10-01-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-07-06 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.1
    CAUTION

    OBEY THE FOLLOWING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WHEN THE AIRCRAFT IS DEFUELED:


    − OBEY THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS GIVEN IN AMM 12-B-28-00-00-00A-901A-A
    − DEFUEL ONLY IN AN APPROVED AREA
    − DO NOT DO MAINTENANCE WORK WHICH WILL CAUSE A SOURCE OF IGNITION NEAR
    OPEN FUEL TANKS OR FUELING EQUIPMENT
    − PUT THE FUELING EQUIPMENT IN A POSITION FROM WHICH IT CAN EASILY BE MOVED IN
    AN EMERGENCY
    − DO NOT REMOVE THE AIRCRAFT GROUND UNTIL THE DEFUEL IS COMPLETED
    − DO NOT REMOVE THE REFUEL/DEFUEL VEHICLE GROUND FROM THE AIRCRAFT UNTIL
    THE DEFUEL IS COMPLETED.

    Note

    To identify the AGE and tools used in this procedure refer to the list of AGE and tools AMM 12-
    B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A.

    De-energize the aircraft electrical system, refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.


    3.2 Ground the aircraft.
    3.3 Move the Defuel vehicle (With suction function) (Pt.No. Local supply) to the correct position to defuel
    the aircraft.
    3.4 Connect the defuel vehicle ground Figure 1 [5] to the nose landing gear.
    3.5 Put the Defuel container (Minimum capacity 10 US gal (37,8 l)) (Pt.No. Local supply) Figure 2 [5] close
    to the aircraft and ground it to the nose landing gear Figure 2 [1].
    3.6 Ground the defuel hose Figure 2 [6] to the container Figure 2 [5].
    3.7 Put the defuel hose Figure 2 [6] in the container Figure 2 [5].
    3.8 Open access panel 11BL and engine cowling 43AL.
    3.9 Pull the maintenance valve control-rod Figure 2 [7] to close the maintenance valve.
    3.10 Disconnect the fuel pipe Figure 2 [10] from the EDP Figure 2 [11].
    3.11 Connect the Defuel adapter (To connect to the aircraft fuel line and defuel container) (Pt.No. Local
    supply) Figure 2 [4] to the fuel pipe Figure 2 [10].
    3.12 Put the open end of the adaptor Figure 2 [4] in the container Figure 2 [5].
    3.13 Push the maintenance valve control-rod Figure 2 [7] to open the maintenance valve.
    3.14 Energize the aircraft electrical system, refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    3.15 Set the FUEL PUMP LH and FUEL PUMP RH switches to ON.
    3.16 Make sure the fuel flows into the container Figure 2 [5].
    3.17 Operate the defuel vehicle to remove the fuel from the container Figure 2 [5].
    3.18 Control the fuel flow with the control rod of the maintenance shut-off valve Figure 2 [7] to make sure
    the fuel does not come out of the container Figure 2 [5].

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-10-01-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-07-06 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.19 When the flow of fuel from the aircraft stops, set the FUEL PUMP LH and FUEL PUMP RH switches to
    AUTO.
    3.20 Stop the operation of the defuel vehicle when the container Figure 2 [5] is empty.
    3.21 De-energize the aircraft electrical system, refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    3.22 Remove the Defuel adapter (To connect to the aircraft fuel line and defuel container) (Pt.No. Local
    supply) Figure 2 [4] from the Defuel container (Minimum capacity 10 US gal (37,8 l)) (Pt.No. Local
    supply) Figure 2 [5].
    3.23 Disconnect the Defuel adapter (To connect to the aircraft fuel line and defuel container) (Pt.No. Local
    supply) Figure 2 [4] from the fuel pipe Figure 2 [10].
    3.24 Connect the fuel pipe Figure 2 [10] to the EDP Figure 2 [11].
    3.25 Remove the defuel hose Figure 2 [6] from the Defuel container (Minimum capacity 10 US gal (37,8
    l)) (Pt.No. Local supply) Figure 2 [5].
    3.26 Remove the defuel vehicle ground Figure 1 [5] from the nose landing gear.
    3.27 Move the defuel vehicle from the area.
    3.28 Put the Defuel container (Minimum capacity 10 US gal (37,8 l)) (Pt.No. Local supply) Figure 2 [5]
    below the left-wing outboard drain-valve Figure 2 [2].

    Note

    You can use the drain tool (Fuel drain tool (Optional for wing drain points) (Pt.No. 990.00.00.908)) to
    drain the remaining fuel from the tank.

    3.29 Open the drain valve Figure 2 [2] and drain the remaining fuel from the fuel tank.
    3.30 Close the drain valve Figure 2 [2].
    3.31 Put the Defuel container (Minimum capacity 10 US gal (37,8 l)) (Pt.No. Local supply) Figure 2 [5]
    below the left-wing inboard drain-valve Figure 2 [3].

    Note

    You can use the Fuel drain tool (Optional for wing drain points) (Pt.No. 990.00.00.908) to drain the
    remaining fuel from the tank.

    3.32 Open the drain valve Figure 2 [3] and drain the remaining fuel from the fuel tank.
    3.33 Close the drain valve Figure 2 [3].
    3.34 Do Step 3.27 thru Step 3.32 for the right wing.
    3.35 Put the Defuel container (Minimum capacity 10 US gal (37,8 l)) (Pt.No. Local supply) Figure 2 [5]
    below the fuel filter drain Figure 2 [8] and the air separator drain Figure 2 [9].
    3.36 Open the drains Figure 2 [8] and Figure 2 [9] and drain the remaining fuel from the fuel system.
    3.37 Close the drains Figure 2 [8] and Figure 2 [9].
    3.38 Remove the Defuel container (Minimum capacity 10 US gal (37,8 l)) (Pt.No. Local supply) Figure 2 [5]
    from the area.
    3.39 Close the access panels 11 BL and 43 AL.
    4 Fuel Anti Icing Additive

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-10-01-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-07-06 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    4.1
    WARNING

    THE FUEL SYSTEM ANTI-ICING ADDITIVES CONTAIN ETHYLENE GLYCOL MONOETHYL ETHER
    WHICH IS HIGHLY TOXIC. TAKE CARE TO PREVENT DIRECT CONTACT WITH SKIN AND
    CLOTHING. CLOTHING ACCIDENTLY CONTAMINATED BY SPLASHING SHOULD BE
    IMMEDIATELY REMOVED AND THE SKIN WASHED WITH SOAP AND WATER. PREVENT
    CONTACT WITH EYES AND DO NOT INHALE THE VAPORS. IF CONTACT IS MADE WITH THE
    EYES, FLUSH WITH WATER FOR 15 MINUTES. CONSULT A PHYSICIAN AS QUICKLY AS
    POSSIBLE AFTER ALL CONTACT CASES.

    CAUTION

    THE ADDITIVE CONCENTRATION BY VOLUME SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 0.06% AND A


    MAXIMUM OF 0.15%.

    CAUTION

    THE CORRECT MIX OF ANTI-ICING ADDITIVE IS IMPORTANT. CONCENTRATIONS OF MORE


    THAN 0.15% BY VOLUME WILL CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE PROTECTIVE PRIMER AND
    SEALANTS OF THE FUEL TANKS AND ENGINE COMPONENTS. CONCENTRATIONS OF LOWER
    THAN 0.06% VOLUME MAY NOT BE ENOUGH TO INHIBIT ICE FORMATION.

    CAUTION

    MAKE SURE THAT THE ANTI-ICING ADDITIVE IS DIRECTED INTO THE FUEL STREAM. START
    THE ADDITIVE FLOW AFTER THE FUEL FLOW STARTS AND STOP THE ADDITIVE FLOW
    BEFORE THE FUEL FLOW STOPS. DO NOT ALLOW CONCENTRATED ADDITIVE TO CONTACT
    THE INTERIOR OF THE FUEL TANKS OR EXTERIOR PAINTED SURFACES.

    Calculate the quantity of anti-icing additive necessary for the quantity of fuel to added.
    4.2 Remove the cap that contains the tube and clip assembly from the blender.
    4.3 Attach the pistol on the collar, press the tube into the button and clip the tube end to the fuel nozzle.
    4.4 Pull the trigger tightly then lock into position.
    4.5 Start the flow of the anti-icing additive when the fueling starts. Make sure the fuel rate is between 30
    and 60 gallons per minute.
    4.6 Do a water drain check before the first flight of the day.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-10-01-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-07-06 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1
    2

    3
    4
    5

    A
    12101

    Figure 1 Fuel – Refuel

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-10-01-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-07-06 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    7
    A
    1

    9
    A

    3
    B

    6 5 4

    10

    11

    B
    12102

    Figure 2 Fuel – Defuel

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-10-01-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-07-06 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-10-01-00A-902A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-07-06 Page 9
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-10-01-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-07-06 Page 10


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    BRAKES

    SERVICING

    Table of Contents Page

    BRAKES - SERVICING.............................................................................................................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-12-10-00-00A-040A-A REPLENISHMENT - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-29-00-00-00A-901A-A HYDRAULIC POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Wheel chocks Part Local supply As
    required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Cleaning cloth Part P02-003 As
    required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-10-02-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-01-05 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    Do not do the check of the fluid level when the brakes are hot. Let the brakes cool to ambient temperature
    before the check of the fluid level is done. Refer to 12-B-12-10-00-00A-040A-A for the specification of the
    hydraulic fluid you must use.
    2 The Check Of The Fluid Level
    2.1 Preparation
    2.1.1 Obey the safety precautions given in 12-B-29-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    2.1.2 Put the chocks (Wheel chocks (Pt.No. Local supply)) in position at the main landing gear.
    2.1.3 Set the parking brake to off.
    2.1.4 Remove the access panel 21 PZ.
    2.2 Procedure
    2.2.1 Find the hydraulic fluid level in the brake reservoir.
    2.2.2 If the hydraulic fluid level is on the arrow mark on the brake reservoir the level is satisfactory.
    2.2.3 If the hydraulic fluid is below the arrow mark fill the brake reservoir.
    2.3 Close Up
    2.3.1 Set the parking brake to ON.
    2.3.2 Install the access panel 21 PZ.
    3 Fill The Brake Reservoir
    3.1 Preparation
    3.1.1 Obey the safety precautions given in 12-B-29-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    3.1.2 Put the wheel chocks in position at the main landing gear.
    3.1.3 Set the parking brake to off.
    3.1.4 Remove the access panel 21 PZ.
    3.2 Procedure
    3.2.1
    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIAL. OBEY THE


    OPERATOR'S AND MANUFACTURER'S HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

    Remove the cap from the brake reservoir.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-10-02-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-01-05 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.2.2 Fill the brake reservoir to the arrow mark with hydraulic fluid (refer to DM 12-
    B-12-10-00-00A-040A-A).
    3.2.3 Install the cap on the brake reservoir.
    3.2.4 Remove unwanted fluid with a cloth (Cleaning cloth (Pt.No. P02-003)).
    3.3 Close Up
    3.3.1 Set the parking brake to ON.
    3.3.2 Look for leaks from the brake system. No leaks are permitted.
    3.3.3 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.3.4 Install the access panel 21 PZ.

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-10-02-00A-902A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-01-05 Page 3
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-10-02-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-01-05 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    ENGINE OIL

    SERVICING

    Table of Contents Page

    ENGINE OIL - SERVICING........................................................................................................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-12-10-00-00A-040A-A REPLENISHMENT - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065. As
    open) required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Engine oil Part P10-004 As
    required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-10-03-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-04-25 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This document gives the procedure to fill the engine oil system. Refer to 12-B-12-10-00-00A-040A-A for oil
    specifications and capacities.
    The oil tank dipstick is identified HOT, COLD and ADD 1,2,3,4,5. This gives the quantity of oil in US quarts
    that must be added to the oil tank to fill it when it is hot.
    The HOT identification refers to the engine condition in the first ten minutes after shutdown.
    The COLD identification refers to the engine condition when the engine has been shutdown for 12 hours or
    more. To prevent too much oil in the engine, do not use this identification to fill the engine oil system.
    If the engine is frequently in temperatures of -18 °C (-0.4 °F) or lower for a long time, the use of PWA521,
    Type ll oil (5cs viscosity) is recommended.
    2 Fill The Engine Oil System
    2.1 Preparation
    2.1.1 Open and install a safety clip (Safety clip (circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065.))
    on this circuit breaker:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    2.1.2 Open the engine cowling 43 AL.
    2.2
    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIAL. OBEY THE MANUFACTURER'S
    HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

    CAUTION

    OBEY THE ENGINE MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS (REF. P&WC SB 14001).

    CAUTION

    DO NOT FILL THE ENGINE OIL SYSTEM WHEN THE ENGINE IS COLD.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-10-03-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-04-25 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Procedure
    2.2.1 Release the filler sleeve on the accessory gearbox.
    2.2.2 Remove the dipstick from the accessory gearbox.
    2.2.3
    CAUTION

    IF THERE IS NO INDICATION OF OIL ON THE DIPSTICK, LARGE OIL PRESSURE


    CHANGES HAVE BEEN NOTED OR THE RATE OF USE OF OIL IS HIGH FIND THE
    CAUSE.

    Find the oil level shown on the dipstick.


    2.2.4
    Note

    The usual engine oil level is when the dipstick shows one US quart below maximum. Oil
    above this level can go overboard.

    If necessary, fill the oil tank with the quantity of oil (Engine oil (Pt.No. P10-004)) shown on
    the dipstick.
    2.2.5 Make a note of the quantity of oil used.
    2.2.6
    CAUTION

    THE GREEN MARKS ON THE FILLER SLEEVE AND THE DIPSTICK MUST BE ALIGNED
    WHEN THE DIPSTICK IS INSTALLED.

    Push the dipstick fully in until the filler sleeve engages in the accessory gearbox and the
    green marks are aligned.

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    1 Close the engine cowling 43AL.
    2 Remove the saftey clip and close this circuit breaker:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-10-03-00A-902A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-04-25 Page 3
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-10-03-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-04-25 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    TIRES

    SERVICING

    Table of Contents Page

    TIRES - SERVICING.................................................................................................................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Tires – Wear Indication........................................................................................... 5

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A GENERAL - AEROSPACE GROUND EQUIPMENT
    (AGE) AND TOOLS
    12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A JACKING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Compressed nitrogen supply Part 99.00.00.702 As
    required
    Tire pressure gage Part 903.70.32.911 As
    required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-10-04-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Soap solution Part P01-005 As
    required
    Cleaning cloth Part P02-003 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This document gives the procedure to pressurize the tires of the nose and main wheels to the correct
    pressure. Overinflation plugs are installed in the wheel hubs. They prevent overinflation of the tire by means
    of a disk which ruptures when overinflation occurs, deflating the tire to zero pressure. This document also
    gives the maximum wear and damage limits for the tires.
    2
    WARNING

    DO NOT POINT A COMPRESSED GAS SUPPLY AT PERSONS. IT CAN CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY.

    WARNING

    DO NOT PRESSURIZE THE TIRES TO MORE THAN THE SPECIFIED PRESSURE. THEY CAN EXPLODE
    AND CAN CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY.

    WARNING

    INCREASE THE PRESSURE OF THE TIRES SLOWLY. IF THE PRESSURE INCREASES TOO QUICKLY
    THE TIRES WILL BECOME HOT AND CAN EXPLODE.

    WARNING

    DO NOT RELEASE COMPRESSED GAS PRESSURE TOO QUICKLY. IT CAN CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY.

    Tire Inflation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-10-04-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.1
    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Note

    To identify the AGE and tools used in this procedure refer to the list of AGE and tools 12-
    B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A.

    General
    This procedure is applicable to the tires of the nose and main wheels. The correct pressures for
    normal operation of the aircraft are:
    − nose wheel tire 60 + 3 psi (4,1 + 0,2 bar)
    − main wheel tires 60 + 3 psi (4,1 + 0,2 bar)
    2.2 Remove the cap from the tire inflation valve.
    2.3 Measure the tire pressure with the tire pressure gage.
    2.4 Connect the compressed nitrogen supply to the tire inflation valve.
    2.5 Slowly operate the compressed nitrogen supply and pressurize the tire to the correct pressure.
    2.6 Disconnect the compressed nitrogen supply from the tire inflation valve.
    2.7 Let the temperature of the nitrogen in the tire become stable.
    2.8 Make sure the tire pressure is correct.
    2.9 Apply soap solution (Soap solution (Pt.No. P01-005)) to the tire inflation valve. Make sure there are no
    leaks from the tire inflation valve.
    2.10 Remove the soap (Soap solution (Pt.No. P01-005)) from the tire inflation valve with a cloth (Cleaning
    cloth (Pt.No. P02-003)).
    2.11 Install the cap on the tire inflation valve.
    2.12 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3 Tire Wear (Ref. Fig. 1)
    3.1 General
    It is recommended that the tires are replaced when there is wear or damage to the following limits:
    − Pattern tread tires are worn to the depth of the pattern
    − Ribbed tires with marker tie bars are worn to the top of the marker tie bars
    − Ribbed tires without marker tie bars are worn to less than 0.08 in (2 mm) from the bottom of the
    wear indicating grooves
    − Plain tread tires are worn to the casing chords
    − Cuts in the tire open the tread to the casing chord
    − Tires which are soft or swollen after contact with oils or fuel
    − A flat spot on a tire cannot be removed after a short taxi period
    − A tire is tacky after it has got hot during use
    − The aircraft has been moved when the tire is deflated

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-10-04-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.2 Procedure
    3.2.1 Make sure the tire is at the correct pressure.
    3.2.2 If necessary, lift the wheel clear of the ground (refer to DM12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A).
    3.2.3 Examine the tire for wear and damage.

    Note

    If the wheel is clear of the ground, turn the wheel to examine the complete tire.

    3.2.4 If necessary, replace the wheel assembly.


    3.2.5 If necessary, lower the wheel to the ground (refer to DM 12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-10-04-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    MARKER TIE BAR

    WEAR INDICATING
    GROOVES

    12108

    Figure 1 Tires – Wear Indication

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-10-04-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-10-04-00A-902A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 6
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    OXYGEN

    SERVICING

    Table of Contents Page

    OXYGEN - SERVICING.............................................................................................................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Oxygen – Servicing................................................................................................ 4
    2 Oxygen – Servicing................................................................................................ 5

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A GENERAL - AEROSPACE GROUND EQUIPMENT
    (AGE) AND TOOLS
    12-B-12-10-00-00A-040A-A REPLENISHMENT - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-35-00-00-00A-901A-A OXYGEN SYSTEM - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Thermometer Part Local supply As
    required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-10-05-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-11-22 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark


    Oxygen trolley Part 990.00.00.601 As
    required
    Adapter (Connects between Part 990.00.00.604 As
    supply hose and charging valve) required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This document gives the procedure to fill the oxygen cylinder of the standard and optional larger capacity
    systems. Refer to 12-B-12-10-00-00A-040A-A for the oxygen specification and system capacities.
    There is a second option for the larger capacity system. This option has the oxygen cylinder installed on the
    top right side of the rear fuselage compartment. The charging valve and pressure gage are installed on a
    panel. The panel is attached to a supporting rib at the bottom right side of the rear fuselage compartment.
    2 Check Of The Oxygen Cylinder Pressure
    2.1
    CAUTION

    INCREASE THE PRESSURE OF THE CYLINDER SLOWLY.

    Note

    To identify the AGE and tools used in this procedure refer to the list of AGE and tools 12-
    B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A.

    Preparation
    2.1.1 Obey the safety precautions given in 12-B-35-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    2.1.2 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.1.3 Standard system. Open the access panel 11 BR.
    2.1.4 Larger capacity system. Open the access panel 31 AB.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-10-05-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-11-22 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.2 Procedure
    2.2.1 Hold the thermometer (Thermometer (Pt.No. Local supply)) close to the oxygen cylinder.
    2.2.2 Make sure the thermometer indication is constant. Make a note of the indication.
    2.2.3 Refer to the temperature/pressure graph for the correct oxygen cylinder pressure (Ref.
    Fig. 1).
    2.2.4 If the pressure on the gage (Figure 2 [4]) is satisfactory do the close up.
    2.2.5 If the pressure is low fill the oxygen cylinder.
    3 Fill The Oxygen Cylinder
    3.1
    Note

    To identify the AGE and tools used in this procedure refer to the list of AGE and tools 12-
    B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A.

    Procedure
    3.1.1 Make sure the area around the charging valve (Figure 2 [1]) is clean.
    3.1.2 Remove the cap (Figure 2 [2]) from the charging valve (Figure 2 [1]).
    3.1.3 Install the adaptor (Adapter (Connects between supply hose and charging
    valve) (Pt.No. 990.00.00.604)) to the charging valve (Figure 2 [1]).
    3.1.4 Make sure the oxygen supply hose (Figure 2 [3]) of the oxygen trolley (Oxygen
    trolley (Pt.No. 990.00.00.601)) is clean and connect it to the adapter.
    3.1.5 Slowly pressurize the oxygen cylinder to the correct pressure.
    3.1.6 Close the oxygen supply (Figure 2 [1]) and let the cylinder temperature become stable.
    3.1.7 Monitor the oxygen pressure on the gage (Figure 2 [4]) and do Step 3.1.5 thru Step 3.1.7
    again until the pressure is correct.
    3.1.8 Release the pressure in the oxygen supply hose (Figure 2 [3]).
    3.1.9 Disconnect the oxygen supply hose (Figure 2 [3]) from the adapter and remove the adapter
    from the charging valve (Figure 2 [1]).
    3.1.10 Install the cap (Figure 2 [2]) on the charging valve (Figure 2 [1]).
    3.2 Close Up
    3.2.1 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.2.2 Standard system. Close the access panel 11 BR.
    3.2.3 Larger capacity system. Close the access panel 31 AB.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-10-05-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-11-22 Page 3


    895 SERIES OXYGEN CYLINDER CHARGE PRESSURE VS. CYLINDER TEMPERATURE
    FOR NOMINAL FILLING OF 1850 PSIG AT 70 °F (21.1 °C)

    Effectivity: ALL
    2400

    2200 TEMPERATURE PRESSURE


    (°C) (PSIG)

    85 2419
    80 2375
    75 2331
    70 2287
    2000
    65 2242
    60 2198
    55 2153
    50 2108
    45 2063
    40 2018
    1800 35 1974
    30 1930
    25 1885
    21 1850
    20 1841
    15 1798

    UNCLASSIFIED
    UNCLASSIFIED

    10 1755

    CHARGE PRESSURE (PSIG)


    1600 5 1712
    0 1669
    -5 1628
    -10 1586

    Figure 1 Oxygen – Servicing


    -15 1545
    -20 1505
    -25 1466
    1400 -30 1426
    -35 1388
    -40 1351
    -45 1313
    -50 1275
    -55 1239

    1200
    -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90

    CYLINDER TEMPERATURE (°C)

    12-A-121005-A-S4080-00067-A-02-1

    12-B-12-10-05-00A-902A-A
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I

    2010-11-22 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    STANDARD
    SYSTEM

    OPTIONAL
    SYSTEM

    A
    4 1

    3
    2

    A
    12109

    Figure 2 Oxygen – Servicing

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-10-05-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-11-22 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-10-05-00A-902A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-11-22 Page 6
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    SCHEDULED SERVICING

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    SCHEDULED SERVICING - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION.............................................. 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-12-20-01-00A-902A-A AIRCRAFT EXTERIOR WASHING - SERVICING
    12-B-12-20-02-00A-902A-A AIRCRAFT WINDOWS CLEANING - SERVICING
    12-B-12-20-03-00A-902A-A AIRCRAFT INTERIOR CLEANING - SERVICING
    12-B-12-20-04-00A-902A-A LANDING GEAR - SERVICING
    12-B-12-20-05-00A-902A-A PROPELLER - SERVICING
    12-B-12-20-06-00A-902A-A WHEEL BEARING - SERVICING

    Description

    1 General
    This section has these scheduled servicing procedures:
    − Aircraft exterior cleaning (refer to DM 12-B-12-20-01-00A-902A-A)
    − Aircraft windows cleaning (refer to DM 12-B-12-20-02-00A-902A-A)
    − Aircraft interior cleaning (refer to DM 12-B-12-20-03-00A-902A-A)
    − Landing gear servicing (refer to DM 12-B-12-20-04-00A-902A-A)
    − Propeller servicing (refer to DM 12-B-12-20-05-00A-902A-A)
    − Wheel bearing servicing (refer to DM 12-B-12-20-06-00A-902A-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-20-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-20-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    AIRCRAFT EXTERIOR

    POLISH AND APPLY SEALING

    Table of Contents Page

    AIRCRAFT EXTERIOR - POLISH AND APPLY SEALING........................................................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-12-20-01-00A-902A-A AIRCRAFT EXTERIOR WASHING - SERVICING
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Polishing machine Part Dynabrade Finesse it 53460 As
    or equivalent required
    Disc pad Part Dynabrade 54018 or As
    equivalent required
    Eccentric polishing machine Part Meguiar's ND EZLS-6 or As
    equivalent required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-20-01-00A-256A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-08 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Lamb wool polish pad Part P02-033 As
    required
    Polish hood Part P02-036 As
    required
    Microfiber cloth Part P02-037 As
    required
    Polish cleaner Part P05-008 As
    required
    Fine cleaner Part P05-010 As
    required
    Sealing Part P05-009 As
    required
    Polish pad (black) Part P02-034 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedures to polish and to seal the aircraft external surface.
    Polishing removes material from the surface finish to give a smooth and bright finish. Take care not to
    remove too much material from the surface finish as this can only be corrected by adding more paint layers.
    Sealing protects the surface finish from sun radiation and contamination.
    2 Polish the Surface
    2.1
    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MANUFACTURERS
    HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-20-01-00A-256A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-08 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    CAUTION

    DO NOT PUT POLISH ON THE AIRCRAFT WINDOWS. POLISH MAY DAMAGE THE SURFACE OF
    THE WINDOWS.

    CAUTION

    DO NOT POLISH THE AIRCRAFT ANTENNAS. YOU CAN DAMAGE THE ANTENNAS.

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Wash the exterior of the aircraft (refer to DM 12-B-12-20-01-00A-902A-A).


    2.2 Let the aircraft exterior surface dry.
    2.3 Use clean water to make a clean (Lamb wool polish pad (Pt.No. P02-033)) moist.
    2.4 Attach the lamb wool pad to the (Polishing machine (Pt.No. Dynabrade Finesse it 53460 or
    equivalent)).
    2.5 Put a small amount of (Polish cleaner (Pt.No. P05-008)) between the center and the outer edge of the
    lamb wool pad.
    2.6 Hold the polishing machine with the lamb wool pad on the aircraft surface to be polished. Do not push
    the polishing machine against the aircraft surface.
    2.7
    CAUTION

    DO NOT HOLD THE POLISHING MACHINE IN THE SAME PLACE ON THE SURFACE. YOU CAN
    DAMAGE THE SURFACE FINISH.

    CAUTION

    DO NOT USE THE LAMB WOOL PAD AT MORE THAN 900 RPM. YOU CAN DAMAGE THE
    SURFACE FINISH.

    CAUTION

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU POLISH AREAS THAT HAVE RIVET HEADS. THE SURFACE FINISH IS
    REMOVED MORE EASILY FROM RIVET HEADS.

    Switch on the polishing machine and move the lamb wool pad in a circular movement over the surface
    to be polished.
    2.8 When the (Polish cleaner (Pt.No. P05-008)) on the lamb wool pad is used, apply more polish as
    needed.
    2.9 Do Step 2.6 thru Step 2.8 again until the surface is polished.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-20-01-00A-256A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-08 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.10 Use a clean (Microfiber cloth (Pt.No. P02-037)) made moist with (Fine cleaner (Pt.No. P05-010)) to
    remove unwanted polish deposits.
    2.11 Apply (Sealing (Pt.No. P05-009)) if needed, refer to Para .
    3 Apply Sealing
    3.1
    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MANUFACTURERS
    HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Use a (Polish pad (black) (Pt.No. P02-034)) with a (Polish hood (Pt.No. P02-036)) on an (Eccentric
    polishing machine (Pt.No. Meguiar's ND EZLS-6 or equivalent)).
    3.2 Put a small amount of (Sealing (Pt.No. P05-009)) between the center and the outer edge of the polish
    hood.
    3.3 Hold the polishing machine with the polish hood on the aircraft surface. Do not push the polishing
    machine against the aircraft surface.
    3.4 Switch on the polishing machine and move the polish hood in a circular movement over the surface to
    be sealed.
    3.5 When the (Sealing (Pt.No. P05-009)) on the polish hood is used, apply more sealing as needed.
    3.6 Do Step 3.3 thru Step 3.5 again until the surface is sealed.
    3.7 Use a clean (Microfiber cloth (Pt.No. P02-037)) made moist with (Fine cleaner (Pt.No. P05-010)) to
    remove unwanted sealing deposits.

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-20-01-00A-256A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-08 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    AIRCRAFT EXTERIOR WASHING

    SERVICING

    Table of Contents Page

    AIRCRAFT EXTERIOR WASHING - SERVICING..................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Aircraft Washing Sections...................................................................................... 6

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A GENERAL - AEROSPACE GROUND EQUIPMENT
    (AGE) AND TOOLS
    12-B-12-20-02-00A-902A-A AIRCRAFT WINDOWS CLEANING - SERVICING
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Engine exhaust-stub covers Part 510.10.12.046 As
    required
    ECS intake cover Part 990.00.00.894 As
    required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-20-01-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-09-18 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark


    AOA transmitter covers Part 110.88.07.001 As
    required
    Pitot head cover Part 510.10.12.017 As
    required
    Static port cover (high visibility) Part Local supply As
    required
    Static blanking adaptor Part 990.00.00.209 As
    required
    Compressor spray equipment Part 968.86.93.124 As
    required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Soap solution Part P01-005 As
    required
    Alkaline cleaner Part P01-001 As
    required
    Extreme Simple Green cleaner Part P01-027 As
    Required
    Water-displacing corrosion Part P10-001 As
    preventive required
    Soft bristle brush Part Local supply As
    required
    Clean water Part Local supply As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Clean The Aircraft

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-20-01-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-09-18 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1.1
    Note

    To identify the AGE and tools used in this procedure refer to the list of AGE and tools 12-
    B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A.

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items AMM 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Preparation
    1.1.1 Make sure that the water that you use to clean the aircraft is of good quality. If the water is
    contaminated, it can cause corrosion or damage to the surface of the aircraft.
    1.1.2 Do not use a high pressure washer to clean the external surface of the aircraft. The high
    pressure water can cause damage to the external surface of the aircraft.
    1.1.3 Make sure that the equipment used to clean the aircraft is clean and correct for the aircraft.
    1.1.4 Set the flaps to the landing position (40 degrees), if necessary use the Flap Maintenance
    switch to move the flaps.
    1.1.5 Close the passenger/crew door, the cargo door and the DV window.
    1.1.6 Make sure all access panels are closed.
    1.1.7
    CAUTION

    DO NOT USE ADHESIVE TAPE TO COVER THE STATIC PORTS.

    Install these covers on the aircraft:


    − Engine exhaust-stub covers
    − ECS NACA intake cover
    − AOA transmitter covers
    − Pitot head covers
    − Static port covers or blanking adaptors.
    1.1.8 Make sure that all the other covers are removed from the aircraft.
    1.1.9 The aircraft can be divided into five sections (Ref. Fig. 1), that can be cleaned at different
    times to prevent the cleaning agent from drying out on the aircraft surface:
    − Section 1 - The front fuselage
    − Section 2 - The wings and center fuselage
    − Section 3 - The rear fuselage
    − Section 4 - The tail and control surfaces
    − Section 5 - The landing gear

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-20-01-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-09-18 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Note

    Certain types of paint finishes, like matt or semi-gloss, are significantly more susceptible to
    long-lasting staining than a glossy finish. This is because of the physical nature of a matt
    surface, which requires a certain roughness to give the matt appearance. A rough surface is
    a better adhesion substrate for contaminants than a smooth one.

    1.1.10 To maintain a clean appearance, regularly wash the aircraft thoroughly. Give special
    attention to the exhaust fume exposed areas.
    1.2
    CAUTION

    MAKE SURE THE WATER AND THE SOAP SOLUTION DO NOT GO INTO THE STATIC PORTS.

    Procedure
    1.2.1 Prepare the soap (Soap solution (Pt.No. P01-005)).
    1.2.2 Flush the aircraft skin and landing gear with water (Clean water (Pt.No. Local supply)).
    1.2.3 Apply the Soap solution (Pt.No. P01-005) (for up to three minutes) to a small area (4 to 5 m²
    (43 to 54 ft²)) of the aircraft skin and then clean it with the Soft bristle brush (Pt.No. Local
    supply).
    1.2.4 Flush the soap from the aircraft skin with clean water.
    1.2.5 Do Step 1.2.3 and Step 1.2.4 again (up to a maximum of 3 times) until all the aircraft skin
    and landing gear is clean.
    1.2.6
    CAUTION

    DO NOT ALLOW THE HEAVY DUTY CLEANER TO COME INTO CONTACT WITH
    ACRYLIC GLASSES I.E. THE COCKPIT OR CABIN WINDOWS, AS CONTACT MAY
    CAUSE A STRESS CRAZING EFFECT OF THE ACRYLIC GLASS.

    CAUTION

    DO NOT APPLY TOO MUCH PRESSURE WHEN YOU CLEAN THE HEAVY DIRT OR
    STAINS, AS THIS MAY DAMAGE THE TOP COAT.

    To remove heavy exhaust gas or heavy dirt stains, apply undiluted Extreme Simple Green
    cleaner (Pt.No. P01-027) to the affected area (for up to three minutes) and then clean with
    the Soft bristle brush (Pt.No. Local supply).
    1.2.7 Flush the cleaner from the aircraft skin with clean water.
    1.2.8 Do Step 1.2.6 and Step 1.2.7 again (up to a maximum of 3 times) to remove heavy dirt or
    stains.
    1.2.9
    CAUTION

    DO NOT LET ANY CLEANING AGENT STAY IN CONTACT WITH THE AIRCRAFT TIRES
    FOR ANY LENGTH OF TIME, AS DAMAGE TO THE TIRES MAY OCCUR.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-20-01-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-09-18 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Flush the aircraft tires with clean water and then, if necessary, move the aircraft to a dry
    area.
    1.2.10 Clean the aircraft windows, refer to AMM 12-B-12-20-02-00A-902A-A.
    1.3 Close Up
    1.3.1 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    1.3.2 Set the flaps to 0 degrees.
    1.3.3 Install all the covers on the aircraft.
    1.3.4 Remove static port covers or blanking adaptors that are not part of the aircraft standard
    cover kit.
    2 Clean The Engine
    2.1 Remove the engine cowlings 42 AB and 42 AT and the access panel 43 BB.
    2.2 Open the engine cowlings 43 AL, 43 AR.
    2.3 Prepare the cleaner (Alkaline cleaner (Pt.No. P01-001)).
    2.4 Flush the engine with clean water.
    2.5 Apply the cleaner (Alkaline cleaner (Pt.No. P01-001)) to the engine external surfaces and clean them
    with soft bristle brushes.
    2.6 Flush the cleaner from the engine external surfaces with clean water.
    2.7 Do Step 2.5 and Step 2.6 again until the engine is clean.
    2.8 Let the engine surfaces dry.
    2.9 If the aircraft is to be operated in a corrosive environment, use spray equipment to apply a layer of
    corrosion preventative (Water-displacing corrosion preventive (Pt.No. P10-001)) to all the bare
    surfaces of the engine.
    2.10 Close the engine cowlings 43 AL, 43 AR.
    2.11 Install the engine cowlings 42 AB and 42 AT and the access panel 43 BB.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-20-01-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-09-18 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    SECTION 1 SECTION 2 SECTION 3 SECTION 4

    SECTION 5

    12-A-122001-A-S4080-30019-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Aircraft Washing Sections

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-20-01-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-09-18 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-20-01-00A-902A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-09-18 Page 7
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-20-01-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-09-18 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    AIRCRAFT WINDOWS CLEANING

    SERVICING

    Table of Contents Page

    AIRCRAFT WINDOWS CLEANING - SERVICING.................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Soap solution Part P01-005 As
    required
    Chamois leather Part P02-004 As
    required
    Sponge Part P02-005 As
    required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-20-02-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark


    Transparency cleaner Part P05-003 As
    required
    Transparency cleaner Part P05-002 As
    (Alternative) required
    Clean water Part Local supply As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Clean The Windows
    1.1
    CAUTION

    THE AIRCRAFT WINDOWS CAN EASILY BECOME DAMAGED. MAKE SURE THE SPONGE AND
    CHAMOIS LEATHER ARE CLEAN BEFORE USE.

    CAUTION

    SOLVENTS AND FUELS WILL DAMAGE THE WINDOWS. ONLY USE THE RECOMMENDED
    MATERIALS TO CLEAN THE WINDOWS.

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Preparation
    1.1.1 Make sure the DV window, passenger/crew door and the cargo door are closed.
    1.1.2 Prepare the soap solution (Soap solution (Pt.No. P01-005)).
    1.2 Procedure
    1.2.1 Flush the windows with water (Clean water (Pt.No. Local supply)).
    1.2.2 Apply the soap solution (Soap solution (Pt.No. P01-005)) to the windows and clean them
    with the sponge (Sponge (Pt.No. P02-005)).
    1.2.3 Flush the windows with clean water.
    1.2.4 Dry the windows with a clean chamois leather (Chamois leather (Pt.No. P02-004)).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-20-02-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1.2.5 Remove all the remaining contamination from the windows with the cleaner (Transparency
    cleaner (Pt.No. P05-003)) and a Chamois leather (Chamois leather (Pt.No. P02-004)).
    1.2.6 Clean the inside of the windows in the flight and passenger compartments with the cleaner
    (Transparency cleaner (Pt.No. P05-003)) and a Chamois leather (Chamois
    leather (Pt.No. P02-004)).

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    1 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-20-02-00A-902A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 3
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-20-02-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    AIRCRAFT INTERIOR CLEANING

    SERVICING

    Table of Contents Page

    AIRCRAFT INTERIOR CLEANING - SERVICING..................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-12-20-02-00A-902A-A AIRCRAFT WINDOWS CLEANING - SERVICING
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-46-30-00-00A-901A-A DISPLAY AND CONTROL - MAINTENANCE
    PRACTICES

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Vacuum cleaner Part Local supply As
    required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Soap solution Part P01-005 As
    required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-20-03-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-09-18 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark


    Absorbent paper Part P02-031 As
    required
    Sponge Part P02-005 As
    required
    Clean water Part Local supply As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Clean the Aircraft Interior
    1.1
    CAUTION

    DO NOT LET THE WATER AND SOAP SOLUTION GO BEHIND THE AIRCRAFT INTERIOR
    SURFACES.

    CAUTION

    DO NOT CLEAN THE COCKPIT INSTRUMENTS WITH SOAPY WATER AS THIS COULD DAMAGE
    THE DISPLAY SCREEN ANTI GLARE COATING.

    CAUTION

    DO NOT CLEAN FABRIC SURFACES WITH A SOAP SOLUTION OR WATER. THIS CAN INHIBIT
    THE PROPERTIES OF THE FIREBLOCK TREATMENT APPLIED TO THE FABRIC.

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items, AMM 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Remove the seat rail covers.


    1.2 100 or 150 Hour Inspection. Use a Vacuum cleaner (Pt.No. Local supply) to clean the seats, carpets
    (upper side) and seat tracks.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-20-03-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-09-18 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1.3 Annual Inspection. Use a Vacuum cleaner (Pt.No. Local supply) to clean the seats, carpets (both
    sides), floor panels (and gaps between floor panels) and seat tracks.
    1.4 Prepare the Soap solution (Pt.No. P01-005).
    1.5 Make the Sponge (Pt.No. P02-005) moist with the Soap solution (Pt.No. P01-005).
    1.6 Do a test on a non-visible area of each surface to be cleaned.
    1.7 If there is any noticeable damage to any of the test areas e.g. fading, discoloration or staining:
    − Do not clean the remaining area of the damaged surface and
    − Contact the equipment vendor for advice.
    1.8 Make the Sponge (Pt.No. P02-005) moist with the Soap solution (Pt.No. P01-005).
    1.9 Clean the interior surfaces with the Sponge (Pt.No. P02-005).
    1.10 Make the Sponge (Pt.No. P02-005) moist with Clean water (Pt.No. Local supply).
    1.11 Clean the interior surfaces with the sponge.
    1.12 Use Absorbent paper (Pt.No. P02-031) to dry the interior surfaces.
    1.13 Clean the windows, AMM 12-B-12-20-02-00A-902A-A.
    1.14 Clean the PFDs and MFDs, AMM 12-B-46-30-00-00A-901A-A.
    1.15 Install the carpets, where necessary.
    1.16 Install the seat rail covers.
    1.17 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-20-03-00A-902A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-09-18 Page 3
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-20-03-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-09-18 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    LANDING GEAR

    SERVICING

    Table of Contents Page

    LANDING GEAR - SERVICING.................................................................................................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Nose Landing Gear – Servicing.............................................................................. 3


    2 Main Landing Gear – Servicing.............................................................................. 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A GENERAL - AEROSPACE GROUND EQUIPMENT
    (AGE) AND TOOLS
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Grease gun (or equivalent) Part 904.21.02.103 As
    required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-20-04-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Cleaning cloth Part P02-003 As
    required
    Grease Part P04-028 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This document gives the procedure for the lubrication of the landing gear assemblies.
    2
    Note

    To identify the AGE and tools used in this procedure refer to the list of AGE and tools 12-
    B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A.

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Nose Landing Gear


    2.1 Use the grease gun (Grease gun (or equivalent) (Pt.No. 904.21.02.103)) to put the grease
    (Grease (Pt.No. P04-028)) into the grease fittings (Figure 1 [1]), (Figure 1 [2]), (Figure 1 [3]),
    (Figure 1 [4]) and (Figure 1 [5]) until clean grease (Grease (Pt.No. P04-028)) comes out of the
    assemblies.
    2.2 Remove unwanted grease (Grease (Pt.No. P04-028)) with a cloth (Cleaning cloth (Pt.No. P02-003)).
    3 Main Landing Gear
    3.1 Use the grease gun (Grease gun (or equivalent) (Pt.No. 904.21.02.103)) to put the grease
    (Grease (Pt.No. P04-028)) into the grease fittings (Figure 2 [1]), (Figure 2 [2]) at the main gear leg
    knees until clean grease (Grease (Pt.No. P04-028)) comes out of the assemblies.
    3.2 Remove unwanted grease (Grease (Pt.No. P04-028)) with a cloth (Cleaning cloth (Pt.No. P02-003)).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-20-04-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    B

    B
    4 12104

    Figure 1 Nose Landing Gear – Servicing

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-20-04-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    B
    12-B-122004-A-S4080-01052-A-01-1

    Figure 2 Main Landing Gear – Servicing

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-20-04-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-20-04-00A-902A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-20-04-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PROPELLER

    SERVICING

    Table of Contents Page

    PROPELLER - SERVICING....................................................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A GENERAL - AEROSPACE GROUND EQUIPMENT
    (AGE) AND TOOLS
    12-B-61-10-01-00A-920A-A PROPELLER - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required
    Grease gun Part 904.21.02.102 As
    required
    Grease gun (Alternative) Part 904.21.02.702 As
    required
    Grease gun (Alternative) Part 904.21.02.103 As
    required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-20-05-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-06-14 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Cleaning cloth Part P02-003 As
    required
    Grease Part P04-016 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Propeller Lubrication
    1.1
    CAUTION

    MAKE SURE THE GREASE GUN IS CLEAN BEFORE USE AND THE CORRECT GREASE IS
    USED.

    CAUTION

    THE LUBRICATION PROCEDURE MUST BE DONE CORRECTLY TO KEEP THE ACCURATE


    DYNAMIC BALANCE OF THE PROPELLER AND HUB ASSEMBLIES. IT IS IMPORTANT TO PUT
    THE LUBRICANT INTO THE PROPELLER HUB IN THE SAME DIRECTION EACH TIME THE
    PROPELLER IS GREASED BETWEEN OVERHAULS.

    Note

    To identify the AGE and tools used in this procedure refer to the list of AGE and tools 12-
    B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A.

    Preparation
    1.1.1 Open and install a safety clip (Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065))
    on this circuit breaker:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    1.1.2 Remove the spinner dome (AMM 12-B-61-10-01-00A-920A-A).
    1.1.3 Make sure the area around the forward and rear grease points is clean.
    1.2 Procedure

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-20-05-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-06-14 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Refer to Hartzell Propeller Owners Manual No. 149.

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    1 Install the spinner dome (AMM 12-B-61-10-01-00A-920A-A).
    2 Remove the safety clip and close the circuit breaker:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-20-05-00A-902A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-06-14 Page 3
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-20-05-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-06-14 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    WHEEL BEARING

    SERVICING

    Table of Contents Page

    WHEEL BEARING - SERVICING............................................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Nose Wheel Bearings (Goodrich Wheels) – Servicing (MSN 1001 – 1230)........... 4


    2 Nose Wheel Bearings (Parker Wheels) – Servicing (MSN 1231 – 9999)............... 5
    3 Main Wheel Bearings (Goodrich Wheels) – Servicing (MSN 1001 – 1230)........... 6
    4 Main Wheel Bearings (Parker Wheels) – Servicing (MSN 1231 – 9999)............... 7

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A JACKING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-32-40-01-00A-920A-A MAIN WHEEL - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-32-40-02-00A-920A-A NOSE WHEEL - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-20-06-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-02-27 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Cleaning cloth Part P02-003 As
    required
    Grease Part P04-031 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This document gives the procedure for the lubrication of the main and nose wheel bearings.
    2 Preparation
    2.1
    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items AMM 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Open and install a safety clip (Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on this
    circuit breaker:
    − HYD CTL (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    2.2 Lift the aircraft clear of the ground on jacks, AMM 12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A.
    3 Nose Wheel Bearing Lubrication
    3.1 Remove the nose wheel, AMM 12-B-32-40-02-00A-920A-A.
    3.2 Clean and grease the nose wheel bearings Figure 1 [3] or Figure 2 [3], AMM 12-
    B-32-40-02-00A-920A-A.
    3.3 Install the nose wheel, AMM 12-B-32-40-02-00A-920A-A.
    4 Main Wheels Bearing Lubrication
    4.1 Remove the main wheels, AMM 12-B-32-40-01-00A-920A-A.
    4.2 Clean and grease the main wheel bearings Figure 3 [12] or Figure 4 [13] , AMM 12-
    B-32-40-01-00A-920A-A.
    4.3 Install the main wheels, AMM 12-B-32-40-01-00A-920A-A.
    5 Close Up

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-20-06-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-02-27 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    5.1 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    5.2 Lower the aircraft to the ground and remove the jacks, AMM 12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A.
    5.3 Remove the safety clip and close this circuit breaker:
    − HYD CTL (ESSENTIAL BUS)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-20-06-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-02-27 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    A

    B
    4

    12-A-122006-A-S4080-00072-A-02-1

    Figure 1 Nose Wheel Bearings (Goodrich Wheels) – Servicing (MSN 1001 – 1230)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-20-06-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-02-27 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    A

    B
    4

    12-B-122006-A-S4080-01053-A-01-1

    Figure 2 Nose Wheel Bearings (Parker Wheels) – Servicing (MSN 1231 – 9999)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-20-06-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-02-27 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    RIB 5 A

    B
    2
    1

    B 4
    3

    13

    10
    11 1

    12

    6
    12 7
    11
    10 6
    9 8

    12-A-122006-A-S4080-00073-A-02-1

    Figure 3 Main Wheel Bearings (Goodrich Wheels) – Servicing (MSN 1001 – 1230)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-20-06-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-02-27 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    RIB 5 A

    B
    2
    1

    B 5
    4
    3

    14 11
    12 1

    13

    7
    13 8
    12
    11 7
    10 9

    12-B-122006-A-S4080-01054-A-01-1

    Figure 4 Main Wheel Bearings (Parker Wheels) – Servicing (MSN 1231 – 9999)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-20-06-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-02-27 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-12-20-06-00A-902A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-02-27 Page 8
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    EQUIPMENT HANDLING

    MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Table of Contents Page

    EQUIPMENT HANDLING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES........................................................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-00-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-26 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives information for handling of Line Replaceable Units (LRUs).
    2 Cockpit Instruments and Displays
    Cockpit instruments and display units show the pilot information about the aircraft. The units have either
    glass, cathode ray tube (CRT) or Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) screens with an anti-reflective coating and/or
    optical filters, which are easily damaged. Refer to the appropriate AMM section for information about
    cleaning the display screens.
    2.1 Remove rings and other jewellery before you handle instruments or display units to prevent scratch
    damage.
    2.2 Wear clean protective gloves before you handle instruments or display units.
    2.3 Handle instruments and display units with care.
    2.4 If the instrument or display unit has a protective film installed, do not remove the film until the unit is
    installed on the aircraft.
    3 Electronic and Electro-Mechanical LRUs
    3.1 Handle LRUs with care.
    3.2 Always install blanking caps on electrical connectors.
    3.3 Make sure that you use Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) procedures necessary to protect the LRU and
    its components from electrostatic discharge.

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-00-00-00A-901A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-26 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    LOCKING AND RETAINING DEVICES

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    LOCKING AND RETAINING DEVICES - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION........................... 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1
    2 Component Description (Ref. , and )...................................................................... 2
    2.1 Cotter Pins.............................................................................................................. 2
    2.2 Locking Plates........................................................................................................ 2
    2.3 Locking Washers.................................................................................................... 2
    2.3.1 Spring Washers...................................................................................................... 2
    2.3.2 Shakeproof Washers.............................................................................................. 3
    2.3.3 Tab Washers.......................................................................................................... 3
    2.4 Circlips, Locking Rings And Snap Rings................................................................ 3
    2.5 Lockwire................................................................................................................. 3
    2.6 Spring Clips............................................................................................................ 4
    2.7 Self Locking Fasteners........................................................................................... 4

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Locking Washers.................................................................................................... 5
    2 Cotter Pins, Locking Plates, Circlips and Locking Rings........................................ 6
    3 Lockwire and Locking Clips.................................................................................... 7

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description

    1 General
    Locking and retaining devices are used on components that can become loose because of vibration or changes in
    temperature. All of the locking devices used must be the same type as specified in the Illustrated Parts Catalog.
    The types of locking and retaining devices are:
    − Cotter pins
    − Locking plates
    − Locking washers
    − Circlips, locking rings and snap rings

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-20-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2007-11-20 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − Lockwire
    − Spring clips
    − Self-locking nuts

    2 Component Description (Ref. Fig. 1, Fig. 2 and Fig. 3)

    2.1 Cotter Pins


    Cotter pins are used to safety castellated nuts and pins that do not have a nut installed on them. They can be
    installed with their legs around the sides of the nuts or with their legs on the top and one edge of the nuts. This
    makes sure the cotter pins do not touch other surfaces, particularly where flying controls or other parts that move
    are close to the nut that is safetied.
    The cotter pin must be a close fit in the hole of the fastener. Cut the legs of the cotter pin to the correct length and
    bend them to hold the cotter pin in position. Make sure the legs cannot touch other components or cause injury to
    persons. Remove the cut ends of the legs from the aircraft.
    After installation, examine the legs of the cotter pins for cracks and cuts. Replace the cotter pin if cracks or cuts are
    found.
    Use cotter pins one time only.

    2.2 Locking Plates


    Locking plates are installed on nuts or the heads of bolts and are safetied to the adjacent surface with a screw. The
    screw is safetied with a spring or shakeproof washer, peening or lockwire.

    2.3 Locking Washers


    Locking washers are used when a bolt or screw is installed without a self-locking or castellated nut. Locking
    washers must not be used:
    − With fasteners in primary and secondary structures
    − Where a failure can cause damage or injury to the aircraft or personnel
    − Where a failure will permit a joint to become open to the airflow
    − With fasteners that are removed and installed frequently
    − In positions that are in the airflow around the aircraft
    − In conditions that can cause corrosion
    − Without a plain washer between the locking washer and the component when the component is made of soft
    metal

    Three types of locking washers are:


    − Spring washers
    − Shakeproof washers
    − Tab washers

    2.3.1 Spring Washers


    Spring washers are installed in positions where vibration can make a nut become loose. The spring action gives
    sufficient friction to prevent the nut becoming loose.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-20-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2007-11-20 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.3.2 Shakeproof Washers


    Shakeproof washers are used as an alternative to spring washers.
    Use shakeproof washers one time only.

    2.3.3 Tab Washers


    Tab washers are installed below nuts or the heads of bolts and are used in conditions where there are high
    temperatures or high vibration.
    A tab washer has two or more tabs. One tab engages in a hole in the component and the other tab or tabs are bent
    until they touch the flats on the nut or the head of the bolt. This makes sure the nut or bolt cannot move.
    After installation, make sure the tab which engages is correctly engaged and the tabs that are bent are not cracked
    or cut. Replace the tab washer if cracks or cuts are found.
    Use tab washers one time only.

    2.4 Circlips, Locking Rings And Snap Rings


    Circlips, locking rings and snap rings engage in grooves in a hole or on a shaft to keep the component in a
    particular position. Circlips and locking rings can be installed on the outside or the inside of the components.
    After installation, make sure the circlip, locking ring or snap ring is correctly engaged in the groove in the
    component.
    Use circlips, locking rings and snap rings one time only.

    2.5 Lockwire
    Lockwire is used to safety bolts, pins, screws, nuts and other components and is supplied in different diameters
    and materials.
    Lockwire that is used to safety components that are not emergency controls is made with stainless steel. Do not
    use stainless steel type lockwire to safety emergency controls. it will prevent operation of the emergency controls
    during an emergency.
    Lockwire that is used to safety emergency controls is made with copper. This type of lockwire is identified as shear
    wire and is supplied in small diameters. It keeps the emergency control in the normal or safe position but can be
    broken easily when it is necessary to operate the emergency control. It is also used as an indicator that shows
    when an emergency control has been operated.
    Safety thread is also used for emergency controls.
    Lockwire must be installed as follows:
    − In the direction that makes the component tighten or keep the same position
    − At an angle that is not less than 45 degrees to the axis that the component turns in
    − At a tangent to the component

    Install lockwire with between 7 and 10 turns in each 1 in (25 mm) length of lockwire. More than 10 turns in each 1
    in (25 mm) can cause stress and the lockwire can break. Bend the open end of the lockwire to stop injury to
    persons.
    Locking tabs must be installed with the locking tab and the lockwire in a straight line.
    Use lockwire one time only.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-20-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2007-11-20 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    The procedures in this maintenance manual specify the type of lockwire to be used.

    2.6 Spring Clips


    Spring clips are used to safety turnbuckles. They are easier to install than lockwire and decrease the risk that
    controls can touch other components or structure when they move.
    Before the turnbuckle or connecting rod is safetied, make sure the two end fittings extend further than the
    inspection holes towards the center of the turnbuckle or connecting rod.
    Align the grooves in the turnbuckle and the terminal and install two spring clips in the turnbuckle, one on each side
    of the turnbuckle body. Make sure the ends of the spring clip engage correctly in the turnbuckle and the terminal.
    Use spring clips one time only.

    2.7 Self Locking Fasteners


    Self locking fasteners are used where it is not necessary, or possible to use other methods of locking. They have a
    nylon, fiber or metal insert that increases the friction between the fastener and the component it attaches to. Self
    locking fasteners include nuts, bolts, screws and studs.
    Use fasteners with a nylon or fiber insert only once. Do not lubricate fasteners that have a nylon insert.
    Fasteners that have a metal insert can only be used again on components that are not critical to the safety of the
    aircraft, and a test of the fastener shows the self locking is correct.
    When a self locking fastener is to be installed it must be tested to make sure it is suitable for use. Small diameter
    nylon-insert nuts must be replaced if finger pressure can be used to install the nut on a bolt, screw or stud until the
    thread goes completely through the nut.
    At least one thread of the bolt, screw or stud must protrude from the nut when it is fully tightened.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-20-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2007-11-20 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    SINGLE COIL CRINKLE CUP


    SPRING WASHERS

    SHAKEPROOF WASHERS

    TAB WASHERS
    20101

    Figure 1 Locking Washers

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-20-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2007-11-20 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    INSTALLATION OF COTTER PINS

    LOCKING PLATE

    INTERNAL EXTERNAL

    SNAP RING CIRCLIPS

    INTERNAL EXTERNAL

    LOCKING RINGS
    20102

    Figure 2 Cotter Pins, Locking Plates, Circlips and Locking Rings

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-20-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2007-11-20 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    OPEN END OF
    LOCKWIRE

    NOT LESS THAN


    45 DEGREES

    90 DEGREES
    CLOSED END
    OF LOCKWIRE
    0.25 in
    (6 mm)

    90 DEGREES

    LOCKING
    TAB

    END FITTING

    SPRING CLIP

    CABLE
    SPRING CLIP

    INSPECTION
    HOLE

    END FITTING
    SPRING CLIP

    SPRING CLIP

    CABLE INSPECTION
    HOLE
    20103

    Figure 3 Lockwire and Locking Clips

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-20-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2007-11-20 Page 7
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-20-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2007-11-20 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    TORQUE WRENCHES AND PROCEDURES

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    TORQUE WRENCHES AND PROCEDURES - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION................. 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1
    2 Definition of Torque................................................................................................ 1
    3 Standard Torque Tightening Procedures and Values (Ref. )................................. 2
    4 Use of Torque Wrenches (Ref. and )...................................................................... 2
    4.1 General................................................................................................................... 2
    4.2 Calculation of the Torque when a Drive Extension is Used.................................... 3

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Torque Calculation With a Drive Extension............................................................ 4


    2 Torque Wrenches and Extensions......................................................................... 5
    3 Standard Torque Values for Nut and Bol Mixtures................................................. 6
    4 Standard Torque Values for Screws....................................................................... 7

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description

    1 General
    This data module gives information about:
    − The use of torque wrenches
    − Standard torque tightening procedures and values
    − Calculation of the correct indication on a torque wrench when an extension is used

    2 Definition of Torque
    Torque is the force that causes a movement around an axis. A torque is given to nuts, bolts and other fasteners to
    make sure they do not become loose or have too much stress. A torque wrench with an applicable extension is
    used to give the correct amount of torque to the fastener. In the Aircraft Maintenance Manual the torque is given in
    Newton meters (Nm) and pounds-force inches (lbf in).
    Torque is calculated by the following formula:

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-20-01-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2007-11-20 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Torque = Force applied x Distance from axis to which the force is applied

    3 Standard Torque Tightening Procedures and Values (Ref. Fig. 3)


    Torque values for special nuts and bolts are given in the relevant procedure in this manual. Where no figure is
    given the nut or bolt must be tightened to the standard value given in the tables in this data module.
    Before a nut or bolt is torque tightened, clean the threads and, if applicable, apply the lubricant specified in the
    maintenance procedure.
    When castellated nuts, which are safetied with cotter pins, are torque tightened, the cotter pin holes must align
    when the nut is tightened between the minimum and maximum values. If the holes do not align, the washer under
    the nut must be replaced with one of a different thickness until the holes align. Do not loosen the nut to align the
    cotter pin holes.
    Unless otherwise specified in the relevant procedure, all torque figures are for ‛dry’ threads.
    If no torque figure is given in a procedure, then the values given in the Table in Fig. 4 must be used. These
    standard values are for ‛dry’ threads only, and must be changed as follows if lubricants are used:
    Mineral oil or grease Subtract 10% from the values in the tables.
    Graphite or molybdenum disulphide oil or grease Subtract 20% from the values in the tables.

    Note

    If Mastinox 6856H is used as a corrosion preventative on the component, use the values in the table.

    The torque necessary to turn a self-locking nut is not included in the standard values given in the tables. To
    correctly torque a self-locking nut use the following procedure:
    − Find the torque necessary to turn the nut on the bolt approximately one turn before the nut makes contact
    − Add this torque figure to the values in the table

    Note

    If a self-locking nut can be turned by hand on the bolt it must be replaced.

    4 Use of Torque Wrenches (Ref. Fig. 1 and Fig. 2)

    4.1 General
    Make sure that torque wrenches are regularly calibrated.
    Set the torque wrench to the required figure and check the torque on a calibrated source before use.
    Clean the threads and, if applicable, apply the lubricant specified in the maintenance procedure.
    Hold the wrench handle at the center and apply torque slowly and evenly until the required value is reached.
    On castellated nuts which are safetied with a cotter pin, the cotter pin holes should align when the nut is tightened
    between the minimum and maximum values. If the holes do not align, the washer under the nut must be replaced
    with one of a different thickness until the holes align. Do not loosen the nut to align the cotter pin holes.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-20-01-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2007-11-20 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    4.2 Calculation of the Torque when a Drive Extension is Used


    If an extension or adapter is used with the torque wrench, use the formula given in Fig. 1 to set the torque on the
    wrench.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-20-01-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2007-11-20 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    IF AN EXTENSION OR ADAPTER IS USED WITH THE TORQUE WRENCH, THE TORQUE SET ON THE WRENCH MUST
    BE CALCULATED USING THIS FORMULA:

    INDICATED TORQUE = SPECIFIED TORQUE x L


    L+X

    WHERE:
    L IS THE DISTANCE FROM THE CENTER OF THE WRENCH HANDLE TO THE CENTER OF THE WRENCH DRIVE.
    X IS THE LENGTH OF THE EXTENSION.
    FOR EXAMPLE: A FASTENER WHICH REQUIRES A TORQUE OF 2,0 Nm, WITH A WRENCH DISTANCE OF 450 mm
    AND AN EXTENSION 50 mm LONG, WILL REQUIRE A SET TORQUE OF:

    INDICATED TORQUE = 2,0 x 450 = 1,8 Nm


    450 + 50

    IF THE ANGLE BETWEEN THE EXTENSION AND THE CENTER LINE OF THE WRENCH IS MORE THAN 15 DEGREES,
    THE FORMULA MUST BE CHANGED:

    INDICATED TORQUE = SPECIFIED TORQUE x L


    D

    WHERE:
    L IS THE DISTANCE FROM THE CENTER OF THE WRENCH HANDLE TO THE CENTER OF THE WRENCH DRIVE.
    D IS THE DISTANCE FROM THE CENTER OF THE WRENCH HANDLE TO THE CENTER OF THE EXTENSION DRIVE.
    FOR EXAMPLE: A FASTENER WHICH REQUIRES A TORQUE OF 2,0 Nm, WITH A WRENCH HANDLE LENGTH OF
    450 mm AND A DISTANCE FROM THE HANDLE CENTER TO THE EXTENSION CENTER OF 480 mm, WILL REQUIRE A
    SET TORQUE OF:

    INDICATED TORQUE = 1,875 Nm

    12-A-202001-A-S4080-05001-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Torque Calculation With a Drive Extension

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-20-01-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2007-11-20 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    X
    L

    EXTENSION HAND GRIP

    >15°

    D
    S20104

    Figure 2 Torque Wrenches and Extensions

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-20-01-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2007-11-20 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    TENSILE STRENGTH: 125 KSI TENSILE STRENGTH: 160 KSI TENSILE STRENGTH: 180 KSI
    (SHEAR STRENGTH: 75 KSI) (SHEAR STRENGTH: 95 KSI) (SHEAR STRENGTH: 108 KSI)
    BOLTS AN 3- A20 NAS 6603 - NAS 6620 MS 21250
    AN 173 - AN 186 NAS 1580 & NAS 1581 NAS 1953 - NAS 1970

    MS 21042 MS 21045 MS 21042 MS 21045 NAS 1804 NAS 1804


    MS 21043 MS 21046 MS 21043 MS 21046 NAS 1805 NAS 1805
    LOCKING NUT MS 21045 NAS 1804
    MS 21046 NAS 1805

    TYPE OF LOAD SHEAR TENSION SHEAR TENSION SHEAR TENSION


    THREAD UNF/UNJF
    TORQUE VALUES IN Nm AND [lb inch]
    inch mm
    .1900-32 4,83x0,79 1,4-1,7 2,3-2,9 1,7-2,3 2,9-3,5 2,9-3,5 3,4-4,5
    [12-15] [20-25] [15-20] [25-30] [25-30] [30-40]

    .2500-28 6,35x0,90 3,4-4,5 5,7-7,9 5,7-6,8 9-11,3 9-11,3 11,3-13,5


    [30-50] [50-70] [50-60] [80-100] [80-100] [100-120]

    .3125-24 7,94x1,06 7-9,5 11-16 8-10 13,5-16,5 13,5-16,5 22,5-30,5


    [60-85] [100-140] [70-90] [120-145] [120-145] [200-270]

    .3750-24 9,53x1,06 10,5-12,5 18-21 13,5-17 22,5-28 22,5-28 34-51


    [95-110] [160-190] [120-150] [200-250] [200-250] [300-450]

    .4375-20 11,11x1,27 30,5-34 51-56 34-45 59-71 59-71 73-96


    [270-300] [450-500] [300-400] [520-630] [520-630] [650-850]

    .5000-20 12,70x1,27 33-46 54-78 51-62 87-107 87-107 102-124


    [290-410] [480-690] [450-550] [770-950] [770-950] [900-1100]

    .5625-18 14,29x1,41 54-68 90-113 73-90 124-145 124-145 158-180


    [480-600] [800-1000] [650-800] [1100-1300] [1100-1300] [1400-1600]

    .6250-18 15,88x1,41 74-88 125-145 85-107 140-175 140-175 226-271


    [660-780] [1100-1300] [750-950] [1250-1550] [1250-1550] [2000-2400]

    .7500-16 19,05x1,59 145-170 260-280 180-215 300-360 300-360 510-600


    [1300-1500] [2300-2500] [1600-1900] [2650-3200] [2650-3200] [4500-5300]

    .8750-14 22,23x1,81 170-203 280-340 240-290 400-490 400-490 735-850


    [1500-1800] [2500-3000] [2100-2600] [3550-4360] [3550-4360] [6500-7500]

    1.0000-12 25,40x2,12 250-370 420-510 300-370 510-620 510-620 960-1130


    [2200-3300] [3700-4500] [2700-3300] [4500-5500] [4500-5500] [8500-10000]

    1.1250-12 28,58x2,12 340-470 560-790 410-500 680-820 680-820 1240-1470


    [3000-4200] [5000-7000] [3600-4400] [6000-7300] [6000-7300] [11000-13000]

    1.2500-12 31,75x2,12 610-745 1020-1240 678-900 1240-1469 1240-1469 2150-2370


    [5400-6600] [9000-11000] [6000-8000] [11000-13000] [11000-13000] [19000-21000]

    THIS TABLE IS ALSO APPLICABLE TO CASTELLATED NUTS MS 9359 (AN 310 TENSION) AND MS 9364 (AN 320 SHEAR),
    IF THEY ARE TO BE TORQUE WRENCH TIGHTENED.

    12-A-202001-A-S4080-05002-A-01-1

    Figure 3 Standard Torque Values for Nut and Bol Mixtures

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-20-01-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2007-11-20 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    COUNTERSUNK: MS24693 CRES - 80 KSI

    SCREW TYPE MS24693 CADMIERT - 60 KSI

    PANHEAD: MS35207 CADMIERT - 60 KSI

    THREAD UNF STANDARD TIGHTENING TORQUE (T) Nm AND [lb inch]

    inch mm WITHOUT SELF-LOCKING NUTS WITH SELF-LOCKING NUTS

    0.1380-40 3,51 0,9 - 1,1 [8 - 10] 1,1 - 1,4 [10 - 12]

    0.1640-36 4,16 1,4 - 1,7 [12 - 15] 1,8 - 2,3 [16 - 20]

    0.1900-32 4,829 2,3 - 2,8 [20 - 25] 2,7 - 2,9 [24 - 26]

    12-A-202001-A-S4080-05000-A-01-1

    Figure 4 Standard Torque Values for Screws

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-20-01-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2007-11-20 Page 7
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-20-01-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2007-11-20 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    CRIMPING

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    CRIMPING - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION....................................................................... 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 2
    2 Requirements......................................................................................................... 2
    2.1 Technical Requirements......................................................................................... 2
    2.2 Working Conditions................................................................................................ 2
    2.3 Personnel............................................................................................................... 3
    2.4 Material................................................................................................................... 3
    2.5 Tools....................................................................................................................... 3
    2.5.1 Cutting Tool............................................................................................................ 3
    2.5.2 Stripping Tool......................................................................................................... 3
    2.5.3 Crimping Tool......................................................................................................... 3
    3 Crimping Procedure................................................................................................ 3
    3.1 Preparation of Material........................................................................................... 5
    3.1.1 Types of electrical contacts.................................................................................... 5
    3.1.2 Cutting Cables to Length........................................................................................ 5
    3.1.3 Stripping Cables (Ref. ).......................................................................................... 5
    3.2 Preparation of the Crimping Tool............................................................................ 6
    3.2.1 Selection of the Crimping Tool............................................................................... 6
    3.2.2 Crimping Tool Check.............................................................................................. 7
    3.2.3 Installation of the Crimping device.......................................................................... 7
    3.2.4 Cable Size.............................................................................................................. 7
    3.3 Crimping of Terminal Lugs..................................................................................... 7
    3.3.1 Crimping (Ref. )...................................................................................................... 7
    3.3.2 Inspection of Crimped Terminal Lugs ()................................................................. 8
    3.4 Crimping of Pin and Socket Contacts .................................................................... 9
    3.4.1 Crimping (Ref. )...................................................................................................... 9
    3.4.2 Use of Reduction Sleeves (Ref. and ).................................................................... 10
    3.4.3 Inspection of Crimped Pin and Socket Contacts (Ref. and ).................................. 11
    3.5 Crimping of Coaxial Connectors............................................................................. 13
    3.5.1 Crimping (Ref. )...................................................................................................... 13
    3.5.2 Inspection of Coaxial Connectors........................................................................... 14

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 2
    2 Minimum Requirements for Crimped Connections................................................. 2
    3 Color Codes for Terminal Lugs and Splices........................................................... 6
    4 Color Codes for Crimping Die of Coaxial Cable Connectors.................................. 7
    5 Reduction Sleeves.................................................................................................. 10

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Crimping Procedure Flowchart............................................................................... 4


    2 Types of Electrical Contacts................................................................................... 5
    3 Correct/Incorrect Stripped Cables.......................................................................... 6
    4 Crimping of Terminal Lugs..................................................................................... 8

    Effectivity: All 12-B-20-20-10-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-06-21 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    5 Correctly/Incorrectly Crimped Terminal Lugs (With or Without Insulation)............. 9


    6 Crimping of Pins and Sockets................................................................................ 10
    7 Adding a Reduction Sleeve.................................................................................... 11
    8 Correctly Crimped Pin/Socket Contacts................................................................. 12
    9 Incorrectly Crimped Pin/Socket Contacts............................................................... 12
    10 Crimping of Coaxial Connectors............................................................................. 14

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description

    1 General
    This data module gives information about the processes for crimping:
    − Terminal Lugs / splices
    − Connector Pins and Sockets
    − Coaxial Connectors

    2 Requirements

    2.1 Technical Requirements


    Table 2 gives the minimum requirements for crimped connections dependant on the cable size.

    Table 2 Minimum Requirements for Crimped Connections


    Cable Section Test Current Voltage Drop Ultimate Load
    (AWG) (mm2) (A) (max. mV) (min. N)
    8 8,98 50,0 2,0 979
    10 4,74 30,0 3,0 667
    12 3,39 23,0 3,0 489
    14 1,91 17,0 3,5 311
    16 1,34 13,0 3,5 222
    18 0,93 10,0 3,5 156
    20 0,62 7,5 4,0 89
    22 0,38 5,0 4,0 53
    24 0,22 3,0 4,0 36
    26 0,15 2,0 4,0 22
    28 0,10 1,5 5,0 13

    2.2 Working Conditions


    The work area must comply with the conditions that follow:
    − It must be clean and dust free
    − It must be well illuminated, to ensure that there are no detrimental shadows or reflections on the work

    Effectivity: All 12-B-20-20-10-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-06-21 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − Eating is not allowed.

    2.3 Personnel
    Only specifically trained and qualified personnel shall crimp connections.

    2.4 Material
    The list that follows must be complied with at all times:
    − Only the material listed in the Illustrated Parts Catalogue, or specified by Pilatus Aircraft Ltd can be used
    − Damaged or corroded contacts may not be used
    − Chromel cables must only be connected with contacts made from Chromel
    − Alumel cables must only be connected with contacts made from Alumel

    2.5 Tools
    Use only the tools specified for the corresponding crimp contact. The tools must be in a clean and serviceable
    condition.

    2.5.1 Cutting Tool


    The cutting tool used to cut the cables to the required length, must produce a clean cut.

    2.5.2 Stripping Tool


    A thermal or mechanical stripper, not adjustable, must be used to strip the insulation. It must not cut or damage the
    cable conductors.

    2.5.3 Crimping Tool


    The crimping tool must:
    − Be qualified in accordance with MIL-C-22520
    − Be periodically calibrated
    − Have an integrated mechanism which prevents the opening of the tool before the crimping cycle has finished
    − Be inspected weekly with a go-no-go inspection gauge (this may be ignored if it is not used)

    3 Crimping Procedure
    The Flowchart (Fig. 1) and steps that follow show/describe the procedures for crimping contacts onto cables.

    Effectivity: All 12-B-20-20-10-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-06-21 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    START

    PREPARE MATERIAL:
    - CUT WIRES AND STRIP OFF INSULATION
    - PREPARE CRIMP CONTACTS

    PREPARE CRIMPING TOOL:


    - SELECT, CHECK AND ADJUST CRIMPING TOOL,
    POSITIONER OR TURRET HEAD

    CRIMPING

    TERMINAL LUGS: PINS AND SOCKETS: COAXIAL CONNECTORS:


    - CRIMPING - CRIMPING - CRIMPING
    - CHECK CRIMPING - CHECK CRIMPING - CHECK CRIMPING

    CRIMPING OK? NO

    YES

    END
    12-A-202010-A-S4080-05003-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Crimping Procedure Flowchart

    Effectivity: All 12-B-20-20-10-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-06-21 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.1 Preparation of Material

    3.1.1 Types of electrical contacts


    There are three main types of electrical contacts (Ref. Fig. 2) that can be crimped. Each type has a specific
    crimping procedure that must be done prior to, and during crimping of the contact. These procedures must be
    strictly followed.

    Note

    Only the contacts listed in the Illustrated Parts Catalogue or specified by Pilatus Aircraft Ltd. can be used.

    TERMINAL LUG / SPLICE CONNECTOR PIN / SOCKET COAXIAL CABLE CONNECTOR

    12-A-202010-A-S4080-05004-A-01-1

    Figure 2 Types of Electrical Contacts

    3.1.2 Cutting Cables to Length


    Make sure that the outer cables for connectors of cable harnesses are left longer to support correct installation of
    the strain relief clamps. This is especially important for elbowed type connectors.

    3.1.3 Stripping Cables (Ref. Fig. 3)


    When stripping cables, care must be taken to make sure that the conductors are not:
    − Crushed
    − Notched
    − Folded
    − Damaged

    Effectivity: All 12-B-20-20-10-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-06-21 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − Twisted.

    Therefore, thermal stripping of cables is the preferred method.


    For coaxial cables, care must be taken not to damage the shielding or the insulation. The dielectric must be cut
    perpendicular to the cable axis.

    CORRECT INCORRECT

    12-A-202010-A-S4080-05005-A-01-1

    Figure 3 Correct/Incorrect Stripped Cables

    3.2 Preparation of the Crimping Tool


    The steps that follow describe how to prepare the crimping tool.

    3.2.1 Selection of the Crimping Tool


    The crimping tools and locators are selected with respect to the contact that is to be used.
    To help determine the crimping tool required to crimp terminal lugs or splices, color codes are used, refer to
    Table 3.

    Table 3 Color Codes for Terminal Lugs and Splices


    Color Code Cable Size (AWG)
    Yellow 26 - 22
    Red 22 - 18
    Blue 16 - 14
    Yellow 12 - 10
    To help determine the crimping dies required to crimp coaxial cables, color codes are used with respect to cable
    type, refer to Table 4.

    Effectivity: All 12-B-20-20-10-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-06-21 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Table 4 Color Codes for Crimping Die of Coaxial Cable Connectors


    Color Code Die Cable Type
    Red 1 / 2A RG 316/U
    RG 58C/U
    Orange 2B
    RG 142B/U
    RG 213/U
    Purple 3D
    RG 214/U
    For the crimping of connector pins and sockets, crimping dies are normally marked with color codes according to
    the contact size. However, there are no standardized color codes; they differ depending on the supplier. Care must
    be taken to make sure that the correct die is selected with respect to the contact to be crimped.

    3.2.2 Crimping Tool Check


    Before the crimping tool is used, the user must do the checks that follow:
    − Check that the calibration date (weekly) on the crimping tool is valid
    − If it is not, or the tool has been out of use, the tool must not be used and must be calibrated or repaired
    − If the calibration date is valid, check the tool with the go-no-go gauge
    − If the tool fails the go-no-go check, the tool must not be used and must be calibrated or repaired

    3.2.3 Installation of the Crimping device


    The crimping die, positioner or turret-head must be inserted into the crimping tool dependant on the tool type and
    crimping contact.

    3.2.4 Cable Size


    With respect to the tool type, the cable size must be selected on the selector wheel.

    3.3 Crimping of Terminal Lugs

    3.3.1 Crimping (Ref. Fig. 4)


    When crimping a terminal lug, do the steps that follow:
    − Select the correct size of terminal lug to match the size of the conductor(s)
    − Strip the cable(s) as needed to make sure that the cable insulation is covered by the terminal lug insulation
    and the conductor(s) are flush with the end of the crimp sleeve
    − Do not twist the conductors
    − Make sure that you have the correct crimping tool for the terminal lug
    − Do not insert more than three conductors into a terminal lug
    − Close the crimping tool with firm pressure before you insert the terminal lug, then release the pressure (the tool
    should open automatically)
    − Insert the terminal lug into the tool until it hits the stop and gently close the tool until it has a firm grip of the lug
    − Insert the conductor(s) into the terminal lug and close the crimping tool sufficiently, so that it opens when you
    release the pressure
    − Remove the terminal lug from the crimping tool.

    Effectivity: All 12-B-20-20-10-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-06-21 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A B C D E

    DO NOT TWIST THE CONDUCTORS INSULATION OF CABLE (A) IS COVERED BY THE INSULATION OF THE
    TERMINAL LUG (B). THE END OF THE CONDUCTOR (C) SHOULD BE
    FLUSH WITH THE END OF THE SLEEVE (B). CONDUCTOR (C) MUST
    NOT CONTACT THE WASHER (D) OR SCREW (E).

    12-A-202010-A-S4080-05006-A-01-1

    Figure 4 Crimping of Terminal Lugs

    3.3.2 Inspection of Crimped Terminal Lugs (Fig. 5)


    After a terminal lug has been crimped, it must be inspected to make sure that it has been crimped correctly, as
    incorrect crimping can result in a week connection.
    Do a check of the terminal lug as follows for:
    − Crimp position too high
    − Crimp position too low
    − Crimp position too long
    − Crimp position too short
    − Signs of cracks
    − Security of the crimp - By hand, gently pull the terminal lug and cable. The lug must remain firmly crimped to
    the cable.

    Effectivity: All 12-B-20-20-10-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-06-21 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    CORRECTLY CRIMPED

    TOO LONG TOO SHORT

    TOO HIGH
    *
    *

    TOO LOW TOO LOW

    INCORRECTLY CRIMPED
    12-A-202010-A-S4080-05007-A-01-1

    Figure 5 Correctly/Incorrectly Crimped Terminal Lugs (With or Without Insulation)

    3.4 Crimping of Pin and Socket Contacts

    3.4.1 Crimping (Ref. Fig. 6)


    When crimping a contact, do the steps that follow:
    − Only one conductor is to be inserted into the contact. However, if certain circumstances require, that two
    conductors are crimped into one contact, permission must be obtained from Pilatus Aircraft Ltd.
    − Strip the cable as needed to make sure that when the cable conductor is inserted into the contact, the end of
    the cable insulation is 0,5 to 1 mm away from the contact and the conductor is partly or completely visible
    through the inspection hole in the side of the contact, refer to Fig. 8.
    − Make sure that the crimping tool is the correct tool for the pin/socket to be crimped
    − Close the crimping tool with firm pressure before you insert the contact, then release the pressure (the tool
    should open automatically)
    − Make sure that the crimping tool clamping jaws are open
    − Insert the contact down into the crimping tool (Ref.
    − If a reduction sleeve is to be used, insert the sleeve into the contact (Ref. to Step )
    − Hold the crimping tool in one hand and insert the cable into the contact
    − Apply slight pressure to the cable so that is stays in the contact
    − Close the crimping tool sufficiently, so that it opens when you release the pressure
    − Remove the contact from the crimping tool.
    − Inspect the contact for damage, refer to Step . A damaged contact must be replaced.

    Effectivity: All 12-B-20-20-10-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-06-21 Page 9


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    INSERT CONTACT INSERT CONDUCTOR AND CLOSE CRIMPING TOOL

    12-A-202010-A-S4080-05008-A-01-1

    Figure 6 Crimping of Pins and Sockets

    3.4.2 Use of Reduction Sleeves (Ref. Table 5 and Fig. 7)


    Reduction sleeves must be used if the cable conductor has a smaller cross-section than the contact. The cross-
    section of the contact is reduced by the installation of a reduction sleeve into the contact.
    Reduction sleeves may be used staggered to reduce, for example, an AWG 12 contact to accept an AWG 22
    conductor by the installation of two reduction sleeves into the contact.
    When crimping a contact onto a reduction sleeve, the reduction sleeve and the conductor are inserted into the
    contact and the crimping done in accordance with Step .

    Table 5 Reduction Sleeves


    Insert Size (contact side) Conductor Size Reduction Sleeve
    (AWG) (AWG) (Part No.)
    12 16 971.74.90.891
    16 20 971.74.90.890
    16 22 - 24 971.74.90.892

    Effectivity: All 12-B-20-20-10-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-06-21 Page 10


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    CONTACT REDUCTION SLEEVE CONDUCTOR CABLE

    12-A-202010-A-S4080-05009-A-01-1

    Figure 7 Adding a Reduction Sleeve

    3.4.3 Inspection of Crimped Pin and Socket Contacts (Ref. Fig. 8 and Fig. 9)
    After a contact has been crimped, it must be inspected to make sure that it has been crimped correctly, as incorrect
    crimping can result in a week connection.
    Check the contact as follows for:
    − Crimping impressions that are even in depth and located in the middle between the rear of the contact and the
    inspection hole
    − The conductor must be partly or completely visible through the inspection hole in the side of the contact
    − The contact must not be bent
    − The contact must not show any cracks
    − Security of the crimp - By hand, gently pull the terminal lug and cable. The lug must remain firmly crimped to
    the cable.

    Effectivity: All 12-B-20-20-10-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-06-21 Page 11


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    X/2

    CONDUCTOR VISIBLE PARTLY CRIMP INDENTIONS ARE CENTRED NO CRACKS IN CRIMP BARREL
    OR COMPLETELY

    12-A-202010-A-S4080-05010-A-01-1

    Figure 8 Correctly Crimped Pin/Socket Contacts

    X/2

    X
    WIRE NOT VISIBLE

    X/2

    STRAND NOT INSERTED CRIMP INDENTIONS NOT CENTRED CRACKS IN CRIMP BARREL

    12-A-202010-A-S4080-05011-A-01-1

    Figure 9 Incorrectly Crimped Pin/Socket Contacts

    Effectivity: All 12-B-20-20-10-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-06-21 Page 12


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.5 Crimping of Coaxial Connectors

    3.5.1 Crimping (Ref. Fig. 10)


    This procedure details the procedures required to crimp coaxial connectors. The examples shown are for a BNC
    connector. However, the procedure is similar for other types of coaxial connectors.
    When crimping a coaxial connector, do as follows:
    − Make sure that the crimping tool is the correct tool for the coaxial connector
    − Slip a ferrule over the coaxial cable
    − Strip the coaxial cable
    − Close the crimping tool with firm pressure before you insert the contact, then release the pressure (the tool
    should open automatically)
    − Make sure that the crimping tool clamping jaws are open
    − Install the inner contact over the inner conductor until it touches the dielectric
    − Insert the contact down into the crimping tool
    − Apply slight pressure to the cable so that is stays in the contact
    − Close the crimping tool sufficiently, so that it opens when you release the pressure
    − Remove the contact from the crimping tool.
    − Check that the conductor is partly or completely visible through the inspection hole in the side of the contact
    − Inspect the contact for damage, refer to Step . A damaged contact must be replaced.
    − Expand the braid and then install the contact body. The inner contact must lock mechanically
    − Slip the ferrule forward as close as possible to the contact body and crimp it with the applicable crimping tool.

    Effectivity: All 12-B-20-20-10-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-06-21 Page 13


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    INNER CONTACT FERRULE


    8 4,5

    16
    CONTACT BODY

    STRIP OFF INSULATION CRIMP INNER CONTACT INSTALL CONTACT BODY CRIMP FERRULE

    12-A-202010-A-S4080-05012-A-01-1

    Figure 10 Crimping of Coaxial Connectors

    3.5.2 Inspection of Coaxial Connectors


    After a coaxial connector has been crimped, it must be inspected to make sure that it has been crimped correctly,
    as incorrect crimping can result in a week connection.
    Check the coaxial connector as follows:
    − The ferrule must be as close as possible to the contact body and cover sufficient insulation
    − The inner contact must be located to the correct depth
    − Security of the crimp - By hand, gently pull the terminal lug and cable. The lug must remain firmly crimped to
    the cable.
    − Do an insulation test; at a voltage of 500V, of the coaxial cable, the resistance must not be less than 100MΩ.

    Effectivity: All 12-B-20-20-10-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-06-21 Page 14
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    STANDARD PRACTICES

    CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST

    Table of Contents Page

    STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST................................................ 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-071A-A CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST - PROCESSING
    AND CLEANING
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-071B-A CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST - PROCESSING
    SUNDRIES
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-071C-A CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST - WELDING AND
    METAL
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-071D-A CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST - JOINTING
    COMPOUNDS AND GREASES
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-071E-A CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST - POLISHING
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-071F-A CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST - INSPECTING
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-071G-A CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST - PAINTS,
    VARNISHES AND THINNERS
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-071H-A CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST - BONDING,
    ADHESIVES, FILLERS AND SEALERS
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-071I-A CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST - GENERAL
    STORES
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-071J-A CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST - OILS AND FLUIDS
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-071K-A CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST - FUELS
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-071L-A CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST - PACKING
    CrossRefList.pdf

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-10-31 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Description

    1 General

    Note

    Consumable materials are available from Pilatus Aircraft Ltd. Some consumable items are also available from
    Interturbine Logistics. A cross reference list of Pilatus Aircraft Ltd part numbers to Interturbine Logistics part
    numbers is in a separate document (CrossRefList.pdf).

    This data module gives details of the consumable materials which are recommended for the maintenance of all
    Pilatus aircraft types. The maintenance procedures in this manual give the materials necessary for each task for
    this aircraft.
    The materials are divided into groups (e.g. P07 Paints, Varnishes and Thinners) and then each material is given an
    identification number. The group number and the material identification number is given in the maintenance
    procedures to identify the necessary materials.
    The groups of materials are shown in tables, each table is divided into these columns:
    − Material No.
    − Description
    − Remarks
    − Pilatus Part No.
    − Alternative Product/Specification

    The Material No, Description, Remarks and Pilatus Part No. columns are for the materials recommended by
    Pilatus.
    The Alternative Product/Specification column is to give alternative products or the specification for alternative
    products when it is known, for each Pilatus recommended item.
    Alternative materials can be used, but if there are no alternative products given only the recommended material
    can be used.
    Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) containing information about trade name, safety hazards, reactivity, spill and
    leak procedures, special protection information, special precautions, and transportation and labelling are available
    from the manufacturer of the products. Read all MSDS before using the consumable materials.
    The groups used in this topic are:
    P01 - Processing and Cleaning Materials (refer to DM 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071A-A)
    P02 - Processing Sundries (refer to DM 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071B-A)
    P03 - Welding and Metal (refer to DM 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071C-A)
    P04 - Jointing Compounds and Greases (refer to DM 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071D-A)
    P05 - Polishing (refer to DM 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071E-A)
    P06 - Inspecting (refer to DM 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071F-A)
    P07 - Paints, Varnishes and Thinners (refer to DM 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071G-A)
    P08 - Bonding, Adhesives, Fillers and Sealers (refer to DM 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071H-A)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-10-31 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    P09 - General Stores (refer to DM 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071I-A)


    P10 - Oils and Fluids (refer to DM 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071J-A)
    P11 - Fuels (refer to DM 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071K-A)
    P12 - Packing (refer to DM 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071L-A)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-10-31 Page 3
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-10-31 Page 4


    Consumable Material List Pilatus Aircraft Ltd. 05.11.2012
    Cross Reference List
    Intertubine Aviation Logistics GmbH
    Superseded
    by Pilatus
    Item-No Material PIL-No ITL No ITL UOM Material.Description Specification / Alternative Product Specification Commercial P/N with
    P01-005 Soap solution 910.21.21.120 25KG/BO Aero-Klene 1002
    P01-008 White spirit 908.63.81.101 102636ITL 20LI EXXSOL D40 N/A EXXCOL D40
    P01-009 Methanol (Methyl alcohol) 908.44.52.003 164758ITL 30LI AMS3004 , O-M-232, PWC011-010 AMS3004 , O-M-232, PWC011-010
    P01-010 MEK - Methyl Ethyl Ketone 910.21.61.015 101878ITL 1LI Methyl-Ethyl-Ketone ASTM D740, MIL-M-13999, O-C-265 M.E.K.
    P01-011 Isopropyl Alcohol 908.44.52.005 101864ITL 5LI Isopropyl Alcohol TT-I-735 Grade A, MIL-D-16791E, PWC 011-014 TT-I-735A
    P01-012 Liquid Detergent 148173ITL 5LI Teepol MIL-D-18791E TEEPOL
    P01-013 Toluene 910.33.90.270 142300ITL 5GL Toluene TT-T-548 TT-T-548 REV D
    P01-016 Acetone 910.21.21.001 101898ITL 1LI Acetone O-A-51, ASTM D329-95 Acetone
    P01-017 Electrical contact protector 908.24.32.024 111226ITL 142G/200ML Progold G5S-6 N/A Progold G5S-6
    P01-018 Electrical contact enhancer 908.24.32.025 123878ITL 15ML Stabilant 22A N/A Stabilant 22 P01-020
    P01-023 Paint remover 910.10.00.003 Turco 6776 LO WOD Socomore, Socostrip A 0103N, PPG PR-5044, Henkel Turco 6813
    P01-028 Cleaner 908.64.22.216 153753ITL 12OZ/BO Zip-Chem X-405
    P01-028 Cleaner 141039ITL 1GL Zip-Chem X-405
    P01-028 Cleaner 908.64.22.215 141040ITL 5GL Zip-Chem X-405
    P01-029 Cleaning wipe 908.64.22.214 Zip-Chem X-405 EFIS cleaner kit Visial ALGLAS, Cleansafe Screen/Sachet
    P02-001 Lockwire (standard) 919.01.11.104 107062ITL 1RL=500G 0.032 in. (0.8mm) dia. MS20995C-32, NASM20995 MS20995C32
    P02-006 Lockwire (heat resistant) 919.01.11.203 147563ITL 1LB 0.025 in. dia. MS9226-03 MS9226-03
    P02-007 Lockwire (standard) 919.01.11.103 107060ITL 1LB 0.025 in. dia. MS20995C-25, NASM20995 MS20995C25
    P02-008 Lockwire (heat resistant) 919.01.11.107 122589ITL 1EA=1LB 0.04 in. dia. MS9226-05 MS9226-05
    P02-015 Lockwire (heat resistant) 919.01.11.105 130718ITL 1RL=1LB 0.032 in. dia. MS9226-04 MS9226-04
    P02-016 Scotch - Brite 904.48.85.107 145145ITL BX Very fine grade N/A Scotch-Brite CP-HP A vfn 07447
    P02-017 Lockwire (standard) 919.01.11.106 107064ITL 1RL=1KG 0.04 in.dia. MS20995C-41, NAS<20995 MS20995C41
    P02-021 Lockwire (brass) 919.01.11.117 175619ITL 1RL=1LB 0.020 in. Dia. QQ-W-321-GR.A/0.020IN.
    P02-022 Lockwire (special) 919.01.11.101 121646ITL 1EA=1LB 0.016 in. Dia MS 9226-01 MS9226-01
    P04-001 Grease 908.21.52.003 100316ITL 3KG/CAN Aeroshell Grease 5 MIL-PRF-81322F, G-395, DOD-G-24508 Aeroshell Grease 5 P04-031
    P04-002 Grease 908.20.02.063 100345ITL 3KG/CAN Aeroshell Grease 7 MIL-PRF-23827C Type II, G-354 Aeroshell Grease 7
    P04-003 Grease 908.20.02.064 101554ITL 3KG/CAN Aeroshell Grease 22 MIL-PRF-81322F Grade 2, G-395, DOD-G-24508A Aeroshell Grease 22
    P04-004 Grease 908.25.71.501 137629ITL 14OZ/TU Plastilube 3 N/A Plastilube No. 3
    P04-005 Vaseline 908.24.32.023 102741ITL 200G/CAN Brisal OX50-855 Brisal OX 50-855 P04-030
    P04-006 Grease 908.25.71.803 3KG/CAN Aeroshell Grease 17 MIL-G-21164D, G-353 Aeroshell Grease 17 P04-037
    P04-006 Grease 179558ITL 3KG/CAN Aeroshell Grease 33MS MIL-G-21164D, G-353 Aeroshell Grease 33MS
    P04-007 Petroleum Jelly 100365ITL 1KG/CAN Petrolatum Def Stan 91-38, Grade PX-7, VV-P-236A, MIL-C-11796C NYCO 65
    P04-009 Grease 107011ITL 1LB/CAN MoS2 MIL-T-83483A, MIL-PRF-83483C MIL-PRF-83483
    P04-009 Grease 908.25.71.802 325ML/CAN MoS2 MIL-T-83483A, MIL-PRF-83483C MIL-PRF-83483
    P04-010 Anti-Corrrosion compound Aeroshell Compound 08 SAE-AMS2518, Def Stan 80-80 Iss2, S-720, P04-009
    P04-010 Anti-Corrrosion compound 107526ITL 1KG/CAN Graphite Petrolatum SAE-AMS2518 NYCO GREASE GN GA 47
    P04-011 Spray lubricant 908.10.09.002 325ML/CAN Molyslip ADF
    P04-012 Corrosion preventative 910.31.20.040 117161ITL 160ML/KT Mastinox 6856H MIL-PRF-8116C Mastinox 6856H P04-039
    P04-013 Grease 908.21.02.103 193254ITL 4,4LB/CAN Mobil Grease 28 MIL-PRF-81322F Grade 2, DOD-G-24508A, G-395 Mobil Grease 28 P04-003
    P04-015 Anti-seize compound 908.24.02.004 134851ITL 100G/TU Molykote 1000 N/A Molykote 1000
    P04-016 Grease 908.25.71.111 108128ITL 3KG/CAN Aeroshell Grease 6 MIL-PRF-24139A, G-382, G-450 Aeroshell Grease 6
    P04-017 Joint compound 907.13.11.903 131926ITL 100G/TU Hylomar PL32M Aero Grade N/A Hylomar PL32M Aero Grade
    P04-018 Silicone grease 908.20.02.093 106094ITL 100G/TU DC 4 MIL-S-8660, SAE-AS8660 DC 4
    P04-019 Anti-seize compound 100328ITL 1KG/CAN Molykote M77 N/A Molykote M 77
    P04-021 Grease 111586ITL 250G/EA Molykote DX, superseeded by P04-029 N/A Molykote DX
    P04-022 Grease 126255ITL 50G/TU Molykote G Rapid Plus, vers. No. 9150-0-200-0097 Vers. Nr. 9150-0-200-0097 Molykote G-Rapid Plus
    P04-025 Anti-seize compound 102919ITL 1LB/CAN Never Seez PWA36053 or -1, PMC79966 Never-Seez NSN165
    P04-026 Anti-seize compound 103505ITL 1OZ/TU Silver Goop PWA36001, PMC9940 SILVER GOOP
    P04-028 Grease 908.20.02.065 100347ITL 3KG/CAN Aeroshell grease 33 MIL-PRF-23827C Type I Aeroshell Grease 33
    P04-030 Grease 908.20.02.101 100365ITL 1KG/CAN Vaselinum 26-7500-1 NYCO 65
    P04-031 Grease 908.20.02.066 192650ITL 2KG/CAN Mobile SHC 100 MAG SHC 100 Mobil SHC100
    P04-038 Oxygen paste 908.25.71.702 Krytox 240AC MIL-PRF-27617
    P05-003 Plastic/acrylic cleaner (liquid) 908.64.22.202 236ML/CAN MGH No. 18 Novus No. 1
    P05-003 Plastic/acrylic cleaner (liquid) 100356ITL 2 OZ/TU MGH No. 18 Novus No. 1

    Rev. 2 Page 1 of 3
    Consumable Material List Pilatus Aircraft Ltd. 05.11.2012
    Cross Reference List
    Intertubine Aviation Logistics GmbH
    Superseded
    by Pilatus
    Item-No Material PIL-No ITL No ITL UOM Material.Description Specification / Alternative Product Specification Commercial P/N with
    P05-004 Transparency polish 907.71.22.702 100526ITL 1LI/CAN Altupol No. 2 N/A Altupol No. 2
    P05-005 Plastic polish 907.71.22.701 100386ITL 1LI/CAN Altuglass Polish No.1 Altuglass Polish No. 1
    P05-011 Plastic/acrylic cleaner (liquid) 908.64.22.215 141040ITL 5GL/CAN Zip-Chem X-405
    P05-011 Plastic/acrylic cleaner (liquid) 908.64.22.216 153753ITL 12OZ/CAN Zip-Chem X-405
    P05-011 Plastic/acrylic cleaner (liquid) 141039ITL 1GL Zip-Chem X-405
    P05-012 Plastic/acrylic cleaner (liquid) 908.64.22.217 20LI/CAN Burnus Acrylic Glass Cleaner
    P05-012 Plastic/acrylic cleaner (liquid) 139918ITL 10LI/CAN Burnus Acrylic Glass Cleaner
    P05-012 Plastic/acrylic cleaner (liquid) 908.64.22.218 101962ITL 500ML/CAN Burnus Acrylic Glass Cleaner
    P05-013 Plastic/acrylic cleaner (liquid) 908.64.22.219 25LT/CAN R 300 Super Surface
    P06-001 Penetrant 908.68.12.105 101921ITL 500ML/CAN Ardrox 970/P23 AMS-2644, ASTM-E1417, MIL-STD-2132, ASTM-E165, MIL-STD-271 Ardrox 970/P23
    P06-003 Developer 908.68.12.107 117921ITL 0,5KG/EA Ardrox 9D4A AMS-2644, ASTM-E1417, MIL-STD-2132, ASTM-E165, MIL-STD-271 Ardrox 9D4A
    P06-004 Leak detector spray 907.12.11.004 MIL- Ardrox 9D4A
    P07-007 Epoxy primer, yellow 910.02.05.031 106483ITL 5LI/CAN Epoxy Primer 37035A N/A Epoxy Primer 37035A
    P07-016 Primer, barrier white 910.02.05.030 102031ITL 5LI/CAN Aerodur 37045 Aerodur 37045
    P07-017 Paint, white 910.04.04.515 175060ITL 5LI/CAN Aviox finish 77298 Aviox Finish 77298 BAC7067
    P08-002 Sealant, Silicone 910.42.12.126 167503ITL 310ML Loctite 5368 Loctite 5368
    P08-005 Sealant 907.13.13.022 104965ITL 3 OZ semkit/EA Pro Seal 890A2 N/A PS 890 A2
    P08-007 Coating, no longer available 910.33.88.214 131362ITL 0,75LI/KT PR 1560 N/A PR1576
    P08-009 Adhesive 910.42.22.037 141716ITL 1LI/CAN Scotch-Weld 10 MMM-A-121, MMM-A-130, A-A-1936, MIL-A-21366 Scotch-Grip 10
    P08-013 Sealant 907.13.13.021 108417ITL 100ML/KT Pro Seal 890B1/2 N/A PS 890 B1/2 P08-018
    P08-014 Sealant 907.10.11.251 119589ITL 100ML/KT PR1829 B2 SK654 N/A PR1829 B2 P08-040
    P08-016 Edge sealer 910.33.88.063 101291ITL 237ML/CA Scotch-Weld 3950 N/A EC 3950 P08-041
    P08-017 Adhesive 910.42.12.123 106893ITL 10ML/TU Loctite Grade 241 Loctite Grade 641 (P/N 910.42.12.120) Loctite 241
    P08-019 Sealant 907.13.11.931 101203ITL 310ML/EA RTV-123 N/A RTV 123
    P08-021 Adhesive 910.42.12.121 101197ITL 50ML/JAR Loctite Grade 542 N/A Loctite 542
    P08-022 Sealant 907.12.11.203 103426ITL 3OZ/TU Permatex Form-A-Gasket No. 1 MIL-S-45180D Permatex No. 1
    P08-023 Adhesive 910.42.72.203 101131ITL 0,9KG Scotch-Weld 1614 N/A EC 1614
    P08-024 Coating 907.10.02.001 101491ITL 250ML/KT PR 1005-L AMS-S-4383 PR1005L
    P08-027 Coating 908.41.01.001 103209ITL 1QT/CAN Age Master No. 1 N/A AGE MASTER NO. 1
    P08-028 Fuel protective coating 907.13.13.041 120063ITL 1QT/CAN 74-451-99 N/A 74-451-99
    P08-029 Adhesive 910.42.22.052 164628ITL 1QT/CAN 3M Scotch-Weld 1300L with Toluene MMM-A-121, MMM-A-130, A-A-1936, MIL-A-21366 EC 1300L
    P08-032 Sealant 907.10.11.241 103791ITL 3,5OZ/KT PS 870 B1/2 PS 870 B1/2 P08-057
    P08-033 Sealant 907.10.11.242 103791ITL 3,5OZ/KT PS 870 B1/2 PS 870 B1/2 P08-058
    P08-034 Adhesive 910.42.62.002 102992ITL 200ML Araldite rapid Araldite AW2011
    P08-035 Sealant, plastic 957.30.00.049 117007ITL 50ML Loctite 586 Loctite 586
    P08-036 Resin, epoxy, 2 part 910.42.72.170 104567ITL 1QT/CAN Dexter Hysol AE 9396 N/A EA 9396A/B
    P08-037 Glass microspheres 910.82.20.910 129083ITL 10LB Aerosil 200 Aerosil 200
    P08-038 Adhesive, epoxy 910.42.62.000 148378ITL 1KG/CAN Araldite AW106 Araldite AW106
    Hardener 101093ITL 0,8KG Araldite HV 953U hardener for Araldite AW106 Araldite HV 953U
    P08-039 Sealant 101254ITL 50ML/JAR Loctite Grade 307 N/A Loctite 307
    P08-040 Sealant 907.10.11.252 135793ITL 100ML+30ML PR1829 B2 noir with primer 186 N/A PR1829 B2 NOIR
    P08-042 Sealant 907.13.13.201 123743ITL 310ML Sikaflex 221 N/A Sikaflex 221 grey
    P08-043 Adhesive 910.42.12.128 101250ITL 50ML Loctite Grade 243, blue N/A Loctite 243
    P08-044 Resin, epoxy 910.42.72.169 106391ITL 1QT/CAN Dexter Hysol AE 9395 N/A EA 9395A/B
    P08-045 Sealant, silicon, translucent 907.13.13.102 107810ITL 82,8ML/TU RTV-108 MIL-A-46106 RTV 108
    P08-046 Sealant, electrically conductive 907.10.11.271 104607ITL 2OZ PR1764 class B N/A PR1764 B2
    P08-048 Resin, epoxy 004.50.80.179 103551ITL 1QT/CAN Hysol 9394 A/B MMM-A-132A EA 9394A/B
    P08-052 Adhesive, epoxy 910.42.72.205 129282ITL 50ML DP490 DP490
    P08-054 Resin, epoxy 917.00.40.001 128099ITL 1KG Araldite LY 5052 Araldite LY5052
    P09-001 Tape, thread seeling 917.47.71.103 182499ITL 12MMx12ME/RL PTFE, 01.1040.1212 TETRATAPE 12MM
    P09-002 French chalk 908.44.12.203 Talcom powder Talk EP, 82383-155
    P09-002 177503ITL 25KG Talcom powder Luzenac H-60
    P09-007 Glass fiber tape 917.40.80.006 164690ITL 36YD/RL Scotch 425, width 19,05MM FAR 25.853(a) Permacel P-212
    P09-009 Nylon cord 917.54.16.520 182508ITL 250ME/RL 3 mm dia. for 917.54.16.201 u. 917.54.16.203 Getaplan 940 DTEX x 7 P09-024

    Rev. 2 Page 2 of 3
    Consumable Material List Pilatus Aircraft Ltd. 05.11.2012
    Cross Reference List
    Intertubine Aviation Logistics GmbH
    Superseded
    by Pilatus
    Item-No Material PIL-No ITL No ITL UOM Material.Description Specification / Alternative Product Specification Commercial P/N with
    P09-012 Aluminum tape 917.40.91.005 100703ITL 25.4MM/33ME/RL Scotch 425, 25,4MM width FAR 25.853(a), L-T-80, MIL-T-23397, SAE-AMS-T-23397, TO 1-1-8 Scotch 425
    P09-020 Glass fiber tape 917.40.80.004 164690ITL 36YD/RL 19 mm wide FAR 25.853(a) Permacel P-212
    P09-026 Tape, adhesive 917.40.68.001 113250ITL 25.4MM/32.9ME/RL Scotch 8561, .25,4MM width N/A Scotch 8561
    P09-030 Heat shrink sleeve 917.99.88.605 106148ITL ME 3/16 in. dia. N/A E0126-03B
    P09-031 Glass fiber fabric 917.00.11.002 102902ITL M2 163 g/m2 WL8.4548.60 92110
    P09-032 Carbon fiber fabric 917.00.12.123 104613ITL M2 200 g/m2 98140
    P09-033 Glass fiber fabric 100537ITL M2 108 g/m2 WL8.4510.60 91106
    P09-036 Tape, adhesive 917.40.67.312 182498ITL 19MMx33ME/RL Scotch 3M-4932 .64 mm x 19 mm N/A Scotch 4932P
    P10-001 CPC-temporary 908.18.12.087 106915ITL 400ML Lear Chemical ACF-50 MIL-C-81309E Type 3 LPS-2
    P10-003 Hydraulic fluid 908.14.12.015 100804ITL 1LI/CAN Hydraunycoil FH51 MIL-H-5606, MIL-PRF-5606H Hydraunycoil FH51
    P10-005 CPC-light 908.18.12.081 101215ITL 400ML Ardrox/Dinitrol AV8 MIL-PRF-16173E Grade 1 and 4 Ardrox AV8
    P10-006 Hydraulic fluid 908.14.12.016 114984ITL 1GL Aeroshell Fluid 31 MIL-H-83282, MIL-PRF-83282D Aeeroshell Fluid 31
    P10-009 Cold air unit oil 908.11.02.105 132846ITL 1QT/CAN BPTO 2380 MIL-L-23699, MIL-PRF-23699F BPTO 2380
    P10-010 Refrigerant 957.30.00.063 139084ITL 250ML/JR FREON OIL HFC134A HFC-134A 200-90330
    P10-011 Compressor oil 957.30.00.051 145934ITL 1LI/CAN Castrol Icematic SW32 N/A Castrol Icmatic SW 32
    P10-012 Oil, hellerine 908.20.02.017 147306ITL 250ML/Can Hellerine Hellerine
    P10-013 CPC-highT / exterior 908.18.12.086 100493ITL 1LI/CAN Ardrox/Dinitrol AV 40 - Ardrox AV40
    P10-014 CPC-remover 908.18.12.089 151967ITL 400ML/Can Ardrox/Dinitrol AV980, 400 ml aerosol - Ardrox AV980
    P10-015 CPC-heavy 908.18.12.080 100492ITL 20LI/Can Ardrox/Dinitrol AV 30, 20 litre MIL-PRF-16173 Grade 1 and 4 Ardrox AV30
    P10-016 CPC-lubricating 908.18.12.084 106117ITL 400ML/Can Ardrox/Dinitrol AV 25, aerosol MIL-PRF-16173 Grade 3, AMS 3066 Ardrox AV25
    Hardener 5052 917.00.40.002 133054ITL 750 GR Araldite HY 5052 Araldite HY5052
    P11-001 Fuel 146606ITL 1GL Refer to PWC EMM MIL-PRF-5624S, MIL-DTL-5624T JP4

    Revised information is shown on a blue background

    Rev. 2 Page 3 of 3
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST

    PROCESSING AND CLEANING

    Table of Contents Page

    CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST - PROCESSING AND CLEANING...................................... 1


    1 Processing and Cleaning Materials........................................................................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description

    1 Processing and Cleaning Materials


    Material Description Remarks Pilatus Part Alternative
    No. No. Product/
    Specification
    P01-001 Alkaline cleaner Turco 5884 910.21.31.008 MIL-PRF-85704
    B & B 3100
    Carbitol
    CLIX
    Magnus 1214
    Rivenaes R-MCS
    Rivenaes R-MC
    G21
    Ardrox 624
    Almon AL-333
    P01-002 Triethanolamine
    P01-003 Emulsifier Witco HC-59B or
    P10-59B
    P01-004 Superseded by P01-015
    P01-005 Soap solution Aero-Klene 1002 910.21.21.120
    P01-006 No longer available
    P01-007 Non leaded gasoline Petroleum 908.62.11.101 MIL-G-5572F
    ASTM-D910
    P01-008 Solvent Exxsol D40 908.63.81.101
    P01-009 Methanol (Methyl 908.44.52.003 AMS3004
    alcohol) O-M-232
    PWC011-010
    P01-010 Methyl-Ethyl-Ketone 910.21.61.015 ASTM-D740
    (MEK) MIL-M-13999

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-30 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Material Description Remarks Pilatus Part Alternative


    No. No. Product/
    Specification
    O-C-265
    P01-011 Isopropyl alcohol 908.44.52.005 TT-I-735 GRADE A,
    PWC 011-014
    P01-012 Liquid detergent Teepol MIL-D-16791E
    P01-013 Toluene 910.33.90.270 TT-T-548
    P01-014 Cleaner, detergent Turboclean 2 MIL-PRF-85704
    Ardrox 6345
    P01-015 Ethanol (Ethyl 908.44.52.006 AMS3002
    alcohol) MIL-A-6091
    O-E-760 type III
    PWC011-009
    P01-016 Acetone 910.21.21.001 O-A-51
    ASTM-D329
    P01-017 Electrical contact Progold G5S-6 908.24.32.024
    protector
    P01-018 Superseded by P01-020
    P01-019 Cleaning fluid Kontact 60 908.18.12.094
    P01-020 Electrical contact Stabilant 22 908.24.32.026
    enhancer
    P01-021 Corrosion remover Phos-Klene 1 Super 908.40.32.155
    P01-022 Corrosion remover Turco 4409 908.40.32.154
    P01-023 Paint remover Turco 6776 LO WOD 910.10.00.003 Socomore
    Socostrip A 0103N
    PPG PR-5044
    Henkel Turco 6813
    P01-024 Heavy duty cleaner Ardrox 1900C
    P01-025 Heavy duty cleaner Zip-Chem Calla 800 MIL-PRF-87937D
    Type II
    P01-026 Disinfectant Antec International
    Virkon S
    P01-027 Cleaner Extreme Simple Green 910.21.21.121 MIL-PRF-87937D
    Type 2 / Boeing
    Spec. D6-17487
    P01-028 Cleaner Zip-Chem X-405 12oz 908.64.22.216
    spray bottle
    5 gallon pail 908.64.22.215
    P01-029 Cleaning wipe Zip-Chem X-405 EFIS 908.64.22.214 Visial ALGLAS
    cleaner kit (wet / dry
    wipes) Cleansafe Screen/
    Sachet

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-30 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST

    PROCESSING SUNDRIES

    Table of Contents Page

    CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST - PROCESSING SUNDRIES.............................................. 1


    1 Processing Sundries............................................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description

    1 Processing Sundries
    Material Description Remarks Pilatus Part Alternative
    No. No. Product/
    Specification
    P02-001 Lockwire (standard) 0,8 mm (0.032 in.) 919.01.11.104 NASM20995
    diameter (former
    MS20995C-32)
    P02-002 Aluminium wool 904.48.83.103
    P02-003 Cleaning cloth Superseded by P02-031
    P02-004 Chamois leather 904.49.74.204
    P02-005 Sponge 904.49.75.303
    P02-006 Lockwire (heat 0,6 mm (0.025 in.) 919.01.11.203 MS9226-03
    resistant) diameter
    P02-007 Lockwire (standard) 0,6 mm (0.025 in.) 919.01.11.103 NASM20995
    diameter (former
    MS20995C-25)
    P02-008 Lockwire (heat 1,0 mm (0.04 in.) 919.01.11.107 MS9226-05
    resistant) diameter
    P02-009 Abrasive paper Grade 120 904.47.22.210
    P02-010 Abrasive paper Grade 180 904.47.22.213
    P02-011 Abrasive paper Grade 240 904.47.22.216
    P02-012 Abrasive paper Grade 280 904.47.22.218
    P02-013 Abrasive paper Grade 320 904.47.22.220
    P02-014 Abrasive paper Grade 400 904.47.22.222
    P02-015 Lockwire (heat 0,8 mm (0.032 in.) 919.01.11.105 MS 9226-04
    resistant) diameter
    P02-016 ScotchBrite Very fine grade 904.48.85.107

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071B-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-18 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Material Description Remarks Pilatus Part Alternative


    No. No. Product/
    Specification
    P02-017 Lockwire (standard) 1,0 mm (0.04 in.) 919.01.11.106 NASM20995
    diameter (former
    MS20995C-41)
    P02-018 Cloth, abrasive Grade 80 904.47.23.176
    P02-019 Cloth, cotton 904.49.71.203
    P02-020 ScotchBrite Regular grade
    P02-021 Lockwire (brass) 0,5 mm (0.020 in) 919.01.11.117
    diameter
    P02-022 Lockwire (heat 0,4 mm (0.016 in) 919.01.11.101 MS9226-01
    resistant) diameter
    P02-023 Supersede by P02-024
    P02-024 Abrasive paper Grade 600 904.47.22.223
    P02-025 Cotton wadding Pure cotton wool 904.49.73.006
    P02-026 Abrasive cloth Grade 1500 907.71.22.703
    P02-027 Abrasive cloth Grade 1800 907.71.22.704
    P02-028 Abrasive cloth Grade 2400 907.71.22.705
    P02-029 Abrasive cloth Grade 3200 907.71.22.706
    P02-030 Abrasive cloth Grade 4000 907.71.22.707
    P02-031 Absorbent paper E-Tork 904.49.73.004
    P02-032 Abrasive paper 3M Trizact P3000 D32 907.71.22.791
    MM
    P02-033 Lamb wool pad Polishing pad 904.49.76.362
    P02-034 Polish pad Mirror polish - black 904.49.76.341
    P02-035 Polish pad small Finesse It Buff Pad 904.49.76.321
    P02-036 Polish hood Off Polish Hood of 904.49.76.361
    Micro Fiber white
    P02-037 Micro Fiber Cloth Micro Power Cloth - 904.49.76.381
    Terrycloth
    P02-038 Cleaning Modelling Magic Smooth and 904.49.76.121
    Material Clean, yellow
    P02-039 All Purpose Cleaner All Purpose Cleaner 904.49.76.141
    PLUS Concentrate D-12
    P02-040 Lockwire (heat Inconel. 0,5 mm (0.02 919.01.11.102 MS9226-02
    resistant) in.) diameter

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071B-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-18 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST

    WELDING AND METAL

    Table of Contents Page

    CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST - WELDING AND METAL................................................... 1


    1 Welding and Metal.................................................................................................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description

    1 Welding and Metal


    Material Description Remarks Pilatus Part Alternative
    No. No. Product/
    Specification
    P03-001 Welding rod, filler rod 0,8 mm diameter 907.83.32.501 AMS5680
    347
    1,0 mm diameter 907.83.32.502
    1,14 mm diameter 907.83.32.503
    1,6 mm diameter 907.83.32.505
    P03-002 Welding Rod, Filler Diameter 1,5 mm (0,06 907.83.31.911 WL 1.7734.2
    rod in.)
    Diameter 2,0 mm (0,8 907.83.31.912 WL 1.7734.2
    in.)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071C-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-12-02 Page 1
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071C-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-12-02 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST

    JOINTING COMPOUNDS AND GREASES

    Table of Contents Page

    CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST - JOINTING COMPOUNDS AND GREASES..................... 1


    1 Jointing Compounds and Greases......................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description

    1 Jointing Compounds and Greases


    Material Description Remarks Pilatus Part Alternative
    No. No. Product/
    Specification
    P04-001 Grease Aeroshell Grease 5 MIL-PRF-81322F
    Superseded by P04-031 G-395
    DOD-G-24508
    P04-002 Grease Aeroshell Grease 7 908.20.02.063 MIL-PRF-23827
    Type II
    P04-003 Grease Aeroshell Grease 22 908.20.02.064 MIL-PRF-81322
    Grade 2 G-395
    P04-004 Grease Plastilube 3 908.25.71.501 PWC 04–004
    P04-005 Superseded by P04-030
    P04-006 Grease Aeroshell Grease 17 MIL-G-21164
    Superseded by P04-037
    P04-007 Superseded by P04-030
    P04-008 Wellseal Superseded by P04-017
    P04-009 Grease MoS2 908.25.71.802 MIL-PRF-83483
    P04-010 Anti-seize compound SAE-AMS2518,
    Def Stan 80-80 Iss
    2
    S-720
    P04-009
    P04-011 Spray lubricant Molyslip ADF 908.10.09.002
    P04-012 Corrosion Mastinox 6856H
    preventative Superceded by P04-039

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071D-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-14 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Material Description Remarks Pilatus Part Alternative


    No. No. Product/
    Specification
    P04-013 Superseded by P04-003
    P04-014 Heat conducting Superseded by P04-036
    paste
    P04-015 Anti seize compound Molykote 1000 908.24.02.004
    P04-016 Grease Aeroshell Grease 6 908.25.71.111 MIL-G-24139,
    G382, G-450
    P04-017 Jointing compound Hylomar SQ 32M 907.13.11.903
    P04-018 Grease Silicon grease MS4 908.20.02.093 SAE AS8660
    (DC4) (former MIL-
    S-8660), S-736
    P04-019 No longer used
    P04-020 Superseded by P04-004
    P04-021 Superseded by P04-029
    P04-022 Grease Molykote G Rapid Plus NATO No.
    9150-0-200-0097
    P04-023 Propeller grease Gulflex 2 - No longer 908.25.71.101
    used
    P04-024 Grease MolySlip LQG 908.10.09.013
    P04-025 Compound, anti- Never Seez PWC06-009
    seize
    Molykote P-37
    P04-026 Compound, anti- Silver Goop PWC06-023
    seize
    P04-027 Grease Mobil Grease Special 908.21.42.110
    P04-028 Grease Aeroshell Grease 33 908.20.02.065 MIL-PRF-23827
    Type I
    Def Stan 91-53
    NATO G-354
    Mobil Grease 27
    P04-024 Grease MolySlip LQG 908.10.09.013
    P04-025 Compound, anti Never Seez PWC06-009
    seize
    Molykote P-37
    P04-026 Compound, anti Silver Goop PWC06-023
    seize
    P04-027 Grease Mobil Grease Special 908.21.42.110
    P04-028 Grease Aeroshell Grease 33 908.20.02.065 MIL-PRF-23827
    Type I
    Def Stan 91-53
    NATO G-354
    Mobil Grease 27
    P04-029 Paste, Installation Duotempi PMY45
    60 g tube 908.24.02.001
    600 g tin 908.24.02.002
    P04-030 Grease Vaselinum 26-7500-1 908.20.02.101 VV-236A
    Def Stan 91-38
    Grade PX-7
    MIL-C-11796
    P04-031 Grease MAG SHC 100 908.20.02.066
    P04-032 Grease Isoflex Topas NCA 51 908.21.42.115

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071D-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-14 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Material Description Remarks Pilatus Part Alternative


    No. No. Product/
    Specification
    P04-033 Oxygen paste Oxygenoex FF250 MIL-T-5542
    Superseded by P04-038
    P04-034 Lubricant Ultra-Plus Extra 908.40.01.002
    P04-035 Anti-seize compound Molycote P-37 908.24.02.003
    P04.036 Heat conducting Dow Corning 340 907.13.11.997
    paste
    P04-037 Grease Aeroshell Grease 33MS 908.25.71.804 MIL-G-21164,
    G-353
    P04-038 Oxygen paste Krytox 240AC MIL-PRF-27617
    Superseded by P04-040 Type III
    P04-039 Corrosion Supersedes P04-012 910.31.20.042
    preventative,
    (chromate-free)
    CA1000
    P04-040 Oxygen paste Krytox 240AZ 908.25.71.703 MIL -PRF-27617
    Type 1

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071D-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-14 Page 3
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071D-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-14 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST

    POLISHING

    Table of Contents Page

    CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST - POLISHING...................................................................... 1


    1 Polishing................................................................................................................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description

    1 Polishing
    Material Description Remarks Pilatus Part Alternative
    No. No. Product/
    Specification
    P05-001 (No longer used)
    P05-002 Plastic/acrylic MGH No.17 908.64.22.203
    cleaner (paste)
    P05-004 Plastic / Acrylic Altupol No. 2 907.71.22.702
    Polish (fine)
    P05-005 Plastic / Acrylic Altupol No. 1 907.71.22.701 Novus No. 3
    Polish (heavy)
    P05-006 Plastic / Acrylic MGH No. 10 908.64.22.201 Novus No. 2
    Polish (Medium)
    P05-007 Grinding polish Diamant Grinding polish 904.49.76.261
    M-85
    P05-008 Polish cleaner Cleaning and Mirror 904.49.76.241
    Polish M-83
    P05-009 Sealing Polymer Sealing M-20 904.49.76.221
    P05-010 Fine Cleaner Last Touch Detailing 904.49.76.165
    D-155
    P05-011 Plastic/acrylic Zip-Chem X-405 908.64.22.215
    cleaner
    (5 gall. container)
    (12 oz spray) 908.64.22.216
    P05-012 Plastic/acrylic Burnus 908.64.22.217
    cleaner Kunststoffreiniger
    (20 l container)
    (0.5 l container) 908.64.22.218

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071E-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-03-02 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Material Description Remarks Pilatus Part Alternative


    No. No. Product/
    Specification
    P05-013 Plastic/acrylic R 300 Super Surface 908.64.22.219
    cleaner

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071E-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-03-02 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST

    INSPECTING

    Table of Contents Page

    CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST - INSPECTING.................................................................... 1


    1 Inspecting............................................................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description

    1 Inspecting
    Material Description Remarks Pilatus Part No. Alternative Product/
    No. Specification
    P06-001 Penetrant Aerosol 908.68.12.105 AMS-2644
    ASTM-E1417
    MIL-STD-2132
    ASTM-E-165
    P06-002 Remover Aerosol 908.68.12.106 AMS-2644
    Ardrox 9PR88
    ASTM-E1417
    MIL-STD-2132
    ASTM-E-165
    P06-003 Developer Aerosol 908.68.12.107 AMS-2644
    ASTM-E1417
    MIL-STD-2132
    ASTM-E-165
    P06-004 Leak detector spray 907.12.11.004 MIL-PRF-25567
    P06-005 Fluorescent Ardox 970P25E 908.68.12.113
    penetrant
    P06-006 Dry developer Ardox 9D4A 908.68.12.112
    P06-007 Wet developer Ardox 9D1B 908.68.12.111
    P06-008 Remover Ardox 9PR50 908.68.12.108

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071F-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-05 Page 1
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071F-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-05 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST

    PAINTS, VARNISHES AND THINNERS

    Table of Contents Page

    CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST - PAINTS, VARNISHES AND THINNERS.......................... 1


    1 Paints, Varnishes and Thinners.............................................................................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description

    1 Paints, Varnishes and Thinners


    Material Description Remarks Pilatus Part No. Alternative Product/
    No. Specification
    P07-001 Alodine 1200S, CCC solution 908.40.32.251
    P07-002 Zinc chromate primer Superseded by P07-003
    P07-003 Epoxy primer Superseded by P07-007 MIL-P-23377
    P07-004 Primer 8010-0-100-012P
    Thinner Supersedes P07-005
    Paint, cockpit, grey Supersedes P07-006 8010-0-100-0144
    P07-005 Deleted Refer to P07-004
    P07-006 Deleted Refer to P07-004
    P07-007 Epoxy primer Akzo Nobel 910.02.05.031
    Hardener For epoxy primer 910.02.05.032
    Thinner 910.09.00.101
    P07-008 Paint, marking, red Enictol 234183-125 910.33.82.150
    P07-009 Topcoat, anti-erosion Celoflex 95 black 910.04.04.504
    Hardener For Celoflex 910.04.04.505
    Thinner For Celoflex 910.09.00.057
    P07-010 Screen printing, Serie 658-33 910.07.05.102
    black
    Screen printing, Serie 658-00 910.07.05.103
    white
    Screen printing, red Serie 658-16 910.07.05.104
    Hardener 910.07.05.101
    Thinner 910.09.00.508
    Retarder 910.09.00.904
    P07-011 deleted Refer to P07-010
    P07-012 deleted Refer to P07-010

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071G-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-26 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Material Description Remarks Pilatus Part No. Alternative Product/


    No. Specification
    P07-013 deleted Refer to P07-010
    P07-014 deleted Refer to P07-010
    P07-015 deleted Refer to P07-010
    P07-016 Primer, barrier white 37045 910.02.05.030
    Hardener For barrier primer 910.04.04.316
    P07-017 Topcoat, white Aviox finish 910.04.04.515
    Hardener 90075 for white paint 910.04.04.502
    P07-018 Topcoat, anti-chafe Celogliss 5456/1238 910.07.09.012
    snow white
    Topcoat, anti-chafe Celogliss 5456/7203 910.07.09.015
    grey
    Hardener For Celogliss 5456 910.07.09.014
    Thinner For Celogliss 5456 910.07.09.013
    P07-019 Topcoat, impact Nuvovern ACR enamel 910.04.04.022
    resistant
    Hardener PUR 910.04.04.050
    Thinner 910.09.00.005
    P07-020 Topcoat, white Aerodur finish, C21/100 910.04.04.320
    UVR
    Topcoat, black Aerodur finish, C21/100 910.04.04.416
    UVR
    Topcoat, red Aerodur finish, C21/100 910.04.04.317
    UVR
    Topcoat, gray Aerodur finish, C21/100 910.04.04.328 RAL 7030
    UVR
    Hardener 910.04.04.316
    Thinner 910.09.00.101
    Thinner 910.09.00.102
    P07-021 Alodine 1132 Touch-N-Prep Pen 908.44.32.252
    P07-022 Snow white 702112, Superseded by P07-031
    ECL-G-1678
    Light grey RAL7035, Superseded by P07-031
    ECL-G-11018
    Grey RAL 7040, Superseded by P07-031
    ECL-G-11017
    Black RAL 9005, Superseded by P07-031
    ECL-G-92
    Blue RAL 5017, Superseded by P07-031
    ECL-G-2843
    White RAL 9003, Superseded by P07-031
    ECL-G-1681
    Traffic red RAL Superseded by P07-031
    3020, ECL-G-3637
    White RAL 9010, Superseded by P07-031
    ECL-G-1670
    White FSB 17925, Superseded by P07-031
    ECL-G-10
    Red FSB 11350, Superseded by P07-031
    ECL-G-3701
    Orange CM410A5, Superseded by P07-031
    ECL-G-3818UK

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071G-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-26 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Material Description Remarks Pilatus Part No. Alternative Product/


    No. Specification
    Orange RAL 2009, Superseded by P07-031
    ECL-G-6663
    Hardner Superseded by P07-031
    Activator 910.04.04.529
    P07-023 deleted
    P07-030 FASTboot primer Primer 907.13.13.091
    P07-031 Alumigrip 4200
    Alumigrip 4200, Snow 910.04.04.558
    white
    Alumigrip 4200, RAL 910.04.04.562
    7040
    Alumigrip 4200, RAL 910.04.04.570
    9005
    Alumigrip 4200, RAL 910.04.04.564
    5017
    Alumigrip 4200, RAL 910.04.04.565
    9003
    Alumigrip 4200, RAL 910.04.04.561
    3020
    Alumigrip 4200, RAL 910.04.04.563
    9010
    Curing Solution PC-242 910.04.04.553
    Alumigrip 4200, Orange 910.04.04.577
    Alumigrip 4200, RAL 910.04.04.576
    7037
    Alumigrip 4200, B.T 910.04.04.566
    White
    Alumigrip 4200, RAL 910.04.04.567
    3003
    Alumigrip 4200, RAL 910.04.04.568
    5003
    Alumigrip 4200, RAL 910.04.04.569
    7001
    Alumigrip 4200 Yellow, 910.04.04.578
    RAL 1023
    P07–032 Berlacryl Graphite Pearl 910.04.04.062
    (PC-12/47E only) Hardener 910.04.04.057
    Thinner 910.09.00.009
    P07–033 Berlacryl Clearcoat 910.04.04.063
    (PC-12/47E only)
    P07–034 Berlacryl 2K PUR SGL Cockpit 910.04.04.056
    Green
    P07–035 Berlacryl 2K PUR SGL Cockpit 910.04.04.060
    Grey

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071G-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-26 Page 3
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071G-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-26 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST

    BONDING, ADHESIVES, FILLERS AND SEALERS

    Table of Contents Page

    CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST - BONDING, ADHESIVES, FILLERS AND SEALERS....... 1


    1 Bonding, Adhesives, Fillers and Sealers................................................................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description

    1 Bonding, Adhesives, Fillers and Sealers


    Material Description Remarks Pilatus Part Alternative
    No. No. Product/
    Specification
    P08-001 Caulking putty. 3M Superseded by P08-069
    body caulking.
    P08-002 Silicon Sealant Loctite 5368 910.42.12.126
    P08-003 Sealant Superseded by P08-018
    P08-004 Sealant Superseded by P08-020
    P08-005 Sealant Pro seal 890 A2 907.13.13.022
    P08-006 Coating, Laminar Superseded by P08-024
    X-500
    P08-007 Coating, PR 1560 Superseded by P08-024
    P08-008 Adhesive BALCO-ME 910.42.22.372
    P08-009 Adhesive 3M Fastbond 10 910.42.22.037 MIL-A-21366, A-
    A-1936
    P08-010 Thinners 3M Fastbond 10 910.42.22.038
    P08-011 Contact adhesive Superseded by P08-009
    P08-012 Thinner Superseded by P08-010
    P08-013 Sealant Superseded by P08-018
    P08-014 Sealant Superseded by P08-056
    P08-015 Acrylic adhesive Tensol No. 6 910.42.22.393 No longer available
    P08-016 Edge sealer 3M Superseded by P08-041
    3950
    P08-017 Adhesive Loctite 241 910.42.12.123
    Loctite 641. Moved to 910.42.12.120
    P08-065

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071H-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-18 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Material Description Remarks Pilatus Part Alternative


    No. No. Product/
    Specification
    P08-018 Sealant PR 1422B-2, 1 liter. Alternative P08-071
    Available in USA for EU
    P08-019 Sealant RTV 123 907.13.11.931
    P08-020 Sealant PR 1422A-2. Available Alternative P08-073
    in USA for EU
    P08-021 Adhesive Loctite 542 910.42.12.121
    P08-022 Sealant, Permatex Form-a-Gasket No. 1 907.12.11.203 MIL-S-45180D
    P08-023 Adhesive Superseded by P08-059
    P08-024 Coating PR 1005-L 907.10.02.001 AMS-S-4383
    P08-025 Thinners BALCO ME thinners 910.42.22.375
    P08-026 Adhesive Bostik M890 910.42.72.111
    P08-027 Coating Age Master No. 1 908.41.01.001
    P08-028 Fuel Protective BFG A-851-B 907.13.13.041
    Coating
    P08-029 Adhesive 3M Scotch-Weld 1300L 910.42.22.052 MIL-A-21366, A-
    with Toluene A-1936
    P08-030 Filler Scotchseal EC-801
    P08-031 Static conductive BFG A-56-B 910.07.19.012
    coating
    P08-032 Sealant Superseded by P08-057
    P08-033 Sealant Superseded by P08-058
    P08-034 Adhesive Araldite 2012 910.42.62.002
    P08-035 Plastic sealant Loctite AVX 957.30.00.049
    P08-036 Resin, epoxy Dexter Hysol EA 9396 910.42.72.170
    (two part)
    P08-037 Glass microspheres Cap-o-Sil 910.82.20.910
    P08-038 Adhesive, epoxy Araldite 2011 910.42.62.000
    P08-039 Adhesive Loctite 307
    P08-040 Sealant Superseded by P08-056
    P08-041 Clear sealer, 3M Superseded by P08-056
    08551
    P08-042 Sealant Sikaflex-221 907.13.13.201
    P08-043 Adhesive Loctite 243, blue, 910.42.12.128
    50cm3
    P08-044 Resin, epoxy Hysol EA 9395 (two 910.42.72.169
    part)
    P08-045 Sealant, silicon, RTV 108Q 907.13.13.102 MIL-A-46106
    translucent
    P08-046 Sealant, silicone, Superseded by P08-070
    translucent, PR 1764
    Class B
    P08-047 Not used
    P08-048 Resin, epoxy Hysol EA 9394 (two 907.10.11.272
    part)
    P08-049 Honeycomb core Nomex 3.2-80 14 mm 917.00.25.210
    P08-050 Honeycomb core Nomex 3.2-48 12 mm 917.00.25.227
    P08-051 Foam core PMI Rohazell 51WF 35 917.33.14.146
    mm
    P08-052 Adhesive, epoxy 3M DP490 910.42.72.205
    910.42.72.169 EA9395

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071H-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-18 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Material Description Remarks Pilatus Part Alternative


    No. No. Product/
    Specification
    P08-053 Filler, spray BE-2 910.0
    0 8.06.
    Belfa 004
    pol
    ZW
    P08-054 Resin, epoxy Araldite LY 5052 917.00.40.001
    P08-055 Ceramic adhesive Resbond 907GF 907.10.11.273 MMS3500-11
    P08-056 Sealant PR 1829 B-1/2 Pot life 907.10.11.262
    30 minutes
    Sealant black PR 1829 B-2 Pot life 907.10.11.263
    120 minutes
    P08-057 Sealant , PS 892 Superseded by P08-074
    C12
    P08-058 Sealant , PS 892 Superseded by P08-075
    C24
    P08-059 Adhesive, epoxy Scotch-Weld 9323 B/A 910.42.72.204
    P08-060 Adhesive, epoxy, Superseded by P08-059
    EC1614B/A
    P08-061 Adhesive, epoxy Scotch-Weld DP-100FR 910.42.62.003
    (two part)
    P08-062 Insulkleber 1000 - 910.42.22.351
    P08-063 Adhesive, acrylic Tensol No. 70 910.42.72.112
    P08-064 Adhesive, epoxy Raychem S1005 910.42.72.206
    P08-065 Adhesive, loctite Not used
    Grade 641
    P08-066 Honeycomb core ECA 3.2-48 3 mm thick 917.00.25.220
    P08-067 Honeycomb core ECA 3.2-48 6 mm thick 917.00.25.223
    P08-068 Honeycomb core ECA 3.2-80 9.5 mm 917.00.25.206
    thick
    P08-069 Sealant GURISIL, 575.3 910.42.12.112
    KARTUSCHE.
    Supersedes P08-001
    P08-070 Sealant, Electrically PR1764 MB-2 907.10.11.274
    Conductive
    P08-071 Sealant MC-238 B-2 907.10.11.233
    P08-072 Adhesive Activator Loctite N 7649 (150 cm) 910.42.12.129
    P08-073 Sealant MC-780 C-2 907.10.11.235
    P08-074 Sealant MC-780 C-12 907.10.11.236
    P08-075 Sealant MC-780 C-24 907.10.11.237
    P08-076 Glyptal G7526F 908.18.12.095 P07-007
    P08-077 Honeycomb core ECA 3.2-48. 8 mm 917.00.25.225
    thick. Formerly P08-069
    P08-078 ICEX II Rubber boots ice 908.41.10.002
    adhesion inhibitor

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071H-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-18 Page 3
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071H-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-18 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST

    GENERAL STORES

    Table of Contents Page

    CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST - GENERAL STORES......................................................... 1


    1 General Stores....................................................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description

    1 General Stores
    Material Description Remarks Pilatus Part Alternative
    No. No. Product/
    Specification
    P09-001 Tape, PTFE Tetratape 12 mm 917.47.71.103
    P09-002 French chalk Talcum powder 908.44.12.203
    P09-003 Fabric strip 50 mm (2 in.) wide 918.71.62.032
    P09-004 Koroseal binding
    P09-005 Cable ties Nylon, 119 mm x 3,6 971.32.51.105 MS3367-4-9
    mm SAE-AS33671
    P09-006 Thread, indicating Red colored 918.71.03.121
    P09-007 Glass fibre tape Permacel P-212, 25 mm 917.40.80.006 FAR 25.853(a)
    wide
    P09-008 Cable ties Nylon, 69 mm x 2.5 mm 971.32.51.104 MS3367-5-9
    SAE-AS33671
    P09-009 Nylon cord, 3 mm Superseded by P09-024
    diameter
    P09-010 Rubber band 178 x 16 mm 944.85.82.112
    P09-011 Lead seal 8 x 5 mm 911.21.91.005
    P09-012 Aluminium tape Scotch 425, 50 mm 917.40.91.005 FAR 25.853(a)
    wide L-T-80
    MIL-T-2339-7
    TO 1-1-8
    P09-013 Armaflex Band 50 mm wide 957.30.00.046
    P09-014 Cable ties Nylon, 160 mm x 4,8 971.32.51.101 MS3367-1-9
    mm SAE-AS33671
    P09-015 Protective tape BAS185-GS3-0.6 in 946.33.21.296
    P09-016 Superseded by P09-046

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071I-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-22 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Material Description Remarks Pilatus Part Alternative


    No. No. Product/
    Specification
    P09-017 Cable tie, heat 360 mm x 6 mm 971.32.51.206
    resistant
    P09-018 Soldering Sleeve D142-50 971.19.26.104 NAS1745-14
    P09-019 Soldering Sleeve D142-51 971.19.26.105 NAS1745-15
    P09-020 Glass fibre tape Permacel P-212, 19 mm 917.40.80.004 FAR 25.853(a)
    wide
    P09-021 Superseded by P09-045
    P09-022 Pack thread, nylon 917.54.16.203
    P09-023 Lead seal 5,5 x 3,5 mm 911.21.91.002
    P09-024 Rope, polyester, 3 mm diameter 917.54.26.520
    white
    P09-025 Polyethylene foil 3M 5423, 19 mm wide x 917.40.69.019
    1000 mm long
    P09-026 Tape adhesive 3M 8561, 0.35 mm 917.40.68.001
    thick, 20 mm wide
    P09-027 Superseded by P09-044
    P09-028 Ident sleeve 20 mm wide 942.94.51.106
    P09-029 Pack thread, nylon 918.71.03.071 MIL-T-43435B, A-
    A-52080B, A-
    A-52081B, A-
    A52082B, A-
    A-52083B, A-
    A-52084B
    P09-030 Heat shrink sleeve 3/16 inch diameter 917.99.88.605
    P09-031 Glass fiber fabric 163 g/m2 917.00.11.002 WL 8.4548.60
    P09-032 Carbon fiber fabric Not used
    P09-033 Glass fiber fabric Not used
    P09-034 Copper wire mesh lightning strike 919.02.30.111
    protection 72 g/m2
    P09-035 Release film Wrighton 4600 blue
    P09-036 Tape Adhesive 3M 4932 0.64 x 19 mm 917.40.67.312
    P09-037 Spiralwrap 917.99.90.002
    P09-038 Superseded by P09-043
    P09-039 Masking Paper 300 mm width 905.20.10.003 Permafix 045
    P09-040 Masking Paper 600 mm width 905.20.10.006 Permafix 045
    P09-041 Masking Paper 900 mm width 905.20.10.009 Permafix 045
    P09-042 Masking Paper 1500 mm width 905.20.10.015 Permafix 045
    P09-043 Tape adhesive, blue 0,025 x 25 mm 917.40.20.703 PPI 1022
    P09-044 Heat shrink sleeve 3/8 in diameter 917.99.88.607
    P09-045 Heat shrink sleeve 1/4 in diameter 917.99.88.606
    P09-046 Heat shrink sleeve 1 in diameter 917.99.88.610
    P09-047 Tape, adhesive 25,4 mm (1.0 in) width 917.40.61.108
    P09-048 Tape, adhesive 76,2 mm (3.0 in) width 917.40.61.113
    P09-049 Tape, adhesive 0.36*305 3M-8673 917.40.69.152
    P09-050 Tape, lead 12 mm 917.40.91.011
    P09-051 Tape, lead 50 mm 917.40.91.012
    P09-052 Tape, Aluminium 25 mm (1.0 in) wide 917.40.91.003
    Scotch 425
    P09-053 Glass fiber fabric 280 g/m² 917.00.11.003
    P09-054 Carbon fiber fabric 200 g/m² 917.00.12.123
    P09-055 Peel ply 51789 Natural

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071I-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-22 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Material Description Remarks Pilatus Part Alternative


    No. No. Product/
    Specification
    P09-056 Cable ties 971.32.51.106 MS3367-5-9, PA66,
    SAE-AS33671
    P09-057 Tape, adhesive 971.32.52.802

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071I-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-22 Page 3
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071I-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-22 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST

    OILS AND FLUIDS

    Table of Contents Page

    CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST - OILS AND FLUIDS........................................................... 1


    1 Oils and Fluids........................................................................................................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description

    1 Oils and Fluids


    Material Description Remarks Pilatus Part Alternative
    No. No. Product/
    Specification
    P10-001 CPC-temporary Lear Chemical ACF-50 908.18.12.087 MIL-C-81309 Type
    III
    (Supersedes Lear Chemical ACF-50 908.18.12.088
    P10-001B and C) aerosol
    P10-002 Superceded by
    P10-005
    P10-003 Hydraulic Fluid Castrol Aero 585B 908.14.12.015 MIL-PRF-5606
    Replaced by P10-017
    P10-004 Engine oil Refer to P&WC SB
    14001 or AMM
    P10-005 CPC-light Ardrox AV 8 908.18.12.081 MIL-PRF-16173
    (Supersedes Grade 1 and 4
    P10-001A, P10-002, Ardrox AV 8, aerosol 908.18.12.083
    P10-005A and B)
    P10-006 Hydraulic fluid Aeroshell Fluid 31 908.14.12.016 MIL-PRF-83282
    (former MIL-
    H-83282)
    P10-007 Compressor oil, BVM 100N Supersedes 908.12.22.101
    P10-007A, B, C & D
    Tamoil Tamfrost 100 957.30.00.050
    P10-008 Refrigerant R12, Freon, Fresan - 957.30.00.058
    No longer used

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071J-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-11-24 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Material Description Remarks Pilatus Part Alternative


    No. No. Product/
    Specification
    P10-009 Cold air unit oil Esso ETO 2380 908.11.02.105 MIL-PRF-23699
    (former MIL-
    L-23699)
    Aeroshell 500 908.11.02.102
    P10-010 Refrigerant R134A 957.30.00.063
    P10-011 Superseded by
    P10-021
    (Supersedes
    P10-011A, B and C)
    P10-012 Oil Hellerine 248 ml 908.20.02.047
    P10-013 CPC Ardrox AV 40 Ardrox AV 40 908.18.12.086
    P10-014 CPC Remover Ardrox AV980 aerosol 908.18.12.089
    P10-015 CPC Ardrox AV 30 Ardrox AV 30, 20 litre 908.18.12.080 MIL-PRF-16173
    (Supersedes Grade 1 and 4
    P10-005C) Ardrox AV 30, aerosol 908.18.12.085 AMS 3077
    P10-016 CPC Ardrox AV 25 Ardrox AV 25, aerosol 908.18.12.084 MIL-PRF-16173
    (Supersedes Grade 3
    P10-005D)
    AMS3066
    P10-017 Hydraulic Fluid Aeroshell Fluid 41 908.14.12.017 MIL-PRF-5606
    (20 liters) (former MIL-
    H-5606)
    908.14.12.018
    (5 liters)
    P10-021 Compressor Oil Emkarate RL 100H 957.30.00.059

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071J-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-11-24 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST

    FUELS

    Table of Contents Page

    CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST - FUELS.............................................................................. 1


    1 Fuels....................................................................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description

    1 Fuels
    Material Description Remarks Pilatus Part Alternative
    No. No. Product/
    Specification
    P11-001 Fuel For fuel
    specifications refer
    to P&WC EMM

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071K-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-12-02 Page 1
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071K-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-12-02 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST

    PACKING

    Table of Contents Page

    CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST - PACKING......................................................................... 1


    1 Packing................................................................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description

    1 Packing
    Material Description Remarks Pilatus Part Alternative
    No. No. Product/
    Specification
    There are no Pilatus
    Recommended
    Materials in this section.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071L-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-12-02 Page 1
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-31-00-00A-071L-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-12-02 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    CORROSION

    DESCRIPTION

    Table of Contents Page

    CORROSION - DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................. 1
    1 General................................................................................................................... 2
    2 Types of Corrosion................................................................................................. 2
    2.1 Uniform Corrosion.................................................................................................. 2
    2.2 Galvanic or Dissimilar Metal Corrosion.................................................................. 2
    2.3 Pitting Corrosion..................................................................................................... 2
    2.4 Inter granular Corrosion.......................................................................................... 2
    2.5 Stress Corrosion..................................................................................................... 2
    2.6 Crevice Corrosion................................................................................................... 2
    2.7 Corrosion Fatigue................................................................................................... 3
    2.8 Fretting Corrosion................................................................................................... 3
    2.9 Biological Corrosion................................................................................................ 3
    2.10 Embrittlement of Highly Stressed Alloys................................................................. 3
    3 Corrosion in Joints.................................................................................................. 3
    4 Metal Groups.......................................................................................................... 3
    5 Identification of Corrosion....................................................................................... 4
    5.1 General - Painted Surfaces.................................................................................... 4
    5.2 Steels...................................................................................................................... 4
    5.3 Cadmium Plated Components................................................................................ 4
    5.4 Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys............................................................................. 4
    6 Corrosion Prevention.............................................................................................. 4
    7 Wash Frequency.................................................................................................... 4
    8 Wash Water............................................................................................................ 5
    9 Corrosion Preventive Compounds.......................................................................... 5
    9.1 Medium to Long Term Protection........................................................................... 5
    9.2 Short Term Protection............................................................................................ 5
    9.3 Alternative Products............................................................................................... 6
    9.4 Material Description................................................................................................ 6
    9.5 Inspection and Application Frequency.................................................................... 6

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Wash Water Quality................................................................................................ 5
    3 Corrosion Preventive Compounds.......................................................................... 6

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A CORROSION CONTROL - MAINTENANCE
    PRACTICES

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-40-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-12-23 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Description

    1 General
    Corrosion is the deterioration of a metal because of a reaction with its environment. All types of corrosion decrease
    the strength of the part. Corrosion must be found quickly and repaired immediately or it will become worse and a
    failure of the structure can occur.
    Further information about corrosion control is available in FAA Advisory Circular AC 43-4A, ‛Corrosion Control for
    Aircraft’.

    2 Types of Corrosion
    Each type of corrosion looks different and has a different effect on the material. All corrosion causes the properties
    of metal to change and can cause the failure of the part or structure to occur.

    2.1 Uniform Corrosion


    Uniform corrosion is caused by the direct effect of water, corrosive gas, salt spray or other contaminants on a metal
    surface. On a polished surface the finish will at first become dull. If the corrosion is not treated, the surface will
    become rough and will look frosted. Discoloration and dulling of a surface can also be caused by high
    temperatures.

    2.2 Galvanic or Dissimilar Metal Corrosion


    Galvanic corrosion occurs when different metal types join and there is an electrolyte, usually water. This type of
    corrosion frequently occurs when two dissimilar metals make electrical contact. The larger the potential difference
    between the two metals the faster the corrosion. Parts which have dissimilar metals are treated on assembly to
    prevent corrosion.

    2.3 Pitting Corrosion


    This type of corrosion is a local corrosion of cavities in the surface of the metal. Pitting corrosion can be the start
    point of inter granular and stress corrosion. The corrosion usually shows as blisters on the surface finish. When the
    surface finish is removed pits can be seen on the surface of the metal.

    2.4 Inter granular Corrosion


    This type of corrosion occurs along the grain boundaries of alloys under certain conditions. The corrosion causes
    the separation of the grains. This corrosion can cause very small cracks on the surface of the metal which can only
    be seen with magnification. This corrosion causes serious damage to parts and makes the structure weak. A part
    which has, or possibly has, this type of corrosion must be replaced.

    2.5 Stress Corrosion


    This can occur where there is corrosion and a continuous load is applied to a part. It can be seen as very small
    cracks. This corrosion can also start in areas where loads are applied to the material during manufacture. A
    decrease of metal thickness because of corrosion and the load on the part can cause a crack.

    2.6 Crevice Corrosion


    Crevice corrosion is caused by water held between the two surfaces of a joint. The corrosion pushes the parts
    apart and can cause stress damage to the fasteners.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-40-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-12-23 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.7 Corrosion Fatigue


    This occurs when loads are frequently put on a part which has corrosion. The combination of the loads and the
    corrosion can cause cracks at the corrosion pits and a failure of the part can occur. It may not be possible to see
    the corrosion and there may be no loss of material.

    2.8 Fretting Corrosion


    This corrosion is caused when two surfaces, one metallic, rub against each other. When the surfaces rub together
    the protective film on the surface of the metal is removed. The corrosion makes an abrasive and removes more
    material from the surface. This makes the damage worse. This corrosion can cause fatigue cracks and subsequent
    failure of the part.
    This corrosion can also occur between aerodynamic fairings, access panels and service doors and the structure.
    This corrosion shows as a black powder on aluminum alloys and a brown powder on steels. The powder also
    collects on and around the surfaces which touch each other.

    2.9 Biological Corrosion


    This type of corrosion is caused by micro-organisms such as bacteria, fungi and algae growing in areas where
    water has collected. This usually occurs in areas such as fuel tanks and aerodynamic fairings. The corrosion shows
    as green particles on the material surface. If the fuel tank coating is damaged other types of corrosion can occur.

    2.10 Embrittlement of Highly Stressed Alloys


    High-strength, high-stress alloys can absorb hydrogen. This can make the metal brittle and cracks can occur.
    Mercury will corrode and embrittle aluminum and titanium along the grain boundaries.
    Cadmium and silver particles can make stressed titanium brittle when the temperature is higher than room
    temperature.

    3 Corrosion in Joints
    If there is moisture on the mating surfaces between two components or fasteners when they are assembled local
    corrosion or pitting can occur.
    Use of jointing compounds and sealants can reduce the possibility of galvanic corrosion in joints. Components that
    can be affected, should be examined regularly for signs of seep stains, powdery deposits, or loose or blistered
    protective finish or sealant at the edge of the join and fastener holes.
    Exterior and interior joints should be assembled wet with jointing compound, epoxy primer or sealant.

    4 Metal Groups
    Metals can be put into groups:
    − Group 1 Magnesium and its alloys
    − Group 2 All aluminum alloys, cadmium, zinc
    − Group 3 Iron, lead, tin and tin alloys, steels
    − Group 4 Stainless steel, titanium, chromium, nickel, copper and their alloys

    The metals in Group 1 corrode easily and must have maximum protection against corrosion. The metals in Group 4
    need minimum protection.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-40-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-12-23 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Parts which have metals from different groups must be treated on assembly to prevent corrosion.

    5 Identification of Corrosion
    The size, appearance and type of corrosion is different for each type of metal. Most types of corrosion can be seen
    on the surface of the metal, but some types occur in the metal.

    5.1 General - Painted Surfaces


    Blisters, swells and flakes on the surface finish of the metal show that there may be corrosion below the surface
    finish.
    Blisters, swells and cracks on metal surfaces show that there may be corrosion in the metal.

    5.2 Steels
    On alloy and carbon steels a red oxide dust (rust) collects on the metal and there are pits on the surface.

    5.3 Cadmium Plated Components


    Cadmium plating is applied to protect steel components and to give a compatible surface when a part is in contact
    with other materials. Corrosion of the cadmium shows as a white to brown color on the surface. This corrosion
    prevents corrosion of the steel component.

    5.4 Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys


    A white or gray dust collects on the surface and the surface can break away.

    6 Corrosion Prevention
    To prevent corrosion it is recommended that:
    − the aircraft is regularly washed and minor damage to the paint finish is immediately repaired
    − the accessible interior of the aircraft structure is regularly cleaned and examined for signs of corrosion
    − the drain holes are kept free of debris
    − the interior of the structure is treated with a corrosion preventive
    − metal components which are not painted are treated with a corrosion preventive
    − when washing the aircraft care is taken not to wash out the grease from greased parts
    − parts requiring lubrication are lubricated in accordance with the time limited and scheduled inspection
    requirements
    − Corrosion Preventive Compounds (CPC) are regularly examined for deterioration of the protective layer and
    repaired if necessary

    7 Wash Frequency
    The aircraft must be washed on an On-Condition basis dependent on the local environmental conditions. Refer to
    12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A for the aircraft wash frequencies.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-40-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-12-23 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    8 Wash Water
    The quality of the wash water is important, Pilatus Aircraft Ltd. has specified the standard that follows:

    Table 2 Wash Water Quality


    Element Requirement
    pH value 6.5 - 8.5
    Chloride concentration Lower than 100 mg/I

    9 Corrosion Preventive Compounds


    There are different Corrosion Preventive Compounds (CPC). The CPC used by Pilatus Aircraft are as follows (see
    Table 3 for details):
    − ACF-50
    − Ardrox AV8
    − Ardrox AV25
    − Ardrox AV30
    − Ardrox AV40.

    9.1 Medium to Long Term Protection


    The CPC that are used for medium to long term protection are as follows:
    − Ardrox AV8
    − Ardrox AV25
    − Ardrox AV30
    − Ardrox AV40

    These corrosion preventive compounds leave a film of different consistencies and thickness. They are suitable for
    medium and long-term protection of components. They require periodical inspection of the film surface.
    CPC can be applied by brush or spraying. Spray application at all joints and surfaces with airless or airmix spray
    equipment is the preferred method. For treatment of small areas and touch-up, aerosol cans are most suitable.
    The CPC film must be clear and without any cracks. Joints along stringers and spars must be filled with a
    continuous fillet of a corrosion preventive compound. If the CPC film is damaged, fissured, or cracked then the
    coating must be repaired by applying a new layer of the applicable CPC. It is not necessary to remove the old CPC,
    unless the film is dark, cloudy, muddy or extremely dry.

    9.2 Short Term Protection


    This category of CPC includes ACF-50.
    This is a super penetrating, water displacing CPC that leaves an ultra-thin film.
    These give short-term protection and must therefore be reapplied at relatively short intervals to maintain the
    protective layer. They can stop light corrosion already present and prevent further corrosion until the next
    inspection or application.
    Water displacing compounds can be applied by brush, dipping or spraying. Spray application in a fine mist with
    airless spray equipment or aerosol can is the preferred method.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-40-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-12-23 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    9.3 Alternative Products


    Alternative products are available. However, if an alternative product is used it must not damage the materials or
    components or leave any unwanted residue as it dries. Before an alternative compound is applied, make sure the
    original layer is removed.

    9.4 Material Description


    Table 3 Corrosion Preventive Compounds
    CPC Pilatus Intended Use Properties
    Material No.
    ACF-50 P10-001 To stop light corrosion and prevent Very thin layer. Very
    more corrosion. good penetration and
    water displacing
    compound. Does not
    cause damage to the
    rubber components.
    ARDROX P10-005 All airframe areas. Approximately 0,008 mm
    AV 8 (0.0003 in) in thickness.
    Very good penetrating
    water displacing
    compound. Brown in
    color, hard, tack-free and
    transparent layer.
    ARDROX P10-013 For areas with the temperatures of Approximately 0,04 mm
    AV 40 150°C to 210°C (302°F to 410°F) (0.002 in) in thickness. A
    for small time intervals.External temperature resistant
    parts in severe environmental colorless compound
    conditions. which forms a tack free
    firm layer.
    ARDROX P10-015 Joints, detail parts and the Approximately 0,03 mm
    AV 30 airframe. (0.001 in) in thickness
    and has penetration and
    thickness properties.
    Brown in color, soft,
    waxy film, tack-free and
    transparent.

    ARDROX P10-016 Where a soft, lubricating layer is Approximately 0,03 mm


    AV 25 necessary. (0.001 in) in thickness
    and has penetration and
    water displacing
    properties. Soft, waxy,
    lubricating, tacky layer
    and transparent.

    9.5 Inspection and Application Frequency


    The frequency of corrosion inspections depends on the location of the aircraft and are based on calendar time.
    Refer to 12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A for the inspection and application frequencies.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-40-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-12-23 Page 6
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    CORROSION CONTROL

    MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Table of Contents Page

    CORROSION CONTROL - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES........................................................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 2
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 2
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2
    6 Wash Frequency.................................................................................................... 4
    7 Corrosion protective inspection frequency............................................................. 5
    8 CPC Application Areas........................................................................................... 6

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Corrosion Severity – Worldwide............................................................................. 9


    2 Local and Widespread Corrosion........................................................................... 16

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A GENERAL - AEROSPACE GROUND EQUIPMENT
    (AGE) AND TOOLS
    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A ACCESS PROVISION – HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR
    - DESCRIPTION
    12-B-12-20-01-00A-902A-A AIRCRAFT EXTERIOR WASHING - SERVICING
    12-B-12-20-02-00A-902A-A AIRCRAFT WINDOWS CLEANING - SERVICING
    12-B-12-20-03-00A-902A-A AIRCRAFT INTERIOR CLEANING - SERVICING
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-20-40-00-00A-904A-A CORROSION - REPAIR
    12-B-53-20-02-00A-313A-A CENTER FUSELAGE – CARRY THROUGH FRAMES -
    INSPECTION/CHECK

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-08-10 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Paint brush Part Local supply As
    Required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    CPC Ardrox AV 8 Part P10-005 As
    Required
    CPC Ardrox AV 40 Part P10-013 As
    Required
    CPC remover Ardrox AV 980 Part P10-014 As
    Required
    CPC Ardrox AV 30 Part P10-015 As
    Required
    CPC Ardrox AV 25 Part P10-016 As
    Required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Introduction

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-08-10 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1.1
    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Note

    To identify the AGE and tools used in this procedure refer to the list of AGE and tools 12-
    B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A.

    General
    Inspection for corrosion and of corrosion preventives must be done as given in the Time Limited
    Inspections and Scheduled Maintenance Checks.
    The inspection intervals are based on normal usage of the aircraft under average environmental
    conditions. Aircraft operated in extremely humid tropical, or in exceptionally cold, damp climates,
    industrial or salt-laden conditions, may need more frequent inspection and treatment. Under these
    conditions inspections should be more frequent until the operator can set a Corrosion Control Program
    based on field experience.
    If corrosion is found, it must be removed as soon as possible (AMM 12-B-20-40-00-00A-904A-A).
    Refer to P&WC EMM for corrosion on the engine.
    1.2 Corrosion Prone Areas
    Particular attention should be given to the corrosion-prone areas below, which should be cleaned,
    examined and treated more frequently than defined in the Scheduled Maintenance Checks. See
    Step 1.5 for details about Corrosion Inspection Schedules.
    − Exhaust trail areas, especially gaps, hinges and fairings
    − Rear fuselage, especially around the battery
    − Underfloor metallic internal structure and frames around cabin doors
    − Landing gear compartments
    − Damaged paint finish
    − Bonding straps
    − Steel control cables
    − Accessible hinges and joints
    − Bolt heads and nuts in exposed locations
    1.3 Wash Frequency
    The wash procedure must be done on an "On-condition" basis, dependent on the local climatic
    conditions (Ref. Table 6). Local conditions will not be the same for all operators and must be
    considered when establishing a wash program.
    The climatic conditions are shown in Fig. 1, but local conditions may be more or less severe.
    The aircraft exterior wash procedure is given in AMM 12-B-12-20-01-00A-902A-A.
    The aircraft interior clean procedure is given in AMM 12-B-12-20-03-00A-902A-A.
    The aircraft windows clean procedure is given in AMM 12-B-12-20-02-00A-902A-A.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-08-10 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    It is recommended to re-apply Corrosion Preventive Compounds (Table 8) to exposed areas


    (especially landing gears) after every wash.

    Table 6 Wash Frequency


    Climatic Conditions Wash
    Mild Each 3 months
    Moderate Each month
    Severe Each week
    1.4 Geographical location and environment
    The geographical location and environmental conditions can cause damage to the aircraft exposed to
    the conditions that follow:
    − Marine atmospheres
    − Moisture
    − Acid rain
    − Tropical temperatures
    − Industrial chemicals
    − Soil and dust in the atmosphere.
    1.4.1 Moisture is in the air as a gas, water vapor or as finely divided droplets of liquid. These forms
    of moisture contain chemicals such as chlorides, sulfates and nitrates. When the moisture
    evaporates, the chemicals remain on the surfaces. The moisture and the chemicals can be
    trapped in joints. A capillary action can put moisture into bond lines and cause corrosion.
    1.4.2 Salt particles, when dissolved in water, form strong electrolytes. Sea winds carry the
    dissolved salt on to the land and can make the coastal environments very corrosive.
    1.4.3 The industrial chemicals that follow can cause corrosion:
    − Carbon
    − Nitrates
    − Ozone
    − Sulfur dioxide
    − Sulfates.

    These industrial chemicals cause damage to nonmetallic materials and can cause severe
    corrosion of many metals.
    1.4.4 Warm, moist air, usually in tropical climates, can make the formation of corrosion a very
    quick process. Cold dry air, usually in cold climates, makes the formation of corrosion a
    slower process.
    Islands and areas near the sea are in severe corrosion zones. For information about the
    corrosion severity zones, refer to Fig. 1.
    1.5 Corrosion Inspection Schedule
    In addition to detailed corrosion inspections given in Time Limited Inspections and Scheduled
    Maintenance Checks, the following inspections are recommended to be implemented with the
    frequency detailed in Table 7. The inspection frequency depends on the location of the aircraft.
    External surfaces can be attacked more by environmentally polluted air and rain. Internal surfaces can
    remain wet for a longer period of time if water condenses.
    1.5.1 Aircraft External Inspection

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-08-10 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − Wash the exterior surface of the aircraft, AMM 12-B-12-20-01-00A-902A-A


    − Examine the aircraft skin, specially around the seams and fasteners
    − Make sure all drain holes are clear, AMM 12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A
    − Examine the landing gear compartments, specially the landing gear, wheels, tubing
    clamps and hydraulic actuators
    − Examine the flight control surfaces, especially the bearings
    − Examine all doors, specially the locks, handles and hinges
    − Examine the CPC film applied to external areas (Table 8).
    1.5.2 Aircraft Internal Inspection
    − Clean the aircraft interior, AMM 12-B-12-20-03-00A-902A-A
    − Remove the seats, carpets and floor panels
    − Examine Frames around doors
    − Examine center fuselage Frames 21 and 24, AMM 12-B-53-20-02-00A-313A-A
    − Examine seat tracks, especially the flanges
    − Examine the CPC film applied to internal areas (Table 8).
    1.6 Corrosion Inspection Frequency
    The corrosion severity zones for the different geographical locations are shown in Fig. 1, but local
    conditions can be more or less severe.

    Table 7 Corrosion protective inspection frequency


    Corrosion severity
    Inspection Interval
    zones
    Aircraft External Aircraft Internal
    Mild 12 months 12 months
    Moderate 6 months 12 months
    Severe 1 month 12 months
    Note: If corrosion is found during inspection, the inspection interval must be reduced (e.g
    six months instead of twelve, three months instead of six, and so on) until the corrosion
    problem is rectified.
    1.7 Corrosion Preventive Compounds
    Corrosion Preventive Compounds (CPCs) are applied to aircraft areas and components to give
    protection against corrosion. Table 8 gives the areas and their CPC application.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-08-10 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Table 8 CPC Application Areas


    Area Components CPC Remarks
    Application
    General Hinges, access panel fasteners CPC Ardrox AV -
    25 (Pt.No. P10-
    016)
    Battery compartment, on screws CPC Ardrox AV -
    and rivets 40 (Pt.No. P10-
    013)
    Engine Bolt heads and nuts that are part CPC Ardrox AV Not on bolts and
    compartment and of the airframe structure and 40 (Pt.No. P10- nuts that are part
    cowling engine cowling 013) of the engine
    Fuselage Interior of the fuselage (except CPC Ardrox AV Forward, center
    pressurized area below the floor) 8 (Pt.No. P10-0 and rear fuselage
    05)
    Interior of the fuselage CPC Ardrox AV -
    pressurized area below the floor 30 (Pt.No. P10-
    015)
    Bolt heads and nuts in the below CPC Ardrox AV -
    floor structure (wet areas) 40 (Pt.No. P10-
    013)
    Wings Interior of the wings (except the CPC Ardrox AV -
    fuel tank area) 8 (Pt.No. P10-0
    05)
    Stabilizers Interior of the horizontal and CPC Ardrox AV -
    vertical stabilizers 8 (Pt.No. P10-0
    05)
    Flight control Control cables CPC Ardrox AV -
    cables 25 (Pt.No. P10-
    016)
    Landing gear Bolt heads and nuts in the landing CPC Ardrox AV Not movable
    compartment gear legs and compartment 40 (Pt.No. P10- connections
    013)
    2 Corrosion Preventive Compounds Application Methods
    2.1 General
    2.1.1 Clean the structure with a vacuum cleaner.
    2.1.2 Make sure drain holes are clear.
    2.1.3 Examine the structure for signs of corrosion. Repair as necessary, AMM 12-
    B-20-40-00-00A-904A-A.
    2.1.4 Choose the applicable CPC according to the application area, refer to Table 8.
    2.2 Masking
    CPC must not be come into contact with the following components:
    − Oxygen systems
    − Brake discs/units
    − Drive belts
    − Clutch assemblies (e.g. air-conditioning compressor or autopilot servo)
    − Electrical components

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-08-10 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − Windows (acrylic glass)

    Mask the above parts or assemblies with masking tape and masking paper.

    Note

    To avoid damage on acrylic glass (crazing) use only approved masking tapes.

    2.3 Procedure
    2.3.1
    WARNING

    MAKE SURE THE AREA IS WELL VENTILATED WHEN YOU APPLY CPC. CPC
    PRODUCTS CONTAIN SOLVENTS.
    WEAR PROTECTIVE CLOTHING AND GOGGLES WHEN YOU APPLY THE CPC. WEAR
    A RESPIRATOR WHEN YOU WORK IN AN ENCLOSED AREA. DO NOT LET THE
    MATERIAL STAY ON YOUR SKIN FOR A LONG TIME. THE CPC CAN BE TOXIC AFTER
    LONG EXPOSURE.

    WARNING

    DO NOT APPLY CPC TO THE OXYGEN SYSTEM COMPONENTS. AN EXPLOSION CAN


    OCCUR.

    CAUTION

    DO NOT LET THE CPC GET ON THE BRAKE UNITS, DISCS OR TIRES, DRIVE BELTS
    OR CLUTCH ASSEMBLIES. MASK OFF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT AND ELECTRICAL
    CONNECTORS.

    Note

    Use an aerosol spray can or a Paint brush (Pt.No. Local supply) to apply the CPC.
    Use an extension tube with spray aerosol cans to minimize overspray.
    For large application areas, use spray equipment (airless or airmix application equipment)
    with extension tubes. Refer to the CPC manufacturer for recommendations and application
    instructions.

    Note

    Put masking tape on movable parts, before treatment with the CPC. If this is not possible,
    use the softer CPC Ardrox AV 25 (Pt.No. P10-016) as an alternative.

    On areas with damaged or fissured CPC layer apply the applicable CPC (Ref. Table 8),
    where necessary, to touch-up the damaged layer. It is not necessary to remove the old
    corrosion preventive compound unless the film is dark, cloudy, muddy or extremely dry.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-08-10 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.3.2 On areas with dark, cloudy, muddy or extremely dry CPC layer:
    − Apply CPC remover Ardrox AV 980 (Pt.No. P10-014) to remove the old CPC layer
    − Leave the CPC remover for 10 minutes, then scrub with a non-metallic soft-bristle brush
    − Rinse with de-ionized water
    − Let the structure dry
    − Apply a new layer of the applicable CPC (Ref. Table 8)

    Note

    The applied CPC film must show a slight red or amber color.

    2.3.3 CPC appearance:


    − The CPC film must be even, smooth and must fill all gaps and crevices
    − A narrow stream of CPC must remain along stringers, profiles and other joints to give
    penetration. A stream of 3 to 5 mm is acceptable.
    − A narrow circle of CPC must be visible around rivets and fasteners
    − CPC is not a decorative finish. Runs and drips are allowed, but isolated droplets are not
    allowed. Droplets indicate contaminated surface under the CPC layer.
    − Heavy overspray or excess CPC which has collected in pools or puddles must be
    removed.
    2.3.4 Remove excess CPC:
    − After CPC application, the accumulated deposits can be remove with absorbent rag or
    brush
    − CPC overspray on external panels or on areas to be painted must be removed
    immediately
    2.3.5 Drying:
    − Drying times specified on the CPC datasheet applies to open structures. In semi-closed
    or fully-closed structures, drying may take a longer time.
    − The drying process can be accelerated by ensuring good air circulation.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-08-10 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    ANCHORAGE

    SEATTLE

    MONTREAL

    CHICAGO NEW YORK

    DENVER

    LOS ANGELES
    ATLANTA

    HOUSTON

    MIAMI

    HAVANA

    PORT-AU-PRINCE
    MEXICO CITY
    CORROSION SEVERITY ZONE

    MILD

    MODERATE

    SEVERE
    S20105

    Figure 1 Corrosion Severity – Worldwide (Sheet 1 of 6)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-08-10 Page 9


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    CARACAS

    BOGOTA

    GUAYAQUIL

    LIMA

    BRASILIA
    LA PAZ

    SANTIAGO
    BUENOS AIRES
    MONTEVIDEO

    CORROSION SEVERITY ZONE

    MILD

    MODERATE

    SEVERE
    S20106

    Figure 1 Corrosion Severity – Worldwide (Sheet 2 of 6)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-08-10 Page 10


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    RABAT TEHERAN
    TEL AVIV
    BENGHAZI

    CAIRO

    MUSCAT
    JEDDAH

    KHARTOUM
    DAKAR
    KANO

    ACCRA KISANGANI

    NAIROBI

    LUANDA

    JOHANNESBURG

    CORROSION SEVERITY ZONE

    MILD

    MODERATE
    CAPE TOWN
    SEVERE
    S20107

    Figure 1 Corrosion Severity – Worldwide (Sheet 3 of 6)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-08-10 Page 11


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PERTH
    SYDNEY

    MELBOURNE

    WELLINGTON

    CHRISTCHURCH

    CORROSION SEVERITY ZONE

    MILD

    MODERATE
    S20108

    SEVERE

    Figure 1 Corrosion Severity – Worldwide (Sheet 4 of 6)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-08-10 Page 12


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    VLADIVOSTOK

    BEIJING

    SEOUL
    TOKYO

    DELHI

    KARACHI CALCUTTA

    HONG KONG

    MUMBAI RANGOON

    BANGKOK MANILLA
    CHENNAI

    HO CHI MINH

    KUALA LUMPUR
    SINGAPORE

    CORROSION SEVERITY ZONE

    MILD

    MODERATE

    SEVERE
    S20109

    Figure 1 Corrosion Severity – Worldwide (Sheet 5 of 6)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-08-10 Page 13


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    REYKJAVIK

    HELSINKI
    OSLO ST. PETERSBURG
    STOCKHOLM

    GLASGOW MOSCOW
    BELFAST
    COPENHAGEN

    DUBLIN

    MINSK
    LONDON
    WARSAW
    AMSTERDAM BERLIN

    FRANKFURT
    PARIS

    MUNICH

    VIENNA
    BUDAPEST
    MILAN

    BELGRADE
    MADRID ISTANBUL
    LISBON

    ROME

    ATHENS

    ALGIERS
    TUNIS

    CORROSION SEVERITY ZONE

    MILD

    MODERATE

    SEVERE
    S20110

    Figure 1 Corrosion Severity – Worldwide (Sheet 6 of 6)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-08-10 Page 14


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3 Corrosion Prevention and Control Program


    The Corrosion Prevention and Control Program (CPCP) applies to aircraft that have 25000 flight hours or
    30000 flights or more. The general definitions and maintenance philosophy follow.
    3.1 Definitions
    3.1.1 Local Corrosion
    Local corrosion is corrosion of a skin/bay that does not exceed one frame, stringer or
    stiffener bay. It is typically limited to a single frame, stringer or stiffener, or to more than one
    frame stringer or stiffener where no corrosion exists on two adjacent members located on
    each side of the corroded member.
    3.1.2 Widespread Corrosion
    Widespread corrosion is corrosion of two or more adjacent skins/bays or corrosion of two or
    more adjacent frames, stringers or stiffeners.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-08-10 Page 15


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    LOCAL CORROSION
    (CORROSION OCCURING IN NON-ADJACENT FRAMES)

    WIDESPREAD CORROSION
    (CORROSION OCCURING IN ADJACENT FRAMES)

    12-A-204000-A-S4080-30019-A-01-1

    Figure 2 Local and Widespread Corrosion

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-08-10 Page 16


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.2 Corrosion Levels


    3.2.1 Level 1 Corrosion
    Local corrosion that can be reworked or blended out within the allowable limit,
    3.2.2 Level 2 Corrosion
    Local corrosion that requires a single rework or blend out which exceeds the allowable limits,
    or
    Widespread corrosion that requires a single rework or blend out within the allowable limits.
    3.2.3 Level 3 Corrosion
    Widespread corrosion that requires a single rework or blend out which exceeds the allowable
    limits.
    3.3 Allowable Limits
    The allowable limit is the amount of material (normally expressed in material thickness) that may be
    removed or blended out without affecting the ultimate design strength of the structural element.
    The corrosion level definitions refer to the allowable blend out limit which is given in the applicable
    section of the Structural Repair Manual (SRM).
    Where no limit is given in the SRM, operators must contact Pilatus for advice.

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-08-10 Page 17
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-08-10 Page 18


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    CORROSION

    REPAIR

    Table of Contents Page

    CORROSION - REPAIR............................................................................................................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A CORROSION CONTROL - MAINTENANCE
    PRACTICES

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-40-00-00A-904A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2007-11-20 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This procedure must only be used for minor surface corrosion on components. If the corrosion is severe refer
    to the Structural Repair Manual as it may be necessary to replace or do a repair to the component.
    Corrosion products can be removed using these materials:
    − 320-400 grit abrasive paper
    − ScotchBrite abrasive mat
    − abrasive non-woven nylon wheel
    2
    CAUTION

    DO NOT USE STEEL WOOL, WIRE BRUSHES OR EMERY CLOTH TO REMOVE THE CORROSION.

    CAUTION

    CHEMICALS CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO SOME MATERIALS. REFER TO THE MANUFACTURERS DATA
    FOR INSTRUCTIONS. DO NOT USE IN AREAS WHERE CHEMICALS COULD BECOME TRAPPED.

    Aluminum Alloy Parts


    2.1 Remove the corrosion with 320-400 grit abrasive paper, ScotchBrite or abrasive non-woven nylon
    wheel.
    2.2 Wash the area to remove debris and prepare the surface.
    2.3 Apply wash primer or chemical conversion coating to the damaged area.
    2.4 Let the area become dry. Do not wipe dry.
    2.5 Prime the area with epoxy primer.
    2.6 Apply the applicable paint finish as necessary.
    2.7 On internal structure, apply corrosion preventative 12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A.
    3
    CAUTION

    DO NOT USE STEEL WOOL, WIRE BRUSHES OR EMERY CLOTH TO REMOVE THE CORROSION.

    CAUTION

    CHEMICALS CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO SOME MATERIALS. REFER TO THE MANUFACTURERS DATA
    FOR INSTRUCTIONS. DO NOT USE IN AREAS WHERE CHEMICALS COULD BECOME TRAPPED.

    Steel and Stainless Steel Parts


    3.1 Remove the corrosion with 320-400 grit abrasive paper, ScotchBrite, abrasive non-woven nylon
    wheel.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-40-00-00A-904A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2007-11-20 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.2 Prime the area with epoxy primer (if applicable).


    3.3 Apply the applicable paint finish as necessary.
    3.4 Apply corrosion preventative 12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A.

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-40-00-00A-904A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2007-11-20 Page 3
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-40-00-00A-904A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2007-11-20 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    CHEMICAL CONVERSION COATING

    MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Table of Contents Page

    CHEMICAL CONVERSION COATING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Solvent Part P01-010 As
    required
    Ethanol Part P01-015 As
    required
    Abrasive paper (320 grade) Part P02-013 As
    required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-40-10-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2007-11-20 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark


    Scotch-Brite Type A Part P02-016 As
    required
    Cloth, lint free Part P02-019 As
    required
    Alodine 1200S Part P07-001 As
    required
    Alodine 1132 Touch-N-Prep pen Part P07-021 As
    required
    Water that has no minerals in it Part Local supply As
    required
    Brush, synthetic (acid resistant) Part Local supply As
    required
    Masking tape Part Local supply As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedure to apply the chemical conversion coating to bare aluminum surfaces
    before you apply the sealant and the protective coating. There are two procedures:
    − Alodine 1200S solution (refer to Step 3)
    − Touch-N-Prep pen (refer to Step 4).

    The procedure with the Alodine 1132 Touch-N-Prep pen is used for areas that have a size of no more than
    50 mm x 50 mm (2.0 in. x 2.0 in.).
    2 Preparation
    2.1
    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE


    MANUFACTURERES HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-40-10-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2007-11-20 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    CAUTION

    YOU MUST NOT USE A STEEL OR COPPER BRUSH TO REMOVE CORROSION ON ALUMINUM
    PARTS. ONLY USE ABRASIVE PAPER.

    Note

    The ambient temperature must be more than 18°

    If necessary use the Scotch-Brite Type A (Pt.No. P02-016) made moist with water, or the Abrasive
    paper (320 grade) (Pt.No. P02-013) to activate the bare metal surface.
    2.2 If necessary use a Cloth, lint free (Pt.No. P02-019) made moist with the Solvent (Pt.No. P01-010) or
    the Ethanol (Pt.No. P01-015) to clean the bare metal surface.
    3 Chemical Conversion Coating with Alodine 1200S Solution
    3.1 Mix the Alodine 1200S (Pt.No. P07-001) as given in the manufacturer's instructions.
    3.2 Use a Brush, synthetic (acid resistant) (Pt.No. Local supply) and apply a smooth layer of the Alodine
    1200S (Pt.No. P07-001) to the bare metal surface.
    3.3 Let the conversion solution stay on the surface for:
    − One minute (if you must apply the primer).
    − Between two and three minutes (if you must not apply the primer).
    3.4 If the surface starts to dry before the reaction time of the solution, apply one more layer of the
    conversion solution.
    3.5 Use the Water that has no minerals in it (Pt.No. Local supply) or a Cloth, lint free (Pt.No. P02-019)
    made moist with Water that has no minerals in it (Pt.No. Local supply) and clean the area that has the
    coating.
    3.6 Let the coating dry at room temperature for a period of 30 minutes.
    4 Chemical Conversion Coating with Alodine 1132 Touch-N-Prep Pen
    4.1 Push down the tip of the Alodine 1132 Touch-N-Prep pen (Pt.No. P07-021) on the firm flat surface.
    4.2
    Note

    This will open the valve to let the Alodine 1132 solution get to the point of the pen.

    When the point of the pen becomes moist, release the pressure. This will make sure that not too much
    solution gets on the point of the pen.
    4.3 Apply the Alodine 1132 solution to the applicable area in one direction only, as given in the
    manufacturer's Technical Datasheet. There must be an overlap of 50% of each row.
    4.4 After a period of between one and two minutes, apply a second layer of the Alodine 1132 solution at
    90 degrees to the first layer. There must be an overlap of 50% of each row.
    4.5 If drops of the Alodine 1132 solution get on the surface, you must remove them immediately with a
    Cloth, lint free (Pt.No. P02-019).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-40-10-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2007-11-20 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    4.6
    Note

    Drops of the Alodine 1132 solution can prevent a good bond of the primer.

    Note

    Do not use water or a moist cloth to clean the area that has the chemical conversion coating.

    Let the coating dry at room temperature for a period of 30 minutes.

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-40-10-00A-901A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2007-11-20 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    STANDARD PRACTICES

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    STANDARD PRACTICES - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION................................................ 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description

    1 General
    This section contains standard practices that are small step-by-step procedures. They are given here because they
    are of a general type and are thus not copied to other sections of the manual.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2007-11-20 Page 1
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2007-11-20 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    COMPOSITE PANELS ANTI–CHAFE STRIP

    REPAIR

    Table of Contents Page

    COMPOSITE PANELS ANTI–CHAFE STRIP - REPAIR............................................................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Composite Panels Anti–Chafe Strips– Repair........................................................ 5

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A ACCESS PROVISION – HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR
    - DESCRIPTION
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Spatula (Plexiglass or similar) Part Local supply As
    Required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-01-00A-904A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2007-11-20 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Methyl-Ethyl-Ketone (MEK) Part P01-010 As
    Required
    Scotch-Brite Part P02-016 As
    Required
    Sealant (Long drying time) Part P08-020 As
    Required
    Sealant (Short drying time) Part P08-042 As
    Required
    Talcum powder Part P09-002 As
    Required
    Masking tape Part Local supply As
    Required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1
    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    General
    The composite panels on aircraft MSN 101-169 have a polyurethane tape on the inside edges to prevent
    chafing of the fiber reinforced plastic on the aircraft metallic structure. It has been found during service that
    the tape has come away from the panel. This repair procedure replaces the tape with a layer of polyurethane
    or polysulfide sealant.
    Aircraft MSN 170-999 have composite panels with an anti-chafe strip laminated in during manufacture. This
    repair procedure can also be used to repair these panels if necessary.
    The composite panels (Ref. 12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A) that can be repaired using this procedure are as
    follows:

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-01-00A-904A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2007-11-20 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Panel Ident Panel Description Panel Ident Panel Description


    No. No.
    - Left Strake 62 XT Winglet assy, right
    - Right Strake 51 MB Flap fairing, inner, left, rear
    12 AB Wing Fairing, bottom, fwd 61 MB Flap fairing, inner, right,
    rear
    12 BB Wing Fairing, bottom, rear 51 JB Flap fairing, inner, left,
    front
    12 AL Wing Fairing, fwd, left 61 JB Flap fairing, inner, right,
    front
    12 AR Wing Fairing, fwd, right 51 NB Flap fairing, center, left,
    rear
    12 BL Wing Fairing, top, left, 61 NB Flap fairing, center, right,
    center rear
    12 BR Wing Fairing, top, right, 51 LB Flap fairing, center, left,
    center front
    12 FL Wing Fairing, bottom, left 61 LB Flap fairing, center, right,
    front
    12 FR Wing Fairing, bottom, right 52 TB Flap fairing, outer, left,
    rear
    12 CL Wing Fairing, rear, left 62 TB Flap fairing, outer, right,
    rear
    12 CR Wing Fairing, rear, right 52 QB Flap fairing, outer, left,
    front
    - Wing Fairing, bottom, rear, 62 QB Flap fairing, outer, right,
    left front
    12 EL Cover, left 52 SB Aileron access panel, left
    12 ER Cover, right 62 SB Aileron access panel, right
    12 DL Wing Fairing, bottom, 43 AL Cowling assy, upper, left,
    center, left rear
    12 DR Wing Fairing, bottom, 43 AR Cowling assy, upper, right,
    center, right rear
    31 BB Fairing, ventral fin, front 42 AT Cowling assy, upper, front
    32 BT Fairing, vert stabilizer, 42 AB Cowling assy, lower, front
    front
    32 CT Fairing, vert stabilizer, rear
    31 AT Fairing assy, dorsal
    32 AB Fairing assy, rudder
    52 XT Winglet assy, left
    2
    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MANUFACTURERS
    HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.
    Repair (Ref. Fig. 1)
    2.1 Remove the access panel.
    2.2 Remove the loose tape from the edge of the panel.
    2.3 Use a small quantity of Methyl-Ethyl-Ketone (MEK) (Pt.No. P01-010) to make the old adhesive soft.
    Then scrape off the old adhesive with the Spatula (Plexiglass or similar) (Pt.No. Local supply).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-01-00A-904A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2007-11-20 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.4 Clean the edge of the panel with a small quantity of Methyl-Ethyl-Ketone (MEK) (Pt.No. P01-010) to
    remove all the old adhesive.
    2.5 Lightly make the edge of the panel rough with Scotch-Brite (Pt.No. P02-016). Remove the dust.
    2.6 Put Masking tape (Pt.No. Local supply) around the outside edge of the panel for protection.
    2.7 Apply a layer of Sealant (Short drying time) (Pt.No. P08-042) or Sealant (Long drying
    time) (Pt.No. P08-020) to the inside edge of the panel.
    2.8 Use the spatula to make a smooth strip that is 0.02 to 0.04 in (0,5 to 1 mm) thick and 1 to 1.5 in (25 to
    40 mm) wide.
    2.9 Remove the wet sealant from the panel screw holes.
    2.10 Smooth the seal with the spatula. Use soapy water to get a smooth surface.
    2.11 Let the sealant to become dry. If necessary trim the seal with a sharp knife or a plastic scraper to get
    the finish.
    2.12 Apply Talcum powder (Pt.No. P09-002) to the seal before installing the panel.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-01-00A-904A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2007-11-20 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    ANTI-CHAFE COATING

    COMPOSITE PART

    PLASTIC SPATULA

    SEALANT

    ANTI-CHAFE COATING
    WIDTH 1 to 1.5 in (20 to 40 mm) 0.02 to 0.04 in (0.5 to 1 mm) THICK
    APPROX. 0.04 in (1 mm)

    VIEW 'A'
    COMPOSITE LAMINATE
    20111

    Figure 1 Composite Panels Anti–Chafe Strips– Repair

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-01-00A-904A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2007-11-20 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-01-00A-904A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2007-11-20 Page 6
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PLASTIC TUBING

    MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Table of Contents Page

    PLASTIC TUBING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 2
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 3
    6 Approved Materials - Remarks............................................................................... 4
    7 Approved Cable Bushes......................................................................................... 8

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Tubes – Bend Radius............................................................................................. 5


    2 Tools....................................................................................................................... 7
    3 Bushings................................................................................................................. 9
    4 Assembly of Fittings............................................................................................... 11
    5 Tube Expansion Curve........................................................................................... 13
    6 Tubes – Mounting................................................................................................... 14
    7 Connection to the Single/Dual Static Port.............................................................. 15
    8 Assembly of the Pitot Static System Drains........................................................... 18
    9 Connection to Metallic Pipes.................................................................................. 20

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-02-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-10-24 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Tube forming tool Part Local manufacture As
    Required
    Heat gun Part Local supply As
    Required
    Side cutting pliers Part Local Supply As
    Required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Plastic Thermoplast Tubing Part 917.95.05.004 As
    Required
    Cable lead-through Part 944.87.33.102 As
    Required
    Cable lead-through Part 944.87.33.105 As
    Required
    Cable lead-through Part 944.87.31.005 As
    Required
    Nylo-seal Fitting (Straight fitting) Part 946.01.17.101 As
    Required
    Nylo-seal Fitting (T-fitting) Part 946.01.17.131 As
    Required
    Nylo-seal Fitting (Elbow fitting) Part 946.01.17.151 As
    Required
    Insert, conical Part 946.01.17.197 As
    Required
    Adaptor, aluminium (ADAHRS Part 946.20.85.202 As
    Pitot) Required
    Adaptor, aluminium (ADAHRS Part 946.20.85.209 As
    Static) Required
    Adaptor, aluminium (Static port) Part 521.31.12.055 As
    Required
    Cable Clips Part 946.31.05.703 As
    Required
    Spacer Part 971.32.18.105 As
    Required
    Spacer Part 971.32.18.108 As
    Required
    Cable Tie Part 971.32.51.105 As
    Required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-02-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-10-24 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark


    O-Ring Part 946.91.27.103 As
    Required
    O-Ring Part 946.91.27.106 As
    Required
    Vaseline Part P04-030 As
    Required
    Hellerine oil Part P10-012 As
    Required
    Grease, Plastilube #3 Part P04-004 As
    Required
    Grease, Duotempi PMY45 Part P04-029 As
    Required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1
    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items AMM 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    General
    This data module give the procedures for the maintenance and replacement of Pitot Static Tubes and other
    Plastic Thermoplast Tubing.

    CAUTION

    THE INCORRECT INSTALLATION OF PITOT STATIC TUBES OR OTHER PLASTIC THERMOPLAST


    TUBING, CAN CAUSE THEIR RELEASE FROM THE FITTING. THIS WILL CAUSE AN IMMEDIATE LOSS
    OF PRESSURE WITHIN THE RELEVANT SYSTEM, AND MAY ALSO CAUSE DAMAGE TO, OR
    COMPLETE FAILURE OF THE CONNECTED INSTRUMENTS/EQUIPMENT.

    CAUTION

    DO NOT USE TEFLON TAPE WHEN ASSEMBLING PITOT STATIC OR OTHER PLASTIC THERMOPLAST
    TUBING. THE TAPE CAN CAUSE AN OBSTRUCTION.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-02-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-10-24 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Plastic Thermoplast Tubing is used in the pitot static system, the air conditioning pressurization and
    temperature sensing systems.
    The following procedures describe the installation and maintenance of the Plastic Thermoplast Tubing:
    − cable bushings
    − assembly of fittings
    − tube expansion curve
    − mounting of tubes
    − connection to the static ports
    − water drainage
    − installation with clamps.
    2 Plastic Thermoplast Tubing
    2.1 Approved Materials
    Table 4 details the approved materials for the maintenance of the Pitot Static systems. Table 6 gives
    remarks about the approved materials.

    Table 6 Approved Materials - Remarks


    Nomenclature P/N Remarks
    Plastic Thermoplast Tubing 917.95.05.004 Diameter in mm
    Cable lead-through 944.87.33.102 Frame 21 and 24
    Cable lead-through 944.87.33.105 From Frames 17 to 35, except 21 and 24
    Cable lead-through 944.87.31.005 Grommet, from Frame 26 to 35
    Nylo-seal Fitting 946.01.17.101 Straight fitting
    Nylo-seal Fitting 946.01.17.131 T-fitting
    Nylo-seal Fitting 946.01.17.151 Elbow fitting (90 degrees)
    Adaptor, aluminium (ADAHRS Pitot) 946.20.85.202 T-fitting
    Adaptor, aluminium (ADAHRS Static) 946.20.85.209 Elbow (90 degrees)
    Adaptor, aluminium (Static port) 521.31.12.055 Pilatus part
    Cable Clips 946.31.05.703 Type depends on tube diameter
    2.2 Preparation
    Before you work on the Pitot Static systems:
    2.2.1 The working environment must be clean and protected from dust and moisture.
    2.2.2 The temperature must be between 18°C (64°F) and 30°C (86°F).
    2.2.3 Make sure that all the materials required to complete the task are available.
    2.2.4 Make sure that all of the tools required to do the task are available.
    2.2.5 If Pitot Static tubing is to be installed with a curve (Ref. Fig. 1), the curve must have sufficient
    bend radius to ensure that the tubing is not installed under tension, as this may cause it to
    pull out of the fitting.
    2.2.6 If the bend radius of a tube becomes too small, a Nylo-seal Fitting (Elbow
    fitting) (Pt.No. 946.01.17.151) (Elbow 90 degrees) must be used.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-02-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-10-24 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    BEND RADIUS

    BEND RADIUS

    12-A-205002-A-S4080-00088-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Tubes – Bend Radius

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-02-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-10-24 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.2.7 Use Grease, Duotempi PMY45 (Pt.No. P04-029) on the threads of plastic-to-plastic and
    aluminium-to-plastic fittings before assembly.
    2.2.8 Use Grease, Plastilube #3 (Pt.No. P04-004) on the threads of aluminium-to-aluminium
    fittings before assembly.
    2.2.9 Remove any grease that has leaked from the assembled fittings.
    2.3 Tools

    WARNING

    DO NOT USE CARPET CUTTERS TO CUT PLASTIC TUBING. FAILURE TO USE THE CORRECT
    CUTTING TOOL MAY CAUSE A PRESSURE LEAK BECAUSE THE CONICAL INSERT DOES NOT
    SEAL CORRECTLY ON THE PIPE END.
    Special Side cutting pliers (Pt.No. Local Supply) e.g. Type ZRS Figure 2 [1], must be used to cut the
    pitot static tubing. The cutting pliers must be serviceable with a sharp cutting edge. A damaged or dull
    cutting edge may not give a clean cut of the tubing. The tubing must be cut perpendicular to its
    longitudinal axis, or the Insert, conical (Pt.No. 946.01.17.197) will not seat correctly against the pipe
    end.
    To install tubing onto a metal pipe, the diameter of the tubing has to be slightly expanded with a Tube
    forming tool (Pt.No. Local manufacture) Figure 2 [2] (Ref. Step 2.12) to allow tubing to slide over the
    pipe.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-02-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-10-24 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    O 4.3 mm O 7 mm O 12 mm O 6 mm O 4.3 mm

    20 mm 9 mm 25 mm 50 mm 25 mm 9 mm 20 mm

    USE THIS END FOR USE THIS END FOR


    PRESSURIZATION 2 TEMPERATURE SENSING
    AND PITOT STATIC SYSTEM TUBING
    SYSTEM TUBING

    12-A-205002-A-S4080-00085-A-02-1

    Figure 2 Tools

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-02-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-10-24 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.4 Cable Bushings (Ref. Fig. 3)


    When tubing passes through a frame, it must be supported with plastic cable bushings to prevent any
    contact/chafing with the frame. Use the cable bushings in Table 7.
    Apply Vaseline to the bushing to reduce the friction of the tube when you insert it through the bushing.
    Remove the Vaseline after the tubing has been inserted.

    Table 7 Approved Cable Bushes


    Frame No. P/N
    17 - 20 944.87.33.105
    21 944.87.33.102
    22 + 23 944.87.33.105
    24 944.87.33.102
    25 - 35 944.87.33.105
    26 - 35 944.87.33.005

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-02-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-10-24 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    TUBE LEAD THROUGH RIGHT HAND SIDE

    TUBE LEAD THROUGH LEFT HAND SIDE

    12-A-205002-A-S4080-00089-A-01-1

    Figure 3 Bushings

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-02-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-10-24 Page 9


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.5 Assembly of Fittings


    The correct assembly of pitot static fittings is crucial to prevent leaks. To assemble fittings correctly, do
    as follows:
    2.5.1
    CAUTION

    A STOP-SLEEVE AND INSERT MUST ALWAYS BE INSTALLED TO ASSEMBLE A


    FITTING. IF YOU DO NOT THE FITTING WILL LEAK.

    CAUTION

    IF A FITTING HAS BEEN DISASSEMBLED, DO A VISUAL CHECK BEFORE IT IS RE-


    ASSEMBLED TO MAKE SURE THAT A STOP-SLEEVE AND INSERT ARE INSTALLED,
    OR A LEAK MAY OCCUR WHEN THE FITTING IS RE-ASSEMBLED.

    CAUTION

    IF A SPIGOT NUT IS TO BE DISCONNECTED FROM A FITTING, AND UNLESS IT IS TO


    BE REPLACED, THE STOP-SLEEVE AND INSERT MUST NOT BE REMOVED, OR A
    LEAK MAY OCCUR WHEN THE FITTING IS RE-ASSEMBLED.

    CAUTION

    DO NOT OVER-TIGHTEN THE SPIGOT NUT, AS THIS MAY CRACK THE NUT.

    Apply Grease, Duotempi PMY45 (Pt.No. P04-029) to all threads and assemble the fittings as
    follows:
    2.5.1.1 Step 1 - Install the spigot nut Figure 4 [1] and stop-sleeve Figure 4 [2] onto the
    tube Figure 4 [3], and then move the spigot nut a minimum of15 mm (0.59 in)
    back from the end of the tube.
    2.5.1.2 Step 2 - Make sure that the stop-sleeve Figure 4 [2] is locked into the spigot nut
    Figure 4 [1] and then install an Insert, conical (Pt.No. 946.01.17.197)
    Figure 4 [4] into the tube Figure 4 [3].
    2.5.1.3 Step 3 - Insert the tube Figure 4 [3] as far as it will go into the nylo-seal fitting
    Figure 4 [5].
    2.5.1.4 Step 4 - Hand tighten the spigot nut Figure 4 [1] onto the nylo-seal fitting
    Figure 4 [5] one and a half to two and a half turns, and then tighten it
    approximately half a turn with a wrench.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-02-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-10-24 Page 10


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    STEP 1

    15 mm

    3
    STEP 2 4

    5
    3
    STEP 3

    STEP 4

    12-A-205002-A-S4080-00090-A-01-1

    Figure 4 Assembly of Fittings

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-02-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-10-24 Page 11


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.5.2 Do a visual check of the fittings to make sure that there are no:
    − Kinks or splits in the tube
    − Cracks in the spigot nut
    − Cracks in the nylo-seal fitting
    2.6 Tube Expansion Curve (Ref. Fig. 5)
    The expansion curve of a tube compensates for possible deformations of the tube because of length
    elongation or the push-in of the heat and noise insulation mats between the frames.
    The tube should have expansion curves between frames 17-18 and 32-33. The expansion height of
    the curve should be between 40-50 mm inclusive.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-02-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-10-24 Page 12


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FR 17 FR 18 FR 32 FR 33

    40 - 50 mm

    12-A-205002-A-S4080-00091-A-01-1

    Figure 5 Tube Expansion Curve

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-02-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-10-24 Page 13


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.7 Mounting of the tubes

    CAUTION

    DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN CABLE TIES AS THEY MAY DAMAGE THE PLASTIC TUBING.
    The tubes have to be mounted with Cable Clips (Pt.No. 946.31.05.703) Figure 6 [1] or Cable
    Tie (Pt.No. 971.32.51.105) Figure 6 [3] to the aircraft structure or other suitable tubes/pipes.
    Adjacent tubes/pipes must be separated with a Spacer (Pt.No. 971.32.18.105) Figure 6 [2] to make
    sure that the correct distance between them is maintained.

    1
    2

    12-A-205002-A-S4080-00092-A-01-1

    Figure 6 Tubes – Mounting


    2.8 Connection to the Single/Dual Static Ports
    The connection of the static tubes to the single or dual static ports must be done as follows:
    2.8.1 On single static ports, a Nylo-seal Fitting (Straight fitting) (Pt.No. 946.01.17.101) Figure 7 [1]
    must be used as a default fitting to connect the plastic static tube to the Adaptor, aluminium
    (Static port) (Pt.No. 521.31.12.055) Figure 7 [2] on the static port Figure 7 [3].
    2.8.2 On dual static ports, a Nylo-seal Fitting (Elbow fitting) (Pt.No. 946.01.17.151) Figure 7 [6]
    must be used as a default fitting to connect the RH forward and LH rear plastic static tube to
    the Adaptor, aluminium (Static port) (Pt.No. 521.31.12.055) Figure 7 [5] on the static port
    Figure 7 [4].

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-02-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-10-24 Page 14


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3
    2

    A
    SINGLE STATIC PORT

    6 4

    A
    DUAL STATIC PORT

    12-A-205002-A-S4080-00093-A-01-1

    Figure 7 Connection to the Single/Dual Static Port

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-02-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-10-24 Page 15


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.9 Water Drainage


    The aluminium end fittings Figure 8 [6] are used to drain water from the pitot static tubes, and are
    screwed into the plastic fittings Figure 8 [5]. The thread of the aluminium end fittings must be greased
    with Grease, Duotempi PMY45 (Pt.No. P04-029). Any excess grease must be completely removed
    from around the fittings.
    Assemble the pitot static tube drains as follows:
    2.9.1 If you have only removed the aluminium end fitting to drain the system:
    2.9.1.1 Apply Grease, Duotempi PMY45 (Pt.No. P04-029) to the threads of the
    aluminium end fitting Figure 8 [6].
    2.9.1.2 Screw the aluminium end fitting Figure 8 [6] into the relevant pitot static nylo-
    seal fitting Figure 8 [5].
    2.9.1.3 Hand tighten the aluminium end fitting Figure 8 [6] one and a half to two and a
    half turns, and then tighten it approximately half a turn with a wrench.
    2.9.1.4 Remove any excess grease from around the aluminium end fitting Figure 8 [6]
    and the nylo-seal fitting Figure 8 [5].
    2.9.2 If you have to replace the pitot static drain fittings, do as follows:
    2.9.2.1
    CAUTION

    A STOP-SLEEVE AND INSERT MUST ALWAYS BE INSTALLED TO


    ASSEMBLE A FITTING. IF YOU DO NOT THE FITTING WILL LEAK.

    CAUTION

    IF A FITTING HAS BEEN DISASSEMBLED, DO A VISUAL CHECK BEFORE


    IT IS RE-ASSEMBLED TO MAKE SURE THAT A STOP-SLEEVE AND
    INSERT ARE INSTALLED, OR A LEAK MAY OCCUR WHEN THE FITTING IS
    RE-ASSEMBLED.

    CAUTION

    IF A SPIGOT NUT IS TO BE DISCONNECTED FROM A FITTING, AND


    UNLESS IT IS TO BE REPLACED, THE STOP-SLEEVE AND INSERT MUST
    NOT BE REMOVED, OR A LEAK MAY OCCUR WHEN THE FITTING IS RE-
    ASSEMBLED.

    CAUTION

    DO NOT OVER-TIGHTEN THE SPIGOT NUT, AS THIS MAY CRACK THE


    NUT.

    Step 1 - Install the spigot nut Figure 8 [1] and stop-sleeve Figure 8 [2] onto the
    tube Figure 8 [3], and then move the spigot nut approximately 15 mm (0.59 in)
    back from the end of the tube.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-02-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-10-24 Page 16


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.9.2.2 Step 2 - Make sure that the stop-sleeve Figure 8 [2] is locked into the spigot nut
    Figure 8 [1] and then install an Insert, conical (Pt.No. 946.01.17.197)
    Figure 8 [4] into the tube Figure 4 [3].
    2.9.2.3 Step 3 - Insert the tube Figure 8 [3] as far as it will go into the nylo-seal fitting
    Figure 8 [5] and hand tighten the spigot nut Figure 4 [1] onto the nylo-seal fitting
    Figure 4 [5] one and a half to two and a half turns, and then tighten it
    approximately half a turn with a wrench.
    2.9.2.4 Step 4 - Apply Grease, Duotempi PMY45 (Pt.No. P04-029) to the threads of the
    aluminium end fitting Figure 8 [6] then:
    2.9.2.4.1 Screw the aluminium end fitting Figure 8 [6] into the relevant
    pitot static nylo-seal fitting Figure 8 [5].
    2.9.2.4.2 Hand tighten the aluminium end fitting Figure 8 [6] one and a
    half to two and a half turns, and then tighten it approximately
    half a turn with a wrench.
    2.9.2.4.3 Remove any excess grease from around the aluminium end
    fitting Figure 8 [6] and the nylo-seal fitting Figure 8 [5].

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-02-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-10-24 Page 17


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    STEP 1

    15 mm

    STEP 2 3
    4

    5
    3
    STEP 3

    STEP 4

    12-A-205002-A-S4080-00095-A-01-1

    Figure 8 Assembly of the Pitot Static System Drains

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-02-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-10-24 Page 18


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.10 Subsequent Installation of Equipment


    If there is an installation of new equipment that requires change to the pitot static system e.g. Air Data
    Computer, the affected tubes must be separated and joined to the equipment with fittings (straight or
    90 degrees). The tubes must not be shortened.
    2.11 Pitot Static Testing
    If the pitot and/or static systems have been disturbed, a leak check must be done once all the pipes
    have been reconnected.
    2.12 Installation of Plastic Thermoplast Tubing with a Clamp
    Where a pitot static or other thermoplast tubing has to be connected straight onto a metallic pipe and
    not a fitting or an adaptor, do the these steps:
    2.12.1 Put the Tube forming tool (Pt.No. Local manufacture) Figure 2 [2] in a vice with the
    applicable end free from the vice.

    Note

    Refer to Fig. 2 for the dimensions of the Tube forming tool (Pt.No. Local manufacture).

    2.12.2 Lubricate the end of the tool with Hellerine oil (Pt.No. P10-012).
    2.12.3 Lubricate the inner end of the tube with Hellerine oil (Pt.No. P10-012).
    2.12.4 Use a Heat gun (Pt.No. Local supply) to warm the end of the new tube until the color starts
    to become clear.

    Note

    If the tube melts, cut off the damaged area and start again.

    2.12.5 Push the tube, without bending it, onto the tool and expand approximately 0.5 in (15 mm) of
    the tube end.
    2.12.6 If the tube end shape can not be made the first time, do the above steps again.
    2.12.7 When the tube end becomes cool remove it from the tool.
    2.12.8 Make sure that the metallic fitting Figure 9 [2] is installed correctly on the fitting Figure 9 [1].
    2.12.9 Install a clamp Figure 9 [3] over the tube Figure 9 [4].
    2.12.10 Carefully install the tube Figure 9 [4] over the metallic fitting Figure 9 [2].
    2.12.11 Tighten the clamp Figure 9 [3] to attach the tube Figure 9 [4] onto the metallic fitting
    Figure 9 [2].

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-02-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-10-24 Page 19


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    12-A-205002-A-S4080-00096-A-01-1

    Figure 9 Connection to Metallic Pipes

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-02-00A-901A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-10-24 Page 20
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    SEALANT APPLICATION

    MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Table of Contents Page

    SEALANT APPLICATION - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES........................................................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Ethanol Part P01-015 As
    Required
    Scotch-Brite (Very fine grade) Part P02-016 As
    Required
    Cotton cloth Part P02-019 As
    Required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-03-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2007-11-20 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark


    Sealant (PR 1425 B-2) Part P08-040 As
    Required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1
    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    General
    This data module gives the procedure to apply sealant around the edges of the windshields and side
    windows.
    2 Sealant Application
    2.1 If the sealant is to be repaired, use non-metallic tools and remove all the old sealant from the doubler
    and window.
    2.2 Put masking tape around the edge of the window doubler.
    2.3 Put masking tape on the surface of the windows 0.3 in (8 mm) in from the edges. Cover the remaining
    glass to protect it from being scratched.
    2.4 Use Scotch-Brite (Very fine grade) (Pt.No. P02-016) to carefully make rough the glass area to be
    sealed.
    2.5 Clean the area to be sealed with Ethanol (Pt.No. P01-015) and wipe dry with Cotton
    cloth (Pt.No. P02-019).

    Note

    To get a correct bond of the sealant, it is important to make sure that the glass surface is clean.

    2.6 Apply Sealant (PR 1425 B-2) (Pt.No. P08-040) around the edge of the windows and make a smooth
    surface.
    2.7 Remove the masking tape from the windows while the sealant is wet.
    2.8 Let the sealant to become fully dry before the aircraft is used.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-03-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2007-11-20 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-03-00A-901A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2007-11-20 Page 3
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-03-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2007-11-20 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    BUSHES AND BEARINGS

    MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Table of Contents Page

    BUSHES AND BEARINGS - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES...................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Static Load Test...................................................................................................... 6

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Hot air blower or heat lamps Part Local supply As
    (100 to 120° C) Required
    Non metallic scraper Part Local supply As
    Required
    Press (Or equivalent) Part Local supply As
    Required
    Mandrel Part Local supply As
    Required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-04-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-03-22 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark


    Torque wrench Part Local supply As
    Required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Methyl-Ethyl-Keytone (MEK) Part P01-010 As
    Required
    Scotch-Brite Type A Part P02-016 As
    Required
    Corrosion preventative Part P04-012 As
    Required
    Alodine 1200S Part P07-001 As
    Required
    Epoxy adhesive Part P08-059 As
    Required
    Grease Part P04-003 As
    Required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1
    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    General
    This data module gives the procedures to replace the following bushes and bearings that are installed in the
    aircraft:
    − Clearance fit bushes
    − Bonded bushes/bearings
    − Press fit bushes/bearings

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-04-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-03-22 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2
    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE OPERATOR’S AND
    MANUFACTURERS’ HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

    Removal of Clearance Fit Bushes


    2.1 Remove the bush from the bore in the structure/component. Discard the bush.
    2.2 Clean the bore in the structure/component with the Methyl-Ethyl-Keytone (MEK) (Pt.No. P01-010).
    2.3 Polish the bore in the structure/component with the Scotch-Brite Type A (Pt.No. P02-016).
    2.4 Clean the bore in the structure/component with the Methyl-Ethyl-Keytone (MEK) (Pt.No. P01-010).
    3
    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE OPERATOR’S AND
    MANUFACTURERS’ HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

    Installation of Clearance Fit Bushes


    3.1 Clean the outer surface of the new bush with the Methyl-Ethyl-Keytone (MEK) (Pt.No. P01-010).
    3.2 Make sure the new bush is free to move in the bore in the structure/component.
    3.3 Apply a layer of the Corrosion preventative (Pt.No. P04-012) to the outer surface of the bush and to
    the bore in the structure/component. Make sure the outer surface of the bush is completely covered
    with the corrosion preventative.
    3.4 Install the bush in the bore of the structure/component.
    3.5 Remove all the excess corrosion preventative from the structure/component.
    4 Replacement of Bonded Bushes/Bearings
    The work area for the replacement of bonded bushes and bearings must be clean, dust and solvent free.
    The temperature must be between 60 and 80° F (15 and 30° C) with the humidity not more than 80%.
    5
    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE OPERATOR’S AND
    MANUFACTURERS’ HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

    Removal of Bonded Bushes/Bearings


    5.1 If the bush is flanged, make a record of its position in the structure/component. This is to make sure
    the new bush is bonded in the correct position in the structure/component.
    5.2 Use the Hot air blower or heat lamps (100 to 120° C) (Pt.No. Local supply) and apply heat to loosen
    the adhesive between the bush/bearing and the bore in the structure/component.
    5.3 Use a Press (Or equivalent) (Pt.No. Local supply) or an applicable diameter drift to remove the bush/
    bearing from the bore in the structure/component. Discard the bush/bearing.
    5.4 Use the Non metallic scraper (Pt.No. Local supply) and Methyl-Ethyl-Keytone (MEK) (Pt.No. P01-010)
    to remove all the remaining adhesive from bore in the structure/component. Be careful not to damage
    the bore.
    5.5 Polish the bore in the structure/component with the Scotch-Brite Type A (Pt.No. P02-016).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-04-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-03-22 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    5.6 Clean the bore in the structure/component with the Methyl-Ethyl-Keytone (MEK) (Pt.No. P01-010).
    5.7 Apply a layer of Alodine 1200S (Pt.No. P07-001) to the surface of the bore in the structure/component.
    6
    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE OPERATOR’S AND
    MANUFACTURERS’ HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

    Installation of Bonded Bushes/Bearings


    6.1 Clean the bonding surface of the new bush/bearing with the Methyl-Ethyl-Keytone
    (MEK) (Pt.No. P01-010). Make sure the MEK does not go into bearing surfaces.
    6.2 If more than 72 hours has passed since the Alodine 1200S (Pt.No. P07-001) was applied to the bore
    in the structure/component, lightly rub the bonding surface in the bore with Scotch-Brite Type
    A (Pt.No. P02-016). Take care not to remove the corrosion protection. Clean the bonding surface with
    the Methyl-Ethyl-Keytone (MEK) (Pt.No. P01-010).
    6.3 Make sure the new bush/bearing is free to move in the bore in the structure/component.
    6.4 Mix the two parts of the Epoxy adhesive (Pt.No. P08-059).
    6.5 Apply a layer of Epoxy adhesive (Pt.No. P08-059) to the applicable surface of the bush/bearing and
    the bore in the structure/component. There must be sufficient adhesive applied to fully fill the gap
    between the bush/bearing and the bore.
    6.6 Install the bush/bearing (with the flange, if applicable, in the correct position as recorded during
    removal) in the bore of the structure/component. Use a round bar of the correct diameter (or
    equivalent) where necessary to install bushes which must align. Put the bar in position through the
    bushes immediately after installation of the bushes (while the adhesive is soft). Keep the bar in
    position until the adhesive has cured.
    6.7 Remove all the excess adhesive from the structure/component and allow the adhesive to dry. Read
    the manufacturers instructions for the correct cure time.
    6.8 Repair the structure surface finish of the structure/component where necessary.
    7 Static Load Test of Bonded Bushes/Bearings
    7.1 Two procedures are given to do a static load test of bonded bushes:
    − use a Mandrel (Pt.No. Local supply) to apply the static load
    − use the bush removal tools and a Torque wrench (Pt.No. Local supply) to apply the load.

    You can use either procedure to do a static load test for bonded bushes. Do the load test at ambient
    temperature after the adhesive has fully cured.
    When applying the test load to the bush, be careful not to damage the surrounding structure. The
    structure shall be supported as required to withstand the load applied to the bush.
    7.2 Static Load Test using a Mandrel
    7.2.1 Refer to Fig. 1 for the applicable static test load, or use the static load specified in the
    relevant bush installation procedure.
    7.2.2 Install a Mandrel (Pt.No. Local supply) in the bush.
    7.2.3 Apply the calculated or specified static load to the mandrel.
    7.2.4 Make sure that the bond is satisfactory and that the bush has not moved.
    7.2.5 If the bond is not satisfactory, or the bush has moved, remove and discard the bush (Para 5).
    Install a new bush (para 6) and then do the static load test again.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-04-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-03-22 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    7.3 Static Load Test using Bush Removal Tools


    7.3.1
    Note

    Apply Grease (Pt.No. P04-003) to the bush removal tool screw thread to make sure that the
    run-down torque is a minimum.

    Install the tools normally used to remove the bush.


    7.3.2 Use a Torque wrench (Pt.No. Local supply) and apply the applicable load as per Fig. 1, or
    use the load specified in the relevant bush installation procedure.
    7.3.3 Make sure that the bond is satisfactory and that the bush has not moved.
    7.3.4 If the bond is not satisfactory, or the bush has moved, remove and discard the bush (Para 5).
    Install a new bush (para 6) and then do the static load test again.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-04-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-03-22 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    TEST LOAD (P)

    MANDREL

    BEARING
    OR BUSH

    THE APPLICABLE TEST LOAD IS TO BE CALCULATED BY THE FOLLOWING FORMULA, BUT IS LIMITED BY
    THE MAX. LOAD AS DEFINED IN THE TABLE BELOW.

    CALCULATION OF THE TEST LOAD:

    P = 31.4 x D x h P = 4555 x D x h
    P = TEST LOAD IN (N) P = TEST LOAD IN (lbf)
    D = BORE DIAMETER IN (mm) D = BORE DIAMETER IN (in)
    h = HEIGHT OF BEARING/BUSH IN (mm) h = HEIGHT OF BEARING/BUSH IN (in)

    MAXIMUM APPLICABLE TEST LOAD:

    FOR THIN WALL BUSH: Pmax = 500 N Pmax = 112 lbf


    FOR NORMAL WALL BUSH: Pmax = 2000 N Pmax = 450 lbf

    DEFINITION:

    A BUSH IS DEFINED AS A 'THIN WALL BUSH', IF: t/D < 0.05 (WHERE "t" IS THE MIN. WALL THICKNESS AND
    "D" IS THE MIN. OUTER DIAMETER OF THE BUSH).

    12-A-205004-A-S4080-00087-A-02-1

    Figure 1 Static Load Test

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-04-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-03-22 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    8
    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE OPERATOR’S AND
    MANUFACTURERS’ HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

    Removal of Press Fit Bushes/Bearings


    8.1 If the bush is flanged, make a record of its position in the structure/component. This is to make sure
    the new bush is installed in the correct position in the structure/component.
    8.2 Use the press or an applicable diameter drift to remove the bush/bearing from the bore in the
    structure/component. Discard the bush/bearing.
    8.3 Clean the bore in the structure/component with the Methyl-Ethyl-Keytone (MEK) (Pt.No. P01-010).
    8.4 Polish the bore in the structure/component with the Scotch-Brite Type A (Pt.No. P02-016).
    8.5 Clean the bore in the structure/component with the Methyl-Ethyl-Keytone (MEK) (Pt.No. P01-010).
    9
    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE OPERATOR’S AND
    MANUFACTURERS’ HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

    Installation of Press Fit Bushes/Bearings


    9.1 Clean the outer surface of the new bush/bearing with the Methyl-Ethyl-Keytone
    (MEK) (Pt.No. P01-010). Make sure the MEK does not go into bearing surfaces.
    9.2 Apply a layer of the Corrosion preventative (Pt.No. P04-012) to the outer surface of the bush/bearing
    and to the bore in the structure/component. Make sure the outer surfaces of the bush/bearing is
    completely covered with the corrosion preventative.
    9.3 Use the Press (Or equivalent) (Pt.No. Local supply) or an applicable diameter drift to install the bush/
    bearing (if applicable, with the flange in the correct position as recorded during removal) in the bore of
    the structure/component. Only use the minimum force necessary to install the bush/bearing.
    9.4 Remove all the excess corrosion preventative from the structure/component.
    9.5 Repair the structure/component surface finish of the structure/component where necessary.

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-04-00A-901A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-03-22 Page 7
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-04-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-03-22 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    HEXASHIELD CONNECTOR

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    HEXASHIELD CONNECTOR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION...................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Hexashield Connector............................................................................................ 3
    2 Shielded Wire preparation...................................................................................... 5
    3 Unshielded Wire Preparation.................................................................................. 7

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Heat gun Part Local supply As
    required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-10-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-09 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    HexaShield shielded termination Part 971.19.26.113 As
    kit required
    HexaShield unshielded Part 971.19.26.112 As
    termination kit required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedures to remove and install Tyco Hexashield type electrical connectors,
    prepare and install the wire shield terminations for these connectors. The electrical connectors are used on
    the Air Data Attitude and Heading Reference System (ADAHRS), the Modular Avionics Unit (MAU)
    Advanced Graphics Module (AGM) and the autopilot servos. The shield terminations are part of the Electro
    Magnetic Interference (EMI) and High Intensity Radiated Field (HIRF) protection on the aircraft.
    2 Removal
    2.1 Remove the five screws that hold the side plate to the connector.
    2.2 Remove the connector side plate.
    2.3 Make a note of the position of the wires in the ferrule guide and in the connector.
    2.4 Remove the ferrule from the ferrule guide.
    2.5 Use an insert/extract tool to extract the wire contacts from the connector.
    2.6 If needed, remove the ferrule and solder sleeve:
    2.6.1
    CAUTION

    TAKE CARE WHEN YOU REMOVE THE FERRULE AND SOLDER SLEEVE. YOU CAN
    DAMAGE THE WIRES AND THE INSULATION.

    Use a heat gun (Heat gun (Pt.No. Local supply)) to heat the ferrule and solder sleeve.
    2.6.2 Use pliers to grip the ferrule and solder sleeve assembly, then gently pull the assembly off
    the cable.
    2.6.3 If needed, use a heat gun to soften and remove any sleeve material that stayed on the cable.
    2.6.4 Inspect the wires, the insulation and the braid carefully to make sure that there is no
    damage.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-10-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-09 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Figure 1 Hexashield Connector


    3 Preparation - Shielded Wires
    Refer to Fig. 2
    3.1
    CAUTION

    MAKE SURE THAT THE INNER SHIELD DOES NOT TOUCH THE OUTER SHIELD. THIS CAN
    CAUSE A BREAKDOWN OF THE HIRF/EMI PROTECTION AND POSSIBLE ELECTRICAL SPIKES
    ON THE DIGITAL DATABUS.

    Strip the insulation from the shielding so that there is 10 mm (0.4 in) of bare shielding.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-10-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-09 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.2 Use heatshrink tubing from the kit (HexaShield shielded termination kit (Pt.No. 971.19.26.113)). Install
    the heatshrink tubing over the individual wires and the end of the stripped shielding braid. The
    window-like opening in the heatshrink tubing must be over the shielding braid.
    3.3 Push the solder sleeve over the wires and heatshrink tubing. The solder ring in the sleeve must cover
    the window-like opening in the heatshrink tubing.
    3.4 Push the ferrule over the heatshrink tubing and into the solder sleeve until the ferrule touches the
    shielding braid.
    3.5 Use a heat gun (Heat gun (Pt.No. Local supply)) to shrink the heatshrink tubing and the solder sleeve.
    Make sure that the solder ring melts and connects with the shielding braid.
    3.6 Let the assembly cool.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-10-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-09 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    10 mm

    HEATSHRINK WIRE BRAIDED


    SLEEVE SHEILD

    WIRE BRAIDED
    SOLDER SHEILD
    SLEEVE

    FERRULE

    12-B-205010-A-S4080-00001-A-01-1

    Figure 2 Shielded Wire preparation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-10-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-09 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    4 Preparation - Unshielded Wires


    Refer to Fig. 3
    4.1 Remove the outer insulation form the multi-core cable as needed.
    4.2 Put the sleeve from the kit (HexaShield unshielded termination kit (Pt.No. 971.19.26.112)) over the
    wires.
    4.3 Put the ferrule over the wires.
    4.4 Put the heatshrink tubing from the kit (HexaShield unshielded termination kit (Pt.No. 971.19.26.112))
    over the wires.
    4.5 Use a heat gun (Heat gun (Pt.No. Local supply)) to shrink the tubing.
    4.6 Make sure that the ferrule is 48 mm (1.9 in) from the end of the wires.
    4.7 Push the sleeve over the end of the ferrule.
    4.8 Use a heat gun (Heat gun (Pt.No. Local supply)) to shrink the sleeve.
    4.9 Let the assembly cool.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-10-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-09 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    HEATSHRINK
    HEATSHRINK FERRULE SLEEVE
    TUBING

    48 mm

    12-B-205010-A-S4080-00003-A-01-1

    Figure 3 Unshielded Wire Preparation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-10-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-09 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    5 Installation
    5.1 Install the wires in the connector at the correct positions (noted in Para 2 Step 2.3).
    5.2 Install the ferrules in the correct positions (noted in Para 2 Step 2.3).
    5.3 Put the connector in the backshell.
    5.4 Put the side plate on the connector backshell.
    5.5 Install the five screws to hold the side plate on the backshell.

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-20-50-10-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-09 Page 8
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    AIR CONDITIONING

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    AIR CONDITIONING - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION........................................................ 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1
    1.1 Distribution System................................................................................................. 1
    1.2 Pressurization Control System............................................................................... 2
    1.3 Heating and Cooling System ................................................................................. 2
    1.4 Additional Cooling System...................................................................................... 2
    1.5 Temperature Control System................................................................................. 2

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-21-20-00-00A-040A-A DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-21-30-00-00A-040A-A PRESSURIZATION CONTROL - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-21-40-00-00A-040A-A HEATING AND COOLING - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-21-50-00-00A-040A-A ADDITIONAL COOLING - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-21-60-00-00A-040A-A TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION
    AND OPERATION
    12-B-31-41-00-00A-040A-A MODULAR AVIONICS UNIT - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION

    Description

    1 General
    The air conditioning system is known as the integrated Environmental Control System (ECS). The temperature and
    pressure in the aircraft is controlled by the ECS which receives inputs from the Modular Avionics Unit (MAU) (Refer
    to DM 12-B-31-41-00-00A-040A-A). The components in the ECS are described in these sub-systems:

    1.1 Distribution System


    (Refer to DM 12-B-21-20-00-00A-040A-A)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-00-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-29 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    The distribution system sends air into the flight compartment through floor, body level and overhead outlets and
    into the passenger compartment through floor and overhead outlets. It also sends air from an auxiliary heating unit
    through ducting to the underfloor avionics compartment.

    1.2 Pressurization Control System


    (Refer to DM 12-B-21-30-00-00A-040A-A)
    The Air Cycle System (ACS) supplies cooled engine bleed-air to the distribution system for the air conditioning and
    the pressurization of the flight and passenger compartments. The pressurization control system controls the rate of
    exhaust of the air that the ACS supplies for ventilation of the flight compartment and the passenger compartment. It
    keeps the air (cabin) pressure in the flight compartment and passenger compartment between the safe limits for
    the passengers and crew, and the aircraft structure.

    1.3 Heating and Cooling System


    (Refer to DM 12-B-21-40-00-00A-040A-A)
    Air from the ACS is used as the primary source for heating. An auxiliary, secondary heating system supplies
    heated air to the distribution system to increase the temperature in the passenger compartment in cold ambient
    temperatures. The auxiliary heating system also supplies heated air to the underfloor avionics compartment
    through a separate heating unit. An optional footwarmer supplies heated air to foot outlets in the flight
    compartment. The cooling system uses cooled air from the ACS to decrease the temperature of the air in the flight
    and passenger compartments.

    1.4 Additional Cooling System


    (Refer to DM 12-B-21-50-00-00A-040A-A)
    The optional Vapour Cycle Cooling System gives additional cooling. When installed, the VCCS is controlled by the
    integrated ECS Controller (IEC).

    1.5 Temperature Control System


    (Refer to DM 12-B-21-60-00-00A-040A-A)
    The temperature of the air in the flight and passenger compartments is controlled by the integrated ECS Controller
    (IEC).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-00-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-29 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION................................................ 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1
    2 Component Description.......................................................................................... 2
    2.1 Firewall Shut-Off Valve (FSOV).............................................................................. 2
    2.2 Emergency Ram-Air Scoop.................................................................................... 2
    2.3 Non-Return Valve (NRV)........................................................................................ 2
    2.4 Plenum Chamber.................................................................................................... 3
    2.5 Flow Control Valve (FCV)....................................................................................... 3
    2.6 Ducting................................................................................................................... 3
    2.7 Recirculation Fans.................................................................................................. 3
    2.8 Flight Compartment Outlets.................................................................................... 3
    2.9 Passenger Compartment Outlets........................................................................... 3
    2.10 Underfloor Outlets.................................................................................................. 4
    3 Operation (Ref. )..................................................................................................... 4

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Distribution – Schematic......................................................................................... 5

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-21-30-00-00A-040A-A PRESSURIZATION CONTROL - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-21-40-00-00A-040A-A HEATING AND COOLING - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-21-50-01-00A-040A-A VAPOUR CYCLE COOLING SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION
    AND OPERATION
    12-B-21-60-00-00A-040A-A TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION
    AND OPERATION

    Description

    1 General
    The distribution system, which is controlled by the integrated Environmental Control System (ECS) Controller (IEC),
    sends air into the flight compartment through floor, body level and overhead outlets and into the passenger

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-20-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    compartment through floor and overhead outlets. It also sends air from an auxiliary heating unit through ducting to
    the underfloor avionics compartment.
    The distribution system has these components:
    − A firewall shut-off valve (FSOV)
    − An emergency ram-air scoop
    − A non-return valve (NRV)
    − A plenum chamber
    − An air flow control valve (FCV)
    − Ducting
    − Flight compartment outlets
    − Passenger compartment outlets
    − Underfloor outlets

    The distribution system gets inputs from:


    − The air cycle system (ACS) (Refer to DM 12-B-21-40-00-00A-040A-A)
    − The IEC (Refer to DM 12-B-21-60-00-00A-040A-A)
    − The vapour-cycle cooling system (VCCS) (when installed) (Refer to DM 12-B-21-50-01-00A-040A-A)
    The distribution system supplies the air for the pressurization system to pressurize the aircraft (Refer to DM 12-
    B-21-30-00-00A-040A-A).
    The distribution system gives an output for the heating system (Refer to DM 12-B-21-40-00-00A-040A-A).

    2 Component Description

    2.1 Firewall Shut-Off Valve (FSOV)


    The firewall shut-off valve (FSOV) stops the supply of air from the air cycle system to the distribution system in an
    emergency. The FSOV is installed at the bottom and to the right of frame 10. A cable connects the bellcrank on the
    FSOV to the ACS EMERG SHUT-OFF lever in the rear of the flight compartment center console. The cable for the
    emergency ram-air scoop is also connected to the bellcrank. A microswitch on the FSOV operates the ACS Shut-
    Off latch relay of the environmental control system (ECS) when the FSOV closes. At the same time the FSOV open
    input is removed from the integrated ECS controller (IEC).

    2.2 Emergency Ram-Air Scoop


    The emergency ram-air scoop opens when the FSOV closes. It lets air from outside the aircraft go into the
    distribution system. The emergency ram-air scoop is installed at the bottom and to the right of the fuselage
    between frames 13 and 14. It is operated by a cable that is connected to the bellcrank on the FSOV.

    2.3 Non-Return Valve (NRV)


    The non-return valve stops the depressurization of the flight compartment and the passenger compartment if:
    − The ACS fails and the FSOV is open
    − The FSOV is closed and the emergency ram-air scoop is open

    The non-return valve is installed at frame 15 between the emergency ram-air scoop and the plenum chamber.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-20-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.4 Plenum Chamber


    The plenum chamber distributes the air supply to the flight compartment and the passenger compartment. It is
    installed under the flight compartment floor between frames 15 and 16.

    2.5 Flow Control Valve (FCV)


    The flow control valve (FCV) is installed between the plenum chamber and the ducting of the ECS.
    The FCV controls the supply of air from the ACS to the flight compartment and the passenger compartment, this
    adjusts the air flow related to the temperature set by the pilot on the Evironment Window.
    The FCV actuator opens and closes the FCV related to the input it receives from the IEC.

    2.6 Ducting
    The ducting connects the plenum chamber and the heaters of the ECS to the outlets in the flight compartment, the
    passenger compartment and under the floor.
    The ducting to the floor and body level outlets at the pilot and copilot positions is installed between the structure
    and the trim panels of the flight compartment. The ducting for the outlets in the overhead panel is part of the
    overhead panel.
    The ducting in the passenger compartment is part of the sidewalls and, for the VCCS (when installed), in the
    overhead panel, which extends into the flight compartment.

    2.7 Recirculation Fans


    The recirculation fans are vent fans which circulates the air through the overhead ducting to the passenger
    compartment and the flight compartment.
    The recirculation fans are installed at the rear of the passenger compartment between frames 34 and 35.
    When the VCCS is installed the recirculation fans are part of that system.

    2.8 Flight Compartment Outlets


    The flight compartment outlets send air to the pilot and copilot positions.
    A floor level and a body level outlet is installed at the pilot and copilot positions. They distribute the air from the
    plenum chamber. Each body level outlet has an eyeball socket to control the direction and quantity of the airflow
    from it. The floor outlets have a valve that can be moved to the open or closed position by a lever which is installed
    on the sidewall. There are placards that show the OPEN and CLOSED positions.
    Outlets installed in the overhead panel distribute air from the ventilation blowers or the VCCS (when installed).
    They have eyeball sockets to control the direction and quantity of the airflow from them.
    An optional footwarmer supplies heated air to a distribution duct with outlets installed at the pilots and copilots foot
    positions.

    2.9 Passenger Compartment Outlets


    The passenger compartment outlets send air into the passenger compartment.
    Outlets installed along each side of the passenger compartment in the bottom of the left and right sidewalls
    distribute air from the plenum chamber and the cabin heater of the auxiliary heating system.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-20-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Outlets installed along each side of the passenger compartment in the bottom of the left and right sidewalls
    distribute air from the plenum chamber. The cabin heater supplies heated air to the distribution duct in the right
    sidewall.
    Outlets installed in the overhead panel distribute air from the ventilation blowers or the VCCS (when installed).
    These outlets have eyeball sockets to control the direction and quantity of the airflow that comes out.

    2.10 Underfloor Outlets


    The underfloor ducts send air, that is heated by the underfloor heater, to the avionic compartment.

    3 Operation (Ref. Fig. 1)


    Air from the ACS goes through the FSOV and the NRV into the plenum chamber and through the FCV. The IEC
    signals the FCV to send air to the flight compartment and to the passenger compartment as necessary.
    The air to the flight compartment goes through the ducting and into the flight compartment through the floor and
    body level outlets at the pilot and copilot positions. The air to the passenger compartment goes through the ducting
    and into the passenger compartment through the outlets at the bottom of the sidewalls.
    The distribution system also uses hot air from the auxiliary heating system to increase the air temperature. The hot
    air from the heater helps increase the temperature of the air that comes from the distribution outlets.
    Cool air from the VCCS (when installed) is supplied to the rear connections of the overhead panels which distribute
    the air to the passenger and flight compartments, as well as, air supplied from the flood outlet at the rear of the
    passenger compartment. On aircraft without a VCCS installed the blowers supply recirculated air to rear
    connections of the overhead panel which distribute the air to the passenger and flight compartments.
    The pressurization system uses the air from the distribution system to pressurize the aircraft. This helps the
    circulation of the air inside the flight compartment and the passenger compartment and keeps the air fresh. The air
    goes out of the aircraft through the outflow valve or the safety valve of the pressurization system.
    In an emergency, operation of the ACS EMERG SHUT-OFF lever closes the FSOV and opens the emergency ram-
    air scoop. The supply of air from the ACS to the distribution system stops and the microswitch on the FSOV
    disengages the ACS latch relay of the environmental control system. This closes the primary shut-off valve in the
    engine compartment and the ECS amber caution on the CAS display comes on. The emergency ram-air scoop lets
    air from outside the aircraft go into the distribution system through the valve.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-20-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    CONDITIONED AIR
    SUPPLIED FROM ECS

    FIREWALL
    FOOT WARMER SHUTOFF VALVE
    OPTION

    FOOT
    OUTLET FOOT
    OUTLET

    FOOT OUTLET
    FOOT OUTLET OPEN/CLOSED
    OPEN/CLOSED LEVER
    LEVER

    PANEL PANEL
    OUTLET OUTLET

    FLOW
    CONTROL EMERGENCY RAM
    VALVE AIR INLET

    PLENUM
    CHAMBER
    NON-RETURN
    VALVE

    PAX
    DOOR

    CABIN SIDEWALL CABIN SIDEWALL


    DISTRIBUTION DISTRIBUTION
    DUCT LEFT DUCT RIGHT

    U/F HEATER

    U/FLOOR
    DISTRIBUTION
    DUCT

    CABIN HEATER

    INLET FROM
    CABIN

    FLOOR STEP
    120247

    Figure 1 Distribution – Schematic

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-20-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-20-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FIREWALL SHUT–OFF VALVE

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    FIREWALL SHUT–OFF VALVE - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.................................................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Firewall Shut–Off Valve – Removal/Installation...................................................... 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903S-A POWER PLANT TEST 18 – ENVIRONMENTAL
    CONTROL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required
    Blanking cap (For air hoses) Part Local supply As
    required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-20-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    O-ring CSN 21-20-00-02-020 1
    O-ring CSN 21-20-00-04-145 1
    Cable tie Part P09-005 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Open and install a Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065) on these circuit
    breakers:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − ECS (ESSENTIAL BUS).
    1.2 Open the access panel 11 AR.
    1.3 Remove the nut (Figure 1 [19]), washer (Figure 1 [18]), bolt (Figure 1 [15]) and bush (Figure 1 [16])
    and disconnect the control cable (Figure 1 [14]) for the firewall shut-off valve from the lever
    (Figure 1 [17]).
    1.4 Remove the nut (Figure 1 [20]), washer (Figure 1 [21]), bolt (Figure 1 [23]) and bush (Figure 1 [22])
    and disconnect the control cable (Figure 1 [24]) for the air scoop from the lever (Figure 1 [17]).
    1.5 Loosen the clamp (Figure 1 [8]) and disconnect the hose (Figure 1 [9]) from the tube (Figure 1 [7]).
    1.6 Remove the screw (Figure 1 [10]) and washer (Figure 1 [11]) that attach the tube (Figure 1 [7]) to the
    structure.
    1.7 Remove the clamp (Figure 1 [6]), O-ring (Figure 1 [5]) and tube (Figure 1 [7]) from the firewall shut-off
    valve (Figure 1 [4]). Discard the O-ring.
    1.8 Remove the cable tie from the electrical connector (Figure 1 [12]).
    1.9 Tag the electrical wires (Figure 1 [13]) and disconnect them from the connector (Figure 1 [12]).
    1.10 Hold the firewall shut-off valve (Figure 1 [4]). Remove the clamp (Figure 1 [2]), O-ring (Figure 1 [3])
    and the firewall shut-off valve (Figure 1 [4]) from the pipe (Figure 1 [1]). Discard the O-ring.

    Note

    Use the Blanking cap (For air hoses) (Pt.No. Local supply) to blank the the open pipes and hoses.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-20-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2 Installation

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    2.1 Loosely install the clamp (Figure 1 [2]) on the pipe (Figure 1 [1]).
    2.2 Put the O-ring (O-ring (Pt.No. CSN 21200002 020 )) (Figure 1 [3]) and the firewall shut-off valve
    (Figure 1 [4]) in position on the pipe (Figure 1 [1]) with the microswitch towards the center of the
    fuselage.
    2.3 Tighten the clamp (Figure 1 [2]).
    2.4 Connect the electrical wire (Figure 1 [13]) to the connector (Figure 1 [12]).
    2.5 Connect the electrical connector (Figure 1 [12]) to the structure with a cable tie (Cable
    tie (Pt.No. P09-005)).
    2.6 Set the ECS SHUT-OFF lever in the flight compartment to the off position.
    2.7 Move the ram air scoop to the closed position.
    2.8 Set the lever (Figure 1 [17]) to the open position.
    2.9 Connect the control cable (Figure 1 [14]) for the firewall shut-off valve to the lever (Figure 1 [17]) with
    the bolt (Figure 1 [15]), bush (Figure 1 [16]), washer (Figure 1 [18]) and nut (Figure 1 [19]).
    2.10 Connect the control cable (Figure 1 [24]) for the air scoop to the lever (Figure 1 [17]) with the bolt
    (Figure 1 [23]), bush (Figure 1 [22]), washer (Figure 1 [21]) and nut (Figure 1 [20]).
    2.11 Operate the ECS SHUT-OFF lever four times and make sure:
    2.11.1 The firewall shut-off valve opens and closes.
    2.11.2 The air scoop opens when the firewall shut-off valve closes and closes when the firewall
    shut-off valve opens.
    2.11.3 The control cable has no sharp bends or deformation when the shut-off valve is open or
    closed.
    2.12 Loosely install the clamp (Figure 1 [6]) on the firewall shut-off valve (Figure 1 [4]).
    2.13 Put the O-ring (O-ring (Pt.No. CSN 21200002 020 )) (Figure 1 [5]) and the tube (Figure 1 [7]) in
    position on the firewall shut-off valve (Figure 1 [4]).
    2.14 Tighten the clamp (Figure 1 [6]).
    2.15 Attach the tube (Figure 1 [7]) to the structure with the bolt (Figure 1 [10]) and washer (Figure 1 [11]).
    2.16 Connect the hose (Figure 1 [9]) to the tube (Figure 1 [7]) and tighten the clamp (Figure 1 [8]).
    2.17 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.18 Close the access panel 11 AR.
    2.19 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − ECS (ESSENTIAL BUS).
    2.20 Do the functional test of the Temperature Conditioning System (Ref.12-B-71-00-00-00A-903S-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-20-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1
    12 13

    11
    10

    2
    3

    4
    A
    5 B
    6

    7
    14

    15
    9

    24
    16

    17

    23 18

    22 19

    21
    B
    20
    21101

    Figure 1 Firewall Shut–Off Valve – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-20-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-20-01-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-20-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    MICROSWITCH

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    MICROSWITCH - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.......................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 ACS EMERG SHUT OFF Lever – Location........................................................... 6


    2 Microswitch – Removal/Installation........................................................................ 7
    3 Microswitch – Check for Correct Adjustment.......................................................... 8
    4 Microswitch – Adjustment....................................................................................... 9

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903S-A POWER PLANT TEST 18 – ENVIRONMENTAL
    CONTROL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required
    Soldering iron Part Local supply 1

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-20-01-01A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-08-23 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark


    Heatshrink gun Part Local supply 1
    Protractor Part Local supply 1

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Solder (60% Sn / 40% Pb) or Part Local supply As
    equivalent required
    Heatshrink sleeve (3,18 mm Part P09-030 As
    (0.125 in) diameter) required
    Loctite 242 Part Local supply As
    required
    Loctite primer Part Local supply As
    required
    Isopropyl Alcohol Part P01-011 As
    required
    Absorbent paper Part P02-031 As
    required
    Cable tie Part P09-017 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Microswitch Part B3-26141 1

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal of Microswitch
    1.1 Open and install a Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065) on these circuit
    breakers:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − ECS (ESSENTIAL BUS).
    1.2 At the rear of the center console Figure 1 [1] in the flight compartment, make sure that the ACS
    EMERG SHUT OFF lever Figure 1 [2] is fully in.
    1.3 Open the access panel 11 AR.
    1.4 Identify the microswitch Figure 2 [4] located on the bottom of the Firewall Shut-off Valve Figure 2 [1].

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-20-01-01A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-08-23 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1.5 Remove and discard any cable ties that attach the microswitch cables to the Firewall Shut-off Valve
    Figure 2 [1].
    1.6 Remove and discard the heatshrink sleeves Figure 2 [13], Figure 2 [15], Figure 2 [18] and
    Figure 2 [20] that cover the four cables Figure 2 [14], Figure 2 [16], Figure 2 [17] and Figure 2 [19] and
    terminals Figure 2 [12], Figure 2 [11], Figure 2 [10] and Figure 2 [9] respectively.
    1.7 Record the microswitch terminal that each of the four cables Figure 2 [14], Figure 2 [16], Figure 2 [17]
    and Figure 2 [19] are soldered onto.
    1.8 De-solder the cables Figure 2 [14], Figure 2 [16], Figure 2 [17] and Figure 2 [19] from the terminals
    Figure 2 [12], Figure 2 [11], Figure 2 [10] and Figure 2 [9].
    1.9 Remove the screws Figure 2 [6] and Figure 2 [7], and washers Figure 2 [5] and Figure 2 [8].
    1.10 Remove and discard the microswitch Figure 2 [4].
    2 Installation of Microswitch
    2.1 At the rear of the center console Figure 1 [1] in the flight compartment, make sure that the ACS
    EMERG SHUT OFF lever Figure 1 [2] is fully in (Emergency Shut-off Valve OPEN).
    2.2
    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items AMM 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Apply a small amount of Loctite primer (Pt.No. Local supply) and then Loctite 242 (Pt.No. Local
    supply) onto the threads of the screws Figure 2 [6] and Figure 2 [7].
    2.3 Install a new Microswitch Figure 2 [4] with washers Figure 2 [5] and Figure 2 [8], and screws
    Figure 2 [6] and Figure 2 [7] so that the microswitch actuator faces the valve shaft Figure 2 [3] and
    butts up against the valve shaft cam face Figure 2 [2].
    2.4 Torque the screws Figure 2 [6] and Figure 2 [7] to between 0,25 and 0,28 Nm (35 to 40 in oz).
    2.5 Check that the microswitch Figure 3 [3] is adjusted correctly as follows:

    Note

    The check of the microswitch adjustment requires two persons:


    − One in the flight compartment to operate the ACS EMERG SHUT OFF lever Figure 1 [2], and
    − One by the Emergency Shut-off Valve to listen for the microswitch operating and to record the
    valve operating angle.

    2.5.1 On the ACS EMERG SHUT OFF lever arm Figure 3 [2], draw a datum line Figure 3 [1]
    through the center of the rear arm of the lever as shown.
    2.5.2 In the flight compartment, make sure that the ACS EMERG SHUT OFF lever Figure 1 [2] is
    fully in (Emergency Shut-off Valve OPEN).
    2.5.3 Place the Protractor (Pt.No. Local supply) adjacent to the ACS EMERG SHUT OFF lever
    arm Figure 3 [2] as follows:
    2.5.3.1 Align the protractor zero datum over the center of the ACS EMERG SHUT OFF
    lever arm Figure 3 [2].
    2.5.3.2 Align the center 90 degree line on the protractor directly over the datum line
    Figure 3 [1] on the ACS EMERG SHUT OFF lever arm Figure 3 [2].

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-20-01-01A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-08-23 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.5.3.3 Hold the protractor steady, do not allow it to move during Step 2.5.4 and
    Step 2.5.5.
    2.5.4 In the flight compartment, slowly pull the ACS EMERG SHUT OFF lever Figure 1 [2] out until
    the microswitch Figure 3 [3] can be heard to operate and STOP.
    2.5.5 Record the position of the ACS EMERG SHUT OFF lever arm datum line Figure 3 [1] with
    the protractor. The datum line must be between 50 and 70 degrees (inclusive) away from the
    90 degree line on the protractor.
    2.5.6 In the flight compartment, pull the ACS EMERG SHUT OFF lever Figure 1 [2] until it is fully
    out, and then push it fully in.
    2.5.7 If the recorded angle measurement in Step 2.5.5 is within the limits, go to Step 2.6, else go
    to Step 2.5.8.
    2.5.8 If the recorded angle measurement in Step 2.5.5 is not within the limits, do as follows:
    2.5.8.1 Loosen the hexagonal socket head screws Figure 4 [2] and Figure 4 [5].
    2.5.8.2 Carefully adjust the switch mount Figure 4 [1] as needed to bring the recorded
    angle measurement within the limits as follows:
    2.5.8.2.1 For a recorded angle measurement of less than 50 degrees,
    move the switch mount Figure 4 [1] in towards the valve shaft
    cam face Figure 4 [3] to make the switch operate later.
    2.5.8.2.2 For a recorded angle measurement of greater than 70 degrees,
    move the switch mount Figure 4 [1] away from the valve shaft
    cam face Figure 4 [3] to make the switch operate earlier.
    2.5.8.3 Hand tighten the hexagonal socket head screws Figure 4 [2] and Figure 4 [5].
    2.5.8.4 Do Step 2.5.3 thru Step 2.5.7 again to check that the recorded angle
    measurement is within the limits.
    2.5.8.5 If necessary, do Step 2.5.3 thru Step 2.5.8.4 again until the recorded angle
    measurement is within the limits.
    2.5.8.6 Torque the hexagonal socket head screw Figure 4 [2] to between 0,34 and 0,45
    Nm (48 to 64 in oz).
    2.5.8.7 Remove the hexagonal socket head screw Figure 4 [5] and apply a small
    amount of Loctite primer (Pt.No. Local supply) and then Loctite
    242 (Pt.No. Local supply) onto the screw threads.
    2.5.8.8 Install the hexagonal socket head screw Figure 4 [5] in the switch mount
    Figure 4 [1] and torque it to between 0,34 and 0,45 Nm (48 to 64 in oz).
    2.5.8.9 Remove the hexagonal socket head screw Figure 4 [2] and apply a small
    amount of Loctite primer (Pt.No. Local supply) and then Loctite
    242 (Pt.No. Local supply) onto the screw threads.
    2.5.8.10 Install the hexagonal socket head screw Figure 4 [2] in the switch mount
    Figure 4 [1] and torque it to between 0,34 and 0,45 Nm (48 to 64 in oz).
    2.5.8.11 Do Step 2.5.2 thru Step 2.5.7 again to make sure that the recorded
    measurement has not changed.
    2.6 Cut four 12,7 mm (0.5 in) lengths of Heatshrink sleeve (3,18 mm (0.125 in)
    diameter) (Pt.No. P09-030).
    2.7 Slide the new Heatshrink sleeves Figure 2 [13], Figure 2 [15], Figure 2 [18] and Figure 2 [20] over the
    end of each cable Figure 2 [14], Figure 2 [16], Figure 2 [17] and Figure 2 [19] respectively.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-20-01-01A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-08-23 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.8 Solder the cables Figure 2 [14], Figure 2 [16], Figure 2 [17] and Figure 2 [19] onto the microswitch
    terminals Figure 2 [12], Figure 2 [11], Figure 2 [10] and Figure 2 [9] as recorded at Step 1.7 with
    Solder (60% Sn / 40% Pb) or equivalent (Pt.No. Local supply).
    2.9 Clean the solder joints with Isopropyl Alcohol (Pt.No. P01-011) and Absorbent paper (Pt.No. P02-031)
    to remove any flux deposits.
    2.10 Move the heatshrink sleeves Figure 2 [13], Figure 2 [15], Figure 2 [18] and Figure 2 [20] into position
    to cover the ends of the cables Figure 2 [14], Figure 2 [16], Figure 2 [17] and Figure 2 [19], and
    terminals Figure 2 [12], Figure 2 [11], Figure 2 [10] and Figure 2 [9] respectively, and then shrink them
    with the Heatshrink gun (Pt.No. Local supply).
    2.11 In the flight compartment, make sure that the ACS EMERG SHUT OFF lever Figure 1 [2] is fully in
    (Emergency Shut-off Valve OPEN).
    2.12 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.13 Close the access panel 11 AR.
    2.14 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − ECS (ESSENTIAL BUS).
    2.15 Do the adjustment/test of the ECS, refer to AMM 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903S-A.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-20-01-01A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-08-23 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    ACS
    EMERGENCY
    SHUT OFF

    PULL

    12-B-212001-A-S4080-00004-A-01-1

    Figure 1 ACS EMERG SHUT OFF Lever – Location

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-20-01-01A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-08-23 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    B
    A
    11AR

    DIRECTION OF AIRFLOW
    THROUGH THE VALVE

    2
    17
    18 19 B
    3
    20
    16
    15
    10
    9
    14
    13 4

    12
    11
    5
    8
    6
    7
    12-B-212001-A-S4080-00003-A-01-1

    Figure 2 Microswitch – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-20-01-01A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-08-23 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    B
    A
    11AR

    70°
    50°
    90°

    12-B-212001-A-S4080-00005-A-01-1

    Figure 3 Microswitch – Check for Correct Adjustment

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-20-01-01A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-08-23 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    B
    A
    11AR

    DIRECTION OF AIRFLOW
    THROUGH THE VALVE

    SWITCH SHOWN
    CLOSED

    1 2 3

    NO NC NC NO

    B
    SWITCH SHOWN
    OPEN
    5 4

    NO NC NC NO

    12-B-212001-A-S4080-00006-A-01-1

    Figure 4 Microswitch – Adjustment

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-20-01-01A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-08-23 Page 9


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-20-01-01A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-08-23 Page 10
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    BLOWER UNIT

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    BLOWER UNIT - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................................................................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Blower Unit – Removal/Installation......................................................................... 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-25-23-01-00A-920A-A BAGGAGE AREA EQUIPMENT - REMOVAL
    INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-20-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-06 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This procedure is applicable to the left and right recirculation blower units. The recirculation system is
    installed in an aircraft when the optional vapour cycle cooling system (VCCS) is not installed.
    2 Removal
    2.1 Open the cargo door.
    2.2 Open and install Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065) on this circuit breaker:
    − VENT FANS (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    2.3 Remove the baggage compartment carpet, left and right side panels (Ref. 12-B-25-23-01-00A-920A-
    A).
    2.4 Remove the screws and the panel in front of the blower unit.
    2.5 Loosen the clamp (Figure 1 [3]) and disconnect the flexible duct (Figure 1 [4]) from the headliner duct
    (Figure 1 [2]).
    2.6 Loosen the clamp (Figure 1 [6]) and remove the duct (Figure 1 [5]) from the aircraft.
    2.7 Remove the screw (Figure 1 [9]), washer (Figure 1 [8]) and bonding strap (Figure 1 [7]) from the
    blower unit (Figure 1 [13]).
    2.8 Tag the electrical wires (Figure 1 [10]) and disconnect the electrical cables (Figure 1 [12]) from the
    electrical connectors (Figure 1 [11]).
    2.9 Remove the four nuts (Figure 1 [15]), washers (Figure 1 [14]) and remove the blower unit
    (Figure 1 [13]) from the plate assembly (Figure 1 [1]).
    3 Installation
    3.1 Install the blower unit (Figure 1 [13]) on the plate assembly (Figure 1 [1]) with the four washers
    (Figure 1 [14]) and nuts (Figure 1 [15]).
    3.2 Connect the electrical cables (Figure 1 [12]) to the electrical connectors (Figure 1 [11]). Remove the
    tags from the electrical wires (Figure 1 [10]).
    3.3 Connect the bonding strap (Figure 1 [7]) to the blower unit (Figure 1 [13]) with the washer
    (Figure 1 [8]) and screw (Figure 1 [9]).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-20-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-06 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.4 Install the flexible duct (Figure 1 [5]) on the blower unit (Figure 1 [13]) and tighten the clamp
    (Figure 1 [6]).
    3.5 Connect the flexible duct (Figure 1 [4]) to the headliner duct (Figure 1 [2]) and tighten the clamp
    (Figure 1 [3]).
    3.6 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.7 Install the access panel in front of the blower unit with the screws.
    3.8 Install the baggage compartment left and right side panels and the carpet (Ref. 12-
    B-25-23-01-00A-920A-A).
    3.9 Remove the safety clips and close this circuit breaker:
    − VENT FANS (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    3.10 Do the Close Up Procedure (Para ).
    4 Close Up
    4.1 Energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    4.2 Set the VENT FANS switch to AUTO.
    4.3 Set the ECS cockpit and cabin temperatures to full cold on the Multi Function Display (MFD)
    Environment window.
    4.4 Make sure that the blower units operate.
    4.5 Set the VENT FANS switch to LOW.
    4.6 Make sure that the blower units operate at low speed.
    4.7 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-20-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-06 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    14
    15 A

    12 13
    11

    10

    7
    9 8
    6
    4

    5
    2
    21155

    Figure 1 Blower Unit – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-20-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-06 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-20-02-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-06 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-20-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-06 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PRESSURIZATION CONTROL

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    PRESSURIZATION CONTROL - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION....................................... 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1
    2 Component Description.......................................................................................... 2
    2.1 Cabin Pressure Control Unit................................................................................... 2
    2.2 Outflow Valve......................................................................................................... 2
    2.3 Pressure Relief Valve............................................................................................. 2
    3 Operation (Ref. )..................................................................................................... 2
    3.1 Automatic Operation............................................................................................... 3
    3.2 Manual Operation................................................................................................... 3
    3.3 Emergency Depressurization................................................................................. 3

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Cabin Pressurization Control System – Schematic................................................ 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-46-30-03-00A-040A-A MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION

    Description

    1 General
    The pressurization control system controls the rate of exhaust of the air that the Environmental Control System
    (ECS) and Air Cycle System (ACS) supplies as conditioned air for the flight compartment and the passenger
    compartment. It keeps the air (cabin) pressure in the flight compartment and passenger compartment between
    limits that are safe for the passengers and crew, and the aircraft structure. The Cabin Pressurization Control
    System (CPCS) has these components:
    − A dual channel Cabin Pressure Control Unit (CPCU)
    − An electrically operated outflow valve (OFV)
    − A pneumatic Pressure Relief Valve (PRV)

    The power supply to the Cabin Pressurization Control System (CPCS) is 28 VDC through the CPCS CH1 (EPS
    BUS) and the CPCS CH2 (MAIN BUS) circuit breakers.
    The CPCS has two modes of operation:

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − Normal operation of the CPCS is fully automatic. The CPCU controls the cabin pressure depending on the
    aircraft altitude, and referring to the climb and descent schedules that the pilot sets before take off.
    − Low Cabin mode (selected by the pilot). The Landing Field Elevation (LFE) is used as the target cabin
    pressure altitude.

    If one of the two CPCU channels fail or a fault is detected, the CPCU will automatically switch to the remaining
    channel.
    The Multi Function Display (MFD) ENVIRONMENT window is used to monitor and control the CPCS. Manual
    control of the CPCS functions for emergency operation are provided on the co-pilot lower left panel.
    Warning and caution messages for the CPCS are displayed in the MFD CAS window (Refer to DM 12-
    B-46-30-03-00A-040A-A).

    2 Component Description

    2.1 Cabin Pressure Control Unit


    The Cabin Pressure Control Unit (CPCU) is a dual channel microprocessor unit and is installed at frame 17 in the
    under-floor pressurized area. The CPCU channels sense the cabin pressure and receive the aircraft pressure
    altitude and rate of climb data from the Modular Avionics Unit (MAU). The cabin altitude, cabin rate of climb and
    differential pressure are automatically controlled by the CPCU, which controls the exhaust airflow through the
    outlow valve. The cabin pressure and airflow rates are controlled within limitations for safe and comfortable flight.

    2.2 Outflow Valve


    The outflow valve is installed on the frame 15 pressure bulkhead and exhausts air through louvres in the equipment
    bay doors.The outflow valve has a circular butterfly plate that rotates in the valve body. The butterfly valve is
    operated by an actuator assembly which has two electric motors and a gearbox. Each electric motor is connected
    to, and controlled by, one of the two CPCU channels.

    2.3 Pressure Relief Valve


    The Pressure Relief Valve (PRV) is a pneumatic poppet type control valve and is installed on the frame 15
    pressure bulkhead. The PRV is operated pneumatically and is totally independent of the outflow valve and the
    CPCU. The PRV has a positive pressure relief metering function which senses the differential pressure between
    the cabin and the atmosphere. If the differential pressure exceeds the relief pressure set value the valve will open
    to allow pressure from the cabin to exhaust to atmosphere.
    The PRV also has a negative pressure relief function and will open to allow atmosphere air into the cabin if the
    cabin negative pressure exceeds the relief pressure set value.

    3 Operation (Ref. Fig. 1)


    The CPCS automatically controls the cabin pressure to:
    − depressurize the cabin on the ground to let the door open and crew/passenger entry and exit
    − pre-pressurize the cabin during takeoff and landing to prevent pressure bump excursions
    − control the cabin altitude and rate of change during flight
    − prevent the cabin to atmosphere positive or negative differential pressure limits being exceeded
    − close the outflow valve if the cabin altitude exceeds 14,500 feet (automatic altitude limiting function).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.1 Automatic Operation


    When the CPCS SYSTEM MODE SWITCH is in the AUTO position the CPCU uses air data information from the
    Modular Avionics Unit (MAU) to control the opening and closing of the outflow butterfly valve. The air data
    information from the MAU channel A is used by channel 1 of the CPCU, the air data information from the MAU
    channel B is used by channel 2 of the CPCU. Either of the two channels can operate the outflow valve.
    On the ground, with the engine running and bleed air on, the outflow butterfly valve is open to prevent the cabin
    pressurizing. The system will pre-pressurize the cabin when these inputs are set:
    − the doors are closed
    − the takeoff roll is started (Condition Lever is at Flight Idle, throttle more than 20 psi torque)
    − ECS bleed air is on
    − the aircraft is weight on wheels.

    If the takeoff roll is aborted, or if the aircraft lands, the system will automatically open the outflow valve to
    depressurize the cabin.

    3.2 Manual Operation


    When the CPCS - SYSTEM MODE switch is in the MANUAL position, the outflow valve butterfly is controlled by the
    MANUAL CONTROL - CLIMB/DESCENT switch. The CLIMB/DESCENT switch is a three position switch which is
    spring loaded to the center (off) position.
    When the switch is pressed and held to the CLIMB position the outflow valve butterfly drives towards closed. If the
    switch is pressed and held for more than ten seconds, the butterfly valve will drive faster.
    When the switch is pressed and held to the DESCENT position the outflow valve butterfly drives towards open. If
    the switch is pressed and held for more than ten seconds, the butterfly valve will drive faster.

    3.3 Emergency Depressurization


    In an emergency, the CPCS - CABIN PRESSURE switch is set to DUMP to depressurize the cabin. When the
    CABIN PRESSURE swicth is set to DUMP the outflow valve butterfly opens fully in approximately 16 seconds.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    EPS BUS
    ECS
    CPCS
    CH 1

    STATIC
    ATMOSPHERIC
    PRESSURE
    CABIN PRESSURE
    CONTROL UNIT CHANNEL 1

    AUTO MOTOR
    PRESSURE
    CONTROL CONTROL
    RELIEF VALVE
    CIRCUIT 1 CIRCUIT 1

    MOTOR 1

    MAU
    CHANNEL A
    CPCS
    GEAR OUTFLOW
    CONTROL
    TRAIN VALVE
    PANEL
    SYSTEMS FCB MAU
    MFD VIDEO CHANNEL B
    MOTOR 2

    MAIN BUS

    CPCS
    CH 2

    AUTO MOTOR
    CONTROL CONTROL
    CIRCUIT 2 CIRCUIT 2

    CABIN PRESSURE
    CONTROL UNIT CHANNEL 2
    FORWARD
    PRESSURE
    BULKHEAD

    12-A-213000-A-S4080-01009-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Cabin Pressurization Control System – Schematic

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PRESSURIZATION CONTROL

    MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Table of Contents Page

    PRESSURIZATION CONTROL - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES............................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-34-11-00-00A-901A-A PITOT STATIC SYSTEM - MAINTENANCE
    PRACTICES

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Warning signs (AIRCRAFT Part Local supply As
    PRESSURIZED - DO NOT required
    OPEN ACCESS PANELS OR
    DOORS)
    Warning signs (KEEP CLEAR Part Local supply As
    OF ALL ACCESS PANELS, required
    DOORS AND WINDOWS)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    Safety Precautions
    Only approved personnel can operate the pressurization system when the aircraft is on the ground. It is
    dangerous and can cause injury to persons and damage to the aircraft and equipment if the procedures are
    not done correctly.
    Obey these safety precautions when you operate the pressurization system on the ground:
    1.1 Persons Safety Precautions
    1.1.1 Only authorized persons must operate the pressurization system.
    1.1.2 Put warning signs around the aircraft when work is done on the pressurization system.
    1.1.3 Do not open a door, a window or an access panel when the aircraft is pressurized. The
    pressure in the aircraft can cause the door window or access panel to open quickly and
    cause injury to persons.
    1.1.4 There must be no persons in the aircraft when a ground rig is used to do a maximum
    pressure leak test.
    1.1.5 Persons are permitted in the aircraft for a leak detection procedure if the maximum pressure
    is not more than 2 psi.
    1.1.6 All persons that are in the aircraft during operation of the pressurization system must have
    medical approval.
    1.1.7 Make sure the minimum number of persons necessary are in the aircraft during operation of
    the pressurization system.
    1.1.8 Persons must move their jaws and swallow frequently when they are in the aircraft and it is
    pressurized.
    1.1.9 Do not increase or decrease the pressure in the aircraft too quickly or injury to persons in the
    aircraft can occur.
    1.2 Equipment Safety Precautions
    1.2.1 Use a suitable intercom system to let the persons in the aircraft speak to the persons outside
    the aircraft during the test.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1.2.2 Make sure all tools and equipment are satisfactory.


    1.2.3 Make sure all tools and equipment are clear of the aircraft, specially around doors, windows
    and access panels.
    1.2.4 Make sure all open pitot-static connections have blanks installed in them and the pitot-static
    system has no leaks before the aircraft is pressurized.
    2 Work On The Pressurization System
    2.1 Prepare for Work on the Pressurization System
    2.1.1 Obey the safety precautions.
    2.1.2 Make sure the aircraft structure is complete and safe for pressurization tests.
    2.1.3 Do a leak test of the pitot and static systems (refer to DM 12-B-34-11-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.1.4 Make sure the passenger/crew door, cargo door, emergency exit and the DV window open
    and close correctly.
    2.1.5 Put the signs (Warning signs (AIRCRAFT PRESSURIZED - DO NOT OPEN ACCESS
    PANELS OR DOORS) (Pt.No. Local supply)) and Warning signs (KEEP CLEAR OF ALL
    ACCESS PANELS, DOORS AND WINDOWS) (Pt.No. Local supply) around the aircraft.
    2.1.6 Do the necessary pressurization test procedure.
    2.2 Close-up After Work on the Pressurization System
    2.2.1 Make sure the passenger/crew door, cargo door, emergency exit and the DV window open
    and close correctly.
    2.2.2 Remove the warning signs from around the aircraft.

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-00-00A-901A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 3
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PRESSURIZATION CONTROL

    ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Table of Contents Page

    PRESSURIZATION CONTROL - ADJUSTMENT/TEST............................................................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 2
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2
    6 Pressurization Control - Test Record Form............................................................ 6

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Pressurization Control - Adjustment/Test............................................................... 8


    2 Pressurization Control - Cabin Leak Rate Graph................................................... 9

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A GENERAL - AEROSPACE GROUND EQUIPMENT
    (AGE) AND TOOLS
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-21-30-00-00A-901A-A PRESSURIZATION CONTROL - MAINTENANCE
    PRACTICES
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-34-11-00-00A-901A-A PITOT STATIC SYSTEM - MAINTENANCE
    PRACTICES
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903A-A POWER PLANT - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-05 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required
    Cabin pressurization unit Part 990.00.00.660 As
    (220/230 VAC 60 Hz) required
    Cabin pressurization unit (380 Part 990.00.00.661 As
    VAC 50 Hz) required
    Adapter kit, CPU Part 990.00.00.662 As
    required
    Blanking cap Part Local supply As
    required
    Stopwatch Part Local supply As
    required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    O-ring CSN 21-20-00-02-020 As
    required

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedures to do:
    − A cabin positive pressure relief functional test
    − A cabin leak test
    − A Manual Control Operation test
    − A Pressurization Dump Switch Operation test
    2 Pressure Tests
    (Ref. Fig. 1 and Fig. 2)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-05 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    WARNING

    WHEN A CABIN PRESSURIZATION UNIT IS USED TO DO A TEST OF THE PRESSURIZATION SYSTEM,


    PUSH THE CARGO DOOR OPEN BUTTON, BUT DO NOT OPERATE THE DOOR HANDLE, TO MAKE
    SURE ALL THE PRESSURE IS RELEASED FROM INSIDE THE AIRCRAFT BEFORE YOU OPEN A
    DOOR.

    Note

    To identify the AGE and tools used in this procedure refer to the list of AGE and tools DM 12-
    B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A.

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items AMM 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    2.1 Preparation
    2.1.1 Obey the safety precautions given in AMM 12-B-21-30-00-00A-901A-A.
    2.1.2 Prepare for work on the pressurization system (Refer to AMM 12-B-21-30-00-00A-901A-A).

    Note

    The components of the pitot-static system can stay installed in the aircraft if the pitot-static
    system is serviceable, or all open connections have a Blanking cap (Pt.No. Local supply)
    installed on them to make sure they are sealed and air does not go into the pitot-static
    system.

    2.1.3 Remove any sensing device (e.g. Electronic Standby Instrument or Air Data Attitude and
    Heading Reference System) from the aircraft if it is not connected to the pitot static system.
    2.1.4 Install Blanking cap (Pt.No. Local supply) on the pitot static pipes and do a leak test of the
    pitot static system (refer to AMM 12-B-34-11-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.1.5 Open and install a Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065) on these
    circuit breakers:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − ECS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    2.1.6 Open these circuit breakers:
    − CPCS CH 1 (EPS BUS)
    − CPCS CH 2 (MAIN BUS)
    2.1.7 Open the access panels 11AR, 11BL and 11BR.
    2.1.8 Remove the screw Figure 1 [9] and the washer Figure 1 [8] from the pipe Figure 1 [7].
    2.1.9 Remove the clamp Figure 1 [5] from the pipes Figure 1 [4] and Figure 1 [7].
    2.1.10 Disconnect the pipe Figure 1 [4] from the pipe Figure 1 [7] and remove the O-ring
    Figure 1 [6]. Discard the O-ring.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-05 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.1.11 Connect the cabin pressurization unit adaptor hose Figure 1 [3] to the pipe Figure 1 [7] with
    the clamp Figure 1 [5].
    2.1.12 Loosely attach (as strain relief) the adaptor hose to the aircraft structure.
    2.1.13 Remove the blanking cap (if installed) from the cabin pressure-sensing port Figure 1 [1].
    Aircraft with Standard interior - the port is marked Cabin Press Test Port. Aircraft with
    Executive interior - the port is marked WC Vent Port.
    2.1.14 Connect the cabin pressurization unit pressure-sensing hose Figure 1 [2] to the pressure
    sensing port Figure 1 [1].
    2.1.16 Use tape to seal fastener holes if the fairings are not installed during this test.
    2.1.17 Energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.2 Preliminary Inspection
    2.2.1 Do a visual inspection of the negative pressure relief valves (NPRV) on the rear pressure
    bulkhead:
    2.2.1.1 Look into the valve armature from the tailcone side and make sure it is free of
    debris.
    2.2.1.2 Push open the flapper valves and make sure that the valve opens fully.
    2.2.1.3 Release the flapper valves and make sure that they close fully.
    2.2.2 Close these circuit breakers:
    − CPCS CH 1 (EPS BUS)
    − CPCS CH 2 (MAIN BUS)
    2.3 Manual Operation - Mechanical Function
    2.3.1 Make sure that the CPCS CABIN PRESSURE switch is set to AUTO.
    2.3.2 Set the CPCS SYSTEM MODE switch to MANUAL.
    2.3.3 Press and hold the CPCS MANUAL CONTROL switch to DESCENT until the outflow valve is
    fully CLOSED.
    2.4 Preliminary Leak Check

    WARNING

    THERE MUST BE NO PERSONS IN THE AIRCRAFT WHEN THE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE IN


    THE AIRCRAFT IS MORE THAN 2.0 PSI (0,138 BAR)

    2.4.1 Close the DV window, emergency exit, cargo door and the passenger/crew door.
    2.4.2 Set the cabin pressurization unit to ON.
    2.4.3 Slowly pressurize the cabin to a differential pressure of approximately 2 psi (0,138 bar).
    2.4.4 Make sure:
    − The airspeed, aircraft altitude and vertical speed indications on the Primary Flight
    Display and Electronic Standby Instrument and the airspeed indicator do not move
    − The pressure relief valve and the outflow valve are fully closed

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-05 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Note

    There is a small leak from the pressure relief valve and outflow valve when they are fully
    closed.

    2.4.5 If the airspeed, aircraft altitude or vertical speed indications move:


    2.4.5.1 Set the cabin pressurization unit to OFF.
    2.4.5.2 Release the pressure from the aircraft.
    2.4.5.3 Open the passenger/crew door.
    2.4.5.4 Find the leak in the pitot-static system and make the system safe for this test.
    2.4.5.5 Do Step 2.4 again.
    2.4.6 Make sure that there are no excessive leaks from the aircraft. Repair the leaks as needed
    then do Step 2.4 again.
    2.5 Cabin Positive Pressure Relief Functional Test

    WARNING

    THERE MUST BE NO PERSONS IN THE AIRCRAFT WHEN THE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE IN


    THE AIRCRAFT IS MORE THAN 2.0 PSI (0,138 BAR).

    WARNING

    DO NOT INCREASE THE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE IN THE AIRCRAFT TO MORE THAN 6.5 PSI
    (0,448 BAR). INJURY TO PERSONS AND DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT CAN OCCUR.

    Note

    SCFM is based on standardized air at 14.7 psi, 20 °C at 36% relative humidity.

    2.5.1 Refer to the rate of climb indication and slowly increase the pressure in the aircraft, at a rate
    of descent of not more than 2000 ft/min, until the pressure relief valve starts to open. Record
    the pressure on the Test Record Form (Table 6).
    2.5.2 Increase the mass airflow of the cabin pressurization unit to 12 lb/min (157 SCFM) minimum
    and:
    − Make sure the stabilized pressure in the aircraft is not more than 6.35 psi (0,438 bar)
    and that the pressure relief valve lets air pass through it.
    − Make sure the mass airflow is not less than 12 lb/min (157 SCFM).
    − Record the pressure on the Test Record Form (Table 6).
    2.6 Cabin Leak Check
    2.6.1 Adjust the mass airflow to stabilize the differential pressure in the aircraft to 5.8 psi (0,40
    bar).
    2.6.2 Record the stabilized differential pressure on the Test Record Form (Table 6).
    2.6.3 Make sure that the pressure relief valve and the outflow valve are fully closed.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-05 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.6.4 Check if the mass airflow is less than 2.5 lb/min (33 SCFM) and record the mass airflow on
    the Test Record Form (Table 6).
    2.6.5 Set the cabin pressurization unit to OFF.
    2.6.6 Start theStopwatch (Pt.No. Local supply).
    2.6.7 After a period of 120 seconds record the pressure in the aircraft on the Test Record Form
    (Table 6).
    2.6.8 Make a mark on the graph in Fig. 2 to show the pressure from Step 2.6.7 at the 120 second
    position.
    2.6.9 Draw a line from the 0 seconds/5,8 psi position on the graph to the mark made in Step 2.6.8.
    2.6.10 Make sure the line in Step 2.6.9 is above the reference line on the graph.
    2.6.11 If the mass airflow is more than 2.5 lb/min (33 SCFM) and the leak rate line in Step 2.6.10 is
    below the reference line:
    2.6.11.1 Carefully find the leakage from the pressurized area of the aircraft.
    2.6.11.2 Do the repairs necessary.
    2.6.11.3 Do the cabin leak check procedure again.
    2.6.12 Release the pressure from the aircraft.

    Table 6 Pressurization Control - Test Record Form


    Test Result
    Pressure relief valve open ΔP cab (max)................ psi
    Correct = 6.00 to 6.35 psi (0,414 to 0,438 bar)
    Mass airflow Mass airflow...... lb/min
    Mass airflow min 12 lb/min (157 SCFM)
    Cabin differential pressure ΔP cab (max)................ psi
    Maximum = 6.35 psi (0,438 bar)
    Cabin leak test
    Stabilized differential pressure ΔP cab ........................psi
    Correct = 5.75 to 5.80 psi (0,396 to 0,400 bar)
    Mass airflow (leak rate) Air flow........................
    Correct flow rate = 2.5 lb/min (max) (33 SCFM
    Maximum pressure decay rate Above reference line (Fig 2).............. OK
    2.7 Close Up
    2.7.1 Disconnect the cabin pressure-sensing hose Figure 1 [2] of the cabin pressurization unit on
    the Cabin Press Test port/WC Vent port Figure 1 [1].
    2.7.2 Install the blanking cap (if previously removed) on the cabin pressure-sensing port
    Figure 1 [1]. Aircraft with Standard interior - the port is marked Cabin Press Test Port.
    Aircraft with Executive interior - the port is marked WC Vent Port.
    2.7.3 Remove the adapter hose of the cabin pressurization unit from the aircraft structure.
    2.7.4 Remove the clamp Figure 1 [5] and disconnect the adapter hose of the cabin pressurization
    unit from the pipe Figure 1 [7].
    2.7.5 Install a new O-ring (O-ring ) Figure 1 [6] between the pipes Figure 1 [7] and Figure 1 [4].
    2.7.6 Install the clamp Figure 1 [5] on the pipes Figure 1 [7] and Figure 1 [4].

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-05 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.7.7 Torque the clamp Figure 1 [5] to between 15 and 35 lbf in (1,6 and 4,0 Nm).
    2.7.8 Connect the pipe Figure 1 [7] to the structure with the screw Figure 1 [9] and washer
    Figure 1 [8].
    2.7.9 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.7.10 Close the access panels 11AR, 11BL and 11BR.
    2.7.11 Make sure that the CAS CPCS FAULT message is OFF.
    2.7.12 If the CAS CPCS FAULT message is ON:
    2.7.12.1 Set the CPCS SYSTEM MODE switch to MANUAL for 1 second.
    2.7.12.2 Set the CPCS SYSTEM MODE switch to AUTO.
    2.7.12.3 If the CAS CPCS FAULT message is still ON:
    2.7.12.3.1 Open these circuit breakers for a minimum of four seconds:
    − CPCS CH 1 (EPS BUS)
    − CPCS CH 2 (MAIN BUS)
    2.7.12.3.2 Close these circuit breakers:
    − CPCS CH 1 (EPS BUS)
    − CPCS CH 2 (MAIN BUS)
    2.7.12.3.3 Do Step 2.7.12.1 thru Step 2.7.12.2 again.
    2.7.13 Remove the safety clip and close the circuit breaker:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − ECS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    2.7.14 Do the close up after work on the pressurization system (Refer to AMM 12-
    B-21-30-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.7.15 Do the operational test of the pressurization control system (Refer to AMM 12-
    B-71-00-00-00A-903A-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-05 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    B
    9
    8
    6
    B
    5

    1 2

    12-B-213000-A-S4080-20042-A-02-1

    Figure 1 Pressurization Control - Adjustment/Test

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-05 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    MAXIMUM PRESSURE LEAK RATE - FUSELAGE EQUIPPED

    CABIN
    PRESSURE
    (PSIG) 7

    0
    0 20 40 60 80 100 120

    TIME (SEC.)
    21142

    Figure 2 Pressurization Control - Cabin Leak Rate Graph

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-05 Page 9


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3 Manual Control Operation Test


    3.1 Energize the aircraft electrical system (Refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    3.2 Make sure that the CAS CPCS FAULT message is OFF.
    3.3 If the CAS CPCS FAULT message is ON:
    3.3.1 Set the CPCS - SYSTEM MODE switch to MANUAL for 1 second.
    3.3.2 Set the CPCS - SYSTEM MODE switch to AUTO.
    3.3.3 If the CAS CPCS FAULT message is still ON:
    3.3.3.1 Open these circuit breakers for a minimum of four seconds:
    − CPCS CH 1 (EPS BUS)
    − CPCS CH 2 (MAIN BUS)
    3.3.3.2 Close these circuit breakers:
    − CPCS CH 1 (EPS BUS)
    − CPCS CH 2 (MAIN BUS)
    3.3.3.3 Do Step 3.3.1 thru Step 2.3.2 again.
    3.3.4 Set the CPCS - SYSTEM MODE switch to AUTO.
    3.4 Set the CPCS - CABIN PRESSURE switch to AUTO.
    3.5 Set the CPCS - MANUAL CONTROL switch to CLIMB. Make sure that the outflow valve butterfly does
    not move.
    3.6 Set the CPCS - MANUAL CONTROL switch to DESCENT. Make sure that the outflow valve butterfly
    does not move.
    3.7 Set the CPCS - SYSTEM MODE switch to MANUAL.
    3.8 Press and hold the CPCS - MANUAL CONTROL switch to DESCENT.
    3.9 Make sure that the outflow valve butterfly closes, and that the butterfly closes faster after
    approximately 10 seconds.
    3.10 Release the CPCS - MANUAL CONTROL switch and make sure that the outflow valve butterfly stops.
    3.11 Press and hold the CPCS - MANUAL CONTROL switch to CLIMB.
    3.12 Make sure that the outflow valve butterfly opens, and that the butterfly opens faster after
    approximately 10 seconds.
    3.13 Release the CPCS - MANUAL CONTROL switch and make sure that the outflow valve butterfly stops.
    3.14 Press and hold the CPCS - MANUAL CONTROL switch to DESCENT until the outflow valve butterfly
    is fully closed.
    3.15 Set the CPCS - CABIN PRESSURE switch to AUTO.
    3.16 Make sure that the CAS CPCS FAULT message is OFF.
    3.17 If the CAS CPCS FAULT message is ON:
    3.17.1 Set the CPCS - SYSTEM MODE switch to MANUAL for 1 second.
    3.17.2 Set the CPCS - SYSTEM MODE switch to AUTO.
    3.17.3 If the CAS CPCS FAULT caution message is still ON:
    3.17.3.1 Open these circuit breakers for a minimum of four seconds:
    − CPCS CH 1 (EPS BUS)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-05 Page 10


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − CPCS CH 2 (MAIN BUS)


    3.17.3.2 Close these circuit breakers:
    − CPCS CH 1 (EPS BUS)
    − CPCS CH 2 (MAIN BUS)
    3.17.3.3 Do Step 3.17.1 thru Step 3.17.2 again.
    3.17.4 Set the CPCS - SYSTEM MODE switch to AUTO.
    3.18 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    4 Pressurization Dump Switch Operation Test
    4.1 Energize the aircraft electrical system (Refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    4.2 Make sure that the CAS CPCS FAULT message is OFF.
    4.3 If the CAS CPCS FAULT message is ON:
    4.3.1 Set the CPCS - SYSTEM MODE switch to MANUAL for 1 second.
    4.3.2 Set the CPCS - SYSTEM MODE switch to AUTO.
    4.3.3 If the CAS CPCS FAULT message is still ON:
    4.3.3.1 Open these circuit breakers for a minimum of four seconds:
    − CPCS CH 1 (EPS BUS)
    − CPCS CH 2 (MAIN BUS)
    4.3.3.2 Close these circuit breakers:
    − CPCS CH 1 (EPS BUS)
    − CPCS CH 2 (MAIN BUS)
    4.3.3.3 Do Step 3.3.1 thru Step 4.3.2 again.
    4.4 Set the CPCS - SYSTEM MODE switch to MANUAL.
    4.5 Press and hold the CPCS - MANUAL CONTROL switch to DESCENT.
    4.6 Make sure that the outflow valve butterfly closes.
    4.7 Set the CPCS - CABIN PRESSURE switch to DUMP and start the stopwatch (Stopwatch (Pt.No. Local
    supply)).
    4.8 Make sure that the outflow valve butterfly opens at a constant speed, and is fully open in 16 seconds 3
    seconds.
    4.9 Set the CPCS - CABIN PRESSURE switch to AUTO.
    4.10 Set the CPCS - SYSTEM MODE switch to AUTO.
    4.11 Make sure that the CAS CPCS FAULT message is OFF.
    4.12 If the CAS CPCS FAULT message is ON:
    4.12.1 Set the CPCS - SYSTEM MODE switch to MANUAL for 1 second.
    4.12.2 Set the CPCS - SYSTEM MODE switch to AUTO.
    4.12.3 If the CAS CPCS FAULT message is still ON:
    4.12.3.1 Open these circuit breakers for a minimum of four seconds:
    − CPCS CH 1 (EPS BUS)
    − CPCS CH 2 (MAIN BUS)
    4.12.3.2 Close these circuit breakers:

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-05 Page 11


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − CPCS CH 1 (EPS BUS)


    − CPCS CH 2 (MAIN BUS)
    4.12.3.3 Do Step 4.12.1 thru Step 4.12.2 again.
    4.13 Set the CPCS - CABIN PRESSURE switch to AUTO.
    4.14 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-00-00A-903A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-05 Page 12
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    CABIN PRESSURIZATION CONTROL UNIT

    ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Table of Contents Page

    CABIN PRESSURIZATION CONTROL UNIT - ADJUSTMENT/TEST....................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-01-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-09-11 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Operational Test
    1.1 Make sure that these circuit breakers are open and have a safety clip (Safety clip (circuit breaker hold
    open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) installed:
    − CPCS CH 1 (EPS BUS)
    − CPCS CH 2 (MAIN BUS)
    1.2 Make sure that:
    − the passenger/crew door is open
    − the CPCS SYSTEM MODE switch is set to AUTO
    − the CPCS CABIN PRESSURE switch is set to AUTO
    1.3 Open access panel 21QZ.
    1.4 Energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    1.5 Make sure that the MFD Environment window shows invalid information (amber dashes and crosses).
    1.6 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − CPCS CH 1 (EPS BUS)
    − CPCS CH 2 (MAIN BUS)
    1.7 Make sure that the CAS window does not show an amber CPCS FAULT caution message. If the
    caution message CPCS FAULT is shown:
    1.7.1 Set the CPCS SYSTEM MODE switch to MANUAL.
    1.7.2 Wait 5 seconds, then set the CPCS SYSTEM MODE switch to AUTO.
    1.7.3 Open and then close these circuit breakers:
    − CPCS CH 1 (EPS BUS)
    − CPCS CH 2 (MAIN BUS)
    1.7.4 Make sure that the CAS caution message CPCS FAULT is off.
    1.8 Make sure that the CPCS starts Built In Test (BIT). The system has started the BIT tests when the
    outflow valve moves a small amount within 2 minutes of energizing electrical power.
    1.9 Make sure that the:
    − outflow valve is fully open
    − the MFD Environment window shows valid data (white numbers)
    − the CAS caution message CPCS FAULT is off
    1.10 Set the Passenger Oxygen switch to OFF.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-01-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-09-11 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1.11 Make sure that this circuit breaker is closed:


    − OXY (EPS BUS)
    1.12 Open this circuit breaker:
    − CPCS CH 1 (EPS BUS)
    1.13 Make sure that the CAS white status message CPCS FAULT is ON.
    1.14 Close this circuit breaker:
    − CPCS CH 1 (EPS BUS)
    1.15 Make sure that the CAS white status message CPCS FAULT is off.
    1.16 Open this circuit breaker:
    − CPCS CH 2 (MAIN BUS)
    1.17 Make sure that the CAS white status message CPCS FAULT is ON.
    1.18 Close this circuit breaker:
    − CPCS CH 2 (MAIN BUS)
    1.19 Make sure that the CAS white status message CPCS FAULT is off.
    1.20 On the aircraft Maintenance Panel set the AIR/GND switch to AIR.
    1.21 Open this circuit breaker:
    − CPCS CH 1 (EPS BUS)
    1.22 Make sure that the CAS white status message CPCS FAULT is off.
    1.23 Close this circuit breaker:
    − CPCS CH 1 (EPS BUS)
    1.24 Open this circuit breaker:
    − CPCS CH 2 (MAIN BUS)
    1.25 Make sure that the CAS white status message CPCS FAULT is off.
    1.26 Open this circuit breaker:
    − CPCS CH 1 (EPS BUS)
    1.27 Make sure that the CAS caution message CPCS FAULT is ON.
    1.28 Close this circuit breaker:
    − CPCS CH 2 (MAIN BUS)
    1.29 Make sure that the CAS caution message CPCS FAULT is off.
    1.30 Close this circuit breaker:
    − CPCS CH 1 (EPS BUS)
    1.31 On the aircraft Maintenance Panel set the AIR/GND switch to GND.
    1.32 Make sure that the CPCS CABIN PRESSURE switch is set to AUTO.
    1.33 Set the CPCS SYSTEM MODE switch to MANUAL.
    1.34 Press and hold the CPCS MANUAL CONTROL switch to DESCENT until the outflow valve is fully
    CLOSED.
    1.35 Set the CPCS CABIN PRESSURE switch to DUMP.
    1.36 Make sure that the outflow valve opens fully in 16 seconds ± 3 seconds.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-01-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-09-11 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1.37 Set the CPCS CABIN PRESSURE switch to AUTO.


    1.38 Press and hold the CPCS MANUAL CONTROL switch to DESCENT until the outflow valve is fully
    CLOSED.
    1.39 Press and hold the CPCS MANUAL CONTROL switch to CLIMB until the outflow valve is fully OPEN.
    1.40 Make sure that:
    − the CPCS SYSTEM MODE switch is set to AUTO
    − the CPCS CABIN PRESSURE switch is set to AUTO
    1.41 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    1.42 Close access panel 21QZ.

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-01-00A-903A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-09-11 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    CABIN PRESSURIZATION CONTROL UNIT

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    CABIN PRESSURIZATION CONTROL UNIT - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Cabin Pressurization Control Unit – Removal/Installation...................................... 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-21-30-01-00A-903A-A CABIN PRESSURIZATION CONTROL UNIT -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A STANDARD CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-18 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Lockwire Part P02-007 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Open and install a Safety clip (circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065) on these circuit
    breakers:
    − CPCS CH 1 (EPS BUS)
    − CPCS CH 2 (MAIN BUS)
    1.2 Remove the center carpet:
    − for Executive interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − for Standard interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A
    1.3 Open panel 11 DZ.
    1.4 Disconnect the four electrical connectors from the Cabin Pressurization Control Unit (CPCU)
    Figure 1 [1].
    1.5 Remove the four screws Figure 1 [5] that hold the CPCU and mount Figure 1 [4].
    1.6 Remove the CPCU and mount from the aircraft.
    1.7 If needed, remove the lockwire, the four screws Figure 1 [2] and washers Figure 1 [3] that hold the
    CPCU Figure 1 [1] on the mount Figure 1 [4].
    1.8 If needed, remove the CPCU Figure 1 [1] from the mount Figure 1 [4].
    2 Installation
    2.1 If needed, put the CPCU Figure 1 [1] on the mount Figure 1 [4], and install the four screws Figure 1 [2]
    and washers Figure 1 [3]. Use Lockwire (Pt.No. P02-007) to safety the four screws.
    2.2 Put the CPCU and mount in position on the aircraft.
    2.3 Install the four screws Figure 1 [5] that hold the CPCU and mount. Make sure that you put the screws
    through the cable tie mounts Figure 1 [8] to hold the wiring looms.
    2.4 Connect the four electrical connectors to the CPCU Figure 1 [1].
    2.5 Do the operational test of the CPCU (refer to AMM 12-B-21-30-01-00A-903A-A).
    2.6 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-18 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.7 Close panel 11 DZ.


    2.8 Install the center carpet:
    − for Executive interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − for Standard interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-18 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FRAME 18

    FRAME 17

    2
    3

    1
    8

    12-B-213001-A-S4080-20043-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Cabin Pressurization Control Unit – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-18 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-01-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-18 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-18 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    SAFETY VALVE

    CLEAN

    Table of Contents Page

    SAFETY VALVE - CLEAN.......................................................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Pressurization Control – Cleaning.......................................................................... 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-21-30-02-00A-920A-A SAFETY VALVE - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-02-00A-250A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Soap solution Part P01-005 As
    Required
    Isopropyl alcohol Part P01-011 As
    Required
    Cleaning cloth Part P02-003 As
    Required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1
    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    General
    This data module gives the procedure to clean the poppet valves and seats of the safety valve, and the air
    filter of the safety valve.
    2 Cleaning (Ref. Fig. 1)
    2.1
    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MANUFACTURERS
    HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

    CAUTION

    DO NOT USE COMPRESSED AIR TO CLEAN THE OUTFLOW VALVE OR THE SAFETY VALVE. IT
    WILL CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE VALVES.

    Remove the safety valve (Refer to DM 12-B-21-30-02-00A-920A-A).


    2.2 Clean The Safety Valve

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-02-00A-250A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.2.1 Open and clean the poppet valve and the seat of the safety valve with the Cleaning
    cloth (Pt.No. P02-003) and the Soap solution (Pt.No. P01-005) or with Isopropyl
    alcohol (Pt.No. P01-011) if there are large quantities of dirt.
    2.2.2 Make sure the safety valve is dry.
    2.2.3 Clean the filter cartridge (Figure 1 [4]) as follows:
    2.2.3.1 Remove the circlip (Figure 1 [1]) and filter screen (Figure 1 [2]) from the filter
    cartridge (Figure 1 [4]).
    2.2.3.2
    CAUTION

    DO NOT CRUSH THE COPPER RIBBON FILTER WHEN YOU REMOVE IT


    FROM THE FILTER CARTRIDGE.

    Carefully remove the copper ribbon filter (Figure 1 [3]) from the filter cartridge
    (Figure 1 [4]).
    2.2.3.3 Put the copper ribbon filter (Figure 1 [3]) in a container that is filled with
    Isopropyl alcohol (Pt.No. P01-011) for 10 minutes.
    2.2.3.4 Remove the copper ribbon filter (Figure 1 [3]) from the container and let it dry.
    2.2.3.5 Install the copper ribbon filter (Figure 1 [3]) in the filter cartridge (Figure 1 [4]).
    2.2.3.6 Install the filter screen (Figure 1 [2]) and circlip (Figure 1 [1]) in the filter
    cartridge (Figure 1 [4]).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-02-00A-250A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    AREAS TO CLEAN

    C 3
    2
    1

    12-B-213002-A-S4080-20037-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Pressurization Control – Cleaning

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-02-00A-250A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-02-00A-250A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-02-00A-250A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    SAFETY VALVE

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    SAFETY VALVE - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.......................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Safety Valve – Removal/Installation....................................................................... 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-21-30-00-00A-903A-A PRESSURIZATION CONTROL - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A FLIGHT COMPARTMENT CREW SEATS - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-10-04-00A-920A-A FLIGHT COMPARTMENT CARPET - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) Required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Gasket CSN 21-30-00-01-040 As
    required

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1
    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Removal
    1.1 Open and install a safety clip (Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on these
    circuit breakers:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − ECS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    1.2 Open the access door 11 BL.
    1.3 Remove the pilot seat (Refer to DM 12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A).
    1.4 Remove the flight compartment carpet (Refer to DM 12-B-25-10-04-00A-920A-A).
    1.5 Remove the access panel 11 AZ.
    1.6 Loosen the clamps (Figure 1 [3]) and (Figure 1 [6]) and disconnect the tube (Figure 1 [5]) from the
    safety valve (Figure 1 [7]).
    1.7 Hold the safety valve (Figure 1 [7]) then remove the six nuts (Figure 1 [1]), washers (Figure 1 [2]) and
    screen (Figure 1 [9]).
    1.8 Remove the safety valve (Figure 1 [7]) and gasket (Figure 1 [8]) from the structure. Discard the gasket.
    2 Installation
    2.1 Put the new gasket (Gasket ) (Figure 1 [8]) and the safety valve (Figure 1 [7]) in position on the
    structure and install the screen (Figure 1 [9]), six washers (Figure 1 [2]) and nuts (Figure 1 [1]).
    2.2 Torque the nuts (Figure 1 [1]) to between 12 and 15 lbf in (1,4 and 1,7 Nm).
    2.3 Connect the tube (Figure 1 [5]) to the safety valve (Figure 1 [7]) and tighten the clamps (Figure 1 [3])
    and (Figure 1 [6]).
    2.4 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.5 Install the access panel 11 AZ.


    2.6 Install the flight compartment carpet (Refer to DM 12-B-25-10-04-00A-920A-A).
    2.7 Install the pilot seat (Refer to DM 12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A).
    2.8 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − ECS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    2.9 Close the access door 11 BL.
    2.10 Do an adjustment/test of the pressurization system (Refer to DM 12-B-21-30-00-00A-903A-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1
    9

    B
    8
    2

    12-B-213002-A-S4080-20038-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Safety Valve – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-02-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    OUTFLOW VALVE

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    OUTFLOW VALVE - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION...................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Outflow Valve – Removal/Installation..................................................................... 3

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-21-30-00-00A-903A-A PRESSURIZATION CONTROL - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A FLIGHT COMPARTMENT CREW SEATS - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-10-04-00A-920A-A FLIGHT COMPARTMENT CARPET - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Gasket CSN 21-30-00-01-040 1

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Open and install a safety clip (Safety clip (circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on these
    circuit breakers:
    − CPCS CH 1 (EPS BUS)
    − CPCS CH 2 (MAIN BUS)
    1.2 Remove the copilot seat (refer to DM 12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A).
    1.3 Remove the flight compartment carpet (refer to DM 12-B-25-10-04-00A-920A-A).
    1.4 Open panel 11CZ.
    1.5 Disconnect the electrical connectors from the outflow valve.
    1.6 Remove the nuts (Figure 1 [1]) and the washers (Figure 1 [2]) that hold the outflow valve to frame 15.
    1.7 Remove the outflow valve (Figure 1 [4]) and the gasket (Figure 1 [3]) from the aircraft.
    1.8 Discard the gasket (Figure 1 [3]).
    2 Installation
    2.1 Use a new gasket (Figure 1 [3]).
    2.2 Install the gasket (Figure 1 [3]) on the outflow valve (Figure 1 [4]).
    2.3 Put the outflow valve (Figure 1 [4]) in position on the aircraft.
    2.4 Install the nuts (Figure 1 [1]) and the washers (Figure 1 [2]).
    2.5 Connect the electrical connectors to the outflow valve.
    2.6 Do the leak test and manual operation test of the pressurization control system (refer to DM 12-
    B-21-30-00-00A-903A-A).
    2.7 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.8 Close panel 11CZ.
    2.9 Install the flight compartment carpet (refer to DM 12-B-25-10-04-00A-920A-A).
    2.10 Install the copilot seat (refer to DM 12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FRAME 15

    FRAME 15
    B15
    5

    A B15
    4

    1
    2

    12-B-213003-A-S4080-20044-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Outflow Valve – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-03-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    NEGATIVE PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    NEGATIVE PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Relief Valve – Removal/Installation........................................................................ 3

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A ACCESS PROVISION – HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR
    - DESCRIPTION

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-05-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-05-05 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Open access panel 31 AB, refer to 12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A.
    1.2 Remove the three nuts (Figure 1 [25]), six washers (Figure 1 [20]) and three screws (Figure 1 [15])
    that hold the flange (Figure 1 [10]) on the bulkhead fitting (Figure 1 [45]).
    1.3 Remove the flange (Figure 1 [10]) from the bulkhead fitting (Figure 1 [45]).
    1.4 Remove the relief valve (Figure 1 [30]) from the bulkhead fitting (Figure 1 [45]).
    2 Installation
    2.1 Make sure that the bore of the bulkhead fitting (Figure 1 [45]) is free from corrosion and other damage.
    2.2 Put the relief valve (Figure 1 [30]) in position in the bulkhead fitting (Figure 1 [45]).

    Note

    Make sure that the valve flaps with the blue material face the rear of the aircraft and the valve locating
    pin goes into the hole in the bulkhead fitting.

    2.3 Put the flange (Figure 1 [10]) in position on the bulkhead fitting (Figure 1 [45]).
    2.4 Install the three screws (Figure 1 [15]), six washers (Figure 1 [20]) and three nuts (Figure 1 [25]) to
    hold the flange (Figure 1 [10]) on the bulkhead fitting (Figure 1 [45]).
    2.5 Close access panel 31 AB, refer to 12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-05-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-05-05 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    B
    B

    50 25 20 10 20 15

    30
    35 40 45

    B
    102338

    Figure 1 Relief Valve – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-05-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-05-05 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    1 Check
    1.1 Use your finger to carefully push open the flapper valves from the tailcone side. Make sure that:
    1.1.1 The flapper valves move freely and open fully.
    1.1.2 The valve armature is free of debris.
    1.2 Release the flapper valves and make sure that they close fully.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-30-05-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-05-05 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    HEATING AND COOLING

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    HEATING AND COOLING - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION............................................... 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 2
    2 Component Description.......................................................................................... 3
    2.1 Air Cycle System (Ref. )......................................................................................... 3
    2.1.1 Low Pressure Non-Return Valve............................................................................ 3
    2.1.2 Bleed Change-over Pressure Switch...................................................................... 4
    2.1.3 HP Bleed Air Venturi............................................................................................... 4
    2.1.4 HP Shut-Off Valve.................................................................................................. 4
    2.1.5 Overtemperature Switch (OTS).............................................................................. 4
    2.1.6 Primary Bleed Air Shut-Off Valve........................................................................... 4
    2.1.7 Flow Control Venturi............................................................................................... 4
    2.1.8 Overpressure Switch (OPS)................................................................................... 4
    2.1.9 Refrigeration Unit.................................................................................................... 4
    2.1.9.1 Heat Exchanger...................................................................................................... 5
    2.1.9.2 Cold Air Unit........................................................................................................... 5
    2.1.9.3 Water Injector......................................................................................................... 5
    2.1.10 Water Separator..................................................................................................... 5
    2.1.11 Duct Temperature Sensor...................................................................................... 5
    2.1.12 Duct Overtemperature Switch (DOTS)................................................................... 5
    2.1.13 Temperature Control Valve.................................................................................... 5
    2.1.14 ACS BLEED AIR Switch......................................................................................... 6
    2.2 Auxiliary Heating System........................................................................................ 6
    2.2.1 Heaters................................................................................................................... 6
    2.2.2 Auxiliary Heating Distribution (Ref. )....................................................................... 6
    2.2.3 Underfloor Temperature Sensor............................................................................. 6
    2.2.4 Passenger Compartment Temperature Sensor...................................................... 6
    2.2.5 Heating Contactors................................................................................................. 6
    2.2.6 Footwarmer............................................................................................................ 6
    2.3 Cooling................................................................................................................... 7
    2.3.1 Vent Fans............................................................................................................... 7
    2.3.2 FANS VENT Switch................................................................................................ 7
    2.3.3 VCCS...................................................................................................................... 7
    3 Operation................................................................................................................ 7
    3.1 Air Cycle System (Ref. )......................................................................................... 7
    3.2 Auxiliary Heating System........................................................................................ 8
    3.2.1 Underfloor Heater................................................................................................... 9
    3.2.2 Passenger Compartment Heater............................................................................ 9
    3.2.3 Footwarmer............................................................................................................ 9
    3.3 Cooling .................................................................................................................. 9
    3.3.1 Vent Fans............................................................................................................... 9
    3.3.2 VCCS...................................................................................................................... 10

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 2

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-30 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Air Cycle System – Schematic............................................................................... 11


    2 Distribution Ducting – Schematic............................................................................ 12

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-21-20-00-00A-040A-A DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-21-43-00-00A-040A-A FOOTWARMER - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-21-50-00-00A-040A-A ADDITIONAL COOLING - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-21-60-00-00A-040A-A TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION
    AND OPERATION
    12-B-31-41-00-00A-040A-A MODULAR AVIONICS UNIT - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION

    Description

    1 General
    The heating and cooling part of the Environmental Control System (ECS) has an Air Cycle System (ACS), an
    auxiliary heating system, and vent fans.
    The ACS supplies cooled engine bleed-air to the distribution system for the air conditioning system and the
    pressurization of the flight and passenger compartments.
    The auxiliary heating system supplies heated air to the cabin and the underfloor area to increase the temperature
    when ambient temperatures are low.
    An optional footwarmer supplies heated air to foot outlets in the flight compartment (refer to DM 12-
    B-21-43-00-00A-040A-A).
    The cooling system uses the vent fans to provide cool air through the overhead ventilation ducts to the flight and
    passenger compartments.
    An optional Vapour Cycle Cooling System (VCCS) decreases the temperature of the air in the flight and passenger
    compartments (refer to DM 12-B-21-50-00-00A-040A-A).
    The Integrated ECS Controller (IEC) (refer to DM 12-B-21-60-00-00A-040A-A) controls the ECS which has these
    primary components:

    ● the Air Cycle System


    − a firewall shut-off valve
    − a low pressure non-return valve
    − a primary bleed air shut-off valve
    − a flow control venturi
    − a high pressure (HP) shut-off valve

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-30 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − a bleed air venturi


    − an overpressure switch
    − an overtemperature switch
    − a bleed change-over pressure switch
    − a duct overtemperature switch
    − a duct temperature sensor
    − a refrigeration unit
    − a water separator
    − a flight compartment temperature sensor
    − temperature control valve (TCV)
    − an ACS BLEED AIR switch
    ● the Auxiliary heating system
    − a cabin heater
    − a cabin heater fan
    − an underfloor heater
    − an underfloor heater fan
    − distribution ducting
    − an underfloor temperature sensor
    − a passenger compartment temperature sensor
    − an ELECTRICAL HEAT/COOL switch

    The power supply to the air conditioning system is 28 VDC through the ECS (ESSENTIAL BUS) circuit breaker.
    The ACS gets inputs and outputs from:
    − The temperature control system (refer to DM 12-B-21-60-00-00A-040A-A)
    − The Modular Avionics Unit (MAU) (refer to DM 12-B-31-41-00-00A-040A-A)

    The auxiliary heating system gets inputs and outputs from:


    − The temperature control system (refer to DM 12-B-21-60-00-00A-040A-A)
    − The Modular Avionics Unit (MAU) (refer to DM 12-B-31-41-00-00A-040A-A)

    The auxiliary heating system supplies hot air to the distribution system (refer to DM 12-B-21-20-00-00A-040A-A)

    2 Component Description

    2.1 Air Cycle System (Ref. Fig. 1)

    2.1.1 Low Pressure Non-Return Valve


    The low pressure non-return valve makes sure P3 bleed air does not go into the engine through the P2.5 bleed-air
    line when the HP shut-off valve is open. It is installed in the P2.5 bleed-air line on the top of the engine.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-30 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.1.2 Bleed Change-over Pressure Switch


    The bleed change-over pressure switch connects the 28 VDC supply to the HP shut-off valve when the pressure of
    the P2.5 bleed-air line is too low for the air conditioning system to operate correctly. It is installed in the engine bay
    and connected to a sensing port in the P3 bleed-air line between the engine and the HP shut-off valve. The switch
    opens at 43 psi (2,97 bar) when the pressure increases and closes at 36 psi (2,48 bar) when the pressure
    decreases.

    2.1.3 HP Bleed Air Venturi


    The HP bleed air venturi controls the flow rate of the P3 bleed air supply to the air conditioning system. It is
    connected to the HP shut-off valve.

    2.1.4 HP Shut-Off Valve


    The HP shut-off valve lets P3 bleed air into the air conditioning system when the pressure of the P2.5 bleed air is
    not sufficient to operate the air conditioning system. It is installed on the right side of the engine. It is an air-
    operated valve controlled by a solenoid. The solenoid becomes energized when the P3 pressure switch closes.
    When the solenoid is energized the shut-off valve is open.

    2.1.5 Overtemperature Switch (OTS)


    The overtemperature switch (OTS) stops the supply of bleed air to the air conditioning system if the temperature of
    the bleed air supply from the engine is more than 290 °C. It is installed in the bleed-air line before the primary shut-
    off valve.

    2.1.6 Primary Bleed Air Shut-Off Valve


    The primary bleed air shut-off valve stops the supply of bleed-air from the engine when the system is set to off. It is
    installed on the engine bulkhead (frame 10). It is an air-operated valve controlled by a solenoid. When the solenoid
    is energized the valve is open.

    2.1.7 Flow Control Venturi


    The flow control venturi controls the flow rate of the bleed air supply to the refrigeration unit and the temperature
    control valve (refer to DM 12-B-21-60-00-00A-040A-A). It is connected to the primary shut-off valve.

    2.1.8 Overpressure Switch (OPS)


    The overpressure switch (OPS) stops the supply of bleed air from the engine if the air pressure at the outlet of the
    flow control venturi is more than 33 psi (2.28 bar). It is installed at the outlet of the flow control venturi.

    2.1.9 Refrigeration Unit


    The refrigeration unit decreases the temperature of the bleed air before it goes into the distribution system. It is
    installed at the bottom of the engine compartment. It has these primary components:
    − A heat exchanger
    − A cold air unit
    − A water injector

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-30 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.1.9.1 Heat Exchanger


    The heat exchanger is an aluminum single pass, crossflow, plate and fin unit and is an air-to-air heat exchanger
    which uses the ambient air flow as a coolant. The unit includes a one-charge air-tap to help the injection of water
    into the intake of the heat exchanger. The effect of the evaporation of the water when it touches the surface of the
    heat exchanger increases the performance of the unit.
    The heat exchanger decreases the temperature of the bleed air which flows through it. The ambient air comes from
    outside through a ram-air inlet duct. It has a plenum that is connected to the bleed air from the flow control venturi.
    The cooled air then goes to the cold air unit.

    2.1.9.2 Cold Air Unit


    The cold air unit takes air from outside the aircraft and sends the ambient air through the heat exchanger. The cold
    air unit has a duct, a turbine, a shaft and a fan. The duct has a ram-air inlet which is on the bottom aft engine-
    cowling and points forward, and an outlet on the right side of the same cowling. The turbine and the fan are on
    each end of the shaft. The shaft is installed in ball bearings which are lubricated with oil. There are plugs which
    give access to fill or drain the oil in the unit. The bleed air from the heat exchanger operates the turbine. This turns
    the fan which, when the aircraft is stationary, pulls the ambient air through the heat exchanger where it is used as a
    coolant.

    2.1.9.3 Water Injector


    The water injector sprays the water from the water separator into the ram-air inlet of the heat exchanger to increase
    the efficiency of the heat exchanger.

    2.1.10 Water Separator


    The water separator removes water from the cooled bleed air and sends the water to the water injector. It is
    installed at the bottom of the engine compartment and is connected to the outlet of the refrigeration unit and to the
    water injector.
    The water separator has an aluminum shell that contains a coalescer and its support. The moisture in the air is
    collected into large droplets as it passes through the coalescor, the droplets then enter a swirl section, where they
    are removed by centrifugal force. The separator has a spring loaded poppet valve which lets air bypass the unit if
    the coalescor becomes blocked.

    2.1.11 Duct Temperature Sensor


    The duct temperature sensor supplies an indication of the temperature of the bleed-air supply to the IEC. It is
    installed in the bleed air duct in the engine compartment. It is a temperature sensitive thermistor-unit.

    2.1.12 Duct Overtemperature Switch (DOTS)


    The duct overtemperature switch (DOTS) stops the supply of bleed air to the distribution system if the temperature
    is more than 105 °C. It is installed between the temperature control valve and the firewall shut-off valve.

    2.1.13 Temperature Control Valve


    The Temperature Control Valve (TCV) operates through one inlet and two outlet ports and is driven by a 28 VDC
    actuator. The valve body and rotating drum are aluminum. The actuator has gearing, limit switches, and a magnetic
    brake to control the series wound motor which can turn in one direction then another direction.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-30 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.1.14 ACS BLEED AIR Switch


    The ACS BLEED AIR switch is a rocker-type switch installed on the right cross bar panel. It has two positions
    AUTO and INHIBIT. In the AUTO position it connects the 28 VDC supply to the air conditioning system and
    temperature systems.

    2.2 Auxiliary Heating System

    2.2.1 Heaters
    Two 1.625 kW heater assemblies are installed below the passenger compartment floor, one to heat the underfloor
    avionics area and one to supply more heat to the passenger compartment.
    The forward heater assembly (U/F Heater) is installed between frames 21 and 22. The rear heater assembly (Cabin
    Heater) is installed between frames 29 and 30.
    Each heater assembly is in a cylindrical case with an electrical connector, an air inlet and an air outlet.
    Each heater assembly has two elements that get hot, a fan and a thermal safety switch, which will open if the
    temperature of the heater gets too high. The thermal safety switch of each heater assembly is monitored by the
    IEC. The heater element and the fan motor of each heater assembly operates independently. The fan motors use
    approximately 200 W and are used to make the air go through the heater. The air heated by the heater assemblies
    is then sent to the distribution ducting.

    2.2.2 Auxiliary Heating Distribution (Ref. Fig. 2)


    The underfloor heater assembly gets its air supply from the area below the floor. The air goes through a wire mesh
    grill on the inlet and across the heater element to the outlet duct. The outlet duct supplies the heated air forwards
    and rearwards below the floor to make sure the avionics equipment is warm.
    The passenger compartment heater assembly has an inlet and an outlet duct. The inlet duct connects the heater
    assembly to a collector box and grill installed in the baggage compartment floor step at Frame 34. The outlet duct
    is connected to the right rear distribution duct in the passenger compartment sidewall.

    2.2.3 Underfloor Temperature Sensor


    The underfloor sensor sends a temperature indication to the IEC. It is installed adjacent to the air inlet of the
    underfloor heater. In this position it measures the coldest part of the underfloor area.

    2.2.4 Passenger Compartment Temperature Sensor


    The passenger compartment sensor sends a temperature indication to the IEC. It has a small 12 VDC fan that
    moves air over the sensor probe. This makes for a better measurement of the temperature accuracy. If the fan
    becomes defective the sensor will send a higher than usual temperature indication to the IEC. This will result in an
    earlier de-energizing of the heater element. The sensor is installed at the rear right side of the passenger headliner.

    2.2.5 Heating Contactors


    The heating contactors, one for each heater assembly are controlled by signals from the IEC (Refer to DM 12-
    B-21-60-00-00A-040A-A). When a signal from the IEC is given the contactor will close and supply 28 VDC to the
    heater assembly elements. The heating contactors are installed with and are part of the heater assemblies.

    2.2.6 Footwarmer
    The optional footwarmer supplies heated air to foot outlets in the flight compartment (refer to DM 12-
    B-21-43-00-00A-040A-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-30 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.3 Cooling

    2.3.1 Vent Fans


    The vent fans are installed above the baggage area aft of frame 35 on the right and left side of the aircraft. Air from
    the vent fans is supplied through the overhead ducts to cool the flight and passenger compartments

    2.3.2 FANS VENT Switch


    The FANS VENT switch is a rocker-type switch installed on the right cross bar panel. It has two positions AUTO
    and LOW, in the AUTO position the IEC controls the vent fans. When the LOW position is selected then the vent
    fans will operate at a reduced rate.

    2.3.3 VCCS
    The VCCS is a factory option (refer to DM 12-B-21-50-00-00A-040A-A).

    3 Operation

    3.1 Air Cycle System (Ref. Fig. 1)


    The usual operation of the ACS in the heating mode, is with the ACS BLEED AIR switch in the AUTO position and
    with the adjustable air outlets open at the overhead, side and feet positions. The temperature control system (refer
    to DM 12-B-21-60-00-00A-040A-A) then automatically controls the cockpit and cabin air temperatures as set by the
    pilot on the systems MFD ENVIRONMENT status window.
    During engine start when the engine speed is more than 62%, the NG>62% relay energizes and the ACS is
    enabled.
    With the ECS control switches set to AUTO, 28 VDC is connected through the ACS shut-off latch-relay to the
    primary shut-off valve. The primary shut-off valve opens to let the P2.5 pressure into the system. The 28 VDC
    supply also goes to the P3 pressure switch, overpressure switch, overtemperature switch, duct overtemperature
    switch and the switch on the firewall shut-off valve.
    When the engine is at idle speeds the P2.5 pressure is not sufficient to operate the air conditioning system. The P3
    pressure switch connects a 28 VDC supply to the HP shut-off valve. The HP shut-off valve opens and lets P3 bleed
    air go into the P2.5 line. This closes the non-return valve to makes sure the P3 air does not go back into the
    engine. The P3 air goes through the primary shut-off valve into the system. When the engine speed increases the
    P3 pressure increases and the P3 pressure switch removes the 28 VDC supply from the HP shut-off valve and the
    valve closes. The P2.5 pressure opens the non-return valve and the system uses the P2.5 bleed air supply.
    The bleed air goes through the flow control venturi to the temperature control valve (refer to DM 12-
    B-21-60-00-00A-040A-A). The temperature control valve sends air to the refrigeration unit and downstream of the
    cooling turbine. In the refrigeration unit the bleed air goes through the heat exchanger to the turbine. The turbine
    operates the fan to pull ambient air through the heat exchanger to cool the bleed air. When the aircraft is in flight,
    the ram air through the duct increases the cooling effect. The cooled bleed air from the heat exchanger goes
    through the cooling turbine. The cooled bleed air from the turbine is mixed with the hot bleed air from the
    temperature control valve. The IEC operates the temperature control valve to give the selected temperature in the
    flight and passenger compartments.
    The conditioned air goes to the water separator where the moisture in the air is collected into large droplets as it
    passes through the coalescor, the droplets then enter a swirl section, where they are removed by centrifugal force.
    The water drains from the water separator and goes to the water injector of the refrigeration unit. The water is
    sprayed into the ambient air that flows through the heat exchanger to increase the cooling effect.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-30 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    The conditioned air goes to the firewall shut-off valve and into the distribution system.
    The ECS Controller adjusts the position of the ACS TCV to give the warm/cold air mix for the cockpit/cabin
    temperatures set on the ENVIRONMENT status window. If additional heating is required the cabin auxiliary heater
    and fan will be automatically selected on. If additional cooling is required the VCCS and fans (if installed) will be
    automatically selected on.
    The ACS stops and the TCV moves to the full cold position when the operation of a protection switch (OPS, OTS,
    DOT or FSOV) is sensed. This disconnects the 28 VDC supply from the primary shut-off valve, bleed change-over
    pressure switch and the HPSOV. The primary shut-off valve closes and the HP shut-off valve closes. At the same
    time the amber ACS LOW INFLOW caution message on the CAS window comes on.
    If the failure condition is removed from the system the valves will start operation from the cold position. It is
    necessary to set the ACS BLEED AIR switch to INHIBIT then back to AUTO to cancel the ACS LOW INFLOW
    caution indication.

    3.2 Auxiliary Heating System


    The auxiliary heating system can be operated from aircraft electrical power when the engine is in operation, or from
    external power. There is an ELECTRICAL HEAT/COOL switch on the right inner crossbar panel.
    The power supplies to the auxiliary heating system are:
    − 28 VDC through the CABIN HEATER (POWERLINE) circuit breaker for the passenger compartment heater
    − 28 VDC through the CABIN FAN (GENERATOR 1 BUS) circuit breaker for the cabin heater fan
    − 28 VDC through the U/F HEATER (LEFT POWER JUNCTION BOX) circuit breaker for the underfloor heater
    element
    − 28 VDC through the U/F FAN (GENERATOR 2 BUS) circuit breaker for the underfloor heater fan
    − 28 VDC through the COND HTR CTL (NON ESSENTIAL BUS) circuit breaker

    All the control, temperature sensor inputs and heater operation outputs (but not the power switching) are controlled
    by the IEC. The control logic conditions that follow will stop the electrical power supply to the heaters and will
    prevent their operation:
    − ECS uses P3 bleed air (airborne)
    ● CABIN heater element (inhibited) and fan (inhibited after a 30 second delay)
    ● U/F heater element and fan (operate)
    − Vapour Cycle Cooling System (factory option) in operation
    ● CABIN heater element (inhibited) and fan (inhibited after a 30 second delay)
    ● U/F heater element (inhibited) fan (operates)
    − Hydraulic power pack (airborne)
    ● CABIN heater element (inhibited) and fan (inhibited after a 30 second delay)
    ● U/F heater element (inhibited) fan (operates)
    − Engine Starter ON (during first 80 seconds)
    ● CABIN heater element (inhibited) and fan (inhibited after a 30 second delay)
    ● U/F heater element (inhibited) fan (operates)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-30 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.2.1 Underfloor Heater


    With the ELECTRICAL HEAT/COOL switch set to AUTO a signal is sent to the IEC which then energizes the
    underfloor heater fan. If the underfloor temperature sensor reads a temperature of below 5°C the IEC will energize
    the heater contactor. The contactor will close and energize the underfloor heater element. The air that is pulled
    through the heater by the fan is then heated and supplied to the distribution duct. The heated air is then distributed
    forwards and rearwards in the underfloor area to warm the avionics equipment. When the underfloor temperature
    sensor reads a temperature of 11°C it will tell the IEC to de-energize the heater contactor. The contactor will then
    open and de-energize the heater element. The heater fan will continue to operate unless stopped by the control
    logic condition.

    3.2.2 Passenger Compartment Heater


    With the ELECTRICAL HEAT/COOL switch set to AUTO a signal is sent to the IEC which then energizes the
    passenger compartment heater fan. Control of the heater element is from the passenger compartment rear
    temperature sensor. The sensor will tell the IEC to energize the heater when the temperature in the passenger
    compartment goes below the temperature set on the CAB temperature selector on the ENVIRONMENT WINDOW.
    The fan takes inlet air from floor level through the inlet grill and collector box to the heater inlet. The air that is
    pulled through the heater by the fan is then heated and supplied to the distribution duct in the right sidewall, where
    it adds more heated air to the ECS airflow. This configuration gives a better circulation of air and equal
    temperatures in the passenger compartment than the other configurations. The heater fan will continue to operate
    unless stopped by the control logic condition.
    The interior of an aircraft that has had a cold soak can be pre-heated before engine start by the connection of
    external power and setting the CAB temperature on the ENVIRONMENT WINDOW. This will make the underfloor
    and passenger compartment heater elements and fans operate. The heating stops during the engine start cycle.
    If the internal temperature of a heater becomes too high the thermal protection switch will operate and signal the
    IEC. The IEC then de-energizes the HEATER ELEMENT. The fans will continue to operate to cool the heater.
    When the heater has cooled sufficiently the thermal protection switch will be set again and the heater will operate.

    3.2.3 Footwarmer
    The optional footwarmer supplies heated air to foot outlets in the flight compartment (refer to DM 12-
    B-21-43-00-00A-040A-A).

    3.3 Cooling
    The cooling system can be operated from aircraft electrical power when the engine is in operation, or from external
    power. There is an ELECTRICAL HEAT/COOL switch on the right inner crossbar panel.
    The power supplies to the cooling system are:
    − 28 VDC through the VENT FANS (NON ESSENTIAL BUS) circuit breaker for the left and right vent fans
    − 28 VDC through the COND HTR CTL (NON ESSENTIAL BUS) circuit breaker for the ELECTRICAL HEAT/
    COOL switch

    3.3.1 Vent Fans


    With the ELECTRICAL HEAT/COOL switch set to AUTO a signal is sent to the IEC which then energizes the vent
    fans. The vent fan will continue to operate unless stopped by the control logic condition.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-30 Page 9


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.3.2 VCCS
    The optional Vapour Cycle Cooling System (VCCS) decreases the temperature of the air in the flight and
    passenger compartments (refer to DM 12-B-21-50-00-00A-040A-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-30 Page 10


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    MAU
    AUTO
    START
    ESSENTIAL BUS

    ECU

    ACS BLEED GEN 1

    ACS CTRL
    AIR SWITCH GEN 1
    AUTO

    K161H3

    K161J4
    AUTO
    START

    GEN1 AUTO NG > 62%


    INHIBIT RESET

    K161K4
    ACS SHUT-OFF
    FLIGHT COMPARTMENT
    TEMP. SENSOR BLEED AIR SUPPLY
    P2.5 P3 BLEED
    CABIN CHANGE-OVER
    TEMP. SENSOR
    PRESSURE
    SWITCH
    U/FLOOR
    TEMP. SENSOR

    HP
    AIR
    FLOW
    CONTROL
    VENTURI
    NON
    GROUND RETURN
    VALVE
    HP
    K161A2

    INTEGRATED T SHUT-OFF
    ECS OVER- VALVE
    CONTROLLER TEMPERATURE
    WEIGHT SWITCH
    ON LEG 2
    PRIMARY
    BLEED AIR
    SHUT-OFF
    VALVE
    FLOW
    CONTROL
    VENTURI
    OVER-
    PRESSURE
    TEMPERATURE
    SWITCH
    CONTROL VALVE

    REFRIGERATION
    DUCT
    UNIT
    OVER-
    TEMPERATURE HEAT
    AMBIENT
    SWITCH WATER EXCHANGER
    AIR
    INJECTOR

    DUCT
    TEMP
    SENSOR

    T T
    DISTRIBUTION WATER AMBIENT
    TURBINE SHAFT AIR
    SYSTEM SEPARATOR
    FIREWALL OVERBOARD
    SHUT-OFF FAN
    VALVE

    12-B-214001-A-S4080-00001-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Air Cycle System – Schematic

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-30 Page 11


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    CONDITIONED AIR
    SUPPLIED FROM ECS
    FIREWALL
    FOOT WARMER SHUTOFF VALVE
    OPTION

    FOOT
    OUTLET FOOT
    OUTLET

    FOOT OUTLET
    FOOT OUTLET OPEN/CLOSED
    OPEN/CLOSED LEVER
    LEVER

    PANEL PANEL
    OUTLET OUTLET

    FLOW
    CONTROL EMERGENCY RAM
    VALVE AIR INLET

    PLENUM
    CHAMBER
    NON-RETURN
    VALVE

    PAX
    DOOR

    CABIN SIDEWALL
    DISTRIBUTION CABIN SIDEWALL
    DUCT LEFT DISTRIBUTION
    DUCT RIGHT

    U/F HEATER

    U/FLOOR
    DISTRIBUTION
    DUCT

    CABIN HEATER

    INLET FROM
    CABIN

    FLOOR STEP

    12-B-214001-A-S4080-00004-A-01-1

    Figure 2 Distribution Ducting – Schematic

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-30 Page 12
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    SECONDARY HEATING

    ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Table of Contents Page

    SECONDARY HEATING - ADJUSTMENT/TEST....................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A STANDARD CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Resistance box Part Local supply As
    required
    Stopwatch Part Local supply As
    required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-01-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-06 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This date module gives the procedures to do:
    − an operation test of the cabin auxiliary heater thermal protection switch
    − a function test of the underfloor heater thermal protection switch
    2 Cabin Auxiliary Heater Operation Test
    2.1 Energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.2 On the Multi Function Display (MFD) Environment window, set the CAB demand temperature to full
    hot.
    2.3 Make sure that the cabin auxiliary heater and the cabin auxiliary heater fan is ON.

    CAUTION

    THE CABIN AUXILIARY HEATER CAN OVERHEAT. IF THE THERMAL PROTECTION SWITCH
    DOES NOT OPEN AFTER 120 SECONDS, CLOSE THE CABIN AUXILIARY HEATER FAN CIRCUIT
    BREAKER (GENERATOR 1 BUS) AND LET THE CABIN AUXILIARY HEATER COOL.

    2.4 Open this circuit breaker and start the Stopwatch (Pt.No. Local supply):
    − CABIN FAN (GENERATOR 1 BUS)
    2.5 Make sure that the cabin auxiliary heater fan is OFF.
    2.6 Make sure that the cabin heater thermal protection switch opens after approximately 70 to 120
    seconds. The cabin heater does not heat.
    2.7 Close this circuit breaker and start the Stopwatch (Pt.No. Local supply):
    − CABIN FAN (GENERATOR 1 BUS)
    2.8 Make sure that the cabin auxiliary heater fan is ON, and the cabin auxiliary heater is OFF.
    2.9 Wait for approximately 5 minutes then make sure that the cabin auxiliary heater thermal protection
    switch closes and the cabin auxiliary heater is ON. Make sure that the cabin auxiliary heater fan is ON.
    2.10 Set the CAB demand temperature to the center (default) position.
    2.11 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    3 Underfloor Heater Function Test
    3.1 Set Up
    3.1.1 Remove the passenger compartment center carpet above access panel 12EZ:
    − for Executive interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-01-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-06 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − for Standard interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A


    3.1.2 Open access panel 12EZ.
    3.1.3 Disconnect electrical connector Z211P from the underfloor temperature sensor.
    3.1.4 Connect a Resistance box (Pt.No. Local supply) to electrical connector Z211P.
    3.1.5 Set the resistance box to 3°C (4987Ω).
    3.2 Procedure
    3.2.1 Energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    3.2.2 Set the CAB demand temperature three clicks towards hot (right) from the center position.
    3.2.3 Make sure that the underfloor heater is ON.

    CAUTION

    THE UNDERFLOOR HEATER CAN OVERHEAT. IF THE THERMAL PROTECTION


    SWITCH DOES NOT OPEN AFTER 120 SECONDS, CLOSE THE U/F FAN CIRCUIT
    BREAKER (GENERATOR 2 BUS) AND LET THE UNDERFLOOR HEATER COOL.

    3.2.4 Open this circuit breaker and start the Stopwatch (Pt.No. Local supply):
    − U/F FAN (GENERATOR 2 BUS)
    3.2.5 Make sure that the underfloor heater fan is OFF.
    3.2.6 Make sure that the underfloor heater thermal protection switch opens after approximately 70
    to 120 seconds. The underfloor heater does not heat.
    3.2.7 Close this circuit breaker and start the stopwatch:
    − U/F FAN (GENERATOR 2 BUS)
    3.2.8 Make sure that the underfloor heater fan is ON.
    3.2.9 Make sure that the underfloor heater is OFF.
    3.2.10 Wait for approximately 5 minutes then make sure that the underfloor heater is ON.
    3.2.11 Make sure that the underfloor heater fan is ON.
    3.2.12 Set the CAB demand temperature to the center (default) position.
    3.3 Close Up
    3.3.1 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    3.3.2 Disconnect the resistance box from electrical connector Z211P.
    3.3.3 Connect electrical connector Z211P to the underfloor temperature sensor.
    3.3.4 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.3.5 Close access panel 12EZ.
    3.3.6 Install the passenger compartment center carpet above access panel 12EZ:
    − for Executive interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − for Standard interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-01-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-06 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-01-00A-903A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-06 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    UNDERFLOOR HEATER

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    UNDERFLOOR HEATER - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................................................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Under Floor Auxiliary Heater – Removal/Installation.............................................. 5

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-21-40-01-00A-903A-A SECONDARY HEATING - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A STANDARD CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Cable tie Part P09-014 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Make sure external power is not connected to the aircraft.
    1.2 Open these circuit breakers:
    − BAT1 (BATTERY AND EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX)
    − BAT2 (BATTERY AND EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX)
    1.3 Remove the passenger compartment center carpet:
    − for Executive interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − for Standard interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A
    1.4 Remove the floor panels 12 BZ and 12 EZ.
    1.5 Remove the four screws (Figure 1 [21]), washers (Figure 1 [19]) and (Figure 1 [20]) and cover
    (Figure 1 [18]) from the heater (Figure 1 [6]).
    1.6 Identify and tag the electrical connections (Figure 1 [12]) and (Figure 1 [15]).
    1.7 Remove the two nuts (Figure 1 [17]), washers (Figure 1 [16]) and electrical connections (Figure 1 [15])
    from the heater (Figure 1 [6]).
    1.8 Remove the four screws (Figure 1 [14]), washers (Figure 1 [13]) and electrical connections
    (Figure 1 [12]) and from the heater (Figure 1 [6]).
    1.9 Remove the cable tie (Figure 1 [28]) and move the insulation (Figure 1 [27]) to get access to the clamp
    (Figure 1 [26]).
    1.10 Loosen the clamp (Figure 1 [26]) and disconnect the rear hose (Figure 1 [30]).
    1.11 Loosen the clamp (Figure 1 [24]) and disconnect the forward hose (Figure 1 [23]).
    1.12 Remove the nut (Figure 1 [3]), washer (Figure 1 [2]), bonding lead (Figure 1 [1]) and bolt
    (Figure 1 [25]) from the air outlet duct (Figure 1 [22]) and heater (Figure 1 [6]).
    1.13 Loosen the two clamps (Figure 1 [7]) from around the heater (Figure 1 [6]). Move the clamps
    (Figure 1 [7]) away from the supports (Figure 1 [4]).
    1.14 Remove the heater (Figure 1 [6]) from the aircraft.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1.15 Remove the three nuts (Figure 1 [3]), washers (Figure 1 [2]), bolts (Figure 1 [25]) and remove the air
    outlet duct (Figure 1 [22]) and gasket (Figure 1 [5]) from the heater (Figure 1 [6]).
    1.16 Remove the three screws (Figure 1 [11]), washers (Figure 1 [10]), cover (Figure 1 [9]) and inlet screen
    (Figure 1 [8]) from the heater (Figure 1 [6]).
    1.17 Remove and the clamps (Figure 1 [7]) from the heater (Figure 1 [6]).
    2 Installation
    2.1
    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Install the cover (Figure 1 [9]) and inlet screen (Figure 1 [8]) on the heater (Figure 1 [6]) with the three
    screws (Figure 1 [11]) and washers (Figure 1 [10]).
    2.2 Put the clamps (Figure 1 [7]) in position on the heater (Figure 1 [6]).
    2.3 Put the air outlet duct (Figure 1 [22]) and the gasket (Figure 1 [5]) in the correct position on the heater
    (Figure 1 [6]). Install the one top and two bottom bolts (Figure 1 [25]), washers (Figure 1 [2]) and nuts
    (Figure 1 [3]).
    2.4 Put the heater (Figure 1 [6]) in position on the supports (Figure 1 [4]) and connect the rear hose
    (Figure 1 [30]) to the inlet duct (Figure 1 [22]).
    2.5 Move the heater (Figure 1 [6]) on the supports (Figure 1 [4]) to give a distance of 4.25 in (108 mm)
    from the vertical stiffener (29) to the flange of the heater outlet (Figure 1 [6]).
    2.6 Position the clamps (Figure 1 [7]) around the supports (Figure 1 [4]) and heater (Figure 1 [6]) and
    tighten the clamps (Figure 1 [7]).
    2.7 Install the air outlet duct (Figure 1 [22]) top bolt (Figure 1 [25]), bonding lead (Figure 1 [1]), washer
    (Figure 1 [2]) and nut (Figure 1 [3]).
    2.8 Connect the forward hose (Figure 1 [23]). Position and tighten the clamp (Figure 1 [24]).
    2.9 Position and tighten the clamp (Figure 1 [26]) on the rear hose (Figure 1 [30]).
    2.10 Move the insulation (Figure 1 [27]) in position over the clamp (Figure 1 [26]) and install the Cable
    tie (Pt.No. P09-014) (Figure 1 [28]).
    2.11 Connect the four electrical connections (Figure 1 [12]) to the heater (Figure 1 [6]) with the washers
    (Figure 1 [13]) and screws (Figure 1 [14]).
    2.12 Connect the two electrical connections (Figure 1 [15]) to the heater (Figure 1 [6]) with the washers
    (Figure 1 [16]) and nuts (Figure 1 [17]).
    2.13 Remove the tags from the electrical cables (Figure 1 [12]) and (Figure 1 [15]).
    2.14 Install the cover (Figure 1 [18]) on the heater (Figure 1 [6]) with the four screws (Figure 1 [21]) and
    washers (Figure 1 [19]) and (Figure 1 [20]).
    2.15 Close these circuit breakers:
    − BAT1 (BATTERY AND EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX)
    − BAT2 (BATTERY AND EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX)
    2.16 Do the functional test of the under floor heater and thermal protection switch (refer to DM 12-
    B-21-40-01-00A-903A-A).
    2.17 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.18 Install the floor panels 12 BZ and 12 EZ.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.19 Install the passenger compartment center carpet:


    − for Executive interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − for Standard interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    FR 24

    FR 22
    FR 21

    FR 19
    B

    29

    28
    26 27

    25

    1
    C 2
    3

    30

    24
    23

    22
    5
    4

    6
    21 7

    20
    19 7

    B
    18 17
    14

    13
    16
    15
    C
    12

    10
    11
    21168

    Figure 1 Under Floor Auxiliary Heater – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-01-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 6
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    REFRIGERATION PACK

    INSPECTION/CHECK

    Table of Contents Page

    REFRIGERATION PACK - INSPECTION/CHECK..................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Refrigeration Pack – Inspection/Check.................................................................. 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-21-40-01-00A-920A-A UNDERFLOOR HEATER - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-21-40-10-00A-920A-A COLD AIR UNIT - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-71-10-00-00A-920A-A ENGINE COWLINGS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required
    Light source Part Local supply As
    required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-02-00A-313A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedure to do an inspection of the refrigeration pack heat exchanger matrix.
    2 Inspection
    2.1 Inspection
    2.1.1 Open and install a safety clip (Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065))
    on this circuit breaker:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    2.1.2 Remove the lower engine cowling 42AB (refer to DM 12-B-71-10-00-00A-920A-A).
    2.1.3 Use a light (Light source (Pt.No. Local supply)) and look through the duct (Figure 1 [2]) to
    examine the matrix (Figure 1 [3]) of the heat exchanger (Figure 1 [1]) for damage and
    contamination.
    2.1.4 If damage or contamination is found do the Detailed Inspection.
    2.1.5 If no damage or contamination is found, install the lower engine cowling 42AB (refer to DM
    12-B-71-10-00-00A-920A-A).
    2.1.6 Remove the safety clip and close this circuit breaker:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    2.2 Detailed Inspection
    2.2.1 Open the right upper engine cowling 43AR.
    2.2.2 Loosen the clamp (Figure 1 [7]) and disconnect the hose (Figure 1 [6]) from the refrigeration
    unit (Figure 1 [1]).
    2.2.3 Remove the three screws (Figure 1 [5]) and washers (Figure 1 [4]).
    2.2.4 Remove the two screws (Figure 1 [9]) and washers (Figure 1 [8]).
    2.2.5 Disconnect the duct (Figure 1 [2]) from the heat exchanger (Figure 1 [1]) and move it
    sufficiently to get access to the heat exchanger matrix (Figure 1 [3]).
    2.2.6 Use a soft bristle brush to remove the contamination from the matrix (Figure 1 [3]).
    2.2.7 Examine the matrix (Figure 1 [3]) of the heat exchanger (Figure 1 [1]) for damage.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-02-00A-313A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.2.8 No damage to the matrix (Figure 1 [3]) is permitted. If damage is found:


    2.2.8.1 Remove the cold air unit from the heat exchanger (refer to DM 12-
    B-21-40-10-00A-920A-A).
    2.2.8.2 Replace the heat exchanger (refer to DM 12-B-21-40-01-00A-920A-A).
    2.2.8.3 Install the cold air unit from the heat exchanger (refer to DM 12-
    B-21-40-10-00A-920A-A).
    2.2.9 Connect the duct (Figure 1 [2]) to the heat exchanger (Figure 1 [1]).
    2.2.10 Install the two screws (Figure 1 [9]) and washers (Figure 1 [8]).
    2.2.11 Install the three screws (Figure 1 [5]) and washers (Figure 1 [4]).
    2.2.12 Connect the hose (Figure 1 [6]) to the refrigeration unit (Figure 1 [1]) and tighten the clamp
    (Figure 1 [7]).
    2.2.13 Close the right upper engine cowling 43AR.
    2.2.14 Install the lower engine cowling 42AB (refer to DM 12-B-71-10-00-00A-920A-A).
    2.2.15 Remove the safety clip and close this circuit breaker:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-02-00A-313A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A B

    B 1

    9 8

    1 4
    5

    D C
    6
    21174

    Figure 1 Refrigeration Pack – Inspection/Check

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-02-00A-313A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-02-00A-313A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-02-00A-313A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    REFRIGERATION PACK

    SERVICING

    Table of Contents Page

    REFRIGERATION PACK - SERVICING..................................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Refrigeration Pack – Servicing............................................................................... 5

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903A-A POWER PLANT - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required
    Oil container with hose Part Local supply As
    (Minimum capacity 0.68 fl oz (20 required
    cc))

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-02-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Cleaning cloth Part P02-003 As
    required
    Lockwire Part P02-007 As
    required
    Oil Part P10-009 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    O-ring CSN 21-40-00-04-062 As
    required

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedure to add oil to the cold air unit in the refrigeration pack.
    2 Add Oil To The Cold Air Unit
    2.1 Preparation
    2.1.1 Open and install a clip (Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on
    these circuit breakers:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − ECS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    2.1.2 Open the engine cowlings 43 AL and 43 AR.
    2.2 Procedure

    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIAL. OBEY THE MANUFACTURERS
    HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-02-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.2.1 Use a cloth (Cleaning cloth (Pt.No. P02-003)) to clean the cold air unit (Figure 1 [1]) around
    the fill plug (Figure 1 [5]) and the drain plug (Figure 1 [3]).
    2.2.2 Remove the lockwire from the fill plug (Figure 1 [5]).
    2.2.3 Remove the fill plug (Figure 1 [5]) and the O-ring (Figure 1 [4]) from the cold air unit
    (Figure 1 [1]). Discard the O-ring.
    2.2.4 Use the container (Oil container with hose (Minimum capacity 0.68 fl oz (20
    cc)) (Pt.No. Local supply)) to put 0.68 fl oz (20 cc) of oil (Oil (Pt.No. P10-009)) in the cold air
    unit (Figure 1 [1]) through the fill hole.
    2.2.5 Let the cotton in the cold air unit (Figure 1 [1]) absorb the oil for 20 minutes.
    2.2.6 Remove the lockwire from the drain plug (Figure 1 [3]).
    2.2.7 Put a cloth (Cleaning cloth (Pt.No. P02-003)) below the drain plug (Figure 1 [3]).
    2.2.8 Remove the drain plug (Figure 1 [3]) and the O-ring (Figure 1 [2]) from the cold air unit
    (Figure 1 [1]). Discard the O-ring.
    2.2.9 Let the unwanted oil drain out of the cold air unit (Figure 1 [1]) on to the cleaning cloth.
    2.2.10 If no oil drains out do these steps:

    CAUTION

    IF OIL DOES NOT DRAIN OUT OF THE COLD AIR UNIT AFTER 80 CC OF OIL HAS
    BEEN PUT IN, THE COLD AIR UNIT MUST BE REPLACED.

    2.2.10.1 Temporarily install the drain plug (Figure 1 [3]) in the cold air unit (Figure 1 [1]).
    2.2.10.2 Put 0.68 fl oz (20 cc) more oil (Oil (Pt.No. P10-009)) into the cold air unit
    (Figure 1 [1]) through the fill hole.
    2.2.10.3 Let the cotton in the cold air unit (Figure 1 [1]) absorb the oil for 20 minutes.
    2.2.10.4 Remove the drain plug (Figure 1 [3]) and let the unwanted oil drain out of the
    cold air unit (Figure 1 [1]) on to the cleaning cloth.
    2.2.10.5 If no oil drains out of the cold air unit (Figure 1 [1]) do Step 2.2.10.1 thru
    Step 2.2.10.4 again.

    CAUTION

    YOU MUST LET ALL OF THE UNWANTED OIL DRAIN OUT OF THE COLD
    AIR UNIT BEFORE YOU INSTALL THE DRAIN PLUG. TOO MUCH OIL IN
    THE COLD AIR UNIT CAN CAUSE DAMAGE.

    2.2.11 Install the drain plug (Figure 1 [3]), fill plug (Figure 1 [5]) with new O-ring (O-ring )
    (Figure 1 [2]) and (Figure 1 [4]) in the cold air unit (Figure 1 [1]).
    2.2.12 Remove the cleaning cloth from below the cold air unit (Figure 1 [1]).
    2.2.13 Safety the drain plug (Figure 1 [3]) and the fill plug (Figure 1 [5]) with lockwire
    (Lockwire (Pt.No. P02-007)).
    2.3 Close Up
    2.3.1 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.3.2 Close the engine cowlings 43 AL and 43 AR.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-02-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.3.3 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − ECS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    2.3.4 Do the adjustment/test of the ECS (refer to DM 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903A-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-02-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A B

    4 1
    B

    3
    21121

    Figure 1 Refrigeration Pack – Servicing

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-02-00A-902A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-02-00A-902A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 6
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    REFRIGERATION PACK

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    REFRIGERATION PACK - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................................................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Refrigeration Pack – Removal/Installation.............................................................. 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903A-A POWER PLANT - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-71-10-00-00A-920A-A ENGINE COWLINGS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    O-ring CSN 21-40-00-03-125 As
    required
    Seal CSN 21-40-00-02-015 As
    required
    O-ring CSN 21-40-00-02-065 As
    required
    Washer CSN 21-40-00-04-053 As
    required

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Open and install a clip (Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on these circuit
    breakers:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − ECS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    1.2 Open the left and right upper engine-cowlings 43 AL and 43 AR.
    1.3 Remove the lower engine cowling 42 AB (refer to DM 12-B-71-10-00-00A-920A-A).
    1.4 Loosen the clamp (Figure 1 [19]) and disconnect the pipe (Figure 1 [10]) from the refrigeration unit
    (Figure 1 [11]).
    1.5 Loosen the clamp (Figure 1 [9]). Remove the clamp (Figure 1 [3]), disconnect and remove the pipe
    (Figure 1 [4]) from the refrigeration unit (Figure 1 [11]) and the temperature control valve (Figure 1 [1]).
    Remove and discard the seal (Figure 1 [2]).
    1.6 Remove the two clamps (Figure 1 [31]) and the pipe (Figure 1 [29]). Remove and discard the O-ring
    (Figure 1 [30]) and the seal (Figure 1 [19]).
    1.7 Loosen the clamp (Figure 1 [28]) on the flexible pipe (Figure 1 [27]).
    1.8 Remove the two clamps (Figure 1 [7]) and (Figure 1 [5]) and the pipe (Figure 1 [6]). Remove and
    discard the O-ring (Figure 1 [8]).
    1.9 Remove the three screws (Figure 1 [18]) and washers (Figure 1 [17]), and the two screws
    (Figure 1 [33]) and six washers (Figure 1 [34]).
    1.10 Remove the nut (Figure 1 [26]), washers (Figure 1 [25]) and (Figure 1 [24]), large washer
    (Figure 1 [22]) and bolt (Figure 1 [21]).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1.11 Hold the refrigeration unit (Figure 1 [11]) and remove the two nuts (Figure 1 [14]), washers
    (Figure 1 [15]) and bolts (Figure 1 [16]).
    1.12 Disconnect the refrigeration unit (Figure 1 [11]) from the duct (Figure 1 [13]) and remove the
    refrigeration unit (Figure 1 [11]) from the structure.
    2 Installation

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    2.1 Make sure the seal (Figure 1 [12]) is in position around the end of the duct (Figure 1 [13]).
    2.2 Put the refrigeration unit (Figure 1 [11]) in position in the structure and engage the refrigeration unit
    (Figure 1 [11]) with the duct (Figure 1 [13]) and the flexible pipe (Figure 1 [27]).
    2.3 Install the two bolts (Figure 1 [16]), washers (Figure 1 [15]) and nuts (Figure 1 [14]).
    2.4 Make sure the hole in the forward shockmount (Figure 1 [23]) aligns with the hole in the forward
    attachment flange of the refrigeration unit (Figure 1 [11]). If not loosen the screws (Figure 1 [20]) and
    nuts and adjust the position of the shockmount (Figure 1 [23]). Tighten the screws (Figure 1 [20]) and
    nuts.
    2.5 Install the bolt (Figure 1 [21]), large washer (Figure 1 [22]), washers (Figure 1 [24]) and (Figure 1 [25])
    and nut (Figure 1 [26]).

    Note

    The washer (Figure 1 [24]) is installed to adjust the clearance between the shockmount (Figure 1 [23])
    and the heat exchanger (Figure 1 [11]). Refer to the IPC if a different size washer is necessary.

    2.6 Install the duct (Figure 1 [13]) on the structure with the three screws (Figure 1 [18]) and washers
    (Figure 1 [17]), and the two screws (Figure 1 [33]) and six washers (Figure 1 [34]).
    2.7 Install the pipe (Figure 1 [6]) with the two clamps (Figure 1 [7]) and (Figure 1 [5]) and the new O-ring
    (Figure 1 [8]).
    2.8 Tighten the clamp (Figure 1 [28]).
    2.9 Install the pipe (Figure 1 [29]) with the two clamps (Figure 1 [31]) and new O-ring (O-ring )
    (Figure 1 [30]) and seal (Seal ) (Figure 1 [32]).
    2.10 Connect the pipe (Figure 1 [4]) to the refrigeration unit (Figure 1 [11]) and the temperature control unit
    (Figure 1 [1]) with the clamps (Figure 1 [3]) and (Figure 1 [9]) and the new seal (Seal ) (Figure 1 [2]).
    2.11 Connect the pipe (Figure 1 [10]) to the refrigeration unit (Figure 1 [11]) with the clamp (Figure 1 [19]).
    2.12 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.13 Install the lower engine cowling 42 AB (refer to DM 12-B-71-10-00-00A-920A-A).
    2.14 Close the left and right upper engine-cowlings 43 AL and 43 AR.
    2.15 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − ECS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    2.16 Do the operational test of the environmental control system (refer to DM 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903A-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    34

    33

    13

    A
    G
    B

    A 1

    4 5

    32 3
    2 6
    31
    7

    14
    15

    B
    9
    15
    31
    C 16

    30

    29
    C 10

    E
    28
    F
    27 11

    C
    12

    26
    25
    11 13

    24 G 13
    23
    22

    21
    D
    17

    10
    20
    F 11
    E
    D
    21170

    19 18

    Figure 1 Refrigeration Pack – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-02-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    WATER SEPARATOR

    CLEAN

    Table of Contents Page

    WATER SEPARATOR - CLEAN................................................................................................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Water – Separator – Cleaning................................................................................ 5

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-21-40-02-00A-920A-A REFRIGERATION PACK - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903A-A POWER PLANT - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required
    Clean fresh water Part Local supply As
    required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-03-00A-250A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark


    Compressed air supply Part Local supply As
    required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    MEK Part P01-010 As
    required
    Soap solution Part P01-005 As
    required
    Cleaning cloth Part P02-003 As
    required
    Cord Part Local supply As
    required
    O ring CSN 21-40-00-03-095 2

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Clean the Condenser
    1.1 Preparation

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    1.1.1 Remove the water separator (refer to DM 12-B-21-40-02-00A-920A-A).


    1.1.2 Remove the clamp (Figure 1 [8]) and outlet casing (Figure 1 [6]) from the inlet casing
    (Figure 1 [1]).
    1.1.3 Remove the support assembly (Figure 1 [9]) and condenser (Figure 1 [4]) from the inlet
    casing (Figure 1 [1]).
    1.1.4 Remove the O-rings (Figure 1 [2]) and (Figure 1 [7]) from the outlet casing (Figure 1 [6]) and
    the inlet casing (Figure 1 [1]). Discard the O-rings.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-03-00A-250A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1.1.5 Carefully remove the spring (Figure 1 [3]) from the small end of the support assembly
    (Figure 1 [9]).
    1.1.6 At the large end of the support assembly (Figure 1 [9]), disconnect the chain (Figure 1 [10])
    from one end of the spring (Figure 1 [5]).
    1.1.7 Remove the condenser (Figure 1 [4]) from the support assembly (Figure 1 [9]).
    1.1.8 Attach a cord (Figure 1 [11]) to the free end of the chain (Figure 1 [10]) and pull the spring
    (Figure 1 [5]) and the chain (Figure 1 [10]) from the hem of the condenser (Figure 1 [4]). This
    pulls the cord (Figure 1 [11]) into the condenser hem, ready for use in assembly. Remove
    the cord (Figure 1 [11]) from the chain (Figure 1 [10]).
    1.2 Procedure

    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MANUFACTURERS
    HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

    CAUTION

    BE CAREFUL NOT TO CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE CONDENSOR OR CHANGE ITS SHAPE WHEN
    YOU CLEAN IT.

    1.2.1 If the condenser (Figure 1 [4]) is contaminated with a large quantity of oil, flush it with solvent
    (MEK (Pt.No. P01-010)).
    1.2.2 Prepare a 5% soap solution (Soap solution (Pt.No. P01-005)) in warm water.
    1.2.3 Wash the condenser (Figure 1 [4]) in the soap solution.
    1.2.4 Flush the soap solution from the condenser (Figure 1 [4]) with water (Clean fresh
    water (Pt.No. Local supply)).
    1.2.5 Dry the condenser (Figure 1 [4]) with the air supply (Compressed air supply (Pt.No. Local
    supply)).
    1.2.6 Examine the condenser (Figure 1 [4]) for damage and make sure that:
    − The outer surface of the condenser (Figure 1 [4]) feels rough
    − The condenser (Figure 1 [4]) has not become smaller during cleaning
    1.2.7 Replace the condenser (Figure 1 [4]) if necessary.
    1.3 Close Up
    1.3.1 Attach the free end of the chain (Figure 1 [10]) to the cord (Figure 1 [11]) in the hem of the
    condenser (Figure 1 [4]). Use the cord (Figure 1 [11]) to pull the chain (Figure 1 [10]) and
    spring (Figure 1 [5]) into the hem of the condenser (Figure 1 [4]). Remove and discard the
    cord (Figure 1 [11]).
    1.3.2 Carefully install the condenser (Figure 1 [4]) on the support assembly (Figure 1 [9]) and
    attach the free end of the chain (Figure 1 [10]) to the spring (Figure 1 [5]). Make sure the
    spring (Figure 1 [5]) engages in the groove in the support assembly (Figure 1 [9]).
    1.3.3 Carefully install the spring (Figure 1 [3]) on the small end of the support assembly
    (Figure 1 [9]).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-03-00A-250A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1.3.4 Install new O ring (Pt.No. CSN 21400003 095 ) (Figure 1 [2]) and (Figure 1 [7]) in the inlet
    casing (Figure 1 [1]) and the outlet casing (Figure 1 [6]).
    1.3.5 Install the support assembly (Figure 1 [9]) and the condenser (Figure 1 [4]) in the inlet casing
    (Figure 1 [1]).
    1.3.6 Loosely install the outlet casing (Figure 1 [6]) on the inlet casing (Figure 1 [1]) with the clamp
    (Figure 1 [8]).
    1.3.7 Turn the outlet casing (Figure 1 [6]) to put its drain connection at the six o'clock position, then
    turn the inlet casing (Figure 1 [1]) to put the down arrow at the three o'clock position when
    you look in the direction of flow.
    1.3.8 Tighten the clamp (Figure 1 [8]).
    1.3.10 Do the adjustment/test of the environmental control system (Refer to DM 12-
    B-71-00-00-00A-903A-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-03-00A-250A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    5

    2
    B 3 11 10

    9
    21122

    Figure 1 Water – Separator – Cleaning

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-03-00A-250A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-03-00A-250A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 6
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    WATER SEPARATOR

    REPAIR

    Table of Contents Page

    WATER SEPARATOR - REPAIR............................................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-21-40-03-00A-920A-A WATER SEPARATOR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    WATER SEPARATOR REMOVAL

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Solvent Part P01-010 As
    required
    Cloth Part P02-003 As
    required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-03-00A-904A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-01-05 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Insulation sleeve kit Part 918.60.11.961 1

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedures to remove the insulation from the water separator and to install a new
    insulation sleeve.
    2 Remove the Insulation

    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU REMOVE THE INSULATION. PARTICLES OF THE INSULATION ARE
    POISONOUS AND VERY DANGEROUS IF BREATHED. YOU MUST DO THE WORK IN A VENTILATED
    AREA AND WEAR APPROVED BREATHING EQUIPMENT AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING AT ALL TIMES.

    2.1 Carefully remove the fiberglass tape that holds the end of the insulation to the water separator.
    2.2 Carefully cut the stitches that join the insulation along the length of the water separator.
    2.3 Remove the insulation from the water separator.
    2.4 Use a Cloth (Pt.No. P02-003) made moist with Solvent (Pt.No. P01-010) to clean the water separator.
    Make sure that you remove the adhesive that was used to hold the insulation on the water separator.
    2.5 Make sure that the water separator is not damaged. Look for:
    − cracks
    − scratches and scores
    − holes
    − corrosion
    2.6 If the water separator is damaged, discard it.
    3 Install the Insulation Sleeve

    Note

    The replaceable insulation sleeve inner fabric is delicate and must be handled with care.

    3.1 Slide the large insulation sleeve onto the water separator.
    3.2 Tighten and secure the safety wire in the collar of the new sleeve.
    3.3 Slide the smaller insulation sleeve onto the water separator. make sure that the cut-out in the sleeve
    goes around the connector on the water separator.
    3.4 Tighten and secure the safety wire in the collar of the new sleeve.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-03-00A-904A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-01-05 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-03-00A-904A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-01-05 Page 3
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-03-00A-904A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-01-05 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    WATER SEPARATOR

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    WATER SEPARATOR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION................................................................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Water Separator – Removal/Installation................................................................. 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903A-A POWER PLANT - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-03-10 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    O-ring CSN 21-40-00-03-085 As
    required

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Open and install a Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065) on these circuit
    breakers:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − ECS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    1.2 Open the engine cowlings 43 AL and 43 AR.
    1.3 Loosen the clamp Figure 1 [6].
    1.4 Disconnect the pipe Figure 1 [5] from the union Figure 1 [11].
    1.5 Remove the two clamps Figure 1 [2] and protectors Figure 1 [3].
    1.6 Loosen the two clamps Figure 1 [9].
    1.7 Disconnect the water separator Figure 1 [8] and flexible pipe Figure 1 [4] from the flexible adapter
    Figure 1 [7] and the duct Figure 1 [1].
    1.8 Remove the water separator Figure 1 [8] and flexible pipe Figure 1 [4] from the structure.
    1.9 Remove the flexible pipe Figure 1 [4] from the water separator Figure 1 [8].
    1.10 If necessary, remove the union Figure 1 [11] and O-ring Figure 1 [10] from the water separator
    Figure 1 [8]. Discard the O-ring.
    2 Installation
    2.1 If necessary, install the new O-ring Figure 1 [10] and union Figure 1 [11] in the water separator
    Figure 1 [8].
    2.2 Connect the flexible pipe Figure 1 [4] to the water separator Figure 1 [8].
    2.3 Put the water separator Figure 1 [8] and flexible pipe Figure 1 [4] in position in the structure with the
    union Figure 1 [11] at the six o'clock position.
    2.4 Connect the water separator Figure 1 [8] and flexible pipe Figure 1 [4] to the flexible adapter
    Figure 1 [7] and the duct Figure 1 [1].
    2.5 Tighten the two clamps Figure 1 [9].
    2.6 Install the two clamps Figure 1 [2] and protectors Figure 1 [3] on the flexible pipe Figure 1 [4].
    2.7 Tighten the clamps Figure 1 [6] and Figure 1 [2].
    2.8 Connect the pipe Figure 1 [5] to the union Figure 1 [11].
    2.9 Tighten the pipe Figure 1 [5].
    2.10 Do a check of the ECS system clamps in the engine compartment to make sure that all the ECS
    clamps are correctly installed and tightened.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-03-10 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.11 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.12 Close the engine cowlings 43 AL and 43 AR.
    2.13 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − ECS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    2.14 Do the test of the environmental control system (AMM 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903A-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-03-10 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    9
    2
    3
    4
    8
    3

    C
    6

    10
    5

    11

    B
    C
    5
    21110

    Figure 1 Water Separator – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-03-10 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-03-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-03-10 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-03-10 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    HP SHUT–OFF VALVE

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    HP SHUT–OFF VALVE - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 HP Shut–Off Valve – Removal/Installation............................................................. 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903A-A POWER PLANT - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) Required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-04-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-02-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Seal CSN 21-40-00-01-090 As
    Required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Open and install Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065) on these circuit
    breakers:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − ECS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    1.2
    WARNING

    THE ENGINE AND ADJACENT COMPONENTS MUST BE ALLOWED TO COOL DOWN BEFORE
    YOU DO WORK IN THE ENGINE BAY. A HOT ENGINE AND/OR ADJACENT COMPONENTS
    COULD CAUSE SERIOUS BURNS IF TOUCHED.

    Open the engine cowling 43 AR.


    1.3 Disconnect the electrical connector Figure 1 [6] from the HP shut-off valve Figure 1 [9].
    1.4
    CAUTION

    DO NOT REMOVE THE BLEED AIR PIPES MOUNTING BRACKETS FROM THE ENGINE
    MOUNTING FRAME. THE POSITION OF EACH MOUNTING BRACKET IS SET WITH A JIG
    DURING MANUFACTURE.

    Loosen off the clamps Figure 1 [5] and Figure 1 [8].


    1.5 Use a suitable tool between the flange Figure 1 [3] and the bracket Figure 1 [1] to compress the
    bellows Figure 1 [2] then remove the HP shut-off valve Figure 1 [9], seals Figure 1 [4] and Figure 1 [7]
    and the clamps Figure 1 [5] and Figure 1 [8].
    1.6 Discard the seals.
    2 Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-04-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-02-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.1
    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items AMM 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Use a suitable tool between the flange Figure 1 [3] and the bracket Figure 1 [1] to compress the
    bellows Figure 1 [2] then install the HP shut-off valve Figure 1 [9], new Seal (Pt.No. CSN 21400001
    090 ) Figure 1 [4] and Figure 1 [7] with the clamps Figure 1 [5] and Figure 1 [8].
    2.2 Tighten and torque the clamps Figure 1 [5] and Figure 1 [8] to 34.5 lbf in (3,9 Nm).
    2.3 Connect the electrical connector Figure 1 [6] to the HP shut-off valve Figure 1 [9].
    2.4 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.5 Close the engine cowling 43 AR.
    2.6 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − ECS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    2.7 Do the test of the environmental control system, refer to AMM 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903A-A.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-04-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-02-15 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    A

    1
    5
    6 4

    B 3

    2
    21107

    Figure 1 HP Shut–Off Valve – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-04-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-02-15 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-04-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-02-15 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-04-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-02-15 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PRIMARY SHUT–OFF VALVE

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    PRIMARY SHUT–OFF VALVE - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Primary Shut–Off Valve – Removal/Installation...................................................... 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903A-A POWER PLANT - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) Required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-05-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-02-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Seal CSN 21-40-00-02-015 3
    CSN 21-40-00-01-210

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Open and install Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065) on these circuit
    breakers:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − ECS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    1.2
    WARNING

    THE ENGINE AND ADJACENT COMPONENTS MUST BE ALLOWED TO COOL DOWN BEFORE
    YOU DO WORK IN THE ENGINE BAY. A HOT ENGINE AND/OR ADJACENT COMPONENTS
    COULD CAUSE SERIOUS BURNS IF TOUCHED.

    Open the engine cowling 43 AR.


    1.3 Disconnect the electrical connector Figure 1 [7] from the primary shut-off valve Figure 1 [6].
    1.4 Loosen off the clamps Figure 1 [3], Figure 1 [5] and Figure 1 [9].
    1.5 Remove the pipe Figure 1 [1], clamps Figure 1 [3] and Figure 1 [5] and seals Figure 1 [2] and
    Figure 1 [4].
    1.6 Remove the screws Figure 1 [11] and washers Figure 1 [10].
    1.7 Remove the primary shut-off valve Figure 1 [6], clamp Figure 1 [9] and seal Figure 1 [8] from the flow
    control venturi
    1.8 Discard the seals.
    2 Installation
    2.1
    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items AMM 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-05-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-02-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Put the primary shut-off valve Figure 1 [6], new Seal (Pt.No. CSN 21400002 015 21400001 210 )
    Figure 1 [8] and clamp Figure 1 [9] in position on the flow control venturi.
    2.2 Connect the primary shut-off valve Figure 1 [6] to the structure with the screws Figure 1 [11] and
    washers Figure 1 [10].
    2.3 Tighten and torque the clamp Figure 1 [9] to 34.5 lbf in (3,9 Nm).
    2.4 Install the pipe Figure 1 [1] with the new Seal (Pt.No. CSN 21400002 015 21400001 210 ) Figure 1 [2]
    and Figure 1 [4] and clamps Figure 1 [3] and Figure 1 [5].
    2.5 Tighten and torque the clamps Figure 1 [3] and Figure 1 [5] to 34.5 lbf in (3,9 Nm).
    2.6 Connect the electrical connector Figure 1 [7] to the primary shut-off valve Figure 1 [6].
    2.7 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.8 Close the engine-cowling 43 AR.
    2.9 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − ECS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    2.10 Do the test of the environmental control system, refer to AMM 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903A-A.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-05-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-02-15 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    1

    3
    4

    11
    5
    10

    7
    8

    B
    21108

    Figure 1 Primary Shut–Off Valve – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-05-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-02-15 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-05-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-02-15 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-05-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-02-15 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    OVERTEMPERATURE SWITCH

    ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Table of Contents Page

    OVERTEMPERATURE SWITCH - ADJUSTMENT/TEST.......................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A GENERAL - AEROSPACE GROUND EQUIPMENT
    (AGE) AND TOOLS
    12-B-21-40-06-00A-920A-A OVER TEMPERATURE SWITCH - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Temperature Calibrator (100-130 Part 990.00.00.818 As
    VAC) required
    Temperature Calibrator (200-250 Part 990.00.00.819 As
    VAC) required
    Special insert Part 513.21.21.002 As
    required
    100-130 or 200-250 VAC power Part Local supply As
    supply required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-06-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-12-11 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark


    Safety clip (circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General

    Note

    To identify the AGE and tools used in this procedure refer to the list of AGE and tools 12-
    B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A.

    This data module gives the procedure to do a functional test of the overtemperature switch. The functional
    test uses a Temperature Calibrator to heat the overtemperature switch to its set point. The set point is seen
    by the CAS ACS LOW INFLOW caution coming on. Refer to the manufacturer’s User Manual for instructions
    on how to operate the Temperature Calibrator.
    2 Functional Test of the Overtemperature Switch
    2.1 Job Set Up
    2.1.1 Remove the overtemperature switch (AMM12-B-21-40-06-00A-920A-A).
    2.1.2 Install the overtemperature switch Special insert (Pt.No. 513.21.21.002) in the Temperature
    Calibrator (100-130 VAC) (Pt.No. 990.00.00.818) or Temperature Calibrator (200-250
    VAC) (Pt.No. 990.00.00.819).
    2.1.3 Connect the applicable 100-130 or 200-250 VAC power supply (Pt.No. Local supply)to the
    temperature calibrator.
    2.2 Procedure

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-06-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-12-11 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.2.1
    CAUTION

    THE SPECIAL INSERT IN THE TEMPERATURE CALIBRATOR GETS HOT. DO NOT


    TOUCH THE SPECIAL INSERT AND THE OVER TEMPERATURE SWITCH UNTIL THEY
    HAVE BECOME SUFFICIENTLY COOL.

    Connect the aircraft electrical connector to the overtemperature switch.


    2.2.2 Remove the safety clip and close this circuit breaker:
    − ECS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    2.2.3 Energize the aircraft electrical system (AMM12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.2.4 Set the ACS BLEED AIR control switch to AUTO in the flight compartment.
    2.2.5 Put the overtemperature switch into the special insert in the temperature calibrator.
    2.2.6 Set the temperature to 283° C on the temperature calibrator. Let the temperature stabilize for
    a minimum of 5 minutes.
    2.2.7 Make sure the CAS ACS LOW INFLOW caution is not on in the flight compartment.
    2.2.8 Set the temperature to 296° C on the temperature calibrator.
    2.2.9 Monitor the temperature increase on the temperature calibrator.
    2.2.10 When the temperature on the temperature calibrator gets to 290° C ±6° C, make sure the
    CAS ACS LOW INFLOW caution comes on in the flight compartment.
    2.2.11 Set the temperature to 0° C on the temperature calibrator. Let the equipment become cool
    before removing the overtemperature switch from the special insert in the temperature
    calibrator.
    2.2.12 Set the ACS BLEED AIR control switch in the flight compartment to INHIBIT.
    2.2.13 Make sure the CAS ACS LOW INFLOW caution is on.
    2.2.14 Set the ACS BLEED AIR control switch in the flight compartment to AUTO.
    2.2.15 Make sure the CAS ACS LOW INFLOW caution is off.
    2.2.16 Set the ACS BLEED AIR control switch in the flight compartment to INHIBIT.
    2.2.17 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.2.18 Open and install a safety clip on this circuit breaker:
    − ECS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    2.2.19 Disconnect the aircraft electrical connector from the overtemperature switch.
    2.2.20 Remove the overtemperature switch from the test equipment. Remove the test equipment
    from the aircraft.
    2.2.21 Install the overtemperature switch (AMM12-B-21-40-06-00A-920A-A).

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-06-00A-903A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-12-11 Page 3
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-06-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-12-11 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    OVER TEMPERATURE SWITCH

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    OVER TEMPERATURE SWITCH - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Over Temperature Switch – Removal/Installation.................................................. 3

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903A-A POWER PLANT - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) Required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Lockwire Part P02-007 As
    required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-06-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-10-10 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Seal CSN 21-40-00-01-190 1

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Open and install a Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065) on these circuit
    breakers:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − ECS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    1.2 Open the engine cowling 43 AR.
    1.3 Remove the lockwire from the electrical connector Figure 1 [1].
    1.4 Disconnect the electrical connector Figure 1 [1] from the over temperature switch Figure 1 [2].
    1.5 Remove the over temperature switch Figure 1 [2] and seal Figure 1 [3] from the pipe Figure 1 [4].
    Discard the seal.
    2 Installation
    2.1 Install a new Seal Figure 1 [3] and the over temperature switch Figure 1 [2] on the pipe Figure 1 [4].
    2.2 Connect the electrical connector Figure 1 [1] to the over temperature switch Figure 1 [2].
    2.3 Safety the electrical connector Figure 1 [1] with Lockwire (Pt.No. P02-007).
    2.4 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.5 Close the engine cowling 43 AR.
    2.6 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − ECS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    2.7 Do the functional test of the ECS temperature conditioning system (Refer to AMM 12-
    B-71-00-00-00A-903A-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-06-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-10-10 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    B
    3

    12-B-214006-A-S4080-01054-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Over Temperature Switch – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-06-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-10-10 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-06-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-10-10 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    OVERPRESSURE SWITCH

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    OVERPRESSURE SWITCH - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION....................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Overpressure Switch – Removal/Installation.......................................................... 3

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903S-A POWER PLANT TEST 18 – ENVIRONMENTAL
    CONTROL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-07-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-22 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Seal CSN 21-40-00-02-055 As
    required
    Lockwire (0,6 mm diameter) Part P02-007 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Open and install a Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065) these circuit
    breakers:
    − STARTER (BATTERY BUS)
    − ECS (BATTERY BUS)
    1.2 Open the engine cowling 43 AR.
    1.3 Remove the lockwire from the overpressure switch Figure 1 [2].
    1.4 Disconnect the electrical connector Figure 1 [1] from the overpressure switch Figure 1 [2].
    1.5 Remove the overpressure switch Figure 1 [2] and seal Fig. 1 from the pipe Figure 1 [4]. Discard the
    seal.
    2 Installation
    2.1 Install a new Seal (Pt.No. CSN 21400002 055 ) Figure 1 [3] and the overpressure switch Figure 1 [2]
    on the pipe Figure 1 [4].
    2.2 Connect the electrical connector Figure 1 [1] to the overpressure switch Figure 1 [2].
    2.3 Safety the overpressure switch Figure 1 [2] with Lockwire (0,6 mm diameter) (Pt.No. P02-007).
    2.4 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.5 Close the engine cowling 43 AR.
    2.6 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − STARTER (BATTERY BUS)
    − ECS (BATTERY BUS)
    2.7 Do the functional test of the ECS temperature conditioning system, AMM 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903S-A.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-07-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-22 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    B
    A

    4
    2
    3

    21150

    Figure 1 Overpressure Switch – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-07-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-22 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-07-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-22 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION........................................................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 High Pressure Switch – Removal/Installation......................................................... 3

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903A-A POWER PLANT - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-71-10-00-00A-920A-A ENGINE COWLINGS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-08-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Open and install a Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065) on these circuit
    breakers:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − ECS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    1.2 Remove the engine cowling 42 AT (refer to DM 12-B-71-10-00-00A-920A-A).
    1.3 Open the engine cowling 43 AR.
    1.4 Disconnect the electrical connector (Figure 1 [1]) from the high pressure switch (Figure 1 [3]).
    1.5 Disconnect the hose (Figure 1 [7]) from the high pressure switch (Figure 1 [3]).
    1.6 Hold the high pressure switch (Figure 1 [3]). Remove the nut (Figure 1 [5]), washer (Figure 1 [4]), bolt
    (Figure 1 [8]) and high pressure switch (Figure 1 [3]) from the structure.
    1.7 Remove the clamp (Figure 1 [6]) from the high pressure switch (Figure 1 [3]).
    2 Installation
    2.1 Install the clamp (Figure 1 [6]) on the high pressure switch (Figure 1 [3]).

    Note

    Make sure that the clamp (Figure 1 [6]) does not cover the bleed hole (Figure 1 [2]).

    2.2 Install the high pressure switch (Figure 1 [3]) on the structure with the bolt (Figure 1 [8]), washer
    (Figure 1 [4]) and nut (Figure 1 [5]).
    2.3 Connect the hose (Figure 1 [7]) to the high pressure switch (Figure 1 [3]).
    2.4 Connect the electrical connector (Figure 1 [1]) to the high pressure switch (Figure 1 [3]).
    2.5 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.6 Install the engine cowling 42 AT (refer to DM 12-B-71-10-00-00A-920A-A).
    2.7 Close the engine cowling 43 AR.
    2.8 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − ECS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    2.9 Do the operational test of the pressurization control system (refer to DM12-B-71-00-00-00A-903A-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-08-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A B

    A
    1

    5
    4
    B
    2

    8
    7
    21118

    Figure 1 High Pressure Switch – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-08-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-08-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FLOW CONTROL VENTURI

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    FLOW CONTROL VENTURI - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION....................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Flow Control Venturi – Removal/Installation........................................................... 3

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-21-40-05-00A-920A-A PRIMARY SHUT–OFF VALVE - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903S-A POWER PLANT TEST 18 – ENVIRONMENTAL
    CONTROL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-09-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-22 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Seal CSN 21-40-00-02-015 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Open and install Safety clip (circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065) on these circuit
    breakers:
    − STARTER (BATTERY BUS)
    − ECS (BATTERY BUS)
    1.2 Open the engine cowling 43 AR.
    1.3 Remove the primary shut-off valve (AMM 12-B-21-40-05-00A-920A-A).
    1.4 Remove the clamp Figure 1 [3] flow control venturi Figure 1 [1] and the seal Figure 1 [2] from the pipe
    Figure 1 [4]. Discard the seal.
    2 Installation
    2.1 Install the flow control venturi Figure 1 [1] and the new seal Figure 1 [2] on the pipe Figure 1 [4] with
    the clamp Figure 1 [3].
    2.2 Install the primary shut-off valve (AMM 12-B-21-40-05-00A-920A-A).
    2.3 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.4 Close the engine cowling 43 AR.
    2.5 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − STARTER (BATTERY BUS)
    − ECS (BATTERY BUS)
    2.6 Do the operational test of the pressurization control system (AMM 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903S-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-09-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-22 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    B
    A

    B 1

    12-B-214009-A-S4080-01053-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Flow Control Venturi – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-09-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-22 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-09-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-22 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    COLD AIR UNIT

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    COLD AIR UNIT - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.......................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Cold Air Unit – Removal/Installation....................................................................... 5

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-21-40-02-00A-902A-A REFRIGERATION PACK - SERVICING
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903A-A POWER PLANT - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-10-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Protective tape Part P09-015 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Seal CSN 21-40-00-02-015 As
    required
    O-ring CSN 21-40-00-03-125 As
    required

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Open and install a clip (Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on these circuit
    breakers:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − ECS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    1.2 Open the engine cowlings 43AL and 43AR.
    1.3 Loosen the clamp (Figure 1 [6]) on the flexible pipe (Figure 1 [5]).
    1.4 Remove the clamp (Figure 1 [8]) from the support bracket (Figure 1 [7]).
    1.5 Disconnect the flexible pipe (Figure 1 [11]) from the water separator (Figure 1 [10]).
    1.6 Loosen the two clamps (Figure 1 [12]) from the water separator (Figure 1 [10]).
    1.7 Remove the clamp (Figure 1 [15]) from the adapter (Figure 1 [13]).
    1.8 Move the water separator (Figure 1 [10]) and disconnect the pipe (Figure 1 [9]) from the flexible pipe
    (Figure 1 [5]). Move the water separator (Figure 1 [10]) and pipe (Figure 1 [9]) clear of the cold air unit
    (Figure 1 [16]).
    1.9 Remove and discard the O-ring (Figure 1 [14]).
    1.10 Remove the two clamps (Figure 1 [3]) and (Figure 1 [17]) and the pipe (Figure 1 [4]) between the
    control valve (Figure 1 [1]) and the cold air unit (Figure 1 [16]). Remove and discard the seal
    (Figure 1 [2]).
    1.11 Loosen the clamps (Figure 1 [24]) and (Figure 1 [26]). Move the hose (Figure 1 [25]) clear of the cold
    air unit (Figure 1 [16]).
    1.12 Remove the four bolts (Figure 1 [23]) and washers (Figure 1 [22]).
    1.13 Carefully remove the cold air unit (Figure 1 [16]) from the heat exchanger (Figure 1 [21]).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-10-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Note

    There is a wave washer (Figure 1 [18]) positioned between the cold air unit and heat exchanger outlet
    de-swirl which should be kept for the installation procedure.

    1.14 Examine the heat exchanger matrix (Figure 1 [19]) for damage and contamination.
    2 Installation

    Note

    Use the tape (Protective tape (Pt.No. P09-015)) under the clamps on the installation of the flexible pipes.

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    2.1 Do the procedure to add oil to the cold air unit (refer to DM 12-B-21-40-02-00A-902A-A).
    2.2 Put the wave washer (Figure 1 [18]) in position in the heat exchanger outlet de-swirl (Figure 1 [20]).
    2.3 Install the cold air unit (Figure 1 [16]) in the heat exchanger (Figure 1 [21]) with the four washers
    (Figure 1 [22]) and bolts (Figure 1 [23]).

    Note

    When the cold air unit is installed the wave washer is compressed.

    2.4 Move the hose (Figure 1 [25]) in position and tighten the clamps (Figure 1 [24]) and (Figure 1 [26]).
    2.5 Install a new O-ring (O-ring ) (Figure 1 [14]) in the adapter (Figure 1 [13]).
    2.6 Move the water separator (Figure 1 [10]) and the pipe (Figure 1 [9]) in position and connect the pipe
    (Figure 1 [9]) to the flexible pipe (Figure 1 [5]).
    2.7 Install the clamp (Figure 1 [15]).
    2.8 Position and tighten the clamp (Figure 1 [6]) on the flexible pipe (Figure 1 [5]).
    2.9 Install the two clamps (Figure 1 [12]) on the water separator (Figure 1 [10]).
    2.10 Install the clamp (Figure 1 [8]) on the pipe (Figure 1 [9]) and the support bracket (Figure 1 [7]).
    2.11 Connect the flexible pipe (Figure 1 [11]) to the water separator (Figure 1 [10]).
    2.12 Install the pipe (Figure 1 [4]) with the new seal (Seal ) (Figure 1 [2]) and the two clamps (Figure 1 [3])
    and (Figure 1 [17]) between the control valve (Figure 1 [1]) and the cold air unit (Figure 1 [16]).
    2.13 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.14 Close the engine cowlings 43AL and 43AR.
    2.15 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − ECS (ESSENTIAL BUS)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-10-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.16 Do the functional test of the temperature conditioning system (refer to DM 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903A-
    A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-10-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    B
    A

    9
    4
    3 7
    2 6
    5

    12

    17
    10 C
    13

    D 14
    16
    15 B
    10

    C
    11

    12-B-214010-A-S4080-01050-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Cold Air Unit – Removal/Installation (Sheet 1 of 2)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-10-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    20
    26

    19
    25

    18
    24

    21

    16
    22
    23

    12-B-214010-A-S4080-01051-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Cold Air Unit – Removal/Installation (Sheet 2 of 2)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-10-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-10-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 7
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-40-10-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    CABIN HEATER

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    CABIN HEATER - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.......................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Cabin Heater – Removal/Installation...................................................................... 5

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-21-40-01-00A-903A-A SECONDARY HEATING - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A STANDARD CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: CABIN HEATER 12-B-21-40-15-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-03-21 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Gasket CSN 21-40-00-05-220 1
    Cable tie Part P09-008 As
    Required
    Cable tie Part P09-005 As
    Required
    Loctite 241 Part P08-017 As
    Required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Make sure external power is not connected to the aircraft.
    1.2 Open this circuit breaker:
    − CABIN FAN (GEN 1 BUS)
    1.3 Remove the passenger compartment center carpet:
    − for Executive interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − for Standard interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A.
    1.4 Remove the floor panel 12 KZ.
    1.5 Remove the four screws Figure 1 [2] and cover Figure 1 [3] from the heater Figure 1 [4].
    1.6 If necessary, remove the cable ties Figure 1 [16] and Figure 1 [18] and cable tie retainer Figure 1 [17].
    1.7 If necessary, mark the heater electrical supply cables with their wire ident and/or terminal position to
    aid in re-connection when the heater is installed.
    1.8 Disconnect the electrical wires from the heater electrical terminals as follows:

    Wire Ident Heater Electrical Terminal


    H231A6 A
    H232A6N B
    H234A18 C
    H235A18N D
    H241A22 E
    H242A22N F
    1.9 Remove the heater Figure 1 [4] as follows:

    Effectivity: CABIN HEATER 12-B-21-40-15-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-03-21 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1.9.1 Loosen the hose clamp Figure 1 [5].


    1.9.2 Remove the nuts Figure 1 [10] and washers Figure 1 [11].
    1.9.3 Remove the bonding strap Figure 1 [1] from the bolt Figure 1 [14].
    1.9.4 Remove the bolts Figure 1 [14] and washers Figure 1 [15].
    1.9.5 Remove the pan head screws Figure 1 [7] and spring washers Figure 1 [6].
    1.9.6 Remove the heater Figure 1 [4], hose clamp Figure 1 [5] and gasket Figure 1 [12] from the
    aircraft.
    1.9.7 Remove and retain the hose clamp Figure 1 [5] if the heater Figure 1 [4] is to be replaced.
    1.9.8 Discard the gasket Figure 1 [12].
    2 Installation
    2.1
    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    If necessary, slide the hose clamp Figure 1 [5] onto the heater Figure 1 [4] and then install the heater:
    2.1.1 Place the heater Figure 1 [4] and gasket Figure 1 [12] into position on the aircraft.
    2.1.2 Install one washer Figure 1 [15] onto each of the four bolts Figure 1 [14].
    2.1.3 Install the bolts Figure 1 [14] through the pipe Figure 1 [13], gasket Figure 1 [12] and into the
    heater Figure 1 [4].
    2.1.4 Install the bonding strap Figure 1 [1] onto the bolt Figure 1 [14].
    2.1.5 Install a washer Figure 1 [11] and nut Figure 1 [10] onto each of the four bolts Figure 1 [14].
    2.1.6 Tighten the nuts Figure 1 [10].
    2.1.7 Connect the pipe Figure 1 [8] to the heater Figure 1 [4] with three pan head screws
    Figure 1 [7] and spring washers Figure 1 [6].
    2.1.8 Tighten the three pan head screws Figure 1 [7].
    2.1.9 Move the hose clamp Figure 1 [5] over the heater Figure 1 [4] to the left until it slides over
    the lip on the sub-frame Figure 1 [9].
    2.1.10 Tighten the hose clamp Figure 1 [5] so that it grips the heater Figure 1 [4] onto the sub-frame
    Figure 1 [9].
    2.1.11 Connect the electrical wires to the positions on the heater Figure 1 [4] as follows:

    Wire Ident Heater Electrical Terminal


    H231A6 A
    H232A6N B
    H234A18 C
    H235A18N D
    H241A22 E
    H242A22N F
    2.1.12 If removed in Step 1.6, install the cable tie retainer Figure 1 [17] and a new Cable
    tie (Pt.No. P09-008) Figure 1 [18] and Cable tie (Pt.No. P09-005) Figure 1 [16] to support the
    wires.

    Effectivity: CABIN HEATER 12-B-21-40-15-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-03-21 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.1.13 Put a small amount of Loctite 241 (Pt.No. P08-017) onto the threads of each of the four
    screws Figure 1 [2].
    2.1.14 Install the cover Figure 1 [3] onto the heater Figure 1 [4] with four screws Figure 1 [2].
    2.1.15 Tighten the four screws Figure 1 [2].
    2.2 Temporarily place the floor panel 12 KZ in position.
    2.3 Remove safety clip and close the circuit breaker:
    − CABIN FAN (GEN 1 BUS)
    2.4 Do a functional test of the heater, refer to AMM 12-B-21-40-01-00A-903A-A.
    2.5 Install the floor panel 12 KZ.
    2.6 Install the passenger compartment center carpet:
    − for Executive interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − for Standard interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A.
    2.7 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.

    Effectivity: CABIN HEATER 12-B-21-40-15-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-03-21 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FR 34
    ZONE 12
    FR 33 A
    A FR 31
    FR 32

    FR 30
    FR 29
    FR 28

    B
    1
    14

    15

    13

    5
    B
    C
    12
    11
    10

    6
    7

    C
    9
    16
    8
    17

    18

    12-B-214015-A-S4080-01052-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Cabin Heater – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: CABIN HEATER 12-B-21-40-15-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-03-21 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: CABIN HEATER 12-B-21-40-15-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-03-21 Page 6
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    ENGINE BAY DUCTS

    REPAIR

    Table of Contents Page

    ENGINE BAY DUCTS - REPAIR................................................................................................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-21-41-00-00A-920A-A ENGINE BAY DUCTS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    ENGINE BAY DUCTS - REMOVAL

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Solvent Part P01-010 As
    required
    Cloth Part P02-003 As
    required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-41-00-00A-904A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-01-05 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Insulation sleeve Part 918.60.11.962 1
    Insulation sleeve Part 918.60.11.963 1
    Insulation sleeve Part 918.60.11.964 1

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedures to remove the insulation from the following ECS ducts and install new
    insulation sleeves:
    − P/N 521.41.12.051, new insulation sleeve P/N 918.60.11.962
    − P/N 521.41.12.052, new insulation sleeve P/N 918.60.11.963
    − P/N 521.41.12.084, new insulation sleeve P/N 918.60.11.964
    2 Remove the Insulation

    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU REMOVE THE INSULATION. PARTICLES OF THE INSULATION ARE
    POISONOUS AND VERY DANGEROUS IF BREATHED. YOU MUST DO THE WORK IN A VENTILATED
    AREA AND WEAR APPROVED BREATHING EQUIPMENT AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING AT ALL TIMES.

    2.1 Carefully remove the fiberglass tape that holds the end of the insulation to the duct.
    2.2 Carefully cut the stitches that join the insulation along the length of the duct.
    2.3 Remove the insulation from the duct.
    2.4 Use a Cloth (Pt.No. P02-003) made moist with Solvent (Pt.No. P01-010) to clean the duct.
    2.5 Make sure that the duct is not damaged. Look for:
    − cracks
    − scratches and scores
    − holes
    − corrosion
    2.6 If the duct is damaged, discard the duct.
    3 Install the Insulation Sleeve

    Note

    The insulation sleeve inner fabric is delicate and must be handled with care.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-41-00-00A-904A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-01-05 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.1 Duct P/N 521.41.12.051


    3.1.1 Put the insulation sleeve (Insulation sleeve ) on the duct.
    3.1.2 Close the snap fasteners on the insulation sleeve.
    3.2 Duct P/N 521.41.12.052
    3.2.1 Put the insulation sleeve (Insulation sleeve ) on the duct. Make sure that the cut-outs in the
    sleeve go around the boss on the duct and the sensor pipe.
    3.2.2 Close the snap fasteners on the insulation sleeve.
    3.3 Duct P/N 521.41.12.084
    3.3.1 Put the insulation sleeve (Insulation sleeve ) on the duct.
    3.3.2 Close the snap fasteners on the insulation sleeve.

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-41-00-00A-904A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-01-05 Page 3
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-41-00-00A-904A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-01-05 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    ENGINE BAY DUCTS

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    ENGINE BAY DUCTS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION................................................................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Duct – Removal/Installation.................................................................................... 5

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903S-A POWER PLANT TEST 18 – ENVIRONMENTAL
    CONTROL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-41-00-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Seal CSN 21-40-00-02-015 As
    required
    Cable tie Part P09-017 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedures to remove and install these ECS ducts:
    − P/N 521.41.12.051
    − P/N 521.41.12.052
    − P/N 521.41.12.084
    2 Removal
    2.1 Open and install a Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065) on these circuit
    breakers:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − ECS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    2.2 Open the engine cowlings 43 AL and 43 AR.
    2.3 Remove duct P/N 521.41.12.051 (Figure 1 [12]):
    2.3.1 Loosen the clamps (Figure 1 [10]) and (Figure 1 [13]).
    2.3.2 Remove the clamp (Figure 1 [11]).
    2.3.3 Carefully pull the duct (Figure 1 [12]) from the sleeves (Figure 1 [9]) and (Figure 1 [14]).
    2.3.4 Remove the duct (Figure 1 [12]) from the aircraft.
    2.3.5 If needed, remove the clamps (Figure 1 [10]) and (Figure 1 [13]).
    2.4 Remove duct P/N 521.41.12.052 (Figure 1 [7]):

    Note

    Remove the cable ties from electrical looms as needed.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-41-00-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.4.1 Disconnect the electrical connector from the duct overtemperature switch.
    2.4.2 Disconnect the electrical connector from the duct temperature sensor.
    2.4.3 Loosen the clamps (Figure 1 [3]) and (Figure 1 [8]).
    2.4.4 Remove the clamp (Figure 1 [6]).
    2.4.5 Carefully pull the duct (Figure 1 [7]) from the sleeves (Figure 1 [2]) and (Figure 1 [9]).
    2.4.6 Remove the duct (Figure 1 [7]) from the aircraft.
    2.4.7 If needed, remove the clamps (Figure 1 [3]) and (Figure 1 [8]).
    2.5 Remove duct P/N 513.41.12.084 (Figure 1 [21]):
    2.5.1 Loosen the clamp (Figure 1 [18]).
    2.5.2 Remove the clamp (Figure 1 [20]) and the seal (Figure 1 [19]). Discard the seal
    (Figure 1 [19]).
    2.5.3 Carefully pull the duct (Figure 1 [21]) from the sleeve (Figure 1 [17]).
    2.5.4 Remove the duct (Figure 1 [21]) from the aircraft.
    2.5.5 If needed, remove the clamp (Figure 1 [18]).
    3 Installation
    3.1 Install duct P/N 521.41.12.084 (Figure 1 [21]):
    3.1.1 Make sure that the clamp (Figure 1 [18]) is on the sleeve (Figure 1 [17]).
    3.1.2 Put the end of the duct (Figure 1 [21]) into the sleeve (Figure 1 [17]).
    3.1.3 Use a new seal (Figure 1 [19]). Align the end of the duct (Figure 1 [21]) with the temperature
    control valve and install the seal (Figure 1 [19]) and the clamp (Figure 1 [20]).
    3.1.4 Tighten the clamps (Figure 1 [18]) and (Figure 1 [20]).
    3.2 Install duct P/N 521.41.12.052 (Figure 1 [7]):
    3.2.1 Make sure that the clamps (Figure 1 [3]) and (Figure 1 [8]) are on the sleeves (Figure 1 [2])
    and (Figure 1 [9]).
    3.2.2 Put the ends of the duct (Figure 1 [7]) into the sleeves (Figure 1 [2]) and (Figure 1 [9]).
    3.2.3 Position the clamps (Figure 1 [3]) and (Figure 1 [8]) on the sleeves.
    3.2.4 Tighten the clamps (Figure 1 [3]) and (Figure 1 [8]).
    3.2.5 Install and tighten the clamp (Figure 1 [6]).
    3.2.6 Connect the electrical connector to the duct temperature sensor.
    3.2.7 Connect the electrical connector to the duct overtemperature switch.
    3.2.8 If needed, install cable ties (Cable tie (Pt.No. P09-017)) to hold the electrical loom on the
    duct.
    3.3 Install duct P/N 521.41.12.051 (Figure 1 [12]):
    3.3.1 Make sure that the clamps (Figure 1 [10]) and (Figure 1 [13]) are on the sleeves
    (Figure 1 [9]) and (Figure 1 [14]).
    3.3.2 Put the ends of the duct (Figure 1 [12]) into the sleeves (Figure 1 [9]) and (Figure 1 [14]).
    3.3.3 Position the clamps (Figure 1 [10]) and (Figure 1 [13]) on the sleeves.
    3.3.4 Tighten the clamps (Figure 1 [10]) and (Figure 1 [13]).
    3.3.5 Install and tighten the clamp (Figure 1 [11]).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-41-00-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.4 Close the engine cowlings 43 AL and 43 AR.


    3.5 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − ECS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    3.6 Do the test of the environmental control system (refer to DM 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903S-A, Test 18
    steps 4.1. thru 4.39).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-41-00-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    10
    A
    B 9

    8
    6
    1 7

    21
    11
    20
    12
    19

    18 13

    17
    14

    16 15

    12-A-214100-A-S4080-00001-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Duct – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-41-00-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-41-00-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 6
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FOOTWARMER

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    FOOTWARMER - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION............................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Foot Warmer System – Schematic......................................................................... 3

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description
    General
    The optional foot warmer system sends warm air through the left and right distribution ducts to the pilot and copilot
    foot outlets.
    The system has these components:
    − a heater and fan assembly
    − a FOOT WARMER ON/OFF switch
    − a thermal protection switch
    − a heater contactor.

    Component Description
    Heater and Fan Assembly
    The heater and fan assembly is installed forward, above the cockpit floor. It is a 28 VDC 1 kW heater connected by
    distribution ducts to the foot outlets at the pilot and copilot positions.
    FOOT WARMER ON/OFF Switch
    The FOOT WARMER ON/OFF switch is installed in the right inner crossbar panel. It energizes and de-energizes
    the foot warmer system.
    Thermal Protection Switch
    The thermal protection switch is installed in the heater and fan assembly. It de-energizes the heater contactor and
    stops the heater if the heater temperature is too high.
    Heater Contactor

    Effectivity: FOOT WARMER SYSTEM 12-B-21-43-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-07 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    The heater contactor supplies 28 VDC from the Secondary Power Line (SPL) to the heater. It is controlled by the
    heater thermal protection switch. The heater contactor is installed in the Right Power Junction Box.
    Operation
    When the FOOT WARMER switch is set to OFF, the contacts open the 28 VDC electrical supply from the NON
    ESSENTIAL bus. The heater thermal protection switch has no electrical supply, so the heater contactor cannot
    energize and the foot warmer heater does not heat. The foot warmer heater fan also has no electrical supply.
    When the FOOT WARMER switch is set to ON, the contacts close and connect 28 VDC from the NON ESSENTIAL
    bus to:
    − the foot warmer heater
    − the foot warmer heater fan
    − the thermal protection switch

    The foot warmer heater fan is ON.


    The thermal protection switch is closed and supplies 28 VDC to the foot warmer contactor which energizes. When
    the foot warmer contactor energizes 28 VDC from the SPL bus is supplied to the heater. The heater is ON.
    If the thermal protection switch opens, the heater contactor de-energizes, the contacts open and remove the power
    supply from the heater. The heater is OFF, but the heater fan is still ON.
    When the heater has cooled, the thermal protection switch closes and energizes the heater contactor. The contacts
    close and connect the power supply to the heater which is then ON.

    Effectivity: FOOT WARMER SYSTEM 12-B-21-43-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-07 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    SPL BUS NON ESS BUS

    FOOT WARMER FOOT WARMER

    FOOT WARMER
    CONTACTOR

    ON OFF
    FOOT WARMER
    SWITCH

    FOOT WARMER

    12-B-214300-A-S4080-00001-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Foot Warmer System – Schematic

    Effectivity: FOOT WARMER SYSTEM 12-B-21-43-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-07 Page 3
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: FOOT WARMER SYSTEM 12-B-21-43-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-07 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FOOTWARMER

    ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Table of Contents Page

    FOOTWARMER - ADJUSTMENT/TEST.................................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Wood or metal heat resistant Part Local supply As
    blank required
    DC Ammeter (clip-on) Part Local supply As
    required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-43-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-05-07 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Operation Test
    1.1 Connect the DC Ammeter (clip-on) (Pt.No. Local supply) to the RHPJB, connector A122P1A pin 1
    (wire H92A8, footwarmer power supply).
    1.2 Energize the aircraft electrical system, AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    1.3 On the right inner cross bar panel set the FOOT WARMER switch to ON.
    1.4 Make sure that:
    − the heater operates and hot air is blown from the foot warmer ducts.
    − the ammeter shows 35 A ±10 A.
    1.5 Let the heater operate for 10 minutes.
    1.6
    CAUTION

    DO NOT LEAVE THE FOOTWARMER UNATTENDED WHEN THE AIR OUTLET IS COVERED.

    Cover the air outlet of the heater with the blank (Wood or metal heat resistant blank (Pt.No. Local
    supply)).

    Note

    Covering the air outlet is difficult and the time taken for the thermal protection switch to operate can
    change dependant on how effectively the outlet is covered. The ambient temperature will also affect
    the time taken for the thermal protection switch to operate.

    1.7 After approximately 2 to 8 minutes the thermal protection switch must operate and stop the heater.
    Make sure that:
    − the air from the foot warmer ducts is cool
    − the ammeter shows 0 A.
    1.8
    Note

    The heater blower fan will continue to operate.

    Remove the blank from the heater outlet.


    1.9 After 1 to 2 minutes the heater must start to operate again. Make sure that:
    − the air from the foot warmer ducts is hot

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-43-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-05-07 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − the ammeter shows 35 A ±10 A.


    1.10 Set the FOOT WARMER switch to OFF.
    1.11 De-energize the aircraft electrical system, AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    1.12 Disconnect the ammeter and remove it from the aircraft.
    1.13 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-43-00-00A-903A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-05-07 Page 3
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-43-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-05-07 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FOOTWARMER

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    FOOTWARMER - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.......................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Footwarmer Heater – Removal/Installation............................................................ 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-21-43-00-00A-903A-A FOOTWARMER - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A FLIGHT COMPARTMENT CREW SEATS - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required

    Effectivity: FOOT WARMER SYSTEM 12-B-21-43-00-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-06 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Cable ties Part P09-014 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Open and install a safety clip (Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on these
    circuit breakers:
    − FOOT WARMER (SECONDARY POWERLINE BUS)
    − FOOT WARMER (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    1.2 Remove the pilot crew seat (refer to DM 12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A).
    1.3 Remove and discard the cable ties (Figure 1 [15]) as necessary, to get access to the electrical
    connections.
    1.4 Remove and keep the screws (Figure 1 [12]) from the cover (Figure 1 [14]) and remove the cover
    (Figure 1 [14]) from TB 105 (Figure 1 [13]).
    1.5 Put labels on the footwarmer cables (Figure 1 [1]) and record their position.
    1.6 Remove the nuts (Figure 1 [21]) and washers (Figure 1 [22]) from the terminal studs 01, 02, 03 and 04
    on the terminal block (TB 105) (Figure 1 [13]).
    1.7 Remove the footwarmer cables (Figure 1 [1]) from the terminal studs 01, 02, 03 and 04 on TB 105
    (Figure 1 [13]).
    1.8 Loosen the clamp (Figure 1 [4]) on the heater air duct (Figure 1 [17]).
    1.9 Remove the screws (Figure 1 [20]) and washers (Figure 1 [19]) from the angle (Figure 1 [18]).
    1.10 Disconnect and remove the air duct (Figure 1 [17]) and the clamp (Figure 1 [4]) from the heater
    (Figure 1 [3]).
    1.11 Remove the two nuts (Figure 1 [5]), washers (Figure 1 [6]) and screws (Figure 1 [11]) from the heater
    (Figure 1 [3]) and the cover (Figure 1 [8]).
    1.12 Remove the two nuts (Figure 1 [10]), washers (Figure 1 [9]) and bolts (Figure 1 [7]) that attach the
    heater (Figure 1 [3]) to the bracket (Figure 1 [16]) and the cover (Figure 1 [8]).
    1.13 Remove the cover (Figure 1 [8]) from the heater (Figure 1 [3]).
    1.14 Hold the heater (Figure 1 [3]), then loosen and remove the clamp (Figure 1 [2]) from the bracket
    (Figure 1 [23]).

    Effectivity: FOOT WARMER SYSTEM 12-B-21-43-00-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-06 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1.15 Remove the heater (Figure 1 [3]) from the aircraft.


    2 Installation
    2.1
    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Put the heater (Figure 1 [3]) in position on the brackets (Figure 1 [16]) and (Figure 1 [23]).
    2.2 Hold the heater (Figure 1 [3]) and install the clamp (Figure 1 [2]) on the heater (Figure 1 [3]) and the
    bracket (Figure 1 [23]).
    2.3 Install the two bolts (Figure 1 [7]), washers (Figure 1 [9]) and nuts (Figure 1 [10]) that attach the heater
    (Figure 1 [3]) through the cover (Figure 1 [8]) to the bracket (Figure 1 [16]).
    2.4 Install the two screws (Figure 1 [11]), washers (Figure 1 [6]) and nuts (Figure 1 [5]) that attach the
    cover (Figure 1 [8]) to the heater (Figure 1 [3]).
    2.5 Loosely install the clamp (Figure 1 [4]) on the heater (Figure 1 [3]).
    2.6 Connect the air duct (Figure 1 [17]) to the heater (Figure 1 [3]).
    2.7 Install the screws (Figure 1 [20]) and washers (Figure 1 [19]) in the air duct (Figure 1 [17]) and angle
    (Figure 1 [18]).
    2.8 Position and tighten the clamp (Figure 1 [4]) on the heater air duct (Figure 1 [17]) and the heater
    (Figure 1 [3]).
    2.9 Put the footwarmer cables (Figure 1 [1]) on the terminal studs 01, 02, 03 and 04 on TB 105
    (Figure 1 [13]). Use the labels on the footwarmer cables (Figure 1 [1]) and the positions recorded in
    Fig. .
    2.10 Install the nuts (Figure 1 [21]) and washers (Figure 1 [22]) on the terminal studs 01, 02, 03 and 04 on
    the terminal block (TB 105) (Figure 1 [13]).
    2.11 Install the cover (Figure 1 [14]) on TB 105 (Figure 1 [13]) with the screws (Figure 1 [12]).
    2.12 Put the heater cable in position and install the necessary cable ties (Cable ties (Pt.No. P09-014))
    (Figure 1 [15]).
    2.13 Install the pilot crew seat (refer to DM 12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A).
    2.14 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.15 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − FOOT WARMER (SECONDARY POWERLINE BUS)
    − FOOT WARMER (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    2.16 Do a test of the foot warmer system (refer to DM 12-B-21-43-00-00A-903A-A).

    Effectivity: FOOT WARMER SYSTEM 12-B-21-43-00-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-06 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A 3
    2

    23

    15 B
    D 6
    5

    13 TB 105
    15
    16
    20
    19

    7
    18

    C A
    11

    17

    8
    5
    9 6
    10

    11
    21
    22 3
    TB 105
    15
    B
    13
    01
    02
    03
    04

    9 16
    10 3

    14
    C
    12
    D 12-B-214300-A-S4080-00002-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Footwarmer Heater – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: FOOT WARMER SYSTEM 12-B-21-43-00-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-06 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: FOOT WARMER SYSTEM 12-B-21-43-00-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-06 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: FOOT WARMER SYSTEM 12-B-21-43-00-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-06 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    ADDITIONAL COOLING

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    ADDITIONAL COOLING - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION.................................................. 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-21-50-01-00A-040A-A VAPOUR CYCLE COOLING SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION
    AND OPERATION

    Description

    1 General
    The cooling system on the PC12/47E aircraft is the Vapour-Cycle Cooling System (VCCS). The VCCS decreases
    the temperature of the air in the flight and passenger compartments. It is automatically operated by signals from the
    integrated ECS controller.
    Refer to DM 12-B-21-50-01-00A-040A-A for details of the VCCS.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-50-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-29 Page 1
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-50-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-29 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    VAPOUR CYCLE COOLING SYSTEM

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    VAPOUR CYCLE COOLING SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION............................ 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1
    2 Component Description.......................................................................................... 2
    2.1 Compressor/Condenser Assembly......................................................................... 2
    2.1.1 Electric Motor.......................................................................................................... 2
    2.1.2 Compressor............................................................................................................ 2
    2.1.3 Condenser Coil Assembly...................................................................................... 2
    2.1.4 Receiver/Dryer Assembly....................................................................................... 3
    2.1.4.1 Container................................................................................................................ 3
    2.1.4.2 Service Valve.......................................................................................................... 3
    2.1.4.3 Binary Pressure Switch.......................................................................................... 3
    2.1.5 Power Control Relay............................................................................................... 3
    2.2 Evaporator Assemblies........................................................................................... 3
    2.2.1 Blower..................................................................................................................... 4
    2.2.2 Coil......................................................................................................................... 4
    2.2.3 Expansion Valve..................................................................................................... 4
    2.2.4 Water Tank............................................................................................................. 4
    2.3 FLOOD FAN Switch............................................................................................... 4
    3 Operation (Ref. )..................................................................................................... 4

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Vapour Cycle Cooling System – Schematic........................................................... 6

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-21-60-00-00A-040A-A TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION
    AND OPERATION

    Description

    1 General
    The optional Vapour-Cycle Cooling System (VCCS) decreases the temperature of the air in the flight and
    passenger compartments. It is automatically operated by signals from the integrated ECS controller.
    The VCCS has these components:
    − A compressor/condenser assembly

    Effectivity: VAPOUR CYCLE


    12-B-21-50-01-00A-040A-A
    COOLING SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − Three evaporator assemblies


    − A FLOOD FAN switch
    − A compressor relay
    − A flood fan relay
    − A water tank

    The power supplies to the system are:


    − 28 VDC through the CPRSR (BATTERY & EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX) circuit breaker
    − 28 VDC through the FLOOD FAN (NON ESSENTIAL BUS) circuit breaker

    2 Component Description

    2.1 Compressor/Condenser Assembly


    The compressor/condenser assembly compresses the refrigerant gas, decreases its temperature then filters the
    gas and liquid mixture. It is installed in the rear fuselage between frames 36 and 38. A duct connects the
    compressor/condenser assembly to a vent in the structure. Hot air from the compressor/condenser assembly and
    electric motor goes through a fan and is removed from the aircraft through the vent.
    The compressor/condenser assembly has these components:
    − An electric motor with a cooling fan
    − A compressor
    − A condenser coil assembly
    − A receiver/dryer assembly
    − A power control relay

    2.1.1 Electric Motor


    The 28 VDC electric motor operates the compressor and the cooling fan. Pulleys and a toothed belt connect one
    end of the motor drive shaft to the compressor, and the cooling fan is directly connected to the other end. A cover
    is installed on the toothed belt. The cooling fan has six plastic blades installed on an aluminum hub. It makes the
    air flow through the condenser coil assembly.
    The motor has a thermal cut-out that operates if the temperature of the motor is more than 250 °C, and an hour
    meter to show operation time.

    2.1.2 Compressor
    The compressor is a constant-displacement swashplate type installed in an aluminum case. It compresses the
    refrigerant gas to a high pressure and temperature and sends it to the condenser coil assembly.

    2.1.3 Condenser Coil Assembly


    The condenser coil assembly is a copper coil with aluminum fins. The cooling fan pulls air through the condenser to
    decrease the temperature of the high pressure refrigerant gas and condense it into a warm liquid before it goes into
    the receiver/dryer assembly. A shroud is installed between the condenser coil assembly and the fan.

    Effectivity: VAPOUR CYCLE


    12-B-21-50-01-00A-040A-A
    COOLING SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.1.4 Receiver/Dryer Assembly


    The receiver/dryer assembly removes remaining gas from the warm refrigerant liquid, and absorbs any water in the
    liquid. It has these components:
    − A container
    − A service valve
    − A binary pressure switch

    2.1.4.1 Container
    The container is the refrigerant reservoir for the system. It is steel and has a volume of 35 in³ (574 cm³). It has a
    sight glass and coated glass-fiber filters that absorb the water from the refrigerant liquid. When the system is on
    and the pressure is low bubbles will show in the sight glass.

    2.1.4.2 Service Valve


    The service valve is a non-return valve. It makes it possible to remove the binary pressure switch from the receiver/
    dryer assembly with the refrigerant in the system.

    2.1.4.3 Binary Pressure Switch


    The binary pressure switch has two switches that stop the compressor when the system pressure is too high or too
    low.
    The low pressure switch operates when the system pressure is 25 ± 5 psi (1,7 ± 0,3 bar) (the ambient temperature
    is low or the refrigerant quantity is low). It lets the compressor operate again when the pressure becomes 40 psi
    (2,8 bar).
    The high pressure switch operates when the system pressure is 300 ± 30 psi (20,7 ± 2,1 bar) (the system is
    blocked or the condenser coil assembly does not decrease the temperature of the refrigerant sufficiently). It lets the
    compressor operate again when the pressure is 100 ± 20 psi (6,9 ± 1,4 bar).

    2.1.5 Power Control Relay


    The power control relay is a 28 VDC 200 A relay installed in the compressor/condenser assembly. It is controlled
    by the binary pressure switch.

    2.2 Evaporator Assemblies


    The evaporator assemblies use the refrigerant liquid to decrease the temperature of the air in the passenger and
    flight compartments. The center evaporator assembly supplies cool air directly into the passenger compartment.
    The left and right evaporator assemblies supply cool air to the passenger and flight compartments through the
    ducting in the overhead panels. The three evaporator assemblies are installed at the rear of the passenger
    compartment above the baggage area. Each evaporator assembly has these components:
    − A blower
    − A coil
    − An expansion valve
    − A drip tray

    Effectivity: VAPOUR CYCLE


    12-B-21-50-01-00A-040A-A
    COOLING SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.2.1 Blower
    The blower makes air from the passenger compartment flow through the coil. It has an electric motor that operates
    an aluminum centrifugal fan.

    2.2.2 Coil
    The coil is a copper coil with aluminum fins. It decreases the temperature of the air in the passenger compartment.
    It also removes moisture from the air by condensation.

    2.2.3 Expansion Valve


    The expansion valve is a pressure-sensitive valve that keeps the flow of refrigerant and the system suction
    pressure correct. This makes sure the coil assembly does not freeze and the load on the compressor/condenser
    motor stays constant. The expansion valve has a bypass valve that can quickly make the pressures on each side
    of the expansion valve the same when the pressure in the coil assembly is less than 27 psi.

    2.2.4 Water Tank


    The water tank collects the condensation from three evaporator assemblies during flight. It is installed in the
    passenger compartment floor between frames 35 and 36. It is a rectangular plastic box with two inlet connections
    on one side and a valve with a drain on the bottom. Moisture from the evaporator assemblies flows down the drain
    pipes and through the inlet connections into the water tank. When the flight and passenger compartments are
    pressurized the valve stays closed and moisture collects in the water tank. When the aircraft is de-pressurized the
    valve opens and lets the moisture drain overboard.

    2.3 FLOOD FAN Switch


    The FLOOD FAN switch has two positions AUTO and INHIBIT.

    3 Operation (Ref. Fig. 1)


    When the aircraft electrical system is energized 28 VDC is supplied to the compressor power control relay.
    The integrated Environment Conditioning System (ECS) controller gives signals to operate the VCCS to control the
    cabin and cockpit temperature (refer to DM 12-B-21-60-00-00A-040A-A).
    When the electric motor in the compressor/condenser starts, the compressor compresses the refrigerant gas and
    increases the temperature of the gas. The refrigerant gas goes through the condenser where it cools and
    condenses into a warm liquid. At the same time the fan cools the compressor and the condenser and sends the hot
    air overboard through the duct and vent.
    The liquid then goes into the receiver/dryer assembly where the filters remove gas and moisture from the liquid. If
    the pressure of the warm liquid is less than 300 ± 30 psi (20,7 ± 2,1 bar) it goes to the expansion valves in the
    evaporator assemblies. If the pressure is more than 300 ± 30 psi (20,7 ± 2,1 bar) the binary pressure switch
    operates and disconnects the 28 VDC supply to the power control relay to stop the electric motor in the
    compressor/condenser assembly. When the pressure decreases to 100 ± 20 psi (6,9 ± 1,4 bar) the binary pressure
    switch operates and supplies 28 VDC to the power control relay to start the electric motor in the compressor/
    condenser assembly.
    As the refrigerant liquid goes through the expansion valves it expands and a large decrease in its pressure occurs.
    The refrigerant becomes a cold gas and goes through the condenser coil assemblies. The expansion valves make
    sure the pressure in the condenser coil assemblies is not less than 27 psi (1,9 bar). This makes sure the gas does
    not freeze in the condenser coil assemblies.

    Effectivity: VAPOUR CYCLE


    12-B-21-50-01-00A-040A-A
    COOLING SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    If the pressure in the condenser coil assemblies is less than 27 psi (1,9 bar) the bypass valves in the expansion
    valves open and let the refrigerant go through the condenser coil assemblies at a pressure that is sufficient to make
    sure the gas does not freeze. When the bypass valves open the pressure at the receiver/dryer assembly
    decreases. If the pressure decreases to 25 ± 5 psi (1,7 ± 0,3 bar) the binary pressure switch operates and
    disconnects the 28 VDC supply to the power control relay to stop the electric motor in the compressor/condenser
    assembly. When the pressure in the receiver/dryer assembly increases to 40 psi (2,8 bar) the binary pressure
    switch operates and supplies 28 VDC to the power control relay to start the electric motor in the compressor/
    condenser assembly.
    The condenser coil assemblies absorb the heat from the passenger compartment air that the blowers pull through
    them. The refrigerant gas becomes warm and goes to the compressor. The air from the passenger compartment
    cools as it goes through the condenser coil assemblies and moisture from the air condenses on the condenser coil
    assemblies. The moisture flows down the pipes into the water tank. When the flight and passenger compartments
    are pressurized the valve in the water tank stays closed and moisture collects in the water tank. When the aircraft
    is de-pressurized the valve opens and lets the moisture drain overboard.

    Effectivity: VAPOUR CYCLE


    12-B-21-50-01-00A-040A-A
    COOLING SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    COMPRESSOR\CONDENSER ASSEMBLY

    DUCT
    CONDENSER
    FAN
    AMBIENT
    AIR FLOW
    AIR
    OVERBOARD M

    SERVICE
    PORTS
    BELT
    RECEIVER/
    DRYER

    COMPRESSOR
    FILTERS SERVICE BINARY
    VALVE PRESSURE
    SWITCH

    WATER TANK

    AIR
    FLOW
    AIR OVERBOARD
    FLOW DRAIN

    AIR
    FLOW

    EXPANSION EXPANSION EXPANSION


    VALVE VALVE VALVE
    COIL COIL COIL

    FAN FAN FAN

    BLOWER BLOWER BLOWER


    M M M

    RIGHT CENTER LEFT


    EVAPORATOR EVAPORATOR EVAPORATOR
    ASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY

    OVERHEAD PASSENGER OVERHEAD


    PANEL COMPARTMENT PANEL

    DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
    (REF. 21-20-00)
    21131

    Figure 1 Vapour Cycle Cooling System – Schematic

    Effectivity: VAPOUR CYCLE


    12-B-21-50-01-00A-040A-A
    COOLING SYSTEM
    End of data module
    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 6
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    VAPOUR CYCLE COOLING SYSTEM

    SERVICING

    Table of Contents Page

    VAPOUR CYCLE COOLING SYSTEM - SERVICING............................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 2
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Vapour–Cycle Cooling System – Servicing............................................................ 8

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A GENERAL - AEROSPACE GROUND EQUIPMENT
    (AGE) AND TOOLS
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-21-50-01-00A-903A-A VAPOUR CYCLE COOLING SYSTEM -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-25-23-01-00A-920A-A BAGGAGE AREA EQUIPMENT - REMOVAL
    INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Effectivity: VAPOUR CYCLE


    12-B-21-50-01-00A-902A-A
    COOLING SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-02-16 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required
    Service kit R134A Part 990.00.09.213 As
    required
    Service station Part 990.00.09.216 As
    required
    Nitrogen supply (200 psi (13,79 Part Local supply As
    bar)) required
    Halogen leak detector Part Local supply As
    required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Cleaning cloth Part P02-003 As
    required
    Leak detector spray Part P06-004 As
    required
    Adhesive Part P08-017 As
    required
    Armaflex band Part P09-013 As
    required
    Compressor oil (Emkarate RL Part P10-021 As
    100H) required
    R134A refrigerant Part P10-010 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This document gives the procedure to service the vapour cooling system, which includes these tasks:

    Effectivity: VAPOUR CYCLE


    12-B-21-50-01-00A-902A-A
    COOLING SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-02-16 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − The recovery of the refrigerant


    − The leak test
    − The evacuation
    − The flush
    − The charge of the refrigerant
    2 Vapour Cooling System Servicing
    2.1
    WARNING

    THE REFRIGERANT IN THE VAPOUR-CYCLE COOLING SYSTEM CAN BE DANGEROUS. OBEY


    THE MANUFACTURERS HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

    WARNING

    COVER ALL AREAS OF YOUR SKIN AND WEAR PROTECTIVE GOGGLES WHEN YOU
    DISCONNECT THE PIPES FROM THE UNIONS.

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items AMM 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Note

    To identify the AGE and tools used in this procedure refer to the list of AGE and tools AMM 12-
    B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A.

    Preparation
    2.1.1 Open the cargo door.
    2.1.2 Open the access panel 31 AB.
    2.1.3 Open and install a Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065) on these
    circuit breakers:
    − FLOOD FAN (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − VENTS FANS (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − CPRSR (BATTERY & EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX)
    − COND HTR CTL (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    2.1.4 Remove the screws Figure 1 [5] and the outlet cover Figure 1 [4] from the aircraft.
    2.1.5 Remove the carpet, if installed, from the baggage compartment floor, refer to AMM 12-
    B-25-23-01-00A-920A-A.
    2.1.6 Remove the access panels 22 PZ, 22 SZ and 22 TZ, refer to AMM 12-
    B-25-23-01-00A-920A-A.
    2.1.7 Remove the dust caps Figure 1 [1] from the suction pressure connection Figure 1 [2] and
    discharge pressure connection Figure 1 [3].

    Effectivity: VAPOUR CYCLE


    12-B-21-50-01-00A-902A-A
    COOLING SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-02-16 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.1.8 Make sure the valve is closed and connect the blue hose quick connector of the Service
    station (Pt.No. 990.00.09.216) to the suction pressure connection Figure 1 [2].
    2.1.9 Make sure the valve is closed and connect the red hose quick connector of the Service
    station (Pt.No. 990.00.09.216) to the discharge pressure connection Figure 1 [3].
    2.1.10 If necessary evacuate the service station hoses, then open the quick connector valves.
    2.2 Recovery of the Refrigerant
    2.2.1 Drain the collected compressor oil from the drain-tank of the service station.
    2.2.2 Set the service station to refrigerant recovery.
    2.2.3 When the suction and discharge pressures are zero, stop the recovery procedure.

    Note

    Some service stations automatically go off when the recovery is complete.

    2.2.4 Drain the collected compressor oil from the drain-tank of the service station. Make a note of
    the quantity of oil drained from the aircraft system.
    2.3 Leak Test
    2.3.1
    CAUTION

    THE VAPOUR-CYCLE COOLING SYSTEM CAN BE DAMAGED IF IT IS PRESSURIZED


    TO MORE THAN 200 PSI (13,79 BAR).

    Do the recovery of the refrigerant procedure.


    2.3.2 Install a suitable adaptor on the nitrogen supply.
    2.3.3 Disconnect the blue hose from the service station and connect the hose to the Nitrogen
    supply (200 psi (13,79 bar)) (Pt.No. Local supply).
    2.3.4 Slowly increase the nitrogen supply pressure to 200 psi (13,79 bar) then wait five minutes
    and let the pressure become stable.
    2.3.5 Close the nitrogen supply.
    2.3.6 Make a note of the pressure shown on the service station red gage.
    2.3.7 Put Leak detector spray (Pt.No. P06-004) on all of the connections in the vapour-cycle
    cooling system. Make sure there are no leaks.
    2.3.8 If there are leaks:
    2.3.8.1 Release the nitrogen pressure from the vapour-cycle cooling system.
    2.3.8.2 Disconnect and clean the hoses and tubes that have leaks.
    2.3.8.3 Examine the flares and connectors on the hoses and tubes.
    2.3.8.4 Carefully apply Adhesive (Pt.No. P08-017) to the hose and tube connector
    threads.
    2.3.8.5 Carefully apply a small amount of Compressor oil (Emkarate RL
    100H) (Pt.No. P10-021) to the hose and tube flares.
    2.3.8.6 Connect the hoses and tubes.
    2.3.8.7 Do Step 2.3.4 thru Step 2.3.7 again.

    Effectivity: VAPOUR CYCLE


    12-B-21-50-01-00A-902A-A
    COOLING SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-02-16 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.3.9 Remove the Leak detector spray (Pt.No. P06-004) from the connections with a Cleaning
    cloth (Pt.No. P02-003).
    2.3.10 Use the Halogen leak detector (Pt.No. Local supply) around all of the connections in the
    vapour-cycle cooling system. Make sure there are no leaks.

    Note

    The halogen leak detector is very sensitive. Before you do the leak test make sure there are
    no refrigerant fumes in the area.

    2.3.11 Make sure the pressure given in Step 2.3.6 has not decreased.
    2.3.12 If there are leaks do Step 2.3.8.
    2.3.13 Release the nitrogen pressure from the vapour-cycle cooling system.
    2.3.14 Disconnect the nitrogen hose from the service station blue hose.
    2.3.15 Wind Armaflex band (Pt.No. P09-013) on the uncovered areas of the suction pressure hoses
    and tubes.
    2.4 Evacuation
    2.4.1 Do the leak test procedure.
    2.4.2 On the service station make sure that the vacuum pump oil level is correct.
    2.4.3 Set the service station operate to evacuation.
    2.4.4 After 10 to 15 minutes, make sure the vacuum pressure shown on the blue gage is between
    25 and 27 in Hg.
    2.4.5 Let the vacuum pump operate for a minimum of 30 minutes.
    2.4.6 On the refrigerant charging/recovery rig set the vacuum pump to off.
    2.5 Flush
    2.5.1 Do the evacuation procedure.
    2.5.2 On the service station:
    − Set the heater to on
    − Let the refrigerant pressure become between 101 and 130 psi (7 and 9 bar).
    2.5.3 Set the service station to refrigerant fill and charge the vapour-cycle cooling system with 21
    oz (600 g) of R134A refrigerant (Pt.No. P10-010).
    2.5.4 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − FLOOD FAN (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − VENTS FANS (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − CPRSR (BATTERY & EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX)
    − COND HTR CTL (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    2.5.5 Energize the aircraft electrical system, refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    2.5.6 Set the ECS cockpit and cabin temperatures to full cold on the Multi Function Display (MFD)
    Environment window and let the vapour-cycle cooling system operate for 10 minutes.

    Effectivity: VAPOUR CYCLE


    12-B-21-50-01-00A-902A-A
    COOLING SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-02-16 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Note

    If the suction pressure is less than 25 ± 5 psi (1,7 ± 0,3 bar) the compressor motor will not
    operate.

    Note

    After a leak test the vapour-cycle cooling system may not operate. If the vapour-cycle
    cooling system does not operate, carefully and lightly hit the binary high pressure switch
    installed on the dryer receiver.

    2.5.7 De-energize the aircraft electrical system, refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.


    2.5.8 Open and install safety clips on these circuit breakers:
    − FLOOD FAN (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − VENTS FANS (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − CPRSR (BATTERY & EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX)
    − COND HTR CTL (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    2.5.9 Do the recovery of the refrigerant procedure.
    2.6 Charge of the Refrigerant
    2.6.1
    Note

    If the compressor oil cannot be automatically filled with the service station, do Step 2.6.2
    before Step 2.6.1.

    Do the evacuation procedure.


    2.6.2 Fill the compressor with the same quantity of new Compressor oil (Emkarate RL
    100H) (Pt.No. P10-021) plus 10 ccm as noted during the recovery of the refrigerant.
    2.6.3 On the service station:
    − Set the heater to on
    − Let the refrigerant pressure become between 101 and 130 psi (7 and 9 bar).
    2.6.4 Set the service station to refrigerant fill and charge the vapour-cycle cooling system with 32
    oz (900 g) of R134A refrigerant (Pt.No. P10-010).
    2.6.5 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − FLOOD FAN (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − VENTS FANS (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − CPRSR (BATTERY & EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX)
    − COND HTR CTL (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    2.6.6 Energize the aircraft electrical system, refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    2.6.7 Set the ECS cockpit and cabin temperatures to full cold on the MFD Environment window
    and let the vapour-cycle cooling system operate for 10 minutes.
    2.6.8 Make sure the vapour-cycle cooling system operates.

    Effectivity: VAPOUR CYCLE


    12-B-21-50-01-00A-902A-A
    COOLING SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-02-16 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Note

    If the suction pressure in the vapour-cycle cooling system is less than 25 ± 5 psi (1,7 ± 0,3
    bar) the compressor motor will not operate.

    2.6.9 Do the adjustment of the vapour-cycle cooling system, refer to AMM 12-
    B-21-50-01-00A-903A-A.

    Effectivity: VAPOUR CYCLE


    12-B-21-50-01-00A-902A-A
    COOLING SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-02-16 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3 1

    B
    4 5
    C
    21143

    Figure 1 Vapour–Cycle Cooling System – Servicing

    Effectivity: VAPOUR CYCLE


    12-B-21-50-01-00A-902A-A
    COOLING SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-02-16 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: VAPOUR CYCLE


    12-B-21-50-01-00A-902A-A
    COOLING SYSTEM
    End of data module
    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-02-16 Page 9
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: VAPOUR CYCLE


    12-B-21-50-01-00A-902A-A
    COOLING SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-02-16 Page 10


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    VAPOUR CYCLE COOLING SYSTEM

    ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Table of Contents Page

    VAPOUR CYCLE COOLING SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST................................................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 2
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2
    6 Suction and Discharge Pressures.......................................................................... 4

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Vapour–Cycle Cooling System – Adjustment/Test................................................. 10

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A GENERAL - AEROSPACE GROUND EQUIPMENT
    (AGE) AND TOOLS
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-21-50-01-00A-902A-A VAPOUR CYCLE COOLING SYSTEM - SERVICING
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-25-23-01-00A-920A-A BAGGAGE AREA EQUIPMENT - REMOVAL
    INSTALLATION
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903A-A POWER PLANT - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-50-01-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required
    Service kit R134A Part 990.00.09.213 As
    required
    Service station Part 990.00.09.216 As
    required
    Digital thermometer Part Local supply As
    required
    Dynamometer (2.5 - 2.75 lbf (11 Part Local supply As
    - 12 N)) required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Evaporator inlet screen CSN 21500003 As
    required
    Lockwire Part P02-007 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    The operational test of the vapour-cycle cooling system is given in the powerplant adjustment/test (refer to
    DM 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903A-A).
    This data module gives the procedure to do:
    − A functional test of the vapour-cycle cooling system
    − An adjustment of the vapour-cycle cooling system
    − An adjustment of the compressor drive belt
    2 Functional Test of the Vapour-Cycle Cooling System

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-50-01-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.1
    WARNING

    THE REFRIGERANT IN THE VAPOUR-CYCLE COOLING SYSTEM CAN BE DANGEROUS. OBEY


    THE MANUFACTURERS HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

    WARNING

    COVER ALL AREAS OF YOUR SKIN AND WEAR PROTECTIVE GOGGLES WHEN YOU
    DISCONNECT THE PIPES FROM THE UNIONS.

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Note

    Top identify the AGE and tools used in this procedure refer to the list of AGE and tools 12-
    B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A.

    Preparation
    2.1.1 Open the cargo door.
    2.1.2 Open the access panel 31 AB.
    2.1.3 Open and install a clip (Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on
    these circuit breakers:
    − FLOOD FAN (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − VENTS FANS (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − CPRSR (BATTERY & EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX)
    − COND HTR CTL (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    2.1.4
    CAUTION

    DO NOT LET MOISTURE GO INTO THE VAPOUR-CYCLE COOLING SYSTEM. MAKE


    SURE THAT A VACUUM PRESSURE IS IN THE RED AND BLUE HOSES BEFORE THEY
    ARE CONNECTED.

    On the service station (Service station (Pt.No. 990.00.09.216)) make sure that all the valves
    are closed.
    2.1.5 Remove the dust caps (Figure 1 [2]) from the suction pressure connection (Figure 1 [3]) and
    discharge valve pressure connection (Figure 1 [14]).
    2.1.6 Make sure the valve is closed and connect the blue hose quick connector of the service
    station to the suction pressure connection (Figure 1 [3]).
    2.1.7 Make sure the valve is closed and connect the red hose quick connector of the service
    station to the discharge pressure connection (Figure 1 [14]).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-50-01-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.1.8 Open the quick connector valves.


    2.1.9 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − FLOOD FAN (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − VENTS FANS (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − CPRSR (BATTERY & EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX)
    − COND HTR CTL (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    2.1.10 Energize the aircraft electrical system (Refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).

    Note

    Use an external power supply to operate the vapour-cycle cooling system.

    2.2 Procedure
    2.2.1 Set the VENT FANS switch to AUTO.
    2.2.2 Set the FLOOD FANS switch to AUTO.
    2.2.3 Set the ECS cockpit and cabin temperatures to full cold on the Multi Function Display (MFD)
    Environment window.
    2.2.4 Let the vapour-cycle cooling system operate for 15 minutes.
    2.2.5 Refer to Table 6, on the service station make sure that the suction and discharge pressures
    are correct:

    Table 6 Suction and Discharge Pressures


    AMBIENT SUCTION PRESSURE DISCHARGE PRESSURE
    TEMP.
    °C psi (bar) psi (bar)
    15 28-34 (1.9-2.3) 110-135 (7.5-9.2)
    20 29-35 (2.0-2.4) 123-151 (8.4-10.3)
    25 31-37 (2.1-2.5) 142-173 (9.7-11.8)
    30 31-38 (2.1-2.6) 162-197 (11.0-13.4)
    35 32-38 (2.2-2.6) 181-222 (12.3-15.1)
    40 32-40 (2.2-2.7) 206-251 (14.0-17.1)
    45 34-41 (2.3-2.8) 235-287 (16.0-19.5)

    Note

    Better cooling will result if the lower suction pressure values are used.

    2.2.5.1 If the suction and discharge pressures are less than the limit, do a leak test of
    the vapour-cycle cooling system (refer to DM 12-B-21-50-01-00A-902A-A).
    2.2.5.2 If the suction pressure is less than the limit and the discharge pressure is more
    than the limit, do the adjustment of the vapour-cycle cooling system.
    2.2.5.3 If the suction pressure is more than the limit and discharge pressure is less than
    the limit, do the adjustment of the vapour-cycle cooling system.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-50-01-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.2.6 Use the thermometer (Digital thermometer (Pt.No. Local supply)) to measure the evaporator
    inlet temperature.
    2.2.7 Use the digital thermometer to measure the evaporator outlet temperature.
    2.2.8 Make sure that the difference between the temperatures measured in Step 2.2.6 and
    Step 2.2.7 is 8°C or more.

    Note

    With increased humidity or with ambient temperature less than 15°C the cooling effect will be
    less.

    2.2.9 If the difference between the temperatures noted in Step 2.2.6 and Step 2.2.7 steps is less
    than 9°C do the adjustment of the vapour-cycle cooling system.
    2.3 Close Up
    2.3.1 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.3.2 Open and install safety clips on these circuit breakers:
    − FLOOD FAN (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − VENTS FANS (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − CPRSR (BATTERY & EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX)
    − COND HTR CTL (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    2.3.3 Close the quick connector valves.
    2.3.4 Disconnect the red hose quick connector of the service station from the discharge pressure
    connection (Figure 1 [14]).
    2.3.5 Disconnect the blue hose quick connector of the service station from the suction pressure
    connection (Figure 1 [3]).
    2.3.6 Install the dust caps (Figure 1 [2]) on the suction pressure connection (Figure 1 [3]) and
    discharge pressure connection (Figure 1 [14]).
    2.3.7 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.3.8 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − FLOOD FAN (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − VENTS FANS (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − CPRSR (BATTERY & EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX)
    − COND HTR CTL (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    2.3.9 Close the access panel 31 AB.
    2.3.10 Close the cargo door.
    3 Adjustment of the Vapour-Cycle Cooling System
    3.1
    WARNING

    THE REFRIGERANT IN THE VAPOUR-CYCLE COOLING SYSTEM CAN BE DANGEROUS. OBEY


    THE MANUFACTURERS HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-50-01-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    WARNING

    COVER ALL AREAS OF YOUR SKIN AND WEAR PROTECTIVE GOGGLES WHEN YOU
    DISCONNECT THE PIPES FROM THE UNIONS.

    Preparation
    3.1.1 Open the cargo door.
    3.1.2 Open the access panel 31 AB.
    3.1.3 Open and install safety clips on these circuit breakers:
    − FLOOD FAN (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − VENTS FANS (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − CPRSR (BATTERY & EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX)
    − COND HTR CTL (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    3.1.4 Remove the screws (Figure 1 [21]) and outlet duct cover (Figure 1 [19]) from the duct.
    3.1.5 Remove the carpet, if installed, from the baggage compartment floor (Refer to DM 12-
    B-25-23-01-00A-920A-A).
    3.1.6 Remove the access panels 22 PZ, 22 SZ and 22 TZ (refer to DM 12-B-25-23-01-00A-920A-
    A).
    3.1.7 Loosen the clamp (Figure 1 [25]) then disconnect the water drain hose (Figure 1 [24]) from
    the outlet duct assembly (Figure 1 [17]).
    3.1.8 Loosen the clamps (Figure 1 [15]) then disconnect the two air hoses (Figure 1 [16]) from the
    headliner ducts (Figure 1 [18]).
    3.1.9 Loosen the clamps (Figure 1 [20]) and remove the outlet duct assembly (Figure 1 [17]) from
    the aircraft.
    3.1.10 Remove the inlet screens (Figure 1 [23]) from the evaporators (Figure 1 [22]).
    3.1.11 Examine the inlet screens (Figure 1 [23]) and replace them if they are dirty or damaged.
    3.1.12 Install the inlet screens (Figure 1 [23]) on the evaporators (Figure 1 [22]).
    3.1.13 Make sure all the valves on the refrigerant charging/recovery rig are closed.
    3.1.14
    CAUTION

    DO NOT LET MOISTURE GO INTO THE VAPOUR-CYCLE COOLING SYSTEM. MAKE


    SURE THAT A VACUUM PRESSURE IS IN THE RED AND BLUE HOSES BEFORE THEY
    ARE CONNECTED.

    Remove the dust caps (Figure 1 [2]) from the suction pressure connection (Figure 1 [3]) and
    discharge valve pressure connection (Figure 1 [14]).
    3.1.15 Make sure the valve is closed and connect the blue hose quick connector of the service
    station to the suction pressure connection (Figure 1 [3]).
    3.1.16 Make sure the valve is closed and connect the red hose quick connector of the service
    station to the discharge pressure connection (Figure 1 [14]).
    3.1.17 Open the quick connector valves.
    3.1.18 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-50-01-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − FLOOD FAN (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)


    − VENTS FANS (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − CPRSR (BATTERY & EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX)
    − COND HTR CTL (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    3.1.19 Energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).

    Note

    Use an external power supply to operate the vapour-cycle cooling system.

    3.2 Procedure
    3.2.1 Set the VENT FANS switch to AUTO.
    3.2.2 Set the FLOOD FANS switch to AUTO.
    3.2.3 Set the ECS cockpit and cabin temperatures to full cold on the Multi Function Display (MFD)
    Environment window.
    3.2.4 Let the vapour-cycle cooling system operate for 15 minutes.
    3.2.5 Use the digital thermometer to measure the temperatures at each evaporator outlet and inlet.
    3.2.6 On the service station, make a note of the suction pressure and the discharge pressure.
    3.2.7 Make sure that the difference between the temperatures of the evaporator outlets is less
    than 2°C, and that the outlet temperatures are minimum 8°C lower than the inlet
    temperatures.
    3.2.8 If the temperature at an evaporator outlet is not in limits, turn the screw of the related
    expansion valve in steps of between 1/8 to 1/2 of a turn. Let the temperature become stable
    after each adjustment.

    Note

    The expansion valve adjustment is very sensitive. Turn the screw clockwise to increase the
    suction pressure and decrease the discharge pressure. Turn the screw counterclockwise to
    decrease the suction pressure and increase the discharge pressure.

    3.2.9 On the service station, make a note of the suction pressure.


    3.2.10 Refer to Table 6 and, if necessary, adjust the three expansion valves in the same direction
    and the same amount until the suction pressure is correct.
    3.2.11 On the service station, make a note of the discharge pressure.
    3.2.12 Refer to Table 6:
    3.2.12.1 The discharge pressure is in limits if the suction pressure is in limits and the
    coolant quantity is 32 oz (900 g).
    3.2.12.2 A correctly serviced system with a much too low discharge pressure points to
    an unserviceable compressor.
    3.2.13 Do Step 3.2.7 thru Step 3.2.10 again until the temperatures and pressure are correct.
    3.3 Close Up
    3.3.1 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    3.3.2 Open and install safety clips on these circuit breakers:

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-50-01-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − FLOOD FAN (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)


    − VENTS FANS (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − CPRSR (BATTERY & EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX)
    − COND HTR CTL (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    3.3.3 Close the quick connector valves.
    3.3.4 Disconnect the red hose quick connector of the service station from the discharge pressure
    connection (Figure 1 [14]).
    3.3.5 Disconnect the blue hose quick connector of the service station from the suction pressure
    connection (Figure 1 [3]).
    3.3.6 Install the dust caps (Figure 1 [2]) on the suction pressure connection (Figure 1 [3]) and
    discharge pressure connection (Figure 1 [14]).
    3.3.7 Install the outlet duct assembly (Figure 1 [17]) in the aircraft then tighten the clamps
    (Figure 1 [20]).
    3.3.8 Connect the two air hoses (Figure 1 [16]) to the headliner ducts (Figure 1 [18]) then tighten
    the clamps (Figure 1 [15]).
    3.3.9 Connect the water drain hose (Figure 1 [24]) to the outlet duct assembly (17) then tighten the
    clamp (Figure 1 [25]).
    3.3.10 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.3.11 Install the access panels 22 PZ, 22 SZ and 22 TZ (refer to DM 12-B-25-23-01-00A-920A-A).
    3.3.12 Install the outlet duct cover (Figure 1 [19]) with the screws (Figure 1 [21]).
    3.3.13 Install the carpet, if installed, on the baggage compartment floor (Refer to DM 12-
    B-25-23-01-00A-920A-A).
    3.3.14 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − FLOOD FAN (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − VENTS FANS (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − CPRSR (BATTERY & EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX)
    − COND HTR CTL (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    3.3.15 Close the access panel 31 AB.
    3.3.16 Close the cargo door.
    4 Adjustment of the Compressor/Condenser Drive Belt
    4.1 Preparation
    4.1.1 Open the access panel 31 AB.
    4.1.2 Open and install safety clips on these circuit breakers:
    − CPRSR (BATTERY & EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX)
    − COND HTR CTL (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    4.1.3 Loosen the two bolts (Figure 1 [13]) on the compressor/condenser (Figure 1 [8]).
    4.1.4 Remove the lockwire from the four screws (Figure 1 [9]). Remove the four screws
    (Figure 1 [9]) and the belt guard (Figure 1 [10]) from the compressor/condenser
    (Figure 1 [8]).
    4.2 Procedure

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-50-01-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    4.2.1 Make sure the drive pulley (Figure 1 [11]) is aligned with the pulley (Figure 1 [7]) on the
    compressor/condenser (Figure 1 [8]).
    4.2.2 If necessary, adjust the drive pulley (Figure 1 [11]) as follows:
    4.2.2.1 Turn the pulley (Figure 1 [11]) until you get access to the pulley set screws
    (Figure 1 [12]).
    4.2.2.2 Loosen the pulley set screws (Figure 1 [12]) then move the pulley
    (Figure 1 [11]) to the correct position.
    4.2.2.3 Tighten the pulley set screws (Figure 1 [12]).
    4.2.3 Use the dynamometer (Dynamometer (2.5 - 2.75 lbf (11 - 12 N)) (Pt.No. Local supply)) and
    apply a force of between 1.5 and 1.75 lbs (6,7 and 7,8 N) to the top of the drive belt
    (Figure 1 [6]) half way between the pulleys (Figure 1 [7]) and (Figure 1 [11]). Make sure the
    drive belt moves 0.1 in (2,5 mm).
    4.2.4
    CAUTION

    DO NOT SET THE TENSION ON THE DRIVE BELT TO MORE THAN THE LIMIT OR
    DAMAGE TO THE DRIVE BELT OR MOTOR CAN OCCUR.

    To increase the tension, loosen the bolt (Figure 1 [5]) and bolts (Figure 1 [4]).
    If necessary, adjust the tension of the drive belt (Figure 1 [6]) as follows:
    Set the drive belt (Figure 1 [6]) to the correct tension and tighten the bolts (Figure 1 [5]) and
    (Figure 1 [4]).
    4.3 Close Up
    4.3.1 Install the belt guard (Figure 1 [10]) on the compressor/condenser (Figure 1 [8]) with the four
    screws (Figure 1 [9]). Safety the four screws (Figure 1 [9]) with lockwire
    (Lockwire (Pt.No. P02-007)).
    4.3.2 Tighten the two bolts (Figure 1 [13]) on the compressor/condenser (Figure 1 [8]).
    4.3.3 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    4.3.4 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − CPRSR (BATTERY & EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX)
    − COND HTR CTL (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    4.3.5 Close the access panel 31 AB.
    4.3.6 Do the operational test of the temperature conditioning system (refer to DM 12-
    B-71-00-00-00A-903A-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-50-01-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 9


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    C 3

    A 1

    14

    12
    11
    13
    10

    B
    9

    4
    5
    6
    4
    7

    0.1 in (2.5 mm) 8

    B
    21144

    Figure 1 Vapour–Cycle Cooling System – Adjustment/Test (Sheet 1 of 2)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-50-01-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 10


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    D
    E
    21
    E
    15

    16
    E 17 18

    20
    F
    C
    19

    25 D
    24
    F

    22

    23

    E
    21146

    Figure 1 Vapour–Cycle Cooling System – Adjustment/Test (Sheet 2 of 2)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-50-01-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 11


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-50-01-00A-903A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 12
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    COMPRESSOR CONDENSER UNIT

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    COMPRESSOR CONDENSER UNIT - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION......................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Compressor/Condenser Unit – Removal/Installation.............................................. 5

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-21-50-01-00A-902A-A VAPOUR CYCLE COOLING SYSTEM - SERVICING
    12-B-21-50-01-00A-903A-A VAPOUR CYCLE COOLING SYSTEM -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required

    Effectivity: VAPOUR CYCLE


    12-B-21-50-01-00A-920A-A
    COOLING SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-02-16 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Adhesive Part P08-017 As
    required
    Koroseal binding Part P09-004 As
    required
    Armaflex band Part P09-013 As
    required
    Cable tie Part P09-014 As
    required
    Compressor oil (Emkarate RL Part P10-021 As
    100H) required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1
    WARNING

    THE COMPRESSOR/CONDENSER UNIT IS HEAVY. IT WEIGHS APPROXIMATELY 50 LB (23 KG).


    USE THE CORRECT TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT TO LIFT AND LOWER IT.

    WARNING

    THE REFRIGERANT IN THE VAPOUR-CYCLE COOLING SYSTEM CAN BE DANGEROUS. OBEY


    THE MANUFACTURERS HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

    WARNING

    COVER ALL AREAS OF YOUR SKIN AND WEAR PROTECTIVE GOGGLES WHEN YOU
    DISCONNECT THE PIPES FROM THE UNIONS.

    Effectivity: VAPOUR CYCLE


    12-B-21-50-01-00A-920A-A
    COOLING SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-02-16 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    CAUTION

    BE CAREFUL NOT TO CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE PRESSURE BULKHEAD WHEN YOU REMOVE
    AND INSTALL THE COMPRESSOR/CONDENSER UNIT.

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items AMM 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Open the access panel 31AB.


    1.2 Open and install a Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065) on these circuit
    breakers:
    − CPRSR (BATTERY & EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX)
    − COND HTR CTL (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    1.3 Do the recovery of the refrigerant, refer to AMM 12-B-21-50-01-00A-902A-A.
    1.4 Remove the bulkhead protection net Figure 1 [1] from the aircraft.
    1.5 Loosen the clamps Figure 1 [10] and remove the hose Figure 1 [11] from the compressor/condenser
    unit Figure 1 [24] and duct Figure 1 [9].
    1.6 Remove the cable ties Figure 1 [25] from the connector cover Figure 1 [26] then move the connector
    cover away from the connectors Figure 1 [27].
    1.7 Disconnect the connectors Figure 1 [27].
    1.8 Remove the nut Figure 1 [8], lock washer Figure 1 [7], washer Figure 1 [6], electrical cables
    Figure 1 [5] and Figure 1 [4] and washer Figure 1 [3] from the relay Figure 1 [2].
    1.9 Remove the nut Figure 1 [15], washer Figure 1 [14], bonding lead Figure 1 [13] and washer
    Figure 1 [12] from the compressor/condenser unit Figure 1 [24].
    1.10 Remove the Koroseal binding Figure 1 [20] from the pipes Figure 1 [17] and Figure 1 [19].
    1.11 Remove the Armaflex band from the connection Figure 1 [18].
    1.12
    WARNING

    ON THE REFRIGERANT CHARGING/RECOVERY RIG MAKE SURE THAT THE PRESSURE AND
    SUCTION GAGES SHOW ZERO PRESSURE BEFORE YOU DISCONNECT THE PIPES.

    Disconnect the hose Figure 1 [17] from the adaptor Figure 1 [16].
    1.13 Remove the adaptor Figure 1 [16] from the compressor/condenser unit Figure 1 [24].
    1.14 Disconnect the pipe Figure 1 [19] from the union Figure 1 [18].
    1.15 Disconnect the charging/recovery rig hoses from the compressor/condenser unit Figure 1 [24].
    1.16 Remove the four bolts Figure 1 [21] and washers Figure 1 [22] from the compressor/condenser unit
    Figure 1 [24].
    1.17 Carefully remove the compressor/condenser unit Figure 1 [24] from the support assembly and from
    the aircraft.
    1.18 Install blanking caps on all pipes and on the openings of the compressor/condenser unit Figure 1 [24].

    Effectivity: VAPOUR CYCLE


    12-B-21-50-01-00A-920A-A
    COOLING SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-02-16 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2 Installation
    2.1
    CAUTION

    REMOVE ALL THE BLANKING CAPS ONLY IMMEDIATELY BEFORE YOU CONNECT THE PIPES.

    CAUTION

    DO NOT APPLY THE ADHESIVE (MATERIAL NO. P08-017) TO THE FLARED SURFACES OF THE
    UNIONS AND PIPES.

    Carefully put the compressor/condenser unit Figure 1 [24] on the support assembly.
    2.2 Attach the compressor/condenser unit Figure 1 [24] to the support assembly with the bolts
    Figure 1 [21] and washers Figure 1 [22].
    2.3 Carefully apply a thin layer of Adhesive (Pt.No. P08-017) to the threads of the union Figure 1 [18],
    adaptor Figure 1 [16], and pipes Figure 1 [17] and Figure 1 [19].
    2.4 Apply a thin layer of Compressor oil (Emkarate RL 100H) (Pt.No. P10-021) to the flared surfaces of
    the union Figure 1 [18], adaptor Figure 1 [16], and pipes Figure 1 [17] and Figure 1 [19].
    2.5 Install the adaptor Figure 1 [16] on the compressor/condenser unit Figure 1 [24].
    2.6 Connect the hose Figure 1 [17] to the adapter Figure 1 [16], and the pipe Figure 1 [19] to the union
    Figure 1 [18].
    2.7 Install the washer Figure 1 [12], bonding lead Figure 1 [13], washer Figure 1 [14] and nut Figure 1 [15]
    on the compressor/condenser unit Figure 1 [24].
    2.8 Install the washer Figure 1 [3], electrical cables Figure 1 [4] and Figure 1 [5], washer Figure 1 [6], lock
    washer Figure 1 [7] and nut Figure 1 [8] on the relay Figure 1 [2].
    2.9 Connect the connectors Figure 1 [27].
    2.10 Put the connector cover Figure 1 [26] over the connectors Figure 1 [27]. Install the Cable
    tie (Pt.No. P09-014) Figure 1 [25] on the connector cover.
    2.11 Install the hose Figure 1 [11] on the compressor/condenser unit Figure 1 [24] and duct Figure 1 [9].
    2.12 Tighten the clamps Figure 1 [11].
    2.13 Install the Koroseal binding (Pt.No. P09-004) Figure 1 [20] on the pipes Figure 1 [17] and
    Figure 1 [19].
    2.14 Do the servicing of the vapour-cycle cooling system, refer to AMM 12-B-21-50-01-00A-902A-A.
    2.15 Wind Armaflex band (Pt.No. P09-013) on to the connection of the union Figure 1 [18] and the pipe
    Figure 1 [19].
    2.16 Install the bulkhead protection net Figure 1 [1] in the aircraft.
    2.17 Do the adjustment of the compressor drive belt, refer to AMM 12-B-21-50-01-00A-903A-A.
    2.18 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.19 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − CPRSR (BATTERY & EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX)
    − COND HTR CTL (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    2.20 Close the access panel 31 AB.

    Effectivity: VAPOUR CYCLE


    12-B-21-50-01-00A-920A-A
    COOLING SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-02-16 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2
    3
    4
    5
    B
    6
    7
    8

    C
    A 9
    27
    26 10

    25

    24

    11

    E 12
    D
    C B 13
    14
    15

    16
    17

    A
    22

    21 E
    20
    18 19
    21145

    Figure 1 Compressor/Condenser Unit – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: VAPOUR CYCLE


    12-B-21-50-01-00A-920A-A
    COOLING SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-02-16 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: VAPOUR CYCLE


    12-B-21-50-01-00A-920A-A
    COOLING SYSTEM
    End of data module
    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-02-16 Page 6
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    COMPRESSOR DRIVE MOTOR

    INSPECTION/CHECK

    Table of Contents Page

    COMPRESSOR DRIVE MOTOR - INSPECTION/CHECK......................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-21-50-01-00A-920A-A COMPRESSOR CONDENSER UNIT - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety Clip (Circuit Breaker Hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    Open) required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Lockwire Part P02-007 As
    required

    Effectivity: VAPOUR CYCLE


    12-B-21-50-03-00A-313A-A
    COOLING SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-11-11 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Inspection/Check
    1.1
    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Open the access panel 31AB.


    1.2 Open and install a clip (Safety Clip (Circuit Breaker Hold Open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on these
    circuit breakers:
    − CPRSR (BATTERY & EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX)
    − COND HTR CTL (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    1.3 Remove the lockwire from the screws that attach the compressor/condenser support bracket.
    1.4 Remove the compressor/condenser support bracket screws and the pipeline support clamp screw.
    1.5 Remove the compressor/condenser support bracket.
    1.6 Remove the compressor/condenser unit from the aircraft (AMM 12-B-21-50-01-00A-920A-A .

    Note

    Refer to the manufacturer’s General Operating, Servicing and Maintenance Manual for the
    maintenance procedures on the compressor drive motor.

    1.7 Remove and discard the motor brushes.


    1.8 Refer to the manufacturer's documentation and examine the motor for:
    − wear of the commutator
    − looseness and damage from arcing, heat distortion or cracks in the brush holders.
    1.9 Install new motor brushes, refer to the manufacturer's documentation.
    1.10 Install the compressor/condensor unit, (AMM 12-B-21-50-01-00A-920A-A.
    1.11 Install the compressor/condenser support bracket with the screws.
    1.12 Install the screw in the pipeline support clamp.
    1.13 Safety the screws that attach the compressor/condenser support bracket with lockwire
    (Lockwire (Pt.No. P02-007)).
    1.14 Close the access panel 31AB.

    Effectivity: VAPOUR CYCLE


    12-B-21-50-03-00A-313A-A
    COOLING SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-11-11 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1.15 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − CPRSR (BATTERY & EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX)
    − COND HTR CTL (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    1.16 Energize the aircraft electrical system (AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    1.17 Operate the VCCS to check the operation of the compressor drive motor.
    1.18 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: VAPOUR CYCLE


    12-B-21-50-03-00A-313A-A
    COOLING SYSTEM
    End of data module
    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-11-11 Page 3
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: VAPOUR CYCLE


    12-B-21-50-03-00A-313A-A
    COOLING SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-11-11 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION............................ 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1
    2 Component Description.......................................................................................... 2
    2.1 Integrated ECS Controller...................................................................................... 2
    2.2 Temperature Control Valve.................................................................................... 3
    2.3 Flow Control Valve................................................................................................. 3
    2.4 Duct Temperature Sensor...................................................................................... 3
    2.5 Duct Overtemperature Switch................................................................................ 3
    2.6 Cockpit Temperature Sensor.................................................................................. 3
    2.7 Cabin Temperature Sensor.................................................................................... 3
    2.8 Underfloor Temperature Sensor............................................................................. 3
    3 Operation................................................................................................................ 3
    3.1 Normal Mode.......................................................................................................... 3
    3.2 Ground ECS Mode................................................................................................. 4
    3.3 Overtemperature Protection................................................................................... 4
    3.4 Undertemperature Protection................................................................................. 4

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Temperature Control – Schematic.......................................................................... 5

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description

    1 General
    The temperature control system controls the temperature of the air in the flight compartment and the passenger
    compartment.
    The temperature control system has these components:
    − An Integrated ECS Controller (IEC)
    − A temperature control valve
    − A flow control valve
    − A duct temperature sensor

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-27 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − A duct overtemperature switch


    − A cockpit temperature sensor
    − A cabin temperature sensor
    − An underfloor temperature sensor
    − Switches for:
    ● the flood fan
    ● ACS bleed air
    ● Electrical heat/cool
    ● Vent fans
    ● Footwarmer system

    2 Component Description

    2.1 Integrated ECS Controller


    The Integrated ECS Controller (IEC) automatically controls the temperature of the flight and passenger
    compartments. It is an electronic unit with two electrical connectors and is installed under the floor at frame 18, left
    of the fuselage centerline. The IEC gets inputs from:
    − the duct temperature sensor
    − the cockpit temperature sensor
    − the cabin temperature sensor
    − the underfloor temperature sensor
    − the flow control valve position potentiometer
    − the Modular Avionics Unit (MAU)
    − the Cabin Pressurization Control System (CPCS)
    − the refrigeration pack overtemperature switch
    − the refrigeration pack overpressure switch
    − the firewall shut-off valve switch
    − the duct overtemperature switch
    − the weight on wheels system

    The IEC gives outputs to:


    − the temperature control valve
    − the flow control valve
    − the MAU
    − the cabin heater and fan
    − the underfloor heater and fan
    − the Vent fans
    − the Flood fan
    − the optional VCCS

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-27 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.2 Temperature Control Valve


    The temperature control valve controls the temperature of the bleed-air flow into the distribution system. The valve
    is installed in the engine compartment on the pressure bulkhead. It is a three-port valve with an electric actuator.
    The temperature control valve is controlled by the Integrated ECS Controller (IEC).

    2.3 Flow Control Valve


    The flow control valve (FCV) directs the ACS air to the cockpit and/or the cabin. When it is fully closed, the FCV
    directs the ACS air only to the cabin. It is installed behind the forward pressure bulkhead in the underfloor area at
    the plenum chamber outlet for the cockpit.

    2.4 Duct Temperature Sensor


    The duct temperature sensor supplies an indication of the temperature of the bleed-air supply to the IEC. It is
    installed in the bleed air duct in the engine compartment. It is a temperature sensitive thermistor-unit.

    2.5 Duct Overtemperature Switch


    The duct overtemperature switch stops the supply of bleed air to the distribution system if the temperature is more
    than 105 °C. It is installed between the temperature control valve and the firewall shut-off valve.

    2.6 Cockpit Temperature Sensor


    The temperature sensor measures the temperature of the air in the flight compartment. The temperature sensor is
    installed in the rear of the center console on the left side. It has a temperature sensitive resistor and an electrical
    connector on the rear and a small 12 VDC fan that moves air over the sensor probe. This makes for a better
    measurement of the temperature accuracy.

    2.7 Cabin Temperature Sensor


    The passenger compartment sensor sends a temperature indication to the IEC. It has a small 12 VDC fan that
    moves air over the sensor probe. This makes for a better measurement of the temperature accuracy. The sensor is
    installed at the rear right side of the passenger headliner.

    2.8 Underfloor Temperature Sensor


    The under floor sensor sends a temperature signal to the IEC. It has a small 12 VDC fan that moves air over the
    sensor probe. This makes for a better measurement of the temperature accuracy. It is installed adjacent to the air
    inlet of the under floor heater. In this position it measures the coldest part of the under floor area.

    3 Operation
    The IEC has two modes of operation:
    − Normal
    − Ground ECS

    3.1 Normal Mode


    The IEC compares the temperature that is set on the Multi Function Display (MFD) Environment window with the
    temperature that the cockpit and cabin sensors detect. If the set temperature and the actual temperature are

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-27 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    different, the IEC operates the flow control valve and the temperature control valve to increase or decrease the
    amount and the temperature of the bleed-air supply sent to the cabin and the cockpit.
    This gives a bleed-air supply through the distribution system to make the temperature correct.
    The cockpit and cabin temperatures set on the MFD Environment window can only differ by a maximum of 5 clicks.
    After more than 5 clicks movement of one set temperature slider, the other slider moves in the same direction.
    If more heating is needed, the IEC automatically activates the cabin auxiliary heater and fan. It also monitors the
    underfloor temperature and automatically sets the underfloor heater on or off as necessary.
    If more cooling is needed, the IEC automatically activates the the optional Vapour Cycle Cooling System (VCCS)
    and the Flood fan.

    3.2 Ground ECS Mode


    To pre-heat or cool the cabin on the ground, the IEC can operate the auxiliary heaters or the optional VCCS in
    Ground ECS mode. The IEC is set to Ground ECS mode when these conditions are valid:
    − the aircraft is weight on wheels, AND
    − engine not running, AND
    − external power is connected and energized, AND THEN
    − the MFD set temperature is moved away from the default (center) position

    3.3 Overtemperature Protection


    The duct temperature sensor monitors the temperature in the bleed-air duct. If the temperature is more than 85° C
    the IEC makes sure the flow control valve does not let more hot bleed-air go into the distribution system. The cabin
    temperature does not increase and the control valve operates to the maximum duct temperature.
    The duct overtemperature switch monitors the temperature in the bleed-air duct. If the temperature rises above
    105° C the overtemperature switch will close the primary shut-off valve. If this happens, the MFD CAS window
    shows the ACS LOW INFLOW caution message.

    3.4 Undertemperature Protection


    The duct temperature sensor monitors the temperature in the bleed-air duct. If the temperature is less than 4°C the
    IEC makes sure the flow control valve does not let more cold air go into the distribution system. The cabin
    temperature does not decrease and the control valve operates to the minimum duct temperature.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-27 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Smith Anthony Mark


    Zahnd Gabriela

    12-B-216000-A-S4080-00001-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Temperature Control – Schematic

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-27 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-27 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    INTEGRATED ECS CONTROLLER

    ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Table of Contents Page

    INTEGRATED ECS CONTROLLER - ADJUSTMENT/TEST..................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A GENERAL - AEROSPACE GROUND EQUIPMENT
    (AGE) AND TOOLS
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903A-A POWER PLANT - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required
    Voltmeter Part Local supply As
    required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-01-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-11-07 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    The operational test of the Temperature Control System is given in the powerplant adjustment/test (Refer to
    DM 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903A-A).
    This data module gives the procedure to do:
    − A functional test of the Temperature Control System
    2 Functional Test of the Temperature Control System
    2.1
    Note

    Top identify the AGE and tools used in this procedure refer to the list of AGE and tools 12-
    B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A.

    Preparation
    2.1.1 Remove furnishings and equipment as needed and open access panel:
    − 43 AR
    2.1.2 Open thIs circuit breaker:
    − ECS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    2.1.3 Make sure that the:
    − ACS BLEED AIR switch is set to AUTO
    − ELECTRICAL HEAT/COOL switch is set to AUTO
    − VENT FANS switch is set to AUTO
    − FLOOD FAN switch is set to AUTO
    − air distribution vents are fully open
    − air torso outlets are fully open
    − air foot levers are fully open
    2.1.4 Energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-01-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-11-07 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.2 Procedure
    2.2.1 Make sure that the Multi Function Display (MFD) Environment window shows invalid data:
    − amber dashes for CKPT, CAB and U-FLR temperatures
    − amber X for demanded temperature sliders
    2.2.2
    Note

    The U-FLR temperature indication is an option.

    5 seconds after power on Built In Test (BIT), make sure that the CAS amber ECS FAIL
    caution message is off.
    2.2.3 Make sure that the Multi Function Display (MFD) Environment window shows valid data for:
    − CKPT and CAB temperatures
    − U-FLR temperature (if available)
    − demanded temperature sliders
    2.2.4 Make sure that the cockpit, cabin and underfloor temperature sensor fans are ON.
    2.2.5 Make sure that the underfloor heater fan is ON.
    2.2.6 Make sure that the Primary Shut-Off Valve (PSOV) is not energized:
    − disconnect electrical connector L086P from the PSOV
    − use a voltmeter (Voltmeter (Pt.No. Local supply)) to measure between pins A and B of
    connector L086P
    − the voltmeter reading is 0V ±1V
    − connect electrical connector L086P to the PSOV
    2.3 Close Up
    2.3.1 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (Refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.3.2 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.3.3 Close access panel:
    − 43 AR
    2.3.4 Install removed equipment and furnishings, as needed.

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-01-00A-903A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-11-07 Page 3
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-01-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-11-07 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    INTEGRATED ECS CONTROLLER

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    INTEGRATED ECS CONTROLLER - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION........................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 IEC – Removal/Installation..................................................................................... 3

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-21-60-01-00A-903A-A INTEGRATED ECS CONTROLLER - ADJUSTMENT/
    TEST
    12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A STANDARD CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-22 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Open and install a safety clip (Safety clip (circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on this
    circuit breaker:
    − ECS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    1.2 Remove the passenger compartment center carpets as needed to get access to access panel 12 BZ:
    − for Executive interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − for Standard interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A
    1.3 Open access panel 12 BZ.
    1.4 Disconnect the two electrical connectors from the Integrated ECS Controller (IEC) (Figure 1 [10]).
    1.5 Remove the four screws (Figure 1 [15]) and four washers (Figure 1 [20]) that hold the IEC
    (Figure 1 [10]) on the mount.
    1.6 Remove the IEC (Figure 1 [10]).
    2 Installation
    2.1 Put the IEC (Figure 1 [10]) in position on the mount.
    2.2 Install the four screws (Figure 1 [15]) and four washers (Figure 1 [20]) that hold the IEC (Figure 1 [10])
    on the mount.
    2.3 Connect the two electrical connectors to the IEC (Figure 1 [10]).
    2.4 Remove the safety clip and close this circuit breaker:
    − ECS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    2.5 Do the adjustment/test of the Integrated ECS Controller (refer to DM 12-B-21-60-01-00A-903A-A).
    2.6 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.7 Install access panel 12 BZ.
    2.8 Install the center carpets:
    − for Executive interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − for Standard interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-22 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    15
    A
    20
    15
    FRAME 18
    20

    10
    A

    FRAME 18

    1
    A18

    25

    35

    40
    102344

    Figure 1 IEC – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-22 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-01-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-22 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    TEMPERATURE CONTROL VALVE

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    TEMPERATURE CONTROL VALVE - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.......................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Control Valve – Removal/Installation...................................................................... 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903A-A POWER PLANT - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    O-ring CSN 21-40-00-02-065 1
    Seal CSN 21-40-00-02-015 2
    Lockwire Part P02-007 As
    required
    Barrier Primer Part P07-016 As
    required
    Paint Part P07-017 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Open and install a Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065) on these circuit
    breakers:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − ECS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    1.2 Open the left and right upper engine-cowlings 43 AL and 43 AR.
    1.3 Disconnect the electrical connector (Figure 1 [13]) from the control valve (Figure 1 [12]).
    1.4 Remove the clamps (Figure 1 [15]) and (Figure 1 [17]), the pipe (Figure 1 [14]) and seal
    (Figure 1 [16]). Discard the seal.
    1.5 Remove the clamps (Figure 1 [21]) and (Figure 1 [25]), the pipe (Figure 1 [23]), seal (Figure 1 [22])
    and O-ring (Figure 1 [24]). Discard the seal and O-ring.
    1.6 Remove the clamp (Figure 1 [20]) from the pipe (Figure 1 [18]).
    1.7 Remove sufficient screws (Figure 1 [3]) and washers (Figure 1 [2]) from the insulation blanket
    (Figure 1 [1]) to get access to the four bolts (Figure 1 [4]).
    1.8 Hold the control valve (Figure 1 [12]) and remove the four bolts (Figure 1 [4]) and washers
    (Figure 1 [5]).
    1.9 Remove the control valve (Figure 1 [12]), seal (Figure 1 [19]) and support assembly (Figure 1 [8]) from
    the aircraft. Discard the seal.
    1.10 Remove the lockwire from the four bolts (Figure 1 [6]).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1.11 Remove the four bolts (Figure 1 [6]) and washers (Figure 1 [7]), then remove the support
    (Figure 1 [8]), insulation plate (Figure 1 [9]), heatshield (Figure 1 [10]) and distance pieces
    (Figure 1 [11]) from the control valve (Figure 1 [12]).
    2 Installation

    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MANUFACTURERS
    HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    2.1 Put the distance pieces (Figure 1 [11]), heatshield (Figure 1 [10]), insulation plate (Figure 1 [9]) and
    support (Figure 1 [8]) in position on the control valve (Figure 1 [12]) and install the four washers
    (Figure 1 [7]) and bolts (Figure 1 [6]).
    2.2 Safety the four bolts (Figure 1 [6]) with Lockwire (Pt.No. P02-007).
    2.3 Put the control valve (Figure 1 [12]), new seal (Figure 1 [19]) and support assembly (Figure 1 [8])
    through the insulation blanket (Figure 1 [1]) and in position on the aircraft.
    2.4 Attach the support assembly (Figure 1 [8]) to the structure with the four washers (Figure 1 [5]) and
    bolts (Figure 1 [4]).
    2.5 Attach the insulation blanket (Figure 1 [1]) to the structure with the screws (Figure 1 [3]) and washers
    (Figure 1 [2]).
    2.6 Install the clamp (Figure 1 [20]) on the pipe (Figure 1 [18]).
    2.7 Install the pipe (Figure 1 [23]) with the new Seal (Pt.No. CSN 21400002 015 ) (Figure 1 [22]), new O-
    ring (Pt.No. CSN 21400002 065 ) (Figure 1 [24]) and clamps (Figure 1 [21]) and (Figure 1 [25]).
    2.8 Install the pipe (Figure 1 [14]) with the new Seal (Pt.No. CSN 21400002 015 ) (Figure 1 [16]), clamps
    (Figure 1 [15]) and (Figure 1 [17]).
    2.9 Connect the electrical connector (Figure 1 [13]) to the control valve (Figure 1 [12]).
    2.10 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.11 Close the left and right upper engine-cowlings 43 AL and 43 AR.
    2.12 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − ECS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    2.13 Do the functional test of the ECS temperature conditioning system (refer to DM 12-
    B-71-00-00-00A-903A-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2
    1

    A A C
    B
    B 5
    4

    13
    6
    14
    7 26
    8

    12

    5 15
    4 10 16

    11
    22

    C 20

    21 19

    18

    23

    17

    24
    25

    12-B-216002-A-S4080-00003-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Control Valve – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-02-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FLOW CONTROL VALVE

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    FLOW CONTROL VALVE - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION........................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Flow Control Valve – Removal/Installation............................................................. 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-25-10-04-00A-920A-A FLIGHT COMPARTMENT CARPET - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903S-A POWER PLANT TEST 18 – ENVIRONMENTAL
    CONTROL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Cap Part Local supply As
    required
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-25 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Open and install a safety clip (Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on these
    circuit breakers:
    − ECS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − COND HTR CTL (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    1.2 Remove the flight compartment carpet (refer to DM 12-B-25-10-04-00A-920A-A).
    1.3 Remove the panel 11 BZ to get access to the Air Cycle System (ACS) plenum chamber (Figure 1 [4]).
    1.4 Disconnect the electrical connection (Figure 1 [9]) from the Flow Control Valve (FCV) (Figure 1 [3]).
    1.5 Loosen the hose clamps (Figure 1 [2]) and (Figure 1 [5]) on the plenum Air Cycle System (ACS) outlet
    duct (Figure 1 [1]) and remove the plenum ACS outlet duct (Figure 1 [1]).
    1.6 Loosen the hose clamp (Figure 1 [8]) on the FCV (Figure 1 [3]).
    1.7 Remove the two screws (Figure 1 [6]) from the FCV (Figure 1 [3]) and remove the FCV (Figure 1 [3])
    from plenum distributor (Figure 1 [7]).
    1.8 Put caps (Cap (Pt.No. Local supply)), as necessary, on the open ends of the plenum ACS outlet duct
    (Figure 1 [1]), plenum chamber (Figure 1 [4]), plenum distributor (Figure 1 [7]) and the FCV
    (Figure 1 [3]).
    2 Installation
    2.1 Remove the caps (Cap (Pt.No. Local supply)) from FCV (Figure 1 [3]) and the plenum distributor
    (Figure 1 [7]).
    2.2 Put the FCV (Figure 1 [3]) in position on the plenum distributor (Figure 1 [7]) and loosely install the
    hose clamp (Figure 1 [8]).
    2.3 Install the two screws (Figure 1 [6]) in the FCV (Figure 1 [3]).
    2.4 Tighten the hose clamp (Figure 1 [8]) on the FCV (Figure 1 [3]).
    2.5 Remove the caps (Cap (Pt.No. Local supply)) from the plenum ACS outlet duct (Figure 1 [1]) and the
    plenum chamber (Figure 1 [4]).
    2.6 Install the plenum ACS outlet duct (Figure 1 [1]) on the plenum chamber (Figure 1 [4]) and the FCV
    (Figure 1 [3]).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-25 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.7 Connect the electrical connection (Figure 1 [9]) to the Flow Control Valve (FCV) (Figure 1 [3]).
    2.8 Remove the safety clip (Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) and close
    these circuit breakers:
    − ECS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − COND HTR CTL (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    2.9 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.10 Do the functional test of the temperature conditioning system (refer to DM 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903S-
    A).
    2.11 Make sure that there is no signs of the leakage of air from around the plenum.
    2.12 Make sure that the temperature in the flight and cabin compartments is correct.
    2.13 Install the floor panel 11 BZ.
    2.14 Install the flight compartment carpet (refer to DM 12-B-25-10-04-00A-920A-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-25 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A 1
    FRAME 15

    FRA 16
    FRA 15
    5

    B
    2

    FRAME 16

    B 155
    9

    8 6

    7
    B 12-B-216003-A-S4080-00008-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Flow Control Valve – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-25 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-03-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-25 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-25 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    ACTUATOR

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    ACTUATOR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION................................................................................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2
    6 FCV CW Operating Limits...................................................................................... 3
    7 FCV CCW Operating Limits.................................................................................... 4

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Flow Control Valve Actuator – Removal/Installation............................................... 5


    2 Flow Control Valve Actuator – Cam Drive Setup.................................................... 6
    3 Test Circuit Setup................................................................................................... 7

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-21-60-03-00A-920A-A FLOW CONTROL VALVE - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-10-04-00A-920A-A FLIGHT COMPARTMENT CARPET - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903S-A POWER PLANT TEST 18 – ENVIRONMENTAL
    CONTROL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Ammeter Part Local Supply 1

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-03-01A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-11-30 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark


    Power Supply Part Local Supply 1
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required
    Stopwatch Part Local Supply 1

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Loctite 241 Part P08-017 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Remove the Flow Control Valve (FCV) assembly, refer to AMM 12-B-21-60-03-00A-920A-A.
    1.2 Remove the two screws Figure 1 [8] and the V-clamp Figure 1 [7] that attach the actuator Figure 1 [9]
    to the FCV Figure 1 [6].
    1.3 Remove the actuator Figure 1 [9] from the FCV Figure 1 [6].
    2 Installation
    2.1 Make sure that the FCV Figure 2 [1] is in the closed position.
    2.2 Make sure that the actuator cam drive Figure 2 [3] is in the closed position.
    2.3 Line up and insert the actuator cam drive Figure 2 [3] into the FCV drive shaft Figure 2 [2].
    2.4 Add a small drop of Loctite 241 (Pt.No. P08-017) onto each of the two screws Figure 1 [8].
    2.5 Install the V-clamp Figure 1 [7] with the two screws Figure 1 [8] onto the actuator Figure 1 [9] and FCV
    Figure 1 [6].
    2.6
    Note

    Care must be taken not to over-tighten the two screws Figure 1 [8], as damage to the V-clamp
    Figure 1 [7], and the actuator Figure 1 [9] and FCV Figure 1 [6] mounting flanges can occur.

    Install the FCV assembly, refer to AMM 12-B-21-60-03-00A-920A-A, but do not install the plenum Air
    Cycle System (ACS) outlet duct Figure 1 [1] at this time.
    2.7 Do not install the connector B155P at this time.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-03-01A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-11-30 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3 End of Travel Test


    3.1 Test Setup
    3.1.1 Make sure that a Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065) is installed
    on these circuit breakers:
    − ECS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − COND HTR CTL (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    3.1.2 Do a visual inspection of the FCV assembly for any signs of mechanical interference that
    prevents or may prevent free movement of the valve e.g. debris inside the valve chamber.
    3.1.3 Observe and record any anomalies in the valve movement throughout Step 3.2.1 and
    Step 3.2.2.
    3.2 Test the Flow Control Valve (FCV) as follows:
    3.2.1 Clockwise (CW) Check (Ref. Fig. 3)
    3.2.1.1 Connect the 0 VDC return terminal of the Power Supply (Pt.No. Local Supply) to
    Pin 6 of the FCV connector.
    3.2.1.2 Connect the Ammeter (Pt.No. Local Supply) as needed to measure the current
    drawn on Pin 6.
    3.2.1.3 Connect the Power Supply (Pt.No. Local Supply) +ve output terminal to Pin 7.
    3.2.1.4 Set the Power Supply (Pt.No. Local Supply) to +28 VDC.
    3.2.1.5 Switch ON the Power Supply (Pt.No. Local Supply) and:
    − With the Stopwatch (Pt.No. Local Supply) record the time taken for the
    valve to reach the stop
    − Record the current changes.
    3.2.1.6 Check that the recorded values in Step 3.2.1.5 are within the limits in Table 6.

    Table 6 FCV CW Operating Limits


    Action Limits
    Time taken for valve to reach stop (fully open) max 8 seconds
    Running current (Pin 6) Max. 50 mA
    3.2.1.7 Switch OFF the Power Supply (Pt.No. Local Supply).
    3.2.2 Counter-clockwise (CCW) Check (Ref. Fig. 3)
    3.2.2.1 Connect the 0 VDC terminal of the Power Supply (Pt.No. Local Supply) to Pin 6
    of the FCV connector.
    3.2.2.2 Connect the Power Supply (Pt.No. Local Supply) output terminal to Pin 9.
    3.2.2.3 Set the Power Supply (Pt.No. Local Supply) to +28 VDC.
    3.2.2.4 Switch ON the Power Supply (Pt.No. Local Supply) and:
    − With the Stopwatch (Pt.No. Local Supply) record the time taken for the
    valve to reach the stop
    − Record the current changes.
    3.2.2.5 Check the recorded values in Step 3.2.2.4 are within the limits in Table 7.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-03-01A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-11-30 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Table 7 FCV CCW Operating Limits


    Action Limits
    Time taken for valve to reach stop (fully closed) max 8 seconds
    Running current (Pin 6) Max. 50 mA
    3.2.2.6 Switch OFF the Power Supply (Pt.No. Local Supply).
    4 Close Up
    4.1 Disconnect and remove the Ammeter (Pt.No. Local Supply), Power Supply (Pt.No. Local Supply) and
    Test cable harness.
    4.2 Remove the protective caps from the plenum ACS outlet duct Figure 1 [1] and the plenum chamber
    Figure 1 [4].
    4.3 Install the plenum Air Cycle System (ACS) outlet duct Figure 1 [1] onto the FCV Figure 1 [3] with
    clamps Figure 1 [2] and Figure 1 [5].
    4.4 Install the electrical connector B155P onto the FCV Figure 1 [3].
    4.5 Remove the Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065) and close these circuit
    breakers:
    − ECS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − COND HTR CTL (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    4.6 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    4.7 Do the functional test of the temperature conditioning system, refer to AMM 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903S-
    A.
    4.8 Make sure that there is no signs of the leakage of air from around the plenum.
    4.9 Make sure that the temperature in the flight and cabin compartments is correct.
    4.10 Install the floor panel 11 BZ.
    4.11 Install the flight compartment carpet, refer to AMM 12-B-25-10-04-00A-920A-A.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-03-01A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-11-30 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FRAME 15
    1

    5
    4

    A
    B
    FRAME 16
    FRAME 15
    2
    3

    9 8

    VALVE CLOSED
    6

    VALVE OPEN

    B 12-B-216003-A-S4080-00009-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Flow Control Valve Actuator – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-03-01A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-11-30 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FRAME 15

    A
    C
    FRAME 16
    FRAME 15

    C B

    SECTION
    C-C A
    B

    OPEN 3

    SECTION
    B-B

    CLOSED

    3
    1

    NOTE:
    THE CAM DRIVE MUST BE IN THE CLOSED POSITION (AS SHOWN)
    PRIOR TO THE ACTUATOR BEING INSTALLED.
    12-B-216003-A-S4080-00010-A-01-1

    Figure 2 Flow Control Valve Actuator – Cam Drive Setup

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-03-01A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-11-30 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    COUNTER-CLOCKWISE (CCW) CHECK

    FLOW CONTROL
    PIN 9 VALVE CONNECTOR

    28 VDC
    POWER SUPPLY

    CLOCKWISE (CW) CHECK PIN 7 PIN 6

    12-B-216003-A-S4080-00011-A-01-1

    Figure 3 Test Circuit Setup

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-03-01A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-11-30 Page 7
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-03-01A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-11-30 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    DUCT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    DUCT TEMPERATURE SENSOR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.............................................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Duct Temperature Sensor – Removal/Installation.................................................. 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903A-A POWER PLANT - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-04-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Lockwire Part P02-007 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Seal CSN 21-40-00-03-025 As
    required

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Open and install a safety clip (Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on these
    circuit breakers:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − ECS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    1.2 Open the engine cowling 43 AR.
    1.3 Remove the lockwire from the duct temperature sensor (Figure 1 [2]).
    1.4 Disconnect the electrical connector (Figure 1 [1]) from the duct temperature sensor (Figure 1 [2]).
    1.5 Remove the duct temperature sensor (Figure 1 [2]) and seal (Figure 1 [3]) from the pipe (Figure 1 [4]).
    Discard the seal.
    2 Installation

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    2.1 Install a new seal (Seal ) (Figure 1 [3]) and the duct temperature sensor (Figure 1 [2]) on the pipe
    (Figure 1 [4]).
    2.2 Safety the duct temperature sensor (Figure 1 [2]) with lockwire (Lockwire (Pt.No. P02-007)).
    2.3 Connect the electrical connector (Figure 1 [1]) to the duct temperature sensor (Figure 1 [2]).
    2.4 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.5 Close the engine cowling 43 AR.
    2.6 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-04-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − ECS (ESSENTIAL BUS)


    2.7 Do the test of the Air Cycle System (ACS) (refer to DM 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903A-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-04-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    B 2

    4
    21112

    Figure 1 Duct Temperature Sensor – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-04-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-04-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-04-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    DUCT OVERTEMPERATURE SWITCH

    ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Table of Contents Page

    DUCT OVERTEMPERATURE SWITCH - ADJUSTMENT/TEST............................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A GENERAL - AEROSPACE GROUND EQUIPMENT
    (AGE) AND TOOLS
    12-B-21-60-05-00A-920A-A DUCT OVER TEMPERATURE SWITCH - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Temperature Calibrator (100-130 Part 990.00.00.818 As
    VAC) required
    Temperature Calibrator (200-250 Part 990.00.00.819 As
    VAC) required
    Special insert Part 513.21.21.002 As
    required
    100-130 or 200-250 VAC power Part Local supply As
    supply required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-05-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-12-11 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark


    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedure to do a functional test of the duct overtemperature switch. The
    functional test uses a Temperature Calibrator to heat the duct overtemperature switch to its set point. The
    set point is seen by the CAS ACS LOW INFLOW caution coming on. Refer to the manufacturer’s User
    Manual for instructions on how to operate the Temperature Calibrator.
    2 Functional Test of the Duct Overtemperature Switch
    2.1 Job Set Up
    2.1.1
    Note

    To identify the AGE and tools used in this procedure refer to the list of AGE and tools 12-
    B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A.

    Remove the duct overtemperature switch (AMM 12-B-21-60-05-00A-920A-A).


    2.1.2 Install the duct overtemperature switch Special insert (Pt.No. 513.21.21.002) the
    Temperature Calibrator (100-130 VAC) (Pt.No. 990.00.00.818) or Temperature Calibrator
    (200-250 VAC) (Pt.No. 990.00.00.819).
    2.1.3 Connect the applicable 100-130 or 200-250 VAC power supply (Pt.No. Local supply) to the
    temperature calibrator.
    2.2 Procedure

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-05-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-12-11 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.2.1
    CAUTION

    THE SPECIAL INSERT IN THE TEMPERATURE CALIBRATOR GETS HOT. DO NOT


    TOUCH THE SPECIAL INSERT AND THE DUCT OVERTEMPERATURE SWITCH UNTIL
    THEY HAVE BECOME SUFFICIENTLY COOL.

    Connect the aircraft electrical connector to the duct overtemperature switch.


    2.2.2 Remove the Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065) and close this
    circuit breaker:
    − ECS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    2.2.3 Energize the aircraft electrical system (AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.2.4 Set the ACS BLEED AIR control switch to AUTO in the flight compartment.
    2.2.5 Put the duct overtemperature switch into the special insert in the temperature calibrator.
    2.2.6 Set the temperature to 97° C on the temperature calibrator. Let the temperature stabilize for
    a minimum of 5 minutes.
    2.2.7 Make sure the CAS ACS LOW INFLOW caution is not on in the flight compartment.
    2.2.8 Set the temperature to 110° C on the temperature calibrator.
    2.2.9 Monitor the temperature increase on the temperature calibrator.
    2.2.10 When the temperature on the temperature calibrator gets to 104° C ± 6° C, make sure the
    CAS ACS LOW INFLOW caution comes on in the flight compartment.
    2.2.11 Set the temperature to 0° C on the temperature calibrator. Let the equipment become cool
    before removing the duct over temperature switch from the special insert in the temperature
    calibrator.
    2.2.12 Set the ACS BLEED AIR control switch in the flight compartment to INHIBIT.
    2.2.13 Make sure the CAS ACS LOW INFLOW caution is on.
    2.2.14 Set the ACS BLEED AIR control switch in the flight compartment to AUTO.
    2.2.15 Make sure the CAS ACS LOW INFLOW caution is off.
    2.2.16 Set the ACS BLEED AIR control switch in the flight compartment to INHIBIT.
    2.2.17 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (AMM12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.2.18 Open and install a Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065) on this
    circuit breaker:
    − ECS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    2.2.19 Disconnect the aircraft electrical connector from the duct overtemperature switch.
    2.2.20 Disconnect the duct overtemperature switch from the test equipment and remove the test
    equipment from the aircraft.
    2.2.21 Install the duct overtemperature switch (AMM 12-B-21-60-05-00A-920A-A).

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-05-00A-903A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-12-11 Page 3
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-05-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-12-11 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    DUCT OVER TEMPERATURE SWITCH

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    DUCT OVER TEMPERATURE SWITCH - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Duct Overtemperature Switch – Removal/Installation............................................ 3

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903A-A POWER PLANT - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Lockwire Part P02-007 As
    required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-05-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-30 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Seal CSN 21-40-00-03-035 1

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Open and install a Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065) on these circuit
    breakers:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − ECS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    1.2 Open the engine cowling 43 AR.
    1.3 Remove the lockwire from the overtemperature switch Figure 1 [2].
    1.4 Disconnect the electrical connector Figure 1 [1] from the overtemperature switch Figure 1 [2].
    1.5 Remove the overtemperature switch Figure 1 [2] and seal Figure 1 [3] from the pipe Figure 1 [4].
    Discard the seal.
    2 Installation
    2.1 Install a new Seal Figure 1 [3] and the overtemperature switch Figure 1 [2] on the pipe Figure 1 [4].
    2.2 Connect the electrical connector Figure 1 [1] to the overtemperature switch Figure 1 [2].
    2.3 Safety the overtemperature switch Figure 1 [2] with Lockwire (Pt.No. P02-007).
    2.4 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.5 Close the engine cowling 43 AR.
    2.6 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − ECS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    2.7 Do the functional test of the ECS temperature conditioning system (refer to AMM 12-
    B-71-00-00-00A-903A-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-05-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-30 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    C
    B

    3 4

    12-B-216005-A-S4080-00012-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Duct Overtemperature Switch – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-05-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-30 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-05-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-30 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FLIGHT COMPARTMENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    FLIGHT COMPARTMENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.............. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Flight Compartment Temperature Sensor – Removal/Installation.......................... 3

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-25-10-03-00A-920A-A FLIGHT COMPARTMENT TRIM - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-06-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-07-07 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 De-energize aircraft electrical power (refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    1.2 Remove the center console left side panel (refer to DM 12-B-25-10-03-00A-920A-A).
    1.3 Disconnect the temperature sensor electrical connector Z131P from the sensor (Figure 1 [10]).
    1.4 Remove the two nuts (Figure 1 [15]) from the temperature sensor (Figure 1 [10]).
    1.5 Remove the temperature sensor (Figure 1 [10]) from the aircraft.
    2 Installation
    2.1 Put the temperature sensor (Figure 1 [10]) in position and install the two nuts (Figure 1 [15]).
    2.2 Connect the temperature sensor electrical connector Z131P to the sensor (Figure 1 [10]).
    2.3 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.4 Energize aircraft electrical power (refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.5 On the Multi Function Display (MFD) Environment window, move the temperature sliders.
    2.6 Make sure that on the MFD Environment window the cockpit temperature display shows the ambient
    temperature.
    2.7 De-energize aircraft electrical power (refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.8 Install the center console left side panel (refer to DM 12-B-25-10-03-00A-920A-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-06-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-07-07 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    B

    B 25

    15

    10
    20

    C
    35

    45

    30

    60
    40
    C
    102345

    Figure 1 Flight Compartment Temperature Sensor – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-06-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-07-07 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-06-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-07-07 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FLIGHT COMPARTMENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR FAN

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    FLIGHT COMPARTMENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR FAN - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION...... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Flight Compartment Temperature Sensor Fan – Removal/Installation.................. 3

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-25-10-03-00A-920A-A FLIGHT COMPARTMENT TRIM - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-07-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-07-07 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 De-energize aircraft electrical power (refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    1.2 Remove the center console left side cover (refer to DM 12-B-25-10-03-00A-920A-A).
    1.3 Remove the four screws (Figure 1 [25]) from the fan (Figure 1 [20]).
    1.4 Disconnect the fan electrical connector B131J.
    1.5 Remove the fan from the aircraft.
    2 Installation
    2.1 Connect the fan electrical connector B131J.
    2.2 Put the fan (Figure 1 [20]) in position on the duct (Figure 1 [35]) and install the four screws
    (Figure 1 [25]).
    2.3 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.4 Energize aircraft electrical power (refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.5 On the Multi Function Display (MFD) Environment window, move the temperature sliders.
    2.6 Make sure that the fan operates and that the airflow is in the correct direction.
    2.7 De-energize aircraft electrical power (refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.8 Install the center console left side cover (refer to DM 12-B-25-10-03-00A-920A-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-07-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-07-07 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    B

    B 25

    15

    10
    20

    C
    35

    45

    30

    60
    40
    C
    102345

    Figure 1 Flight Compartment Temperature Sensor Fan – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-07-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-07-07 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-07-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-07-07 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    UNDERFLOOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    UNDERFLOOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Under Floor Temperature Sensor – Removal/Installation...................................... 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A STANDARD CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-08-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Cooling spray Part Local supply As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    1.2 Remove the left floor carpet:
    − Executive interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − Standard interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A
    1.3 Remove the floor panel 12 DZ.
    1.4 Disconnect the temperature sensor (Figure 1 [10]) electrical connector Z211P.
    1.5 Remove the two nuts (Figure 1 [15]) from the temperature sensor (Figure 1 [10]) and bracket
    (Figure 1 [30]).
    1.6 Remove the temperature sensor (Figure 1 [10]) from the aircraft.
    2 Installation
    2.1 Put the temperature sensor (Figure 1 [10]) in position on the bracket (Figure 1 [30]) and install the two
    nuts (Figure 1 [15]).
    2.2 Connect the temperature sensor (Figure 1 [10]) electrical connector Z211P.
    2.3 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.4 Energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.5 On the Multi Function Display (MFD) Environment window, move the demanded temperature sliders to
    set the ECS to Ground Mode.
    2.6 Test the underfloor temperature sensor:
    2.6.1 If the underfloor temperature is more than 5°C, use a cooling spray (Cooling
    spray (Pt.No. Local supply)) to cool the underfloor temperature sensor. Make sure that the
    underfloor heater comes ON.
    2.6.2 If the underfloor temperature is less than 5°C, warm the temperature sensor with your hand.
    Make sure that the underfloor heater switches off.
    2.7 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-08-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.8 Install the floor panel 12 DZ.


    2.9 Install the left floor carpet:
    − Executive interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − Standard interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-08-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FRAME 22

    40 45

    65
    50

    15

    FRAME 22
    20

    70

    25

    55

    30
    55 25
    60 35

    75

    10
    102347

    Figure 1 Under Floor Temperature Sensor – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-08-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-08-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-08-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    UNDERFLOOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR FAN

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    UNDERFLOOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR FAN - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION....................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Under Floor Temperature Sensor Fan – Removal/Installation............................... 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A STANDARD CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-09-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-07-07 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Tywrap Part P09-005 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    1.2 Remove the left floor carpet:
    − Executive interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − Standard interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A
    1.3 Remove the floor panel 12 DZ.
    1.4 Disconnect the fan (Figure 1 [20]) electrical connector B211J.
    1.5 Remove and discard the tywrap from the mount (Figure 1 [65]).
    1.6 Remove the fan electrical wires from the mount (Figure 1 [65]).
    1.7 Remove the four screws (Figure 1 [25]) that hold the fan (Figure 1 [20]) on the bracket (Figure 1 [30]).
    1.8 Remove the fan (Figure 1 [20]) from the aircraft.
    2 Installation
    2.1 Put the fan (Figure 1 [20]) in position on the bracket (Figure 1 [30]) and install the four screws
    (Figure 1 [25]).
    2.2 Put the fan electrical wires in the mount (Figure 1 [65]) and install a tywrap (Tywrap (Pt.No. P09-005)).
    2.3 Connect the fan (Figure 1 [20]) electrical connector B211J.
    2.4 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.5 Energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.6 On the Multi Function Display (MFD) Environment window, move the temperature sliders.
    2.7 Make sure that the underfloor temperature sensor fan operates and that the airflow is in the correct
    direction.
    2.8 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.9 Install the floor panel 12 DZ.
    2.10 Install the left floor carpet:

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-09-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-07-07 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − Executive interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A


    − Standard interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-09-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-07-07 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FRAME 22

    40 45

    65
    50

    15

    FRAME 22
    20

    70

    25

    55

    30
    55 25
    60 35

    75

    10
    102347

    Figure 1 Under Floor Temperature Sensor Fan – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-09-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-07-07 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-09-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-07-07 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-09-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-07-07 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PASSENGER COMPARTMENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    PASSENGER COMPARTMENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION..... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Passenger Compartment Temperature Sensor – Removal/Installation................. 3

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-10-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-07-07 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    1.2 Carefully remove the grille that covers the passenger compartment temperature sensor installation
    between frame 33 and frame 34.
    1.3 Remove the two screws (Figure 1 [25]) that hold the bracket (Figure 1 [20]) and temperature sensor
    (Figure 1 [10]).
    1.4 Lower the bracket (Figure 1 [20]) and temperature sensor (Figure 1 [10]) from the housing
    (Figure 1 [80]).
    1.5 Remove the two nuts (Figure 1 [15]) that hold the temperature sensor (Figure 1 [10]) on the bracket
    (Figure 1 [20]).
    1.6 Disconnect the temperature sensor (Figure 1 [10]) electrical connector J330.
    1.7 Remove the temperature sensor (Figure 1 [10]) from the aircraft.
    2 Installation
    2.1 Put the temperature sensor (Figure 1 [10]) in position through the bracket (Figure 1 [20]).
    2.2 Install the two nuts (Figure 1 [15]) to hold the temperature sensor on the bracket.
    2.3 Connect the temperature sensor (Figure 1 [10]) electrical connector J330.
    2.4 Put the bracket (Figure 1 [20]) and temperature sensor (Figure 1 [10]) in position in the housing
    (Figure 1 [80]).
    2.5 Install the two screws (Figure 1 [25]) to hold the bracket in the housing (Figure 1 [80]).
    2.6 Install the grille in the housing (Figure 1 [80]).
    2.7 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.8 Energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.9 On the Multi Function Display (MFD) Environment window, move the temperature sliders.
    2.10 Make sure that the cabin ambient temperature is shown on the MFD Environment window.
    2.11 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-10-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-07-07 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    B
    A

    90

    85

    C 80
    60

    15

    90 B

    20
    65

    25
    90

    10
    70

    50 55

    C 35
    45 30
    102346

    40

    Figure 1 Passenger Compartment Temperature Sensor – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-10-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-07-07 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-10-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-07-07 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PASSENGER COMPARTMENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR FAN

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    PASSENGER COMPARTMENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR FAN - REMOVAL/ 1


    INSTALLATION..........................................................................................................................

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Passenger Compartment Temperature Sensor Fan– Removal/Installation........... 3

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-11-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-07-07 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    1.2 Carefully remove the grille that covers the passenger compartment temperature sensor installation
    between frame 33 and frame 34.
    1.3 Remove the screw (Figure 1 [85]) and the washer (Figure 1 [90]) that hold the housing (Figure 1 [80]).
    1.4 Carefully lower the housing (Figure 1 [80]) to get access to the fan electrical connector.
    1.5 Disconnect the fan (Figure 1 [30]) electrical connector J330.
    1.6 Remove the fan electrical wires from the grommet (Figure 1 [55]).
    1.7 Remove the two screws (Figure 1 [35]) that hold the fan (Figure 1 [30]) on the housing (Figure 1 [80]).
    1.8 Remove the fan (Figure 1 [30]) from the aircraft.
    2 Installation
    2.1 Put the fan (Figure 1 [30]) in position in the housing (Figure 1 [80]).
    2.2 Install the two screws (Figure 1 [35]) to hold the fan in the housing.
    2.3 Feed the fan electrical wires through the grommet (Figure 1 [55]).
    2.4 Hold the housing (Figure 1 [80]) close to the roof and connect the fan (Figure 1 [30]) electrical
    connector J330.
    2.5 Put the housing (Figure 1 [80]) in position.
    2.6 Install the screw (Figure 1 [85]) and the washer (Figure 1 [90]) to hold the housing (Figure 1 [80]).
    2.7 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.8 Energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.9 On the Multi Function Display (MFD) Environment window move the cockpit and the cabin
    temperature sliders.
    2.10 Make sure that the fan operates and gives airflow in the correct direction.
    2.11 On the MFD Environment window, make sure that the cabin temperature shows the ambient
    temperature.
    2.12 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.13 Install the grille in the housing (Figure 1 [80]).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-11-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-07-07 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    B
    A

    90

    85

    C 80
    60

    15

    90 B

    20
    65

    25
    90

    10
    70

    50 55

    C 35
    45 30
    102346

    40

    Figure 1 Passenger Compartment Temperature Sensor Fan– Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-11-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-07-07 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-21-60-11-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-07-07 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL – GENERAL

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL – GENERAL - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION............... 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1
    1.1 Autopilot.................................................................................................................. 1
    1.2 Speed and Attitude Correction............................................................................... 2

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-22-10-00-00A-040A-A AUTOPILOT - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-22-20-00-00A-040A-A SPEED AND ATTITUDE CORRECTION -
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Description

    1 General
    The Automatic Flight Control System and the Speed and Attituide Correction System is described in these sub-
    systems:

    1.1 Autopilot
    (Refer to DM 12-B-22-10-00-00A-040A-A)
    The autopilot function in the Modular Avionics Unit (MAU) gives automatic flight control in the pitch, roll and yaw
    axes. The AFCS function gives flight director guidance signals for display on the pilots Primary Flight Display (PFD)
    and the optional copilots PFD.
    The AFCS has these components:
    − A Flight Control Panel (FCP)
    − Dual-channel AFCS software stored on the AIOP cards within the MAU
    − A pitch trim adaptor
    − A pitch, a roll and a yaw servo-actuator
    − A Touch Control Steering (TCS) switch (on each control yoke)
    − A Go-Around (GA) switch
    − Autopilot Disconnect (A/P DISC) switch (on each control yoke)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-00-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1.2 Speed and Attitude Correction


    (Refer to DM 12-B-22-20-00-00A-040A-A)
    The speed and attitude correction system gives a warning when the aircraft gets near the stall speed and
    automatically corrects the aircraft attitude when it is near a stall.
    The system changes automatically to operate in ice mode when the inertial separator is open at the same time the
    propeller deicing system is operating.
    A warning tone generator in the system computer gives signals to the audio integrating system for the aural stall
    warning and other flight conditions.
    The system has these components:
    − A stick pusher computer
    − A stick pusher servo/capstan
    − A stick shaker actuator
    − Two Angle-Of-Attack (AOA) transmitters
    − A torque transducer
    − A PUSHER INTR switch on each control wheel
    − A PUSHER test switch
    − A Power Control Lever (PCL) switch

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-00-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    AUTOPILOT

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    AUTOPILOT - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION..................................................................... 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 2
    2 Component Description.......................................................................................... 3
    2.1 Modular Avionics Unit Autopilot Function............................................................... 3
    2.2 Flight Control Panel ............................................................................................... 3
    2.3 Trim Adaptor........................................................................................................... 4
    2.4 Pitch, Roll and Yaw Servo Actuators...................................................................... 4
    2.5 TCS Switch............................................................................................................. 4
    2.6 GA Switch............................................................................................................... 4
    2.7 A/P DISC switch..................................................................................................... 4
    3 Operation (Ref. )..................................................................................................... 4
    3.1 Modes..................................................................................................................... 4
    3.1.1 HDG/T.................................................................................................................... 5
    3.1.2 NAV........................................................................................................................ 5
    3.1.3 APR........................................................................................................................ 5
    3.1.4 YD........................................................................................................................... 5
    3.1.5 AP........................................................................................................................... 5
    3.1.6 ALT......................................................................................................................... 5
    3.1.7 SPD........................................................................................................................ 5
    3.1.8 FD........................................................................................................................... 5
    3.1.9 GA.......................................................................................................................... 5
    3.1.10 L/R.......................................................................................................................... 6
    3.1.11 VNAV...................................................................................................................... 6
    3.2 Indication and Warning........................................................................................... 6

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 CAS Messages for Failures.................................................................................... 6
    3 CAS Messages for Mis-Trim................................................................................... 7

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Autopilot Schematic................................................................................................ 8

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-22-20-00-00A-040A-A SPEED AND ATTITUDE CORRECTION -
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-23-50-00-00A-040A-A AUDIO INTEGRATING SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-27-15-00-00A-040A-A AILERON TRIM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-06-04 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Data module/Technical publication Title


    12-B-27-25-00-00A-040A-A RUDDER TRIM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-27-40-00-00A-040A-A HORIZONTAL STABILIZER TRIM - DESCRIPTION
    AND OPERATION
    12-B-27-50-00-00A-040A-A FLAPS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-31-40-00-00A-040A-A CENTRAL COMPUTERS - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-31-50-00-00A-040A-A CENTRAL WARNING SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-34-25-00-00A-040A-A AIR DATA, ATTITUDE AND HEADING REFERENCE
    SYSTEM KSG 7200 - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-46-30-01-00A-040A-A PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION

    Description

    1 General
    The AFCS gives automatic flight control in the pitch, roll and yaw axes. The AFCS also gives altitude preselect and
    flight director signals for the Primary Flight Display (PFD).
    The autopilot has these components:
    − A Flight Control Panel (FCP)
    − AFCS signal processing within the Modular Avionics Unit (MAU)
    − A pitch, a roll and a yaw servo-actuator
    − A Touch Control Steering (TCS) switch (on each control wheel)
    − A Go-Around (GA) switch
    − An Autopilot Disconnect (A/P DISC) switch (on each control wheel)

    The AFCS system gets signals from:


    − The stick pusher computer (Refer to DM 12-B-22-20-00-00A-040A-A)
    − The aileron trim system (Refer to DM 12-B-27-15-00-00A-040A-A)
    − The horizontal stabilizer trim system (Refer to DM 12-B-27-40-00-00A-040A-A)
    − The rudder trim system (refer to DM 12-B-27-25-00-00A-040A-A)
    − The flaps system (Refer to DM 12-B-27-50-00-00A-040A-A)
    − The Air Data Attitude and Heading Reference System (ADAHRS) (Refer to DM 12-B-34-25-00-00A-040A-A)

    The AFCS system gives outputs to:


    − The audio integrating system (Refer to DM 12-B-23-50-00-00A-040A-A)
    − The rudder trim system (Refer to DM 12-B-27-25-00-00A-040A-A)
    − The horizontal stabilizer trim system (Refer to DM 12-B-27-40-00-00A-040A-A)
    − The Crew Alerting System (Refer to DM 12-B-31-50-00-00A-040A-A)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-06-04 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − The PFD (Refer to DM 12-B-46-30-01-00A-040A-A)

    The power supplies to the AFCS are:


    − 28 VDC through the FLT CONT CH A (AVIONIC 1 BUS) circuit breaker
    − 28 VDC through the A/P SERVO ENABLE (AVIONIC 1 BUS) circuit breaker
    − 28 VDC through the A/P SERVO (AVIONIC 1 BUS) circuit breaker
    − 28 VDC through the FLT CONT CH B (AVIONIC 2 BUS) circuit breaker
    − internal power within the MAU

    2 Component Description

    2.1 Modular Avionics Unit Autopilot Function


    The Modular Avionics Unit (MAU) (Refer to DM 12-B-31-40-00-00A-040A-A) processes flight environment and
    navigation data to make control signals for the auto pilot servo-actuators. The Flight Control Panel (FCP) is used to
    set the mode of the AFCS.
    The MAU is below the passenger compartment floor between subframes 19A and 21.
    The MAU continuously does a check for failures in the autopilot system. If a failure occurs, the MAU sends signals
    to the CAS (which shows the appropriate message, refer to Table 2), and to the audio integrating system which
    gives a warning tone.
    Whenever the autopilot is disengaged, the MAU sends signals to the PFD which shows the red flashing A/P
    caption, and the audio integrating system which gives a warning tone.

    2.2 Flight Control Panel


    The Flight Control Panel (FCP) is used to select the AFCS mode. It is installed in the top of the center instrument
    panel and is in a rectangular box that has two electrical connectors on the rear. The front of the box has:
    − A NOSE DN/UP trim switch
    − A HDG/T (heading/track) pushbutton and green LED
    − A BL (bank level - high/low) pushbutton and green LED
    − A NAV (navigation) pushbutton, green LED
    − An APR (approach) pushbutton, green LED
    − A YD (yaw damper) pushbutton and a green LED
    − An AP (autopilot) pushbutton and a green LED
    − An ALT (altitude hold) pushbutton and green LED
    − A SPD (airspeed hold) pushbutton and green LED
    − A FD (flight director) pushbutton and green LED
    − A L/R (left/right) pushbutton and left/right green arrowhead LEDs
    − A VS (vertical speed) pushbutton and green LED
    − A VNAV (vertical navigation) pushbutton and green LED (MSN 545, 1001 thru 1180 Post SB 22-005 and MSN
    1181 up)
    − A MINIMUMS rotary control with PUSH to select RA (radar altitude) or BARO (barometric altitude)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-06-04 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − A HDG/TRK (heading/track) selector, a HDG/TRK rotary control and a PUSH SYNC (push to synchronize)
    control
    − An ALT (altitude) rotary selector

    2.3 Trim Adaptor


    The trim adaptor processes the signals from the MAU to control the horizontal stabilizer position and the rudder
    tab. The trim adaptor is below the passenger compartment floor between frames 23 and 24. It is in a rectangular
    box with an electrical connector on the front. The trim adaptor operates the horizontal stabilizer actuator and the
    yaw trim actuator when the autopilot is engaged.

    2.4 Pitch, Roll and Yaw Servo Actuators


    The pitch, roll and yaw servo-actuators operate the flight controls when the autopilot is engaged. The pitch servo-
    actuator moves the elevator and is installed on the right between frames 38 and 39. The roll servo-actuator moves
    the ailerons and is installed below the passenger floor between frames 23 and 24. The yaw servo-actuator moves
    the rudder and is installed on the left between frames 38 and 39.
    The pitch, roll and yaw servo-actuators are the same. Each servo-actuator is in a rectangular box that has a motor,
    an electrical clutch, a drive shaft at the front and an electrical connector on the side. The servo-actuator is installed
    on a capstan mount which has a base, a capstan and a mechanical clutch. The autopilot cables installed on the
    capstan connect to the flight control cables. The slip-clutch lets the pilot override the servo-actuator torque if the
    servo-actuator will not disengage.
    When the autopilot is engaged, the MAU controls the servo-actuators which operate the flight controls.

    2.5 TCS Switch


    The TCS switch is used to temporarily disengage the pitch and roll servo-actuators. The TCS switch is a
    pushbutton switch on the pilot and co-pilot control wheels. When the TCS switch is pushed and held the servo-
    actuators disengage. The flight controls are used to change the aircraft attitude. When the TCS switch is released
    the servo-actuators will engage and all active flight director modes will synchronize to the new aircraft reference.

    2.6 GA Switch
    The GA switch is used to give a pitch-up signal and make the aircraft climb, in a wings-level attitude, to perform a
    missed approach maneuver. The GA switch is a pushbutton switch on the left side of the Power Control Lever
    (PCL).

    2.7 A/P DISC switch


    The A/P DISC switch disengages the autopilot and all modes. The A/P DISC switch is a pushbutton switch on the
    pilot and co-pilot control wheels.

    3 Operation (Ref. Fig. 1)

    3.1 Modes
    When a mode is set on the FCP the associated green LED comes on. The autopilot mode caption also shows on
    the Primary Flight Display (PFD) Flight Guidance Display. The mode caption is colored white to indicate the mode
    is armed, and changes color to green when the mode is active.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-06-04 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.1.1 HDG/T
    This mode makes the aircraft fly to the magnetic heading (or track) shown by the heading bug on the Primary Flight
    Display (PFD).
    Bank Limit (BL) is available if either heading or track mode is selected. If low bank limit is selected, a magenta arc
    is shown on the top of the PFD ADI sphere between +17° and -17° of roll angle. BL is automatically set when
    HDG/TRK mode is set and the aircraft altitude is more than 25000 feet.

    3.1.2 NAV
    This mode makes the aircraft fly to the navigation source set on the selected PFD. When the mode is set it is
    shown on the PFD in white to indicate the mode is armed. When the autopilot finds the navigation source the PFD
    white caption changes to green to indicate the mode is active. If the navigation source is lost the AFCS reverts to
    the basic wings level roll mode.

    3.1.3 APR
    This mode makes the aircraft fly to the approach ILS, BC or VOR source shown on the PFD. The mode caption is
    shown on the PFD.

    3.1.4 YD
    The yaw damping mode comes on automatically when the AP mode is selected or set to on when the YD
    pushbutton is pushed.
    The yaw damping gives turn coordination, yaw damping and rudder trim functions.

    3.1.5 AP
    The AP pushbutton engages the autopilot mode. The autopilot controls the pitch and roll servo-actuators and the
    horizontal stabilizer actuator to keep the aircraft attitude to the FD mode that is active. If no modes are set the
    autopilot activates the basic roll and pitch hold modes. A green AP caption on the PFD shows that the autopilot is
    engaged.

    3.1.6 ALT
    This mode keeps the aircraft at the altitude at which the mode was engaged. The MAU compares the set altitude
    data and the actual altitude, any difference causes a change in aircraft pitch.

    3.1.7 SPD
    This mode makes the aircraft stay at the set airspeed. The MAU puts the airspeed signal from the ADAHRS into a
    memory. The MAU compares the airspeed data and the actual airspeed, any difference causes a change in aircraft
    pitch.

    3.1.8 FD
    This activates the flight director mode. On the PFD the command bars come on.

    3.1.9 GA
    When the GA switch is pushed the MAU gives a signal to the pitch servo-actuator to make a 9° aircraft nose-up
    attitude and wings level.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-06-04 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.1.10 L/R
    The Left/Right pushbutton selects the side that the autopilot is coupled to (left side - pilot, right side - copilot). The
    appropriate arrowhead LED and a green arrow on the PFD come on to show which side is active.

    3.1.11 VNAV
    The VNAV pushbutton engages or disengages various vertical navigation modes (if this option is activated). The
    vertical navigation mode depends upon how the Flight Management System (FMS) is set when the VNAV
    pushbutton is pushed. The green LED above the VNAV pushbutton comes on to show when a vertical navigation
    mode is engaged.

    3.2 Indication and Warning


    When the autopilot is engaged, the AP, YD and FD LEDs on the FCP come on, and the green AP caption, the
    green left or right couple arrow and the command bars on the PFD come on.
    The autopilot will disengage when:
    − On the FCP the AP pushbutton is pushed
    − On the control wheels the A/P DISC pushbuttons are pushed
    − The manual trim switch is engaged
    − The TRIM INTERRUPT switch is pushed
    − The ALTERNATE STAB TRIM switch is set to UP or DOWN
    − The power to the MAU fails
    − The MAU detects a failure
    − Servo circuit breaker(s) are opened.

    When the autopilot is disengaged manually:


    − On the FCP the AP LED goes off
    − On the PFD the red AP caption flashes for 2.5 seconds
    − The autopilot disconnect warning tone is heard in the loudspeakers and the headsets

    If the MAU detects a failure in the autopilot or trim functions, or a mis-trim condition:
    − for failures which cause the autopilot to disengage:
    ● On the FCP the AP caption goes off
    ● On the PFD the red AP caption flashes continuously
    ● The autopilot disconnect warning tone is heard in the flight compartment loudspeakers and the headsets
    ● The CAS shows the appropriate message (Table 2)

    Table 2 CAS Messages for Failures


    CAS Message Description Status A/P Status Audio
    Pitch Trim Runaway Auto pitch trim inoperative - monitor Warning Disengage Yes
    detects failure of trim to respond
    properly
    Autopilot Fail Autopilot not available Advisory Disengage Yes
    Flight Director Fail Active or armed lateral mode invalid Advisory Engaged No
    Yaw Damper Fail YD not available Advisory Engaged No
    − for mis-trim conditions:

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-06-04 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    ● the CAS shows the appropriate mis-trim message (Table 3)


    ● the autopilot remains engaged

    Table 3 CAS Messages for Mis-Trim


    CAS Message Description Status A/P Status Audio
    AP Hold LH (RH) Wing Roll mistrim - monitor detects Caution Engaged Gong
    DN excessive forces
    AP Hold Nose UP (DN) Pitch mistrim - monitor detects Caution Engaged Gong
    excessive forces
    YD Hold Nose Left Yaw mistrim - monitor detects Caution Engaged Gong
    (Right) excessive forces

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-06-04 Page 7


    A/P SERVO FLIGHT CONTOLLER
    CH A CH B AV 2 CH A
    AV 1 BUS
    BUS FLT CONT FLT CONT (R/W) CAN BUS A
    AILERON SERVO
    CH A CH B

    Effectivity: ALL
    FD 1 (R ) CAN BUS B
    A/P SERVO ENABLE AP CMD CLUTCH DRIVE
    SERVO ENABLE
    YAW TRIM DRIVE AP MONITORS
    YAW TRIM
    YAW TRIM LH/RH AUTO YAW TRIM
    YAW TRIM LH/RH
    YD CMD

    TRIM YD MONITORS
    I/FACE
    ALT PITCH TRIM DRIVE PITCH TRIM CAN BUS A
    AUTO YAW TRIM ELEVATOR SERVO
    AP PITCH UP/DN
    CAN BUS B
    AP PITCH UP/DN CH B
    CLUTCH DRIVE
    SERVO ENABLE
    (R )
    COCKPIT SWITCHES FD 2

    AP CMD (R/W)

    MAN YAW TRIM AP MONITORS


    CWS

    UNCLASSIFIED
    UNCLASSIFIED

    QUICK DISCONNECT AUTO PITCH TRIM

    End of data module


    MAN TRIM ENGAGE CAN BUS A
    YD CMD RUDDER SERVO
    AUTO PITCH TRIM DEV

    Figure 1 Autopilot Schematic


    ALT PITCH TRIM DEV
    YD MONITORS CAN BUS B
    GA
    AUTO YAW TRIM CLUTCH DRIVE
    SERVO ENABLE
    CAS
    PITCH TRIM FAIL
    YAW TRIM FAIL
    AP HOLD LH WING DN
    AP HOLD RH WING DN
    AP HOLD NOSE UP
    MANUAL AP HOLD NOSE DN
    TRIM YD HOLD NOSE LEFT
    YD HOLD NOSE RIGHT
    YAW DAMPER FAIL
    AUTOPILOT FAIL
    FLIGHT DIRECTOR FAIL

    12-A-221000-A-S4080-01010-A-01-1
    SYSTEM MFD

    12-B-22-10-00-00A-040A-A

    2009-06-04 Page 8
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    AUTOPILOT

    INSPECTION/CHECK

    Table of Contents Page

    AUTOPILOT - INSPECTION/CHECK......................................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Actuator Clutch – Inspection/Check....................................................................... 5

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A GENERAL - AEROSPACE GROUND EQUIPMENT
    (AGE) AND TOOLS
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A STANDARD CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) Required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-00-00A-313A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-06-10 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark


    Adaptor Part 985.92.03.903 As
    required
    Clutch plate Part 985.92.03.902 As
    required
    Dry air supply Part Local supply As
    required
    Warning sign (DO NOT Part Local supply As
    OPERATE THE FLIGHT required
    CONTROLS)

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Loctite Part P08-017 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedure to do a check of the torque of the clutches in the actuator mounts of
    the pitch, roll and yaw actuators and, if necessary, adjust the clutches.
    2 Clutch Torque Check and Adjustment
    2.1
    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A

    Note

    To identify the AGE and tools used in this procedure refer to the list of AGE and tools 12-
    B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A.

    For the pitch actuator mount and the yaw actuator mount open the access panel 31 AB.
    2.2 For the roll actuator mount, remove the center carpet:

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-00-00A-313A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-06-10 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − for executive interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A


    − for standard interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A
    2.3 Remove the access panel 12 EZ.
    2.4 Put up a sign (Warning sign (DO NOT OPERATE THE FLIGHT CONTROLS) (Pt.No. Local supply)) in
    the flight compartment.
    2.5 Open and install a safety clip (Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on these
    circuit breakers:
    − A/P SERVO (AVIONIC 1 BUS)
    − A/P SERVO ENABLE (AVIONIC 1 BUS).
    2.6 Remove the six screws (Figure 1 [5]), washers (Figure 1 [4]) and the cover (Figure 1 [1]).
    2.7 Remove the clutch (Figure 1 [2]) from the actuator mount (Figure 1 [3]).
    2.8 Examine the clutch (Figure 1 [2]). If there is contamination on the clutch, clean it with dry air (Dry air
    supply (Pt.No. Local supply)) at 15 psi (1,0 bar).
    2.9 Install the clutch (Figure 1 [2]) in position on the clutch plate (Clutch plate (Pt.No. 985.92.03.902))
    (Figure 1 [7]) with the six screws (Figure 1 [5]) and washers (Figure 1 [4]).
    2.10 Hold the clutch plate (Figure 1 [7]) in a vice.
    2.11 Install the adaptor (Adaptor (Pt.No. 985.92.03.903)) (Figure 1 [6]) in the clutch (Figure 1 [2]).
    2.12 Install the torque wrench on the adaptor (Figure 1 [6]).
    2.13 Slowly turn the torque wrench clockwise until the clutch operates. Make a note of the torque.
    2.14 Slowly turn the torque wrench counterclockwise until the clutch operates. Make a note of the torque.
    2.15 Make sure the clutch torque is in these limits:
    − 80 ± 5 lbf in (9,0 ± 0,5 Nm) for the pitch clutch
    − 70 ± 5 lbf in (7,9 ± 0,5 Nm) for the roll clutch
    − 120 ± 5 lbf in (13,5 ± 0,5 Nm) for the yaw clutch.
    2.16 If the clutch torque is not in the limits:
    2.16.1 Turn the adjust nut (Figure 1 [8]).

    Note

    A 30° turn of the adjust nut (Figure 1 [8]) clockwise increases the clutch torque by 8 lbf in
    (0,9 Nm). A 30° turn of the adjust nut counterclockwise decreases the clutch torque by 8 lbf
    in (0,9 Nm).

    2.16.2 Do Step 2.13 thru Step 2.16 again until the clutch torque is in the limits.
    2.17 Remove the torque wrench and adaptor (Figure 1 [6]) from the clutch (Figure 1 [2]).
    2.18 Remove the six screws (Figure 1 [5]), washers (Figure 1 [4]) and the clutch (Figure 1 [2]) from the
    clutch plate (Figure 1 [7]).
    2.19 Install the clutch (Figure 1 [2]) in the actuator mount (Figure 1 [3]).
    2.20 Apply Loctite (Loctite (Pt.No. P08-017)) to the threads of the six screws (Figure 1 [5]).
    2.21 Install the cover (Figure 1 [1]) on the actuator mount (Figure 1 [3]) with the six screws (Figure 1 [5])
    and washers (Figure 1 [4]).
    2.22 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-00-00A-313A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-06-10 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − A/P SERVO (AVIONIC 1 BUS)


    − A/P SERVO ENABLE (AVIONIC 1 BUS).
    2.23 Remove the DO NOT OPERATE THE FLIGHT CONTROLS warning sign from the flight compartment.
    2.24 Make sure the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.25 For the pitch actuator mount and the yaw actuator mount close the access panel 31 AB.
    2.26 For the roll actuator mount install the access panel 12 EZ and install the center carpet:
    − for executive interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − for standard interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-00-00A-313A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-06-10 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    PITCH
    CLUTCH YAW
    CLUTCH

    ROLL A
    CLUTCH

    A 1
    5

    6
    2

    7 3

    12-B-221000-A-S4080-01083-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Actuator Clutch – Inspection/Check

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-00-00A-313A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-06-10 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-00-00A-313A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-06-10 Page 6
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    AUTOPILOT

    ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Table of Contents Page

    AUTOPILOT - ADJUSTMENT/TEST.......................................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Maintenance Box Part 985.99.99.610 1
    Pitot Static Test Set Part Local Supply As
    Required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-12 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedure for the operational test of the autopilot system
    Do an operational test to make sure that the system is serviceable, or when a part of the system is replaced.
    Other operational tests are also given as an aid to troubleshooting and maintenance:
    − Touch Control Steering (TCS) check
    − Trim Sense check
    2 Operational Test
    2.1 Do the Initial Power On check (Step 3).
    2.2 Do the Engage/Disengage check (Step 4).
    2.3 Do the Polarity check (Step 6).
    2.4 Do the Close Up procedure (Step 1).
    3 Initial Power On Check

    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU OPERATE THE AUTOPILOT. MAKE SURE THE FLIGHT CONTROLS ARE
    CLEAR AND ALL RIGGING PINS ARE REMOVED. INJURY TO PERSONS AND/OR DAMAGE TO
    EQUIPMENT CAN OCCUR.

    3.1 Connect the Maintenance Box (Pt.No. 985.99.99.610).


    3.2 Remove the protective covers from the left and right pitot heads.
    3.3 Connect the Pitot Static Test Set (Pt.No. Local Supply) pitot line to the left and right pitot heads.
    3.4 If the aircraft is on jacks:
    3.4.1 Set the Maintenance Box AIR/GND switch to GND.
    3.4.2 Put metal targets in the left and right main landing gear WOW proximity switches.
    3.5 Energize the aircraft electrical system, refer AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    3.6 On the Overhead Control Panel (OCP), set the AVIONIC 1 (AV1) and AVIONIC 2 (AV2) switches to
    the ON position.
    3.7 Make sure that these circuit breakers are closed:
    − A/P SERVO ENABLE (AVIONIC 1 BUS)
    − A/P SERVO (AVIONIC 1 BUS)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-12 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Note

    The autopilot can take four minutes to complete the self-test procedure and remove the CAS YD Fail
    and A/P Fail advisory messages.

    3.8 If installed, remove the metal targets from the left and right main landing gear WOW switches.

    WARNING

    MAKE SURE THAT THE GEAR HANDLE IS IN THE DOWN POSITION. THE GEAR WILL RETRACT
    IF THE HANDLE IS MOVED TO UP.

    3.9 Open these circuit breakers:


    − RAD ALT (AVIONIC 1 BUS)
    − AIR/GND (STANDBY BUS)
    3.10 On the Maintenance Box, set the AIR/GND switch to AIR.
    3.11 Make sure that there are no autopilot or yaw damper messages shown on the lower MFD CAS
    window.
    3.12 Make sure that the flight controls move freely in roll, pitch and yaw.
    3.13 On the Flight Control Panel (FCP), make sure that all mode LEDs are off (except the L/R switch).
    3.14 On the FCP, press the L/R pushbutton until the arrow that points to the pilot is ON.
    3.15 Press the FCP FD pushbutton. make sure that the LED above the button is ON.
    3.16 On the PFD, make sure that flight director bars are shown, and agree with the aircraft attitude.
    3.17 On the PFD, make sure that:
    − a green ROLL shows as the active lateral mode
    − a green PIT shows as the active vertical mode
    3.18 Press the FCP AP pushbutton.
    3.19 On the FCP, make sure that:
    − the LED above the AP button is ON
    − the LED above the YD button is ON
    3.20 On the PFD, make sure that the green AP caption is ON.
    3.21 Make sure that the autopilot servo clutches engage (the flight controls do not move freely).
    3.22 On the FCP, press the AP and YD pushbuttons.
    3.23 Make sure that:
    − the LED above the FCP AP button is OFF
    − the LED above the FCP YD button is OFF
    − the PFD green AP caption is OFF
    − the autopilot servo clutches disengage (the flight controls move freely)
    4 Engage/Disengage Checks
    4.1 Use the Pitot Static test set to increase the IAS to 120 knots.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-12 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    4.2 On the FCP, press the AP pushbutton. Make sure that:


    − the LED above the AP button is ON
    − the LED above the YD button is ON
    − the PFD green AP caption is ON
    − the flight controls do not move freely
    4.3 On the pilot control yoke, press and release the Quick Disconnect pushbutton.
    4.4 Make sure that:
    − the audio warning (a triple "cavalry charge") is heard
    − the LED above the FCP AP button is OFF
    − the LED above the FCP YD button is OFF
    − the PFD AP caption flashes red and red reverse video, then goes OFF
    − the flight controls move freely
    4.5 Do Step 4.2 again.
    4.6 On the copilot control yoke, press and release the Quick Disconnect pushbutton.
    4.7 Make sure that:
    − the audio warning (a triple "cavalry charge") is heard
    − the LED above the FCP AP button is OFF
    − the LED above the FCP YD button is OFF
    − the PFD AP caption flashes red and red reverse video, then goes OFF
    − the flight controls move freely
    4.8 Do Step 4.2 again.
    4.9 On the FCP, press and release the AP pushbutton.
    4.10 Make sure that
    − the audio warning (a triple "cavalry charge") is heard
    − the LED above the FCP AP button is OFF
    − the LED above the FCP YD button is ON
    − the PFD AP caption flashes red and red reverse video, then goes OFF
    − the autopilot pitch and roll servo clutches disengage.
    4.11 On the FCP, press and release the YD pushbutton.
    4.12 Make sure that:
    − the yaw servo clutch disengages
    − the LED above the FCP YD button is OFF
    4.13 On the FCP, press and release the YD pushbutton.
    4.14 Make sure that:
    − the LED above the FCP YD button is ON
    − the yaw servo clutch engages
    4.15 On the FCP, press and release the YD pushbutton.
    4.16 Make sure that:

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-12 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − the yaw servo clutch disengages


    − the LED above the FCP YD button is OFF
    4.17 On the FCP, press and release the AP pushbutton.
    4.18 Make sure that:
    − the LED above the AP button is ON
    − the LED above the YD button is ON
    − the PFD green AP caption is ON
    − the flight controls do not move freely
    4.19 On the pilot control yoke, press the Trim Engage trigger.
    4.20 Make sure that:
    − the audio warning (a triple "cavalry charge") is heard
    − the LED above the FCP AP button is OFF
    − the LED above the FCP YD button is ON
    − the PFD AP caption flashes red and red reverse video, then goes OFF
    − the flight controls move freely in pitch and roll only
    4.21 On the FCP, press the AP pushbutton.
    4.22 Make sure that:
    − the LED above the AP button is ON
    − the LED above the YD button is ON
    − the PFD green AP caption is ON
    − the flight controls do not move freely
    4.23 On the copilot control yoke, press the Trim Engage trigger.
    4.24 Make sure that:
    − the audio warning (a triple "cavalry charge") is heard
    − the LED above the FCP AP button is OFF
    − the LED above the FCP YD button is ON
    − the PFD AP caption flashes red and red reverse video, then goes OFF
    − the flight controls move freely in pitch and roll only
    4.25 On the FCP, press the AP pushbutton.
    4.26 Make sure that:
    − the LED above the AP button is ON
    − the LED above the YD button is ON
    − the PFD green AP caption is ON
    − the flight controls do not move freely
    4.27 On the Power Control Lever (PCL), press the RH Rudder Trim switch.
    4.28 Make sure that:
    − the audio warning (a triple "cavalry charge") is heard
    − the LED above the FCP AP button is OFF

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-12 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − the LED above the FCP YD button is OFF


    − the PFD AP caption flashes red and red reverse video, then goes OFF
    − the flight controls move freely
    4.29 On the FCP, press the AP pushbutton.
    4.30 Make sure that:
    − the LED above the AP button is ON
    − the LED above the YD button is ON
    − the PFD green AP caption is ON
    − the flight controls do not move freely
    4.31 On the PCL, press the LH Rudder Trim switch.
    4.32 Make sure that:
    − the audio warning (a triple "cavalry charge") is heard
    − the LED above the FCP AP button is OFF
    − the LED above the FCP YD button is OFF
    − the PFD AP caption flashes red and red reverse video, then goes OFF
    − the flight controls move freely
    4.33 On the FCP, press the AP pushbutton.
    4.34 Make sure that:
    − the LED above the AP button is ON
    − the LED above the YD button is ON
    − the PFD green AP caption is ON
    − the flight controls do not move freely
    4.35 On the forward center console, press the ALTERNATE STAB TRIM switch to UP.
    4.36 Make sure that:
    − the audio warning (a triple "cavalry charge") is heard
    − the LED above the FCP AP button is OFF
    − the LED above the FCP YD button is ON
    − the PFD AP caption flashes red and red reverse video, then goes OFF
    − the flight controls move freely in pitch and roll only
    4.37 On the FCP, press the AP pushbutton.
    4.38 Make sure that:
    − the LED above the AP button is ON
    − the LED above the YD button is ON
    − the PFD green AP caption is ON
    − the flight controls do not move freely
    4.39 On the forward center console, press the ALTERNATE STAB TRIM switch to DOWN.
    4.40 Make sure that:
    − the audio warning (a triple "cavalry charge") is heard

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-12 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − the LED above the FCP AP button is OFF


    − the LED above the FCP YD button is ON
    − the PFD AP caption flashes red and red reverse video, then goes OFF
    − the flight controls move freely in pitch and roll only
    4.41 On the FCP, press the AP pushbutton.
    4.42 Make sure that:
    − the LED above the AP button is ON
    − the LED above the YD button is ON
    − the PFD green AP caption is ON
    − the flight controls do not move freely
    4.43 On the OCP, push the STICK PUSHER SYSTEM TEST switch.
    4.44 Make sure that:
    − the audio warning (a continuous "cavalry charge") is heard
    − the LED above the FCP AP button is OFF
    − the LED above the FCP YD button is ON
    − the PFD AP caption flashes red and red reverse video
    − the flight controls move freely in pitch and roll only.
    4.45 On the pilot control yoke, press and release the Quick Disconnect pushbutton.
    4.46 Make sure that the:
    − audio warning stops
    − PFD red flashing AP caption goes OFF
    4.47 On the FCP, press the AP pushbutton.
    4.48 Make sure that:
    − the LED above the AP button is ON
    − the LED above the YD button is ON
    − the PFD green AP caption is ON
    − the flight controls do not move freely
    4.49 On the forward center console, set the TRIM INTERRUPT switch to INTR.
    4.50 Make sure that:
    − the audio warning (a continuous "cavalry charge") is heard
    − the LED above the FCP AP button is OFF
    − the LED above the FCP YD button is OFF
    − the PFD AP caption flashes red and red reverse video
    − the flight controls move freely
    4.51 On the copilot control yoke, press and release the Quick Disconnect pushbutton.
    4.52 Make sure that the:
    − audio warning stops
    − PFD red flashing AP caption goes OFF

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-12 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    4.53 On the forward center console, set the TRIM INTERRUPT switch to NORM.
    4.54 On the FCP, press the AP pushbutton.
    4.55 Make sure that:
    − the LED above the AP button is ON
    − the LED above the YD button is ON
    − the PFD green AP caption is ON
    − the flight controls do not move freely
    4.56 Open this circuit breaker:
    − A/P SERVO (AVIONIC 1 BUS)
    4.57 Make sure that the:
    − autopilot servo clutches disengage (the flight controls move freely)
    − audio warning ("cavalry charge") is continuous
    − the PFD AP caption flashes red and red reverse video
    4.58 Press and release the pilot Quick Disconnect button and make sure that:
    − the audio warning stops
    − the PFD red flashing AP caption goes OFF
    − the MFD CAS window shows a cyan AUTOPILOT FAIL message
    − the MFD CAS window shows a cyan YAW DAMPER FAIL message
    − the LED above the FCP AP button is OFF
    − the LED above the FCP YD button is OFF
    4.59 Close this circuit breaker:
    − A/P SERVO (AVIONIC 1 BUS)
    4.60 On the FCP, press the AP pushbutton.
    4.61 Make sure that:
    − the MFD CAS AUTOPILOT FAIL and YAW DAMPER FAIL messages are OFF
    − the LED above the AP button is ON
    − the LED above the YD button is ON
    − the PFD green AP caption is ON
    − the flight controls do not move freely
    4.62 Open this circuit breaker:
    − A/P SERVO ENABLE (AVIONIC 1 BUS)
    4.63 Make sure that the:
    − autopilot servo clutches disengage (the flight controls move freely)
    − audio warning ("cavalry charge") is continuous
    − the PFD AP caption flashes red and red reverse video
    4.64 Press and release the copilot Quick Disconnect button and make sure that:
    − the audio warning stops
    − the PFD red flashing AP caption goes OFF

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-12 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − the MFD CAS window shows a cyan AUTOPILOT FAIL message


    − the MFD CAS window shows a cyan YAW DAMPER FAIL message
    − the LED above the FCP AP button is OFF
    − the LED above the FCP YD button is OFF
    4.65 Close this circuit breaker:
    − A/P SERVO ENABLE (AVIONIC 1 BUS)
    4.66 On the FCP, press the AP pushbutton.
    4.67 Make sure that:
    − the MFD CAS AUTOPILOT FAIL and YAW DAMPER FAIL messages go OFF
    − the LED above the AP button is ON
    − the LED above the YD button is ON
    − the PFD green AP caption is ON
    − the flight controls do not move freely
    5 Touch Control Steering Check
    5.1 Make sure that the autopilot and yaw damper are engaged.
    5.2 Press and hold the pilot control yoke TCS pushbutton
    5.3 Make sure that the pitch and roll servo clutches disengage (flight controls move freely in pitch and
    roll).
    5.4 On the PFD, make sure that the AP caption changes from a green AP to an amber TCS caption.
    5.5 Release the pilot TCS pushbutton.
    5.6 Make sure that the autopilot servo clutches engage (flight controls do not move freely).
    5.7 Do Step 5.1 thru Step 5.6 again. Use the copilot TCS pushbutton to do this test.
    5.8 Press the pilots AP quick disconnect switch on the pilots yoke to disconnect the AP and YD.
    6 Polarity Check
    6.1 Hold the pilot control yoke approximately at the center of travel in pitch.
    6.2 On the FCP, press the AP pushbutton.
    6.3 Make sure that:
    − the LED above the AP button is ON
    − the LED above the YD button is ON
    − the PFD green AP caption is ON
    − the flight controls do not move freely
    − the PFD shows a green ROLL caption
    − the PFD shows a green PIT caption
    6.4 On the FCP, press the NOSE DN pushbutton. Make sure that the control yoke moves forwards.
    6.5 On the FCP, press the NOSE UP pushbutton. Make sure that the control yoke moves rearwards.
    6.6 Disengage the autopilot.
    6.7 On the FCP, press the HEADING rotary control to center the heading bug.
    6.8 On the FCP, press the HDG/T pushbutton.
    6.9 Make sure that the PFD heading bug is shown in magenta.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-12 Page 9


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    6.10 Use the FCP heading rotary control to move the heading 20° left of the actual aircraft heading.
    6.11 Make sure that the Flight Director bars follow the heading bug to the left.
    6.12 Use the FCP heading rotary control to move the heading 20° right of the actual aircraft heading.
    6.13 Make sure that the Flight Director bars follow the heading bug to the right.
    6.14 On the FCP, press the HEADING rotary control to center the heading bug.
    6.15 Hold the pilot control yoke at the center of the travel in roll.
    6.16 Press the FCP AP pushbutton to engage the autopilot.
    6.17 Use the FCP heading rotary control to move the heading 5° left of the actual aircraft heading.
    6.18 Make sure that the control yoke turns to the left.
    6.19 Use the FCP heading rotary control to move the heading 5° right of the actual aircraft heading.
    6.20 Make sure that the control yoke turns to the right.
    6.21 Disengage the autopilot.
    7 Trim Sense Check
    7.1 Hold the pilot control yoke approximately at the center of travel in pitch and roll.
    7.2 Press the FCP AP pushbutton to engage the autopilot.
    7.3 Make sure that:
    − the LED above the AP button is ON
    − the LED above the YD button is ON
    − the PFD green AP caption is ON
    − the Maintenance Box (Pt.No. 985.99.99.610)flight controls do not move freely
    7.4 Hold the control yoke and gently turn it clockwise with enough force to turn the yoke, but not enough to
    override the servo clutch or to backdrive the servo.
    7.5 Make sure that after approximately 15 seconds, the CAS AP HOLD LH WING DN caution message
    comes ON.
    7.6 Release the control yoke and make sure that the CAS caution message goes OFF.
    7.7 Do Step 7.4 thru Step 7.6 again, but turn the yoke counter clockwise. Make sure that the CAS caution
    message AP HOLD RH WING DN comes ON and goes OFF.
    7.8 Hold the control yoke and gently push it forwards with enough force to move the yoke, but not enough
    to override the servo clutch or to backdrive the servo.
    7.9 Make sure that:
    − the PITCH TRIM running indicator (green dot) shows in the lower MFD Trim window
    − the pitch trim drives nose UP
    − after 10 to 20 seconds the CAS window shows an amber AP HOLD NOSE UP caution message
    7.10 Release the control yoke.
    7.11 Do Step 7.8 thru Step 7.10 again, but pull the control yoke. Make sure that the pitch trim drives nose
    DOWN and the CAS message AP HOLD NOSE DN appears.
    7.12 Push on the right rudder pedal with enough force to move the pedal forward, but not enough to
    override the servo clutch or to backdrive the servo.
    7.13 Make sure that the rudder trim drives counter clockwise and the RUDDER TRIM running indicator (a
    green dot) shows on the lower MFD Trim window.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-12 Page 10


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    7.14 After approximately 25 seconds make sure that the CAS window shows the YD HOLD NOSE LEFT
    caution message.
    7.15 Release the rudder pedal.
    7.16 Make sure that the YD HOLD NOSE LEFT caution message on the CAS is removed
    7.17 Push on the left rudder pedal with enough force to move the pedal forward, but not enough to override
    the servo clutch or to backdrive the servo.
    7.18 Make sure that the rudder trim drives clockwise and the RUDDER TRIM running indicator (a green
    dot) shows on the lower MFD Trim window.
    7.19 After approximately 25 seconds make sure that the CAS window shows the YD HOLD NOSE RIGHT
    caution message.
    7.20 Release the rudder pedal.
    7.21 Make sure that the YD HOLD NOSE RIGHT caution message on the CAS is removed.

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    1 Close Up Procedure
    1.1 Slowly adjust the Pitot Static Test Set (Pt.No. Local Supply) static and pitot pressures to ambient.
    1.2 Disconnect and remove the Maintenance Box (Pt.No. 985.99.99.610) from the aircraft.
    1.3 Set the flaps to 0°.
    1.4 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    1.5 De-energize the aircraft electrical system, refer AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    1.6 Close these circuit breakers:
    − RAD ALT (AVIONIC 1 BUS)
    − AIR/GND (STANDBY BUS)
    1.7 Disconnect the Pitot Static Test Set (Pt.No. Local Supply) from the left and right pitot heads.
    1.8 Install the protective covers to the left and right pitot heads.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-00-00A-903A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-12 Page 11
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-12 Page 12


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PITCH ACTUATOR

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    PITCH ACTUATOR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION..................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Pitch Actuator – Removal/Installation..................................................................... 3

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-22-10-00-00A-903A-A AUTOPILOT - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) Required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Lockwire Part P02-022 As
    required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Open and install a clip (Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on these circuit
    breakers:
    − A/P SERVO (AVIONICS 1 BUS)
    − A/P SERVO ENABLE (AVIONICS 1 BUS)
    1.2 Open the access panel 31AB.
    1.3 Disconnect the electrical connector (Figure 1 [1]) from the pitch actuator.
    1.4 Cut and remove the lockwire from the bolts (Figure 1 [2]).
    1.5 Hold the pitch actuator (Figure 1 [4]). Remove the two bolts (Figure 1 [2]) and washers (Figure 1 [3])
    then remove the pitch actuator from the mount (Figure 1 [5]).
    2 Installation
    2.1 Make sure that the damping gasket is installed and is not damaged. If required, use the
    manufacturer's instructions to replace the damping gasket.
    2.2 Put the pitch actuator (Figure 1 [4]) in position on the mount (Figure 1 [5]) and install the two washers
    (Figure 1 [3]) and bolts (Figure 1 [2]).
    2.3 Torque the two bolts (Figure 1 [2]) to 36 to 40 lbf in. (4,1 to 4,5 Nm).
    2.4 Use lockwire (Lockwire (Pt.No. P02-022)) to safety the bolts (Figure 1 [2]).
    2.5 Connect the electrical connector (Figure 1 [1]) to the pitch actuator.
    2.6 Remove the safety clip and close the circuit breakers:
    − A/P SERVO (AVIONICS 1 BUS)
    − A/P SERVO ENABLE (AVIONICS 1 BUS)
    2.7 Do the operational test of the autopilot system (refer to DM 12-B-22-10-00-00A-903A-A).
    2.8 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.9 Close the access panel 31AB.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FRAME 39

    FRAME 38

    B
    A

    B 3

    2 4

    1
    3

    12-B-221002-A-S4080-01080-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Pitch Actuator – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-02-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    ROLL ACTUATOR

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    ROLL ACTUATOR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION...................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Roll Actuator – Removal/Installation....................................................................... 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-22-10-00-00A-903A-A AUTOPILOT - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A STANDARD CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Lockwire Part P02-022 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Open and install a safety clip (Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on these
    circuit breakers:
    − A/P SERVO (AVIONIC 1 BUS)
    − A/P SERVO ENABLE (AVIONIC 1 BUS)
    1.2 Remove the center carpet:
    − for Executive interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − for Standard interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A
    1.3 Open the access panel 12EZ.
    1.4 Disconnect the electrical connector (Figure 1 [4]) from the roll actuator (Figure 1 [5]).
    1.5 Cut and remove the lockwire from the bolts (Figure 1 [1]).
    1.6 Hold the roll actuator (Figure 1 [5]). Remove the two bolts (Figure 1 [1]) and washers (Figure 1 [2])
    then remove the roll actuator from the mount (Figure 1 [3]).
    2 Installation
    2.1 Make sure that the damping gasket is installed and is not damaged. If required, use the
    manufacturer's instructions to replace the damping gasket.
    2.2
    Note

    If a new actuator is to be installed, remove the two anchor nuts from the removed actuator and install
    them on the new actuator.

    Put the roll actuator (Figure 1 [5]) in position on the mount (Figure 1 [3]) and install the two washers
    (Figure 1 [2]) and bolts (Figure 1 [1]).
    2.3 Torque the bolts (Figure 1 [1]) to 36 to 40 lbf in. (4,1 to 4,5 Nm).
    2.4 Use the lockwire (Lockwire (Pt.No. P02-022)) to safety the bolts (Figure 1 [1]).
    2.5 Connect the electrical connector (Figure 1 [4]) to the actuator.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.6 Remove the safety clip and close the circuit breakers:
    − A/P SERVO (AVIONIC 1 BUS)
    − A/P SERVO ENABLE (AVIONIC 1 BUS)
    2.7 Do the operational test of the autopilot system (refer to DM 12-B-22-10-00-00A-903A-A).
    2.8 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.9 Close the access panel 12EZ.
    2.10 Install the center carpet:
    − for Executive interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − for Standard interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FRAME 24

    A
    FRAME 23
    B

    1
    2

    12-B-221003-A-S4080-01081-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Roll Actuator – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-03-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    YAW ACTUATOR

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    YAW ACTUATOR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION........................................................................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Yaw Actuator – Removal/Installation...................................................................... 3

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-22-10-00-00A-903A-A AUTOPILOT - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Lockwire Part P02-022 As
    required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-04-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Open and install a safety clip (Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on these
    circuit breakers:
    − A/P SERVO (AVIONIC 1 BUS)
    − A/P SERVO ENABLE (AVIONIC 1 BUS)
    1.2 Open the access panel 31AB.
    1.3 Disconnect the electrical connector (Figure 1 [1]) from the actuator.
    1.4 Cut and remove the lockwire from the bolts (Figure 1 [4]).
    1.5 Hold the yaw actuator (Figure 1 [2]). Remove the two bolts (Figure 1 [4]) and washers (Figure 1 [3])
    then remove the yaw actuator from the mount (Figure 1 [5]).
    2 Installation
    2.1 Make sure that the damping gasket is installed and is not damaged. If required, use the
    manufacturer's instructions to replace the damping gasket.
    2.2 Put the yaw actuator (Figure 1 [2]) in position on the mount (Figure 1 [5]) and install the two washers
    (Figure 1 [3]) and bolts (Figure 1 [4]).
    2.3 Torque the bolts (Figure 1 [2]) to 36 to 40 lbf in. (4,1 to 4,5 Nm).
    2.4 Use lockwire (Lockwire (Pt.No. P02-022)) to safety the bolts (Figure 1 [4]).
    2.5 Connect the electrical connector (Figure 1 [1]) to the actuator.
    2.6 Remove the safety clip and close the circuit breakers:
    − A/P SERVO (AVIONIC 1 BUS)
    − A/P SERVO ENABLE (AVIONIC 1 BUS)
    2.7 Do the operational test of the autopilot system (refer to DM 12-B-22-10-00-00A-903A-A).
    2.8 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.9 Close the access panel 31AB.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-04-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FRAME 39

    FRAME 38

    A B

    3 4

    3 4

    12-B-221004-A-S4080-01082-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Yaw Actuator – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-04-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-04-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FLIGHT CONTROL PANEL

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    FLIGHT CONTROL PANEL - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION........................................................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Flight Control Panel – Removal/Installation............................................................ 3

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-22-10-00-00A-903A-A AUTOPILOT - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required
    Hexagonal wrench Part Local supply As
    required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-05-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Open and install Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065) on these circuit
    breakers:
    − FLT CONT CH A (AVIONIC 1 BUS)
    − FLT CONT CH B (AVIONIC 2 BUS)
    − INST LIGHTS PILOT (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    1.2 Use a hexagonal wrench to undo the screw (Figure 1 [2]) on the Flight Control Panel (FCP)
    (Figure 1 [3].
    1.3 Carefully remove the FCP (Figure 1 [3] from the mount (Figure 1 [1]).
    2 Installation
    2.1 Install the FCP (Figure 1 [3]) in the mount (Figure 1 [1]) then tighten the screw (Figure 1 [2]) with a
    hexagonal wrench.
    2.2 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − FLT CONT CH A (AVIONIC 1 BUS)
    − FLT CONT CH B (AVIONIC 2 BUS)
    − INST LIGHTS PILOT (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    2.3 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.4 Do the operational test of the autopilot system (Refer to DM 12-B-22-10-00-00A-903A-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-05-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    12-B-221005-A-S4080-01084-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Flight Control Panel – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-05-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-05-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    TRIM ADAPTOR

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    TRIM ADAPTOR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION......................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Trim Adapter – Removal/Installation...................................................................... 3

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-22-10-00-00A-903A-A AUTOPILOT - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A STANDARD CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) Required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-07-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Open and install a clip (Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on these circuit
    breakers:
    − PITCH TRIM (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − TRIM CTL (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    1.2 Remove the center carpet:
    − for Executive interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − for Standard interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A
    1.3 Open the access panel 12 EZ.
    1.4 Disconnect the electrical connector (Figure 1 [3]) from the trim adapter (Figure 1 [1]).
    1.5 Remove the four screws (Figure 1 [2]).
    1.6 Remove the trim adapter (Figure 1 [1]) from the mount.
    2 Installation
    2.1 Install the trim adapter (Figure 1 [1]) on the mount with the four screws (Figure 1 [2]).
    2.2 Connect the electrical connector (Figure 1 [3]) to the trim adapter (Figure 1 [1]).
    2.3 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − PITCH TRIM (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − TRIM CTL (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    2.4 Do the operational test of the autopilot system (refer to DM 12-B-22-10-00-00A-903A-A).
    2.5 Make sure the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.6 Close the access panel 12 EZ.
    2.7 Install the center carpet:
    − for Executive interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − for Standard interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-07-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2
    3

    12-B-221007-A-S4080-01085-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Trim Adapter – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-07-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-10-07-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    SPEED AND ATTITUDE CORRECTION

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    SPEED AND ATTITUDE CORRECTION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION......................... 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 2
    2 Component Description.......................................................................................... 3
    2.1 Stick Pusher Computer........................................................................................... 3
    2.2 Stick Pusher Channels........................................................................................... 3
    2.3 Stick Pusher Servo/Capstan................................................................................... 3
    2.4 Stick Shaker Actuator............................................................................................. 4
    2.5 PUSHER INTR Switch............................................................................................ 4
    2.6 AOA Transmitter..................................................................................................... 4
    2.7 Torque Transducer................................................................................................. 4
    2.8 PUSHER Test Switch............................................................................................. 5
    2.9 Power Control Lever (PCL) Switch......................................................................... 5
    3 Operation - Stick Pusher System (Ref. )................................................................ 5
    3.1 On Ground.............................................................................................................. 5
    3.2 In Flight................................................................................................................... 5
    3.3 Stick Shaker........................................................................................................... 5
    3.4 Stick Pusher........................................................................................................... 5
    3.5 Ice Mode................................................................................................................. 6
    3.6 CAS Captions......................................................................................................... 6
    3.6.1 PUSHER................................................................................................................. 6
    3.6.2 Air/Ground Fail....................................................................................................... 7
    3.6.3 Pusher Safe Mode.................................................................................................. 7
    3.7 System Tests.......................................................................................................... 7
    3.7.1 System Start Up..................................................................................................... 7
    3.7.2 Pre-flight Test......................................................................................................... 7
    3.7.3 In-flight Test............................................................................................................ 8

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Stick Pusher System – Schematic.......................................................................... 9

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-22-10-00-00A-040A-A AUTOPILOT - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-23-50-00-00A-040A-A AUDIO INTEGRATING SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-27-50-00-00A-040A-A FLAPS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-05-11 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Data module/Technical publication Title


    12-B-30-20-00-00A-040A-A AIR INTAKE DE–ICE SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-30-30-00-00A-040A-A PROBES DE–ICE SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-30-60-00-00A-040A-A PROPELLER DE–ICE SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-31-10-00-00A-040A-A OVERHEAD CONTROL PANEL - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-31-50-00-00A-040A-A CENTRAL WARNING SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-32-60-00-00A-040A-A POSITION AND WARNING – HYDRAULIC LANDING
    GEAR - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-79-00-00-00A-040A-A OIL SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Description

    1 General
    The speed and attitude correction system gives a warning when the aircraft gets near the stall-speed and
    automatically corrects the aircraft attitude when it is near a stall.
    The system changes automatically to operate in ice mode when the inertial separator is open at the same time the
    propeller deicing system is operating.
    The system has these components:
    − A stick pusher computer
    − A stick pusher servo/capstan
    − A stick shaker actuator
    − Two Angle-Of-Attack (AOA) transmitters
    − A torque transducer
    − A PUSHER INTR switch on each control wheel
    − A PUSHER test switch
    − A Power Control Lever (PCL) switch

    The system gets signals from:


    − The flaps system, refer to AMM 12-B-27-50-00-00A-040A-A
    − The air intake deice system, refer to AMM 12-B-30-20-00-00A-040A-A
    − The left and right Weight-On-Wheels (WOW) relays, refer to AMM 12-B-32-60-00-00A-040A-A
    − The oil pressure switch, refer to AMM 12-B-79-00-00-00A-040A-A

    The system gives outputs to the Modular Avionics Unit (MAU) dual channel Generic Input/Output (GIO) modules.
    The MAU gives the signals to these systems:
    − The autopilot system, refer to AMM 12-B-22-10-00-00A-040A-A
    − The audio integrating system, refer to AMM 12-B-23-50-00-00A-040A-A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-05-11 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − The Master Warning System (MWS), refer to AMM 12-B-31-50-00-00A-040A-A

    The power supplies to the system are:


    − 28 VDC through the STALL WARN 1 (ESS BUS) circuit breaker
    − 28 VDC through the STALL WARN 2 (MAIN BUS) circuit breaker
    − 28 VDC through the PUSHER SYS (ESS BUS) circuit breaker

    2 Component Description

    2.1 Stick Pusher Computer


    The stick pusher computer is installed below the floor between frames 17 and 18 in a rectangular box with three
    electrical connectors on the front. It has two stick pusher channels which have separate 28 VDC supplies from
    different busbars.
    Each channel gives a 28 VDC output to the torque transducer. The two channel outputs to the torque transducer
    are connected to a terminal block. The terminal block also connects the channels to each other. If the 28 VDC
    supply to one channel becomes defective, the 28 VDC output from the other channel will then supply the torque
    transducer and the other channel with a 28 VDC input. This keeps the two stick push channels operational and the
    torque transducer continues to have a 28 VDC supply.

    2.2 Stick Pusher Channels


    The stick pusher computer contains two independent channels which are the same. They get the same data from
    the engine oil pressure switch, the torque transducer and the Flap Control and Warning Unit (FCWU). Channel 1
    also gets signals from the left AOA transmitter and the left WOW relay. Channel 2 also gets signals from the right
    AOA transmitter and the right WOW relay. The two channels operate independently for the stick shaker and audio
    stall warning functions. The two channels operate together for the stick pusher function.
    AOA data is used by the Fast/Slow (F/S) pointer (Primus APEX Build 7 or lower) or by the Dynamic Speed Bug
    (DSB) (Primus APEX Build 8 and higher) on the left of the Primary Flight Display (PFD). The data is also used to
    show the Low Speed Awareness Indication adjacent to the Air Speed tape on the PFD.
    The stick pusher computer processes the aircraft angle of attack, flap position and engine condition signals. When
    the aircraft is near the stall angle, the stick pusher computer operates the stick shaker actuator to warn the pilot of
    the situation. If no manual correction is made the stick pusher computer operates the stick pusher servo when the
    aircraft gets nearer the stall angle, to automatically correct the aircraft attitude.
    The stick pusher computer also changes the stall angle datums between normal mode operation and ice mode
    operation when the pusher ice mode relay energizes.

    2.3 Stick Pusher Servo/Capstan


    The stick pusher servo operates the elevator cable system to make the aircraft pitch go nose-down. It is installed
    below the floor between frames 21 and 22. The stick pusher servo is in a rectangular box that has a splined drive
    shaft at the front and an electrical connector on the rear.
    Inside the stick pusher servo there is an accelerometer circuit with a g-switch. The g-switch operates when the
    vertical acceleration due to gravity (g) is less than 0.5 g. This gives an inhibit signal to stop the operation of the
    stick pusher servo.
    The output torque of the stick pusher servo is electronically limited to give a control force of 55 to 70 lbf (24,9 to
    31,8 kgf). The stick pusher servo monitors its electronic circuits and, if there is a fault, sends a signal to the MAU
    that makes the amber PUSHER caution message come on.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-05-11 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    The stick pusher servo is installed on a capstan mount which has a base, a capstan and a mechanical slip clutch.
    The clutch operates at a control force of 70 to 90 lbf (31,8 to 40,8 kgf). A cable installed on the capstan connects to
    the elevator control cable. The slip clutch lets the pilot override the stick pusher servo if incorrect operation occurs.
    The slip clutch operates if the torque given to the capstan from the elevator control cable is more than the slip
    clutch limit.
    The stick pusher servo is controlled by the two independent channels of the stick pusher computer. If both
    channels send a push command, the electrical clutch is engaged and the servo is activated. This results in a nose
    down movement on the pitch controls. If only the left hand stick pusher computer sends a push command, it has no
    effect on the system. If only the right hand stick pusher computer sends a push command, the electrical clutch of
    the push servo engages and makes the movement of the control column heavy.
    In case the stick pusher servo detects a discrepancy in the commands between the left hand and right hand stick
    pusher computer, a PUSHER caution is indicated after 3.5 seconds.

    2.4 Stick Shaker Actuator


    The stick shaker actuator vibrates the pilot and co-pilot control columns to give a warning that the aircraft is near
    the stall speed. The stick shaker actuator is attached to a tube of the left control column behind the instrument
    panel. It is a motor with a reduction gear and an off-center weighted disc in a housing. On the rear of the housing is
    an electrical connector.

    2.5 PUSHER INTR Switch


    PUSHER INTR switches are installed on the pilot and co-pilot control wheels. The PUSHER INTR switches are
    used to stop the operation of the stick pusher servo if incorrect operation occurs.
    The PUSHER INTR switch installed on the pilot’s control wheel disengages the stick pusher servo electrical clutch
    and lets the control column move freely.
    The PUSHER INTR switch installed on the co-pilot’s control wheel stops the operation of the stick pusher servo.
    The electrical clutch remains engaged and makes movement of the control column heavy.

    2.6 AOA Transmitter


    The left and right AOA transmitters detect the angle of the aircraft pitch attitude in relation to the airflow and give
    aircraft pitch-angle signals to the stick pusher computer. They are on the leading edge of the wings at rib 16. The
    AOA transmitter and its mounting plate are electrically heated, refer to AMM 12-B-30-30-00-00A-040A-A. On the
    rear of the AOA transmitter is an electrical connector.
    The stick pusher computer supplies the AOA transmitter with a reference voltage of 6 VAC, 2500 Hz. The AOA
    transmitter supplies the stick pusher computer with sine and cosine signals which are relative to the position of the
    vane on the transmitter. The vane is attached by a spindle to the side of the transmitter. As the vane turns to stay
    aligned with the airflow it causes the sine and cosine output signals to change.

    2.7 Torque Transducer


    The torque transducer detects the pressure of the oil in the torquemeter chamber and sends the signals to the stick
    pusher computer. The oil pressure is in proportion to the engine torque. The torque transducer is installed on the
    engine on the top of the reduction gearbox casing. It gets an excitation supply from the stick pusher computer.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-05-11 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.8 PUSHER Test Switch


    The PUSHER test switch is used to do a test of the stall warning and pusher functions of the system. The system
    goes into PUSHER ICE MODE operation when the PUSHER test switch is pressed. It can be used in flight or on
    the ground. The in-flight and on-ground tests operate differently.
    The PUSHER TEST push switch is on the TEST section of the Overhead Control Panel refer to AMM 12-
    B-31-10-00-00A-040A-A.

    2.9 Power Control Lever (PCL) Switch


    The PCL switch is a two position switch which gives a ground signal to the stick pusher computer when the PCL is
    set to IDLE. The switch is installed in the center console. When the PCL is set to IDLE the stick pusher computer
    disables the monitoring of the engine torque and engine running signals. This prevents incorrect operation of the
    amber PUSHER message on the CAS display.

    3 Operation - Stick Pusher System (Ref. Fig. 1)

    3.1 On Ground
    When the electrical system is energized, the left and right WOW relays energize and connect a ground to channel
    1 and channel 2 of the stick pusher computer. This disables the stick shaker actuator, the stick pusher servo and
    the stall warning tone during normal operation. They are enabled for the system test.

    3.2 In Flight
    The stick shaker and aural stall warning tone circuits are enabled immediately after take-off. The stick pusher circuit
    is enabled five seconds after take-off.
    When the PCL is set to IDLE a signal is given to the stick pusher computer to disable monitoring of the engine
    torque and engine running signals. This prevents the amber PUSHER message on the CAS display from coming
    on during a descent. The stick pusher and stick shaker operate as normal during this condition.

    3.3 Stick Shaker


    The AOA transmitter vanes turn to stay aligned with the airflow as the aircraft pitch changes and give pitch-angle
    signals to the stick pusher computer. When the data supplied from the left or right AOA transmitter shows the
    aircraft is near the stall angle, channel 1 or channel 2 of the stick pusher computer sends a signal to the stick
    shaker actuator. The stick shaker actuator operates and vibrates the control wheels to give a warning to the pilot.
    The stick pusher computer also gives a signal to disengage the autopilot, if it is engaged.
    The AOA value at which the stick shaker actuator operates depends on several factors. These include the flap
    position, engine torque and mode of operation (normal or ice). The AOA datums change by 8 degrees between
    normal and ice mode operation. This is necessary because of the changes to the wing lift characteristics due to ice
    formation.

    3.4 Stick Pusher


    The stick pusher computer disables the stick pusher servo operation when one or more of these conditions are
    present:
    − The aircraft is on the ground
    − For five seconds after take-off
    − The aircraft vertical acceleration is less than 0.5 g

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-05-11 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − The PUSHER INTR switch is pressed

    When the data supplied to the stick pusher computer from the left and right AOA transmitters shows the aircraft is
    very near the stall angle, channels 1 and 2 of the stick pusher computer send a signal to the stick pusher servo.
    The stick pusher servo operates the elevator cable system to move the elevators and make the aircraft pitch go
    nose-down. The stick shaker and stall warning tone stay on when the stick pusher servo operates.
    The AOA value at which the stick pusher servo operates depends on several factors. These include the flap
    position, engine torque and mode of operation (normal or ice). The AOA datums change by 8 degrees between
    normal and ice mode operation. This is necessary because of the changes to the wing lift characteristics due to ice
    formation.
    When the AOA value is less than the set limits or the vertical acceleration is less than 0.5g the stick pusher servo
    will stop.
    Operation of the stick pusher servo also stops when the PUSHER INTR switch on the pilot’s or co-pilot's control
    wheel is pushed and held. The aural stall warning tone and stick shaker actuator stay operational. The PUSHER
    caution message on the CAS comes on and an aural gong sounds three seconds after operation of the PUSHER
    INTR switch. This is in case of accidental operation of the PUSHER INTR switch. If the PUSHER INTR switch is
    released when the aircraft pitch is still out of the set limits, the stick pusher servo will operate immediately.
    If a failure of the stick pusher servo or capstan occurs and the elevator system does not move freely, the
    mechanical slip clutch operates when the torque given to the capstan from the elevator control cable is more than
    the slip-clutch limit.

    3.5 Ice Mode


    When both the inertial separator de-ice system, refer to AMM 12-B-30-20-00-00A-040A-A and the propeller de-ice
    system, refer to AMM 12-B-30-60-00-00A-040A-A are ON, the MAU connects a grounding circuit to the two
    channels of the stick pusher computer. This puts the system into ice mode operation. The AOA datums change by
    8 degrees.

    3.6 CAS Captions

    3.6.1 PUSHER
    The amber PUSHER caution message on the CAS display comes on and an aural gong is heard when one of
    these conditions occur:
    − A failure of the stick pusher computer channel 1 or channel 2
    − When one channel is operating in normal mode and the other channel in ice mode
    − When the CAS detects ice mode conditions are present (inertial separation system is open with the propeller
    deicing system on) but the stick pusher system stays in normal mode operation
    − A failure of the stick pusher servo (with 3 seconds delay)
    − When the PUSHER INTR switch is pushed (with 3 seconds delay)
    − A failure of any of the inputs from the AOA system, flaps, engine power or WOW switches
    − The g switch is active for longer than 3 seconds
    − When a failure is detected by the system Built-In-Test (BIT)
    − When the amber Air/Ground Fail caution message on the CAS display comes on

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-05-11 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.6.2 Air/Ground Fail


    The amber Air/Ground Fail caution message on the CAS display comes on and an aural gong is heard when there
    is a difference between the LH and RH weight-on-wheel switches. When this occurs, the stick shaker and aural
    stall warning are operational but the stick pusher is disabled.

    3.6.3 Pusher Safe Mode


    The cyan Pusher Safe Mode advisory message comes on if the stick pusher computer detects a flap position or
    flap asymmetry greater than 2 degrees for 10 seconds or more. In safe mode, the stall warning trigger points are
    rescheduled to operate at the 0 degrees flap position setting, irrespective of the flap position. The MAU gives a
    signal to the CAS to display the Pusher caution message.

    3.7 System Tests


    The amber or green PUSHER ICE MODE caption on the CAS display comes on and stays on during system pre-
    flight and in-flight tests.

    3.7.1 System Start Up


    When the electrical system is energized the amber PUSHER message on the CAS display comes on and stays on
    until operation of the pre-flight test.

    3.7.2 Pre-flight Test


    The pre-flight test makes sure that the two channels of the stick pusher computer independently operate the stick
    shaker actuator and the stall warning tone. Then, together, they operate the stick pusher servo. When the stick
    pusher servo operates, the amber PUSHER message on the CAS display goes off.
    The stick pusher computer must receive all of these signals to do the pre-flight test:
    − Aircraft on ground
    − Engine torque more than 5 psi
    − PCL not set to IDLE
    − Flaps set to 15 degrees

    When the PUSHER switch is pressed and held in, the system goes through this sequence:
    − The green PUSHER ICE MODE caption on the MFD ICE PROTECTION window comes on
    − The stick shaker and audio stall warning operate for two seconds
    − The stick shaker and audio stall warning stop for one second
    − The stick shaker and audio stall warning operate for two seconds
    − The stick shaker and audio stall warning stop for one second
    − The stick pusher, stick shaker and audio stall warning operate for as long as the PUSHER switch is pressed
    − The green PUSHER ICE MODE caption on the MFD ICE PROTECTION window goes off when the stick
    pusher operates

    Note

    For aircraft MSN 1001 to 1180 post SB 45-003, and for aircraft MSN 1181 and higher, the audio stall warning is
    inhibited on the ground.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-05-11 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    During the pre-flight test, the pilot operates the PUSHER INTR switch (when the stick pusher operates) to make
    sure the stick pusher function is disabled.
    At the end of the sequence, the PUSHER switch is released and the amber PUSHER ICE MODE caption on the
    CAS display goes off.

    3.7.3 In-flight Test


    The in-flight test is not the same as the pre-flight test. The amber PUSHER caption on the CAS display must
    remain off and the stick pusher must not operate. The stick pusher computer must receive all of these signals to do
    the in-flight test:
    − Aircraft not on ground
    − Engine torque more than 5 psi
    − PCL not set to IDLE
    − Flaps set to any angle

    When the PUSHER switch is pressed and held in, the system goes through this sequence:
    − The green PUSHER ICE MODE caption on the MFD ICE PROTECTION window comes on
    − The stick shaker and audio stall warning operate for two seconds
    − The stick shaker and audio stall warning stop for one second
    − The stick shaker and audio stall warning operate for two seconds
    − The stick shaker and audio stall warning stop for one second
    − The stick shaker and audio stall warning operate for as long as the PUSHER switch is pressed

    At the end of the sequence, the PUSHER switch is released and the green PUSHER ICE MODE caption on the
    MFD ICE PROTECTION window goes off.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-05-11 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    AOA AOA
    ENGINE POWER PCL IDLE
    LH RH

    ENGINE
    WEIGHT ON RUNNING FLAP WEIGHT ON
    WHEEL LH SWITCH POSITION WHEEL RH
    60 PSI

    ESS BUS

    STALL WARN 1

    LH STICK PUSHER RH STICK PUSHER


    COMPUTER COMPUTER

    MAU
    MAIN BUS
    CH B
    STALL WARN 2
    PUSHER AOA
    RH COMP
    FAIL
    SYSTEM TEST STALL
    SWITCH
    MAU A/P CO PILOT PFD
    DISCONNECT
    CH A

    AOA
    CAS ICE
    LH COMP PROTECTION
    FAIL "OR" PUSHER
    PUSHER (SEE NOTE)
    AIR/GND PUSHER ICE
    SERVO FAIL MODE
    FAIL

    STICK SYSTEMS MFD


    SHAKER
    STALL

    PILOT PFD

    ICE MODE NOTE: "OR" - ACTIVATED BY


    AURAL STALL "AND" EITHER COMPUTER
    WARNING (SEE NOTE) "AND" - ACTIVATED BY
    PROP INERT BOTH COMPUTERS
    DEICE SEP
    ON OPEN
    G SWITCH COPILOT
    PILOT INTR
    INTR STICK PUSHER
    SWITCH
    SWITCH ACTUATOR
    ESS
    BUS
    PUSHER
    SYS
    PUSHER
    12-B-222000-A-S4080-01040-A-01-1
    SYS GND

    Figure 1 Stick Pusher System – Schematic

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-05-11 Page 9
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-05-11 Page 10


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    SPEED AND ATTITUDE CORRECTION

    ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Table of Contents Page

    SPEED AND ATTITUDE CORRECTION - ADJUSTMENT/TEST.............................................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 2
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 2
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 3
    6 Stick Pusher Operating Parameters....................................................................... 19

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Calibration Tool – Installation and Removal........................................................... 5


    2 Oil Pressure Switch Electrical Connector............................................................... 6
    3 Connect the Pressure Test Set.............................................................................. 7
    4 Servo and Capstan – Functional Test.................................................................... 28

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A GENERAL - AEROSPACE GROUND EQUIPMENT
    (AGE) AND TOOLS
    12-B-12-10-03-00A-902A-A ENGINE OIL - SERVICING
    12-B-22-20-02-00A-920A-A AOA TRANSMITTER - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-22-20-04-00A-920A-A STICK PUSHER SERVO - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-22-20-06-00A-920A-A STICK PUSHER CAPSTAN - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-25-10-03-00A-920A-A FLIGHT COMPARTMENT TRIM - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    12-B-27-30-00-00A-903A-A ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/
    TEST
    12-B-31-20-21-00A-920A-A FLIGHT TIME COUNTER - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-901A-A POWERPLANT - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-76-10-01-00A-903A-A POWER CONTROLS MICROSWITCHES -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-12 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required
    Left AOA transmitter calibration Part 513.22.12.055 As
    tool required
    Right AOA transmitter calibration Part 513.22.12.056 As
    tool required
    Maintenance Box Part 985.99.99.610 As
    required
    Pressure calibrator Part 990.00.00.839 As
    required
    Pitot Static test set Part 990.00.00.206 As
    required
    Gauge (0 to 150 lbf (0 to 68 kg)) Part 903.70.32.920 As
    required
    Nylon strap (For the control Part Local supply As
    wheel) required
    Jumper wire Part Local supply As
    required
    Laptop with FCWU Utility Part Local supply As
    software required
    Adaptor Part Local supply As
    required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Paper Part P02-031 As
    required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-12 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    1.1 Procedures
    This data module gives the procedures to do:
    − A check of the stick pusher system
    − A functional test of the stick pusher system.
    − A functional test of the stick pusher servo and capstan.
    1.2 Stick Pusher System
    Do the check of the stick pusher system to make sure the system is serviceable
    Do the functional test of the stick pusher system when:
    − A part of the stick pusher system is replaced
    − It is necessary to make sure the system is serviceable and calibrated.

    The functional test of the stick pusher system includes clearing the memory of the stick pusher
    computer at the start of the test. It has been found that this decreases out of tolerance test failures of
    the AOA transmitter and stick pusher computer. The Crew Alerting System (CAS) display is monitored
    during this procedure to make sure that the applicable captions come on and go off in the correct
    sequence.
    Table 6 gives the operating parameters for parts of the functional test.
    1.3 Stick Pusher Servo and Capstan
    Do the functional test of the stick pusher servo and capstan when:
    − A servo is replaced
    − A capstan is replaced.
    1.4 Troubleshooting
    Troubleshooting of the system can be done with a torque simulator to give an electrical torque signal
    to the system. The torque simulator must not be used to do the check and the functional test of the
    stick pusher system.
    2 Disconnect the Flight Time Counter
    2.1 Remove the left bulkhead, refer to AMM 12-B-25-10-03-00A-920A-A.
    2.2 Refer to AMM 12-B-31-20-21-00A-920A-A and disconnect wire D30A22N from the Flight Time
    Counter negative terminal.
    3 Connect the Flight Time Counter

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-12 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.1 Connect wire D30A22N to the Flight Time Counter negative terminal, refer to AMM 12-
    B-31-20-21-00A-920A-A.
    3.2 Install the left bulkhead, refer to AMM 12-B-25-10-03-00A-920A-A.
    4 Check of the Stick Pusher System
    4.1 Job Set Up
    4.1.1
    Note

    To identify the AGE and tools used in this procedure refer to the list of AGE and tools, refer
    to AMM 12-B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A.

    Open and install a safety clip (Safety clip (circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065))
    on this circuit breaker:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    4.1.2 Remove the protective covers from the AOA transmitters.
    4.1.3 Install the Left AOA transmitter calibration tool (Pt.No. 513.22.12.055) Ref. Fig. 1.
    4.1.3.1 On the AOA calibration tool Figure 1 [1], loosen the securing knob Figure 1 [7].
    4.1.3.2 Put the AOA calibration tool Figure 1 [1] on the left AOA transmitter Figure 1 [6],
    with the protractor scale Figure 1 [2] outboard, then slowly lower the AOA
    calibration tool onto the wing surface. Tighten the securing knob Figure 1 [7].
    4.1.3.3 Slowly turn the AOA transmitter vane Figure 1 [5] up and install the pointer
    Figure 1 [3] on the AOA transmitter vane Figure 1 [5].
    4.1.3.4 Measure the distance `A' between the AOA calibration tool Figure 1 [1] and the
    wing. Make sure the distance `A' is between 0.47 and 0.7 in (12 and 18 mm). If
    the distance is not correct, replace or refit the AOA transmitter, refer to AMM
    12-B-22-20-02-00A-920A-A.
    4.1.3.5 Set the pointer Figure 1 [3] to the zero position. Tighten the pointer securing
    knob Figure 1 [4].
    4.1.3.6 Do Step 4.1.3.1 thru Step 4.1.3.5 for the Right AOA transmitter calibration
    tool (Pt.No. 513.22.12.056).
    4.1.4 Open access panel 21 QZ.
    4.1.5 Connect the Maintenance Box (Pt.No. 985.99.99.610) to the Maintenance panel.
    4.1.6 Open the engine cowlings 42 AT and 43 AR.
    4.1.7 On the engine Ref. Fig. 2, disconnect the electrical connector S045P Figure 2 [2] from the oil
    pressure switch Figure 2 [1].
    4.1.8 Connect a Jumper wire (Pt.No. Local supply) between pins B and C of the connector S045P.
    4.1.9 Aircraft with Primus APEX Build 8 or higher. Remove the cover from the left pitot head
    and connect the pitot line of the Pitot Static test set (Pt.No. 990.00.00.206) to the left pitot
    head.
    4.1.10 In the flight compartment, open the PROP DE-ICE (LEFT POWER JUNCTION BOX) circuit
    breaker.
    4.1.11 Disconnect the Flight Time Counter as needed, refer to Para .
    4.1.12 Energize the aircraft electrical system, refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-12 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    1

    2
    3
    4

    6 A
    22121

    Figure 1 Calibration Tool – Installation and Removal

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-12 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    12-B-222000-A-S4080-01042-A-01-1

    Figure 2 Oil Pressure Switch Electrical Connector

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-12 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    A

    1
    3

    12-B-222000-A-S4080-01041-A-01-1

    Figure 3 Connect the Pressure Test Set

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-12 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    4.2 Procedure
    4.2.1 Set the PCL to MAX.
    4.2.2 Set the flaps to 15°.
    4.2.3 On the maintenance box, set the A/C - AIR/GND switch to AIR.
    4.2.4 Open these circuit breakers:
    − STALL WARN 1 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − STALL WARN 2 (MAIN BUS)
    4.2.5 Close these circuit breakers:
    − STALL WARN 1 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − STALL WARN 2 (MAIN BUS)
    4.2.6
    Note

    This sets the CAS PUSHER caution message to OFF.

    On the Maintenance Box, set the A/C - AIR/GND switch to GND.


    4.2.7 Make sure that after approximately 60 seconds the CAS PUSHER caution message is ON
    and a gong is heard.
    4.2.8 Set the PCL to the idle detent position.
    4.2.9 Make sure the CAS PUSHER caution message is OFF.
    4.2.10 Set the PCL to MAX.
    4.2.11 Make sure that after approximately 60 seconds, the CAS PUSHER caution message is ON
    and a gong is heard.
    4.2.12 Remove the jumper from electrical connector S045P pins B and C. Connect electrical
    connector S045P Figure 2 [2] to the oil pressure switch Figure 2 [1].
    4.2.13 Make sure the CAS PUSHER caution message is OFF.
    4.2.14 On the Maintenance Box, set the A/C - AIR/GND switch to AIR.
    4.2.15 Set the ICE PROTECTION - INERT SEP switch to OPEN.
    4.2.16 Set the ICE PROTECTION - PROPELLER switch to ON. The CAS amber PROPELLER DE
    ICE caution is ON after approximately 20 seconds.
    4.2.17 On the MFD display, make sure the green PUSHER ICE MODE caption is ON and stays ON
    through this procedure.
    4.2.18 Press and hold the OCP SYSTEM TEST STICK PUSHER button. Make sure that the
    following sequence occurs.
    4.2.18.1 On the CAS display, the PUSHER caution is OFF.
    4.2.18.2 The stick shaker actuator:
    − Operates and the audio stall warning comes on for 2 seconds
    − Stops and the audio stall warning goes off for 1 second
    − Operates and the audio stall warning comes on for 2 seconds
    − Stops and the audio stall warning goes off for 1 second
    − Operates and the audio stall warning comes on

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-12 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    4.2.18.3 The stick pusher servo does not operate.


    4.2.19 Release the SYSTEM TEST - STICK PUSHER button. Make sure:
    − The stick shaker actuator stops.
    − The audio stall warning goes off.
    − On the MFD display, the green PUSHER ICE MODE caption stays ON and the CAS
    amber PUSHER caution is OFF.
    4.2.20 Make sure the left and right AOA transmitter vanes are set to the pointer zero position.
    4.2.21 Set the flaps to 40°.
    4.2.22 Slowly move the left AOA transmitter vane up and make sure that at 31° (-2°/+1°)
    (increasing):
    − The stick shaker actuator starts to operate
    − The audio stall warning comes on.
    4.2.23 Set the left transmitter vane to the pointer zero position.
    4.2.24 Slowly move the right AOA transmitter vane up and make sure that at 31° (-2°/+1°)
    (increasing):
    − The stick shaker actuator starts to operate
    − The audio stall warning comes on.
    4.2.25 Set the right transmitter vane to the pointer zero position.
    4.2.26
    CAUTION

    DO NOT OPERATE THE STICK PUSHER ACTAUTOR FOR MORE THAN 5 SECONDS
    WHEN IT IS AT THE LIMIT STOP. OPERATION OF THE STICK PUSHER ACTUATOR
    FOR LONGER THAN 5 SECONDS WILL CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE STICK PUSHER
    ACTUATOR.

    Note

    Hold the control wheel firmly when the stick pusher engages.

    Move the right AOA transmitter vane to the fully up position. Make sure:
    − The stick shaker actuator operates
    − The audio stall warning comes on
    − After 3 seconds, the CAS PUSHER caution message is ON
    4.2.27 Slowly move the left AOA transmitter vane up and make sure that at 40° (-2°/+1°)
    (increasing):
    − The stick pusher servo operates
    − The PUSHER caution message goes OFF when the servo starts to operate.
    4.2.28 Slowly move the left AOA transmitter vane to the pointer zero position and make sure that at
    30° (-2°/+1°) (decreasing):
    − The stick pusher servo stops
    − The PUSHER caution message comes ON when the servo stops.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-12 Page 9


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    4.2.29 Move the right AOA transmitter vane to the pointer zero position. Make sure:
    − The audio stall warning goes off
    − The stick shaker actuator stops
    4.2.30 Aircraft with Primus APEX Build 7 or lower:
    4.2.30.1 Move the left AOA transmitter vane to 7° (-2°/+1°). Make sure the PFD Fast/
    Slow indicator on the ADI shows in the center position.
    4.2.30.2 Move the left AOA transmitter vane to 17° (-2°/+1°). Make sure the PFD Fast/
    Slow indicator on the ADI moves towards SLOW.
    4.2.30.3 Move the left AOA transmitter vane to -3° (-2°/+1°). Make sure the PFD Fast/
    Slow indicator on the ADI moves towards FAST.
    4.2.31 Aircraft with Primus APEX Build 8 or higher:
    4.2.31.1 Open the pitot valve on the pitot static test set and slowly increase pitot
    pressure until the pilot Primary Flight Display (PFD) airspeed indiction shows
    100 kts.
    4.2.31.2 Move the left AOA transmitter vane to 7° (-2°/+1°). Make sure the PFD Dynamic
    Speed Bug (DSB) on the ADI shows at 99 ±3 kts.
    4.2.31.3 Move the left AOA transmitter vane to 17° (-2°/+1°). Make sure the PFD
    Dynamic Speed Bug (DSB) on the ADI shows at 106 ±3 kts.
    4.2.31.4 Move the left AOA transmitter vane to -3° (-2°/+1°). Make sure the PFD
    Dynamic Speed Bug (DSB) on the ADI shows at 91 ±3 kts.
    4.2.32 Set the ICE PROTECTION - INERT SEP switch to CLOSED.
    4.2.33 Set the ICE PROTECTION - PROPELLER switch to OFF.
    4.2.34 On the MFD, make sure the green PUSHER ICE MODE caption is OFF.
    4.2.35 Aircraft with Primus APEX Build 7 or lower:
    4.2.35.1 Move the left AOA transmitter vane up to 15° (-2°/+1°). Make sure the PFD
    Fast/Slow indicator on the ADI shows in the center position.
    4.2.35.2 Move the left AOA transmitter vane up to 25° (-2°/+1°). Make sure the PFD
    Fast/Slow indicator on the ADI moves towards SLOW.
    4.2.35.3 Move the left AOA transmitter vane down to 5° (-2°/+1°). Make sure the PFD
    Fast/Slow indicator on the ADI moves towards FAST.
    4.2.36 Aircraft with Primus APEX Build 8 or higher:
    4.2.36.1 Move the left AOA transmitter vane to 15° (-2°/+1°). Make sure the PFD
    Dynamic Speed Bug (DSB) on the ADI shows at 99 ±3 kts.
    4.2.36.2 Move the left AOA transmitter vane to 25° (-2°/+1°). Make sure the PFD
    Dynamic Speed Bug (DSB) on the ADI shows at 107 ±3 kts.
    4.2.36.3 Move the left AOA transmitter vane to 5° (-2°/+1°). Make sure the PFD Dynamic
    Speed Bug (DSB) on the ADI shows at 91 ±3 kts.
    4.2.36.4 Slowly release the pitot pressure of the pitot static test set to ambient pressure.
    4.2.36.5 Disconnect the pitot static test set from the left pitot head.
    4.2.36.6 Install the protective cover on the left pitot head.
    4.2.36.7 Make sure that the left and right static ports are clear.
    4.3 Close Up

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-12 Page 10


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    4.3.1 Set the flaps to 0°.


    4.3.2 On the Maintenance Box, set the A/C - AIR/GND switch to the A/C position.
    4.3.3 Close the PROP DE-ICE (LEFT POWER JUNCTION BOX) circuit breaker in the flight
    compartment.
    4.3.4 De-energize the aircraft electrical system, refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    4.3.5 Disconnect the Maintenance box from the maintenance panel.
    4.3.6 Install access panel 21 QZ.
    4.3.7 Connect the Flight Time Counter as needed, refer to Para .
    4.3.8 Remove the left AOA calibration tool (Ref. Fig. 1).
    4.3.8.1 On the pointer Figure 1 [3] of the AOA calibration tool Figure 1 [1], loosen the
    pointer securing knob Figure 1 [4].
    4.3.8.2 Slowly turn the AOA transmitter vane Figure 1 [5] up and remove the pointer
    Figure 1 [3].
    4.3.8.3 Slowly turn the AOA transmitter vane Figure 1 [5] to 0°.
    4.3.8.4 On the AOA calibration tool Figure 1 [1], loosen the securing knob Figure 1 [7].
    4.3.8.5 Carefully lift and remove the AOA calibration tool Figure 1 [1] from the AOA
    transmitter Figure 1 [6].
    4.3.8.6 Do Step 4.3.8.1 thru Step 4.3.8.5 for the right AOA calibration tool.
    4.3.9 Remove the safety clip and close this circuit breaker:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    4.3.10 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    4.3.11 Close the engine cowlings 42 AT and 43 AR.
    4.3.12 Start the engine, refer to AMM 12-B-71-00-00-00A-901A-A and do the engine ground run.
    4.3.13 During the engine ground run do the following Steps to check the operation of the stick
    pusher system:
    4.3.13.1 Set the flaps to 15°.
    4.3.13.2 Push the PCL forward until 5 to 10 psi torque is reached.
    4.3.13.3 Operate the SYSTEM TEST - STICK PUSHER button on the overhead control
    panel. Make sure that the following sequence occurs:
    4.3.13.3.1 The stick shaker actuator:
    − Operates and the audio stall warning comes on for 2
    seconds.
    − Stops and the audio stall warning goes off for 1 second.
    − Operates and the audio stall warning comes on for 2
    seconds.
    − Stops and the audio stall warning goes off for 1 second.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-12 Page 11


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Note

    For aircraft MSN 1001 to 1180 post SB 45-003, and for aircraft
    MSN 1181 and higher, the audio stall warning is inhibited on
    the ground.

    4.3.13.3.2 The stick shaker actuator and pusher servo operates.


    4.3.13.4 Hold the control wheel until the stick pusher servo clutch engages. When the
    stick pusher servo operates, do the actions that follow:
    4.3.13.4.1 On the pilot control wheel, push the PUSHER INTR pushbutton
    and make sure:
    − The stick shaker actuator continues to operate.
    − The stick pusher servo stops.
    − The stick pusher servo clutch disengages.
    − On the CAS, the PUSHER caution message comes ON
    after 3 seconds.
    − The master caution comes ON.
    4.3.13.4.2
    Note

    In the next steps, the movement definitions are:


    − fast, half the full travel of the control wheel in pitch in
    approximately 0.3 seconds or less
    − gentle, full travel of the control wheel in pitch in
    approximately 1 to 2 seconds

    Note

    When you move the control column in the next steps, make
    sure that the control column moves freely. If you feel a
    restriction through the control column, investigate and rectify
    the cause.

    On the pilot control wheel, hold the PUSHER INTR pushbutton:


    − Pull back the control wheel fast once
    − Move the control wheel in pitch gently for ten seconds
    − Pull back the control wheel fast again
    4.3.13.4.3 On the pilot control wheel, release the PUSHER INTR
    pushbutton.
    4.3.13.4.4 On the pilot control wheel, press and hold the PUSHER INTR
    pushbutton:
    − Pull back the control wheel fast once
    − Move the control wheel in pitch gently for ten seconds

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-12 Page 12


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    4.3.13.4.5 On the pilot control wheel, release the PUSHER INTR


    pushbutton.
    4.3.13.5 Hold the control wheel until the stick pusher servo clutch engages. When the
    stick pusher servo operates, do the actions that follow:
    4.3.13.5.1 On the copilot control wheel, push the PUSHER INTR
    pushbutton and make sure:
    − The stick shaker actuator continues to operate.
    − The stick pusher servo stops.
    − The stick pusher servo clutch stays engaged.
    − On the CAS, the PUSHER caution message comes ON
    after 3 seconds.
    − The master caution comes ON.
    − The copilot’s control column can not be moved freely.
    4.3.13.5.2 On the copilot control wheel, release the PUSHER INTR
    pushbutton.
    4.3.14 Release the SYSTEM TEST - STICK PUSHER button. Make sure:
    − The stick pusher servo stops.
    − The stick shaker actuator stops.
    − On the CAS, the PUSHER caution message goes OFF.
    4.3.15 Make sure that the control wheel can be moved through the full travel in pitch.
    4.3.16 Stop the engine, refer to AMM 12-B-71-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    4.3.17 Install the protective covers on the AOA transmitters.
    5 Functional Test of the Stick Pusher System
    5.1 Job Set Up
    5.1.1
    Note

    A minimum of two persons are necessary for this test.

    Open and install a safety clip on this circuit breaker:


    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS).
    5.1.2 Remove the protective covers from the AOA transmitters.
    5.1.3 Install the left AOA calibration tool (Ref. Fig. 1).
    5.1.3.1 On the AOA calibration tool Figure 1 [1], loosen the securing knob Figure 1 [7].
    5.1.3.2 Put the AOA calibration tool Figure 1 [1] on the left AOA transmitter Figure 1 [6],
    with the protractor scale Figure 1 [2] outboard, then slowly lower the AOA
    calibration tool onto the wing surface. Tighten the securing knob Figure 1 [7].
    5.1.3.3 Slowly turn the AOA transmitter vane Figure 1 [5] up and install the pointer
    Figure 1 [3] on the AOA transmitter vane Figure 1 [5].
    5.1.3.4 Measure the distance `A' between the AOA calibration tool Figure 1 [1] and the
    wing. Make sure the distance `A' is between 0.47 and 0.7 in (12 and 18 mm). If
    the distance is not correct, replace the AOA transmitter, refer to AMM 12-
    B-22-20-02-00A-920A-A.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-12 Page 13


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    5.1.3.5 Set the pointer Figure 1 [3] to the zero position. Tighten the pointer securing
    knob Figure 1 [4].
    5.1.3.6 Do Step 5.1.3.1 thru Step 5.1.3.5 for the right AOA calibration tool.
    5.1.4 Aircraft with Primus APEX Build 8 or higher. Remove the cover from the left pitot head
    and connect the pitot line of the Pitot Static test set (Pt.No. 990.00.00.206) to the left pitot
    head.
    5.1.5 Open access panel 21 QZ.
    5.1.6 Connect the Maintenance Box (Pt.No. 985.99.99.610) to the maintenance panel.
    5.1.7 Open the engine cowlings 42 AT and 43 AR.
    5.1.8 Connect the pressure test-set:
    5.1.8.1 Put absorbent Paper (Pt.No. P02-031) on the engine below the elbow connector
    Figure 3 [1].
    5.1.8.2 Disconnect the torque pressure pipe Figure 3 [2] from the elbow connector
    Figure 3 [1].
    5.1.8.3 Use an Adaptor (Pt.No. Local supply) Figure 3 [4] to connect the pressure test-
    set Figure 3 [3] to the torque pressure pipe Figure 3 [2].
    5.1.9 Disconnect the Flight Time Counter as needed, refer to Para .
    5.1.10 Energize the aircraft electrical system, refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    5.1.11 On the audio control panel set the MIC SELECT control to COM 1.
    5.2 Normal Mode Procedure
    5.2.1
    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU OPERATE THE STICK SHAKER AND STICK PUSHER. MAKE
    SURE THE CONTROL WHEELS ARE CLEAR. INJURY TO PERSONS AND/OR DAMAGE
    TO EQUIPMENT CAN OCCUR.

    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU OPERATE THE FLAP CONTROLS. MAKE SURE THE FLAPS
    ARE CLEAR. INJURY TO PERSONS AND/OR DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT CAN OCCUR.

    Note

    Hold the control wheel in the neutral pitch position during the test of the stick pusher.

    Do this procedure to clear the memory of the stick pusher computer.


    5.2.1.1 Set the flaps to 0°.
    5.2.1.2 On the Maintenance Box, set the A/C - AIR/GND switch to GND.
    5.2.1.3 Open and install a safety clip (Safety clip (circuit breaker hold
    open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on these circuit breakers:
    − PUSHER SYS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − STALL WARN 1 (ESSENTAIL BUS)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-12 Page 14


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − STALL WARN 2 (MAIN BUS)


    5.2.1.4 Press and hold the SYSTEM TEST - STICK PUSHER button on the OCP.
    5.2.1.5 On the Maintenance Box:
    − insert the key in the STICK PUSHER SET 0 Lock and turn it to ENGAGE
    − push and hold the four LH AOA and RH AOA pushbuttons
    5.2.1.6 Remove the safety clip form the STALL WARN 1 (ESSENTIAL BUS) circuit
    breaker.
    5.2.1.7 Monitor the CAS window and close the STALL WARN 1 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    circuit breaker. Make sure:
    − after 2 seconds, the PUSHER caution message goes OFF for 1 second
    and then comes ON
    − when the PUSHER caution message comes ON, the MFD green PUSHER
    ICE MODE caption comes ON (and stays ON)
    5.2.1.8 On the Maintenance Box, release the four LH AOA and RH AOA pushbuttons.
    5.2.1.9 Release the SYSTEM TEST - STICK PUSHER button on the OCP.
    5.2.1.10 On the Maintenance Box, turn the key in the STICK PUSHER SET 0 Lock to
    OFF.
    5.2.1.11 Make sure that:
    − the CAS PUSHER caution message is ON
    − the MFD green PUSHER ICE MODE caption is OFF
    5.2.1.12
    Note

    The memory of the stick pusher computer is now clear.

    Remove the safety clip and close these circuit breakers:


    − PUSHER SYS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − STALL WARN 2 (MAIN BUS)
    5.2.2 Set the flaps to 30°.
    5.2.3 Make sure the left and right AOA transmitter vanes are at 0°.
    5.2.4 On the Maintenance Box do the AOA set zero LH and RH procedure as follows:
    5.2.4.1 Make sure the key in the ‛Stick Pusher set 0’ lock is set to the ENGAGE
    position.
    5.2.4.2 Push and hold the two LH AOA pushbuttons. Make sure that the stick shaker
    actuator operates for 2 seconds.
    5.2.4.3 Release the two LH AOA pushbuttons. Push and hold the two RH AOA
    pushbuttons. Make sure that the stick shaker actuator operates for 2 seconds.
    5.2.4.4 Release the two RH AOA pushbuttons.
    5.2.4.5 Turn the key in the ‛Stick Pusher set 0’ lock to the OFF position and remove the
    key.
    5.2.5 Set the flaps to 15°.
    5.2.6 Disconnect the electrical connector Figure 2 [2] from the oil pressure switch Figure 2 [1].

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-12 Page 15


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    5.2.7 Connect a Jumper wire (Pt.No. Local supply) between pins B and C of the oil pressure
    switch electrical connector Figure 2 [2].
    5.2.8 Set the PCL to MAX.
    5.2.9 On the pressure test-set, slowly increase the pressure to 5 psi (0,3 bar).
    5.2.10 Open then close these circuit breakers:
    − STALL WARN 1 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − STALL WARN 2 (MAIN BUS)
    5.2.11 On the CAS display make sure that the PUSHER caution message is ON.
    5.2.12 Open this circuit breaker:
    − STALL WARN 2 (MAIN BUS)
    5.2.13 Hold the control wheel in the neutral pitch position. Press and hold the SYSTEM TEST -
    STICK PUSHER button. Make sure that:
    − On the MFD display, the PUSHER ICE MODE caption comes ON
    − The stick shaker actuator operates and the audio stall warning comes on for 2 seconds
    − The stick shaker actuator stops and the audio stall warning goes off for 1 second
    − The stick shaker actuator operates and the audio stall warning comes on for 2 seconds
    − The stick shaker actuator stops and the audio stall warning goes off for 1 second
    − The stick shaker actuator operates and the audio stall warning comes on
    − The stick pusher servo operates and the audio stall warning is on
    − On the CAS display the PUSHER caution message goes OFF.

    Note

    For aircraft MSN 1001 to 1180 post SB 45-003, and for aircraft MSN 1181 and higher, the
    audio stall warning is inhibited on the ground.

    5.2.14 Release the SYSTEM TEST - STICK PUSHER button. Make sure that:
    − The stick shaker actuator stops
    − The stick pusher servo stops
    − On the MFD display, the PUSHER ICE MODE caption goes OFF
    − On the CAS display, the PUSHER caution message stays OFF.
    5.2.15 Close this circuit breaker:
    − STALL WARN 2 (MAIN BUS)
    5.2.16 Open this circuit breaker:
    − STALL WARN 1 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    5.2.17 Do Step 5.2.13 and Step 5.2.14 again.
    5.2.18 Close this circuit breaker:
    − STALL WARN 1 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    5.2.19 On the pressure test-set, slowly decrease the pressure to 0 psi (0 bar).
    5.2.20 On the CAS display make sure that after 60 seconds the PUSHER caution message is ON.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-12 Page 16


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    5.2.21 Slowly move the PCL rearwards until the PUSHER caution message goes OFF.
    5.2.22 Mark the PCL position on the center console.
    5.2.23 Set the PCL to the idle detent position.
    5.2.24 Mark the PCL position on the center console.
    5.2.25 Make sure that the distance between the marks in Step 5.2.22 and Step 5.2.24 is between
    0.3 and 0.4 in (8 and 10 mm).
    5.2.26 If necessary, do the adjustment of the PCL microswitch, refer to AMM 12-
    B-76-10-01-00A-903A-A.
    5.2.27 On the pressure test-set, slowly increase the pressure to 5 psi (0,3 bar).
    5.2.28 Set the PCL to MAX.
    5.2.29 Press and hold the SYSTEM TEST - STICK PUSHER button on the OCP to start the test
    sequence (same as Step 5.2.13).
    5.2.30 When the stick pusher servo operates, on the pilot control wheel push the PUSHER INTR
    pushbutton. Make sure that:
    − The stick shaker actuator does not stop
    − The stick pusher servo stops
    − On the CAS display, after 3 seconds the PUSHER caution message comes ON.
    − The master caution comes ON.
    − The control column can be moved freely.
    5.2.31 Release the SYSTEM TEST - STICK PUSHER button and the PUSHER INTR pushbutton.
    5.2.32 Press and hold the SYSTEM TEST - STICK PUSHER button on the OCP to start the test
    sequence (same as Step 5.2.13).
    5.2.33 When the stick pusher servo operates, on the copilot control wheel push the PUSHER INTR
    pushbutton. Make sure that:
    − The stick shaker actuator does not stop
    − The stick pusher servo stops
    − On the CAS display, after 3 seconds the PUSHER caution message comes ON.
    − The master caution comes ON.
    − The control column can be moved when force is applied.
    5.2.34 Release the SYSTEM TEST - STICK PUSHER button and the PUSHER INTR pushbutton.
    5.2.35 On the MFD, make sure that the PUSHER ICE MODE caption is OFF.
    5.2.36 On the Maintenance Box, set the A/C - AIR/GND switch to AIR.
    5.2.37 Do the AOA transmitter vane input tests with reference to Table 6 that follows. The operating
    parameters for each test are given. Do each test as shown in the Steps that follow:
    5.2.37.1 Set the pressure test-set to give the Torque Setting for the test in the applicable
    table.
    5.2.37.2 Simulate the Engine Condition as applicable for the test by connecting or
    disconnecting the oil pressure switch (Ref. NOTE on the applicable table).
    5.2.37.3 Set the Flaps Setting as shown in the applicable table for the test.
    5.2.37.4 Make sure the left and right AOA transmitter vanes are at 0°.
    5.2.38 Slowly move the left AOA transmitter vane:

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-12 Page 17


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    5.2.38.1 Up and make sure that the stick shaker actuator starts to operate at the Shaker
    ON (increasing) position given for the test. At the same time, make sure:
    − The audio stall warning comes on
    − The stick pusher servo does not operate.
    5.2.38.2 Down to the pointer zero position and make sure that the stick shaker actuator
    stops at the Shaker OFF (decreasing) position given for the test. At the same
    time, make sure:
    − The audio stall warning goes off.
    5.2.39 Slowly move the right AOA transmitter vane:
    5.2.39.1 Up and make sure that the stick shaker actuator starts to operate at the Shaker
    ON (increasing) position given for the test. At the same time, make sure:
    − The audio stall warning comes on
    − The stick pusher servo does not operate.
    5.2.39.2 Down to the pointer zero position and make sure that the stick shaker actuator
    stops at the Shaker OFF (decreasing) position given for the test. At the same
    time, make sure:
    − The audio stall warning goes off.
    5.2.40 Move the left AOA transmitter vane to the fully up position. Make sure that:
    − The stick shaker actuator operates
    − The audio stall warning comes on.

    Note

    When one AOA transmitter vane is moved into the pusher range, the PUSHER caption
    message on the CAS display.

    5.2.41
    CAUTION

    DO NOT OPERATE THE STICK PUSHER ACTUATOR FOR MORE THAN 5 SECONDS
    WHEN IT IS AT THE LIMIT STOP.

    Slowly move the right AOA transmitter vane:


    5.2.41.1 Up and make sure that the stick pusher servo starts to operate at the Pusher
    ON (increasing) position given for the test. At the same time, make sure:
    − The CAS PUSHER caution message goes OFF when the servo starts to
    operate.
    5.2.41.2 Down to the pointer zero position and make sure that the stick pusher servo
    stops at the Pusher OFF (decreasing) position given for the test. At the same
    time, make sure:
    − The CAS PUSHER caution message comes ON when the servo stops.
    5.2.42 Move the left AOA transmitter vane to the pointer zero position. Make sure that:
    − The audio stall warning goes off
    − The stick shaker actuator stops.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-12 Page 18


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    5.2.43 Move the right AOA transmitter vane to the fully up position. Make sure that:
    − The stick shaker actuator operates
    − The audio stall warning comes on
    − The stick pusher servo clutch engages.

    Note

    Force is necessary to move the control wheel in pitch when the stick pusher servo clutch is
    engaged.

    5.2.44
    CAUTION

    DO NOT OPERATE THE STICK PUSHER ACTUATOR FOR MORE THAN 5 SECONDS
    WHEN IT IS AT THE LIMIT STOP.

    Slowly move the left AOA transmitter vane:


    5.2.44.1 Up and make sure that the stick pusher servo starts to operate at the Pusher
    ON (increasing) position given for the test. At the same time, make sure:
    − The CAS PUSHER caution message goes OFF when the servo starts to
    operate.
    5.2.44.2 Down to the pointer zero position and make sure that the stick pusher servo
    stops at the Pusher OFF (decreasing) position given for the test. At the same
    time, make sure:
    − The CAS PUSHER caution message comes ON when the servo stops.
    5.2.45 Move the right AOA transmitter vane to the pointer zero position. Make sure that:
    − The audio stall warning goes off
    − The stick shaker actuator stops
    − The stick pusher servo clutch disengages.

    Table 6 Stick Pusher Operating Parameters


    NORMAL MODE
    Test Procedure Torque Engine Flaps Shaker ON Shaker PusherON Pusher
    (NOTE 6) Condition Setting (inc) (-2°/ OFF (dec) (inc) (-2°/ OFF (dec)
    Setting +1°) (-2°/+1°) +1°) (-2°/+1°)
    (NOTE 8 and
    (NOTE 7) 9)
    Test 1 (NOTE 0 Not Running 40° 39° 39° 48° 38°
    10)
    Test 2 5 psi (0,35 bar) Running 0° 34° 34° 39° 29°
    Test 3 5 psi (0,35 bar) Running 15° 35° 35° 43° 33°
    Test 4 5 psi (0,35 bar) Running 30° 38° 38° 46° 36°
    Test 5 20 psi (1,38 Running 40° 35° 35° 44° 34°
    bar)
    Test 6 40 psi (2,76 Running 40° 31° 31° 40° 30°
    bar)
    ICE MODE

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-12 Page 19


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Test Procedure Torque Engine Flaps Shaker ON Shaker PusherON Pusher


    (NOTE 11) Condition Setting (inc) (-2°/ OFF (dec) (inc) (-2°/ OFF (dec)
    Setting +1°) (-2°/+1°) +1°) (-2°/+1°)
    (NOTE 8)
    (NOTE 7)
    Test 7 40 psi (2,76 Running 40° 23° 23° 32° 22°
    bar)

    NOTE: 6. Ref. Normal Mode Procedure, Step 5.2.37 thru Step 5.2.45.
    NOTE: 7. Use a pressure test-set connected to the torque transducer (Ref. Fig. 3).
    NOTE: 8. Disconnect the connector on the oil pressure switch to simulate ‛engine running’ (Ref. Fig. 2).
    Connect a jumper wire between pins B and C of the connector.
    NOTE: 9. Connect the connector on the oil pressure switch to simulate ‛engine not running’ (Ref. Fig. 2).
    NOTE: 10. Reset the AOA transmitter if the shaker/pusher operates between +1° and +1.5° of the set value.
    Ref. Para. 3. C. Normal Mode Procedure, Step 5.2.49.
    NOTE: 11. Ref. Para. 3. D. Ice Mode Procedure, Step 5.3.17 thru Step 5.3.31.
    5.2.46 Do Step 5.2.37 thru Step 5.2.45 for all the NORMAL MODE Test positions shown on the
    applicable Table. If the shaker/pusher operation is within tolerance (-2°/+1°) at each Test
    position, go to Step 5.2.47 or Step 5.2.48 as applicable.
    5.2.47 For Tests 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 only; if the shaker/pusher operation is outside the tolerance (-2°/
    +1°), replace the applicable AOA transmitter, refer to AMM 12-B-22-20-02-00A-920A-A.
    5.2.48 For Test 1 only (Torque Setting 0 psi / Engine Not Running / Flaps Setting 40°); if the shaker/
    pusher operation is outside the tolerance (-2°/+1°) but operates between +1° and +1.5° of
    the set value, do the reset procedure in Step 5.2.49.
    5.2.49 Do this reset procedure only for the conditions shown in Test 3 or Step 5.2.48 Test 1 as
    follows:
    5.2.49.1 Set the AOA transmitter vane, which you are testing at the moment, to -0.5° on
    the protractor of the calibration tool and the other AOA transmitter vane to 0.0°.
    5.2.49.2 Do a stick pusher set 0 as described in Step 5.2.2 thru Step 5.2.5 above but
    with the AOA transmitter vanes set to the angles as shown in Step 5.2.49.1
    above.
    5.2.49.3 Do the AOA transmitter vane input tests again at all flap angles and torque
    settings, as described in Step 5.2.37 thru Step 5.2.46 above.
    5.2.49.4 If the AOA transmitter still does not meet these criteria, replace the AOA
    transmitter, refer to AMM 12-B-22-20-02-00A-920A-A.
    5.2.50 Set the flaps to 40°.
    5.2.51 Slowly increase the pressure in the pressure test-set to 35 psi ±5 psi (2,4 bar ±0,3 bar).
    5.2.52 Aircraft with Primus APEX Build 7 or lower:
    5.2.52.1 Slowly move the left AOA transmitter vane up to 15° (-2°/+1°). Make sure that
    on the PFD ADI the Fast/Slow indicator shows in the center position.
    5.2.52.2 Slowly move the left AOA transmitter vane up to 25° (-2°/+1°). Make sure that
    on the PFD ADI the Fast/Slow indicator goes towards SLOW.
    5.2.52.3 Slowly move the left AOA transmitter vane down to 5° (-2°/+1°). Make sure that
    on the PFD ADI the Fast/Slow indicator goes towards FAST.
    5.2.53 Aircraft with Primus APEX Build 8 or higher:
    5.2.53.1 Open the pitot valve on the pitot static test set and slowly increase pitot
    pressure until the pilot Primary Flight Display (PFD) airspeed indiction shows
    100 kts.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-12 Page 20


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    5.2.53.2 Move the left AOA transmitter vane to 15° (-2°/+1°). Make sure the PFD
    Dynamic Speed Bug (DSB) on the ADI shows at 105 ±3 kts.
    5.2.53.3 Move the left AOA transmitter vane to 25° (-2°/+1°). Make sure the PFD
    Dynamic Speed Bug (DSB) on the ADI shows at 112 ±3 kts.
    5.2.53.4 Move the left AOA transmitter vane to 5° (-2°/+1°). Make sure the PFD Dynamic
    Speed Bug (DSB) on the ADI shows at 98 ±3 kts.
    5.3 Ice Mode Procedure
    5.3.1 Open the PROP DE-ICE circuit breaker (LEFT POWER JUNCTION BOX) in the flight
    compartment.
    5.3.2 On the Maintenance Box, set the A/C - AIR/GND switch to GND.
    5.3.3 Open these circuit breakers:
    − STALL WARN 1 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − STALL WARN 2 (MAIN BUS)
    5.3.4 Close these circuit breakers:
    − STALL WARN 1 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − STALL WARN 2 (MAIN BUS)
    5.3.5 Set the flaps to 15°.
    5.3.6 Set the PCL to the MAX position.
    5.3.7 Disconnect the electrical connector S045P Figure 2 [2] from the oil pressure switch
    Figure 2 [1]. Install a Jumper wire (Pt.No. Local supply) between pins B and C of the
    connector.
    5.3.8 Set the pressure in the pressure test-set to 5 psi (0,3 bar).
    5.3.9 Set the ICE PROTECTION - INERT SEP switch to OPEN.
    5.3.10 Set the ICE PROTECTION - PROPELLER switch to ON.
    5.3.11 On the MFD, make sure the green PUSHER ICE MODE caption is ON.
    5.3.12 Press and hold the SYSTEM TEST - STICK PUSHER button on the OCP. Make sure that:
    − On the CAS, the PUSHER caution message is ON
    − The MFD green PUSHER ICE MODE caption is ON
    − The stick shaker actuator operates and the audio stall warning comes on for 2 seconds
    − The stick shaker actuator stops and the audio stall warning goes off for 1 second
    − The stick shaker actuator operates and the audio stall warning comes on for 2 seconds
    − The stick shaker actuator stops and the audio stall warning goes off for 1 second
    − The stick shaker actuator operates and the audio stall warning comes on
    − The stick pusher servo operates and the audio stall warning is on
    − On the CAS the PUSHER caution message goes OFF
    − On the MFD, the PUSHER ICE MODE caption stays ON during the whole procedure.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-12 Page 21


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Note

    For aircraft MSN 1001 to 1180 post SB 45-003, and for aircraft MSN 1181 and higher, the
    audio stall warning is inhibited on the ground.

    5.3.13 Release the SYSTEM TEST - STICK PUSHER button. Make sure that:
    − The stick shaker actuator stops
    − The stick pusher servo stops
    − On the MFD, the green PUSHER ICE MODE caption stays ON
    − On the CAS, the PUSHER caution message is OFF
    5.3.14 On the Maintenance Box, set the A/C - AIR/GND switch to AIR.
    5.3.15 Press and hold the SYSTEM TEST - STICK PUSHER button on the OCP. Make sure that:
    − On the CAS, the PUSHER caution message stays OFF
    − The stick shaker actuator operates and the audio stall warning comes on for 2 seconds
    − The stick shaker actuator stops and the audio stall warning goes off for 1 second
    − The stick shaker actuator operates and the audio stall warning comes on for 2 seconds
    − The stick shaker actuator stops and the audio stall warning goes off for 1 second
    − The stick shaker actuator operates and the audio stall warning comes on
    − The stick pusher servo does not operate
    − On the MFD, the PUSHER ICE MODE caption stays ON during the whole procedure.
    5.3.16 Release the SYSTEM TEST - STICK PUSHER button. Make sure that:
    − The stick shaker actuator stops
    − On the CAS, the PUSHER ICE MODE caution message stays ON
    5.3.17 Make sure the left and right AOA transmitter vanes are set to the pointer zero position.
    5.3.18 Set the flaps to 40°.
    5.3.19 On the pressure test-set, slowly increase the pressure to 40 psi (2,76 bar).
    5.3.20 Slowly move the left AOA transmitter vane up and make sure that at 23° (-2°/+1°)
    (increasing):
    − The stick shaker actuator starts to operate
    − The audio stall warning comes on
    − The stick pusher servo does not operate.
    5.3.21 Set the left AOA transmitter vane to the pointer zero position.
    5.3.22 Slowly move the right AOA transmitter vane up and make sure that at 23° (-2°/+1°)
    (increasing):
    − The stick shaker actuator operates
    − The audio stall warning comes on
    − The stick pusher servo does not operate.
    5.3.23 Set the right AOA transmitter vane to the pointer zero position.
    5.3.24 Move the left AOA transmitter vane to the fully up position. Make sure that:

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-12 Page 22


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − The stick shaker actuator operates


    − The audio stall warning comes on.

    Note

    When one AOA transmitter vane is moved into the pusher range, the PUSHER caption on
    the CAS display unit and the warning gong will come on after 3 seconds.

    5.3.25
    CAUTION

    DO NOT OPERATE THE STICK PUSHER ACTUATOR FOR MORE THAN 5 SECONDS
    WHEN IT IS AT THE LIMIT STOP.

    Slowly move the right AOA transmitter vane up and make sure that at 32° (-2°/+1°)
    (increasing):
    − The stick pusher servo operates
    − The CAS PUSHER caution message goes OFF when the servo starts to operate.
    5.3.26 Slowly move the right AOA transmitter vane to the pointer zero position and make sure that
    at 22° (-2°/+1°) (decreasing):
    − The stick pusher servo stops
    − The CAS PUSHER caution message comes ON when the servo stops.
    5.3.27 Move the left AOA transmitter vane to the pointer zero position. Make sure that:
    − The audio stall warning goes off
    − The stick shaker actuator stops.
    − The CAS PUSHER caution message goes OFF.
    5.3.28 Move the right AOA transmitter vane to the fully up position. Make sure that:
    − The stick shaker actuator operates
    − The audio stall warning comes on
    − The stick pusher servo clutch engages.
    5.3.29 Slowly move the left AOA transmitter vane up and make sure that at 32° (-2°/+1°)
    (increasing):
    − The stick pusher servo operates
    − The CAS PUSHER caution message goes OFF when the servo starts to operate.
    5.3.30 Slowly move the left AOA transmitter vane to the pointer zero position and make sure that at
    22° (-2°/+1°) (decreasing):
    − The stick pusher servo stops
    − The CAS PUSHER caution message comes ON when the servo stops.
    5.3.31 Move the right AOA transmitter vane to the pointer zero position. Make sure that:
    − The audio stall warning goes off
    − The stick shaker actuator stops
    − The stick pusher servo clutch disengages
    − The CAS PUSHER caution message goes OFF.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-12 Page 23


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Note

    Force is necessary to move the control wheel in pitch when the stick pusher servo clutch is
    engaged.

    5.3.32 Slowly increase the pressure in the pressure test-set to 35 psi ±5 psi (2,4 bar ±0,3 bar).
    5.3.33 Aircraft with Primus APEX Build 7 or lower:
    5.3.33.1 Move the left AOA transmitter vane to 7° (-2°/+1°). Make sure that on the PFD
    ADI, the Fast/Slow indicator shows in the center position.
    5.3.33.2 Move the left AOA transmitter vane to 17° (-2°/+1°). Make sure that on the PFD
    ADI, the Fast/Slow indicator goes towards SLOW.
    5.3.33.3 Move the left AOA transmitter vane to -3° (-2°/+1°). Make sure that on the PFD
    ADI, the Fast/Slow indicator goes towards FAST.
    5.3.34 Aircraft with Primus APEX Build 8 or higher:
    5.3.34.1 Open the pitot valve on the pitot static test set and slowly increase pitot
    pressure until the pilot Primary Flight Display (PFD) airspeed indiction shows
    100 kts.
    5.3.34.2 Move the left AOA transmitter vane to 7° (-2°/+1°). Make sure the PFD Dynamic
    Speed Bug (DSB) on the ADI shows at 105 ±3 kts.
    5.3.34.3 Move the left AOA transmitter vane to 17° (-2°/+1°). Make sure the PFD
    Dynamic Speed Bug (DSB) on the ADI shows at 112 ±3 kts.
    5.3.34.4 Move the left AOA transmitter vane to -3° (-2°/+1°). Make sure the PFD
    Dynamic Speed Bug (DSB) on the ADI shows at 98 ±3 kts.
    5.3.34.5 Slowly release the pitot pressure of the pitot static test set to ambient pressure.
    5.3.34.6 Disconnect the pitot static test set from the left pitot head.
    5.3.34.7 Install the protective cover on the left pitot head.
    5.3.34.8 Make sure that the left and right static ports are clear.
    5.4 Close Up
    5.4.1 Set the flaps to 0°.
    5.4.2 On the Maintenance Box, set the A/C - AIR/GND switch to the A/C position.
    5.4.3 Set the PCL to the idle detent position.
    5.4.4 Make sure that the control wheel can be moved through the full travel in pitch.
    5.4.5 Set the pressure in the pressure test-set to zero.
    5.4.6 Set the ICE PROTECTION - INERT SEP switch to CLOSED.
    5.4.7 Set the ICE PROTECTION - PROPELLER switch to OFF.
    5.4.8 Close the PROP DE-ICE circuit breaker (LEFT POWER JUNCTION BOX) in the flight
    compartment.
    5.4.9 De-energize the aircraft electrical system, refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    5.4.10 Disconnect the pressure test-set:
    5.4.10.1 Disconnect the pressure test-set Figure 3 [3] from the torque pressure pipe
    Figure 3 [2].
    5.4.10.2 Remove the adaptor Figure 3 [4] from the torque pressure pipe Figure 3 [2].

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-12 Page 24


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    5.4.10.3 Connect the torque pressure pipe Figure 3 [2] to the elbow connector
    Figure 3 [1].
    5.4.11 Remove the jumper wire from the oil pressure switch electrical connector Figure 2 [2] pins B
    and C.
    5.4.12 Connect the electrical connector Figure 2 [2] to the oil pressure switch Figure 2 [1].
    5.4.13 Remove the absorbent paper from the engine.
    5.4.14 Close the engine cowlings 42 AT and 43 AR.
    5.4.15 Disconnect the Maintenance Box from the maintenance panel.
    5.4.16 Install access panel 21 QZ.
    5.4.17 Connect the Flight Time Counter as needed, refer to Para .
    5.4.18 Remove the left AOA calibration tool (Ref. Fig. 1).
    5.4.18.1 On the pointer Figure 1 [3] of the AOA calibration tool Figure 1 [1], loosen the
    pointer securing knob Figure 1 [4].
    5.4.18.2 Slowly turn the AOA transmitter vane Figure 1 [5] up and remove the pointer
    Figure 1 [3].
    5.4.18.3 Slowly turn the AOA transmitter vane Figure 1 [5] to 0°.
    5.4.18.4 On the AOA calibration tool Figure 1 [1], loosen the securing knob Figure 1 [7].
    5.4.18.5 Carefully lift and remove the AOA calibration tool Figure 1 [1] from the AOA
    transmitter Figure 1 [6].
    5.4.18.6 Do Step 5.4.18 again for the right AOA calibration tool.
    5.4.19 Remove the safety clip and close this circuit breaker:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    5.4.20 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    5.4.21 Start the engine, refer to AMM 12-B-71-00-00-00A-901A-A and operate the engine at ground
    idle for five minutes.
    5.4.22 Stop the engine, refer to AMM 12-B-71-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    5.4.23 Open and install safety clips on this circuit breaker:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS).
    5.4.24 Open the engine cowling 43 AR.
    5.4.25 Look for leaks around the torque transducer. No leaks are permitted.
    5.4.26 Make sure the engine oil level is correct, refer to AMM. 12-B-12-10-03-00A-902A-A.
    5.4.27 Close the engine cowling 43 AR.
    5.4.28 Remove the safety clip and close this circuit breaker:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS).
    5.4.29 Install the protective covers on the AOA transmitters.
    6 Functional Test of the Stick Pusher Servo and Capstan
    6.1 Job Set Up

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-12 Page 25


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    6.1.1
    Note

    Two persons are necessary for this test.

    Open access panel 21 QZ and connect the Maintenance Box to the maintenance panel.
    6.1.2 Make sure the tension of the elevator cable is correct, refer to AMM 12-
    B-27-30-00-00A-903A-A.
    6.1.3 Make sure the tension of the stick pusher cable is correct, refer to AMM 12-
    B-27-30-00-00A-903A-A.

    Note

    Incorrect cable tension will give incorrect pusher force readings.

    6.1.4 On the Maintenance Box, set the A/C - AIR/GND switch to GND.
    6.1.5 Move the left and right AOA transmitter vanes to the fully up position. Hold the vanes in this
    position with masking tape.
    6.2 Procedure
    6.2.1 Move the pilot control wheel Figure 4 [1] 210 mm rearward (¾ of full travel) from the fully
    forward position and make a mark Figure 4 [4] on the control column Figure 4 [5].
    6.2.2 Energize the aircraft electrical system, refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    6.2.3 Install the strap (Nylon strap (For the control wheel) (Pt.No. Local supply)) Figure 4 [3]
    around the pilot control wheel Figure 4 [1].
    6.2.4 Set the spring balance Figure 4 [2] to zero and attach to the nylon strap Figure 4 [3].
    6.2.5 Move the control wheel Figure 4 [1] and spring balance Figure 4 [2] rearwards to the mark
    Figure 4 [4] on the control column Figure 4 [5] and hold.
    6.2.6
    CAUTION

    DO NOT OPERATE THE STICK PUSHER ACTUATOR FOR MORE THAN 5 SECONDS
    WHEN IT IS AT THE LIMIT STOP.

    On the Maintenance Box, set the A/C - AIR/GND switch to AIR.


    6.2.7 After 5 seconds when the pusher operates:
    − Make a note of the indication on the spring balance
    − Slowly release the control wheel
    − On the Maintenance Box, set the A/C - AIR/GND switch to GND.
    6.2.8 The pusher pull force should be between 56 and 72 lbf (250 and 320 N).
    6.2.9 If the force is not correct, replace the stick pusher servo, refer to AMM 12-
    B-22-20-04-00A-920A-A.
    6.2.10 Move the control wheel and spring balance rearwards to the mark on the control column and
    hold.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-12 Page 26


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    6.2.11
    CAUTION

    DO NOT OPERATE THE STICK PUSHER ACTUATOR FOR MORE THAN 5 SECONDS
    WHEN IT IS AT THE LIMIT STOP.

    On the Maintenance Box, set the A/C - AIR/GND switch to AIR.


    6.2.12 After 5 seconds when the pusher operates:
    − Pull the spring balance against the stick pusher force to make the capstan clutch slip (a
    ratchet noise will be heard)
    − Make a note of the indication on the spring balance
    − Slowly release the control wheel
    − On the Maintenance Box, set the A/C - AIR/GND switch to GND.
    6.2.13 Make sure the clutch slip force is between 72 and 92 lbf (320 and 410 N). If the force is not
    correct, replace the stick pusher capstan, refer to AMM 12-B-22-20-06-00A-920A-A.
    6.3 Close Up
    6.3.1 De-energize the aircraft electrical system, refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    6.3.2 Remove the spring balance Figure 4 [2] and nylon strap Figure 4 [3] from the control wheel
    Figure 4 [1].
    6.3.3 Disconnect and remove the Maintenance Box.
    6.3.4 Close the access panel 21 QZ.
    6.3.5 Remove the masking tape from the left and right AOA transmitter vanes.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-12 Page 27


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    4 5

    mm
    210

    2
    22130

    Figure 4 Servo and Capstan – Functional Test

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-12 Page 28


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-12 Page 29
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-12 Page 30


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    STICK PUSHER COMPUTER

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    STICK PUSHER COMPUTER - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Stick Pusher Computer – Removal/Installation...................................................... 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A SPEED AND ATTITUDE CORRECTION -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A STANDARD CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-18 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    When the stick pusher computer is replaced or when the circuit to it has been broken, a test must be done to
    make sure the system operates correctly (refer to AMM 12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A).
    2 Removal
    2.1 Open and install a Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065) on these circuit
    breakers:
    − STALL WARN 1 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − STALL WARN 2 (MAIN BUS)
    − PUSHER SYS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    2.2 Remove the center carpet:
    − for executive interior, refer to AMM12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − for standard interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A
    2.3 Open the access panel 11 DZ.
    2.4 Disconnect three electrical connectors Figure 1 [2], Figure 1 [3], and Figure 1 [4] from the stick pusher
    computer Figure 1 [7].
    2.5 Hold the stick pusher computer Figure 1 [7] and remove the top two screws Figure 1 [5] and washers
    Figure 1 [6]. Loosen the inboard bottom screw Figure 1 [5].
    2.6 Slide the stick pusher computer Figure 1 [7] up and remove it from the aircraft.
    3 Installation
    3.1 Clean the static bonding point Figure 1 [1].
    3.2 Slide the stick pusher computer Figure 1 [7] into position and install the top two screws Figure 1 [5]
    and washers Figure 1 [6]. Tighten the inboard lower screw and the top two screws Figure 1 [5].
    3.3 Connect the three electrical connectors Figure 1 [2], Figure 1 [3], and Figure 1 [4] to the stick pusher
    computer Figure 1 [7].
    3.4 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − STALL WARN 1 (ESSENTIAL BUS)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-18 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − STALL WARN 2 (MAIN BUS)


    − PUSHER SYS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    3.5 Make sure the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.6 Do the functional test of the stick pusher system (refer to AMM 12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A).
    3.7 Close the access panel 11 DZ.
    3.8 Install the center carpet:
    − for executive interior, refer to AMM12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − for standard interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-18 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2
    3

    B
    4

    A
    22107

    Figure 1 Stick Pusher Computer – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-18 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-01-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-18 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-18 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    AOA TRANSMITTER

    INSPECTION/CHECK

    Table of Contents Page

    AOA TRANSMITTER - INSPECTION/CHECK........................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-22-20-02-00A-920A-A AOA TRANSMITTER - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Gram gage Part Local supply As
    required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-02-00A-313A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-22 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Visual Inspection
    1.1
    CAUTION

    DO NOT TRY TO STRAIGHTEN AN AOA VANE THAT IS BENT. A BENT OR DAMAGED VANE
    MUST BE REPLACED AS IT CAN CAUSE AN AERODYNAMIC ERROR.

    Make sure that the transmitter vane is not:


    − broken
    − bent
    − dented
    − deformed
    − eroded
    1.2 Make sure that the transmitter probe is not:
    − broken
    − bent
    − dented
    − deformed
    − eroded
    1.3 If you find damage, refer to the vendor CMM for the damage limits.
    2 Measure the Vane Friction
    2.1 Use a gram gage (Gram gage (Pt.No. Local supply)) to measure the force needed to move the AOA
    vane. Measure the force needed to move the AOA vane through its full range of movement at the
    vane trailing edge tip.
    2.2 If the force needed is more than 7 grams ± 0.5 grams, replace the AOA transmitter (refer to DM 12-
    B-22-20-02-00A-920A-A).

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-02-00A-313A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-22 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    AOA TRANSMITTER

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    AOA TRANSMITTER - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.................................................................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 AOA Transmitter – Removal/Installation................................................................ 5

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A GENERAL - AEROSPACE GROUND EQUIPMENT
    (AGE) AND TOOLS
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A SPEED AND ATTITUDE CORRECTION -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-30-30-20-00A-903A-A PROBES DE–ICE SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark


    Left AOA calibration tool Part 513.22.12.050 As
    required
    Left AOA calibration tool Part 513.22.12.055 As
    required
    Right AOA calibration tool Part 513.22.12.051 As
    required
    Right AOA calibration tool Part 513.22.12.056 As
    required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Sealant Part P08-018 As
    required
    Cable Tie Part P09-008 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This procedure is applicable to the left and the right AOA transmitters.
    2 Removal
    2.1 To remove the left AOA transmitter open and install a safety clip (Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold
    open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on these circuit breakers:
    − LH AOA PLATE HEAT (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − LH PROBES DE-ICE (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − STALL WARN 1 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − STALL WARN 2 (MAIN BUS)
    2.2 To remove the right AOA transmitter open and install a safety clip (Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold
    open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on these circuit breakers:
    − RH AOA PLATE HEAT (MAIN BUS)
    − RH PROBES DE-ICE (MAIN BUS)
    − STALL WARN 1 (ESSENTIAL BUS)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − STALL WARN 2 (MAIN BUS)


    2.3 Remove the sealant from around the edges of the AOA transmitter plate heater (Figure 1 [7]).
    2.4 Remove the access panel 52 KB or 62 KB.
    2.5 Remove the cable ties as necessary.
    2.6 Disconnect the AOA transmitter plate heater electrical connector (Figure 1 [3]) from the connector in
    the wing (Figure 1 [4]).
    2.7 Disconnect the electrical connector (Figure 1 [6]) from the AOA transmitter (Figure 1 [2]).
    2.8 Hold the AOA transmitter (Figure 1 [2]) and remove the four screws (Figure 1 [1]).

    Note

    The screws are installed in anchor nuts.


    The lower screws are installed in an anchor nut plate.

    2.9 Remove the AOA transmitter (Figure 1 [2]) from the wing.
    3 Installation
    3.1
    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Note

    To identify the AGE and tools used in this procedure refer to the list of AGE and tools 12-
    B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A.

    Position the AOA transmitter (Figure 1 [2]) on the wing and install the four screws (Figure 1 [1]), but do
    not fully tighten.
    3.2 Install the calibration tool (Left AOA calibration tool (Pt.No. 513.22.12.050) or Left AOA calibration
    tool (Pt.No. 513.22.12.055)) on the AOA transmitter/wing (Refer to DM 12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A).
    Or, install the calibration tool (Right AOA calibration tool (Pt.No. 513.22.12.051 )or Right AOA
    calibration tool (Pt.No. 513.22.12.056)) on the AOA transmitter/wing (Refer to DM 12-
    B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A).
    3.3
    WARNING

    THE SETTING OF DIMENSION `A' IS VERY IMPORTANT. AN AOA TRANSMITTER INCORRECTLY


    SET COULD CAUSE A SERIOUS MALFUNCTION IN FLIGHT.

    Adjust the position of the AOA transmitter (Figure 1 [2]) to set dimension `A' (Refer to DM 12-
    B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A) between 0.47 to 0.7 in (12 to 18 mm). Tighten the screws.
    3.4 Connect the electrical connector (Figure 1 [6]) to the AOA transmitter (Figure 1 [2]).
    3.5 Connect AOA plate heater electrical connector (Figure 1 [3]) to the connector in the wing
    (Figure 1 [4]).
    3.6 Install cable ties (Cable Tie (Pt.No. P09-008)) as necessary.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.7 Apply sealant (Sealant (Pt.No. P08-018)) around the edges of the AOA transmitter plate heater
    (Figure 1 [7]), to make an aerodynamically smooth surface between the transmitter plate edges and
    the wing deicer boot.
    3.8 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.9 Install the access panel 52 KB or 62 KB.
    3.10 Remove the safety clips and close the applicable circuit breakers:
    − LH AOA PLATE HEAT (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − LH PROBES DE-ICE (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − RH AOA PLATE HEAT (MAIN BUS)
    − RH PROBES DE-ICE (MAIN BUS)
    − STALL WARN 1 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − STALL WARN 2 (MAIN BUS)
    3.11 Do a functional test of the stick pusher system (Refer to DM 12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A).
    3.12 Do an adjustment/test of the probes deicing system (Refer to DM 12-B-30-30-20-00A-903A-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    5
    2

    7
    22109

    Figure 1 AOA Transmitter – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-02-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 6
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    STICK–SHAKER ACTUATOR

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    STICK–SHAKER ACTUATOR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Stick–Shaker Actuator – Removal/Installation........................................................ 3

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) Required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Open and install a safety clip (Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on these
    circuit breakers:
    − STALL WARN 1 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − STALL WARN 2 (MAIN BUS).
    1.2 Disconnect the electrical connector (Figure 1 [6]) from the stick-shaker actuator (Figure 1 [2]).
    1.3 Hold the stick-shaker actuator (Figure 1 [2]) and remove the two nuts (Figure 1 [4]), washers
    (Figure 1 [3]), bracket (Figure 1 [5]) and bolts (Figure 1 [1]).
    1.4 Remove the stick-shaker actuator (Figure 1 [2]) from the aircraft.
    2 Installation
    2.1 Install the stick-shaker actuator (Figure 1 [2]) with the two bolts (Figure 1 [1]), washers (Figure 1 [3]),
    bracket (Figure 1 [5]) and nuts (Figure 1 [4]).
    2.2 Connect the electrical connector (Figure 1 [6]) to the stick-shaker actuator (Figure 1 [2]).
    2.3 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − STALL WARN 1 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − STALL WARN 2 (MAIN BUS).
    2.4 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.5 Remove access panel 21 QZ.
    2.6 Energize the aircraft electrical system (Refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.7 Press and hold the Maintenance Panel AIR/GND switch to AIR.
    2.8 Press the TEST PUSHER switch on the overhead control panel.
    2.9 Make sure that the stick shaker actuator operates.
    2.10 Release the TEST PUSHER switch.
    2.11 Release the AIR/GND switch.
    2.12 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (Refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.13 Install access panel 21 QZ.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A A

    2
    B

    3
    4

    3
    4
    22126

    Figure 1 Stick–Shaker Actuator – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-03-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    STICK PUSHER SERVO

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    STICK PUSHER SERVO - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................................................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Stick Pusher Servo – Removal/Installation............................................................. 3

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A SPEED AND ATTITUDE CORRECTION -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A STANDARD CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) Required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-04-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Open and install a safety clip (Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on this
    circuit breaker:
    − PUSHER SYS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    1.2 Remove the center and right carpets:
    − for executive interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − for standard interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A
    1.3 Open the access panels 12 EZ and 12 FZ.
    1.4 Disconnect the electrical connector (Figure 1 [3]) from the stick pusher servo (Figure 1 [2]).
    1.5 Hold the stick pusher servo (Figure 1 [2]) then remove the four bolts (Figure 1 [5]) and washers
    (Figure 1 [4]).
    1.6 Remove the stick pusher servo (Figure 1 [2]) from the mount (Figure 1 [1]).
    2 Installation
    2.1 Install the stick pusher servo (Figure 1 [2]) on the mount (Figure 1 [1]) with the four washers
    (Figure 1 [4]) and bolts (Figure 1 [5]).
    2.2 Connect the electrical connector (Figure 1 [3]) to the stick pusher servo (Figure 1 [2]).
    2.3 Remove the safety clip and close the circuit breaker:
    − PUSHER SYS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    2.4 Do a functional test of the stick pusher servo and capstan (Refer to DM 12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A).
    2.5 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.6 Close the access panel 12 EZ and 12 FZ.
    2.7 Install the center and right carpets:
    − for executive interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − for standard interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-04-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    B
    A

    5 1

    B
    22111

    Figure 1 Stick Pusher Servo – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-04-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-04-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    TORQUE TRANSDUCER

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    TORQUE TRANSDUCER - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION........................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Torque Transducer – Removal/Installation............................................................. 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A SPEED AND ATTITUDE CORRECTION -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) Required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-05-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-04 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Absorbent paper Part P02–031 As
    Required
    Lockwire Part P02-007 As
    Required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Open and install a safety clip (Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on these
    circuit breakers:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − PUSHER SYS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − STALL WARN 1 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − STALL WARN 2 (MAIN BUS)
    1.2 Remove the engine cowling 42 AT.
    1.3 Disconnect the electrical connector (Figure 1 [1]) from the torque transducer (Figure 1 [2]).
    1.4 Put the paper ( (Pt.No. P02–031)) below the torque transducer (Figure 1 [2]).
    1.5 Disconnect the hoses (Figure 1 [5]) and (Figure 1 [7]) from the torque transducer (Figure 1 [2]).
    1.6 Remove the lockwire from the two screws (Figure 1 [3]).
    1.7 Remove the two screws (Figure 1 [3]), washers (Figure 1 [6]), clamps (Figure 1 [4]) and the torque
    transducer (Figure 1 [2]) from the engine.
    1.8 Remove the two clamps (Figure 1 [4]) from the torque transducer (Figure 1 [2]).
    1.9 Remove the absorbent paper from the engine.
    2 Installation

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    2.1 Put the two clamps (Figure 1 [4]) on the torque transducer (Figure 1 [2]).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-05-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-04 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.2 Check the condition of the helicoil inserts for the torque transducer mounting screws.
    2.3 Install the torque transducer (Figure 1 [2]) on the engine with the two screws (Figure 1 [3]) and
    washers (Figure 1 [6]).
    2.4 Torque tighten the two screws Figure 1 [3] to 24 to 36 lbf in.
    2.5 Safety the two screws (Figure 1 [3]) with lockwire ( (Pt.No. P02-007)).
    2.6
    CAUTION

    MAKE SURE THAT THE +VE MARK ON THE TORQUE TRANSDUCER (Figure 1 [2]) IS ADJACENT
    TO THE TORQUE PRESSURE HOSE (Figure 1 [5]).

    Loosely connect the hoses (Figure 1 [5]) and (Figure 1 [7]) to the torque transducer (Figure 1 [2]).
    Make sure there is a clearance of not less than 0.12 in (3,0 mm) around all the pipes in the area and
    then tighten the coupling nuts.
    2.7 Connect the electrical connector (Figure 1 [1]) to the torque transducer (Figure 1 [2]).
    2.8 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.9 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − PUSHER SYS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − STALL WARN 1 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − STALL WARN 2 (MAIN BUS)
    2.10 Do a functional test of the stick pusher system (Refer to DM 12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-05-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-04 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    7
    3 1

    3
    +

    A
    22113

    Figure 1 Torque Transducer – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-05-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-04 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-05-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-04 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-05-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-04 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    STICK PUSHER CAPSTAN

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    STICK PUSHER CAPSTAN - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION........................................................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Stick Pusher Capstan – Removal/Installation......................................................... 5

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A SPEED AND ATTITUDE CORRECTION -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A STANDARD CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-27-30-00-00A-903A-A ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/
    TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-06-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark


    Rigging block Part 513.27.12.075 As
    required
    Rigging pin Part 513.27.72.001 As
    required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Locking clip CSN 27-30-00-04-050 As
    required

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Preparation
    1.1.1 Energize the aircraft electrical system (Refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    1.1.2 Set the horizontal stabilizer to the green-line take-off position.
    1.1.3 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (Refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    1.1.4 Open and install a safety clip (Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065))
    on these circuit breakers:
    − PUSHER SYS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − STALL WARN 1 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − STALL WARN 2 (MAIN BUS)
    1.1.5 Remove the center and right carpets:
    − for executive interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − for standard interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A
    1.1.6 Open the access panels 12 CZ, 12 EZ and 12 FZ.
    1.1.7 Put up a warning sign DO NOT OPERATE THE FLIGHT CONTROLS in the flight
    compartment.
    1.2 Procedure
    1.2.1 Move the elevator controls to the center position and install the rigging block (Rigging
    block (Pt.No. 513.27.12.075)) (Figure 1 [17]) on the pilot control column (Figure 1 [16]).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-06-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1.2.2 Install the rigging pin (Rigging pin (Pt.No. 513.27.72.001)) (Figure 1 [2]) in the left elevator
    horn (Figure 1 [1]).
    1.2.3 Remove the locking clips (Figure 1 [8]) from the turnbuckle (Figure 1 [9]). Discard the locking
    clips.
    1.2.4 Turn the turnbuckle (Figure 1 [9]) and release the stick pusher cable (Figure 1 [10]) tension.
    Disconnect the turnbuckle (Figure 1 [9]) from the cable (Figure 1 [10]).
    1.2.5 Loosen the nuts (Figure 1 [11]) on the clamp (Figure 1 [12]). Remove the stick pusher cable
    (Figure 1 [10]) from the clamp.
    1.2.6 Disconnect the electrical connector (Figure 1 [3]) from the stick pusher servo (Figure 1 [4]).
    1.2.7 Remove the four bolts (Figure 1 [13]) and the washers (Figure 1 [14]). Remove the stick
    pusher servo (Figure 1 [4]) from the mounting (Figure 1 [15]).
    1.2.8 Remove the four bolts (Figure 1 [5]), the washers (Figure 1 [6]) and remove the capstan
    (Figure 1 [7]) complete with the cable (Figure 1 [10]) from the mounting (Figure 1 [15]).
    1.2.9 Remove the cable (Figure 1 [10]) from the capstan (Figure 1 [7]).
    2 Installation
    2.1 Procedure
    2.1.1 From the bottom of the capstan (Figure 1 [7]) and with the stick pusher cable (Figure 1 [10])
    turnbuckle end on the right side, install the free end of the cable in the left side of the
    capstan (Figure 1 [7]).
    2.1.2 Install the stick pusher cable (Figure 1 [10]) ball in the socket on the capstan (Figure 1 [7]).
    2.1.3 Turn the capstan (Figure 1 [7]) until two turns of the stick pusher cable (Figure 1 [10]) can be
    seen on the capstan.
    2.1.4 Install the capstan (Figure 1 [7]) on the mount (Figure 1 [15]) with the four bolts (Figure 1 [5])
    and the washers (Figure 1 [6]).
    2.1.5 Install the stick pusher servo (Figure 1 [4]) on the mount (Figure 1 [15]) with the four bolts
    (Figure 1 [13]) and washers (Figure 1 [14]).
    2.1.6 Connect the electrical connector (Figure 1 [3]) to the stick pusher servo (Figure 1 [4]).
    2.1.7 Connect the stick pusher cable (Figure 1 [10]) to the turnbuckle (Figure 1 [9]).
    2.1.8 Put the free end of the stick pusher cable (Figure 1 [10]) through the clamp (Figure 1 [12]).
    2.1.9 Do the adjustment of the stick pusher cable (Refer to DM 12-B-27-30-00-00A-903A-A).
    2.1.10 Safety the turnbuckle (Figure 1 [9]) with a new lock clip (Locking clip ) (Figure 1 [8]).
    2.1.11 Remove the rigging block assembly (Figure 1 [17]) from the pilot control column
    (Figure 1 [16]).
    2.1.12 Remove the rigging pin (Figure 1 [2]) from the left elevator horn (Figure 1 [1]).
    2.2 Close Up
    2.2.1 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.2.2 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − PUSHER SYS (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − STALL WARN 1 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − STALL WARN 2 (MAIN BUS)
    2.2.3 Remove the DO NOT OPERATE THE FLIGHT CONTROLS warning sign from the flight
    compartment.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-06-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.2.4 Do the functional test of the stick pusher servo and capstan (Refer to DM 12-
    B-22-20-00-00A-903A-A).
    2.2.5 Close the access panel 12 CZ, 12 EZ and 12 FZ.
    2.2.6 Install the center and right carpets:
    − for executive interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − for standard interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-06-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    B 1

    2
    A

    C 17

    16

    3
    4

    15 5
    6
    7
    13 14

    12
    10

    11

    10
    8
    9
    C
    22129

    Figure 1 Stick Pusher Capstan – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-06-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-22-20-06-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 6
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    COMMUNICATIONS

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    COMMUNICATIONS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION........................................................ 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1
    1.1 Speech Communication......................................................................................... 1
    1.2 Passenger Advisory and Entertainment System.................................................... 2
    1.3 Audio Integrating System....................................................................................... 2
    1.4 Dual Audio Integrating System (Optional).............................................................. 2
    1.5 Static Discharging................................................................................................... 3

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-23-10-00-00A-040A-A SPEECH COMMUNICATION - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-23-40-00-00A-040A-A PASSENGER ADVISORY SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION
    AND OPERATION
    12-B-23-50-00-00A-040A-A AUDIO INTEGRATING SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-23-50-10-00A-040A-A DUAL AUDIO INTEGRATING SYSTEM -
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-23-60-00-00A-040A-A STATIC DISCHARGING - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION

    Description

    1 General
    The communications systems are described in these sub-systems:

    1.1 Speech Communication


    (Refer to DM 12-B-23-10-00-00A-040A-A)
    The Very High Frequency (VHF) communication system uses voice-modulated electromagnetic waves to transmit
    and receive speech communication between air-to-air and air-to-ground installations.
    An optional High Frequency (HF) Single Sideband (SSB) transceiver system may be installed. The HF system
    gives long distance voice and data communication between aircraft, or between the aircraft and a ground station.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-00-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1.2 Passenger Advisory and Entertainment System


    The passenger advisory and entertainment system is used to transmit information from the crew to the passenger
    and music to the crew and the passengers (refer to DM 12-B-23-40-00-00A-040A-A).

    1.3 Audio Integrating System


    (Refer to DM 12-B-23-50-00-00A-040A-A)
    The Audio Integrating System (AIS) is used to set and amplify the audio signals from the navigation and the
    communication systems. It also includes:
    − The Intercom System (ICS) between the pilot, the copilot and the cabin crew
    − The Passenger Address (PA) and aural warning system

    There are different configurations for the AIS. The different configurations include these components:
    − An Audio Control Panel (ACP)
    − A EMERG COM 1 switch
    − Pilot and copilot hand microphones
    − Pilot and copilot oxygen mask microphone connectors
    − Pilot and copilot headphone connectors
    − Pilot and copilot microphone connectors
    − Pilot and copilot BOSE headset connectors
    − A pilot and copilot Press-To-Transmit (PTT) switch (control wheels)
    − A pilot and copilot ICS switch (control wheels)
    − Two flight compartment loudspeakers
    − Two cabin loudspeakers
    − A cabin microphone connector
    − A cabin headset connector

    1.4 Dual Audio Integrating System (Optional)


    (Refer to DM 12-B-23-50-10-00A-040A-A)
    The dual audio integrating system controls all the aircraft audio signals. The two audio control panels give the pilot
    and the copilot individual control of receive and transmit functions. The system also integrates:
    − The Intercom System (ICS) between the pilot, the copilot and the cabin crew
    − The Passenger Address (PA) system and aural warning system

    The dual audio integrating system has these components:


    − Two audio control panels
    − A EMERG COM 1 switch
    − Pilot and copilot hand microphones
    − Pilot and copilot oxygen mask microphone connectors
    − Pilot and copilot headphone connectors
    − Pilot and copilot microphone connectors

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-00-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − Pilot and copilot BOSE headset connectors


    − A pilot and copilot Press-To-Transmit (PTT) switch (control wheels)
    − A pilot and copilot ICS switch (control wheels)
    − Two flight compartment loudspeakers
    − Two cabin loudspeakers
    − Cabin microphone connector
    − Cabin headset connector

    1.5 Static Discharging


    (Refer to DM 12-B-23-60-00-00A-040A-A)
    Static dischargers remove the static-electricity that the aircraft collects during flight.
    Static dischargers are installed at these positions:
    − 3 on each wing tip
    − 3 on each elevator
    − 4 on the rudder
    − 1 on the stabilizer fairing

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-00-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 3
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-00-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    SPEECH COMMUNICATION

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    SPEECH COMMUNICATION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION.......................................... 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-23-12-00-00A-040A-A VHF COMMUNICATION - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-34-51-00-00A-040A-A VHF NAVIGATION SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-34-53-00-00A-040A-A ADF SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Description

    1 General
    The speech communication system is part of the Very High Frequency (VHF) communication systems 1 and 2
    (refer to DM 12-B-23-12-00-00A-040A-A).
    The VHF communication systems 1 and 2 give voice communication between aircraft, or between the aircraft and a
    ground station. The two systems (VHF1 and VHF2) are the same.
    The VHF communication system 1 and 2 have the components as follow:
    − Two Multi-Mode Digital Radio (MMDR) transceivers
    − Two VHF antennas

    The MMDR transceiver is a VHF NAV/COM transceiver with a self contained Automatic Direction Finder (ADF)
    receiver.
    The description and operation of the navigation part of the MMDR transceiver is given in DM 12-
    B-34-51-00-00A-040A-A.
    The description and operation of the ADF part of the MMDR transceiver is given in DM 12-B-34-53-00-00A-040A-A.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-10-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 1
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-10-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    HF COMMUNICATION

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    HF COMMUNICATION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION.................................................... 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 2
    2 Description.............................................................................................................. 2
    3 Component Description.......................................................................................... 2
    3.1 KRX 1053 HF Receiver/Exciter.............................................................................. 2
    3.2 KPA 1052 HF Power Amplifier............................................................................... 2
    3.3 PS 440 HF Controller (Ref. ).................................................................................. 3
    3.3.1 VOL PUSH PWR Knob........................................................................................... 3
    3.3.2 Function Selector Knob.......................................................................................... 3
    3.3.3 EMER Channel Access Button............................................................................... 3
    3.3.4 Functional TEST Button......................................................................................... 3
    3.3.5 Display Area........................................................................................................... 3
    3.3.6 Sub FUNC Select Button........................................................................................ 3
    3.3.7 TX Transmit Lamp.................................................................................................. 3
    3.3.8 TUNE Outer Selector Knob.................................................................................... 4
    3.3.9 TUNE Inner Selector Knob..................................................................................... 4
    3.3.10 ENTER Button........................................................................................................ 4
    3.4 KAC 1052 HF Antenna Coupler............................................................................. 4
    3.5 HF Antenna............................................................................................................ 4
    4 Operation (Ref. )..................................................................................................... 4
    4.1 General................................................................................................................... 4
    4.2 HF System Failures................................................................................................ 5
    4.3 Channel Mode........................................................................................................ 5

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    Index of Figures Page

    1 HF Controller – Layout........................................................................................... 6
    2 HF Communications System – Schematic............................................................. 7

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-23-50-00-00A-040A-A AUDIO INTEGRATING SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-23-50-10-00A-040A-A DUAL AUDIO INTEGRATING SYSTEM -
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Effectivity: HF COMMUNICATION
    12-B-23-11-00-00A-040A-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Description

    1 General
    The KHF 1050 HF Communication System is a High Frequency (HF) Single Sideband (SSB) transceiver system.
    The system gives long distance voice and data communication between aircraft, or between the aircraft and a
    ground station.

    2 Description
    The KH1050 system has the components that follow:
    − KRX 1053 receiver/exciter
    − KPA 1052 power amplifier
    − PS 440 controller
    − KAC 1052 antenna coupler
    − HF antenna

    The system receives an audio signal from the audio integrating system (refer to DM 12-B-23-50-00-00A-040A-A) or
    the dual audio integrating system, if installed (refer to DM 12-B-23-50-10-00A-040A-A). The system also sends an
    audio signal to the audio integrating system.
    The power supplies to the HF system are as follows:
    − 28 VDC through HF TX (AVIONIC 2 BUS) circuit breaker
    − 28 VDC through HF RX (AVIONIC 2 BUS) circuit breaker

    3 Component Description

    3.1 KRX 1053 HF Receiver/Exciter


    The KRX 1053 HF receiver/exciter is installed in a rack at the bottom of the fuselage reference plane aft of frame
    33. It is held in position by two hold-down clamps.
    The receiver/exciter operates from 2 MHz to 29.999 MHz synthesized in 100 Hz steps. The unit also operates in
    Amplitude Modulated (AM) equivalents and Upper Sideband (USB) and SSB modes.
    There are two connectors at one end of the receiver/exciter. There is an electrical connector that connects the
    receiver/exciter to the aircraft system. There is also a coaxial connector that connects to the Radio Frequency (RF)
    input/output.

    3.2 KPA 1052 HF Power Amplifier


    The KPA 1052 HF power amplifier is installed in a rack aft of frame 31. It is held in position by two hold down
    clamps.
    The HF power amplifier amplifies the signal from the HF receiver/exciter. This signal is amplified into a 200 Watt
    Peak Envelope Power (PEP) transmitted signal in SSB or 50 Watts of carrier power in AM operation. After being
    filtered, the amplified signal is supplied to the HF antenna coupler. In the receive mode, the signal is put through
    the power amplifier to the receiver/exciter.
    There are three connectors on the front of the power amplifier. There is an electrical connector that connects the
    power amplifier to the aircraft system and two coaxial connectors.

    Effectivity: HF COMMUNICATION
    12-B-23-11-00-00A-040A-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.3 PS 440 HF Controller (Ref. Fig. 1)


    The PS 440 HF controller is installed on the left crossbar panel.
    The controller sets the frequency and mode of the HF communication system. It is in a rectangular box and has an
    electrical connector on the rear face of the unit.
    It has the controls as follows:
    − VOL PUSH PWR inner concentric knob
    − Function selector outer concentric knob
    − EMER channel access button
    − Functional TEST button
    − Display area
    − Sub FUNC select button
    − TX transmit lamp
    − TUNE outer selector knob
    − TUNE inner selector knob
    − ENT button

    3.3.1 VOL PUSH PWR Knob


    To set the power on and off push the inner concentric knob. To adjust the volume, turn the knob to the necessary
    position.

    3.3.2 Function Selector Knob


    To set the correct function turn the outer concentric knob to the necessary position. It has five positions FREQ
    (Frequency), CHAN (Channel), MOD (Mode), SQL (Squelch) and OPT (Option).

    3.3.3 EMER Channel Access Button


    To set the available emergency channels push the EMER (Emergency) button.

    3.3.4 Functional TEST Button


    To start the built in functional test push the TEST button.

    3.3.5 Display Area


    The digital display area shows the frequencies, mode, channel numbers and warnings.

    3.3.6 Sub FUNC Select Button


    To go into sub functions push the FUNC sub function select button.

    3.3.7 TX Transmit Lamp


    This lamp comes on when the system transmits.

    Effectivity: HF COMMUNICATION
    12-B-23-11-00-00A-040A-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.3.8 TUNE Outer Selector Knob


    To set the frequency and channel number turn the TUNE outer selector knob.

    3.3.9 TUNE Inner Selector Knob


    To set the frequency and channel number turn the TUNE inner selector knob.

    3.3.10 ENTER Button


    To keep data entries push the ENT (Enter) button.

    3.4 KAC 1052 HF Antenna Coupler


    The KAC 1052 HF antenna coupler is installed in a rack at the top of the fuselage immediately aft of frame 37. It is
    held in position by two hold down clamps. The front of the antenna coupler has an electrical connector and a
    coaxial connector and it has a coaxial connector at the rear.
    The antenna coupler automatically tunes the 50 ohm coaxial output of the 200 Watt HF power amplifier. It tunes it
    to the aircraft HF antenna impedance for each of the system frequencies used by the HF system.
    The network configurations for each frequency are kept in a non volatile memory. This occurs until the antenna
    coupler is tuned to the HF antenna and the system frequency. The memory keeps that frequency.
    If the antenna impedance changes, the antenna coupler changes to that impedance. The antenna coupler gives a
    good signal from the antenna to the receiver/exciter in the receive mode.

    3.5 HF Antenna
    The antenna receives and transmits signals in the frequency band from 2 MHz to 29.9999 MHz. It is a 10 foot (3 m)
    short wire type antenna which is connected between the antenna coupler and the top of the vertical stabilizer. The
    antenna goes through the top of the fuselage at frame 37. It goes through an antenna isolator which is connected
    to the skin of the vertical stabilizer. It then goes back to a turnbuckle connector to the fuselage at frame 36.

    4 Operation (Ref. Fig. 2)

    4.1 General
    When the HF communication system is set to on it will receive signals. The power amplifier is prevented from
    operation and the antenna is connected to the receiver/exciter through the antenna coupler.
    The HF communication system transmits when the Press to Transmit (PTT) switch on the flight control column, or
    on the hand microphone is pushed. The system automatically sets the antenna and coupler to the correct
    frequency. The receiver/exciter gets audio signals from the audio integrating system and sends them to the power
    amplifier. The audio signals are amplified by the power amplifier and sent to the antenna coupler then the antenna
    for transmission.
    When the system receives audio signals, the antenna sends the signals to the receiver/exciter. The receiver/exciter
    changes the audio signals and sends them to the audio integrating system. It then sends the audio signals to the
    headsets and the loudspeakers.

    Effectivity: HF COMMUNICATION
    12-B-23-11-00-00A-040A-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    4.2 HF System Failures


    If there is a failure of the HF controller the bottom row of the display shows PANEL. A failure elsewhere in the
    system shows FAIL on the top row of the display. If other failures occur one of the indications shows on the bottom
    of the display as follows:
    − RXEX This shows a failure in the receiver/exciter or its electrical connections. It also shows that DC power is
    missing to the receiver/exciter or communication between the receiver/exciter and the controller is missing
    − PA This shows a failure in the power amplifier or its electrical connections. It also shows that DC power is
    missing to the power amplifier
    − CPLR This shows a failure in the antenna coupler or its electrical connections. It also shows that DC power is
    missing to the antenna coupler or communication between the antenna coupler and the receiver/exciter is
    missing
    − PRS W This shows a warning that the pressure in the antenna coupler is below normal. Servicing of the
    antenna coupler is necessary
    − PRS F This shows a failure in the antenna coupler that the pressure is at a dangerous level below normal. It
    also shows that the transmitter power is decreased to 50 Watts. Servicing of the antenna coupler is necessary
    immediately

    4.3 Channel Mode


    The HF controller memory keeps 100 different channel frequencies. The HF communication system can operate in
    the channel modes as follow:
    − Simplex mode the same frequency is for transmit and receive
    − Semi duplex mode the transmit frequency is different to the receive frequency

    The TUNE inner and outer selector knobs on the controller change the channels.

    Effectivity: HF COMMUNICATION
    12-B-23-11-00-00A-040A-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    HF

    DISPLAY AREA 1

    RX
    FUNCTIONAL SUB-FUNCTION
    TEST BUTTON SELECT BUTTON

    EMER TEST FUNC TRANSMIT LAMP

    EMERGENCY CHANNEL VOL OUTER SELECTOR


    ACCESS BUTTON FREQ CHAN TUNE KNOB

    PUSH MOD TX ENT


    PWR
    SOL
    FUNCTION INNER SELECTOR
    SELECTOR KNOB
    OPT

    ON/OFF/VOLUME ENTER BUTTON

    12-B-231100-A-S4080-20052-A-01-1

    Figure 1 HF Controller – Layout

    Effectivity: HF COMMUNICATION
    12-B-23-11-00-00A-040A-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    AVIONIC 2 BUS AVIONIC 2 BUS

    28V DC FLIGHT COMPARTMENT


    HF HF
    LIGHTS
    RX TX

    POWER CONTROL ON/OFF

    AUDIO INTEGRATING SYSTEM


    OR
    DUAL AUDIO INTEGRATING
    SYSTEM (IF INSTALLED)

    HF
    DATA BUS
    CONTROLLER

    HF
    RECEIVER/
    EXCITER

    HF

    HF
    REFERENCE
    POWER
    AMPLIFIER
    HF
    ANTENNA
    COUPLER

    TRANSMITTER
    INPUT

    TRANSMITTER OUTPUT

    HF
    ANTENNA

    12-B-231100-A-S4080-20053-A-01-1

    Figure 2 HF Communications System – Schematic

    Effectivity: HF COMMUNICATION
    12-B-23-11-00-00A-040A-A
    SYSTEM
    End of data module
    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 7
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: HF COMMUNICATION
    12-B-23-11-00-00A-040A-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    HF COMMUNICATION

    ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Table of Contents Page

    HF COMMUNICATION - ADJUSTMENT/TEST......................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-901A-A POWERPLANT - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Headset Part Local supply As
    required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: HF COMMUNICATION
    12-B-23-11-00-00A-903A-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Operational Test
    1.1
    WARNING

    MAKE SURE THAT NO PERSONNEL ARE ON THE GROUND NEAR THE AIRCRAFT OR HAVE
    CONTACT WITH THE AIRFRAME. PERSONNEL CAN RECEIVE SERIOUS RADIO FREQUENCY
    (RF) BURNS IF THEY TOUCH THE HF ANTENNA, ANTENNA TERMINAL OR AIRFRAME DURING
    AN HF TRANSMISSION. DO NOT OPERATE THE HF SYSTEM WHILE THE AIRCRAFT IS
    REFUELED.

    CAUTION

    DO NOT USE AN EXTERNAL POWER UNIT (EPU) TO DO THIS PROCEDURE.

    Note

    For the test the aircraft must not be in the hangar. The minimum distance must be 50 ft (15 m) from
    metal buildings.

    Job Set Up
    1.1.1 Make sure that the external power is disconnected (refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    1.1.2 Connect the pilots headset to the pilots MIC and PHONE connectors.
    1.1.3 Start the engine (refer to DM 12-B-71-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    1.2 Procedure
    1.2.1 On the HF controller, push the PUSH PWR inner concentric knob. Make sure that a
    frequency and channel show on the display.
    1.2.2 Turn the TUNE inner and outer selector knobs and set the frequency of a known HF
    communications station.
    1.2.3 Turn the inner concentric knob VOL to adjust the volume of the HF communication to a
    satisfactory level. Make sure that the HF communication station is heard clearly.
    1.2.4 On the pilots flight control column push the Press to Transmit (PTT) switch. Make sure that:
    − The TX caption shows on the bottom display
    − The HF communication station receives the test transmission clearly and the
    communication from the HF communication station is heard clearly

    Effectivity: HF COMMUNICATION
    12-B-23-11-00-00A-903A-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1.2.5 On the copilots flight control column push the PTT switch. Make sure that:
    − The TX caption shows on the bottom display
    − The HF communication station receives the test transmission clearly and the
    communication from the HF communication station is heard clearly
    1.3 Close Up
    1.3.1 Stop the engine (refer to DM 12-B-71-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    1.3.2 Disconnect the pilots headset from the pilots MIC and PHONE connectors.

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: HF COMMUNICATION
    12-B-23-11-00-00A-903A-A
    SYSTEM
    End of data module
    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 3
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: HF COMMUNICATION
    12-B-23-11-00-00A-903A-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    CONTROL UNIT

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    CONTROL UNIT - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.......................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 HF Controller – Removal/Installation...................................................................... 3

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-23-11-00-00A-903A-A HF COMMUNICATION - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: HF COMMUNICATIONS
    12-B-23-11-01-00A-920A-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Open and install a clip (Safety clip (circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on these circuit
    breakers:
    − HF RX (AVIONIC 2 BUS)
    − HF TX (AVIONIC 2 BUS)
    1.2 Release the two fasteners (Figure 1 [3]) on the controller (Figure 1 [4]).
    1.3 Carefully remove the controller (Figure 1 [4]) from the panel (Figure 1 [1]) to get access to the
    electrical connector (Figure 1 [2]).
    1.4 Disconnect the electrical connector (Figure 1 [2]) from the controller (Figure 1 [4]). Remove the
    controller (Figure 1 [4]).
    2 Installation
    2.1 Connect the electrical connector (Figure 1 [2]) to the controller (Figure 1 [4]).
    2.2 Install the controller (Figure 1 [4]) in the panel (Figure 1 [1]) and tighten the two fasteners
    (Figure 1 [3]).
    2.3 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − HF RX (AVIONIC 2 BUS)
    − HF TX (AVIONIC 2 BUS)
    2.4 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.5 Do an operational test of the HF communication system (refer to DM 12-B-23-11-00-00A-903A-A).

    Effectivity: HF COMMUNICATIONS
    12-B-23-11-01-00A-920A-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    12-B-231101-A-S4080-20058-A-01-1

    Figure 1 HF Controller – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: HF COMMUNICATIONS
    12-B-23-11-01-00A-920A-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: HF COMMUNICATIONS
    12-B-23-11-01-00A-920A-A
    SYSTEM
    End of data module
    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    RECEIVER UNIT

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    RECEIVER UNIT - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION......................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Receiver/Exciter – Removal/Installation................................................................. 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-23-11-00-00A-903A-A HF COMMUNICATION - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A STANDARD CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required

    Effectivity: HF COMMUNICATIONS
    12-B-23-11-02-00A-920A-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Open and install a clip (Safety clip (circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on these circuit
    breakers:
    − HF RX (AVIONIC 2 BUS)
    − HF TX (AVIONIC 2 BUS)
    1.2 Remove the center carpet:
    − Executive interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − Standard interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A
    1.3 Open the access panel 12 KZ.
    1.4 Disconnect the electrical connectors (Figure 1 [5]) and (Figure 1 [2]) from the receiver/exciter
    (Figure 1 [1]).
    1.5 Loosen the hold down fasteners (Figure 1 [4]) and disengage them from the receiver/exciter
    (Figure 1 [1]).
    1.6 Remove the receiver/exciter (Figure 1 [1]) from the mounting tray (Figure 1 [3]).
    2 Installation
    2.1 Install the receiver/exciter (Figure 1 [1]) on the mounting tray (Figure 1 [3]).
    2.2 Engage the hold down fasteners (Figure 1 [4]) in the receiver/exciter (Figure 1 [1]). Tighten the hold
    down fasteners (Figure 1 [4]).
    2.3 Connect the electrical connectors (Figure 1 [5]) and (Figure 1 [2]) to the receiver/exciter (Figure 1 [1]).
    2.4 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − HF RX (AVIONIC 2 BUS)
    − HF TX (AVIONIC 2 BUS)
    2.5 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.6 Do an operational test of the HF communication system (Refer to DM 12-B-23-11-00-00A-903A-A).
    2.7 Close the access panel 12 KZ.
    2.8 Install the center carpet:

    Effectivity: HF COMMUNICATIONS
    12-B-23-11-02-00A-920A-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − Executive interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A


    − Standard interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A

    Effectivity: HF COMMUNICATIONS
    12-B-23-11-02-00A-920A-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    FRA 33

    A B

    FRA 34

    12-B-231102-A-S4080-20054-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Receiver/Exciter – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: HF COMMUNICATIONS
    12-B-23-11-02-00A-920A-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: HF COMMUNICATIONS
    12-B-23-11-02-00A-920A-A
    SYSTEM
    End of data module
    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: HF COMMUNICATIONS
    12-B-23-11-02-00A-920A-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    COUPLER UNIT

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    COUPLER UNIT - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.......................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 HF Antenna Coupler – Removal/Installation.......................................................... 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-23-11-00-00A-903A-A HF COMMUNICATION - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required

    Effectivity: HF COMMUNICATIONS
    12-B-23-11-03-00A-920A-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Lockwire Part P02-007 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Open and install a safety clip (Safety clip (circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on these
    circuit breakers:
    − HF RX (AVIONIC 2 BUS)
    − HF TX (AVIONIC 2 BUS)
    1.2 Open the access door 31 AB.
    1.3 Disconnect the coaxial connector (Figure 1 [3]) and the electrical connector (Figure 1 [2]) from the
    antenna coupler (Figure 1 [1]).
    1.4 Disconnect the antenna coaxial connector (Figure 1 [9]) from the antenna coupler (Figure 1 [1]).
    1.5 Remove the nut (Figure 1 [6]) and washer (Figure 1 [7]) and disconnect the bonding cable
    (Figure 1 [8]) from the antenna coupler (Figure 1 [1]).
    1.6 Remove and discard the lockwire from the two hold down fasteners (Figure 1 [4]).
    1.7 Loosen the two hold down fasteners (Figure 1 [4]) and disengage them from the antenna coupler
    (Figure 1 [1]).
    1.8 Remove the antenna coupler (Figure 1 [1]) from the mounting tray (Figure 1 [5]).
    2 Installation
    2.1
    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items DM 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Install the antenna coupler (Figure 1 [1]) on the mounting tray (Figure 1 [5]).
    2.2 Engage the hold down fasteners (Figure 1 [4]) in the antenna coupler (Figure 1 [1]). Tighten the hold
    down fasteners (Figure 1 [4]).
    2.3 Safety the two hold down fasteners (Figure 1 [4]) with lockwire (Lockwire (Pt.No. P02-007)).

    Effectivity: HF COMMUNICATIONS
    12-B-23-11-03-00A-920A-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.4 Connect the coaxial connector (Figure 1 [3]) and the electrical connector (Figure 1 [2]) to the antenna
    coupler (Figure 1 [1]).
    2.5 Connect the antenna coaxial connector (Figure 1 [9]) to the antenna coupler (Figure 1 [1]).
    2.6 Connect the bonding cable (Figure 1 [8]) to the antenna coupler (Figure 1 [1]) with the washer
    (Figure 1 [7]) and nut (Figure 1 [6]).
    2.7 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − HF RX (AVIONIC 2 BUS)
    − HF TX (AVIONIC 2 BUS)
    2.8 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.9 Close the access door 31 AB.
    2.10 Do an operational test of the HF communication system (refer to DM 12-B-23-11-00-00A-903A-A).

    Effectivity: HF COMMUNICATIONS
    12-B-23-11-03-00A-920A-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    B
    A

    FRA 38

    FRA 37

    2
    1

    9 3

    7
    6

    12-B-231103-A-S4080-20055-A-01-1

    Figure 1 HF Antenna Coupler – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: HF COMMUNICATIONS
    12-B-23-11-03-00A-920A-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: HF COMMUNICATIONS
    12-B-23-11-03-00A-920A-A
    SYSTEM
    End of data module
    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: HF COMMUNICATIONS
    12-B-23-11-03-00A-920A-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    ANTENNA

    REMOVAL INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    ANTENNA - REMOVAL INSTALLATION................................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Antenna – Removal/Installation.............................................................................. 6

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-23-11-00-00A-903A-A HF COMMUNICATION - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required
    Extractor Part 110.85.07.347 1
    Spring balance 0 to 34 lbf (0 to Part Local supply 1
    150 N)

    Effectivity: HF COMMUNICATIONS
    12-B-23-11-04-00A-920A-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark


    Gage push/pull 0 to 150 lbs (0 to Part 903.70.32.920 1
    70 kgs)
    Pinpunch Part Local supply 1

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    MEK Part P01-010 As
    required
    Cleaning cloth Part P02-003 As
    required
    Sealant Part P08-018 As
    required
    Cable tie Part P09-014 As
    required
    Heat shrink sleeve Part P09-021 As
    required
    Thread Part P09-022 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Cotter pin CSN 231-00-00-40-000 2
    Terminal Part 371.31.18.820 1

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    The antenna cable can be removed as follows:
    − The complete antenna cable assembly
    − The antenna cable only
    1.1 Job Set Up
    1.1.1 Open and install a clip (Safety clip (circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on the
    circuit breakers as follow:
    − HF RX (AVIONIC 2 BUS)
    − HF TX (AVIONIC 2 BUS)
    1.1.2 Open the access door 31 AB.

    Effectivity: HF COMMUNICATIONS
    12-B-23-11-04-00A-920A-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1.2 The Complete Antenna Cable Assembly


    1.2.1 Put the extractor (Extractor (Pt.No. 110.85.07.347)) on the cable (Figure 1 [1]) and push the
    extractor in the feed through (Figure 1 [2]) to disconnect the cable (Figure 1 [1]).
    1.2.2 Remove the screw (Figure 1 [7]), washer (Figure 1 [8]) and terminal (Figure 1 [9]) from the
    nut (Figure 1 [10]) in the fuselage at frame 36.
    1.2.3 Remove and discard the cotter pin (Figure 1 [21]), washers (Figure 1 [19]) and
    (Figure 1 [20]) and pin (Figure 1 [24]). Remove the shackle (Figure 1 [22]) with the isolator
    (Figure 1 [23]), from the vertical stabilizer bracket (Figure 1 [18]).
    1.2.4 Remove the cotter pin (Figure 1 [11]) and pin (Figure 1 [15]) from the shackle (Figure 1 [12]).
    1.2.5 Remove the complete antenna cable assembly from the aircraft.
    1.3 The Antenna Cable Only
    1.3.1 Put the extractor (Extractor (Pt.No. 110.85.07.347)) on the cable (Figure 1 [1]) and push the
    extractor in the feed through (Figure 1 [2]) to disconnect the cable (Figure 1 [1]).
    1.3.2 Remove the screw (Figure 1 [7]), washer (Figure 1 [8]) and terminal (Figure 1 [9]) from the
    nut (Figure 1 [10]) in the fuselage at frame 36.
    1.3.3 Remove the cable ties (Figure 1 [16]) from the turnbuckle assembly (Figure 1 [17]).
    1.3.4 Carefully remove the cable ties (Figure 1 [16]), heat shrink sleeve (Figure 1 [25]) and thread
    (Figure 1 [26]) from the cable (Figure 1 [1]).
    1.3.5 Remove the terminal (Figure 1 [9]) from the cable (Figure 1 [1]).
    1.3.6 Remove the cable (Figure 1 [1]) from the turnbuckle assembly (Figure 1 [17]).
    1.3.7 Pull the cable (Figure 1 [1]) through the isolator (Figure 1 [23]) and remove the cable
    (Figure 1 [1]) from the aircraft.
    2 Installation
    2.1
    WARNING

    WHEN YOU USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS BE CAREFUL. OBEY THE MANUFACTURER'S
    HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items (refer to DM
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A).

    The Antenna Cable Only


    2.1.1 Make sure that the shackle (Figure 1 [22]) with the isolator (Figure 1 [17]) is installed to the
    vertical stabilizer bracket (Figure 1 [18]).
    2.1.2 Make sure that the turnbuckle assembly (Figure 1 [17]) is installed on the aircraft at frame
    36.
    2.1.3 Pull the cable (Figure 1 [1]) through the isolator (Figure 1 [23])
    2.1.4 Remove 1.26 in (32 mm) of insulation from the cable (Figure 1 [1]) then install the cable
    (Figure 1 [1]) in the feed through (Figure 1 [2]).
    2.1.5 Put the cable (Figure 1 [1]) through the turnbuckle assembly (Figure 1 [17]). Lightly pull the
    cable (Figure 1 [1]) to tighten it then turn the cable thru 180°.

    Effectivity: HF COMMUNICATIONS
    12-B-23-11-04-00A-920A-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.1.6 Wind the thread (Thread (Pt.No. P09-022)) (Figure 1 [26]) around the cable (Figure 1 [1]).
    2.1.7 Install the sleeve (Heat shrink sleeve (Pt.No. P09-021)) (Figure 1 [25]) on the cable
    (Figure 1 [1]).
    2.1.8 Install the cable tie (Cable tie (Pt.No. P09-014)) (Figure 1 [16]) on the heat shrink sleeve
    (Figure 1 [25]).
    2.1.9 Attach the loose cable (Figure 1 [1]) with cable ties (Figure 1 [16]) to the turnbuckle
    assembly (Figure 1 [17]) and heat shrink sleeve (Figure 1 [25]).
    2.1.10 Cut the end of the cable (Figure 1 [1]) to the correct length and install a new Terminal
    (Figure 1 [9]).
    2.1.11 Install the screw (Figure 1 [7]), washer (Figure 1 [8]) and terminal (Figure 1 [9]) to the nut
    (Figure 1 [10]) on the fuselage at frame FRA 36.
    2.1.12 Move the sleeve (Figure 1 [28]) on the turnbuckle assembly (Figure 1 [17]) to see the holes
    (Figure 1 [29]).
    2.1.13 Carefully pull the antenna cable to the side to put the spring in the turnbuckle assembly
    (Figure 1 [17]) in tension. Put a pin punch (Pinpunch (Pt.No. Local supply)) in the holes
    (Figure 1 [29]) to lock the spring.
    2.1.14 Release the cable (Figure 1 [1]) and push the rod (Figure 1 [13]) into the turnbuckle
    assembly (Figure 1 [17]).
    2.1.15 Remove the pin punch (Pinpunch (Pt.No. Local supply)) from the holes (Figure 1 [29]).
    2.1.16 Attach the spring balance (Spring balance 0 to 34 lbf (0 to 150 N) (Pt.No. Local supply))
    (Figure 1 [27]) to the rod (Figure 1 [13]). Pull the spring balance to give a force of 22.5 lbf
    (100 N) to the cable (Figure 1 [1]). Make sure the rod (Figure 1 [13]) moves away from the
    shackle (Figure 1 [12]). Do Step 2.1.12 to Step 2.1.15 again, if necessary.
    2.1.17
    Note

    A gage (Gage push/pull 0 to 150 lbs (0 to 70 kgs) (Pt.No. 903.70.32.920)) can be used as
    an alternative.

    Remove the spring balance (Spring balance 0 to 34 lbf (0 to 150 N) (Pt.No. Local supply))
    (Figure 1 [27]) and the attachment from the rod (Figure 1 [13]).
    2.2 The Complete Assembly
    2.2.1 Install the turnbuckle (Figure 1 [17]) with the new Cotter pin (Figure 1 [11]) and pin
    (Figure 1 [15]) to the shackle (Figure 1 [12]).
    2.2.2 Install the cable (Figure 1 [1]) terminal (Figure 1 [9]) with the screw (Figure 1 [7]), washer
    (Figure 1 [8]) to the nut (Figure 1 [10]) in the fuselage at Stn. 36.
    2.2.3 Install the new Cotter pin (Figure 1 [21]), washers (Figure 1 [19]) and (Figure 1 [20]) and pin
    (Figure 1 [24]) the shackle (Figure 1 [22]) with the isolator (Figure 1 [23]), to the vertical
    stabilizer bracket (Figure 1 [18]).
    2.2.4 Install the cable (Figure 1 [1]) in the feed through (Figure 1 [2]).
    2.2.5 Do Step 2.1.12 to Step 2.1.16 to make sure that the cable (Figure 1 [1]) tension is correct.
    2.2.6 Remove the spring balance (Spring balance 0 to 34 lbf (0 to 150 N) (Pt.No. Local supply))
    (Figure 1 [27]) and the attachment from the rod (Figure 1 [13]).
    2.3 Close Up
    2.3.1 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:

    Effectivity: HF COMMUNICATIONS
    12-B-23-11-04-00A-920A-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − HF RX (AVIONIC 2 BUS)
    − HF TX (AVIONIC 2 BUS)
    2.3.2 Close the access door 31 AB.
    2.3.3 Do an operational test of the HF communication system (refer to DM 12-
    B-23-11-00-00A-903A-A).

    Effectivity: HF COMMUNICATIONS
    12-B-23-11-04-00A-920A-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2 3
    4

    1
    1.26 in
    (32 mm)
    1
    C
    B
    5

    FRA 36
    6

    27
    FRA 37
    A

    28 29

    12
    13 14
    17

    E 7
    A
    8

    14
    9
    16 E
    13
    10
    D
    12

    11
    17
    16
    15
    B 16 16
    1

    20
    19
    16
    18

    25

    21
    26
    16
    22

    24 23

    1
    C
    D
    12-B-231104-A-S4080-20056-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Antenna – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: HF COMMUNICATIONS
    12-B-23-11-04-00A-920A-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: HF COMMUNICATIONS
    12-B-23-11-04-00A-920A-A
    SYSTEM
    End of data module
    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 7
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: HF COMMUNICATIONS
    12-B-23-11-04-00A-920A-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    OPTIONAL SHORT ANTENNA

    REMOVAL INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    OPTIONAL SHORT ANTENNA - REMOVAL INSTALLATION................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 HF Short Antenna – Removal/Installation.............................................................. 6

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-23-11-00-00A-903A-A HF COMMUNICATION - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required
    Extractor Part 110.85.07.347 1
    Spring balance 0 to 34 lbf (0 to Part Local supply 1
    150 N)

    Effectivity: SHORT HF ANTENNA 12-B-23-11-04-00A-920B-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-09-01 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark


    Gage push/pull 0 to 150 lbs (0 to Part 903.70.32.920 1
    70 kgs)
    Pin punch Part Local supply 1

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    MEK Part P01-010 As
    required
    Cleaning cloth Part P02-003 As
    required
    Sealant Part P08-018 As
    required
    Cable tie Part P09-014 As
    required
    Heat shrink sleeve Part P09-021 As
    required
    Thread Part P09-022 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Cotter pin CSN 231-00-00-40-000 2
    Terminal Part 371.31.18.820 1

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    The antenna cable can be removed as follows:
    − The complete antenna cable assembly
    − The antenna cable only
    1.1 Job Set Up
    1.1.1 Open and install a clip (Safety clip (circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on the
    circuit breakers as follow:
    − HF RX (AVIONIC 2 BUS)
    − HF TX (AVIONIC 2 BUS)
    1.1.2 Open the access door 31 AB.

    Effectivity: SHORT HF ANTENNA 12-B-23-11-04-00A-920B-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-09-01 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1.2 The Complete Antenna Cable Assembly


    1.2.1 Put the extractor (Extractor (Pt.No. 110.85.07.347)) on the cable (Figure 1 [1]) and push the
    extractor in the feed through (Figure 1 [2]) to disconnect the cable (Figure 1 [1]).
    1.2.2 Remove the screw (Figure 1 [21]), washer (Figure 1 [22]) and terminal (Figure 1 [23]) from
    the vertical stabilizer structure.
    1.2.3 Remove and discard the cotter pin (Figure 1 [7]), washer (Figure 1 [8]) and pin
    (Figure 1 [10]). Remove the shackle (Figure 1 [11]) with the isolator/turnbuckle assembly
    (Figure 1 [12]), from the vertical stabilizer bracket (Figure 1 [9]).
    1.2.4 Remove the complete antenna cable assembly from the aircraft.
    1.3 The Antenna Cable Only
    1.3.1 Put the extractor (Extractor (Pt.No. 110.85.07.347)) on the cable (Figure 1 [1]) and push the
    extractor in the feed through (Figure 1 [2]) to disconnect the cable (Figure 1 [1]).
    1.3.2 Remove the screw (Figure 1 [21]), washer (Figure 1 [22]) and terminal (Figure 1 [23]) from
    the vertical stabilizer structure.
    1.3.3 Remove the cable ties (Figure 1 [15]) from the isolator/turnbuckle assembly (Figure 1 [12]).
    1.3.4 Carefully remove the cable ties (Figure 1 [15]), heat shrink sleeve (Figure 1 [17]) and thread
    (Figure 1 [16]) from the cable (Figure 1 [1]).
    1.3.5 Remove the terminal (Figure 1 [23]) from the cable (Figure 1 [1]).
    1.3.6 Remove the cable (Figure 1 [1]) from the isolator/turnbuckle assembly (Figure 1 [12]).
    1.3.7 Pull the cable (Figure 1 [1]) through the isolator/turnbuckle assembly (Figure 1 [12]) and
    remove the cable (Figure 1 [1]) from the aircraft.
    2 Installation
    2.1 The Antenna Cable Only

    WARNING

    WHEN YOU USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS BE CAREFUL. OBEY THE MANUFACTURER'S
    HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items (refer to DM
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A).

    2.1.1 Make sure that the shackle (Figure 1 [11]) with the isolator/turnbuckle assembly
    (Figure 1 [12]) is installed to the vertical stabilizer bracket (Figure 1 [9]).
    2.1.2 Pull the cable (Figure 1 [1]) through the isolator/turnbuckle assembly (Figure 1 [12])
    2.1.3 Remove 1.26 in (32 mm) of insulation from the cable (Figure 1 [1]) then install the cable
    (Figure 1 [1]) in the feed through (Figure 1 [2]).
    2.1.4 Put the cable (Figure 1 [1]) through the isolator/turnbuckle assembly (Figure 1 [12]). Lightly
    pull the cable (Figure 1 [1]) to tighten it then turn the cable thru 180°.
    2.1.5 Wind the thread (Thread (Pt.No. P09-022)) (Figure 1 [16]) around the cable (Figure 1 [1]).

    Effectivity: SHORT HF ANTENNA 12-B-23-11-04-00A-920B-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-09-01 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.1.6 Install the sleeve (Heat shrink sleeve (Pt.No. P09-021)) (Figure 1 [17]) on the cable
    (Figure 1 [1]).
    2.1.7 Install the cable tie (Cable tie (Pt.No. P09-014)) (Figure 1 [15]) on the heat shrink sleeve
    (Figure 1 [17]).
    2.1.8 Attach the loose cable (Figure 1 [1]) with cable ties (Figure 1 [15]) to the isolator/turnbuckle
    assembly (Figure 1 [12]) and heat shrink sleeve (Figure 1 [17]).
    2.1.9 Cut the end of the cable (Figure 1 [1]) to the correct length and install a new Terminal
    (Figure 1 [23]).
    2.1.10 Install the screw (Figure 1 [21]), washer (Figure 1 [22]) and terminal (Figure 1 [23]) on the
    vertical stabilizer structure.
    2.1.11 Move the sleeve (Figure 1 [17]) on the isolator/turnbuckle assembly (Figure 1 [12]) to see the
    holes (Figure 1 [18]).
    2.1.12 Carefully pull the antenna cable to the side to put the spring in the isolator/turnbuckle
    assembly (Figure 1 [12]) in tension. Put a pin punch (Pin punch (Pt.No. Local supply)) in the
    holes (Figure 1 [18]) to lock the spring.
    2.1.13 Release the cable (Figure 1 [1]) and push the rod (Figure 1 [14]) into the isolator/turnbuckle
    assembly (Figure 1 [12]).
    2.1.14 Remove the pin punch (Pin punch (Pt.No. Local supply)) from the holes (Figure 1 [18]).
    2.1.15 Attach the spring balance (Spring balance 0 to 34 lbf (0 to 150 N) (Pt.No. Local supply))
    (Figure 1 [20]) to the rod (Figure 1 [14]). Pull the spring balance to give a force of 22.5 lbf
    (100 N) to the cable (Figure 1 [1]). Make sure the rod (Figure 1 [14]) moves away from the
    shackle (Figure 1 [11]). Do Step 2.1.11 to Step 2.1.14 again, if necessary.

    Note

    A gage (Gage push/pull 0 to 150 lbs (0 to 70 kgs) (Pt.No. 903.70.32.920)) can be used as
    an alternative.

    2.1.16 Remove the spring balance (Figure 1 [20]) and the attachment from the rod (Figure 1 [14]).
    2.2 The Complete Assembly
    2.2.1 Install the cable (Figure 1 [1]) terminal (Figure 1 [23]) with the screw (Figure 1 [21]) and
    washer (Figure 1 [22]) to the anchor nut in the vertical stabilizer structure.
    2.2.2 Install the new Cotter pin (Figure 1 [7]), washer (Figure 1 [8]) and pin (Figure 1 [10]) through
    the shackle (Figure 1 [11]) with the isolator/turnbuckle assembly (Figure 1 [12]), to the
    vertical stabilizer bracket (Figure 1 [9]).
    2.2.3 Install the cable (Figure 1 [1]) in the feed through (Figure 1 [2]).
    2.2.4 Do Step 2.1.11 to Step 2.1.15 to make sure that the cable (Figure 1 [1]) tension is correct.
    2.2.5 Remove the spring balance (Spring balance 0 to 34 lbf (0 to 150 N) (Pt.No. Local supply))
    (Figure 1 [20]) and the attachment from the rod (Figure 1 [14]).
    2.3 Close Up
    2.3.1 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − HF RX (AVIONIC 2 BUS)
    − HF TX (AVIONIC 2 BUS)
    2.3.2 Close the access door 31 AB.

    Effectivity: SHORT HF ANTENNA 12-B-23-11-04-00A-920B-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-09-01 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.3.3 Do an operational test of the HF communication system (refer to DM 12-


    B-23-11-00-00A-903A-A).

    Effectivity: SHORT HF ANTENNA 12-B-23-11-04-00A-920B-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-09-01 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2 3

    4
    1
    1.26 in
    B (32 mm)

    1 5
    A
    6
    FR 37
    A

    C
    23

    22
    13
    14
    21

    15

    20 12
    B

    E 7
    19 18 E 9
    C
    15

    11 8
    13 14
    12 10

    11

    15 15

    17 15
    D 12

    16 15
    15

    D 1
    1

    12-B-231104-A-S4080-20059-A-01-1

    Figure 1 HF Short Antenna – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: SHORT HF ANTENNA 12-B-23-11-04-00A-920B-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-09-01 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: SHORT HF ANTENNA 12-B-23-11-04-00A-920B-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-09-01 Page 7
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: SHORT HF ANTENNA 12-B-23-11-04-00A-920B-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-09-01 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    HF POWER AMPLIFIER

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    HF POWER AMPLIFIER - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................................................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 HF Power Amplifier – Removal/Installation............................................................ 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-23-11-00-00A-903A-A HF COMMUNICATION - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A STANDARD CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-11-06-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-06-17 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Open and install a clip (Safety clip (circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on these circuit
    breakers:
    − HF RX (AVIONIC 2 BUS)
    − HF TX (AVIONIC 2 BUS)
    1.2 Remove the center carpet:
    − Executive interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − Standard interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A
    1.3 Open the access panel 12 KZ.
    1.4 Disconnect the two coaxial connectors (Figure 1 [4]) and the electrical connector (Figure 1 [5]) from
    the power amplifier (Figure 1 [1]).
    1.5 Loosen the hold-down fasteners (Figure 1 [3]) and disengage them from the power amplifier
    (Figure 1 [1]).
    1.6 Remove the power amplifier (Figure 1 [1]) from the mounting tray (Figure 1 [2]).
    2 Installation
    2.1 Install the power amplifier (Figure 1 [1]) on the mounting tray (Figure 1 [2]).
    2.2 Engage the hold-down fasteners (Figure 1 [3]) in the power amplifier (Figure 1 [1]). Tighten the hold-
    down fasteners (Figure 1 [3]).
    2.3 Connect the electrical connector (Figure 1 [5]) and the two coaxial connectors (Figure 1 [4]) to the
    power amplifier(Figure 1 [1]).
    2.4 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − HF RX (AVIONIC 2 BUS)
    − HF TX (AVIONIC 2 BUS)
    2.5 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.6 Close the access panel 12 KZ.
    2.7 Install the center carpet:

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-11-06-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-06-17 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − Executive interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A


    − Standard interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A
    2.8 Do an operational test of the HF communication system (Refer to DM 12-B-23-11-00-00A-903A-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-11-06-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-06-17 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    FRA 31

    A B

    FRA 32

    FRA 31

    B
    3

    12-B-231105-A-S4080-20057-A-01-1

    Figure 1 HF Power Amplifier – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-11-06-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-06-17 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-11-06-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-06-17 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-11-06-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-06-17 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    VHF COMMUNICATION

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    VHF COMMUNICATION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION.................................................. 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 2
    2 Description.............................................................................................................. 2
    3 Component Description.......................................................................................... 3
    3.1 Multi Mode Digital Radio 1 and 2 Transceivers and their Fans.............................. 3
    3.2 KMC 2220 MF Controller........................................................................................ 3
    3.3 Frequency Transfer Switch..................................................................................... 3
    3.4 Modular Avionics Unit............................................................................................. 3
    3.5 VHF 1 and 2 Antennas........................................................................................... 4
    3.6 EMERG COM 1 Switch.......................................................................................... 4
    4 Operation (Ref. and ).............................................................................................. 4
    4.1 General................................................................................................................... 4
    4.2 Controls and Displays............................................................................................. 4
    4.2.1 Primary Flight Display Controller............................................................................ 4
    4.2.2 MF Controller.......................................................................................................... 4

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    Index of Figures Page

    1 VHF Communication Systems 1 and 2 – Communication Controls and Displays.. 6


    2 VHF 1 and 2 Communication Systems – Schematic.............................................. 7

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-31-41-00-00A-040A-A MODULAR AVIONICS UNIT - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-34-00-00-00A-040A-A NAVIGATION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-34-51-00-00A-040A-A VHF NAVIGATION SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-34-53-00-00A-040A-A ADF SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-12-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Description

    1 General
    The VHF communications systems 1 and 2 give voice communication between aircraft, or between the aircraft and
    a ground station. The VHF 1 communications system is connected to a remote frequency transfer switch on the
    Power Control Lever (PCL). All other functions of the two VHF communications systems are the same.

    2 Description
    Each VHF communication system has the components that follow:
    − MMDR 1 and 2 and their fans

    − KMC 2220 MF controller

    − Frequency transfer switch

    − Modular Avionics Unit (MAU)

    − VHF 1 and VHF 2 antennas (S65-8280-10)

    − EMERG COM 1 switch

    MMDR 1 and 2 are VHF-NAV/COM transceivers each with a self contained ADF receiver. The VHF NAV area
    contains VHF Omni-Range (VOR), Localizer (LOC) and Glideslope (GS) functions. The VHF COM area contains 3
    receivers that operate at the same time and one 16 Watt transmitter.
    Each MMDR is supplied with a voltage of 28 VDC. They are controlled by other Line Replaceable Units (LRUs)
    which send control information through an ARINC 429 data bus. Some outputs from the MMDRs are in digital
    format and are sent to other LRUs through an ARINC 429 data bus. The MMDRs also give analog outputs.
    The single transmitter is a 2280 channel, 16 Watt Double Side Band (DSB), Amplitude Modulated (AM) COM
    transmitter that has a channel spacing operation of 8.33/25 kHz. The six receivers of each MMDR include one 200
    channel NAV receiver, one 40 channel glideslope receiver, and four receivers, which can be any combination of
    COM or ADF. The MMDRs use one COM and ADF receiver channel. The COM receivers have 2280 channels and
    these have a channel spacing operation in increments of 8.33/25 kHz. The ADF tunes frequencies from 190 kHz to
    1799 kHz and 2180 kHz to 2189 kHz.
    The description and operation of the navigation part of the MMDR transceiver is given in DM 12-
    B-34-51-00-00A-040A-A.
    The description and operation of the ADF part of the MMDR transceiver is given in DM 12-B-34-53-00-00A-040A-A.
    The power supplies to the VHF communication systems 1 and 2 are as follows:
    − 28 VDC through MMDR 1 (AVIONIC 1 BUS) circuit breaker

    − 28 VDC through MMDR 2 PRI (MAIN BUS) circuit breaker

    − 28 VDC through MMDR 2 SEC (STANDBY BUS) circuit breaker

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-12-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3 Component Description

    3.1 Multi Mode Digital Radio 1 and 2 Transceivers and their Fans
    The MMDR transceivers are installed in racks, one behind the pilots PFD and one behind the upper MFD. Each
    MMDR transceiver is a combined VHF communications and navigation transceiver and is part of the VHF
    communication system. Each transceiver contains one transmitter and six receivers.
    The MMDRs receive data inputs in ARINC 429 format and data outputs in ARINC 429 and analog formats. The
    VHF NAV area contains VOR, LOC and GS functions details given in DM 12-B-34-00-00-00A-040A-A.
    The VHF communications area contains four receivers available for COM and ADF functions and one transmitter.
    Primary controls for the MMDRs are on the KMC 2220 MF controller and the KMC 2210 PFD control panel with the
    set information shown on the PFDs. The EMERG COM 1 switch is a two-position switch which is installed on the
    cockpit oxygen indication panel. The usual position for the switch is NORM which means the radios are tuned
    normally. The other position for the switch is 121.5 MHz and is a preset communication frequency for COM 1
    emergency transmissions.

    3.2 KMC 2220 MF Controller


    The MF controller is installed in the center console. The MF controller contains shortcut control keys and window
    navigation/cursor movement/menu controls, they are on the upper part of the controller as follows:
    − Arrow keys - four arrowed keys (up, down, left and right) move window focus in the shown direction to the next
    interactive window

    − Joystick/knob control - controls cursor focus in a window which lets operation from item to item after selection.
    Dependent on the data field, a concentric knob can control the item that has cursor focus or a value can be
    input through alphanumeric keypad

    − ENT button - makes sure of the entry of data

    − PAGE button - shows menu of possible pages that can be set in this window

    − MFD swap button - sets the situation awareness and systems MFDs. All window navigation operations as
    shown will also be set

    − DETAIL button - calls up a secondary window related to the current active window that gives additional details
    related to the set item

    3.3 Frequency Transfer Switch


    The frequency transfer switch is installed on the power control lever in the center console. It has two functions as
    follows:
    − To interchange the active and standby communication frequencies

    − To set the communications system to active entry (direct tuning) mode and to exit the active entry mode and
    return to the standby frequency

    3.4 Modular Avionics Unit


    The MAU is installed under the cabin floor and has a cabinet/chassis that contains a backplane circuit card
    assembly, cooling fans and 12 user Input/Output (I/O) module slots that contain LRUs for different functions. The
    MAU cabinet is divided into two channels (A and B), with each channel electrically isolated from the other with its

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-12-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    own power supply module, Network Interface Controller (NIC) module and data communication backplane (Refer to
    DM 12-B-31-41-00-00A-040A-A).

    3.5 VHF 1 and 2 Antennas


    The MMDR 1 communication system uses the VHF antenna that is installed at the bottom of the fuselage. The
    MMDR 2 communication system uses the VHF antenna that is installed at the top of the fuselage.
    The antennas receive and transmit signals in the frequency band between 118.000 MHz and 136.975 MHz.
    The lower and upper antenna are blade-type antenna each with a single coaxial connector on the base. The
    antenna are installed in the positions as follows:
    − VHF 1 antenna on the bottom of the fuselage (on the centerline) between frames 28 and 29

    − VHF 2 antenna on the top of the fuselage (on the centerline) at frame 31

    3.6 EMERG COM 1 Switch


    The EMERG COM 1 switch is installed on the pilots oxygen indication panel. It sets normal radio tuning or a preset
    emergency communication frequency for COM 1 as follows:
    − NORM normal radio tuning controls are set

    − 121.5 MHz VHF COM 1 active frequency is set to 121.5 MHz. The previous active frequency is moved to the
    standby frequency window

    4 Operation (Ref. Fig. 1 and Fig. 2)

    4.1 General
    Primary controls for MMDR 1 and 2 are on the PFD and the MF controllers, with the set information shown on the
    PFDs.

    4.2 Controls and Displays


    The PFD controller can only operate on the PFD and the MF controller operates on the PFDs and the MFDs.

    4.2.1 Primary Flight Display Controller


    The PFD controller push button controls for normal window navigation are as follows:
    − DME (Distance Measuring Equipment) short-cut key to the DME detail window on the radio window

    − Detail calls up a secondary window related to the current active window that supplies more instruction related
    to the set item

    − PFD lets PFD control to be transferred from one to the other PFD if a controller fails

    4.2.2 MF Controller
    To do page operation push the PAGE button on the MF controller when in an active window. A menu that lists the
    available pages for the window will be shown. Use the joystick to make a selection and then push the ENT key on
    the MF controller to show a new window. Push the PAGE button again or wait 60 seconds and the page menu is
    removed. There are two types of menu as follows:

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-12-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − Page menus to access pages of functions contained in the same window

    − Functionality menus to show set headings that stay the same regardless of the current mode of operation

    All menus once set have cursor snapping, so that the cursor snaps to the first item in the menu and to the
    subsequent items with joystick operation. When a keyboard or an MF controller entry is made the cursor stays
    inside the data field until the entry is completed when the ENT key is pushed or the entry is erased with the CLR or
    DEL keys. If an MF controller short-cut key is pushed or the cursor time out period is reached the entry is
    considered not finished and goes back to the previous value.
    The MF controller has short-cut keys, which can be used to quickly access functionality on the windows. Pressing a
    short-cut key moves the window focus to the window that contains the set function and places the cursor on the
    item.
    The short-cut keys on the MF controller when pushed moves the window focus and places the cursor as follow:
    − COM - to the COM 1 field on the PFD RADIOS window

    − NAV - to the NAV 1 field on the PFD RADIOS window

    − XPDR - to the XPDR field on the PFD RADIOS window

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-12-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    COM1 COM1
    118.015 ADHRS PFD ADHRS PFD 118.015
    RADIO RADIO COM2
    122.960 COM2 122.960
    SQ R SQ R
    IDENT VFR IDENT VFR
    108.00 NAV1 NAV1 108.00
    DME DETAIL DME DETAIL
    108.05 050° NAV2 NAV2 108.05
    DME ID VOL VOL DME ID

    1700.0 ADF SEL SEL ADF 1700.0


    ANT ANT
    PUSH PUSH
    R R
    1234 050 XPDR SQ/ID SQ/ID
    XPDR 1234 050
    GND ALT PUSH PUSH GND ALT
    FREQ FREQ
    SWAP SWAP

    PILOT PFD PILOT PFD COPILOT PFD COPILOT PFD


    CONTROL CONTROL

    MOR POWER CONDITION FLAP


    EMERG MAX
    PHONE

    MAX FLIGHT
    COM1 IDLE
    COM NAV XPDR
    CONNECT ONLY
    ONE HEADSET

    121.5 MHz
    D INFO CKLST
    MIC

    GROUND
    IDLE

    NORM
    O
    F
    SEL
    F
    BOSE

    CUT-OFF DETAIL
    FEATHER

    E
    N PAGE
    COM 1 T
    EMERG
    COM1 FREQUENCY
    TRANSFER MF
    SWITCH
    SWITCH CONTROL

    12-B-231200-A-S4080-20045-A-01-1

    Figure 1 VHF Communication Systems 1 and 2 – Communication Controls and Displays

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-12-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    MAIN BUS STANDBY BUS AVIONIC 1 BUS


    28V DC 28V DC VHF 2 28V DC
    ANTENNA
    E319
    (UPPER)
    MMDR 2 MMDR 2
    MMDR 1
    PRI SEC

    MULTI-MODE DIGITAL
    RADIO TRANSCEIVER 2 FAN FAN
    POWER RELAY

    MULTI-MODE DIGITAL MULTI-MODE DIGITAL


    RADIO TRANSCEIVER 2 RADIO TRANSCEIVER 1
    KTR 2280 KTR 2280

    CHANNEL B CHANNEL A

    EMERG
    MODULAR AVIONICS UNIT COM 1
    SWITCH

    FREQUENCY
    TRANSFER
    SWITCH
    S 1347

    POWER
    CONTROL
    LEVER

    MF CONTROLLER
    KMC 2220

    F1
    VH R
    E
    XP
    VHF 1
    ANTENNA
    E289
    (LOWER)

    12-B-231200-A-S4080-20042-A-01-1

    Figure 2 VHF 1 and 2 Communication Systems – Schematic

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-12-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 7
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-12-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    VHF COMMUNICATION

    ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Table of Contents Page

    VHF COMMUNICATION - ADJUSTMENT/TEST....................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required
    Headset Part Local supply As
    required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: SINGLE VHF


    12-B-23-12-00-00A-903A-A
    COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-12 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Operational Test
    1.1 Job Set Up
    1.1.1 Energize the AVIONICS 1 BUS and AVIONICS 2 BUS of the aircraft electrical system (Refer
    to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    1.1.2 Make sure that the headsets and oxygen mics are connected as follow:
    − Pilot and copilots headsets in their normal audio jack sockets
    − The oxygen mics in their normal audio jack sockets
    1.1.3 Open and install a clip (Safety clip (circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on
    these circuit breakers:
    − MMDR 1 (AVIONIC 1 BUS)
    − MMDR 2 SEC (STANDBY BUS)
    − MMDR 2 PRI (MAIN BUS)
    1.2 MMDR Procedure
    1.2.1 On the PFD make sure that there are no COM 1 and COM 2 annunciations and that the
    COM 1 and COM 2 sub-windows show amber dashes only (- - -).

    Note

    NAV 1 and NAV 2 also show amber dashes (- - -).

    1.2.2 Remove the safety clip and close the circuit breaker as follows:
    − MMDR 1 (AVIONIC 1 BUS)

    Make sure that COM 1 and NAV 1 annunciations come into view and that the amber dashes
    (- - -) are replaced with numerical figures.
    1.2.3 Remove the safety clips and close the circuit breakers as follows:
    − MMDR 2 SEC (STANDBY BUS)
    − MMDR 2 PRI (MAIN BUS)

    Make sure that COM 2 and NAV 2 annunciations come into view and that the amber dashes
    (- - -) are replaced with numerical figures.
    1.3 Frequency Adjustment
    1.3.1 On the pilots PFD push the soft-key adjacent to COM 1 or use the PFD controller to set
    COM 1. Make sure COM 1 comes on as the active sub-window.

    Effectivity: SINGLE VHF


    12-B-23-12-00-00A-903A-A
    COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-12 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1.3.2 Make sure that the standby frequency can be adjusted by the inner and outer SEL knob on
    the pilots PFD controller.
    1.3.3 Do the Step 1.3.1 and Step 1.3.2 for the copilots PFD (if installed) and copilots PFD
    controller using COM 2.
    1.3.4 On the PCL push the FREQ TRANSFER switch and make sure that the COM 1 standby and
    active frequency toggle..
    1.4 COM Transmission and Receive Check
    1.4.1 Set the frequency to a known VHF communications station
    1.4.2 On the pilots audio control panel push COM 1, MIC and AUDIO.
    1.4.3 On the pilots PFD controller adjust the volume of the VHF communication system to a
    satisfactory level.
    1.4.4 Make sure that the VHF communication station is heard clearly without distortion.
    1.4.5 Push the pilots PTT and use the pilots headset mic to transmit a message.
    1.4.6 Make sure that the VHF communication station receives the message clearly and with no
    distortion.
    1.4.7 Make sure that sidetone is heard in the pilots headset.
    1.4.8 Set the MASK MIC switch to MASK.
    1.4.9 Push the pilots PTT and use the pilots mask mic to transmit a message.
    1.4.10 Make sure that the VHF communication station receives the message clearly and with no
    distortion.
    1.4.11 Push the pilots hand mic PTT and use the pilots hand mic to transmit a message.
    1.4.12 Make sure that the VHF communication station receives the message clearly and with no
    distortion.
    1.4.13 Release the pilots PTT.
    1.4.14 Set the MASK MIC switch to MIC.
    1.4.15 Do Step 1.4.2 thru Step 1.4.13 for COM 2 using the copilot PFD Controller, headset, mask
    and hand mic.
    1.5 Emergency Tuning
    1.5.1 Set COM 1 frequency to 136.00 MHz.
    1.5.2 On the oxygen panel set the EMERG COM 1 switch to 121.5 MHz.
    1.5.3 Make sure that the pilots COM 1 automatically tunes to 121.5 MHz.
    1.5.4 Make sure that the COM 1 standby frequency tunes to 136.00 MHz.
    1.5.5 On the oxygen panel set the EMERG COM 1 switch to NORMAL.
    1.5.6 On the pilots PFD controller push the PUSH FREQ SWAP switch and make sure that the
    standby and set frequencies of COM 1 swap.
    1.6 Close Up
    1.6.1 Disconnect the headsets and oxygen mics as follows:
    − Pilot and copilots headsets from their normal audio jack sockets
    − The oxygen mics from their normal audio jack sockets
    1.6.2 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).

    Effectivity: SINGLE VHF


    12-B-23-12-00-00A-903A-A
    COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-12 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: SINGLE VHF


    12-B-23-12-00-00A-903A-A
    COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
    End of data module
    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-12 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    MULTI MODE DIGITAL RADIO

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    MULTI MODE DIGITAL RADIO - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Multi–Mode Digital Radio Transceiver – Removal/Installation............................... 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-23-12-00-00A-903A-A VHF COMMUNICATION - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-34-51-00-00A-903A-A VHF NAVIGATION SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-34-53-00-00A-903A-A ADF SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-46-30-01-00A-920A-A PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    12-B-46-30-03-00A-920A-A MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-12-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-12 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark


    3/32" Hexagonal-head wrench Part Local supply 1

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedures for the removal and installation of the VHF COM/NAV system
    transceivers. The KTR 2280 Multi-Mode Digital Radio (MMDR) transceivers 1 and 2 are installed as follow:
    − MMDR 1 transceiver, installed behind the pilots Primary Flight Display (PFD)
    − MMDR 2 transceiver, installed behind the upper Multi Function Display (MFD)

    The removal and installation procedures are the same for the two MMDRs.
    2 Removal
    2.1 Job Set Up
    2.1.1 Open and install a clip (Safety clip (circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on
    these circuit breakers:
    For the MMDR 1 transceiver:
    − MMDR 1 (AVIONIC 1 BUS)

    For the MMDR 2 transceiver:


    − MMDR 2 PRI (MAIN BUS)
    − MMDR 2 SEC (STANDBY BUS)
    2.1.2 Get access to the applicable MMDR:
    − For the MMDR 1 transceiver remove the pilot's PFD (Refer to DM 12-
    B-46-30-01-00A-920A-A)
    − For the MMDR 2 transceiver remove the upper MFD (Refer to DM 12-
    B-46-30-03-00A-920A-A)
    2.2 Procedure

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-12-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-12 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.2.1 Put the wrench (3/32" Hexagonal-head wrench (Pt.No. Local supply)) in the access hole
    (Figure 1 [3]) and make sure it engages correctly in the MMDR transceiver locking screw.
    2.2.2 On the MMDR transceiver (Figure 1 [2]), turn the locking screw (Figure 1 [3])
    counterclockwise until the MMDR transceiver (Figure 1 [2]) is released from the rack
    (Figure 1 [1]).
    2.2.3 Carefully remove the MMDR transceiver (Figure 1 [2]) from the rack (Figure 1 [1]).
    3 Installation
    3.1 Procedure
    3.1.1 Put the MMDR transceiver (Figure 1 [2]) in the rack (Figure 1 [1]) into position. Carefully
    push the MMDR transceiver (Figure 1 [2]) until the locking screw is engaged at the rear.
    3.1.2 Put the wrench (3/32" Hexagonal-head wrench (Pt.No. Local supply)) in the access hole
    (Figure 1 [3]) and make sure it engages correctly in the MMDR transceiver locking screw.
    3.1.3
    CAUTION

    DO NOT TIGHTEN THE LOCKING SCREW TOO MUCH. THIS WILL HELP PREVENT
    DAMAGE TO THE LOCKING SCREW.

    Apply light pressure to the wrench clockwise to tighten the locking screw (Figure 1 [3]).
    3.2 Close Up
    3.2.1 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.2.2 Close the access to the applicable MMDR:
    − For the MMDR 1 transceiver install the pilot's PFD (refer to DM 12-
    B-46-30-01-00A-920A-A)
    − For the MMDR 2 transceiver install the upper MFD (refer to DM 12-
    B-46-30-03-00A-920A-A)
    3.2.3 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    For the MMDR 1 transceiver:
    − MMDR 1 (AVIONIC 1 BUS)

    For the MMDR 2 transceiver:


    − MMDR 2 PRI (MAIN BUS)
    − MMDR 2 SEC (STANDBY BUS)
    3.2.4 Do an operational test of the VHF communication system 1 and 2 (refer to DM 12-
    B-23-12-00-00A-903A-A).
    3.2.5 Do an functional test of the VHF Navigation system (refer to DM 12-B-34-51-00-00A-903A-
    A).
    3.2.6 For MMDR 1 Only. Do an operational test of the ADF System (refer to DM 12-
    B-34-53-00-00A-903A-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-12-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-12 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A B

    A B
    3

    12-B-231201-A-S4080-20041-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Multi–Mode Digital Radio Transceiver – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-12-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-12 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-12-01-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-12 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-12-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-12 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    VHF 1 ANTENNA

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    VHF 1 ANTENNA - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION........................................................................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 VHF 1 Antenna – Removal/Installation................................................................... 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-23-12-00-00A-903A-A VHF COMMUNICATION - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-12-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Methyl-Ethyl-Ketone (MEK) Part P01-010 As
    required
    Cleaning cloth Part P02-003 As
    required
    Electrically conductive sealant Part P08-046 As
    required
    Sealant Part P08-018 As
    required
    Sealant Part P08-056 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedures for the removal and installation of the VHF 1 antenna S65-8280-10
    that is installed on the bottom of the fuselage.
    2 Removal
    2.1 In the flight compartment, open and install a clip (Safety clip (circuit breaker hold
    open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on this circuit breaker:
    − MMDR 1 (AVIONIC 1 BUS)
    2.2 At the VHF 1 antenna (Figure 1 [3]) at the bottom of the fuselage, carefully cut the sealant from around
    the antenna (Figure 1 [3]).
    2.3 Hold the antenna (Figure 1 [3]) and remove the six screws (Figure 1 [2]).
    2.4 Carefully move the antenna (Figure 1 [3]) from the bottom of the fuselage until you have access to the
    coaxial connector (Figure 1 [1]).
    2.5 Disconnect the coaxial connector (Figure 1 [1]) from the antenna (Figure 1 [3]).
    2.6 Remove the antenna (Figure 1 [3]) from the aircraft.
    3 Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-12-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.1
    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MANUFACTURER'S
    HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items (refer to DM
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A)

    Use a cloth (Cleaning cloth (Pt.No. P02-003)) with solvent (Methyl-Ethyl-Ketone


    (MEK) (Pt.No. P01-010)) to remove the sealant from the fuselage. Make sure that the contact surfaces
    are clean.
    3.2 Apply a stripe of sealant (Electrically conductive sealant (Pt.No. P08-046)), approximately 0.4 in. (10
    mm) wide, around the edge of the contact surface of the antenna (Figure 1 [3]).
    3.3 Connect the coaxial connector (Figure 1 [1]) to the antenna (Figure 1 [3]).
    3.4 Apply the sealant (Sealant (Pt.No. P08-018)) around the coaxial connector hole on the fuselage (so
    that it makes a seal between the fuselage and the antenna, when installed).

    Note

    Sealant (Sealant (Pt.No. P08-056)) can also be used.

    3.5 Hold the antenna (Figure 1 [3]) in position on the fuselage and install the six screws (Figure 1 [2]).
    3.6 Apply the sealant (Sealant (Pt.No. P08-018)) around the edge of the antenna (Figure 1 [3]). Make the
    sealant smooth.

    Note

    Sealant (Sealant (Pt.No. P08-056)) can also be used.

    3.7 Apply the sealant (Sealant (Pt.No. P08-018)) over the heads of the six screws (Figure 1 [2]).

    Note

    Sealant (Sealant (Pt.No. P08-056)) can also be used.

    3.8 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.9 In the flight compartment, remove the safety clip and close the circuit breaker:
    − MMDR 1 (AVIONIC 1 BUS)
    3.10 Do an operational test of the VHF 1 communication system (refer to DM 12-B-23-12-00-00A-903A-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-12-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    SEALANT
    (AROUND EDGES)

    A
    SEALANT
    (AROUND CONNECTOR AREA)

    ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTIVE SEALANT


    (ON CONTACT SURFACE)

    SEALANT
    (AROUND EDGES)

    2
    SEALANT
    (OVER SCREWS)

    12-B-231202-A-S4080-20043-A-01-1

    Figure 1 VHF 1 Antenna – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-12-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-12-02-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-12-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    VHF 2 ANTENNA

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    VHF 2 ANTENNA - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION........................................................................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 VHF 2 Antenna – Removal/Installation................................................................... 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-23-12-00-00A-903A-A VHF COMMUNICATION - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-12-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Methyl-Ethyl-Ketone (MEK) Part P01-010 As
    required
    Cleaning cloth Part P02-003 As
    required
    Electrically conductive sealant Part P08-046 As
    required
    Sealant Part P08-018 As
    required
    Sealant Part P08-056 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 In the flight compartment, open and install a clip (Safety clip (circuit breaker hold
    open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on these circuit breakers:
    − MMDR 2 SEC (STANDBY BUS)
    − MMDR 2 PRI (MAIN BUS)
    1.2 At the VHF 2 antenna (Figure 1 [1]) on the top of the fuselage, carefully cut the sealant from around
    the antenna (Figure 1 [1]).
    1.3 Hold the antenna (Figure 1 [1]) and remove the six screws (Figure 1 [2]).
    1.4 Carefully move the antenna (Figure 1 [1]) from the top of the fuselage until you have access to the
    coaxial connector (Figure 1 [3]).
    1.5 Disconnect the coaxial connector (Figure 1 [3]) from the antenna (Figure 1 [1]).
    1.6 Remove the antenna (Figure 1 [1]) from the aircraft.
    2 Installation
    2.1
    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MANUFACTURER'S
    HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-12-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items (refer to DM
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A)

    Use a cloth (Cleaning cloth (Pt.No. P02-003)) made moist with solvent (Methyl-Ethyl-Ketone
    (MEK) (Pt.No. P01-010)) to remove the sealant from the fuselage. Make sure that the contact surfaces
    are clean.
    2.2 Apply a stripe of sealant (Electrically conductive sealant (Pt.No. P08-046)), approximately 0.4 in. (10
    mm) wide, around the edge of the contact surface of the antenna (Figure 1 [1]).
    2.3 Apply the sealant (Sealant (Pt.No. P08-018)) around the coaxial connector hole on the fuselage (so
    that it makes a seal between the fuselage and the antenna, when installed).

    Note

    Sealant (Sealant (Pt.No. P08-056)) can also be used.

    2.4 Connect the connector (Figure 1 [3]) to the antenna (Figure 1 [1]).
    2.5 Hold the antenna (Figure 1 [1]) in position on the fuselage and install the six screws (Figure 1 [2]).
    2.6 Apply the sealant (Sealant (Pt.No. P08-018)) around the edge of the antenna (Figure 1 [1]).

    Note

    Sealant (Sealant (Pt.No. P08-056)) can also be used.

    2.7 Apply the sealant (Sealant (Pt.No. P08-018)) over the heads of the six screws (Figure 1 [2]).

    Note

    Sealant (Sealant (Pt.No. P08-056)) can also be used.

    2.8 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.9 In the flight compartment, remove the safety clip and close these circuit breakers:
    − MMDR 2 SEC (STANDBY BUS)
    − MMDR 2 PRI (MAIN BUS)
    2.10 Do an operational test of the VHF 2 communication system (refer to DM 12-B-23-12-00-00A-903A-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-12-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    2
    SEALANT
    (OVER SCREWS)

    SEALANT
    (AROUND EDGES)

    ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTIVE SEALANT


    (ON CONTACT SURFACE)

    SEALANT
    (AROUND EDGES)

    SEALANT
    (AROUND CONNECTOR AREA)

    12-B-231203-A-S4080-20044-A-01-1

    Figure 1 VHF 2 Antenna – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-12-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-12-03-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-12-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    SATCOM

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    SATCOM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION.......................................................................... 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1
    2 Description.............................................................................................................. 1
    3 Component Description.......................................................................................... 1
    3.1 SATCOM Antenna.................................................................................................. 1
    3.2 Antenna Cable........................................................................................................ 2
    3.2.1 Executive Interior.................................................................................................... 2
    3.2.2 Standard or Medical Interior................................................................................... 2

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description

    1 General
    The optional SATCOM provision allows the use of customer supplied communications equipment when the aircraft
    is in flight.

    2 Description
    The SATCOM system provision has the components that follow:
    − an antenna
    − an antenna cable

    3 Component Description

    3.1 SATCOM Antenna


    The SATCOM antenna is installed on the top of the fuselage between frames 27 and 28 on the aircraft centerline. It
    is a low profile Iridium/GPS antenna that receives and transmits signals in the frequency band of between 1565
    MHz and 1626.5 MHz.

    Effectivity: SATCOM 12-B-23-16-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-06 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.2 Antenna Cable


    The antenna cable carries the communication signals between the cabin SATCOM installation and the antenna.
    Two SATCOM provision installations are possible:

    3.2.1 Executive Interior


    The antenna cable is routed to the right armrest at seat two (frame 20). An electrical connector at seat two right
    armrest connects the SATCOM communication equipment to the antenna.

    3.2.2 Standard or Medical Interior


    The antenna cable is routed to the right armrest at seat two (frame 17). An electrical connector at seat two right
    armrest connects the SATCOM communication equipment to the antenna.

    Effectivity: SATCOM 12-B-23-16-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-06 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    SATCOM ANTENNA

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    SATCOM ANTENNA - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 SATCOM Antenna – Removal/Installation............................................................. 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Sealant Part P08-018 As
    required

    Effectivity: SATCOM 12-B-23-16-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-06 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark


    Sealant Part P08-046 As
    required
    Methyl-Ethyl-Ketone (MEK) Part P01-010 As
    required
    Cleaning cloth Part P02-003 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 At the SATCOM antenna (Figure 1 [2]) at the top of the fuselage between frame 27 and frame 28,
    carefully cut the sealant from around the antenna (Figure 1 [2]).
    1.2 Remove the sealant from the heads of the four screws (Figure 1 [1]).
    1.3 Hold the antenna (Figure 1 [2]) and remove the four screws (Figure 1 [1]).
    1.4 Carefully move the antenna (Figure 1 [2]) from the fuselage until you have access to the antenna
    electrical connector (Figure 1 [3]).
    1.5 Disconnect the electrical connector (Figure 1 [3]) from the antenna (Figure 1 [2]).
    1.6 Remove the antenna (Figure 1 [2]) from the aircraft.
    2 Installation

    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MANUFACTURER'S
    HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items (refer to DM 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A)

    2.1 Use a cloth (Cleaning cloth (Pt.No. P02-003)) made moist with solvent (Methyl-Ethyl-Ketone
    (MEK) (Pt.No. P01-010)) to remove the sealant from the fuselage. Make sure that the contact surfaces
    are clean.
    2.2 Apply a stripe of sealant (Sealant (Pt.No. P08-046)), approximately 0.4 in. (10 mm) wide, around the
    edge of the contact surface of the antenna (Figure 1 [2]).

    Effectivity: SATCOM 12-B-23-16-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-06 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.3 Connect the coaxial connector (Figure 1 [3]) to the antenna (Figure 1 [2]).
    2.4 Apply the sealant (Sealant (Pt.No. P08-018)) around the coaxial connector hole on the fuselage (so
    that it makes a seal between the fuselage and the antenna, when installed).
    2.5 Hold the antenna (Figure 1 [2]) in position on the fuselage and install the four screws (Figure 1 [1]).
    2.6 Apply the sealant (Sealant (Pt.No. P08-018)) around the edge of the antenna (Figure 1 [2]). Make the
    sealant smooth.
    2.7 Apply the sealant (Sealant (Pt.No. P08-018)) over the heads of the four screws (Figure 1 [1]).
    2.8 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.

    Effectivity: SATCOM 12-B-23-16-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-06 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FRAME 28

    APPLY ELECTRICALLY
    CONDUCTIVE SEALANT
    (ON CONTACT SURFACE)

    FRAME 28

    FRAME 27

    A 3

    12-B-231601-A-S4080-00001-A-01-1

    Figure 1 SATCOM Antenna – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: SATCOM 12-B-23-16-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-06 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: SATCOM 12-B-23-16-01-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-06 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: SATCOM 12-B-23-16-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-06 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PASSENGER ADVISORY SYSTEM

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    PASSENGER ADVISORY SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION................................ 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-23-40-10-00A-040A-A PASSENGER ENTERTAINMENT - DESCRIPTION
    AND OPERATION
    12-B-23-50-00-00A-040A-A AUDIO INTEGRATING SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-23-50-10-00A-040A-A DUAL AUDIO INTEGRATING SYSTEM -
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Description

    1 General
    The Passenger Advisory (PA) system is used to transmit the pilots and copilots microphone audio through cabin
    loudspeakers to the passengers. It is part of the audio integrating system (Refer to DM 12-B-23-50-00-00A-040A-
    A) or the dual audio integrating system (refer to DM 12-B-23-50-10-00A-040A-A) (if installed).
    The PA system also transmits audio to the cabin entertainment system (refer to DM 12-B-23-40-10-00A-040A-A) (if
    installed) through the audio integrating system (refer to DM 12-B-23-50-00-00A-040A-A) or the dual audio
    integrating system (refer to DM 12-B-23-50-10-00A-040A-A) (if installed).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-40-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 1
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-40-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    PASSENGER ENTERTAINMENT

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    PASSENGER ENTERTAINMENT - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description
    The optional passenger entertainment system gives the electrical wiring provision for an entertainment system.
    A CABIN ENT circuit breaker is installed on the CABIN BUS to give a 28 VDC power supply for the system.
    Headphone sockets are installed at each passenger seat position.

    Effectivity: PASSENGER
    12-B-23-40-10-00A-040A-A
    ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
    End of data module
    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 1
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: PASSENGER
    12-B-23-40-10-00A-040A-A
    ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    AUDIO INTEGRATING SYSTEM

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    AUDIO INTEGRATING SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION..................................... 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 2
    2 Component Description.......................................................................................... 3
    2.1 Audio Control Panel - General................................................................................ 3
    2.2 Audio Control Panel - Controls............................................................................... 4
    2.2.1 SPKR/PA ON OFF PA Switch................................................................................ 4
    2.2.2 Five COM MIC (Microphone) Selector Buttons...................................................... 4
    2.2.3 SPLIT Mode Button................................................................................................ 5
    2.2.4 ICS VOL CREW PAX (Crew/Passenger Intercom System Volume) Knob............. 5
    2.2.5 PUSH EMG/OFF (Power On and Emergency/Off) Switch..................................... 5
    2.2.6 ICS (Intercom System) Button................................................................................ 5
    2.2.7 Five COM AUDIO Selector Buttons........................................................................ 5
    2.2.8 NAV 1 and 2, ADF 1 and 2, DME 1 and 2, AUX, MKR (Navigation Radio Audio) 5
    Selector Buttons.....................................................................................................
    2.2.9 MUTE (Marker Beacon Mute/Test) Button............................................................. 5
    2.2.10 MKR SENS HI LO (Marker Beacon Sensitivity) Button.......................................... 5
    2.3 Pilot and Copilot PTT Switches.............................................................................. 6
    2.4 MIC SELECT Switches........................................................................................... 6
    2.5 Mask Microphones................................................................................................. 6
    2.6 Bose Headset, Headset and Microphone Connectors........................................... 6
    2.7 Hand Microphone Connectors................................................................................ 6
    2.8 3rd Crew Member Headset Connector................................................................... 6
    2.9 Loudspeakers......................................................................................................... 6
    3 Operation................................................................................................................ 6
    3.1 Normal Operation................................................................................................... 6
    3.2 COM Microphone Operation................................................................................... 7
    3.3 Communication and Navigation Audio Operation................................................... 7
    3.4 Marker Beacon Operation...................................................................................... 7
    3.5 Split Mode Operation.............................................................................................. 7
    3.6 Emergency Operation............................................................................................. 7
    3.7 Intercom.................................................................................................................. 7
    3.8 Passenger Address................................................................................................ 8
    3.9 Aural Warnings....................................................................................................... 8
    3.9.1 Central Warning System......................................................................................... 8
    3.9.2 Monitor Warning System........................................................................................ 8
    3.9.3 Autopilot.................................................................................................................. 8
    3.9.4 (Optional) Traffic Advisory System/Traffic Collision and Avoidance System.......... 8
    3.9.5 (Optional) Terrain Awareness Warning System/Enhanced Ground Proximity 8
    Warning System.....................................................................................................

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 2

    Effectivity: SINGLE AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-00-00A-040A-A
    PANEL

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-03-17 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Audio Control Panel – Layout................................................................................. 9


    2 Audio Integrating System – Schematic................................................................... 10

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-22-10-00-00A-040A-A AUTOPILOT - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-22-20-00-00A-040A-A SPEED AND ATTITUDE CORRECTION -
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-23-11-00-00A-040A-A HF COMMUNICATION - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-23-12-00-00A-040A-A VHF COMMUNICATION - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-31-41-00-00A-040A-A MODULAR AVIONICS UNIT - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-31-50-00-00A-040A-A CENTRAL WARNING SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-33-10-00-00A-040A-A FLIGHT COMPARTMENT LIGHTS - DESCRIPTION
    AND OPERATION
    12-B-34-32-00-00A-040A-A MARKER SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-34-44-00-00A-040A-A TRAFFIC ALERT AND COLLISION AVOIDANCE
    SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-34-45-00-00A-040A-A ENHANCED GROUND PROXIMITY WARNING
    SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-34-51-00-00A-040A-A VHF NAVIGATION SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-34-52-00-00A-040A-A DME SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-34-53-00-00A-040A-A ADF SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Description

    1 General
    The audio integrating system has an audio control panel, which controls all the aircraft audio signals. The audio
    control panel gives the pilot and the copilot control of transmit and receive functions. The system also has:
    − Speaker control
    − Five (5) Very High Frequency (VHF) communication (COM) transceivers
    − Split single panel or dual panel (independent) operation
    − Intercom System (ICS) operation with automatic voice activation (VOX)
    − Eight (8) navigation receivers as follows:

    Effectivity: SINGLE AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-00-00A-040A-A
    PANEL

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-03-17 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    ● Two navigation (NAV) receivers


    ● Two Automatic Direct Finder (ADF) receivers
    ● Two Distance Measurement Equipment (DME)
    ● One auxiliary (AUX) receiver
    ● One marker beacon (MKR) receiver
    − Pilot and copilot headset connectors
    − A pilot and copilot Press-to-Transmit (PTT) switch
    − Two flight compartment loudspeakers
    − Two cabin loudspeakers
    − A cabin microphone connector
    − A cabin headset connector.

    The system receives unmuted audio signals or warning tones through the Monitor Warning Function (MWF) of the
    Modular Avionics Unit (MAU) from:
    − The autopilot, refer to AMM 12-B-22-10-00-00A-040A-A
    − The speed and attitude correction system, refer to AMM 12-B-22-20-00-00A-040A-A
    − The Central Warning System (CWS), refer to AMM 12-B-31-50-00-00A-040A-A.

    The system receives unmuted audio signals or warning tones directly from:
    − The Traffic Advisory System/Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System (TAS/TCAS), if installed, refer to
    AMM 12-B-34-44-00-00A-040A-A
    − The Terrain Awareness and Warning System/Enhanced Ground Proximity Warning System (TAWS/EGPWS),
    if installed, refer to AMM 12-B-34-45-00-00A-040A-A.

    The system receives other audio signals from:


    − The HF communication system (if installed), refer to AMM 12-B-23-11-00-00A-040A-A
    − The VHF communication systems 1 and 2, refer to AMM 12-B-23-12-00-00A-040A-A
    − The marker system, refer to AMM 12-B-34-32-00-00A-040A-A
    − The VHF navigation systems 1 and 2, refer to AMM 12-B-34-51-00-00A-040A-A
    − The Distance Measuring Equipment (DME) system, refer to AMM 12-B-34-52-00-00A-040A-A
    − The Automatic Direction Finding (ADF) system, refer to AMM 12-B-34-53-00-00A-040A-A.

    The power supplies to the system are as follows:


    − 28 VDC through the AUDIO 1 (STANDBY BUS) circuit breaker
    − 28 VDC instrument lighting from flight compartment lights, refer to AMM 12-B-33-10-00-00A-040A-A.

    2 Component Description

    2.1 Audio Control Panel - General


    The audio control panel is installed in the top of the pilots instrument panel. The audio control panel sets and
    amplifies all the audio communication and the audio navigation signals. It also amplifies and connects some aural
    warnings directly to the pilot and copilot headset connectors and the flight compartment loudspeakers.

    Effectivity: SINGLE AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-00-00A-040A-A
    PANEL

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-03-17 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    The audio control panel is in a rectangular box with a single, electrical connector. This connects with a connector
    on the panel on which the audio control panel is installed. There is a locking screw access hole on the front panel
    of the audio control panel. A hexagonal wrench (3/32”) is put into the hole to turn the locking screw clockwise, to
    hold the control panel correctly in its assembly.
    When the pilot or copilot transmit switch is pushed, the audio control panel automatically mutes all audio inputs,
    other than warnings and sidetone.

    2.2 Audio Control Panel - Controls


    The front of the audio control panel has:
    − SPKR/PA ON OFF PA (Speaker/Passenger Address) switch
    − Five COM MIC (Microphone) selector buttons
    − SPLIT Mode button
    − ICS VOL CREW PAX (Crew/Passenger Intercom System Volume) knob
    − PUSH EMG/OFF (Power On and Emergency/Off) switch
    − ICS (Intercom System) button
    − Five COM AUDIO selector buttons
    − NAV 1 and 2, ADF 1 and 2, DME 1 and 2, AUX and MKR (Navigation radio audio) selector buttons
    − MUTE (Marker beacon mute/test) button
    − MKR SENS HI LO (Marker beacon sensitivity) button

    2.2.1 SPKR/PA ON OFF PA Switch


    The SPKR/PA switch has three functions as follows:
    − ON - The ON Light Emitting Diode (LED) comes on, all set audio comes through the cockpit speaker (headset
    audio is on always)
    − OFF - The OFF LED comes on, no audio is available through the cockpit speaker (headset audio is on always)
    − PA - The PA LED comes on; the pilot can transmit through the microphone to the passenger cabin speaker.
    The normal microphone Push-to-Transmit (PTT) switch is for the Passenger Address (PA) function. The copilot
    can continue to use the set COM radio while the pilot is heard through the speaker.

    2.2.2 Five COM MIC (Microphone) Selector Buttons


    The microphone input selector buttons are in position along the top edge of the audio control panel. The selector
    buttons are dedicated, momentary-action, push buttons.
    The COM 1 thru COM 5 MIC selector buttons are used to set the correct audio transmitter. The receiver audio is
    set automatically for the transmitter.
    When an arrow above each button is ON it shows that the button has been pushed and the mode is active (← is
    pilot selection, → is copilot selection). This is for the pilots side or copilots side or both if the mode of the Audio
    Control Panel is set to duplex or split.
    COM 5 can be set for duplex, which simulates the operation of a telephone.

    Effectivity: SINGLE AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-00-00A-040A-A
    PANEL

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-03-17 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.2.3 SPLIT Mode Button


    The audio panel has two modes of operation, normal and split. In the normal mode the pilot and copilot transmit on
    the same set COM radio. The split mode operation lets the pilot and copilot to transmit and receive on different
    COM radios.

    2.2.4 ICS VOL CREW PAX (Crew/Passenger Intercom System Volume) Knob
    The ICS VOL CREW/PAX knob control adjusts the volume of the intercom only. When the inner knob is turned
    clockwise or counterclockwise it sets the volume of the headphone up or down for the related crew intercom. When
    the outer knob is turned it controls the speaker or headphone volume for the passengers intercom. There is no
    effect on set radio levels, music input levels or passengers' volume level.

    2.2.5 PUSH EMG/OFF (Power On and Emergency/Off) Switch


    The audio control panel power is turned on and off when the PUSH EMG/OFF power switch is pushed.
    The power switch also controls the intercom, audio selector panel functions, and marker beacon receiver.

    2.2.6 ICS (Intercom System) Button


    The ICS selector button gives communication between the pilot, copilot and all passengers that are on a headset.
    An LED shows the active mode.

    2.2.7 Five COM AUDIO Selector Buttons


    The COM 1 thru COM 5 AUDIO selector buttons are to set the correct receiver audio. The set transmitter receive
    audio is set automatically. When a selector button is pushed the correct radio audio comes on. The pilot can
    identify which receivers are set by which of the green LEDs come on.

    2.2.8 NAV 1 and 2, ADF 1 and 2, DME 1 and 2, AUX, MKR (Navigation Radio Audio)
    Selector Buttons
    When a selector button is pushed it turns on the correct navigation receiver audio. When set, the correct LED
    comes on.
    The AUX selector button sets the entertainment audio. When the green LED above the button comes on
    entertainment audio can be heard.
    When the MKR selector button is pushed, the LED above the button comes on. The MKR selector button lets the
    Primary Flight Display (PFD) and the audio indicator show when the aircraft is above a 75-MHz marker beacon
    transmitter.
    When the LED above the MKR button is OFF, the marker audio is muted. The visual indications on the PFD
    continue to operate when the aircraft is above the marker.

    2.2.9 MUTE (Marker Beacon Mute/Test) Button


    When the MUTE button is pushed and released, the marker beacon audio is muted for that marker beacon.

    2.2.10 MKR SENS HI LO (Marker Beacon Sensitivity) Button


    The MKR SENS HI LO button controls the marker beacon receiver sensitivity. The LEDs show which sensitivity is
    set, as follows:
    − HI - High sensitivity lets the pilots hear the outer marker approximately one mile from the beacon.

    Effectivity: SINGLE AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-00-00A-040A-A
    PANEL

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-03-17 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − LO - Low sensitivity gives a more accurate location of the marker.

    2.3 Pilot and Copilot PTT Switches


    The PTT switches are installed on the pilots and the copilots control wheel at frame 13.
    The PTT switch is used to transmit from the aircraft. At the same time it mutes all other microphone and receiver
    inputs, other than aural warnings. The pilots PTT switch has priority above the copilots PTT switch.

    2.4 MIC SELECT Switches


    The MIC SELECT switches are two position switches (MASK - MIC) installed adjacent to the flight compartment left
    and right oxygen panels at frame 15.

    2.5 Mask Microphones


    The mask microphones are installed on the left and right of the flight compartment at frame 15.

    2.6 Bose Headset, Headset and Microphone Connectors


    The Bose headset and the headset and microphone connectors are installed aft of the flight compartment left and
    right oxygen panels at frame 15.

    2.7 Hand Microphone Connectors


    The hand microphone connectors are installed on the left and right sides of the flight compartment at frame 11.

    2.8 3rd Crew Member Headset Connector


    The 3rd crew member headset connector is installed in the passenger compartment at frame 34 right side.

    2.9 Loudspeakers
    Two loudspeakers are installed on the left and right sides of the flight compartment at frame 14.
    Two loudspeakers are installed in the passenger compartment, one between frames 22 and 23 and the other
    between frames 30 and 31.

    3 Operation

    3.1 Normal Operation


    The audio control panel receives audio from remote radio units, decodes the audio, controls the volume and routing
    of the different channels. It also filters audio signals, and output the audio to different speakers and headphones. It
    controls microphone inputs to different radios, intercom and passenger address systems. Amplifiers are included
    for the headphones and speakers.
    The audio control panel has inputs for intercom, crew annunciator, crew communication, hot microphones and full-
    time emergency warning inputs from the aircraft systems.
    When the pilot or copilot transmits, all other audio inputs are prevented other than audio warnings. The input from
    the copilot microphone is stopped when the pilot transmits at the same time.

    Effectivity: SINGLE AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-00-00A-040A-A
    PANEL

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-03-17 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.2 COM Microphone Operation


    When a microphone selector button is set and a PTT switch is operated, the pilots or copilots microphone signal is
    put to that radios' microphone input. When the MIC selector button is pushed to operate the applicable COM it also
    causes the audio for that COM to be automatically set.
    Above each microphone input selector button are left and right arrow LEDs that show the status of the related COM
    transceiver. The left arrow is on when that applicable COM transceiver is moved to the pilot. The right arrow is on
    when that applicable COM transceiver is moved to the copilot. One COM microphone output only can be active for
    the pilot or copilot at a time as follows:
    − Split mode
    − Telephone mode (or duplex mode)

    3.3 Communication and Navigation Audio Operation


    When you push one of the MIC communication (COM 1 thru 5) or navigation (NAV 1 and 2, ADF 1 and 2, DME 1
    and 2, AUX, or MKR) audio selector buttons as follows occurs:
    − Their audio comes on
    − The LED above the button comes on

    When you push the same audio selector button again the audio for that channel and the LED above the button are
    turned off. The pilot and copilot can set and listen to more than one communication or navigation audio at a time.

    3.4 Marker Beacon Operation


    The marker beacon receiver uses visual and audio indicators to alert the crew when the aircraft is above a 75 MHz
    transmitter. The outer, middle and inner marker indications are shown on an external display.

    3.5 Split Mode Operation


    The split mode is used only with a single audio control panel. It lets the pilot and copilot transmit and receive on
    different COM radios. When the split mode is started, the intercom automatically goes back to the isolated mode
    (ISO). The ICS button can be used to set the crew (CREW) and all (ALL) modes for intercommunications. To exit
    the split mode, the pilot and copilot must set the same COM MIC button.

    3.6 Emergency Operation


    If the failure of or power is missing to the audio control panel the PUSH EMG/OFF switch is pushed. This connects
    the pilots and copilots microphones to COM 1.
    In the EMG/OFF position, the pilot is connected directly to COM 1 transmit and COM 1 receive through the
    headphones only. When power is removed or turned off, the audio selector is put in the EMG mode.
    In the EMG mode, one or two of the unswitched audio inputs are supplied to the pilot headset. Also, in the EMG
    mode, audio signals are in one ear of a stereo headset.

    3.7 Intercom
    When the pilot or copilot push their ICS switch and speak into the headset or mask microphone, the other crew
    automatically receive the audio. One crew member only can transmit at a time.

    Effectivity: SINGLE AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-00-00A-040A-A
    PANEL

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-03-17 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.8 Passenger Address


    The audio control panel gives two isolated entertainment inputs. Entertainment 1 (or Music 1) supplies the pilot and
    copilot positions, which are isolated in the audio panel. The CREW/PAX ICS VOL knob does not affect the music
    level.
    The music automatically mutes when either the copilot or passengers speak then gradually goes back to the
    original listening level when the intercom or radio conversation stops. The pilot does not mute the music while in
    the ISO mode if the PTT switch is pushed to transmit.

    3.9 Aural Warnings


    All aural warnings are heard in the flight compartment headsets and loudspeakers. The aural warnings cannot be
    muted by the audio integrating system.

    3.9.1 Central Warning System


    The CWS sends a ‛gong’ audio signal to the audio integrating system when a red warning or an amber caution
    caption comes on, refer to AMM 12-B-31-50-00-00A-040A-A.

    3.9.2 Monitor Warning System


    The audio integrating system receives audio warnings from the Monitor Warning System (MWS), which is part of
    the MAU, refer to AMM 12-B-31-41-00-00A-040A-A.

    3.9.3 Autopilot
    The audio integrating system receives audio warnings from the autopilot system, refer to AMM 12-
    B-22-10-00-00A-040A-A.

    3.9.4 (Optional) Traffic Advisory System/Traffic Collision and Avoidance System


    The audio integrating system TAS/TCAS receives an aural warning when it finds an intruder aircraft on a possible
    collision course, refer to AMM 12-B-34-44-00-00A-040A-A.

    3.9.5 (Optional) Terrain Awareness Warning System/Enhanced Ground Proximity


    Warning System
    The audio integrating system receives aural messages from the TAWS/EGPWS when it finds conditions that could
    cause possible flight into the terrain, refer to AMM 12-B-34-45-00-00A-040A-A.

    Effectivity: SINGLE AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-00-00A-040A-A
    PANEL

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-03-17 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    EMERGENCY/OFF
    SWITCH (PUSH)
    SPEAKER/PASSENGER COM AUDIO SELECTOR SPLIT MODE CREW INTERCOM
    ADDRESS PUSH SWITCH PUSH SWITCHES PUSH SWITCHES SYSTEM VOLUME

    COM MICROPHONE
    SELECTOR MARKER BEACON
    PUSH SWITCHES MUTE/TEST

    ON OFF PA ICS VOL


    CREW PAX

    COM 1 COM 2 COM 3 COM 4 COM 5 SPLIT


    SPKR/PA
    MIC

    ISO ALL CREW


    PUSH
    COM 1 COM 2 COM 3 COM 4 COM 5 EMG/OFF
    ICS
    MKR MUTE/TEST
    AUDIO

    MKR HI
    NAV 1 NAV 2 ADF 1 ADF 2 DME 1 DME 2 AUX MKR SENS LO

    PASSENGER INTERCOM
    SYSTEM VOLUME

    INTERCOM SYSTEM NAVIGATION RADIO MARKER BEACON


    PUSH SWITCH SELECTOR SENSITIVITY
    PUSH SWITCHES PUSH SWITCH

    12-B-235000-A-S4080-20051-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Audio Control Panel – Layout

    Effectivity: SINGLE AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-00-00A-040A-A
    PANEL

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-03-17 Page 9


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    MODULAR AVIONICS UNIT

    AUTO PILOT PA SPEAKERS


    WARNINGS STANDBY BUS 28V DC

    AUDIO 1
    CAWS GONG

    HAND MIC

    TONE TRANSMIT
    HAND MIC
    GENERATOR RELAY PIL
    WARNINGS

    EMERGENCY HEAD-
    (OPTIONAL) UNMUTED AUDIO MIC KEY PHONES
    TAWS/TCAS AUDIO

    PILOTS
    CONTROL
    (OPTIONAL) MIC MIC WHEEL
    EGPWS
    MASK PTT
    PILOT
    MASK
    MIC
    KEY

    MARKER AUDIO
    SYSTEM
    TO STORM SCOPE
    (IF INSTALLED)

    VHF 1 AND 2 AUDIO


    NAVIGATION
    SYSTEM
    MIC
    COPILOT
    COPILOT SAME AS
    AUDIO PILOT
    DME SYSTEM
    KEY

    AUDIO HEADPHONES AUDIO


    ADF SYSTEM

    3RD CREW
    AUDIO MEMBER
    HF
    COMMUNICATIONS KEY/MIC MIC 3
    (OPTIONAL)

    PILOTS
    AUDIO SPEAKER
    VHF 1 AND 2
    COMMUNICATIONS KEY/MIC

    PILOTS AUDIO
    CONTROL PANEL COPILOTS
    KMA29 SPEAKER

    FLIGHT COMPARTMENT
    LIGHTS 28V DC

    12-B-235000-A-S4080-20059-A-02-1

    Figure 2 Audio Integrating System – Schematic

    Effectivity: SINGLE AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-00-00A-040A-A
    PANEL
    End of data module
    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-03-17 Page 10
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    AUDIO INTEGRATING SYSTEM

    ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Table of Contents Page

    AUDIO INTEGRATING SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST.......................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-23-50-01-00A-920A-A AUDIO CONTROL PANEL - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Navigation test set Part NAV 401L As
    required
    ATC transponder/DME test set Part ATC 600A As
    required
    External Radio Set Part Local Supply As
    required
    Headset Part Local supply As
    required

    Effectivity: SINGLE AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-00-00A-903A-A
    PANEL

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-07 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the operational test and functional test procedures for the adjustment/test of the
    Audio Integrating System (AIS):
    Do an operational test to make sure that the system is serviceable.
    Do a functional test to make sure that the system operates to the minimum permitted specification.
    Do the Emergency Mode Operation test (maintenance Task 23-10/322).
    2 Check the Cockpit Speaker Volume
    2.1 Energize the aircraft electrical system, AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    2.2 Trigger a caution chime, and make sure that the speaker volume level is satisfactory.
    2.2.1 If the volume level is not satisfactory, do the Audio Control Panel Pre Installation Adjustment
    procedure, AMM 12-B-23-50-01-00A-920A-A.
    2.2.2 If the volume is still not satisfactory, remove the Audio Control Panel (ACP), AMM 12-
    B-23-50-01-00A-920A-A.
    2.2.3 On the underside of the ACP there are three potentiometer adjustment holes:
    − the hole closest to the ACP front panel allows access to a potentiometer to adjust the
    cockpit speaker volume
    − the hole furthest away from the ACP front panel allows access to a potentiometer to
    adjust the PA volume
    − the center hole allows access to a potentiometer to adjust the unswitched speaker
    volume.

    Use the appropriate access hole and turn the potentiometer CCW half a turn to increase the
    volume.
    2.2.4 Install the ACP, AMM 12-B-23-50-01-00A-920A-A.
    2.2.5 Do Step 2.2.2 thru Step 2.2.4 again until the volume level is satisfactory.
    2.3 Do the Operational Test (refer to Para 3).
    3 Operational Test

    Effectivity: SINGLE AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-00-00A-903A-A
    PANEL

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-07 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.1 Job Set Up


    3.1.1 Energize the aircraft electrical system, AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    3.1.2 Connect a headset to the pilot PHONE and MIC connectors.
    3.1.3 Connect a headset to the copilot PHONE and MIC connectors.
    3.1.4 Connect a headset to the cabin crew PHONE and MIC connectors.
    3.1.5 Connect an oxygen mask to the pilot MASK MIC connector.
    3.1.6 Connect an oxygen mask to the copilot MASK MIC connector.
    3.1.7 On the audio control panel:
    − Make sure that the PUSH EMG/OFF switch is set to on
    − Push the SPKR/PA switch until the ON LED comes on
    − Turn the ICS VOL CREW PAX control to the middle position
    3.2 Procedure
    3.2.1 Set the INSTR LIGHTING PNL switch at the aft of the center panel to ON. Make sure that
    the lighting in the audio control panel push switches comes on. Turn the PILOT knob to set
    the lighting to a satisfactory level.
    3.2.2 Use the headsets and make sure that intercom from pilot to copilot and cabin crew is clear
    with no distortion.
    3.2.3 While using the intercom, turn the pilot ICS VOL inner control knob on the audio control
    panel. Make sure that volume on the pilots and cabin crew headsets adjusts correctly.
    3.2.4 Use the headsets and make sure that intercom from copilot to pilot and cabin crew is clear
    with no distortion.
    3.2.5 While using the intercom, turn the copilot ICS VOL inner control knob on the audio control
    panel. Make sure that volume on the pilots and cabin crew headsets adjusts correctly.
    3.2.6 Use the headsets and make sure that intercom from cabin crew to pilot and copilot is clear
    with no distortion.
    3.2.7 On the audio control panel set the SPKR/PA switch to PA.
    3.2.8 Push the Press-to-Transmit (PTT) switch on the pilots control wheel and speak into the
    headset microphone. Make sure that the PA communication is heard on the two cabin
    loudspeakers.
    3.2.9 On the audio control panel press the ICS pushbutton to select ALL.
    3.2.10 Put on the pilot oxygen mask.
    3.2.11 Select the pilot MASK MIC SWITCH to MASK.
    3.2.12 Make sure that intercom from pilot to copilot and cabin is clear with no distortion.
    3.2.13 Put on the copilot oxygen mask.
    3.2.14 Select the copilot MASK MIC SWITCH to MASK.
    3.2.15 Make sure that intercom from copilot to pilot and cabin is clear with no distortion.
    3.2.16 Take off the pilot and copilot oxygen masks.
    3.2.17 Select the pilot and copilot MASK MIC SWITCH to MIC.
    3.2.18 On the audio control panel, press the COM 1 button.
    3.2.19 Set the COM 1 frequency to the same test frequency as an external test set.

    Effectivity: SINGLE AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-00-00A-903A-A
    PANEL

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-07 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.2.20 Use the pilot hand-mic to transmit to the external test set. Make sure that the PTT function
    works correctly and that the transmission is possible with no distortion.
    3.2.21 Make sure that when the pilot hand-mic is keyed, the pilot headset microphone and mask
    microphone are disabled.
    3.2.22 Use the copilot hand-mic to transmit to the external test set. Make sure that the PTT function
    works correctly and that the transmission is possible with no distortion.
    3.2.23 Make sure that when the copilot hand-mic is keyed, the copilot headset microphone and
    mask microphone are disabled.
    3.3 Backlighting Adjustment
    3.3.1 On the audio control panel press and hold the left SPLIT button for 10 seconds.
    3.3.2 Make sure that the audio control panel left SPLIT LED flashes on and off.
    3.3.3 On the audio control panel press the COM 5 MIC button to select the dimmest backlighting
    curve.

    Note

    The audio control panel exits this mode after a COM button is pressed, or after 10 seconds.

    3.4 Close Up
    3.4.1 Set the INSTR LIGHTING PNL switch to OFF.
    3.4.2 De-energize the aircraft electrical system, AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    3.4.3 Disconnect the headset from the pilot PHONE and MIC connectors.
    3.4.4 Disconnect the headset from the copilot PHONE and MIC connectors.
    3.4.5 Disconnect the headset from the cabin crew PHONE and MIC connectors.
    3.4.6 Disconnect the oxygen mask from the pilot MASK MIC connector.
    3.4.7 Disconnect the oxygen mask from the copilot MASK MIC connector.
    4 Functional Test
    4.1 Job Set Up
    4.1.1 Energize the avionics 1 bus and avionics 2 bus of the aircraft electrical system, AMM 12-
    B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    4.1.2 Connect a headset to the pilots PHONE and MIC connectors.
    4.1.3 Connect a headset to the copilots PHONE and MIC connectors.
    4.1.4 Connect a headset to the cabin crew PHONE and MIC connectors.
    4.1.5 On the audio control panel do the procedure as follows:
    − Make sure that the MKR SENS push switch is set to HI
    − Set the SPKR/PA switch to ON
    − Make sure that the ICS VOL CREW PAX control is turned to the middle position
    4.1.6 On the MF controller set the frequencies as follow:
    − NAV 1 to 108.00 MHz
    − COM 1 to a known VHF communication station

    Effectivity: SINGLE AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-00-00A-903A-A
    PANEL

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-07 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − COM 2 to a known VHF communication station that is different to that for COM 1 if
    possible
    − ADF 1 to a known ADF station
    4.1.7 On the Navigation test set (Pt.No. NAV 401L):
    − Connect the test set antenna to the OUT antenna connector on the test set
    − Set the MASTER MOD control to CAL
    − Set the AC/OFF/BAT switch to BAT or AC and make sure the power indicator comes on
    4.1.8
    CAUTION

    THE TEST SET ANTENNA MUST BE MORE THAN 15 IN (38 CM) AWAY FROM THE ATC
    ANTENNA. DAMAGE TO THE TEST SET CAN OCCUR IF THE ANTENNA IS NEARER.

    On the ATC transponder/DME test set (Pt.No. ATC 600A):


    − Install the test set antenna on the tripod
    − Put the test set antenna at the same level and approximately 21 in (53 cm) from the
    ATC antenna
    − Connect the test set antenna-cable to the test set and the test set antenna
    − Set the mode switch to DME
    − Set the X/Y channel switch to X
    − Set the OFF/SQTR switch to SQTR
    − Set the DME PRF switch to 0-300
    − Set the AC/OFF/BAT switch to BAT and make sure the power indicator comes on
    4.2 Procedure
    4.2.1 Do the operational test Step 3 of the audio integrating system.
    4.2.2 On the audio control panel, push the COM 1 MIC push switch until the two arrows come on.
    Make sure that the VHF communication station from the Multi Mode Digital Radio (MMDR) 1
    is heard:
    − At the pilot and copilot headsets
    − From the flight compartment loudspeakers
    4.2.3 Push the PTT switch on the pilots control wheel and speak into the headset microphone.
    Make sure that:
    − The T caption shows on the pilots Primary Flight Display (PFD)
    − The sidetone is heard in the pilot and copilot headsets
    − The VHF communication station receives clearly the test transmission
    4.2.4 Push the PTT switch on the pilots hand microphone and speak into the hand microphone.
    Make sure that:
    − The T caption shows on the pilots PFD
    − The sidetone is heard in the pilot and copilot headsets
    − The VHF communication station receives clearly the test transmission

    Effectivity: SINGLE AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-00-00A-903A-A
    PANEL

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-07 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    4.2.5 On the audio control panel, push the COM 2 MIC push switch until the two arrows come on.
    Make sure that the VHF communication station from the Multi Mode Digital Radio (MMDR) 2
    is heard:
    − At the pilot and copilot headsets
    − From the flight compartment loudspeakers
    4.2.6 Push the PTT switch on the pilots control wheel and speak into the headset microphone.
    Make sure that:
    − The T caption shows on the pilots PFD
    − The sidetone is heard in the pilot and copilot headsets
    − The VHF communication station receives clearly the test transmission
    4.2.7 On the audio control panel push the NAV 1 push switch. On the navigation test set, set the
    select switch for the tone to 1020. Make sure that the 1020 Hz tone is heard:
    − At the pilot and copilot headsets
    − From the flight compartment loudspeakers
    4.2.8 On the audio control panel push the MKR push switch. On the navigation test set, set the
    select switch for the tone to 400, 1300 and 3000. Make sure that the 400 Hz, 1300 Hz then
    the 3000 Hz tone is heard:
    − At the pilot and copilot headsets
    − From the flight compartment loudspeakers
    4.2.9 On the audio control panel push the DME 1 push switch. On the test set, set the IDENT/50%
    RPLY switch to IDENT. Make sure that the 1350 Hz tone is heard:
    − At the pilot and copilot headsets
    − From the flight compartment loudspeakers
    4.2.10 On the audio control panel push the ADF push switch and set to a known ADF station. Make
    sure that the ADF station is heard:
    − At the pilot and copilot headsets
    − From the flight compartment loudspeakers
    4.3 Close Up
    4.3.1 On the Navigation test set (Pt.No. NAV 401L):
    − Set the AC/OFF/BAT switch to OFF
    − Disconnect the test set antenna from the OUT antenna connector on the test set
    4.3.2 On the ATC transponder/DME test set (Pt.No. ATC 600A):
    − Set the AC/OFF/BAT switch to OFF
    − Disconnect the test set antenna-cable from the test set and the test set antenna
    − Remove the test set antenna from the tripod and remove the test set antenna
    4.3.3 Disconnect the headset from the pilots PHONE and MIC connectors.
    4.3.4 Disconnect the headset from the copilots PHONE and MIC connectors.
    4.3.5 Disconnect the headset from the cabin crew PHONE and MIC connectors.
    4.3.6 De-energize the aircraft electrical system, AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    5 Emergency Mode Operation Test

    Effectivity: SINGLE AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-00-00A-903A-A
    PANEL

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-07 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    5.1 Job Set Up


    5.1.1 Energize the aircraft electrical system, AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    5.1.2 Connect a headset to the pilots PHONE and MIC connectors.
    5.2 Procedure
    5.2.1 On the Pilots audio control panel:
    − Press the EMG/OFF switch to turn the panel OFF.
    5.2.2 Make sure that the pilots communication (transmit and receive) on COM1 is clear with no
    distortion using a External Radio Set (Pt.No. Local Supply).
    5.2.3 Press the EMG/OFF switch to turn the panel ON.
    5.2.4 Open the CB AUDIO 1 circuit breaker on the LH CB PNL AFT (CB_LU3).
    5.2.5 Make sure that the pilots communication (transmit and receive) on COM1 is clear with no
    distortion.
    5.2.6 Close the CB AUDIO 1 circuit breaker on the LH CB PNL AFT (CB_LU3).
    5.3 Close Up
    5.3.1 Disconnect the headset from the pilots PHONE and MIC connectors.
    5.3.2 De-energize the aircraft electrical system, AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: SINGLE AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-00-00A-903A-A
    PANEL
    End of data module
    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-07 Page 7
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: SINGLE AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-00-00A-903A-A
    PANEL

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-07 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    AUDIO CONTROL PANEL

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    AUDIO CONTROL PANEL - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.......................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Audio Control Panel – Removal/Installation........................................................... 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-23-50-00-00A-903A-A AUDIO INTEGRATING SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/
    TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required
    3/32" Hexagonal-head wrench Part Local supply 1

    Effectivity: SINGLE AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-01-00A-920A-A
    PANEL

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Open and install a clip (Safety clip (circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on these
    circuits:
    − AUDIO 1 (STANDBY BUS)
    − INST LIGHTS PILOT (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    1.2 Put the wrench (3/32" Hexagonal-head wrench (Pt.No. Local supply)) in the access hole (Figure 1 [3])
    and make sure it engages correctly in the audio control panel locking screw.
    1.3 Turn the locking screw counterclockwise until it disengages from the audio control panel mounting
    (Figure 1 [1]).
    1.4 Pull on the edges of the audio panel mounting (Figure 1 [1]) until the audio control panel (Figure 1 [2])
    is free from the audio control panel mounting (Figure 1 [1]).
    2 Pre Installation Adjustment
    Make sure that the Audio Control Panel (ACP) volume potentiometers are set correctly as follows:
    2.1 On the bottom of the ACP set the potentiometer nearest the front of the ACP (the cockpit speaker
    potentiometer) to the mid travel position.
    2.2 On the bottom of the ACP, set the center potentiometer (the unswitched speaker volume
    potentiometer) to ⅓ of the maximum setting (full CCW is the maximum setting).
    3 Installation
    3.1 Put the audio control panel (Figure 1 [2]) in the audio control panel mounting (Figure 1 [1]) into
    position and carefully push on the edges of the audio control panel (Figure 1 [2]) until the locking
    screw is engaged at the rear.
    3.2 Put the wrench (3/32" Hexagonal-head wrench (Pt.No. Local supply)) in the access hole (Figure 1 [3])
    and make sure it engages correctly in the audio control panel locking screw.
    3.3
    CAUTION

    DO NOT TIGHTEN THE LOCKING SCREW TOO MUCH. THIS WILL HELP PREVENT DAMAGE TO
    THE LOCKING SCREW.

    Effectivity: SINGLE AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-01-00A-920A-A
    PANEL

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Apply light pressure to the edges of the audio control panel mounting (Figure 1 [1]) and at the same
    time turn the wrench clockwise to tighten the locking screw.
    3.4 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.5 Remove the safety clip and close these circuit breakers:
    − AUDIO 1 (STANDBY BUS)
    − INST LIGHTS PILOT (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    3.6 Do an operational test of the audio integrating system (refer to DM 12-B-23-50-00-00A-903A-A).

    Effectivity: SINGLE AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-01-00A-920A-A
    PANEL

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    ON
    OF
    F
    PA

    SP
    KR
    ISO /PA
    AL
    L
    CR CO
    EW M
    1
    ICS CO
    M
    2
    CO CO
    M M
    1 3
    NA
    V1 CO CO
    M MIC M
    2 4
    NA
    V2 CO CO
    M M
    3 5
    AD AU
    F1 DIO CO SP
    M LIT
    4
    AD
    F2 CO CR ICS
    M EW VO
    DM
    5 L
    PA
    E1 X

    DM MK
    E2 RM
    UT
    E/T
    EST
    AU
    X
    EM PUSH
    MK G/O
    FF
    R
    3 MK
    SE R
    NS HI

    LO

    12-B-235001-A-S4080-20039-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Audio Control Panel – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: SINGLE AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-01-00A-920A-A
    PANEL

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: SINGLE AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-01-00A-920A-A
    PANEL
    End of data module
    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: SINGLE AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-01-00A-920A-A
    PANEL

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    DUAL AUDIO INTEGRATING SYSTEM

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    DUAL AUDIO INTEGRATING SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION.......................... 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 2
    2 Component Description.......................................................................................... 4
    2.1 Audio Control Panel - General................................................................................ 4
    2.2 Audio Control Panel - Controls............................................................................... 4
    2.2.1 SPKR/PA ON OFF PA Switch................................................................................ 4
    2.2.2 Five COM MIC (Microphone) Selector Buttons...................................................... 4
    2.2.3 SPLIT Mode Button................................................................................................ 5
    2.2.4 ICS VOL CREW PAX (Crew/Passenger Intercom System Volume) Knob............. 5
    2.2.5 PUSH EMG/OFF (Power On and Emergency/Off) Switch..................................... 5
    2.2.6 ICS (Intercom System) Button................................................................................ 5
    2.2.7 Five COM AUDIO Selector Buttons........................................................................ 5
    2.2.8 NAV 1 and 2, ADF 1 and 2, DME 1 and 2, AUX, MKR (Navigation Radio Audio) 5
    Selector Buttons.....................................................................................................
    2.2.9 MUTE (Marker Beacon Mute/Test) Button............................................................. 5
    2.2.10 MKR SENS HI LO (Marker Beacon Sensitivity) Button.......................................... 6
    2.3 Pilot and Copilot PTT Switches.............................................................................. 6
    2.4 MIC SELECT Switches........................................................................................... 6
    2.5 Mask Microphones................................................................................................. 6
    2.6 Bose Headset, Headset and Microphone Connectors........................................... 6
    2.7 Hand Microphone Connectors................................................................................ 6
    2.8 3rd Crew Member Headset Connector................................................................... 6
    2.9 Loudspeakers......................................................................................................... 6
    3 Operation................................................................................................................ 6
    3.1 Normal Operation................................................................................................... 6
    3.2 COM Microphone Operation................................................................................... 7
    3.3 Communication and Navigation Audio Operation................................................... 7
    3.4 Marker Beacon Operation...................................................................................... 7
    3.5 Split Mode Operation.............................................................................................. 7
    3.6 Emergency Operation............................................................................................. 7
    3.7 Intercom.................................................................................................................. 8
    3.8 Passenger Address................................................................................................ 8
    3.9 Aural Warnings....................................................................................................... 8
    3.9.1 Central Warning System......................................................................................... 8
    3.9.2 Monitor Warning System........................................................................................ 8
    3.9.3 Autopilot.................................................................................................................. 8
    3.9.4 (Optional) Traffic Advisory System/Traffic Collision and Avoidance System.......... 8
    3.9.5 (Optional) Terrain Awareness Warning System/Enhanced Ground Proximity 8
    Warning System.....................................................................................................

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 2

    Effectivity: DUAL AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-10-00A-040A-A
    PANELS

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-03-17 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Audio Control Panel – Layout................................................................................. 9


    2 Dual Audio Integrating System – Schematic.......................................................... 10

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-22-10-00-00A-040A-A AUTOPILOT - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-22-20-00-00A-040A-A SPEED AND ATTITUDE CORRECTION -
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-23-11-00-00A-040A-A HF COMMUNICATION - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-23-12-00-00A-040A-A VHF COMMUNICATION - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-31-41-00-00A-040A-A MODULAR AVIONICS UNIT - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-31-50-00-00A-040A-A CENTRAL WARNING SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-33-10-00-00A-040A-A FLIGHT COMPARTMENT LIGHTS - DESCRIPTION
    AND OPERATION
    12-B-34-32-00-00A-040A-A MARKER SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-34-44-00-00A-040A-A TRAFFIC ALERT AND COLLISION AVOIDANCE
    SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-34-45-00-00A-040A-A ENHANCED GROUND PROXIMITY WARNING
    SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-34-51-00-00A-040A-A VHF NAVIGATION SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-34-52-00-00A-040A-A DME SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-34-53-00-00A-040A-A ADF SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Description

    1 General
    The dual audio integrating system has two audio control panels which control all the aircraft audio signals. The two
    audio control panels give the pilot and the copilot each control of transmit and receive functions. The system also
    has:
    − Speaker control
    − Five (5) Very High Frequency (VHF) communication (COM) transceivers
    − Split single panel or dual panel (independent) operation
    − Intercom System (ICS) operation with automatic voice activation (VOX)

    Effectivity: DUAL AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-10-00A-040A-A
    PANELS

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-03-17 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − Eight (8) navigation receivers as follows:


    ● Two navigation (NAV) receivers
    ● Two Automatic Direct Finder (ADF) receivers
    ● Two Distance Measurement Equipment (DME)
    ● One auxiliary (AUX) receiver
    ● One marker beacon (MKR) receiver
    − Pilot and copilot headset connectors
    − A pilot and copilot Press-to-Transmit (PTT) switch
    − Two flight compartment loudspeakers
    − Two cabin loudspeakers
    − A cabin microphone connector
    − A cabin headset connector.

    The system receives unmuted audio signals or warning tones through the Monitor Warning Function (MWF) of the
    Modular Avionics Unit (MAU) from:
    − The autopilot, refer to AMM 12-B-22-10-00-00A-040A-A
    − The speed and attitude correction system, refer to AMM 12-B-22-20-00-00A-040A-A
    − The Central Warning System (CWS), refer to AMM 12-B-31-50-00-00A-040A-A.

    The system receives unmuted audio signals or warning tones directly from:
    − The Traffic Advisory System/Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System (TAS/TCAS), if installed, refer to
    AMM 12-B-34-44-00-00A-040A-A
    − The Terrain Awareness and Warning System/Enhanced Ground Proximity Warning System (TAWS/EGPWS),
    if installed, refer to AMM 12-B-34-45-00-00A-040A-A

    The system receives other audio signals from:


    − The HF communication system (if installed), refer to AMM 12-B-23-11-00-00A-040A-A
    − The VHF communication systems 1 and 2, refer to AMM 12-B-23-12-00-00A-040A-A
    − The marker system, refer to AMM 12-B-34-32-00-00A-040A-A
    − The VHF navigation systems 1 and 2, refer to AMM 12-B-34-51-00-00A-040A-A
    − The Distance Measuring Equipment (DME) system, refer to AMM 12-B-34-52-00-00A-040A-A
    − The Automatic Direction Finding (ADF) system, refer to AMM 12-B-34-53-00-00A-040A-A.

    The power supplies to the system are as follows:


    − 28 VDC through the AUDIO 2 PRI (MAIN BUS) circuit breaker
    − 28 VDC through the AUDIO 2 SEC (AVIONIC 1 BUS) circuit breaker
    − 28 VDC through the AUDIO 1 (STANDBY BUS) circuit breaker
    − 28 VDC instrument lighting from flight compartment lights, refer to AMM 12-B-33-10-00-00A-040A-A.

    Effectivity: DUAL AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-10-00A-040A-A
    PANELS

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-03-17 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2 Component Description

    2.1 Audio Control Panel - General


    The audio control panels are installed in the top of the pilots and copilots instrument panels. Each audio control
    panel sets and amplifies all the audio communication and the audio navigation signals. It also amplifies and
    connects some aural warnings directly to the pilot and copilot headset connectors and the flight compartment
    loudspeakers.
    Each audio control panel is in a rectangular box with a single, electrical connector. This connects with a connector
    on the panel on which the audio control panel is installed. There is a locking screw access hole on the front panel
    of the audio control panel. A hexagonal wrench (3/32”) is put into the hole to turn the locking screw clockwise, to
    hold the control panel correctly in its assembly.
    When the pilot or copilot transmit switch is pushed, the applicable audio control panel automatically mutes all audio
    inputs, other than warnings and sidetone.

    2.2 Audio Control Panel - Controls


    The front of each audio control panel has:
    − SPKR/PA ON OFF PA (Speaker/Passenger Address) switch
    − Five COM MIC (Microphone) selector buttons
    − SPLIT Mode button
    − ICS VOL CREW PAX (Crew/Passenger Intercom System Volume) knob
    − PUSH EMG/OFF (Power On and Emergency/Off) switch
    − ICS (Intercom System) button
    − Five COM AUDIO selector buttons
    − NAV 1 and 2, ADF 1 and 2, DME 1 and 2, AUX and MKR (Navigation radio audio) selector buttons
    − MUTE (Marker beacon mute/test) button
    − MKR SENS HI LO (Marker beacon sensitivity) button

    2.2.1 SPKR/PA ON OFF PA Switch


    The SPKR/PA switch has three functions as follows:
    − ON - The ON Light Emitting Diode (LED) comes on, all set audio comes through the cockpit speaker (headset
    audio is on always)
    − OFF - The OFF LED comes on, no audio is available through the cockpit speaker (headset audio is on always)
    − PA - The PA LED comes on; the pilot can transmit through the microphone to the passenger cabin speaker.
    The normal microphone Push-to-Transmit (PTT) switch is for the PA function. The copilot can continue to use
    the set COM radio while the pilot is heard thru the speaker. The pilots microphone has priority if one of the pilot
    and copilot PA switches are pushed at the same time and the two audio panels are on PA

    2.2.2 Five COM MIC (Microphone) Selector Buttons


    The microphone input selector buttons are in position along the top edge of the audio control panel. The selector
    buttons are dedicated, momentary-action, push buttons.
    The COM 1 thru COM 5 MIC selector buttons are used to set the correct audio transmitter. The receiver audio is
    set automatically for the transmitter.

    Effectivity: DUAL AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-10-00A-040A-A
    PANELS

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-03-17 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    When an arrow above each button is ON it shows that the button was pushed and the mode is active (← is pilot
    selection, → is copilot selection). This applies for the pilots side, copilots side, or to both if the mode of the audio
    control panel operation is set to split or duplex.
    COM 5 can be set for duplex, which simulates the operation of a telephone.

    2.2.3 SPLIT Mode Button


    The audio panel has two modes of operation, normal and split. In the normal mode the pilot and copilot transmit on
    the same set COM radio. The split mode operation allows the pilot and copilot to transmit and receive on separate
    COM radios.

    2.2.4 ICS VOL CREW PAX (Crew/Passenger Intercom System Volume) Knob
    The ICS VOL CREW PAX knob control adjusts the volume of the intercom only. When the inner knob is turned
    clockwise or counterclockwise it sets the volume of the headphone up or down for the related crew intercom. When
    the outer knob is turned it controls the speaker or headphone volume for the passengers intercom. There is no
    effect on set radio levels, music input levels or passengers' volume level.

    2.2.5 PUSH EMG/OFF (Power On and Emergency/Off) Switch


    The audio control panel power is turned on and off when the PUSH EMG/OFF power switch is pushed.
    The power switch also controls the intercom, audio selector panel functions, and marker beacon receiver.

    2.2.6 ICS (Intercom System) Button


    The ICS selector button gives communication between the pilot, copilot and all passengers that have a headset. An
    LED shows the active mode.

    2.2.7 Five COM AUDIO Selector Buttons


    The COM 1 thru COM 5 AUDIO selector buttons are used to set the correct receiver audio. The set transmitter
    receive audio is set automatically. When a selector button is pushed the correct radio audio comes on. The pilot
    can identify which receivers are set by which of the green LEDs come on.

    2.2.8 NAV 1 and 2, ADF 1 and 2, DME 1 and 2, AUX, MKR (Navigation Radio Audio)
    Selector Buttons
    When a selector button is pushed it turns on the correct navigation receiver audio. When set, the correct LED
    comes on.
    The AUX selector button sets the entertainment audio. The green LED above the button comes on when
    entertainment audio is set to be heard.
    When the MKR selector button is pushed, the LED above the button comes on. The MKR selector button lets the
    Primary Flight Display (PFD) and the audio indicator show when the aircraft is above a 75-MHz marker beacon
    transmitter.
    When the LED above the MKR button is OFF, the marker audio is muted. The visual indications on the PFD
    continue to operate when the aircraft is above the marker.

    2.2.9 MUTE (Marker Beacon Mute/Test) Button


    When the MUTE button is pushed and released, the marker beacon audio is muted for that marker beacon.

    Effectivity: DUAL AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-10-00A-040A-A
    PANELS

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-03-17 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.2.10 MKR SENS HI LO (Marker Beacon Sensitivity) Button


    The MKR SENS HI LO button controls the marker beacon receiver sensitivity. The LEDs show which sensitivity is
    set, as follows:
    − HI - High sensitivity lets the pilots hear the outer marker approximately one mile from the beacon.
    − LO - Low sensitivity gives a more accurate location of the marker.

    2.3 Pilot and Copilot PTT Switches


    The PTT switches are installed on the pilots and the copilots control wheel at frame 13.
    The PTT switch is used to transmit from the aircraft. At the same time it mutes all other microphone and receiver
    inputs, other than aural warnings. The pilots PTT switch has priority above the copilots PTT switch.

    2.4 MIC SELECT Switches


    The MIC SELECT switches are two-position switches (MASK - MIC) installed adjacent to the flight compartment left
    and right oxygen panels at frame 15.

    2.5 Mask Microphones


    The mask microphones are installed on the left and right of the flight compartment at frame 15.

    2.6 Bose Headset, Headset and Microphone Connectors


    The Bose headset and the headset and microphone connectors are installed aft of the flight compartment left and
    right oxygen panels at frame 15.

    2.7 Hand Microphone Connectors


    The hand microphone connectors are installed on the left and right sides of the flight compartment at frame 11.

    2.8 3rd Crew Member Headset Connector


    The 3rd crew member headset connector is installed in the passenger compartment at frame 34 right side.

    2.9 Loudspeakers
    Two loudspeakers are installed on the left and right sides of the flight compartment at frame 14.
    Two loudspeakers are installed in the passenger compartment, one between frames 22 and 23 and the other
    between frames 30 and 31.

    3 Operation

    3.1 Normal Operation


    The audio control panel receives audio from remote radio units, decodes the audio, controls the volume and routing
    of the different channels. It also filters audio signals, and output the audio to different speakers and headphones. It
    controls microphone inputs to different radios, intercom and passenger address systems. Amplifiers are included
    for the headphones and speakers.

    Effectivity: DUAL AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-10-00A-040A-A
    PANELS

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-03-17 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    The audio control panel also has inputs for intercom, crew annunciator, crew communication, hot microphones and
    full time emergency warning inputs from aircraft systems.
    When the pilot or copilot transmits, all other audio inputs are prevented other than audio warnings. The input from
    the copilot microphone is stopped when the pilot transmits at the same time.

    3.2 COM Microphone Operation


    When a microphone selector button is set and a PTT switch is operated, the pilots or copilots microphone signal is
    put to that radios' microphone input. When the MIC selector button is pushed to operate the applicable COM it also
    causes the audio for that COM to be automatically set.
    Above each microphone input selector button are left and right arrow LEDs that show the status of the related COM
    transceiver. The left arrow is lit when that applicable COM transceiver is given to the pilot. The right arrow is lit
    when that applicable COM transceiver is given to the copilot. Only one COM microphone output can be active for
    the pilot or copilot at a time as follows:
    − Split mode
    − Telephone mode (or duplex mode)

    3.3 Communication and Navigation Audio Operation


    When you push one of the MIC communication (COM 1 thru 5) or navigation (NAV 1 and 2, ADF 1 and 2, DME 1
    and 2, AUX, or MKR) audio selector buttons as follows occurs:
    − Their audio comes on
    − The LED above the button comes on

    When you push the same audio selector button again the audio for that channel and the LED above the button are
    turned off. The pilot and copilot can set and listen to more than one communication or navigation audio at a given
    time.

    3.4 Marker Beacon Operation


    The marker beacon receiver uses visual and audio indicators to alert the crew when the aircraft is above a 75 MHz
    transmitter. The outer, middle and inner marker indications are shown on an external display.

    3.5 Split Mode Operation


    The split mode is used only with a single audio control panel. It lets the pilot and copilot transmit and receive on
    different COM radios. When the split mode is started, the intercom automatically goes back to the isolated mode
    (ISO). The ICS button can be used to set the crew (CREW) and all (ALL) modes for intercommunications. To exit
    the split mode, the pilot and copilot must set the same COM MIC button.

    3.6 Emergency Operation


    If failure of or power is missing to the audio control panel the PUSH EMG/OFF switch is pushed. This connects the
    pilots and copilots microphones to COM 1.
    In the EMG/OFF position, the pilot is connected directly to COM 1 transmit and COM 1 receive through the
    headphones only. When power is removed or turned off, the audio selector is put in the EMG mode.
    In the EMG mode, one or two of the unswitched audio inputs are supplied to the pilot headset. Also, in the EMG
    mode, audio signals are present in one ear of a stereo headset.

    Effectivity: DUAL AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-10-00A-040A-A
    PANELS

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-03-17 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.7 Intercom
    When the pilot or copilot push their ICS switch and speak into the headset or mask microphone, the other crew
    automatically receive the audio. One crew member only can transmit at one time.

    3.8 Passenger Address


    The audio control panel gives two isolated entertainment inputs. Entertainment 1 (or Music 1) supplies the pilot and
    copilot positions, which are isolated in the audio panel. The CREW/PAX ICS VOL knob does not affect the music
    level.
    The music automatically mutes when either the copilot or passengers speak then gradually goes back to the
    original listening level when the intercom or radio conversation stops. The pilot does not mute the music while in
    the ISO mode if the PTT switch is pushed to transmit.

    3.9 Aural Warnings


    All aural warnings are heard in the flight compartment headsets and loudspeakers. The aural warnings cannot be
    muted by the dual audio integrating system.

    3.9.1 Central Warning System


    The CWS sends a ‛gong’ audio signal to the audio integrating system when a red warning or an amber caution
    caption comes on, refer to AMM 12-B-31-50-00-00A-040A-A.

    3.9.2 Monitor Warning System


    The audio integrating system receives audio warnings from the Monitor Warning System (MWS), which is part of
    the MAU, refer to AMM 12-B-31-41-00-00A-040A-A.

    3.9.3 Autopilot
    The audio integrating system receives audio warnings from the autopilot system, refer to AMM 12-
    B-22-10-00-00A-040A-A.

    3.9.4 (Optional) Traffic Advisory System/Traffic Collision and Avoidance System


    The audio integrating system TAS/TCAS receives an aural warning when it finds an intruder aircraft on a possible
    collision course, refer to AMM 12-B-34-44-00-00A-040A-A.

    3.9.5 (Optional) Terrain Awareness Warning System/Enhanced Ground Proximity


    Warning System
    The audio integrating system receives aural messages from the TAWS/EGPWS when it finds conditions that could
    cause possible flight into the terrain, refer to AMM 12-B-34-45-00-00A-040A-A.

    Effectivity: DUAL AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-10-00A-040A-A
    PANELS

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-03-17 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    EMERGENCY/OFF
    SWITCH (PUSH)
    SPEAKER/PASSENGER COM AUDIO SELECTOR SPLIT MODE CREW INTERCOM
    ADDRESS PUSH SWITCH PUSH SWITCHES PUSH SWITCHES SYSTEM VOLUME

    COM MICROPHONE
    SELECTOR MARKER BEACON
    PUSH SWITCHES MUTE/TEST

    ON OFF PA ICS VOL


    CREW PAX

    COM 1 COM 2 COM 3 COM 4 COM 5 SPLIT


    SPKR/PA
    MIC

    ISO ALL CREW


    PUSH
    COM 1 COM 2 COM 3 COM 4 COM 5 EMG/OFF
    ICS
    MKR MUTE/TEST
    AUDIO

    MKR HI
    NAV 1 NAV 2 ADF 1 ADF 2 DME 1 DME 2 AUX MKR SENS LO

    PASSENGER INTERCOM
    SYSTEM VOLUME

    INTERCOM SYSTEM NAVIGATION RADIO MARKER BEACON


    PUSH SWITCH SELECTOR SENSITIVITY
    PUSH SWITCHES PUSH SWITCH

    12-B-235010-A-S4080-20046-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Audio Control Panel – Layout

    Effectivity: DUAL AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-10-00A-040A-A
    PANELS

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-03-17 Page 9


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    MODULAR AVIONICS UNIT PA SPEAKERS


    STANDBY BUS 28V DC
    AUTO PILOT
    WARNINGS
    AUDIO 1

    CAWS GONG
    HAND MIC

    TONE TRANSMIT
    HAND MIC
    GENERATOR RELAY PIL
    WARNINGS

    UNMUTED EMERGENCY HEAD-


    (OPTIONAL) AUDIO MIC KEY PHONES
    TAWS/TCAS AUDIO
    MIC 2
    MARKER
    OUT KEY 2 PILOTS
    CONTROL
    (OPTIONAL) MIC 1 MIC WHEEL
    EGPWS
    MASK PTT
    MASK
    MIC
    KEY 1

    AUDIO TO STORM COPE


    MARKER
    (IF INSTALLED)
    SYSTEM

    HEADPHONES AUDIO

    VHF 1 AND 2 AUDIO MIC 3


    NAVIGATION 3RD CREW
    SYSTEM MEMBER
    PAX

    PILOTS AUDIO
    CONTROL PANEL PILOTS
    AUDIO KMA29 SPEAKER
    DME SYSTEM

    AUDIO HEADPHONES AUDIO


    ADF SYSTEM
    MIC 2

    KEY 2

    MIC 1 COPILOT
    AUDIO SAME AS
    HF KEY 1 PILOT
    COMMUNICATIONS KEY/MIC
    (OPTIONAL)
    MIC 3

    AUDIO
    VHF 1 AND 2 PAX
    COMMUNICATIONS KEY/MIC COPILOTS AUDIO
    COPILOTS
    SPEAKER
    CONTROL PANEL
    KMA29
    MMDR2
    POWER
    RELAY

    FLIGHT COMPARTMENT
    LIGHTS 28V DC

    MMDR 2 AUDIO 2 PR1 AUDIO 2 SEC

    MAIN BUS 28V DC MAIN BUS 28V DC AVIONIC 1 BUS 28V DC 12-B-235010-A-S4080-20050-A-02-1

    Figure 2 Dual Audio Integrating System – Schematic

    Effectivity: DUAL AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-10-00A-040A-A
    PANELS
    End of data module
    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-03-17 Page 10
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    DUAL AUDIO INTEGRATING SYSTEM

    ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Table of Contents Page

    DUAL AUDIO INTEGRATING SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST............................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-23-50-11-00A-920A-A DUAL AUDIO CONTROL PANEL - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Navigation test set Part NAV 401L (or equivalent) As
    required
    ATC transponder/DME test set Part ATC 600A (or equivalent) As
    required
    External Radio Set Part Local Supply As
    required
    Headset Part Local supply As
    required

    Effectivity: DUAL AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-10-00A-903A-A
    PANELS

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-09-12 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the operational test and functional test procedures for the adjustment/test of the Dual
    Audio Integrating System (AIS).
    Do an operational test to make sure that the system is serviceable.
    Do a functional test to make sure that the system operates to the minimum permitted specification.
    Do the Emergency Mode Operation test (maintenance Task 23-10/322).
    2 Check the Cockpit Speaker Volume
    2.1 Energize the aircraft electrical system, refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    2.2 Trigger a caution chime, and make sure that the speaker volume level is satisfactory.
    2.3 If the volume level is not satisfactory, do the Audio Control Panel Pre Installation Adjustment
    procedure, refer to AMM 12-B-23-50-11-00A-920A-A.
    2.4 Do the Operational Test (refer to Para 3).
    3 Operational Test
    3.1 Job Set Up
    3.1.1 Energize the avionics 1 bus and avionics 2 bus of the aircraft electrical system, refer to AMM
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    3.1.2 Connect a headset to the pilots PHONE and MIC connectors.
    3.1.3 Connect a headset to the copilots PHONE and MIC connectors.
    3.1.4 Connect a headset to the cabin crew PHONE and MIC connectors.
    3.1.5 Connect an oxygen mask to the pilot MASK MIC connector.
    3.1.6 Connect an oxygen mask to the copilot MASK MIC connector.
    3.1.7 On each control panel:
    − Make sure that the PUSH EMG/OFF switch is set to on
    − Push the SPKR/PA switch until the ON LED comes on
    − Turn the ICS VOL CREW PAX control to the middle position.

    Effectivity: DUAL AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-10-00A-903A-A
    PANELS

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-09-12 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.2 Procedure
    3.2.1 Set the INSTR LIGHTING PNL switch aft of the center panel to the ON position. Make sure
    that the lighting in the audio control panel push switches comes on. Turn the PILOT lighting
    dim knob to set the lighting to a satisfactory level.
    3.2.2 Use the headsets and make sure that intercom from pilot to copilot and cabin crew is clear
    with no distortion.
    3.2.3 While using the intercom, turn the pilot ICS VOL inner control knob on the audio control
    panel. Make sure that volume on the pilots and cabin crew headsets adjusts correctly.
    3.2.4 Use the headsets and make sure that intercom from copilot to pilot and cabin crew is clear
    with no distortion.
    3.2.5 While using the intercom, turn the copilot ICS VOL inner control knob on the audio control
    panel. Make sure that volume on the pilots and cabin crew headsets adjusts correctly.
    3.2.6 Use the headsets and make sure that intercom from cabin crew to pilot and copilot is clear
    with no distortion.
    3.2.7 On the pilot audio control panel set the SPKR/PA switch to PA.
    3.2.8 Push the Press-to-Transmit (PTT) switch on the pilots control wheel and speak into the
    headset microphone. Make sure that the PA communication is heard on the two cabin
    loudspeakers.
    3.2.9 On the pilot audio control panel press the ICS pushbutton to select ALL.
    3.2.10 Put on the pilot oxygen mask.
    3.2.11 Select the pilot MASK MIC SWITCH to MASK.
    3.2.12 Make sure that intercom from pilot to copilot and cabin is clear with no distortion.
    3.2.13 Put on the copilot oxygen mask.
    3.2.14 Select the copilot MASK MIC SWITCH to MASK.
    3.2.15 Make sure that intercom from copilot to pilot and cabin is clear with no distortion.
    3.2.16 Take off the pilot and copilot oxygen masks.
    3.2.17 Select the pilot and copilot MASK MIC SWITCH to MIC.
    3.2.18 On the pilot audio control panel, press the COM 1 button.
    3.2.19 Set the COM 1 frequency to the same test frequency as an external test set.
    3.2.20 Use the pilot hand-mic to transmit to the external test set. Make sure that the PTT function
    works correctly and that the transmission is possible with no distortion.
    3.2.21 Make sure that when the pilot hand-mic is keyed, the pilot headset microphone and mask
    microphone are disabled.
    3.2.22 Use the copilot hand-mic to transmit to the external test set. Make sure that the PTT function
    works correctly and that the transmission is possible with no distortion.
    3.2.23 Make sure that when the copilot hand-mic is keyed, the copilot headset microphone and
    mask microphone are disabled.
    3.2.24 Do Step 3.2.20 thru Step 3.2.23 again for the copilot controls.
    3.3 Backlighting Adjustment
    3.3.1 On the pilot and copilot audio control panel press and hold the left SPLIT button for 10
    seconds.
    3.3.2 Make sure that the pilot and copilot audio control panel left SPLIT LED flashes on and off.

    Effectivity: DUAL AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-10-00A-903A-A
    PANELS

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-09-12 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.3.3 On the pilot and copilot audio control panel press the COM 5 MIC button to select the
    dimmest backlighting curve.

    Note

    The audio control panel exits this mode after a COM button is pressed, or after 10 seconds.

    3.4 Close Up
    3.4.1 Set the INSTR LIGHTING PNL switch to OFF.
    3.4.2 De-energize the aircraft electrical system, refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    3.4.3 Disconnect the headset from the pilots PHONE and MIC connectors.
    3.4.4 Disconnect the headset from the copilots PHONE and MIC connectors.
    3.4.5 Disconnect the headset from the cabin crew PHONE and MIC connectors.
    3.4.6 Disconnect the oxygen mask from the pilot MASK MIC connector.
    3.4.7 Disconnect the oxygen mask from the copilot MASK MIC connector.
    4 Functional Test
    4.1 Job Set Up
    4.1.1 Energize the avionics 1 bus and avionics 2 bus of the aircraft electrical system, refer to AMM
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    4.1.2 Connect a headset to the pilots PHONE and MIC connectors.
    4.1.3 Connect a headset to the copilots PHONE and MIC connectors.
    4.1.4 Connect a headset to the cabin crew PHONE and MIC connectors.
    4.1.5 On the two audio control panels do the procedure as follows:
    − Make sure that the MKR SENS push switch is set to HI
    − Set the SPKR/PA switch to ON
    − Make sure that the ICS VOL CREW PAX control is turned to the middle position.
    4.1.6 On the MF controller set the frequencies as follow:
    − NAV 1 to 108.00 MHz
    − COM 1 to a known VHF communication station
    − COM 2 to a known VHF communication station that is different to that for COM 1 if
    possible
    − ADF 1 to a known ADF station.
    4.1.7 On the Navigation test set (Pt.No. NAV 401L (or equivalent)):
    − Connect the test set antenna to the OUT antenna connector on the test set
    − Set the MASTER MOD control to CAL
    − Set the AC/OFF/BAT switch to BAT or AC and make sure the power indicator comes on.
    4.1.8
    CAUTION

    THE TEST SET ANTENNA MUST BE MORE THAN 15 IN (38 CM) AWAY FROM THE ATC
    ANTENNA. DAMAGE TO THE TEST SET CAN OCCUR IF THE ANTENNA IS NEARER.

    Effectivity: DUAL AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-10-00A-903A-A
    PANELS

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-09-12 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    On the ATC transponder/DME test set (Pt.No. ATC 600A (or equivalent)):
    − Install the test set antenna on the tripod
    − Put the test set antenna at the same level and approximately 21 in (53 cm) from the
    ATC antenna
    − Connect the test set antenna-cable to the test set and the test set antenna
    − Set the mode switch to DME
    − Set the X/Y channel switch to X
    − Set the OFF/SQTR switch to SQTR
    − Set the DME PRF switch to 0-300
    − Set the AC/OFF/BAT switch to BAT and make sure the power indicator comes on.
    4.2 Procedure
    4.2.1 Do the operational test Step 3 of the dual audio integrating system.
    4.2.2 On the pilots audio control panel, push the COM 1 MIC push switch until the left arrow is ON
    (←). Make sure that the VHF communication station from the Multi Mode Digital Radio
    (MMDR) 1 is heard:
    − At the pilot and copilot headsets
    − From the flight compartment loudspeakers.
    4.2.3 Push the PTT switch on the pilots control wheel and speak into the headset microphone.
    Make sure that:
    − The T caption shows on the pilots Primary Flight Display (PFD) Com 1 window
    − The sidetone is heard in the pilot and copilot headsets
    − The VHF communication station receives clearly the test transmission.
    4.2.4 Push the PTT switch on the pilots hand microphone and speak into the hand microphone.
    Make sure that:
    − The T caption shows on the pilot PFD Com 1 window
    − The sidetone is heard in the pilot and copilot headsets
    − The VHF communication station receives clearly the test transmission.
    4.2.5 On the pilots audio control panel, push the COM 2 MIC push switch until the left arrow is ON
    (←). Make sure that the VHF communication station from the Multi Mode Digital Radio
    (MMDR) 2 is heard:
    − At the pilot and copilot headsets
    − From the flight compartment loudspeakers.
    4.2.6 Push the PTT switch on the pilots control wheel and speak into the headset microphone.
    Make sure that:
    − The T caption shows on the pilot PFD COM 2 window
    − The sidetone is heard in the pilot and copilot headsets
    − The VHF communication station receives clearly the test transmission.
    4.2.7 On the pilots audio control panel push the NAV 1 push switch. On the navigation test set, set
    the tone select switch to 1020. Make sure that the 1020 Hz tone is heard:
    − At the pilot and copilot headsets
    − From the flight compartment loudspeakers.

    Effectivity: DUAL AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-10-00A-903A-A
    PANELS

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-09-12 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    4.2.8 On the pilots audio control panel push the MKR push switch. On the navigation test set, set
    the tone select switch to 400, 1300 and 3000. Make sure that the 400 Hz, 1300 Hz then the
    3000 Hz tone is heard:
    − At the pilot and copilot headsets
    − From the flight compartment loudspeakers.
    4.2.9 On the pilots audio control panel push the DME 1 push switch. On the test set, set the
    IDENT/50% RPLY switch to the IDENT position. Make sure that the 1350 Hz tone is heard:
    − At the pilot and copilot headsets
    − From the flight compartment loudspeakers.
    4.2.10 On the pilots audio control panel push the ADF push switch. Make sure that the ADF station
    is heard:
    − At the pilot and copilot headsets
    − From the flight compartment loudspeakers.
    4.2.11 Do Step 4.2.2 to Step 4.2.10 for the copilots audio control panel and the PTT switch on the
    copilots control wheel.
    4.3 Close Up
    4.3.1 On the Navigation test set (Pt.No. NAV 401L (or equivalent)):
    − Set the AC/OFF/BAT switch to OFF
    − Disconnect the test set antenna from the OUT antenna connector on the test set.
    4.3.2 On the ATC transponder/DME test set (Pt.No. ATC 600A (or equivalent)):
    − Set the AC/OFF/BAT switch to OFF
    − Disconnect the test set antenna-cable from the test set and the test set antenna
    − Remove the test set antenna from the tripod and remove the test set antenna.
    4.3.3 Disconnect the headset from the pilots PHONE and MIC connectors.
    4.3.4 Disconnect the headset from the copilots PHONE and MIC connectors.
    4.3.5 Disconnect the headset from the cabin crew PHONE and MIC connectors.
    4.3.6 De-energize the aircraft electrical system, refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    5 Emergency Mode Operation Test
    5.1 Job Set Up
    5.1.1 Energize the aircraft electrical system, refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    5.1.2 Connect a headset to the pilots PHONE and MIC connectors.
    5.2 Procedure
    5.2.1 On the Pilots audio control panel:
    − Press the EMG/OFF switch to turn the panel OFF.
    5.2.2 Make sure that the pilots communication (transmit and receive) on COM1 is clear with no
    distortion using a External Radio Set (Pt.No. Local Supply).
    5.2.3 Press the EMG/OFF switch to turn the panel ON.
    5.2.4 Open the CB AUDIO 1 circuit breaker on the LH CB PNL AFT (CB_LU3).
    5.2.5 Make sure that the pilots communication (transmit and receive) on COM1 is clear with no
    distortion.

    Effectivity: DUAL AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-10-00A-903A-A
    PANELS

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-09-12 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    5.2.6 Close the CB AUDIO 1 circuit breaker on the LH CB PNL AFT (CB_LU3).
    5.3 Close Up
    5.3.1 Disconnect the headset from the pilots PHONE and MIC connectors.
    5.3.2 De-energize the aircraft electrical system, refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: DUAL AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-10-00A-903A-A
    PANELS
    End of data module
    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-09-12 Page 7
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: DUAL AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-10-00A-903A-A
    PANELS

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-09-12 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    DUAL AUDIO CONTROL PANEL

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    DUAL AUDIO CONTROL PANEL - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Dual Audio Control Panel – Removal/Installation................................................... 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-23-50-10-00A-903A-A DUAL AUDIO INTEGRATING SYSTEM -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required
    3/32" Hexagonal-head wrench Part Local supply 1

    Effectivity: DUAL AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-11-00A-920A-A
    PANEL

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedures for the removal and installation of the pilots and copilots audio control
    panel KMA 29. The procedure is the same for each audio control panel.
    2 Removal
    2.1 Open and install a clip (Safety clip (circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on these circuit
    breakers:
    − AUDIO 2 PRI (MAIN BUS)
    − AUDIO 2 SEC (AVIONIC 1 BUS)
    − AUDIO 1 (STANDBY BUS)
    − INST LIGHTS PILOT (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − INST LIGHTS COPIL (MAIN BUS)
    2.2 Put the wrench (3/32" Hexagonal-head wrench (Pt.No. Local supply)) in the access hole (Figure 1 [1])
    and make sure it engages correctly in the audio control panel locking screw.
    2.3 Turn the locking screw counterclockwise until it disengages from the audio control panel mounting
    (Figure 1 [2]).
    2.4 Pull on the edges of the audio panel mounting (Figure 1 [2]) until the audio control panel (Figure 1 [3])
    is free from the audio control panel mounting (Figure 1 [2]).
    3 Pre Installation Adjustment
    Make sure that the Audio Control Panel (ACP) volume potentiometers are set correctly as follows:
    3.1 On the bottom of the ACP set the potentiometer nearest the front of the ACP (the cockpit speaker
    potentiometer) to the mid travel position.
    3.2 On the bottom of the ACP, set the center potentiometer (the unswitched speaker volume
    potentiometer) to ⅓ of the maximum setting (full CCW is the maximum setting).
    4 Installation
    4.1 Put the audio control panel (Figure 1 [3]) in the audio control panel mounting (Figure 1 [2]) into
    position and carefully push on the edges of the audio control panel (Figure 1 [3]) until the locking
    screw is engaged at the rear.

    Effectivity: DUAL AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-11-00A-920A-A
    PANEL

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    4.2 Put the wrench (3/32" Hexagonal-head wrench (Pt.No. Local supply)) in the access hole (Figure 1 [1])
    and make sure it engages correctly in the audio control panel locking screw.
    4.3
    CAUTION

    DO NOT TIGHTEN THE LOCKING SCREW TOO MUCH. THIS WILL HELP PREVENT DAMAGE TO
    THE LOCKING SCREW.

    Apply light pressure to the edges of the audio control panel mounting (Figure 1 [2]) and at the same
    time turn the wrench (3/32" Hexagonal-head wrench (Pt.No. Local supply)) clockwise to tighten the
    locking screw.
    4.4 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    4.5 Remove the safety clip and close these circuit breakers:
    − AUDIO 2 PRI (MAIN BUS)
    − AUDIO 2 SEC (AVIONIC 1 BUS)
    − AUDIO 1 (STANDBY BUS)
    − INST LIGHTS PILOT (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − INST LIGHTS COPIL (MAIN BUS)
    4.6 Do an operational test of the dual audio integrating system (refer to DM 12-B-23-50-10-00A-903A-A).

    Effectivity: DUAL AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-11-00A-920A-A
    PANEL

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A A

    1
    A
    LH SHOWN
    RH SIMILAR

    ON
    OF
    F
    PA

    SP
    KR
    ISO /PA
    AL
    L
    CR CO
    EW M
    1
    ICS CO
    M
    2
    CO CO
    M M
    1 3
    NA
    V1 CO CO
    M MIC M
    2 4
    NA
    V2 CO CO
    M M
    3 5
    AD AU
    F1 DIO CO SP
    M LIT
    4
    AD
    F2 CO CR ICS
    M EW VO
    DM
    5 L
    PA
    E1 X

    DM MK
    E2 RM
    UT
    E/T
    EST
    AU
    X
    EM PUSH
    MK G/O
    FF
    R
    3 MK
    SE R
    NS HI

    LO

    12-B-235011-A-S4080-20040-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Dual Audio Control Panel – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: DUAL AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-11-00A-920A-A
    PANEL

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: DUAL AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-11-00A-920A-A
    PANEL
    End of data module
    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: DUAL AUDIO CONTROL


    12-B-23-50-11-00A-920A-A
    PANEL

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    NOISE CANCELLING HEADSETS

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    NOISE CANCELLING HEADSETS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION.................................. 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1
    2 Component Description (Ref. )............................................................................... 1
    3 Operation................................................................................................................ 2

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Noise Cancelling Headset Connection – Location................................................. 3

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-23-50-00-00A-040A-A AUDIO INTEGRATING SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-23-50-10-00A-040A-A DUAL AUDIO INTEGRATING SYSTEM -
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Description

    1 General
    The optional noise cancelling headsets can be used with all configurations of the audio integrating system or the
    dual audio integrating system (if installed).

    2 Component Description (Ref. Fig. 1)


    A noise cancelling headset connector is installed aft of the flight compartment left and right oxygen panels. They
    are located adjacent to the standard microphone and headset connectors to make sure that only one type of
    headset can be connected to the audio integrating system. A placard CONNECT ONLY ONE HEADSET is
    installed below the microphone/headset connectors.
    Electrical power is supplied to the noise cancelling function of the headsets through the headset connectors.
    The power supplies for the pilot and copilot noise cancelling headsets are as follow:
    For the pilots noise cancelling headset:
    − 28 VDC through AUDIO 1 (STANDBY BUS)

    For the copilots noise cancelling headset:

    Effectivity: NOISE CANCELLING


    12-B-23-51-00-00A-040A-A
    HEADSETS

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − 28 VDC through AUDIO 2 PRI (AVIONIC 1 BUS)

    − 28 VDC through AUDIO 2 SEC (MAIN BUS)

    The phones and microphones of the noise cancelling headsets are electrically connected in parallel to the standard
    headset phone and microphone wiring.

    3 Operation
    The noise cancelling mode is active when the headset control module power switch is set to ON. The headset is in
    the passive mode when the power switch is set to OFF. If loud tones are heard and the communication is lost, the
    power switch must be set to OFF. The headset can be used as a standard headset. It will continue to give
    communications in the passive noise-reducing mode.
    The volume control of the noise cancelling headset is made through the audio integrating system (refer to DM 12-
    B-23-50-00-00A-040A-A) or the dual audio integrating system (refer to DM 12-B-23-50-10-00A-040A-A) (if
    installed) and the volume control knobs on the headsets control module. Also at the lowest setting of the headset
    volume control knobs, the volume cannot be fully turned off.

    Effectivity: NOISE CANCELLING


    12-B-23-51-00-00A-040A-A
    HEADSETS

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    EMERG
    PHONE

    COM1
    CONNECT ONLY
    ONE HEADSET

    121.5 MHz
    MIC

    NORM
    BOSE

    NOISE CANCELLING
    HEADSET CONNECTION

    12-B-235100-A-S4080-20049-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Noise Cancelling Headset Connection – Location

    Effectivity: NOISE CANCELLING


    12-B-23-51-00-00A-040A-A
    HEADSETS
    End of data module
    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 3
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: NOISE CANCELLING


    12-B-23-51-00-00A-040A-A
    HEADSETS

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    STATIC DISCHARGING

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    STATIC DISCHARGING - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION.................................................. 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1
    2 Component Description (Ref. )............................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Static Discharger – Layout..................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description

    1 General
    Static dischargers remove the static-electricity that the aircraft collects during the flight.
    Static dischargers are installed at these positions:
    − 2 on each winglet
    − 2 on each elevator
    − 3 on the rudder
    − 1 on the stabilizer fairing

    2 Component Description (Ref. Fig. 1)


    Each static discharger has a base and a discharger. The discharger has a conductor through its center and a
    carbon tip. The base is installed with two blind countersink rivets. The discharger has a thread at the end and is
    installed with a screw to the base.
    Rigid static dischargers are installed on the winglets, the elevators, the stabilizer fairing and the top of the rudder.
    A flexible static discharger is installed on the bottom of the rudder.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-60-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A A
    A

    A A
    A
    A A
    A
    A

    DISCHARGER

    BASE

    12-B-236000-A-S4080-20037-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Static Discharger – Layout

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-60-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    STATIC DISCHARGING

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    STATIC DISCHARGING - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................................................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2
    6 Table of Electrical Continuity Tests........................................................................ 4

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Static Discharger – Removal/Installation................................................................ 6

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-60-00-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-03-17 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Rivet, blind, csk CSN 23600001 As
    required
    Cleaning cloth Part P02-003 As
    required
    Methyl Ethyl Ketone (MEK) Part P01-010 As
    required
    Sealant conductive Part P08-046 As
    required
    Adhesive Part P08-043 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Static discharger CSN 23-60-00-01-005 As
    required
    Static discharger base CSN 23600001 As
    required

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedure for the removal and installation of a static discharger.
    There are different types of static discharger installed on the aircraft:
    − rigid steel static dischargers are installed on the winglets and stabilizer fairing
    − rigid alloy static dischargers are installed on the elevator and on the top of the rudder
    − a flexible static discharger is installed on the bottom of the rudder

    When replacing a static discharger make sure that the static discharger to be installed is the correct type for
    the position.
    The removal and installation procedure is the same for all of the static dischargers installed on the aircraft.
    2 Removal of a Static Discharger
    2.1 Loosen the screw Figure 1 [3] and lightly hit the screw to release the taper on the static discharger
    Figure 1 [1].
    2.2 Remove the screw Figure 1 [3] from the end of the static discharger Figure 1 [1].
    2.3 Remove the static discharger Figure 1 [1] from the static discharger base Figure 1 [2].

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-60-00-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-03-17 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3 Removal of a Static Discharger Base


    3.1 Use a center punch to make a mark at the center of the two rivet heads Figure 1 [4] that attach the
    static discharger base Figure 1 [2].
    3.2 Use a 0.125 in. (3,2 mm) drill to remove the rivet heads Figure 1 [4].
    3.3 Use a rivet punch to remove the rivet shanks.
    3.4 Remove the static discharger base Figure 1 [2] from the aircraft structure Figure 1 [5].
    3.5 Remove the rivet shanks and washers Figure 1 [6] (if installed).

    Note

    The rivets in the static discharger bases installed on the winglets and the vertical stabilizer fairing have
    the washer installed on the rivet shank.

    4 Installation of a Static Discharger Base

    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MANUFACTURER’S
    HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

    CAUTION

    MAKE SURE THAT THE STATIC DISCHARGER BASE TO BE INSTALLED IS THE CORRECT TYPE FOR
    THE POSITION.

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items (refer to DM 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A)

    4.1 Use a Cleaning cloth (Pt.No. P02-003) made moist with Methyl Ethyl Ketone (MEK) (Pt.No. P01-010)
    and clean the static discharger base Figure 1 [2] and structure surface Figure 1 [5], rivets Figure 1 [4]
    and washers Figure 1 [6] (if installed).
    4.2 Install the Static discharger base Figure 1 [2] on the structure surface Figure 1 [5] with the Rivet,
    blind, csk (Pt.No. CSN 23600001) Figure 1 [4]. Install the washers Figure 1 [6] on the rivet shanks
    where necessary.

    Note

    The hole through the static discharger base is tapered. Make sure the smaller side of the hole faces
    the aircraft’s direction of flight when installing the static discharger base.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-60-00-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-03-17 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Note

    The rivets in the static discharger bases installed on the winglets and the vertical stabilizer fairing must
    have a washer installed on the rivet shank.

    4.3 Put Sealant conductive (Pt.No. P08-046) in a bead around the static discharger base Figure 1 [2] and
    smooth-off with a wet finger. Let the sealant dry.
    4.4 Apply the correct surface finish paint to the area.
    4.5 Install the static discharger (Refer to Para ).
    4.6 Do an electrical continuity test of the static discharger and base, refer to Table 6 for the resistance
    values:
    MM = Standard Multi-Meter, BT = Bonding Tester (Maximum current of 1 Amp), IT = Insulation Tester
    (Voltage of 500 Volts)
    Sharp = Standard Multi-Meter Probe, Dull = Adapter with large area probe

    Table 6 Table of Electrical Continuity Tests


    Position on Test Material Tested Meter Probe Value
    the Aircraft Type Type
    Winglets Ground to Steel base plates on embedded MM Dull/ 1 Ohm
    Base Plate copper mesh in carbon fiber Sharp max.
    Elevator Ground to Aluminum base plates on painted BT Sharp/ 30
    Base Plate alloy flaying surface Sharp mOhm
    max.
    Rudder and Ground to Aluminum base plates on painted BT Sharp/ 30
    Trim Tab Base Plate alloy flaying surface Sharp mOhm
    max.
    V-stabilizer Ground to Steel base plates carbon fiber MM Dull/ 1 Ohm
    Fairing Base Plate Sharp max.
    All positions Structure to Alloy to carbon tip of static IT Sharp/T 6 to
    Tip of Wick dischargers ip 200
    MOhm
    5 Installation of a Static Discharger

    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MANUFACTURER’S
    HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

    CAUTION

    MAKE SURE THAT THE STATIC DISCHARGER BASE TO BE INSTALLED IS THE CORRECT TYPE FOR
    THE POSITION.

    5.1 Use a Cleaning cloth (Pt.No. P02-003) made moist with Methyl Ethyl Ketone (MEK) (Pt.No. P01-010)
    and clean the static discharger base Figure 1 [2].
    5.2 Install the new Static discharger Figure 1 [1] into the static discharger base Figure 1 [2].

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-60-00-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-03-17 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    5.3 Apply Adhesive (Pt.No. P08-043) to the threads of the screw Figure 1 [3]. Install the screw Figure 1 [3]
    in the end of the static discharger Figure 1 [1].
    5.4 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-60-00-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-03-17 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A A
    A

    A A
    A
    A A
    A
    A

    A
    1
    4

    2
    2
    B
    5

    12-B-236000-A-S4080-20038-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Static Discharger – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-60-00-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-03-17 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-60-00-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-03-17 Page 7
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-23-60-00-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-03-17 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    ELECTRICAL POWER

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    ELECTRICAL POWER - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION..................................................... 1


    1 General ()............................................................................................................... 1
    1.1 DC Generation........................................................................................................ 1
    1.2 External Power....................................................................................................... 2
    1.3 Load Distribution..................................................................................................... 3

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Electrical Power – System Schematic.................................................................... 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-24-30-00-00A-040A-A DC GENERATION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-24-40-00-00A-040A-A EXTERNAL POWER - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-24-50-00-00A-040A-A DC ELECTRICAL LOAD DISTRIBUTION -
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Description

    1 General (Fig. 1)
    The electrical power system supplies electrical power to the different systems of the aircraft. Refer to the aircraft
    wiring manual for the principle schematic of the aircraft.
    The power supply is 28 VDC. The electrical power system includes these sub-systems:
    − DC generation
    − External power
    − Load distribution

    1.1 DC Generation
    (Refer to DM 12-B-24-30-00-00A-040A-A)
    The DC generation system supplies DC power to the different systems of the aircraft.
    The system has these components:

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-00-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − Generator 1: with voltage regulator, generator contactor and current sensor


    − Generator 2: with voltage regulator, generator contactor and current sensor
    − A Left Hand Power Junction Box (LHPJB), which contains:
    − ● A generator 1 bus contactor
    ● An avionics 1 bus contactor
    ● A secondary start contactor
    ● A bus tie contactor
    ● A standby bus hot battery/avionics 1 bus changeover relay
    ● Cabin heater, flap power, prop de-ice and left hand windshield de-ice circuit breakers.
    ● A Right Hand Power Junction Box (RHPJB), which contains:
    ● − A generator 2 bus contactor
    − An avionics 2 bus contactor
    − A main start contactor
    − A non-essential bus contactor
    − A cabin bus contactor
    − A main bus contactor
    − Under-floor heater, hydraulic power pack and right hand windshield de-ice circuit breakers (CBs)
    − A foot warmer contactor and CB (option)

    − A Battery and External Power Junction Box (BEPJB), which contains:


    − ● A battery 1 contactor
    ● A battery 1 current sensor
    ● A battery 2 contactor
    ● A battery 2 current sensor
    ● A hot battery bus and related CBs
    ● An external power controller and control contactor
    ● A standby power relay
    ● Logo light CB and control relays (option)
    ● A Vapor Cooling Cycle System (VCCS) compressor power CB (option)

    − An emergency power supply, with an EPS battery and relay for the EPS bus.

    − Two 24 VDC batteries

    1.2 External Power


    (Refer to DM 12-B-24-40-00-00A-040A-A)
    The external power system supplies all the systems of the aircraft that use DC power when the aircraft is on the
    ground and the generators are switched off. The external power system has an external power receptacle, an
    External Power Contactor (EPC), an EXT PWR switch and a control unit.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-00-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1.3 Load Distribution


    (Refer to DM 12-B-24-50-00-00A-040A-A)
    The load distribution system controls the DC power supplies to all the systems in the aircraft that use electrical
    power.
    The load distribution has these components:
    − A power line
    − A secondary power line
    − A generator 1 bus
    − A generator 2 bus
    − A hot battery bus
    − An essential bus
    − A non-essential bus
    − An avionic 1 bus
    − An avionic 2 bus
    − A main bus
    − A standby bus
    − An EPS bus
    − A cabin bus
    − Four circuit breaker panels installed in the cockpit.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-00-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    GENERATOR 1 GENERATOR 2

    GENERATOR 1 GENERATOR 2
    CONTACTOR CONTACTOR

    LHPJB RHPJB
    GEN 1 BUS

    GEN 1 BUS MAIN START


    CONTACTOR CONTACTOR

    SEC START CABIN BUS


    CONTACTOR CONTACTOR

    ESS BUS CABIN BUS

    SECONDARY POWER LINE


    NON-ESS BUS
    BUS TIE
    CONTACTOR
    POWER LINE

    MAIN BUS NON-ESS


    BUS

    AV 1 BUS AV 1 BUS MAIN BUS GEN 2 BUS


    CONTACTOR CONTACTOR CONTACTOR

    GEN 2 BUS

    STANDBY BUS AV 2 BUS


    RELAY CONTACTOR

    STBY BUS AV 2 BUS

    BEPJB

    STBY POWER HOT BAT BUS


    RELAY

    BATTERY 1 EXTERNAL PWR BATTERY 2


    CONTACTOR CONTACTOR CONTACTOR

    EXTERNAL PWR
    CONNECTOR
    BATTERY 1 BATTERY 2

    12-B-240000-A-S4080-20008-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Electrical Power – System Schematic

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-00-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    ELECTRICAL POWER

    MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Table of Contents Page

    ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES............................................................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A GENERAL - AEROSPACE GROUND EQUIPMENT
    (AGE) AND TOOLS

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    External Power Unit (EPU) Part Local Supply As
    required
    Vacuum cleaner Part Local Supply As
    required
    Air supply hose Part Local Supply As
    required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-07-16 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Electrical Power - Maintenance Practices
    1.1 General
    This data module gives maintenance practice information on:
    − Safety precautions
    − External Power Unit specifications
    − Energize the aircraft electrical system
    − De-energize the aircraft electrical system
    − Charging the battery in the aircraft
    1.2 Safety Precautions
    1.2.1 Aircraft Electrical System
    Obey these safety precautions when you work on the electrical power system or at systems
    that uses electrical power:
    1.2.1.1 You must be careful with electrical power. Make sure that it is safe to supply
    electrical power. It can cause injury to persons and/or damage to equipment.
    1.2.1.2 Before you start work on the electrical system make sure that:
    − The External Power Unit (EPU) is disconnected
    − The BAT 1 and BAT 2 switches are set to OFF.
    1.2.1.3 You must make sure that the aircraft is correctly grounded before you start the
    work.
    1.2.1.4 Put up the applicable warning signs to prevent injury to persons.
    1.2.1.5 Open, tag and safety the related circuit breakers before you start the work.
    1.2.1.6 Put covers on all connectors and sockets disconnected during the work. This
    prevents damage and keeps them clean.
    1.2.1.7 After the removal of all panels and/or Line Replaceable Units (LRU), make sure
    you do these checks:
    − Examine all electrical wiring for the signs of friction and heat damage, and
    for frayed areas
    − Make sure all cable looms and terminal blocks are clean and correctly
    installed
    − Do an inspection of all connections for damage
    − Make sure that all safety and locking devices are satisfactory

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-07-16 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1.2.2 Battery
    Use the aircraft battery only for engine starting. The life of the battery quickly decreases
    when it is continuously used as a primary DC power source. Make sure that the battery is
    clean and the plastic parts have no oil or grease on them.
    Obey these safety precautions when you do work on the battery:
    1.2.2.1 Battery maintenance must be done with the battery removed from the aircraft.
    1.2.2.2 Lift the battery correctly. The battery is heavy and can cause injury to persons
    and/or damage to the aircraft.
    1.2.2.3 Do not lift the battery with the vent pipes because this can cause damage to the
    vent pipe. If necessary, get help to remove the battery from the aircraft.
    1.2.2.4 Do not let the battery electrolyte get on your skin or in your eyes. Put on safety
    goggles and clothing. The battery electrolyte can cause corrosion, injury to
    persons and/or damage to equipment can occur.
    1.2.2.5 If you get the battery electrolyte on your skin or in your eyes, obey these
    instructions:
    − Make neutral the effects of the electrolyte in your eyes. Use water to flush
    out the electrolyte
    − Make neutral the effects of electrolyte on your skin. Use a 3% solution of
    acetic acid or a 10% percent solution of boric acid on the area of
    contamination
    − Get medical help
    1.2.2.6 If you get electrolyte on the aircraft clean the area of contamination with water.
    Do not use solvents.
    1.3 External Power Unit Specifications
    Use an EPU for the usual aircraft maintenance. The EPU must be to the following specifications:

    Voltage (nominal) 28.0 ± 1.0 VDC


    Voltage (if adjustable) 22.0 to 30.0 VDC
    Current >400 AMPS continuous
    >1000 AMPS for 30 seconds
    Ripple Voltage <1.2 Vpp below 1000 Hz
    <3.2 Vpp above 1000 Hz
    Momentary Interruptions <40 milliseconds
    Surge Overvoltage <40 V DC for 30 milliseconds
    Surge Undervoltage >15 VDC for 30 milliseconds
    Positive Overvoltage Spike <62 Volts for 80 microseconds
    Negative Undervoltage Spike >-18 Volts for 80 microseconds
    Temperature Expected ambient ± 5° C
    Relative Humidity Within expected ambient condition
    Altitude Within expected ambient condition
    Waterproof Within expected ambient condition
    Sand and Dust Within expected ambient condition
    Emission of Radio Frequency Within local requirements
    2 Energize and De-energize the Aircraft Electrical System
    2.1 Energize the Aircraft Electrical System

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-07-16 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.1.1
    WARNING

    BEFORE YOU APPLY ELECTRICAL POWER TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT
    YOU OBEY THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS. MAKE SURE IT IS SAFE TO SUPPLY
    ELECTRICAL POWER. CIRCUITS THAT ARE NOT SAFE CAN CAUSE INJURY TO
    PERSONS AND/OR DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

    CAUTION

    FOLLOW THE PROCEDURES TO ENERGIZE AND DE-ENERGIZE AIRCRAFT


    ELECTRICAL SYSTEM, OTHERWISE THE AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS WILL NOT ENERGIZE
    IN THE CORRECT SEQUENCE AND RESULT IN A FAULT STATUS. IF THIS HAPPENS,
    DO A CORRECT ENERGIZE AND DE-ENERGIZE CYCLE OF THE AIRCRAFT
    ELECTRICAL SYSTEM.

    CAUTION

    THE USE OF EXTERNAL POWER WITHOUT BOTH BATTERIES INSTALLED AND


    ONLINE IS NOT RECOMMENDED. THE BATTERIES ACT AS FILTERS TO PREVENT
    DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT FROM POSSIBLE EXTERNAL POWER UNIT POWER SPIKES.

    Note

    To identify the AGE and tools used in this procedure refer to the list of AGE and tools 12-
    B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A.

    Note

    The GEN 1 and GEN 2 switches are set to ON. The electrical system design allows the
    generators to energize/de-energize automatically when the engine is operating/shut down.

    Make sure that the EXT PWR switch is set to the OFF position.
    2.1.2 Make sure that the AV 1 BUS, AV 2 BUS and CABIN BUS switches are set to ON.
    2.1.3 Open the access panel 31 BL.
    2.1.4 Energize the power unit (External Power Unit (EPU) (Pt.No. Local Supply)) and adjust the
    voltage to 28 VDC (Refer to the vendor's instructions to operate the EPU).
    2.1.5 Connect the EPU to the external power connector on the aircraft.
    2.1.6 On the Electrical Power Management panel (EPM) make sure that the EXT PWR green
    AVAIL Light Emitting Diode (LED) is on.
    2.1.7 On the Overhead Control Panel (OCP) set the STBY BUS switch to STBY BUS.
    2.1.8 Wait approximately 30 seconds until you see the lower Multi Function Display (MFD)
    situational awareness display.
    2.1.9 Set the BAT 1 and BAT 2 switches to ON.
    2.1.10 Wait approximately 30 seconds until you see the pilot Primary Flight Display (PFD).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-07-16 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.1.11 Set the EXT PWR switch to ON.


    2.1.12 On the EPM panel make sure that the EXT PWR blue ON LED is on.
    2.1.13 On the bottom Multi Function Display (MFD), on the electrical status window, make sure that
    the display shows these indications:
    − The battery voltage is between 27 VDC and 28.5 VDC
    − The current is positive
    2.2 De-energize the Aircraft Electrical System
    2.2.1 Set the EXT PWR switch to OFF.
    2.2.2 Set the STBY BUS switch to OFF.
    2.2.3 Set the BAT 1 and BAT 2 switches to OFF.
    2.2.4 Disconnect the EPU from the external power receptacle.
    2.2.5 De-energize the EPU (Refer to the vendor's instructions to operate the EPU).
    2.2.6 Close the access panel 31 BL.
    3 Charging the Battery in the Aircraft
    3.1
    CAUTION

    DO NOT CHARGE THE BATTERY IN THE AIRCRAFT IF THE BATTERY VOLTAGE IS LESS THAN
    23V OR THE BATTERY TEMPERATURE OR BATTERY COMPARTMENT TEMPERATURE IS
    ABOVE 38° C.

    Note

    To identify the AGE and tools used in this procedure refer to the list of AGE and tools 12-
    B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A.

    Make sure the EXT PWR switch is set to the OFF position.
    3.2 Open the access panel 31 BL.
    3.3 Connect the air supply ( (Pt.No. Local Supply)) to one of the battery vent pipes under the rear
    fuselage.
    3.4 Connect the other end of the air supply hose to the outlet air side of the vacuum cleaner
    ( (Pt.No. Local Supply)) or use the reverse air flow mode if installed.
    3.5 Set the vacuum cleaner to on and make sure air comes out from the other battery vent pipe.
    3.6 Energize the power unit (External Power Unit (EPU) (Pt.No. Local Supply)) and adjust the voltage to
    28 VDC (Refer to the vendor's instructions to operate the EPU).
    3.7 Connect the EPU to the external power receptacle on the aircraft.
    3.8 On the EPM panel make sure that the EXT PWR green AVAIL LED is ON.
    3.9 On the Overhead Control Panel (OCP) set the STBY BUS switch to STBY BUS.
    3.10 Wait approximately 30 seconds until you see the lower Multi Function Display (MFD) situational
    awareness display.
    3.11 Set the BAT 1 and BAT 2 switches to ON.
    3.12 Wait approximately 30 seconds until you see the pilot Primary Flight Display (PFD).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-07-16 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.13 Set the EXT PWR switch to ON.


    3.14 On the bottom Multi Function Display (MFD), on the electrical status window, monitor the battery
    voltage.
    3.15 On completion of the battery charging:
    − Set the EXT PWR switch to OFF
    − Set the STBY BUS switch to OFF
    − Set the BAT 1 and BAT 2 switches to OFF
    − De-energize the EPU (Refer to the vendor's instructions to operate the EPU)
    − Disconnect the EPU from the external power receptacle
    − Close the access panel 31 BL
    − Set the vacuum cleaner switch to off and remove the supply hose from the aircraft.

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-07-16 Page 6
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    DC GENERATION

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    DC GENERATION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION........................................................... 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 2
    2 Component Description (Ref. )............................................................................... 3
    2.1 Generator 1............................................................................................................ 3
    2.2 Generator 2............................................................................................................ 3
    2.3 Batteries................................................................................................................. 3
    2.4 Voltage Regulators (Generator Control Units)........................................................ 3
    2.5 Current Sensor....................................................................................................... 4
    2.6 Power Junction Boxes............................................................................................ 4
    2.7 Bus Tie................................................................................................................... 5
    2.8 Battery/External Power Junction Box..................................................................... 5
    2.9 External Power Controller....................................................................................... 5
    2.10 Overhead Control Panel (Ref. ).............................................................................. 6
    2.11 Emergency Power Supply...................................................................................... 7
    3 Operation................................................................................................................ 7
    3.1 Normal Operation (Ref. )........................................................................................ 7
    3.2 Abnormal Operation............................................................................................... 8
    3.2.1 Generator 1 Failure (Ref. )..................................................................................... 8
    3.2.2 Generator 2 Failure (Ref. )..................................................................................... 9
    3.2.3 Battery Failure........................................................................................................ 9
    3.2.4 Emergency Operation (Ref. ).................................................................................. 10
    3.3 Engine Starting....................................................................................................... 10

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    Index of Figures Page

    1 DC Generation System – Schematic...................................................................... 12


    2 DC Generation – Electronic Power Management Panel........................................ 13
    3 DC Generation – Normal Operation Condition – No. 1 and No. 2 Generator On– 14
    Line.........................................................................................................................
    4 DC Generation – Abnormal Operation Condition – No. 1 Generator Off–Line....... 15
    5 DC – Generation – Abnormal Operation Condition – No. 2 Generator Off–Line.... 16
    6 DC Generation – Emergency Operation Condition – No. 1 and No. 2 Generator 17
    Off–Line..................................................................................................................

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-24-40-00-00A-040A-A EXTERNAL POWER - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-17 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Data module/Technical publication Title


    12-B-24-50-00-00A-040A-A DC ELECTRICAL LOAD DISTRIBUTION -
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-24-52-51-00A-040A-A EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY (EPS) SYSTEM -
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-31-50-00-00A-040A-A CENTRAL WARNING SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-80-00-00-00A-040A-A STARTING - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Description

    1 General
    The Power Generation and Distribution System (PGDS) supplies DC electrical power to the different systems in the
    aircraft.
    The system has these components:
    − A generator 1
    − A generator 2
    − Two 24 VDC batteries
    − Voltage regulators (Generator-control units)
    − Two power junction boxes
    − A battery/external power junction box
    − An Overhead Control Panel (OCP)
    − Circuit Breaker (CB) panels.

    The system supplies 28 VDC to all the DC bus bars of the load distribution system (Refer to DM 12-
    B-24-50-00-00A-040A-A).
    These are the sources of DC electrical power:
    − The primary source is generator 1.
    − The secondary source is the generator 2. Generator 2 is used to start the engine (Refer to DM 12-
    B-80-00-00-00A-040A-A).
    − The two batteries supply electrical power when the two generators are off-line. The bus tie closes to connect
    the two batteries in parallel to power the essential bus, the avionic bus 1/standby power bus bars. Battery 1
    also supplies the hot battery bus.
    − The Emergency Power Supply (EPS) system (Refer to DM 12-B-24-52-51-00A-040A-A).
    When the aircraft is on the ground, the external electrical-power source supplies the DC electrical power (Refer to
    DM 12-B-24-40-00-00A-040A-A). The electrical status window on the lower Multi-Function Display (MFD) shows
    the DC voltage and current.
    The system sends warning and caution signals to the Crew Alerting System (CAS) (Refer to DM. 12-
    B-31-50-00-00A-040A-A) through the Modular Avionics Unit (MAU).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-17 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2 Component Description (Ref. Fig. 1)

    2.1 Generator 1
    Generator 1 supplies the primary source of 28 VDC to the power generation system. Generator 1 is installed on the
    engine-accessory gear box at the aft of the engine. The generator is installed in a metal container. There is a
    terminal block on the top of the metal container. There is an inspection cover around the generator brushes. Each
    brush has a wear line to show the brush wear. The generator has a splined drive shaft that engages with the gears
    in the accessory gear box. A duct and fan, supply the air to the generator to keep it cool. A Quick Attach and
    Detach (QAD) adapter attaches the generator to the accessory gear box.
    The generator has a current sensor, which sends generator load information to the MAU. The current is shown on
    the electrical status window of the bottom MFD. The generator voltages are also shown on the ELECTRICAL
    status window.

    2.2 Generator 2
    Generator 2 has two functions and operates as follows:
    − As an electric motor to turn the engine
    − As a starter to supply 28 VDC for the Secondary Power Line (SPL).
    Generator 2 is installed on the engine-accessory gear box at the aft of the engine. The generator is installed in a
    metal container. There is a terminal block on the top of the metal container. There is an inspection cover around
    the generator brushes. Each brush has a wear line to show the brush wear. The generator has a splined drive shaft
    that engages with the gears in the accessory gear box. A duct and fan, supply the air to the generator to keep it
    cool. A Quick Attach and Detach (QAD) adapter attaches the generator to the accessory gear box.
    The generator has a current sensor, which sends generator load information to the MAU. The current is shown on
    the electrical status window of the bottom MFD. The generator voltages are also shown on the ELECTRICAL
    status window.

    2.3 Batteries
    The batteries supply 24 VDC power to the bus bars for a short time if there is a failure of the generators. There are
    two lead acid 42 Ah batteries installed. Each battery is installed in a battery mounting tray in the rear fuselage. The
    batteries are held in their battery mounting tray with two tie rods, locking plates and wing nuts. Each battery has an
    electrical connector which is the output to the DC generation system. Each side of the battery housing has a hose
    that lets a flow of air through the battery.

    2.4 Voltage Regulators (Generator Control Units)


    There are two voltage regulators installed as follows:
    − Voltage regulator 1 (GCU 1)
    − Voltage regulator 2 (GCU 2)

    Voltage regulators 1 and 2 are installed on the No. 10 frame in the engine compartment. The voltage regulators are
    installed in metal containers. Each voltage regulator controls the field current of their related generator shunt. The
    voltage regulators monitor the voltage at the bus bars and compare the bus bar voltage with a set reference
    voltage. If there is a difference between the voltages, the field current of the generator shunt changes. The change
    of shunt field current keeps the output voltage of the generator between the set limits. Voltage regulator 1 has
    control of the voltage output of generator 1. Voltage regulator 2 has control of the voltage output of generator 2.
    The voltage regulators 1 and 2 prevent high or low voltage, reverse current and monitor the malfunction conditions.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-17 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.5 Current Sensor


    The current sensors are installed on the wires in the DC electrical-power circuit. Each current sensor monitors the
    flow of current through a circuit from the related source of the DC electrical power. When the circuit current flows,
    the current sensor sends a signal through the MAU to the CAS window or the electrical status window of the MFD.

    2.6 Power Junction Boxes


    There are two power junction boxes installed as follows:
    − Left Hand Power Junction Box (LHPJB)
    − Right Hand Power Junction Box (RHPJB).

    The power junction boxes contain the contactors, relays and other circuit protection devices for the related
    generator.
    The LHPJB is installed between frames 12 and 13 on the left side. The RHPJB is installed between frames 12 and
    13 on the right side.
    The LHPJB has these components:
    − Generator 1 bus contactor
    − Avionic 1 bus contactor
    − Secondary Start contactor
    − Bus Tie
    − Standby bus Hot Battery/Avionics bus change-over relay
    − Cabin heater, flap power, prop de-ice and LH windshield de-ice Circuit Breakers (CBs).

    The RHPJB has these components:


    − Main bus contactor
    − Generator 2 bus contactor
    − Avionic 2 bus contactor
    − Non-essential bus (NESS) contactor
    − Cabin bus contactor
    − Main start contactor
    − Under-floor heater, hydraulic power pack and RH windshield de-ice CBs.
    − Foot-warmer contactor and CB (option).

    The LHPJB supplies power to these bus bars and systems:


    − Essential bus
    − Standby bus
    − Avionic 1 bus
    − Generator 1 bus
    − Flaps system
    − LH windshield de-ice system
    − Propeller de-ice system
    − Cabin heater system.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-17 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    The RHPJB supplies power to these bus bars and systems:


    − Main bus
    − Avionic 2 bus
    − Generator 2 bus
    − Non-essential bus
    − Cabin bus
    − Under-floor heating system
    − RH windshield heater system
    − Hydraulics system
    − Foot-warmer system (option)

    2.7 Bus Tie


    The Bus Tie and its current sensor are installed in the LHPJB. The bus tie closes when one of the two generators
    goes off-line to permit the remaining generator to supply power. If the two generators go off-line, the two batteries
    are then connected in parallel through the bus tie to supply power to the left side busses. The MAU monitors the
    bus tie position from auxiliary contactors.
    The Bus Tie contactor position is monitored by the MAU. Failures are shown on the CAS window of the MFD.
    A current sensor monitors excessive current and isolates the left or right side.
    A 0.5A CB on the EPM panel trips to show the pilot that the Bus Tie has opened. This CB can be used for manual
    opening of the bus tie.
    The bus tie can be tested from the maintenance panel.

    2.8 Battery/External Power Junction Box


    The Battery/External Power Junction Box (BEPJB) is installed in the tail cone of the aircraft. The BEPJB controls
    the batteries, external power, logo lights (option) and Vapor-Cooling Cycle-System (VCCS) (option).
    The BEPJB has these components:
    − Battery 1 contactor
    − Battery 1 current sensor
    − Battery 2 contactor
    − Battery 2 current sensor
    − Hot battery bus and its circuit breakers
    − External power controller and External Power Contactor (EPC)
    − Standby power relay
    − Logo light circuit breaker and control relay (option)
    − VCCS compressor power circuit breaker (option).

    2.9 External Power Controller


    When the A/C is powered from an external power supply, all bus bars are energized as necessary and the batteries
    can be on-line to get charged. The external power controller monitors the external power supply and automatically
    isolates the aircraft systems if the voltage is below 22.0 VDC or above 30.3 VDC. The overhead panel gives two

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-17 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    discrete inputs to the external power controller to turn on and off the external power. The external power controller
    disconnects the external power if one of the two generators is on-line.

    2.10 Overhead Control Panel (Ref. Fig. 2)


    The OCP has an Electrical Power Management section that has these switches:
    − MASTER POWER
    − BAT 1/OFF
    − BAT 2/OFF
    − GEN 1/OFF
    − GEN 2/OFF
    − STBY BUS/OFF
    − EXT PWR/OFF
    − AV 1 BUS/OFF
    − AV 2 BUS/OFF
    − BUS TIE (CB)
    − CABIN BUS/OFF
    − EPS ARMED/OFF/TEST.

    Each DC generation control switch controls the DC power to the related bus from the available sources of the
    system. The connections from the switches to the cross tie circuit breakers are shown on the OCP panel by white
    lines.
    The switches are the toggle type. These switches must be pulled out before they can be moved from the on
    position.
    The guarded MASTER POWER EMERGENCY OFF switch sets all the electrical power off. It is a guarded ON-OFF
    toggle switch guarded in the ON position.
    When the MASTER POWER EMERGENCY OFF is set to OFF:
    − Generator 1, generator 2, battery 1, battery 2 and external power are disconnected.
    − The Standby Power, Essential, AV 1, AV 2, GEN 1, GEN 2, NESS and Cabin bus bars are de-energized.
    − The Hot Battery and Emergency Power bus bars are energized.

    The BAT 1 and BAT 2 switches set the battery power to on or off.
    The GEN 1 and GEN 2 switches have three positions, ON (GEN 1), OFF and a RESET position. The GEN 1 and
    GEN 2 switches RESET position is spring loaded back to the ON position when they are released. These switches
    set the generators to on or off, but are normally set to the ON position.
    The STBY BUS switch is a two position switch. When the switch is set to STBY BUS, electrical power is supplied
    from battery 1 through the Hot Battery bus and the Standby bus to certain avionics systems without the battery or
    external power circuits being on (Refer to DM 12-B-24-40-00-00A-040A-A).
    The STBY BUS ON, blue indicator light comes on when the standby power is on.
    When the external electrical power supply is connected to the aircraft, a green AVAIL LED caption adjacent to the
    EXT PWR switch comes on. The external electrical power is available when the AVAIL LED is on. When the EXT
    PWR switch is set to EXT PWR, a blue ON LED caption adjacent to the EXT PWR switch comes on.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-17 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    The AV 1 switch supplies 28 VDC, electrical power to the Avionic Bus 1 and the Standby bus when set to the AV1
    BUS position. The AV 2 switch supplies 28 VDC, electrical power to the Avionic Bus 2 when set to the AV 2 BUS
    position.
    The CABIN BUS switch sets the power for ancillary non-flight related services to on or off.
    The BUS TIE circuit breaker trips to show the pilot that the bus tie has opened. This CB can be used for manual
    opening of the bus tie.
    The EPS switch has three positions, ARMED, OFF and TEST position. When the switch is set to the ARMED
    position, the EPS bus is supplied from the EPS battery. The EPS battery is charged from the essential bus.
    When the EPS switch is set to the TEST position, the internal capacity of the EPS battery is checked and a green
    TEST LED caption adjacent to the EPS switch comes on.
    When the aircraft is powered down, the EPS switch must be set to OFF to prevent discharge of the internal EPS
    battery.

    2.11 Emergency Power Supply


    The PGDS includes an EPS system as part of the power system installation. The EPS gives power to the EPS bus
    when there is a total loss of all electrical power (the two generators and the aircraft batteries). The EPS has a
    dedicated battery that supplies power for 30 minutes. The EPS battery is connected to the essential bus to keep
    charged. When the aircraft is powered down the EPS switch must be set to OFF to stop the EPS battery
    discharging. To give equipment protection against voltage surges because of lightning discharges, suppression
    diodes are fitted to the input and output of the Emergency Power Supply Unit (EPSU).

    3 Operation

    3.1 Normal Operation (Ref. Fig. 3)


    When the system is operating correctly generator 1 and 2 contactors and battery 1 and 2 contactors are closed.
    The bus tie is open. The Power Line and battery 1 are connected to generator 1. The Secondary Power Line (SPL),
    main bus and battery 2 are connected to generator 2. All bus bars and systems are available.
    In normal operation these components for generator 1 are in the closed position:
    − Battery 1 contactor
    − Generator 1 contactor
    − Generator 1 bus contactor
    − Avionic 1 bus contactor.

    These systems are on:


    − Cabin heater
    − Prop de-ice
    − LH windshield heater system
    − Flap power.

    In normal operation these components for generator 2 are in the closed position:
    − Battery 2 contactor
    − Generator 2 contactor
    − Generator 2 bus contactor

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-17 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − Main bus contactor


    − Avionic 2 bus contactor
    − Non-essential contactor
    − Cabin contactor.

    These systems are on:


    − Under-floor heating system
    − Foot-warmer system (option)
    − RH windshield de-ice
    − Hydraulics system
    − VCCS (option)
    − Logo Light (option).

    3.2 Abnormal Operation


    The PGDS has the capability in abnormal and emergency conditions, to automatically load shed systems not
    essential for continued safe flight and landing. The pilot is not required to manually shed loads.
    If generator 1 or 2 becomes unserviceable, the applicable control relays of the PGDS automatically connect the
    remaining generator and batteries in parallel to the power line and SPL. The PGDS gives the primary flight displays
    (APEX) a monitoring function. This shows generator and battery failures.

    3.2.1 Generator 1 Failure (Ref. Fig. 4)


    When generator 1 becomes unserviceable, the generator 1 contactor opens to isolate generator 1. The bus tie
    closes connecting the power line to generator 2. Generator 1 bus, non-essential bus and cabin bus are load shed.
    The failure is shown on the CAS window of the MFD. These power distribution bus bars and equipment remain on:
    − Essential bus
    − Main bus
    − Standby power bus
    − EPS bus
    − Avionic 1 bus
    − Hot battery bus
    − Gen 2 bus
    − Avionic 2 bus
    − Flap system
    − LH and RH windshield de-ice
    − Prop de-ice
    − Hydraulic power.

    These power distribution busses and equipment are load shed:


    − Gen 1 bus
    − Non-essential bus
    − Cabin bus

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-17 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − Cabin heater
    − Under-floor heater
    − Foot-warmer
    − Logo lights
    − VCCS compressor.

    3.2.2 Generator 2 Failure (Ref. Fig. 5)


    When generator 2 becomes unserviceable, the generator 2 contactor opens to isolate generator 2. The bus tie
    closes connecting the secondary power line (SPL) to generator 1. Generator 2 bus, non-essential bus and cabin
    bus are load shed. The failure is shown on the CAS window of the MFD. These power distribution bus bars and
    equipment remain on:
    − Essential bus
    − Main bus
    − Standby power bus
    − EPS bus
    − Avionic 1 bus
    − Hot battery bus
    − Gen 1 bus
    − Avionic 2 bus
    − Flap system
    − LH and RH windshield de-ice
    − Prop de-ice
    − Hydraulic power.

    These power distribution bus bars and equipment are load shed:
    − Gen 2 bus
    − Non-essential bus
    − Cabin bus
    − Cabin heater
    − Under-floor heater
    − Foot-warmer
    − Logo lights
    − VCCS compressor power.

    3.2.3 Battery Failure


    If a battery failure is detected, the crew must switch off the unserviceable battery so that the battery contactor is
    opened. The position of all other relays and bus tie remains the same. Systems performance is not affected.
    Auxiliary contacts on the battery contactors send a signal of its position to the MAU. The MAU generates a caution
    shown on the CAS window of the MFD.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-17 Page 9


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.2.4 Emergency Operation (Ref. Fig. 6)


    If the two generators become unserviceable the bus tie closes so that the two batteries are connected to the power
    line. Generator 1 and 2 contactors open to isolate the generators. The failure is shown on the CAS window of the
    MFD. These power distribution bus bars and equipment remain on:
    − Essential bus
    − Standby power bus
    − EPS bus
    − Avionic 1 bus
    − Hot battery bus
    − Flap system
    − LH windshield de-ice
    − Prop de-ice
    − Hydraulic power.

    These power distribution bus bars and equipment are load shed:
    − Main bus
    − Gen 1 bus
    − Gen 2 bus
    − Non-essential bus
    − Avionic 2 bus
    − Cabin bus
    − Cabin heater
    − Under-floor heater
    − Foot-warmer
    − Logo lights
    − RH windshield de-ice
    − VCCS compressor
    − LH AOA plate heater.

    3.3 Engine Starting


    Generator 2 is used to start the engine. The MAU monitors engine parameters and controls the relays and
    contactors during the engine start procedure.
    The two batteries must be available to start the engine, although an engine start is possible if only battery 1 is
    available (there will be a 10 second delay if only battery 1 is used).
    The STARTER circuit breaker on the ESSENTIAL BUS gives 28 VDC electrical power to the starter circuits.
    Electrical power is routed to the coils of the Main Start Control Relay (MSCR) and Secondary Start Control Relay
    (SSCR) through the Ng>62% relay in the left relay panel. Starter electrical power is also routed to the coils of the
    Bus Tie Start Interlock Relay (BTSIR) and the Manual Start Override Relay (MSOR), which are normally energized
    when the engine is not running.
    The engine is started by pushing the STARTER switch on the OCP. This active ground signal is only available
    when Battery 1 is set to ON. When the MAU receives the starter signal through the MSOR, the Start Hold signal is
    generated to energize the Main Start Control Relay (MSCR). This opens the bus tie and isolates battery 1 during

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-17 Page 10


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    the high torque phase (the first few seconds of the start) to prevent voltage drop on the Essential Bus. The BTSIR
    then opens to make sure that the Bus Tie has fully opened before the starter relays can engage. The MSCR gives
    a ground signal through the BTSIR to start the Generators On Delay Relay (GODR). The GODR controls the ON
    signal preventing the generators from switching on until 10 seconds after the start sequence has ended. This
    makes sure that the engine has accelerated above Ng=62% before the electrical loads are applied and prevents a
    hung start. The MSCR also prevents operation of the hydraulic power pack and switches on the fuel boost pumps.
    When the BTSIR has opened, electrical power is given to the Main Starter Contactor (MSC) and the Starter On
    Relay (SOR) through the BTSIR. The SOR energizes and switches off power to the two voltage regulators and also
    short circuits the shunt winding of generator 2 to prevent voltage spikes. The MSC gives battery 2 power to the
    series winding of generator 2 to crank and start the engine.
    When Ng reaches 10% or after 10 seconds, the MAU gives a Secondary Start Hold signal to energize the SSCR.
    The SSCR removes electrical power from both channels of the stick pusher computer to make sure that the Pusher
    caution is on and a Pusher BIT is done before taxiing. When the SSCR energizes, starter electrical power is routed
    to the Secondary Start Contactor (SSC). The SSC energizes and routes battery 1 electrical power to the MSC via
    the Bus Tie cross feed cable to help engine starting. If external electrical power is used for starting, the right
    External Power On relay stops the SSC operating. If the aircraft is in the air, the RH Weight On Wheels relay stops
    the SSC operating.
    When Ng is 50% or after 60 seconds (aircraft in the air) or after 80 seconds (aircraft on the ground), the MAU
    removes the Start Hold and the Secondary Start Hold signals to stop the start sequence.
    Starter electrical power is interlocked by the Ng>62% relay. If the start sequence starts by a fault (a chafed wire or
    MAU failure), both generators are set off-line by the SOR and the batteries would try to motor generator 2. The
    Ng>62% relay is energized whenever the engine speed is more than 62%. When the engine is running this
    interlock disables the engine start by isolating the coils of the MSCR and the SSCR.
    A second Start Interlock (SI) switch sends a signal to the MAU to abort the start sequence.
    When either the MSCR or the SSCR is energized, a position signal (Starter Engaged) is sent to the MAU. This
    signal is compared to the Start Hold signal to give a CAS warning if the starter is engaged, but has not been
    commanded by the starter switch.
    If the MAU starter function fails, the Auto Start Enable signal is not output from the MAU and the MSOR opens.
    Manual override is possible by pressing and holding the STARTER switch until the Ng reaches 50%. In this mode
    the Secondary Start Hold signal is inoperative.
    A blocking diode stops an incorrect Bus Tie indication to the MAU through the BTSIR coil when the STARTER
    circuit breaker is open.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-17 Page 11


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    MASTER
    POWER
    VOLTAGE VOLTAGE
    REGULATOR 1 OFF REGULATOR 2
    GEN 1 GEN 2
    GEN 1 GEN 2
    ON
    STARTER STARTER
    ON RELAY A ON RELAY
    OFF GENERATOR 1 MAIN START GENERATOR 2 OFF
    GEN 1 CTL GEN 2 CTL
    CONTACTOR CONTACTOR CONTACTOR

    SEC START
    ON CB1 ON
    CONTACTOR SECONDARY POWER LINE
    U/FLOOR HTR

    GEN 1 BUS CABIN BUS


    BUS TIE CONTACTOR CB2
    CONTACTOR
    FOOT WARMER
    GEN 1 BUS CONTACTOR
    NON-ESS BUS
    EPS BATTERY CONTACTOR

    ESS BUS NON-ESS BUS FOOT WARMER

    GEN 2 BUS
    EPS RELAY
    CB1 CONTACTOR CB5

    CABIN HEATING EPS BUS GEN 2 BUS RH W/SHLD

    CB3 CB6
    AV 1 BUS AV 1 BUS
    PROP DE-ICE HYD POWER
    CONTACTOR

    CB4
    AV 2 BUS AV 2 BUS
    LH W/SHLD
    CONTACTOR
    CB9

    CB5 CB6 CPRSR POWER

    FLAP POWER
    MAIN BUS MAIN BUS
    CONTACTOR

    CB8
    STBY BUS STANDBY BUS
    LOGO LIGHT
    RELAY
    OFF

    A
    STBY POWER
    RELAY STANDBY
    ON
    POWER

    BATTERY 1 BATTERY 2
    OFF OFF
    CB1
    A A
    BATTERY 1 EXTERNAL PWR BATTERY 2
    CONTACTOR CONTACTOR CONTACTOR
    ON
    HOT BATTERY
    BUS
    EXTERNAL PWR
    BATTERY 1 BATTERY 2
    CONNECTOR
    ON

    ENGINE
    START
    12-B-243000-A-S4080-20007-A-01-1

    Figure 1 DC Generation System – Schematic

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-17 Page 12


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    BLUE RED

    SYSTEM TEST ELECTRICAL POWER MANAGEMENT


    FIRE STICK AV 1 BUS STBY BUS CABIN BUS AV 2 BUS MASTER POWER
    WARN LAMP PUSHER
    ON

    OFF OFF OFF OFF


    GEN 1 BUS TIE GEN 2 EMERGENCY OFF
    OFF 1/2 OFF
    FUEL PUMPS EPS
    LH RH RESET RESET EPS ON
    ON ARMED
    BAT 1 EXT PWR BAT 2
    OFF
    AUTO ON TEST
    AVAIL TEST
    OFF OFF OFF
    ENGINE START EXTERNAL LIGHTS PASSENGER WARNING
    IGNITION START
    STARTER ON INTERRUPT WING NAV BEACON STROBE TAXI LANDING RECOG LOGO NO SMOKING SEAT BELTS
    ON ON
    OFF OFF
    AUTO

    GREEN GREEN

    12-B-243000-A-S4080-20013-A-01-1

    Figure 2 DC Generation – Electronic Power Management Panel

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-17 Page 13


    Gen 2
    Secondary Power Line (SPL) Ctr A
    V 300
    Gen 1 A
    Ctr Bus Tie Starter
    300 A V Powerline
    A RH Pwr. Junct Box

    Effectivity: ALL
    Main Start
    Gen 1Bus
    Ctr
    Sec Start Gen 2 Bus
    Gen 1Bus Ctr
    Ess Bus Ctr
    Gen 2 Bus Ctr
    Cabin Heater N/Ess Bus
    Stby Bus U/Floor Heater
    Rly Av 1Bus Av 1Ctr LH Wshld Pwr Footwarmer N/Ess Ctr
    Stby Pwr Cabin Bus
    Bus Prop De-Ice RH Wshld Pwr
    Cabin Ctr
    Hyd Pwr
    Av 2 Bus
    Flap Pwr

    LH Pwr. Junct Box Av 2 Bus Ctr


    EPS Main Bus
    Bus
    Main Bus Ctr
    Emerg
    EPS Pwr
    Supply
    EPS Arm Rly

    UNCLASSIFIED
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Sw V A
    Stby
    Pwr Rly VCCS Comp No.2 Bat Ctr
    Stby
    V A
    Bus Sw
    Logo Lt
    Ext Pwr
    Hot Bat No.1 Bat Ctr
    +
    Ctr
    + Bus
    Bat Ext Pwr. Junct Box No.2
    Batt
    No.1
    Batt
    Ext Pwr In

    Figure 3 DC Generation – Normal Operation Condition – No. 1 and No. 2 Generator On–Line
    12-B-243000-A-S4080-20009-A-02-1

    12-B-24-30-00-00A-040A-A

    2008-10-17 Page 14
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    Gen 2
    Secondary Power Line (SPL) Ctr
    300
    Gen 1
    A
    Ctr
    Bus Tie Starter
    300 Powerline
    A RH Pwr. Junct Box

    Effectivity: ALL
    Main Start
    Gen 1 Bus
    Ctr
    Sec Start Gen 2 Bus
    Gen 1 Bus Ctr
    Ess Bus Ctr
    Gen 2 Bus Ctr
    Cabin Heater N/Ess Bus
    Stby Bus U/Floor Heater
    Rly Av 1 Bus Av 1 Ctr LH Wshld Pwr Footwarmer N/Ess Ctr
    Stby Pwr Cabin Bus
    Bus Prop De-Ice RH Wshld Pwr
    Cabin Ctr
    Hyd Pwr
    Av 2 Bus
    Flap Pwr

    LH Pwr. Junct Box Av 2 Bus Ctr


    EPS Main Bus
    Bus
    Main Bus Ctr
    Emerg
    EPS Pwr
    EPS Arm Rly Supply

    UNCLASSIFIED
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Sw
    Stby
    Pwr Rly VCCS Comp No.2 Bat Ctr
    Stby
    Bus Sw
    Logo Lt
    Ext Pwr
    Hot Bat No.1 Bat Ctr
    +
    Ctr
    + Bus
    Bat Ext Pwr. Junct Box No.2
    Batt
    No.1
    Batt
    Ext Pwr In

    AUTOMATIC LOAD SHED - BUS AND SYSTEM INOPERATIVE

    BUS GEN 1 NON-ESSENTIAL CABIN

    Figure 4 DC Generation – Abnormal Operation Condition – No. 1 Generator Off–Line


    SYSTEM CABIN HEATER U/FLOOR HEATER OPTIONAL: VCCS COMPRESSOR OPTIONAL: FOOT-WARMER, LOGO LT

    12-B-243000-A-S4080-20010-A-02-1

    12-B-24-30-00-00A-040A-A

    2008-10-17 Page 15
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    Gen 2
    Ctr
    Secondary Power Line (SPL) 300
    Gen 1 A
    Ctr Bus Tie Starter
    300 Powerline
    A RH Pwr. Junct Box

    Effectivity: ALL
    Main Start
    Gen 1Bus
    Ctr
    Sec Start Gen 2 Bus
    Gen 1Bus Ctr
    Ess Bus Ctr
    Gen 2 Bus Ctr
    Cabin Heater N/Ess Bus
    Stby Bus U/Floor Heater
    Rly Av 1Bus Av 1Ctr LH Wshld Pwr Footwarmer N/Ess Ctr
    Stby Pwr Cabin Bus
    Bus Prop De-Ice RH Wshld Pwr
    Cabin Ctr
    Hyd Pwr
    Av 2 Bus
    Flap Pwr

    LH Pwr. Junct Box Av 2 Bus Ctr


    EPS Main Bus
    Bus
    Main Bus Ctr
    Emerg
    EPS Pwr
    EPS Arm Rly Supply

    UNCLASSIFIED
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Sw
    Stby
    Pwr Rly VCCS Comp No.2 Bat Ctr
    Stby
    Bus Sw
    Logo Lt
    Ext Pwr
    Hot Bat No.1 Bat Ctr
    +
    Ctr
    + Bus
    Bat Ext Pwr. Junct Box No.2
    Batt
    No.1
    Batt
    Ext Pwr In
    AUTOMATIC LOAD SHED - BUS AND SYSTEM INOPERATIVE

    BUS GEN 2 NON-ESSENTIAL CABIN

    Figure 5 DC – Generation – Abnormal Operation Condition – No. 2 Generator Off–Line


    SYSTEM CABIN HEATER U/FLOOR HEATER OPTIONAL: VCCS COMPRESSOR OPTIONAL: FOOT-WARMER, LOGO LT

    12-B-243000-A-S4080-20011-A-02-1

    12-B-24-30-00-00A-040A-A

    2008-10-17 Page 16
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    Gen 2
    Ctr
    Secondary Power Line (SPL) 300
    Gen 1 A
    Ctr Starter
    300 Powerline Bus Tie
    A RH Pwr. Junct Box

    Effectivity: ALL
    Main Start
    Gen 1Bus
    Ctr
    Sec Start Gen 2 Bus
    Gen 1Bus Ctr
    Ess Bus Ctr
    Gen 2 Bus Ctr
    Cabin Heater N/Ess Bus
    Stby Bus U/Floor Heater
    Rly Av 1Bus Av 1Ctr LH Wshld Pwr Footwarmer N/Ess Ctr
    Stby Pwr Cabin Bus
    Bus Prop De-Ice RH Wshld Pwr
    Cabin Ctr
    Hyd Pwr
    Av 2 Bus
    Flap Pwr

    LH Pwr. Junct Box Av 2 Bus Ctr


    EPS Main Bus
    Bus
    Main Bus Ctr
    Emerg
    EPS Pwr
    EPS Arm Rly Supply

    UNCLASSIFIED
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Sw

    End of data module


    Stby
    Pwr Rly VCCS Comp No.2 Bat Ctr
    Stby
    Bus Sw
    Logo Lt
    Ext Pwr
    Hot Bat No.1 Bat Ctr
    +
    Ctr
    + Bus
    Bat Ext Pwr. Junct Box No.2
    Batt
    No.1
    Batt
    Ext Pwr In
    AUTOMATIC LOAD SHED - BUS AND SYSTEM INOPERATIVE

    BUS GEN 1 GEN 2 NON-ESSENTIAL CABIN AV 2 MAIN

    SYSTEM CABIN HEATER U/FLOOR HEATER RH WINDSHIELD OPTIONAL: VCCS OPTIONAL: FOOT-WARMER, LOGO LT

    Figure 6 DC Generation – Emergency Operation Condition – No. 1 and No. 2 Generator Off–Line
    12-B-243000-A-S4080-20012-A-02-1

    12-B-24-30-00-00A-040A-A

    2008-10-17 Page 17
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-17 Page 18


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    DC GENERATION

    ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Table of Contents Page

    DC GENERATION - ADJUSTMENT/TEST................................................................................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-12-20-07-01A-066A-A SERVICING – AGE AND TOOLS DATA - CIRCUIT
    BREAKER SAFETY CLIP (P/N 110.88.07.065)
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-24-40-01-00A-920A-A BATTERY AND EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX
    - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903D-A POWER PLANT TEST 3 – DC GENERATION SYSTEM
    - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open required
    Multimeter Part Local Supply As
    required
    Test Bench Power Supply Part Local Supply As
    required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-01 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark


    Stop Watch Part Local Supply As
    required
    Jumper cable (Three pin Part Local supply 1
    connection)
    Jumper cable (Two pin Part Local supply 1
    connection)

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the operational test procedures for:
    − The batteries
    − The external power.

    The adjustment/test procedures for the generator 1 and 2 are given in AMM 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903D-A.
    2 Battery Operational Test
    2.1
    WARNING

    MAKE SURE IT IS SAFE TO SUPPLY ELECTRICAL POWER. CIRCUITS THAT ARE NOT SAFE
    CAN CAUSE INJURY TO PERSONS AND/OR DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

    Obey the safety precautions given in AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.


    2.2 Make sure that the external power is disconnected, refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    2.3 On the ICE PROTECTION panel, set the switches that follow to these positions:

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-01 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    SWITCH POSITION
    PROBES OFF
    RH WSHLD OFF
    LH WSHLD OFF
    INERT SEP OFF
    PROPELLER OFF
    BOOTS OFF
    FOOT WARMER (if installed) OFF
    LOGO LIGHTS (if installed) OFF
    2.4 On the Electrical Power Management panel (EPM), set the switches that follow to these positions:

    SWITCH POSITION
    GEN 1 OFF
    GEN 2 OFF
    EXT PWR OFF
    AV 2 BUS OFF
    AV 1 BUS OFF
    CABIN BUS OFF
    STBY BUS ON
    BAT 1 ON
    BAT 2 ON
    2.5 On the EPM panel, make sure that all LED indicators, with the exception of the STBY BUS ON LED
    indicator, are off.
    2.6 On the Crew Alerting System (CAS) window of the Multi Function Display (MFD), make sure that the
    Battery 1 + 2 caution is off.
    2.7 On the ELECTRICAL status window of the MFD, make sure that the BAT 1 and BAT 2 display show
    these indications:
    − The volts are 24 ± 3 VDC
    − The amps are negative, but not more than −20 A for each battery
    2.8 ON the EPM panel, set the BAT 1 switch to OFF.
    2.9 On the CAS window of the MFD, make sure that these amber cautions are on:
    − BATTERY 1 OFF
    − AVIONICS 1 BUS
    2.10 ON the EPM panel, set the BAT 1 switch to ON.
    2.11 On the EPM panel, set the BAT 2 switch to OFF.
    2.12 On the CAS window of the MFD, make sure that these amber cautions are on:
    − BATTERY 2 OFF
    − AVIONICS 1 BUS
    2.13 On the EPM panel, set the BAT 1 switch to OFF.
    2.14 On the EPM panel, set the STBY BUS switch to OFF.
    3 Battery HOT test for NiCad Batteries

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-01 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.1
    WARNING

    MAKE SURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO SUPPLY ELECTRICAL POWER. CIRCUITS THAT ARE NOT
    SAFE CAN CAUSE INJURY TO PERSONS AND/OR DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

    Obey the safety precautions given in AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.


    3.2 Open the access door 31 AB.
    3.3 Make sure that the battery connectors BT373P2 and BT384P2 are connected.
    3.4
    Note

    Monitor the CAS Status Window in the Lower MFD for BAT 1 and/or BAT 2 system warnings and
    cautions.

    On the Overhead Panel (OHP), set the STBY BUS, BAT 1, BAT 2 and the EXT PWR switches to ON.
    3.5 Make sure that:
    − the lower Multi Function Display (MFD) is ON
    − the CAS Warning messages Battery 1 Hot, Battery 2 Hot and Battery 1+2 Hot on the lower MFD
    are off.
    3.6 On Battery 1, disconnect the connector BT373P2.
    3.7 Make sure that:
    − the Battery Hot Audio Alert is generated
    − the CAS Warning message `Battery 1 Hot' on the lower MFD is ON and displayed in inverse
    video.
    3.8 Press any MASTER WARNING switch indicator.
    3.9 Make sure that:
    − the Battery Hot Audio Alert stops
    − the CAS Warning message `Battery 1 Hot' on the lower MFD is now displayed in normal video.
    3.10 On the Battery 1 connector BT373P2, connect Jumper cable (Three pin connection) (Pt.No. Local
    supply) between pins D and E.
    3.11
    Note

    The Jumper cable (Three pin connection) (Pt.No. Local supply) must be able to link two or three pins
    at the same time i.e. it should have two wires joined in a common center connection with the relevant
    electrical contacts installed on the three wire ends.

    Make sure that:


    − the Battery Hot Audio Alert is not generated
    − the CAS Warning message `Battery 1 Hot' on the lower MFD is off.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-01 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.12
    Note

    Do not remove the Jumper cable (Three pin connection) (Pt.No. Local supply) between pins D and E
    of the Battery 1 connector BT373P2, until told to do so.

    On the Battery 1 connector BT373P2, connect a second Jumper cable (Two pin
    connection) (Pt.No. Local supply) between pins A and B.
    3.13 Make sure that:
    − the Battery Hot Audio Alert is generated
    − the CAS Warning message `Battery 1 Hot' on the lower MFD is ON and displayed in inverse
    video.
    3.14 On the Battery 1 connector BT373P2, remove the Jumper cable (Two pin connection) (Pt.No. Local
    supply) from pins A and B.
    3.15 Make sure that:
    − the Battery Hot Audio Alert is not generated
    − the CAS Warning message `Battery 1 Hot' on the lower MFD is off.
    3.16 On the Battery 1 connector BT373P2, connect the second wire of the Jumper cable (Three pin
    connection) (Pt.No. Local supply) to pin C (so that pins C, D and E are connected).
    3.17 Make sure that:
    − the Battery Hot Audio Alert is generated
    − the CAS Warning message `Battery 1 Hot' on the lower MFD is ON and displayed in inverse
    video.
    3.18 On the Battery 1 connector BT373P2, remove the Jumper cable (Three pin connection) (Pt.No. Local
    supply) wire from pin C.
    3.19 Make sure that:
    − the Battery Hot Audio Alert is not generated
    − the CAS Warning message `Battery 1 Hot' on the lower MFD is off.
    3.20 On Battery 2, disconnect the connector BT384P2.
    3.21 Make sure that:
    − the Battery Hot Audio Alert is generated
    − the CAS Warning message `Battery 2 Hot' on the lower MFD is ON and displayed in inverse
    video.
    3.22 Press any MASTER WARNING switch indicator.
    3.23 Make sure that:
    − the Battery Hot Audio Alert stops
    − the CAS Warning message `Battery 2 Hot' on the lower MFD is now displayed in normal video.
    3.24 On the Battery 1 connector BT373P2, remove the Jumper cable (Three pin connection) (Pt.No. Local
    supply) from pins D and E.
    3.25 Make sure that:
    − the Battery Hot Audio Alert is generated

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-01 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − the CAS Warning message `Battery 1 + 2 Hot' on the lower MFD is ON and displayed in inverse
    video.
    3.26 Install the connector BT373P2 onto Battery 1.
    3.27 Make sure that the CAS Warning message `Battery 1 + 2 Hot' on the lower MFD is off and Battery 2
    Hot is on.
    3.28 On the Battery 2 connector BT384P2, connect a Jumper cable (Three pin connection) (Pt.No. Local
    supply) between pins D and E.
    3.29 Make sure that:
    − the Battery Hot Audio Alert is not generated
    − the CAS Warning message `Battery 2 Hot' on the lower MFD' is off.
    3.30
    Note

    Do not remove the Jumper cable (Three pin connection) (Pt.No. Local supply) between pins D and E
    of the Battery 2 connector BT384P2, until told to do so.

    On the Battery 2 connector BT384P2, connect a Jumper cable (Two pin connection) (Pt.No. Local
    supply) between pins A and B.
    3.31 Make sure that:
    − the Battery Hot Audio Alert is generated
    − the CAS Warning message `Battery 2 Hot' on the lower MFD is ON and displayed in inverse
    video.
    3.32 On the Battery 2 connector BT384P2, remove the Jumper cable (Two pin connection) (Pt.No. Local
    supply) from pins A and B.
    3.33 Make sure that:
    − the Battery Hot Audio Alert is not generated
    − the CAS Warning message `Battery 2 Hot' on the lower MFD' is off.
    3.34 On the Battery 2 connector BT384P2, connect the second wire of the Jumper cable (Three pin
    connection) (Pt.No. Local supply) to pin C (so that pins C, D and E are connected).
    3.35 Make sure that:
    − the Battery Hot Audio Alert is generated
    − the CAS Warning message `Battery 2 Hot' on the lower MFD is ON and displayed in inverse
    video.
    3.36 On the Battery 2 connector BT384P2, remove the Jumper cable (Three pin connection) (Pt.No. Local
    supply) wire from pin C.
    3.37 Make sure that:
    − the Battery Hot Audio Alert is not generated
    − the CAS Warning message `Battery 2 Hot' on the lower MFD is off.
    3.38 On the Battery 2 connector BT384P2, remove the Jumper cable (Three pin connection) (Pt.No. Local
    supply) from pins D and E.
    3.39 Make sure that:
    − the Battery Hot Audio Alert is generated

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-01 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − the CAS Warning message `Battery 2 Hot' on the lower MFD is ON and displayed in inverse
    video.
    3.40 Install the connector BT384P2 onto Battery 2.
    3.41 Make sure that the CAS Warning messages Battery 1 Hot, Battery 2 Hot and `Battery 1 + 2 Hot' on the
    lower MFD are off.
    3.42 On the OHP, set the BAT 1 switch to OFF.
    3.43 On the OHP, set the BAT 2 switch to OFF.
    3.44 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.45 Close the access door 31 AB.
    4 External Power Overvoltage Operational Test
    4.1
    WARNING

    MAKE SURE IT IS SAFE TO SUPPLY ELECTRICAL POWER. CIRCUITS THAT ARE NOT SAFE
    CAN CAUSE INJURY TO PERSONS AND/OR DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

    Note

    If an External Power Unit (EPU) with an adjustable output from 22,0 VDC to 31,5 VDC inclusive, is not
    available, a Test Bench Power Supply (Pt.No. Local Supply) capable of this range may be used, see
    Step 5.

    Obey the safety precautions given in AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.


    4.2 On the EPM panel, set the switches that follow to these positions:

    SWITCH POSITION
    GEN 1 OFF
    GEN 2 OFF
    EXT PWR OFF
    AV 2 BUS OFF
    AV 1 BUS OFF
    CABIN BUS OFF
    STBY BUS OFF
    BAT 1 ON
    BAT 2 ON
    4.3 Open the access panel 31 BL.
    4.4 Energize the External Power Unit (EPU) and adjust the voltage to 28 VDC (Refer to vendor's
    instruction to operate the EPU).
    4.5 Connect the EPU to the external power connector on the aircraft.
    4.6 On the EPM panel, make sure that the EXT PWR AVAIL LED indicator shows green and the OHP
    backlights are on.
    4.7 On the EPM panel, set the EXT PWR switch to ON and make sure that the EXT PWR ON LED
    indicator shows blue.
    4.8 On the ELECTRICAL status window of the MFD, make sure that the BAT display shows these
    indications:
    − The DC VOLTS is 28 ± 1 VDC

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-01 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − The DC AMPS is positive


    4.9 Do the overvoltage test as follows:
    4.9.1 Slowly increase the EPU output voltage from 28 VDC to more than 29,5 VDC, but no more
    than 31,5 VDC.
    4.9.2 Make sure that the external power disconnects from the aircraft and that the EXT PWR ON
    LED indicator goes off.
    4.9.3 Decrease the EPU voltage to 28 VDC.
    4.9.4 Set the EXT PWR switch to ON and make sure that the blue EXT PWR ON LED indicator
    comes on.
    4.9.5 If the test fails, replace the Battery/External Power Junction Box (BEPJB), AMM 12-
    B-24-40-01-00A-920A-A.
    4.9.6 Set the EXT PWR switch to OFF.
    5 External Power Overvoltage Functional Test
    5.1
    Note

    For wiring diagram, refer to DC Distribution and Power Feeders, 24-30-00, 524.30.12.025/027/030.

    Open and install a Safety clip circuit breaker hold open (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065), refer to TEM
    12-B-12-20-07-01A-066A-A, on the following circuit breakers:
    − IGNITION LM1 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − FUEL CTL LK1 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − LH FUEL PUMP LJ1 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − RH FUEL PUMP LH1 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − LH AOA PLATE HEAT LK2 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − LH PROBES DE-ICE LM2 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − RH AOA PLATE HEAT RD2 (MAIN BUS)
    − RH PROBES DE-ICE RB2 (MAIN BUS).
    5.2 Pull back the rubber insulation boot on the back of the external power connector J391.
    5.3 Connect a Multimeter (Pt.No. Local Supply) to measure the voltage at the connection studs 1+ and 1-,
    on the external power plug J391.
    5.4 Disconnect the signal wire P89A22 from the 2+ stud at the rear of the external power connector J391.
    5.5 Connect the positive side of the test bench power supply to the signal wire P89A22.
    5.6 Connect the negative side of the test bench power supply to the 1- stud of the external power
    connector J391.
    5.7 Apply external power to the aircraft; observing the correct procedures, and adjust the EPU voltage
    until the multimeter reads 28,0 VDC.
    5.8
    Note

    Use the multimeter voltage reading to set the external power voltages when you do this test, NOT the
    TBPS.

    Preset the TBPS supply to 26,0 VDC.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-01 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    5.9 On the EPM panel, set the EXT PWR switch to ON and make sure that the EXT PWR ON LED
    indicator shows blue.
    5.10 Apply the 26,0 VDC supply to the signal wire P89A22.
    5.11 Smoothly increase the TBPS until the multimeter reads more than 29,5 VDC, but no more than 31,5
    VDC.
    5.12 Check that the external power disconnects from the aircraft and that the EXT PWR ON LED indicator
    goes OFF.
    5.13 Decrease the test bench power supply to 28,0 VDC.
    5.14 Set the EXT PWR switch to ON and check that the blue EXT PWR ON LED comes ON.
    5.15 If the test fails, replace the BEPJB, refer to AMM 12-B-24-40-01-00A-920A-A.
    5.16 Set the EXT PWR switch to OFF.
    5.17 Disconnect external power from the aircraft and switch off the EPU.
    5.18 Switch OFF the test bench power supply, and disconnect it from the aircraft.
    5.19 Disconnect and remove the multimeter from the aircraft.
    5.20 Re-connect the signal wire P89A22 to the 2+ stud on the back of the external power connector J391.
    5.21 Place the rubber insulation boot on the back of the external power connector J391 over the connector.
    5.22 Remove the safety clips and close the following circuit breakers:
    − IGNITION LM1 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − FUEL CTL LK1 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − LH FUEL PUMP LJ1 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − RH FUEL PUMP LH1 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − LH AOA PLATE HEAT LK2 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − LH PROBES DE-ICE LM2 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − RH AOA PLATE HEAT RD2 (MAIN BUS)
    − RH PROBES DE-ICE RB2 (MAIN BUS)
    5.23 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    6 External Power Undervoltage Operational Check
    6.1
    Note

    For wiring diagram, refer to DC Distribution and Power Feeders, 24-30-00, 524.30.12.025/027/030.

    Note

    If an EPU that is capable of adjusting its voltage output from 22,0 VDC to 31,5 VDC inclusive, is not
    available, then a Test Bench Power Supply capable of this range may be used, see Step 7.

    Open and install a Safety clip circuit breaker hold open (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065), refer to TEM
    12-B-12-20-07-01A-066A-A on the following circuit breakers:
    − IGNITION LM1 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − FUEL CTL LK1 (ESSENTIAL BUS)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-01 Page 9


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − LH FUEL PUMP LJ1 (ESSENTIAL BUS)


    − RH FUEL PUMP LH1 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − LH AOA PLATE HEAT LK2 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − LH PROBES DE-ICE LM2 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − RH AOA PLATE HEAT RD2 (MAIN BUS)
    − RH PROBES DE-ICE RB2 (MAIN BUS)
    6.2 Pull back the rubber insulation boot on the back of the external power connector J391.
    6.3 Connect a Multimeter (Pt.No. Local Supply) to measure the voltage at the connection studs 1+ and 1−,
    on the external power connector J391.
    6.4
    Note

    Use the multimeter voltage reading; NOT the EPU, to set the external power voltages during this test.

    Apply external power to the aircraft: observing the correct procedures, and adjust the EPU until the
    multimeter reads 26,0 VDC.
    6.5 Select the BAT1 and BAT2 switches on the overhead panel to OFF.
    6.6
    Note

    A brief overshoot below 23,5 VDC during the following adjustment, may not influence this test if a
    correction back to 23,5 VDC is made quickly enough.

    Smoothly reduce the EPU voltage until the multimeter reads 23,5 VDC, and then start the Stop
    Watch (Pt.No. Local Supply).
    6.7 Wait for a minimum of 2 minutes; the external power must not trip OFF.
    6.8 If the test passes, go to Step 6.13, if the test fails, go to Step 6.9.
    6.9 If the external power trips OFF, reset the EPU back to 26,0 VDC, and then set the BAT1 and BAT2
    switches to ON.
    6.10 Repeat Step 6.4 to Step 6.7 inclusive.
    6.11 If the test passes, go to Step 6.13
    6.12 If the test fails again, replace the Battery/External Power Junction Box (BEPJB), AMM 12-
    B-24-40-01-00A-920A-A.
    6.13 Smoothly reduce the EPU voltage until the multimeter reads 22,0 VDC.
    6.14 When 22,0 VDC is reached, start the Stop Watch (Pt.No. Local Supply): the external power must trip
    OFF within 60 ± 10 seconds.
    6.15 If the test passes, go to Step 6.19.
    6.16 If the test fails, set the EXT POWER switch on the overhead panel to OFF.
    6.17 Repeat Step 6.4, Step 6.5 and Step 6.13 thru Step 6.15.
    6.18 If the test fails a second time, replace the BEPJB, refer to AMM 12-B-24-40-01-00A-920A-A.
    6.19 Set the EXT POWER switch on the overhead panel to OFF.
    6.20 Disconnect external power from the aircraft and switch off the EPU.
    6.21 Disconnect and remove the multimeter.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-01 Page 10


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    6.22 Place the rubber insulation boot on the back of the external power connector J391, over the
    connector.
    6.23 Remove the safety clips and close the following circuit breakers:
    − IGNITION LM1 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − FUEL CTL LK1 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − LH FUEL PUMP LJ1 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − RH FUEL PUMP LH1 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − LH AOA PLATE HEAT LK2 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − LH PROBES DE-ICE LM2 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − RH AOA PLATE HEAT RD2 (MAIN BUS)
    − RH PROBES DE-ICE RB2 (MAIN BUS)
    6.24 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    7 External Power Undervoltage Functional Check
    7.1
    Note

    For wiring diagram, refer to DC Distribution and Power Feeders, 24-30-00, 524.30.12.025/027/030.

    Open and install a Safety clip circuit breaker hold open (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065), refer to TEM
    12-B-12-20-07-01A-066A-A on the following circuit breakers:
    − IGNITION LM1 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − FUEL CTL LK1 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − LH FUEL PUMP LJ1 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − RH FUEL PUMP LH1 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − LH AOA PLATE HEAT LK2 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − LH PROBES DE-ICE LM2 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − RH AOA PLATE HEAT RD2 (MAIN BUS)
    − RH PROBES DE-ICE RB2 (MAIN BUS)
    7.2 Pull back the rubber insulation boot on the back of the external power plug J391.
    7.3 Connect a Multimeter (Pt.No. Local Supply) to measure the voltage at the connection studs 1+ and 1−,
    on the external power plug J391.
    7.4 Disconnect the signal wire P89A22 from the 2+ terminal at the rear of the external power connector
    J391.
    7.5 Connect the positive side of the Test Bench Power Supply (Pt.No. Local Supply) to the signal wire
    P89A22.
    7.6 Connect the negative side of the test bench power supply to the 1− stud of the external power
    connector J391.
    7.7
    Note

    Use the multimeter voltage reading; NOT the test bench power supply, to set the external power
    voltages during this test.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-01 Page 11


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Apply external power to the aircraft: observing the correct procedures, and adjust the EPU voltage
    until the multimeter reads 28,0 VDC.
    7.8 On the EPM panel, set the EXT PWR switch to ON and make sure that the EXT PWR ON LED
    indicator shows blue.
    7.9 Preset the test bench power supply to 26,0 VDC.
    7.10 Apply the 26,0 VDC supply to the signal wire P89A22.
    7.11
    Note

    A brief overshoot below 23,5 VDC during the following adjustment, may not influence this test if a
    correction back to 23,5 VDC is made quickly enough.

    Smoothly reduce the test bench power supply until the multimeter reads 23,5 VDC, and then start the
    Stop Watch (Pt.No. Local Supply).
    7.12 Wait for a minimum of 2 minutes; the external power must not trip OFF.
    7.13 If the test passes, go to Step 7.16
    7.14 If the external power trips OFF, repeat Step 7.7 thru Step 7.12.
    7.15 If the test fails again, replace the BEPJB, refer to AMM 12-B-24-40-01-00A-920A-A.
    7.16 Smoothly reduce the test bench power supply voltage until the multimeter reads 22,0 VDC.
    7.17 When 22,0 VDC is reached, start the Stop Watch (Pt.No. Local Supply): the external power must trip
    OFF within 60 ± 10 seconds.
    7.18 If the test passes go to Step 7.22.
    7.19 If the test fails, set the EXT PWR switch on the overhead panel to OFF.
    7.20 Repeat Step 7.7 thru Step 7.12 and Step 7.16 and Step 7.17.
    7.21 If the test fails again, replace the BEPJB, refer to AMM 12-B-24-40-01-00A-920A-A.
    7.22 Set the EXT POWER switch on the overhead panel to OFF.
    7.23 Disconnect external power from the aircraft and switch off the EPU.
    7.24 Switch OFF the test bench power supply, and disconnect it from the aircraft.
    7.25 Disconnect and remove the multimeter.
    7.26 Re-connect the signal wire P89A22 to the 2+ terminal on the back of the external power connector
    J391.
    7.27 Place the rubber insulation boot on the back of the external power connector J391, back over the
    connector.
    7.28 Remove the safety clips and close the following circuit breakers:
    − IGNITION LM1 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − FUEL CTL LK1 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − LH FUEL PUMP LJ1 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − RH FUEL PUMP LH1 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − LH AOA PLATE HEAT LK2 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − LH PROBES DE-ICE LM2 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − RH AOA PLATE HEAT RD2 (MAIN BUS)
    − RH PROBES DE-ICE RB2 (MAIN BUS)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-01 Page 12


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    7.29 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    8 Generator 1 On-line Simulation Test
    8.1 Energize the external power unit (EPU) and set the voltage to 28 VDC (refer to the vendor's
    instructions to operate the EPU).
    8.2 Connect the EPU to the aircraft external power receptacle.
    8.3 Set the EXT PWR switch to ON and make sure that the blue EXT PWR ON LED comes on.
    8.4 Disconnect the electrical connector K001P from the GEN1 LINE CONTACTOR (GLC 1) K001.
    8.5 Make sure that the external power disconnects from the aircraft and that the blue EXT PWR ON LED
    indicator goes off.
    8.6 Connect the electrical connector K001P to GLC 1.
    8.7 Set the EXT PWR switch to ON and make sure that the blue EXT PWR ON LED indicator comes on.
    9 Generator 2 On-line Simulation Test
    9.1 Set the EXT PWR switch to ON and make sure that the blue EXT PWR ON LED comes on.
    9.2 Disconnect the electrical connector K002P from GLC2 K002.
    9.3 Make sure that the external power disconnects from the aircraft and that the blue EXT PWR ON LED
    indicator goes off.
    9.4 Connect the electrical connector K002P to GLC 2.
    9.5 Set the EXT PWR switch to ON and make sure that the blue EXT PWR ON LED indicator comes on.
    9.6 On the EPM panel, set the EXT PWR switch to OFF.
    9.7 De-energize the EPU (Refer to the manufacturer's instructions to operate the EPU).
    9.8 Disconnect the EPU from the external power connector.
    9.9 Close the access panel 31 BL.

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-00-00A-903A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-01 Page 13
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-01 Page 14


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    STARTER/GENERATOR

    INSPECTION/CHECK

    Table of Contents Page

    STARTER/GENERATOR - INSPECTION/CHECK..................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 2
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Generator 1 and 2 – Inspection/Check................................................................... 5

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A GENERAL - AEROSPACE GROUND EQUIPMENT
    (AGE) AND TOOLS
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-24-30-01-00A-920A-A STARTER/GENERATOR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903D-A POWER PLANT TEST 3 – DC GENERATION SYSTEM
    - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-01-00A-313A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-11-23 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 2
    open)
    Brush (non-metallic) Part As
    required
    Dry air supply 30 psi (2,0 bar) Part As
    required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Lockwire Part P02-007 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedure for generator 1 and generator 2 brush inspection.
    2
    WARNING

    DO NOT POINT A COMPRESSED AIR OUTLET AT YOUR BODY OR AT OTHER PERSONS. THE
    COMPRESSED AIR CAN CAUSE AN INJURY TO PERSONS.

    CAUTION

    MAKE SURE YOU USE A LOW-PRESSURE COMPRESSED AIR SUPPLY WHEN YOU CLEAN THE
    COMPONENT. IF YOU USE A HIGH-PRESSURE COMPRESSED AIR SUPPLY, DAMAGE TO THE
    COMPONENT CAN OCCUR.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-01-00A-313A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-11-23 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items AMM 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Note

    To identify the AGE and tools used in this procedure refer to the list of AGE and tools AMM 12-
    B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A.

    Job Set Up
    2.1 Obey the safety precautions given in AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    2.2 Open the engine cowlings 43AL and 43AR.
    2.3 For generator 1:
    − On the generator equipment panel 1, open and install a safety clip on the circuit breaker CB001
    (GEN 1).

    For generator 2:
    − On the generator equipment panel 2, open and install a safety clip on the circuit breaker CB002
    (GEN 2).
    2.4 Remove the lockwire from the screw Figure 1 [1]. Remove the screw Figure 1 [1] and the brush cover
    Figure 1 [2].
    2.5 Carefully clean the internal parts of the generator with a Brush (non-metallic) (Pt.No. ) and the Dry air
    supply 30 psi (2,0 bar) (Pt.No. ).
    3 Inspection
    3.1 Examine the brush pairs Figure 1 [8] and spring assembly Figure 1 [5]. If there are cracks, chips, loose
    connections or damaged leads replace the generator, refer to AMM 12-B-24-30-01-00A-920A-A.
    3.2 On each brush pair Figure 1 [8] measure the distance X. Compare each distance X and make sure
    they are approximately the same.
    3.3 Remove one screw Figure 1 [7] and disconnect the brush leads Figure 1 [3] from the support
    Figure 1 [6].
    3.4 Lift one brush spring Figure 1 [5] and then carefully remove one brush pair Figure 1 [8] from the
    support Figure 1 [6].
    3.5 Examine the brush pair Figure 1 [8] for wear:
    3.5.1
    Note

    The replacement of the brush pairs is only permitted at a BFG approved overhaul shop. It is
    recommended to do an overhaul at the brush replacement. Depending on the generator
    condition, the overhaul shop will decide if an overhaul is required.

    If the wear-line Figure 1 [4] on the brush pair Figure 1 [8] can not be seen, replace the
    generator, refer to AMM 12-B-24-30-01-00A-920A-A.
    3.5.2 If the compared distance X is not approximately the same or it is estimated that the brush
    pair Figure 1 [8] will wear to the maximum wear-line Figure 1 [4] before the next schedule
    check, replace the generator, refer to AMM 12-B-24-30-01-00A-920A-A.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-01-00A-313A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-11-23 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.6 Lift the brush spring Figure 1 [5] and install the brush pair Figure 1 [8] in the support Figure 1 [6]. Make
    sure that the brush pair Figure 1 [8] are in the correct position.
    3.7 Make sure that the brush leads Figure 1 [3] are over the brush springs Figure 1 [5].
    3.8 Connect the brush leads Figure 1 [3] to the support Figure 1 [6] with the screw Figure 1 [7].
    3.9
    CAUTION

    TO PREVENT ARCING, DO NOT POSITION THE BRUSH COVER ON THE GENERATOR WITH
    THE BRACKETS AND THE SCREW OVER A BRUSH HOLDER OPENING.

    Position the brush cover Figure 1 [2] with the brackets and the screws Figure 1 [1] over a rib between
    the brush holder openings. Tighten the screw Figure 1 [1] to 20 to 30 lbf in (2,3 to 3,4 Nm).
    3.10 Safety the screw Figure 1 [1] with Lockwire (Pt.No. P02-007).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-01-00A-313A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-11-23 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    6 3

    B
    B

    D 8 3

    D
    C
    5
    3

    2 4
    B

    C
    12-B-243001-A-S4080-20014-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Generator 1 and 2 – Inspection/Check

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-01-00A-313A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-11-23 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    1 Job Close Up
    1.1 Remove the safety clip(s) and close the circuit breaker(s):
    − CB001 (Gen 1)

    − CB002 (Gen 2).


    1.2 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    1.3 Close the engine cowlings 43 AL and 43 AR.
    1.4 Do the Test and Adjustment of the generator 1 and 2 voltage, refer to AMM 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903D-
    A para 9.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-01-00A-313A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-11-23 Page 6
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    STARTER/GENERATOR

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    STARTER/GENERATOR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................................................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Generator 1 and 2 – Removal/Installation.............................................................. 5

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903D-A POWER PLANT TEST 3 – DC GENERATION SYSTEM
    - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Solvent Part P01-010 As
    required
    Cloth Part P02-003 As
    required
    O-ring CSN 24-30-01-01-020 1
    O-ring CSN 24-30-01-03-020 1

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedure for the removal and installation of generator 1 and 2. The procedure
    for one generator is shown. Use this procedure for the other generator.
    2 Removal
    2.1
    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU REMOVE OR INSTALL THE GENERATOR. THE GENERATOR WEIGHS
    APPROXIMATELY 10 KG (22 LB).

    Obey the safety precautions given in DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.


    2.2 Open the engine cowlings 43 AL and 43 AR.
    2.3 For generator 1:
    − On the generator equipment panel 1, open and install a clip (Safety clip (circuit breaker hold
    open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on this circuit breaker:
    ● GEN 1 (CB001)

    For generator 2:
    − On the generator equipment panel 2, open and install a clip (Safety clip (circuit breaker hold
    open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on this circuit breaker:
    ● GEN 2 (CB002)
    2.4 Open and install a clip (Safety clip (circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on this circuit
    breaker:

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)


    2.5 Remove the screws (Figure 1 [1]) and remove the terminal cover (Figure 1 [2]) from the terminal block
    (Figure 1 [16]).
    2.6 Tag the electrical cables (Figure 1 [11]), (Figure 1 [12]) and (Figure 1 [15]).
    2.7 Remove the three nuts (Figure 1 [18]) and washers (Figure 1 [17]) and disconnect the electrical cables
    (Figure 1 [15]) from the terminal block (Figure 1 [16]).
    2.8 Remove the two nuts (Figure 1 [14]) and washers (Figure 1 [13]) and disconnect the electrical cables
    (Figure 1 [11]) and (Figure 1 [12]) from the terminal block (Figure 1 [16]).
    2.9 With an indelible pen put marks on the generator (Figure 1 [8]) and the adapter (Figure 1 [5]) to help
    the installation procedure.
    2.10 Release the clamp (Figure 1 [9]). Remove the clamp (Figure 1 [9]) and the hose (Figure 1 [10]) from
    the generator (Figure 1 [8]).
    2.11 Hold the generator (Figure 1 [8]) in position, loosen the clamp nut (Figure 1 [3]) and remove the clamp
    (Figure 1 [4]) from the generator (Figure 1 [8]).
    2.12 Hold and move the generator (Figure 1 [8]) rearwards to disengage the splines of the drive shaft
    (Figure 1 [7]).
    2.13 Remove the generator (Figure 1 [8]) and O-ring (Figure 1 [6]) from the adapter (Figure 1 [5]). Discard
    the O-ring.
    3 Installation

    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU REMOVE OR INSTALL THE GENERATOR. THE GENERATOR WEIGHS
    APPROXIMATELY 10 KG (22 LB).

    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIAL. OBEY THE MANUFACTURER'S
    HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    3.1 Examine the engine internal gearshaft for damage and wear (Ref. P EMM 72-60-00).
    3.2 Examine the adapter (Figure 1 [5]) for correct attachment to the engine.
    3.3 Use a clean Cloth (Pt.No. P02-003) made moist with Solvent (Pt.No. P01-010) to clean the splines of
    the drive shaft (Figure 1 [7]).

    Note

    The drive shaft splines must not be lubricated. The engine gearshaft that drives the generator has a
    plastic spline adaptor.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.4 Install the new O-ring (Pt.No. CSN 24300101 020 ) (Figure 1 [6]) on the drive shaft (Figure 1 [7]).
    3.5 Carefully put the generator (Figure 1 [8]) on the adapter (Figure 1 [5]) with the terminal block
    (Figure 1 [16]) at the marked position.
    3.6 Move the generator (Figure 1 [8]) forward to engage the drive shaft (Figure 1 [7]).
    3.7 Install the clamp (Figure 1 [4]) on the generator (Figure 1 [8]).
    3.8 Torque the clamp nut (Figure 1 [3]) to 70 lbf in (7,9 Nm).
    3.9 Attach the hose (Figure 1 [10]) to the generator (Figure 1 [8]) with the clamp (Figure 1 [9]).
    3.10 Connect the electrical cables (Figure 1 [11]) and (Figure 1 [12]) to the terminal block (Figure 1 [16])
    with the two washers (Figure 1 [13]) and nuts (Figure 1 [14]).
    3.11 Connect the electrical cables (Figure 1 [15]) to the terminal block (Figure 1 [16]) with the three
    washers (Figure 1 [17]) and nuts (Figure 1 [18]).
    3.12 Install the terminal block cover (Figure 1 [2]) on the terminal block (Figure 1 [16]) and attach with the
    screws (Figure 1 [1]).
    3.13 Remove the safety clip and close the applicable circuit breaker(s) as follows:
    − For generator 1 circuit breaker CB001 (GEN 1)
    − For generator 2 circuit breaker CB002 (GEN 2)
    3.14 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.15 Close the engine cowlings 43 AL and 43 AR.
    3.16 Do a test of the generator voltage (Refer to DM 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903D-A).
    3.17 If the generator has been replaced to correct an engine starting or electrical generation defect, do an
    engine inspection (Refer to P EMM 72-00-00, Page Block 601).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    1

    2
    18

    17 3

    4
    B
    B
    14 C
    13 15
    16 A
    5

    12
    6
    11
    7

    B
    EXAMPLE

    10

    12-B-243001-A-S4080-20006-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Generator 1 and 2 – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-01-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 6
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1 - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION......................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Voltage Regulator 1 – Removal/Installation........................................................... 3

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903D-A POWER PLANT TEST 3 – DC GENERATION SYSTEM
    - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip Part 110.88.07.065 2

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-05-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Obey the safety precautions given in DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    1.2 Open the engine cowlings 43 AL and 43 AR.
    1.3 On the generator equipment panel 1, open and install safety clips on the CB001 (GEN 1) and CB003
    (GEN 1 CTL) circuit breakers.
    1.4 Disconnect the electrical connector (Figure 1 [4]) from the voltage regulator 1 (Figure 1 [5]).
    1.5 Remove the four screws (Figure 1 [3]) and washers (Figure 1 [2]).
    1.6 Remove the voltage regulator 1 (Figure 1 [5]) from the generator equipment panel 1 (Figure 1 [1]).
    2 Installation
    2.1 Hold the voltage regulator 1 (Figure 1 [5]) in position on the generator equipment panel 1 (Figure 1 [1])
    and install the four screws (Figure 1 [3]) and washers (Figure 1 [2]).
    2.2 Connect the electrical connector (Figure 1 [4]) to the voltage regulator 1 (Figure 1 [5]).
    2.3 On the generator equipment panel 1, remove the safety clips and close the CB001 (GEN 1) and
    CB003 (GEN 1 CTL) circuit breakers.
    2.4 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.5 Close the engine cowlings 43 AL and 43 AR.
    2.6 Do a test of the generator 1 voltage (Refer to DM 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903D-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-05-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2
    A
    4 3

    12-B-243005-A-S4080-20003-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Voltage Regulator 1 – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-05-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-05-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    VOLTAGE REGULATOR 2

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    VOLTAGE REGULATOR 2 - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION......................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Voltage Regulator 2 – Removal/Installation........................................................... 3

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903D-A POWER PLANT TEST 3 – DC GENERATION SYSTEM
    - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip Part 110.88.07.065 2

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-06-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Obey the safety precautions given in DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    1.2 Open the engine cowlings 43 AL and 43 AR.
    1.3 On the generator equipment panel 2, open and install safety clips on the CB002 (GEN 2) and CB004
    (GEN 2 CTL) circuit breakers.
    1.4 Disconnect the electrical connector (Figure 1 [4]) from the voltage regulator 2 (Figure 1 [5]).
    1.5 Remove the four screws (Figure 1 [3]) and washers (Figure 1 [2]).
    1.6 Remove the voltage regulator 2 (Figure 1 [5]) from the generator equipment panel 2 (Figure 1 [1]).
    2 Installation
    2.1 Hold the voltage regulator 2 (Figure 1 [5]) in position on the generator equipment panel 2 (Figure 1 [1])
    and install the four screws (Figure 1 [3]) and washers (Figure 1 [2]).
    2.2 Connect the electrical connector (Figure 1 [4]) to the voltage regulator 2 (Figure 1 [5]).
    2.3 On the generator equipment panel 2, remove the safety clips and close the CB002 (GEN 2) and
    CB004 (GEN 2 CTL) circuit breakers.
    2.4 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.5 Close the engine cowlings 43 AL and 43 AR.
    2.6 Do a test of the generator 2 voltage (Refer to DM 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903D-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-06-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3
    A
    4

    12-B-243006-A-S4080-20004-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Voltage Regulator 2 – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-06-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-06-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    LEAD ACID BATTERY

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    LEAD ACID BATTERY - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION................................................................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Battery – Removal/Installation................................................................................ 7

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-24-30-00-00A-903A-A DC GENERATION - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-25-90-00-00A-903A-A COLD WEATHER PREHEATER SYSTEM (110 VAC) -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Plastic plug Part Local supply As
    required

    Effectivity: LEAD ACID BATTERY 12-B-24-30-07-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-07 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark


    Non-metallic scraper Part Local supply As
    required
    Safety clip (circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Adhesive Part P08-009 As
    required
    Cable ties Part P09-008 As
    required
    Cable ties Part P09-014 As
    required
    Edge strip (short) Part 119.40.07.097 As
    required
    Edge strip (long) Part 119.40.07.098 As
    required
    Lockwire Part P02-007 As
    required
    Methyl Ethyl Ketone (MEK) Part P01-010 As
    required
    RTV silicone sealant Part 907.13.13.103 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedures to:
    − Disconnect and connect the lead acid batteries
    − Remove and install the lead acid batteries
    The procedure is the same for the No. 1 and No. 2 batteries.

    Effectivity: LEAD ACID BATTERY 12-B-24-30-07-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-07 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    When a battery is removed from an aircraft which has the optional Cold Weather Preheat System (Post SB
    25-035), it must be replaced with a battery that has the correct heating element installed. This data module
    gives the basic information for the installation of the heating element, operators must contact their Authorized
    Pilatus PC-12 Service Center or:
    PILATUS AIRCRAFT LTD.
    CUSTOMER SUPPORT MANAGER
    CH-6371 STANS
    SWITZERLAND
    General Aviation:
    Tel: + 41 41 619 6208
    Fax: + 41 41 610 7311
    E-mail: [email protected]

    for further information, installation instructions and modification kits.


    2 Battery Disconnect
    2.1 Obey the safety precautions given in DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    2.2 Open the access door 31 AB.
    2.3 Open and install a safety clip (Safety clip (circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on these
    circuit breakers:
    − BAT 1 (BATTERY AND EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX)
    − BAT 2 (BATTERY AND EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX)
    2.4 Disconnect the battery terminal connector (Figure 1 [1]) from the battery (Figure 1 [2]).
    2.5 Install a plastic plug (Plastic plug (Pt.No. Local supply)) on the battery terminal.
    3 Battery Connect
    3.1 Remove the plastic plug from the terminal connector.
    3.2 Connect the battery terminal connector (Figure 1 [1]) to the battery (Figure 1 [2]).
    3.3 Remove the safety clip and close these circuit breakers:
    − BAT 1 (BATTERY AND EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX)
    − BAT 2 (BATTERY AND EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX)
    3.4 Do an operational test of the battery (Refer to DM 12-B-24-30-00-00A-903A-A).
    3.5 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.6 Close the access door 31 AB.
    4 Battery Removal

    Effectivity: LEAD ACID BATTERY 12-B-24-30-07-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-07 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    4.1
    WARNING

    DO NOT GET BATTERY ELECTROLYTE ON YOUR SKIN OR IN YOUR EYES.


    − PUT ON SAFETY GOGGLES AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
    − MAKE SPILLED ACETIC NEUTRAL WITH A 3 PERCENT SOLUTION OF ACETIC ACID OR A
    10 PERCENT SOLUTION OF BORIC ACID
    − CLEAN THE AREA WITH WATER
    − GET MEDICAL HELP IF YOU GET ELECTROLYTE IN YOUR EYES OR ON YOUR SKIN
    − BATTERY ELECTROLYTE CAN CAUSE CORROSION. INJURY TO PERSONS AND/OR
    DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT CAN OCCUR.

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU REMOVE OR INSTALL THE BATTERY. THE LEAD ACID BATTERY
    WEIGHS APPROXIMATELY 86 LBS (39 KG).

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items DM 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Obey the safety precautions given in DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.


    4.2 Open the access door 31 AB.
    4.3 Open and install a safety clip (Safety clip (circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on these
    circuit breakers:
    − BAT 1 (BATTERY AND EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX)
    − BAT 2 (BATTERY AND EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX)
    4.4 Disconnect the battery terminal connector (Figure 1 [1]) from the battery (Figure 1 [2]).
    4.5 Install a plastic plug (Plastic plug (Pt.No. Local supply)) on the battery terminal.
    4.6 Loosen the hose clamps (Figure 1 [3]) and disconnect the hoses (Figure 1 [4]) and (Figure 1 [5]).
    4.7 Remove the cable ties and disconnect the connector (Post SB 25-035), if necessary, on the heating
    element from the electrical harness for the cold weather heating system.
    4.8 Remove and discard the lockwire from the two wingnuts (Figure 1 [7]).
    4.9 Loosen the two wingnuts (Figure 1 [7]).
    4.10 Disengage the two locking plates (Figure 1 [6]) from the battery (Figure 1 [2]) then move the tie rods
    (Figure 1 [8]) away from the battery.
    4.11 Carefully lift the battery (Figure 1 [2]) from the battery tray (Figure 1 [10]) and remove it from the
    aircraft.
    4.12 Remove the cable ties (Post SB 25-035), if necessary, that hold the heating element to the battery.
    4.13 Examine the wires on the heating element, if necessary, make sure the wires are correctly attached.
    4.14 Examine the heating element, if necessary, for the signs of damage.
    − Use silicone sealant (RTV silicone sealant (Pt.No. 907.13.13.103)) to repair small tears
    − Replace the heating element if you can see the internal element wires
    4.15 Examine the battery tray (Figure 1 [10]) for damage and signs of electrolyte spillage.

    Effectivity: LEAD ACID BATTERY 12-B-24-30-07-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-07 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    4.16 If damage is found to the edge strips (Figure 1 [9]) or (Figure 1 [11]) that are bonded to the battery tray
    (Figure 1 [10]) they can be replaced as follows:
    4.16.1 Remove the damaged edge strip(s) (Figure 1 [9]) or (Figure 1 [11]).
    4.16.2
    WARNING

    MEK IS CLASSIFIED AS A HAZARDOUS MATERIAL WHICH CAN CAUSE INJURY OR


    ILLNESS IF IT IS NOT CORRECTLY USED. REFER TO THE MANUFACTURER'S
    SPECIFIC SAFETY AND HEALTH RECOMMENDATIONS BEFORE YOU USE THIS
    PRODUCT. CAREFULLY READ THE APPLICABLE "MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET"
    AND OBEY ALL SAFETY AND HEALTH PRECAUTIONS.

    Use a non-metallic scraper (Non-metallic scraper (Pt.No. Local supply)) and MEK (Methyl
    Ethyl Ketone (MEK) (Pt.No. P01-010)) to remove all the remaining adhesive from the battery
    tray (Figure 1 [10]).
    4.16.3
    WARNING

    USE SOLVENTS/CLEANING AGENTS, SEALANTS AND OTHER SPECIAL MATERIALS


    ONLY WITH A GOOD SUPPLY OF AIR.
    − PUT ON SAFETY GOGGLES AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
    − OBEY THE MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
    − DO NOT GET THEM IN YOUR EYES OR MOUTH
    − DO NOT SMOKE
    − DO NOT BREATH THE FUMES.

    THESE MATERIALS ARE POISONOUS, FLAMMABLE AND SKIN IRRITANTS. GET


    MEDICAL HELP IF YOUR SKIN OR EYES BECOME IRRITATED.

    Apply a layer of adhesive (Adhesive (Pt.No. P08-009)) to the surface of the battery tray
    (Figure 1 [10]).
    4.16.4 Put the new edge strip(s) (Edge strip (short) (Pt.No. 119.40.07.097)) (Figure 1 [9]) or (Edge
    strip (long) (Pt.No. 119.40.07.098)) (Figure 1 [11]) in position on the battery tray
    (Figure 1 [10]) and let the adhesive dry.
    5 Battery Installation
    5.1
    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items DM 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Install the heating element (Post SB 25-035), if necessary, on the battery (Figure 1 [2]).
    5.1.1 Make sure the flat side of the heating element goes towards the battery and the electric
    cable is in the correct position.
    5.1.2 Put the heating element around the battery and attach with cable ties (Cable
    ties (Pt.No. P09-014)). Make sure the heating element is in the correct position as follows:
    − On number 1 battery, make sure the cable ties are at the rear right side of the battery

    Effectivity: LEAD ACID BATTERY 12-B-24-30-07-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-07 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − On number 2 battery, make sure the cable ties are at the forward left side of the battery
    5.2
    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU REMOVE OR INSTALL THE BATTERY. THE LEAD ACID BATTERY
    WEIGHS APPROXIMATELY 86 LBS (39 KG).

    Install the battery (Figure 1 [2]) on the battery tray (Figure 1 [10]).
    5.3 Move the two tie rods (Figure 1 [8]) into position and engage the locking plates (Figure 1 [6]).
    5.4 Tighten the wingnuts (Figure 1 [7]) by hand.
    5.5 Safety the two wingnuts (Figure 1 [7]) with lockwire (Lockwire (Pt.No. P02-007)).
    5.6 Make sure that the hoses (Figure 1 [4]) and (Figure 1 [5]) are not blocked.
    5.7 Connect the hoses (Figure 1 [4]) and (Figure 1 [5]) and tighten the hose clamps (Figure 1 [5]).
    5.8 Connect the connector (Post SB 25-035), if necessary, on the heating element, to the electrical
    harness for the cold weather heating system, and hold in the correct position with cables ties (Cable
    ties (Pt.No. P09-008)).
    5.9 Remove the plastic plug from the battery terminal.
    5.10 Connect the battery terminal connector (Figure 1 [1]) to the battery (Figure 1 [2]).
    5.11 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − BAT 1 (BATTERY AND EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX)
    − BAT 2 (BATTERY AND EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX)
    5.12 Do an operational test of the battery (Refer to DM 12-B-24-30-00-00A-903A-A).
    5.13 Do a functional test, if necessary, of the cold weather preheater system (Refer to DM 12-
    B-25-90-00-00A-903A-A) for the battery.
    5.14 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    5.15 Close the access door 31 AB.

    Effectivity: LEAD ACID BATTERY 12-B-24-30-07-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-07 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3 A
    A
    A

    1 2

    3
    5
    7

    6
    9

    8
    11
    9

    10
    8

    12-B-243007-A-S4080-20000-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Battery – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: LEAD ACID BATTERY 12-B-24-30-07-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-07 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: LEAD ACID BATTERY 12-B-24-30-07-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-07 Page 8
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    NI–CAD BATTERY

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    NI–CAD BATTERY - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION...................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Battery – Removal/Installation................................................................................ 7

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-24-30-00-00A-903A-A DC GENERATION - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-25-90-00-00A-903A-A COLD WEATHER PREHEATER SYSTEM (110 VAC) -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Plastic plug Part Local supply As
    required

    Effectivity: NI-CAD BATTERY 12-B-24-30-07-00A-920B-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark


    Non-metallic scraper Part Local supply As
    required
    Safety clip (circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Adhesive Part P08-009 As
    required
    Cable ties Part P09-008 As
    required
    Cable ties Part P09-014 As
    required
    Edge strip (short) CSN 24-30-00-07-095 As
    required
    Edge strip (long) CSN 24-30-00-08-085 As
    required
    Lockwire Part P02-007 As
    required
    Methyl-Ethyl-Ketone (MEK) Part P01-010 As
    required
    RTV silicone sealant Part 907.13.13.103 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedures to:
    − Disconnect and connect the optional Ni-Cad batteries
    − Remove and install the optional Ni-Cad batteries
    The procedure is the same for the No. 1 and No. 2 batteries.

    Effectivity: NI-CAD BATTERY 12-B-24-30-07-00A-920B-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    When a battery is removed from an aircraft which has the optional Cold Weather Preheat System (Post SB
    25-035), it must be replaced with a battery that has the correct heating element installed. This data module
    gives the basic information for the installation of the heating element, operators must contact their Authorized
    Pilatus PC-12 Service Center or:
    PILATUS AIRCRAFT LTD.
    CUSTOMER SUPPORT MANAGER
    CH-6371 STANS
    SWITZERLAND
    General Aviation:
    Tel: + 41 41 619 6208
    Fax: + 41 41 610 7311
    E-mail: [email protected]

    for further information, installation instructions and modification kits.


    2 Battery Disconnect
    2.1 Obey the safety precautions given in DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    2.2 Open the access door 31 AB.
    2.3 Open and install a safety clip (Safety clip (circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on these
    circuit breakers:
    − BAT 1 (BATTERY AND EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX)
    − BAT 2 (BATTERY AND EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX)
    2.4 Disconnect the battery terminal connector (Figure 1 [1]) from the battery (Figure 1 [9]).
    2.5 Install a plastic plug (Plastic plug (Pt.No. Local supply)) on the battery terminal.
    3 Battery Connect
    3.1 Remove the plastic plug from the battery terminal.
    3.2 Connect the battery terminal connector (Figure 1 [1]) to the battery (Figure 1 [9]).
    3.3 Remove the safety clip and close these circuit breakers:
    − BAT 1 (BATTERY AND EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX)
    − BAT 2 (BATTERY AND EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX)
    3.4 Do the operational test of the battery (refer to DM 12-B-24-30-00-00A-903A-A).
    3.5 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.6 Close the access door 31 AB.
    4 Battery Removal

    Effectivity: NI-CAD BATTERY 12-B-24-30-07-00A-920B-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    4.1
    WARNING

    DO NOT GET BATTERY ELECTROLYTE ON YOUR SKIN OR IN YOUR EYES.


    − PUT ON SAFETY GOGGLES AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING.
    − MAKE SPILLED ELECTROLYTE NEUTRAL WITH A 3 PERCENT SOLUTION OF ACETIC ACID
    OR A 10 PERCENT SOLUTION OF BORIC ACID.
    − CLEAN THE AREA WITH WATER.
    − GET MEDICAL HELP IF YOU GET ELECTROLYTE IN YOUR EYES OR ON YOUR SKIN.
    − BATTERY ELECTROLYTE CAN CAUSE CORROSION. INJURY TO PERSONS AND/OR
    DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT CAN OCCUR.

    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU REMOVE OR INSTALL THE BATTERY. THE NICAD BATTERY WEIGHS
    APPROXIMATELY 81.4 LBS (37 KG).

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items DM 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Obey the safety precautions given in DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.


    4.2 Open the access door 31 AB.
    4.3 Open and install a safety clip (Safety clip (circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on these
    circuit breakers:
    − BAT 1 (BATTERY AND EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX)
    − BAT 2 (BATTERY AND EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX)
    4.4 Disconnect the battery hot electrical connector (Figure 1 [2]) and the battery terminal connector
    (Figure 1 [1]) from the battery (Figure 1 [9]).
    4.5 Install a plastic plug (Plastic plug (Pt.No. Local supply)) on the battery terminal.
    4.6 Loosen the hose clamps (Figure 1 [6]) and disconnect the hoses (Figure 1 [3]) and (Figure 1 [5]).
    4.7 Remove the cable ties and disconnect the connector (Post SB 25-035), if necessary, on the heating
    element from the electrical harness for the cold weather heating system.
    4.8 Remove the lockwire from the two wingnuts (Figure 1 [7]).
    4.9 Loosen the two wingnuts (Figure 1 [7]).
    4.10 Disengage the two locking plates (Figure 1 [4]) from the battery (Figure 1 [9]) then move the tie rods
    (Figure 1 [8]) away.
    4.11 Lift the battery (Figure 1 [9]) from the battery tray (Figure 1 [11]) and remove it from the aircraft.
    4.12 Remove the cable ties (Post SB 25-035), if necessary, that hold the heating element to the battery.
    4.13 Examine the wires on the heating element, if necessary, make sure the wires are correctly attached.
    4.14 Examine the heating element, if necessary, for the signs of damage.

    Effectivity: NI-CAD BATTERY 12-B-24-30-07-00A-920B-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − Use silicone sealant (RTV silicone sealant (Pt.No. 907.13.13.103)) to repair small tears
    − Replace the heating element if you can see the internal element wires
    4.15 Examine the battery tray (Figure 1 [11]) for damage and signs of electrolyte spillage.
    4.16 A sign of the spillage of NiCad battery electrolyte is shown by white powder particles on the battery
    tray (Figure 1 [11]). If found make the electrolyte neutral with boric or acetic acid and wash with water.
    4.17 If damage is found to the edge strips (Figure 1 [10]) or (Figure 1 [12]) that are bonded to the battery
    tray (Figure 1 [11]) they are replaced as follows:
    4.17.1 Remove the damaged edge strip(s) (Figure 1 [10]) or (Figure 1 [12]).
    4.17.2
    WARNING

    MEK IS CLASSIFIED AS A HAZARDOUS MATERIAL WHICH CAN CAUSE INJURY OR


    ILLNESS IF IT IS NOT CORRECTLY USED. REFER TO THE MANUFACTURER'S
    SPECIFIC SAFETY AND HEALTH RECOMMENDATIONS BEFORE YOU USE THIS
    PRODUCT. CAREFULLY READ THE APPLICABLE "MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET"
    AND OBEY ALL SAFETY AND HEALTH PRECAUTIONS.

    Use a non metallic scraper (Non-metallic scraper (Pt.No. Local supply)) and solvent (Methyl-
    Ethyl-Ketone (MEK) (Pt.No. P01-010)) to remove all the remaining adhesive from the battery
    tray (Figure 1 [11]).
    4.17.3
    WARNING

    USE SOLVENTS/CLEANING AGENTS, SEALANTS AND OTHER SPECIAL MATERIALS


    ONLY WITH A GOOD SUPPLY OF AIR.
    − PUT ON SAFETY GOGGLES AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
    − OBEY THE MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
    − DO NOT GET THEM IN YOUR EYES OR MOUTH
    − DO NOT SMOKE
    − DO NOT BREATH THE FUMES.

    THESE MATERIALS ARE POISONOUS, FLAMMABLE AND SKIN IRRITANTS. GET


    MEDICAL HELP IF YOUR SKIN OR EYES BECOME IRRITATED.

    Apply a layer of adhesive (Adhesive (Pt.No. P08-009)) to the surface of the battery tray
    (Figure 1 [11]).
    4.17.4 Put the new edge strip (Edge strip (short) (Pt.No. CSN 24300007 095 )) (Figure 1 [10]) or
    (Edge strip (long) (Pt.No. CSN 24300008 085 )) (Figure 1 [12]) in position on the battery tray
    (Figure 1 [11]) and let the adhesive dry.
    5 Battery Installation
    5.1
    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items DM 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Install the heating element (Post SB 25-035), if necessary, on the battery (Figure 1 [9]).

    Effectivity: NI-CAD BATTERY 12-B-24-30-07-00A-920B-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    5.1.1 Make sure the flat side of the heating element goes towards the battery and the electric
    cable is in the correct position.
    5.1.2 Put the heating element around the battery and attach with cable ties (Cable
    ties (Pt.No. P09-014)). Make sure the heating element is in the correct position as follows:
    − On number 1 battery, make sure the cable ties are at the rear inboard side of the battery
    − On number 2 battery, make sure the cable ties are at the forward left side of the battery
    5.2
    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU REMOVE OR INSTALL THE BATTERY. THE NICAD BATTERY WEIGHS
    APPROXIMATELY 81.4 LBS (37 KG).

    Install the battery (Figure 1 [9]) on the battery tray (Figure 1 [11]).
    5.3 Move the two tie rods (Figure 1 [8]) into position and engage the locking plates (Figure 1 [4]).
    5.4 Tighten the wingnuts (Figure 1 [7]) by hand.
    5.5 Safety the two wingnuts (Figure 1 [7]) with lockwire (Lockwire (Pt.No. P02-007)).
    5.6 Make sure the hoses (Figure 1 [3]) and (Figure 1 [5]) are not blocked.
    5.7 Connect the hoses (Figure 1 [3]) and (Figure 1 [5]) and tighten the hose clamps (Figure 1 [6]).
    5.8 Connect the connector (Post SB 25-035), if necessary, on the heating element, to the electrical
    harness for the cold weather heating system, and hold in the correct position with cables ties (Cable
    ties (Pt.No. P09-008)).
    5.9 Remove the plastic plug from the battery terminal.
    5.10 Connect the battery hot electrical connector (Figure 1 [2]) and the battery terminal connector
    (Figure 1 [1]) to the battery (Figure 1 [9]).
    5.11 Remove the safety clip and close these circuit breakers:
    − BAT 1 (BATTERY AND EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX)
    − BAT 2 (BATTERY AND EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX)
    5.12 Do the operational test of the battery (refer to DM 12-B-24-30-00-00A-903A-A).
    5.13 Do a functional test, if necessary, of the cold weather preheater system (Refer to DM 12-
    B-25-90-00-00A-903A-A) for the battery.
    5.14 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    5.15 Close the access door 31 AB.

    Effectivity: NI-CAD BATTERY 12-B-24-30-07-00A-920B-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    6 A
    A
    A

    1 9

    6
    5
    2
    7

    4
    10

    8
    12
    10

    11
    8

    12-B-243007-A-S4080-20015-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Battery – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: NI-CAD BATTERY 12-B-24-30-07-00A-920B-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: NI-CAD BATTERY 12-B-24-30-07-00A-920B-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 8
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    GENERATOR CURRENT SENSOR

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    GENERATOR CURRENT SENSOR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION........................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 2
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Water Protection Covers – Removal/Installation.................................................... 5


    2 LH Generator Current Sensor – Removal/Installation............................................ 6
    3 RH Generator Current Sensor – Removal/Installation........................................... 9

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-12-20-07-01A-066A-A SERVICING - AGE AND TOOLS DATA - CIRCUIT
    BREAKER SAFETY CLIP (P/N 110.88.07.065)
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-71-00-00-00A-903D-A POWER PLANT TEST 3 – DC GENERATION SYSTEM
    - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-08-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-06-01 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip Part 110.88.07.065 As
    required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Nut, self locking CSN 24-30-00-04-070 As
    required
    Terminal lug CSN 24-30-00-02-115 As
    required
    Cable tie Part P09-008 As
    required
    Cable tie Part P09-014 As
    required
    Loctite, 241 Part P08-017 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 LH Generator Current Sensor (MT001) Removal
    1.1 Obey the safety precautions given in AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    1.2 Open and install a Safety clip (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065), TEM 12-B-12-20-07-01A-066A-A, on these
    circuit breakers:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − IGNITION (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    1.3 Open the engine cowling 43 AL.
    1.4 Remove the cable tie Figure 1 [4] from the water protection cover Figure 1 [3].
    1.5 Carefully pull the water protection cover Figure 1 [3] away from the current sensor as far as possible.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-08-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-06-01 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1.6
    Note

    You may have to stretch the water protection cover to remove it from the current sensor, as it is
    elasticated at this point.
    Remove and keep the screw Figure 2 [4] and washer Figure 2 [3] from lead 1P99A22N Figure 2 [2].
    1.7 Remove the self locking nut Figure 2 [9], spring washer Figure 2 [8] and washer Figure 2 [7]. Discard
    the self locking nut.
    1.8 Remove and discard the cable tie that attaches the lead Figure 2 [21] to cable 1P3A00 Figure 2 [16].
    1.9 Note the positioning of the P-clip Figure 2 [17] on cable 1P3A00 Figure 2 [16].
    1.10 Remove the screw Figure 2 [11], washer Figure 2 [12], P-clip Figure 2 [17] and spacer Figure 2 [18].
    1.11 Pull back the rubber boot on cable 1P3A00 Figure 2 [16] to get access to the self locking nut
    Figure 2 [13].
    1.12 Remove the self locking nut Figure 2 [13], spring washer Figure 2 [14] and washer Figure 2 [15].
    Discard the self locking nut.
    1.13 Disconnect the cable 1P3A00 Figure 2 [16].
    1.14 Loosen the two captive screws Figure 2 [24] and then disconnect the electrical connector K001P
    Figure 2 [25] from the contactor Figure 2 [10].
    1.15 Loosen the two captive screws Figure 2 [27] and then disconnect the electrical connector MT001P
    Figure 2 [26] from the GCS Figure 2 [6].
    1.16 Remove the Generator Current Sensor (GCS) Figure 2 [6] and Contactor Figure 2 [10].
    1.17 Remove the three screws Figure 2 [1] and Figure 2 [5].
    1.18 Remove the GCS Figure 2 [6] from the contactor Figure 2 [10].
    2 LH Generator Current Sensor (MT001) Installation
    2.1 If a new GCS is to be installed, do the following, else go to Step 2.2 of this installation:
    2.1.1 Cut the lead 1P99A22N Figure 2 [2] to a length of 75 mm (3 in.).
    2.1.2 Install a new Terminal lug (Pt.No. CSN 24300002 115 ) onto the lead 1P99A22N
    Figure 2 [2].
    2.1.3 Remove and discard any retaining sleeves from the three screws Figure 2 [1] and
    Figure 2 [5] on the GCS Figure 2 [6]. Take care not to drop or lose any of the screws.
    2.2 Install the GCS Figure 2 [6] into position on the contactor Figure 2 [10].

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    2.3 Apply a small amount of Loctite, 241 (Pt.No. P08-017) to the threads of the three screws Figure 2 [1]
    and Figure 2 [5].
    2.4 Install the screws Figure 2 [1] and Figure 2 [5].
    2.5 Connect the electrical connector MT001P Figure 2 [26] to the GCS Figure 2 [6].
    2.6 Tighten the two captive screws Figure 2 [27].
    2.7 Connect the electrical connector K001P to the contactor Figure 2 [10].

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-08-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-06-01 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.8 Tighten the two captive screws Figure 2 [24].


    2.9 Install the GCS Figure 2 [6] and Contactor Figure 2 [10].
    2.10 Install the cable 1P3A00 Figure 2 [16].
    2.11 Install the P-clip Figure 2 [17] into the position as noted at Step 1.9 of the LH GCS removal procedure.
    2.12 Install the spacer Figure 2 [18] under the P-clip Figure 2 [17], and then attach the P-clip with washer
    Figure 2 [12] and screw Figure 2 [11].
    2.13 Install the washer Figure 2 [15], spring washer Figure 2 [14] and new Nut, self
    locking (Pt.No. CSN 24300004 070 ) Figure 2 [13].
    2.14 Slide the rubber boot on cable 1P3A00 Figure 2 [16] into position over the self locking nut
    Figure 2 [13].
    2.15 Attach the lead Figure 2 [21] to the cable 1P3A00 Figure 2 [16] with a new Cable tie (Pt.No. P09-014).
    2.16 Install the GCS Figure 2 [6] with washer Figure 2 [7], spring washer Figure 2 [8] and a new Nut, self
    locking (Pt.No. CSN 24300004 070 ) Figure 2 [9].
    2.17 Apply a small amount of Loctite, 241 (Pt.No. P08-017) onto the screw Figure 2 [4].
    2.18 Install the lead 1P99A22N Figure 2 [2] with washer Figure 2 [3] and screw Figure 2 [4].
    2.19 Install sufficient new Cable tie (Pt.No. P09-008) on the current sensor and contactor cable looms to
    ensure their correct routing.
    2.20 Slide the water protection cover Figure 1 [3] over the current sensor.
    2.21 Install a new cable tie Figure 1 [4] at the bottom of the water protection cover Figure 1 [3].
    2.22 Make sure that the elasticated end of the water protection cover Figure 1 [3] still covers the current
    sensor and adjust it if needed.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-08-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-06-01 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    12-B-243008-A-S4080-20018-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Water Protection Covers – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-08-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-06-01 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FRAME 10

    A
    A

    2
    3
    4

    27

    26 6

    25

    24
    23 7
    22 8
    21 9

    20
    19
    10

    16
    18

    15
    14
    13
    12
    17
    11

    12-B-243008-A-S4080-20016-A-02-1

    Figure 2 LH Generator Current Sensor – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-08-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-06-01 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3 RH Generator Current Sensor (MT002) Removal


    3.1 Obey the safety precautions given in AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    3.2 Open and install a Safety clip (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065), TEM 12-B-12-20-07-01A-066A-A, on these
    circuit breakers:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − IGNITION (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    3.3 Open the engine cowling 43 AR.
    3.4 Remove the cable tie Figure 1 [2] from the water protection cover Figure 1 [1].
    3.5 Carefully pull the water protection cover Figure 1 [1] away from the current sensor.
    3.6
    Note

    You may have to stretch the water protection cover to remove it from the current sensor, as it is
    elasticated at this point.

    Carefully pull the water protection cover Figure 1 [3] away from the current sensor as far as possible.
    3.7 Remove and keep the screw Figure 3 [4] and washer Figure 3 [5] that secures lead 2P99A22N
    Figure 3 [6].
    3.8 Remove the self locking nut Figure 3 [25], spring washer Figure 3 [26] and washer Figure 3 [27].
    Discard the self locking nut.
    3.9 Remove and discard the cable tie that secures the lead Figure 3 [13] to cable 2P3A00 Figure 3 [17].
    3.10 Note the positioning of the P-clip Figure 3 [18] on cable 2P3A00 Figure 3 [17].
    3.11 Remove the screw Figure 3 [20], washer Figure 3 [19], P-clip Figure 3 [18] and spacer Figure 3 [16].
    3.12 Pull back the rubber boot on cable 2P3A00 Figure 3 [17] to get access to the self locking nut
    Figure 3 [21].
    3.13 Remove the self locking nut Figure 3 [21], spring washer Figure 3 [22] and washer Figure 3 [23].
    Discard the self locking nut.
    3.14 Disconnect the cable 2P3A00 Figure 3 [17].
    3.15 Loosen the two captive screws Figure 3 [8] and then disconnect the electrical connector K002P
    Figure 3 [9] from the contactor Figure 3 [24].
    3.16 Loosen the two captive screws Figure 3 [10] and then disconnect the electrical connector MT002P
    Figure 3 [7] from the GCS Figure 3 [1].
    3.17 Remove the GCS Figure 3 [1] and Contactor Figure 3 [24].
    3.18 Remove the three screws Figure 3 [2] and Figure 3 [3].
    3.19 Remove the GCS Figure 3 [1] from the contactor Figure 3 [24].
    4 RH Generator Current Sensor (MT002) Installation
    4.1 If a new GCS is to be installed, do as follows, else go to Step 2.2 of this installation:
    4.1.1 Cut the lead Figure 3 [6] to a length of 75 mm (3 in.)
    4.1.2 Install a new Terminal lug (Pt.No. CSN 24300002 115 ) onto the lead Figure 3 [6].
    4.1.3 Remove and discard any retaining sleeves from the three mounting screws Figure 3 [2] and
    Figure 3 [3] on the GCS Figure 3 [1]. Take care not to drop or lose any of the screws.
    4.2 Install the GCS Figure 3 [1] into position on the contactor Figure 3 [24].

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-08-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-06-01 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    4.3 Apply a small amount of Loctite, 241 (Pt.No. P08-017) to the threads of the screws Figure 3 [2] and
    Figure 3 [3].
    4.4 Install the screws Figure 3 [2] and Figure 3 [3].
    4.5 Connect the electrical connector MT002P Figure 3 [7] to the GCS Figure 3 [1].
    4.6 Tighten the two captive screws Figure 3 [10].
    4.7 Connect the electrical connector K002P Figure 3 [9] to the contactor Figure 3 [24].
    4.8 Tighten the two captive screws Figure 3 [8].
    4.9 Install the GCS Figure 3 [1] and Contactor Figure 3 [24].
    4.10 Install the cable 2P3A00 Figure 3 [17].
    4.11 Install the P-clip Figure 3 [18] into the position on cable 2P3A00 Figure 3 [17] as noted at Step 3.10 of
    the RH GCS removal procedure.
    4.12 Install the spacer Figure 3 [16] under the P-clip Figure 3 [18], and then attach the P-clip with washer
    Figure 3 [19] and screw Figure 3 [20].
    4.13 Install the washer Figure 3 [23], spring washer Figure 3 [22] and new Nut, self
    locking (Pt.No. CSN 24300004 070 ) Figure 3 [21].
    4.14 Slide the rubber boot on cable 2P3A00 Figure 3 [17] into position over the self locking nut
    Figure 3 [21].
    4.15 Attach the lead Figure 3 [13] to cable 2P3A00 Figure 3 [17] with a new Cable tie (Pt.No. P09-014).
    4.16 Install the GCS Figure 3 [1] with washer Figure 3 [27], spring washer Figure 3 [26] and a new
    (Pt.No. CSN 24300004 070 ) Figure 3 [25].
    4.17 Apply a small amount of Loctite, 241 (Pt.No. P08-017) onto the screw Figure 3 [4].
    4.18 Install the lead 2P99A22N Figure 3 [6] with washer Figure 3 [5] and screw Figure 3 [4].
    4.19 Install sufficient new Cable tie (Pt.No. P09-008) on the current sensor and contactor cable looms to
    ensure their correct routing.
    4.20 Slide the water protection cover Figure 1 [1] over the current sensor.
    4.21 Install a new cable tie Figure 1 [2] at the bottom of the water protection cover Figure 1 [1].
    4.22 Make sure that the elasticated end of the water protection cover Figure 1 [1] still covers the current
    sensor and adjust it if needed.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-08-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-06-01 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FRAME 10

    A
    5 6
    4

    3
    2

    1
    10

    11 13
    15
    14
    9
    8
    12
    27
    26
    25

    24
    16

    23
    22
    21

    17

    20 18

    19

    12-B-243008-A-S4080-20017-A-02-1

    Figure 3 RH Generator Current Sensor – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-08-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-06-01 Page 9


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    1 Close the engine cowlings 43 AL and 43 AR.
    2 Remove the safety clips and close the circuit breakers:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − IGNITION (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    3 Do a functional test of the DC Generation, AMM 12-B-24-30-00-00A-903A-A.
    4 Do a functional test of the Generators 1 and 2 Voltages, AMM 12-B-71-00-00-00A-903D-A, Para 9.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-30-08-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-06-01 Page 10
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    EXTERNAL POWER

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    EXTERNAL POWER - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION........................................................ 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1
    2 Component Description.......................................................................................... 1
    2.1 External Power Receptacle.................................................................................... 1
    2.2 External Power Switch............................................................................................ 2
    2.3 LED indicator lights................................................................................................. 2
    2.4 External Power Control Unit................................................................................... 2
    3 Operation (Ref. )..................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    Index of Figures Page

    1 External Power System – Schematic..................................................................... 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description

    1 General
    The external electrical-power system, supplies 28 VDC power to the aircraft when the aircraft is on the ground and
    the engine is stopped.
    The system has these components:
    − An external power receptacle
    − An external power switch
    − LED indicator lights
    − A battery and external-power junction box.

    2 Component Description

    2.1 External Power Receptacle


    The external power receptacle connects the supply of DC power from the External Power Unit (EPU) to the
    external electrical-power system of the aircraft. It is installed on the left side of the rear fuselage. The external

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-40-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    power receptacle has three pins that have different dimensions. The pins prevent the incorrect connection of the
    EPU connector.

    2.2 External Power Switch


    The external power switch caption is EXT PWR. It controls the operation of the external electrical-power system.
    The toggle type switch is installed on the Electrical Power Management panel (EPM). The EXT PWR switch has
    two positions EXT PWR and OFF.

    2.3 LED indicator lights


    The external power circuit has two LED indicator lights installed on the EPM panel. There is a blue LED indicator
    light adjacent to the EXT PWR switch. This LED indicator comes on when the EXT PWR switch is set to EXT PWR
    position and the external power is connected to the aircraft. The blue LED indicator light has an ON caption. There
    is also a green LED indicator light adjacent to the EXT PWR switch. The LED has an AVAIL caption and comes on
    when the external electrical power is connected to the aircraft and power is available.

    2.4 External Power Control Unit


    The external-power control unit monitors the external electrical power voltage. The external-power control unit
    disconnects the external electrical power when the voltage is more than 30.3 VCD or less than 22 VDC.
    The control unit is installed inside the Battery and External Power Junction Box (BEPJB). Access to the BEPJB is
    through the access door 31 AB.

    3 Operation (Ref. Fig. 1)


    When the EPU supplies 28 VDC to the external-power system, the green AVAIL LED indicator light on the EPM
    panel comes on. Both generators are off when external power is used. The Bus Tie is closed and the external
    power supplies all aircraft busbars and both batteries. When the EXT PWR switch is set to EXT PWR, the 28 VDC
    from the EPU energizes the external-power control unit. The EPCU energizes the external power contactor. The
    closed contacts of the external power contactor:
    − Connect the 28 VDC to the secondary power line
    − Send a discrete signal to the Modular Avionic Unit (MAU)
    − Energize the blue LED indicator EXT PWR ON
    − Energize the RH and LH EXT PWR ON relay
    − Closes the bus tie contactor.

    The load distribution system gives 28 VDC on the secondary power line and to the different systems that use the
    electrical power. The generator switches GEN 1 and GEN 2 control the electrical power for the EPCU. If the
    switches GEN 1 and/or GEN 2 are set to ON the EPCU will disconnect the EXT PWR relay from the external
    electrical power. The external power relay opens and disconnects the external electrical power from the secondary
    power line.
    When the external electrical-power system is on and the BAT 1 and BAT 2 switches are set to ON the battery
    relays are energized. The closed contactor of the battery relays and the bus tie connect the batteries to the external
    power. The external power charges the batteries.
    When the EPU voltage is more than 29.5 VDC or less than 22 VDC, the external-power control unit removes the
    energizing voltage from the external power contactor. The external power contactor opens and disconnects the
    external electrical power from the secondary power line.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-40-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    When the EXT PWR switch is momentarily set to the OFF position, the external-power control unit removes the
    energizing voltage from the external power contactor. The external power relay opens and disconnects the external
    electrical power from the secondary power line.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-40-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    BATTERY
    SECONDARY POWER LINE
    (REF DM12-B-24-52-00-001-040A-A)

    EXT PWR BATTERY


    CONTACTOR RELAY

    LH EXT
    PWR ON
    RELAY

    EPU EXT PWR


    RECEPTACLE RH EXT
    PWR ON
    EPCU RELAY
    EXT PWR
    CB

    GENERATOR 2
    GENERATOR 1 LINE
    LINE CONTACTOR
    CONTACTOR

    MODULAR AVIONIC UNIT

    GENERATOR 1 GENERATOR 2
    CONTROL CONTROL
    EPMP
    UNIT UNIT
    (REF DM12-B-24-30-00-001-040A-A)

    ON
    BAT 2
    EXT ON
    OFF MASTER PWR
    PWR OFF

    OFF
    ON

    EXT PWR EXT PWR


    AVAIL ON

    12-B-244000-A-S4080-20005-A-01-1

    Figure 1 External Power System – Schematic

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-40-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    BATTERY AND EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX

    ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Table of Contents Page

    BATTERY AND EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX - ADJUSTMENT/TEST....................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required
    Multimeter Part Local supply As
    required
    Lockout ring Part 944.87.10.001 As
    required
    Maintenance box Part 985.99.99.610 As
    required
    Jumper cable Part Local supply As
    required
    28 VDC Power supply Part Local supply As
    required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-40-01-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-22 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1
    WARNING

    MAKE SURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO SUPPLY ELECTRICAL POWER. CIRCUITS THAT ARE NOT SAFE
    CAN CAUSE INJURY TO PERSONS AND/OR DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

    Obey the safety precautions given in AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.


    2 Make sure that external power is disconnected from the aircraft's external power connector.
    3 Open the circuit breakers on the Battery and External Power Junction Box (BEPJB):
    − BAT 1 (BEPJB)
    − BAT 2 (BEPJB)
    − EXT PWR (BEPJB)
    − STBY PWR CTL (BEPJB)
    − STBY PWR SPLY (BEPJB)
    − OVHD/HOT BAT (BEPJB)
    − CARGO DOOR (BEPJB)
    − SERVICE LIGHTS (BEPJB)
    − ELT-NAV/CLOCK (BEPJB)
    − VCCS (if VCCS system installed)(BEPJB)
    − LOGO LTS (if LOGO lights installed) (BEPJB)
    4 On the Overhead Panel (OHP) set these switches to OFF:
    − AV 1 BUS
    − AV 2 BUS
    5 Press the Cargo Door switch to close the cargo door. Make sure that the door does not close.
    6 Close the circuit breaker CARGO DOOR (BEPJB).
    7 Press the Cargo Door switch to close the cargo door. Make sure that the door closes.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-40-01-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-22 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    8 On the passenger door stairs press and release the entry light button. Make sure that the cockpit dome lights
    do not come on.
    9 Close the circuit breaker SERVICE LIGHTS (BEPJB). Make sure that the left cockpit dome light is ON (after
    45 seconds the light goes off). If needed, press and release the entry light button to reactivate the light.
    10 Connect external power to the aircraft external power connector. Make sure that:
    − the OHP green EXT PWR AVAIL LED is off
    − the OHP backlights are off
    11 Close the circuit breaker EXT PWR (BEPJB). Make sure that the OHP EXT PWR AVAIL LED is ON.
    12 Close the circuit breaker OVHD HOT BAT. Make sure that the OHP backlights are ON.
    13 On the OHP, set the STBY BUS switch to ON. Make sure that the OHP blue STBY BUS ON LED is off.
    14 Close the circuit breaker STBY PWR CTL (BEPJB). Make sure that:
    − the OHP blue LED STBY BUS ON is ON
    − the lower Multi Function Display (MFD) does not power up.
    15 Close the circuit breaker STBY PWR SPLY (BEPJB). Make sure that the lower MFD powers up.
    16 Aircraft with an ELT Nav Interface Module installed:
    16.1 Make sure that the ELT Nav Interface is switched ON (the switch is on the face of the ELT Nav
    Interface Unit):
    16.2 Close the circuit breaker ELT-NAV/CLOCK (BEPJB).
    16.3 Make sure that the red LED on the front of the ELT Nav Interface Unit is ON (the LED flashes once
    per second for approximately one minute, then stays ON).
    17 Aircraft with a Thommen clock and no ELT Nav Interface Module installed:
    17.1 Close the circuit breaker ELT-NAV/CLOCK (BEPJB).
    17.2 Make sure that the digital clock installed in the left instrument panel operates.
    18 Aircraft with a Davtron clock and no ELT Nav Interface Module installed:
    18.1 Open the circuit breaker CLOCK (STANDBY BUS).
    18.2 Wait a few seconds, then close the circuit breaker CLOCK (STANDBY BUS).
    18.3 Make sure that the clock time has reset to 00:00.
    18.4 Close the circuit breaker ELT-NAV/CLOCK (BEPJB).
    18.5 After approximately one minute, open the circuit breaker CLOCK (STANDBY BUS).
    18.6 Wait a few seconds, then close the circuit breaker CLOCK (STANDBY BUS).
    18.7 Make sure that the clock time has not reset.
    19 On the OHP, set the BAT 1 switch to ON. Make sure that the Primary Flight Display (PFD) does not power
    up.
    20 Close the circuit breaker BAT 1 (BEPJB).
    21 Make sure that:
    − the pilot Primary Flight Display (PFD) powers ON
    − the MFD battery 1 voltage is 24 VDC ± 3 VDC
    − the MFD battery 1 current shows a negative reading
    − the MFD CAS caution message Battery 1 Off is off

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-40-01-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-22 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − the MFD CAS caution message Battery 2 Off is ON.


    22 On the OHP, set the BAT 2 switch to ON.
    23 Make sure that:
    − the MFD battery 2 current shows 0 A ±3 A
    − the MFD CAS caution message Battery 2 Off is ON.
    24 Close the circuit breaker BAT 2 (BEPJB).
    25 Make sure that:
    − the MFD battery 2 voltage is 24 VDC ± 3 VDC
    − the MFD battery 2 current shows a negative reading
    − the MFD CAS caution message Battery 2 Off is off.
    26 On the OHP, set the BAT 1 switch to OFF. Make sure that:
    − the MFD CAS caution message Battery 1 Off is ON
    − the PFD stays powered ON.
    27 On the OHP, set the EXT PWR switch to ON. Make sure that:
    − on the OHP, the blue EXT PWR ON LED is ON
    − the MFD battery 1 voltage is 24 VDC ± 3 VDC
    − the MFD battery 1 current shows 0 A ±3 A
    − the MFD battery 2 voltage shows more than 25 VDC
    − the MFD battery 2 current shows a positive reading (not discharging).
    28 On the OHP, set the BAT 1 switch to ON. Make sure that:
    − the MFD CAS caution message Battery 1 Off is off
    − the MFD battery 1 voltage shows more than 25 VDC
    − the MFD battery 1 current shows a positive reading.
    29 Aircraft with Optional VCCS installed:
    29.1 Use a Multimeter (Pt.No. Local supply) to measure the voltage at terminal T6 of the BEPJB. The
    voltage is 0 VDC.
    29.2 Close the circuit breaker VCCS (BEPJB).
    29.3 Measure the voltage at terminal T6 of the BEPJB. The voltage is 28 VDC ±1 VDC.
    30 Aircraft with Optional Ni-Cad Batteries:
    30.1 Disconnect electrical connector BT373P2 from Battery 1. Make sure that the MFD CAS warning
    message Battery 1 Hot is ON.
    30.2 Use a jumper cable to link pins D and E of electrical connector BT373P2.
    30.3 Make sure that the MFD CAS warning message Battery 1 Hot is off.
    30.4 Use a second jumper cable to link pins A and B of electrical connector BT373P2.
    30.5 Make sure that the MFD CAS warning message Battery 1 Hot is ON.
    30.6 Remove the jumper cable from pins A and B of electrical connector BT373P2.
    30.7 Make sure that the MFD CAS warning message Battery 1 Hot is off.
    30.8 Use a second jumper cable to link pins A and C of electrical connector BT373P2.
    30.9 Make sure that the MFD CAS warning message Battery 1 Hot is ON.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-40-01-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-22 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    30.10 Remove the jumper cable from pins A and C of electrical connector BT373P2.
    30.11 Make sure that the MFD CAS warning message Battery 1 Hot is off.
    30.12 Remove the jumper cable from pins D and E of electrical connector BT373P2.
    30.13 Connect electrical connector BT373P2 to Battery 1.
    30.14 Disconnect electrical connector BT384P2 from Battery 2. Make sure that the MFD CAS warning
    message Battery 2 Hot is ON.
    30.15 Use a jumper cable to link pins D and E of electrical connector BT384P2.
    30.16 Make sure that the MFD CAS warning message Battery 2 Hot is off.
    30.17 Use a second jumper cable to link pins A and B of electrical connector BT384P2.
    30.18 Make sure that the MFD CAS warning message Battery 2 Hot is ON.
    30.19 Remove the jumper cable from pins A and B of electrical connector BT384P2.
    30.20 Make sure that the MFD CAS warning message Battery 2 Hot is off.
    30.21 Use a second jumper cable to link pins A and C of electrical connector BT384P2.
    30.22 Make sure that the MFD CAS warning message Battery 2 Hot is ON.
    30.23 Remove the jumper cable from pins A and C of electrical connector BT384P2.
    30.24 Make sure that the MFD CAS warning message Battery 2 Hot is off.
    30.25 Remove the jumper cable from pins D and E of electrical connector BT384P2.
    30.26 Connect electrical connector BT384P2 to Battery 2.
    31 Aircraft without Optional Logo Lights installed:
    31.1 In the engine bay, disconnect the electrical connector K001P from the Generator Line Contactor
    (GLC) 1. Make sure that:
    − the OHP blue EXT PWR ON LED is off (external power disconnects from the aircraft)
    − the MFD Battery 1 and Battery 2 current show negative readings.
    31.2 Connect the electrical connector K001P to GLC 1. Make sure that the OHP blue EXT PWR ON LED is
    off (external power is not automatically connected to the aircraft).
    31.3 On the OHP, set the EXT PWR switch to ON. Make sure that the blue EXT PWR ON LED is ON.
    32 On the OHP, set the EXT PWR switch to off. Make sure that:
    − the OHP blue EXT PWR ON LED is off
    − the MFD Battery 1 and Battery 2 current show negative readings.
    33 On the OHP, set the STBY BUS switch to OFF. Make sure that:
    − the lower MFD powers down
    − the OHP blue EXT PWR ON LED is off
    − Post SB 24-035 Aircraft only, the MFD Battery 1 current shows 0 A ±3 A.
    34 On the OHP, set the BAT 2 switch to OFF. Make sure that:
    − the MFD CAS caution message Battery 2 Off is ON
    − Post SB 24-035 Aircraft only, the MFD Battery 2 current shows 0 A ±3 A.
    35 On the OHP, set the BAT 1 switch to OFF.
    36 De-energize the aircraft electrical system, refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    37 On the OHP, set the AV 1 BUS and AV 2 BUS switches to ON.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-40-01-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-22 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    38 Aircraft with Optional Logo Lights installed:


    38.1 De-energize the aircraft electrical system, refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    38.2 Connect the Maintenance box (Pt.No. 985.99.99.610) to the aircraft and set the aircraft to Ground.
    38.3 In the engine bay, disconnect the electrical connector K001P from the Generator Line Contactor
    (GLC) 1.
    38.4 Use a jumper cable to link pins 7 and 12 on electrical connector K001P.
    38.5 In the engine bay, disconnect the electrical connector K002P from the GLC 2.
    38.6 Use a jumper cable to link pins 7 and 12 on electrical connector K002P.
    38.7 In the right engine bay, open the circuit breaker GEN2 CTL.
    38.8 Connect a 28 VDC Power supply (Pt.No. Local supply) to electrical connector K002P pin 9 but do not
    switch the power supply on.
    38.9 Energize the aircraft electrical system, refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    38.10 On the OHP, set the LOGO LIGHT switch to ON. Make sure that the logo lights are off.
    38.11 Close the circuit breaker LOGO LTS (BEPJB). Make sure that the aft logo lights are ON.
    38.12 Set the OHP LOGO LIGHT switch to OFF. Make sure that the logo lights are off.
    38.13 Remove the jumper cable from electrical connector K001P pins 7 and 12. Make sure that the OHP
    blue EXT PWR ON LED is off (external power disconnects from the aircraft).
    38.14 Remove the jumper cable from electrical connector K002P pins 7 and 12.
    38.15 Use a jumper cable to connect pins 7 and 2 on electrical connector K001P.
    38.16 Switch ON the 28 VDC power supply that is connected to electrical connector K002P pin 9.
    38.17 Set the OHP LOGO LIGHT switch to ON and make sure that the forward and aft logo lights are ON.
    38.18 On the Maintenance box, set the aircraft to In-Air and make sure that the forward and aft logo lights
    are ON.
    38.19 On the OHP, set the LOGO LIGHT switch to OFF and make sure that the logo lights are off.
    38.20 On the Maintenance box, set the aircraft to Ground.
    38.21 De-energize the aircraft electrical system, refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    38.22 Switch off and disconnect the 28 VDC power supply from electrical connector K002P.
    38.23 Remove the jumper cable from electrical connector K001P.
    38.24 Close the circuit breaker GEN2 CTL.
    38.25 Connect the electrical connector K001P to GLC 1.
    38.26 Connect the electrical connector K002P to GLC 2.
    38.27 Disconnect the Maintenance box from the aircraft.
    39 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-40-01-00A-903A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-22 Page 6
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    BATTERY AND EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    BATTERY AND EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Battery and External Power Junction Box – Removal/Installation.......................... 5

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-24-30-07-00A-920A-A LEAD ACID BATTERY - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-24-30-07-00A-920B-A NI–CAD BATTERY - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-24-40-01-00A-903A-A BATTERY AND EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX
    - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-40-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-05-22 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Cable tie Part P09-005 As
    required
    Lockout ring Part 944.87.10.001 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Obey the safety precautions given in AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    1.2 Open the access door 31 AB.
    1.3 Open and install a safety clip (Safety clip (circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on these
    circuit breakers:
    − BAT 1 (BATTERY AND EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX)
    − BAT 2 (BATTERY AND EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX)
    − EPS
    1.4 Disconnect the batteries:
    − for lead acid batteries, refer to AMM 12-B-24-30-07-00A-920A-A
    − for Ni-Cad batteries, refer to AMM 12-B-24-30-07-00A-920B-A
    1.5 Remove and discard the cable tie from each cable terminal cover.
    1.6 Slide the terminal covers away from the Battery and External Power Junction Box terminals.
    1.7 Disconnect the cables from the Battery and External Power Junction Box:

    Cable Ident BEPJB Terminal


    1P4A00 T1
    2P4A00 T2
    1P15A00 T3
    2P15A00 T4
    P17A00 T5
    H5A2 (if installed) T6
    P10A10 T7
    1.7.1 Remove the nut Figure 1 [8] and washer Figure 1 [9]. Disconnect the cable Figure 1 [10]
    from terminal stud T1 on the junction box Figure 1 [6].

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-40-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-05-22 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1.7.2 Remove the nut Figure 1 [13] and washer Figure 1 [12]. Disconnect the cable Figure 1 [11]
    from terminal stud T3 on the junction box Figure 1 [6].
    1.7.3 Remove the nut Figure 1 [14] and washer Figure 1 [15]. Disconnect the wire Figure 1 [16]
    from terminal stud T7 on the junction box Figure 1 [6].
    1.7.4 Remove the nuts Figure 1 [23] and washers Figure 1 [22]. Disconnect the cables
    Figure 1 [19], Figure 1 [20] and Figure 1 [21] from terminal studs T4, T6 and T2 respectively
    on the junction box Figure 1 [6].
    1.7.5 Remove the nut Figure 1 [1] and washer Figure 1 [2]. Disconnect the cable Figure 1 [5] from
    terminal stud T5 on the junction box Figure 1 [6].
    1.8 Use a hexagonal key to undo the fasteners that hold the two electrical connectors A381P1 and
    A381P2 Figure 1 [17] and Figure 1 [18] to the Battery and External Power Junction Box Figure 1 [6].
    1.9 Disconnect the two electrical connectors A381P1 and A381P2 Figure 1 [17] and Figure 1 [18] from the
    Battery and External Power Junction Box Figure 1 [6].
    1.10 Hold the Battery and External Power Junction Box Figure 1 [6], and remove the four screws
    Figure 1 [3] and washers Figure 1 [4].
    1.11 Remove the Battery and External Power Junction Box Figure 1 [6] from the aircraft.
    2 Installation
    2.1
    Note

    To identify the consumable items used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items AMM 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Put the Battery and External Power Junction Box Figure 1 [6] in position on the mount Figure 1 [7] and
    install the four screws Figure 1 [3] and washers Figure 1 [4].
    2.2 Connect the cables to the Battery and External Power Junction Box:

    Cable Ident BEPJB Terminal


    1P4A00 T1
    2P4A00 T2
    1P15A00 T3
    2P15A00 T4
    P17A00 T5
    H5A2 (if installed) T6
    P10A10 T7
    2.2.1
    Note

    Torque all of the nuts installed in Step 2.2.1 thru Step 2.2.5 to 9,2 Nm ± 10% (6.8 lb ft ±
    10%).

    Connect the cable Figure 1 [5] to the terminal stud T5 on the junction box Figure 1 [6]. Install
    the washer Figure 1 [2] and the nut Figure 1 [1].
    2.2.2 Connect the cables Figure 1 [19], Figure 1 [20] and Figure 1 [21] to the terminal studs T4, T6
    and T2 respectively on the junction box Figure 1 [6]. Install the washers Figure 1 [22] and
    nuts Figure 1 [23].
    2.2.3 Connect the wire Figure 1 [16] to the terminal stud T7 on the junction box Figure 1 [6]. Install
    the washer Figure 1 [15] and nut Figure 1 [14].

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-40-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-05-22 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.2.4 Connect the cable Figure 1 [11] to the terminal stud T3 on the junction box Figure 1 [6].
    Install the washer Figure 1 [12] and nut Figure 1 [13].
    2.2.5 Connect the cable Figure 1 [10] to the terminal stud T1 on the junction box Figure 1 [6].
    Install the washer Figure 1 [9] and the nut Figure 1 [8].
    2.3 Slide the terminal covers over the Battery and External Power Junction Box terminals.
    2.4 Install cable ties (Cable tie (Pt.No. P09-005)) to hold the terminal covers on the cables.
    2.5 Connect the two electrical connectors A381P1 and A381P2 Figure 1 [17] and Figure 1 [18] to the
    Battery and External Power Junction Box Figure 1 [6].
    2.6 Use a hexagonal key to tighten the fasteners that hold the electrical connectors A381P1 and A381P2
    Figure 1 [17] and Figure 1 [18] to the Battery and External Power Junction Box. Do not overtighten the
    fasteners.
    2.7 Connect the batteries:
    − for lead acid batteries, refer to AMM 12-B-24-30-07-00A-920A-A
    − for Ni-Cad batteries, refer to AMM 12-B-24-30-07-00A-920B-A
    2.8 Remove the safety clip and close these circuit breakers:
    − BAT 1 (BATTERY AND EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX)
    − BAT 2 (BATTERY AND EXTERNAL POWER JUNCTION BOX)
    − EPS
    2.9 For aircraft that do not have the optional VCCS and/or Logo lights installed:
    2.9.1 Open and install a Lockout ring (Pt.No. 944.87.10.001) on the BEPJB VCCS circuit breaker,
    as needed.
    2.9.2 Open and install a Lockout ring (Pt.No. 944.87.10.001) on the BEPJB LOGO LTS circuit
    breaker, as needed.
    2.9.3 Install INOP labels, as needed, to cover the BEPJB VCCS and/or the LOGO LTS circuit
    breaker markings.
    2.10
    Note

    CB 125 Amp = VCCS and CB 15 Amp = Logo Lights.

    Do a test of the Battery and External Power Junction Box, refer to AMM 12-B-24-40-01-00A-903A-A.
    2.11 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.12 Close the access door 31 AB.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-40-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-05-22 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FRAME 39

    5 A
    7

    6 FRAME 38

    4
    3

    9
    8

    10

    21

    22 20
    23
    19

    18

    17
    11

    16

    15
    14
    12
    13

    12-B-244001-A-S4080-20006-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Battery and External Power Junction Box – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-40-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-05-22 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-40-01-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-05-22 Page 6
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    DC ELECTRICAL LOAD DISTRIBUTION

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    DC ELECTRICAL LOAD DISTRIBUTION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION........................ 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-24-52-00-00A-040A-A DC LOAD DISTRIBUTION – HYDRAULIC LANDING
    GEAR - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-24-52-00-00A-040B-A DC LOAD DISTRIBUTION – ELECTRO MECHANICAL
    LANDING GEAR - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Description

    1 General
    The description and operation of the load distribution system is given in the DC load distribution sub-system:
    − Aircraft with hydraulic landing gear, AMM 12-B-24-52-00-00A-040A-A
    − Aircraft with electro mechanical landing gear, AMM 12-B-24-52-00-00A-040B-A

    The DC load distribution system controls the DC power supplies to all the systems in the aircraft that use DC
    electrical power.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-50-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-01-10 Page 1
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-50-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-01-10 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    DC LOAD DISTRIBUTION – HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    DC LOAD DISTRIBUTION – HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR - DESCRIPTION AND 1


    OPERATION...............................................................................................................................
    1 General................................................................................................................... 2
    2 Component Description ......................................................................................... 2
    2.1 Power Line.............................................................................................................. 3
    2.2 Secondary Power Line........................................................................................... 3
    2.3 Generator 1 Bus..................................................................................................... 4
    2.4 Generator 2 Bus..................................................................................................... 4
    2.5 Hot Battery Bus...................................................................................................... 4
    2.6 Essential Bus.......................................................................................................... 4
    2.7 Non Essential Bus.................................................................................................. 4
    2.8 Avionic 1 Bus.......................................................................................................... 4
    2.9 Avionic 2 Bus.......................................................................................................... 5
    2.10 Main Bus................................................................................................................. 5
    2.11 Standby Bus........................................................................................................... 5
    2.12 EPS Bus................................................................................................................. 5
    2.13 Cabin Bus............................................................................................................... 6
    2.14 Front Right Circuit Breaker Panel........................................................................... 6
    2.15 Front Left Circuit Breaker Panel............................................................................. 6
    2.16 Rear Right Circuit Breaker Panel........................................................................... 6
    2.17 Rear Left Circuit Breaker Panel.............................................................................. 6

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    Index of Figures Page

    1 DC Load Distribution – Schematic.......................................................................... 7

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-21-40-00-00A-040A-A HEATING AND COOLING - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-21-50-00-00A-040A-A ADDITIONAL COOLING - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-24-30-00-00A-040A-A DC GENERATION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-24-52-51-00A-040A-A EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY (EPS) SYSTEM -
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-27-50-00-00A-040A-A FLAPS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Effectivity: HYDRAULIC LANDING


    12-B-24-52-00-00A-040A-A
    GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-05-22 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Data module/Technical publication Title


    12-B-29-10-00-00A-040A-A MAIN HYDRAULIC SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-30-40-00-00A-040A-A WINDSHIELD DE–ICE SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-30-60-00-00A-040A-A PROPELLER DE–ICE SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-33-45-00-00A-040A-A LOGO LIGHTS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Description

    1 General
    The DC load distribution system controls the DC power supplies to all the systems in the aircraft that use the DC
    electrical power.
    The DC load distribution system has:
    − A Power Line
    − A Secondary Power Line
    − A Generator 1 bus
    − A Generator 2 bus
    − A Hot Battery bus
    − An Essential bus
    − A Non Essential bus
    − An Avionic 1 bus
    − An Avionic 2 bus
    − A Main bus
    − A Standby bus
    − An Emergency Power System (EPS) bus
    − A Cabin bus
    − Four circuit breaker panels installed in the cockpit.

    The DC generation system (AMM 12-B-24-30-00-00A-040A-A) supplies the aircraft systems with the DC electrical
    power. The switches on the Overhead Control Panel (OCP) control the selection of the different bus bars (AMM 12-
    B-24-30-00-00A-040A-A) and the operation of the standby-power system.

    2 Component Description
    (Ref. Fig. 1)
    DC bus bars distribute the electrical power to the aircraft systems. They each receive electrical power from a
    different source of DC electrical power. The Powerline and the Secondary Powerline are connected through the
    bus tie. This lets electrical power to be supplied from another source if a generator becomes defective.

    Effectivity: HYDRAULIC LANDING


    12-B-24-52-00-00A-040A-A
    GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-05-22 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.1 Power Line


    The power line is the primary source of electrical power with the highest level of integrity. The DC power is supplied
    to the power line from one of these four sources:
    − Batteries 1 and 2 through battery 1 and 2 contactor and the bus tie contactor
    − The external power through the external power contactor and the bus tie contactor
    − Generator 1 through generator 1 contactor
    − Generator 2 through generator 2 contactor and the bus tie contactor
    The power line supplies power to these buses:
    − Essential bus
    − Avionics 1 bus
    − Generator 1 bus.

    These systems get the electrical power directly from the power line:
    − Flap system, AMM 12-B-27-50-00-00A-040A-A
    − Propeller de-ice system, AMM 12-B-30-60-00-00A-040A-A
    − LH windshield de-ice system, AMM 12-B-30-40-00-00A-040A-A
    − Cabin heating system, AMM 12-B-21-40-00-00A-040A-A

    2.2 Secondary Power Line


    The Secondary Power Line (SPL) is the source electrical power with the second highest level of integrity. The DC
    power is supplied to the SPL from one of these four sources:
    − Batteries 1 and 2 through battery 1 and 2 contactors and the bus tie contactor
    − The external power through the external power contactor
    − Generator 1 through generator 1 contactor and the bus tie contactor
    − Generator 2 through generator 2 contactor

    The SPL supplies power to these buses:


    − Main bus
    − Avionics 2 bus
    − Generator 2 bus
    − Non-essential bus
    − Cabin bus.

    These systems get the electrical power directly from the SPL:
    − Hydraulic system, AMM 12-B-29-10-00-00A-040A-A
    − RH windshield de-ice system, AMM 12-B-30-40-00-00A-040A-A
    − Under-floor heating system, AMM 12-B-21-40-00-00A-040A-A
    − Vapor Cooling Cycle System (VCCS) compressor system (if installed), AMM12-B-21-50-00-00A-040A-A
    − Logo lights (if installed), AMM 12-B-33-45-00-00A-040A-A
    − Foot-warmer system (if installed), AMM 12-B-21-40-00-00A-040A-A.

    Effectivity: HYDRAULIC LANDING


    12-B-24-52-00-00A-040A-A
    GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-05-22 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.3 Generator 1 Bus


    Generator 1 bus has the third highest level of integrity and is dedicated to generator 1. Under normal conditions
    and when generator 2 is off-line the generator 1 bus is powered from generator 1. When generator 1 is off-line the
    generator 1 bus is not powered.
    Generator 1 bus supplies power to non-essential equipment, which can be safely used if generator 2 fails.
    The Modular Avionics Unit (MAU) monitors the generator 1 bus voltage. If generator 1 voltage is out of limits, failure
    caution messages are shown on the Crew-Alerting System (CAS) window of the Multi-Function Display (MFD).

    2.4 Generator 2 Bus


    Generator 2 bus has the third highest level of integrity and is dedicated to generator 2.
    In normal conditions and when generator 1 is off-line the generator 2 bus is powered from generator 2. When
    generator 2 is off-line the generator 2 bus is not powered.
    Generator 2 bus supplies power to non-essential equipment, which can be safely used if generator 1 fails.
    The generator 2 bus voltage is monitored by the MAU. If generator 2 voltage is out of limits, failure caution
    messages are shown on the CAS window of the MFD.

    2.5 Hot Battery Bus


    The Hot battery bus is installed in the Battery External Power Junction Bus (BEPJB) in the rear fuselage. The hot
    battery bus is powered from battery 1. The hot battery bus supplies power to the systems, which must stay
    powered when the aircraft is powered down.

    2.6 Essential Bus


    The Essential (Ess) bus has the highest level of integrity. The essential bus can be supplied from one of the two
    generators or from the two batteries. In normal operating conditions it is powered from generator 1. If generator 1 is
    off line (abnormal condition) then generator 2 supplies the power to the essential bus. If the two generators are off
    line (emergency condition) the two batteries supply the essential bus.
    The essential bus voltage is monitored by the MAU. Failures are shown on the CAS window of the MFD.

    2.7 Non Essential Bus


    The Non Essential bus has the fourth level of integrity. Under normal conditions, the non-essential bus is powered
    from generator 2. If one of the two generators is off-line, the non-essential bus is de-energized. The non-essential
    bus supplies power to equipment that can be switched off if there is a single generator failure.
    The non-essential bus voltage is monitored by the MAU. Failures are shown on the CAS window of the MFD. If one
    of the two generators is off-line then the caution messages are not shown.

    2.8 Avionic 1 Bus


    The Avionic 1 bus (AV1) has the highest level of integrity. The Avionic 1 bus can be supplied from one of the two
    generators or by the two batteries. In normal operating conditions it is powered from generator 1. If generator 1 is
    off line (abnormal condition) then generator 2 supplies the power to the Avionic 1 bus. If the two generators are off
    line (emergency condition) the two batteries supply the Avionic 1 bus. This bus is always supplied in normal,
    abnormal and emergency conditions.
    A two-position switch installed in the EPMP controls the avionic 1 bus.The switch caption is AV1 BUS. When the
    AV1 BUS switch is set to ON the AV1 contactor in the Left Hand Power Junction Box (LHPJB) closes and the

    Effectivity: HYDRAULIC LANDING


    12-B-24-52-00-00A-040A-A
    GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-05-22 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    avionic 1 bus is powered from the power line. When the AV1 BUS switch is set to OFF the AV1 contactor opens
    and the avionic 1 bus is de-energized.
    The Avionic 1 bus voltage is monitored by the MAU. Failures are shown on the CAS window of the MFD.

    2.9 Avionic 2 Bus


    The Avionic 2 (AV2) bus has the second highest level of integrity. The avionics 2 bus can be supplied by one of the
    two generators. In normal operating conditions it is supplied by generator 2. In abnormal conditions it is supplied
    from generator 1. This bus is supplied under normal and abnormal conditions. In emergency conditions the AV2
    contactor automatically opens, load shedding the avionic 2 bus.
    A two-position switch installed in the OCP controls the Avionic 2 bus. The switch caption is AV2 BUS. When the
    AV2 BUS switch is set to ON the AV2 contactor in the Right Hand Power Junction Box (RHPJB) closes and the
    Avionic 2 bus is powered from the SPL. When the AV2 BUS switch is set to OFF the AV2 contactor opens and the
    Avionic 2 bus is de-energized.
    If one of the two generators is off-line or the AV2 BUS switch on the OCP is set to OFF then the caution message
    is not shown. The Avionic 2 bus voltage is monitored by the MAU. Caution messages are shown on the CAS
    window of the MFD.

    2.10 Main Bus


    The Main bus has the second highest level of integrity. The Main bus can be supplied by one of the two generators.
    In normal operating conditions it is supplied by generator 2. In abnormal conditions it is supplied from generator 1.
    This bus is supplied in normal and abnormal conditions. In emergency conditions the Main bus contactor
    automatically opens, load shedding the main bus.
    The Main bus voltage is monitored by the MAU. Failures are shown on the CAS window of the MFD. If one of the
    two generators is off line then the caution message is not shown.

    2.11 Standby Bus


    The Standby Power Bus (SPB) supplies 28 VDC to avionics equipment, which lets the pilot, do pre-flight planning
    and air traffic control communication tasks without powering up the aircraft bus bars.
    A two-position switch installed in the OCP controls the SPB. The switch caption is STBY BUS. A blue LED ON
    indicator light is adjacent to the switch. The blue LED ON light comes on when 28 VDC is connected to the
    Standby bus bar.
    When the switch is set to ON, the standby power relay in the BEPJB energizes and the SPB is powered from the
    Hot Battery bus. After engine start and the avionic 1 bus is energized, the standby bus relay in the LHPJB
    energizes and the SPB is powered from the avionic 1 bus.
    During emergency operation the pilot can switch off the AV1 bus and the SPB will still operate.
    DC power is supplied to the standby-power system from one of these two sources:
    − Battery 1 through the hot battery bus
    − The avionic 1 bus.

    The standby bus voltage is monitored by the MAU. Failures are shown on the CAS window of the MFD.

    2.12 EPS Bus


    The EPS bus supplies power to the applicable equipment when there is total loss of electrical power. The total loss
    of power is loss of the two generators and the two aircraft batteries. The EPS has a dedicated battery, which

    Effectivity: HYDRAULIC LANDING


    12-B-24-52-00-00A-040A-A
    GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-05-22 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    supplies sufficient power to supply all the necessary emergency backup systems for 30 minutes. The essential bus
    supplies power to the EPS battery to keep maximum charge.
    A three-position switch installed on the OCP controls the EPS, AMM 12-B-24-52-51-00A-040A-A.

    2.13 Cabin Bus


    The Cabin bus has the fourth level of integrity. In normal operation conditions generator 2 supplies the Cabin bus. If
    one of the two generators is off line then the Cabin bus is switched off.
    The Cabin bus supplies the auxiliary non-flight related equipment in the passenger compartment. All these
    functions are not available if there is a single generator failure.
    A two-position switch installed in the OCP controls the cabin bus. The switch caption is CABIN BUS. When the
    CABIN BUS switch is set to OFF the cabin bus is de-energized.

    2.14 Front Right Circuit Breaker Panel


    The front right circuit breaker panel is installed on the right of the flight compartment. The panel has all the circuit
    breakers of the systems, which get electrical power from the Main bus and Non Essential bus bars.

    2.15 Front Left Circuit Breaker Panel


    The front left circuit breaker panel is installed on the left of the flight compartment. The panel has all the circuit
    breakers of the systems, which get electrical power from the Essential bus bar.

    2.16 Rear Right Circuit Breaker Panel


    The rear right circuit breaker panel is installed on the right of the flight compartment. The panel has all the circuit
    breakers of the systems, which get electrical power from the Avionics 2 bus bar, Cabin bus and Generator 2 bus
    bar.

    2.17 Rear Left Circuit Breaker Panel


    The rear left circuit breaker panel is installed on the left of the flight compartment. The panel has all the circuit
    breakers of the systems, which get electrical power from the Avionics 1 bus, EPS bus, Generator 1 bus and
    Standby bus bars.

    Effectivity: HYDRAULIC LANDING


    12-B-24-52-00-00A-040A-A
    GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-05-22 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    MASTER
    POWER
    VOLTAGE VOLTAGE
    REGULATOR 1 OFF REGULATOR 2
    GEN 1 GEN 2
    GEN 1 GEN 2
    ON
    STARTER STARTER
    ON RELAY A ON RELAY
    OFF GENERATOR 1 MAIN START GENERATOR 2 OFF
    GEN 1 CTL GEN 2 CTL
    CONTACTOR CONTACTOR CONTACTOR

    GEN 1 GEN 2
    SEC START
    ON CB1 ON
    POWER LINE CONTACTOR SECONDARY POWER LINE
    U/FLOOR HTR

    GEN 1 BUS CABIN BUS


    BUS TIE CONTACTOR CB2
    CONTACTOR
    CABIN BUS FOOT WARMER
    GEN 1 BUS CONTACTOR
    NON-ESS BUS
    EPS BATTERY CONTACTOR

    ESS BUS NON-ESS BUS FOOT WARMER

    GEN 2 BUS
    EPS RELAY
    CB1 CONTACTOR CB5

    CABIN HEATING EPS BUS GEN 2 BUS RH W/SHLD

    CB3 CB6
    AV 1 BUS AV 1 BUS
    PROP DE-ICE HYD POWER
    CONTACTOR

    CB4
    AV 2 BUS AV 2 BUS
    LH W/SHLD
    CONTACTOR
    CB9
    CB6 VCCS
    CB5
    CPRSR POWER
    FLAP POWER
    MAIN BUS MAIN BUS
    CONTACTOR

    CB8
    STBY BUS STANDBY BUS
    LOGO LIGHT
    RELAY
    OFF

    A
    STBY POWER
    RELAY STANDBY
    ON
    POWER

    BATTERY 1 BATTERY 2
    OFF OFF
    CB1
    A A
    BATTERY 1 EXTERNAL PWR BATTERY 2
    CONTACTOR CONTACTOR CONTACTOR
    ON
    HOT BATTERY
    BUS
    EXTERNAL PWR
    BATTERY 1 BATTERY 2
    CONNECTOR
    ON

    ENGINE
    START
    12-B-245200-A-S4080-20017-A-01-1

    Figure 1 DC Load Distribution – Schematic

    Effectivity: HYDRAULIC LANDING


    12-B-24-52-00-00A-040A-A
    GEAR
    End of data module
    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-05-22 Page 7
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: HYDRAULIC LANDING


    12-B-24-52-00-00A-040A-A
    GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-05-22 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    DC LOAD DISTRIBUTION – ELECTRO MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    DC LOAD DISTRIBUTION – ELECTRO MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR - DESCRIPTION 1


    AND OPERATION......................................................................................................................
    1 General................................................................................................................... 2
    2 Component Description ......................................................................................... 2
    2.1 Power Line.............................................................................................................. 3
    2.2 Secondary Power Line........................................................................................... 3
    2.3 Generator 1 Bus..................................................................................................... 4
    2.4 Generator 2 Bus..................................................................................................... 4
    2.5 Hot Battery Bus...................................................................................................... 4
    2.6 Essential Bus.......................................................................................................... 4
    2.7 Non Essential Bus.................................................................................................. 4
    2.8 Avionic 1 Bus.......................................................................................................... 4
    2.9 Avionic 2 Bus.......................................................................................................... 5
    2.10 Main Bus................................................................................................................. 5
    2.11 Standby Bus........................................................................................................... 5
    2.12 EPS Bus................................................................................................................. 5
    2.13 Cabin Bus............................................................................................................... 6
    2.14 Front Right Circuit Breaker Panel........................................................................... 6
    2.15 Front Left Circuit Breaker Panel............................................................................. 6
    2.16 Rear Right Circuit Breaker Panel........................................................................... 6
    2.17 Rear Left Circuit Breaker Panel.............................................................................. 6

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    Index of Figures Page

    1 DC Load Distribution – Schematic.......................................................................... 7

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-21-40-00-00A-040A-A HEATING AND COOLING - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-21-50-00-00A-040A-A ADDITIONAL COOLING - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-24-30-00-00A-040A-A DC GENERATION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-24-52-51-00A-040A-A EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY (EPS) SYSTEM -
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-27-50-00-00A-040A-A FLAPS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-24-52-00-00A-040B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-09-20 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Data module/Technical publication Title


    12-B-30-40-00-00A-040A-A WINDSHIELD DE–ICE SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-30-60-00-00A-040A-A PROPELLER DE–ICE SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-32-30-00-00A-040B-A EXTENSION AND RETRACTION – ELECTRO
    MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-33-45-00-00A-040A-A LOGO LIGHTS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Description

    1 General
    The DC load distribution system controls the DC power supplies to all the systems in the aircraft that use the DC
    electrical power.
    The DC load distribution system has:
    − A Power Line
    − A Secondary Power Line
    − A Generator 1 bus
    − A Generator 2 bus
    − A Hot Battery bus
    − An Essential bus
    − A Non Essential bus
    − An Avionic 1 bus
    − An Avionic 2 bus
    − A Main bus
    − A Standby bus
    − An Emergency Power System (EPS) bus
    − A Cabin bus
    − Four circuit breaker panels installed in the cockpit.

    The DC generation system (AMM 12-B-24-30-00-00A-040A-A) supplies the aircraft systems with the DC electrical
    power. The switches on the Overhead Control Panel (OCP) control the selection of the different bus bars (AMM 12-
    B-24-30-00-00A-040A-A) and the operation of the standby-power system.

    2 Component Description
    (Ref. Fig. 1)
    DC bus bars distribute the electrical power to the aircraft systems. They each receive electrical power from a
    different source of DC electrical power. The Powerline and the Secondary Powerline are connected through the
    bus tie. This lets electrical power to be supplied from another source if a generator becomes defective.

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-24-52-00-00A-040B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-09-20 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.1 Power Line


    The power line is the primary source of electrical power with the highest level of integrity. The DC power is supplied
    to the power line from one of these four sources:
    − Batteries 1 and 2 through battery 1 and 2 contactor and the bus tie contactor
    − The external power through the external power contactor and the bus tie contactor
    − Generator 1 through generator 1 contactor
    − Generator 2 through generator 2 contactor and the bus tie contactor
    The power line supplies power to these buses:
    − Essential bus
    − Avionics 1 bus
    − Generator 1 bus.

    These systems get the electrical power directly from the power line:
    − Flap system (AMM 12-B-27-50-00-00A-040A-A)
    − Propeller de-ice system (AMM 12-B-30-60-00-00A-040A-A)
    − LH windshield de-ice system (AMM 12-B-30-40-00-00A-040A-A)
    − Cabin heating system (AMM 12-B-21-40-00-00A-040A-A)

    2.2 Secondary Power Line


    The Secondary Power Line (SPL) is the source electrical power with the second highest level of integrity. The DC
    power is supplied to the SPL from one of these four sources:
    − Batteries 1 and 2 through battery 1 and 2 contactors and the bus tie contactor
    − The external power through the external power contactor
    − Generator 1 through generator 1 contactor and the bus tie contactor
    − Generator 2 through generator 2 contactor

    The SPL supplies power to these buses:


    − Main bus
    − Avionics 2 bus
    − Generator 2 bus
    − Non-essential bus
    − Cabin bus.

    These systems get the electrical power directly from the SPL:
    − Landing gear extension/retraction system (AMM 12-B-32-30-00-00A-040B-A)
    − RH windshield de-ice system (AMM 12-B-30-40-00-00A-040A-A)
    − Under-floor heating system (AMM 12-B-21-40-00-00A-040A-A)
    − Vapor Cooling Cycle System (VCCS) compressor system (if installed) (AMM12-B-21-50-00-00A-040A-A)
    − Logo lights (if installed) (AMM 12-B-33-45-00-00A-040A-A)
    − Foot-warmer system (if installed) (AMM 12-B-21-40-00-00A-040A-A).

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-24-52-00-00A-040B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-09-20 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.3 Generator 1 Bus


    Generator 1 bus has the third highest level of integrity and is dedicated to generator 1. Under normal conditions
    and when generator 2 is off-line the generator 1 bus is powered from generator 1. When generator 1 is off-line the
    generator 1 bus is not powered.
    Generator 1 bus supplies power to non-essential equipment, which can be safely used if generator 2 fails.
    The Modular Avionics Unit (MAU) monitors the generator 1 bus voltage. If generator 1 voltage is out of limits, failure
    caution messages are shown on the Crew-Alerting System (CAS) window of the Multi-Function Display (MFD).

    2.4 Generator 2 Bus


    Generator 2 bus has the third highest level of integrity and is dedicated to generator 2.
    In normal conditions and when generator 1 is off-line the generator 2 bus is powered from generator 2. When
    generator 2 is off-line the generator 2 bus is not powered.
    Generator 2 bus supplies power to non-essential equipment, which can be safely used if generator 1 fails.
    The generator 2 bus voltage is monitored by the MAU. If generator 2 voltage is out of limits, failure caution
    messages are shown on the CAS window of the MFD.

    2.5 Hot Battery Bus


    The Hot battery bus is installed in the Battery External Power Junction Bus (BEPJB) in the rear fuselage. The hot
    battery bus is powered from battery 1. The hot battery bus supplies power to the systems, which must stay
    powered when the aircraft is powered down.

    2.6 Essential Bus


    The Essential (Ess) bus has the highest level of integrity. The essential bus can be supplied from one of the two
    generators or from the two batteries. In normal operating conditions it is powered from generator 1. If generator 1 is
    off line (abnormal condition) then generator 2 supplies the power to the essential bus. If the two generators are off
    line (emergency condition) the two batteries supply the essential bus.
    The essential bus voltage is monitored by the MAU. Failures are shown on the CAS window of the MFD.

    2.7 Non Essential Bus


    The Non Essential bus has the fourth level of integrity. Under normal conditions, the non-essential bus is powered
    from generator 2. If one of the two generators is off-line, the non-essential bus is de-energized. The non-essential
    bus supplies power to equipment that can be switched off if there is a single generator failure.
    The non-essential bus voltage is monitored by the MAU. Failures are shown on the CAS window of the MFD. If one
    of the two generators is off-line then the caution messages are not shown.

    2.8 Avionic 1 Bus


    The Avionic 1 bus (AV1) has the highest level of integrity. The Avionic 1 bus can be supplied from one of the two
    generators or by the two batteries. In normal operating conditions it is powered from generator 1. If generator 1 is
    off line (abnormal condition) then generator 2 supplies the power to the Avionic 1 bus. If the two generators are off
    line (emergency condition) the two batteries supply the Avionic 1 bus. This bus is always supplied in normal,
    abnormal and emergency conditions.
    A two-position switch installed in the EPMP controls the avionic 1 bus.The switch caption is AV1 BUS. When the
    AV1 BUS switch is set to ON the AV1 contactor in the Left Hand Power Junction Box (LHPJB) closes and the

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-24-52-00-00A-040B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-09-20 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    avionic 1 bus is powered from the power line. When the AV1 BUS switch is set to OFF the AV1 contactor opens
    and the avionic 1 bus is de-energized.
    The Avionic 1 bus voltage is monitored by the MAU. Failures are shown on the CAS window of the MFD.

    2.9 Avionic 2 Bus


    The Avionic 2 (AV2) bus has the second highest level of integrity. The avionics 2 bus can be supplied by one of the
    two generators. In normal operating conditions it is supplied by generator 2. In abnormal conditions it is supplied
    from generator 1. This bus is supplied under normal and abnormal conditions. In emergency conditions the AV2
    contactor automatically opens, load shedding the avionic 2 bus.
    A two-position switch installed in the OCP controls the Avionic 2 bus. The switch caption is AV2 BUS. When the
    AV2 BUS switch is set to ON the AV2 contactor in the Right Hand Power Junction Box (RHPJB) closes and the
    Avionic 2 bus is powered from the SPL. When the AV2 BUS switch is set to OFF the AV2 contactor opens and the
    Avionic 2 bus is de-energized.
    If one of the two generators is off-line or the AV2 BUS switch on the OCP is set to OFF then the caution message
    is not shown. The Avionic 2 bus voltage is monitored by the MAU. Caution messages are shown on the CAS
    window of the MFD.

    2.10 Main Bus


    The Main bus has the second highest level of integrity. The Main bus can be supplied by one of the two generators.
    In normal operating conditions it is supplied by generator 2. In abnormal conditions it is supplied from generator 1.
    This bus is supplied in normal and abnormal conditions. In emergency conditions the Main bus contactor
    automatically opens, load shedding the main bus.
    The Main bus voltage is monitored by the MAU. Failures are shown on the CAS window of the MFD. If one of the
    two generators is off line then the caution message is not shown.

    2.11 Standby Bus


    The Standby Power Bus (SPB) supplies 28 VDC to avionics equipment, which lets the pilot, do pre-flight planning
    and air traffic control communication tasks without powering up the aircraft bus bars.
    A two-position switch installed in the OCP controls the SPB. The switch caption is STBY BUS. A blue LED ON
    indicator light is adjacent to the switch. The blue LED ON light comes on when 28 VDC is connected to the
    Standby bus bar.
    When the switch is set to ON, the standby power relay in the BEPJB energizes and the SPB is powered from the
    Hot Battery bus. After engine start and the avionic 1 bus is energized, the standby bus relay in the LHPJB
    energizes and the SPB is powered from the avionic 1 bus.
    During emergency operation the pilot can switch off the AV1 bus and the SPB will still operate.
    DC power is supplied to the standby-power system from one of these two sources:
    − Battery 1 through the hot battery bus
    − The avionic 1 bus.

    The standby bus voltage is monitored by the MAU. Failures are shown on the CAS window of the MFD.

    2.12 EPS Bus


    The EPS bus supplies power to the applicable equipment when there is total loss of electrical power. The total loss
    of power is loss of the two generators and the two aircraft batteries. The EPS has a dedicated battery, which

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-24-52-00-00A-040B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-09-20 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    supplies sufficient power to supply all the necessary emergency backup systems for 30 minutes. The essential bus
    supplies power to the EPS battery to keep maximum charge.
    A three-position switch installed on the OCP controls the EPS (AMM 12-B-24-52-51-00A-040A-A).

    2.13 Cabin Bus


    The Cabin bus has the fourth level of integrity. In normal operation conditions generator 2 supplies the Cabin bus. If
    one of the two generators is off line then the Cabin bus is switched off.
    The Cabin bus supplies the auxiliary non-flight related equipment in the passenger compartment. All these
    functions are not available if there is a single generator failure.
    A two-position switch installed in the OCP controls the cabin bus. The switch caption is CABIN BUS. When the
    CABIN BUS switch is set to OFF the cabin bus is de-energized.

    2.14 Front Right Circuit Breaker Panel


    The front right circuit breaker panel is installed on the right of the flight compartment. The panel has all the circuit
    breakers of the systems, which get electrical power from the Main bus and Non Essential bus bars.

    2.15 Front Left Circuit Breaker Panel


    The front left circuit breaker panel is installed on the left of the flight compartment. The panel has all the circuit
    breakers of the systems, which get electrical power from the Essential bus bar.

    2.16 Rear Right Circuit Breaker Panel


    The rear right circuit breaker panel is installed on the right of the flight compartment. The panel has all the circuit
    breakers of the systems, which get electrical power from the Avionics 2 bus bar, Cabin bus and Generator 2 bus
    bar.

    2.17 Rear Left Circuit Breaker Panel


    The rear left circuit breaker panel is installed on the left of the flight compartment. The panel has all the circuit
    breakers of the systems, which get electrical power from the Avionics 1 bus, EPS bus, Generator 1 bus and
    Standby bus bars.

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-24-52-00-00A-040B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-09-20 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    MASTER
    POWER
    VOLTAGE VOLTAGE
    REGULATOR 1 OFF REGULATOR 2
    GEN 1 GEN 2
    GEN 1 GEN 2
    ON
    STARTER STARTER
    ON RELAY A ON RELAY
    OFF GENERATOR 1 MAIN START GENERATOR 2 OFF
    GEN 1 CTL GEN 2 CTL
    CONTACTOR CONTACTOR CONTACTOR

    GEN 1 GEN 2
    SEC START
    ON CB1 ON
    POWER LINE CONTACTOR SECONDARY POWER LINE
    U/FLOOR HTR

    GEN 1 BUS CABIN BUS


    BUS TIE CONTACTOR CB2
    CONTACTOR
    CABIN BUS FOOT WARMER
    GEN 1 BUS CONTACTOR
    NON-ESS BUS
    EPS BATTERY CONTACTOR

    ESS BUS NON-ESS BUS FOOT WARMER

    GEN 2 BUS
    EPS RELAY
    CB1 CONTACTOR CB5

    CABIN HEATING EPS BUS GEN 2 BUS RH W/SHLD

    CB3 CB6
    AV 1 BUS AV 1 BUS LANDING GEAR
    PROP DE-ICE
    CONTACTOR POWER

    CB4
    AV 2 BUS AV 2 BUS
    LH W/SHLD
    CONTACTOR
    CB9
    CB6 VCCS
    CB5
    CPRSR POWER
    FLAP POWER
    MAIN BUS MAIN BUS
    CONTACTOR

    CB8
    STBY BUS STANDBY BUS
    LOGO LIGHT
    RELAY
    OFF

    A
    STBY POWER
    RELAY STANDBY
    ON
    POWER

    BATTERY 1 BATTERY 2
    OFF OFF
    CB1
    A A
    BATTERY 1 EXTERNAL PWR BATTERY 2
    CONTACTOR CONTACTOR CONTACTOR
    ON
    HOT BATTERY
    BUS
    EXTERNAL PWR
    BATTERY 1 BATTERY 2
    CONNECTOR
    ON

    ENGINE
    START
    12-B-245200-A-S4080-20020-A-01-1

    Figure 1 DC Load Distribution – Schematic

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-24-52-00-00A-040B-A
    LANDING GEAR
    End of data module
    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-09-20 Page 7
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-24-52-00-00A-040B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-09-20 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    LEFT POWER JUNCTION BOX

    ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Table of Contents Page

    LEFT POWER JUNCTION BOX - ADJUSTMENT/TEST........................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required
    Maintenance box Part 985.99.99.610 As
    required
    Multimeter Part Local supply As
    required
    Jumper wire Part Local supply As
    required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-52-10-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-22 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1
    WARNING

    MAKE SURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO SUPPLY ELECTRICAL POWER. CIRCUITS THAT ARE NOT SAFE
    CAN CAUSE INJURY TO PERSONS AND/OR DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

    Obey the safety precautions given in DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.


    2 Open and install a Safety clip (circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065) on these circuit breakers:
    − CABIN HTR (LEFT POWER JUNCTION BOX)
    − GEN 1 (LPJB)
    − PROP DE-ICE (LPJB)
    − LH W/SHLD (LPJB)
    − FLAP PWR (LPJB)
    − AV STBY PWR (LPJB)
    − AV 1 (LPJB)
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − IGNITION (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − FUEL CTL (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − LH FUEL PUMP (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − RH FUEL PUMP (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    3 Open access panels:
    − 21 QZ
    − 43 AL
    − 43 AR
    − 11 DZ

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-52-10-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-22 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    4 Disconnect wire P46A00 from Generator 2. Isolate the terminal lug and make sure that it does not touch the
    structure or other metal components.
    5 Connect the Maintenance box (Pt.No. 985.99.99.610) to the maintenance panel.
    6 Make sure that Battery 1 and Battery 2 are connected.

    Note

    In the test procedure that follows, use the Master Warning or Caution button on the glareshield to
    acknowledge the generated warning or cautions.

    7 Connect external power to the aircraft. Make sure that, on the Overhead Panel (OHP), the EXT PWR AVAIL
    LED is ON.
    8 On the OHP set these switches to off:
    − AV 1 BUS
    − AV 2 BUS
    9 On the OHP set the STBY BUS switch to ON. Make sure that the blue STBY BUS ON LED is ON.
    10 Make sure that the lower MFD powers up.
    11 Wait until the Pre-Departure Clearance mode is shown on the MFD, then on the OHP set the BAT 2 switch to
    ON.
    12 Make sure that:
    − the pilot Primary Flight Display (PFD) comes on
    − the CAS caution message Bus Tie is not shown (swap the MFD display to see the CAS messages).
    13 On the OHP, open the BUS TIE circuit breaker and make sure that:
    − the pilot PFD is off
    − the CAS caution message Bus Tie is ON.
    14 Close the BUS TIE circuit breaker. Make sure that:
    − the pilot PFD comes on
    − the CAS caution message Bus Tie is off.
    15 On the OHP, set the BAT 2 switch to off and make sure that the pilot PFD powers off.
    16 Wait approximately 10 seconds after power off, then on the OHP set the BAT 1 switch to ON.
    17 Make sure that:
    − the pilot PFD comes on
    − the CAS caution message Essential Bus is off
    − the CAS caution message Standby Bus is off
    − the CAS caution message Avionic 1 Bus is ON
    − the CAS caution message FLT CTLR Ch A Fail is ON.
    18 On the OHP set the BAT 2 switch to ON.
    19 On the OHP set the EXT PWR switch to ON and make sure that:
    − the blue EXT PWR ON LED is ON
    − the MFD Battery 1 and Battery 2 voltage shows more than 25 VDC
    − the MFD battery 1 and Battery 2 currents show positive.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-52-10-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-22 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    20 Make sure that the MAIN circuit breaker on the RHPJB is closed.
    21 On the Reversion Control Panel (RCP) set the LOWER MFD rotary control to OFF/REV.
    22 On the OHP set the AV 1 BUS switch to ON and make sure that the CAS caution message Avionic 1 Bus is
    ON.
    23 Remove the safety clip and close the circuit breaker AV 1 on the LHPJB. Make sure that:
    − the CAS caution message Avionic 1 Bus is off
    − the CAS caution message FLT CTLR Ch A Fail is off
    − the OHP blue STBY BUS ON LED is off
    − the CAS caution message Standby Bus is ON.
    24 Close the AV STBY PWR circuit breaker and make sure that the CAS caution message Standby Bus is off.
    25 On the RCP set the LOWER MFD rotary control to ON.
    26 On the Maintenance box set the BUS TIE RCCB switch to DIR+ and make sure that:
    − the OHP BUS TIE circuit breaker opens
    − the CAS caution message Bus Tie is ON.
    27 Close the OHP BUS TIE circuit breaker and make sure that the CAS caution message Bus Tie is off.
    28 On the Maintenance box set the BUS TIE RCCB switch to DIR- and make sure that:
    − the OHP BUS TIE circuit breaker opens
    − the CAS caution message Bus Tie is ON.
    29 Close the OHP BUS TIE circuit breaker and make sure that:
    − the CAS caution message Bus Tie is off
    − the CAS caution message Generator 1 Bus is ON.
    30 Close the GEN 1 circuit breaker and make sure that the CAS caution message Generator 1 Bus is off.
    31 Switch the pilot map light ON and make sure that the map light is ON.
    32 Switch the pilot map light OFF.
    33 At the left generator panel use a Multimeter (Pt.No. Local supply) to measure the voltage at contactor K001
    terminal A1. The voltage reading is 28 VDC ±1 VDC.
    34 Use a Multimeter (Pt.No. Local supply) to measure the voltage at the LPJB terminal T5. Make sure that the
    voltage is 0 VDC.
    35 Remove the safety clip and close this circuit breaker:
    − CABIN HTR (LPJB).
    36 Use a Multimeter (Pt.No. Local supply) to measure the voltage at the LPJB terminal T5. Make sure that the
    voltage is 28 VDC ± 1 VDC.
    37
    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU OPERATE THE FLAP CONTROLS. MAKE SURE THE FLAPS ARE CLEAR.
    INJURY TO PERSONS AND/OR DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT CAN OCCUR.

    Move the flap position lever to 15°. Make sure that the flaps do not move. The CAS caution message Flaps
    will come ON after approximately 7 seconds.
    38 Move the flap position lever to 0°.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-52-10-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-22 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    39 Remove the safety clip and close this circuit breaker:


    − FLAP PWR (LPJB)
    40 Press the Maintenance Panel FLAP RESET switch.
    41 Make sure that the CAS shows no flap related messages.
    42 Move the flap position lever to 15°. Make sure that the flaps move to 15°.
    43 Move the flap position lever to 0°. Make sure that the flaps move to 0°.
    44 On the left cross bar panel, set the ICE PROTECTION - LH WSHLD switch to LIGHT.
    45 After approximately 2 minutes make sure that the left windshield is not heating. The CAS caution message
    LH Windshield Heat is ON.
    46 Remove the safety clip and close this circuit breaker:
    − LH W/SHLD (LPJB)
    47 After approximately two minutes make sure that the left windshield heating is ON and the CAS caution
    message LH Windshield Heat is off.
    48 Set the ICE PROTECTION - LH WSHLD switch to OFF.
    49 On the left cross bar panel, set the ICE PROTECTION - PROPELLER switch to ON.
    50 Make sure that the propeller de-ice boots do not heat for approximately 20 seconds after switch on. The CAS
    Caution message Propeller De Ice comes ON 20 seconds after switch on.
    51 On the left cross bar panel, set the ICE PROTECTION - PROPELLER switch to OFF.
    52 Remove the safety clip and close this circuit breaker:
    − PROP DE-ICE (LPJB)
    53
    CAUTION

    TURN THE PROPELLER SLOWLY BY HAND DURING THIS TEST TO MAKE SURE THAT THE BRUSH
    BLOCK DOES NOT GET TOO HOT.

    On the left cross bar panel, set the ICE PROTECTION - PROPELLER switch to ON.
    54 Make sure that the propeller de-ice boots heat for approximately 20 seconds after switch on and then stop
    heating. The CAS caution message Propeller De Ice is off after approximately 20 seconds after switch on.
    55 On the left cross bar panel, set the ICE PROTECTION - PROPELLER switch to OFF.
    56 On the OHP, set these switches to OFF:
    − EXT PWR
    − BAT 2.
    57 Remove the safety clip and close this circuit breaker:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    58 Use a Multimeter (Pt.No. Local supply) to measure the voltage at the disconnected end of wire P46A00. The
    voltage reading is 0 VDC.
    59 On the OHP, press and release the STARTER pushbutton. Make sure that the PFD green Starter caption is
    ON.
    60 Ten seconds after you press the STARTER pushbutton, use a Multimeter (Pt.No. Local supply) to measure
    the voltage at the disconnected end of wire P46A00. The voltage reading is more than 24 VDC.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-52-10-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-22 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    61 On the OHP, press and release the START INTERRUPT pushbutton.Make sure that the PFD green Starter
    caption is off.
    62 At the underfloor right relay panel, remove relays K162A1 and K162K4. Use a Jumper wire (Pt.No. Local
    supply) to link pin B2 of relay K162A1 to pin B2 of relay K162K4.
    63 Make sure that the PFD green Starter caption is ON.
    64 Remove the jumper wire from pin B2 of relay K162A1 and pin B2 of relay K162K4. Install the relays K162A1
    and K162K4.
    65 Make sure that the PFD green Starter caption is off.
    66 On the OHP, switch these switches to OFF:
    − STANDBY BUS
    − BAT 1.
    67 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    68 On the OHP set the AV 2 BUS switch to ON.
    69 Remove the safety clip and close these circuit breakers:
    − IGNITION (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − FUEL CTL (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − LH FUEL PUMP (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − RH FUEL PUMP (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    70 Open and install a Safety clip (circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065) on this circuit breaker:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    71 Connect wire P46A00 to starter/generator 2.
    72 Disconnect the Maintenance Box from the maintenance panel.
    73 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    74 Close access panels:
    − 21 QZ
    − 43 AL
    − 43 AR
    − 11 DZ.

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-52-10-00A-903A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-22 Page 6
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    LEFT POWER JUNCTION BOX

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    LEFT POWER JUNCTION BOX - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION................................................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 2
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Left Power Junction Box – Removal/Installation.................................................... 5

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-24-52-10-00A-903A-A LEFT POWER JUNCTION BOX - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A FLIGHT COMPARTMENT CREW SEATS - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-10-03-00A-920A-A FLIGHT COMPARTMENT TRIM - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-52-10-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-08-18 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Warning sign Part Local supply As
    required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Cable tie Part P09-005 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Obey the safety precautions given in AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    1.2 De-energize the aircraft electrical system, refer AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    1.3 Put warning signs (Warning sign (Pt.No. Local supply)) around the aircraft to warn "Do not apply
    electrical power".
    1.4 Remove the flight compartment pilot crew seat, refer AMM 12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A.
    1.5 Remove the flight compartment lower left sidewall trim panel, refer AMM 12-B-25-10-03-00A-920A-A.
    1.6 Remove the screws (Figure 1 [14]) and washers (Figure 1 [13]) that hold the LED floodlight mounting
    angle (Figure 1 [12]) on the LH Power Junction Box (LHPJB) (Figure 1 [17]).
    1.7 Temporarily secure the LED floodlight mounting angle (Figure 1 [12]) to the structure away from the
    LHPJB.
    1.8 On the LHPJB forward edge, disconnect electrical connectors A121P1 and A121P2 (Figure 1 [11]).
    1.9 Remove and discard the cable tie from the cable terminal covers.
    1.10 Slide the terminal covers away from the cable terminals.
    1.11 Disconnect these cables from the LHPJB:

    Cable Ident LHPJB Terminal


    P7A2 T4
    H230A6 T5
    P10B10 T6

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-52-10-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-08-18 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1.11.1 Remove the nut (Figure 1 [20]) and washer (Figure 1 [21]) from T4. Disconnect the cable
    (Figure 1 [6]) from the LHPJB.
    1.11.2 Remove the nut (Figure 1 [20]) and washer (Figure 1 [21]) from T5. Disconnect the cable
    (Figure 1 [7]) from the LHPJB.
    1.11.3 Remove the nut (Figure 1 [20]) and washer (Figure 1 [21]) from T6. Disconnect the cable
    (Figure 1 [5]) from the LHPJB.
    1.12 Hold the LHPJB (Figure 1 [17]) and remove the four mounting screws (Figure 1 [18]) and washers
    (Figure 1 [19]).
    1.13 Support the LHPJB (Figure 1 [17]) and disconnect these cables from the outboard side of the junction
    box:

    Cable Ident LHPJB Terminal


    P11A10 T1
    1P4A00 T2
    P5A00 T3
    1.13.1 Remove the nut (Figure 1 [9]) and washer (Figure 1 [10]) from T1. Disconnect the cable
    (Figure 1 [8]) from the LHPJB.
    1.13.2 Remove the nut (Figure 1 [1]) and washer (Figure 1 [2]) from T2. Disconnect the cable
    (Figure 1 [3]) from the LHPJB.
    1.13.3 Remove the nut (Figure 1 [1]) and washer (Figure 1 [2]) from T3. Disconnect the cable
    (Figure 1 [4]) from the LHPJB.
    1.14 Remove the LHPJB (Figure 1 [17]) from the aircraft.
    2 Installation
    2.1
    Note

    To identify the consumable items used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items AMM 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Hold the LHPJB (Figure 1 [17]) and connect these cables on the outboard side of the junction box:

    Cable Ident LHPJB Terminal


    P11A10 T1
    1P4A00 T2
    P5A00 T3
    2.1.1
    Note

    Torque all of the nuts installed in Step 2.1.1 thru Step 2.1.3 to 9,2 Nm ± 10% (6.8 lb ft ±
    10%).

    Connect the cable (Figure 1 [8]) to the LHPJB. Install the nut (Figure 1 [9]) and washer
    (Figure 1 [10]) on T1.
    2.1.2 Connect the cable (Figure 1 [3]) to terminal T2 on the LHPJB. Install the nut (Figure 1 [1])
    and washer (Figure 1 [2]).
    2.1.3 Connect the cable (Figure 1 [4]) to terminal T3 on the LHPJB. Install the nut (Figure 1 [1])
    and washer (Figure 1 [2]).
    2.1.4 Slide the terminal covers over the LHPJB terminals T1, T2 and T3.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-52-10-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-08-18 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.1.5 Install cable ties (Cable tie (Pt.No. P09-005)) to hold the terminal covers in position.
    2.2 Hold the LHPJB (Figure 1 [17]) in position and install the four mounting screws (Figure 1 [18]) and
    washers (Figure 1 [19]).
    2.3 Connect these cables to the LHPJB:

    Cable Ident LHPJB Terminal


    P7A2 T4
    H230A6 T5
    P10B10 T6
    2.3.1
    Note

    Torque all of the nuts installed in Step 2.3.1 thru Step 2.3.3 to 9,2 Nm ± 10% (6.8 lb ft ±
    10%).

    Connect the cable (Figure 1 [6]) to the LHPJB. Install the nut (Figure 1 [20]) and washer
    (Figure 1 [21])on T4.
    2.3.2 Connect the cable (Figure 1 [7]) to the LHPJB. Install the nut (Figure 1 [20]) and washer
    (Figure 1 [21]) on T5.
    2.3.3 Connect the cable (Figure 1 [5]) to the LHPJB. Install the nut (Figure 1 [20]) and washer
    (Figure 1 [21]) on T6.
    2.3.4 Slide the terminal covers over the LHPJB terminals.
    2.3.5 Install cable ties (Cable tie (Pt.No. P09-005)) to hold the terminal covers in position.
    2.4 At the forward edge of the LHPJB connect electrical connectors A121P1 and A121P2 (Figure 1 [11]).
    2.5 Install the LED floodlight mounting angle (Figure 1 [12]) on the LHPJB with the screws (Figure 1 [14])
    and washers (Figure 1 [13]).
    2.6 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.7 Remove the warning signs from around the aircraft.
    2.8 Do the test of the LHPJB, refer AMM 12-B-24-52-10-00A-903A-A.
    2.9 Install the flight compartment left bottom sidewall trim, refer AMM 12-B-25-10-03-00A-920A-A.
    2.10 Install the flight compartment pilot crew seat, refer AMM 12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-52-10-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-08-18 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FRAME 13

    FRAME 12

    FRAME 12

    9
    10 A
    FRAME 13
    11
    1
    2 8

    3 7
    6
    5

    14
    12 13

    4
    15
    16

    17

    21
    20

    19
    18
    12-A-245210-A-S4080-20019-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Left Power Junction Box – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-52-10-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-08-18 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-52-10-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-08-18 Page 6
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    RIGHT POWER JUNCTION BOX – HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR

    ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Table of Contents Page

    RIGHT POWER JUNCTION BOX – HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR - ADJUSTMENT/TEST.... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required
    Maintenance box Part 985.99.99.610 As
    required
    Multimeter Part Local supply As
    required
    Ampere probe Part Local supply As
    required
    Jumper wire Part Local supply As
    required

    Effectivity: HYDRAULIC LANDING


    12-B-24-52-20-00A-903A-A
    GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-22 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Obey the safety precautions given in AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    2 Open and install a Safety clip (circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065) on these circuit breakers:
    − N ESS (RIGHT HAND POWER JUNCTION BOX)
    − AV 2 (RHPJB)
    − MAIN (RHPJB)
    − U/FLOOR HTR (RHPJB)
    − HYD PWR (RHPJB)
    − GEN 2 (RHPJB)
    − F/WARMER (RHPJB) (if installed)
    − RH W/SHLD (RHPJB)
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − IGNITION (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − FUEL CTL (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − LH FUEL PUMP (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − RH FUEL PUMP (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − FLT CONT CH B (AVIONIC 2 BUS)
    − TAXI LIGHT CTL (GENERATOR 2 BUS)
    − MAINT I/F (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − FOOT WARMER (NON ESSENTIAL BUS) (if installed).
    3 Open access panels:
    − 21 QZ
    − 43 AL
    − 43 AR
    − 11 DZ.

    Effectivity: HYDRAULIC LANDING


    12-B-24-52-20-00A-903A-A
    GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-22 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    4 Disconnect wire P46A000 from Generator 2. Isolate the terminal lug and make sure that it does not touch the
    structure or other metal components.
    5 Connect the Maintenance box (Pt.No. 985.99.99.610) to the maintenance panel.
    6 Make sure that Battery 1 and Battery 2 are connected.

    Note

    In this test procedure use the master warning or caution button on the glareshield to acknowledge generated
    warnings and cautions.

    7 Connect external power to the aircraft. Make sure that the green EXT PWR AVAIL LED on the Overhead
    panel (OHP) is ON.
    8 On the OHP set these switches to OFF:
    − CABIN BUS
    − AV 1 BUS
    − AV 2 BUS.
    9 On the OHP set the STBY BUS switch to ON.
    10 Make sure that the lower Multi Function Display (MFD) powers up.
    11 Wait until the Pre-Departure Clearance mode is shown on the MFD then on the OHP set the BAT 2 switch to
    ON. Make sure that:
    − the pilot Primary Flight Display (PFD) powers up
    − the Battery 2 voltage is 24 VDC ±3 VDC
    − the Battery 2 current reading is negative.
    12 On the OHP set the BAT 1 switch to ON.
    13 On the OHP set the EXT PWR switch to ON and make sure that:
    − the blue EXT PWR ON LED is ON
    − the MFD Battery 1 and Battery 2 voltages show more than 25 VDC
    − the MFD Battery 1 and Battery 2 currents show positive.
    14 Use a Multimeter (Pt.No. Local supply) to measure the voltage between RHPJB terminal T6 and ground. The
    voltage reading is 0 VDC.
    15 Remove the safety clip and close this circuit breaker:
    − HYD PWR (RHPJB)
    16 Use a Multimeter (Pt.No. Local supply) to measure the voltage between RHPJB terminal T6 and ground. The
    voltage reading is 28 VDC ±1 VDC.
    17 Use a Multimeter (Pt.No. Local supply) to measure the voltage between RHPJB terminal T7 and ground. The
    voltage reading is 0 VDC.
    18 Remove the safety clip and close this circuit breaker:
    − U/FLOOR HTR (RHPJB)
    19 Use a Multimeter (Pt.No. Local supply) to measure the voltage between RHPJB terminal T7 and ground. The
    voltage reading is 28 VDC ±1 VDC.
    20 Make sure that the CAS caution message Main Bus is ON.
    21 On the OHP set the WING inspection light switch to ON. Make sure that the wing inspection light is off.

    Effectivity: HYDRAULIC LANDING


    12-B-24-52-20-00A-903A-A
    GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-22 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    22 Remove the safety clip and close this circuit breaker:


    − MAIN (RHPJB)
    23 Make sure that:
    − the CAS Main Bus caution message is off
    − the wing inspection light is ON.
    24 On the OHP set the WING inspection light switch to OFF. Make sure that the wing inspection light is off.
    25 On the left cross bar panel, set the ICE PROTECTION - RH WSHLD switch to HEAVY. Make sure that after
    approximately two minutes the right windshield heat is off.
    26 Remove the safety clip and close this circuit breaker:
    − RH W/SHLD (RHPJB)
    27 Make sure that after approximately two minutes the right windshield heat is ON.
    28 On the left cross bar panel, set the ICE PROTECTION - RH WSHLD switch to OFF.
    29 Remove the safety clip and close this circuit breaker:
    − FLT CONT CH B (AVIONIC 2 BUS)
    30 On the CAS window make sure that the Flt Ctlr Ch A+B Fail caution message is ON.
    31 On the OHP set the AV 2 BUS switch to ON.
    32 Make sure that:
    − the CAS Avionic 1+2 Bus caution message is ON
    − the CAS Flt Ctlr Ch A+B Fail caution message is ON.
    33 Remove the safety clip and close this circuit breaker:
    − AV 2 (RHPJB)
    34 Make sure that:
    − the CAS Avionic 1+2 Bus caution message is off
    − the CAS Avionic 1 Bus caution message is ON
    − the CAS Flt Ctlr Ch A+B Fail caution message is off
    − the CAS Flt Ctlr Ch A Fail caution message is ON.
    35 On the OHP set the AV 2 BUS switch to off. On the CAS window make sure that the Flt Ctlr Ch A+B Fail
    caution message is ON.
    36 Remove the safety clip and close this circuit breaker:
    − TAXI LIGHT CTL (GENERATOR 2 BUS)
    37 Set the Maintenance box aircraft air-ground status to AIR.
    38 Make sure that the CAS caution message Generator 2 Bus is ON.
    39 On the OHP set the TAXI light switch to ON. Make sure that the taxi light is off.
    40 Remove the safety clip and close this circuit breaker:
    − GEN 2 (RHPJB)
    41 Make sure that:
    − the CAS Generator 2 Bus caution message is off
    − the taxi light is ON.
    42 On the OHP set the TAXI light switch to off.

    Effectivity: HYDRAULIC LANDING


    12-B-24-52-20-00A-903A-A
    GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-22 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    43 Set the Maintenance box aircraft air-ground status to AIRCRAFT.


    44 Remove the safety clip and close the circuit breaker:
    − MAINT I/F (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    45 On the OHP set the CABIN BUS switch to ON.
    46 Close the N ESS circuit breaker on the RHPJB. Make sure that:
    − the Maintenance Box green 28 VDC AVAILABLE (NON ESS BUS) LED is ON
    − the CAS Non Essential Bus caution message is off
    − Aircraft with equipment on the Cabin Bus: Equipment on the Cabin Bus (e.g. entertainment system,
    toilet, 110 VAC auxiliary power) operate.
    47 Open the N ESS circuit breaker on the RHPJB.
    48 Make sure that:
    − the Maintenance Box green 28VDC AVAILABLE (NON ESS BUS) LED is off
    − the CAS Non Essential Bus caution message is ON
    − Aircraft with equipment on the Cabin Bus: Equipment on the Cabin Bus (e.g. entertainment system,
    toilet, 110 VAC auxiliary power) does not operate.
    49 Open the GEN 2 circuit breaker.
    50 Close the N ESS circuit breaker on the RHPJB. Make sure that:
    − the Maintenance Box green 28VDC AVAILABLE (NON ESS BUS) LED is off
    − the CAS Non Essential Bus caution message is ON.
    51 Close the GEN 2 circuit breaker.
    52 Make sure that:
    − the Maintenance Box green 28VDC AVAILABLE (NON ESS BUS) LED is ON
    − the CAS Non Essential Bus caution message is off
    − Aircraft with equipment on the Cabin Bus: Equipment on the Cabin Bus (e.g. entertainment system,
    toilet, 110 VAC auxiliary power) operate.
    53 On the OHP set the CABIN BUS switch to OFF.
    54 Aircraft with the Optional Footwarmer System installed:
    54.1 Remove the safety clip and close this circuit breaker:
    − FOOT WARMER (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    54.2 On the right crossbar panel set the FOOT WARMER switch to ON.
    54.3 Use a Multimeter (Pt.No. Local supply) and Ampere probe (Pt.No. Local supply) to measure the
    current in wire H92A8 (from RHPJB connector A122P1A pin 1). Make sure the current reading is 0A.
    54.4 Remove the safety clip and close this circuit breaker:
    − F/WARMER (RHPJB)
    54.5 Measure the current in wire H92A8 (from RHPJB connector A122P1A pin 1). Make sure the current
    reading is 35A ±10A.
    54.6 On the right crossbar panel set the FOOT WARMER switch to OFF.
    54.7 Measure the current in wire H92A8 (from RHPJB connector A122P1A pin 1). Make sure the current
    reading is 0A.
    55 Remove the safety clip and close this circuit breaker:

    Effectivity: HYDRAULIC LANDING


    12-B-24-52-20-00A-903A-A
    GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-22 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)


    56 Use a Multimeter (Pt.No. Local supply) to measure the voltage at cable K002/A1 (aircraft side) at the right
    generator panel. Make sure That the voltage is 28 VDC ±1 VDC.
    57 Measure the voltage at the disconnected end of cable P46A00. Make sure that the voltage is 0 VDC.
    58 On the OHP, press and release the STARTER pushbutton switch. Make sure that the MFD green STARTER
    caption is ON.
    59 Measure the voltage at the disconnected end of cable P46A00. Make sure that the voltage is 28 VDC ±1
    VDC.
    60 Wait for the start sequence to finish (after approximately 80 seconds), then make sure that the MFD green
    STARTER caption is off.
    61 Measure the voltage at the disconnected end of cable P46A00. Make sure that the voltage is 0 VDC.
    62 At the underfloor right relay panel, remove relays K162A1 and K162K4.
    63 Use a Jumper wire (Pt.No. Local supply) to link pin B2 of relay K162A1 to pin B2 of relay K162K4. Make sure
    that the PFD green STARTER caption is ON.
    64 Remove the jumper wire from pin B2 of relay K162A1 and pin B2 of relay K162K4. Make sure that the PFD
    green STARTER caption is off.
    65 Install relays K162A1 and K162K4.
    66 De-energize the aircraft electrical system, AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    67 On the OHP set these switches to ON:
    − AV 1 BUS
    − AV 2 BUS
    − CABIN BUS.
    68 Disconnect and remove the Maintenance Box.
    69 Open and install a Safety clip (circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065) on this circuit breaker:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    70 Connect wire P46A000 to starter/generator 2.
    71 Remove the safety clip and close these circuit breakers:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − IGNITION (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − FUEL CTL (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − LH FUEL PUMP (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − RH FUEL PUMP (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    72 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    73 Close access panels:
    − 21 QZ
    − 43 AL
    − 43 AR
    − 11 DZ.

    Effectivity: HYDRAULIC LANDING


    12-B-24-52-20-00A-903A-A
    GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-22 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: HYDRAULIC LANDING


    12-B-24-52-20-00A-903A-A
    GEAR
    End of data module
    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-22 Page 7
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: HYDRAULIC LANDING


    12-B-24-52-20-00A-903A-A
    GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-22 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    ELECTRO MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR – RIGHT POWER JUNCTION BOX

    ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Table of Contents Page

    ELECTRO MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR – RIGHT POWER JUNCTION BOX - 1


    ADJUSTMENT/TEST..................................................................................................................

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required
    Maintenance box Part 985.99.99.610 As
    required
    Multimeter Part Local supply As
    required
    Ampere probe Part Local supply As
    required
    Jumper wire Part Local supply As
    required

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-24-52-20-00A-903B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-22 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Obey the safety precautions given in AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    2
    WARNING

    BEFORE YOU APPLY ELECTRICAL POWER TO THE AIRCRAFT, ALWAYS MAKE SURE THAT THE
    LANDING GEAR SELECTOR HANDLE AND THE LANDING GEAR POSITION AGREE. IF YOU DO NOT
    THE LANDING GEAR CAN RETRACT . THIS CAN CAUSE INJURY TO PERSONNEL AND DAMAGE TO
    THE AIRCRAFT.

    Open and install a Safety clip (circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065) on these circuit breakers:
    − N ESS (RIGHT HAND POWER JUNCTION BOX)
    − AV 2 BUS (RHPJB)
    − MAIN (RHPJB)
    − U/FLOOR HTR (RHPJB)
    − LDG GEAR PWR (RHPJB)
    − GEN 2 (RHPJB)
    − F/WARMER (RHPJB) (if installed)
    − RH W/SHD (RHPJB)
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − IGNITION (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − FUEL CTL (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − LH FUEL PUMP (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − RH FUEL PUMP (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − FLT CONT CH B (AVIONIC 2 BUS)
    − TAXI LIGHT CTL (GENERATOR 2 BUS)
    − MAINT I/F (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − FOOT WARMER (NON ESSENTIAL BUS) (if installed)

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-24-52-20-00A-903B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-22 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3 Open access panels:


    − 21 QZ
    − 43 AL
    − 43 AR
    − 11 DZ.
    4 Disconnect wire P46A000 from starter/generator 2. Isolate the terminal lug and make sure that it does not
    touch the structure or other metal components.
    5 Connect the Maintenance box (Pt.No. 985.99.99.610) to the maintenance panel.
    6 Make sure that Battery 1 and Battery 2 are connected.

    Note

    In this test procedure use the master warning or caution button on the glareshield to acknowledge generated
    warnings and cautions.

    7 Connect external power to the aircraft. Make sure that the green EXT PWR AVAIL LED on the Overhead
    panel (OHP) is ON.
    8 On the OHP set these switches to OFF:
    − CABIN BUS
    − AV 1 BUS
    − AV 2 BUS
    9 On the OHP set the STBY BUS switch to ON. Make sure that the lower Multi Function Display (MFD) powers
    up.
    10 Wait until the Pre-Departure Clearance mode is shown on the MFD then on the OHP set the BAT 2 switch to
    ON. Make sure that:
    − the pilot Primary Flight Display (PFD) powers up
    − the Battery 2 voltage is 24 VDC ±3 VDC
    − the Battery 2 current reading is negative.
    11 On the OHP set the BAT 1 switch to ON.
    12 On the OHP set the EXT PWR switch to ON and make sure that:
    − the blue EXT PWR ON LED is ON
    − the MFD Battery 1 and Battery 2 voltages show more than 25 VDC
    − the MFD Battery 1 and Battery 2 currents show positive.
    13 Use a Multimeter (Pt.No. Local supply) to measure the voltage between RHPJB terminal T6 and ground. The
    voltage reading is 0 VDC.

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-24-52-20-00A-903B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-22 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    14
    CAUTION

    WHEN THE EMERGENCY LANDING GEAR RELEASE HANDLE IS OPERATED, AN ABNORMAL


    LANDING GEAR SYSTEM CONFIGURATION CAN OCCUR (THE LANDING GEAR SELECTOR HANDLE
    IS IN THE UP POSITION, BUT THE LANDING GEAR IS DOWN). AFTER YOU USE THE EMERGENCY
    LANDING GEAR RELEASE HANDLE, AND BEFORE YOU APPLY ELECTRICAL POWER TO THE
    AIRCRAFT, ALWAYS MAKE SURE THAT THE GEAR SELECTOR HANDLE AND GEAR POSITION
    AGREE. IF YOU DO NOT, THE LANDING GEAR CAN RETRACT IF THE AIRCRAFT SYSTEM IS IN A
    WEIGHT-OFF-WHEELS CONFIGURATION.

    Remove the safety clip and close this circuit breaker:


    − LDG GEAR PWR (RHPJB)
    15 Use a Multimeter (Pt.No. Local supply) to measure the voltage between RHPJB terminal T6 and ground. The
    voltage reading is 28 VDC ±1 VDC.
    16 Use a Multimeter (Pt.No. Local supply) to measure the voltage between RHPJB terminal T7 and ground. The
    voltage reading is 0 VDC.
    17 Remove the safety clip and close this circuit breaker:
    − U/FLOOR HTR (RHPJB)
    18 Use a Multimeter (Pt.No. Local supply) to measure the voltage between RHPJB terminal T7 and ground. The
    voltage reading is 28 VDC ±1 VDC.
    19 Make sure that the CAS caution message Main Bus is ON.
    20 On the OHP set the WING inspection light switch to ON. Make sure that the wing inspection light is off.
    21 Remove the safety clip and close the MAIN (RHPJB)circuit breaker. Make sure that:
    − the CAS Main Bus caution message is off
    − the wing inspection light is ON.
    22 On the OHP set the WING inspection light switch to OFF. Make sure that the wing inspection light is off.
    23 On the left cross bar panel, set the ICE PROTECTION - RH WSHLD switch to HEAVY. Make sure that after
    approximately two minutes the right windshield heat is off.
    24 Remove the safety clip and close the RH W/SHLD (RHPJB) circuit breaker. Make sure that after
    approximately two minutes the right windshield heat is ON.
    25 On the left cross bar panel, set the ICE PROTECTION - RH WSHLD switch to OFF.
    26 Remove the safety clip and close this circuit breaker:
    − FLT CONT CH B (AVIONIC 2 BUS)
    27 On the CAS window make sure that the Flt Ctlr Ch A+B Fail caution message is ON.
    28 On the OHP set the AV 2 BUS switch to ON.
    29 Make sure that:
    − the CAS Avionic 1+2 Bus caution message is ON
    − the CAS Flt Ctlr Ch A+B Fail caution message is ON
    30 Remove the safety clip and close this circuit breaker:
    − AV 2 BUS (RHPJB)
    31 Make sure that:
    − the CAS Avionic 1+2 Bus caution message is off

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-24-52-20-00A-903B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-22 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − the CAS Avionic 1 Bus caution message is ON


    − the CAS Flt Ctlr Ch A+B Fail caution message is off
    − the CAS Flt Ctlr Ch A Fail caution message is ON.
    32 On the OHP set the AV 2 BUS switch to off. On the CAS window make sure that the Flt Ctlr Ch A+B Fail
    caution message is ON.
    33 Remove the safety clip and close this circuit breaker:
    − TAXI LIGHT CTL (GENERATOR 2 BUS)
    34 Set the Maintenance box select aircraft air-ground status to AIR.
    35 On the CAS window make sure that the Generator 2 Bus caution message is ON.
    36 On the OHP set the TAXI light switch to ON. Make sure that the taxi light is off.
    37 Remove the safety clip and close this circuit breaker:
    − GEN 2 BUS (RHPJB)
    38 On the CAS window make sure that the Generator 2 Bus caution message is off.
    39 Make sure that the taxi light is ON.
    40 On the OHP set the TAXI light switch to off.
    41 Set the Maintenance box select aircraft air-ground status to AIRCRAFT.
    42 Remove the safety clip and close the circuit breaker:
    − MAINT I/F (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    43 On the OHP set the CABIN BUS switch to ON.
    44 Close the N ESS circuit breaker and make sure that:
    − the CAS caution message Non Essential Bus is off
    − the Maintenance box green LED 28 VDC AVAILABLE (NON ESS BUS) is ON
    − Aircraft with equipment on the Cabin Bus: Equipment on the Cabin Bus (e.g. entertainment system,
    toilet, 110 VAC auxiliary power) operate.
    45 Open the N ESS circuit breaker and make sure that:
    − the CAS caution message Non Essential Bus is ON
    − the Maintenance box green LED 28 VDC AVAILABLE (NON ESS BUS) is off
    − Aircraft with equipment on the Cabin Bus: Equipment on the Cabin Bus (e.g. entertainment system,
    toilet, 110 VAC auxiliary power) does not operate.
    46 Open the GEN 2 circuit breaker on the RHPJB. Close the N ESS circuit breaker on the RHPJB.
    47 Make sure that:
    − the Maintenance Box green LED 28 VDC AVAILABLE (NON ESS BUS) is off
    − the CAS Non Essential Bus caution message is ON
    48 Close the GEN 2 circuit breaker on the RHPJB.
    49 Make sure that:
    − the Maintenance Box green LED 28 VDC AVAILABLE (NON ESS BUS) is ON
    − the CAS Non Essential Bus caution message is off
    − Aircraft with equipment on the Cabin Bus: Equipment on the Cabin Bus (e.g. entertainment system,
    toilet, 110 VAC auxiliary power) operate.

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-24-52-20-00A-903B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-22 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    50 On the OHP set the CABIN BUS switch to OFF.


    51 Aircraft with Optional Footwarmer System:
    51.1 Remove the safety clip and close this circuit breaker:
    − FOOT WARMER (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    51.2 On the right crossbar panel set the FOOT WARMER switch to ON.
    51.3 Use a Multimeter (Pt.No. Local supply) and Ampere probe (Pt.No. Local supply) to measure the
    current in wire H92A8 (from RHPJB connector A122P1A pin 1). Make sure the current reading is 0A.
    51.4 Remove the safety clip and close this circuit breaker:
    − F/WARMER (RHPJB)
    51.5 Measure the current in wire H92A8 (from RHPJB connector A122P1A pin 1). Make sure the current
    reading is 35A ±10A.
    51.6 On the right crossbar panel set the FOOT WARMER switch to OFF.
    51.7 Measure the current in wire H92A8 (from RHPJB connector A122P1A pin 1). Make sure the current
    reading is 0A.
    52 Remove the safety clip and close this circuit breaker:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    53 Use a Multimeter (Pt.No. Local supply) to measure the voltage at cable K002/A1 (aircraft side) at the right
    generator panel. Make sure that the voltage is 28 VDC ±1 VDC.
    54 Measure the voltage at the disconnected end of cable P46A00. Make sure that the voltage is 0 VDC.
    55 On the OHP, press and release the STARTER pushbutton switch. Make sure that the MFD green STARTER
    caption is ON.
    56 Measure the voltage at the disconnected end of cable P46A00. Make sure that the voltage is 28 VDC ±1
    VDC.
    57 Wait for the start sequence to finish (after approximately 80 seconds), then make sure that the MFD green
    STARTER caption is off.
    58 Measure the voltage at the disconnected end of cable P46A00. Make sure that the voltage is 0 VDC.
    59 At the underfloor right relay panel, remove relays K162A1 and K162K4.
    60 Use a Jumper wire (Pt.No. Local supply) to link pin B2 of relay K162A1 to pin B2 of relay K162K4. Make sure
    that the PFD green STARTER caption is ON.
    61 Remove the jumper wire from pin B2 of relay K162A1 and pin B2 of relay K162K4. Make sure that the PFD
    green STARTER caption is off.
    62 Install relays K162A1 and K162K4.
    63 De-energize the aircraft electrical system, AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    64 On the OHP, set these switches to ON:
    − AV 1 BUS
    − AV 2 BUS
    − CABIN BUS.
    65 Disconnect and remove the Maintenance Box.
    66 Open and install a safety clip (Safety clip (circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on this circuit
    breaker:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-24-52-20-00A-903B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-22 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    67 Connect wire P46A000 to starter/generator 2.


    68 Remove the safety clip and close these circuit breakers:
    − STARTER (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − IGNITION (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − FUEL CTL (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − LH FUEL PUMP (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − RH FUEL PUMP (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    69 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    70 Close access panels:
    − 21 QZ
    − 43 AL
    − 43 AR
    − 11 DZ.

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-24-52-20-00A-903B-A
    LANDING GEAR
    End of data module
    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-22 Page 7
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ELECTRO MECHANICAL


    12-B-24-52-20-00A-903B-A
    LANDING GEAR

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-22 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    RIGHT POWER JUNCTION BOX

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    RIGHT POWER JUNCTION BOX - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 2
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Right Power Junction Box – Removal/Installation.................................................. 6

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-24-52-20-00A-903A-A RIGHT POWER JUNCTION BOX – HYDRAULIC
    LANDING GEAR - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-24-52-20-00A-903B-A ELECTRO MECHANICAL LANDING GEAR – RIGHT
    POWER JUNCTION BOX - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A FLIGHT COMPARTMENT CREW SEATS - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-10-03-00A-920A-A FLIGHT COMPARTMENT TRIM - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-21-07-00A-920A-A TOILET COMPARTMENT - REMOVAL INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-52-20-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-01-10 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required
    Warning sign Part Local supply As
    required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Cable tie Part P09-005 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Obey the safety precautions given in AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    1.2 De-energize the aircraft electrical system, AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    1.3 Put Warning sign (Pt.No. Local supply) in the aircraft to warn "Do not apply electrical power".
    1.4 Remove the flight compartment copilot crew seat, AMM 12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A.
    1.5 Aircraft with a Toilet Compartment. Remove the toilet compartment, AMM 12-
    B-25-21-07-00A-920A-A.
    1.6
    Note

    It may not be necessary to remove the toilet compartment completely. Move the toilet away from the
    sidewall to get access to the flight compartment lower right sidewall trim panel.

    Remove the flight compartment lower right sidewall trim panel, AMM 12-B-25-10-03-00A-920A-A.
    1.7 Remove the screws Figure 1 [20] and washers Figure 1 [19] that hold the LED floodlight mounting
    angle Figure 1 [18] on the RH Power Junction Box (RHPJB).
    1.8 Temporarily secure the LED floodlight mounting angle Figure 1 [18] to the structure away from the
    RHPJB.
    1.9 On the RHPJB forward edge, disconnect electrical connectors A122P1 and A122P2 Figure 1 [1].

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-52-20-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-01-10 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1.10 Remove and discard the cable tie from the cable terminal covers.
    1.11 Slide the terminal covers away from the cable terminals.
    1.12 Disconnect these cables from the RHPJB:

    Cable Ident RHPJB Terminal


    P6A2 T5
    Q61A4 T6
    H201A6 T7
    1.12.1 Remove the nut Figure 1 [14] and the washer Figure 1 [13] from T5. Disconnect the cable
    Figure 1 [11] from the RHPJB.
    1.12.2 Remove the nut Figure 1 [14] and the washer Figure 1 [13] from T6. Disconnect the cable
    Figure 1 [12] from the RHPJB.
    1.12.3 Remove the nut Figure 1 [14] and the washer Figure 1 [13] from T7. Disconnect the cable
    Figure 1 [10] from the RHPJB.
    1.13 Hold the RHPJB Figure 1 [17] and remove the four mounting screws Figure 1 [21] and washers
    Figure 1 [22].
    1.14 Support the RHPJB Figure 1 [17] and disconnect these cables from the outboard side of the junction
    box:

    Cable Ident RHPJB Terminal


    2P3A00 T1
    2P4A00 T2
    P5A00 T3
    P46A00 T4
    1.14.1 Remove the nut Figure 1 [2] and washer Figure 1 [3] from T1. Disconnect the cable
    Figure 1 [4] from the RHPJB.
    1.14.2 Remove the nut Figure 1 [8] and washer Figure 1 [7] from T2. Disconnect the cable
    Figure 1 [9] from the RHPJB.
    1.14.3 Remove the nut Figure 1 [8] and washer Figure 1 [7] from T3. Disconnect the cable
    Figure 1 [6] from the RHPJB.
    1.14.4 Remove the nut Figure 1 [2] and washer Figure 1 [3] from T4. Disconnect the cable
    Figure 1 [5] from the RHPJB.
    1.15 Remove the RHPJB Figure 1 [17] from the aircraft.
    2 Installation
    2.1
    Note

    To identify the consumable items used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items AMM 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Hold the RHPJB and connect these cables on the outboard side of the junction box:

    Cable Ident RHPJB Terminal


    2P3A00 T1
    2P4A00 T2
    P5A00 T3
    P46A00 T4

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-52-20-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-01-10 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.1.1
    Note

    Torque all of the nuts installed in Step 2.1.1 thru Step 2.1.4 to 9,2 Nm ± 10% (6.8 lb ft ±
    10%).

    Connect the cable Figure 1 [4] to terminal T1 on the RHPJB. Install the washer Figure 1 [3]
    and nut Figure 1 [2].
    2.1.2 Connect the cable Figure 1 [9] to terminal T2 on the RHPJB. Install the washer Figure 1 [7]
    and nut Figure 1 [8].
    2.1.3 Connect the cable Figure 1 [6] to terminal T3 on the RHPJB. Install the washer Figure 1 [7]
    and nut Figure 1 [8].
    2.1.4 Connect the cable Figure 1 [5] to terminal T4 on the RHPJB. Install the washer Figure 1 [3]
    and nut Figure 1 [2].
    2.1.5 Slide the terminal covers over the RHPJB terminals T1, T2, T3 and T4.
    2.1.6 Install cable ties (Cable tie (Pt.No. P09-005)) to hold the terminal covers in position.
    2.2 Hold the RHPJB in position and install the four mounting screws Figure 1 [21] and washers
    Figure 1 [22].
    2.3 Connect these cables to the RHPJB:

    Cable Ident RHPJB Terminal


    P6A2 T5
    Q61A4 T6
    H201A6 T7
    2.3.1
    Note

    Torque all of the nuts installed in Step 2.3.1 thru Step 2.3.3 to 9,2 Nm ± 10% (6.8 lb ft ±
    10%).

    Connect the cable Figure 1 [11] to the RHPJB. Install the nut Figure 1 [14] and washer
    Figure 1 [13] on T5.
    2.3.2 Connect the cable Figure 1 [12] to the RHPJB. Install the nut Figure 1 [14] and washer
    Figure 1 [13] on T6.
    2.3.3 Connect the cable Figure 1 [10] to the RHPJB. Install the nut Figure 1 [14] and washer
    Figure 1 [13] on T7.
    2.3.4 Slide the terminal covers over the RHPJB terminals.
    2.3.5 Install cable ties (Cable tie (Pt.No. P09-005)) to hold the terminal covers in position.
    2.4 At the forward edge of the RHPJB connect electrical connectors A122P1 and A122P2 Figure 1 [1].
    2.5 Install the LED floodlight mounting angle Figure 1 [18] on the RHPJB with the screws Figure 1 [20]
    and washers Figure 1 [19].
    2.6 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.7 Remove the warning signs from the aircraft.
    2.8 Do the test of the RHPJB:
    − MSN 1001 to 1299, 1301 to 1450, AMM 12-B-24-52-20-00A-903A-A
    − MSN 1300, 1451 to 9999, AMM 12-B-24-52-20-00A-903B-A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-52-20-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-01-10 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.9 Install the flight compartment right bottom sidewall trim, AMM 12-B-25-10-03-00A-920A-A.
    2.10 Aircraft with a Toilet Compartment. Install the toilet compartment, AMM 12-B-25-21-07-00A-920A-
    A.
    2.11 Install the flight compartment copilot crew seat, AMM 12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-52-20-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-01-10 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FRAME 13

    FRAME 12

    FRAME 12

    2
    3
    FRAME 13

    8
    4 7

    6
    5

    22
    21
    CAL
    CAL
    CAL

    20 CAL
    19 CA CA
    L
    CA
    L 12 9
    18 L CA
    L
    13 11
    14
    10

    17

    16
    15 A

    12-A-245220-A-S4080-20018-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Right Power Junction Box – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-52-20-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-01-10 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-52-20-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-01-10 Page 7
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-52-20-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-01-10 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY (EPS) SYSTEM

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY (EPS) SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION.......... 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 2
    2 Component Description.......................................................................................... 2
    2.1 Emergency Power Supply Unit............................................................................... 2
    2.2 Electrical Connector............................................................................................... 3
    2.3 Emergency Power Supply Switch........................................................................... 3
    2.3.1 ARMED Position..................................................................................................... 3
    2.3.2 OFF Position........................................................................................................... 3
    2.3.3 TEST Position......................................................................................................... 3
    2.4 Light Emitting Diodes.............................................................................................. 3
    2.4.1 Red LED (EPS ON)................................................................................................ 3
    2.4.2 Green LED (TEST)................................................................................................. 4
    2.5 EPS Relays............................................................................................................ 4
    2.5.1 EPS ON Relay........................................................................................................ 4
    2.5.2 EPS LIGHTING Relay............................................................................................ 4
    2.6 EPS Circuit Breakers.............................................................................................. 4
    3 Operation................................................................................................................ 4
    3.1 Normal Operation................................................................................................... 4
    3.2 Normal Circuit Operation........................................................................................ 4
    3.3 Failure Operation.................................................................................................... 5
    3.4 Failure Circuit Operation......................................................................................... 5
    3.5 Test Operation........................................................................................................ 5

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Emergency Power Supply – Component Location................................................. 6


    2 Emergency Power Supply – Schematic................................................................. 8

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-21-30-00-00A-040A-A PRESSURIZATION CONTROL - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-33-10-00-00A-040A-A FLIGHT COMPARTMENT LIGHTS - DESCRIPTION
    AND OPERATION
    12-B-34-26-40-00A-040A-A ELECTRONIC STANDBY INSTRUMENT SYSTEM -
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-52-51-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-17 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Description

    1 General
    If both generators and both batteries fail, or if the Essential bus fails under any operational condition, the
    Emergency Power Supply (EPS) system supplies 30 minutes of electrical power from a 24 VDC battery inside the
    EPS unit to these systems:
    − Cabin Pressure Controller System (CPCS)
    − Electronic Standby Instrument System (ESIS)
    − Oxygen system

    A 5 VDC lighting voltage is supplied to the ESIS, the standby compass and the oxygen gage lighting.
    The 30 minutes of emergency electrical power permits the aircraft to continue with a safe flight and landing.
    The EPS system has these components:
    − EPS unit
    − Electrical connector
    − EPS switch (Three position)
    − Two Light Emitting Diode (LED) indicators
    − Two relays
    − 5 circuit breaker(s).

    The EPS sends outputs to the:


    − Pressurization Control (CPCS channel 1 and passenger oxygen) (refer to DM 12-B-21-30-00-00A-040A-A)
    − ESIS (Refer to DM 12-B-34-26-40-00A-040A-A)
    − ESIS and standby compass lighting (refer to DM 12-B-33-10-00-00A-040A-A).

    The power supply to the EPS is:


    − 28 VDC through the EPS IN (Essential bus) circuit breaker.

    The power supply out of the EPS is:


    − 24 VDC through the EPS OUT circuit breaker
    − 5 VDC through the ESIS and standby compass lighting circuit.

    The EPS is operated by a three position ARMED/OFF/TEST rocker switch. The switch caption is EPS.

    2 Component Description
    (Ref. Fig. 1)

    2.1 Emergency Power Supply Unit


    The EPS unit is installed on a mounting tray, below floor panel 12 BZ and in front of frame 19. A hold-down
    fastener holds the unit in place on its mounting tray.
    On the front of the EPS unit there is an LED, a 25 Amp fuse and a test button. On the rear panel of the EPS unit
    there is an electrical receptacle.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-52-51-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-17 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    The EPS unit contains the electronic circuits necessary to keep the power supply on for 30 minutes after an aircraft
    electrical power supply and battery failure. The unit has 12 rechargeable, heavy-duty, sealed lead acid cells which
    have a total capacity of 5Ah.

    2.2 Electrical Connector


    An electrical connector is installed on the rear panel of the EPS. The connector A183P is the interface between the
    EPS unit and the aircraft systems.

    2.3 Emergency Power Supply Switch


    The EPS rocker switch is installed on the right side of the Electrical Power Management (EPM) panel. The switch
    can be operated to the three possible positions that follow:
    − ARMED
    − OFF
    − TEST

    2.3.1 ARMED Position


    The ARMED position is the top position of the switch. When the switch is in the ARMED position, during normal
    operating conditions, the aircraft essential bus supplies a charging voltage to the EPS unit battery. When there is a
    failure of the aircraft electrical power supply and the battery power, the EPS supply to the ESIS and standby
    compass lighting, the passenger oxygen system and the CPCS channel 1 is connected. The red EPS ON LED
    indicator light adjacent to the EPS switch comes on.

    2.3.2 OFF Position


    The OFF position is the centre position of the switch. The EPS will not operate when the switch is in the OFF
    position.

    2.3.3 TEST Position


    The TEST position is the bottom position of the switch. The TEST position of the switch is centre biased and will
    return to the OFF position when it is released.
    When the test switch is set to the TEST position the TEST LED adjacent to the switch will show green if there is
    50% or more of the electrical power capacity in the EPS unit battery available.

    2.4 Light Emitting Diodes


    There are two LEDs adjacent to the EPS switch as follows:

    LED Color LED Caption


    Red EPS ON
    Green TEST

    2.4.1 Red LED (EPS ON)


    The red LED comes on when the EPS is operating after both generators and both batteries fail.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-52-51-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-17 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.4.2 Green LED (TEST)


    The green LED comes on when the EPS switch is moved to the TEST position and there is 50% or more electrical
    power capacity in the EPS unit battery.

    2.5 EPS Relays


    There are two relays in the EPS system. They are installed between frame 16 and frame 17 below the cabin floor
    on the left-hand relay panel. The relays have the captions that follow:
    − EPS ON relay
    − EPS LIGHTING relay.

    2.5.1 EPS ON Relay


    The EPS ON relay is energized when the EPS switch is in the ARMED position. When the EPS ON relay is
    energized the EPS is connected through the EPS out circuit to the EPS bus if there is an aircraft electrical power
    supply and battery failure. When the EPS ON relay is not energized the EPS bus is connected to the essential bus.

    2.5.2 EPS LIGHTING Relay


    The EPS LIGHTING relay is normally energized when the essential bus is energized. The lighting voltages are
    supplied from the flight compartment light system to the ESIS and the standby compass lighting. When the aircraft
    electrical power supply and battery fail, the EPS LIGHTING relay de-energizes. The 5 VDC from the EPS unit is
    supplied to the ESIS and the standby compass lighting circuits.

    2.6 EPS Circuit Breakers


    There are five circuit breakers in the EPS system, they are installed on the cockpit left-hand circuit breaker panel.
    The circuit breakers have the captions that follow:

    Circuit Identification Number Caption Current Rating


    CB LR2 CPCS CH. 1 3A
    CB LP2 Oxygen 3A
    CB LN2 ESIS 5A
    CB LA4 EPS IN 15 A
    CB LU2 EPS OUT 7.5 A

    3 Operation
    (Ref. Fig. 2)

    3.1 Normal Operation


    During normal operation, the EPS switch is set to ARMED. Aircraft electrical power is supplied to the CPCS circuit
    breaker CB LR2, oxygen circuit breaker CB LP2 and the ESIS circuit breaker CB LN2 from the essential bus. The
    EPS battery is charged from the essential bus.

    3.2 Normal Circuit Operation


    A three-position switch on the Electrical Power management section of the Overhead Control Panel (OCP) controls
    the EPS operation. When the switch is OFF, the EPS On relay is de-energized and electrical power from the
    ESSENTIAL BUS is sent to the EPS BUS through the closed contacts of the EPS ON relay. The ESSENTIAL bus
    charges the EPSU battery. The EPS Lighting relay is energized and the Cockpit Lighting Dim Unit (CLDU) gives

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-52-51-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-17 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    electrical power for the back-up instrument lighting (ESIS, standby compass and oxygen gage). The DC-DC
    converter is not energized. The electrical supply to the EPS Bus and the EPSU battery is protected by the EPS IN
    circuit breaker on the ESSENTIAL BUS.
    When the EPS switch is set to ARMED, the EPS On relay is energized and the EPS BUS electrical power supply is
    from the EPSU battery. When the ESSENTIAL BUS is energized, it charges the EPSU battery. The EPS Lighting
    relay stays energized. The electrical power supply to the EPS BUS is protected by the EPS OUT circuit breaker.

    Note

    The EPSU also has an internal circuit breaker to protect its battery output.

    3.3 Failure Operation


    When there is an aircraft electrical power supply and battery failure, the EPS system supplies 24 VDC to the
    CPCS, oxygen system and ESIS and 5 VDC is supplied to the ESIS and standby compass lighting circuits for 30
    minutes.

    3.4 Failure Circuit Operation


    When the essential bus voltage falls, the low voltage is applied through the EPS IN circuit breaker CB LA4 to the
    EPS unit. When this voltage goes low the EPS unit battery will not be charged and the EPS unit battery is
    connected to the EPS bus. The EPS ON LED comes on because there is a low voltage on the ground side of the
    LED. The EPS LIGHTING relay de-energizes, the EPS unit battery voltage is applied to the EPS bus and the EPS
    5 VDC is applied to the ESIS and standby compass lighting circuit.

    3.5 Test Operation


    The EPS system should be tested before flight, but can be tested at any time. When the EPS switch is momentarily
    set to TEST the EPS system will do the functions that follow:
    1 The EPS unit battery voltage will be supplied through the EPS OUT circuit breaker CB LU2, through the EPS
    rocker switch to the green TEST LED. If the EPS unit battery voltage is 50% or more of its capacity, the
    voltage causes the green TEST LED to come on.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-52-51-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-17 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    MASTER POWER

    A EMERGENCY OFF

    EPS
    EPS ON
    ARMED
    OFF
    TEST
    TEST

    A LED INDICATORS

    C
    B

    7,5 3 3 5 15 15 15

    EPS CPCS EPS


    OXY ESIS 2 4
    OUT CH. 1 IN

    EPS BUS ESSENTIAL BUS

    C B
    12-B-245251-A-S4080-20015-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Emergency Power Supply – Component Location (Sheet 1 of 2)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-52-51-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-17 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FWD
    EPS UNIT

    FR 19

    12-B-245251-A-S4080-20002-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Emergency Power Supply – Component Location (Sheet 2 of 2)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-52-51-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-17 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    EPS LIGHTING
    RELAY
    ESSENTIAL BUS
    ESIS AND
    STANDBY COMPASS COCKPIT
    LIGHTING LIGHTING
    DIM UNIT
    EPS IN

    CB LA4

    ELECTRICAL POWER
    MANAGEMENT PANEL

    EPS ON
    CB LR2
    CABIN PRESSURE
    CONTROL SYSTEM
    CPCS CH.1
    EPS ON
    RELAY
    EPS BUS

    CB LP2

    OXYGEN
    OXYGEN

    CB LN2
    ELECTRONIC
    STANDBY
    ESIS INSTRUMENT

    EMERGENCY POWER
    SUPPLY UNIT
    CONV IN

    5V OUT

    IN

    ARMED
    OFF
    TEST
    CB LU2
    OUT DC TO DC
    CONVERTER
    EPS OUT

    BATTERY
    TEST

    TEST LAMP
    TEST
    SWITCH

    12-B-245251-A-S4080-20016-A-01-1

    Figure 2 Emergency Power Supply – Schematic

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-52-51-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-10-17 Page 8
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY (EPS) SYSTEM

    ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Table of Contents Page

    EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY (EPS) SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST............................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-24-52-51-00A-920A-A EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY (EPS) SYSTEM -
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-52-51-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Operational Test of the Emergency Power Supply (EPS)
    1.1 Make sure that the Overhead Control Panel (OCP) BAT 1 and BAT 2 switches and the EXT PWR
    switch are set to OFF.
    1.2 Set the OCP EPS switch to the TEST position for 5 seconds.
    1.3 Make sure that the green BAT TEST LED indicator light adjacent to the EPS switch and the indicator
    light on the EPS unit come on and stay on for the 5 seconds.
    − If the two indicator lights stay on, continue with Step 1.4.
    − If one of the two or the two indicator lights do not come on, replace the EPS unit (Refer to DM 12-
    B-24-52-51-00A-920A-A).
    1.4 Set the EPS switch to the ARMED position.
    1.5 Make sure that the red EPS ON LED indicator light adjacent to the EPS switch comes on.
    1.6 Set the OCP BAT 1 and BAT 2 switches to ON.
    1.7 Make sure that the red EPS ON LED indicator light goes off.
    1.8 Set the EPS switch to the OFF position.
    1.9 Set the BAT 1 and BAT 2 switches to OFF.

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-52-51-00A-903A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY (EPS) SYSTEM

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY (EPS) SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION..................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Emergency Power Supply (EPS) Unit – Removal/Installation................................ 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-24-52-51-00A-903A-A EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY (EPS) SYSTEM -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A STANDARD CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-52-51-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedure for the removal and installation of the Emergency Power Supply (EPS)
    unit.
    2 Removal
    2.1 Open and install a safety clip (Safety clip (circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on these
    circuit breakers:
    − EPS IN (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − EPS OUT (EPS BUS)
    2.2 Remove the center carpet:
    − for Executive interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − for Standard interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A
    2.3 Remove the floor panel 12 BZ.
    2.4 Loosen the hold-down fastener (Figure 1 [4]) and move it from the EPS unit (Figure 1 [2]).
    2.5 Remove the EPS unit (Figure 1 [2]) from the aircraft.
    3 Installation
    3.1 Put the EPS unit (Figure 1 [2]) on the mounting tray (Figure 1 [3]) and carefully push it in to connect
    the electrical connector at the rear of the unit with the receptacle on the mounting tray (Figure 1 [3]).
    3.2 Put the hold-down fastener (Figure 1 [4]) in position on the EPS unit (Figure 1 [2]) and tighten the
    hold-down fastener (Figure 1 [4]).
    3.3 Make sure the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.4 Remove the safety clip and close these circuit breakers:
    − EPS IN (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − EPS OUT (EPS BUS)
    3.5 Do an operational test of the EPS (Refer to DM 12-B-24-52-51-00A-903A-A).
    3.6 Install the floor panel 12 BZ.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-52-51-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.7 Install the center carpet:


    − for Executive interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − for Standard interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-52-51-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FR. 19

    A
    B

    12-B-245251-A-S4080-20001-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Emergency Power Supply (EPS) Unit – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-52-51-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-52-51-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-24-52-51-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    110 VAC AUXILIARY POWER

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    110 VAC AUXILIARY POWER - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION......................................... 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1
    2 Description.............................................................................................................. 1
    3 Component Description ( and )............................................................................... 2
    3.1 DC-to-AC Inverter................................................................................................... 2
    3.2 110 VAC POWER Switch....................................................................................... 2
    3.3 Auxiliary Power Connectors................................................................................... 2
    4 Operation................................................................................................................ 2

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Component Location.............................................................................................. 3
    2 110 VAC Auxiliary Power System – Schematic...................................................... 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description

    1 General
    The 110 VAC auxiliary power system is an optional installation.
    The 110 VAC auxiliary power system supplies AC power to the passenger cabin and the flight compartment. The
    passengers can use the supply for their personal portable equipment, such as:
    − Notebook/handheld computers
    − Audio and video entertainment systems
    − Portable electronics (MP3-, CD- and DVD-players, video games, etc.)
    − Printers
    − Mobile phone chargers

    2 Description
    The DC-to-AC inverter receives a 28 VDC supply from the CABIN BUS through the 110VAC AUX PWR circuit
    breaker. It converts this 28 VDC supply to an output of 110 VAC when the 110 VAC POWER switch is set to ON.

    Effectivity: 110 VAC AUXILIARY


    12-B-24-60-00-00A-040A-A
    POWER

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    The output from the DC-to-AC inverter is supplied to three socket-type connectors in the passenger compartment
    and one in the flight compartment.

    3 Component Description (Fig. 1 and Fig. 2)

    3.1 DC-to-AC Inverter


    The static inverter has a rectangular metal case with an electrical connector at one end. It is installed under the
    passenger compartment floor on the forward side of frame 32. It is a solid-state static power inverter that operates
    when its control pin is connected to ground through the 110 VAC POWER switch.
    The static inverter changes the input from the aircraft’s 28 VDC supply to an output of 110 VAC. This output
    voltage is constant with an input voltage range from 20 VDC to 36.5 VDC. The output is connected directly to the
    three socket-type connectors in the passenger compartment and one in the flight compartment.
    The static inverter has internal protection circuits that shut down the inverter automatically when:
    − The input voltage is less than 18 VDC
    − The input voltage is more than 37.5 VDC
    − The input voltage connection is reverse polarity
    − There is an internal high ambient temperature

    3.2 110 VAC POWER Switch


    The 110 VAC POWER switch is installed in the flight compartment, on the left Auxiliary Switch Panel. It is between
    the headset connectors and the EMERG COM 1 switch. It is a two-position switch that, when set to ON, connects a
    ground to the control pin on the static inverter.

    3.3 Auxiliary Power Connectors


    The auxiliary power outlets are installed in the cabin wall trim panels. Two connectors are installed on the right side
    of the cabin at frame FR 19 and FR 29. One connector is installed on the left side of the cabin at frame FR 23.
    One auxiliary power connector is installed in the flight compartment on the right console adjacent to the headset
    connectors.
    Each connector is a socket with a self-retaining protective cap.

    4 Operation
    The 110 VAC auxiliary power is available to use when:
    − 28 VDC power is connected to the CABIN BUS and
    − The 110 VAC AUX PWR circuit breaker is closed and
    − The 110 VAC POWER switch is set to ON.

    Effectivity: 110 VAC AUXILIARY


    12-B-24-60-00-00A-040A-A
    POWER

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    25

    C 110V
    AUX
    A PWR

    B
    CABIN BUS

    OUTLET
    SOCKET

    STATIC
    INVERTER

    FR 32 FR 29 FR 23 FR 20
    OUTLET OUTLET
    SOCKET SOCKET

    EMERG AURAL MIC


    COM 1 WARN SELECT

    121 5MHz INHIBIT MASK


    500
    1000
    1500
    A
    psi 2000

    OXYGEN
    SUPPLY PRESSURE

    NORM MIC

    12-B-246000-A-S4080-20120-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Component Location

    Effectivity: 110 VAC AUXILIARY


    12-B-24-60-00-00A-040A-A
    POWER

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    CABIN BUS 28 VDC

    110 VAC
    AUX
    PWR

    DC/AC INVERTER
    TYPE SS50
    ON OFF

    110 VAC
    POWER

    AUXILIARY AUXILIARY
    POWER POWER
    CONNECTOR CONNECTORS
    COCKPIT -RIGHT SIDE

    PNL156J4 J OUT2

    AUXILIARY
    POWER
    CONNECTOR
    -LEFT SIDE

    J OUT1 J OUT4

    12-B-246000-A-S4080-20122-A-01-1

    Figure 2 110 VAC Auxiliary Power System – Schematic

    Effectivity: 110 VAC AUXILIARY


    12-B-24-60-00-00A-040A-A
    POWER
    End of data module
    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    110 VAC AUXILIARY POWER – STATIC INVERTER

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    110 VAC AUXILIARY POWER – STATIC INVERTER - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Static Inverter – Removal/Installation..................................................................... 3

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A STANDARD CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required

    Effectivity: 110 VAC AUXILIARY


    12-B-24-60-01-00A-920A-A
    POWER

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Obey the safety precautions given in DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    1.2 Open and install a clip (Safety clip (circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on this circuit
    breaker:
    − 110 VAC AUX PWR (CABIN BUS)
    1.3 Remove the center carpet:
    − Executive interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − Standard interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A
    1.4 Remove the floor panel 12 KZ.
    1.5 Disconnect the electrical connector (Figure 1 [4]).
    1.6 Remove the four screws (Figure 1 [3]) and washers (Figure 1 [2]).
    1.7 Remove the static inverter (Figure 1 [1]) from the aircraft.
    2 Installation
    2.1 Put the static inverter (Figure 1 [1]) in position and install the screws (Figure 1 [3]) and washers
    (Figure 1 [2]).
    2.2 Connect the electrical connector (Figure 1 [4]) to the static inverter (Figure 1 [1]).
    2.3 Install the floor panel 12KZ.
    2.4 Install the center carpet:
    − Executive interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − Standard interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A
    2.5 Remove the safety clip and close the circuit breaker:
    − 110 VAC AUX PWR (CABIN BUS)
    2.6 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.

    Effectivity: 110 VAC AUXILIARY


    12-B-24-60-01-00A-920A-A
    POWER

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    FRA 31

    A B

    FRA 32

    B
    4

    12-B-246001-A-S4080-20121-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Static Inverter – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: 110 VAC AUXILIARY


    12-B-24-60-01-00A-920A-A
    POWER

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: 110 VAC AUXILIARY


    12-B-24-60-01-00A-920A-A
    POWER
    End of data module
    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    EQUIPMENT AND FURNISHINGS

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    EQUIPMENT AND FURNISHINGS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION.................................. 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1
    1.1 Flight Compartment................................................................................................ 1
    1.2 Passenger Compartment........................................................................................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-25-10-00-00A-040A-A FLIGHT COMPARTMENT - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-25-20-00-00A-040A-A EQUIPMENT AND FURNISHINGS – PASSENGER
    COMPARTMENT - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Description

    1 General
    There are equipment and furnishings in the areas as follow:
    − Flight compartment
    − Passenger compartment

    1.1 Flight Compartment


    The flight compartment equipment and furnishings are contained in the area between the forward pressure dome
    and the passenger compartment (Refer to DM 12-B-25-10-00-00A-040A-A).

    1.2 Passenger Compartment


    (Refer to DM 12-B-25-20-00-00A-040A-A).
    There are two usual configurations for the passenger compartment equipment and furnishings:
    − an executive interior
    − a standard interior

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-00-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-25 Page 1
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-00-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-25 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FLIGHT COMPARTMENT

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    FLIGHT COMPARTMENT - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION............................................... 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1
    2 Component Description.......................................................................................... 2
    2.1 Crew Seats............................................................................................................. 2
    2.2 Flight Compartment Trim........................................................................................ 2
    2.2.1 Curtain and Curtain Track...................................................................................... 2
    2.2.2 Left and Right Bulkheads....................................................................................... 2
    2.2.3 Left and Right Top Sidewalls and Eyebrow Panels................................................ 3
    2.2.4 Left and Right Bottom Sidewalls............................................................................. 3
    2.2.5 Headliner Panel...................................................................................................... 3
    2.2.6 Center Console Covers.......................................................................................... 3
    2.3 Flight Compartment Carpet.................................................................................... 3

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Flight Compartment – Layout................................................................................. 4


    2 Flight Compartment – Crew Seat........................................................................... 5

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description

    1 General
    The flight compartment equipment and furnishings have the main parts as follows:
    − The crew seats
    − The flight compartment trim
    − The flight compartment carpet

    The flight compartment equipment and furnishings have a number of comfort features that give the pilot and copilot
    a good work environment.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-10-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-09-23 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2 Component Description

    2.1 Crew Seats


    The two crew seats are for the pilot and the copilot. The crew seats are installed on seat rails in the flight
    compartment on each side of the center console.
    The pilot or copilot can change the longitudinal position of the crew seat when the track lock lever is held in the
    forward position. The track lock lever is installed on the lower inboard side of the seat. The crew seat armrests can
    be moved up and in to give access to get in and out of the crew seat. There is a stowage box for the life vest
    installed below the seat. The crew seat can be adjusted as follows:
    − Recline position with the recline lever at inboard side of the base for the crew seat
    − Vertical position with the control lever at the front of the crew seat
    − Thigh support with the control wheel at the front of the crew seat
    − A lumbar support with the push control at the outboard bottom of the crew seat back
    − A back cushion with the push control and handle at the inboard bottom of the crew seat back
    − Armrests with the control wheel below the armrest
    − A headrest that moves to the side and turns to one of the six lock positions

    Each crew seat has a four point safety harness. Each harness has two lap straps that can be adjusted and two
    inertia reel shoulder straps.

    2.2 Flight Compartment Trim


    The flight compartment has the main components as follow:
    − The curtain and curtain track or door
    − The left and right bulkheads
    − The left and right top sidewalls and eyebrow panels
    − The left and right bottom sidewalls
    − The headliner panel
    − The center console covers

    2.2.1 Curtain and Curtain Track


    The curtain is installed between the left and right bulkheads and can be used to divide the flight and passenger
    compartments. A strap attached to the curtain is to keep it in the open position. The curtain has slides attached at
    the top that move in the curtain track. The curtain track is installed on the flight compartment overhead panel.
    On aircraft with an executive interior, one of the toilet compartment doors opens forward. This door closes the area
    between the left flight compartment bulkhead and the forward toilet wall.

    2.2.2 Left and Right Bulkheads


    The left and right bulkheads divide the flight compartment from the passenger compartment. The bulkheads are
    installed aft of the pilot and co-pilot positions.
    The left bulkhead has a small cowl at the bottom that covers the balance mechanism for the passenger/crew door.
    A bulkhead almost the same is installed on the right of an aircraft with a standard interior. The toilet compartment
    forward wall makes the right bulkhead on an aircraft with an executive interior.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-10-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-09-23 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    There are hooks that give a place to hang coats, and boxes that are used to stow the pilots and copilots headsets
    and oxygen masks. A fire extinguisher is installed on the forward side of the right bulkhead, behind the copilots
    seat.

    2.2.3 Left and Right Top Sidewalls and Eyebrow Panels


    The left and right top sidewalls and eyebrow panels are installed above the structure and equipment. The top
    sidewalls and eyebrow panels are installed at the sides of the flight compartment between the bottom sidewalls and
    the overhead panel.
    A boom-type map light is installed on each top sidewall.

    2.2.4 Left and Right Bottom Sidewalls


    The left and right bottom sidewalls are installed above the structure and equipment. The bottom sidewalls are
    installed at the sides of the flight compartment from the bottom of the top sidewalls to the floor.
    Each bottom sidewall has a slot for the handheld microphones, a cover for a power junction box, a drink holder and
    a pocket. The Aircraft Flight Manual is kept in the pocket. The left bottom sidewall has the clock, time counter (if
    installed) and a CD storage box installed in it.
    The right bottom sidewall has a maintenance panel cover and an oil reservoir cover installed as part of it.

    2.2.5 Headliner Panel


    The headliner panel is installed above the structure and equipment at the top of the flight compartment. Small
    panels are installed above the center and side support structure of the windscreens.
    The headliner panel has the components as follow installed on it:
    − A handle to help personnel get into and out of the crew seats.
    − Two adjustable air outlets
    − The flight compartment dome lights
    − The flight compartment loudspeakers
    − The pilot and copilot sunvisors
    − A standby compass

    2.2.6 Center Console Covers


    Three panels are installed above the structure and equipment in the center console of the flight compartment.

    2.3 Flight Compartment Carpet


    The flight compartment carpet prevents damage to the flight compartment floor and gives a non slip surface. The
    carpet is installed on the flight compartment floor with hook and loop fasteners and an angle plate at its rear edge.
    The plate makes the step between the flight and passenger compartments.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-10-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-09-23 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A RIGHT
    BULKHEAD

    FLIGHT
    COMPARTMENT
    CURTAIN

    OVERHEAD PANEL

    LEFT
    BULKHEAD

    SAFETY
    HARNESS

    TOP
    SIDEWALL

    CENTER
    CONSOLE

    BOTTOM
    SIDEWALL

    SEAT A
    RAIL
    CREW
    SEAT
    FLIGHT
    COMPARTMENT
    CARPET
    CENTER CONSOLE
    COVERS

    12-B-251000-A-S4080-20062-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Flight Compartment – Layout

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-10-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-09-23 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    ADJUSTABLE
    HEADREST

    THIGH SUPPORT
    D
    CONTROL WHEEL

    ARMREST HEIGHT
    CONTROL WHEEL

    C VERTICAL POSITION
    CONTROL LEVER
    B

    D SEAT FORWARD
    AND BACKWARD
    TRACK LOCK LEVER
    C

    RECLINE
    LIFE VEST LEVER
    STOWAGE BOX

    COPILOT SEAT SHOWN

    BACK CUSHION
    HEIGHT PUSH CONTROL
    AND HANDLE

    LUMBAR PAD
    A
    CONTROL
    PUSH CONTROL
    B
    12-B-251000-A-S4080-20063-A-01-1

    Figure 2 Flight Compartment – Crew Seat

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-10-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-09-23 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-10-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-09-23 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FLIGHT COMPARTMENT CREW SEATS

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    FLIGHT COMPARTMENT CREW SEATS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.................................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Crew Seats – Removal/Installation......................................................................... 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-25-10-03-00A-920A-A FLIGHT COMPARTMENT TRIM - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedures for the removal/installation of the pilot and copilot seats for aircraft as
    follows:
    − Standard interior
    − Executive interior

    The crew seats for aircraft with the standard interior and the executive interior are the same.
    Refer to the Component Maintenance Manual (CMM) 25-11-66 Publication Reference No. SM681 for the
    procedures to do all work on the crew seats.
    2 Removal
    2.1 Pilot Seat
    2.1.1 Remove the left flight compartment bulkhead (Refer to DM 12-B-25-10-03-00A-920A-A).
    2.1.2 Remove the two nuts (Figure 1 [8]), washers (Figure 1 [7]), bolts (Figure 1 [5]) and the four
    front stops (Figure 1 [6]) from the two seat rails (Figure 1 [4]).
    2.1.3 Operate the seat adjustment mechanism to lift the pins (Figure 1 [2]) that lock the seat in
    position.
    2.1.4 Move the seat (Figure 1 [1]) forward to disengage the seat from the four seat rails
    (Figure 1 [3]) and (Figure 1 [4]).
    2.1.5 Release the seat adjustment mechanism.
    2.1.6 Remove the seat (Figure 1 [1]) from the aircraft.
    2.2 Copilot Seat
    2.2.1
    Note

    For aircraft with an executive interior to remove the copilots seat the pilots seat must be
    removed first. For aircraft with a standard interior to remove the copilots seat remove the
    right flight compartment bulkhead.

    Remove the left or right flight compartment bulkhead (refer to DM 12-B-25-10-03-00A-920A-


    A).
    2.2.2 For aircraft with an executive interior do Step 2.1 to remove the pilots seat.
    2.2.3 Remove the two nuts (Figure 1 [8]), washers (Figure 1 [7]), bolts (Figure 1 [5]) and the four
    front (Figure 1 [6]) from the two seat rails (Figure 1 [4]).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.2.4 Operate the seat adjustment mechanism to lift the pins (Figure 1 [2]) that lock the seat in
    position.
    2.2.5 Move the seat (Figure 1 [1]) forward to disengage the seat from the four seat rails
    (Figure 1 [3]) and (Figure 1 [4]).
    2.2.6 Release the seat adjustment mechanism.
    2.2.7 Remove the seat (Figure 1 [1]) from the aircraft.
    3 Installation
    3.1 Copilot Seat
    3.1.1
    Note

    If the two crew seats must be installed, for aircraft with an executive interior the copilots seat
    must be installed before the pilots seat.

    Make sure the rear stops (Figure 1 [6]) are installed on the seat rails (Figure 1 [4]) before the
    seat is installed.
    3.1.2 Put the seat (Figure 1 [1]) in position at the front of the four seat rails (Figure 1 [3]) and
    (Figure 1 [4]). Move the seat rearward to engage the seat with the seat rails.
    3.1.3 Operate the seat adjustment mechanism to lift the pins (Figure 1 [2]) that lock the seat in
    position.
    3.1.4 Move the seat (Figure 1 [1]) as far rearward as the seat will go.
    3.1.5 Release the seat adjustment mechanism.
    3.1.6 Install the four front stops (Figure 1 [6]) with the two bolts (Figure 1 [5]), washers
    (Figure 1 [7]) and nuts (Figure 1 [8]).
    3.1.7 Operate the seat adjustment mechanism. Make sure the seat (Figure 1 [1]) moves easily on
    the four seat rails (Figure 1 [3]) and (Figure 1 [4]) and locks correctly in position.
    3.1.8 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.1.9 For aircraft with an executive interior do Step 3.2 to install the pilot seat.
    3.2 Pilot Seat
    3.2.1 Make sure the rear stops (Figure 1 [6]) are installed on the seat rails (Figure 1 [4]) before the
    seat is installed.
    3.2.2 Put the seat (Figure 1 [1]) in position at the front of the four seat rails (Figure 1 [3]) and
    (Figure 1 [4]). Move the seat rearward to engage the seat with the seat rails.
    3.2.3 Operate the seat adjustment mechanism to lift the arresting pins (Figure 1 [2]).
    3.2.4 Move the seat (Figure 1 [1]) as far rearward as the seat will go.
    3.2.5 Release the seat adjustment mechanism.
    3.2.6 Install the four front stops (Figure 1 [6]) with the two bolts (Figure 1 [5]), washers
    (Figure 1 [7]) and nuts (Figure 1 [8]).
    3.2.7 Operate the seat adjustment mechanism. Make sure the seat (Figure 1 [1]) moves easily on
    the four seat rails (Figure 1 [3]) and (Figure 1 [4]) and locks correctly in position.
    3.2.8 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.2.9 Install the left or right flight compartment bulkhead (refer to DM 12-B-25-10-03-00A-920A-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    A
    1

    B 3

    8
    B
    7
    3
    4
    6

    4
    B

    6 B
    5
    B

    12-B-251001-A-S4080-20064-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Crew Seats – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    CREW SEAT SAFETY HARNESS

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    CREW SEAT SAFETY HARNESS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.............................................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A FLIGHT COMPARTMENT CREW SEATS - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-10-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-29 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Remove the pilots or copilots seat (refer to DM 12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A).
    1.2 Remove the restraint system (refer to CMM 25-11-66 Publication Reference No. SM681, Page Block
    301).
    2 Installation
    2.1 Install the restraint system (refer to CMM 25-11-66 Publication Reference No. SM681, Page Block
    701).
    2.2 Do the operational test of the restraint system (refer to CMM 25-11-66 Publication Reference No.
    SM681, Page Block 101).
    2.3 Install the pilots or copilots seat (refer to DM 12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A).

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-10-02-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-29 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FLIGHT COMPARTMENT TRIM

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    FLIGHT COMPARTMENT TRIM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION................................................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 2
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Curtain and Curtain Track Removal/Installation..................................................... 12


    2 Left Bulkhead – Removal/Installation..................................................................... 13
    3 Left and Right Top Sidewalls and Eyebrow Panels – Removal/Installation........... 14
    4 Left and Right Bottom Sidewalls – Removal/Installation........................................ 15
    5 Overhead Panel – Removal/Installation................................................................. 16
    6 Center Console Covers – Removal/Installation...................................................... 17

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A FLIGHT COMPARTMENT CREW SEATS - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    12-B-32-40-05-00A-920A-A PARK BRAKE VALVE - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-33-00-00-00A-903A-A INTERIOR LIGHTS - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-46-30-03-00A-920A-A MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    12-B-56-14-01-00A-920A-A DIRECT VISION WINDOW - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-10-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-25 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required
    Warning signs (DO NOT Part Local supply As
    CONNECT EXTERNAL required
    ELECTRICAL POWER)

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Thread, safety (Red color) Part P09-006 As
    Required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedures for the removal/installation for those parts of the flight compartment
    trim as follows:
    − The curtain and curtain track
    − The left bulkhead
    − The left and right top sidewall and eyebrow panels
    − The left and right bottom sidewall panels
    − The flight compartment headliner
    − The center console panels
    2 Removal
    2.1 Curtain and Curtain Track (if installed)
    2.1.1 Release the end stop tab and remove the end stop (Figure 1 [3]) from the curtain track
    (Figure 1 [1]).
    2.1.2 Remove the curtain slides and curtain (Figure 1 [4]) from the curtain track (Figure 1 [1]).
    2.1.3 Remove the four screws (Figure 1 [2]) and remove the curtain track (Figure 1 [1]) from the
    flight compartment headliner.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-10-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-25 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.2 Left Bulkhead


    2.2.1
    Note

    The removal procedures are almost the same for the right bulkhead installed on an aircraft
    with a standard interior.
    Remove the pilots oxygen mask from the box (Figure 2 [7]) on the front of the left bulkhead
    (Figure 2 [9]).
    2.2.2 If necessary, remove the pilots headset from the hook (Figure 2 [8]) on the front of the left
    bulkhead (Figure 2 [9]).
    2.2.3 Remove the two screws (Figure 2 [2]) and the special washers (Figure 2 [3]), then remove
    the trim strip (Figure 2 [1]).
    2.2.4 Remove the two screws (Figure 2 [5] from the bottom of the left bulkhead (Figure 2 [9]).
    2.2.5 Hold the left bulkhead (Figure 2 [9]) and release the spring lock (Figure 2 [4]).
    2.2.6 Remove the left bulkhead (Figure 2 [9]) from the aircraft.
    2.3 Left and Right Top Sidewalls and Eyebrow Panels
    2.3.1
    Note

    The removal procedures are almost the same for the left and right top sidewalls, and the left
    and right eyebrow panels.

    Open and install a (Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on this
    circuit breaker:
    − MAP LIGHT (GENERATOR 1 BUS)
    2.3.2 To remove the left top sidewall (Figure 3 [1]) and eyebrow panel (Figure 3 [2]), remove the
    left bulkhead (Refer to Step 2.2). To remove a right top sidewall and eyebrow panel from an
    aircraft, remove the right bulkhead. If a toilet is installed, it is not removed for this procedure.
    2.3.3 Remove the crew seats (refer to DM 12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A), as necessary.
    2.3.4 To remove the left post cover (Figure 3 [21]), remove the screw (Figure 3 [19]) and washer
    (Figure 3 [20]). Pull the post cover (Figure 3 [21]) to release the two-piece fasteners and
    remove the post cover (Figure 3 [21]).
    2.3.5 Release the two-piece fasteners (Figure 3 [8]) and remove the trim assembly for the left top
    sidewall (Figure 3 [7]).
    2.3.6 Release the two-piece fastener (Figure 3 [3]) and remove the trim assembly for the left
    eyebrow (Figure 3 [6]).
    2.3.7 Remove the red safety thread (Figure 3 [23]) from the cotter pin (Figure 3 [22]) on the top
    sidewall panel (Figure 3 [1]).
    2.3.8 To remove the top sidewall panel (Figure 3 [1]), remove the bottom screws (Figure 3 [9]) and
    (Figure 3 [16]), and the washers (Figure 3 [10]) and (Figure 3 [17]). Remove the top screws
    (Figure 3 [13]) and washers (Figure 3 [12]). Remove the front top screw (Figure 3 [14]) and
    washer (Figure 3 [15]).
    2.3.9 Carefully move the left top sidewall (Figure 3 [1]) in and rearward, disconnect the electrical
    connector (Figure 3 [11]). Remove the left top sidewall (Figure 3 [1]) away from the structure.
    2.3.10 Remove the two screws (Figure 3 [5]) and washers (Figure 3 [4]) from the lower end of
    eyebrow panel.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-10-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-25 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.3.11 Remove the two screws (Figure 3 [18]) at upper end of eyebrow panel. Move the left
    eyebrow panel (Figure 3 [2]) downwards and away from structure.
    2.3.12 Loosen the clamp and disconnect the air pipe from the air outlet on the left eyebrow panel
    (Figure 3 [2]).
    2.3.13 Remove the left eyebrow panel (Figure 3 [2]) from the structure.
    2.4 Left and Right Bottom Sidewalls
    2.4.1
    Note

    The removal procedures are almost the same for the left and right bottom sidewalls.
    To remove a left bottom sidewall (Figure 4 [4]), remove the left bulkhead (refer to Step 2.2).
    To remove the right bottom sidewall from an aircraft with a standard interior, remove the right
    bulkhead.
    2.4.2 Remove the crew seats (refer to DM 12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A), as necessary.
    2.4.3 Release the trim assembly for the left bottom sidewall (Figure 4 [12]) and the trim assembly
    for the left eyebrow (Figure 4 [13]) from the two-piece fasteners (Figure 4 [11]) and remove
    the trim assemblies.
    2.4.4 Remove the trim/logo assembly for the center console and the trim assembly for the center
    panel on the center console (refer to Step 2.6).
    2.4.5 Remove the trim assembly for the left front and the left connection trim (refer to Step 2.6).
    2.4.6 Remove the four screws (Figure 4 [1]) and washers (Figure 4 [2]) and remove the left cross
    member panel (Figure 4 [3]).
    2.4.7 Remove the parking brake handle (Figure 4 [18]) (refer to DM 12-B-32-40-05-00A-920A-A).
    2.4.8 Remove the two screws (Figure 4 [5]) and (Figure 4 [17]), and the two washers (Figure 4 [6])
    and (16) from the forward edge of the left bottom sidewall (Figure 4 [4]).
    2.4.9 Remove the screw (Figure 4 [15]) and the washer (Figure 4 [14]) from the hand mic cone.
    2.4.10 Remove the four screws (Figure 4 [7]) and washers (Figure 4 [8]) from the bottom edge of
    the left bottom sidewall (Figure 4 [4]).
    2.4.11
    Note

    If the top sidewall panels have not been removed then do the step that follows.

    Remove the five screws (Figure 4 [9]) and washers (Figure 4 [10]) from the top edge of the
    left bottom sidewall (Figure 4 [4]) as given in Step 2.3.8.
    2.4.12 Carefully lift the rear end of the left bottom sidewall (Figure 4 [4]) over the switch assembly
    and move a small distance inward and backwards. Make sure that the armrest is free from
    the handbrake assembly and the spring clips on the front edge of the left bottom sidewall
    (Figure 4 [4]) are disengaged.
    2.4.13 Move the hand-mic trough-cone through, and release it from, the left bottom sidewall
    (Figure 4 [4]).
    2.4.14 Remove the left bottom sidewall (Figure 4 [4]) from the structure.
    2.5 Flight Compartment Headliner

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-10-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-25 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.5.1
    Note

    Two persons are necessary for this procedure.

    Install Warning signs (DO NOT CONNECT EXTERNAL ELECTRICAL


    POWER) (Pt.No. Local supply) on the external power receptacle and in the flight
    compartment.
    2.5.2 Open and install a clip (Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on the
    circuit breakers as follows:
    − OVHD CTL PNL 1 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − OVHD CTL PNL 2 (MAIN BUS)
    − SERVICE LTS (BAT/EXT POWER JUNCTION BOX in the battery compartment)
    − EXT PWR (BAT/EXT POWER JUNCTION BOX in the battery compartment)
    2.5.3 Remove the curtain (refer to Step 2.1).
    2.5.4 Remove the yoke at the front of the flight compartment headliner.
    2.5.5 Remove the left bulkhead (refer to Step 2.2). Remove the right bulkhead on an aircraft with a
    standard interior.
    2.5.6 Remove the screw (Figure 5 [13]), washer (Figure 5 [12]) and right post panel (Figure 5 [14]).
    2.5.7 Remove the screw (Figure 5 [22]), washer (Figure 5 [21]) and left post panel (Figure 5 [23]).
    2.5.8 Remove the two screws (Figure 5 [17]), handle (Figure 5 [18]) and center post panels
    (Figure 5 [15]) and (Figure 5 [16]).
    2.5.9 Remove the left and right top sidewalls (refer to Step 2.3).
    2.5.10 Release the four fasteners (Figure 5 [2]) on the overhead electrical panel (Figure 5 [1]).
    Carefully slide the overhead electrical panel (Figure 5 [1]) forwards and downwards out of
    the flight compartment headliner and disconnect the four electrical connectors A 140 P1, P2,
    P3 & P4. Remove the overhead electrical panel (Figure 5 [1]).
    2.5.11 Release the screw that locks the left sun visor (Figure 5 [19]). Remove the left sun-visor
    (Figure 5 [19]).
    2.5.12 Remove the three screws (Figure 5 [20]) and left sun-visor flange (Figure 5 [19]).
    2.5.13 Release the screw that locks the right sun visor (Figure 5 [9]). Remove the right sun-visor
    (Figure 5 [9]).
    2.5.14 Remove the three screws (Figure 5 [11]) and right sun-visor-flange (Figure 5 [10]).
    2.5.15 Remove the two aft screws (Figure 5 [8]) and (Figure 5 [26]) and the two washers
    (Figure 5 [6]) and (Figure 5 [27]) from the flight compartment headliner (Figure 5 [24]).
    2.5.16 Carefully lower the flight compartment headliner (Figure 5 [24]) and disconnect the electrical
    connectors (Figure 5 [29]) and (Figure 5 [5]) for the dome lights.
    2.5.17 Disconnect the connectors (Figure 5 [28]) and (Figure 5 [7]) from the overhead speakers.
    2.5.18 Release the clamp (Figure 5 [30]) and disconnect the left air pipe (Figure 5 [31]) from the left
    plenum cap.
    2.5.19 Release the clamp (Figure 5 [4]) and disconnect the right air pipe (Figure 5 [3]) from the right
    plenum cap.
    2.5.20 Carefully remove the flight compartment headliner (Figure 5 [24]) from the aircraft.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-10-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-25 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.5.21 Put the electrical overhead panel (Figure 5 [1]) in position and attach with the four fasteners
    (Figure 5 [2]).
    2.6 Center Console Panels
    2.6.1 Remove the left bulkhead (refer to Step 2.2). Remove the right bulkhead on an aircraft with a
    standard interior.
    2.6.2 Remove the crew seats (refer to DM 12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A).
    2.6.3 Remove the two screws (Figure 6 [19]) and the two washers (Figure 6 [20]) from the left
    center-console panel (Figure 6 [18]).
    2.6.4 Remove the two screws (Figure 6 [3]) and the two washers (Figure 6 [4]) from the right
    center-console panel (Figure 6 [1]).
    2.6.5 Remove the two countersunk screws (Figure 6 [6]) and lift the trim (Figure 6 [2]) away from
    the center console.
    2.6.6 Loosen the four screws on the lower Multi Function Display (MFD) panel (refer to DM 12-
    B-46-30-03-00A-920A-A) by approximately two turns.
    2.6.7
    Note

    The procedure to remove the left center trim out of upper center trim is almost the same as
    that for the right.

    Remove the knob (Figure 6 [27]) on the O2 lever and move the right center trim
    (Figure 6 [28]) out of the upper center trim.
    2.6.8 Remove the four screws (Figure 6 [10]) and washers (Figure 6 [11]) from the end cap
    (Figure 6 [8]).
    2.6.9 Lift the two levers (Figure 6 [7]) and handle (Figure 6 [9]) and carefully slide the end cap
    (Figure 6 [8]) over the seal and remove the end cap (Figure 6 [8]) from the center console.
    2.6.10 Remove the screw (Figure 6 [17]), spring washer (Figure 6 [16]), washer (Figure 6 [15]) and
    control wheel (Figure 6 [14]).
    2.6.11 Remove the four countersunk screws (Figure 6 [21]) from the left center-console panel ((18,
    Fig 6)).
    2.6.12 Remove the screw (22, Fig 6) and washer (23, Fig 6) from the left center-console panel ((18,
    Fig 6), forward of the crossbar.
    2.6.13 Remove the two screws (Figure 6 [13]) and washers (Figure 6 [12]) from the left center-
    console panel (Figure 6 [18]).
    2.6.14 Carefully pull the left center-console panel (Figure 6 [18]) away and rearwards, from the
    center console to disengage the spring clips (Figure 6 [24]) and remove the left center-
    console panel (Figure 6 [18]).
    2.6.15 Remove the four countersunk screws (Figure 6 [5]) from the right center-console panel
    (Figure 6 [1]).
    2.6.16 Remove the screw (Figure 6 [26]) and washer (Figure 6 [25]) from the right center-console
    panel (Figure 6 [1]), forward of the crossbar.
    2.6.17 Remove the two screws (Figure 6 [13]) and washers (Figure 6 [12]) (almost the same as the
    left center-console panel (Figure 6 [18]) from the right center-console panel (Figure 6 [1]).
    2.6.18 Carefully pull the right center-console panel (Figure 6 [1]) away and rearwards, from the
    center console to disengage the spring clips (Figure 6 [24]) and remove the right center-
    console panel (Figure 6 [1]).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-10-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-25 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3 Installation
    3.1 Center Console Panels
    3.1.1 Put the left center-console panel (Figure 6 [18]) in position and make sure the spring clips
    (Figure 6 [24]) are engaged correctly. Loosely install the two screws (Figure 6 [13]) and
    washers (Figure 6 [12]).
    3.1.2 Install the control wheel (Figure 6 [14]), washer (Figure 6 [15]), spring washer (Figure 6 [16])
    and screw (Figure 6 [17]).
    3.1.3 Install the four countersunk screws (Figure 6 [21]) in the left center-console panel
    (Figure 6 [18]).
    3.1.4 Install the screw (22, Fig 6) and washer (23, Fig 6) in the left center-console panel
    (Figure 6 [18]), forward of the crossbar.
    3.1.5 Put the right center-console panel (Figure 6 [1]) in position and make sure the spring clips
    (Figure 6 [24]) are engaged correctly. Loosely install the two screws (Figure 6 [13]) and
    washers (Figure 6 [12]).
    3.1.6 Install the four countersunk screws (Figure 6 [5]) in the right center-console panel
    (Figure 6 [1]).
    3.1.7 Install the screw (Figure 6 [26]) and washer (Figure 6 [25]) in the right center-console panel
    (Figure 6 [1]), forward of the crossbar.
    3.1.8 Lift the two levers (Figure 6 [7]) and handle (Figure 6 [9]) and carefully move the end cap
    (Figure 6 [8]) through the seal on the center console. Use the four screws (Figure 6 [10]) and
    washers (Figure 6 [11]) and install the end cap (Figure 6 [8]) on the center console.
    3.1.9
    Note

    The procedure to install the left center trim on the upper center trim is almost the same as
    that for the right.

    Install the right center trim (Figure 6 [28]) on the upper center trim and install the knob
    (Figure 6 [27]) on the O2 lever.
    3.1.10 Tighten the four screws on the lower Multi Function Display (refer to DM 12-
    B-46-30-03-00A-920A-A).
    3.1.11 Put the trim (Figure 6 [2]) in position and install the two screws (Figure 6 [6]).
    3.1.12 Install the two screws (Figure 6 [19]) and washers (Figure 6 [20]) to hold the left center-
    console panel ((18, Fig 6)) and trim (Figure 6 [2]) in position.
    3.1.13 Tighten the two screws (Figure 6 [13]) and washers (Figure 6 [12]) on the left center-console
    panel ((18, Fig 6)).
    3.1.14 Install the two screws (Figure 6 [3]) and washers (Figure 6 [4]) to hold the right center-
    console panel (Figure 6 [1]) and trim (Figure 6 [2]) in position.
    3.1.15 Tighten the two screws (Figure 6 [12]) and washers (Figure 6 [11]) on the right center-
    console panel (Figure 6 [1]).
    3.1.16 Install the crew seats (refer to DM 12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A).
    3.1.17 Install the left bulkhead (refer to Step 3.5). Install the right bulkhead (if removed) on an
    aircraft with a standard interior.
    3.1.18 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.2 Left and Right Bottom Sidewalls

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-10-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-25 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.2.1
    Note

    The installation procedures are almost the same for the left and right bottom sidewalls.

    Put the left bottom sidewall (Figure 4 [4]) in position adjacent to the structure.
    3.2.2 Move the hand-mic trough-cone through, and engage it in, the left bottom sidewall
    (Figure 4 [4]).
    3.2.3 Carefully lift the rear end of the left bottom sidewall (Figure 4 [4]) over the switch assembly
    and move a small distance outward and forwards so that the armrest engages with the
    handbrake assembly. Make sure the spring clips on the forward edge are engaged.
    3.2.4 Install the screw (Figure 4 [15]) and the washer (Figure 4 [14]) in the hand mic cone.
    3.2.5
    Note

    If the top sidewall panels have not been removed then do the step that follows.

    Install the five screws (Figure 4 [9]) and washers (Figure 4 [10]) in the top edge of the left
    bottom sidewall (Figure 4 [4]) as given in Step 3.4.4.
    3.2.6 Install the four screws (Figure 4 [7]) and washers (Figure 4 [8]) in the bottom edge of the left
    bottom sidewall (Figure 4 [4]).
    3.2.7 Install the two screws (Figure 4 [5]) and (Figure 4 [17]), and the two washers (Figure 4 [6])
    and (Figure 4 [16]) in the forward edge of the left bottom sidewall (Figure 4 [4]).
    3.2.8 Install the left cross-member panel (Figure 4 [3]) with the four screws (Figure 4 [1]) and
    washers (Figure 4 [2]).
    3.2.9 Install the parking brake handle (Figure 4 [18]) (refer to DM 12-B-32-40-05-00A-920A-A).
    3.2.10 Install the trim/logo assembly for the center console and the trim assembly for the center
    panel on the center console (refer to Step 3.1).
    3.2.11 Install the trim assembly for the left front and the left connection trim (refer to Step 3.1).
    3.2.12 Put the trim assembly for the left sidewall (Figure 4 [12]) and the trim assembly for the left
    eyebrow (Figure 4 [13]) in position until they align with the two-piece fasteners
    (Figure 4 [11]). Push and install the trim assembly for the left sidewall (Figure 4 [12]) and the
    trim assembly for the left eyebrow (Figure 4 [13]).
    3.2.13 Install the crew seats (refer to DM 12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A).
    3.2.14 Install the left bulkhead (refer to Step 3.5). Install the right bulkhead (if removed) on an
    aircraft with a standard interior.
    3.2.15 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.3 Flight Compartment Headliner
    3.3.1
    Note

    Two persons are necessary for this procedure.

    Hold the overhead electrical panel (Figure 5 [1]) and release the four fasteners (Figure 5 [2]).
    Remove the overhead electrical panel (Figure 5 [1]).
    3.3.2 Put the flight compartment headliner (Figure 5 [24]) in position adjacent to the structure.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-10-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-25 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.3.3 Connect the left air pipe (Figure 5 [31]) to the left plenum cap with the clamp (Figure 5 [30]).
    3.3.4 Connect the right air pipe (Figure 5 [3]) to the right left plenum cap with the clamp
    (Figure 5 [4]).
    3.3.5 Connect the electrical connectors (Figure 5 [29]) and (Figure 5 [5]) to the dome lights.
    3.3.6 Connect the connectors (Figure 5 [28]) and (Figure 5 [7]) to the overhead speakers.
    3.3.7 Put the flight compartment headliner (Figure 5 [24]) into position on the structure and loosely
    install the two screws (Figure 5 [26]) and (Figure 5 [8]) and washers (Figure 5 [27]) and
    (Figure 5 [6]).
    3.3.8 Put the overhead electrical panel (Figure 5 [1]) in position and connect the four electrical
    connectors A 140 P1, P2, P3 & P4. Carefully slide the overhead electrical panel upwards
    and rearwards into the flight compartment headliner and attach the four fasteners
    (Figure 5 [2]).
    3.3.9 Install the left sun-visor flange (Figure 5 [25]) with the three screws (Figure 5 [20]).
    3.3.10 Install the left sun-visor (Figure 5 [19]) on the sun-visor flange (Figure 5 [25]) and tighten the
    screw that locks the left sun visor (Figure 5 [19]).
    3.3.11 Install the right sun-visor flange (Figure 5 [10]) with the three screws (Figure 5 [11]).
    3.3.12 Install the right sun-visor (Figure 5 [9] on the sun-visor flange (Figure 5 [10]) and tighten the
    screw that locks the right sun-visor (Figure 5 [9].
    3.3.13 Install the flight compartment headliner screws (Figure 5 [26]) and (Figure 5 [8]) and washers
    (Figure 5 [27]) and (Figure 5 [6]).
    3.3.14 Install the left post panel (Figure 5 [23]) with the screw (Figure 5 [22]) and washer
    (Figure 5 [21]).
    3.3.15 Install the right post panel (Figure 5 [14]) with the screw (Figure 5 [13]) and washer
    (Figure 5 [12]).
    3.3.16 Install the center post panel (Figure 5 [15]) and (Figure 5 [16]) and handle (Figure 5 [18])
    with the two screws (Figure 5 [17]).
    3.3.17 Install left and right top sidewalls (Refer to Step 3.4).
    3.3.18 Install the left bulkhead (refer to Step 3.5). Install the right bulkhead (if removed) on an
    aircraft with a standard interior.
    3.3.19 Install the curtain track and curtain (Refer to Step 3.6).
    3.3.20 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − OVHD CTL PNL 1 (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − OVHD CTL PNL 2 (MAIN BUS)
    − SERVICE LTS (BAT/EXT POWER JUNCTION BOX in the battery compartment)
    − EXT PWR (BAT/EXT POWER JUNCTION BOX in the battery compartment)
    3.3.21 Remove the Warning signs (DO NOT CONNECT EXTERNAL ELECTRICAL
    POWER) (Pt.No. Local supply) from the external power receptacle and the flight
    compartment.
    3.3.22 Do an operational test of the flight compartment dome lights and floodlights (refer to DM 12-
    B-33-00-00-00A-903A-A).
    3.3.23 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.4 Left and Right Top Sidewalls and Eyebrow Panels

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-10-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-25 Page 9


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.4.1
    Note

    The installation procedures are almost the same for the left and right top sidewalls and the
    left and right eyebrow panels.

    Put the left top sidewall (Figure 3 [1]) and the left eyebrow panel (Figure 3 [2]) in position
    adjacent to the structure.
    3.4.2 Connect the electrical connector (Figure 3 [11]).
    3.4.3 Connect the air pipe to the air outlet on the left eyebrow panel (Figure 3 [2]).
    3.4.4 Put the left top sidewall (Figure 3 [1]) and the left eyebrow panel (Figure 3 [2]) in position on
    the structure and install the bottom screws (Figure 3 [9]) and (Figure 3 [16]), and the
    washers (Figure 3 [10]) and (Figure 3 [17]).
    3.4.5 Install the top screws (Figure 3 [13]) and washers (Figure 3 [12]) as well as the front top crew
    (Figure 3 [14]) and washer (Figure 3 [15]).
    3.4.6 Install the screws (Figure 3 [5]) and washers (Figure 3 [4] in the bottom end of the left
    eyebrow panel (Figure 3 [2]).
    3.4.7 Install the screws (Figure 3 [18]) in the top end of the left eyebrow panel (Figure 3 [2]).
    3.4.8 Put the left top sidewall trim assembly (Figure 3 [7]) and the left eyebrow trim assembly
    (Figure 3 [6]) in position until the assemblies align with the two-piece fasteners (Figure 3 [8])
    and (Figure 3 [3]). Push and install the trim assembly for the left top sidewall (Figure 3 [7])
    and the trim assembly for the left eyebrow (Figure 3 [6]).
    3.4.9 Attach the red safety thread (Figure 3 [23]) (Thread, safety (Red color) (Pt.No. P09-006))) to
    the cotter pin (Figure 3 [22]) on the top sidewall panel (Figure 3 [1]) (refer to DM 12-
    B-56-14-01-00A-920A-A).
    3.4.10
    Note

    If the flight compartment headliner is not removed then do the step that follows:

    Install the left post cover (Figure 3 [21]) with the screw (Figure 3 [19]) and washer
    (Figure 3 [20]).
    3.4.11 Remove the safety clip and close this circuit breaker:
    − MAP LIGHT (GENERATOR 1 BUS)
    3.4.12 Do an operational test of the map lights (refer to DM 12-B-33-00-00-00A-903A-A).
    3.4.13 Install the crew seats (refer to DM 12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A).
    3.4.14 Install the left bulkhead (refer to Step 3.5). Install the right bulkhead (if removed) on an
    aircraft with a standard interior.
    3.4.15 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.5 Left Bulkhead
    3.5.1
    Note

    The installation procedures are almost the same for the right bulkhead installed on an aircraft
    with a standard interior.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-10-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-25 Page 10


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Put the left bulkhead (Figure 2 [9]) in position in the bracket (Figure 2 [6]) and engage the
    spring lock (Figure 2 [4]).
    3.5.2 Install the two screws (Figure 2 [5]) in the bottom of the left bulkhead (Figure 2 [9]).
    3.5.3 Install the trim strip (Figure 2 [1]) with the two screws (Figure 2 [2]).
    3.5.4 Install, if necessary, the pilots headset on the hook (Figure 2 [8]) on the front of the left
    bulkhead (Figure 2 [9]).
    3.5.5 Put the pilots oxygen mask in the box (Figure 2 [9]) on the front of the left bulkhead
    (Figure 2 [9]).
    3.5.6 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.6 Curtain and Curtain Track (if installed)
    3.6.1 Install the curtain track (Figure 1 [1]) on the flight compartment headliner with the four screws
    (Figure 1 [2]).
    3.6.2 Install the curtain slides and curtain (Figure 1 [4]) in the curtain track (Figure 1 [1]).
    3.6.3 Install the end stop (Figure 1 [3]) in the curtain track (Figure 1 [1]) and clip the tab on the end
    stop in position.
    3.6.4 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-10-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-25 Page 11


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    B 2
    B
    B C
    B
    B
    C

    4
    A

    12-B-251003-A-S4080-20065-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Curtain and Curtain Track Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-10-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-25 Page 12


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2 3

    A B 1

    7 9
    4

    B 6

    12-B-251003-A-S4080-20066-A-01-1

    Figure 2 Left Bulkhead – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-10-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-25 Page 13


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    B
    A A

    22

    23

    20 2
    B 19
    14

    1
    21 15

    18

    C
    8 3 4
    5

    17
    16 6
    12
    13 8
    7

    8
    8
    8
    10 9

    11

    10
    9
    A 12-B-251003-A-S4080-20067-A-01-1

    Figure 3 Left and Right Top Sidewalls and Eyebrow Panels – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-10-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-25 Page 14


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    B
    16 17

    P
    R
    A 18
    K
    I
    N
    G
    B
    R
    K

    1
    A A 2

    13

    12

    3
    4

    A
    P
    B
    R
    K
    I
    N
    G
    B
    11 R
    K

    14 15
    9
    6
    10
    5

    A
    7
    8 12-B-251003-A-S4080-20068-A-01-1

    Figure 4 Left and Right Bottom Sidewalls – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-10-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-25 Page 15


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1 2

    A
    31 3

    30 4

    27 6
    29 5
    28
    7

    26 8

    9
    25 10

    24

    18
    20
    11
    19 17
    16
    21 12

    22
    15
    23 13
    14

    12-B-251003-A-S4080-20069-A-01-1

    Figure 5 Overhead Panel – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-10-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-25 Page 16


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    28

    27

    A
    5
    2
    1
    24

    26
    21
    25

    21 3
    4

    23
    22 21

    6
    20
    19 7

    21

    18
    8

    15 14

    16
    A
    10
    17 11
    12
    13
    12-B-251003-A-S4080-20070-A-01-1

    Figure 6 Center Console Covers – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-10-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-25 Page 17


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-10-03-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-25 Page 18
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FLIGHT COMPARTMENT CARPET

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    FLIGHT COMPARTMENT CARPET - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION........................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Flight Compartment Carpet – Removal/Installation................................................ 3

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A FLIGHT COMPARTMENT CREW SEATS - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-10-04-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Remove the crew seats (refer to DM 12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A).
    1.2 Remove the three screws (Figure 1 [4]), distance bushes (Figure 1 [3]) and angle (Figure 1 [2]).
    1.3 Lift the carpet (Figure 1 [1]) up and release the hook and loop fasteners.
    1.4 Remove the carpet (Figure 1 [1]) from the structure.
    2 Installation
    2.1 Put the carpet (Figure 1 [1]) in position on the structure.
    2.2 Push the carpet (Figure 1 [1]) down to engage the hook and loop fasteners.
    2.3 Install the three screws (Figure 1 [4]), distance bushes (Figure 1 [3]) and angle (Figure 1 [2]).
    2.4 Install the crew seats (refer to DM 12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A).
    2.5 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-10-04-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    B
    B
    B
    4

    B 12-B-251004-A-S4080-20071-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Flight Compartment Carpet – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-10-04-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-10-04-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FLIGHT COMPARTMENT – LEFT STORAGE BOX

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    FLIGHT COMPARTMENT – LEFT STORAGE BOX - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Left Storage Box – Removal/Installation................................................................ 3

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-10-05-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-25 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Move the pilots seat as far forward as it will go.
    1.2 Use the latch (Figure 1 [4]) and open the side door (Figure 1 [3]).
    1.3 Remove the six screws (Figure 1 [2]).
    1.4 Remove the storage box (Figure 1 [1]) from the bulkhead (Figure 1 [5]).
    2 Installation
    2.1 Put the storage box (Figure 1 [1]) in position on the bulkhead (Figure 1 [5]).
    2.2 Open the side door (Figure 1 [3]) and install the six screws (Figure 1 [2]).
    2.3 Close the side door (Figure 1 [3]).
    2.4 Put the pilots seat in the correct position.
    2.5 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-10-05-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-25 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    4 2

    A
    12-B-251005-A-S4080-20118-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Left Storage Box – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-10-05-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-25 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-10-05-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-25 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FLIGHT COMPARTMENT – RIGHT STORAGE BOX

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    FLIGHT COMPARTMENT – RIGHT STORAGE BOX - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Right Storage Box – Removal/Installation.............................................................. 3

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-10-06-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-25 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Move the copilots seat as far forward as it will go.
    1.2 Remove the fire extinguisher if installed.
    1.3 Use the latch (Figure 1 [2]) and open the side door (Figure 1 [3]).
    1.4 Remove the six screws (Figure 1 [4]).
    1.5 Remove the storage box (Figure 1 [5]) from the bulkhead (Figure 1 [1]).
    2 Installation
    2.1 Put the storage box (Figure 1 [5]) in position on the bulkhead (Figure 1 [1]).
    2.2 Open the side door (Figure 1 [3]) and install the six screws (Figure 1 [4]).
    2.3 Close the side door (Figure 1 [3]).
    2.4 Install the fire extinguisher if removed.
    2.5 Put the copilots seat in the correct position.
    2.6 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-10-06-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-25 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    12-B-251006-A-S4080-20119-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Right Storage Box – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-10-06-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-25 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-10-06-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-25 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    EQUIPMENT AND FURNISHINGS – PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    EQUIPMENT AND FURNISHINGS – PASSENGER COMPARTMENT - DESCRIPTION AND 1


    OPERATION...............................................................................................................................
    1 General................................................................................................................... 1
    2 Interior Codes......................................................................................................... 1
    3 Bench Seat............................................................................................................. 2

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-25-21-00-00A-040A-A EQUIPMENT AND FURNISHINGS – EXECUTIVE
    INTERIOR - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-25-22-00-00A-040A-A EQUIPMENT AND FURNISHINGS – STANDARD
    INTERIOR - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-25-23-00-00A-040A-A BAGGAGE AREA AND TRIM - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION

    Description

    1 General
    The passenger compartment can have equipment and furnishings for an executive interior (with optional seat
    configurations) or a standard interior (the nine seat corporate commuter). Alternative configurations for the interior
    of the passenger compartment are currently under development.
    A description of the equipment and furnishings in the passenger compartment is shown in the data modules as
    follows:
    − Executive interior (refer to DM 12-B-25-21-00-00A-040A-A)
    − Standard interior (refer to DM 12-B-25-22-00-00A-040A-A)
    − Baggage area and trim (refer to DM 12-B-25-23-00-00A-040A-A)

    2 Interior Codes
    Each of the configurations has an Interior Code number that gives the type and number of seats installed in the
    aircraft. The code number is on a placard installed on the cargo door frame, which gives a visual indication of the
    interior configuration. When a configuration is changed the placard must be changed to show the new
    configuration.
    The code number that is approved for the standard interior is as follows:

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-20-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − Nine seat corporate commuter (Interior Code STD-9S)

    The configurations with a code number that are approved for the executive interior are as follows:
    − Four executive seat and a three seat bench (Interior Code EX-4S-3B)
    − Four executive seat and four seat corporate commuter (Interior Code EX-4S-STD-4S)
    − Six executive seat (Interior Code EX-6S-2)
    − Six executive seat and two seat corporate commuter (Interior Code EX-6S-STD-2S)
    − Eight executive seat (Interior Code EX-8S)

    Refer to the Pilot's Operating Handbook for the distances of the seat locations and the necessary placards.
    Structural and system changes are necessary for some of the configuration changes.

    3 Bench Seat
    A bench seat assembled from three executive seats can be installed as a factory option or Post SB 25-014 at the
    rear of the passenger compartment on aircraft with an executive interior. The bench seat has a leather cover that
    will be the same as the leather covers on executive seats. There is a lever installed on the left side of the bench
    seat. When the lever is pulled up, the seat on the left of the bench can be moved forwards to give better access to
    the baggage compartment. An oxygen mask for each seat is kept in a compartment below the seat.
    The bench seat installation gives space in front of the baggage compartment for the storage of more baggage. A
    larger baggage net (Post SB 25-010) is then installed for the protection of the passengers (refer to DM 12-
    B-25-23-00-00A-040A-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-20-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    EQUIPMENT AND FURNISHINGS – EXECUTIVE INTERIOR

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    EQUIPMENT AND FURNISHINGS – EXECUTIVE INTERIOR - DESCRIPTION AND 1


    OPERATION...............................................................................................................................
    1 General................................................................................................................... 2
    2 Component Description.......................................................................................... 2
    2.1 Passenger Seats.................................................................................................... 2
    2.2 Passenger Compartment Trim............................................................................... 2
    2.2.1 Armrests................................................................................................................. 3
    2.2.2 Tables..................................................................................................................... 3
    2.2.3 Top Sidewalls......................................................................................................... 3
    2.2.4 Bottom Sidewalls.................................................................................................... 3
    2.2.5 Overhead Panel...................................................................................................... 3
    2.2.6 Left Rear Sidewall Panel........................................................................................ 3
    2.2.7 Passenger/Crew Door Cover.................................................................................. 4
    2.2.8 Emergency Exit Door Cover................................................................................... 4
    2.2.9 Cargo Door Sidewalls............................................................................................. 4
    2.2.10 Window Blind Assemblies...................................................................................... 4
    2.2.11 Bulkhead Assembly at Frame 34............................................................................ 4
    2.3 Passenger Compartment Carpets.......................................................................... 4
    2.4 Storage Cabinets.................................................................................................... 4
    2.4.1 Left Cabinet............................................................................................................ 4
    2.4.2 Right Cabinet.......................................................................................................... 5
    2.5 Toilet Compartment................................................................................................ 5
    2.6 Baggage Area......................................................................................................... 5
    2.7 Combi Interior......................................................................................................... 5

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Executive Interior – Typical Layout......................................................................... 6


    2 Toilet Compartment – Electrical Schematic............................................................ 7

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-25-20-00-00A-040A-A EQUIPMENT AND FURNISHINGS – PASSENGER
    COMPARTMENT - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-25-23-00-00A-040A-A BAGGAGE AREA AND TRIM - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-25-50-00-00A-040A-A CARGO COMPARTMENT - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Description

    1 General
    The aircraft with an executive interior can be supplied from the factory in a number of alternative seating
    configurations (refer to DM 12-B-25-20-00-00A-040A-A), in different colors and with some equipment options. The
    interior has these main parts as follows:
    − passenger seats
    − passenger compartment trim
    − passenger compartment carpets
    − storage cabinets
    − toilet
    − baggage area
    − combi interior

    2 Component Description

    2.1 Passenger Seats


    The passenger seats are installed on seat rails. The seat rails make the removal and installation of the seats in the
    aircraft easier. Numbers identify the seat positions with No. 1 at the front left and No. 2 at the front right the of
    passenger compartment.
    The seats are leather upholstered. The seats can be turned through 90° and moved forward, rearward and to the
    side. To turn the seat pull on the control handle installed on the forward edge of the armrest. The seats have a
    reclining backrest, sliding headrest and a movable armrest. The recline control is a push button installed on the
    inner side of the armrest. A pocket for magazines is installed on the aft of each seat.
    All passenger seats have a three-point safety harness. The harness has a lap strap and an inertia-reel shoulder
    strap.

    2.2 Passenger Compartment Trim


    (Refer to Fig. 1)
    The passenger compartment trim has these main components as follows:
    − The armrests
    − The tables
    − The top sidewalls
    − The bottom sidewalls
    − The overhead panel
    − The left rear sidewall panel
    − The passenger/crew door cover
    − The emergency exit door cover
    − The cargo door sidewalls
    − The window blind assemblies

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − The bulkhead assembly at frame 34

    2.2.1 Armrests
    The armrests give the support on the outboard sides of the passenger compartment. The armrests are installed
    along each side of the passenger compartment. The armrests attach to the top and bottom sidewalls with clips, and
    hook and loop fasteners. Each part can be removed independently.
    The armrests adjacent to each seat have as follows:
    − A container where the passenger oxygen mask is kept
    − A reading light switch panel
    − A drink holder
    − An ashtray

    2.2.2 Tables
    Tables that can be folded are installed on the sides of the fuselage, one between each of the forward two seats.
    The other table is in front of the rear right seat. For aircraft takeoff and landing the tables are folded, then moved
    into slots in the armrests. When the tables are in this position they make a smooth shape with the armrests.

    2.2.3 Top Sidewalls


    The three top sidewalls are installed above the structure and equipment between the overhead panel and the
    bottom of the windows. The sidewalls are installed along each side of the passenger compartment and are
    attached to the structure with screws and spacers.
    The left top sidewall is installed between the passenger crew door and the cargo door. The forward right top
    sidewall is installed between the flight compartment and emergency exit door. The rear right top sidewall is
    installed between the emergency exit door and the baggage compartment. The top sidewalls have window cut-outs
    in them.

    2.2.4 Bottom Sidewalls


    The two bottom sidewalls are installed above the structure and equipment between the top sidewalls and the floor
    of the passenger compartment. The sidewalls are installed along each side of the passenger compartment and are
    attached to the structure with screws and spacers.
    The left bottom sidewall is installed between the passenger/crew door and the cargo door. The right bottom
    sidewall is installed between the flight compartment and the baggage compartment. The bottom sidewalls have
    vents at the bottom for the air conditioning system and holes that give access to the connectors for the passenger
    oxygen masks.

    2.2.5 Overhead Panel


    The overhead panel covers the structure and equipment at the top of the passenger compartment. The panel is
    attached to the structure with screws and spacers. The overhead panel has the passenger reading lights, flood
    lights, loudspeakers and air conditioning system air outlets installed.

    2.2.6 Left Rear Sidewall Panel


    The left rear sidewall is installed above the structure and equipment between the, aft of the cargo door and the
    baggage compartment. The panel is in one piece and is made in the shape of the top, armrest and bottom
    sidewalls.

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.2.7 Passenger/Crew Door Cover


    The cover for the passenger/crew door is made in the shape of the door to prevent damage to the door inner
    locking mechanism. The cover is installed on the passenger/crew door with screws.

    2.2.8 Emergency Exit Door Cover


    The cover for the emergency exit door is made in the shape of the door to prevent damage to the door mechanism.
    The cover is attached to the emergency exit door with nuts and has a window blind assembly installed. An access
    panel at the top of the cover gives access to the inner handle.

    2.2.9 Cargo Door Sidewalls


    The sidewalls for the cargo door are made in the shape of the door to prevent damage to the door inner locking
    mechanism. The sidewalls are almost the same for the cargo door as the other sidewalls in the passenger
    compartment.
    Clips, screws and spacers attach the top and bottom sidewalls to the cargo door. There is a window blind assembly
    in the top sidewall and a cargo light in the bottom sidewall. A small trim panel, attached with velcro hook and loop
    fasteners, covers the area around the inner door handle.

    2.2.10 Window Blind Assemblies


    Window blind assemblies are used to prevent too much external light in the passenger compartment. There are
    four blind assemblies installed on the left and five blind assemblies are installed on the right. To close or open the
    window blinds pull or push the blinds.
    The blind assemblies have an acrylic window and a seal. The window and seal prevent the condensation on the
    cabin windows. The window blind assemblies are installed between the structure and the top sidewalls. The
    assemblies are attached to the structure with screws.

    2.2.11 Bulkhead Assembly at Frame 34


    The bulkhead assembly is assembled and installed as one piece. The bulkhead assembly divides the passenger
    and baggage compartments at frame 34. The assembly has a small panel attached at the top rear installed above
    the area in front of the cooling system blower units. The assembly has phone and mic connectors, an illuminated
    'no smoking/fasten seat belt' sign and a cargo door light switch installed on it. The illuminated sign is operated by a
    switch on the electrical overhead panel in the flight compartment. The bulkhead assembly is attached to the
    structure with screws and washers.

    2.3 Passenger Compartment Carpets


    The passenger compartment carpets prevent damage to the floor of the passenger compartment and give a non-
    slip surface on which the passengers can walk. The carpets are installed in strips between the two left seat rails,
    the two right seat rails and the center part of the floor. Each strip is in two parts that let a small area of carpet be
    removed for floor panel access to the equipment below the floor. The carpets are installed on the passenger
    compartment floor with hook and loop fasteners.

    2.4 Storage Cabinets

    2.4.1 Left Cabinet


    The left cabinet is a wooden refreshment cabinet with two drawers. The inner of the top drawer is made to hold hot/
    cold liquid containers and cups. The inner of the lower drawer is made to hold drink cans. The drawers have push
    to open latches that fit flush with the drawer front. The forward side of the cabinet is extended to make a bulkhead.

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    The cabinet is installed against the left sidewall with the bulkhead at the rear of the passenger crew door. The
    cabinet is attached to the seat rail structure with screws. The bulkhead makes an entrance into the passenger
    compartment. The bulkhead is also for aircraft with toilet doors installed to make a larger toilet compartment at the
    front of the passenger compartment.

    2.4.2 Right Cabinet


    The right cabinet is a wooden storage cabinet with two drawers. When installed the top drawer is for CD player
    equipment (optional). The drawers have push to open latches that are flush with the drawer front. The cabinet is
    installed against the rear wall of the toilet and the right sidewall. The cabinet is attached to the seat rail structure
    with screws.

    2.5 Toilet Compartment


    (Refer to Fig. 2)
    The toilet, that can be removed easily for maintenance, is a chemical toilet. The toilet is installed in a compartment
    that is installed on the right, forward of the passenger compartment.
    The toilet is an open top box with sealed sides. The box has a seat installed on the top and an inner tray that can
    be removed for maintenance. Chemical toilet fluid fills the area between the box and tray. When the electrical
    PRESS TO FLUSH switch installed in the compartment is pushed, a pump is energized. The pump transfers
    chemical fluid from the box to the tray.
    The toilet compartment has an airflow through a tube which is connected to the pressurization outflow valve. There
    is a storage drawer at the bottom of the compartment. There is also an internal light and a `fasten seat belt/no
    smoking' sign on the outer rear wall of the compartment. The internal light is operated by the LAVATORY LIGHT
    switch in the toilet compartment.
    The CABIN BUS supplies 28 VDC electrical power for the toilet compartment lighting and flushing circuits through
    circuit breaker TOILET.
    The toilet compartment opening is closed by one of the two configurations as follows:
    − A curtain that pulls across the entrance. The curtain is installed on a curtain rail
    − Two doors that overlap. One door opens forward to close the area between the left flight compartment
    bulkhead and the forward toilet wall. The other door opens rearward to close the area between left cabinet
    bulkhead and the rear toilet wall. This configuration makes a larger toilet area.

    2.6 Baggage Area


    The baggage area is at the rear of the passenger compartment between frames 34 and 36 (refer to DM 12-
    B-25-23-00-00A-040A-A).

    2.7 Combi Interior


    The interior of passenger compartment can easily be changed into a combi interior by the removal of the rear two
    seats or all of the furnishings. Cargo can be put through the cargo door and be held in position with tie down straps
    attached to the seat rails (refer to DM 12-B-25-50-00-00A-040A-A).

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    SIDEWALL FOR THE


    CARGO DOOR
    A
    PASSENGER
    SEAT
    OVERHEAD
    PANEL
    SAFETY
    HARNESS
    TOP
    SIDEWALL
    COVER FOR THE
    EMERGENCY EXIT ARMREST
    DOOR

    RIGHT
    CABINET

    BAGGAGE
    AREA

    BAGGAGE
    NET

    WINDOW BLIND
    ASSEMBLY
    TABLE
    BOTTOM
    SIDEWALL
    LEFT
    CABINET

    TOILET

    PASSENGER
    COMPARTMENT
    CARPET
    SEAT
    RAIL
    A
    COVER FOR THE
    PASSENGER/CREW DOOR

    12-B-252100-A-S4080-20072-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Executive Interior – Typical Layout

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    CABIN BUS

    7.5 TOILET

    INTERIOR DISCONNECT P 162


    J 162

    TOILET COMPARTMENT J 186


    P 186

    LAVATORY
    LIGHT
    SWITCH

    S 160

    DS 170

    PRESS TO
    FLUSH
    SWITCH

    TIMER BOX
    A 180 S 162

    FLUSHING
    PUMP
    MOTOR

    B 160

    12-B-252100-A-S4080-20073-A-01-1

    Figure 2 Toilet Compartment – Electrical Schematic

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 7
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    EXECUTIVE SEATS

    ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Table of Contents Page

    EXECUTIVE SEATS - ADJUSTMENT/TEST............................................................................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Executive Seat Adjustment/Test............................................................................. 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE SEATS - REMOVAL INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Cord Part Local supply As
    necessar
    y
    Digital force gauge Part 903.70.32.921 1

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-01-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Cotter pin Part AN416-1 1

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the adjustment/test procedures for the executive seats as follows:
    − A functional test of the seat locking mechanism
    − The adjustment of the seat locking mechanism
    These procedures are applicable to all the executive seats.
    2 Functional Test of the Seat Locking Mechanism
    2.1 Put the seat (Figure 1 [1]) in the take off and landing position.
    2.2 Move the control handle fully up. Release the control handle and make sure it goes to the fully down
    position.
    2.3 Attach the cord (Cord (Pt.No. Local supply)) to the hinge point on the seat back nearest to the center
    of the aircraft. Wind the cord (Cord (Pt.No. Local supply)) around the other hinge point and along the
    side and front of the seat.
    2.4
    CAUTION

    TOO MUCH FORCE WILL DAMAGE THE BRAKE MECHANISM. DO NOT APPLY A FORCE OF
    MORE THAN 55 LBF.

    Use the gauge (Digital force gauge (Pt.No. 903.70.32.921)) and apply a force of 50 lbf (222 N) to the
    end of the cord. Make sure the seat does not turn.
    2.5 If the functional test is not satisfactory, do the adjustment of the seat locking mechanism (Step 3).
    3 Adjustment of the Seat Locking Mechanism
    3.1 Make sure that the seat (Figure 1 [1]) is in the upright, take off and landing position.
    3.2 Remove the seat (Figure 1 [1]) from the aircraft, if necessary, (Refer to DM 12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-
    A).
    3.3 Remove the seat cushion (Figure 1 [4]) from the seat (Figure 1 [1]).
    3.4 Remove the screws (Figure 1 [3]) and remove the cushion support panel (Figure 1 [2]).

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-01-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.5 Measure the free play on the cable (Figure 1 [6]). If the play is less than or more than 0.125 in (3 mm)
    adjust as follows:
    − Loosen the locknuts (Figure 1 [5])
    − Adjust the applicable locknut (Figure 1 [5]) to give the correct play
    − Tighten the locknuts (Figure 1 [5])
    3.6 Adjust the brake mechanism locknut (Figure 1 [15]) below the seat (Figure 1 [1]) to increase or
    decrease the brake force.
    3.7 Make sure the rollers (Figure 1 [11]) move to the top of the cams (Figure 1 [10]). If not, increase the
    tension on the spring (Figure 1 [12]) as follows:
    − Hold the spring (Figure 1 [12]) and remove the cotter pin (Figure 1 [14]) and pin (Figure 1 [13])
    − Loosen the locknut (Figure 1 [8])
    − Move the cable (Figure 1 [9]) through the bolt (Figure 1 [7]) approximately 0.5 in (12 mm)
    − Tighten the locknut (Figure 1 [8])
    − Extend the spring (Figure 1 [12]) and install the pin (Figure 1 [13]) and new cotter pin (Cotter pin )
    (Figure 1 [14])
    3.8 Do the functional test (Step 2) of the seat locking mechanism.
    3.9 Install the cushion support panel (Figure 1 [2]) with the screws (Figure 1 [3]).
    3.10 Install the seat cushion (Figure 1 [4]) on the seat (Figure 1 [1]).
    3.11 Install the seat (Figure 1 [1]), if removed before, in the aircraft (Refer to DM 12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-
    A).

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-01-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3
    B

    C
    15
    A
    C
    5

    14 6
    11

    13 8

    12
    9

    10 B

    12-B-252101-A-S4080-20076-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Executive Seat Adjustment/Test

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-01-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-01-00A-903A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-01-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    EXECUTIVE SEATS

    REMOVAL INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    EXECUTIVE SEATS - REMOVAL INSTALLATION................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Executive Seats Removal/Installation.................................................................... 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-14 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedures for the removal/installation of the executive seats. Make a mark on
    the seat rail at the forward edge of the seat to help the installation of the seat to its initial position. The seat
    location distances are shown in the Pilots Operating Handbook, Section 6.
    The executive seats in the passenger compartment in a typical installation, have numbers 1 thru 6. The
    different configurations for the number and locations of the seats are shown in the Pilots Operating
    Handbook, Section 6. Seat 1 is installed at the forward left position. Seats 1 and 2 are installed pointed
    rearward and seats 3 thru 6 are installed pointed forward. The seats that point forward and rearward are not
    interchangeable. The seats can be identified by the placard that is installed on the seat pan below the
    cushion. The table as follows identifies the seats that point forward and rearward by their part numbers:

    Part Number Seat Type


    403150–7 Rear facing
    403150–8 Rear facing
    403150–9 Forward facing
    403150–10 Forward facing
    2 Removal
    2.1 Remove the seat rail covers Figure 1 [19].
    2.2 Remove the drawer Figure 1 [11] from the seat pedestal shroud Figure 1 [9].
    2.3 Pull to disengage the two-piece fasteners and remove the pedestal kick panels Figure 1 [6] from the
    front and rear of the seat pedestal shroud Figure 1 [9].
    2.4 Remove the four screws Figure 1 [8], washers Figure 1 [7] from the front and aft of the seat pedestal
    shroud Figure 1 [9].
    2.5 Pull to disengage the two-piece fasteners Figure 1 [10] and Figure 1 [5] and remove the seat pedestal
    shroud Figure 1 [9] from the seat Figure 1 [1].
    2.6 Pull to disengage the two-piece fasteners Figure 1 [2] and Figure 1 [4] and remove the pedestal-
    shroud side-panel Figure 1 [3].
    2.7 Remove the locking clips Figure 1 [13] from the pins Figure 1 [18].
    2.8 Hold the seat Figure 1 [1] and remove the pins Figure 1 [18] and the washers Figure 1 [12] and
    Figure 1 [17]. Remove the seat Figure 1 [1] from the fittings Figure 1 [16].
    2.9 Put marks on the seat rails Figure 1 [15] to show the location of the fittings Figure 1 [16].
    2.10 Loosen the screws Figure 1 [14] until they are away from the seat rails Figure 1 [15].
    2.11 Remove the fittings Figure 1 [16] from the seat rails Figure 1 [15].
    3 Installation

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-14 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.1 Put the fittings Figure 1 [16] in the seat rails Figure 1 [15]. Align the front fittings with the marks made
    on the seat rails. Move the rear fittings until the distance between the centers of the front and the rear
    fittings is 13 in (330 mm).
    3.2 Make sure the screws Figure 1 [14] align with the holes in the seat rails Figure 1 [15], tighten the
    screws Figure 1 [14], then loosen half a turn.
    3.3 Make sure the distance between the front and rear fittings Figure 1 [16] is correct.
    3.4 Put the passenger seat Figure 1 [1] in position on the fittings Figure 1 [16] and install the pins
    Figure 1 [18], washers Figure 1 [12] and Figure 1 [17] and locking clips Figure 1 [13].
    3.5 Put the pedestal-shroud side-panel Figure 1 [3] in position and push to engage the two-piece
    fasteners Figure 1 [2] and Figure 1 [4].
    3.6 Put the seat pedestal shroud Figure 1 [9] in position around the seat Figure 1 [1] with the ends over
    the edges of the pedestal-shroud side-panel Figure 1 [2].
    3.7 Push the seat pedestal shroud Figure 1 [9] in position to engage the two-piece fasteners Figure 1 [10]
    and Figure 1 [5].
    3.8 Install the four washers Figure 1 [7] and screws Figure 1 [8].
    3.9 Install the pedestal kick panels Figure 1 [6] on the front and rear of the seat pedestal shroud
    Figure 1 [9].
    3.10 Install the drawer Figure 1 [11] in the seat pedestal shroud Figure 1 [9].
    3.11 Install the seat rail covers Figure 1 [19].
    3.12 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-14 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    6
    1

    11

    10

    B
    7
    8
    2 3

    B
    1 6
    B

    17
    12
    13
    B
    4
    14
    18 5

    A
    16
    19

    15

    B
    12-B-252101-A-S4080-20074-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Executive Seats Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-14 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-14 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-14 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    EXECUTIVE SEAT SAFETY HARNESS

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    EXECUTIVE SEAT SAFETY HARNESS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE SEATS - REMOVAL INSTALLATION

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedures for the removal/installation of the seat harness for all aircraft with
    executive seats in the passenger compartment.
    Put a cover over the seat as applicable, to protect the surface of the executive seats.
    2 Removal
    2.1 Remove the passenger executive seat (Refer to DM 12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A).
    2.2 Remove the seat harness for executive seats (Refer to CMM 25-20-07, Model 4006 and model 4018,
    page Block 301).
    3 Installation
    3.1 Install the seat harness for executive seats (Refer to CMM 25-20-07, Model 4006 and model 4018,
    page Block 701).
    3.2 Do the operational test of the seat harness for passenger executive seats (Refer to CMM 25-20-07,
    Model 4006 and model 4018, Page Block 101).
    3.3 Install the passenger executive seats (Refer to DM 12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A).
    3.4 Remove, as applicable, the cover used to protect the surface of the executive seats.

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-02-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    EXECUTIVE TRIM

    REMOVAL INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    EXECUTIVE TRIM - REMOVAL INSTALLATION...................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 2
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 2
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Armrests – Removal/Installation............................................................................. 16
    2 Tables – Removal/Installation................................................................................ 17
    3 Top Sidewall Panels – Removal/Installation........................................................... 18
    4 Bottom Sidewall Panels – Removal/installation...................................................... 19
    5 Overhead Panel – Removal/installation................................................................. 20
    6 Left Rear Sidewall–Panel – Removal/Installation................................................... 22
    7 Passenger/Crew Door Panel – Removal/Installation.............................................. 23
    8 Emergency Exit Door Panel – Removal/Installation............................................... 24
    9 Cargo Door Panels – Removal/Installation............................................................. 25
    10 Window Blind Assemblies – Removal/Installation.................................................. 26
    11 Bulkhead Trim at Frame 34 – Removal/Installation................................................ 27

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE SEATS - REMOVAL INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-21-05-00A-920A-A LEFT STORAGE CABINET - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-21-06-00A-920A-A RIGHT STORAGE CABINET - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-21-07-00A-920A-A TOILET COMPARTMENT - REMOVAL INSTALLATION
    12-B-33-00-00-00A-903A-A INTERIOR LIGHTS - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-35-20-01-00A-920A-A PASSENGER OXYGEN CONNECTORS - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Cargo door support Part Local supply As
    Required
    Headset Part Local supply As
    Required
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) Required
    Trestle Part Local supply As
    Required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Adhesive Part P08-009 As
    Required
    Sealant Part P08-020 As
    Required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Spring pin CSN 52-60-00-01-175 As
    Required

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedures for the removal/installation for those parts of the passenger
    compartment standard interior trim as follows:
    − The armrests

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − The tables
    − The top sidewall panels
    − The bottom sidewall panels
    − The overhead panel
    − The left rear sidewall panel
    − The passenger/crew door panel
    − The emergency exit door panel
    − The cargo door sidewall panels
    − The window blind assemblies
    − The bulkhead trim at frame 34
    2 Removal
    2.1 Armrests
    2.1.1 Remove the passenger seats near the armrests (Refer to DM 12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A).
    2.1.2 Seat armrests
    2.1.2.1 Remove the passenger oxygen masks from the armrests (Refer to DM 12-
    B-35-20-01-00A-920A-A).

    Note

    This procedure is applicable to all seven armrests.

    2.1.2.2 Pull the bottom edge of the armrest (Figure 1 [6]) away from the sidewall panel
    (Figure 1 [9]). Disengage the two piece fasteners (Figure 1 [7]) from the sidewall
    panel (1).
    2.1.2.3 Move the armrest (Figure 1 [6]) up to disengage the armrest clip (Figure 1 [8])
    and remove the armrest from the sidewall panel clips (Figure 1 [10]).
    2.1.2.4 Remove the armrest (Figure 1 [6]) from the aircraft.
    2.1.3 Table armrests
    2.1.3.1 Pull the sides of the armrest (Figure 1 [4]) away from the table assembly
    (Figure 1 [1]). Disengage the two piece fasteners (Figure 1 [2]) from the table
    assembly (Figure 1 [1]).

    Note

    This procedure is applicable to all three armrests.

    2.1.3.2 Move the armrest (Figure 1 [4]) to get access to the electrical connectors
    (Figure 1 [3]) and (Figure 1 [5]).
    2.1.3.3 Disconnect the electrical connectors (Figure 1 [3]) and (Figure 1 [5]).
    2.1.3.4 Remove the armrest (Figure 1 [4]) from the aircraft.
    2.2 Tables

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Note

    This procedure is applicable to all three tables.

    2.2.1 Remove the table armrest (Refer to Step 2.1).


    2.2.2 Extend the table (Figure 2 [1]) and remove the eight bolts (Figure 2 [2]) and washers
    (Figure 2 [3]).
    2.2.3 Remove the table (Figure 2 [1]) from the sidewall panel (Figure 2 [4]).
    2.3 Top Sidewall Panels

    Note

    This procedure is applicable to all three top sidewall panels. Two persons are necessary for this
    procedure.

    Note

    Some top sidewall panels are covered in a soft leather which can easily become dirty. It is
    recommended to wear soft linen gloves when you remove and install these top sidewall panels.

    2.3.1 Remove the table armrests (Refer to Step 2.1).


    2.3.2 Remove the flood light covers from the overhead panel (Refer to Step 2.5).
    2.3.3 Remove the flood lights from the holders on the overhead panel (Refer to Step 2.5).
    2.3.4 For the left panel removal, remove the left cabinet (Refer to DM 12-B-25-21-05-00A-920A-
    A). For the right forward panel, remove the right cabinet (Refer to DM 12-
    B-25-21-06-00A-920A-A) and the toilet compartment (Refer to DM 12-B-25-21-07-00A-920A-
    A).
    2.3.5 Loosen the screws that attach the overhead panel (Refer to Step 2.5).
    2.3.6 Hold the top sidewall panel (Figure 3 [7]) and remove the six screws (Figure 3 [1]), washers
    (Figure 3 [2]) and distance bushes (Figure 3 [3]).
    2.3.7 Remove the center screw (Figure 3 [4]) and washer (Figure 3 [5]).
    2.3.8 Pull the top sidewall panel (Figure 3 [7]) down to release the top edge from above the
    overhead panel (Figure 3 [8]).
    2.3.9 Disconnect the two electrical connectors (Figure 3 [9]) and (Figure 3 [10]).
    2.3.10 Remove the top sidewall panel (Figure 3 [7]) from the bottom sidewall panel (Figure 3 [6]).
    2.3.11 Remove the top sidewall panel (Figure 3 [7]) from the aircraft.
    2.4 Bottom Sidewall Panels

    Note

    This procedure is applicable to the two bottom sidewall panels. Two persons are necessary for this
    procedure.

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.4.1 Remove the carpet (Refer to DM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A).


    2.4.2 Remove the top sidewall panel (Refer to Step 2.3).
    2.4.3 Remove the two screws (Figure 4 [1]) and washers (Figure 4 [2]) for a left bottom sidewall
    installation.
    2.4.4 Remove the five screws (Figure 4 [3]) and washers (Figure 4 [4]).
    2.4.5 Carefully move the bottom sidewall panel (Figure 4 [5]) away from the structure to get
    access to the two air distribution ducts (Figure 4 [6]) and (Figure 4 [9]).
    2.4.6 Loosen the clamp (Figure 4 [10]) and disconnect the air distribution pipe (Figure 4 [11]) from
    the sidewall duct (Figure 4 [9]).
    2.4.7 Loosen the clamp (Figure 4 [7]) and disconnect the air distribution pipe (Figure 4 [8]) from
    the sidewall duct (Figure 4 [6]).
    2.4.8 Remove the bottom sidewall panel (Figure 4 [5]) from the aircraft.
    2.5 Overhead Panel

    Note

    Three persons are necessary for this procedure.

    2.5.1 Open and install a Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065) on each of
    these circuit breakers:
    − CABIN FLOOD LT 50% (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − CABIN FLOOD LT 100% (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − CABIN RDNG LIGHT (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − AUDIO 1 (STANDBY BUS)
    − CABIN ENT 1 (CABIN BUS)
    2.5.2 Remove the top sidewall panels (Refer to Step 2.3).

    WARNING

    THE TOP SIDEWALL PANELS ARE HELD IN POSITION BY THE OVERHEAD PANEL.
    BEFORE REMOVAL OF THE OVERHEAD PANEL, THE TOP SIDEWALL PANELS MUST
    BE REMOVED FIRST. REMOVAL OF THE TOP SIDEWALL PANELS PREVENTS INJURY
    TO PERSONNEL AND DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPMENT.

    2.5.3 Remove the left rear sidewall panel (Refer to Step 2.6).
    2.5.4 Remove the two screws (Figure 5 [9]), washers (Figure 5 [8]) and trim strip (Figure 5 [7]).
    2.5.5 Remove the left and right flood light covers (Figure 5 [12]) from the overhead panel
    (Figure 5 [1]).
    2.5.6 Remove the flood lights (Figure 5 [11]) from the holders (Figure 5 [10]) on the overhead
    panel (Figure 5 [1]). Disconnect the electrical connectors and remove the lights.
    2.5.7 Hold the overhead panel (Figure 5 [1]). Remove the screws (Figure 5 [4]), distance bushes
    (Figure 5 [3]) and discs (Figure 5 [2]).
    2.5.8 Remove the four center screws (Figure 5 [6]) and washers (Figure 5 [5]).

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.5.9 Lower the overhead panel (Figure 5 [1]) sufficiently to get access to the electrical connectors
    and the air conditioning pipes.
    2.5.10 Loosen the front clamps (Figure 5 [18]). Disconnect the air pipes (Figure 5 [20]) and
    (Figure 5 [21]) from the overhead panel (Figure 5 [1]).
    2.5.11 Disconnect the two front electrical connectors (Figure 5 [17]).
    2.5.12 Loosen the rear clamps (Figure 5 [14]) and (Figure 5 [16]). Disconnect the air pipes
    (Figure 5 [13]) and (Figure 5 [15]) from the overhead panel (Figure 5 [1]).
    2.5.13 Disconnect the remaining nine electrical connectors (Figure 5 [17]).
    2.5.14 Remove the overhead panel (Figure 5 [1]) from the aircraft.
    2.6 Left Rear Sidewall Panel

    Note

    The left rear sidewall panel is one piece. The panel is installed in the area between the aft of the cargo
    door and the bulkhead trim at frame 34.

    2.6.1 Remove the left flood light cover from the overhead panel (Refer to Step 2.5).
    2.6.2 Loosen the rear left screws in the overhead panel (Refer to Step 2.5).
    2.6.3 Remove the screws (Figure 6 [3]) and washers (Figure 6 [4]).
    2.6.4 Remove the screw (Figure 6 [5]), washer (Figure 6 [6]), screw (Figure 6 [7]) and washer
    (Figure 6 [8]).
    2.6.5 Pull the sidewall panel (Figure 6 [2]) down to release the top edge from above the overhead
    panel (Figure 6 [1]).
    2.6.6 Remove the sidewall panel (Figure 6 [2]) from the aircraft.
    2.7 Passenger/Crew Door Panel
    2.7.1 Put the trestle (Trestle (Pt.No. Local supply)) below the passenger door.
    2.7.2 Open the passenger/crew door (Figure 7 [10]) and lower it on to the trestle
    (Trestle (Pt.No. Local supply)).
    2.7.3 Hold the handrail assembly (Figure 7 [11]) (Detail C) and remove the nut (Figure 7 [29]),
    washer (Figure 7 [28]), bolt (Figure 7 [32]) and shims (Figure 7 [30]) from the lower stanchion
    assembly (Figure 7 [31]).
    2.7.4 Remove the cap (Figure 7 [25]), nut (Figure 7 [24]), washer (Figure 7 [23]) and bolt
    (Figure 7 [27]) from the strut assembly (Figure 7 [26]). Move the hand rail assembly
    (Figure 7 [11]) up away from the door panel (Figure 7 [2]).
    2.7.5 Remove the nut (Figure 7 [7]), washer (Figure 7 [6]), screw (Figure 7 [3]) and the inner
    handle (Figure 7 [4]) from the shaft (Figure 7 [5]).
    2.7.6 Hold the steps (Figure 7 [1]) (Detail H) and remove the two nuts (Figure 7 [13]), washers
    (Figure 7 [14]), bolts (Figure 7 [16]) and washers (Figure 7 [15]).
    2.7.7 Remove the two spring pins (Figure 7 [18]) (Detail E) from the step (Figure 7 [1]). Discard the
    spring pins.
    2.7.8 Hold the step (Figure 7 [1]) and remove the two pins (Figure 7 [17]).
    2.7.9 Hold the step (Figure 7 [1]) (Detail G) and remove the two nuts (Figure 7 [22]), washers
    (Figure 7 [21]), bolts (Figure 7 [19]) and washers (Figure 7 [20]).

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.7.10 Remove the step assembly (Figure 7 [1]) from the passenger/crew door (Figure 7 [10]).
    2.7.11 Remove the eight screws (Figure 7 [8]) and washers (Figure 7 [9]) from the door panel
    (Figure 7 [2]).
    2.7.12 Carefully remove the electrical cable and grommet (Figure 7 [12]) from the passenger/crew
    door (Figure 7 [10]) and remove the door panel (Figure 7 [2]) from the passenger/crew door
    (Figure 7 [10]).
    2.8 Emergency Exit Door Panel
    2.8.1 Remove the cap (Figure 8 [1]) from the panel (Figure 8 [2]).
    2.8.2 Remove the emergency exit door (Figure 8 [5]) from the structure.
    2.8.3 Remove the four screws (Figure 8 [3]) and washers (Figure 8 [4]).
    2.8.4 Remove the panel (Figure 8 [2]) from the emergency exit door (Figure 8 [5]).
    2.9 Cargo Door Panel

    Note

    The cargo door trim panels have, two armrest parts and an upper and a lower panel. This procedure is
    for the removal of all the cargo door panels.

    2.9.1 Open and install a clip (Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on
    these circuit breakers:
    − CABIN RDNG LIGHTS (NON-ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − SERVICE LTS (HOT BATTERY BUS)
    2.9.2 Remove the left rear sidewall panel (Refer to Step 2.6).
    2.9.3 Lower the cargo door (Figure 9 [14]) almost to the closed position.
    2.9.4 Remove the trim panel (Figure 9 [5]) from around the inner handle on the door.
    2.9.5 Pull the bottom edge of the forward armrest (Figure 9 [4]) away from the panel (Figure 9 [13])
    and disengage the two piece fasteners (Figure 9 [9]). Disconnect the electrical connector
    (Figure 9 [8]). Lift the forward armrest (Figure 9 [4]) and remove from the bottom panel
    (Figure 9 [13]).
    2.9.6 Pull the bottom edge of the rear armrest (Figure 9 [6]) away from the panel (Figure 9 [13])
    and disengage the two piece fasteners (Figure 9 [9]). Lift the rear armrest (Figure 9 [6]) and
    remove from the bottom panel (Figure 9 [13]).
    2.9.7 Remove the four screws (Figure 9 [3]) and washers (Figure 9 [2]).
    2.9.8 Open the cargo door (Figure 9 [14]) sufficiently to get access to the bolt (Figure 9 [16]).
    2.9.9 Hold the weight of the cargo door (Figure 9 [14]) with a cargo door support (Cargo door
    support (Pt.No. Local supply)) between the ground and the bottom of the cargo door.
    2.9.10 Remove the nut (Figure 9 [20]), washer (Figure 9 [19]), sliding disc (Figure 9 [18]) and bolt
    (Figure 9 [16]) from the gas strut rod end (Figure 9 [17]).
    2.9.11 Carefully disengage the top panel clips (Figure 9 [15]) from the cargo door clips.
    2.9.12 Remove the top panel (Figure 9 [1]) from the cargo door (Figure 9 [14]).
    2.9.13 Put the gas strut eye end (Figure 9 [17]) in position and loosely install the bolt (Figure 9 [16]),
    sliding disc (Figure 9 [18]), washer (Figure 9 [19]) and nut (Figure 9 [20]).

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.9.14 Hold the bottom panel (Figure 9 [13]). Remove the two screws (Figure 9 [10]), washers
    (Figure 9 [11]) and cushion washers (Figure 9 [12]) from the panel edges.
    2.9.15 Remove the four nuts (Figure 9 [21]), washers (Figure 9 [22]), grommets (Figure 9 [23]) and
    screws (Figure 9 [24]) from the bottom of the panel (Figure 9 [13]).
    2.9.16 Remove the two screws (Figure 9 [25]) from the cargo door light electrical cables
    (Figure 9 [26]).
    2.9.17 Remove the bottom panel (Figure 9 [13]) from the cargo door (Figure 9 [14]).
    2.10 Window Blind Assemblies

    Note

    This procedure is applicable to all of the window blind assemblies in the passenger compartment.

    2.10.1 Remove the top sidewall panel (Refer to Step 2.3).


    2.10.2 Remove the top panel of the cargo door (Refer to Step 2.9).
    2.10.3 Make a mark to show the position of the four screw heads (Figure 10 [4]).

    Note

    Use these marks to make sure that the contour on the blind assembly for the bottom window
    aligns with the contour on the sidewall window during the installation procedure.

    2.10.4 Hold the window blind assembly (Figure 10 [2]) and remove the four screws (Figure 10 [4])
    and washers (Figure 10 [5]).
    2.10.5 Remove the window blind assembly (Figure 10 [2]) from the aircraft.
    2.11 Bulkhead Trim at Frame 34

    Note

    The bulkhead trim is removed and installed as one piece. The bulkhead trim has a cover attached at
    the top rear side. The cover goes on the area between the bulkhead and the recirculation systems
    ventilation blower units.

    2.11.1 Remove the left rear sidewall panel (Refer to Step 2.6).
    2.11.2 Remove the four screws (Figure 11 [11]) from the two switch covers (Figure 11 [10]).
    2.11.3 Remove the cargo door light switch (Figure 11 [7]) from the bulkhead trim (Figure 11 [1]).
    2.11.4 Remove the phone and mic connectors (Figure 11 [2]) from the bulkhead trim (Figure 11 [1]).
    2.11.5 Disconnect the electrical connector (Figure 11 [8]) from the illuminated sign (Figure 11 [9]).
    2.11.6 Remove the screws (Figure 11 [4]), washers (Figure 11 [3]), screws (Figure 11 [5]) and
    washers (Figure 11 [6]).
    2.11.7 Remove the four screws (Figure 11 [12]), distance bushes (Figure 11 [13]) and discs
    (Figure 11 [14]).
    2.11.8 Remove the bulkhead trim (Figure 11 [1]) from the aircraft.

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3 Installation
    3.1 Armrests
    3.1.1 Table armrests
    3.1.1.1 Position the armrest (Figure 1 [4]) and connect the two electrical connectors
    (Figure 1 [3]) and (Figure 1 [5]).
    3.1.1.2 Put the armrest (Figure 1 [4]) in position on the table assembly (Figure 1 [1]).
    3.1.1.3 Push the sides of the armrest (Figure 1 [4]) against the table assembly
    (Figure 1 [1]) to engage the two piece fasteners (Figure 1 [2]).
    3.1.1.4 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − CABIN RDNG LIGHT (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − CABIN ENT 1 (CABIN BUS)
    3.1.1.5 Do an operational test of the cabin reading lights (Refer to DM 12-
    B-33-00-00-00A-903A-A).
    3.1.2 Seat armrests
    3.1.2.1 Put the armrest (Figure 1 [6]) in position on the sidewall panel (Figure 1 [9]).
    3.1.2.2 Push the armrest (Figure 1 [6]) down to engage the armrest clip (Figure 1 [8])
    with the sidewall panel clip (Figure 1 [10]).
    3.1.2.3 Push the bottom edge of the armrest (Figure 1 [6]) against the sidewall panel
    (Figure 1 [9]) to engage the two piece fasteners (Figure 1 [7]).
    3.1.2.4 Install the passengers oxygen masks removed from the armrests (Refer to DM
    12-B-35-20-01-00A-920A-A).
    3.1.2.5 Install the passenger seats removed from near the armrests (Refer to DM 12-
    B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A).
    3.1.2.6 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.2 Tables

    Note

    This procedure is applicable to all the three tables.

    3.2.1 Install the table (Figure 2 [1]) on the sidewall panel (Figure 2 [4]) with the eight washers
    (Figure 2 [3]) and bolts (Figure 2 [2]).
    3.2.2 Fold the table (Figure 2 [1]) then lower into position.
    3.2.3 Install the armrests (Refer to Step 2.1).
    3.3 Top Sidewall Panels

    Note

    This procedure is applicable to all three top sidewall panels. Two persons are necessary for this
    procedure.

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 9


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Note

    Some top sidewall panels are covered in a soft leather which can easily become dirty. It is
    recommended to wear soft linen gloves when you install these top sidewall panels.

    3.3.1 Put the top sidewall panel (Figure 3 [7]) in position and connect the two electrical connectors.
    Lift it above the edge of the overhead panel (Figure 3 [8]).

    Note

    To make Para easier, use the lifting procedure shown in Fig. 3.

    3.3.2 Install the center washer (Figure 3 [5]) and screw (Figure 3 [4]).
    3.3.3 Install the six distance bushes (Figure 3 [3]), washers (Figure 3 [2]) and screws
    (Figure 3 [1]).
    3.3.4 Tighten the screws that attach the overhead panel (Refer to Step 3.5).
    3.3.5 For the left panel installation, install the left cabinet (Refer to DM 12-B-25-21-05-00A-920A-
    A). For the right forward panel, install the right cabinet (Refer to DM 12-
    B-25-21-06-00A-920A-A) and the toilet compartment (Refer to DM 12-B-25-21-07-00A-920A-
    A).
    3.3.6 Install the flood lights in the holders on the overhead panel (Refer to Step 3.5).
    3.3.7 Install the flood light covers in the overhead panel (Refer to Step 3.5). Install the armrests
    (Refer to Step 3.1).
    3.3.8 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.4 Bottom Sidewall Panels

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items DM 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Note

    The cushion washers are bonded in position with adhesive (Adhesive (Pt.No. P08-009)).

    3.4.1 Make sure that the five cushion washers (Figure 4 [12]) are in position on the screw holes
    (Figure 4 [13]) in the floor.
    3.4.2 For a left sidewall installation make sure that the two cushion washers (Figure 4 [14]) are in
    position on the screw holes (Figure 4 [15]).
    3.4.3 Put the bottom sidewall panel (Figure 4 [5]) in position adjacent to the structure.
    3.4.4 Connect the air distribution pipe (Figure 4 [8]) to the sidewall duct (Figure 4 [6]) and tighten
    the clamp (Figure 4 [7]).
    3.4.5 Connect the air distribution pipe (Figure 4 [11]) to the sidewall duct (Figure 4 [9]) and tighten
    the clamp (Figure 4 [10]).

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 10


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.4.6 For a left sidewall installation install the two washers (Figure 4 [2]) and screws (Figure 4 [1]).
    3.4.7 Install the five washers (Figure 4 [4]) and the screws (Figure 4 [3]).
    3.4.8 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.4.9 Install the top sidewall panel (Refer to Step 3.3).
    3.4.10 Install the carpet (Refer to DM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A).
    3.5 Overhead Panel

    Note

    Three persons are necessary for this procedure.

    3.5.1 Put the overhead panel (Figure 5 [1]) in position adjacent to the structure.
    3.5.2 Connect the front air pipes (Figure 5 [20]) and (Figure 5 [21]) to the overhead panel
    (Figure 5 [1]). Put the clamps (Figure 5 [18]) in position and tighten.
    3.5.3 Connect the eleven electrical connectors (Figure 5 [17]).
    3.5.4 Connect the two rear air pipes (Figure 5 [13]) and (Figure 5 [15]) to the overhead panel
    (Figure 5 [1]). Put the clamps (Figure 5 [14]) and (Figure 5 [16]) in position and tighten.
    3.5.5 Put the overhead panel (Figure 5 [1]) up in position. Loosely install the four center washers
    (Figure 5 [5]) and screws (Figure 5 [6]).

    Note

    The screws are tightened when the top sidewall panels are installed.

    3.5.6 Install the top sidewalls (Refer to Step 3.3).


    3.5.7 Connect the flood lights electrical connectors and install the flood lights (Figure 5 [11]) in the
    holders (Figure 5 [10]) on the overhead panel (Figure 5 [1]).
    3.5.8 Install the two flood light covers (Figure 5 [12]) in the overhead panel (Figure 5 [1]).
    3.5.9 Install the trim strip (Figure 5 [7]) with the two washers (Figure 5 [8]) and screws
    (Figure 5 [9]).
    3.5.10 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − CABIN FLOOD LT 50% (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − CABIN FLOOD LT 100% (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − CABIN RDNG LIGHT (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − AUDIO 1 (STANDBY BUS)
    − CABIN ENT 1 (CABIN BUS)
    3.5.11 If necessary, connect a headset (Headset (Pt.No. Local supply)) to the pilots MIC and
    PHONE connectors.
    3.5.12 Set the MIC SELECT switch, on the left oxygen panel, to MIC.
    3.5.13 Energize the aircraft electrical system (Refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    3.5.14 Set the SPKR/PA switch, on the audio control panel, to PA.

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 11


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.5.15 Push the PTT switch on the pilots control wheel and speak into the headset microphone.
    Make sure that the PA communication is heard on the cabin loudspeakers.
    3.5.16 Do an operational test of the cabin flood and reading lights (Refer to DM 12-
    B-33-00-00-00A-903A-A).
    3.5.17 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (Refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    3.5.18 Disconnect the headset from the pilots MIC and PHONE connectors.
    3.5.19 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.6 Left Rear Sidewall Panel

    Note

    The left rear sidewall panel is one piece. The panel is installed in the area between aft of the cargo
    door and the bulkhead trim at frame 34.

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items DM 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Note

    The cushion washers are bonded in position with an adhesive (Adhesive (Pt.No. P08-009)).

    3.6.1 Make sure that the two cushion washers (Figure 6 [9]) are in position on the screw holes
    (Figure 6 [10]) in the floor.
    3.6.2 Put the sidewall panel (Figure 6 [2]) in position then lift above the edge of the overhead
    panel (Figure 6 [1]).
    3.6.3 Install the washer (Figure 6 [6]) and screw (Figure 6 [5]), washer (Figure 6 [8]) and screw
    (Figure 6 [7]).
    3.6.4 Install the washers (Figure 6 [4]) and screws (Figure 6 [3]).
    3.6.5 Tighten the screws in the overhead panel (Refer to Step 3.5).
    3.6.6 Install the left flood light cover in the overhead panel (Refer to Step 3.5).
    3.6.7 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.7 Passenger/Crew Door Panel
    3.7.1 Put the door panel (Figure 7 [2]) (Detail A) in position and install the electrical cable and
    grommet (Figure 7 [12]) in the door panel (Figure 7 [2]).
    3.7.2 Install the door panel (Figure 7 [2]) on the passenger/crew door (Figure 7 [10]) with the eight
    washers (Figure 7 [9]) and screws (Figure 7 [8]).
    3.7.3 Put the step assembly (Figure 7 [1]) in position on the passenger/crew door (Figure 7 [10]).
    3.7.4 Install the two bolts (Figure 7 [19]) (Detail G), washers (Figure 7 [20]), washers
    (Figure 7 [21]) and nuts (Figure 7 [22]) in the passenger/crew door (Figure 7 [10]) and the
    step assembly (Figure 7 [1]).

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 12


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.7.5 Install the two pins (Figure 7 [17]) (Detail E) and new spring pin (Spring pin ) (Figure 7 [18])
    in the passenger/crew door (Figure 7 [10]) and the step assembly (Figure 7 [1]).
    3.7.6 Install the two bolts (Figure 7 [16]) (Detail H), washers (Figure 7 [15]), washers
    (Figure 7 [14]) and nuts (Figure 7 [13]) in the passenger/crew door (Figure 7 [10]) and the
    step assembly (Figure 7 [1]).
    3.7.7 Install the inner handle (Figure 7 [4]) on the shaft (Figure 7 [5]) with the screw (Figure 7 [3]),
    washer (Figure 7 [6]) and nut (Figure 7 [7]).
    3.7.8 Move the handrail assembly (Figure 7 [11]) in position and install the strut (Figure 7 [26]) to
    the passenger/crew door (Figure 7 [10]). Use the bolt (Figure 7 [27]), washer (Figure 7 [23]),
    nut (Figure 7 [24]) and cap (Figure 7 [25]).
    3.7.9 Install the stanchion (Figure 7 [31]) to the passenger/crew door (Figure 7 [10]) with the shims
    (Figure 7 [30]), bolt (Figure 7 [32]), washer (Figure 7 [28]) and nut (Figure 7 [29]).
    3.7.10 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.7.11 Close the passenger/crew door (Figure 7 [10]).
    3.7.12 Make sure the passenger/crew door mechanism operates correctly and the step assembly
    folds to the correct position for flight.
    3.8 Emergency Exit Door Panel
    3.8.1 Install the panel (Figure 8 [2]) on the emergency exit door (Figure 8 [5]) with the four
    washers (Figure 8 [4]) and screws (Figure 8 [3]).
    3.8.2 Install the emergency exit door (Figure 8 [5]) in the structure.
    3.8.3 Attach the cap (Figure 8 [1]) to the panel (Figure 8 [2]).
    3.8.4 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.9 Cargo Door Panels
    3.9.1 Connect the cargo door light electrical cables (Figure 9 [26]) with the two screws
    (Figure 9 [25]).
    3.9.2 Put the bottom panel (Figure 9 [13]) in position on the cargo door (Figure 9 [14]).
    3.9.3 Install the two cushion washers (Figure 9 [12]), washers (Figure 9 [11]) and screws
    (Figure 9 [10]) in the panel edges.
    3.9.4 Install the four screws (Figure 9 [24]), grommets (Figure 9 [23]), washers (Figure 9 [22]) and
    nuts (Figure 9 [21]) in the bottom of the panel (Figure 9 [13]).
    3.9.5 Hold the weight of the cargo door (Figure 9 [14]) with a cargo door support (Cargo door
    support (Pt.No. Local supply)) between the ground and the bottom of the cargo door.
    3.9.6 Remove the nut (Figure 9 [20]), washer (Figure 9 [19]), sliding disc (Figure 9 [18]) and bolt
    (Figure 9 [16]) from the gas strut rod end (Figure 9 [17]).
    3.9.7 Put the top panel (Figure 9 [1]) in position on the cargo door (Figure 9 [14]) until the top
    panel clips (Figure 9 [15]) engage with the cargo door clips.
    3.9.8 Install the top panel (Figure 9 [1]) on the cargo door (Figure 9 [14]) with the four washers
    (Figure 9 [2]) and screws (Figure 9 [3]).
    3.9.9 Put the gas strut eye end (Figure 9 [17]) in position and install the bolt (Figure 9 [16]), sliding
    disc (Figure 9 [18]), washer (Figure 9 [19]) and nut (Figure 9 [20]).
    3.9.10 Remove the cargo door support from the cargo door (Figure 9 [14]).
    3.9.11 Connect together the electrical connectors (Figure 9 [8]) on the forward armrest
    (Figure 9 [4]).

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 13


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.9.12 Put the forward armrest (Figure 9 [4]) in position on the panel (Figure 9 [1]). Push the
    armrest until the top edge of the armrest engages with the panel clips (Figure 9 [7]).
    3.9.13 Push the bottom edge of the armrest (Figure 9 [4]) against the panel (Figure 9 [13]) to
    engage the two piece fasteners (Figure 9 [9]).
    3.9.14 Put the rear armrest (Figure 9 [6]) in position on the panel (Figure 9 [13]). Push the armrest
    until the top edge of the armrest engages with the panel clips (Figure 9 [7]).
    3.9.15 Push the bottom edge of the armrest (Figure 9 [6]) against the panel (Figure 9 [13]) to
    engage the two piece fasteners (Figure 9 [9]).
    3.9.16 Install the trim panel (Figure 9 [5]) around the door inner handle.
    3.9.17 Remove the safety clip and close these circuit breakers:
    − CABIN RDNG LIGHTS (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − SERVICE LTS (HOT BATTERY BUS)
    3.9.18 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.9.19 Energize the aircraft electrical system (Refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    3.9.20 Set the SERVICE LIGHT switch to ON and make sure that the door light comes on. Set the
    SERVICE LIGHT switch to the OFF position.
    3.9.21 On the passenger switch panel set the reading light switch to ON. Make sure that the
    reading light comes on. Set the reading light switch to the OFF position.
    3.9.22 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (Refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    3.10 Window Blind Assemblies

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items DM 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    3.10.1 Examine the window seal (Figure 10 [3]) and replace if necessary. If you must replace the
    seal, attach the new seal in position with the sealant (Sealant (Pt.No. P08-020)).
    3.10.2 Put the window blind assembly (Figure 10 [2]) on the structure in the position with the marks.
    Install the four washers (Figure 10 [5]) and screws (Figure 10 [4]).
    3.10.3 Make sure the window blind (Figure 10 [1]) operates correctly.
    3.10.4 Install the top sidewall panel (Refer to Step 3.3).
    3.10.5 Install the top panel of the cargo door (Refer to Step 2.9).
    3.10.6 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.11 Bulkhead Trim at Frame 34

    Note

    The bulkhead trim is removed and installed as one piece. The bulkhead trim has a cover attached at
    the top rear side. The cover goes on the area between the bulkhead and the cover of the recirculation
    systems ventilation blower units.

    3.11.1 Put the bulkhead (Figure 11 [1]) in position in the aircraft.

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 14


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.11.2 Install the 4 discs (Figure 11 [14]), distance bushes (Figure 11 [13]) and screws
    (Figure 11 [12])
    3.11.3 Install the washers (Figure 11 [3]), screws (Figure 11 [4]), washers (Figure 11 [6]) and
    screws (Figure 11 [5]).
    3.11.4 Connect the electrical connector (Figure 11 [8]) to the illuminated sign (Figure 11 [9]).
    3.11.5 Install the phone and mic connectors (Figure 11 [2]) in the bulkhead trim (Figure 11 [1]).
    3.11.6 Install the cargo door light switch (Figure 11 [7]) in the bulkhead trim (Figure 11 [1]).
    3.11.7 Install the two switch covers (Figure 11 [10]) with the four two screws (Figure 11 [11]).
    3.11.8 Install the left rear sidewall panel (Refer to Step 3.6).
    3.11.9 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 15


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    2
    3
    1

    10

    8
    2

    7
    4

    12-B-252103-A-S4080-20079-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Armrests – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 16


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3 2

    3
    2

    12-B-252103-A-S4080-20080-A-01-1

    Figure 2 Tables – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 17


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A A
    A
    10

    A
    B

    3
    8 2
    1

    B 4

    3
    2 7
    1

    B
    LIFTING PROCEDURE

    12-B-252103-A-S4080-20081-A-01-1

    Figure 3 Top Sidewall Panels – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 18


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    A

    A
    D

    2
    1

    5
    B

    2 5
    1

    B
    D
    C 6

    15
    C 8

    10

    14
    11

    12

    D 13

    12-B-252103-A-S4080-20082-A-01-1

    Figure 4 Bottom Sidewall Panels – Removal/installation

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 19


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    B
    1

    B 3

    7
    2

    9
    8 3
    B
    4

    10

    11

    12

    12-B-252103-A-S4080-20083-A-01-1

    Figure 5 Overhead Panel – Removal/installation (Sheet 1 of 2)

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 20


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    13
    17 14

    17

    15
    17 16

    17
    17

    A
    17

    17

    17

    B
    18
    17 17
    B

    18

    21

    20

    12-B-252103-A-S4080-20123-A-01-1

    Figure 5 Overhead Panel – Removal/installation (Sheet 2 of 2)

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 21


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2
    A
    7
    8

    6 4

    10

    B
    B

    12-B-252103-A-S4080-20084-A-01-1

    Figure 6 Left Rear Sidewall–Panel – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 22


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    11
    A 16
    15

    H A
    12
    14 H
    13
    22
    21
    1 D
    1
    10 10

    19 E

    20
    10 G
    3
    5
    C 1

    4
    G 2

    7
    6 E
    18
    F F

    25
    24 1
    10 29
    23
    17
    28
    B
    C
    B 8

    30 9

    26

    27
    D
    32 30 31
    12-B-252103-A-S4080-20085-A-01-1

    Figure 7 Passenger/Crew Door Panel – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 23


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    B 4
    A

    12-B-252103-A-S4080-20086-A-01-1

    Figure 8 Emergency Exit Door Panel – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 24


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    B
    20
    19
    16

    A 18

    17

    15
    21
    22

    23
    A 24

    14
    C

    2 3
    8

    4
    B
    12
    11
    D
    5

    10

    13
    25
    D

    26

    C
    6

    12-B-252103-A-S4080-20087-A-01-1

    Figure 9 Cargo Door Panels – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 25


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    5
    4

    12-B-252103-A-S4080-20088-A-01-1

    Figure 10 Window Blind Assemblies – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 26


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    3
    6
    4
    5
    B

    D 9
    C
    7

    D
    A D

    B 2
    C
    D
    D
    10

    11

    14
    13
    12
    B
    C

    12-B-252103-A-S4080-20089-A-01-1

    Figure 11 Bulkhead Trim at Frame 34 – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 27


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-03-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 28
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    EXECUTIVE CARPETS

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    EXECUTIVE CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.............................................................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Executive Carpets (Typical Layout) – Removal/Installation................................... 3

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE SEATS - REMOVAL INSTALLATION

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedures for the removal/installation of the carpets in the different executive
    interior installations.
    The carpets are made in two main sections, forward, and aft, and are attached to the floor panels with hook
    and loop fasteners.
    Figure 1 gives a generic impression of a typical layout for the installation of a carpet in an executive interior.
    If necessary, you can order drawings for a specified installation from the manufacturer.
    2 Removal
    2.1 Identify and remove the rail covers (Figure 1 [1]) from the seat rails (Figure 1 [3]) as necessary.
    2.2 Remove the necessary passenger seats (Refer to DM 12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A) for the removal of
    the correction section of the carpet.
    2.3 Identify and remove the carpet (Figure 1 [2]) from the floor panel (Figure 1 [4]).
    3 Installation
    3.1 Make sure the hook and loop fasteners on the carpet (Figure 1 [2]) and the floor panel (Figure 1 [4])
    are serviceable and aligned.
    3.2 Attach the carpet (Figure 1 [2]) to the floor panel (Figure 1 [4]).
    3.3 Install all removed passenger seats (Refer to DM 12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A).
    3.4 Install the rail covers (Figure 1 [1]) in the seat rails (Figure 1 [3]) as necessary.
    3.5 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    1

    12-B-252104-A-S4080-20090-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Executive Carpets (Typical Layout) – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    LEFT STORAGE CABINET

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    LEFT STORAGE CABINET - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION......................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Left Storage Cabinet Removal/Installation............................................................. 3

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Adhesive, epoxy Part P08-059 As
    Required

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-05-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedures for the removal/installation of the left storage cabinet.
    2 Removal
    2.1 Remove the two drawers (Figure 1 [6]) and (Figure 1 [7]) from the cabinet (Figure 1 [2]).
    2.2 Remove the two screws (Figure 1 [8]) from the cover strip (Figure 1 [9]) and remove the strip.
    2.3 Remove the four screws (Figure 1 [1]) from the floor of the cabinet (Figure 1 [2]).
    2.4 Slide the top of the cabinet (Figure 1 [2]) from the bulkhead bracket (Figure 1 [5]).
    2.5 Remove the cabinet (Figure 1 [2]) from the aircraft.
    3 Installation
    3.1
    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MANUFACTURER'S
    HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the numeric index of consumable items DM
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Make sure the four sets of spacers (Figure 1 [4]) are bonded in position on the bottom of the cabinet
    (Figure 1 [2]). Use the adhesive (Adhesive, epoxy (Pt.No. P08-059)) where necessary.
    3.2 Put the cabinet (Figure 1 [2]) in position. Make sure the bulkhead bracket (Figure 1 [5]) engages in the
    top of the cabinet.
    3.3 Install the four screws (Figure 1 [1]) in the floor of the cabinet (Figure 1 [2]) and into the seat rail
    fittings (Figure 1 [3]).
    3.4 Install the cover strip (Figure 1 [9]) with the two screws (Figure 1 [8]).
    3.5 Install the two drawers (Figure 1 [6]) and (Figure 1 [7]).
    3.6 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-05-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A 1

    B
    2
    4

    C 3

    B
    C
    B
    B

    B 7
    8

    12-B-252105-A-S4080-20091-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Left Storage Cabinet Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-05-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-05-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    RIGHT STORAGE CABINET

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    RIGHT STORAGE CABINET - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION...................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Right Storage Cabinet Removal/Installation........................................................... 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE SEATS - REMOVAL INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-21-03-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE TRIM - REMOVAL INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) Required

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-06-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Adhesive, epoxy Part P08-059 As
    Required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedures for the removal/installation of the right storage cabinet.
    2 Removal
    2.1 Remove the forward right passenger seat (Refer to DM 12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A).
    2.2 Remove the forward right armrest from the right sidewall (Refer to DM 12-B-25-21-03-00A-920A-A).
    2.3 Remove the two drawers (Figure 1 [6]) and (Figure 1 [8]) from the cabinet (Figure 1 [3]).
    2.4 Remove the two screws (Figure 1 [9]) from the cover strip (Figure 1 [7]) and remove the strip.
    2.5 Remove the screw (Figure 1 [2]) and the washer (Figure 1 [1]) from the cabinet (Figure 1 [3]).
    2.6 Remove the four screws (Figure 1 [12]) from the floor of the cabinet (Figure 1 [3]).
    2.7 For aircraft with a CD player installed:
    2.7.1 Open and install a safety clip (Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065))
    on this circuit breaker:
    − CABIN ENT 1 (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    2.7.2 Move the cabinet (Figure 1 [3]) to get access to behind the cabinet. Disconnect the electrical
    connectors (Figure 1 [5]) and the antenna connector (Figure 1 [4]).
    2.8 Remove the cabinet (Figure 1 [3]) from the aircraft.
    3 Installation
    3.1
    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MANUFACTURER'S
    HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-06-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the numeric index of consumable items DM
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Make sure the four sets of spacers (Figure 1 [11]) are bonded in position on the bottom of the cabinet
    (Figure 1 [3]). Use adhesive (Adhesive, epoxy (Pt.No. P08-059)) where necessary.
    3.2 For aircraft with a CD player installed:
    3.2.1 Put the cabinet (Figure 1 [3]) near the correct position. Connect the antenna connector
    (Figure 1 [4]) and electrical connectors (Figure 1 [5]), behind the cabinet.
    3.2.2 Remove the safety clip and close the circuit breaker:
    − CABIN ENT 1 (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    3.3 Put the cabinet (Figure 1 [3]) in position.
    3.4 Install the four screws (Figure 1 [12]) in the floor of the cabinet (Figure 1 [3]) and into the seat rail
    fittings (Figure 1 [10]).
    3.5 Install the washer (Figure 1 [1]) and screw (Figure 1 [2]) in the top of the cabinet (Figure 1 [3]).
    3.6 Install the cover strip (Figure 1 [7]) with the two screws (Figure 1 [9]).
    3.7 Install the two drawers (Figure 1 [6]) and (Figure 1 [8]) in the cabinet (Figure 1 [3]).
    3.8 Install the forward right armrest on the right sidewall (Refer to DM 12-B-25-21-03-00A-920A-A).
    3.9 Install the forward right passenger seat (Refer to DM 12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A).

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-06-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    B
    3

    A
    4

    C 5

    12

    3
    11 C

    10 C

    9
    C

    12-B-252106-A-S4080-20092-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Right Storage Cabinet Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-06-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-06-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: EXECUTIVE INTERIOR 12-B-25-21-06-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    TOILET COMPARTMENT

    REMOVAL INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    TOILET COMPARTMENT - REMOVAL INSTALLATION........................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 2
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Toilet Compartment – Removal/Installation............................................................ 6

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-25-10-03-00A-920A-A FLIGHT COMPARTMENT TRIM - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE SEATS - REMOVAL INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-21-05-00A-920A-A LEFT STORAGE CABINET - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-21-06-00A-920A-A RIGHT STORAGE CABINET - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Effectivity: TOILET COMPARTMENT 12-B-25-21-07-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) Required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Adhesive, epoxy Part P08-059 As
    Required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1
    Note

    Two persons are necessary to move the toilet compartment.

    Open and install a safety clip (Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on these
    circuit breakers:
    − TOILET (CABIN BUS)
    − CAB SERV 2 (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − CABIN FLOOD LT 50 (BATTERY BUS)
    − CABIN FLOOD LT 100 (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    1.2 Remove the seats on the right side of the aircraft (Refer to DM 12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A).
    1.3 Remove the left seat adjacent to the cargo door (Refer to DM 12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A).
    1.4 Remove the left storage cabinet (Refer to DM 12-B-25-21-05-00A-920A-A).
    1.5 Remove the right storage cabinet (Refer to DM 12-B-25-21-06-00A-920A-A).
    1.6 Remove the left bulkhead (Refer to DM 12-B-25-10-03-00A-920A-A).
    1.7 Remove the right flood light cover and the forward light.
    1.8 Remove the forward center carpet (Refer to DM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A).
    1.9 If the toilet compartment has doors installed:

    Effectivity: TOILET COMPARTMENT 12-B-25-21-07-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − Open the toilet compartment doors


    1.10 If the toilet compartment has curtains installed:
    − Loosen the screw (Figure 1 [16]) and remove the cager (Figure 1 [17]) from the toilet
    compartment partition curtain track (Figure 1 [6]). Remove the partition curtain (Figure 1 [2]) from
    the curtain track (Figure 1 [6])
    − Remove the screws (Figure 1 [15]) and remove the curtain track (Figure 1 [6]) from the overhead
    panel
    − Loosen the screw (Figure 1 [16]) and remove the cager (Figure 1 [17]) from the toilet
    compartment closure curtain track (Figure 1 [3]). Remove the curtain (Figure 1 [1]) from the toilet
    compartment closure curtain track (Figure 1 [3])
    1.11 Remove the drawer (Figure 1 [11]) from the toilet compartment (Figure 1 [8]).
    1.12 Remove the toilet side panels (Figure 1 [18]) and (Figure 1 [21]) from the toilet compartment
    (Figure 1 [8]).
    1.13
    Note

    The side panels are attached to the toilet compartment with two-piece hook fasteners.

    In the toilet compartment, disconnect the light switch connector (Figure 1 [19]) and the pump switch
    connector (Figure 1 [20]).
    1.14 Lift the toilet seat assembly (Figure 1 [27]). Disconnect the pump electrical connector (Figure 1 [26])
    from the connector (Figure 1 [24]) and remove the toilet seat assembly (Figure 1 [27]).
    1.15 Carefully remove the collector tank (Figure 1 [25]) from the toilet compartment (Figure 1 [8]) and
    remove from the aircraft. Discard the contents in accordance with local regulations.
    1.16 Remove the four screws (Figure 1 [23]) from the toilet box (Figure 1 [22]).
    1.17 Lift the toilet box (Figure 1 [22]) and disconnect the pump electrical connector from behind the
    electrical connector (Figure 1 [24]).
    1.18 Loosen the clamp (Figure 1 [28]) and disconnect the hose (Figure 1 [29]). Remove the toilet box
    (Figure 1 [22]).
    1.19 Remove the cover strip (Figure 1 [10]) from the toilet compartment (Figure 1 [8]) front edge.
    1.20
    Note

    The cover strip is attached to the toilet compartment with two-piece hook fasteners.

    Remove the two top screws (Figure 1 [4]) and washers (Figure 1 [5]) from the toilet compartment
    (Figure 1 [8]).
    1.21 Remove the five screws (Figure 1 [12]) from the floor of the toilet compartment (Figure 1 [8]).
    1.22 Close the doors (if installed) to the toilet compartment.
    1.23 Move the toilet compartment (Figure 1 [8]) sufficiently to get access to the rear.
    1.24 Disconnect the electrical connectors (Figure 1 [9]) and (Figure 1 [7]) (if installed). Pull the hose
    (Figure 1 [29]) out of the toilet compartment (Figure 1 [8]).
    1.25 Carefully move the toilet compartment (Figure 1 [8]) at an angle to the passenger/crew door opening.
    Turn the toilet compartment (Figure 1 [8]) and move it along the passenger compartment to the cargo
    door.

    Effectivity: TOILET COMPARTMENT 12-B-25-21-07-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1.26 Carefully tilt the toilet compartment (Figure 1 [8]) and move it out through the cargo door.
    2 Installation
    2.1
    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MANUFACTURER'S
    HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

    Note

    Two persons are necessary to move the toilet compartment.

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the numeric index of consumable items DM
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Make sure that the seven sets of spacers (Figure 1 [13]) are bonded in position on the back and on
    the bottom of the toilet compartment (Figure 1 [8]). Use adhesive (Adhesive, epoxy (Pt.No. P08-059))
    where necessary.
    2.2 Tilt the toilet compartment (Figure 1 [8]) and move it in through the cargo door.
    2.3 Move the toilet compartment along the passenger compartment to the passenger/crew door opening.
    2.4 Make sure the toilet compartment (Figure 1 [8]) is aligned correctly and move it across and almost into
    position.
    2.5 Connect the electrical connectors (Figure 1 [9]) and (Figure 1 [7]) (if installed) at the rear of the toilet
    compartment (Figure 1 [8]). Put the hose (Figure 1 [29]) through the hole in the toilet compartment
    (Figure 1 [8]).
    2.6 Put the toilet compartment (Figure 1 [8]) in position. Open the toilet compartment doors (if installed).
    2.7 Install the five screws (Figure 1 [12]) in the floor of the toilet compartment (Figure 1 [8]) and into the
    seat rail fittings (Figure 1 [14]).
    2.8 Install the cover strip (Figure 1 [10]) on the toilet compartment (Figure 1 [8]) front edge.
    2.9 Install the two top washers (Figure 1 [5]) and screws (Figure 1 [4]) in the toilet compartment
    (Figure 1 [8]).
    2.10 Put the toilet box (Figure 1 [8]) in position and connect the pump electrical connector to behind the
    electrical connector (Figure 1 [24]).
    2.11 Connect the hose (Figure 1 [29]) and tighten the clamp (Figure 1 [28]).
    2.12 Install the four screws (Figure 1 [23]) in the toilet box (Figure 1 [22]).
    2.13 Install the toilet collector tank (Figure 1 [25]).
    2.14 Connect the pump electrical connector (Figure 1 [26]) to the electrical connector (Figure 1 [24]) and
    install the toilet seat assembly (Figure 1 [27]).
    2.15 Connect the toilet compartment light switch connector (Figure 1 [19]) and the pump switch connector
    (Figure 1 [20]).
    2.16 Install the left and right toilet compartment side panels (Figure 1 [18]) and (Figure 1 [21]) in the toilet
    compartment (Figure 1 [8]).

    Effectivity: TOILET COMPARTMENT 12-B-25-21-07-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.17 Install the drawer (Figure 1 [11]) in the toilet compartment (Figure 1 [8]).
    2.18 If the aircraft has toilet compartment doors installed:
    − Close the doors
    2.19 If the aircraft has a toilet compartment curtain installed:
    − Install the closure curtain (Figure 1 [1]) in the toilet compartment closure curtain track
    (Figure 1 [3]). Install the cager (Figure 1 [17]) in the toilet compartment closure curtain track
    (Figure 1 [3]) and tighten the screw (Figure 1 [16]).
    − Install the curtain track (Figure 1 [6]) with the screws (Figure 1 [15]) on the overhead panel.
    − Install the partition curtain (Figure 1 [2]) in the curtain track (Figure 1 [6]).
    − Install the cager (Figure 1 [17]) in the curtain track (Figure 1 [6]) and tighten the screw
    (Figure 1 [16]).
    2.20 Install the right storage cabinet (Refer to DM 12-B-25-21-06-00A-920A-A).
    2.21 Install the left storage cabinet (Refer to DM 12-B-25-21-05-00A-920A-A).
    2.22 Install the left bulkhead (Refer to DM 12-B-25-10-03-00A-920A-A).
    2.23 Install the right forward light and the flood light cover.
    2.24 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − TOILET (CABIN BUS)
    − CAB SERV 2 (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − CABIN FLOOD LT 50 (BATTERY BUS)
    − CABIN FLOOD LT 100 (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    2.25 Install the forward center carpet (Refer to DM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A).
    2.26 Install the seats on the right side of the passenger compartment and the left seat adjacent to the cargo
    door (Refer to DM 12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A).

    Effectivity: TOILET COMPARTMENT 12-B-25-21-07-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A 12
    2 B
    1
    8
    13

    3 14

    A 7

    C 5

    B B
    B

    C
    B

    10
    17
    11

    16 15

    12-B-252107-A-S4080-20093-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Toilet Compartment – Removal/Installation (Sheet 1 of 2)

    Effectivity: TOILET COMPARTMENT 12-B-25-21-07-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    D
    8 28

    29

    27

    25

    26
    21

    18

    20

    24
    19

    23

    22

    12-B-252107-A-S4080-20094-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Toilet Compartment – Removal/Installation (Sheet 2 of 2)

    Effectivity: TOILET COMPARTMENT 12-B-25-21-07-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: TOILET COMPARTMENT 12-B-25-21-07-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 8
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    BENCH SEAT

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    BENCH SEAT - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.............................................................................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Bench Seat – Removal/Installation......................................................................... 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-35-00-00-00A-903A-A OXYGEN SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Cap Part Local supply As
    required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: BENCH SEAT 12-B-25-21-08-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    The bench seat can be installed in an aircraft that has an Executive Interior as a factory option. It can also be
    installed in an aircraft with an Executive Interior that is Post-SB 25-014. The bench seat is assembled from
    three executive seats.
    Refer to the Pilots Operating Handbook Section 6 for the bench seat location distance.
    2 Removal
    2.1 Remove front, rear and end panels (Figure 1 [2]) from the bench seat (Figure 1 [1]).
    2.2 Factory option installation. Disconnect the oxygen connector (Figure 1 [26]) from the connection
    (Figure 1 [25]) on the sidewall.
    Post SB 25-014. Remove the cover (Figure 1 [24]) and disconnect the oxygen connector
    (Figure 1 [23]) from the connection (Figure 1 [22]).
    2.3 Disconnect the three oxygen mask hoses (Figure 1 [3]) from the oxygen manifold (Figure 1 [4]) on the
    bench seat (Figure 1 [1]).
    2.4 Loosen the clamp (Figure 1 [5]) and disconnect the oxygen hose (Figure 1 [6]) from the oxygen
    manifold (Figure 1 [4]). Seal the hose with a cap (Cap (Pt.No. Local supply)).
    2.5 Pull the oxygen hose (Figure 1 [6]) and grommet (Figure 1 [9]) and release the two-piece fasteners
    (Figure 1 [7]) and (Figure 1 [8]).
    2.6 On the left seat (Figure 1 [1]), remove the locking needles (Figure 1 [15]) and (Figure 1 [20]) from the
    pins (Figure 1 [10]) and (Figure 1 [16]) from the left and right sides of the seat.
    2.7 Hold the left seat (Figure 1 [1]) and remove washers (Figure 1 [11]), (Figure 1 [17]) and pins
    (Figure 1 [10]), (Figure 1 [16]). Remove the left seat (Figure 1 [1]) from the fittings (Figure 1 [13]) and
    (Figure 1 [18]).
    2.8 On the center seat (Figure 1 [1]), remove the locking needles (Figure 1 [20]) from the pins
    (Figure 1 [16]) from the right side of the seat.
    2.9 Hold the center seat (Figure 1 [1]) and remove washers (Figure 1 [17]) and pins (Figure 1 [16]).
    Remove the center seat (Figure 1 [1]) from the fittings (Figure 1 [18]) complete with the adapter bars
    (Figure 1 [21]).
    2.10 On right seat (Figure 1 [1]), remove the locking needles (Figure 1 [15]) from the pins (Figure 1 [10])
    from the right side of the seat.
    2.11 Hold the right seat (Figure 1 [1]) and remove washers (Figure 1 [11]) and pins (Figure 1 [10]). Remove
    the right seat (Figure 1 [1]) from the fittings (Figure 1 [13]).
    2.12 Mark the position of the front and rear fittings (Figure 1 [13]) and (Figure 1 [18]) on the seat rails
    (Figure 1 [12]).

    Effectivity: BENCH SEAT 12-B-25-21-08-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.13 Loosen the screws (Figure 1 [14]) and (Figure 1 [19]) until they are clear of the seat rails
    (Figure 1 [12]).
    2.14 Remove the fittings (Figure 1 [13]) and (Figure 1 [18]) from the seat rails (Figure 1 [12]).
    3 Installation
    3.1 Put the fittings (Figure 1 [13]) and (Figure 1 [18]) in the seat rails (Figure 1 [12]). Align the front and
    rear fittings with the marks made during removal.
    3.2 Make sure the screws (Figure 1 [14]) and (Figure 1 [19]) align with the holes in the seat rails
    (Figure 1 [12]) then tighten the screws.
    3.3 Put the right seat (Figure 1 [1]) in position on the fittings (Figure 1 [13]) and (Figure 1 [18]). Install the
    pins (Figure 1 [10]), washers (Figure 1 [11]) and locking needles (Figure 1 [15]) on the right side of the
    seat.
    3.4 Put the center seat (Figure 1 [1]) in position on the fittings (Figure 1 [18]) and install the pins
    (Figure 1 [16]), washers (Figure 1 [17]) and locking needles (Figure 1 [20]) on the right side of the
    seat.
    3.5 Put the left seat (Figure 1 [1]) in position on the fittings (Figure 1 [13]) and (Figure 1 [18]). Install the
    pins (Figure 1 [10]), (Figure 1 [16]), washers (Figure 1 [11]), (Figure 1 [17]) and locking needles
    (Figure 1 [15]), (Figure 1 [20]) on the left and right sides of the seat.
    3.6 Remove the cap and connect the oxygen tube (Figure 1 [6]) to the oxygen manifold (Figure 1 [4]) and
    tighten the clamp (Figure 1 [5]).
    3.7 Position the oxygen tube (Figure 1 [6]), grommet (Figure 1 [9]) and engage the dual lock fasteners
    (Figure 1 [7]) and (Figure 1 [8]).
    3.8 Position the front panel and connect the three oxygen mask hoses (Figure 1 [3]) to the oxygen
    manifold (Figure 1 [4]) on the bench seat (Figure 1 [1]).
    3.9 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.10 Install the front, rear and end bench seat panels (Figure 1 [2]).
    3.11 Factory option installation. Connect the oxygen connector (Figure 1 [26]) to the oxygen connection
    (Figure 1 [25]) on the sidewall.
    Post SB 25-014. Connect the oxygen connector (Figure 1 [23]) to the oxygen connection
    (Figure 1 [22]) on the sidewall. Install the cover (Figure 1 [24]).
    3.12 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.13 Do an operational test of the passenger oxygen mask (Refer to DM 12-B-35-00-00-00A-903A-A).

    Effectivity: BENCH SEAT 12-B-25-21-08-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3
    B

    A
    6
    4

    5
    A
    25 26

    F
    FACTORY F
    OPTION

    24

    D C
    F 22
    23

    E 2
    POST SB 25-014

    D
    B
    2

    1 E
    2

    E D

    17
    D
    16
    10
    21
    11

    17
    12 C 7
    8
    18
    15 11
    9
    19 13 12 6
    25152

    20 14

    Figure 1 Bench Seat – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: BENCH SEAT 12-B-25-21-08-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: BENCH SEAT 12-B-25-21-08-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: BENCH SEAT 12-B-25-21-08-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    EQUIPMENT AND FURNISHINGS – STANDARD INTERIOR

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    EQUIPMENT AND FURNISHINGS – STANDARD INTERIOR - DESCRIPTION AND 1


    OPERATION...............................................................................................................................
    1 General................................................................................................................... 1
    2 Component Description.......................................................................................... 2
    2.1 Passenger Seats.................................................................................................... 2
    2.2 Passenger Compartment Trim............................................................................... 2
    2.2.1 Armrests................................................................................................................. 2
    2.2.2 Top Sidewalls......................................................................................................... 3
    2.2.3 Bottom Sidewalls.................................................................................................... 3
    2.2.4 Overhead Panel...................................................................................................... 3
    2.2.5 Left Rear Sidewall Panel........................................................................................ 3
    2.2.6 Passenger/Crew Door Cover.................................................................................. 3
    2.2.7 Emergency Exit Door Cover................................................................................... 3
    2.2.8 Cargo Door Sidewalls............................................................................................. 3
    2.2.9 Window Blind Assemblies...................................................................................... 4
    2.2.10 Bulkhead Assembly at Frame 34............................................................................ 4
    2.3 Passenger Compartment Carpets.......................................................................... 4
    2.4 Baggage area......................................................................................................... 4
    2.5 Combi Interior......................................................................................................... 4

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Standard Interior Layout......................................................................................... 5

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-25-23-00-00A-040A-A BAGGAGE AREA AND TRIM - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-25-50-00-00A-040A-A CARGO COMPARTMENT - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION

    Description

    1 General
    The standard interior is a nine seat configuration that has the main parts as follows:
    − The passenger seats

    Effectivity: STANDARD INTERIOR 12-B-25-22-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − The passenger compartment trim


    − The passenger compartment carpets
    − The baggage area
    − a combi interior

    2 Component Description

    2.1 Passenger Seats


    The passenger seats are installed on seat rails. The seat rails make the removal and installation of the seats from
    the aircraft easy. Numbers identify the seat positions with No. 1 at the front left and No. 2 at the front right of the
    passenger compartment.
    The seats have back and pan cushions, a reclining backrest, a sliding headrest and an inner armrest that folds to
    make access easier. The recline control is a push button installed on the inboard side of the side support assembly.
    Oxygen masks are usually kept in fabric pockets below the seats, but not seat 7 which is adjacent to the cargo
    door. The oxygen mask for seat 7 is in the pocket below seat 5 where there are two oxygen masks. A pocket for
    magazines is installed on the aft of each seat.
    All passenger seats have a three point safety harness. The harness has a lap strap and an inertia-reel shoulder
    strap.
    The passenger seats can have, as a factory option or Post SB 25-005, a luggage restraint bar installed on the front
    bottom part of the seat structure. This luggage restraint lets small items of luggage be put below the seat during the
    flight.

    2.2 Passenger Compartment Trim


    The passenger compartment trim has these main components as follows:
    − The armrests
    − The top sidewalls
    − The bottom sidewalls
    − The overhead panel
    − The left rear sidewall panel
    − The passenger/crew door cover
    − The emergency exit door cover
    − The cargo door sidewalls
    − The window blind assemblies
    − The bulkhead assembly at frame 34

    2.2.1 Armrests
    The armrests give the support on the outboard sides of the passenger compartment. The armrests are installed
    along each side of the passenger compartment. The armrests are attached to the top and bottom sidewalls with
    clips. Each part can be removed independently.

    Effectivity: STANDARD INTERIOR 12-B-25-22-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.2.2 Top Sidewalls


    The three top sidewalls are installed between the overhead panel and the bottom of the windows, along each side
    of the passenger compartment and are attached to the structure with screws and spacers.
    The left top sidewall is installed between the passenger crew door and the cargo door. The forward right top
    sidewall is installed between the flight compartment and emergency exit door. The rear right top sidewall is
    installed between the emergency exit door and the baggage compartment. The top sidewalls have window cut outs
    in them.

    2.2.3 Bottom Sidewalls


    The two bottom sidewalls are installed between the top sidewalls and the floor of the passenger compartment,
    along each side of the passenger compartment and are attached to the structure with screws and spacers.
    The left bottom sidewall is installed between the passenger crew door and the cargo door. The right bottom
    sidewall is installed between the flight compartment and the baggage compartment. The bottom sidewalls have
    vents at the bottom for the air conditioning system and holes that give access to the connectors for the passengers
    oxygen masks.

    2.2.4 Overhead Panel


    The overhead panel is installed at the top of the passenger compartment. The panel is attached to the structure
    with screws and spacers. The overhead panel has the passenger reading lights, flood lights, loudspeakers and air
    conditioning system air outlets installed.

    2.2.5 Left Rear Sidewall Panel


    The left rear sidewall is installed between the aft of the cargo door and the baggage compartment. The panel is in
    one piece and is made in the shape of the top, armrest and bottom sidewalls.

    2.2.6 Passenger/Crew Door Cover


    The cover for the passenger crew door is made in the shape of the door to prevent damage to the door inner
    locking mechanism. The cover is installed on the passenger crew door with screws.

    2.2.7 Emergency Exit Door Cover


    The cover for the emergency exit door is made in the shape of the door to prevent damage to the door mechanism.
    The cover is attached to the emergency exit door with nuts and has a window blind assembly installed. An access
    panel at the top of the cover gives access to the inner handle.

    2.2.8 Cargo Door Sidewalls


    The sidewalls for the cargo door are made in the shape of the door to prevent damage to the door inner locking
    mechanism. The sidewalls for the cargo door are almost the same as the other sidewalls in the passenger
    compartment.
    Clips, screws and spacers attach the top and bottom sidewalls to the cargo door. There is a window blind assembly
    in the top sidewall and a cargo light in the bottom sidewall. A small trim panel, attached with hook and loop
    fasteners, is installed above the area around the inner door handle.

    Effectivity: STANDARD INTERIOR 12-B-25-22-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.2.9 Window Blind Assemblies


    Window blind assemblies are used to prevent too much external light in the passenger compartment. There are
    four blind assemblies installed on the left and five blind assemblies are installed on the right. To close or open the
    window blinds, pull down or push up.
    The blind assemblies have an acrylic window and a seal. The window and seal prevent the condensation on the
    cabin windows. The window blind assemblies are installed between the structure and the top sidewalls. The
    assemblies are attached to the structure with screws.

    2.2.10 Bulkhead Assembly at Frame 34


    The bulkhead assembly is assembled and installed as one piece at frame 34. It gives the divide between the
    passenger and baggage compartments. The assembly has a small panel attached at the top rear which covers the
    area in front of the cooling system blower units. It also has phone and mic connectors installed on it and is attached
    to the structure with screws and washers.

    2.3 Passenger Compartment Carpets


    The passenger compartment carpets prevent damage to the floor of the passenger compartment and give a non-
    slip surface on which the passengers can walk. The carpets are installed in strips between the two left seat rails,
    the two right seat rails and the center part of the floor. Each strip is in two parts that let a small area of carpet be
    removed for floor panel access to the equipment below the floor. The carpets are installed on the passenger
    compartment floor with hook and loop fasteners.

    2.4 Baggage area


    The baggage area is aft of the passenger compartment between frames 34 and 36 (Refer to DM 12-
    B-25-23-00-00A-040A-A).

    2.5 Combi Interior


    The interior of the passenger compartment can be changed easily into a combi interior. This change is done by
    removal of the rear three, the rear five or all of the nine seats. Cargo can be put through the cargo door and held in
    position with the tie-down straps attached to the seat rails (Refer to DM 12-B-25-50-00-00A-040A-A).

    Effectivity: STANDARD INTERIOR 12-B-25-22-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    SIDEWALL FOR THE


    CARGO DOOR

    OVERHEAD
    PANEL

    SAFETY
    HARNESS

    COVER FOR THE


    EMERGENCY EXIT
    DOOR

    PASSENGER
    SEAT

    TOP
    SIDEWALL

    BAGGAGE
    AREA

    BAGGAGE
    NET

    WINDOW
    BLIND ASSEMBLY

    ARMREST

    BOTTOM
    SIDEWALL
    SEAT
    RAIL
    PASSENGER
    COMPARTMENT
    CARPET
    A

    COVER FOR THE


    PASSENGER/CREW
    DOOR

    12-B-252200-A-S4080-20095-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Standard Interior Layout

    Effectivity: STANDARD INTERIOR 12-B-25-22-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: STANDARD INTERIOR 12-B-25-22-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    STANDARD SEATS

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    STANDARD SEATS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Standard Seats Removal/Installation..................................................................... 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-35-00-00-00A-903A-A OXYGEN SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: STANDARD INTERIOR 12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-16 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedures for the removal/installation of all the standard seats. The seat
    location distances are shown in the Pilots Operating Handbook, Section 6.
    Seat 7 which is adjacent to the cargo door does not have an oxygen mask below the seat. The oxygen mask
    for seat 7 is kept under seat 5. Seat 5 has two oxygen masks kept in the net below the seat and two oxygen
    outlets on the sidewall adjacent to the seat.
    2 Removal
    2.1 For a seat 7 removal, Step 2.4 and Step 2.7 are not applicable. For a seat 5 removal, at Step 2.4
    disconnect the two oxygen hoses and at Step 2.7 remove the two oxygen masks.
    2.2 Remove the seat rail covers Figure 1 [3].
    2.3 Put a mark on the seat rail Figure 1 [4] at the forward edge of the seat to show the initial position of the
    seat.
    2.4 Disconnect the passenger oxygen mask hose Figure 1 [7] from the oxygen outlet Figure 1 [6] on the
    sidewall.
    2.5 Pull up and turn the mechanism Figure 1 [2] that locks the seat in position.
    2.6 Move the seat Figure 1 [1] forward or rearward to disengage the fittings Figure 1 [5].
    2.7 If the seat is to be replaced:
    2.7.1 Remove the passenger oxygen mask from the net below the seat.
    2.7.2 Post SB 25-005, remove the nuts Figure 1 [10], the washers Figure 1 [9], the bolts
    Figure 1 [8] and the luggage restraint bar Figure 1 [11].
    3 Installation
    3.1 For a seat 7 installation, Step 3.2.2, Step 3.6 and Step 3.8 are not applicable. For a seat 5 installation,
    at Step 3.2 put the two oxygen masks in the net below the seat and at Step 3.6 connect the two
    oxygen hoses.
    3.2 If the seat was replaced:
    3.2.1 Post SB 25-005, install the luggage restraint bar Figure 1 [11] with the bolts Figure 1 [8], the
    washers Figure 1 [9] and the nuts Figure 1 [10].
    3.2.2 Put the passenger oxygen mask in the net below the seat.
    3.3 Position the seat Figure 1 [1] on the seat rails Figure 1 [4] at the mark made during removal. Move the
    seat forward or rearward and engage the fittings Figure 1 [5] in the seat rails Figure 1 [4].
    3.4 Turn and release the mechanism Figure 1 [2] that locks the seat in the seat rails Figure 1 [4].
    3.5 Install the seat rail covers Figure 1 [3].

    Effectivity: STANDARD INTERIOR 12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-16 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.6 Connect the passenger oxygen mask hose Figure 1 [7] to the oxygen outlet Figure 1 [6] on the
    sidewall.
    3.7 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.8 Do an operational test of the passenger oxygen mask (Refer to AMM 12-B-35-00-00-00A-903A-A).

    Effectivity: STANDARD INTERIOR 12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-16 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    11

    B
    POST SB 25-005

    9 7

    10 6

    2
    5

    B
    4
    5
    B

    12-B-252201-A-S4080-20096-A-02-1

    Figure 1 Standard Seats Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: STANDARD INTERIOR 12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-16 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: STANDARD INTERIOR 12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-16 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: STANDARD INTERIOR 12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-16 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    STANDARD SEAT SAFETY HARNESS

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    STANDARD SEAT SAFETY HARNESS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION..................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A STANDARD SEATS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: STANDARD INTERIOR 12-B-25-22-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedures for the removal/installation of all the passenger seat harnesses for
    aircraft with a standard interior.
    The seat pan and backrest cushions are attached to the seat frame with two-piece fasteners.
    2 Removal
    2.1 Remove the passenger seats (Refer to DM 12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A).
    2.2 Remove the seat harness for standard passenger seats (Refer to CMM 25-20-99, Document No.
    504300037, Page Block 301).
    3 Installation
    3.1 Install the seat harness for standard passenger seats (Refer to CMM 25-20-99, Document No.
    504300037, Page Block 701).
    3.2 Do the operational test of the seat harness for standard passenger seats (Refer to CMM 25-20-99,
    Document No. 504300037, Page Block 101).
    3.3 Install the passenger seats (Refer to DM 12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A).

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: STANDARD INTERIOR 12-B-25-22-02-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    STANDARD TRIM

    REMOVAL INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    STANDARD TRIM - REMOVAL INSTALLATION....................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 2
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Armrests – Removal/Installation............................................................................. 13
    2 Top Sidewall Panels – Removal/Installation........................................................... 14
    3 Sidewall Panels – Removal/Installation.................................................................. 15
    4 Overhead Panel – Removal/Installation................................................................. 16
    5 Left Rear Sidewall Panel – Removal/Installation.................................................... 18
    6 Passenger/Crew Door Panel – Removal/Installation.............................................. 19
    7 Emergency Exit Door Panel – Removal/Installation............................................... 20
    8 Cargo Door Panels – Removal/Installation............................................................. 21
    9 Window Blind Assemblies – Removal/Installation.................................................. 22
    10 Bulkhead Trim – Removal/Installation.................................................................... 23

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A STANDARD SEATS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A STANDARD CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-33-00-00-00A-903A-A INTERIOR LIGHTS - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Effectivity: STANDARD INTERIOR 12-B-25-22-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-16 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Cargo door support Part Local supply 1
    Headset Part Local supply 1
    Safety clip Part 110.88.07.065 As
    Required
    Trestle Part Local supply 1

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Adhesive Part P08-009 As
    Required
    Sealant Part P08-020 As
    Required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Spring pin CSN 52-60-00-01-175 As
    Required

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedures for the removal/installation for those parts of the passenger
    compartment standard interior trim as follows:
    − The armrests
    − The top sidewall panels
    − The bottom sidewall panels
    − The overhead panel
    − The left rear sidewall panel
    − The passenger/crew door panel
    − The emergency exit door panel
    − The cargo door sidewall panels
    − The window blind assemblies
    − The bulkhead trim at frame 34

    Effectivity: STANDARD INTERIOR 12-B-25-22-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-16 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2 Removal
    2.1 Armrests

    Note

    This procedure is applicable to all seven armrests.

    2.1.1 Remove the passenger seats near the armrests (Refer to DM 12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A).
    2.1.2 Pull the bottom edge of the armrest (Figure 1 [2]) away from the sidewall panel (Figure 1 [1]).
    Disengage the two piece fasteners (Figure 1 [3]) from the sidewall panel (Figure 1 [1]).
    2.1.3 Move the armrest (Figure 1 [2]) up and remove the armrest from the sidewall panel clips
    (Figure 1 [5]).
    2.1.4 Remove the armrest (Figure 1 [2]) from the aircraft.
    2.2 Top Sidewall Panels

    Note

    This procedure is applicable to all three top sidewall panels. Two persons are necessary for this
    procedure.

    2.2.1 Remove the armrests (Refer to Step 2.1).


    2.2.2 Remove the covers from the overhead panel (Refer to Step 2.4).
    2.2.3 Loosen the screws that attach the overhead panel (Refer to Step 2.4).
    2.2.4 Hold the top sidewall panel (Figure 2 [7]) and remove the six screws (Figure 2 [1]), washers
    (Figure 2 [2]) and distance bushes (Figure 2 [3]).
    2.2.5 Remove the center screw (Figure 2 [4]) and washer (Figure 2 [5]).
    2.2.6 Pull the top sidewall panel (Figure 2 [7]) down to release the top edge from above the
    overhead panel (Figure 2 [8]).
    2.2.7 Remove the top sidewall panel (Figure 2 [7]) from the aircraft.
    2.3 Bottom Sidewall Panels

    Note

    This procedure is applicable to the two bottom sidewall panels. Two persons are necessary for this
    procedure.

    2.3.1 Remove the carpet (Refer to DM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A).


    2.3.2 Remove the top sidewall panel (Refer to Step 2.2).
    2.3.3 To do a left sidewall installation, remove the two screws (Figure 3 [1]) and washers
    (Figure 3 [2]).
    2.3.4 Remove the five screws (Figure 3 [3]) and washers (Figure 3 [4]).
    2.3.5 Carefully move the bottom sidewall panel (Figure 3 [5]) away from the structure to get
    access to the air distribution ducts (Figure 3 [6]) and (Figure 3 [9]).

    Effectivity: STANDARD INTERIOR 12-B-25-22-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-16 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.3.6 Loosen the clamp (Figure 3 [10]) and disconnect the air distribution pipe (Figure 3 [11]) from
    the sidewall duct (Figure 3 [9]).
    2.3.7 Loosen the clamp (Figure 3 [7]) and disconnect the air distribution pipe (Figure 3 [8]) from
    the sidewall duct (Figure 3 [6]).
    2.3.8 Remove the bottom sidewall panel (Figure 3 [5]) from the aircraft.
    2.4 Overhead Panel

    Note

    Three persons are necessary for this procedure.

    2.4.1 Open and install safety clips (Safety clip (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on these circuit breakers:
    − CABIN FLOOD LT 50% (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − CABIN FLOOD LT 100% (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − CABIN RDNG LIGHT (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − AUDIO 1 (STANDBY BUS)
    2.4.2 Remove the top sidewall panels (Refer to Step 2.2).

    WARNING

    THE TOP SIDEWALL PANELS ARE HELD IN POSITION BY THE OVERHEAD PANEL.
    BEFORE REMOVAL OF THE OVERHEAD PANEL, THE TOP SIDEWALL PANELS MUST
    BE REMOVED FIRST. REMOVAL OF THE TOP SIDEWALL PANELS PREVENTS INJURY
    TO PERSONNEL AND DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPMENT.

    2.4.3 Remove the left rear sidewall panel (Refer to Step 2.5).
    2.4.4 Remove the two screws (Figure 4 [9]), washers (Figure 4 [8]) and trim strip (Figure 4 [7]).
    2.4.5 Remove the left and right covers (Figure 4 [10]) from the overhead panel (Figure 4 [1]).
    2.4.6 Hold the overhead panel (Figure 4 [1]). Remove the screws (Figure 4 [4]), distance bushes
    (Figure 4 [3]) and discs (Figure 4 [2]).
    2.4.7 Remove the four center screws (Figure 4 [6]) and washers (Figure 4 [5]).
    2.4.8 Lower the overhead panel (Figure 4 [1]) sufficiently to get access to the electrical connectors
    and the air conditioning pipes.
    2.4.9 Loosen the front clamps (Figure 4 [16]) and (Figure 4 [17]). Disconnect the air pipes
    (Figure 4 [18]) and (Figure 4 [19]) from the overhead panel (Figure 4 [1]).
    2.4.10 Disconnect the four electrical connectors (Figure 4 [15]).
    2.4.11 Loosen the rear clamps (Figure 4 [12]) and (Figure 4 [14]). Disconnect the air pipes
    (Figure 4 [11]) and (Figure 4 [13]) from the overhead panel (Figure 4 [1]).
    2.4.12 Remove the overhead panel (Figure 4 [1]) from the aircraft.
    2.5 Left Rear Sidewall Panel

    Effectivity: STANDARD INTERIOR 12-B-25-22-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-16 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Note

    The left rear sidewall panel is made in one piece. The panel is installed in the area between the aft of
    the cargo door and the bulkhead trim at frame 34.

    2.5.1 Remove the left cover from the overhead panel (Refer to Step 2.4).
    2.5.2 Loosen the screws on the left, aft of the overhead panel (Refer to Step 2.4).
    2.5.3 Remove the screws (Figure 5 [3]) and washers (Figure 5 [4]).
    2.5.4 Remove the screw (Figure 5 [5]), washer (Figure 5 [6]), screw (Figure 5 [7]) and washer
    (Figure 5 [8]).
    2.5.5 Pull the sidewall panel (Figure 5 [2]) down to release the top edge from above the overhead
    panel (Figure 5 [1]).
    2.5.6 Remove the sidewall panel (Figure 5 [2]) from the aircraft.
    2.6 Passenger/Crew Door Panel
    2.6.1 Put the trestle (Trestle (Pt.No. Local supply)) below the passenger door.
    2.6.2 Open the passenger/crew door (Figure 6 [10]) and lower it on to the Trestle (Pt.No. Local
    supply).
    2.6.3 Hold the handrail assembly (Figure 6 [11]) and remove the nut (Figure 6 [29]), washer
    (Figure 6 [28]), bolt (Figure 6 [32]) and shims (Figure 6 [30]) from the lower stanchion
    assembly (Figure 6 [31]).
    2.6.4 Remove the cap (Figure 6 [25]), nut (Figure 6 [24]), washer (Figure 6 [23]) and bolt
    (Figure 6 [27]) from the strut assembly (Figure 6 [26]). Move the hand rail assembly
    (Figure 6 [11]) up away from the door panel (Figure 6 [2]).
    2.6.5 Remove the nut (Figure 6 [7]), washer (Figure 6 [6]), screw (Figure 6 [3]) and the inner
    handle (Figure 6 [4]) from the shaft (Figure 6 [5]).
    2.6.6 Hold the step assembly (Figure 6 [1]) and remove the two nuts (Figure 6 [13]), washers
    (Figure 6 [14]), bolts (Figure 6 [16]) and washers (Figure 6 [15]).
    2.6.7 Remove the two spring pins (Figure 6 [18]) from the step assembly (Figure 6 [1]). Discard
    the two spring pins (Figure 6 [18]).
    2.6.8 Hold the step assembly (Figure 6 [1]) and remove the two pins (Figure 6 [17]).
    2.6.9 Hold the step assembly (Figure 6 [1]) and remove the two nuts (Figure 6 [22]), washers
    (Figure 6 [21]), bolts (Figure 6 [19]) and washers (Figure 6 [20]).
    2.6.10 Remove the step assembly (Figure 6 [1]) from the passenger/crew door (Figure 6 [10]).
    2.6.11 Remove the eight screws (Figure 6 [8]) and washers (Figure 6 [9]) from the door panel
    (Figure 6 [2]).
    2.6.12 Carefully remove the electrical cable and grommet (Figure 6 [12]) from the door panel
    (Figure 6 [2]) and remove the door panel (Figure 6 [2]) from the passenger/crew door
    (Figure 6 [10]).
    2.7 Emergency Exit Door Panel
    2.7.1 Remove the cap (Figure 7 [1]) from the panel (Figure 7 [2]).
    2.7.2 Remove the emergency exit door (Figure 7 [5]) from the structure.
    2.7.3 Remove the four screws (Figure 7 [3]) and washers (Figure 7 [4]).
    2.7.4 Remove the panel (Figure 7 [2]) from the emergency exit door (Figure 7 [5]).

    Effectivity: STANDARD INTERIOR 12-B-25-22-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-16 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.8 Cargo Door Panel


    2.8.1 Open and install safety clips (Safety clip (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on these circuit breakers:
    − CABIN RDNG LIGHTS (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − SERVICE LTS (HOT BATTERY BUS)
    2.8.2 Remove the left rear sidewall panel (Refer to Step 2.5).
    2.8.3 Lower the cargo door (Figure 8 [13]) almost to the closed position.
    2.8.4 Remove the trim panel (Figure 8 [5]) from around the door inner handle.
    2.8.5 Pull the bottom edge of the forward armrest (Figure 8 [4]) away from the panel (Figure 8 [13])
    and disengage the two piece fasteners (Figure 8 [8]). Lift the armrest and remove from the
    panel.
    2.8.6 Pull the bottom edge of the rear armrest (Figure 8 [6]) away from the panel (Figure 8 [13])
    and disengage the two piece fasteners (Figure 8 [8]). Lift the armrest and remove from the
    panel.
    2.8.7 Remove the four screws (Figure 8 [3]) and washers (Figure 8 [2]).
    2.8.8 Open the cargo door sufficiently to get access to the bolt (Figure 8 [15]).
    2.8.9 Hold the weight of the cargo door (Figure 8 [13]) with a support (Cargo door
    support (Pt.No. Local supply)) between the ground and the bottom of the cargo door.
    2.8.10 Remove the nut (Figure 8 [19]), washer (Figure 8 [18]), sliding disc (Figure 8 [17]) and bolt
    (Figure 8 [15]) from the gas strut rod end (Figure 8 [16]).
    2.8.11 Carefully disengage the top panel clips (Figure 8 [14]) from the cargo door clips.
    2.8.12 Remove the top panel (Figure 8 [1]) from the cargo door (Figure 8 [13]).
    2.8.13 Put the gas strut eye end (Figure 8 [16]) in position and loosely install the bolt (Figure 8 [15]),
    sliding disc (Figure 8 [17]), washer (Figure 8 [18]) and nut (Figure 8 [19]).
    2.8.14 Hold the bottom panel (Figure 8 [4]). Remove the two screws (Figure 8 [9]), washers
    (Figure 8 [10]) and cushion washers (Figure 8 [11]) from the panel edges.
    2.8.15 Remove the four nuts (Figure 8 [20]), washers (Figure 8 [21]), grommets (Figure 8 [22]) and
    screws (Figure 8 [23]) from the bottom of the panel (Figure 8 [12]).
    2.8.16 Remove the two screws (Figure 8 [24]) from the cargo door light electrical cables
    (Figure 8 [25]).
    2.8.17 Remove the bottom panel (Figure 8 [12]) from the cargo door (Figure 8 [13]).
    2.9 Window Blind Assemblies

    Note

    This procedure is applicable to all of the window blind assemblies in the passenger compartment.

    2.9.1 Remove the top sidewall panel (Refer to Step 2.2).


    2.9.2 Remove the top panel of the cargo door (Refer to Step 2.8).
    2.9.3 Make a mark to show the position of the four screw heads (Figure 9 [4]).

    Effectivity: STANDARD INTERIOR 12-B-25-22-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-16 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Note

    These marks make sure that the contour on the blind assembly for the bottom window aligns
    with the contour on the sidewall window during the installation procedure.

    2.9.4 Hold the window blind assembly (Figure 9 [2]) and remove the four screws (Figure 9 [4]) and
    washers (Figure 9 [5]).
    2.9.5 Remove the window blind assembly (Figure 9 [2]) from the aircraft.
    2.10 Bulkhead Trim at Frame 34

    Note

    The bulkhead trim is removed and installed as one piece. The bulkhead trim has a cover attached at
    the top rear side. The cover goes on the area between the bulkhead and the cover of the recirculation
    systems ventilation blower units.

    2.10.1 Remove the left rear sidewall panel (Refer to Step 2.5).
    2.10.2 Remove the two screws (Figure 10 [8]) from the switch cover (Figure 10 [7]).
    2.10.3 Remove the phone and mic connectors (Figure 10 [2]) from the bulkhead trim (Figure 10 [1]).
    2.10.4 Remove the screws (Figure 10 [4]), washers (Figure 10 [3]), screws (Figure 10 [5]) and
    washers (Figure 10 [6]).
    2.10.5 Remove the four screws (Figure 10 [9]), distance bushes (Figure 10 [10]) and discs
    (Figure 10 [11]).
    2.10.6 Remove the bulkhead trim (Figure 10 [1]) from the aircraft.
    3 Installation
    3.1 Armrests
    3.1.1 Put the armrest (Figure 1 [2]) in position on the sidewall panel (Figure 1 [1]). Push the
    armrest to engage the armrest clip (Figure 1 [4]) with the sidewall panel clip (Figure 1 [5]).
    3.1.2 Push the bottom edge of the armrest (Figure 1 [2]) against the sidewall panel (Figure 1 [1]) to
    engage the two piece fasteners (Figure 1 [3]).
    3.1.3 Install the passenger seats removed from near the armrests (Refer to DM 12-
    B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A).
    3.1.4 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.2 Top Sidewall Panels

    Note

    This procedure is applicable to all three top sidewall panels. Two persons are necessary for this
    procedure.

    3.2.1 Put the top sidewall panel (Figure 2 [7]) in position and lift it above the edge of the overhead
    panel (Figure 2 [8]).

    Effectivity: STANDARD INTERIOR 12-B-25-22-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-16 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Note

    To make Step 3.2.2 easier, use the lifting procedure shown in Fig. 3.

    3.2.2 Install the center washer (Figure 2 [5]) and screw (Figure 2 [4]).
    3.2.3 Install the six distance bushes (Figure 2 [3]), washers (Figure 2 [2]) and screws
    (Figure 2 [1]).
    3.2.4 Tighten the screws that attach the overhead panel (Refer to Step 3.4).
    3.2.5 Install the covers in the overhead panel (Refer to Step 3.4). Install the armrests (Refer to
    Step 3.1).
    3.2.6 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.3 Bottom Sidewall Panels
    3.3.1 Make sure that the five cushion washers (Figure 3 [12]) are in position on the screw holes
    (Figure 3 [13]) in the floor.

    Note

    The cushion washers are bonded in position with adhesive (Adhesive (Pt.No. P08-009)).

    3.3.2 Make sure that the two cushion washers (Figure 3 [14]) are in position on the screw holes
    (Figure 3 [15]) for a left sidewall installation.
    3.3.3 Put the bottom sidewall panel (Figure 3 [5]) in position adjacent to the structure.
    3.3.4 Connect the air distribution pipe (Figure 3 [8]) to the sidewall duct (Figure 3 [6]) and tighten
    the clamp (Figure 3 [7]).
    3.3.5 Install the two washers (Figure 3 [2]) and screws (Figure 3 [1]) for a left sidewall installation.
    3.3.6 Install the five washers (Figure 3 [4]) and the screws (Figure 3 [3]).
    3.3.7 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.3.8 Install the top sidewall panel (Refer to Step 3.2).
    3.3.9 Install the carpet (Refer to DM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A).
    3.4 Overhead Panel

    Note

    Three persons are necessary for this procedure.

    3.4.1 Put the overhead panel (Figure 4 [1]) in position adjacent to the structure.
    3.4.2 Connect the front air pipes (Figure 4 [16]) and (Figure 4 [17]) to the overhead panel
    (Figure 4 [1]). Put the clamps (Figure 4 [16]) and (Figure 4 [17]) in position and tighten.
    3.4.3 Connect the four electrical connectors (Figure 4 [15]).
    3.4.4 Connect the two rear air pipes (Figure 4 [11]) and (Figure 4 [13]) to the overhead panel
    (Figure 4 [1]). Put the clamps (Figure 4 [12]) and (Figure 4 [14]) in position and tighten.
    3.4.5 Put the overhead panel (Figure 4 [1]) up in position. Loosely install the four center washers
    (Figure 4 [5]) and screws (Figure 4 [6]).

    Effectivity: STANDARD INTERIOR 12-B-25-22-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-16 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Note

    The screws are tightened when the top sidewall panels are installed.

    3.4.6 Install the top sidewall panels (Refer to Step 3.2).


    3.4.7 Install the two covers (Figure 4 [10]) in the overhead panel (Figure 4 [1]).
    3.4.8 Install the trim strip (Figure 4 [7]) with the two washers (Figure 4 [8]) and screws
    (Figure 4 [9]).
    3.4.9 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − CABIN FLOOD LT 50% (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − CABIN FLOOD LT 100% (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − CABIN RDNG LIGHT (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − AUDIO 1 (STANDBY BUS)
    3.4.10 Connect a headset (Headset (Pt.No. Local supply)), as necessary, to the pilots PHONE and
    MIC connectors.
    3.4.11 On the left oxygen panel, make sure the MIC SELECT switch is set to MIC.
    3.4.12 Energize the aircraft electrical system (Refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    3.4.13 On the audio control panel, set the SPKR/PA switch to PA.
    3.4.14 Push the PTT switch on the pilots control wheel and speak into the headset microphone.
    Make sure that the PA communication is heard on the cabin loudspeakers.
    3.4.15 Do an operational test of the cabin flood and reading lights (Refer to DM 12-
    B-33-00-00-00A-903A-A).
    3.4.16 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (Refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    3.4.17 Disconnect the headset from the pilots PHONE and MIC connectors.
    3.4.18 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.5 Left Rear Sidewall Panel

    Note

    The left rear sidewall panel is one piece. The panel is installed in the area between the aft of the cargo
    door and the bulkhead trim at frame 34.

    3.5.1 Make sure that the two cushion washers (Figure 5 [9]) are in position on the screw holes
    (Figure 5 [10]) in the floor.

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items DM
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Effectivity: STANDARD INTERIOR 12-B-25-22-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-16 Page 9


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Note

    The cushion washers are bonded in position with adhesive (Adhesive (Pt.No. P08-009)).

    3.5.2 Put the sidewall panel (Figure 5 [2]) in position then lift above the edge of the overhead
    panel (Figure 5 [1]).
    3.5.3 Install the washer (Figure 5 [6]) and screw (Figure 5 [5]), washer (Figure 5 [8]) and screw
    (Figure 5 [7]).
    3.5.4 Install the washers (Figure 5 [4]) and screws (Figure 5 [3]).
    3.5.5 Tighten the screws in the overhead panel (Refer to Step 3.4).
    3.5.6 Install the left cover in the overhead panel (Refer to Step 3.4).
    3.5.7 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.6 Passenger/Crew Door Panel
    3.6.1 Put the door panel (Figure 6 [2]) in position and install the electrical cable and grommet
    (Figure 6 [12]) in the door panel (Figure 6 [2]).
    3.6.2 Install the door panel (Figure 6 [2]) on the passenger/crew door (Figure 6 [10]) with the eight
    washers (Figure 6 [9]) and screws (Figure 6 [8]).
    3.6.3 Put the step assembly (Figure 6 [1]) in position on the passenger/crew door (Figure 6 [10]).
    3.6.4 Install the two bolts (Figure 6 [19]), washers (Figure 6 [20]), washers (Figure 6 [21]) and nuts
    (Figure 6 [22]) in the passenger/crew door (Figure 6 [10]) and the step assembly
    (Figure 6 [1]).
    3.6.5 Install the two pins (Figure 6 [17]) and new spring pin (Spring pin ) (Figure 6 [18]) in the
    passenger/crew door (Figure 6 [10]) and the step assembly (Figure 6 [1]).
    3.6.6 Install the two bolts (Figure 6 [16]), washers (Figure 6 [15]), washers (Figure 6 [14]) and nuts
    (Figure 6 [13]) in the passenger/crew door (Figure 6 [10]) and the step assembly
    (Figure 6 [1]).
    3.6.7 Install the inner handle (Figure 6 [4]) on the shaft (Figure 6 [5]) with the screw (Figure 6 [3]),
    washer (Figure 6 [6]) and nut (Figure 6 [7]).
    3.6.8 Move the handrail assembly (Figure 6 [11]) in position and install the strut (Figure 6 [26]) to
    the passenger/crew door (Figure 6 [10]). Use the bolt (Figure 6 [27]), washer (Figure 6 [23]),
    nut (Figure 6 [24]) and cap (Figure 6 [25]).
    3.6.9 Install the stanchion (Figure 6 [31]) to the passenger/crew door (Figure 6 [10]) with the shims
    (Figure 6 [30]), bolt (32), washer (Figure 6 [28]) and nut (Figure 6 [29]).
    3.6.10 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.6.11 Close the passenger/crew door (Figure 6 [10]).
    3.6.12 Make sure the passenger/crew door mechanism operates correctly and the step assembly
    folds to the correct position for flight.
    3.7 Emergency Exit Door Panel
    3.7.1 Install the panel (Figure 7 [2]) on the emergency exit door (Figure 7 [5]) with the four
    washers (Figure 7 [4]) and screws (Figure 7 [3]).
    3.7.2 Install the emergency exit door (Figure 7 [5]) in the structure.
    3.7.3 Attach the cap (Figure 7 [1]) to the panel (Figure 7 [2]).
    3.7.4 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.

    Effectivity: STANDARD INTERIOR 12-B-25-22-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-16 Page 10


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.8 Cargo Door Panels


    3.8.1 Connect the cargo door light electrical cables (Figure 8 [25]) with the two screws
    (Figure 8 [24]).
    3.8.2 Put the bottom panel (Figure 8 [12]) in position on the cargo door (Figure 8 [13]).
    3.8.3 Install the two cushion washers (Figure 8 [11]), washers (Figure 8 [10]) and screws
    (Figure 8 [20]) in the panel edges.
    3.8.4 Install the four screws (Figure 8 [23]), grommets (Figure 8 [22]), washers (Figure 8 [21]) and
    (Figure 8 [9]) nuts in the bottom of the panel (Figure 8 [12]).
    3.8.5 Hold the weight of the cargo door (Figure 8 [13]) with a support (Cargo door
    support (Pt.No. Local supply)) between the ground and the bottom of the cargo door.
    3.8.6 Remove the nut (Figure 8 [19]), washer (Figure 8 [18]), sliding disc (Figure 8 [17]) and bolt
    (Figure 8 [15]) from the gas strut rod end (Figure 8 [16]).
    3.8.7 Put the top panel (Figure 8 [1]) in position on the cargo door (Figure 8 [13]) until the top
    panel clips (Figure 8 [14]) engage with the cargo door clips.
    3.8.8 Install the top panel (Figure 8 [1]) on the cargo door (Figure 8 [13]) with the four washers
    (Figure 8 [2]) and screws (Figure 8 [3]).
    3.8.9 Put the gas strut eye end (Figure 8 [16]) in position and install the bolt (Figure 8 [15]), sliding
    disc (Figure 8 [17]), washer (Figure 8 [18]) and nut (Figure 8 [19]).
    3.8.10 Remove the cargo door support from the cargo door (Figure 8 [13]).
    3.8.11 Put the forward armrest (Figure 8 [4]) in position on the panel (Figure 8 [12]). Push the
    armrest until the top edge of the armrest engages with the panel clips (Figure 8 [7]).
    3.8.12 Push the bottom edge of the armrest (Figure 8 [4]) against the panel (Figure 8 [12]) to
    engage the two piece fasteners (Figure 8 [8]).
    3.8.13 Put the rear armrest (Figure 8 [6]) in position on the panel (Figure 8 [12]). Push the armrest
    until the top edge of the armrest engages with the panel clips (Figure 8 [7]).
    3.8.14 Push the bottom edge of the armrest (Figure 8 [6]) against the panel (Figure 8 [12]) to
    engage the two piece fasteners (Figure 8 [8]).
    3.8.15 Install the trim panel (Figure 8 [5]) around the door inner handle.
    3.8.16 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − CABIN RDNG LIGHTS (NON ESSENTIAL BUS)
    − SERVICE LTS (HOT BATTERY BUS)
    3.8.17 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.8.18 Energize the aircraft electrical system (Refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    3.8.19 Set the SERVICE LIGHT switch to ON and make sure that the door light comes on. Set the
    SERVICE LIGHT switch to the OFF position.
    3.8.20 On the passenger switch panel set the reading light switch to ON. Make sure that the
    reading light comes on. Set the reading light switch to the OFF position.
    3.8.21 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (Refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    3.9 Window Blind Assemblies

    Effectivity: STANDARD INTERIOR 12-B-25-22-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-16 Page 11


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items DM 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    3.9.1 Examine the window seal (Figure 9 [3]) and replace if necessary. If you must replace the
    seal, attach the new seal in position with the sealant (Sealant (Pt.No. P08-020)).
    3.9.2 Put the window blind assembly (Figure 9 [2]) on the structure aligned with the marks made in
    Removal Step 2.9.3. Install the four washers (Figure 9 [5]) and screws (Figure 9 [4]).
    3.9.3 Make sure the window blind operates correctly.
    3.9.4 Install the top sidewall panels (Refer to Step 3.2).
    3.9.5 Install the top panel of the cargo door (Refer to Step 2.8).
    3.9.6 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.10 Bulkhead Trim at Frame 34

    Note

    The bulkhead trim is removed and installed as one piece. The bulkhead trim has a cover attached at
    the top rear side. The cover goes on the area between the bulkhead and the cover of the recirculation
    systems ventilation blower units.

    3.10.1 Put the bulkhead trim (Figure 10 [1]) in position in the aircraft.
    3.10.2 Install the four discs (Figure 10 [11]), distance bushes (Figure 10 [10]) and screws
    (Figure 10 [9]).
    3.10.3 Install the washers (Figure 10 [3]), screws (Figure 10 [4]), washers (Figure 10 [5]) and
    screws (Figure 10 [6]).
    3.10.4 Install the phone and mic connectors (Figure 10 [2]) in the bulkhead trim (Figure 10 [1]).
    3.10.5 Install the switch cover (Figure 10 [7]) with the two screws (Figure 10 [8]).
    3.10.6 Install the left rear sidewall panel (Refer to Step 3.5).
    3.10.7 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.

    Effectivity: STANDARD INTERIOR 12-B-25-22-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-16 Page 12


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    A

    12-B-252203-A-S4080-20098-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Armrests – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: STANDARD INTERIOR 12-B-25-22-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-16 Page 13


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    A
    A

    A
    B

    3
    8 2
    1

    B 4

    3
    2 7
    1

    B
    LIFTING PROCEDURE

    12-B-252203-A-S4080-20099-A-01-1

    Figure 2 Top Sidewall Panels – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: STANDARD INTERIOR 12-B-25-22-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-16 Page 14


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    A

    A D

    2
    1

    5
    B

    2
    1 5

    B
    D
    C
    6

    15
    C 8

    10

    14
    11

    12

    D 13
    12-B-252203-A-S4080-20100-A-01-1

    Figure 3 Sidewall Panels – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: STANDARD INTERIOR 12-B-25-22-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-16 Page 15


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    B
    1

    A
    2

    3
    B
    4

    7
    2

    9
    8 3
    B
    4

    10

    12-B-252203-A-S4080-20101-A-01-1

    Figure 4 Overhead Panel – Removal/Installation (Sheet 1 of 2)

    Effectivity: STANDARD INTERIOR 12-B-25-22-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-16 Page 16


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    11
    15 12

    13
    14

    A
    15

    16
    B B 15 15

    17

    19

    18

    12-B-252203-A-S4080-20124-A-01-1

    Figure 4 Overhead Panel – Removal/Installation (Sheet 2 of 2)

    Effectivity: STANDARD INTERIOR 12-B-25-22-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-16 Page 17


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2
    A
    7
    8

    6 4

    10

    B
    B

    12-B-252203-A-S4080-20102-A-01-1

    Figure 5 Left Rear Sidewall Panel – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: STANDARD INTERIOR 12-B-25-22-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-16 Page 18


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    11
    A
    16
    15
    A
    H
    12
    H
    14
    13

    D
    1 22
    10 21
    10
    1

    E
    19

    20
    10
    G
    C 1

    G 2

    5
    3 E
    4
    18
    F
    6
    7

    F
    10 1

    25
    17
    29
    B
    24 28
    23
    C
    B 8

    30 9

    26

    27 D 32 30 31 12-B-252203-A-S4080-20103-A-01-1

    Figure 6 Passenger/Crew Door Panel – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: STANDARD INTERIOR 12-B-25-22-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-16 Page 19


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    B 4
    A

    12-B-252203-A-S4080-20104-A-01-1

    Figure 7 Emergency Exit Door Panel – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: STANDARD INTERIOR 12-B-25-22-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-16 Page 20


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    B 19
    18

    15

    17
    A
    16

    14
    20
    21

    A 22

    23

    C
    13

    2 3

    B
    11 D
    10 5

    24 D
    12

    25

    C 6

    12-B-252203-A-S4080-20105-A-01-1

    Figure 8 Cargo Door Panels – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: STANDARD INTERIOR 12-B-25-22-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-16 Page 21


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    12-B-252203-A-S4080-20106-A-01-1

    Figure 9 Window Blind Assemblies – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: STANDARD INTERIOR 12-B-25-22-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-16 Page 22


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    3
    6
    4
    5

    D
    A D

    B 2
    C
    D
    D
    7

    11
    10
    9
    B
    C

    12-B-252203-A-S4080-20107-A-01-1

    Figure 10 Bulkhead Trim – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: STANDARD INTERIOR 12-B-25-22-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-16 Page 23


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: STANDARD INTERIOR 12-B-25-22-03-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-05-16 Page 24
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    STANDARD CARPETS

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    STANDARD CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Standard Carpets Removal/Installation.................................................................. 3

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A STANDARD SEATS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: STANDARD INTERIOR 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedures for the removal/installation of all the carpets.
    The carpets are attached to the floor panels with hook and loop fasteners.
    2 Removal
    2.1 Identify and remove the necessary rail covers (Figure 1 [1]) from the seat rails (Figure 1 [3]).
    2.2 Remove the necessary passenger seats (Refer to DM 12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A) for the removal of
    a left, or right carpet.
    2.3 Identify and remove the carpet (Figure 1 [2]) from the floor panel (Figure 1 [4]).
    3 Installation
    3.1 Make sure the hook and loop fasteners on the carpet (Figure 1 [2]) and the floor panel (Figure 1 [4])
    are satisfactory.
    3.2 Attach the carpet (Figure 1 [2]) to the floor panel (Figure 1 [4]).
    3.3 Install all removed passenger seats (Refer to DM 12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A).
    3.4 Install the rail covers (Figure 1 [1]) in the seat rails (Figure 1 [3]).
    3.5 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.

    Effectivity: STANDARD INTERIOR 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2
    1

    12-B-252204-A-S4080-20108-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Standard Carpets Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: STANDARD INTERIOR 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: STANDARD INTERIOR 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    BAGGAGE AREA AND TRIM

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    BAGGAGE AREA AND TRIM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION.......................................... 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description

    1 General
    The baggage area is at the aft of the passenger compartment between frames 34 and 36. Baggage is put into the
    area from the passenger compartment. A baggage net is installed across the baggage area opening at frame 34.
    Attachment points for the net are installed on the structure around the opening.
    There are adjustable and non adjustable baggage nets and a placard that shows the Part Number that identifies
    the nets. Refer to the Pilot's Operating Handbook for the baggage weight limits.
    A larger baggage net can be installed around the frame 34 attachment points and extends forward to frame 32.
    Two attachment points for the top of the net are installed in the headliner at frame 32. The bottom of the net
    attaches to the inner and outer seat rails.
    A bulkhead and curtain assembly can be installed in front of the larger baggage net to separate the passenger and
    baggage compartments. In an executive interior the illuminated 'No Smoking/Fasten Seat Belts' sign is moved from
    the frame 34 to the bulkhead and curtain assembly.
    There is a carpet on the floor and trim panels are installed above the structure and equipment in the baggage area
    and have these main parts:
    − The evaporator cover
    − The left and right sidewall panels
    − The dome cover

    The baggage area trim panels are attached to the structure with screws and spacers. There are air outlets in the
    evaporator cover for the air recirculation system.
    An optional coat rail can be installed in the baggage area.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-23-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 1
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-23-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    BAGGAGE AREA EQUIPMENT

    REMOVAL INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    BAGGAGE AREA EQUIPMENT - REMOVAL INSTALLATION................................................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Standard Baggage Net – Removal/Installation....................................................... 4


    2 Baggage Area Carpet and Floor Panels – Removal/Installation............................ 5

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE SEATS - REMOVAL INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A STANDARD SEATS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-23-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedures for the removal/installation of the baggage area equipment as
    follows:
    − The baggage net
    − The baggage area carpet
    − The baggage area trim and floor panels
    2 Removal
    2.1 Standard Baggage Net
    2.1.1 Pull the seven straps (Figure 1 [2]) up and release the tension from the baggage net
    (Figure 1 [1]).
    2.1.2 Disconnect the eight tiedown fittings (Figure 1 [3]) from the aircraft structure.
    2.1.3 Disconnect the four tiedown fittings (Figure 1 [4]) from the seat rails.
    2.1.4 Remove the baggage net (Figure 1 [1]) from the aircraft.
    2.2 Baggage Area Carpet
    2.2.1 Remove the baggage net (Refer to Para ).
    2.2.2 Remove the nine screws (Figure 2 [7]), bushes (Figure 2 [6]) and edge strip (Figure 2 [5]).
    2.2.3 Remove the carpet (Figure 2 [4]) from the baggage area floor (Figure 2 [3]).
    2.3 Baggage Area Trim and Floor Panels
    2.3.1 Remove the passenger seat from the rear right position:
    − for Executive interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A
    − for Standard interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A
    2.3.2 Remove the baggage net (Refer to Para ).
    2.3.3 Remove the baggage area carpet (Refer to Step 2.2).
    2.3.4 Hold the left panel (Figure 2 [2]) and remove the four top screws (Figure 2 [16]) and washers
    (Figure 2 [17]). Remove the four bottom screws (Figure 2 [15]) and washers (Figure 2 [14]).
    Remove the left panel (Figure 2 [2]) from the structure.
    2.3.5 Hold the right panel (Figure 2 [13]) and remove the four top screws (Figure 2 [16]) and
    washers (Figure 2 [17]). Remove the four bottom screws (Figure 2 [15]) and washers
    (Figure 2 [14]). Remove the right panel (Figure 2 [13]) from the structure.
    2.3.6 Remove the five top screws (Figure 2 [11]) and washers (Figure 2 [12]). Remove the four
    bottom screws (Figure 2 [9]) and washers (Figure 2 [10]). Remove the dome panel
    (Figure 2 [1]) from the structure.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-23-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.3.7 Remove the rear four screws (Figure 2 [8]) and remove the floor panel (Figure 2 [3]).
    3 Installation
    3.1 Baggage Area Trim and Floor Panels
    3.1.1 Install the floor panel (Figure 2 [3]) with the rear four screws (Figure 2 [8]).
    3.1.2 Install the dome panel (Figure 2 [1]) on the structure. Use the five top washers (Figure 2 [12])
    and screws (Figure 2 [11]), and the four bottom washers (Figure 2 [10]) and screws
    (Figure 2 [9]).
    3.1.3 Install the right panel (Figure 2 [13]) on the structure. Use the four top washers
    (Figure 2 [17]) and screws (Figure 2 [16]), and the four bottom washers (Figure 2 [14]) and
    screws (Figure 2 [15]).
    3.1.4 Install the left panel (Figure 2 [2]) on the structure. Use the four top washers (Figure 2 [17])
    and screws (Figure 2 [16]), and the four bottom washers (Figure 2 [14]) and screws
    (Figure 2 [15]).
    3.1.5 Install the carpet on the baggage area floor (Refer to Step 3.2).
    3.1.6 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.1.7 Install the baggage net (Refer to Step 3.3).
    3.1.8 Install the passenger seat in the rear right position:
    − for Executive interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A
    − for Standard interior, refer to DM 12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A
    3.2 Baggage Area Carpet
    3.2.1 Put the carpet (Figure 2 [4]) in position on the baggage area floor (Figure 2 [3]).
    3.2.2 Install the edge strip (Figure 2 [5]), nine bushes (Figure 2 [6]) and screws (Figure 2 [7]).
    3.2.3 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.2.4 Install the baggage net (Refer to Step 3.3).
    3.3 Standard Baggage Net
    3.3.1 Put the baggage net (Figure 1 [1]) in position in the aircraft.
    3.3.2 Connect the eight tiedown fittings (Figure 1 [3]) to the aircraft structure.
    3.3.3 Connect the four tiedown fittings (Figure 1 [4]) to the seat rails.
    3.3.4 Pull on the seven straps (Figure 1 [2]) to adjust the tension of the baggage net (Figure 1 [1]).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-23-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3
    C C

    C
    C 1 C

    2
    2

    C 2 C

    2
    C C
    2

    4
    B B B B
    A
    B
    12-B-252301-A-S4080-20109-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Standard Baggage Net – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-23-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    17
    15

    B C
    16
    14

    B
    12
    11

    13

    A C 10
    B

    2
    7
    8

    5
    C

    12-B-252301-A-S4080-20110-A-01-1

    Figure 2 Baggage Area Carpet and Floor Panels – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-23-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-23-01-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 6
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    LARGE BAGGAGE NET

    REMOVAL INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    LARGE BAGGAGE NET - REMOVAL INSTALLATION............................................................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Large Baggage Net – Removal/Installation............................................................ 3

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-23-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedures for the removal/installation of the large baggage net.
    Refer to the Pilots Operating Handbook Section 2 for the Large Baggage Net Limitations.
    2 Removal
    2.1 Pull the three straps (Figure 1 [1]) and release the tension from the baggage net (Figure 1 [2]).
    2.2 Disconnect the four tiedown fittings (Figure 1 [5]) from the seat rails (Figure 1 [4]).
    2.3 Disconnect the two hook fittings (Figure 1 [6]) from the headliner eyebolts (Figure 1 [7]).
    2.4 Disconnect the two tiedown fittings (Figure 1 [3]) from the seat rails (Figure 1 [4]).
    2.5 Disconnect the eight tiedown fittings (Figure 1 [8]) from the anchor plates (Figure 1 [9]).
    2.6 Remove the baggage net (Figure 1 [2]) from the aircraft.
    3 Installation
    3.1 Find the top of the baggage net (Figure 1 [2]) by the location of two of the adjustable straps
    (Figure 1 [1]).
    3.2 Put the baggage net (Figure 1 [2]) in the correct position in the aircraft.
    3.3 You must put the 3rd adjustable strap at the bottom left corner of the net.
    3.4 Connect the two top tiedown fittings (Figure 1 [8]) to the anchor plates (Figure 1 [9]).
    3.5 Connect the six side tiedown fittings (Figure 1 [8]) to the anchor plates (Figure 1 [9]).
    3.6 Connect the two hook fittings (Figure 1 [6]) to the headliner eyebolts (Figure 1 [7]).
    3.7 Connect the four tiedown fittings (Figure 1 [5]) to the seat rails (Figure 1 [4]).
    3.8 Connect the two tiedown fittings (Figure 1 [3]) to the seat rails (Figure 1 [4]).
    3.9 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.10 Pull the three straps (Figure 1 [1]) and adjust the tension of the baggage net (Figure 1 [2]).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-23-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    E
    A

    A 6

    B B

    E B
    D
    1

    B 1

    5
    E B
    B
    4

    D
    B
    3

    D
    4
    B

    C
    C
    2
    9
    D
    1
    C

    D
    8

    B 12-B-252302-A-S4080-20111-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Large Baggage Net – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-23-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-23-02-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-18 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    CARGO COMPARTMENT

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    CARGO COMPARTMENT - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION............................................... 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description

    1 General
    The passenger compartment of the standard and executive interior aircraft can be made into a cargo compartment.
    This is done by the removal of the rear seats or all seats and furnishings. Cargo can be put through the cargo door
    into position on the floor. Refer to the Pilot's Operating Handbook Section 2 for the Cargo Limitations.
    Load carriers can be put on the seat rails to give protection to the floor carpet.
    When small items with a maximum total weight of 66 lb (30 kg) are put on the floor, baggage straps are not
    necessary. Then a cargo net is installed in front of the cargo. The cargo net is attached to the attachment points at
    frames 24 and 27 and to the seat rails. Small panels in interior sidewalls are removed to give access to the cargo
    net attachment points.
    Large items of cargo are installed in a position where they can be held down with baggage straps attached to the
    seat rails.
    For container cargo, there are two lengths of back squares that are attached across the seat rails. The front side of
    the container is put against the back square and held down with baggage straps. Protection angles can be put on
    the baggage straps to prevent damage around the corners of a container.
    The load carriers, baggage straps, back squares, and protection angles are contained in a Cargo Kit box.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-50-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-09-21 Page 1
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-50-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-09-21 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION............................................ 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-25-63-00-00A-040A-A EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER -
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Description

    1 General
    There are a number of options for the installation of emergency equipment. Fire extinguishers can be located in the
    flight compartment or cabin, and first aid kits can be installed on the aircraft. The Emergency Locator Transmitter
    (ELT) that is installed operates on 406 MHz. As another option the ELT can be installed with a navigation interface
    unit. The functions of the ELT installed in the aircraft are shown in the data module as follows:
    − KANNAD ELT 406 AF (refer to DM 12-B-25-63-00-00A-040A-A)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-60-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-07-17 Page 1
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-60-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-07-17 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION..................... 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1
    2 Component Description.......................................................................................... 2
    2.1 ELT......................................................................................................................... 2
    2.2 Remote Control Panel............................................................................................ 2
    2.3 ELT Antenna........................................................................................................... 3
    2.4 Programming Dongle.............................................................................................. 3
    2.5 Navigation Interface................................................................................................ 3
    3 Operation................................................................................................................ 4
    3.1 Usual Operation...................................................................................................... 4
    3.2 Flight Operation...................................................................................................... 4
    3.3 Test Operation........................................................................................................ 4

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description

    1 General
    An Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT) is installed on the aircraft. The ELT transmits location signals in
    emergency conditions to make the aircraft easier to find. An internal battery supplies power to the ELT. The ELT
    transmits on the three international frequencies as follow:
    − 121.5 MHz
    − 243.0 MHz
    − 406.25 MHz

    The search and rescue teams use the three radio signals to find the aircraft.
    The ELT system has the components as follows:
    − The ELT KANNAD 406 AF
    − The remote control panel
    − The antenna
    − The programming dongle
    − The navigation interface CS144-A (If installed)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-63-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-07-17 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2 Component Description

    2.1 ELT
    The ELT transmitter is an electronic unit that transmits distress signals automatically or manually. The ELT is
    installed in the right rear fuselage between frames 37 and 38. A hook and loop tape strap attaches the unit to a
    mounting tray. The ELT is in a yellow plastic container and has the components as follows:
    − A front control panel
    − A battery pack
    − A g sensor switch
    − The self test and transmitter circuits

    The front control panel has the connections that follow:


    − A connector for the ELT antenna cable
    − A socket for electrical connector on the harness for the remote control panel

    The front control panel has the components as follows:


    − A three position switch with the set positions as follows:
    ● ARM
    ● OFF
    ● ON
    − A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) indicator

    The three position switch is for manual operation of the ELT and has the functions as follow:
    − ARM normal operation and the remote control panel in the cockpit is used
    − OFF isolates the remote control panel and used during maintenance
    − ON sends radio signals to the antenna

    The LED indicator has the functions as follows:


    − The LED comes on when the ELT transmits
    − The LED gives an indication of the power in the battery pack
    − The LED gives an indication of internal faults in the ELT

    The battery pack supplies the electrical power to operate the ELT and the remote control panel in the cockpit. The
    battery pack cannot be charged and must be replaced after the specified time.
    The ELT is installed in a position that lets the g sensor switch measure the g force along the longitudinal axis of the
    aircraft. When the g sensor switch operates the ELT automatically sends radio signals to the antenna. The g
    sensor switch is set to prevent incorrect transmission of the ELT.

    2.2 Remote Control Panel


    The remote control panel (RCP) of the ELT system is installed on the left of the center console in the flight
    compartment. The RCP lets the aircrew manually control the ELT.
    The RCP has an electrical harness that connects to the ELT. On the RCP components that follow:
    − A three position switch with the set positions as follows:
    ● ON

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-63-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-07-17 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    ● ARMED
    ● RESET/TEST
    − An amber LED indicator

    The three position switch is set to the ON position to start the radio transmission from the ELT. When the three
    position switch is set to the ARMED position, the ELT is set for automatic operation. When the three position switch
    is set to the RESET/TEST position, the switch has the two functions as follows:
    − The ELT transmission stops
    − A self test of the ELT system starts

    The amber LED indicator has the functions as follows:


    − The LED comes on when the ELT transmits
    − The LED gives an indication of the power in the battery pack
    − The LED gives an indication of internal faults in the ELT

    The indicator light flashes when the ELT switch is set to the ON position. Electrical power for the remote control
    panel is 28 VDC supplied from the HOT battery bus through the ELT NAV/CLOCK circuit breaker.

    2.3 ELT Antenna


    The ELT antenna is a fixed pole type. The antenna is installed on the top of the fuselage between frames 39 and
    40, below the dorsal fairing.
    The antenna receives the radio signals from the ELT which it then transmits. The antenna transmits the three
    international emergency frequencies as shown in Para 1.

    2.4 Programming Dongle


    The programming dongle of the ELT system is installed in the connector on the wiring harness for the ELT RCP.
    The programming dongle has the data for the identification of the applicable aircraft. This data is in the Serial
    Memory Module (SMM) and is programmed with the related aircraft identity data before the aircraft is delivered.
    The programming dongle stays with the aircraft wiring harness, so it is not necessary to program a replacement
    ELT before it is installed in the aircraft. The ELT is automatically programmed with the related information from the
    programming dongle when the switch on the ELT is set to ARM.
    If there is a change in the identity data for the aircraft then the programming dongle must be programmed again at
    an approved service center.

    2.5 Navigation Interface


    The manufacturer's identification number for the navigation interface is CS144-A. It uses the aircraft's latitude and
    longitude positions as data inputs. This data comes through the Modular Avionics Unit (MAU) from the Flight
    Management System (FMS).
    The data that comes from the Modular Avionics Unit (MAU) goes to the navigation interface as ARINC bus A429
    data.
    The ELT navigation interface (when installed) is installed in the right rear fuselage between frames 37 and 38, aft of
    the ELT. A hook and loop tape strap attaches the unit to a mounting tray.
    The navigation interface is attached to the ELT RCP connection and downloads the position of the aircraft to the
    ELT through an electrical connector. The ELT is updated with the aircraft's latitude and longitude as digital data, for
    the correct identification and position of the aircraft, if necessary.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-63-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-07-17 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3 Operation

    3.1 Usual Operation


    For the usual operation of the aircraft, the switches of the ELT and remote control panel are set as follows:
    − The switch on the ELT is set to the ARM position
    − The switch on the remote control panel is set to the ARMED position
    − The switch on the navigation interface (when installed) is set to the ON position

    In an emergency the aircrew can start the emergency transmissions. The aircrew sets the switch on the remote
    control panel to the ON position. The ELT transmits on all three international emergency frequencies at the same
    time for 24 hours. The COSPAS SARSAT system of satellites receive the 406.025 MHz transmission at 50 second
    intervals, which are then sent to the ground stations. The ground stations use the signals to calculate the
    approximate location of the aircraft. When the navigation interface is installed the data for the position of the aircraft
    is contained in this transmission. The data for the aircraft is transmitted on this frequency for 24 hours.
    The ELT transmits continuously on the 121.5 MHz and 243.0 MHz frequencies for a maximum of 100 hours. The
    search and rescue operators use these frequencies to find the aircraft as part of the recovery mission.

    3.2 Flight Operation


    If the ELT transmits during a flight, the amber LED on the remote control panel flashes as follows:
    − Short interval pulse flashes during the 121.5 MHz and the 243.0 MHz transmissions
    − Long interval flashes at 50 second intervals during the 406.025 MHz transmission

    3.3 Test Operation


    The three different operations that start a self test of the ELT are as follows:
    − The switch on the ELT is set from the OFF position to the ARM position
    − The switch on the remote control panel is set to the RESET/TEST position (the switch on the ELT is set to
    ARM)
    − The self test operates before the transmission. The self test occurs when one of the switches on the ELT or the
    remote control panel is set to the ON position

    Approximately three seconds after the self test, the LED on the remote control panel and the ELT flash as follows:
    − One long flash shows that the ELT system operates correctly
    − A series of flashes show that the ELT system is unserviceable as follows:
    ● Three flashes followed by one flash is an indication of low battery power
    ● Three flashes followed by two flashes are an indication of transmission power that is not sufficient
    ● Three flashes followed by three flashes are an indication of the incorrect operation of the Voltage
    Controlled Oscillator (VCO)
    ● Three flashes followed by four flashes are an indication that there is no data for the aircraft ID in the
    transmission

    The self test transmission is made with a maintenance code that replaces some of the identification code of the
    aircraft. The maintenance code makes sure that the satellite system knows that the transmission is a test and not
    an emergency.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-63-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-07-17 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER

    ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Table of Contents Page

    EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER - ADJUSTMENT/TEST.......................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Sarsat beacon tester Part 990.00.00.211 1

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-63-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-01 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedures for the functional test of the Kannad 406 AF Emergency Locator
    Transmitter (ELT). The test makes sure that the system operates correctly and is done as follows:
    − After the installation of the ELT
    − At the scheduled maintenance

    To prevent incorrect emergency signals in air traffic control during the test, do not set the three position
    switch on the ELT to ON. This is because after 50 seconds the satellite system receives the first 406.025
    MHz transmission and the emergency procedure will start.
    2 Functional Test Procedure (ELT only installed)
    2.1 System Self Test and Short Message Transmission Test
    2.1.1 Energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.1.2 On the Remote Control Panel (RCP) in the flight compartment make sure that the ON/
    ARMED/RESET/TEST switch is set to ARMED.
    2.1.3 Open the access panel 31 AB.
    2.1.4 On the ELT set the ARM/OFF/ON switch to the OFF position.

    Note

    Look at the indicator lights on the ELT when you do Step 2.1.5 thru Step 2.1.8.

    Note

    During the next steps, hold the Sarsat beacon tester (Pt.No. 990.00.00.211) as near the
    ELT antenna as possible. This makes sure that a good signal is received.

    2.1.5 Set the switch on the Sarsat beacon tester (Pt.No. 990.00.00.211) to the ON position and
    select the receive mode.
    2.1.6 On the ELT set the ARM/OFF/ON switch to ARM.
    2.1.7 Make sure the ELT does a self test then after 3 seconds the indicator comes on for 1 long
    flash then goes off and you can hear the buzzer during the self-test.
    2.1.8 If the indicator shows a series of flashes, the system has a fault. The number of flashes
    shows the type of failure as follows:
    − 3 + 1 = Low battery voltage
    − 3 + 2 = Low transmission power
    − 3 + 3 = Defective Voltage Controlled Oscillator (VCO) locking
    − 3 + 4 = No ID number
    2.1.9 Make sure the Sarsat Beacon Tester shows the correct program data:

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-63-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-01 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.1.9.1 On the website www.cospas-sarsat.org, navigate to Beacons/Beacon Message


    Decode Program.
    2.1.9.2 Enter the 15 Hexadecimal Beacon Identification code written on the label on the
    ELT dongle into the Beacon Decode Program.
    2.1.9.3 Compare the data of the following parameters from the Sarsat Beacon Tester
    and the Beacon Decode Program:
    − Country Code (or Country)
    − 24–bit Aircraft ID (or 24–bit Address or Identity)
    − Auxiliary radio device (or Homing or Radio-Locating) which must be
    121.5MHz
    − 15 HEX ID (or Beacon ID).
    2.2 Remote Control Panel (RCP) Test:
    2.2.1 Set and hold for at least two seconds the RCP ON/ARMED/RESET/TEST switch to RESET/
    TEST.
    2.2.2 Make sure the alert buzzer operates.
    2.2.3 After 3 seconds, make sure the indicator comes on for 1 long flash then goes off.
    2.2.4 Set the ON/ARMED/RESET/TEST switch to the ARMED position.
    2.2.5 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to AMM12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    3 Functional Test Procedure (ELT and Navigation Interface installed)
    3.1 System Self Test and Short Message Transmission Test
    3.1.1 Open the circuit breaker:
    − ELT/NAV CLOCK (BAT HOT BUS)
    − GPS 1 (STBY BUS)
    3.1.2 Open access panel 31 AB.
    3.1.3 On the ELT, set the ARM/OFF/ON switch to OFF.
    3.1.4 On the navigation interface set the OFF/ON switch to OFF.
    3.1.5 Energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    3.1.6 On the RCP in the flight compartment make sure that the ON/ARMED/RESET/TEST switch
    is set to ARMED.
    3.1.7 Close the circuit breaker:
    − ELT/NAV CLOCK (BAT HOT BUS)

    Note

    Look at the indicator lights on the ELT and the navigation interface when you do Step 3.1.8
    thru Step 3.1.12.

    Note

    During the next steps, hold the Sarsat beacon tester (Pt.No. 990.00.00.211) as near the
    ELT antenna as possible. This makes sure that a good signal is received.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-63-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-01 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.1.8 Set the Sarsat Beacon Tester to ON and select receive mode.
    3.1.9 On the navigation interface set the OFF/ON switch to ON.
    3.1.10 Make sure that the LED on the navigation interface flashes at 1 second rate for up to 1
    minute.
    3.1.11 During this 1 minute period, set the ELT ARM/OFF/On switch to ARM.
    3.1.12 Make sure that the ELT buzzer operates for the duration of the ELT self test, then after 3
    seconds the ELT LED indicator comes on for 1 long flash and then goes off.
    3.1.13 If the indicator shows a series of flashes, the system has a fault. The number of flashes
    shows the type of failure as follows:
    − 3 + 1 = Low battery voltage
    − 3 + 2 = Low transmission power
    − 3 + 3 = Defective Voltage Controlled Oscillator (VCO) locking
    − 3 + 4 = No ID number
    3.1.14 Make sure the Sarsat Beacon Tester shows the correct program data:
    3.1.14.1 On the website www.cospas-sarsat.org, navigate to Beacons/Beacon Message
    Decode Program.
    3.1.14.2 Enter the 15 Hexadecimal Beacon Identification code written on the label on the
    ELT dongle into the Beacon Decode Program.
    3.1.14.3 Compare the data of the following parameters from the Sarsat Beacon Tester
    and the Beacon Decode Program:
    − Country Code (or Country)
    − 24–bit Aircraft ID (or 24–bit Address or Identity)
    − Auxiliary radio device (or Homing or Radio-Locating) which must be
    121.5MHz
    − 15 HEX ID (or Beacon ID).
    3.2 System Self Test and Long Message Transmission Test
    3.2.1 Close the circuit breaker:
    − GPS 1 (STBY BUS)
    3.2.2 Open access panel 31 AB.
    3.2.3 On the ELT, set the ARM/OFF/ON switch to OFF.
    3.2.4 On the navigation interface set the OFF/ON switch to OFF.
    3.2.5 Make sure that the AV1 and AV2 bus switches are set to ON.
    3.2.6 On the RCP in the flight compartment make sure that the ON/ARMED/RESET/TEST switch
    is set to ARMED.
    3.2.7 Make sure that the aircraft has GPS satellite acquisition.
    3.2.8 In the lower left window of the upper Multi Function Display (MFD) select Update FMS
    Position, then select Apply and wait for 1 minute.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-63-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-01 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Note

    Look at the indicator lights on the ELT and the navigation interface when you do Step 3.2.9
    thru Step 3.2.15.

    Note

    During the next steps, hold the Sarsat beacon tester (Pt.No. 990.00.00.211) as near the
    ELT antenna as possible. This makes sure that a good signal is received.

    3.2.9 On the navigation interface set the OFF/ON switch to ON.


    3.2.10 Make sure that the LED on the navigation interface flashes at 1 second rate for up to 1
    minute.
    3.2.11 Wait 1 minute until the navigation interface self test has completed.
    3.2.12 Set the Sarsat Beacon Tester to ON and select receive mode.
    3.2.13 On the ELT set the ARM/OFF/ON switch to ARM.
    3.2.14 Make sure that the ELT buzzer operates for the duration of the ELT self test, then after 3
    seconds the ELT LED indicator comes on for 1 long flash and then goes off.
    3.2.15 If the indicator shows a series of flashes, the system has a fault. The number of flashes
    shows the type of failure as follows:
    − 3 + 1 = Low battery voltage
    − 3 + 2 = Low transmission power
    − 3 + 3 = Defective Voltage Controlled Oscillator (VCO) locking
    − 3 + 4 = No ID number
    3.2.16 Make sure the Sarsat Beacon Tester shows the correct program data:
    3.2.16.1 On the website www.cospas-sarsat.org, navigate to Beacons/Beacon Message
    Decode Program.
    3.2.16.2 Enter the 30 Hexadecimal Beacon Identification code shown on the Sarsat
    Beacon Tester into the Beacon Decode Program.
    3.2.16.3 Compare the data of the following parameters from the Sarsat Beacon Tester
    and the Beacon Decode Program:
    − Country Code (or Country)
    − 24–bit Aircraft ID (or 24–bit Address or Identity)
    − Auxiliary radio device (or Homing or Radio-Locating) which must be
    121.5MHz
    − Latitude: Sign, Degrees and Minutes
    − Longitude: Sign, Degrees and Minutes.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-63-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-01 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Note

    The 15 Hexadecimal Beacon Identification code shown on the Beacon Decode


    Program will not be the same as written on the ELT dongle label and may also
    be different to that shown on the Sarsat Beacon Tester (depending on the type
    of tester used).

    3.3 Remote Control Panel (RCP) Test:


    3.3.1 On the RCP, set and hold for at least two seconds the ON/ARMED/RESET/TEST switch to
    RESET/TEST.
    3.3.2 Make sure the alert buzzer operates.
    3.3.3 After 3 seconds, make sure the indicator comes on for 1 long flash then goes off.
    3.3.4 Set the ON/ARMED/RESET/TEST switch to ARMED.
    3.3.5 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    4 Job Close Up
    4.1 Turn the beacon tester off.
    4.2 Close the access panel 31 AB.

    Note

    Verify that the transmitted Beacon ID code is registered in accordance with local requirements.

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-63-00-00A-903A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-01 Page 6
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER

    REMOVAL INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER - REMOVAL INSTALLATION................................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Emergency Locator Transmitter – Removal/Installation......................................... 5

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-25-63-00-00A-903A-A EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required
    Dust caps Part Local supply As
    required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-63-00-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-06-25 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedures for the removal/installation of the Emergency Locator Transmitter
    (ELT).
    2 Removal
    2.1 Job Set Up
    2.1.1 Open the access panel 31 AB.
    2.1.2 Open and install safety clips (Safety clip (circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065))
    on these circuit breakers if the navigation interface Figure 1 [8] is installed:
    − ELT-NAV/CLOCK (BAT/EXT PWR JB CB6)
    − GPS 1 (STANDBY BUS)
    2.1.3 On the ELT Figure 1 [2], set the ARM/OFF/ON switch Figure 1 [5] to the OFF position. If the
    navigation interface Figure 1 [8] is installed on the ELT Figure 1 [11], set the OFF/ON switch
    Figure 1 [15] to the OFF position.
    2.2 Procedure (ELT only installed)
    2.2.1 Disconnect the ELT connector with dongle Figure 1 [6] from the ELT Figure 1 [2].
    2.2.2 Disconnect the antenna connector Figure 1 [7] from the ELT Figure 1 [2].
    2.2.3 Hold the ELT Figure 1 [2] and pull the hook and loop tape strap Figure 1 [3] to release the
    ELT Figure 1 [2] from the mounting tray Figure 1 [1].
    2.2.4 Remove the ELT Figure 1 [2] from the aircraft.
    2.2.5 Put dust caps (Dust caps (Pt.No. Local supply)) on the connectors and sockets.
    2.3 Procedure (ELT and Navigation Interface installed)
    2.3.1 Disconnect the electrical connector Figure 1 [16] from the ELT Figure 1 [11].
    2.3.2 Disconnect the antenna connector Figure 1 [17] from the ELT Figure 1 [11].
    2.3.3 Hold the ELT Figure 1 [11] and pull the hook and loop tape strap Figure 1 [13] to release the
    ELT Figure 1 [11] from the mounting tray Figure 1 [10].
    2.3.4 Remove the ELT Figure 1 [11] from the aircraft.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-63-00-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-06-25 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.3.5 Put dust caps Dust caps (Pt.No. Local supply) on the connectors and sockets.
    3 Installation
    3.1 Procedure (ELT only installed)
    3.1.1 Make sure the correct Dongle program is installed.
    3.1.2 Make sure the ARM/OFF/ON switch Figure 1 [5] is set to the OFF position on the ELT
    Figure 1 [2].
    3.1.3 Remove the dust caps from the connectors and sockets.
    3.1.4 Put the ELT Figure 1 [2] in the correct position on the mounting tray Figure 1 [1].
    3.1.5
    CAUTION

    MAKE SURE THAT THE HOOK AND LOOP TAPE STRAP IS TIGHT WHEN YOU ATTACH
    THE ELT TO THE TRAY.

    Attach the ELT Figure 1 [2] to the mounting tray Figure 1 [1] with the hook and loop tape
    strap Figure 1 [3].
    3.1.6 Connect the antenna connector Figure 1 [7] to the ELT Figure 1 [2].
    3.1.7 On the ELT Figure 1 [2], set the ARM/OFF/ON switch Figure 1 [5] to ARM.
    3.1.8 Make sure the ELT Figure 1 [2] indicator Figure 1 [4] shows a series of 3 + 4 flashes.
    3.1.9 On the ELT Figure 1 [2], set the ARM/OFF/ON switch Figure 1 [5] to OFF.
    3.1.10 Connect the ELT connector with dongle Figure 1 [6] to the ELT Figure 1 [2].
    3.1.11 On the ELT Figure 1 [2], set the ARM/OFF/ON switch Figure 1 [5] to ARM.
    3.1.12 Make sure the ELT Figure 1 [2] self test operates satisfactorily as follows:
    − Make sure the buzzer operates during the test, then stops.
    − After approximately 3 seconds, make sure the indicator Figure 1 [4] comes on for 1 long
    flash then goes off.
    3.1.13 On the ELT Figure 1 [2], set the ARM/OFF/ON switch Figure 1 [5] to OFF.
    3.2 Procedure (ELT and Navigation Interface installed)
    3.2.1 Make sure the correct Dongle program is installed.
    3.2.2 Remove the dust caps from the connectors and sockets.
    3.2.3 Make sure the ARM/OFF/ON switch Figure 1 [5] on the ELT Figure 1 [2] is set to the OFF
    position.
    3.2.4 Make sure the OFF/ON switch Figure 1 [15] on the navigation interface Figure 1 [8] is set to
    the OFF position.
    3.2.5 Put the ELT Figure 1 [11] in the correct position on the mounting tray Figure 1 [10].
    3.2.6
    CAUTION

    MAKE SURE THAT THE HOOK AND LOOP TAPE STRAP IS TIGHT WHEN YOU ATTACH
    THE ELT TO THE TRAY.

    Attach the ELT Figure 1 [11] to the mounting tray Figure 1 [10] with the hook and loop tape
    strap Figure 1 [13].

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-63-00-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-06-25 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.2.7 Connect the antenna connector Figure 1 [17] to the ELT Figure 1 [11].
    3.2.8 On the ELT Figure 1 [11], set the ARM/OFF/ON switch Figure 1 [15] to ARM.
    3.2.9 Make sure the ELT Figure 1 [11] indicator Figure 1 [14] shows a series of 3 + 4 flashes.
    3.2.10 On the ELT Figure 1 [11], set the ARM/OFF/ON switch Figure 1 [15] to OFF.
    3.2.11 Connect the electrical connector Figure 1 [16] to the ELT Figure 1 [11].
    3.2.12 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breaker as follows:
    − ELT-NAV/CLOCK (BAT/EXT PWR JB CB6)
    − GPS 1 (STANDBY BUS)
    3.2.13 On the navigation interface Figure 1 [8], set the ON/OFF switch Figure 1 [9] to ON.
    3.2.14 Make sure the navigation interface Figure 1 [8], self test operates satisfactorily as follows:
    − Make sure the indicator Figure 1 [1] flashes each second for one minute
    3.2.15 At the same time, on the ELT Figure 1 [11], set the ARM/OFF/ON switch Figure 1 [15] to
    ARM.
    3.2.16 Make sure the ELT Figure 1 [11] self test operates satisfactorily as follows:
    − Make sure the buzzer operates.
    − After approximately 3 seconds, make sure the indicator Figure 1 [14] comes on for 1
    long flash then goes off.
    3.2.17 On the navigation interface Figure 1 [8], make sure that the indicator stops flashing and
    stays on.
    3.2.18 On the ELT Figure 1 [11], set the ARM/OFF/ON switch Figure 1 [15] to OFF.
    3.3 Job Close Up
    3.3.1 Do the test of the ELT system (AMM 12-B-25-63-00-00A-903A-A).
    3.3.2 Make sure the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items of equipment.
    3.3.3 Close the access panel 31 AB.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-63-00-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-06-25 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FRA 39
    FRA 38

    A 1
    A
    ELT

    7
    5

    4
    6

    9
    10

    ELT AND OPTIONAL

    11
    A NAVIGATION
    INTERFACE MODULE
    15
    17

    13
    14
    16 12
    12-B-256300-A-S4080-20114-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Emergency Locator Transmitter – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-63-00-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-06-25 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-63-00-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-06-25 Page 6
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER ANTENNA

    REMOVAL INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER ANTENNA - REMOVAL INSTALLATION.............. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 ELT Antenna Removal/Installation......................................................................... 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-25-63-00-00A-903A-A EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-63-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-07-17 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Methyl Ethyl Ketone (MEK) Part P01-010 As
    required
    Cleaning cloth Part P02-003 As
    required
    Sealant Part P08-018 As
    required
    Electrically conductive sealant Part P08-046 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Job Set Up
    1.1.1
    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE


    MANUFACTURER'S HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

    Note

    To identify the consumable items used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items
    DM 12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Open the access panel 31 AB.


    1.1.2 Remove the dorsal fairing 31 AT.
    1.2 Procedure
    1.2.1 Disconnect the coaxial connector (Figure 1 [4]) from the antenna (Figure 1 [1]).
    1.2.2 Remove the sealant from the screw heads and remove the three screws (Figure 1 [2]).
    1.2.3 Remove the antenna (Figure 1 [1]) from the aircraft.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-63-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-07-17 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1.2.4 Use a cloth (Cleaning cloth (Pt.No. P02-003)) that is made moist with the solvent (Methyl
    Ethyl Ketone (MEK) (Pt.No. P01-010)) to remove the sealant from the adapter plate
    (Figure 1 [3]).
    2 Installation
    2.1 Procedure
    2.1.1
    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE


    MANUFACTURER'S HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

    Note

    To identify the consumable items used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items
    DM 12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Use a cloth (Cleaning cloth (Pt.No. P02-003)) that is made moist with the solvent (Methyl
    Ethyl Ketone (MEK) (Pt.No. P01-010)) to clean the adapter plate (Figure 1 [3]).
    2.1.2 Use a cloth (Cleaning cloth (Pt.No. P02-003)) that is made moist with the solvent (Methyl
    Ethyl Ketone (MEK) (Pt.No. P01-010)) to clean the contact surface of the antenna
    (Figure 1 [1]).
    2.1.3 Apply a strip of sealant (Electrically conductive sealant (Pt.No. P08-046)), approximately 0.5
    in (12.5 mm) wide around the contact surface of the antenna (Figure 1 [1]).
    2.1.4 Put the antenna (Figure 1 [1]) in position on the adapter plate (Figure 1 [3]) and install the
    three screws (Figure 1 [2]).
    2.1.5 Connect the coaxial connector (Figure 1 [4]) to the antenna (Figure 1 [1]).
    2.1.6 Apply the sealant (Sealant (Pt.No. P08-018)) around the edge of the antenna (Figure 1 [1])
    and to the three screw heads (Figure 1 [2]).
    2.2 Job Close Up
    2.2.1 Do the test of the ELT system (Refer to DM 12-B-25-63-00-00A-903A-A).
    2.2.2 Make sure the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items of equipment.
    2.2.3 Install the dorsal fairing 31 AT.
    2.2.4 Close the access panel 31 AB.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-63-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-07-17 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FR 40

    FR 39

    A B

    2 B

    APPLY SEALANT (AROUND


    EDGE OF ANTENNA
    AND ON SCREW HEADS)
    APPLY ELECTRICALLY
    CONDUCTIVE SEALANT
    (ON CONTACT SURFACE AREA)
    3

    12-B-256302-A-S4080-20115-A-01-1

    Figure 1 ELT Antenna Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-63-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-07-17 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-63-02-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-07-17 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-63-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-07-17 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    ELT – NAVIGATION INTERFACE

    REMOVAL INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    ELT – NAVIGATION INTERFACE - REMOVAL INSTALLATION.............................................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Navigation Interface Removal/Installation.............................................................. 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-25-63-00-00A-903A-A EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-25-63-00-00A-920A-A EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER - REMOVAL
    INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required
    Dust cap Part Local supply As
    required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-63-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-07-17 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedures for the removal/installation of the navigation interface.
    2 Removal
    2.1 Job Set Up
    2.1.1 Open the access panel 31 AB.
    2.1.2 Open and install safety clips (Safety clip (circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065))
    on these circuit breakers as follows:
    − ELT-NAV/CLOCK (BAT/EXT PWR JB CB6)
    − GPS 1 (STANDBY BUS)
    2.1.3 On the navigation interface (Figure 1 [2]), set the OFF/ON switch (Figure 1 [5]) to the OFF
    position.
    2.1.4 Make sure the switch, ARM/OFF/ON, on the Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT) is set to
    the OFF position (Refer to DM 12-B-25-63-00-00A-920A-A).
    2.2 Procedure
    2.2.1 Disconnect the ELT-NAV interface connector with dongle (Figure 1 [6]) and the electrical
    connector (Figure 1 [8]) from the navigation interface (Figure 1 [2]).
    2.2.2 Disconnect the electrical connector (Figure 1 [7]) from the navigation interface (Figure 1 [2])
    to the ELT (Refer to DM 12-B-25-63-00-00A-920A-A).
    2.2.3 Hold the navigation interface (Figure 1 [2]) and pull the hook and loop tape strap
    (Figure 1 [3]) to release the navigation interface (Figure 1 [2]) from the mounting tray
    (Figure 1 [1]).
    2.2.4 Remove the navigation interface (Figure 1 [2]) from the aircraft.
    2.2.5 Put Dust cap (Pt.No. Local supply) on the electrical connectors and sockets.
    3 Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-63-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-07-17 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.1
    Note

    Two persons are necessary for this procedure.

    Procedure
    3.1.1 Make sure the correct Dongle program is installed.
    3.1.2 Make sure the switch, ARM/OFF/ON, on the ELT is set to the OFF position (Refer to DM 12-
    B-25-63-00-00A-920A-A).
    3.1.3 Make sure the switch, OFF/ON (Figure 1 [5]), on the navigation interface (Figure 1 [2]) is set
    to the OFF position.
    3.1.4 Remove the dust caps from the connectors (Figure 1 [6]), (Figure 1 [7]) and Figure 1 [8], and
    sockets.
    3.1.5 Put the navigation interface (Figure 1 [2]) in the correct position on the mounting tray
    (Figure 1 [1]).
    3.1.6 Attach the navigation interface (Figure 1 [2]) to the mounting tray (Figure 1 [1]) with the hook
    and loop tape strap (Figure 1 [3]).
    3.1.7 Connect the ELT-NAV interface connector with dongle (Figure 1 [6]) and the electrical
    connector Figure 1 [8] to the navigation interface (Figure 1 [2]).
    3.1.8 Connect the electrical connector (Figure 1 [7]) from the navigation interface (Figure 1 [2]) to
    the ELT (Refer to DM 12-B-25-63-00-00A-920A-A).
    3.1.9 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breaker as follows:
    − ELT-NAV/CLOCK (BAT/EXT PWR JB CB6)
    − GPS 1 (STANDBY BUS)
    3.1.10 On the navigation interface (Figure 1 [2]), set the ON/OFF switch (Figure 1 [5]) to ON.
    3.1.11 Make sure the navigation interface (Figure 1 [2]) self test operates satisfactorily as follows:
    − Make sure the indicator (Figure 1 [4]) flashes each second for one minute
    3.1.12 At the same time, on the ELT (Refer to DM 12-B-25-63-00-00A-920A-A) set the
    ARM/OFF/ON switch to ARM.
    − Make sure the indicator on the ELT comes on for 1 long flash then goes off
    − Make sure the buzzer operates during the test
    3.1.13 Set the ARM/OFF/ON switch on the ELT (Refer to DM 12-B-25-63-00-00A-920A-A) to OFF.
    3.2 Job Close Up
    3.2.1 Do the test of the ELT system (Refer to DM 12-B-25-63-00-00A-903A-A).
    3.2.2 Make sure the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items of equipment.
    3.2.3 Close the access panel 31 AB.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-63-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-07-17 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FRA 39
    FRA 38

    4
    7

    12-B-256303-A-S4080-20075-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Navigation Interface Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-63-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-07-17 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-63-03-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-07-17 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-63-03-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-07-17 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    INSULATION

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    INSULATION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION.................................................................... 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1
    2 Component Description.......................................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description

    1 General
    The insulation decreases the quantity of heat released from the aircraft while in flight. The insulation also
    decreases the effect of the heat and noise, that is external to the aircraft, on the passengers and aircraft
    equipment.

    2 Component Description
    The insulation is made as parts which are cut to the correct shape and size for each location in the flight and
    passenger compartments. The parts are made of foam between an inboard layer of metallic foil and an outboard
    layer made of vapor breath active foil. There are also spacers installed which keeps the insulation away from the
    fuselage skin. The parts are installed between the frames and stringers along the complete length of the
    pressurized part of the fuselage, as well as, to the front and rear pressure bulkheads.
    Some parts of the insulation have cut-out areas to give access to, the attachment positions for the cargo-net, the
    mechanism that operates the door, and other necessary components.
    There is also insulation, which is supplied as lengths of foam strips that have different shapes, to be installed on
    the correct frames and around the cabin windows of the pressurized part of the fuselage. These help to keep the
    other parts of the insulation in place.
    The insulation does not touch the bottom structure of the fuselage, this gives a better airflow, and routing for the
    condensation to get to the three rubber drain valves.
    Three rubber drain valves are installed on the center of the bottom fuselage. The drains open when the cabin
    pressure is released from the aircraft after landing, this lets any condensation that has collected in the underfloor
    area to drain out.
    When the trim panels are installed they keep the insulation in the correct position.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-80-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-09-23 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Insulation is installed on the inner side of the lower part of the passenger compartment sidewalls and on the
    passenger/crew, emergency exit and cargo doors.
    The insulation on the rear pressure dome and some of the insulation in the flight compartment is installed with self
    adhesive insulation tape.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-25-80-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-09-23 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    COLD WEATHER PREHEATER SYSTEM

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    COLD WEATHER PREHEATER SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION...................... 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1
    2 Component Description.......................................................................................... 2
    2.1 Battery Heaters....................................................................................................... 2
    2.2 Engine Heaters....................................................................................................... 2
    2.3 Auxiliary Heater...................................................................................................... 2
    3 Usual Operation...................................................................................................... 2
    3.1 Battery and Auxiliary Heaters................................................................................. 2
    3.2 Engine Heaters....................................................................................................... 2
    4 Operation in Cold Conditions.................................................................................. 3

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Typical Cold Weather Preheater System (110 VACS) – Layout............................ 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-21-00-00-00A-040A-A AIR CONDITIONING - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION

    Description

    1 General
    The cold weather preheater system is installed as a Customer option (refer to Fig. 1). It has heating elements
    installed on the batteries and around parts of the engine. The system is energized by an external power supply that
    is connected to receptacles on the aircraft. The external power supply will be 110 VAC or 230 VAC (manufacturers
    option). The connection points are different for the 110 VAC and 230 VAC systems. The system gives safe engine
    starting and equipment temperatures on aircraft that operate in cold weather conditions.
    When installed, an engine insulation cover keeps the heat in the engine compartment after shutdown and is used
    with the engine heater system.
    If necessary an auxiliary heater can be used to increase the temperature in the passenger compartment. The
    temperature is displayed on the Multi Function Display (MFD) in the flight compartment (Refer to DM 12-
    B-21-00-00-00A-040A-A).

    Effectivity: COLD WEATHER


    12-B-25-90-00-00A-040A-A
    PREHEATER SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-25 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2 Component Description

    2.1 Battery Heaters


    A belt type 110 VAC or 230 VAC (manufacturers option) heating element is installed around the outer sides of the
    batteries. An external power receptacle and a pilot light are installed on the left of the lower rear fuselage behind
    Frame 38. A skin sensor that monitors the outside temperature is installed on the inside of the aircraft skin near the
    batteries on the left side between Frames 37 and 38.
    A wiring harness connects the components to the external power receptacle. The wiring harness has a connector
    that goes forward through the pressure bulkhead to a receptacle. The receptacle is installed on the lower front
    bulkhead of the baggage compartment.
    An auxiliary heater can be connected to the receptacle.

    2.2 Engine Heaters


    Four heating elements are bonded to those parts of the engine that follow:
    − The left side of the nose case
    − The right side of the nose case
    − The oil sump
    − The bottom of the fuel control unit

    An external power receptacle and a pilot light are installed on the lower left of the front fuselage behind the engine
    firewall. A wiring harness connects the heating elements to the external power receptacle.

    2.3 Auxiliary Heater


    A 110 VAC or 230 VAC safety heater can be installed in the center of the passenger compartment. The safety
    heater increases the temperature of the compartment. The heater is connected to the power receptacle on the
    lower front bulkhead of the baggage compartment. Power is supplied from the battery heater system when the
    system is energized.

    3 Usual Operation

    3.1 Battery and Auxiliary Heaters


    When the system is energized and the aircraft skin temperature decreases to 32°F (0°C) the temperature sensor
    energizes the heating elements around the batteries. The pilot light comes on when the system is energized.
    Power is also supplied to the receptacle on the lower front bulkhead of the baggage compartment for the auxiliary
    heater.
    It is recommended that the batteries are serviced at more frequent intervals when the system is operated for long
    periods of time.

    3.2 Engine Heaters


    When the system is energized the heating elements around the engine are energized and warm the engine. The
    pilot light comes on when the system is energized.

    Effectivity: COLD WEATHER


    12-B-25-90-00-00A-040A-A
    PREHEATER SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-25 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    4 Operation in Cold Conditions


    If the aircraft is parked externally for a period of time and the ambient temperature is as follows:
    − 32°F (0°C) to 5°F (−15°C)
    ● Connect a 110 VAC or 230 VAC, as necessary, ground power supply to the battery heater receptacle
    − 5°F (−15°C) and below
    ● Connect a 110 VAC or 230 VAC, as necessary, ground power supply to the battery and engine heaters
    receptacles
    ● Put an insulation cover on the engine
    ● Put an auxiliary heater in the center of the passenger compartment

    Before engine start, switch off and disconnect the 110 VAC or 230 VAC, as necessary, ground power supply to the
    battery and engine heater receptacles. Remove the insulation cover from the engine and the auxiliary heater from
    the passenger compartment.
    The external power procedure is recommended for engine starting. Use a ground power unit that can supply 1000
    Amp 28 VDC power.
    After an engine start at temperatures below 41°F (5°C) the Environmental Control System (ECS) will automatically
    start the underfloor heating system to warm the avionics equipment, refer to DM 12-B-21-40-00-00A-040A-A.

    Effectivity: COLD WEATHER


    12-B-25-90-00-00A-040A-A
    PREHEATER SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-25 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    110 VOLTS AC

    2 BATTERY
    HEATERS
    SUPPLEMENTARY
    HEATER RECEPTACLE

    AVIONIC COMPARTMENT
    TEMPERATURE SENSOR

    FUSELAGE SKIN
    TEMPERATURE SENSOR

    2 BATTERIES

    BATTERY HEATER RECEPTACLE


    AND PILOT LIGHT

    110 VOLTS AC
    BATTERY HEATER AND
    CABIN POWER OUTLET

    ENGINE HEATER
    RECEPTACLE AND 110 VOLTS AC
    PILOT LIGHT ENGINE HEATER
    ENGINE HEATER
    COMPRISING 4 ELEMENTS:
    1. LEFT SIDE NOSE CASE
    2. RIGHT SIDE NOSE CASE
    3. BOTTOM OF FCU
    4. OIL SUMP

    12-B-259000-A-S4080-20116-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Typical Cold Weather Preheater System (110 VACS) – Layout

    Effectivity: COLD WEATHER


    12-B-25-90-00-00A-040A-A
    PREHEATER SYSTEM
    End of data module
    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-08-25 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    COLD WEATHER PREHEATER SYSTEM (110 VAC)

    ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Table of Contents Page

    COLD WEATHER PREHEATER SYSTEM (110 VAC) - ADJUSTMENT/TEST......................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-79-00-00-00A-902A-A OIL SYSTEM - SERVICING

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Multimeter Part Local Supply 1

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Circuit Freeze Spray Part To be designated As
    necessar
    y

    Effectivity: COLD WEATHER


    12-B-25-90-00-00A-903A-A
    PREHEATER SYSTEM 110 VAC

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-18 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedures for the functional test of the cold weather pre-heater systems that
    operate with voltages of 110 volts. The test makes sure that the systems operate correctly and is done as
    follows:
    − After the installation of the cold weather pre-heater system
    − After components with pre-heater elements, as follows, are removed, replaced or installed
    ● Battery
    ● Engine

    2 Functional Test
    2.1 Set Up
    2.1.1 Make sure the aircraft is electrically safe before the cold weather pre-heater system is
    energize (refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.1.2 Open both rear engine access panels (43 AL and 43 AR) and the engine front top access
    panel (42 AT).
    2.1.3 Make sure the oil level in the engine oil tank is correct (refer to AMM 12-
    B-79-00-00-00A-902A-A).
    2.1.4 Open the access panel (31 AB) to get access to the aircraft batteries.
    2.1.5 Make sure the cold weather pre-heater system is fully installed.
    2.2 Procedures
    2.2.1 Battery Heater Preheat Test
    2.2.1.1 With the Multimeter (Pt.No. Local Supply) measure the resistance across the
    pins of the power receptacle in the cabin (J341).

    FROM TO
    GROUND GROUND PIN CONTINUITY
    POWER PIN (1) POWER PIN (2) NO CONTINUITY
    POWER PIN (1) and (2) GROUND NO CONTINUITY
    2.2.1.2
    WARNING

    DO NOT TOUCH THE AREA THAT IS COOLED BY THE FREEZER SPRAY


    WITH YOUR BARE HAND AS THIS CAN CAUSE AN INJURY.

    Effectivity: COLD WEATHER


    12-B-25-90-00-00A-903A-A
    PREHEATER SYSTEM 110 VAC

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-18 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    With the Circuit Freeze Spray (Pt.No. To be designated) decrease the


    temperature of the fuselage skin around the skin sensor (Z371) to below 0°C.
    2.2.1.3 With the Multimeter (Pt.No. Local Supply) measure the resistance across the
    power pins (1) and (2) of the power receptacle for the battery preheater (J381).
    Make sure the indication is as follows:
    − RESISTANCE = 90±20Ω
    2.2.1.5
    CAUTION

    ONLY APPLY 110 VAC FOR AS SHORT A TIME AS POSSIBLE, OR


    DAMAGE TO THE HEATING ELEMENTS AND BATTERIES WILL OCCUR.

    Connect an external 110 VAC power supply, to the power receptacle for the
    batteries, at the rear of the left side of the fuselage.
    2.2.1.6 Make sure that the pilot light adjacent to the power receptacle for the batteries
    comes on.
    2.2.1.7 If needed, do Step 2.2.1.2 again to activate the battery heating elements.
    2.2.1.8 Make sure the heating elements on the batteries are warm.
    2.2.1.9 With the Multimeter (Pt.No. Local Supply) make sure that the voltage at the
    cabin power receptacle is:
    − ≈ 110 VAC
    2.2.1.10 Disconnect the external 110 VAC power supply from the power receptacle for
    the batteries, at the rear of the left side of the fuselage.
    2.2.2 Engine Heater Preheat Test
    2.2.2.1 With the Multimeter (Pt.No. Local Supply) measure the resistance across the
    pins of the power receptacle for the engine preheater (J901).

    FROM TO
    GROUND GROUND PIN CONTINUITY
    POWER PIN (1) POWER PIN (2) 20±10Ω
    POWER PIN (1) and (2) GROUND NO CONTINUITY
    2.2.2.2
    CAUTION

    APPLY 110 VAC ONLY FOR A VERY SHORT TIME OR DAMAGE TO THE
    HEATER ELEMENTS WILL OCCUR.

    Connect an external 110 VAC power supply to the power receptacle for the
    engine, at the front of the left side of the fuselage.
    2.2.2.3 Make sure that the pilot light adjacent to the power receptacle for the engine
    comes on.
    2.2.2.4
    WARNING

    DO NOT TOUCH THE HEATING ELEMENTS WITH YOUR BARE HAND


    WHEN THEY ARE HOT, AS THIS CAN CAUSE AN INJURY.

    Make sure the heating elements on the engine are warm, as follows:

    Effectivity: COLD WEATHER


    12-B-25-90-00-00A-903A-A
    PREHEATER SYSTEM 110 VAC

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-18 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − reduction gearbox (left side)


    − reduction gearbox (right side)
    − underside of FCU
    − on oil reservoir
    2.2.2.5 Disconnect the external 110 VAC power supply from the power receptacle for
    the engine, at the front of the left side of the fuselage.
    2.3 Apex Option Activation
    2.3.1 Energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.3.2 Make sure the Under-floor Temperature (U-FLR) is shown continuously on the Multi Function
    Display (MFD) Environment window.
    2.3.3 Make sure the Under-floor Temperature shown on the MFD correctly reflects the the under-
    floor temperature.
    2.3.4 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    3 Close Up
    3.1 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.2 Close the rear fuselage battery access panel (31 AB)
    3.3 Close both rear engine access panels (43 AL and 43 AR) and the engine front top access panel (42
    AT)

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: COLD WEATHER


    12-B-25-90-00-00A-903A-A
    PREHEATER SYSTEM 110 VAC
    End of data module
    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-18 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    COLD WEATHER PREHEATER SYSTEM (230 VAC)

    ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Table of Contents Page

    COLD WEATHER PREHEATER SYSTEM (230 VAC) - ADJUSTMENT/TEST......................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-79-00-00-00A-902A-A OIL SYSTEM - SERVICING

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Adapter Cable Part 525.94.12.022 2
    Multimeter Part Local Supply 1

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Circuit Freeze Spray Part To be designated As
    necessar
    y

    Effectivity: COLD WEATHER


    12-B-25-90-00-00A-903B-A
    PREHEATER SYSTEM 230 VAC

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-18 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedures for the functional test of the cold weather pre-heater systems that
    operate with a voltage of 230 volts. The test makes sure that the systems operate correctly and is done as
    follows:
    − After the installation of the cold weather pre-heater system
    − After components with pre-heater elements, as follows, are removed, replaced or installed
    ● Battery
    ● Engine

    2 Functional Test
    2.1 Set Up
    2.1.1 Make sure the aircraft is electrically safe before the cold weather preheater system is
    energize (refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.1.2 Open both rear engine access panels (43 AL and 43 AR) and the engine front top access
    panel (42 AT).
    2.1.3 Make sure the oil level in the engine oil tank is correct (refer to AMM 12-
    B-79-00-00-00A-902A-A).
    2.1.4 Open the access panel (inboard of 11 AL) identified with the placard, 230 VOLTS AC
    ENGINE HEATER and get access to the power receptacle.
    2.1.5 Attach the Adapter Cable (Pt.No. 525.94.12.022) to the power receptacle.
    2.1.6 Open the access panel (31 AB) to get access to the aircraft batteries.
    2.1.7 Open the access panel (aft of 31 BL) identified with the placard, 230 VOLTS AC BATTERY
    HEATER AND CABIN POWER OUTLET and get access to the power receptacle.
    2.1.8 Attach the Adapter Cable (Pt.No. 525.94.12.022) to the power receptacle.
    2.1.9 Make sure the cold weather pre-heater system is fully installed.
    2.2 Procedures
    2.2.1 Battery Heater Preheat Test
    2.2.1.1 With the Multimeter (Pt.No. Local Supply) measure the resistance across the
    pins of the power receptacle in the cabin (J343)

    FROM TO
    GROUND GROUND PIN CONTINUITY
    POWER PIN (1) POWER PIN (2) NO CONTINUITY
    POWER PIN (1) and (2) GROUND NO CONTINUITY

    Effectivity: COLD WEATHER


    12-B-25-90-00-00A-903B-A
    PREHEATER SYSTEM 230 VAC

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-18 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.2.1.2
    WARNING

    DO NOT TOUCH THE AREA THAT IS COOLED BY THE FREEZER SPRAY


    WITH YOUR BARE HAND AS THIS CAN CAUSE AN INJURY.

    With the Circuit Freeze Spray (Pt.No. To be designated) decrease the


    temperature of the fuselage skin around the skin sensor (Z373) to below 0°C.
    2.2.1.3 With the Multimeter (Pt.No. Local Supply) measure the resistance across the
    power pins (1) and (2) of the power receptacle for the battery preheater (J393).
    Make sure the indication is as follows:
    − RESISTANCE = 360±25Ω
    2.2.1.5
    CAUTION

    ONLY APPLY 230 VAC FOR AS SHORT A TIME AS POSSIBLE, OR


    DAMAGE TO THE HEATING ELEMENTS AND BATTERIES WILL OCCUR.

    Connect an external 230 VAC power supply to the adapter cable connected to
    the power receptacle for the batteries, at the rear of the left side of the fuselage.
    2.2.1.6 Make sure that the pilot light adjacent to the power receptacle for the batteries
    comes on.
    2.2.1.7 If needed, do Step 2.2.1.2 again to activate the battery heater elements.
    2.2.1.8 Make sure the heating elements on the batteries are warm.
    2.2.1.9 With the Multimeter (Pt.No. Local Supply) make sure that the voltage at the
    cabin power receptacle is:
    − ≈ 230 VAC
    2.2.1.10 Disconnect the external 230 VAC power supply from the adapter cable
    connected to the power receptacle for the batteries, at the rear of the left side of
    the fuselage.
    2.2.2 Engine Heater Preheat Test
    2.2.2.1 With the Multimeter (Pt.No. Local Supply) measure the resistance across the
    pins of the power receptacle for the engine preheater (J903).

    FROM TO
    GROUND GROUND PIN CONTINUITY
    POWER PIN (1) POWER PIN (2) 75±15Ω
    POWER PIN (1) and (2) GROUND NO CONTINUITY
    2.2.2.2
    CAUTION

    APPLY 230 VAC ONLY FOR A VERY SHORT TIME OR DAMAGE TO THE
    HEATER ELEMENTS WILL OCCUR.

    Connect an external 230 VAC power supply to the adapter cable connected to
    the power receptacle for the engine, at the front of the left side of the fuselage.
    2.2.2.3 Make sure that the pilot light adjacent to the power receptacle for the engine
    comes on.

    Effectivity: COLD WEATHER


    12-B-25-90-00-00A-903B-A
    PREHEATER SYSTEM 230 VAC

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-18 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.2.2.4
    WARNING

    DO NOT TOUCH THE HEATING ELEMENTS WITH YOUR BARE HAND


    WHEN THEY ARE HOT, AS THIS CAN CAUSE AN INJURY.

    Make sure the heating elements on the engine are warm, as follows:
    − reduction gearbox (left side)
    − reduction gearbox (right side)
    − underside of FCU
    − on oil reservoir
    2.2.2.5 Disconnect the external 230 VAC power supply from the adapter cable
    connected to the power receptacle for the engine, at the front of the left side of
    the fuselage.
    2.3 Apex Option Activation
    2.3.1 Energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.3.2 Make sure the Under-floor Temperature (U-FLR) is shown continuously on the Multi Function
    Display (MFD) Environment window.
    2.3.3 Make sure the Under-floor Temperature shown on the MFD correctly reflects the under-floor
    temperature.
    2.3.4 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    3 Close Up
    3.1 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.2 Close the rear fuselage battery access panel (31 AB).
    3.3 Remove the adapter cable from the power receptacle for the batteries.
    3.4 Close the access panel (aft of 31 BL) identified with the placard, 230 VOLTS AC BATTERY HEATER
    AND CABIN POWER OUTLET.
    3.5 Close both rear engine access panels (43 AL and 43 AR) and the engine front top access panel (42
    AT).
    3.6 Remove the adapter cable from the power receptacle for the engine.
    3.7 Close the access panel (inboard of 11 AL) identified with the placard, 230 VOLTS AC ENGINE
    HEATER.

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: COLD WEATHER


    12-B-25-90-00-00A-903B-A
    PREHEATER SYSTEM 230 VAC
    End of data module
    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-02-18 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    COLD WEATHER PREHEATER SYSTEM (110 VAC)

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    COLD WEATHER PREHEATER SYSTEM (110 VAC) - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Battery Tie–down Rods – Release/Attachment...................................................... 4


    2 Battery Preheater – Removal/Installation............................................................... 5
    3 LH and RH Nose Case Preheater Element – Removal/Installation........................ 13
    4 Oil Sump Preheater Element – Removal/Installation............................................. 14
    5 FCU Preheater Element – Removal/Installation..................................................... 15

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-25-90-00-00A-903A-A COLD WEATHER PREHEATER SYSTEM (110 VAC) -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Plastic scraper Part Local Supply As
    Required

    Effectivity: 110 VAC PREHEATER


    12-B-25-90-00-00A-920A-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-04-25 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark


    Roller Part Local Supply As
    Required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Cable tie Part P09-014 As
    Required
    Cable tie Part P09-005 As
    Required
    Lockwire Part P02-007 As
    Required
    MEK Part P01-010 As
    Required
    Absorbent paper Part P02-031 As
    Required
    AC-1230 Sealant Part Supplied with Preheater As
    element Required
    CB 911 Solvent wipe Part Supplied with Preheater As
    element Required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Battery Preheater Kit Part 968.20.13.908 As
    Required
    Engine Preheater Kit Part 968.20.13.907 As
    Required

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedures for the removal/installation of the:
    − Battery Preheater Elements
    − Engine Preheater Elements
    2 Removal of the Battery Preheater Elements
    2.1 Job Set Up

    Effectivity: 110 VAC PREHEATER


    12-B-25-90-00-00A-920A-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-04-25 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.1.1 Make sure the aircraft is electrically safe before removing the battery preheater elements,
    refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    2.1.2 Open the access panel (31 AB) to get access to the aircraft batteries.
    2.2 Removal
    2.2.1 Remove the preheater element from the battery Figure 1 [4] as follows:
    2.2.1.1 Remove and discard the lockwire from the two wingnuts Figure 1 [1].
    2.2.1.2 Loosen the two wingnuts Figure 1 [1].
    2.2.1.3 Disengage the two locking plates Figure 1 [2] from the battery Figure 1 [4] then
    move the tie rods Figure 1 [3] away from the battery.
    2.2.1.4 Remove any cable ties used to hold the preheater element connector
    Figure 2 [3].
    2.2.1.5 Disconnect the preheater element connector Figure 2 [3] from the electrical
    harness Figure 2 [4] for the cold weather heating system.
    2.2.1.6 Remove and discard the cable ties Figure 2 [2] used to hold the preheater
    element Figure 2 [5] onto the battery Figure 2 [1].
    2.2.1.7 Remove the preheater element Figure 2 [5] from the battery Figure 2 [1].
    2.2.2 Remove the preheater element Figure 2 [5] from the aircraft.
    3 Installation of the Battery Preheater Elements
    3.1 Install the Battery Preheater Kit element as follows:
    3.1.1 Make sure the flat side of the preheater element Figure 2 [5] goes towards the battery
    Figure 2 [1].
    3.1.2 Put the preheater element Figure 2 [5] around the battery and attach with (Pt.No. P09-005)
    Figure 2 [2]. Make sure the element is in the correct position as follows:
    − On the number 1 battery, make sure the cable ties Figure 2 [2] are at the rear right side
    of the battery
    − On the number 2 battery, make sure the cable ties Figure 2 [2] are at the forward left
    side of the battery.
    3.1.3 Connect the preheater element connector Figure 2 [3] to the cold weather heating system
    electrical harness Figure 2 [4], and hold in the correct position with (Pt.No. P09-014).
    3.1.4 Move the two tie rods Figure 1 [3] into position on the battery Figure 1 [4] and engage the
    locking plates Figure 1 [2].
    3.1.5 Tighten the wingnuts Figure 1 [1] by hand.
    3.1.6 Safety the two wingnuts Figure 1 [1] with Lockwire (Pt.No. P02-007).
    3.2 Job Close Up
    3.2.1 Do a functional test of the battery cold weather preheater system, refer to AMM 12-
    B-25-90-00-00A-903A-A.
    3.2.2 Make sure the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items of equipment.
    3.2.3 Close the access panel (31 AB).

    Effectivity: 110 VAC PREHEATER


    12-B-25-90-00-00A-920A-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-04-25 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    A
    A

    1
    2

    4
    3

    12-B-259000-A-S4080-20118-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Battery Tie–down Rods – Release/Attachment

    Effectivity: 110 VAC PREHEATER


    12-B-25-90-00-00A-920A-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-04-25 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FRAME 38

    FRAME 37

    FRAME 39

    C
    TYPICAL

    4
    3
    B
    C

    12-B-259000-A-S4080-20119-A-01-1

    Figure 2 Battery Preheater – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: 110 VAC PREHEATER


    12-B-25-90-00-00A-920A-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-04-25 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    4 Removal of the Engine Preheater Elements


    4.1 Job Set Up
    4.1.1 Make sure the aircraft is electrically safe before you install any of the engine elements, refer
    to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    4.1.2 Open or remove the access panels 43 AR, 43 AL, 43 AB, 42 AT and 42AB as necessary to
    get access to the engine elements that are to be removed.
    4.2 Removal of the LH Engine Nose Case Preheater Element (TAS323)
    4.2.1 Identify the element (TAS323) Figure 3 [3] and disconnect its electrical connector.
    4.2.2
    CAUTION

    WHEN REMOVING AN ELEMENT, GREAT CARE MUST BE TAKEN NOT TO SCRATCH


    OR DAMAGE THE NOSE CASE. ANY TOOLS USED TO REMOVE AN ELEMENT MUST
    BE MADE FROM A NON-METALLIC MATERIAL.

    Remove the element (TAS323) Figure 3 [3] with a Plastic scraper (Pt.No. Local Supply) to
    help separate the sealant that bonds the element to the nose case Figure 3 [1].
    4.2.3 Remove any sealant that remains on the nose case Figure 3 [1] with the Plastic
    scraper (Pt.No. Local Supply).
    4.3 Removal of the RH Engine Nose Case Preheater Element (TAS326)
    4.3.1 Identify the preheater element (TAS326) Figure 3 [2] and disconnect its electrical connector.
    4.3.2
    CAUTION

    WHEN REMOVING AN ELEMENT, GREAT CARE MUST BE TAKEN NOT TO SCRATCH


    OR DAMAGE THE NOSE CASE. ANY TOOLS USED TO REMOVE AN ELEMENT MUST
    BE MADE FROM A NON-METALLIC MATERIAL.

    Remove the element Figure 3 [2] with a Plastic scraper (Pt.No. Local Supply) to help
    separate the sealant that bonds the element to the nose case Figure 3 [1].
    4.3.3 Remove any sealant that remains on the nose case Figure 3 [1] with the Plastic
    scraper (Pt.No. Local Supply).
    4.4 Removal of the Oil Sump Preheater Element (TAS379)
    4.4.1 Identify the element (TAS379) Figure 4 [1] and disconnect its electrical connector.
    4.4.2
    CAUTION

    WHEN REMOVING AN ELEMENT, GREAT CARE MUST BE TAKEN NOT TO SCRATCH


    OR DAMAGE THE ENGINE CASING. ANY TOOLS USED TO REMOVE AN ELEMENT
    MUST BE MADE FROM A NON-METALLIC MATERIAL.

    Remove the element Figure 4 [1] with a Plastic scraper (Pt.No. Local Supply) to help
    separate the sealant that bonds the element to the engine casing.
    4.4.3 Remove any sealant that remains on the engine casing with the Plastic scraper (Pt.No. Local
    Supply).
    4.5 Removal of the FCU Preheater Element (TAS324)

    Effectivity: 110 VAC PREHEATER


    12-B-25-90-00-00A-920A-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-04-25 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    4.5.1 Identify the element (TAS324) Figure 5 [1] and disconnect its electrical connector.
    4.5.2
    CAUTION

    WHEN REMOVING AN ELEMENT, GREAT CARE MUST BE TAKEN NOT TO SCRATCH


    OR DAMAGE THE FCU. ANY TOOLS USED TO REMOVE AN ELEMENT MUST BE MADE
    FROM A NON-METALLIC MATERIAL.

    Remove the element Figure 5 [1] with a Plastic scraper (Pt.No. Local Supply) to help
    separate the sealant that bonds the element to the bottom of the FCU.
    4.5.3 Remove any sealant that remains on the FCU with the Plastic scraper (Pt.No. Local Supply).
    5 Installation of the Engine Preheater Elements
    5.1
    WARNING

    STRICT ATTENTION MUST BE PAID TO THE MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTION WRITTEN ON


    THE SEALANT CONTAINER, WITH RESPECT TO HANDLING OF THE AC-1230 SEALANT.

    CAUTION

    T HE LH AND RH ENGINE NOSE CASE PREHEATER ELEMENTS (TAS323 AND TAS326) ARE
    SHAPED DIFFERENTLY. MAKE SURE THAT THEY ARE INSTALLED IN THE CORRECT
    POSITIONS.

    CAUTION

    ONLY USE AC-1230 SEALANT TO BOND THE PREHEATER ELEMENTS. THE BONDING AND
    HEAT TRANSFER QUALITIES OF OTHER SEALANTS CANNOT BE GUARANTEED.

    CAUTION

    THE AC-1230 SEALANT HAS A TOOLING TIME OF APPROXIMATELY 10 MINUTES. THE


    SEALANT IS TACK-FREE IN ABOUT 20 MINUTES. ALL ADJUSTMENTS TO THE POSITIONING OF
    THE ELEMENT MUST BE DONE WITHIN THE TOOLING TIME.

    CAUTION

    CURING TIME OF THE AC-1230 SEALANT IS A MINIMUM, UNDISTURBED, FULL 8 HOURS


    (STANDARD CONDITIONS OF 21°C (71°F) WITH A HUMIDITY OF 50%). HOWEVER, THE ACTUAL
    LENGTH OF CURING TIME DEPENDS ON THE THICKNESS OF THE SEALANT APPLICATION,
    TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY.

    CAUTION

    DO NOT ATTEMPT TO CURE THE AC-1230 SEALANT BY APPLYING POWER TO THE


    PREHEATER ELEMENTS AS THE SEALANT MAY CURE TOO FAST.

    Effectivity: 110 VAC PREHEATER


    12-B-25-90-00-00A-920A-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-04-25 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    CAUTION

    YOU MUST NOT USE A CB 911 SOLVENT WIPE TO CLEAN THE CONTACT SURFACE ON THE
    ENGINE CONTACT SURFACES. THE WIPE CONTAINS A POWERFUL CLEANING SOLUTION
    AND WILL ETCH ANY FINISH THAT IT COMES INTO CONTACT WITH, INCLUDING PAINTED OR
    BARE METAL.

    Note

    Make sure that the flat side of the element goes against the surface of the engine casing.

    Note

    For the steps that follow, blocks of Styrofoam (cut to suit the shape of each element and curvature of
    the engine contact surfaces) will be necessary to hold the elements in position during the sealant
    curing time.

    Note

    All engine contact surfaces are to be thoroughly cleaned with MEK (Pt.No. P01-010), which must be
    allowed to dry, immediately before the elements are installed.

    Installation of the LH Engine Nose Case Preheater Element (TAS323)


    5.1.1 Clean the contact surface of the element Figure 3 [3] with a CB 911 Solvent
    wipe (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater element).
    5.1.2
    Note

    Only one CB 911 Solvent wipe (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater element) is required to
    clean and prepare an element contact surface.

    Apply the AC-1230 Sealant (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater element) onto the element
    Figure 3 [3] as follows:
    5.1.2.1 Apply a zig-zag pattern of AC-1230 Sealant (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater
    element) onto the flat contact surface of the element Figure 3 [3].
    5.1.2.2 Spread the sealant evenly into a very fine layer (approximately 0.02 in (0,50
    mm)) across the whole flat contact surface of the element Figure 3 [3].
    5.1.3 Immediately press the element Figure 3 [3] into position on the LH side of the nose case
    Figure 3 [1], with the element's electrical lead positioned to the rear, as shown on Fig. 3.
    5.1.4 With a Roller (Pt.No. Local Supply), starting from the center of the element Figure 3 [3],
    gently draw it across the surface to the outer edges of the element to express any trapped
    air and excess sealant.
    5.1.5 Immediately wipe away any excess sealant with Absorbent paper (Pt.No. P02-031).
    5.1.6 Put the pre-shaped Styrofoam on top of the element Figure 3 [3] and tie it in position so that
    it supports the element until the sealant has cured.
    5.1.7 When the sealant has cured, remove the Styrofoam.

    Effectivity: 110 VAC PREHEATER


    12-B-25-90-00-00A-920A-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-04-25 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    5.1.8 Apply sufficient AC-1230 Sealant (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater element) under the base
    of the element lead (where the lead enters the element) to help reduce wire fatigue and
    ingress of moisture/fluids between the element and engine contact surface.
    5.1.9 Seal the perimeter of the element Figure 3 [3] with sufficient AC-1230
    Sealant (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater element) to create a smooth transition from the
    element to the nose case Figure 3 [1] and allow the sealant to cure.
    5.1.10
    Note

    The sealant must not extend beyond 0.25 in (6,35 mm) from the edge of the element
    Figure 3 [3] in either direction, onto the element or the nose case Figure 3 [1].

    Check that the element Figure 3 [3] has bonded satisfactorily to the nose case Figure 3 [1].
    5.1.11 Connect the element's Figure 3 [3] electrical connector.
    5.2
    CAUTION

    T HE LH AND RH ENGINE NOSE CASE PREHEATER ELEMENTS (TAS323 AND TAS326) ARE
    SHAPED DIFFERENTLY. MAKE SURE THAT THEY ARE INSTALLED IN THE CORRECT
    POSITION.

    Installation of the RH Engine Nose Case Preheater Element (TAS326)


    5.2.1 Clean the contact surface of the element Figure 3 [2] with a CB 911 Solvent
    wipe (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater element).
    5.2.2
    Note

    Only one CB 911 Solvent wipe (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater element) is required to
    clean and prepare an element contact surface.

    Apply the AC-1230 Sealant (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater element) onto the element
    Figure 3 [2] as follows:
    5.2.2.1 Apply a zig-zag pattern of AC-1230 Sealant (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater
    element) onto the flat contact surface of the element Figure 3 [2].
    5.2.2.2 Spread the sealant evenly into a very fine layer (approximately 0.02 in (0,50
    mm)) across the whole flat contact surface of the element Figure 3 [2].
    5.2.3 Immediately press the element Figure 3 [2] into position on the LH side of the Nose Case
    Figure 3 [1], with its electrical lead positioned to the rear, as shown on Fig. 3.
    5.2.4 With a Roller (Pt.No. Local Supply), starting from the center of the element Figure 3 [2],
    gently draw it across the surface to the outer edges of the element to express any air and
    excess sealant.
    5.2.5 Immediately wipe away any excess sealant with Absorbent paper (Pt.No. P02-031).
    5.2.6 Put the pre-shaped Styrofoam on top of the element Figure 3 [2] and tie it in position so that
    it supports the element until the sealant has cured.
    5.2.7 When the sealant has cured, remove the Styrofoam.

    Effectivity: 110 VAC PREHEATER


    12-B-25-90-00-00A-920A-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-04-25 Page 9


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    5.2.8 Apply sufficient AC-1230 Sealant (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater element) under the base
    of the element lead (where the lead enters the element) to help reduce wire fatigue and
    ingress of moisture/fluids between the element and engine contact surface.
    5.2.9 Seal the perimeter of the element Figure 3 [2] with sufficient AC-1230
    Sealant (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater element) to create a smooth transition from the
    element to the engine casing and allow the sealant to cure.
    5.2.10
    Note

    The sealant must not extend beyond 0.25 in (6,35 mm) from the edge of the element
    Figure 3 [2] in either direction, onto the element or the nose case Figure 3 [1].

    Check that the element Figure 3 [2] has bonded satisfactorily to the nose case Figure 3 [1].
    5.2.11 Connect the element Figure 3 [2] electrical connector.
    5.3 Installation of the Oil Sump Preheater Element (TAS 379)
    5.3.1 Clean the contact surface of the element Figure 4 [1] with a CB 911 Solvent
    wipe (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater element).
    5.3.2
    Note

    Only one CB 911 Solvent wipe (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater element) is required to
    clean and prepare an element contact surface.

    Apply the AC-1230 Sealant (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater element) onto the element
    Figure 4 [1] as follows:
    5.3.2.1 Apply a zig-zag pattern of AC-1230 Sealant (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater
    element) onto the flat contact surface of the element Figure 4 [1].
    5.3.2.2 Spread the sealant evenly into a very fine layer (approximately 0.02 in (0,50
    mm)) across the whole flat contact surface of the element Figure 4 [1].
    5.3.3 Immediately press the element Figure 4 [1] into position on the oil sump, with the electrical
    lead Figure 4 [2] positioned uppermost, as shown on Fig. 4.
    5.3.4 With a Roller (Pt.No. Local Supply), starting from the center of the element Figure 4 [1],
    gently draw it across the surface to the outer edges of the element to express any air and
    excess sealant.
    5.3.5 Immediately wipe away any excess sealant with Absorbent paper (Pt.No. P02-031).
    5.3.6 Put the pre-shaped Styrofoam on top of the element Figure 4 [1] and tie it in position so that
    it supports the element until the sealant has cured.
    5.3.7 When the sealant has cured, remove the Styrofoam.
    5.3.8 Apply sufficient AC-1230 Sealant (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater element) under the base
    of the element lead (where the lead enters the element) to help reduce wire fatigue and
    ingress of moisture/fluids between the element and oil sump contact surface.
    5.3.9 Seal the perimeter of the element Figure 4 [1] with sufficient AC-1230
    Sealant (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater element) to create a smooth transition from the
    element to the oil sump and allow the sealant to cure.

    Effectivity: 110 VAC PREHEATER


    12-B-25-90-00-00A-920A-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-04-25 Page 10


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    5.3.10
    Note

    The sealant must not extend beyond 0.25 in (6,35 mm) from the edge of the element in
    either direction, onto the element or the oil sump.

    Check that the element Figure 4 [1] has bonded satisfactorily to the oil sump.
    5.3.11 Connect the element Figure 4 [1] electrical connector.
    5.4 Installation of the FCU Preheater Element (TAS324)
    5.4.1 Clean the contact surface of the element Figure 5 [1] with a CB 911 Solvent
    wipe (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater element).
    5.4.2
    Note

    Only one CB 911 Solvent wipe (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater element) is required to
    clean and prepare an element contact surface.

    Apply the AC-1230 Sealant (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater element) onto the element
    Figure 5 [1] as follows:
    5.4.2.1 Apply a zig-zag pattern of AC-1230 Sealant (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater
    element) onto the flat contact surface of the element Figure 5 [1].
    5.4.2.2 Spread the sealant evenly into a very fine layer (approximately 0.02 in (0,50
    mm)) across the whole flat contact surface of the element Figure 5 [1].
    5.4.3 Immediately press the element Figure 5 [1] into position on the bottom of the FCU, with the
    electrical lead Figure 5 [2] routed forward and to the left, as shown on Fig. 5.
    5.4.4 With a Roller (Pt.No. Local Supply), starting from the center of the element Figure 5 [1],
    gently draw it across the surface to the outer edges of the element to express any air and
    excess sealant.
    5.4.5 Immediately wipe away any excess sealant with Absorbent paper (Pt.No. P02-031).
    5.4.6 Put the pre-shaped Styrofoam on top of the element Figure 5 [1] and tie it in position so that
    it supports the element until the sealant has cured.
    5.4.7 When the sealant has cured, remove the Styrofoam.
    5.4.8 Apply sufficient AC-1230 Sealant (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater element) under the base
    of the element lead (where the lead enters the element) to help reduce wire fatigue and
    ingress of moisture/fluids between the element and FCU contact surface.
    5.4.9 Seal the perimeter of the element Figure 5 [1] with sufficient AC-1230
    Sealant (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater element) to create a smooth transition from the
    element to the FCU and allow the sealant to cure.
    5.4.10
    Note

    The sealant must not extend beyond 0.25 in (6,35 mm) from the edge of the element in
    either direction, onto the element or the FCU.

    Check that the element Figure 5 [1] has bonded satisfactorily to the FCU.
    5.4.11 Connect the element Figure 5 [1] electrical connector.
    5.5 Close Up

    Effectivity: 110 VAC PREHEATER


    12-B-25-90-00-00A-920A-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-04-25 Page 11


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    5.5.1 Do a check of the engine preheater elements as follows:


    5.5.1.1 Connect an external 110 VAC supply to the power socket located on the
    forward fuselage adjacent to panel 11 AL.
    5.5.1.2
    WARNING

    DO NOT TOUCH THE PREHEATER ELEMENT AS IT CAN BURN YOU

    After approximately 30 minutes, check that the area around the elements feels
    warm.
    5.5.1.3 Switch OFF and disconnect the external 110 VAC power supply.
    5.5.2 Make sure the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items of equipment.
    5.5.3 Close or install the access panels 43 AR, 43 AL, 43 AB, 42 AT and 42AB as necessary.

    Effectivity: 110 VAC PREHEATER


    12-B-25-90-00-00A-920A-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-04-25 Page 12


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    1

    2
    B

    12-B-259000-A-S4080-20120-A-01-1

    Figure 3 LH and RH Nose Case Preheater Element – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: 110 VAC PREHEATER


    12-B-25-90-00-00A-920A-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-04-25 Page 13


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    2

    12-B-259000-A-S4080-20121-A-01-1

    Figure 4 Oil Sump Preheater Element – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: 110 VAC PREHEATER


    12-B-25-90-00-00A-920A-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-04-25 Page 14


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    1

    12-B-259000-A-S4080-20122-A-01-1

    Figure 5 FCU Preheater Element – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: 110 VAC PREHEATER


    12-B-25-90-00-00A-920A-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-04-25 Page 15


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: 110 VAC PREHEATER


    12-B-25-90-00-00A-920A-A
    SYSTEM
    End of data module
    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-04-25 Page 16
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    COLD WEATHER PREHEATER SYSTEM (230 VAC)

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    COLD WEATHER PREHEATER SYSTEM (230 VAC) - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Battery Tie–down Rods – Release/Attachment...................................................... 4


    2 Battery Preheater – Removal/Installation............................................................... 5
    3 LH and RH Nose Case Preheater Element – Removal/Installation........................ 13
    4 Oil Sump Preheater Element – Removal/Installation............................................. 14
    5 FCU Preheater Element – Removal/Installation..................................................... 15

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-25-90-00-00A-903B-A COLD WEATHER PREHEATER SYSTEM (230 VAC) -
    ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Plastic scraper Part Local Supply As
    Required

    Effectivity: 230 VAC PREHEATER


    12-B-25-90-00-00A-920B-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-05-22 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark


    Roller Part Local Supply As
    Required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Cable tie Part P09-014 As
    Required
    Cable tie Part P09-005 As
    Required
    Lockwire Part P02-007 As
    Required
    MEK Part P01-010 As
    Required
    Absorbent paper Part P02-031 As
    Required
    AC-1230 Sealant Part Supplied with Preheater As
    element Required
    CB 911 Solvent wipe Part Supplied with Preheater As
    element Required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Battery Preheater Kit Part 968.20.12.948 As
    Required
    Engine Preheater Kit Part 968.20.12.947 As
    Required

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedures for the removal/installation of the:
    − Battery Preheater Elements
    − Engine Preheater Elements
    2 Removal of the Battery Preheater Elements
    2.1 Job Set Up

    Effectivity: 230 VAC PREHEATER


    12-B-25-90-00-00A-920B-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-05-22 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.1.1 Make sure the aircraft is electrically safe before removing the battery preheater elements,
    refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    2.1.2 Open the access panel (31 AB) to get access to the aircraft batteries.
    2.2 Removal
    2.2.1 Remove the preheater element from the battery Figure 1 [4] as follows:
    2.2.1.1 Remove and discard the lockwire from the two wingnuts Figure 1 [1].
    2.2.1.2 Loosen the two wingnuts Figure 1 [1].
    2.2.1.3 Disengage the two locking plates Figure 1 [2] from the battery Figure 1 [4] then
    move the tie rods Figure 1 [3] away from the battery.
    2.2.1.4 Remove any cable ties used to hold the preheater element connector
    Figure 2 [3].
    2.2.1.5 Disconnect the preheater element connector Figure 2 [3] from the electrical
    harness Figure 2 [4] for the cold weather heating system.
    2.2.1.6 Remove and discard the cable ties Figure 2 [2] used to hold the preheater
    element Figure 2 [5] onto the battery Figure 2 [1].
    2.2.1.7 Remove the preheater element Figure 2 [5] from the battery Figure 2 [1].
    2.2.2 Remove the preheater element Figure 2 [5] from the aircraft.
    3 Installation of the Battery Preheater Elements
    3.1 Install the Battery Preheater Kit element as follows:
    3.1.1 Make sure the flat side of the preheater element Figure 2 [5] goes towards the battery
    Figure 2 [1].
    3.1.2 Put the preheater element Figure 2 [5] around the battery Figure 2 [1] and attach with
    (Pt.No. P09-005) Figure 2 [2]. Make sure the element is in the correct position as follows:
    − On the number 1 battery, make sure the cable ties Figure 2 [2] are at the rear right side
    of the battery
    − On the number 2 battery, make sure the cable ties Figure 2 [2] are at the forward left
    side of the battery.
    3.1.3 Connect the preheater element connector Figure 2 [3] to the cold weather heating system
    electrical harness Figure 2 [4], and hold in the correct position with (Pt.No. P09-014).
    3.1.4 Move the two tie rods Figure 1 [3] into position on the battery Figure 1 [4] and engage the
    locking plates Figure 1 [2].
    3.1.5 Tighten the wingnuts Figure 1 [1] by hand.
    3.1.6 Safety the two wingnuts Figure 1 [1] with Lockwire (Pt.No. P02-007).
    3.2 Close Up
    3.2.1 Do a functional test of the battery cold weather preheater system, refer to AMM 12-
    B-25-90-00-00A-903B-A.
    3.2.2 Make sure the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items of equipment.
    3.2.3 Close the access panel (31 AB).

    Effectivity: 230 VAC PREHEATER


    12-B-25-90-00-00A-920B-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-05-22 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    A
    A

    1
    2

    4
    3

    12-B-259000-A-S4080-20118-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Battery Tie–down Rods – Release/Attachment

    Effectivity: 230 VAC PREHEATER


    12-B-25-90-00-00A-920B-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-05-22 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FRAME 40

    FRAME 39
    FRAME 39

    A
    FRAME 38
    FRAME 40

    FRAME 38

    FRAME 37 FRAME 37

    FW
    D

    4
    3 B

    12-B-259000-A-S4080-20123-A-01-1

    Figure 2 Battery Preheater – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: 230 VAC PREHEATER


    12-B-25-90-00-00A-920B-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-05-22 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    4 Removal of the Engine Preheater Elements


    4.1 Job Set Up
    4.1.1 Make sure the aircraft is electrically safe before you install any of the engine elements, refer
    to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    4.1.2 Open or remove the access panels 43 AR, 43 AL, 43 AB, 42 AT and 42AB as necessary to
    get access to the engine elements that are to be removed.
    4.2 Removal of the LH Engine Nose Case Preheater Element (TAS323)
    4.2.1 Identify the element (TAS323) Figure 3 [3] and disconnect its electrical connector.
    4.2.2
    CAUTION

    WHEN REMOVING AN ELEMENT, GREAT CARE MUST BE TAKEN NOT TO SCRATCH


    OR DAMAGE THE NOSE CASE. ANY TOOLS USED TO REMOVE AN ELEMENT, MUST
    BE MADE FROM A NON-METALLIC MATERIAL.

    Remove the element (TAS323) Figure 3 [3] with a Plastic scraper (Pt.No. Local Supply) to
    help separate the sealant that bonds the element to the nose case Figure 3 [1].
    4.2.3 Remove any sealant that remains on the nose case Figure 3 [1] with the Plastic
    scraper (Pt.No. Local Supply).
    4.3 Removal of the RH Engine Nose Case Preheater Element (TAS326)
    4.3.1 Identify the preheater element (TAS326) Figure 3 [2] and disconnect its electrical connector.
    4.3.2
    CAUTION

    WHEN REMOVING AN ELEMENT, GREAT CARE MUST BE TAKEN NOT TO SCRATCH


    OR DAMAGE THE NOSE CASE. ANY TOOLS USED TO REMOVE AN ELEMENT, MUST
    BE MADE FROM A NON-METALLIC MATERIAL.

    Remove the element Figure 3 [2] with a Plastic scraper (Pt.No. Local Supply) to help
    separate the sealant that bonds the element to the nose case Figure 3 [1].
    4.3.3 Remove any sealant that remains on the nose case Figure 3 [1] with the Plastic
    scraper (Pt.No. Local Supply).
    4.4 Removal of the Oil Sump Preheater Element (TAS379)
    4.4.1 Identify the element (TAS379) Figure 4 [1] and disconnect its electrical connector.
    4.4.2
    CAUTION

    WHEN REMOVING AN ELEMENT, GREAT CARE MUST BE TAKEN NOT TO SCRATCH


    OR DAMAGE THE ENGINE CASING. ANY TOOLS USED TO REMOVE AN ELEMENT,
    MUST BE MADE FROM A NON-METALLIC MATERIAL.

    Remove the element Figure 4 [1] with a Plastic scraper (Pt.No. Local Supply) to help
    separate the sealant that bonds the element to the engine casing.
    4.4.3 Remove any sealant that remains on the engine casing with the Plastic scraper (Pt.No. Local
    Supply).
    4.5 Removal of the FCU Preheater Element (TAS324)

    Effectivity: 230 VAC PREHEATER


    12-B-25-90-00-00A-920B-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-05-22 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    4.5.1 Identify the element (TAS324) Figure 5 [1] and disconnect its electrical connector.
    4.5.2
    CAUTION

    WHEN REMOVING AN ELEMENT, GREAT CARE MUST BE TAKEN NOT TO SCRATCH


    OR DAMAGE THE FCU. ANY TOOLS USED TO REMOVE AN ELEMENT, MUST BE
    MADE FROM A NON-METALLIC MATERIAL.

    Remove the element Figure 5 [1] with a Plastic scraper (Pt.No. Local Supply) to help
    separate the sealant that bonds the element to the bottom of the FCU.
    4.5.3 Remove any sealant that remains on the FCU with the Plastic scraper (Pt.No. Local Supply).
    5 Installation of the Engine Preheater Elements
    5.1
    WARNING

    STRICT ATTENTION MUST BE PAID TO THE MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTION WRITTEN ON


    THE SEALANT CONTAINER, WITH RESPECT TO HANDLING OF THE AC-1230 SEALANT.

    CAUTION

    T HE LH AND RH ENGINE NOSE CASE PREHEATER ELEMENTS (TAS323 AND TAS326) ARE
    SHAPED DIFFERENTLY. MAKE SURE THAT THEY ARE INSTALLED IN THE CORRECT
    POSITIONS.

    CAUTION

    ONLY USE AC-1230 SEALANT TO BOND THE PREHEATER ELEMENTS. THE BONDING AND
    HEAT TRANSFER QUALITIES OF OTHER SEALANTS CANNOT BE GUARANTEED.

    CAUTION

    THE AC-1230 SEALANT HAS A TOOLING TIME OF APPROXIMATELY 10 MINUTES. THE


    SEALANT IS TACK-FREE IN ABOUT 20 MINUTES. ALL ADJUSTMENTS TO THE POSITIONING OF
    THE ELEMENT MUST BE DONE WITHIN THE TOOLING TIME.

    CAUTION

    CURING TIME OF THE AC-1230 SEALANT IS A MINIMUM, UNDISTURBED, FULL 8 HOURS


    (STANDARD CONDITIONS OF 21°C (71°F) WITH A HUMIDITY OF 50%), BEFORE REMOVAL OF
    STYROFOAM BLOCKS. HOWEVER, THE ACTUAL LENGTH OF CURING TIME DEPENDS ON THE
    THICKNESS OF THE SEALANT APPLICATION, TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY.

    CAUTION

    DO NOT ATTEMPT TO CURE THE AC-1230 SEALANT BY APPLYING POWER TO THE


    PREHEATER ELEMENTS AS THE SEALANT MAY CURE TOO FAST.

    Effectivity: 230 VAC PREHEATER


    12-B-25-90-00-00A-920B-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-05-22 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    CAUTION

    YOU MUST NOT USE A CB 911 SOLVENT WIPE TO CLEAN THE CONTACT SURFACE ON THE
    ENGINE CONTACT SURFACES. THE WIPE CONTAINS A POWERFUL CLEANING SOLUTION
    AND WILL ETCH ANY FINISH THAT IT COMES INTO CONTACT WITH, INCLUDING PAINTED OR
    BARE METAL.

    Note

    Make sure that the flat side of the element goes against the surface of the engine casing.

    Note

    For the steps that follow, blocks of Styrofoam (cut to suit the shape of each element and curvature of
    the engine contact surfaces) will be necessary to hold the elements in position during the sealant
    curing time.

    Note

    All engine contact surfaces are to be thoroughly cleaned with MEK (Pt.No. P01-010), which must be
    allowed to dry, immediately before the elements are installed.

    Installation of the LH Engine Nose Case Preheater Element (TAS323)


    5.1.1 Clean the contact surface of the element Figure 3 [3] with a CB 911 Solvent
    wipe (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater element).
    5.1.2
    Note

    Only one CB 911 Solvent wipe (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater element) is required to
    clean and prepare an element contact surface.

    Apply the AC-1230 Sealant (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater element) onto the element
    Figure 3 [3] as follows:
    5.1.2.1 Apply a zig-zag pattern of AC-1230 Sealant (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater
    element) onto the flat contact surface of the element Figure 3 [3].
    5.1.2.2 Spread the sealant evenly into a very fine layer (approximately 0.02 in (0,50
    mm)) across the whole flat contact surface of the element Figure 3 [3].
    5.1.3 Immediately press the element Figure 3 [3] into position on the LH side of the nose case
    Figure 3 [1], with the element's electrical lead positioned to the rear, as shown on Fig. 3.
    5.1.4 With a Roller (Pt.No. Local Supply), starting from the center of the element Figure 3 [3],
    gently draw it across the surface to the outer edges of the element to express any trapped
    air and excess sealant.
    5.1.5 Immediately wipe away any excess sealant with Absorbent paper (Pt.No. P02-031).
    5.1.6 Put the pre-shaped Styrofoam on top of the element Figure 3 [3] and tie it in position so that
    it supports the element until the sealant has cured.
    5.1.7 When the sealant has cured, remove the Styrofoam.

    Effectivity: 230 VAC PREHEATER


    12-B-25-90-00-00A-920B-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-05-22 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    5.1.8 Apply sufficient AC-1230 Sealant (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater element) under the base
    of the element lead (where the lead enters the element) to help reduce wire fatigue and
    ingress of moisture/fluids between the element and engine contact surface.
    5.1.9 Seal the perimeter of the element Figure 3 [3] with sufficient AC-1230
    Sealant (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater element) to create a smooth transition from the
    element to the nose case Figure 3 [1] and allow the sealant to cure.
    5.1.10
    Note

    The sealant must not extend beyond 0.25 in (6,35 mm) from the edge of the element
    Figure 3 [3] in either direction, onto the element or the nose case Figure 3 [1].

    Check that the element Figure 3 [3] has bonded satisfactorily to the nose case Figure 3 [1].
    5.1.11 Connect the element's Figure 3 [3] electrical connector.
    5.2
    CAUTION

    T HE LH AND RH ENGINE NOSE CASE PREHEATER ELEMENTS (TAS323 AND TAS326) ARE
    SHAPED DIFFERENTLY. MAKE SURE THAT THEY ARE INSTALLED IN THE CORRECT
    POSITION.

    Installation of the RH Engine Nose Case Preheater Element (TAS326)


    5.2.1 Clean the contact surface of the element Figure 3 [2] with a CB 911 Solvent
    wipe (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater element).
    5.2.2
    Note

    Only one CB 911 Solvent wipe (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater element) is required to
    clean and prepare an element contact surface.

    Apply the AC-1230 Sealant (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater element) onto the element
    Figure 3 [2] as follows:
    5.2.2.1 Apply a zig-zag pattern of AC-1230 Sealant (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater
    element) onto the flat contact surface of the element Figure 3 [2].
    5.2.2.2 Spread the sealant evenly into a very fine layer (approximately 0.02 in (0,50
    mm)) across the whole flat contact surface of the element Figure 3 [2].
    5.2.3 Immediately press the element Figure 3 [2] into position on the LH side of the Nose Case
    Figure 3 [1], with its electrical lead positioned to the rear, as shown on Fig. 3.
    5.2.4 With a Roller (Pt.No. Local Supply), starting from the center of the element Figure 3 [2],
    gently draw it across the surface to the outer edges of the element to express any air and
    excess sealant.
    5.2.5 Immediately wipe away any excess sealant with Absorbent paper (Pt.No. P02-031).
    5.2.6 Put the pre-shaped Styrofoam on top of the element Figure 3 [2] and tie it in position so that
    it supports the element until the sealant has cured.
    5.2.7 When the sealant has cured, remove the Styrofoam.

    Effectivity: 230 VAC PREHEATER


    12-B-25-90-00-00A-920B-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-05-22 Page 9


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    5.2.8 Apply sufficient AC-1230 Sealant (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater element) under the base
    of the element lead (where the lead enters the element) to help reduce wire fatigue and
    ingress of moisture/fluids between the element and engine contact surface.
    5.2.9 Seal the perimeter of the element Figure 3 [2] with sufficient AC-1230
    Sealant (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater element) to create a smooth transition from the
    element to the engine casing and allow the sealant to cure.
    5.2.10
    Note

    The sealant must not extend beyond 0.25 in (6,35 mm) from the edge of the element
    Figure 3 [2] in either direction, onto the element or the nose case Figure 3 [1].

    Check that the element Figure 3 [2] has bonded satisfactorily to the nose case Figure 3 [1].
    5.2.11 Connect the element Figure 3 [2] electrical connector.
    5.3 Installation of the Oil Sump Preheater Element (TAS 379)
    5.3.1 Clean the contact surface of the element Figure 4 [1] with a CB 911 Solvent
    wipe (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater element).
    5.3.2
    Note

    Only one CB 911 Solvent wipe (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater element) is required to
    clean and prepare an element contact surface.

    Apply the AC-1230 Sealant (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater element) onto the element
    Figure 4 [1] as follows:
    5.3.2.1 Apply a zig-zag pattern of AC-1230 Sealant (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater
    element) onto the flat contact surface of the element Figure 4 [1].
    5.3.2.2 Spread the sealant evenly into a very fine layer (approximately 0.02 in (0,50
    mm)) across the whole flat contact surface of the element Figure 4 [1].
    5.3.3 Immediately press the element Figure 4 [1] into position on the oil sump, with the electrical
    lead Figure 4 [2] positioned uppermost, as shown on Fig. 4.
    5.3.4 With a Roller (Pt.No. Local Supply), starting from the center of the element Figure 4 [1],
    gently draw it across the surface to the outer edges of the element to express any air and
    excess sealant.
    5.3.5 Immediately wipe away any excess sealant with Absorbent paper (Pt.No. P02-031).
    5.3.6 Put the pre-shaped Styrofoam on top of the element Figure 4 [1] and tie it in position so that
    it supports the element until the sealant has cured.
    5.3.7 When the sealant has cured, remove the Styrofoam.
    5.3.8 Apply sufficient AC-1230 Sealant (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater element) under the base
    of the element lead (where the lead enters the element) to help reduce wire fatigue and
    ingress of moisture/fluids between the element and oil sump contact surface.
    5.3.9 Seal the perimeter of the element Figure 4 [1] with sufficient AC-1230
    Sealant (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater element) to create a smooth transition from the
    element to the oil sump and allow the sealant to cure.

    Effectivity: 230 VAC PREHEATER


    12-B-25-90-00-00A-920B-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-05-22 Page 10


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    5.3.10
    Note

    The sealant must not extend beyond 0.25 in (6,35 mm) from the edge of the element in
    either direction, onto the element or the oil sump.

    Check that the element Figure 4 [1] has bonded satisfactorily to the oil sump.
    5.3.11 Connect the element Figure 4 [1] electrical connector.
    5.4 Installation of the FCU Preheater Element (TAS324)
    5.4.1 Clean the contact surface of the element Figure 5 [1] with a CB 911 Solvent
    wipe (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater element).
    5.4.2
    Note

    Only one CB 911 Solvent wipe (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater element) is required to
    clean and prepare an element contact surface.

    Apply the AC-1230 Sealant (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater element) onto the element
    Figure 5 [1] as follows:
    5.4.2.1 Apply a zig-zag pattern of AC-1230 Sealant (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater
    element) onto the flat contact surface of the element Figure 5 [1].
    5.4.2.2 Spread the sealant evenly into a very fine layer (approximately 0.02 in (0,50
    mm)) across the whole flat contact surface of the element Figure 5 [1].
    5.4.3 Immediately press the element Figure 5 [1] into position on the bottom of the FCU, with the
    electrical lead Figure 5 [2] routed forward and to the left, as shown on Fig. 5.
    5.4.4 With a Roller (Pt.No. Local Supply), starting from the center of the element Figure 5 [1],
    gently draw it across the surface to the outer edges of the element to express any air and
    excess sealant.
    5.4.5 Immediately wipe away any excess sealant with Absorbent paper (Pt.No. P02-031).
    5.4.6 Put the pre-shaped Styrofoam on top of the element Figure 5 [1] and tie it in position so that
    it supports the element until the sealant has cured.
    5.4.7 When the sealant has cured, remove the Styrofoam.
    5.4.8 Apply sufficient AC-1230 Sealant (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater element) under the base
    of the element lead (where the lead enters the element) to help reduce wire fatigue and
    ingress of moisture/fluids between the element and FCU contact surface.
    5.4.9 Seal the perimeter of the element Figure 5 [1] with sufficient AC-1230
    Sealant (Pt.No. Supplied with Preheater element) to create a smooth transition from the
    element to the FCU and allow the sealant to cure.
    5.4.10
    Note

    The sealant must not extend beyond 0.25 in (6,35 mm) from the edge of the element in
    either direction, onto the element or the FCU.

    Check that the element Figure 5 [1] has bonded satisfactorily to the FCU.
    5.4.11 Connect the element Figure 5 [1] electrical connector.
    5.5 Close Up

    Effectivity: 230 VAC PREHEATER


    12-B-25-90-00-00A-920B-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-05-22 Page 11


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    5.5.1 Do a functional test of the engine cold weather preheater system, refer to AMM 12-
    B-25-90-00-00A-903B-A.
    5.5.2 Make sure the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items of equipment.
    5.5.3 Close or install the access panels 43 AR, 43 AL, 43 AB, 42 AT and 42AB as necessary.

    Effectivity: 230 VAC PREHEATER


    12-B-25-90-00-00A-920B-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-05-22 Page 12


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    1

    2
    B

    12-B-259000-A-S4080-20120-A-01-1

    Figure 3 LH and RH Nose Case Preheater Element – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: 230 VAC PREHEATER


    12-B-25-90-00-00A-920B-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-05-22 Page 13


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    2

    12-B-259000-A-S4080-20121-A-01-1

    Figure 4 Oil Sump Preheater Element – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: 230 VAC PREHEATER


    12-B-25-90-00-00A-920B-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-05-22 Page 14


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    1

    12-B-259000-A-S4080-20122-A-01-1

    Figure 5 FCU Preheater Element – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: 230 VAC PREHEATER


    12-B-25-90-00-00A-920B-A
    SYSTEM

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-05-22 Page 15


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: 230 VAC PREHEATER


    12-B-25-90-00-00A-920B-A
    SYSTEM
    End of data module
    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-05-22 Page 16
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FIRE PROTECTION

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    FIRE PROTECTION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION......................................................... 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1
    1.1 Fire/Overheat Detection System............................................................................ 1
    1.2 Extinguishing.......................................................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-26-10-00-00A-040A-A FIRE/OVERHEAT DETECTION - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-26-20-00-00A-040A-A EXTINGUISHING - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Description

    1 General
    The fire detection and extinguishing equipment installed in the aircraft is described in the following sub-systems:

    1.1 Fire/Overheat Detection System


    (Refer to DM 12-B-26-10-00-00A-040A-A)
    The fire/overheat detection system gives a warning signal when the engine exterior is too hot or on fire. The system
    has these components:
    − A fire/overheat detector
    − A fire wire
    − A FIRE WARN test switch

    1.2 Extinguishing
    (Refer to DM 12-B-26-20-00-00A-040A-A)
    A fire extinguisher is installed in the aircraft. It is used to extinguish a fire in the aircraft.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-26-00-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-26-00-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FIRE/OVERHEAT DETECTION

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    FIRE/OVERHEAT DETECTION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION....................................... 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1
    2 Component Description.......................................................................................... 2
    2.1 Fire/Overheat Detector........................................................................................... 2
    2.2 Fire Wire................................................................................................................. 2
    2.3 FIRE WARN Test Switch........................................................................................ 2
    3 Operation (Ref. )..................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Detection System – Schematic............................................................................... 3

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-31-50-00-00A-040A-A CENTRAL WARNING SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION

    Description

    1 General
    The fire/overheat detection system gives a warning signal when the engine exterior is too hot or on fire. The system
    has these components:
    − A fire/overheat detector
    − A fire wire
    − A FIRE WARN test switch

    The system gives an output to the Modular Avionics Unit (MAU) for the Crew Advisory System (CAS) (Refer to DM
    12-B-31-50-00-00A-040A-A).
    The power supply to the system is 28 VDC through the FIRE WARN (ESSENTIAL BUS) circuit breaker.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-26-10-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2 Component Description

    2.1 Fire/Overheat Detector


    The fire/overheat detector detects the increase in the pressure of the gas in the fire wire. It sends a warning signal
    to the MAU if the engine exterior is too hot or on fire. It also sends a warning signal to the MAU if an internal failure
    occurs. The fire/overheat detector is installed on the rear of the engine. It contains two switches which are
    hermetically sealed in the housing of the detector. An increase in fire wire gas-pressure operates one switch to give
    a fire warning. A decrease in fire wire gas-pressure operates the other switch to give a failure warning. At one end
    of the housing is a connector for the switch connections and the power supply. At the other end of the housing is an
    end cap which connects to the fire wire.

    2.2 Fire Wire


    The fire wire contains gas which increases its pressure as its temperature increases. It is installed around the
    engine. One end connects to the fire/overheat detector.

    2.3 FIRE WARN Test Switch


    The FIRE WARN test switch does a test of the detection system.
    The FIRE WARN switch is a push switch installed in the SYSTEM TEST part of the Overhead Control Panel
    (OCP).

    3 Operation (Ref. Fig. 1)


    The detection system monitors the temperature around the engine. If the engine exterior becomes too hot or on fire
    the pressure of the gas in the fire wire increases. The increase in pressure causes the switch in the fire/overheat
    detector to operate. The fire/overheat detector sends a signal to the MAU and the CAS ENGINE FIRE warning
    message comes on. A CAS voice call out FIRE FIRE FIRE will also be heard.
    If there is a decrease in the gas pressure of the fire wire the fire/overheat detector sends a signal to the MAU and
    the CAS FIRE DETECTOR caution message comes on.
    When the FIRE WARN test switch is pushed to on, the system circuit continuity is tested. The system is serviceable
    when the CAS ENGINE FIRE and FIRE DETECTOR messages come on.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-26-10-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    ESS BUS

    FIRE
    WARN

    FIRE WIRE

    MFD

    CAS WINDOW

    ENGINE FIRE
    TEST

    FIRE/OVERHEAT
    DETECTOR

    FIRE WARN
    TEST SWITCH FIRE DETECTOR

    12-B-261000-A-S4080-01016-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Detection System – Schematic

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-26-10-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 3
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-26-10-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FIRE/OVERHEAT DETECTION

    ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Table of Contents Page

    FIRE/OVERHEAT DETECTION - ADJUSTMENT/TEST............................................................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-26-10-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Operation Test
    1.1 Open this circuit breaker:
    − FIRE WARN (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    1.2 Energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    1.3 Make sure that the CAS FIRE DETECTOR caution message is ON.
    1.4 Close this circuit breaker:
    − FIRE WARN (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    1.5 Make sure that the CAS FIRE DETECTOR caution message is OFF.
    1.6 On the Overhead Control Panel (OCP), press and hold the SYSTEM TEST - FIRE WARN button.
    1.7 On the CAS window, make sure that:
    − the ENGINE FIRE warning message is ON
    − the FIRE DETECTOR caution message is ON
    1.8 Release the OCP SYSTEM TEST - FIRE WARN button.
    1.9 On the CAS window, make sure that:
    − the ENGINE FIRE warning message is OFF
    − the FIRE DETECTOR caution message is OFF
    1.10 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-26-10-00-00A-903A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    EXTINGUISHING

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    EXTINGUISHING - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION............................................................. 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1
    2 Component Description.......................................................................................... 1
    3 Operation................................................................................................................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description

    1 General
    A fire extinguisher is installed in a mounting bracket on the forward side of the co-pilot bulkhead. It is used to
    extinguish a fire in the aircraft.

    2 Component Description
    The cylinder is red and contains 3.3 lbs (1,5 Kg) of extinguishing agent. The operating mechanism is installed on
    top of the cylinder. It has a safety catch, an operating lever and a discharge nozzle. A transit pin installed through
    the lever must be removed when the fire extinguisher is installed in the aircraft. A placard on the side of the cylinder
    gives the operating instructions. When the fire extinguisher is weighed for a contents check, the weight must be
    within 0.35 oz. (10 g) of that stated on the placard around the top of the extinguisher.

    3 Operation
    When the safety catch is released the lever is operated, the pressure in the cylinder will push the extinguishing
    agent out of the cylinder through the discharge nozzle. The agent continues to come out of the cylinder until the
    lever is released or the cylinder is empty.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-26-20-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-26-20-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FLIGHT CONTROLS

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    FLIGHT CONTROLS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION........................................................ 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1
    1.1 The Aileron System................................................................................................ 1
    1.2 The Aileron Trim System........................................................................................ 2
    1.3 The Rudder System................................................................................................ 2
    1.4 The Rudder Trim System....................................................................................... 2
    1.5 The Elevator System.............................................................................................. 2
    1.6 The Horizontal Stabilizer System........................................................................... 2
    1.7 The Flaps System................................................................................................... 2
    1.8 The Gust Lock........................................................................................................ 2

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-27-10-00-00A-040A-A AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-27-15-00-00A-040A-A AILERON TRIM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-27-20-00-00A-040A-A RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-27-25-00-00A-040A-A RUDDER TRIM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-27-30-00-00A-040A-A ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION
    AND OPERATION
    12-B-27-40-00-00A-040A-A HORIZONTAL STABILIZER TRIM - DESCRIPTION
    AND OPERATION
    12-B-27-50-00-00A-040A-A FLAPS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-27-70-00-00A-040A-A GUST LOCK - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Description

    1 General
    The flight control systems are described in these sub-systems:

    1.1 The Aileron System


    (Refer to DM 12-B-27-10-00-00A-040A-A)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-00-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    The aileron system controls the roll attitude of the aircraft. The system has an aileron/rudder interconnection
    system which connects the aileron system to the rudder system. It helps control yaw of the aircraft with less input
    through the rudder pedals when the aircraft takes-off and lands.

    1.2 The Aileron Trim System


    (Refer to DM 12-B-27-15-00-00A-040A-A)
    The aileron trim system is used to make small changes to the aircraft attitude (roll). This lets the aircraft fly level
    with no input from the control wheels.

    1.3 The Rudder System


    (Refer to DM 12-B-27-20-00-00A-040A-A)
    The rudder system controls the yaw attitude of the aircraft.

    1.4 The Rudder Trim System


    (Refer to DM 12-B-27-25-00-00A-040A-A)
    The rudder trim system is used to make small changes to the aircraft direction (yaw) in flight. This lets the aircraft
    fly straight with no input from the rudder pedals.

    1.5 The Elevator System


    (Refer to DM 12-B-27-30-00-00A-040A-A)
    The elevator system controls the pitch attitude of the aircraft.

    1.6 The Horizontal Stabilizer System


    (Refer to DM 12-B-27-40-00-00A-040A-A)
    The horizontal stabilizer trim system makes small changes to the aircraft attitude (pitch). This lets the aircraft fly
    level with no input from the control wheel.

    1.7 The Flaps System


    (Refer to DM 12-B-27-50-00-00A-040A-A)
    The flaps are used to increase the lift of the wings during take-off, landing and low airspeed. The flaps extend from
    the trailing edge of the left and right wings.

    1.8 The Gust Lock


    (Refer to DM 12-B-27-70-00-00A-040A-A)
    The gust lock makes sure strong winds do not move the ailerons and elevators when the aircraft is parked. The
    gust lock does not lock the rudder, but the rudder is dampened through the nose-landing-gear steering actuator
    when the nose wheel is on the ground.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-00-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FLIGHT CONTROLS

    INSPECTION/CHECK

    Table of Contents Page

    FLIGHT CONTROLS - INSPECTION/CHECK........................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 2
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Flight Control Cables – Inspection/Check.............................................................. 6


    2 Flight Control Pulleys – Inspection/Check.............................................................. 7
    3 Aileron Control Rod – Support Assembly Roller Adjustment.................................. 9

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-27-10-01-00A-920A-A AILERON CABLES - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-27-10-02-00A-920A-A AILERON AUTOPILOT CABLE - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    12-B-27-20-01-00A-920A-A RUDDER CABLES - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-27-20-02-00A-920A-A RUDDER AUTOPILOT CABLES - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    12-B-27-30-01-00A-920A-A ELEVATOR CABLES - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-27-30-02-00A-920A-A ELEVATOR AUTOPILOT CABLES - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-00-00-00A-313A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-10-23 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) Required
    Warning sign (DO NOT Part Local supply As
    OPERATE THE FLIGHT Required
    CONTROLS)
    Fiber brush Part Local supply As
    Required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Cleaning cloth Part P02-003 As
    Required
    Corrosion preventive Part P10-005 As
    Required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedures to examine the flight control cables and pulleys, the autopilot and
    stick pusher cables and capstans for damage and wear. It is applicable to:
    − The aileron control cables and rods
    − The elevator control cables
    − The rudder control cables
    − The autopilot cables
    − The stick pusher cables

    It is necessary to inspect the entire length of the control cables. The cable must be bent to properly inspect
    for broken wires and internal corrosion, refer to Fig. 1. Pilatus recommends to completely remove the control
    cables from the aircraft. Refer to AMM:
    − 12-B-27-10-01-00A-920A-A Aileron control cable removal/installation
    − 12-B-27-10-02-00A-920A-A Aileron autopilot cable removal/installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-00-00-00A-313A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-10-23 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − 12-B-27-20-01-00A-920A-A Rudder cables removal/installation


    − 12-B-27-20-02-00A-920A-A Rudder autopilot cables removal/installation
    − 12-B-27-30-01-00A-920A-A Elevator cables removal/installation
    − 12-B-27-30-02-00A-920A-A Elevator autopilot cables removal/installation
    2 Examination of the Control Cables and Pulleys
    2.1
    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Preparation
    2.1.1 Open and install a safety clip (Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065))
    on these circuit breakers:
    − PUSHER SYS (ESS BUS)
    − A/P SERVO (EPS BUS)
    − A/P SERVO ENABLE (EPS BUS)
    2.1.2 Put up a sign (Warning sign (DO NOT OPERATE THE FLIGHT CONTROLS) (Pt.No. Local
    supply)) in the flight compartment.
    2.1.3 Clean the cables with a cloth (Cleaning cloth (Pt.No. P02-003)). If necessary, make the cloth
    moist with corrosion preventative (Corrosion preventive (Pt.No. P10-005)).
    2.2 Flight Control Cables
    2.2.1 Broken Wires
    2.2.1.1 Carefully move a new cloth (Cleaning cloth (Pt.No. P02-003)) along the cables
    to find broken wires.

    Note

    Broken wires will catch in the cleaning cloth.

    2.2.1.2 Replace the cable if broken wires are found at the ends of a cable or in areas
    where the cable goes around pulleys or through cable guides.
    2.2.1.3 If broken wires are found in other areas of the cables the cable must be
    replaced if the distance between two or more broken wires is less than 12 in
    (300 mm).
    2.2.2 Wear
    2.2.2.1 Examine the cables for wear.

    Note

    A polished surface on the cable is the usual indication of wear.

    2.2.2.2 Replace the cable if more than six wires are worn in the same area.
    2.2.2.3 Replace the cable if two or more adjacent wires are worn sufficiently to make
    them appear as one wire.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-00-00-00A-313A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-10-23 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Note

    When two or more adjacent wires appear as one wire, they are worn to
    between 40% and 50% of their diameter.

    2.2.3 Corrosion
    2.2.3.1 Replace the cable if corrosion is found on the inside of the cable.
    2.2.3.2 If surface corrosion is found on the cable, use a Fiber brush (Pt.No. Local
    supply) to remove the corrosion. Make sure the cable is not worn or damaged
    below the corrosion.
    2.2.4 End Fittings
    2.2.4.1 Examine the end fittings of the cables for signs of cracks, damage and
    movement between the wires and the end fittings.
    2.2.4.2 Replace the cables if there are signs of cracks, damage and movement of the
    end fittings.
    2.3 Flight Control Pulleys
    2.3.1 Examine the pulleys for contamination, damage and wear.
    2.3.2 Make sure the pulleys turn smoothly.
    2.3.3 Make sure the pulley attachment brackets are satisfactory.
    2.4 Autopilot and Stickpusher Cables
    2.4.1 Carefully pull one end of the cables to turn the capstan until the center fitting is free.
    2.4.2 Broken Wires
    2.4.2.1 Carefully move a new cloth (Cleaning cloth (Pt.No. P02-003)) along the cables
    to find broken wires.

    Note

    Broken wires will catch in the cleaning cloth.

    2.4.2.2 Replace the cable if broken wires are found at the ends of a cable or in areas
    where the cable goes around pulleys or through cable guides.
    2.4.2.3 If broken wires are found in other areas of the cables the cable must be
    replaced if the distance between two or more broken wires is less than 12 in
    (300 mm).
    2.4.3 Wear
    2.4.3.1 Examine the cables for wear.

    Note

    A polished surface on the cable is the usual indication of wear.

    2.4.3.2 Replace the cable if more than six wires are worn in the same area.
    2.4.3.3 Replace the cable if two or more adjacent wires are worn sufficiently to make
    them appear as one wire.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-00-00-00A-313A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-10-23 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Note

    When two or more adjacent wires appear as one wire, they are worn to
    between 40% and 50% of their diameter.

    2.4.4 Corrosion
    2.4.4.1 Replace the cable if corrosion is found on the inside of the cable.
    2.4.4.2 If surface corrosion is found on the cable, use a Fiber brush (Pt.No. Local
    supply) to remove the corrosion. Make sure the cable is not worn or damaged
    below the corrosion.
    2.4.5 Center Fittings
    2.4.5.1 Examine the center fittings of the cables for indications of movement between
    the wires and the center fittings.
    2.4.5.2 Replace the cables if there are indications of movement of the center fittings.
    2.4.6 Engage the center fitting and carefully pull the other end of the cables to turn the capstan in
    the other direction until the capstan stops.
    2.4.7 Do Step 2.4.2 thru Step 2.4.5 for the other end of the cables.
    2.5 Autopilot and Stickpusher Capstans
    2.5.1 Examine the capstans for contamination, damage and wear.
    2.5.2 Make sure the capstans turn smoothly.
    2.6 Close Up
    2.6.1 Apply a layer of corrosion preventative (Corrosion preventive (Pt.No. P10-005)) to all of the
    flight control cables.
    2.6.2 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.6.3 Remove the warning sign DO NOT OPERATE THE FLIGHT CONTROLS from the flight
    compartment.
    2.6.4 Remove these safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − PUSHER SYS (ESS BUS)
    − A/P SERVO (EPS BUS)
    − A/P SERVO ENABLE (EPS BUS)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-00-00-00A-313A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-10-23 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    STRAND

    WORN WIRES BLEND TOGETHER


    WIRES ARE BETWEEN 40% AND 50% WORN

    A
    B

    BROKEN WIRES

    B
    27128

    Figure 1 Flight Control Cables – Inspection/Check

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-00-00-00A-313A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-10-23 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    NORMAL CONDITION PULLEY NOT ALIGNED

    PULLEY TOO LARGE FOR CABLE CABLE NOT ALIGNED

    SEIZED BEARING CABLE TENSION TOO HIGH


    27129

    Figure 2 Flight Control Pulleys – Inspection/Check

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-00-00-00A-313A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-10-23 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3 Examination For Wear On The Left And Right Aileron Center Control Rods
    3.1 Remove the access panels 51 KB, 52 PB and 61 KB, 62 PB.
    3.2 Examine the rollers (Figure 3 [2]) in the three support assemblies along the left and right aileron center
    control rods (Figure 3 [1]). Replace if wear is more than 0.039 in. (1 mm).
    3.3 On the left and right aileron center control rods (Figure 3 [1]), examine the control rod protection
    sleeves for wear at the contact points of the rollers in the three support assemblies. Wear is permitted
    up to a radial limit of 0.039 in. (1 mm).
    3.4 If wear is found that is at the limit, it is permitted to rotate the center control rod once to give new
    contact points for the rollers. If the center control rod has been rotated before it must be replaced.
    3.5 If the center control rod has not been rotated before:
    3.5.1 Remove the nut, washer and bolt at each end of the center control rod.
    3.5.2 Disconnect the center control rod from the inner and outer control rods. Move the aileron if
    necessary.
    3.5.3 Rotate the center control rod 180°.
    3.5.4 Align the center control rod ends with the inner and outer control rod ends and install the
    bolt, washer and nut at each end.
    3.5.5 Adjust the support assembly rollers (refer to Fig. 3):
    3.5.5.1 Loosen the roller nuts (Figure 3 [3]).
    3.5.5.2 Adjust the roller eccentric bolts (Figure 3 [4]) to give a maximum gap of 0,2 mm
    (0.008 in) between the roller (Figure 3 [2]) and the control rod (Figure 3 [1]).
    3.5.5.3 Tighten the roller nuts (Figure 3 [3]).
    3.5.5.4 Make sure that the gap between the roller and the control rod has not changed.
    3.5.6 Move the aileron control system through its full range and make sure the aileron controls
    move freely.
    3.6 Install the access panels 51 KB, 52 PB and 61 KB, 62 PB.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-00-00-00A-313A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-10-23 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    A
    A

    A
    A
    A

    A
    2

    B
    1

    0,2 mm
    (0.0078 in.)

    B
    TYPICAL
    SECTION

    12-A-270000-A-S4080-30031-A-01-1

    Figure 3 Aileron Control Rod – Support Assembly Roller Adjustment

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-00-00-00A-313A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-10-23 Page 9


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-00-00-00A-313A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-10-23 Page 10
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FLIGHT CONTROLS – CONTROL RODS

    MAGNETIC PARTICLE INSPECTION

    Table of Contents Page

    FLIGHT CONTROLS – CONTROL RODS - MAGNETIC PARTICLE INSPECTION................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Control Rod – Magnetic Particle Inspection........................................................... 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A CORROSION CONTROL - MAINTENANCE
    PRACTICES
    12-B-51-00-00-00A-352A-A STRUCTURES - STANDARD PRACTICES -
    MAGNETIC PARTICLE INSPECTION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-00-01-00A-352A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-09-01 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Solvent Part P01-010 As
    required
    Cloth Part P02-003 As
    required
    Lockwire Part P02-007 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Remove the control rod(s) to be inspected.
    2 Measure and note the length of the control rod between the hole centers in the eye end and the fork end.
    3 Cut and remove the lockwire from the fork end locknut Figure 1 [3].
    4 Loosen the fork end locknut Figure 1 [3].
    5 Remove the fork end Figure 1 [4] and the lockwasher Figure 1 [2] from the control rod Figure 1 [1].
    6
    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MANUFACTURERS'
    HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items AMM 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Use a Cloth (Pt.No. P02-003) made moist with Solvent (Pt.No. P01-010) to clean the rod fork end
    Figure 1 [4] as needed.
    7 Examine the rod fork end Figure 1 [4].
    8 Cracks or corrosion Level 2 or 3 are not permitted. Refer to AMM 12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A for the
    definition of corrosion levels. If you find cracks or corrosion Level 2 or 3, contact Pilatus Aircraft.
    9 Do a magnetic particle NDT inspection of the control rod fork end Figure 1 [4], SRM
    12-B-51-00-00-00A-352A-A.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-00-01-00A-352A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-09-01 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    10 Cracks are not permitted. If you find cracks, contact Pilatus Aircraft.
    11 If the control rod fork end is serviceable, install the fork end Figure 1 [4], the locknut Figure 1 [3] and the
    lockwasher Figure 1 [2] in the control rod Figure 1 [1]. Do not tighten the fork end locknut.
    12 Measure the length of the control rod between the hole centers in the eye end and the fork end. Make sure
    that the measurement is the same as noted in Step 2.
    13 Tighten the fork end locknut Figure 1 [3]. Make sure that the control rod length is the same as noted in
    Step 2.
    14 Safety the locknut Figure 1 [3]with Lockwire (Pt.No. P02-007).
    15 Send a copy of the inspection report and all findings to Pilatus Aircraft Ltd.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-00-01-00A-352A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-09-01 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3
    2

    5
    5

    12-A-270001-A-S4080-30032-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Control Rod – Magnetic Particle Inspection

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-00-01-00A-352A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-09-01 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-00-01-00A-352A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-09-01 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-00-01-00A-352A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-09-01 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    FLIGHT CONTROLS – CONTROL RODS

    EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION

    Table of Contents Page

    FLIGHT CONTROLS – CONTROL RODS - EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION.......................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Control Rod – Eddy Current Inspection.................................................................. 3

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A CORROSION CONTROL - MAINTENANCE
    PRACTICES
    12-B-51-00-00-00A-353A-A STRUCTURES - STANDARD PRACTICES - EDDY
    CURRENT INSPECTION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Shielded surface probe Part Nortec 9222202 or As
    equivalent required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-00-01-00A-353A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-09-01 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Solvent Part P01-010 As
    required
    Cloth Part P02-003 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1
    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MANUFACTURERS'
    HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items AMM 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.
    Use a Cloth (Pt.No. P02-003) made moist with Solvent (Pt.No. P01-010) to clean the ends of the control rod
    (where the rod ends screw into Figure 1 [5]) as needed.
    2 Examine the control rod Figure 1 [1].
    3 Cracks or corrosion Level 2 or 3 are not permitted. Refer to AMM 12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A for the
    definition of corrosion levels. If you find cracks or corrosion Level 2 or 3, contact Pilatus Aircraft.
    4 Do an eddy current NDT inspection of the control rod ends Figure 1 [5], SRM 12-B-51-00-00-00A-353A-A,
    Procedure 3. Use a frequency of 100 to 500 kHz for the inspection.
    5 Cracks are not permitted. If you find cracks, contact Pilatus Aircraft.
    6 If the control rod is serviceable, install the control rod Figure 1 [1].
    7 Send a copy of the inspection report and all findings to Pilatus Aircraft Ltd.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-00-01-00A-353A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-09-01 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3
    2

    5
    5

    12-A-270001-A-S4080-30032-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Control Rod – Eddy Current Inspection

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-00-01-00A-353A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-09-01 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-00-01-00A-353A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-09-01 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION....................................... 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1
    2 Component Description (Ref. )............................................................................... 2
    2.1 Pilot and Co-Pilot Control Wheels.......................................................................... 2
    2.2 Control Column....................................................................................................... 2
    2.3 Cable System......................................................................................................... 2
    2.4 Cable Segment....................................................................................................... 2
    2.5 Aileron/Rudder Connection System....................................................................... 2
    2.5.1 Connection Assembly............................................................................................. 3
    2.5.2 Spring Housing Assembly...................................................................................... 3
    2.6 Rods And Bellcranks System................................................................................. 3
    2.7 Ailerons................................................................................................................... 3
    3 Operation................................................................................................................ 3
    3.1 Aileron System....................................................................................................... 3
    3.2 Aileron/Rudder Connection System....................................................................... 3

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Aileron System – Layout......................................................................................... 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-22-10-00-00A-040A-A AUTOPILOT - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-27-15-00-00A-040A-A AILERON TRIM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-57-00-00-00A-041A-A WINGS - DESCRIPTION

    Description

    1 General
    The aileron system controls the roll attitude of the aircraft.
    The aileron system is connected to the rudder system by an aileron/rudder connection system.
    The aileron system has:
    − Pilot and co-pilot control wheels
    − A control column

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − A cable system
    − A cable segment
    − An aileron/rudder connection system
    − A rods and bellcranks system
    − Two ailerons (Refer to DM 12-B-57-00-00-00A-041A-A)

    The aileron system gets an input from the autopilot system (Refer to DM 12-B-22-10-00-00A-040A-A).

    2 Component Description (Ref. Fig. 1)

    2.1 Pilot and Co-Pilot Control Wheels


    The pilot and co-pilot control wheels are left and right handed and contain control switches of other systems. Each
    control wheel is installed on a shaft that goes through the instrument panel and connects to the control column.
    There is a chain wheel on the end of each shaft. A map holder is installed at the center of each control wheel.

    2.2 Control Column


    The control column is installed behind the instrument panel. The control wheels are attached to the left and right
    arms of the control column arm. A chain wheel is attached to the center of the control column arm. A chain
    connects the chain wheels of the control column together. A chain connection connects the chain to the cable
    system.
    Two non-adjustable stops are installed on the left arm of the control column. A stop arm on the pilot control wheel
    shaft moves between the stops when the control wheels are turned.

    2.3 Cable System


    The cable system transmits the movement of the control wheels through the chain to the cable segment. It has two
    cables that connect the chain mechanism to the cable segment. The cables go from the control column along the
    left side of the center console to the cable segment below the center of the passenger compartment floor. Pulleys
    and cable guides keep the cables in the correct routing. The cable system has two turnbuckles between frames 19
    and 21.

    2.4 Cable Segment


    The cable segment connects the cable system to the rods and bellcranks system. It is installed below the center of
    the passenger compartment floor between frames 22 and 23. The cable segment gives an output to the aileron/
    rudder interconnection system through a spring cylinder. A cable connects the roll servo actuator of the autopilot
    system to the cable segment.

    2.5 Aileron/Rudder Connection System


    The aileron/rudder connection system connects the aileron system to the rudder system. The connection system is
    installed below the passenger compartment floor between the cable segment and the rudder cable system. The
    system has:
    − A connection assembly
    − A spring housing assembly

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.5.1 Connection Assembly


    The connection assembly has a circular body with a connection for the spring housing assembly. It is attached at
    the bottom to the fuselage structure with a bushing collar. The cable bracket which is attached at the top is
    connected to the left rudder cable with a cable clamp.

    2.5.2 Spring Housing Assembly


    The spring housing is attached to the aileron cable segment and the connection assembly. It compresses and
    extends to transmit a smooth movement from the aileron to the rudder or from the rudder to the aileron control
    systems when they are operated.

    2.6 Rods And Bellcranks System


    The rods and bellcranks system transmits movement of the cable system to the ailerons. The rods and bellcranks
    are installed in the fuselage from the cable segment to the rear of the wing roots and along the trailing edges of the
    wings, aft of the rear spar, to the two ailerons. The rods aft of the rear spar move in roller guides and guide plates.
    The rods connect to the ailerons through a bellcrank at the inboard end of each aileron. An stop on each bellcrank
    controls the range of movement of the ailerons.

    2.7 Ailerons
    The ailerons change the roll attitude of the aircraft. Two hinges connect each aileron to the outer trailing edge of
    each wing. An arm connects each aileron to the bellcranks at the outboard end of the rods and bellcranks system.
    A tab is installed on the outboard end of each aileron.
    A geared lever (flettner) mechanism is installed in each aileron. The mechanism has a push rod, lever and
    supports. The push rod is connected to the aileron tab and the lever is connected to the trim actuator on the left
    aileron and to a short push rod on the right aileron. The other end of the trim actuator and the short push rod are
    connected to the wing structure. The left aileron tab is also moved by the aileron trim system (Refer to DM 12-
    B-27-15-00-00A-040A-A).

    3 Operation

    3.1 Aileron System


    When a control wheel turns to the left or the right the chain wheel on the end of the control wheel shaft turns. This
    makes the chains move the chain connection. The chain connection operates the cable system to turn the cable
    segment. The cable segment operates the rods and bellcranks system and the ailerons move. Because the
    ailerons are connected, when one aileron moves up the other aileron moves down. When an aileron moves the
    geared lever (flettner) mechanism inside the aileron also operates and moves the tab in the opposite direction.
    The input from the autopilot system to the aileron controls turns the cable segment with no input from the control
    wheels. This moves the ailerons and turns the control wheels.

    3.2 Aileron/Rudder Connection System


    When the aileron system is operated the connection system, through the spring housing and connection
    assemblies, moves the rudder cables and the rudder. This makes the aircraft more stable in a turn.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    CO-PILOT
    A
    CONTROL WHEEL
    RODS
    CABLE
    PULLEYS

    AILERON
    CABLE
    SYSTEM FLETTNER/
    TRIM TAB
    PILOT TURNBUCKLES
    CONTROL WHEEL

    CHAIN
    WHEEL BELLCRANK
    STOP

    CHAIN
    WHEEL

    SHAFT

    CHAIN
    CONNECTION
    LEFT ARM

    CHAIN
    WHEEL
    CHAIN

    CHAIN CONNECTION

    RIGHT ARM

    CONTROL COLUMN

    SHAFT

    A
    12-A-271000-A-S4080-00001-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Aileron System – Layout (Sheet 1 of 2)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    BELLCRANK

    ROD
    AUTOPILOT
    ROLL SERVO
    CABLE

    ROLL SERVO
    ACTUATOR
    ROD

    C
    CABLE
    SEGMENT

    BELLCRANK
    PULLEYS

    ROD
    ROD

    AILERON/RUDDER
    INTERCONNECTION
    SYSTEM

    CABLE SEGMENT

    SPRING HOUSING
    ASSEMBLY

    LEFT RUDDER
    CABLE
    LEVER

    AILERON/RUDDER
    CONNECTION ASSEMBLY

    CABLE CLAMP

    C
    27200

    Figure 1 Aileron System – Layout (Sheet 2 of 2)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM

    PARTS LIST– COCKPIT – KIT P/N 500.50.12.314

    Table of Contents Page

    AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM - PARTS LIST– COCKPIT – KIT P/N 500.50.12.314.............. 1


    1 Inspection Kit P/N 500.50.12.314........................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Inspection Kit P/N 500.50.12.314........................................................................... 1

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Inspection Kit – Aileron Control, Cockpit................................................................ 4


    2 Inspection Kit – Aileron Control, Cockpit................................................................ 5
    3 Inspection Kit – Aileron Control, Fuselage............................................................. 6

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description

    1 Inspection Kit P/N 500.50.12.314


    Replace the parts in Table 2 when you examine the aileron control system.

    Table 2 Inspection Kit P/N 500.50.12.314


    Part No. Description Qty Reference
    527.10.12.124 Washer, Distance 2 Figure 2 [39]
    527.10.12.146 Spacer 1 Figure 1 [33]
    527.10.12.113 Aileron Control Cable 1 Figure 3 [1]
    527.10.12.114 Aileron Control Cable 1 Figure 3 [2]
    527.10.12.115 Aileron Control Cable 1 Figure 3 [3]
    527.10.12.116 Aileron Control Cable 1 Figure 3 [4]
    941.93.41.616 Turnb. Body, Clip, Lock, MS21251-5L 2 Figure 3 [6]
    940.17.29.402 Clip, Locking, Turnb. MS21256-2, CR 4 Figure 3 [5] and
    Figure 3 [7]
    935.23.11.412 Bolt, Clevis, AN23-12, CADM 1 Figure 2 [13]
    935.23.11.453 Bolt Clevis, AN24-12, CADM 1 Figure 2 [31]
    932.35.14.224 Bolt, Hex HD, CL TOL, NAS6605-24 1 Figure 1 [32]
    932.19.21.025 Bolt, Hex HD, AN3-3A 4 Figure 1 [19] and
    Figure 1 [34]

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-307A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-10-27 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Part No. Description Qty Reference


    932.35.14.222 Bolt, Hex HD, CL TOL, NAS6605-22 2 Figure 1 [1] and
    Figure 1 [23]
    932.35.14.375 Bolt, Hex HD, CL TOL, NAS6606D25 2 Figure 1 [15]
    932.19.21.251 Bolt, Hex HD, AN5-36A 1 Figure 1 [20]
    932.19.21.245 Bolt, Hex HD, AN5-30A 2 Figure 2 [35] and
    Figure 2 [36]
    932.19.60.814 Bolt, Hex, CL TOL, Cres, AN174C15A 2 Figure 2 [7] and
    Figure 2 [22]
    932.35.71.107 Bolt, Shoulder, Hex HD, NAS1160-3-7 2 Figure 2 [9] and
    Figure 2 [20]
    935.63.11.068 Screw, Pan HD, MS35206-249 2 Figure 2 [37]
    935.63.31.026 Screw, Pan HD, MS27039-0826 5 Figure 1 [2],
    Figure 1 [21] and
    Figure 1 [29]
    938.08.71.403 Nut, Hex, SLFLKG, Thin, MS17826-3 1 Figure 2 [16]
    938.08.71.404 Nut, Hex, SLFLKG, Thin, MS17826-4 1 Figure 2 [34]
    938.08.71.206 Nut, Hex, SLFLKG, MS17825-6 2 Figure 1 [13]
    938.07.68.506 Nut, Hex, SLFLKG, CADM, MS21042-5 6 Figure 1 [7],
    Figure 1 [10],
    Figure 1 [26],
    Figure 1 [30] and
    Figure 2 [18]
    938.07.68.504 Nut, Hex, SLFLKG, CADM, MS21042-3 4 Figure 1 [9],
    Figure 2 [8] and
    Figure 2 [21]
    938.07.68.505 Nut, Hex, SLFLKG, CADM, MS21042-4 2 Figure 2 [11] and
    Figure 2 [24]
    938.07.68.503 Nut, Hex, SLFLKG, CADM, MS21042-08 7 Figure 1 [5],
    Figure 1 [16],
    Figure 1 [27] and
    Figure 2 [43]
    938.77.11.119 Washer, Flat, NAS1149F0663P, CA 2 Figure 1 [14]
    938.77.11.117 Washer, Flat, NAS1149F0563P, CA 8 Figure 1 [6],
    Figure 1 [11],
    Figure 1 [25],
    Figure 1 [31] and
    Figure 2 [19]
    938.77.11.112 Washer, Flat, NAS1149F0332P, CA 12 Figure 1 [8],
    Figure 2 [2],
    Figure 2 [14] and
    Figure 2 [26]
    938.77.11.110 Washer, Flat, NAS1149FN816P, CA 17 Figure 1 [4],
    Figure 1 [17],
    Figure 1 [28] and
    Figure 2 [42]
    938.77.11.115 Washer, Flat, NAS1149F0463P, CA 3 Figure 2 [10],
    Figure 2 [23] and
    Figure 2 [32]
    940.17.02.248 Pin, Cotter, Steel, MS24665-285 2 Figure 1 [12]

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-307A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-10-27 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Part No. Description Qty Reference


    940.17.02.225 Pin, Cotter, Steel, MS24665-132 4 Figure 2 [12],
    Figure 2 [15],
    Figure 2 [33] and
    Figure 2 [38]
    940.83.08.603 Bearing, Ball, MS27641-5 1 Figure 2 [40]
    527.10.12.195 Universal Joint 2 Figure 2 [4] and
    Figure 2 [25]
    932.35.14.016 Bolt, Hex HD, CL TOL, NAS6603-16 1 Figure 2 [28]
    932.35.14.012 Bolt, Hex HD, CL TOL, NAS6603-12 1 Figure 2 [1]
    938.07.68.304 Nut, Hex, SLFLKG, CADM, MS21045-3E 2 Figure 2 [3] and
    Figure 2 [27]

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-307A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-10-27 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2
    1
    FRAME 12

    D C A A
    B 9 8 4
    3

    5
    6
    7

    10

    11
    12

    13
    14

    17

    18

    16
    33
    19
    18
    15
    34

    B 20

    22
    17
    21
    32

    23

    31 29
    30 24

    D C

    28 25
    27
    26

    12-A-271000-A-S4080-30049-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Inspection Kit – Aileron Control, Cockpit

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-307A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-10-27 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1
    6
    5
    2 4
    3
    8

    A 10
    11
    9

    FRAME 12

    A
    12

    13

    18
    17
    19 14
    16
    18
    15 22
    19

    42 20 21
    43
    23

    41 24

    25
    29
    41

    39

    30
    40
    38
    28 26
    27
    39

    37

    34 31

    36 33
    35 32 12-A-271000-A-S4080-30050-A-01-1

    Figure 2 Inspection Kit – Aileron Control, Cockpit

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-307A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-10-27 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    1

    3 B

    4 5
    6

    7
    12-A-271000-A-S4080-30051-A-01-1

    Figure 3 Inspection Kit – Aileron Control, Fuselage

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-307A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-10-27 Page 6
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM

    PARTS LIST – FLOOR – KIT P/N 500.60.12.035

    Table of Contents Page

    AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM - PARTS LIST – FLOOR – KIT P/N 500.60.12.035................. 1


    1 Inspection Kit P/N 500.60.12.035........................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Inspection Kit P/N 500.60.12.035........................................................................... 1

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Inspection Kit – Aileron Ctrl. Floor.......................................................................... 4


    2 Inspection Kit – Aileron Ctrl. Floor.......................................................................... 5
    3 Inspection Kit – Aileron Ctrl. Floor.......................................................................... 6
    4 Inspection Kit – Aileron Ctrl. Floor.......................................................................... 7

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description

    1 Inspection Kit P/N 500.60.12.035


    Replace the parts in Table 2 when you inspect the aileron control system.

    Table 2 Inspection Kit P/N 500.60.12.035


    Part No. Description Qty Reference
    941.22.56.053 Bearing, M81934/1-05A008, AL 1 Figure 3 [2]
    527.10.12.165 Clamp Top 1 Figure 3 [7]
    527.10.12.166 Clamp Bottom 1 Figure 3 [8]
    527.10.12.103 Ring, Distance 2 Figure 2 [5]
    527.10.12.112 Washer 4 Figure 2 [16], Figure 4 [2] &
    Figure 4 [4]
    527.10.12.177 Bushing Collar 2 Figure 3 [15]
    527.10.12.144 Aileron Autopilot Contr. Cable 1 Figure 1 [11]
    527.10.12.183 Washer 1 Figure 4 [13]
    932.35.14.290 Bolt, Hex HD, CL TOL, NAS6605D48 1 Figure 4 [1]
    932.35.14.222 Bolt, Hex HD, CL TOL, NAS6605-22 1 Figure 3 [1]
    938.08.21.103 Nut, Hex, CSTL TD, AN310-5 3 Figure 2 [14] & Figure 4 [8]

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-307B-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-05-12 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Part No. Description Qty Reference


    940.17.02.226 Pin, Cotter, Steel, MS24665-134 7 Figure 1 [17], Figure 1 [22],
    Figure 2 [13], Figure 3 [13],
    Figure 4 [9] & Figure 4 [10]
    938.77.11.116 Washer, Flat, NAS1149F0532P, CA 4 Figure 2 [9], Figure 2 [15],
    Figure 4 [7] & Figure 4 [12]
    938.07.68.506 Nut, Hex, SLFLKG, CADM, MS21042-5 1 Figure 3 [4]
    932.35.14.114 Bolt, Hex HD, CL TOL, NAS6604-14 2 Figure 1 [10]
    938.07.68.505 Nut, Hex, SLFLKG, CADM, MS21042-4 6 Figure 1 [1], Figure 1 [9] &
    Figure 2 [11]
    938.77.11.114 Washer, Flat, NAS1149F0432P, CA 3 Figure 3 [20] & Figure 4 [17]
    932.35.14.273 Bolt, Hex HD, CL TOL, NAS6605DH23 1 Figure 4 [14]
    935.23.11.457 Bolt, Clevis, AN24-16, CADM 1 Figure 1 [20]
    938.77.11.115 Washer, Flat, NAS1149F0463P, CA 6 Figure 1 [8], Figure 1 [19],
    Figure 1 [21] & Figure 2 [12]
    935.23.11.509 Bolt, Clevis, AN25-17, CADM 1 Figure 1 [12]
    938.08.71.405 Nut, Hex, SLFLKG, Thin, MS17826-5 2 Figure 1 [18]
    938.77.11.117 Washer, Flat, NAS1149F0563P, CA 4 Figure 1 [13], Figure 1 [15],
    Figure 1 [16] & Figure 3 [3]
    935.23.11.412 Bolt, Clevis, AN23-12, CADM 1 Figure 3 [6]
    938.08.71.403 Nut, Hex, SLFLKG, Thin, MS17826-3 1 Figure 3 [12]
    933.45.17.051 Screw, CSKHD, 100, MS24694-S51, CAD 2 Figure 3 [5]
    938.07.68.504 Nut, Hex, SLFLKG, CADM, MS21042-3 4 Figure 2 [17]
    938.77.11.112 Washer, Flat, NAS1149F0332P, CA 8 Figure 1 [23], Figure 3 [22],
    Figure 3 [9], Figure 3 [11],
    Figure 3 [16] & Figure 3 [25]
    940.61.08.241 Ring, Retaining, I, MS16625-4193 2 Figure 2 [6]
    940.83.28.401 Bearing, Ball, SELFAL, MS27648-16 2 Figure 2 [4]
    932.19.60.421 Bolt, Hex, CL TOL, CRES, AN173C6A 2 Figure 2 [19]
    938.77.11.113 Washer, Flat, NAS1149F0363P, CA 4 Figure 2 [18]
    932.19.60.422 Bolt, Hex, CL TOL, CRES, AN173C7A 2 Figure 2 [20]
    938.07.68.304 Nut, Hex, SLFLKG, CADM, MS21045-3E 5 Figure 1 [24], Figure 3 [23],
    Figure 3 [17] & Figure 3 [26]
    936.07.68.305 Nut, Hex, SLFLKG, CADM, MS21045-4E 2 Figure 4 [18]
    940.83.28.507 Bearing, Ball, SELFAL, MS27645-5 3 Figure 2 [21] & Figure 4 [3]
    938.09.14.303 Nut, 12 P, SLFLKG, CADM, NAS1804-3N 2 Figure 3 [10]
    932.19.21.030 Bolt, Hex HD, AN3-10A 3 Figure 3 [21] & Figure 3 [14]
    940.26.28.079 Pin, Straight, Headed MS20932-3C19 1 Figure 3 [24]
    940.17.02.235 Pin, Cotter, Steel, MS24665-208 3 Figure 3 [19] & Figure 4 [5]
    932.35.14.111 Bolt, Hex HD, CL TOL, NAS6604-11 4 Figure 1 [7] & Figure 2 [22]
    932.19.21.035 Bolt, Hex HD, AN3-15A 1 Figure 3 [18]
    527.10.12.102 Bush, Distance 2 Figure 2 [7]
    932.35.14.222 Bolt, Hex HD, CL TOL, NAS6605-22 4 Figure 2 [3] & Figure 2 [8]
    938.07.68.306 Nut, Hex, SLFLKG, CADM, MS21045-5E 4 Figure 2 [10] & Figure 2 [24]
    938.75.11.102 Washer, MS20002C5, CADM 2 Figure 2 [2]
    938.77.11.116 Washer, Flat, NAS1149F0532P, CA 2 Figure 2 [15]
    938.75.11.122 Washer, MS20002-5, CADM 2 Figure 2 [25]
    940.83.28.506 Bearing, Ball, SELFAL, MS27645-4 4 Figure 2 [1] & Figure 2 [23]
    938.02.27.207 Nut, Hex, CRES, NAS509L6C 2 Figure 1 [3]
    938.83.13.006 Washer, Lock, COMPL, NAS1193K6C 4 Figure 1 [4] & Figure 1 [5]
    938.02.27.206 Nut, Hex, CRES, NAS509-6C 2 Figure 1 [6]

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-307B-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-05-12 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Part No. Description Qty Reference


    944.61.13.255 Bearing, Rod End, LH, NSA8159.015E 2 Figure 1 [2]
    940.83.38.603 Bearing, Ball, 2R, MS27643-5 1 Figure 4 [15]
    940.61.08.223 Ring, Retaining, I, MS16625-4125 1 Figure 4 [16]

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-307B-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-05-12 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    B B

    A 1
    C

    11 2
    3
    A
    4

    E
    10

    F 5
    7
    6

    D B
    17
    C 14
    17
    13
    14 8

    13 9

    16
    D
    12
    MSN 0101-0683 D
    15 MSN 0684-9999

    22

    12
    18 22
    19
    18

    19

    11

    21 F
    23
    E 20
    24

    MSN 0101-0683

    E 20

    MSN 0684-9999
    12-A-271000-A-S4080-30052-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Inspection Kit – Aileron Ctrl. Floor

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-307B-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-05-12 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    ZONE 12
    B

    A B

    24
    1
    25

    5
    20
    6

    19

    22
    21

    18
    17
    12 23

    MSN 0684-9999 ONLY 16 11

    15

    14
    8
    10 9
    13
    B
    12-A-271000-A-S4080-30053-A-01-1

    Figure 2 Inspection Kit – Aileron Ctrl. Floor

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-307B-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-05-12 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    ZONE 12

    23
    22

    21
    3

    24 4

    25
    6

    20 26
    8

    19 9
    10
    18

    11
    12

    17
    16

    13

    B 14

    15
    12-A-271000-A-S4080-30054-A-01-1

    Figure 3 Inspection Kit – Aileron Ctrl. Floor

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-307B-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-05-12 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    ZONE 12

    B
    A
    1

    A
    2

    18 3
    17

    5
    7

    5 6
    9

    11
    10
    6 12

    16

    15

    13

    14

    B 12-A-271000-A-S4080-30055-A-01-1

    Figure 4 Inspection Kit – Aileron Ctrl. Floor

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-307B-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-05-12 Page 7
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-307B-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-05-12 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM

    PARTS LIST – WING – KIT P/N 500.60.12.016

    Table of Contents Page

    AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM - PARTS LIST – WING – KIT P/N 500.60.12.016.................... 1


    1 Inspection Kit P/N 500.60.12.016........................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Inspection Kit P/N 500.60.12.016........................................................................... 1

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Inspection Kit – Aileron Ctrl. Wing.......................................................................... 3


    2 Inspection Kit – Aileron Ctrl. Wing.......................................................................... 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description

    1 Inspection Kit P/N 500.60.12.016


    Replace the parts in Table 2 when you examine the aileron control system.

    Table 2 Inspection Kit P/N 500.60.12.016


    Part No. Description Qty Reference
    527.12.12.179 Shaft 2 Figure 1 [28]
    932.19.21.031 Bolt, Hex HD, AN3-11A 2 Figure 1 [30]
    932.35.14.112 Bolt, Hex HD, CL TOL, NAS6604-12 6 Figure 1 [5],
    Figure 1 [11] &
    Figure 1 [17]
    938.08.21.102 Nut, Hex, CSTLTD, AN310-4 2 Figure 1 [21]
    938.07.68.504 Nut, Hex, SLFLKG, CADM, MS21042-3 2 Figure 1 [32]
    938.07.68.505 Nut, Hex, SLFLKG, CADM, MS21042-4 6 Figure 1 [1],
    Figure 1 [9] &
    Figure 1 [15]
    938.77.11.115 Washer, Flat, NAS1149F0463P, CA 6 Figure 1 [2],
    Figure 1 [10] &
    Figure 1 [16]
    938.77.11.112 Washer, Flat, NAS1149F0332P, CA 2 Figure 1 [31]
    938.77.11.123 Washer, Flat, NAS1149F0863P, CA 2 Figure 1 [29]
    938.77.11.114 Washer, Flat, NAS1149F0432P, CA 2 Figure 1 [22]

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-307C-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-05-12 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Part No. Description Qty Reference


    940.17.02.226 Pin, Cotter, Steel, MS24665-134 2 Figure 1 [20]
    940.83.08.605 Bearing, Ball, MS27641-8 2 Figure 1 [26]
    940.83.28.506 Bearing, Ball, SELF AL, MS27645-4 4 Figure 1 [27]
    944.61.10.626 Bearing, Self-Aligning, MS14102-6K 2 Figure 1 [25]
    940.61.08.215 Ring, Retaining, I, MS16625-4087 2 Figure 1 [24]
    940.83.08.602 Bearing, Ball, MS27641-4 2 Figure 1 [23]
    938.02.27.207 Nut, Hex, Cres, NAS509L6C 4 Figure 1 [4] &
    Figure 1 [18]
    938.02.27.106 Nut, Hex, Jam, 0,5D, AN316-6R 4 Figure 1 [7] &
    Figure 1 [13]
    938.83.13.006 Washer, Lock, NAS1193K6C 4 Figure 1 [3] &
    Figure 1 [19]
    938.83.12.103 Washer, Lock, W8021/.3750 4 Figure 1 [8] &
    Figure 1 [14]
    944.61.13.254 Bearing, Rod End, RH, NAS8159.014E 4 Figure 1 [6] &
    Figure 1 [12]
    557.22.09.290 Bush 2 Figure 2 [14]
    940.83.38.603 Bearing, Ball, 2R, MS27643-5 2 Figure 2 [10]
    940.61.08.223 Ring, Retaining, I, MS16625-4125 2 Figure 2 [9]
    932.35.14.275 Bolt, Hex HD, CL TOL, NAS6605H25 2 Figure 2 [7]
    941.14.11.223 Bushing, Flanged, Press Fit, NAS77-5-044 2 Figure 2 [8]
    932.35.14.171 Bolt, Hex HD, CL TOL, NAS6604H21 2 Figure 2 [11]
    941.14.11.169 Bushing, Flanged, Press Fit, NAS77-4-028 2 Figure 2 [12]
    940.83.38.602 Bearing, Ball, 2R, MS27643-4 2 Figure 2 [13]
    557.60.12.334 Drive Arm Aileron Assy. 2 Figure 2 [1]
    944.61.10.624 Bearing, Self-Aligning, MS14102-4K 2 Figure 2 [6]
    932.35.14.167 Bolt, Hex HD, CL TOL, NAS6604H17 4 Figure 2 [2]
    941.14.11.170 Bus, Flang, Press Fit, NAS77-4-031 4 Figure 2 [3]
    938.83.61.104 Nut, Retainer,-Floating, NAS578-4B 4 Figure 2 [5]
    938.51.10.104 Nut, SLFLKG, BBL, FLTG, NAS577B4A 4 Figure 2 [4]

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-307C-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-05-12 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A A

    A
    Ref 27-10-00-05

    B
    4
    3

    1
    2

    8
    7
    6
    9
    10
    5

    11

    12
    13
    14

    32
    31

    16
    19
    18

    B 15
    17
    30

    28
    29

    26
    27

    23 20
    22
    25 21

    24

    12-B-271000-A-S4080-00006-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Inspection Kit – Aileron Ctrl. Wing

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-307C-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-05-12 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    D A

    C
    B

    13
    14

    12

    1
    B
    D 2 4
    11
    5
    5
    3

    9
    10 4
    6

    7
    3
    8
    2

    12-A-271000-A-S4080-30060-A-01-1

    Figure 2 Inspection Kit – Aileron Ctrl. Wing

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-307C-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-05-12 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM

    EXAMINE

    Table of Contents Page

    AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM - EXAMINE.............................................................................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 2
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 2
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A ACCESS PROVISION – HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR
    - DESCRIPTION
    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040B-A ACCESS PROVISIONS – ELECTRO MECHANICAL
    LANDING GEAR - DESCRIPTION
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A CORROSION CONTROL - MAINTENANCE
    PRACTICES
    12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE SEATS - REMOVAL INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A STANDARD SEATS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A STANDARD CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-27-10-00-00A-307A-A AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM - PARTS LIST–
    COCKPIT – KIT P/N 500.50.12.314
    12-B-27-10-00-00A-307B-A AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM - PARTS LIST –
    FLOOR – KIT P/N 500.60.12.035
    12-B-27-10-00-00A-307C-A AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM - PARTS LIST – WING
    – KIT P/N 500.60.12.016
    12-B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-27-10-01-00A-920A-A AILERON CABLES - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-27-10-02-00A-920A-A AILERON AUTOPILOT CABLE - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-310A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-03 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Warning sign DO NOT MOVE Part Local supply As
    THE FLYING CONTROLS required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Solvent Part P01-010 As
    required
    Absorbent paper Part P02-031 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Inspection kit cockpit Part 500.50.12.314 As
    required
    Inspection kit floor Part 500.60.12.035 As
    required
    Inspection kit wing Part 500.60.12.016 As
    required

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Put a Warning sign DO NOT MOVE THE FLYING CONTROLS (Pt.No. Local supply) in the flight
    compartment.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-310A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-03 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Note

    To identify the parts you need to replace as part of this procedure, refer to AMM 12-B-27-10-00-00A-307A-A,
    12-B-27-10-00-00A-307B-A and 12-B-27-10-00-00A-307C-A.

    2 Remove the passenger compartment seats:


    − Executive interior, AMM 12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A
    − Standard interior, AMM 12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A.
    3 Remove the passenger compartment carpets:
    − Executive interior, AMM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − Standard interior, AMM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A.
    4 Open the access panels, AMM 12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A or 12-B-06-20-00-00A-040B-A:
    − 11 AL, 11 DZ
    − 12 BZ, 12 EZ, 12 HZ, 12 KZ.
    5 Remove the aileron autopilot cables, AMM 12-B-27-10-02-00A-920A-A.
    6 Remove the aileron control cables, AMM 12-B-27-10-01-00A-920A-A.

    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MANUFACTURERS'
    HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items AMM 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    7 Use a Absorbent paper (Pt.No. P02-031) made moist with Solvent (Pt.No. P01-010) to clean, as needed, the
    areas you will examine.
    8 Examine the aileron control system and attachment structure. Make sure that you examine:
    − the cable pulleys
    − the pulley brackets
    − the pilot control wheel mechanism
    − the copilot control wheel mechanism
    − the aileron hinge points and fittings.
    9 Cracks or corrosion Level 2 or 3 are not permitted. Refer to AMM 12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A for the
    definition of corrosion levels. If you find cracks or corrosion Level 2 or 3, contact Pilatus Aircraft.
    10 Install the aileron control cables, AMM 12-B-27-10-01-00A-920A-A.
    11 Install the aileron autopilot cables, AMM 12-B-27-10-02-00A-920A-A.
    12 Remove the warning sign from the flight compartment.
    13 Do the adjustment/test of the aileron control system, AMM 12-B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-310A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-03 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    14 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    15 Close the access panels, AMM 12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A or 12-B-06-20-00-00A-040B-A:
    − 11 AL, 11 DZ
    − 12 BZ, 12 EZ, 12 HZ, 12 KZ.
    16 Install the passenger compartment carpets:
    − Executive interior, AMM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − Standard interior, AMM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A.
    17 Install the passenger compartment seats:
    − Executive interior, AMM 12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A
    − Standard interior, AMM 12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A.

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-310A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-04-03 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM

    ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Table of Contents Page

    AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST............................................................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 2
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 2
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 3

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Aileron Control Cables – Temperature Compensation Chart................................. 10


    2 Aileron Control System – Adjustment/Test............................................................. 17
    3 Aileron Autopilot Cable – Adjustment..................................................................... 20

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A GENERAL - AEROSPACE GROUND EQUIPMENT
    (AGE) AND TOOLS
    12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A JACKING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE SEATS - REMOVAL INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A STANDARD SEATS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A STANDARD CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-27-15-01-00A-920A-A AILERON TRIM ACTUATOR - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    12-B-57-00-00-00A-901A-A WINGS - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-16 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Tensiometer Part 110.85.07.242 As
    required
    Rigging pin Part 110.85.07.252 1
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required
    Warning sign (DO NOT Part Local supply As
    OPERATE THE FLIGHT required
    CONTROLS)
    Rigging block Part 513.27.12.075 As
    required
    Inclinometer Part 903.70.32.410 As
    required
    Steel ruler Part Local supply As
    required
    Rigging pin Part 513.27.12.050 2
    Steel ruler Part Local supply As
    required
    Warning sign (DO NOT MOVE Part Local supply As
    THE FLIGHT CONTROLS) required
    Spring balance (0-5 lbf) Part Local supply As
    required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Lockwire Part P02-007 As
    required
    PTFE Teflon spray Part OKS 571 Or
    equivalen
    t

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-16 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Locking clip CSN 27-10-00-04-010 As
    required
    Cotter pin CSN 27-10-00-09-090 As
    required

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedures to do:
    − A tension check of the aileron control cables
    − A functional test of the aileron control system
    − The adjustment of the aileron control-cables tension
    − The adjustment of the aileron control system
    − The adjustment of the right aileron tab
    − The adjustment of the left aileron tab
    − The adjustment of the aileron autopilot cable.
    2 Tension Check of the Aileron Control Cables

    Note

    To identify the AGE and tools used in this procedure refer to the list of AGE and tools 12-
    B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A.

    Note

    The aircraft must be in an area that has a constant temperature for not less than two hours before the
    functional test of the control cables tension is done.

    2.1 Preparation
    2.1.1 Raise the aircraft on jacks, refer to AMM 12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A.
    2.1.2 Open and install a Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065) on this
    circuit breaker:
    − A/P SERVO (AVIONICS 1 BUS)
    2.1.3 Put up a Warning sign (DO NOT OPERATE THE FLIGHT CONTROLS) (Pt.No. Local
    supply) in the flight compartment.
    2.1.4 Remove the center passenger compartment carpets from above the access panel 12EZ:
    − for executive interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-16 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − for standard interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A


    2.1.5 Remove the access panel 12EZ.
    2.2 Procedure
    (Ref. Fig. 1 and Fig. 2)
    2.2.1 Install the Rigging block (Pt.No. 513.27.12.075) Figure 2 [13] on the pilot control column
    Figure 2 [14].
    2.2.2 Install the Rigging pin (Pt.No. 513.27.12.050) Figure 2 [23] in the cable segment
    Figure 2 [24].
    2.2.3 If the rigging pin Figure 2 [23] cannot be easily installed in the cable segment Figure 2 [24],
    do the adjustment of the aileron control cables tension.
    2.2.4 Use the Tensiometer (Pt.No. 110.85.07.242) to measure the tension of the aileron control-
    cables Figure 2 [10] between frames 19 and 21.
    2.2.5 Refer to Fig. 1 and make sure the tension of the aileron control-cables Figure 2 [10] is
    correct.
    2.2.6 If the tension of the aileron control-cables Figure 2 [10] is not in limits, do the adjustment of
    the aileron control-cables tension.
    2.2.7 Remove the rigging pin Figure 2 [23] and the rigging block assembly Figure 2 [13] from the
    cable segment Figure 2 [24] and the pilot control column Figure 2 [14].
    2.3 Close Up
    2.3.1 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.3.2 Install the access panel 12 EZ.
    2.3.3 Install the passenger compartment center-carpets on the access panel 12 EZ:
    − for executive interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − for standard interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A
    2.3.4 Remove the warning sign DO NOT OPERATE THE FLIGHT CONTROLS from the flight
    compartment.
    2.3.5 Remove the safety clip and close this circuit breaker:
    − A/P SERVO (AVIONICS 1 BUS)
    2.3.6 Lower the aircraft off jacks, refer to AMM 12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A.
    3 Functional Test of the Aileron Control System

    Note

    To identify the AGE and tools used in this procedure refer to the list of AGE and tools 12-
    B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A.

    Note

    The tension of the aileron control cables must be correct before the functional test of the aileron control
    system is done.

    3.1 Preparation
    3.1.1 Raise the aircraft on jacks, refer to AMM 12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-16 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.1.2 Move the aileron controls to align the right aileron rear edge parallel with rear edge of the
    tab.
    3.1.3 Put masking tape across the space between the rear edge of the aileron and tab.
    3.1.4 Make a reference line on the tape across the center of the aileron and tab rear edges.
    3.1.5 Cut the masking tape at the space between the rear edge of the aileron and tab.
    3.1.6 Move the aileron controls to align the left aileron rear edge parallel with rear edge of the tab.
    3.1.7 Put masking tape across the space between the rear edge of the aileron and tab.
    3.1.8 Make a reference line on the tape across the center of the aileron and tab rear edges.
    3.1.9 Cut the masking tape at the space between the rear edge of the aileron and tab.
    3.1.10 Open and install a safety clip on this circuit breaker:
    − A/P SERVO (AVIONICS 1 BUS)
    3.1.11 Put up a warning sign DO NOT OPERATE THE FLIGHT CONTROLS in the flight
    compartment.
    3.2 Procedure
    (Ref. Fig. 2)
    3.2.1 Make sure the rudder control system movement is free.
    3.2.2 Move the aileron controls to the center position.
    3.2.3 Install the Rigging block (Pt.No. 513.27.12.075) Figure 2 [13] on the pilot control column
    Figure 2 [14].
    3.2.4 Put the Inclinometer (Pt.No. 903.70.32.410) on the right aileron and align it with the aileron
    ribs.
    3.2.5 Set the inclinometer to 0°.
    3.2.6 Measure the distance between the masking tape mark on the aileron and the masking tape
    mark on the flettner tab.
    3.2.7 Remove the rigging block from the pilot control column.
    3.2.8 Turn the pilot control wheel to the maximum left position.
    3.2.9 Make sure the right aileron moves down 13° ± 0.5°.
    3.2.10 Make sure the stop Figure 2 [21] on the left aileron bellcrank Figure 2 [6] touches the stop on
    the structure.
    3.2.11 Make sure the right flettner tab moves up.
    3.2.12 Measure the distance between the aileron rear edge center line and the tab rear edge center
    line (reference line on masking tape). Make sure the distance is 0.504 in (12,8 mm) + (the
    distance measured in Step 3.2.6) ± 0.047 in (1,2 mm).
    3.2.13 Turn the pilot control wheel to the maximum right position.
    3.2.14 Make sure the right aileron moves up 26.5° ± 0.5°.
    3.2.15 Make sure the stop Figure 2 [21] on the right aileron bellcrank Figure 2 [1] touches the stop
    on the structure.
    3.2.16 Make sure the right aileron tab moves down.
    3.2.17 Measure the distance between the aileron rear edge center line and the tab rear edge center
    line. Make sure the distance is 1.012 in (25,7 mm) − (the distance measured in Step 3.2.6) ±
    0.047 in (1,2 mm).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-16 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.2.18 Move the aileron controls to the center position.


    3.2.19 Install the Rigging pin (Pt.No. 110.85.07.252) Figure 2 [23] in the cable segment
    Figure 2 [24].
    3.2.20 Put the inclinometer on the left aileron and align it with the aileron ribs.
    3.2.21 Set the inclinometer to 0°.
    3.2.22 Energize the aircraft electrical system, refer to AMDM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    3.2.23 Push and hold the TRIM ENGAGE switch on the pilot control wheel.
    3.2.24 Operate the PITCH/AIL TRIM switch on the pilot control wheel to the left until movement of
    the aileron tab stops.
    3.2.25 Make sure the left aileron tab moves down.
    3.2.26 Release the PITCH/AIL TRIM and TRIM ENGAGE switches on the pilot control wheel.
    3.2.27 Measure the distance between the aileron rear edge center line and the tab rear edge center
    line. Make sure the distance is 11,6 mm ± 1,2 mm (0.457in ± 0.047 in).
    3.2.28 Push and hold the TRIM ENGAGE switch on the pilot control wheel.
    3.2.29 Operate the PITCH/AIL TRIM switch on the pilot control wheel to the right until movement of
    the aileron tab stops.
    3.2.30 Make sure the left aileron tab moves up.
    3.2.31 Release the PITCH/AIL TRIM and TRIM ENGAGE switches on the pilot control wheel.
    3.2.32 Measure the distance between the aileron rear edge center line and the tab rear edge center
    line. Make sure the distance is 23,2 mm ± 1,2 mm (0.913 in ± 0.047 in).
    3.2.33 Push and hold the TRIM ENGAGE switch on the pilot control wheel.
    3.2.34 Operate the PITCH/AIL TRIM switch on the pilot control wheel to the left until the distance
    between the masking tape mark on the aileron and the masking tape mark on the flettner tab
    is 6,2 mm ±0,6 mm (0.244 in ±0.024 in).
    3.2.35 Release the PITCH/AIL TRIM and TRIM ENGAGE switches on the pilot control wheel.
    3.2.36 Make sure that the aileron trim indication on the lower Multi Function Display (MFD) is
    approximately neutral.
    3.2.37 Remove the rigging pin from the cable segment Figure 2 [24].
    3.2.38 Turn the pilot control wheel to the maximum right position.
    3.2.39 Make sure the left aileron moves down 13° ± 0.5°.
    3.2.40 Make sure the stop Figure 2 [21] on the right aileron bellcrank Figure 2 [6] touches the stop
    on the structure.
    3.2.41 Make sure the left aileron tab moves up.
    3.2.42 Measure the distance between the aileron rear edge center line and the tab rear edge center
    line. Make sure the distance is 19 mm ± 1,2 mm (0.748 in ± 0.047 in).
    3.2.43 Turn the pilot control wheel to the maximum left position.
    3.2.44 Make sure the left aileron moves up 26.5° ± 0.5°.
    3.2.45 Make sure the stop Figure 2 [21] on the left aileron bellcrank Figure 2 [6] touches the stop on
    the structure.
    3.2.46 Make sure the left aileron tab moves down.
    3.2.47 Measure the distance between the aileron rear edge center line and the tab rear edge center
    line. Make sure the distance is 19,5 mm ± 1,2 mm (0.767 in ± 0.047 in).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-16 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.2.48 Remove the inclinometer from the left aileron.


    3.2.49 Move the aileron control system through its full range four times. With the aileron control at
    full left operate the aileron trim system to full left and full right. With the aileron control at full
    right operate the aileron trim system to full left and full right. Make sure the aileron control
    system moves smoothly.
    3.2.50 If the functional test of the aileron control system is not satisfactory, do the adjustment of the
    aileron control system.
    3.2.51 If the functional test of the right aileron tab is not satisfactory, do the adjustment of the right
    aileron tab.
    3.2.52 If the functional test of the left aileron tab is not satisfactory, do the adjustment of the left
    aileron tab.
    3.3 Close Up
    3.3.1 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.3.2 Remove the warning sign DO NOT OPERATE THE FLIGHT CONTROLS from the flight
    compartment.
    3.3.3 Remove the safety clip and close this circuit breaker:
    − A/P SERVO (AVIONICS 1 BUS)
    3.3.4 De-energize the aircraft electrical system , refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    3.3.5 Lower the aircraft off jacks, refer to AMM 12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A.
    3.3.6 Remove the masking tape from the left and right aileron and tabs.
    4 Adjust the Tension of the Aileron Control Cables
    4.1 Preparation
    4.1.1 Open and install a safety clip on this circuit breaker:
    − A/P SERVO (AVIONICS 1 BUS)
    4.1.2 Put up a warning sign DO NOT OPERATE THE FLIGHT CONTROLS in the flight
    compartment.
    4.1.3 Remove the passenger seats from above the access panels 12 AZ and 12 DZ:
    − for executive interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A
    − for standard interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A
    4.1.4 Remove the center and left passenger compartment carpets from above the access panels
    12 AZ, 12 DZ and 12 EZ:
    − for executive interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − for standard interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A
    4.1.5 Remove the access panels 12 AZ, 12 DZ and 12 EZ.
    4.1.6 Raise the aircraft on jacks, refer to AMM 12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A.
    4.2 Procedure
    (Ref. Fig. 1 and Fig. 2)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-16 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Note

    To identify the AGE and tools used in this procedure refer to the list of AGE and tools 12-
    B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A.

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Note

    The rudder is at 2.6 in (65 mm) to the right of its neutral position through the interconnect system when
    the ailerons are at the neutral position.

    Procedure
    4.2.1 Move the aileron controls to the center position and install the rigging pin Figure 2 [23] in the
    cable segment Figure 2 [24].
    4.2.2 Install the rigging block assembly Figure 2 [13] on the pilot control column Figure 2 [14].
    4.2.3 Remove the four locking clips Figure 2 [12] from the two turnbuckles Figure 2 [11]. Discard
    the locking clips.
    4.2.4 Use the Tensiometer (Pt.No. 110.85.07.242) to measure the tension of the control cables
    Figure 2 [10] between frames 19 and 21.
    4.2.5 Refer to Fig. 1 and identify the correct tension of the control cables Figure 2 [10].
    4.2.6
    CAUTION

    MAKE SURE THE CONTROL CABLES DO NOT TURN WHEN YOU TURN THE
    TURNBUCKLES. ADJUST THE TURNBUCKLES THE SAME QUANTITY TO KEEP THE
    TENSION OF EACH CONTROL CABLE THE SAME.

    Hold the control cables Figure 2 [10] and adjust the turnbuckles Figure 2 [11] to get the
    correct tension.
    4.2.7 Align the locking clip grooves in the turnbuckles Figure 2 [11] and the aileron control cables
    Figure 2 [10].
    4.2.8 Remove the rigging pin Figure 2 [23] from the cable segment Figure 2 [24].
    4.2.9 Make sure the rigging pin Figure 2 [23] can be easily removed and installed in the cable
    segment Figure 2 [24]. If the rigging pin cannot be easily removed and installed, adjust the
    turnbuckles Figure 2 [11].
    4.2.10 Use the tensiometer to make sure the tension of the control cables Figure 2 [10] is correct. If
    necessary, do Step 4.2.4 thru Step 4.2.9 again until the tension is correct. Temporarily install
    the locking clips Figure 2 [12] in the turnbuckles Figure 2 [11].
    4.2.11 Remove the rigging pin Figure 2 [23] from the cable segment Figure 2 [24] and the rigging
    block assembly Figure 2 [13] from the pilot control column Figure 2 [14].

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-16 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    4.2.12 Move the aileron controls through their complete range five times. Make sure when the
    aileron controls are turned fully to the left and right that the same amount of soft stop is felt
    before the hard stop is reached.
    4.2.13 Move the aileron controls to the center position. Install the rigging pin Figure 2 [23] in the
    cable segment Figure 2 [24] and the rigging block assembly Figure 2 [13] on the pilot control
    column Figure 2 [14].
    4.2.14 Use the tensiometer to measure the tension of the aileron control cables Figure 2 [10]
    between frames 19 and 21.
    4.2.15 If the tension of the aileron control cables Figure 2 [10] is not correct, do Step 4.2.5 thru
    Step 4.2.14 again.
    4.2.16 Safety the turnbuckles Figure 2 [11] with new Locking clip Figure 2 [12].
    4.2.17 Remove the rigging pin Figure 2 [23] from the cable segment Figure 2 [24] and the rigging
    block assembly Figure 2 [13] from the pilot control column Figure 2 [14].
    4.2.18 Slowly move the aileron controls through their full range. Make sure the aileron controls
    move smoothly and the aileron control cables Figure 2 [10] do not touch the structure.
    4.2.19 Do the functional test of the aileron control system.
    4.3 Close Up
    4.3.1 Make sure the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    4.3.2 Install the access panels 12 AZ, 12 DZ and 12 EZ.
    4.3.3 Install the center and left passenger compartment carpets on the access panels 12 AZ, 12
    DZ and 12 EZ:
    − for executive interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − for standard interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A
    4.3.4 Install the passenger seats above the access panels 12 AZ and 12 DZ:
    − for executive interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A
    − for standard interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A
    4.3.5 Remove the warning sign DO NOT OPERATE THE FLIGHT CONTROLS from the flight
    compartment.
    4.3.6 Remove the safety clip and close this circuit breaker:
    − A/P SERVO (AVIONICS 1 BUS)
    4.3.7 Lower the aircraft off jacks, refer to AMM 12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-16 Page 9


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    NOTE: CABLE DIAMETER = 0.125 in (3,2 mm)


    o
    EXAMPLE: CABLE TENSION AT 20 C = 33 ± 3.3 lbf (15 ± 1.5 kgf)

    CABLE
    TENSION
    (kgf) (lbf)
    (30) 66

    MAX
    (25) 55

    MIN

    (20) 44

    (15) 33

    (10) 22

    (5) 11

    0
    0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50

    o
    TEMPERATURE ( C)
    27130

    Figure 1 Aileron Control Cables – Temperature Compensation Chart

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-16 Page 10


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    5 Adjustment of the Aileron Control System


    5.1 Preparation
    5.1.1 Do the check of the aileron control-cable tension.
    5.1.2 Energize the aircraft electrical system, refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    5.1.3 Set the flaps to 40°.
    5.1.4 De-energize the aircraft electrical system, refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    5.1.5 Open and install a safety clip on this circuit breaker:
    − A/P SERVO (AVIONICS 1 BUS)
    5.1.6 Put up a warning sign DO NOT OPERATE THE FLIGHT CONTROLS in the flight
    compartment.
    5.1.7 Remove the passenger seats from above the access panels 12 GZ and 12 IZ:
    − for executive interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A
    − for standard interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A
    5.1.8 Remove the passenger compartment carpets from above the access panels 12 EZ, 12 GZ
    and 12 IZ:
    − for executive interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − for standard interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A
    5.1.9 Remove these access panels:
    − 12 CL, 12 CR
    − 12 EZ, 12 GZ and 12 IZ
    − 51 KB
    − 52 PB, 52 RB and 52 SB
    − 61 KB
    − 62 PB, 62 RB and 62 SB
    5.1.10 Raise the aircraft on jacks, refer to AMM 12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A.
    5.2 Procedure
    (Ref. Fig. 2)
    5.2.1
    Note

    To identify the AGE and tools used in this procedure refer to the list of AGE and tools 12-
    B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A.

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Make sure the rudder control system movement is free.


    5.2.2 Move the aileron controls to the center position and install a rigging pin Figure 2 [23] in the
    cable segment Figure 2 [24].

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-16 Page 11


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    5.2.3 In the left wing root, install a rigging pin Figure 2 [25] in the bellcrank Figure 2 [9] and the
    bracket Figure 2 [26].
    5.2.4 If the rigging pin Figure 2 [25] cannot be installed in the bellcrank Figure 2 [9] and bracket
    Figure 2 [26], adjust the left control rod Figure 2 [8] as follows:
    5.2.4.1 Remove the lockwire from the locknuts Figure 2 [34] and Figure 2 [39].
    5.2.4.2 Loosen the locknuts Figure 2 [34] and Figure 2 [39] and disengage the
    lockwashers Figure 2 [33] and Figure 2 [36].
    5.2.4.3 Turn the control rod Figure 2 [8] until the rigging pin Figure 2 [25] can be easily
    installed through the rigging holes in the bellcrank Figure 2 [9] and the bracket
    Figure 2 [26].
    5.2.4.4 Hold the rod ends Figure 2 [35] and Figure 2 [37]. Align and engage the
    lockwashers Figure 2 [33] and Figure 2 [36] and tighten the locknuts
    Figure 2 [34] and Figure 2 [39].
    5.2.4.5 Make sure the rigging pin Figure 2 [25] can be easily removed and installed in
    the bellcrank Figure 2 [9] and the bracket Figure 2 [26].
    5.2.5 In the right wing root install a rigging pin Figure 2 [25] in the bellcrank Figure 2 [7] and
    bracket Figure 2 [26].
    5.2.6 If the rigging pin Figure 2 [25] cannot be installed in the bracket Figure 2 [26], do Step 5.2.4
    for the right control rod Figure 2 [8].
    5.2.7 Remove the rigging pins Figure 2 [25] from the bellcranks Figure 2 [7] and Figure 2 [9].
    5.2.8 Remove the rigging pin Figure 2 [23] from the cable segment Figure 2 [24].
    5.2.9 Move the left aileron through its full range. At the same time, on the control rod Figure 2 [5]
    in the left wing, make sure the three larger-diameter sections that are not painted do not
    move out of the roller assemblies Figure 2 [40].
    5.2.10 If the larger-diameter sections on the control rod Figure 2 [5] move out of the roller
    assemblies Figure 2 [40], adjust the rods Figure 2 [2] and Figure 2 [4] as follows:
    5.2.10.1 Remove the lockwire from the locknuts Figure 2 [17] and Figure 2 [28].
    5.2.10.2 Remove the nuts Figure 2 [20] and Figure 2 [29], washers Figure 2 [19] and
    Figure 2 [30], bolts Figure 2 [15] and Figure 2 [32] then disconnect the rods
    Figure 2 [2] and Figure 2 [4].
    5.2.10.3 Loosen the locknuts Figure 2 [17] and Figure 2 [28] and disengage the
    lockwashers Figure 2 [18] and Figure 2 [27].
    5.2.10.4 Turn the rod ends Figure 2 [16] and Figure 2 [31] the same quantity to put the
    control rod Figure 2 [3] in the correct position.
    5.2.10.5 Hold the rod ends Figure 2 [16] and Figure 2 [31]. Align and engage the
    lockwashers Figure 2 [18] and Figure 2 [27] and tighten the locknuts
    Figure 2 [17] and Figure 2 [28].
    5.2.10.6 Connect the rods Figure 2 [2] and Figure 2 [4] with the bolts Figure 2 [15] and
    Figure 2 [32], washers Figure 2 [19] and Figure 2 [30] and nuts Figure 2 [20]
    and Figure 2 [29].
    5.2.11 In the left wing root, install a rigging pin Figure 2 [25] in the bellcrank Figure 2 [9] and bracket
    Figure 2 [26].
    5.2.12 Install a rigging pin Figure 2 [22] in the left aileron bellcrank Figure 2 [6].
    5.2.13 If the rigging pin Figure 2 [22] cannot be installed in the bellcrank Figure 2 [6], adjust the rod
    end Figure 2 [16] as follows:

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-16 Page 12


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    5.2.13.1 Remove the lockwire from the locknut Figure 2 [17].


    5.2.13.2 Remove the nut Figure 2 [20], washer Figure 2 [19], bolt Figure 2 [15] and
    disconnect the rod end Figure 2 [16].
    5.2.13.3 Loosen the locknut Figure 2 [17] and disengage the lockwasher Figure 2 [18].
    5.2.13.4 Adjust the rod end Figure 2 [16]. Temporarily connect the rod end Figure 2 [16]
    with the bolt Figure 2 [15].
    5.2.13.5 Make sure the rigging pin Figure 2 [22] can be easily installed in the bellcrank
    Figure 2 [6] and the structure.
    5.2.13.6 If the rigging pin Figure 2 [22] cannot be easily installed, remove the bolt
    Figure 2 [15] and do Step 5.2.13.4 and Step 5.2.13.5 again.
    5.2.13.7 Hold the rod end Figure 2 [16]. Align and engage the lockwasher Figure 2 [18]
    then tighten the locknut Figure 2 [17].
    5.2.13.8 Make sure the rigging pin Figure 2 [22] can be easily removed and installed in
    the bellcrank Figure 2 [6] and the structure. Remove the rigging pin.
    5.2.13.9 Remove the rigging pin Figure 2 [25] from the bellcrank Figure 2 [9] in the left
    wing root.
    5.2.13.10 Connect the rod end Figure 2 [16] with the bolt Figure 2 [15], washer
    Figure 2 [19] and nut Figure 2 [20].
    5.2.14 Do steps Step 5.2.8 thru Step 5.2.13 for the control rod Figure 2 [3] in the right wing and the
    right aileron bellcrank Figure 2 [1].
    5.2.15 Do the functional test of the aileron control system.
    5.2.16 Safety the locknuts Figure 2 [17], Figure 2 [28], Figure 2 [34] and Figure 2 [39] with
    Lockwire (Pt.No. P02-007).
    5.3 Close Up
    5.3.1 Apply PTFE Teflon spray (Pt.No. OKS 571) to the sleeve on the aileron control rod (LH and
    RH center wing) at the support assembly guide rollers Figure 2 [40] (three locations each
    wing).
    5.3.2 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    5.3.3 Install these access panels:
    − 12 CL, 12 CR
    − 12 EZ, 12 GZ and 12 IZ
    − 51 KB
    − 52 PB, 52 RB and 52 SB
    − 61 KB
    − 62 PB, 62 RB and 62 SB
    5.3.4 Install the passenger compartment carpets on the access panels 12 EZ, 12 GZ and
    12 IZ:
    − for executive interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − for standard interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A
    5.3.5 Install the passenger seats above the access panels 12 GZ and 12 IZ:
    − for executive interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-16 Page 13


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − for standard interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A


    5.3.6 Remove the warning sign DO NOT OPERATE THE FLIGHT CONTROLS from the flight
    compartment.
    5.3.7 Remove the safety clip and close the circuit breaker:
    − A/P SERVO (AVIONICS 1 BUS)
    5.3.8 Lower the aircraft off jacks, refer to AMM 12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A.
    5.3.9 If necessary, set the flaps to 0°.
    6 Adjustment of the Right Aileron Tab
    6.1 Preparation
    6.1.1 Move the aileron controls to align the right aileron rear edge parallel with rear edge of the
    tab.
    6.1.2 Make a reference line on the tape across the center of the aileron and tab rear edges.
    6.1.3 Cut the masking tape at the space between the rear edge of the aileron and tab.
    6.1.4 Put masking tape across the space between the rear edge of the aileron and tab.
    6.2 Procedure
    (Ref. Fig. 2)
    6.2.1
    Note

    The length of the rod between the wing structure and the flettner tab drive must be 151,0 mm
    ± 0,5 mm (5.95 in ± 0.02 in) when measured between the center of the rod eye ends.

    Note

    To identify the AGE and tools used in this procedure refer to the list of AGE and tools 12-
    B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A.

    Move the aileron controls to the center position and install the rigging pin Figure 2 [23] in the
    cable segment Figure 2 [24].
    6.2.2 Loosen the locknut Figure 2 [45].
    6.2.3 Remove the cotter pin Figure 2 [49], nut Figure 2 [47], washer Figure 2 [48], bonding lead
    Figure 2 [43] and the bolt Figure 2 [42].
    6.2.4 Disconnect the push rod Figure 2 [46] from the tab Figure 2 [41].
    6.2.5 Adjust the rod end Figure 2 [44] until the distance between the aileron rear edge center line
    and the tab rear edge center line is 6,2 mm ± 0,6 mm (0.244 in ± 0.024 in) up.
    6.2.6 Make sure the rod end Figure 2 [44] is in safety and connect the push rod Figure 2 [46] to
    the tab Figure 2 [41] with the bolt Figure 2 [42], bonding lead Figure 2 [43], washer
    Figure 2 [48], nut Figure 2 [47] and new cotter pin Figure 2 [49].
    6.2.7 Tighten the locknut Figure 2 [45].
    6.2.8 Remove the rigging pin from the cable segment.
    6.2.9 Turn the pilot control wheel to the maximum left position.
    6.2.10 While the right aileron moves down, make sure the right aileron tab moves up.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-16 Page 14


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    6.2.11 Measure the distance between the aileron rear edge center line and the tab rear edge center
    line. Make sure the distance is 19 mm ± 1,2 mm (0.748 in ± 0.047 in).
    6.2.12 Turn the pilot control wheel to the maximum right position.
    6.2.13 While the right aileron moves up, make sure the right aileron tab moves down.
    6.2.14 Measure the distance between the aileron rear edge center line and the tab rear edge center
    line. Make sure the distance is 19,5 mm ± 1,2 mm (0.768 in ± 0.047 in).
    6.2.15 Remove the masking tape from the right aileron and tab.
    6.2.16 On the next flight check the aircraft for roll, refer to AMM 12-B-57-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    7 Adjustment of the Left Aileron Tab
    7.1 Preparation
    7.1.1 Move the aileron controls to align the left aileron rear edge parallel with rear edge of the trim
    tab.
    7.1.2 Put masking tape across the space between the rear edge of the aileron and trim tab.
    7.1.3 Make a reference line on the tape across the center of the aileron and trim tab rear edges.
    7.1.4 Cut the masking tape at the space between the rear edge of the aileron and trim tab.
    7.2 Procedure
    (Ref. Fig. 2)
    7.2.1 Move the aileron controls to the center position and install the rigging block Figure 2 [13] on
    the pilot control column Figure 2 [14].
    7.2.2 Energize the aircraft electrical system, refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    7.2.3 Push and hold the TRIM ENGAGE switch on the pilot control wheel.
    7.2.4 Operate the PITCH/AIL TRIM switch on the pilot control wheel to the left until movement of
    the aileron tab stops.
    7.2.5 Make sure the aileron trim tab moves down.
    7.2.6 Release the PITCH/AIL TRIM and TRIM ENGAGE switches on the pilot control wheel.
    7.2.7 Make sure the distance between the aileron rear edge center line and the trim tab rear edge
    center line is 0.457 ± 0.047 in (11,6 ± 1,2 mm).
    7.2.8 Push and hold the TRIM ENGAGE switch on the pilot control wheel.
    7.2.9 Operate the PITCH/AIL TRIM switch on the pilot control wheel to the right until movement of
    the aileron tab stops.
    7.2.10 Make sure the aileron trim tab moves up.
    7.2.11 Release the PITCH/AIL TRIM and TRIM ENGAGE switches on the pilot control wheel.
    7.2.12 Make sure the distance between the aileron rear edge center line and the trim tab rear edge
    center line is 0.913 ± 0.047 in (23,2 ± 1,2 mm).
    7.2.13 Release the PITCH/AIL TRIM and TRIM ENGAGE switches on the pilot control wheel.
    7.2.14 If the above distances are not correct:
    7.2.14.1 Loosen the locknut Figure 2 [45].
    7.2.14.2 Remove the cotter pin Figure 2 [49], nut Figure 2 [47], washer Figure 2 [48],
    bonding lead Figure 2 [43] and the bolt Figure 2 [42].
    7.2.14.3 Disconnect the push rod Figure 2 [46] from the trim tab Figure 2 [41]. Adjust the
    rod end Figure 2 [44] to get the correct distance.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-16 Page 15


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    7.2.14.4 Make sure the rod end Figure 2 [44] is in safety and connect the push rod
    Figure 2 [46] to the trim tab Figure 2 [41] with the bolt Figure 2 [42], bonding
    lead Figure 2 [43], washer Figure 2 [48], nut Figure 2 [47] and new cotter pin
    Figure 2 [49].
    7.2.14.5 Tighten the locknut Figure 2 [45].
    7.2.15 If the distances continue to be incorrect, make sure the adjustment of the aileron trim
    actuator is correct, refer to AMM 12-B-27-15-01-00A-920A-A.
    7.2.16 Push and hold the TRIM ENGAGE switch on the pilot control wheel.
    7.2.17 Operate the PITCH/AIL TRIM switch on the pilot control wheel to the right until the MFD trim
    indication shows the aileron trim in the center green position.
    7.2.18 Measure the distance between the aileron rear edge center line and the tab rear edge center
    line which must be 0.244 ± 0.024 in (6,2 ± 0,6 mm). Operate the PITCH/AIL TRIM switch on
    the pilot control wheel as necessary to get the correct distance.
    7.2.19 Release the PITCH/AIL TRIM and TRIM ENGAGE switches on the pilot control wheel.
    7.2.20 Remove the rigging block Figure 2 [13] from the pilot control column Figure 2 [14].
    7.2.21 Turn the pilot control wheel to the maximum left position.
    7.2.22 While the left aileron moves up, make sure the left aileron tab moves down.
    7.2.23 Measure the distance between the aileron rear edge center line and the tab rear edge center
    line. Make sure the distance is 0.768 ± 0.047 in (19,5 ± 1,2 mm).
    7.2.24 Turn the pilot control wheel to the maximum right position.
    7.2.25 While the left aileron moves down, make sure the left aileron tab moves up.
    7.2.26 Measure the distance between the aileron rear edge center line and the tab rear edge center
    line. Make sure the distance is 0.748 ± 0.047 in (19 ± 1,2 mm).
    7.2.27 If the measurements at Step 7.2.23 and Step 7.2.26 are not satisfactory. Adjust the rod eye
    end Figure 2 [44] using the plus minus tolerances given in Step 7.2.23 and Step 7.2.26 to get
    the correct measurements.
    7.2.28 Remove the masking tape from the left aileron and trim tab.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-16 Page 16


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    H 1
    2
    3

    D
    4
    G
    G A
    G
    C
    4
    5

    2
    6
    B G
    G
    G H
    7 F D

    8
    8

    E 9

    13

    10

    11
    11 10
    12
    12

    10

    10

    14
    B
    C
    12-B-271000-A-S4080-00004-A-01-1

    Figure 2 Aileron Control System – Adjustment/Test (Sheet 1 of 2)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-16 Page 17


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    18
    15 17
    16

    19
    20 23

    21 D 24

    1 22
    6

    41

    49

    H 48
    39 8

    47 38
    43
    37 36
    34 35

    44

    45 33

    42
    46
    25

    7
    9
    32
    26

    40
    31

    30
    F
    29
    28
    27203

    3
    5 G 27
    4

    Figure 2 Aileron Control System – Adjustment/Test (Sheet 2 of 2)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-16 Page 18


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    8 Adjustment of the Aileron Autopilot Cable


    8.1 Job Set-Up
    8.1.1 Put up a Warning sign (DO NOT MOVE THE FLIGHT CONTROLS) (Pt.No. Local supply) in
    the flight compartment.
    8.1.2 Open and install safety clips on these circuit breakers:
    − A/P SERVO (AVIONICS 1 BUS)
    − A/P SERVO ENABLE (AVIONICS 1 BUS)
    8.1.3 Remove the center carpet from above access panel 12 EZ:
    − for executive interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − for standard interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A
    8.1.4 Remove the access panel 12 EZ.
    8.2 Procedure
    (Ref. Fig. 3)
    8.2.1 Apply a force of 2.2 lbf (10 N) to the side of the aileron cable Figure 3 [1] at frame 23. Make
    sure the aileron autopilot cable Figure 3 [1] moves between 3,5 and 6 mm (0.14 and 0.23 in).
    8.2.2 If necessary, turn the nut Figure 3 [2] to set the correct tension in the aileron autopilot cable
    Figure 3 [1].
    8.2.3 Make sure the aileron autopilot cable Figure 3 [1] does not touch the structure.
    8.3 Close Up
    8.3.1 Install the access panel 12 EZ.
    8.3.2 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    8.3.3 Install the center carpet on access panel 12 EZ:
    − for executive interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − for standard interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A
    8.3.4 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − A/P SERVO (AVIONICS 1 BUS)
    − A/P SERVO ENABLE (AVIONICS 1 BUS)
    8.3.5 Remove the DO NOT OPERATE THE FLIGHT CONTROLS warning sign from the flight
    compartment.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-16 Page 19


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    B
    1

    A
    1

    FRAME 23
    1

    FORCE = 2.2 lbf


    (10N)

    FWD B 0.14 to 0.23 in


    (3,5 to 6 mm)
    27131

    Figure 3 Aileron Autopilot Cable – Adjustment

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-16 Page 20


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-16 Page 21
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-16 Page 22


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    AILERON CABLES

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    AILERON CABLES - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION...................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Aileron Cables – Removal/Installation.................................................................... 6

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A FLIGHT COMPARTMENT CREW SEATS - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE SEATS - REMOVAL INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A STANDARD SEATS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A STANDARD CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) Required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-18 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark


    Warning sign (DO NOT Part Local supply As
    OPERATE THE FLIGHT Required
    CONTROLS)
    String Part Local supply As
    Required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Cotter pin CSN 27-10-00-04-050 As
    Required
    Cotter pin CSN 27-10-00-02-010 As
    Required
    Cotter pin CSN 27-10-00-04-075 As
    Required
    Cotter pin CSN 27-10-00-07-030 As
    Required

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Preparation

    CAUTION

    MAKE A NOTE OF THE ROUTING OF THE AILERON CABLES BEFORE YOU REMOVE THEM.

    1.1.1 Open and install a Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065) on these
    circuit breakers:
    − FLT CONT CH A (AVIONIC 1 BUS)
    − FLT CONT CH B (AVIONIC 2 BUS)
    1.1.2 Put up a Warning sign (DO NOT OPERATE THE FLIGHT CONTROLS) (Pt.No. Local
    supply) in the flight compartment.
    1.1.3 Remove the pilot and co-pilot seats (refer to AMM 12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-18 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1.1.4 Remove the passenger seats from above the access panels 12 AZ, 12 CZ and 12 DZ:
    − for executive interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A
    − for standard interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A
    1.1.5 Remove the flight compartment and center and left passenger compartment carpets:
    − for executive interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − for standard interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A
    1.1.6 Remove these access panels:
    − 11 BZ, 11 DZ
    − 12 AZ, 12 BZ, 12 DZ and 12 EZ
    − 21 GZ and 21 JZ
    1.2 Procedure
    1.2.1 Remove the four locking clips Figure 1 [13] and Figure 1 [15] from the turnbuckles
    Figure 1 [12] and Figure 1 [14]. Discard the locking clips.
    1.2.2 Disconnect the turnbuckle Figure 1 [12] from the aileron cables Figure 1 [1] and Figure 1 [8].
    1.2.3 Disconnect the turnbuckle Figure 1 [14] from the aileron cables Figure 1 [2] and Figure 1 [6].
    1.2.4 Attach guide String (Pt.No. Local supply) to the aileron cables Figure 1 [1] and Figure 1 [2].
    1.2.5 Remove the nut Figure 1 [11], washer Figure 1 [10], bolt Figure 1 [9] and two pulleys
    Figure 1 [7] from the structure.
    1.2.6 Remove the cotter pins Figure 1 [4] and guards Figure 1 [5]. Discard the cotter pins.
    1.2.7 Remove the cotter pin Figure 1 [19], nut Figure 1 [16], washer Figure 1 [17], bolt
    Figure 1 [18] and aileron cable Figure 1 [6] from the cable segment Figure 1 [3]. Discard the
    cotter pin.
    1.2.8 Remove the cotter pin Figure 1 [23], nut Figure 1 [22], washer Figure 1 [21], bolt
    Figure 1 [20] and aileron cable Figure 1 [8] from the cable segment Figure 1 [3]. Discard the
    cotter pin.
    1.2.9 Remove the aileron cables Figure 1 [6] and Figure 1 [8] from the aircraft.
    1.2.10 Remove the nut Figure 1 [24], washer Figure 1 [25], bolt Figure 1 [27] and two pulleys
    Figure 1 [26] from the structure.
    1.2.11 Remove the nut Figure 1 [31], washer Figure 1 [32], screw Figure 1 [34] and guard
    Figure 1 [33] from the structure.
    1.2.12 Remove the nut Figure 1 [30], washer Figure 1 [29], bolt Figure 1 [35] and the two pulleys
    Figure 1 [28] from the structure.
    1.2.13 Remove the bolts Figure 1 [42], the nut Figure 1 [41], washer Figure 1 [40], cable bracket
    Figure 1 [43], two pulleys Figure 1 [39], spacer Figure 1 [38] and the bolt Figure 1 [37] from
    the structure.
    1.2.14 Remove the nut Figure 1 [48], washer Figure 1 [49], screw Figure 1 [51] and guard
    Figure 1 [50] from the structure.
    1.2.15 Remove the nut Figure 1 [46], washer Figure 1 [47], bolt Figure 1 [52] and the two pulleys
    Figure 1 [45] from the structure.
    1.2.16 Remove the cotter pin Figure 1 [64], nut Figure 1 [63], washer Figure 1 [65], bolt
    Figure 1 [66]and aileron cable Figure 1 [2] from the chain Figure 1 [62]. Discard the cotter
    pin.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-18 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1.2.17 Remove the nut Figure 1 [59], washer Figure 1 [60], bolt Figure 1 [61] and pulley
    Figure 1 [58] from the control column Figure 1 [44].
    1.2.18 Remove the cotter pin Figure 1 [57], nut Figure 1 [56], washer Figure 1 [55], bolt
    Figure 1 [54] and aileron cable Figure 1 [1] from the chain connection Figure 1 [53]. Discard
    the cotter pin.
    1.2.19 Remove the aileron cables Figure 1 [1] and Figure 1 [2] from the aircraft.
    1.2.20 Disconnect the aileron cables Figure 1 [1] and Figure 1 [2] from the guide strings and attach
    the guide strings to the structure.
    2 Installation
    2.1 Procedure

    CAUTION

    MAKE SURE THE AILERON CABLES FOLLOW THEIR CORRECT ROUTING THROUGH THE
    AIRCRAFT.

    2.1.1 Examine these parts for wear and damage:


    − The spacers
    − The aircraft structure along the cable routing
    − The turnbuckles
    2.1.2 Attach the aileron cables Figure 1 [1] and Figure 1 [2] to the guide strings.
    2.1.3 Carefully pull the guide strings and put the aileron cables Figure 1 [1] and Figure 1 [2] in
    position in the aircraft.
    2.1.4 Connect the aileron cable Figure 1 [1] to the chain connection Figure 1 [53] with the bolt
    Figure 1 [54], washer Figure 1 [55], nut Figure 1 [56] and new Cotter pin Figure 1 [57].
    2.1.5 Install the pulley Figure 1 [58] on the control column Figure 1 [44] with the bolt Figure 1 [61],
    washer Figure 1 [60], and nut Figure 1 [59].
    2.1.6 Connect the aileron cable Figure 1 [2] to the chain Figure 1 [62] with the bolt Figure 1 [66],
    washer Figure 1 [65], nut Figure 1 [63] and new Cotter pin Figure 1 [64].
    2.1.7 Install the two pulleys Figure 1 [45] in the structure with the bolt Figure 1 [52], washer
    Figure 1 [47] and nut Figure 1 [46].
    2.1.8 Make sure the aileron cables Figure 1 [1] and Figure 1 [2] are in position on the pulleys and
    install the guard Figure 1 [50], screw Figure 1 [51], washer Figure 1 [49] and nut
    Figure 1 [48].
    2.1.9 Install the two pulleys Figure 1 [39] and the cable bracket Figure 1 [43] in the structure with
    the bolt Figure 1 [37], spacer Figure 1 [38], washer Figure 1 [40], nut Figure 1 [41] and the
    two bolts Figure 1 [42].
    2.1.10 Install the two pulleys Figure 1 [28] in the structure with the bolt Figure 1 [35], washer
    Figure 1 [29] and nut Figure 1 [30].
    2.1.11 Make sure the aileron cables Figure 1 [1] and Figure 1 [2] are in position on the pulleys and
    install the guard Figure 1 [33], screw Figure 1 [34], washer Figure 1 [32] and nut
    Figure 1 [31].
    2.1.12 Install the two pulleys Figure 1 [26] in the structure with the bolt Figure 1 [27], washer
    Figure 1 [25] and nut Figure 1 [24].

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-18 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.1.13 Put the aileron cables Figure 1 [6] and Figure 1 [8] in position in the structure.
    2.1.14 Connect the aileron cable Figure 1 [6] to the cable segment Figure 1 [3] with the bolt
    Figure 1 [18], washer Figure 1 [17], nut Figure 1 [16] and new Cotter pin Figure 1 [19].
    2.1.15 Connect the aileron cable Figure 1 [8] to the cable segment Figure 1 [3] with the bolt
    Figure 1 [20], washer Figure 1 [21], nut Figure 1 [22]and new Cotter pin Figure 1 [23].
    2.1.16 Make sure the aileron cables Figure 1 [6] and Figure 1 [8] are in the correct position and
    install the two guards Figure 1 [5] in the structure with new Cotter pin Figure 1 [4].
    2.1.17 Install the two pulleys Figure 1 [7] in the structure with the bolt Figure 1 [9], washer
    Figure 1 [10] and nut Figure 1 [11].
    2.1.18 Remove the guide strings from the aircraft.
    2.1.19 Connect the aileron cable Figure 1 [1] to the aileron cable Figure 1 [8] with the turnbuckle
    Figure 1 [12].
    2.1.20 Connect the aileron cable Figure 1 [2] to the aileron cable Figure 1 [6] with the turnbuckle
    Figure 1 [14].
    2.1.21 Examine the routing of the aileron cables Figure 1 [1], Figure 1 [2], Figure 1 [6] and
    Figure 1 [8]. Make sure they do not go across each other or touch the structure.
    2.1.22 Do the adjustment of the aileron control-cables tension (refer to AMM 12-
    B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A).
    2.2 Close Up
    2.2.1 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.2.2 Install these access panels:
    − 11 BZ, 11 DZ
    − 12 AZ, 12 BZ, 12 DZ and 12 EZ
    − 21 GZ and 21 JZ
    2.2.3 Install the flight compartment and center and left passenger compartment carpets:
    − for executive interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − for standard interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A
    2.2.4 Install the passenger seats above the access panels 12 AZ, 12 CZ and 12 DZ:
    − for executive interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A
    − for standard interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A
    2.2.5 Install the pilot and co-pilot seats (refer to AMM 12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A).
    2.2.6 Remove the DO NOT OPERATE THE FLIGHT CONTROLS warning sign from the flight
    compartment.
    2.2.7 Remove the safety clip and close these circuit breakers:
    − FLT CONT CH A (AVIONIC 1 BUS)
    − FLT CONT CH B (AVIONIC 2 BUS)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-18 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    F E

    C
    G 2 3 4
    1
    H A
    5

    34 35
    5 D 8

    6
    9
    7

    B
    33

    28

    32 10
    27 11
    31 29
    2
    30 1
    8
    F
    12
    13

    E 26 14
    1
    6

    25 2
    24

    23
    19
    15 B
    22 16
    21 17

    6 C
    D 18
    20
    12-B-271000-A-S4080-00005-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Aileron Cables – Removal/Installation (Sheet 1 of 2)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-18 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    43 37
    K
    42
    L
    38

    41
    44
    N J

    39
    H
    40
    G
    45

    62

    46
    47
    66
    63

    2 65
    64 48
    49
    52

    N 51 50

    58

    61 57
    53

    56
    44
    55

    60
    59

    L
    54
    K
    1
    27118

    Figure 1 Aileron Cables – Removal/Installation (Sheet 2 of 2)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-18 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-01-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-18 Page 8
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    AILERON AUTOPILOT CABLE

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    AILERON AUTOPILOT CABLE - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 2
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Aileron Autopilot Cable – Removal/Installation....................................................... 5

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A GENERAL - AEROSPACE GROUND EQUIPMENT
    (AGE) AND TOOLS
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-22-10-00-00A-903A-A AUTOPILOT - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A STANDARD CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-03-16 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip Part 110.88.07.065 As
    Required
    Warning sign (DO NOT Part Local supply As
    OPERATE THE FLIGHT Required
    CONTROLS)
    Rigging pin Part 110.85.07.252 As
    Required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Lockwire Part P02-022 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    Refer to Fig. 1.
    1.1
    Note

    To identify the AGE and tools used in this procedure refer to the list of AGE and tools 12-
    B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A.

    Open and install a Safety clip (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065) on these circuit breakers:
    − A/P SERVO (AV 1 BUS)
    − A/P SERVO ENABLE (AV 1 BUS).
    1.2 Put up a Warning sign (DO NOT OPERATE THE FLIGHT CONTROLS) (Pt.No. Local supply) in the
    flight compartment.
    1.3 Remove the center carpet from above the access panel 12 EZ:
    − for executive interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − for standard interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-03-16 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1.4 Remove the access panel 12 EZ.


    1.5 Move the aileron controls to the center position and install the rigging pin (Rigging
    pin (Pt.No. 110.85.07.252)) Figure 1 [1] in the cable segment Figure 1 [9].
    1.6 Cut, remove and discard the lockwire from the three cable guards Figure 1 [11].
    1.7 Remove and keep the three cable guards Figure 1 [11].
    1.8 Remove the nut Figure 1 [5] and washer Figure 1 [6] and remove the autopilot cable end fitting
    Figure 1 [7] from the cable segment Figure 1 [9].
    1.9 Turn the capstan Figure 1 [3] and remove the other autopilot cable end fitting Figure 1 [8] from the
    cable segment Figure 1 [9].
    1.10 Turn the capstan Figure 1 [3] and remove the autopilot cable ball Figure 1 [13] from the socket
    Figure 1 [12] in the capstan Figure 1 [3].
    1.11 Unwind and remove the autopilot cable Figure 1 [2] from the capstan Figure 1 [3].
    2 Installation
    Refer to Fig. 1.
    2.1
    Note

    To identify the consumable materials used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Install the autopilot cable on the capstan, refer to Fig. 1, Detail C and D:
    2.1.1 Install the autopilot cable ball Figure 1 [13] in the socket Figure 1 [12] in the capstan
    Figure 1 [3].
    2.1.2 Wind the end of the autopilot cable with the ball end-fitting Figure 1 [8] clockwise around the
    capstan so that the cable fits in the capstan groove and the ball end-fitting Figure 1 [8]
    comes from the left side of the capstan (refer to View D Fig. 1).
    2.1.3 Wind the end of the autopilot cable with the turnbuckle end-fitting Figure 1 [7] counter-
    clockwise around the capstan so that the cable fits in the capstan groove and the turnbuckle
    end Figure 1 [7] comes from the right side of the capstan (refer to View D Fig. 1).
    2.1.4 Make sure that there are two turns of autopilot cable around the capstan and that the cable
    sits in the groove on the capstan.
    2.2 Install the autopilot cable ball-end fitting Figure 1 [8] in the cable segment Figure 1 [9]. Make sure the
    autopilot cable Figure 1 [2] is inside the pin Figure 1 [4] on the bearing support Figure 1 [14].
    2.3 Install the autopilot cable turnbuckle fitting Figure 1 [7] in the cable segment Figure 1 [9] with the
    washer Figure 1 [6] and nut Figure 1 [5]. Make sure the autopilot cable Figure 1 [2] is inside the pin
    Figure 1 [10] on the bearing support Figure 1 [14].
    2.4 Install the three cable guards Figure 1 [11]. Make sure that the autopilot cable Figure 1 [2] is inside the
    guards Figure 1 [11].
    2.5 Use Lockwire (Pt.No. P02-022) to safety the cable guards Figure 1 [11] to the adjacent screw
    Figure 1 [15].
    2.6 Remove the rigging pin Figure 1 [1] from the cable segment Figure 1 [9].
    2.7 Do the adjustment of the aileron autopilot cable, AMM 12-B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A.
    2.8 Do the autopilot system adjustment/test procedure, AMM 12-B-22-10-00-00A-903A-A.
    2.9 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-03-16 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.10 Install the access panel 12 EZ.


    2.11 Install the center carpet from above the access panel 12 EZ:
    − for executive interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − for standard interior, refer to AMM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A.
    2.12 Remove the warning sign DO NOT OPERATE THE FLIGHT CONTROLS from the flight compartment.
    2.13 Remove the safety clip and close these circuit breakers:
    − A/P SERVO (AV 1 BUS)
    − A/P SERVO ENABLE (AV 1 BUS).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-03-16 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    6
    5

    A
    B

    1
    C
    2

    A 14

    10

    9
    B
    2

    11
    2
    3

    11

    8 C
    13 12

    12-A-271002-A-S4080-30059-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Aileron Autopilot Cable – Removal/Installation (Sheet 1 of 2)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-03-16 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    8
    2

    11 11

    15 15

    11

    VIEW FROM
    ABOVE

    D
    12-A-271002-A-S4080-30058-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Aileron Autopilot Cable – Removal/Installation (Sheet 2 of 2)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-03-16 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-02-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-03-16 Page 7
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-03-16 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    AILERON CONTROL ROD – INNER WING

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    AILERON CONTROL ROD – INNER WING - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Aileron Control Rod (Inner Wing) – Removal/Installation....................................... 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Warning sign Part Local supply As
    required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-05-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Lockwire Part P02-007 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal (Refer to Fig. 1)
    1.1 Energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    1.2 Extend the flaps to 40°.
    1.3 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    1.4 Put signs (Warning sign (Pt.No. Local supply)) in the cockpit.
    1.5 Remove panels 12FR and 51KB or 12FL and 61KB to get access.
    1.6 Remove the nut (Figure 1 [11]), washer (Figure 1 [12]) and bolt (Figure 1 [14]) from the control rod fork
    end (Figure 1 [13]).
    1.7 Remove the nut (Figure 1 [5]), washer (Figure 1 [4]) and bolt (Figure 1 [3]) from the control rod bearing
    end (Figure 1 [6]).
    1.8 Measure and make a note of:
    − the distance from the center of the bolt hole in the fork end (Figure 1 [13]) and the end of the
    control rod (Figure 1 [2])
    − the distance from the center of the bolt hole in the bearing end (Figure 1 [6]) and the end of the
    control rod (Figure 1 [2])
    1.9 Remove the lockwire from the fork end (Figure 1 [13]) locknut (Figure 1 [10]).
    1.10 Open the saftey tab (Figure 1 [8]) on the bearing end locknut (Figure 1 [7]).
    1.11 Undo the locknuts and remove the fork end (Figure 1 [13]) and the bearing end (Figure 1 [6]) from the
    control rod (Figure 1 [2]).
    1.12 Remove the fork end (Figure 1 [13]) and the bearing end (Figure 1 [6]) from the control rod
    (Figure 1 [2]).
    1.13 Energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    1.14 Set the flaps to 30°.
    1.15 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    1.16 Carefully tilt and slide the control rod (Figure 1 [2]) towards the aircraft fuselage and remove it from the
    aircraft.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-05-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2 Installation (Refer to Fig. 1)


    2.1 Make sure that the flaps are set to 30°.
    2.2 Make sure that the fork end (Figure 1 [13]) and the bearing end (Figure 1 [6]) are not installed on the
    control rod (Figure 1 [2]).
    2.3 Carefully tilt and slide the control rod (Figure 1 [2]) into position on the aircraft from the fuselage
    towards the wing tip.
    2.4 Energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.5 Set the flaps to 40°.
    2.6 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.7 Install the fork end (Figure 1 [13]) and the bearing end (Figure 1 [6]) on the control rod (Figure 1 [2]).
    Make sure that you adjust the fork end and the bearing end to the measurements noted in the
    Removal step 8.
    2.8 Install the bolt (Figure 1 [3]), washer (Figure 1 [4]) and nut (Figure 1 [5]) at the bearing end
    (Figure 1 [6]) of the control rod.
    2.9 Install the bolt (Figure 1 [14]), washer (Figure 1 [12]) and nut (Figure 1 [11]) at the fork end
    (Figure 1 [13]) of the control rod.
    2.10 Do a check of the aileron control system adjustment (refer to DM 12-B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A).
    2.11 Make sure that the locknuts (Figure 1 [10]) and (Figure 1 [7]) are tightened.
    2.12 Close the lock tab (Figure 1 [7]) on the bearing end locknut (Figure 1 [7]).
    2.13 Use lockwire (Lockwire (Pt.No. P02-007)) to safety the fork end locknut (Figure 1 [10]).
    2.14 Install the access panels 12FR and 51KB or 12FL and 61KB.
    2.15 Energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.16 Retract the flaps to 0°.
    2.17 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.18 Remove the warning signs from the cockpit.
    2.19 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.20 Install the access panel 12FR and 51KB or 12FL and 61KB.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-05-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2
    1

    2 B

    14

    2
    13

    12
    B
    11
    10
    9
    8
    2
    7

    6
    3

    4
    5
    12-A-271005-A-S4080-30036-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Aileron Control Rod (Inner Wing) – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-05-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-05-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-05-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    AILERON CONTROL ROD – CENTER WING

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    AILERON CONTROL ROD – CENTER WING - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 2
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Aileron Control Rod (Center Wing) – Removal/Installation.................................... 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-27-00-00-00A-313A-A FLIGHT CONTROLS - INSPECTION/CHECK
    12-B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-27-10-07-00A-920A-A AILERON CONTROL ROD – OUTER WING -
    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-57-33-00-00A-920A-A WING TIP - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-57-33-00-00A-920B-A WING TIP – LED EXTERNAL LIGHTS - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    12-B-57-60-02-00A-920A-A AILERON - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-06-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-14 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Warning sign Part Local supply As
    required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    PTFE Teflon spray Part OKS 571 Or
    equivalen
    t

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    (Refer to Fig. 1)
    1.1 Energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    1.2 Extend the flaps to 40°.
    1.3 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    1.4 Put a Warning sign (Pt.No. Local supply) in the cockpit.
    1.5 Remove access panel 52RB and 52PB or 62RB and 62PB.
    1.6 Remove the wing tip (refer to AMM 12-B-57-33-00-00A-920A-A or 12-B-57-33-00-00A-920B-A).
    1.7 Remove the aileron (refer to AMM 12-B-57-60-02-00A-920A-A).
    1.8 Remove the outer wing aileron control rod (refer to AMM 12-B-27-10-07-00A-920A-A).
    1.9 Remove the nut Figure 1 [15], the washer Figure 1 [16] and the bolt Figure 1 [17] from the inboard end
    of the control rod Figure 1 [2].
    1.10 Remove the control rod Figure 1 [2] form the aircraft. Slide the rod out of the fairleads Figure 1 [7] and
    the support assembly rollers Figure 1 [4] towards the wing tip.
    2 Installation
    (Refer to Fig. 1)
    2.1 Position the control rod Figure 1 [2] on the aircraft. Slide the rod into the fairleads Figure 1 [7] and the
    support assembly rollers Figure 1 [4].

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-06-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-14 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.2 Install the bolt Figure 1 [17], washer Figure 1 [16] and nut Figure 1 [15] at the inboard end of the
    control rod Figure 1 [2].
    2.3 Install the outer wing aileron control rod (refer to AMM 12-B-27-10-07-00A-920A-A).
    2.4 Install the aileron (refer to AMM 12-B-57-60-02-00A-920A-A).
    2.5 Install the wing tip (refer to AMM 12-B-57-33-00-00A-920A-A or 12-B-57-33-00-00A-920B-A).
    2.6 Adjust the support assembly rollers Figure 1 [4] if necessary (refer to AMM 12-B-27-00-00-00A-313A-
    A).
    2.7 Do a check of the aileron control system adjustment (refer to AMM 12-B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A).
    2.8
    Note

    Do Step 2.8 for the left and right wing aileron control rods.

    Apply PTFE Teflon spray (Pt.No. OKS 571) to the sleeve on the aileron control rod at the three
    locations on each wing for the support assembly guide rollers Figure 1 [4]. Make sure that you apply
    spray to the whole sleeve (length and circumference).
    2.9 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.10 Install access panels 52RB and 52PB or 62RB and 62PB.
    2.11 Energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.12 Retract the flaps to 0°.
    2.13 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.14 Remove the warning signs from the cockpit.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-06-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-14 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    B
    A
    B 3
    C A

    2
    C A
    B
    A
    B
    A
    C
    3

    C
    2

    A
    20
    19 4

    18
    17

    C 2
    2 5
    6
    2
    16 7

    14
    15
    B
    8

    11
    10
    13 9

    12
    1

    12-A-271006-A-S4080-30037-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Aileron Control Rod (Center Wing) – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-06-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-14 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-06-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-14 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-06-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2013-10-14 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    AILERON CONTROL ROD – OUTER WING

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    AILERON CONTROL ROD – OUTER WING - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.............................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Aileron Control Rod (Outer Wing) – Removal/Installation...................................... 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-57-60-02-00A-920A-A AILERON - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Warning sign Part Local supply As
    required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-07-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal (Refer to Fig. 1)
    1.1 Energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    1.2 Extend the flaps to 40°.
    1.3 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    1.4 Put signs (Warning sign (Pt.No. Local supply)) in the cockpit.
    1.5 Remove access panel 52RB or 62RB to get access.
    1.6 Remove the aileron (refer to DM 12-B-57-60-02-00A-920A-A).
    1.7 Remove the bellcrank (Figure 1 [9]).
    1.8 Remove the nut (Figure 1 [11]), the washer (Figure 1 [12]) and the bolt (Figure 1 [10]) from the control
    rod fork end (Figure 1 [13]).
    1.9 Remove the nut (Figure 1 [5]), the washer (Figure 1 [4]) and the bolt (Figure 1 [3]) from the control rod
    bearing end (Figure 1 [6]).
    1.10 Slide the control rod (Figure 1 [1]) out of the aircraft towards the wing tip.
    2 Installation (Refer to Fig. 1)
    2.1 Slide the control rod (Figure 1 [1]) in position on the aircraft from the wingtip towards the fuselage.
    2.2 Install the bellcrank (Figure 1 [9]).
    2.3 Install the bolt (Figure 1 [3]), washer (Figure 1 [4]) and nut (Figure 1 [5]) at the bearing end
    (Figure 1 [6]) of the control rod.
    2.4 Install the bolt (Figure 1 [10]), washer (Figure 1 [12]) and nut (Figure 1 [11]) at the fork end
    (Figure 1 [13]) of the control rod.
    2.5 Install the aileron (refer to DM 12-B-57-60-02-00A-920A-A).
    2.6 Do a check of the aileron control system adjustment (refer to DM 12-B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A).
    2.7 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.8 Install access panels 52RB or 62RB.
    2.9 Energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.10 Retract the flaps to 0°.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-07-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.11 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).


    2.12 Remove the warning signs from the cockpit.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-07-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    6
    7
    4 8

    5
    1

    1
    13
    12
    15
    14

    11

    10
    9

    12-A-271007-A-S4080-30038-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Aileron Control Rod (Outer Wing) – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-07-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-07-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-07-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM – FUSELAGE BELLCRANK

    MAGNETIC PARTICLE INSPECTION

    Table of Contents Page

    AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM – FUSELAGE BELLCRANK - MAGNETIC PARTICLE 1


    INSPECTION..............................................................................................................................

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 2
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Fuselage Bellcrank – Magnetic Particle Inspection................................................ 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A CORROSION CONTROL - MAINTENANCE
    PRACTICES
    12-B-20-40-00-00A-904A-A CORROSION - REPAIR
    12-B-27-10-08-00A-920B-A AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM – FUSELAGE
    BELLCRANK - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-51-00-00-00A-352A-A STRUCTURES - STANDARD PRACTICES -
    MAGNETIC PARTICLE INSPECTION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    FUSELAGE BELLCRANK - REMOVE

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-08-00A-352B-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-10-27 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Part As
    required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Solvent Part P01-010 As
    required
    Cloth Part P02-003 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1
    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MANUFACTURERS'
    HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items AMM 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Use a Cloth (Pt.No. P02-003) made moist with Solvent (Pt.No. P01-010) to clean the bellcrank shaft.
    2 Examine the bellcrank shaft.
    3 Cracks or corrosion Level 2 or 3 are not permitted. Refer to AMM 12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A for the
    definition of corrosion levels. If you find cracks or corrosion Level 2 or 3, contact Pilatus Aircraft.
    4 Do a magnetic particle NDT inspection of the bellcrank shaft , SRM 12-B-51-00-00-00A-352A-A.
    5 Cracks are not permitted. If you find cracks contact Pilatus Aircraft.
    6 Apply the correct surface finish, as needed, AMM 12-B-20-40-00-00A-904A-A.
    7 Apply corrosion protection as needed, AMM 12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-08-00A-352B-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-10-27 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    8 Send a copy of the inspection report and all findings to Pilatus Aircraft Ltd.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-08-00A-352B-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-10-27 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    B
    1

    ET
    (BOLT HOLE PROBE)

    B
    4

    MT
    2

    ET
    (SHIELDED PROBE)

    ET
    (BOLT HOLE PROBE)

    ET
    (BOLT HOLE PROBE)

    12-A-271008-A-S4080-30062-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Fuselage Bellcrank – Magnetic Particle Inspection

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-08-00A-352B-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-10-27 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-08-00A-352B-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-10-27 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-08-00A-352B-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-10-27 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM – OUTER WING BELLCRANK

    EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION

    Table of Contents Page

    AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM – OUTER WING BELLCRANK - EDDY CURRENT 1


    INSPECTION..............................................................................................................................

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 2
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Aileron Bellcrank – Eddy Current Inspection.......................................................... 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A CORROSION CONTROL - MAINTENANCE
    PRACTICES
    12-B-20-40-00-00A-904A-A CORROSION - REPAIR
    12-B-20-50-04-00A-901A-A BUSHES AND BEARINGS - MAINTENANCE
    PRACTICES
    12-B-27-10-08-00A-920A-A AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM – OUTER WING
    BELLCRANK - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-51-00-00-00A-353A-A STRUCTURES - STANDARD PRACTICES - EDDY
    CURRENT INSPECTION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-08-00A-353A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-09-20 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Shielded surface probe Part Nortec 9222202 (or As
    equivalent) required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Solvent Part P01-010 As
    required
    Cloth Part P02-003 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Remove the bellcrank, AMM 12-B-27-10-08-00A-920A-A.
    2 Remove and discard the bearings from the bellcrank, AMM 12-B-20-50-04-00A-901A-A.
    3
    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MANUFACTURERS'
    HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items AMM 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Use a Cloth (Pt.No. P02-003) made moist with Solvent (Pt.No. P01-010) to clean the bellcrank.
    4 Examine the bellcrank and the attachment structure.
    5 Cracks or corrosion Level 2 or 3 are not permitted. Refer to AMM 12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A for the
    definition of corrosion levels. If you find cracks or corrosion Level 2 or 3, contact Pilatus Aircraft.
    6 Refer to Fig. 1. Use a Shielded surface probe (Pt.No. Nortec 9222202 (or equivalent))to do an eddy current
    NDT inspection of the bellcrank, SRM 12-B-51-00-00-00A-353A-A, Procedure 3. Use a frequency of 100 to
    500 kHz to do the eddy current inspection..

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-08-00A-353A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-09-20 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    7 Cracks are not permitted. If you find cracks contact Pilatus Aircraft.
    8 Apply the correct surface finish, as needed, AMM 12-B-20-40-00-00A-904A-A.
    9 Apply corrosion protection as needed, AMM 12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A.
    10 Install the bellcrank, AMM 12-B-27-10-08-00A-920A-A.
    11 Send a copy of the inspection report and all findings to Pilatus Aircraft Ltd.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-08-00A-353A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-09-20 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    EDDY CURRENT INSPECT


    THE SHADED AREAS

    12-A-271008-A-S4080-30043-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Aileron Bellcrank – Eddy Current Inspection

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-08-00A-353A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-09-20 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-08-00A-353A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-09-20 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-08-00A-353A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-09-20 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM – FUSELAGE BELLCRANK

    EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION

    Table of Contents Page

    AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM – FUSELAGE BELLCRANK - EDDY CURRENT 1


    INSPECTION..............................................................................................................................

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 2
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Aileron Fuselage Bellcrank – Inspection................................................................ 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A CORROSION CONTROL - MAINTENANCE
    PRACTICES
    12-B-20-40-00-00A-904A-A CORROSION - REPAIR
    12-B-20-50-04-00A-901A-A BUSHES AND BEARINGS - MAINTENANCE
    PRACTICES
    12-B-27-10-08-00A-352B-A AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM – FUSELAGE
    BELLCRANK - MAGNETIC PARTICLE INSPECTION
    12-B-27-10-08-00A-920B-A AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM – FUSELAGE
    BELLCRANK - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-51-00-00-00A-353A-A STRUCTURES - STANDARD PRACTICES - EDDY
    CURRENT INSPECTION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-08-00A-353B-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-10-27 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Bolt hole probe Part Nortec SPO-5393, 5/16" (or As
    equivalent) required
    Shielded surface probe Part Nortec 9222202 (or As
    equivalent) required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Solvent Part P01-010 As
    required
    Cloth Part P02-003 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Remove the aileron control system left and right fuselage bellcranks, AMM 12-B-27-10-08-00A-920B-A.
    2 Remove the bearings from the bellcrank levers Figure 1 [1] and Figure 1 [3], AMM 12-B-20-50-04-00A-901A-
    A.
    3
    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MANUFACTURERS'
    HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items AMM 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Use a Cloth (Pt.No. P02-003) made moist with Solvent (Pt.No. P01-010) to clean the bellcrank levers.
    4 Examine the bellcrank levers Figure 1 [1] and Figure 1 [3] and the attachment structure on the fuselage.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-08-00A-353B-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-10-27 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    5 Cracks or corrosion Level 2 or 3 are not permitted. Refer to AMM 12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A for the
    definition of corrosion levels. If you find cracks or corrosion Level 2 or 3, contact Pilatus Aircraft.
    6 Use the Bolt hole probe (Pt.No. Nortec SPO-5393, 5/16" (or equivalent)) to do an eddy current NDT
    inspection of the bolt hole bores in the bellcrank levers Figure 1 [1] and Figure 1 [3], SRM
    12-B-51-00-00-00A-353A-A, Procedure 5.
    7 Use the Shielded surface probe (Pt.No. Nortec 9222202 (or equivalent)) to do an eddy current NDT
    inspection of the support bracket Figure 1 [4] bearing lug surfaces, SRM 12-B-51-00-00-00A-353A-A,
    Procedure 3. Use a frequency of 100 to 500 kHz to do the inspection.
    8 Cracks are not permitted. If you find cracks contact Pilatus Aircraft.
    9 Do a magnetic particle NDT inspection of the bellcrank shaft, AMM 12-B-27-10-08-00A-352B-A.
    10 Install the bearings in the bellcrank levers Figure 1 [1] and Figure 1 [3], AMM 12-B-20-50-04-00A-901A-A.
    11 Apply the correct surface finish, as needed, AMM 12-B-20-40-00-00A-904A-A.
    12 Apply corrosion protection as needed, AMM 12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A.
    13 Install the bellcrank, AMM 12-B-27-10-08-00A-920B-A.
    14 Send a copy of the inspection report and all findings to Pilatus Aircraft Ltd.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-08-00A-353B-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-10-27 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    B
    1

    ET
    (BOLT HOLE PROBE)

    B
    4

    MT
    2

    ET
    (SHIELDED PROBE)

    ET
    (BOLT HOLE PROBE)

    ET
    (BOLT HOLE PROBE)

    12-A-271008-A-S4080-30062-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Aileron Fuselage Bellcrank – Inspection

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-08-00A-353B-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-10-27 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-08-00A-353B-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-10-27 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-08-00A-353B-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-10-27 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM – OUTER WING BELLCRANK

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM – OUTER WING BELLCRANK - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Aileron Bellcrank – Removal/Installation................................................................ 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-57-60-02-00A-920A-A AILERON - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Warning sign DO NOT MOVE Part Local supply As
    THE AILERON CONTROLS required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Cotter pin CSN 27-10-00-08-155 1

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-08-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-08-07 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Energize the aircraft electrical system, AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    1.2
    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU OPERATE THE FLAP CONTROLS. MAKE SURE THE FLAPS ARE
    CLEAR. INJURY TO PERSONS AND/OR DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT CAN OCCUR.

    Extend the flaps to 40°.


    1.3 De-energize the aircraft electrical system, AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    1.4 Put signs (Warning sign DO NOT MOVE THE AILERON CONTROLS (Pt.No. Local supply)) in the
    cockpit.
    1.5 Remove access panel 52RB or 62RB to get access.
    1.6 Remove the left and/or right ailerons, AMM 12-B-57-60-02-00A-920A-A
    1.7 Remove the nut Figure 1 [30], washer Figure 1 [25] and bolt Figure 1 [20] that hold the control rod fork
    end Figure 1 [31] to the left and/or right bellcrank Figure 1 [140].
    1.8 Disconnect the control rod fork end Figure 1 [31] from the bellcrank Figure 1 [140].
    1.9 Remove and discard the cotter pin Figure 1 [115].
    1.10 Remove the nut Figure 1 [120] and washer Figure 1 [125] that hold the bellcrank Figure 1 [140].
    1.11 Remove the bellcrank Figure 1 [140] from the aircraft.
    2 Installation
    2.1 Install the bellcrank Figure 1 [140] on the shaft Figure 1 [155].
    2.2 Install the washer Figure 1 [125] and the nut Figure 1 [120].
    2.3 Safety the nut with a new Cotter pin (Pt.No. CSN 27100008 155 ) Figure 1 [115].
    2.4 Connect the control rod Figure 1 [15] fork end Figure 1 [31] to the bellcrank with the bolt Figure 1 [20],
    washer Figure 1 [25] and nut Figure 1 [30].
    2.5 Install the left and/or right ailerons, AMM 12-B-57-60-02-00A-920A-A.
    2.6 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.7 Install the access panels you removed.
    2.8 Remove the warning sign from the flight compartment.
    2.9 Energize the aircraft electrical system, AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-08-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-08-07 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.10
    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU OPERATE THE FLAP CONTROLS. MAKE SURE THE FLAPS ARE
    CLEAR. INJURY TO PERSONS AND/OR DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT CAN OCCUR.

    Retract the flaps to 0°.


    2.11 De-energize the aircraft electrical system, AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-08-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-08-07 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    C
    A D A
    C
    D
    A C
    Ref 27-10-00-05

    31 B
    95 32
    110 33
    105
    100
    15 30
    25

    D
    36 20
    35
    34

    34
    30 35
    36
    25 38

    185

    170
    165
    15
    20 31
    25
    33
    150
    B 32

    30
    20
    160

    155

    75 149
    70 148

    C 55
    60 50
    140

    135

    85 130 115
    90
    125
    120

    65 147 146
    70
    75
    27021 H

    80 60
    45

    Figure 1 Aileron Bellcrank – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-08-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-08-07 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-08-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-08-07 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-08-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-08-07 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM – FUSELAGE BELLCRANK

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM – FUSELAGE BELLCRANK - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION..... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 2
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Aileron Bellcrank – Removal/Installation................................................................ 5

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A ACCESS PROVISION – HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR
    - DESCRIPTION
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE SEATS - REMOVAL INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A STANDARD SEATS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A STANDARD CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-08-00A-920B-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-08-07 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Warning sign DO NOT MOVE Part Local supply As
    THE AILERON CONTROLS required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Cotter pin CSN 27-10-00-05-045 1

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Energize the aircraft electrical system, AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    1.2
    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU OPERATE THE FLAP CONTROLS. MAKE SURE THE FLAPS ARE
    CLEAR. INJURY TO PERSONS AND/OR DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT CAN OCCUR.

    Extend the flaps to 40°.


    1.3 De-energize the aircraft electrical system, AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    1.4 Put a Warning sign DO NOT MOVE THE AILERON CONTROLS (Pt.No. Local supply) in the flight
    compartment.
    1.5 Remove passenger compartment seats as needed:
    − Executive interior, AMM 12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A
    − Standard interior, AMM 12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A.
    1.6 Remove the passenger compartment carpets as needed:
    − Executive interior, AMM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − Standard interior, AMM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A.
    1.7 Remove floor panels 12 GZ and 12 IZ, AMM 12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A.
    1.8 Remove panels 12 FR and 51 KB or 12 FL and 61 KB to get access.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-08-00A-920B-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-08-07 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1.9 Remove the nut Figure 1 [165], washer Figure 1 [160] and bolt Figure 1 [150] from the left and right
    aileron control rod Figure 1 [185] connections to the bellcrank lever Figure 1 [105].
    1.10 Disconnect the aileron control rod Figure 1 [185] from the bellcrank lever Figure 1 [105].
    1.11 Remove the nut Figure 1 [70], washer Figure 1 [75] and bolt Figure 1 [80] from control rod connection
    to the bellcrank lever Figure 1 [155].
    1.12 Disconnect the control rod from the lever Figure 1 [155].
    1.13 Remove and discard the cotter pin Figure 1 [45] from the nut Figure 1 [50] on the bellcrank shaft
    Figure 1 [180] .
    1.14 Remove the nut Figure 1 [50], washer Figure 1 [55] and washer Figure 1 [60].
    1.15 Remove the nut Figure 1 [160], washer Figure 1 [165] and bolt Figure 1 [170] from the bellcrank lever
    Figure 1 [155].
    1.16 Remove the nuts Figure 1 [15], washers Figure 1 [20], bolts Figure 1 [35] and Figure 1 [40] and
    packers Figure 1 [25] and Figure 1 [30] that hold the bearing support bracket Figure 1 [10] to the
    airframe.
    1.17 Remove the bearing support bracket Figure 1 [10].
    1.18 Remove the lever Figure 1 [155] from the bellcrank shaft Figure 1 [180].
    1.19 Remove the nut Figure 1 [110], washer Figure 1 [115], washer Figure 1 [120] and bolt Figure 1 [125]
    from the bellcrank lever Figure 1 [105].
    1.20 Remove the bellcrank lever Figure 1 [105].
    1.21 If needed, remove the bellcrank shaft Figure 1 [180] from the aircraft. Make sure that you keep the
    distance bush Figure 1 [190].
    2 Installation
    2.1 If you removed the bellcrank shaft, install the bellcrank shaft Figure 1 [180] on the aircraft. Make sure
    that the distance bush Figure 1 [190] is installed correctly on the shaft.
    2.2 Install the lever Figure 1 [105] on the bellcrank shaft Figure 1 [180].
    2.3 Install the bolt Figure 1 [125], washer Figure 1 [120], washer Figure 1 [115] and nut Figure 1 [110] that
    hold the lever Figure 1 [105] on the bellcrank shaft Figure 1 [180].
    2.4 Install the lever Figure 1 [155] on the shaft Figure 1 [180].
    2.5 Install the bolt Figure 1 [170], washer Figure 1 [165] and nut Figure 1 [160] that hold the lever
    Figure 1 [155] on the bellcrank shaft Figure 1 [180].
    2.6 Hold the bearing support bracket Figure 1 [10] in position on the aircraft and install the bolts
    Figure 1 [35] and Figure 1 [40], the packers Figure 1 [25] and Figure 1 [30], the washers Figure 1 [20]
    and the nuts Figure 1 [15].
    2.7 Install the washer Figure 1 [60], washer Figure 1 [55] and nut Figure 1 [50] on the bellcrank shaft
    Figure 1 [180].
    2.8 Safety the nut Figure 1 [50] with a new Cotter pin (Pt.No. CSN 27100005 045 ) Figure 1 [45].
    2.9 At the wing fairing left and right, connect the inner wing control rod to the bellcrank lever Figure 1 [155]
    with the bolt Figure 1 [80], washer Figure 1 [75] and nut Figure 1 [70].
    2.10 Connect the aileron control rod Figure 1 [185] to the bellcrank lever Figure 1 [105] and install the bolt
    Figure 1 [150], washer Figure 1 [160] and nut Figure 1 [165].
    2.11 Make sure that the work areas are clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.12 Remove the warning sign from the flight compartment.
    2.13 Do a functional test of the aileron control system, AMM 12-B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-08-00A-920B-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-08-07 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.14 Install the floor panels you removed.


    2.15 Install the passenegr compartment carpets you removed:
    − Executive interior, AMM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − Standard interior, AMM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A.
    2.16 Install the passenger compartment seats you removed:
    − Executive interior, AMM 12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A
    − Standard interior, AMM 12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A.
    2.17 Install panels 12FR and 51KB or 12FL and 61KB.
    2.18 Energize the aircraft electrical system, AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.
    2.19
    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU OPERATE THE FLAP CONTROLS. MAKE SURE THE FLAPS ARE
    CLEAR. INJURY TO PERSONS AND/OR DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT CAN OCCUR.

    Retract the flaps to 0°.


    2.20 De-energize the aircraft electrical system, AMM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-08-00A-920B-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-08-07 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    ZONE 12
    B

    A
    A B

    150

    185
    110
    105
    115

    160

    165

    35

    120
    40
    25
    190 125

    30

    10

    80

    180

    20
    15
    75

    60 70

    155
    55
    50
    170
    160 165
    45
    B

    12-A-271008-A-S4080-30046-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Aileron Bellcrank – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-08-00A-920B-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-08-07 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-08-00A-920B-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-08-07 Page 6
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM – FUSELAGE CABLE QUADRANT

    EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION

    Table of Contents Page

    AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM – FUSELAGE CABLE QUADRANT - EDDY CURRENT 1


    INSPECTION..............................................................................................................................

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 2
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Aileron Quadrant – Eddy Current Inspection.......................................................... 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A CORROSION CONTROL - MAINTENANCE
    PRACTICES
    12-B-20-40-00-00A-904A-A CORROSION - REPAIR
    12-B-20-50-04-00A-901A-A BUSHES AND BEARINGS - MAINTENANCE
    PRACTICES
    12-B-27-10-04-00A-920A-A AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM - AILERON / RUDDER
    INTERCONNECT SPRING PACK - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    12-B-27-10-09-00A-920A-A AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM – FUSELAGE CABLE
    QUADRANT - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-51-00-00-00A-353A-A STRUCTURES - STANDARD PRACTICES - EDDY
    CURRENT INSPECTION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-09-00A-353A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-10-21 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Bolt hole probe Part Nortec SPO 5393 3/16 in (or As
    equivalent) required
    Bolt hole probe Part Nortec SPO 5393 3/8 in (or As
    equivalent) required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Solvent Part P01-010 As
    required
    Cloth Part P02-003 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Remove the aileron / rudder interconnect spring pack, AMM 12-B-27-10-04-00A-920A-A.
    2 Remove the aileron cable quadrant, AMM 12-B-27-10-09-00A-920A-A.
    3 Remove the bearing Figure 1 [65] from the bearing support Figure 1 [70], AMM 12-B-20-50-04-00A-901A-A.
    4 Remove the nut Figure 1 [160], washer Figure 1 [155] and bolt Figure 1 [150] from the drive lever
    Figure 1 [145].
    5 Remove the nut Figure 1 [190], washer Figure 1 [185] and bolt Figure 1 [180] from the switch lever
    Figure 1 [175].
    6 Use a Cloth (Pt.No. P02-003) made moist with Solvent (Pt.No. P01-010) to clean the quadrant Figure 1 [90]
    and the levers Figure 1 [145] and Figure 1 [175], including the holes for the removed fasteners.
    7 Examine the quadrant Figure 1 [90], the levers Figure 1 [145] and Figure 1 [175] and the torsion tube
    Figure 1 [195].
    8 Cracks or corrosion Level 2 or 3 are not permitted. Refer to AMM 12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A for the
    definition of corrosion levels. If you find cracks or corrosion Level 2 or 3, contact Pilatus Aircraft.
    9 Use the appropriate bolt hole probe and do an eddy current NDT inspection of the quadrant Figure 1 [90],
    the fastener holes in the levers Figure 1 [145] and Figure 1 [175], and the torsion tube Figure 1 [195], SRM
    12-B-51-00-00-00A-353A-A, Procedure 5.
    10 Cracks are not permitted. If you find cracks contact Pilatus Aircraft.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-09-00A-353A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-10-21 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    11 Install the bearing Figure 1 [65] in the bearing support Figure 1 [70], AMM 12-B-20-50-04-00A-901A-A.
    12 Install the bolt Figure 1 [180], washer Figure 1 [185] and nut Figure 1 [190] that hold the switch lever
    Figure 1 [175] on the torsion tube Figure 1 [195].
    13 Install the bolt Figure 1 [150], washer Figure 1 [155] and nut Figure 1 [160] that hold the drive lever
    Figure 1 [145] on the torsion tube Figure 1 [195].
    14 Apply the correct surface finish, as needed, AMM 12-B-20-40-00-00A-904A-A.
    15 Apply corrosion protection as needed, AMM 12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A.
    16 Install the quadrant, AMM 12-B-27-10-09-00A-920A-A.
    17 Install the aileron / rudder interconnect spring pack, AMM 12-B-27-10-04-00A-920A-A.
    18 Send a copy of the inspection report and all findings to Pilatus Aircraft Ltd.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-09-00A-353A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-10-21 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    ZONE 12

    B
    A
    C
    Ref. 27-10-00-04 180
    135
    140
    60 A
    80
    170 75

    165 55
    10 65 85
    145 175
    185 15
    130 190

    120
    20
    75
    150
    195

    85

    80 70
    130
    25
    155
    160
    135
    140
    C 90
    50
    30
    45

    35
    40
    30 105

    100
    110

    35

    115

    95

    B
    12-A-271009-A-S4080-30047-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Aileron Quadrant – Eddy Current Inspection

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-09-00A-353A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-10-21 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-09-00A-353A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-10-21 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-09-00A-353A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-10-21 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM – FUSELAGE CABLE QUADRANT

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM – FUSELAGE CABLE QUADRANT - REMOVAL/ 1


    INSTALLATION..........................................................................................................................

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Aileron Quadrant – Removal/Installation................................................................ 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-50-04-00A-901A-A BUSHES AND BEARINGS - MAINTENANCE
    PRACTICES
    12-B-27-10-01-00A-920A-A AILERON CABLES - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-27-10-02-00A-920A-A AILERON AUTOPILOT CABLE - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-09-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-08-07 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Cotter pin CSN 27-10-00-04-102 2
    Cotter pin CSN 27-10-00-07-040 1
    Cotter pin CSN 27-10-00-07-095 1
    Corrosion preventive Part P04-039 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Remove the aileron autopilot cable, AMM 12-B-27-10-02-00A-920A-A.
    1.2 Remove the aileron control cables, AMM 12-B-27-10-01-00A-920A-A.
    1.3 Remove and discard the cotter pins Figure 1 [18] from the nuts Figure 1 [19].
    1.4 Remove the nut Figure 1 [19], washer Figure 1 [20], bush Figure 1 [21], special washer Figure 1 [23],
    washer Figure 1 [24] and bolt Figure 1 [25] that hold the control rod eye ends Figure 1 [22] and
    Figure 1 [28] to the quadrant Figure 1 [11].
    1.5 Remove and discard the cotter pin Figure 1 [12] from the nut Figure 1 [14].
    1.6 Remove the nut Figure 1 [14], washer Figure 1 [13], bolt Figure 1 [1] and the washer Figure 1 [2].
    1.7 Remove the nuts Figure 1 [6], washers Figure 1 [5] and bolts Figure 1 [4] that hold the quadrant
    bearing support Figure 1 [7].
    1.8 Remove the nuts Figure 1 [30], washers Figure 1 [29] and bolts Figure 1 [31] that hold the quadrant
    bearing support Figure 1 [7].
    1.9 Remove the quadrant bearing support Figure 1 [7].
    1.10 Remove and discard the cotter pin Figure 1 [15] from the nut Figure 1 [16].
    1.11 Remove the nut Figure 1 [16], washer Figure 1 [17], bolt Figure 1 [27] and washer Figure 1 [26].
    1.12 Remove the quadrant Figure 1 [11] and the washer Figure 1 [2] from the aircraft.
    2 Installation
    2.1 Make sure that the quadrant bearings are serviceable. Replace the bearings if needed, AMM 12-
    B-20-50-04-00A-901A-A.
    2.2 Put the quadrant Figure 1 [11] in position on the aircraft.
    2.3 Apply Corrosion preventive (Pt.No. P04-039) to the bolt Figure 1 [27] and washer Figure 1 [26].

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-09-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-08-07 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.4 Install the washer Figure 1 [26], bolt Figure 1 [27], washer Figure 1 [17] and nut Figure 1 [16] through
    the lower bearing support and quadrant Figure 1 [11].
    2.5 Install a new Cotter pin (Pt.No. CSN 27100007 095 ) Figure 1 [15] to safety the nut Figure 1 [16].
    2.6 Install the washer Figure 1 [2] on the quadrant Figure 1 [11].
    2.7 Put the quadrant bearing support Figure 1 [7] in position on the quadrant.
    2.8 Make sure that the pins Figure 1 [9] engage in the holes in the upper and the lower bearing supports.
    2.9 Install the bolts Figure 1 [4], washers Figure 1 [5] and nuts Figure 1 [6] to hold the quadrant bearing
    support Figure 1 [7].
    2.10 Install the nuts Figure 1 [30], washers Figure 1 [29] and bolts Figure 1 [31] that hold the quadrant
    bearing support.
    2.11 Install the washer Figure 1 [2], bolt Figure 1 [1], washer Figure 1 [13] and nut Figure 1 [14] through the
    bearing support Figure 1 [7] and quadrant Figure 1 [11].
    2.12 Install a new Cotter pin (Pt.No. CSN 27100007 040 ) Figure 1 [12] to safety the nut Figure 1 [14].
    2.13 Connect the control rod eye ends Figure 1 [22] and Figure 1 [28] to the quadrant Figure 1 [11] with the
    bolt Figure 1 [25], washer Figure 1 [24], special washer Figure 1 [23], bush Figure 1 [21], washer
    Figure 1 [20] and nut Figure 1 [19].
    2.14 Install a new Cotter pin (Pt.No. CSN 27100004 102 ) Figure 1 [18] to safety the nuts Figure 1 [19].
    2.15 Install the aileron control cables, AMM 12-B-27-10-01-00A-920A-A.
    2.16 Install the aileron autopilot cable, AMM 12-B-27-10-02-00A-920A-A.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-09-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-08-07 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    ZONE 12

    1 B
    A
    2
    5
    4 A
    34 3 6
    33
    B
    7
    32
    31
    8
    9

    30 13
    2
    10
    14
    29 18 12
    20 19
    11
    21

    15 16

    17
    28
    23

    24

    18
    8 19
    20
    25
    21
    9
    22

    23

    26 24

    25

    27

    12-B-271009-A-S4080-00007-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Aileron Quadrant – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-09-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-08-07 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-09-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-08-07 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-10-09-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-08-07 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    AILERON TRIM

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    AILERON TRIM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION................................................................ 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1
    2 Component Description.......................................................................................... 2
    2.1 Trim Switch............................................................................................................. 2
    2.2 Trim Interrupt Switch.............................................................................................. 2
    2.3 Aileron Trim Actuator.............................................................................................. 2
    2.4 Trim Engage Switch............................................................................................... 2
    2.5 Trim Indication........................................................................................................ 2
    3 Operation (Ref. )..................................................................................................... 3

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Aileron Trim – Schematic....................................................................................... 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-22-10-00-00A-040A-A AUTOPILOT - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-27-25-00-00A-040A-A RUDDER TRIM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-27-40-00-00A-040A-A HORIZONTAL STABILIZER TRIM - DESCRIPTION
    AND OPERATION

    Description

    1 General
    The aileron trim system is used to make small changes to the aircraft attitude (roll). This lets the aircraft fly level
    with no input from the control wheels. The aileron trim system has:
    − Two trim switches (pilot and co-pilot)
    − A trim interrupt switch
    − An aileron trim actuator
    − Two trim engage switches (pilot and co-pilot)

    The aileron trim system sends:


    − An aileron trim monitoring signal to the Modular Avionics Unit (MAU) autopilot function (Refer to DM 12-
    B-22-10-00-00A-040A-A)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-15-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − A manual trim mode signal to the Modular Avionics Unit (MAU) autopilot function.

    The power supply to the system are:


    − 28 VDC through the AIL TRIM (ESSENTIAL BUS) circuit breaker
    − 28 VDC through the TRIM CTL (ESSENTIAL BUS) circuit breaker

    2 Component Description

    2.1 Trim Switch


    Each trim switch controls the power supply to the aileron trim actuator and the horizontal stabilizer trim actuator
    (Refer to DM 12-B-27-40-00-00A-040A-A).
    The trim switches are on the control wheels. They are four-position rocker switches. The aileron trim positions are
    LH and RH. The other positions are DN and UP for the horizontal stabilizer.

    2.2 Trim Interrupt Switch


    If a trim runaway occurs, the trim interrupt switch is used to disconnect the 28 VDC power supply from the autopilot
    pitch trim adapter and the aileron, rudder and horizontal stabilizer trim actuators.
    The switch is a rocker-type with a safety cover. It is installed on the center pedestal. It is identified by the caption
    INTERRUPT - TRIM and has the position marks NORM (normal) and INTR (interrupt).

    2.3 Aileron Trim Actuator


    The aileron trim actuator is an electrically-operated linear actuator which moves the aileron trim tab. The aileron
    trim actuator is controlled manually when one of the trim engage switches is pressed. There is no autotrim facility
    on the aileron trim system.
    The aileron trim actuator is in the left aileron. An adjustable rod connects it to the trim tab. It is in a rectangular case
    with an electrical connector and an eye-end at one end and a connection rod at the other. The case contains an
    electric motor, gears and a screw assembly. Two limit switches stop the motor when the aileron trim actuator is fully
    extended or retracted. A potentiometer is used to send a position signal to the MAU.

    2.4 Trim Engage Switch


    A trigger-type trim engage switch is installed on the pilots and co-pilots control wheels. The trigger switch must be
    pressed and held in to operate the trim switch.
    The trim engage switches are used to connect the power supply to the trim switches. At the same time, they
    connect a 28 VDC supply to the MAU. This gives a signal to the MAU that the aileron is being trimmed manually,
    which disconnects the autopilot.

    2.5 Trim Indication


    The Multi Function Display (MFD) gives an indication of the amount of trim of the aileron, rudder and horizontal
    stabilizer.The trim indications are three graduated dials with a zero-trim position. Each dial has an aircraft symbol
    pointer which turns in relation to the amount of trim.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-15-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3 Operation (Ref. Fig. 1)


    When the trim engage trigger switch is pushed, a 28 VDC supply is connected to the trim switch. At the same time,
    it connects a 28 VDC supply to the MAU ‛trim engage mode’ autopilot function. This disconnects the autopilot.
    When the trim switch is pushed and held to the RH or LH position, 28 VDC energizes the right aileron-trim relay
    (K161E3) or the left aileron-trim relay (K161D3).
    When the right aileron-trim relay (K161E3) is energized, a 28 VDC supply goes through the contacts of the trim-
    interrupt switch and the right aileron-trim relay (K161E3) to the aileron trim actuator. The return from the aileron trim
    actuator goes through a second set of contacts of the right aileron-trim relay (K161E3) to ground.
    When the left aileron-trim relay (K161D3) is energized, a 28 VDC supply goes to the aileron trim actuator through
    the contacts of the trim-interrupt switch, the (de-energized) right aileron-trim relay (K161E3) and the (energized) left
    aileron-trim relay K161D3. The return from the aileron trim actuator goes through a second set of contacts of the
    left aileron-trim relay (K161D3) and the right aileron-trim relay (K161E3) to ground.
    The aileron trim actuator extends or retracts to move the aileron trim tab up or down. The actuator stops when the
    trim switch is released or when the aileron trim actuator limit switches operate. The aileron trim actuator sends a
    position signal to the MAU to give an indication of the amount of aileron trim to be shown on the MFD.
    The MAU monitors the aileron trim system circuit during autopilot operation and will disengage the autopilot when it
    detects any uncommanded aileron trim movement. The trim interrupt switch is manually operated to disconnect the
    power supply from the trim actuator through the trim relays (K161E3 and K161D3) if a trim runaway occurs.
    The other trim actuators are also disconnected from the 28 VDC supply by the trim interrupt switch (Refer to DM
    12-B-27-25-00-00A-040A-A and 12-B-27-40-00-00A-040A-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-15-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Johnson Mark EC A
    Sansome Cliv e

    Holer Danie l

    12-B-271000-A-S4080-00002-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Aileron Trim – Schematic

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-15-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    AILERON TRIM

    ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Table of Contents Page

    AILERON TRIM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST..................................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A GENERAL - AEROSPACE GROUND EQUIPMENT
    (AGE) AND TOOLS
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required
    Rigging block Part 513.27.12.075 As
    required
    Steel ruler Part Local supply As
    required
    Warning sign (DO NOT Part Local supply As
    OPERATE THE FLIGHT required
    CONTROLS)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-15-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedure to do a functional test of the aileron trim system on the left aileron.
    2 Functional Test Of The Aileron Trim System
    2.1 Preparation
    2.1.1
    Note

    To identify the AGE and tools used in this procedure refer to the list of AGE and tools 12-
    B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A.

    Open and install a clip (Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on
    this circuit breaker:
    − A/P SERVO (AVIONIC 1 BUS)
    2.1.2 Put the sign (Warning sign (DO NOT OPERATE THE FLIGHT CONTROLS) (Pt.No. Local
    supply)) in the flight compartment.
    2.1.3 Move the aileron control system to the center position and install the rigging block (Rigging
    block (Pt.No. 513.27.12.075)) in the pilot control column.
    2.1.4 Energize the aircraft electrical system (Refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.2 Procedure
    2.2.1
    Note

    Two persons are necessary for this test.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-15-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Note

    When the aileron trim is at the 0° green mark on the MFD aileron trim indication, the aileron
    trim tab is 0.244 in (6,2 mm) up. Measured from the aileron rear edge center line and the tab
    rear edge center line.

    Set the TRIM INTERRUPT switch to INTR.


    2.2.2 Push and hold the TRIM ENGAGE switch on the pilot control wheel.
    2.2.3 Operate the PITCH/AIL TRIM switch on the pilot control wheel and make sure the aileron
    trim does not operate.
    2.2.4 Set the TRIM INTERRUPT switch to NORMAL.
    2.2.5 Operate the PITCH/AIL TRIM switch on the pilot control wheel to the left until movement of
    the trim tab stops.
    2.2.6 Make sure the trim tab moves down.
    2.2.7 Release the PITCH/AIL TRIM and TRIM ENGAGE switches on the pilot control wheel.
    2.2.8 Use the Steel ruler (Pt.No. Local supply) and measure the distance between the aileron rear
    edge center line and the tab rear edge center line. Make sure the distance is 0.457 ± 0.047
    in (11,6 ± 1,2 mm).
    2.2.9 Push and hold the TRIM ENGAGE switch on the pilot control wheel.
    2.2.10 Operate the PITCH/AIL TRIM switch on the pilot control wheel to the right until movement of
    the trim tab stops.
    2.2.11 Make sure the trim tab moves up.
    2.2.12 Release the PITCH/AIL TRIM and TRIM ENGAGE switches on the pilot control wheel.
    2.2.13 Measure the distance between the aileron rear edge center line and the tab rear edge center
    line. Make sure the distance is 0.913 ± 0.047 in (23,2 ± 1,2 mm).
    2.2.14 If the movement of the trim tab is not in limits, do the adjustment of the left aileron trim tab
    (Refer to DM 12-B-27-10-00-00A-903A-A).
    2.2.15 Push and hold the TRIM ENGAGE switch on the copilot control wheel.
    2.2.16 Push and hold the PITCH/AIL TRIM switch on the copilot control wheel to the left until
    movement of the trim tab stops. Make sure the trim tab moves smoothly through its complete
    range.
    2.2.17 Push and hold the PITCH/AIL TRIM switch on the copilot control wheel to the right until
    movement of the trim tab stops. Make sure the trim tab moves smoothly through its complete
    range.
    2.2.18 Operate the PITCH/AIL TRIM switch on the copilot control wheel to the left until the Multi
    Function Display (MFD) aileron trim indication shows on the green mark.
    2.2.19 Release the PITCH/AIL TRIM and TRIM ENGAGE switches on the copilot control wheel.
    2.3 Close Up
    2.3.1 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (Refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.3.2 Remove the rigging block assembly from the pilot control column.
    2.3.3 Remove the safety clips and close this circuit breaker:
    − A/P SERVO (AVIONIC 1 BUS)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-15-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.3.4 Remove the DO NOT OPERATE THE FLIGHT CONTROLS warning sign from the flight
    compartment.

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-15-00-00A-903A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    AILERON TRIM ACTUATOR

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    AILERON TRIM ACTUATOR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION...................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Aileron Trim Actuator – Removal/Installation......................................................... 5

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-27-15-00-00A-903A-A AILERON TRIM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required
    Warning sign (DO NOT Part Local supply As
    OPERATE THE FLIGHT required
    CONTROLS)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-15-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Cable tie Part P09-014 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Cotter pin CSN 27-10-00-09-124 As
    required

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Open and install a safety clip (Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on this
    circuit breaker:
    − AIL TRIM (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    1.2 Put up a sign (Warning sign (DO NOT OPERATE THE FLIGHT CONTROLS) (Pt.No. Local supply)) in
    the flight compartment.
    1.3 Remove the access panels 52 SB, 52 VB and 52 OB.
    1.4 Remove the cable ties (Figure 1 [11]) and disconnect the electrical connector (Figure 1 [7]) from the
    aircraft electrical connector (Figure 1 [6]).
    1.5 Remove the cotter pin (Figure 1 [10]), nut (Figure 1 [9]), washer (Figure 1 [8]), bolt (Figure 1 [4]) and
    bush (Figure 1 [5]).
    1.6 Remove the cotter pin (Figure 1 [22]), nut (Figure 1 [23]), washer (Figure 1 [24]), bolt (Figure 1 [1]) and
    bonding lead (Figure 1 [2]) from the rod end (Figure 1 [3]).
    1.7 Remove the four bolts (Figure 1 [20]) and washers (Figure 1 [19]) from the trim mechanism
    (Figure 1 [18]).
    1.8 Carefully remove the trim mechanism (Figure 1 [18]) and aileron trim actuator (Figure 1 [12]) from the
    aileron.
    1.9 Remove the cotter pin (Figure 1 [13]), nut (Figure 1 [14]), bolt (Figure 1 [17]) and bushes
    (Figure 1 [15]) and (Figure 1 [16]).
    1.10 Remove the aileron trim actuator (Figure 1 [12]) from the trim mechanism (Figure 1 [18]).
    1.11 Loosen the locknut (Figure 1 [26]). Remove and keep the rod end (Figure 1 [27]).
    2 Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-15-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    2.1 Connect the electrical connector (Figure 1 [7]) to the aircraft electrical connector (Figure 1 [6]).
    2.2 Remove the safety clip and close the circuit breaker:
    − AIL TRIM (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    2.3 Energize the aircraft electrical system (Refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.4 Push and hold the TRIM ENGAGE switch on the pilot control wheel.
    2.5 Operate the PITCH/AIL TRIM switch on the pilot control wheel and set the trim to the green mark on
    the MFD trim indicator.
    2.6 Make sure the dimension between the end of the aileron trim actuator output rod (Figure 1 [25]) and
    the center of the aileron trim actuator attachment lug is 4.88 in (124,05 mm).
    2.7 Release the TRIM ENGAGE switch on the pilot control wheel.
    2.8 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (Refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.9 Open and install a safety clip on this circuit breaker:
    − AIL TRIM (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    2.10 Disconnect the electrical connector (Figure 1 [7]) from the aircraft electrical connector (Figure 1 [6]).
    2.11 Install the rod end (Figure 1 [27]) on the aileron trim actuator output rod (Figure 1 [25]).
    2.12 Adjust the rod end (Figure 1 [27]) to give a dimension of 1.06 in (27 mm) between the end of the
    aileron trim actuator output rod (Figure 1 [25]) and the center of the rod end (Figure 1 [27]).
    2.13 Tighten the locknut (Figure 1 [26]). Make sure the dimension between the center of the aileron trim
    actuator (Figure 1 [12]) attachment lug and the center of the rod end (Figure 1 [27]) is 5.945 in (151
    mm).
    2.14 Connect the aileron trim actuator (Figure 1 [12]) to the trim mechanism (Figure 1 [18]) and install the
    bushes (Figure 1 [15]) and (Figure 1 [16]), bolt (Figure 1 [17]), nut (Figure 1 [14]) and new cotter pin
    (Figure 1 [13]).
    2.15 Carefully put the aileron trim actuator (Figure 1 [12]) and trim mechanism (Figure 1 [18]) in position in
    the aileron and install the four bolts (Figure 1 [20]) and washers (Figure 1 [19]).
    2.16 Install the bolt (Figure 1 [4]), bush (Figure 1 [5]), washer (Figure 1 [8]), nut (Figure 1 [9]) and new
    cotter pin (Figure 1 [10]).
    2.17 Put the electrical connector (Figure 1 [7]) through the wing rib and connect the electrical connector
    (Figure 1 [7]) to the aircraft electrical connector (Figure 1 [6]).
    2.18 Install cable ties (Cable tie (Pt.No. P09-014)) (Figure 1 [11]) as necessary.
    2.19 Connect the rod end (Figure 1 [3]) to the aileron trim tab with the bolt (Figure 1 [1]), bonding lead
    (Figure 1 [2]), washer (Figure 1 [24]), nut (Figure 1 [23]) and new Cotter pin (Figure 1 [22]).
    2.20 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.21 Remove the safety clip and close the circuit breaker:
    − AIL TRIM (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    2.22 Do the functional test of the aileron trim (Refer to DM 12-B-27-15-00-00A-903A-A).
    2.23 Install the access panels 52 VB 52 SB and 52 OB.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-15-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.24 Remove the warning sign from the flight compartment.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-15-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    B
    A

    A
    5
    1.
    (27 06 in (15 .94 in
    .00 1.0
    mm 0m
    ) m)
    4
    (12 .88 in
    4.0
    5m
    m )

    1
    27
    26
    25

    D 2

    18
    19 24
    20 23

    22

    C
    3
    D
    4

    17
    16
    5

    15 12
    14

    13 11
    11

    11
    C 12

    9 B 6
    27201

    10

    Figure 1 Aileron Trim Actuator – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-15-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-15-01-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2009-11-30 Page 6
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION........................................ 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1
    2 Component Description (Ref. )............................................................................... 2
    2.1 Rudder Pedals........................................................................................................ 2
    2.1.1 Pedals..................................................................................................................... 2
    2.1.2 Stay And Beam Assembly...................................................................................... 2
    2.1.3 Adjustment Mechanism.......................................................................................... 2
    2.1.4 Torque Tube........................................................................................................... 2
    2.2 Cable System......................................................................................................... 3
    2.3 Rudder.................................................................................................................... 3
    3 Operation................................................................................................................ 3

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Rudder System – Layout........................................................................................ 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-22-10-00-00A-040A-A AUTOPILOT - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-27-10-00-00A-040A-A AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-27-25-00-00A-040A-A RUDDER TRIM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-32-40-00-00A-040A-A WHEELS AND BRAKES - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-32-50-00-00A-040A-A NOSE WHEEL STEERING - DESCRIPTION AND
    OPERATION
    12-B-55-00-00-00A-040A-A STABILIZERS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Description

    1 General
    The rudder system controls the yaw attitude of the aircraft.
    The rudder system has:

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − Pilot and co-pilot rudder pedals


    − A cable system
    − A rudder (Refer to DM 12-B-55-00-00-00A-040A-A)

    The rudder system gets inputs from:


    − The autopilot system (Refer to DM 12-B-22-10-00-00A-040A-A)
    − The aileron/rudder interconnection system of the aileron system (Refer to DM 12-B-27-10-00-00A-040A-A)

    The rudder has a trim tab (Refer to DM 12-B-27-25-00-00A-040A-A).


    The rudder pedals are also used for:
    − The brakes (Refer to DM 12-B-32-40-00-00A-040A-A)
    − The nose wheel steering (Refer to DM 12-B-32-50-00-00A-040A-A)

    2 Component Description (Ref. Fig. 1)

    2.1 Rudder Pedals


    The pilot and co-pilot rudder pedals are used to operate the cable system. They are also used to operate the brake
    system and the nose-wheel steering system. They are installed in the flight compartment below the instrument
    panel. Each set of rudder pedals have these main parts:
    − Two pedal arm assemblies
    − A stay and beam assembly
    − An adjustment mechanism
    − A torque tube

    2.1.1 Pedals
    A left and right pedal is installed at the pilot and co-pilot positions. Each pedal is installed on the spindle of the
    pedal arm assembly. The pedal arm assembly is installed on the beam assembly and is connected by a rod to the
    torque tube. Each pedal has an attachment point for a rod which connects to the brake master cylinder.

    2.1.2 Stay And Beam Assembly


    The stay and beam assembly makes a frame that holds the pedal arms, adjustment mechanism and the torque
    tube.

    2.1.3 Adjustment Mechanism


    The adjustment mechanism makes it possible to adjust the position of the pedals forward or to the rear. It is
    connected to the stay and beam assembly and the torque tube. The universal joint on the torque tube makes this
    adjustment possible.

    2.1.4 Torque Tube


    The top of the torque tube is connected to the adjustment mechanism and the pedals. The pilot and co-pilot torque
    tubes are connected together with a connecting rod.
    The pilot torque tube is connected by a universal joint to a bearing and torque tube that goes through the flight
    compartment floor. A bellcrank at the bottom of the torque tube connects to the cable system and the nose-wheel

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    steering system. Two adjustable stops are installed on the structure adjacent to the bellcrank. These control the
    range of movement of the rudder pedals to the left or right.
    The bottom co-pilot torque tube is attached to a self-aligning bearing in the flight compartment floor.

    2.2 Cable System


    The cable system transmits the movement of the rudder pedals to the rudder. Two cables connect the bellcrank on
    the bottom of the pilot torque tube to the rudder quadrant. The cables go through the pressure bulkhead at frame
    15 below the left of the passenger compartment floor. They continue through the rear pressure bulkhead to the
    rudder quadrant. Pulleys and cable guides keep the cables in the correct routing. Seals are installed on the cables
    at the two pressure bulkheads. Each cable has a turnbuckle aft of the bellcrank.
    Cable clamps connect the cables of the autopilot yaw servo to the rudder cables at frame 40 and the aileron/rudder
    interconnect system between frames 22 and 23.

    2.3 Rudder
    The rudder changes the yaw attitude of the aircraft. A hinge connects the rudder to the trailing edge of the vertical
    stabilizer and a quadrant connects the bottom of the rudder to the rear fuselage. The quadrant connects the cable
    system to the rudder and has two adjustable stops on it to control the range of movement of the rudder. The rudder
    has a trim tab on it.

    3 Operation
    When one rudder pedal is pushed the pedal arm turns which causes the torque tube to turn. The second rudder
    pedal moves in the opposite direction. The other rudder pedals operate in the same direction because of the
    connecting rod between the two torque tubes.
    The pilot torque tube turns the bellcrank and moves the cable system which turns the rudder to the left when the
    left pedal is pushed forward, and to the right when the right pedal is pushed forward.
    Movement of the pedals and bellcrank causes the nose wheel steering system to operate. If the Nose Landing
    Gear (NLG) is extended the nosewheel will turn. If the aircraft is in the air and the landing gear is retracted the
    mechanism of the nose wheel steering absorbs the movement of the bellcrank.
    An input from the autopilot yaw servo makes the rudder cables move without an input from the rudder pedals. This
    makes the rudder and the pedals move.
    When the rudder system is operated the aileron/rudder connection system moves the aileron cables and the
    ailerons. This makes the aircraft more stable in a turn.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    AUTOPILOT
    YAW SERVO
    CABLES

    RUDDER

    CABLE
    SYSTEM QUADRANT

    CABLE
    GUIDES PULLEYS

    SEALS

    CONNECTING ROD

    BEAM ASSEMBLY

    SEALS

    A
    RUDDER
    PEDAL

    ADJUSTMENT
    MECHANISM
    ROD
    STAY
    TORQUE TUBE
    PEDAL ARM ASSEMBLY

    BRAKE
    CONNECTING
    RODS

    UNIVERSAL
    JOINT

    TURNBUCKLE

    BELLCRANK
    NOSE-WHEEL
    STEERING SYSTEM
    TURNBUCKLE

    A
    27120

    Figure 1 Rudder System – Layout

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM

    PARTS LIST – KIT P/N 500.60.12.018

    Table of Contents Page

    RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM - PARTS LIST – KIT P/N 500.60.12.018.................................. 1


    1 Inspection Kit P/N 500.60.12.018........................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Inspection Kit P/N 500.60.12.018........................................................................... 1

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Rudder Control System – Examine........................................................................ 4


    2 Rudder Control System – Examine........................................................................ 5
    3 Rudder Control System – Examine........................................................................ 6
    4 Rudder Control System – Examine........................................................................ 7
    5 Rudder Control System – Examine........................................................................ 8
    6 Rudder Control System – Examine........................................................................ 9
    7 Rudder Control System – Examine........................................................................ 10
    8 Rudder Control System – Examine........................................................................ 11

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    None

    Description

    1 Inspection Kit P/N 500.60.12.018


    Replace the parts in Table 2 when you examine the rudder control system.

    Table 2 Inspection Kit P/N 500.60.12.018


    Part No. Description Qty Reference
    527.20.12.098 Cable RH 1 Figure 1 [80]
    527.20.12.099 Cable LH 1 Figure 1 [85]
    527.20.12.092 Shackle 1 Figure 1 [145]
    527.20.12.091 Shackle 1 Figure 1 [140]
    932.35.14.213 Bolt, NAS6605-13 4 Figure 7 [70]
    932.35.14.222 Bolt, NAS6605-22 2 Figure 7 [75]
    941.93.37.010 Connector rod end, 1 Figure 1 [115]
    MS21254-5RL
    941.93.41.616 Turnbuckle body clip lock, 2 Figure 1 [70]
    MS21251-5L

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-00-00A-307A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-02-21 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Part No. Description Qty Reference


    940.17.29.402 Lock clip, MS21256-2 4 Figure 1 [65]
    941.93.26.111 Clevis end, turnbuckle, 1 Figure 1 [90]
    MS21252-5LL
    935.23.11.413 Clevis bolt, AN23-13 1 Figure 1 [150]
    935.23.11.454 Clevis bolt, AN24-13 1 Figure 1 [155]
    935.23.11.453 Clevis bolt, AN24-12 2 Figure 1 [95]Figure
    1 [120]
    938.08.71.403 Nut, MS17826-3 1 Figure 1 [170]
    938.08.71.404 Nut, MS17826-4 3 Figure 1 [105]Figur
    e 1 [130]
    Figure 1 [175]
    938.07.68.506 Nut, MS21042-5 6 Figure 7 [85]
    938.77.11.114 Washer, NAS1149F0432P 3 Figure 1 [165]Figur
    e 1 [100]
    Figure 1 [125]
    938.77.11.112 Washer, NAS1149F0332P 1 Figure 1 [160]
    938.77.11.117 Washer, NAS1149F0563P 8 Figure 7 [80]
    940.17.02.225 Cotter pin, MS24665-132 4 Figure 1 [110]Figur
    e 1 [135]
    Figure 1 [180]
    932.35.14.014 Bolt, NAS6603-14 1 Figure 2 [35]
    941.14.12.107 Bush, NAS75-3-007 1 Figure 2 [40]
    932.35.71.166 Bolt, NAS1160-3-16H 1 Figure 2 [50]
    940.17.02.248 Cotter pin, MS24665-285 1 Figure 2 [55]
    938.08.69.004 Nut, AN310C6 1 Figure 2 [60]
    555.40.12.201 Washer 1 Figure 2 [65]
    932.19.60.483 Bolt, AN176C23 1 Figure 2 [70]
    940.61.08.229 Retaining ring, MS16625-4143 1 Figure 3 [110]
    940.83.38.604 Ball bearing, MS27643-6 1 Figure 3 [115]
    940.83.28.506 Ball bearing, MS27645-4 1 Figure 4 [195]
    555.40.12.135 Hinge pin 1 Figure 5 [105]
    940.17.02.202 Cotter pin, MS24665-5 1 Figure 5 [100]
    941.14.11.111 Bush, NAS77-3-013 1 Figure 5 [175]
    527.20.12.119 Cable clamp 4 Figure 6 [10]
    932.35.14.005 Bolt, NAS6603-5 6 Figure 6 [15]
    938.77.11.113 Washer, NAS1149F0363P 6 Figure 6 [20]
    938.09.14.303 Nut, NAS1804-3N 6 Figure 6 [25]
    940.17.29.401 Lock clip, MS21256-1 2 Figure 6 [30]
    941.93.41.613 Turnbuckle body, MS21251-3S 1 Figure 6 [35]
    527.20.12.105 Cable autopilot 1 Figure 6 [40]
    527.20.12.106 Cable autopilot 1 Figure 6 [45]
    940.83.08.601 Ball bearing, MS27641-3 1 Figure 8 [365]
    940.83.08.602 Ball bearing, MS27641-4 1 Figure 8 [365]
    941.22.57.053 Flanged bush, M81934/2-05A008 2 Figure 8 [385]
    932.19.60.490 Bolt, AN176C20A 1 Figure 8 [370]
    938.07.68.507 Nut, MS21042-6 1 Figure 8 [380]
    938.77.11.119 Washer, NAS1149F0633P 1 Figure 8 [375]
    932.19.21.029 Bolt, AN3-7A 2 Figure 3 [90]

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-00-00A-307A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-02-21 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Part No. Description Qty Reference


    932.19.60.800 Bolt, AN174C16A 2 Figure 3 [95]
    938.77.81.015 Washer, NAS1149D0463K 2 Figure 3 [105]
    938.77.11.112 Washer, NAS1149F0332P 2 Figure 3 [100]
    932.19.60.835 Bolt, AN175C26 1 Figure 8 [305]
    938.77.11.117 Washer, NAS1149F0563P 1 Figure 8 [310]
    938.08.21.103 Nut, AN310-5 1 Figure 8 [315]
    940.17.02.236 Cotter pin, MS24665-210 1 Figure 8 [320]

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-00-00A-307A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-02-21 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    60
    D 55

    D
    50

    F
    60
    A
    F
    30

    35

    40
    45

    15
    B
    B 10
    10

    C
    A
    155
    E 20
    25

    140
    120

    165
    175
    C
    Ref. 32-50-00-01 180 115

    125 70
    130
    135 75
    65

    150
    110
    85
    145 65
    100
    65
    160
    170 105

    90
    180
    95
    80 D
    E
    27023 C

    70
    65

    Figure 1 Rudder Control System – Examine

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-00-00A-307A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-02-21 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    D
    B

    40

    35 70

    D
    65

    45

    50 45

    47

    60

    55
    B
    C
    55005 E

    Figure 2 Rudder Control System – Examine

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-00-00A-307A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-02-21 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A A 50

    35
    30

    B
    70

    B
    56
    57

    F
    F 57
    C 130
    145

    56
    F
    130 135

    25
    D
    55

    135

    E
    57
    16
    56 C
    15

    10

    37
    38

    85

    59
    D
    75

    100

    58 80 90
    75

    105
    115
    55006 H

    110
    95

    Figure 3 Rudder Control System – Examine

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-00-00A-307A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-02-21 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    P P G
    65
    165
    E
    A
    H R 80
    195 D K
    B
    Q Q
    C
    90 J
    K
    105 F B
    J J L 210

    J M
    80
    K
    105
    S N C
    F
    R J
    G
    70
    F A
    C F A L
    65 60
    65

    C N 70
    70
    75 25

    H
    20
    80 70
    185
    C
    N
    G P
    MS 150
    220 225
    40

    M S 145
    110 155
    115 155
    15 160
    145

    130
    10 140 125

    120

    135
    F
    D
    55004 G

    E
    Figure 4 Rudder Control System – Examine

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-00-00A-307A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-02-21 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    B
    B
    A 95
    A
    145
    60
    D
    85
    100
    70
    67
    65
    E
    80

    55 105 C

    50

    110
    75 120

    115

    E 160

    40 155

    45 165

    35

    30

    135
    D
    130

    175
    10

    140
    150 125

    15 20
    102325

    25

    Figure 5 Rudder Control System – Examine

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-00-00A-307A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-02-21 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    10

    15

    45

    30 35

    10
    20
    25

    10
    15

    30

    40

    10
    20
    25

    A
    27004

    Figure 6 Rudder Control System – Examine

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-00-00A-307A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-02-21 Page 9


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    60 55 40

    85
    80
    50 A

    70

    D
    65
    85 80

    75

    65

    D B 70

    65

    C 80
    15 85

    B
    20

    C
    10

    25
    30
    25
    27024 E

    30

    Figure 7 Rudder Control System – Examine

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-00-00A-307A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-02-21 Page 10


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    35 125 105

    100
    40
    140 110
    135
    137 115

    120
    125 45

    95

    A 80
    85 75
    87
    285 97
    70 55
    293
    290 40
    65
    35
    210
    270 240
    96 230
    265
    275 250 30
    20
    25 270
    265

    330 280
    350
    60 35 255
    347 260
    105 40 125
    65 220
    73
    347 100
    50 150
    65 130
    60 70 110 137
    125 70
    115 65
    65
    74 150
    45
    120
    65 205
    335 55
    70 200 195
    340 190
    340 90 215 145
    50
    345
    165
    160
    145
    40
    355 180
    185
    35
    225 170 175
    305
    30
    25
    300
    80
    20
    320

    85
    87 235 A
    390 245
    75 370
    295 395
    315 310

    385
    365
    390 380
    27002 G

    395 375

    Figure 8 Rudder Control System – Examine

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-00-00A-307A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-02-21 Page 11
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-00-00A-307A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-02-21 Page 12


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM

    EXAMINE

    Table of Contents Page

    RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM - EXAMINE............................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 2
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A ACCESS PROVISION – HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR
    - DESCRIPTION
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A CORROSION CONTROL - MAINTENANCE
    PRACTICES
    12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE SEATS - REMOVAL INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A STANDARD SEATS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A STANDARD CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-27-20-00-00A-307A-A RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM - PARTS LIST – KIT
    P/N 500.60.12.018
    12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-27-20-01-00A-920A-A RUDDER CABLES - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-27-20-02-00A-920A-A RUDDER AUTOPILOT CABLES - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-00-00A-310A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-01-18 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Warning sign DO NOT MOVE Part Local supply As
    THE FLYING CONTROLS required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Solvent Part P01-010 As
    required
    Cloth Part P02-003 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Inspection kit Part 500.60.12.018 1

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1
    Note

    To identify the parts you need to replace as part of this procedure, refer to AMM 12-B-27-20-00-00A-307A-A.

    Put a Warning sign DO NOT MOVE THE FLYING CONTROLS (Pt.No. Local supply) in the flight
    compartment.
    2 Remove the passenger compartment seats:
    − Executive interior, AMM 12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A
    − Standard interior, AMM 12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A.
    3 Remove the passenger compartment carpets:
    − Executive interior, AMM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − Standard interior, AMM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A.
    4 Open the access panels, AMM 12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A:
    − 11 AL
    − 12 BZ, 12 EZ, 12 HZ, 12 KZ
    − 31 AB.
    5 Remove the rudder autopilot cables, AMM 12-B-27-20-02-00A-920A-A.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-00-00A-310A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-01-18 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    6 Remove the rudder control cables, AMM 12-B-27-20-01-00A-920A-A.


    7
    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MANUFACTURERS'
    HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items AMM 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Use a Cloth (Pt.No. P02-003) made moist with Solvent (Pt.No. P01-010) to clean, as needed, the areas you
    will examine.
    8 Examine the rudder control system and attachment structure. Make sure that you also examine:
    − the cable pulleys
    − the pulley brackets
    − the pilot rudder pedal mechanism
    − the copilot rudder pedal mechanism
    9 Cracks or corrosion Level 2 or 3 are not permitted. Refer to AMM 12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A for the
    definition of corrosion levels. If you find cracks or corrosion Level 2 or 3, contact Pilatus Aircraft.
    10 Install the rudder control cables, AMM 12-B-27-20-01-00A-920A-A.
    11 Install the rudder autopilot cables, AMM 12-B-27-20-02-00A-920A-A.
    12 Remove the warning sign from the flight compartment.
    13 Do the adjustment/test of the rudder control system, AMM 12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A.
    14 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    15 Close the access panels, AMM 12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A:
    − 11 AL
    − 12 BZ, 12 EZ, 12 HZ, 12 KZ
    − 31 AB.
    16 Install the passenger compartment carpets:
    − Executive interior, AMM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − Standard interior, AMM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A.
    17 Install the passenger compartment seats:
    − Executive interior, AMM 12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A
    − Standard interior, AMM 12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A.

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-00-00A-310A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-01-18 Page 3
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-00-00A-310A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-01-18 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM

    ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Table of Contents Page

    RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST............................................................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 2
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 2
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Rudder Control Cables – Temperature Compensation Chart (Autopilot Cables 7


    Disconnected).........................................................................................................
    2 Rudder Control Cables – Adjustment..................................................................... 8
    3 Rudder Control System – Adjustment/Test............................................................ 15
    4 Rudder Autopilot Cables – Adjustment................................................................... 19
    5 Rudder Autopilot Cables – Temperature Compensation Chart ............................. 20

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A GENERAL - AEROSPACE GROUND EQUIPMENT
    (AGE) AND TOOLS
    12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A JACKING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-20-20-01-00A-040A-A TORQUE WRENCHES AND PROCEDURES -
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE SEATS - REMOVAL INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A STANDARD SEATS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A STANDARD CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-11 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Rigging pin Part 110.85.07.050 2
    Tensiometer Part 110.85.07.242 As
    required
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required
    Warning sign (DO NOT Part Local supply As
    OPERATE THE FLIGHT required
    CONTROLS)
    Rigging block assembly Part 513.27.12.075 1
    Rigging tool Part (Local manufacture) As
    required
    Locking screw (For the NLG leg) Part 513.32.12.050 As
    required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Lockwire Part P02-007 As
    required
    Installation paste Part P04-029 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Locking clip CSN 27-20-00-01-065 As
    required
    Cotter pin CSN 32-50-00-01-035 As
    required
    Locking clip CSN 27-20-00-05-050 As
    required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-11 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedures to do:
    − A tension check of the rudder control cables
    − The adjustment of the rudder control-cables tension
    − A functional test of the rudder control system
    − The adjustment of the rudder control system
    − The adjustment of the rudder autopilot cable tension
    2 Tension Check of the Rudder Control Cables
    2.1 Preparation

    Note

    The aircraft must be in an area that has a constant temperature for not less than one hour before the
    test of the control cables tension is done.

    2.1.1 Lift the aircraft clear of the ground on jacks, AMM 12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A.
    2.1.2 Make sure that the flaps are set to 0°.
    2.1.3 Open and install a Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065) on this
    circuit breaker:
    − A/P SERVO (AVIONIC 1 BUS)
    2.1.4 Put up a Warning sign (DO NOT OPERATE THE FLIGHT CONTROLS) (Pt.No. Local
    supply) in the flight compartment.
    2.1.5 Open the access panels 11 AL and 31 AB.
    2.1.6 Remove the access panel 32 AB.
    2.2 Procedure

    Note

    To identify the AGE and tools used in this procedure refer to the list of AGE and tools 12-
    B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A.

    2.2.1 Make sure the aileron control system movement is free.


    2.2.2 Move the rudder pedals to the center position and install a Rigging
    pin (Pt.No. 110.85.07.050)Figure 2 [5] in the bellcrank Figure 2 [6].
    2.2.3 Install a Rigging pin (Pt.No. 110.85.07.050) Figure 2 [12] in the rudder quadrant
    Figure 2 [11]. If the rigging pin cannot be easily installed, do the adjustment of the rudder
    control cable tension.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-11 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.2.4 Remove the clips Figure 2 [9] from the turnbuckle Figure 2 [8] on the autopilot cables
    Figure 2 [7] and Figure 2 [10]. Discard the clips.
    2.2.5 Loosen the turnbuckle Figure 2 [8].
    2.2.6 Use the Tensiometer (Pt.No. 110.85.07.242) to measure the tension of the control cables
    between frames 36 and 38.
    2.2.7 Refer to Fig. 1 and identify the correct tension of the control cables Figure 2 [1] and
    Figure 2 [2].
    2.2.8 If the tension of the control cables Figure 2 [1] and Figure 2 [2] is not correct do the
    adjustment of the rudder control-cables tension.
    2.2.9 Do the adjustment of the rudder autopilot cable.
    2.2.10 Remove the rigging pins Figure 2 [5] and Figure 2 [12] from the bellcrank Figure 2 [6] and
    the rudder quadrant Figure 2 [11].
    2.3 Close Up
    2.3.1 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.3.2 Close the access panels 11 AL and 31 AB.
    2.3.3 Install the access panel 32 AB.
    2.3.4 Remove the safety clip and close this circuit breaker:
    − A/P SERVO (AVIONIC 1 BUS)
    2.3.5 Remove the warning sign DO NOT OPERATE THE FLIGHT CONTROLS from the flight
    compartment.
    2.3.6 Lower the aircraft to the ground and remove the jacks, AMM 12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A.
    3 Adjustment of the Rudder Control-Cables Tension
    3.1 Preparation

    Note

    The aircraft must be in an area that has a constant temperature for not less than one hour before the
    test of the control cables tension is done.

    3.1.1 Make sure the aileron control system movement is free.


    3.1.2 Lift the aircraft clear of the ground on jacks, AMM 12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A.
    3.1.3 Make sure that the flaps are set to 0°.
    3.1.4 Put up a warning sign DO NOT OPERATE THE FLIGHT CONTROLS in the flight
    compartment.
    3.1.5 Remove the access panel 32 AB.
    3.1.6 Open the access panels 11 AL and 31 AB.
    3.2 Procedure

    Note

    To identify the AGE and tools used in this procedure refer to the list of AGE and tools 12-
    B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-11 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    3.2.1 Move the rudder pedals to the center position and install a rigging pin Figure 2 [5] in the
    bellcrank Figure 2 [6].
    3.2.2 Install a rigging pin Figure 2 [12] in the rudder quadrant Figure 2 [11].
    3.2.3 Remove the locking clips Figure 2 [9] from the turnbuckle Figure 2 [8] on the autopilot cables
    Figure 2 [7] and Figure 2 [10]. Discard the locking clips.
    3.2.4 Loosen the turnbuckle Figure 2 [8].
    3.2.5 Remove the locking clips Figure 2 [3] from the turnbuckles Figure 2 [4]. Discard the locking
    clips.
    3.2.6 Use the Tensiometer (Pt.No. 110.85.07.242) to measure the tension of the control cables
    Figure 2 [1] and Figure 2 [2] between frames 36 and 38.
    3.2.7 Refer to Fig. 1 and identify the correct tension of the control cables Figure 2 [1] and
    Figure 2 [2].

    CAUTION

    MAKE SURE THE CONTROL CABLES DO NOT TURN WHEN YOU TURN THE
    TURNBUCKLES. ADJUST THE TURNBUCKLES THE SAME QUANTITY TO KEEP THE
    TENSION OF EACH CONTROL CABLE THE SAME.

    3.2.8 Hold the control cables Figure 2 [1] and Figure 2 [2] and adjust the turnbuckles Figure 2 [4]
    to get the correct tension.
    3.2.9 Make sure the rigging pin Figure 2 [12] can be easily removed and installed.
    3.2.10 If the rigging pin Figure 2 [12] cannot be easily installed:
    3.2.10.1 Adjust the turnbuckles Figure 2 [4] until the rigging pin can be easily installed.
    3.2.10.2 Do Step 3.2.8 and Step 3.2.9 again.
    3.2.11 Remove the rigging pins Figure 2 [5] and Figure 2 [12] from the bellcrank Figure 2 [6] and
    the rudder quadrant Figure 2 [11].
    3.2.12 Move the rudder controls through their full range four times.
    3.2.13 Move the rudder controls to the center position and install the rigging pins Figure 2 [5] and
    Figure 2 [12] in the bellcrank Figure 2 [6] and the rudder quadrant Figure 2 [11].
    3.2.14 Do Step 3.2.6 thru Step 3.2.10 again.
    3.2.15 Safety the turnbuckles Figure 2 [4] with new Locking clip Figure 2 [3].
    3.2.16 Remove the rigging pins Figure 2 [5] and Figure 2 [12] from the bellcrank Figure 2 [6] and
    the rudder quadrant Figure 2 [11].
    3.2.17 Slowly move the rudder controls through their full range. Make sure the rudder controls move
    smoothly and the control cables Figure 2 [1] and Figure 2 [2] do not touch the structure.
    3.2.18 Do the adjustment of the rudder autopilot cable.
    3.2.19 Do the functional test of the rudder control system.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-11 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3.3 Close Up
    3.3.1 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    3.3.2 Close the access panels 11 AL and 31 AB.
    3.3.3 Install the access panel 32 AB.
    3.3.4 Remove the warning sign DO NOT OPERATE THE FLIGHT CONTROLS from the flight
    compartment.
    3.3.5 Lower the aircraft to the ground and remove the jacks, AMM 12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-11 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    350
    78
    340
    76

    330 74

    320 72

    310 70

    68
    300
    66
    290
    64
    CABLE TENSION [N]

    280

    CABLE TENSION [lbf]


    62
    270
    60
    260 58

    250 56

    240 54

    230 52

    50
    220
    48
    210
    46
    200
    44
    190
    42
    180 40

    170 38

    160 36
    0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44

    OAT [°C]

    12-A-272000-A-S4080-00372-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Rudder Control Cables – Temperature Compensation Chart (Autopilot Cables Disconnected)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-11 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    3 3

    5 2
    6
    C
    3
    3

    A 4
    1
    1
    B

    7
    9 8

    A 10

    C B
    11

    12

    12-B-272000-A-S4080-01035-A-02-1

    Figure 2 Rudder Control Cables – Adjustment

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-11 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    4 Functional Test of the Rudder Control System


    4.1 Preparation
    4.1.1 Lift the aircraft clear of the ground on jacks, AMM 12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A.
    4.1.2 Make sure that the flaps are set to 0°.
    4.1.3 Open and install a Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065) on this
    circuit breaker:
    − A/P SERVO (AVIONIC 1 BUS)
    4.1.4 Put up a warning sign DO NOT OPERATE THE FLIGHT CONTROLS in the flight
    compartment.
    4.1.5 Remove the access panel 32 AB.
    4.1.6 Open the access panel 11 AL.
    4.2 Procedure

    Note

    To identify the AGE and tools used in this procedure refer to the list of AGE and tools 12-
    B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A.

    4.2.1 Adjust the pilot and co-pilot rudder pedals to the fully forward position and then to the fully
    rear position. Make sure the rudder pedals adjustment is smooth through the full range.
    4.2.2 Move the rudder pedals to the center position.
    4.2.3 Make sure the rigging pins Figure 3 [6] and Figure 3 [8] can be easily installed in at the same
    time:
    − In the rudder quadrant Figure 3 [1]
    − In the bellcrank Figure 3 [7]
    4.2.4 If the rigging pins Figure 3 [6] and Figure 3 [8] cannot be easily installed at the same time, do
    the adjustment of the control cables tension.
    4.2.5 Make sure the left and right rudder pedals at the pilot and co-pilot positions are aligned.
    4.2.6 Put the Rigging tool (Pt.No. (Local manufacture)) at the rear of the rudder so the point of the
    rigging tool aligns with the center of the bottom rear corner of the rudder.
    4.2.7 Remove the rigging pins Figure 3 [6] and Figure 3 [8] from the bellcrank Figure 3 [7] and the
    rudder quadrant Figure 3 [1].
    4.2.8 Move the pilot left rudder-pedal fully forward.
    4.2.9 Make sure that the stop bolt Figure 3 [3] touches the stop Figure 3 [4].
    4.2.10 Measure the distance between the point of the rigging tool and the bottom rear corner of the
    rudder. Make sure the distance is 11.3 ± 0.35 in (287 ± 9 mm).
    4.2.11 Move the pilot right rudder-pedal fully forward.
    4.2.12 Make sure that the stop bolt Figure 3 [5] touches the stop Figure 3 [4].
    4.2.13 Measure the distance between the point of the rigging tool and the bottom rear corner of the
    rudder. Make sure the distance is 13.43 ± 0.35 in (341 ± 9 mm).
    4.2.14 Move the aileron controls to the center position.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-11 Page 9


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    4.2.15 Install the Rigging block assembly (Pt.No. 513.27.12.075) Figure 3 [28] in the pilot control
    column Figure 3 [29].
    4.2.16 Make sure that the aileron/rudder interconnect spring pack is in the neutral (unloaded)
    position.
    4.2.17 Measure the distance between the point of the rigging tool and the bottom rear corner of the
    rudder
    4.2.18 Make sure the distance is 1.45 in ± 0.2 in (37 mm ± 5 mm) to the right of the rigging tool
    pointer.

    Note

    This setting was originally 2.6 in ± 0.08 in (66 mm ± 2 mm) to the right. The new setting 1.45
    in ± 0.2 in (37 mm ± 5 mm) to the right was developed and certified by Pilatus in September
    2010. It is acceptable to re-adjust existing aircraft to the new setting. No further adjustments
    or check flights are required.

    4.2.19 If the test of the rudder control system is not correct, do the adjustment of the rudder control
    system.
    4.3 Close Up
    4.3.1 Remove the rigging block assembly from the pilot control column.
    4.3.2 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    4.3.3 Install the access panel 32 AB.
    4.3.4 Close the access panel 11 AL.
    4.3.5 Remove the safety clip and close this circuit breaker:
    − A/P SERVO (AVIONIC 1 BUS)
    4.3.6 Remove the warning sign DO NOT OPERATE THE FLIGHT CONTROLS from the flight
    compartment.
    4.3.7 Lower the aircraft to the ground and remove the jacks, AMM 12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A.
    5 Adjustment of the Rudder Control System

    CAUTION

    THE TENSION OF THE RUDDER CONTROL CABLES MUST BE CORRECT BEFORE THE ADJUSTMENT
    OF THE RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM IS DONE.

    5.1 Preparation
    5.1.1 Lift the aircraft clear of the ground on jacks, AMM 12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A.
    5.1.2 Put up a warning sign DO NOT OPERATE THE FLIGHT CONTROLS in the flight
    compartment.
    5.1.3 Remove the passenger seat from above the access panel 12 DZ:
    − for executive interior, AMM 12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A
    − for standard interior, AMM 12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A
    5.1.4 Remove the passenger compartment carpets from above the access panels 12 DZ and 12
    EZ:

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-11 Page 10


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − for executive interior, AMM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A


    − for standard interior, AMM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A
    5.1.5 Remove the access panels 12 DZ, 12 EZ and 32 AB.
    5.1.6 Open the access panel 11 AL.
    5.2 Procedure

    Note

    To identify the AGE and tools used in this procedure refer to the list of AGE and tools 12-
    B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A.

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    5.2.1 Loosen the screws Figure 3 [25] on the cable clamp Figure 3 [26] to release the control
    cable.
    5.2.2 Remove the cotter pin Figure 3 [17], nut Figure 3 [16], washer Figure 3 [15] and bolt
    Figure 3 [10] and disconnect the control rod Figure 3 [11] for the nose wheel steering from
    the bellcrank Figure 3 [7].
    5.2.3 Move the rudder pedals to the center position and install a Rigging
    pin (Pt.No. 110.85.07.050) Figure 3 [8] in the bellcrank Figure 3 [7].
    5.2.4 Install a Rigging pin (Pt.No. 110.85.07.050) Figure 3 [6] in the rudder quadrant Figure 3 [1].
    5.2.5 Make sure the pilot and co-pilot left and right rudder pedals are aligned.
    5.2.6 If the pilot and co-pilot rudder pedals are not aligned:
    5.2.6.1 Remove the lockwire from the locknuts Figure 3 [19].
    5.2.6.2 Loosen the locknuts Figure 3 [19] and adjust the control rod Figure 3 [20] to
    align the pilot and co-pilot rudder pedals.
    5.2.6.3 Tighten the locknuts Figure 3 [19].
    5.2.6.4 Safety the locknuts Figure 3 [19] with Lockwire (Pt.No. P02-007).
    5.2.7 Put the rigging tool at the rear of the rudder so the point of the rigging tool aligns with the
    center of the bottom rear corner of the rudder.

    Note

    The rudder stop adjustment is correct when the flexible stop is touched and not compressed.

    5.2.8 Remove the rigging pins Figure 3 [8] and Figure 3 [6] from the bellcrank Figure 3 [7] and the
    rudder quadrant Figure 3 [1].
    5.2.9 Move the rudder by hand to the fully left position.
    5.2.10 Measure the distance between the point of the rigging tool and the bottom rear corner of the
    rudder. Make sure the distance is 11.3 ± 0.35 in (287 ± 9 mm).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-11 Page 11


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    5.2.11 If the distance is not correct:


    5.2.11.1 Loosen the locknut Figure 3 [13] and adjust the left safety-stop bolt Figure 3 [18]
    fully in.
    5.2.11.2 Loosen the locknut Figure 3 [2] and adjust the left stop bolt Figure 3 [3] until the
    distance between the point on the rigging tool and the bottom rear corner of the
    rudder is correct.
    5.2.11.3 Tighten the locknut Figure 3 [2].
    5.2.11.4 Keep the rudder by hand at the fully left position and adjust the left safety-stop
    bolt Figure 3 [18] to give a gap of approximately 0.2 in (5 mm) between the left
    safety-stop bolt Figure 3 [18] and the bellcrank Figure 3 [7].
    5.2.11.5 Tighten the locknut Figure 3 [13].
    5.2.11.6 Move the pilot left rudder-pedal fully forward. Make sure the distance between
    the point of the rigging tool and the bottom rear corner of the rudder is 11.3 ±
    0.35 in (287 ± 9 mm).
    5.2.12 Move the rudder by hand to the fully right position.
    5.2.13 Measure the distance between the point of the rigging tool and the bottom rear corner of the
    rudder. Make sure the distance is 13.43 ± 0.35 in (341 ± 9 mm).
    5.2.14 If the distance is not correct:
    5.2.14.1 Loosen the locknut Figure 3 [13] and adjust the right safety-stop bolt
    Figure 3 [14] fully in.
    5.2.14.2 Loosen the locknut Figure 3 [2] and adjust the right stop bolt Figure 3 [5] until
    the distance between the point on the rigging tool and the bottom rear corner of
    the rudder is correct.
    5.2.14.3 Tighten the locknut Figure 3 [2].
    5.2.14.4 Keep the rudder by hand at the fully right position and adjust the right safety-
    stop bolt Figure 3 [14] to give a gap of approximately 0.12 in (3 mm) between
    the right safety-stop bolt Figure 3 [14] and the bellcrank Figure 3 [7].
    5.2.14.5 Tighten the locknut Figure 3 [13].
    5.2.14.6 Move the pilot right rudder-pedal fully forward. Make sure the distance between
    the point of the rigging tool and the bottom rear corner of the rudder is 13.43 ±
    0.35 in (341 ± 9 mm).
    5.2.15 Move the aileron controls to the center position.
    5.2.16 Install the rigging pin Figure 3 [22] in the aileron control-cable segment Figure 3 [21].
    5.2.17 Move the rudder controls until the bottom rear corner of the rudder is 1.45 in ± 0.2 in (37 mm
    ± 5 mm) to the right of the rigging tool pointer.

    CAUTION

    MAKE SURE YOU ADD THE RUN-DOWN TORQUE OF THE NUTS TO THE VALUE
    GIVEN IN STEP 5.2.18 (REFER TO AMM 12-B-20-20-01-00A-040A-A). DO NOT APPLY
    ANY CORRECTION FACTORS.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-11 Page 12


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Note

    Apply Installation paste (Pt.No. P04-029) to the screws and the nuts before you torque
    tighten them.

    5.2.18 Hold the rudder in this position and tighten the screws Figure 3 [25] on the cable clamp
    Figure 3 [26] to between 2,7 Nm and 3,2 Nm (23.9 to 28.3 lbf in) to attach the rudder control
    cable. Make sure that the spring cylinder damper Figure 3 [24] is in the neutral position.
    5.2.19 Remove the rigging pin Figure 3 [22] from the aileron control-cable segment Figure 3 [21].
    5.2.20 Hold the pilot control wheel in the center position then move the rudder controls through their
    full range and make sure:
    − The spring Figure 3 [24] compresses and extends
    − The stop bolts Figure 3 [3] and Figure 3 [5] on the rudder quadrant Figure 3 [1] touch the
    stop on the rudder support Figure 3 [4]
    5.2.21 Make sure the Nose Landing Gear (NLG) is in the center position and install the locking
    screw Figure 3 [23] in the NLG leg.
    5.2.22 Move the rudder controls to the center position and install the rigging pin Figure 3 [8] in the
    bellcrank Figure 3 [7].
    5.2.23 Make sure the eye end Figure 3 [12] of the control rod Figure 3 [11] of the nose wheel
    steering aligns with the bellcrank Figure 3 [7].
    5.2.24 If the eye end Figure 3 [12] does not align with the bellcrank Figure 3 [7]:
    5.2.24.1 Remove the lockwire from the locknut Figure 3 [9].
    5.2.24.2 Loosen the locknut Figure 3 [9] and adjust the eye end Figure 3 [12] until it
    aligns with the bellcrank Figure 3 [7].
    5.2.24.3 Tighten the locknut Figure 3 [9].
    5.2.24.4 Safety the locknut Figure 3 [9] with Lockwire (Pt.No. P02-007).
    5.2.25 Connect the eye end Figure 3 [12] to the bellcrank Figure 3 [7] with the bolt Figure 3 [10],
    washer Figure 3 [15], nut Figure 3 [16] and new Cotter pin Figure 3 [17].
    5.2.26 Remove the rigging pin Figure 3 [8] and the locking screw Figure 3 [23] from the bellcrank
    Figure 3 [7] and the NLG leg.
    5.2.27 Hold the pilot control wheel in the center position and move the rudder controls through their
    full range. Make sure the safety-stop bolts Figure 3 [3] and Figure 3 [5] touch the stop on the
    rudder support Figure 3 [4] and the rudder moves smoothly through its full range.
    5.2.28 Do the functional test of the rudder control system.
    5.3 Close Up
    5.3.1 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    5.3.2 Install the access panels 12 DZ, 12 EZ and 32 AB.
    5.3.3 Close the access panel 11 AL.
    5.3.4 Install the passenger compartment carpets above the access panels 12 DZ and 12 EZ:
    − for executive interior, AMM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − for standard interior, AMM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A
    5.3.5 Install the passenger seats above the access panels 12 DZ:

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-11 Page 13


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − for executive interior, AMM 12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A


    − for standard interior, AMM 12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A
    5.3.6 Remove the warning sign DO NOT OPERATE THE FLIGHT CONTROLS from the flight
    compartment.
    5.3.7 Lower the aircraft to the ground and remove the jacks, AMM 12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-11 Page 14


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    19

    19 20

    A
    C
    RIGGING
    TOOL

    1
    2

    E
    2 3

    C
    B A 5

    D 18 6

    17
    13
    14

    16
    15

    13 8

    12 9
    9
    11
    10

    B
    12-B-272000-A-S4080-01034-A-01-1

    Figure 3 Rudder Control System – Adjustment/Test (Sheet 1 of 2)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-11 Page 15


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    23

    22

    21

    24

    E 25

    26

    27

    F
    28

    29

    12-B-272000-A-S4080-01036-A-01-1

    Figure 3 Rudder Control System – Adjustment/Test (Sheet 2 of 2)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-11 Page 16


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    6 Adjustment of the Rudder Autopilot Cable Tension


    6.1 Job Set-Up
    6.1.1 Lift the aircraft clear of the ground on jacks, AMM 12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A.
    6.1.2 Put up a warning sign DO NOT OPERATE THE FLIGHT CONTROLS in the flight
    compartment.
    6.1.3 Open and install a safety clips on these circuit breakers:
    − A/P SEVO ENABLE (AVIONIC 1 BUS)
    − A/P SERVO (AVIONIC 1 BUS)
    6.1.4 Open access panels 11 AL and 31 AB.
    6.1.5 Install the rigging pin Figure 3 [6] in the rudder bellcrank Figure 3 [1] and the rigging pin
    Figure 3 [8] in the bellcrank Figure 3 [7].
    6.1.6 Make sure the tension of the rudder control cable is correct, AMM 12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-
    A Para .
    6.2 Procedure

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    6.2.1 Make sure the rudder autopilot cables Figure 4 [3] and Figure 4 [6] are correctly installed and
    set to the correct dimensions.
    6.2.2 If necessary, adjust the position of the rudder autopilot cables Figure 4 [3] and Figure 4 [6]:
    6.2.2.1 Remove the locking clips Figure 4 [5] from the turnbuckle Figure 4 [4], Discard
    the locking clips.
    6.2.2.2 Loosen the turnbuckle Figure 4 [4].
    6.2.2.3 Loosen the nuts Figure 4 [2] on the clamps Figure 4 [1].
    6.2.2.4 Move the clamps Figure 4 [1] and the rudder autopilot cables Figure 4 [3] and
    Figure 4 [6] to the correct positions then tighten the nuts Figure 4 [2].

    CAUTION

    MAKE SURE YOU ADD THE RUN-DOWN TORQUE OF THE NUTS TO THE
    VALUE GIVEN IN STEP 6.2.2.5, (REFER TO AMM 12-B-20-20-01-00A-040A-
    A). DO NOT APPLY ANY CORRECTION FACTORS.

    Note

    Apply grease (Installation paste (Pt.No. P04-029)) to the threads of the bolts
    and the nuts before you torque tighten them.

    6.2.2.5 Torque the nuts Figure 4 [2] to between 4 and 4,5 Nm (35.4 to 39.8 lbf in).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-11 Page 17


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    6.2.3 Use the tensiometer to measure the tension at the center of the rudder autopilot cables
    Figure 4 [3] and Figure 4 [6].
    6.2.4 Refer to Fig. 5 and identify the correct tension for the rudder autopilot cables Figure 4 [3] and
    Figure 4 [6].
    6.2.5 If the tension of the rudder autopilot cables Figure 4 [3] and Figure 4 [6] is not correct, adjust
    the tension of the rudder autopilot cables:
    6.2.5.1 Remove the locking clips Figure 4 [5] from the turnbuckle Figure 4 [4]. Discard
    the locking clips.
    6.2.5.2 Turn the turnbuckle Figure 4 [4] to set the correct tension in the rudder autopilot
    cable Figure 4 [3] and Figure 4 [6].
    6.2.5.3 Safety the turnbuckle Figure 4 [4] with new locking clip (Locking clip )
    Figure 4 [5].
    6.2.5.4 Remove the rigging pin Figure 3 [6] from the rudder bellcrank Figure 3 [1] and
    the rigging pin Figure 3 [8] from the bellcrank Figure 3 [7].
    6.2.5.5 Move the rudder controls through the full range of movement. Pull the autopilot
    cable by hand through the full range of movement.
    6.2.5.6 Install the rigging pin Figure 3 [6] in the rudder bellcrank Figure 3 [1] and the
    rigging pin Figure 3 [8] in the bellcrank Figure 3 [7].
    6.2.5.7 Do Step 6.2.3 thru Step 6.2.5 again to make sure that the rudder autopilot cable
    tension is within the limits.
    6.2.6 Make sure the rudder autopilot cables Figure 4 [3] and Figure 4 [6] do not touch the
    structure.
    6.3 Close Up
    6.3.1 Remove the rigging pin Figure 3 [6] from the rudder bellcrank Figure 3 [1] and the rigging pin
    Figure 3 [8] from the bellcrank Figure 3 [7].
    6.3.2 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    6.3.3 Close the access panels 11 AL and 31 AB.
    6.3.4 Remove the safety clip and close the circuit breaker:
    − A/P SEVO ENABLE (AVIONIC 1 BUS)
    − A/P SERVO (AVIONIC 1 BUS)
    6.3.5 Remove the warning sign DO NOT OPERATE THE FLIGHT CONTROLS from the flight
    compartment.
    6.3.6 Lower the aircraft to the ground and remove the jacks, AMM 12-B-07-10-00-00A-901A-A.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-11 Page 18


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    1

    4
    2

    A
    3

    4.1 in (105 mm)

    1.2 in (30 mm)

    1.2 in (30 mm)

    13.4 in (340 mm)

    12-A-272000-A-S4080-00371-A-03-1

    Figure 4 Rudder Autopilot Cables – Adjustment

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-11 Page 19


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    160 36

    150 34

    32
    140
    30
    130
    28
    120
    26
    110
    24
    CABLE TENSION [N]

    CABLE TENSION [lbf]


    100 22

    90 20

    80 18

    70 16

    14
    60
    12
    50
    10
    40
    8
    30
    6
    20 4

    10 2

    0 0
    0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44

    OAT [°C]

    12-A-272000-A-S4080-00373-A-01-1

    Figure 5 Rudder Autopilot Cables – Temperature Compensation Chart

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-11 Page 20


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-11 Page 21
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2014-03-11 Page 22


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    RUDDER CABLES

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    RUDDER CABLES - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION...................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 2
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Rudder Cables – Removal/Installation................................................................... 7

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A FLIGHT COMPARTMENT CREW SEATS - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE SEATS - REMOVAL INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A EXECUTIVE CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A STANDARD SEATS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A STANDARD CARPETS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
    12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-30 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required
    Warning sign (DO NOT Part Local supply As
    OPERATE THE FLIGHT required
    CONTROLS)

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Lockwire Part P02-007 As
    required
    String Part Local supply As
    required
    Abrasive paper Part P02-011 As
    required
    Sealant Part P08-071 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Cotter pin CSN 27-20-00-01-075 As
    required
    Seal CSN 27-20-00-01-060 As
    required

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Preparation
    1.1.1 Open and install a safety clip (Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065))
    on these circuit breakers:
    − A/P SERVO ENABLE (AVIONIC 1 BUS)
    − A/P SERVO (AVIONIC 1 BUS)
    1.1.2 Put up a Warning sign (DO NOT OPERATE THE FLIGHT CONTROLS) (Pt.No. Local
    supply) in the flight compartment.
    1.1.3 Remove the pilot seat (AMM 12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-30 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1.1.4 Remove the passenger seats from the left side of the passenger compartment:
    − for executive interior, AMM 12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A
    − for standard interior, AMM 12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A
    1.1.5 Remove the flight compartment and left passenger compartment carpets:
    − for executive interior, AMM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − for standard interior, AMM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A
    1.1.6 Open the access panels 11 AL, 11 BL and 31 AB.
    1.1.7 Remove these access panels:
    − 11 AZ
    − 12 AZ, 12 DZ, 12 GZ, 12 JZ, 12 MZ and 32 AB
    1.2
    CAUTION

    MAKE A NOTE OF THE ROUTING OF THE RUDDER CABLES BEFORE YOU REMOVE THEM.

    Procedure
    1.2.1 Remove the two locking clips Figure 1 [4] from the turnbuckle Figure 1 [5] on the autopilot
    cables Figure 1 [3] and Figure 1 [6]. Discard the locking clips.
    1.2.2 Loosen the turnbuckle Figure 1 [5].
    1.2.3 Remove the nuts Figure 1 [9] and Figure 1 [13], washers Figure 1 [10] and Figure 1 [14] and
    bolts Figure 1 [7] and Figure 1 [11], the cable clamps Figure 1 [8] and Figure 1 [12] and the
    autopilot cables Figure 1 [3] and Figure 1 [6] from the rudder cables Figure 1 [1] and
    Figure 1 [2].
    1.2.4 Remove the four locking clips Figure 1 [17] and Figure 1 [18] from the turnbuckles
    Figure 1 [16] and Figure 1 [19]. Discard the locking clips.
    1.2.5 Disconnect the turnbuckles Figure 1 [16] and Figure 1 [19] from the rudder cables
    Figure 1 [1] and Figure 1 [2] and the eye end Figure 1 [15] and fork end Figure 1 [20].
    1.2.6 Attach a guide String (Pt.No. Local supply) to the rudder cables Figure 1 [1] and Figure 1 [2].
    1.2.7 Remove the nuts Figure 1 [24], washers Figure 1 [23], bolts Figure 1 [22] and pulleys
    Figure 1 [21] from the structure.
    1.2.8 Remove the lockwire from the four seals Figure 1 [25].
    1.2.9 Remove the two screws Figure 1 [27] and the cover plate Figure 1 [26] from the structure
    and remove the four seals Figure 1 [25] from the rudder cables Figure 1 [1] and Figure 1 [2].
    Discard the seals.
    1.2.10 Remove the two nuts Figure 1 [31], washers Figure 1 [30], screws Figure 1 [28] and cable
    guides Figure 1 [29] from the structure.
    1.2.11 Disengage the rudder cable Figure 1 [2] from the cable guide Figure 1 [32].
    1.2.12 Remove the nuts Figure 1 [42], washers Figure 1 [43], screws Figure 1 [40], and the cable
    guides Figure 1 [41] from the structure.
    1.2.13 Remove the nut Figure 1 [47], two washers Figure 1 [46], the bolt Figure 1 [44] and two
    pulleys Figure 1 [45] from the structure.
    1.2.14 Remove the lockwire from the four seals Figure 1 [49].

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-30 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1.2.15 Remove the two screws Figure 1 [48] and the cover plate Figure 1 [50] from the structure
    then remove the four seals Figure 1 [49] from the rudder cables Figure 1 [1] and Figure 1 [2].
    Discard the seals.
    1.2.16 Remove the nut Figure 1 [54], washer Figure 1 [53], bolt Figure 1 [51] and the two pulleys
    Figure 1 [52] from the structure.
    1.2.17 Remove the nuts Figure 1 [62], washers Figure 1 [61], guards Figure 1 [63] and screws
    Figure 1 [59] from the brackets Figure 1 [57].
    1.2.18 Remove the nuts Figure 1 [55], washers Figure 1 [56], bolts Figure 1 [58] and pulleys
    Figure 1 [60] from the structure.
    1.2.19 Remove the nuts Figure 1 [67], washers Figure 1 [66], bonding leads Figure 1 [65], bolts
    Figure 1 [64] and the cable guard Figure 1 [69] from the support Figure 1 [68].
    1.2.20 Remove the two cotter pins Figure 1 [71] from the quadrant Figure 1 [70]. Discard the cotter
    pins.
    1.2.21 Disconnect the rudder cables Figure 1 [1] and Figure 1 [2] from the quadrant Figure 1 [70].
    1.2.22 Remove the rudder cables Figure 1 [1] and Figure 1 [2] from the aircraft.
    1.2.23 Disconnect the rudder cables Figure 1 [1] and Figure 1 [2] from the guide strings and attach
    the guide strings to the structure.
    2 Installation
    2.1
    CAUTION

    MAKE SURE THE RUDDER CABLES FOLLOW THEIR CORRECT ROUTING THROUGH THE
    AIRCRAFT.

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Procedure
    2.1.1 Examine these parts for wear and damage:
    − The eye and fork ends
    − The turnbuckles
    − The cable guides
    − The aircraft structure along the cable routing
    − The quadrant
    − The control cables.
    2.1.2 Attach the guide strings to the rudder cables Figure 1 [1] and Figure 1 [2].
    2.1.3 Put the rudder cables Figure 1 [1] and Figure 1 [2] in position in the aircraft.
    2.1.4 Connect the rudder cables Figure 1 [1] and Figure 1 [2] to the quadrant Figure 1 [70] and
    install two new Cotter pin Figure 1 [71].
    2.1.5 Install the cable guard Figure 1 [69] and the bonding leads Figure 1 [65] on the support
    Figure 1 [68] with the bolts Figure 1 [64], washers Figure 1 [66] and nuts Figure 1 [67].

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-30 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.1.6 Install the pulleys Figure 1 [60] in the brackets Figure 1 [57] with the bolts Figure 1 [58],
    washers Figure 1 [56] and nuts Figure 1 [55].
    2.1.7 Make sure the rudder cables Figure 1 [1] and Figure 1 [2] are correctly installed in the
    pulleys Figure 1 [60], then install the guards Figure 1 [63] with the screws Figure 1 [59],
    washers Figure 1 [61] and nuts Figure 1 [62].
    2.1.8 Install the two pulleys Figure 1 [52] in the structure with the bolt Figure 1 [51], washer
    Figure 1 [53] and nut Figure 1 [54].
    2.1.9 Install the two pulleys Figure 1 [45] in the structure with the bolt Figure 1 [44], washers
    Figure 1 [46] and nut Figure 1 [47].
    2.1.10 Engage the rudder cable Figure 1 [2] in the cable guide Figure 1 [32].
    2.1.11 Install the two pulleys Figure 1 [21] in the structure with the two bolts Figure 1 [22], washers
    Figure 1 [23] and nuts Figure 1 [24].
    2.1.12 Remove the guide strings from the aircraft.
    2.1.13 Connect the rudder cables Figure 1 [1] and Figure 1 [2] to the eye end Figure 1 [15] and fork
    end Figure 1 [20] with the turnbuckles Figure 1 [16] and Figure 1 [19].
    2.1.14
    CAUTION

    DO NOT POLISH THE SEAL FLAT SURFACES TOO MUCH. IF YOU DO THE CABLES
    CAN JAM.

    Use Abrasive paper (Pt.No. P02-011) to lightly polish the flat mating surfaces of the seals
    Figure 1 [49].
    2.1.15 Apply a layer of Sealant (Pt.No. P08-071) to the ball-ends of the seals Figure 1 [49].
    2.1.16 Put the four Seal Figure 1 [49] in position on the rudder cables Figure 1 [1] and Figure 1 [2].
    2.1.17 Install the cover plate Figure 1 [50] with the two screws Figure 1 [48].
    2.1.18 Safety the pairs of seals Figure 1 [49] together with Lockwire (Pt.No. P02-007).
    2.1.19
    CAUTION

    DO NOT POLISH THE SEAL FLAT SURFACES TOO MUCH. IF YOU DO THE CABLES
    CAN JAM.

    Use Abrasive paper (Pt.No. P02-011) to lightly polish the flat mating surfaces of the seals
    Figure 1 [25].
    2.1.20 Apply a layer of Sealant (Pt.No. P08-071) to the ball-ends of the seals Figure 1 [25].
    2.1.21 Put the four seals Figure 1 [25] in position on the rudder cables Figure 1 [1] and Figure 1 [2].
    2.1.22 Install the cover plate Figure 1 [26] with the two screws Figure 1 [27].
    2.1.23 Safety the pairs of seals Figure 1 [25] together with Lockwire (Pt.No. P02-007).
    2.1.24 Install the two cable guides Figure 1 [29] on the structure with the two screws Figure 1 [28],
    washers Figure 1 [30] and nuts Figure 1 [31].
    2.1.25 Install the four cable guides Figure 1 [41] on the structure with the four screws Figure 1 [40],
    washers Figure 1 [43] and nuts Figure 1 [42].
    2.1.26 Examine the routing of the rudder cables Figure 1 [1] and Figure 1 [2]. Make sure they do not
    go across each other or touch the structure.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-30 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.1.27 Put the rudder cable Figure 1 [2] and autopilot cable Figure 1 [6] between the clamps
    Figure 1 [8].
    2.1.28 Connect the clamps Figure 1 [8] with the screws Figure 1 [7], washers Figure 1 [10] and nuts
    Figure 1 [9].
    2.1.29 Put the rudder cable Figure 1 [1] and autopilot cable Figure 1 [6] between the clamps
    Figure 1 [12].
    2.1.30 Connect the clamps Figure 1 [12] with the screws Figure 1 [11], washers Figure 1 [14] and
    nuts Figure 1 [13].
    2.1.31 Do the adjustment of the rudder control-cables tension (AMM 12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A).

    Note

    Do not do the functional test of the rudder control system until you have adjusted the rudder
    control-cables tension.

    2.1.32 Do the adjustment (and the functional test) of the rudder control system (AMM 12-
    B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A).
    2.2 Close Up
    2.2.1 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.2.2 Install these access panels:
    − 11 AZ
    − 12 AZ, 12 DZ, 12 GZ, 12 JZ, 12 MZ and 32 AB
    2.2.3 Close the access panels 11 AL, 11 BL and 31 AB.
    2.2.4 Install the flight compartment and left passenger compartment carpets:
    − for executive interior, AMM 12-B-25-21-04-00A-920A-A
    − for standard interior, AMM 12-B-25-22-04-00A-920A-A
    2.2.5 Install the passenger seats in the left side of the passenger compartment:
    − for executive interior, AMM 12-B-25-21-01-00A-920A-A
    − for standard interior, AMM 12-B-25-22-01-00A-920A-A
    2.2.6 Install the pilot seat (AMM 12-B-25-10-01-00A-920A-A).
    2.2.7 Remove the DO NOT OPERATE THE FLIGHT CONTROLS warning sign from the flight
    compartment.
    2.2.8 Remove the safety clip and close these circuit breakers:
    − A/P SERVO ENABLE (AVIONIC 1 BUS)
    − A/P SERVO (AVIONIC 1 BUS)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-30 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    22

    21

    N O

    23
    C 24
    N
    L
    2 A
    1
    K

    J 8

    7
    2

    6
    H
    4 5
    F 8
    E 3
    10
    9
    D 11
    12

    B C 1
    4

    15

    16 12
    17
    14
    13
    17
    2
    A
    20 18
    19

    1 B
    18

    12-B-272001-A-S4080-01037-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Rudder Cables – Removal/Installation (Sheet 1 of 3)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-30 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    27

    26

    D
    25

    25

    31
    30

    29

    29
    E
    41
    40

    40 H
    28

    1
    42
    2

    41

    42
    43

    43

    F 32

    12-B-272001-A-S4080-01038-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Rudder Cables – Removal/Installation (Sheet 2 of 3)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-30 Page 8


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    71

    47 46

    70 44

    45
    J
    Q 49

    48

    1
    2
    49
    K
    1 50

    70
    54
    53
    51
    71 P
    55
    56 57

    52
    L 62
    63

    61

    P 59

    58

    1 60

    64
    N

    65
    70 66
    67
    2
    69

    O 68
    27125

    Figure 1 Rudder Cables – Removal/Installation (Sheet 3 of 3)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-30 Page 9


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-01-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2012-11-30 Page 10
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    RUDDER AUTOPILOT CABLES

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    RUDDER AUTOPILOT CABLES - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION................................................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Rudder Autopilot Cables – Removal/Installation.................................................... 5

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A GENERAL - AEROSPACE GROUND EQUIPMENT
    (AGE) AND TOOLS
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-22-10-00-00A-903A-A AUTOPILOT - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip Part 110.88.07.065 As
    Required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-03-22 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark


    Warning sign (DO NOT Part Local supply As
    OPERATE THE FLIGHT Required
    CONTROLS)
    Rigging pin Part 110.85.07.050 2
    Hydraulic jack Part 968.85.81.214 As
    Required
    Adapter kit Part 968.85.81.232 As
    Required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Lockwire Part P02-022 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1
    Note

    To identify the AGE and tools used in this procedure refer to the list of AGE and tools 12-
    B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A.

    Install the jack (Hydraulic jack (Pt.No. 968.85.81.214)) and adaptor (Adapter
    kit (Pt.No. 968.85.81.232)) at the rear fuselage jacking position.
    1.2 Open and install a safety clip (Safety clip (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on these circuit breakers:
    − A/P SERVO ENABLE (AVIONIC 1 BUS)
    − A/P SERVO (AVIONIC 1 BUS)
    1.3 Put up a sign (Warning sign (DO NOT OPERATE THE FLIGHT CONTROLS) (Pt.No. Local supply)) in
    the flight compartment.
    1.4 Open the access panels 11 AL and 31 AB.
    1.5 Move the rudder pedals to the center position and install a Rigging pin (Pt.No. 110.85.07.050)
    Figure 1 [4] in the bellcrank Figure 1 [3].

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-03-22 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1.6 Install a Rigging pin (Pt.No. 110.85.07.050) Figure 1 [2] in the rudder quadrant Figure 1 [1].
    1.7 Remove the two locking clips Figure 1 [11] from the turnbuckle Figure 1 [12] connecting the two
    autopilot cables Figure 1 [10] and Figure 1 [13].
    1.8 Loosen the turnbuckle Figure 1 [12].
    1.9 Remove the six nuts Figure 1 [7], washers Figure 1 [8] and bolts Figure 1 [5], cable clamps
    Figure 1 [6] and the autopilot cables Figure 1 [10] and Figure 1 [13] from the rudder cables
    Figure 1 [9].
    1.10 Remove the two autopilot cables Figure 1 [10] and Figure 1 [13] from the turnbuckle Figure 1 [12].
    1.11 Disconnect the electrical connector Figure 1 [14] from the aircraft wiring.
    1.12 Hold the yaw actuator Figure 1 [16]. Remove the four bolts Figure 1 [18] and washers Figure 1 [17]
    then remove the yaw actuator Figure 1 [16] together with the autopilot cable Figure 1 [13] from the
    mounting bracket Figure 1 [15].
    1.13 Cut, remove and discard the lockwire from the three cable guards Figure 1 [22].
    1.14 Remove and keep the three cable guards Figure 1 [22].
    1.15 Unwind and remove the autopilot cable Figure 1 [13] from the capstan Figure 1 [21].
    2 Installation
    2.1
    Note

    To identify the consumable items used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Install the autopilot cable on the capstan, refer to Fig. 1 Sheet 2 Detail E and Sheet 3 Detail F:
    2.1.1 Put the autopilot cable ball Figure 1 [19] in the capstan socket Figure 1 [20].
    2.1.2 Wind the end of the autopilot cable Figure 1 [13] with the turnbuckle fitting Figure 1 [24]
    anticlockwise around the capstan so that the cable fits in the capstan groove and the
    turnbuckle fitting Figure 1 [24] comes from the top of the capstan.
    2.1.3 Wind the end of the autopilot cable Figure 1 [13] that has no end fitting clockwise around the
    capstan so that the cable fits in the capstan groove and the end of the cable comes form the
    bottom of the capstan.
    2.1.4 Make sure that there are three turns of autopilot cable around the capstan and that the cable
    sits in the groove on the capstan.
    2.1.5 Install the three cable guards Figure 1 [22]. Make sure that the autopilot cable is inside the
    cable guards Figure 1 [22].
    2.1.6 Use Lockwire (Pt.No. P02-022) to safety the cable guards Figure 1 [22] to the adjacent
    screw Figure 1 [23] as shown in Fig. 1 Sheet 3 Detail F.
    2.2 Put the autopilot cable Figure 1 [13] through the yaw actuator mounting bracket Figure 1 [15] and
    position the yaw actuator Figure 1 [16] on the mounting bracket Figure 1 [15].
    2.3 Install the four bolts Figure 1 [18] and washers Figure 1 [17].
    2.4 Connect the electrical connector Figure 1 [14] to the aircraft wiring.
    2.5 Install the autopilot cables Figure 1 [10] and Figure 1 [13] in the turnbuckle Figure 1 [12].
    2.6 Loosely attach the autopilot cables Figure 1 [10] and Figure 1 [13] to the rudder cables Figure 1 [9]
    with the cable clamps Figure 1 [6], bolts Figure 1 [5], washers Figure 1 [8] and nuts Figure 1 [7].
    2.7 Do the adjustment of the rudder autopilot cable (Refer to AMM 12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-03-22 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.8 Do the operational test of the autopilot system (Refer to AMM 12-B-22-10-00-00A-903A-A).
    2.9 Remove the hydraulic jack and adapter from the rear fuselage jacking position.
    2.10 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.11 Close the access panels 11 AL and 31 AB.
    2.12 Remove the warning sign from the flight compartment.
    2.13 Remove the safety clip and close these circuit breakers:
    − A/P SERVO ENABLE (AVIONIC 1 BUS)
    − A/P SERVO (AVIONIC 1 BUS)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-03-22 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    B 2

    B
    27190

    Figure 1 Rudder Autopilot Cables – Removal/Installation (Sheet 1 of 3)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-03-22 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    C
    6 5 6
    5

    C
    9
    13 9 6
    11 10 6
    8
    7
    8
    D 7
    11

    13
    12 19

    21
    16

    20

    15

    22
    16

    17

    18

    14

    E
    D

    12-A-273002-A-S4080-00372-A-02-1

    Figure 1 Rudder Autopilot Cables – Removal/Installation (Sheet 2 of 3)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-03-22 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    13 22 23

    24 23

    22

    23

    22

    VIEW FROM AIRCRAFT


    CENTER LINE LOOKING
    OUTBOARD

    12-A-272002-A-S4080-00382-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Rudder Autopilot Cables – Removal/Installation (Sheet 3 of 3)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-02-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-03-22 Page 7


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-02-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-03-22 Page 8
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM – BELLCRANK

    EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION

    Table of Contents Page

    RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM – BELLCRANK - EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION.................. 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 2
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Rudder Bellcrank – Eddy Current Inspection......................................................... 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A ACCESS PROVISION – HYDRAULIC LANDING GEAR
    - DESCRIPTION
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A CORROSION CONTROL - MAINTENANCE
    PRACTICES
    12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-51-00-00-00A-353A-A STRUCTURES - STANDARD PRACTICES - EDDY
    CURRENT INSPECTION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-04-00A-353A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-01-04 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Bolt hole probe Part Nortec SPO-5393, 3/16 in As
    (or equivalent) required
    Bolt hole probe Part Nortec SPO-5393, 1/4 in (or As
    equivalent) required
    Warning sign DO NOT MOVE Part Local supply As
    THE FLYING CONTROLS required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Solvent Part P01-010 As
    required
    Cloth Part P02-003 As
    required
    Cotter pin CSN 27-20-04-01-006 2
    CSN 27-20-04-01-011

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Open access panel 11AL, AMM 12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A.
    2 Put a Warning sign DO NOT MOVE THE FLYING CONTROLS (Pt.No. Local supply) in the flight
    compartment.
    3 Disconnect the control cable shackles Figure 1 [3] and Figure 1 [8] from the bellcrank Figure 1 [1]:
    3.1 Remove and discard the two cotter pins Figure 1 [6] and Figure 1 [11].
    3.2 Remove the nut Figure 1 [5], washer Figure 1 [4] and clevis pin Figure 1 [2].
    3.3 Disconnect the control cable shackle Figure 1 [3] from the bellcrank Figure 1 [1].
    3.4 Remove the nut Figure 1 [10], washer Figure 1 [9] and clevis pin Figure 1 [7].
    3.5 Disconnect the control cable shackle Figure 1 [8] from the bellcrank Figure 1 [1].

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-04-00A-353A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-01-04 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    4
    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MANUFACTURERS'
    HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items AMM 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Use a Cloth (Pt.No. P02-003) made moist with Solvent (Pt.No. P01-010) to clean the clevis pin holes in the
    bellcrank.
    5 Examine the bellcrank ends and the holes in the bellcrank for cracks or corrosion.
    6 Cracks or corrosion Level 2 or 3 are not permitted. Refer to AMM 12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A for the
    definition of corrosion levels. If you find cracks or corrosion Level 2 or 3, contact Pilatus Aircraft.
    7 Use the bolt hole probe to eddy current inspect the clevis pin hole bores in the bellcrank, refer to SRM
    12-B-51-00-00-00A-353A-A, Procedure 5.
    8 Cracks are not permitted. If you find cracks contact Pilatus Aircraft.
    9 Connect the control cable shackles Figure 1 [8] and Figure 1 [3] to the bellcrank Figure 1 [1] as follows:
    9.1 Connect the control cable shackle Figure 1 [8] to the bellcrank Figure 1 [1].
    9.2 Install the clevis pin Figure 1 [7], washer Figure 1 [9] and nut Figure 1 [10].
    9.3 Connect the control cable shackle Figure 1 [3] to the bellcrank Figure 1 [1].
    9.4 Install the clevis pin Figure 1 [2], washer Figure 1 [4] and nut Figure 1 [5].
    9.5 Safety the nuts Figure 1 [5] and Figure 1 [10] with new Cotter pin (Pt.No. CSN 27200401 006
    27200401 011 )s Figure 1 [6] and Figure 1 [11].
    10 Apply corrosion protection as needed, refer to AMM 12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A.
    11 Remove the warning sign from the flight compartment.
    12 Do a check of the rudder control cable tension, refer to AMM 12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A.
    13 Do the adjustment/test of the rudder control system, refer to AMM 12-B-27-20-00-00A-903A-A.
    14 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    15 Close access panel 11AL, refer to AMM 12-B-06-20-00-00A-040A-A.
    16 Send a copy of the inspection report to Pilatus.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-04-00A-353A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-01-04 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1
    3

    4
    5
    6

    8
    A
    9

    10

    11

    12-A-272004-A-S4080-00384-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Rudder Bellcrank – Eddy Current Inspection

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-04-00A-353A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-01-04 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-04-00A-353A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-01-04 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-04-00A-353A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2011-01-04 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM – CABLE QUADRANT

    EXAMINE

    Table of Contents Page

    RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM – CABLE QUADRANT - EXAMINE.......................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 1
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A STANDARD PRACTICES - CONSUMABLE
    MATERIALS LIST
    12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A CORROSION CONTROL - MAINTENANCE
    PRACTICES
    12-B-55-40-01-00A-920A-A RUDDER - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Warning sign DO NOT MOVE Part Local supply As
    THE FLYING CONTROLS required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Solvent Part P01-010 As
    required

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-05-00A-310A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-11-22 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark


    Cloth Part P02-003 As
    required

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Put a Warning sign DO NOT MOVE THE FLYING CONTROLS (Pt.No. Local supply) in the flight
    compartment.
    2 Remove the rudder, AMM 12-B-55-40-01-00A-920A-A.
    3 Remove the rudder cable quadrant from the aircraft.
    4
    WARNING

    BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MANUFACTURERS'
    HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

    Note

    To identify the consumables used in this procedure refer to the list of consumable items AMM 12-
    B-20-31-00-00A-070A-A.

    Use a Cloth (Pt.No. P02-003) made moist with Solvent (Pt.No. P01-010) to clean the rudder cable quadrant
    as needed.
    5 Examine the rudder cable quadrant.
    6 Cracks or corrosion Level 2 or 3 are not permitted. Refer to AMM 12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A for the
    definition of corrosion levels. If you find cracks or corrosion Level 2 or 3, contact Pilatus Aircraft.
    7 Cracks are not permitted. If you find cracks, contact Pilatus Aircraft Ltd.
    8 Apply corrosion protection as needed, AMM 12-B-20-40-00-00A-901A-A.
    9 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    10 Install the rudder cable quadrant.
    11 Install the rudder, AMM 12-B-55-40-01-00A-920A-A.
    12 Remove the warning sign from the flight compartment.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-05-00A-310A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-11-22 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-05-00A-310A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-11-22 Page 3
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-20-05-00A-310A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2010-11-22 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    RUDDER TRIM

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    RUDDER TRIM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION................................................................ 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1
    2 Component Description.......................................................................................... 2
    2.1 Rudder Trim Switch................................................................................................ 2
    2.2 Trim Interrupt Switch.............................................................................................. 2
    2.3 Rudder Trim Actuator............................................................................................. 2
    2.4 Multi Function Display (MFD) Trim Indication......................................................... 2
    3 Operation (Ref. )..................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Rudder Trim – Schematic....................................................................................... 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-22-10-00-00A-040A-A AUTOPILOT - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-27-15-00-00A-040A-A AILERON TRIM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Description

    1 General
    The rudder trim system is used to make small changes to the aircraft direction (yaw) in flight. This lets the aircraft
    fly straight with no input from the rudder pedals.
    The rudder trim system has:
    − A rudder trim switch
    − A trim interrupt switch
    − A rudder trim actuator

    The rudder trim system gets drive inputs from the autopilot yaw servo actuator (Refer to DM 12-
    B-22-10-00-00A-040A-A).
    The power supply to the rudder trim system is 28 VDC through the RUD TRIM (ESS BUS) circuit breaker.
    The autopilot yaw servo actuator gives a signal to the Modular Avionics Unit (MAU) when the rudder trim actuator is
    moving during automatic operation.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-25-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2 Component Description

    2.1 Rudder Trim Switch


    The rudder trim switch controls the power supply to the rudder trim actuator. The rudder trim switch is a rocker type
    and is on the Power Control Lever (PCL).

    2.2 Trim Interrupt Switch


    If a trim runaway occurs, the trim interrupt switch is used to disconnect the 28 VDC power supply from the rudder
    trim actuator.
    The switch is a rocker-type with a safety cover. It is installed on the center pedestal. It is identified by the caption
    INTERRUPT - TRIM and has the position marks NORM (normal) and INTR (interrupt).

    2.3 Rudder Trim Actuator


    The rudder trim actuator is an electrically-operated linear actuator which moves the rudder trim tab. The rudder trim
    actuator is controlled automatically by the autopilot yaw servo actuator, or manually when the rudder trim switch on
    the PCL is pressed.
    The trim actuator is in the fin and an adjustable rod connects it to the trim tab. It is in a rectangular case with an
    electrical connector and an eye-end at one end and a connection rod at the other. The case contains an electric
    motor, gears and a screw assembly. Two limit switches stop the motor when the trim actuator is fully extended or
    retracted. A potentiometer is used to send a position signal to the MAU.

    2.4 Multi Function Display (MFD) Trim Indication


    The MFD gives an indication of the amount of trim of the aileron, rudder and horizontal stabilizer. The indication is
    on the MFD TRIM window.

    3 Operation (Ref. Fig. 1)


    When the rudder trim switch is pushed and held at its left or right position, 28 VDC energizes the left rudder-trim
    relay or the right rudder-trim relay.
    When the left rudder-trim relay is energized, the 28 VDC goes through the contacts of the trim-interrupt switch and
    the left rudder-trim relay to the rudder trim actuator. The return from the rudder trim actuator goes through a second
    set of contacts of the left rudder-trim relay to ground.
    When the right rudder-trim relay is energized, the 28 VDC goes through the contacts of the trim-interrupt switch,
    the (de-energized) left rudder-trim relay and the right rudder-trim relay to the rudder trim actuator. The return from
    the rudder trim actuator goes through a second set of contacts of the right rudder-trim relay and the left rudder-trim
    relay to ground.
    The rudder trim actuator extends or retracts to move the rudder trim tab left or right. The rudder actuator stops
    when the trim switch is released or when the trim actuator limit switches operate. The rudder trim actuator sends a
    position signal to the MAU. An indication of the amount of rudder trim is shown on the MFD.
    The trim interrupt switch is used to de-energize the 28 VDC power supplies to the trim systems if a trim runaway
    occurs during manual or autopilot operation. When the trim interrupt switch is set to INT, one set of the switch
    contacts disconnect the 28 VDC supply from the rudder trim actuator. At the same time, other contacts on the trim
    interrupt switch disconnect the main 28 VDC power supply from the aileron and horizontal stabilizer trim actuators
    (Refer to DM 12-B-27-15-00-00A-040A-A).

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-25-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    The yaw servo actuator in the autopilot system automatically controls the rudder trim when the yaw damper is
    engaged.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-25-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Johnson Mark EC A
    Sansome Cliv e

    Holer Danie l

    12-B-271000-A-S4080-00002-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Rudder Trim – Schematic

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-25-00-00A-040A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-04-09 Page 4
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    RUDDER TRIM

    ADJUSTMENT/TEST

    Table of Contents Page

    RUDDER TRIM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST..................................................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Rudder Trim – Adjustment/Test.............................................................................. 5

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A GENERAL - AEROSPACE GROUND EQUIPMENT
    (AGE) AND TOOLS
    12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
    12-B-27-25-01-00A-920A-A RUDDER TRIM ACTUATOR - REMOVAL/
    INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required
    Warning sign (DO NOT Part Local supply As
    OPERATE THE FLIGHT required
    CONTROLS)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-25-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark


    Rigging pin Part 110.85.07.050 1
    Rigging tool Part Local manufacture As
    required
    Straight edge Part Local supply As
    required

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 General
    This data module gives the procedure to do:
    − A functional test of the rudder trim system
    − The adjustment of the rudder trim system
    2 Functional Test Of The Rudder Trim System
    2.1 Preparation
    2.1.1
    Note

    Two persons are necessary for this test and adjustment.

    Remove the access panels 32 AB and 32 BB.


    2.1.2 Energize the aircraft electrical system (Refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.1.3 Set the flaps to 0°.
    2.1.4 Open and install a safety clip (Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065))
    on these circuit breakers:
    − A/P SERVO ENABLE (AVIONIC 1 BUS)
    − A/P SERVO (AVIONIC 1 BUS)
    2.1.5 Move the rudder control system to the center position.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-25-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2.1.6 Put the sign (Warning sign (DO NOT OPERATE THE FLIGHT CONTROLS) (Pt.No. Local
    supply)) in the flight compartment.
    2.1.7 Install a rigging pin (Rigging pin (Pt.No. 110.85.07.050)) (Figure 1 [6]) in the rudder quadrant
    (Figure 1 [7]).
    2.2 Procedure
    2.2.1 Set the INTERRUPT TRIM switch to INTR.
    2.2.2 Operate the rudder trim switch on the Power Control Lever (PCL) and make sure the rudder
    trim system does not operate.
    2.2.3 Set the INTERRUPT TRIM switch to NORMAL.
    2.2.4 Put the straight edge (Straight edge (Pt.No. Local supply)) on the side of the trim tab to make
    sure the trim tab surface aligns with the rudder surface.
    2.2.5 Operate the rudder trim switch on the PCL until the trim tab surface aligns with the rudder
    surface.
    2.2.6 Remove the straight edge from the trim tab.
    2.2.7 Make sure the lower MFD trim indicator shows the rudder trim is approximately in the center
    position.
    2.2.8 Put the rigging tool (Rigging tool (Pt.No. Local manufacture)) in position and align its point
    with the center of the bottom rear corner of the trim tab.
    2.2.9 Operate the rudder trim switch on the PCL to the left until movement of the trim tab stops.
    During operation of the trim tab make sure:
    − The trim tab moves right
    − The MFD trim indicator shows smooth movement to the left
    2.2.10 Measure the distance between the point of the rigging tool and the center of the bottom rear
    corner of the trim tab. Make sure the distance is 0.63 ± 0.08 in (16 ± 2 mm).
    2.2.11 Operate the rudder trim switch on the PCL to the right until movement of the trim tab stops.
    During operation of the trim tab make sure:
    − The trim tab moves left
    − The MFD trim indicator shows smooth movement to the right
    2.2.12 Measure the distance between the point of the rigging tool and the center of the bottom rear
    corner of the trim tab. Make sure the distance is 1.1 ± 0.08 in (28 ± 2 mm).
    2.2.13 If the distances in Step 2.2.10 and Step 2.2.12 are not in limits, do the adjustment of the
    rudder trim system.
    2.2.14 Push the rudder trim switch on the PCL to the left until movement of the trim tab stops.
    2.2.15 Make sure the trim tab moves smoothly through its complete range.
    2.2.16 Push the rudder trim switch on the PCL to the right until movement of the trim tab stops.
    2.2.17 Make sure the trim tab moves smoothly through its complete range.
    2.3 Adjustment Of The Rudder Trim System
    2.3.1
    Note

    To identify the AGE and tools used in this procedure refer to the list of AGE and tools 12-
    B-00-00-00-00A-060A-A.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-25-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Operate the rudder trim switch on the PCL until the lower MFD trim indicator shows the
    rudder trim is in the center position.
    2.3.2 Open and install a safety clip on this circuit breaker:
    − RUD TRIM (ESSENTIAL BUS).
    2.3.3 Remove the bolt (Figure 1 [3]) and the bush (Figure 1 [2]), then disconnect the rod end
    (Figure 1 [5]) from the trim tab (Figure 1 [1]).
    2.3.4 Loosen the locknut and adjust the rod end (Figure 1 [5]) until the surface of the trim tab
    (Figure 1 [1]) aligns with the surface of the rudder.
    2.3.5 Tighten the locknut on the control rod eye end (Figure 1 [5]).
    2.3.6 Make sure the rod end (Figure 1 [5]) is in safety and temporarily connect the rod end
    (Figure 1 [5]) to the trim tab (Figure 1 [1]) with the bolt (Figure 1 [3]) and the bush
    (Figure 1 [2]).
    2.3.7 Put the straight edge on the side of the trim tab to make sure the trim tab surface aligns with
    the rudder surface.
    2.3.8 Remove the straight edge from the trim tab.
    2.3.9 Put the rigging tool in position and align its point with the center of the bottom rear corner of
    the trim tab.
    2.3.10 Remove the safety clip and close the circuit breaker:
    − RUD TRIM (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    2.3.11 Operate the rudder trim switch on the PCL to the left until movement of the trim tab stops.
    2.3.12 Measure the distance between the point of the rigging tool and the center of the bottom rear
    corner of the trim tab. Make sure the distance is 0.63 ± 0.08 in (16 ± 2 mm).
    2.3.13 Operate the rudder trim switch on the PCL to the right until movement of the trim tab stops.
    2.3.14 Measure the distance between the point of the rigging tool and the center of the bottom rear
    corner of the trim tab. Make sure the distance is 1.1 ± 0.08 in (28 ± 2 mm).
    2.3.15 If the distances in Step 2.3.12 and Step 2.3.14 are in limits, tighten the bolt (Figure 1 [3]).
    2.3.16 If the distances in Step 2.3.12 and Step 2.3.14 are not in limits, replace the rudder trim
    actuator (Refer to DM 12-B-27-25-01-00A-920A-A).
    2.4 Close Up
    2.4.1 De-energize the aircraft electrical system (Refer to DM 12-B-24-00-00-00A-901A-A).
    2.4.2 Remove the rigging pin (Figure 1 [6]) from the rudder quadrant (Figure 1 [7]).
    2.4.3 Remove the rigging tool from the area.
    2.4.4 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.4.5 Install the access panels 32 AB and 32 BB.
    2.4.6 Remove the DO NOT OPERATE THE FLIGHT CONTROLS warning sign from the flight
    compartment.
    2.4.7 Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
    − A/P SERVO ENABLE (AVIONIC 1 BUS)
    − A/P SERVO (AVIONIC 1 BUS)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-25-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    A
    A
    B

    RIGGING
    TOOL

    6 5

    4
    2

    B
    3

    12-B-272500-A-S4080-00001-A-01-1

    Figure 1 Rudder Trim – Adjustment/Test

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-25-00-00A-903A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 5


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-25-00-00A-903A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 6
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    RUDDER TRIM ACTUATOR

    REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Table of Contents Page

    RUDDER TRIM ACTUATOR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION....................................................... 1

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1
    2 Required Conditions............................................................................................... 1
    3 Support Equipment................................................................................................. 1
    4 Supplies.................................................................................................................. 2
    5 Spares.................................................................................................................... 2

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Rudder Trim Actuator – Removal/Installation......................................................... 4

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-27-25-00-00A-903A-A RUDDER TRIM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
    12-B-55-40-01-00A-920A-A RUDDER - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

    Preliminary Requirements

    Required Conditions
    Table 2 Required Conditions
    Action / Condition Data module/Technical publication
    None

    Support Equipment
    Table 3 Support Equipment
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold Part 110.88.07.065 As
    open) required
    Warning sign (DO NOT Part Local supply As
    OPERATE THE FLIGHT required
    CONTROLS)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-25-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Supplies
    Table 4 Supplies
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Spares
    Table 5 Spares
    Name Identifications/References Qty Ref Remark
    None

    Safety Conditions
    None

    Procedure
    1 Removal
    1.1 Open and install a safety clip (Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) (Pt.No. 110.88.07.065)) on this
    circuit breaker:
    − RUD TRIM (ESSENTIAL BUS)
    1.2 Put up a sign (Warning sign (DO NOT OPERATE THE FLIGHT CONTROLS) (Pt.No. Local supply)) in
    the flight compartment.
    1.3 Remove the rudder (refer to DM 12-B-55-40-01-00A-920A-A).
    1.4 Remove the access panels 32 AL and 32 AR.
    1.5 Disconnect the electrical connector (Figure 1 [5]) from the aircraft electrical connector (Figure 1 [4]).
    1.6 Remove the nut (Figure 1 [3]) and bolt (Figure 1 [1]). Disconnect the fork end (Figure 1 [12]) from the
    push rod (Figure 1 [2]).
    1.7 Hold the rudder trim actuator (Figure 1 [9]) and remove the nut (Figure 1 [6]), washer (Figure 1 [7]) and
    bolt (Figure 1 [8]). Remove the rudder trim actuator (Figure 1 [9]) from the aircraft.
    1.8 Loosen the nut (Figure 1 [11]) and remove the fork end (Figure 1 [12]) from the operating rod
    (Figure 1 [10]).
    2 Installation
    2.1 Loosely install the nut (Figure 1 [11]) and fork end (Figure 1 [12]) on the operating rod (Figure 1 [10]).
    2.2 Adjust the fork end (Figure 1 [12]) to set a distance of 0.80 ± 0.2 in (20,5 ± 0,5 mm) from the face of
    the operating rod (Figure 1 [10]). Align the bolt holes in the fork end (Figure 1 [12]) vertical to the
    rudder trim actuator (Figure 1 [9]) then tighten the nut (Figure 1 [11]).
    2.3 Hold the rudder trim actuator (Figure 1 [9]) in position in the aircraft then install the bolt (Figure 1 [8]),
    washer (Figure 1 [7]) and nut (Figure 1 [6]).
    2.4 Connect the fork end (Figure 1 [12]) to the push rod (Figure 1 [2]) then install the bolt (Figure 1 [1])
    and nut (Figure 1 [3]).
    2.5 Connect the electrical connector (Figure 1 [5]) to the aircraft electrical connector (Figure 1 [4]).
    2.6 Install the rudder (refer to DM 12-B-55-40-01-00A-920A-A).
    2.7 Remove the safety clip and close the circuit breaker:

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-25-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 2


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    − RUD TRIM (ESSENTIAL BUS)


    2.8 Do the functional test of the rudder trim system (refer to DM 12-B-27-25-00-00A-903A-A).
    2.9 Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
    2.10 Install the access panels 32 AL and 32 AR.
    2.11 Remove the warning sign from the flight compartment.

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-25-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 3


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    1 2

    C
    12
    9 11
    10

    8 3

    +
    B 0.80 0.02 in
    +
    (20,5 0,5 mm) 12
    10

    7
    6

    11 C
    27102

    Figure 1 Rudder Trim Actuator – Removal/Installation

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-25-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 4


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Requirements after job completion

    Required Actions
    None

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-25-01-00A-920A-A

    End of data module


    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 5
    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    Intentionally left blank

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-25-01-00A-920A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 6


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM

    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Table of Contents Page

    ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION.................................... 1


    1 General................................................................................................................... 1
    2 Component Description (Ref. )............................................................................... 2
    2.1 Control Column Assembly...................................................................................... 2
    2.2 Cable System......................................................................................................... 2
    2.3 Elevators................................................................................................................. 2
    3 Operation................................................................................................................ 2

    Index of Tables Page

    1 References............................................................................................................. 1

    Index of Figures Page

    1 Elevator System – Layout....................................................................................... 3

    References
    Table 1 References
    Data module/Technical publication Title
    12-B-22-10-00-00A-040A-A AUTOPILOT - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-22-20-00-00A-040A-A SPEED AND ATTITUDE CORRECTION -
    DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
    12-B-55-00-00-00A-040A-A STABILIZERS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

    Description

    1 General
    The elevator system controls the pitch attitude of the aircraft.
    The elevator system has:
    − A control column assembly
    − A cable system
    − Two elevators (refer to DM 12-B-55-00-00-00A-040A-A)

    The elevator system gets inputs from:


    − The autopilot system (refer to DM 12-B-22-10-00-00A-040A-A)
    − The speed and attitude correction system (refer to DM 12-B-22-20-00-00A-040A-A)

    Effectivity: ALL 12-B-27-30-00-00A-040A-A

    UNCLASSIFIED 2008-03-15 Page 1


    12-B-AM-00-00-00-I
    UNCLASSIFIED

    2 Component Description (Ref. Fig. 1)

    2.1 Control Column Assembly


    The control column assembly transmits the forward and aft movement of the control wheels to the cable system. It
    is installed in the flight compartment behind the instrument panel. The control column turns on ball bearings. A rod
    and bellcrank connect the control column to the cable system at the front of the center console. The pilot and co-
    pilot control wheels are installed on the left and right arms. The stick shaker actuator is installed on the left arm.

    2.2 Cable System


    The cable system transmits the movement of the control column to the elevators. It has two cables that connect to
    the front bellcrank in the flight compartment and the rear bellcrank at the top of the vertical stabilizer. The cables go
    from the bellcrank of the control column along the righ

    You might also like